HomeMy WebLinkAbout2009-192A A Oz
VE
LORD
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
BID NO . 2009043
PROJECT NO , 0701
APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
00001 - 1 00001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doe
F.1EngineeringlCapi[al Projectsl0701 IRC PARKS COMPLEX1Contrac[ Documents Eng11RC Parks Maintenance Complex100001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doc
A Oz
VE
LORD
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
BID NO . 2009043
PROJECT NO , 0701
APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
00001 - 1 00001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doe
F.1EngineeringlCapi[al Projectsl0701 IRC PARKS COMPLEX1Contrac[ Documents Eng11RC Parks Maintenance Complex100001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doc
A Oz
VE
LORD
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
BID NO . 2009043
PROJECT NO , 0701
APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
00001 - 1 00001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doe
F.1EngineeringlCapi[al Projectsl0701 IRC PARKS COMPLEX1Contrac[ Documents Eng11RC Parks Maintenance Complex100001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doc
A Oz
VE
LORD
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
BID NO . 2009043
PROJECT NO , 0701
APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
00001 - 1 00001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doe
F.1EngineeringlCapi[al Projectsl0701 IRC PARKS COMPLEX1Contrac[ Documents Eng11RC Parks Maintenance Complex100001 - Appendix C - Technical Specificantions .doc
PROJECT MANUAL
ARCHITECT' S COMM. # 050605VB
08 October 2007 (Revised 03 February 2009)
For the :
INDIAN RIVER PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Bid No. 2009043
For:
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY FLORIDA
Joseph Baird : County Administrator
Chris Kafer, P. E. - Project Manager
Phone : (772) 226- 1283
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
Phone : (772) 226-1416
PROJECT ADDRESS :
5500 77t" Street
Wabasso, Florida
Indian River County , Florida
EDLUND , DRITENBAS BINKLEY
ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES P . A .
65 Royal Palm Pointe, Suite-D
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Phone : 772-569-4320
Fax: 772-569-9208
AR#AAC000886
C: 050605 V B.doc
PROJECT MANUAL
ARCHITECT' S COMM. # 050605VB
08 October 2007 (Revised 03 February 2009)
For the :
INDIAN RIVER PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Bid No. 2009043
For:
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY FLORIDA
Joseph Baird : County Administrator
Chris Kafer, P. E. - Project Manager
Phone : (772) 226- 1283
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
Phone : (772) 226-1416
PROJECT ADDRESS :
5500 77t" Street
Wabasso, Florida
Indian River County , Florida
EDLUND , DRITENBAS BINKLEY
ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES P . A .
65 Royal Palm Pointe, Suite-D
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Phone : 772-569-4320
Fax: 772-569-9208
AR#AAC000886
C: 050605 V B.doc
PROJECT MANUAL
ARCHITECT' S COMM. # 050605VB
08 October 2007 (Revised 03 February 2009)
For the :
INDIAN RIVER PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Bid No. 2009043
For:
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY FLORIDA
Joseph Baird : County Administrator
Chris Kafer, P. E. - Project Manager
Phone : (772) 226- 1283
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
Phone : (772) 226-1416
PROJECT ADDRESS :
5500 77t" Street
Wabasso, Florida
Indian River County , Florida
EDLUND , DRITENBAS BINKLEY
ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES P . A .
65 Royal Palm Pointe, Suite-D
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Phone : 772-569-4320
Fax: 772-569-9208
AR#AAC000886
C: 050605 V B.doc
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(REVISED 12 MARCH 2009)
SECTION & DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01100 - Definitions
Section 01200 - Contractors General Notes
Section 01300 - Submittals
Section 01400 - Quality Control
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01700 - Project Closeout
Section 01720 - Project Related Documents
DIVISION 2, SITE WORK
Section 02010 - Site Conditions and Subsurface Investigation
Section 02110 - Clearing and Grubbing
Section 02204 - Grassing by Sodding
Section 02206 - Site Cleanup & Restoration
Section 02220 - Civil Site Demolition
Section 02250 - Soil Poisoning
Section 02270 - Erosion Control
Section 02300 - Site Earthwork
Section 02302 - Excavation and Fill
Section 02510 - Water Mains
Section 02515 - Gate Valves
Section 02516 - Site Concrete (Walks and Slabs)
Section 02518 - Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
Section 02520 - Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
Section 02535 - Force Mains
Section 02538 - Testing Force Mains
Section 02630 - Storm Sewerage
Section 02714 - Stabilized Subgrade
Section 02722 - Cemented Coquina Shell Base Course
Section 02741 - Asphalt Concrete Surface Course
Section 02752 - Concrete Paving
Section 02761 - Pavement Markings
Section 02821 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates
DIVISION 35 CONCRETE
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete
Section 03420 - Precast Concrete Lintels
PROJECT MANUAL
ARCHITECT' S COMM. # 050605VB
08 October 2007 (Revised 03 February 2009)
For the :
INDIAN RIVER PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Bid No. 2009043
For:
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY FLORIDA
Joseph Baird : County Administrator
Chris Kafer, P. E. - Project Manager
Phone : (772) 226- 1283
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
Phone : (772) 226-1416
PROJECT ADDRESS :
5500 77t" Street
Wabasso, Florida
Indian River County , Florida
EDLUND , DRITENBAS BINKLEY
ARCHITECTS & ASSOCIATES P . A .
65 Royal Palm Pointe, Suite-D
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Phone : 772-569-4320
Fax: 772-569-9208
AR#AAC000886
C: 050605 V B.doc
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(REVISED 12 MARCH 2009)
SECTION & DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01100 - Definitions
Section 01200 - Contractors General Notes
Section 01300 - Submittals
Section 01400 - Quality Control
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01700 - Project Closeout
Section 01720 - Project Related Documents
DIVISION 2, SITE WORK
Section 02010 - Site Conditions and Subsurface Investigation
Section 02110 - Clearing and Grubbing
Section 02204 - Grassing by Sodding
Section 02206 - Site Cleanup & Restoration
Section 02220 - Civil Site Demolition
Section 02250 - Soil Poisoning
Section 02270 - Erosion Control
Section 02300 - Site Earthwork
Section 02302 - Excavation and Fill
Section 02510 - Water Mains
Section 02515 - Gate Valves
Section 02516 - Site Concrete (Walks and Slabs)
Section 02518 - Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
Section 02520 - Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
Section 02535 - Force Mains
Section 02538 - Testing Force Mains
Section 02630 - Storm Sewerage
Section 02714 - Stabilized Subgrade
Section 02722 - Cemented Coquina Shell Base Course
Section 02741 - Asphalt Concrete Surface Course
Section 02752 - Concrete Paving
Section 02761 - Pavement Markings
Section 02821 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates
DIVISION 35 CONCRETE
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete
Section 03420 - Precast Concrete Lintels
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(REVISED 12 MARCH 2009)
SECTION & DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01100 - Definitions
Section 01200 - Contractors General Notes
Section 01300 - Submittals
Section 01400 - Quality Control
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01700 - Project Closeout
Section 01720 - Project Related Documents
DIVISION 2, SITE WORK
Section 02010 - Site Conditions and Subsurface Investigation
Section 02110 - Clearing and Grubbing
Section 02204 - Grassing by Sodding
Section 02206 - Site Cleanup & Restoration
Section 02220 - Civil Site Demolition
Section 02250 - Soil Poisoning
Section 02270 - Erosion Control
Section 02300 - Site Earthwork
Section 02302 - Excavation and Fill
Section 02510 - Water Mains
Section 02515 - Gate Valves
Section 02516 - Site Concrete (Walks and Slabs)
Section 02518 - Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
Section 02520 - Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
Section 02535 - Force Mains
Section 02538 - Testing Force Mains
Section 02630 - Storm Sewerage
Section 02714 - Stabilized Subgrade
Section 02722 - Cemented Coquina Shell Base Course
Section 02741 - Asphalt Concrete Surface Course
Section 02752 - Concrete Paving
Section 02761 - Pavement Markings
Section 02821 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates
DIVISION 35 CONCRETE
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete
Section 03420 - Precast Concrete Lintels
DIVISION 4, MASONRY
Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry
Section 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5, METALS
Section 05030 - Powdered Coating
Section 05120 - Structural Steel
Section 05400 - Lightgauge Metal Framing
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
Section 06076 - Preservative Treatment
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7, THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07160 - Underslab Vapor Retarder
Section 07200 - Insulation
Section 07610 - Metal Roof and Fascia Panels (Standing Seam)
Section 07710 - Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8, DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 08200 - Wood Doors
Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors
Section 08400 - Entrance Storefront Doors
Section 08410 - Flush Glazed Storefront Windows
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows
Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware Schedule
Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9, FINISHES
Section 09100 - Lathing and Stucco
Section 09230 - Cement Backing Board
Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile Work
Section 09510 - Lay in Panel Ceilings
Section 09655 - Vinyl Transition Molding
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Commercial Application
Section 09900 - Painting
DIVISION 4, MASONRY
Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry
Section 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5, METALS
Section 05030 - Powdered Coating
Section 05120 - Structural Steel
Section 05400 - Lightgauge Metal Framing
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
Section 06076 - Preservative Treatment
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7, THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07160 - Underslab Vapor Retarder
Section 07200 - Insulation
Section 07610 - Metal Roof and Fascia Panels (Standing Seam)
Section 07710 - Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8, DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 08200 - Wood Doors
Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors
Section 08400 - Entrance Storefront Doors
Section 08410 - Flush Glazed Storefront Windows
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows
Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware Schedule
Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9, FINISHES
Section 09100 - Lathing and Stucco
Section 09230 - Cement Backing Board
Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile Work
Section 09510 - Lay in Panel Ceilings
Section 09655 - Vinyl Transition Molding
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Commercial Application
Section 09900 - Painting
DIVISION 4, MASONRY
Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry
Section 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5, METALS
Section 05030 - Powdered Coating
Section 05120 - Structural Steel
Section 05400 - Lightgauge Metal Framing
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
Section 06076 - Preservative Treatment
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7, THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07160 - Underslab Vapor Retarder
Section 07200 - Insulation
Section 07610 - Metal Roof and Fascia Panels (Standing Seam)
Section 07710 - Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8, DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 08200 - Wood Doors
Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors
Section 08400 - Entrance Storefront Doors
Section 08410 - Flush Glazed Storefront Windows
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows
Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware Schedule
Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9, FINISHES
Section 09100 - Lathing and Stucco
Section 09230 - Cement Backing Board
Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile Work
Section 09510 - Lay in Panel Ceilings
Section 09655 - Vinyl Transition Molding
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Commercial Application
Section 09900 - Painting
DIVISION 10, SPECIALTIES
Section 10100 - Chalkboards, Markerboards and Tackboards
Section 10260 - Comer Guards
Section 10440 - Specialty Signs
Section 10520 - Portable Fire Extinguishers
Section 10531 - Aluminum Walkway Covers
Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT
Section 11132 - Projection Screens
Section 11458 - Disappearing Stairs
DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGS
Section 12290 - Manufactured Casework: Light Commercial
DIVISION 13 , SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13122 - Metal Building Systems
DIVISION 145 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
This Section Not Used.
DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL
Section 15055 - Common Piping Requirements
Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation
Section 15110 - Valves
Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping
Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 15183 - Refrigerant Piping
Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15425 - Plumbing Specialties
Section 15480 - Domestic Water ,Heaters
Section 15736 - Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units ( 15 Tons and Smaller)
Section 15738 - Split-System Air-Conditioning Units
Section 15810 - Ducts and Accessories
Section 15838 - Power Ventilators
Section 15855 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Section 15981 - Performance Verification, Final
DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL
Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(REVISED 12 MARCH 2009)
SECTION & DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01100 - Definitions
Section 01200 - Contractors General Notes
Section 01300 - Submittals
Section 01400 - Quality Control
Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01700 - Project Closeout
Section 01720 - Project Related Documents
DIVISION 2, SITE WORK
Section 02010 - Site Conditions and Subsurface Investigation
Section 02110 - Clearing and Grubbing
Section 02204 - Grassing by Sodding
Section 02206 - Site Cleanup & Restoration
Section 02220 - Civil Site Demolition
Section 02250 - Soil Poisoning
Section 02270 - Erosion Control
Section 02300 - Site Earthwork
Section 02302 - Excavation and Fill
Section 02510 - Water Mains
Section 02515 - Gate Valves
Section 02516 - Site Concrete (Walks and Slabs)
Section 02518 - Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
Section 02520 - Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
Section 02535 - Force Mains
Section 02538 - Testing Force Mains
Section 02630 - Storm Sewerage
Section 02714 - Stabilized Subgrade
Section 02722 - Cemented Coquina Shell Base Course
Section 02741 - Asphalt Concrete Surface Course
Section 02752 - Concrete Paving
Section 02761 - Pavement Markings
Section 02821 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates
DIVISION 35 CONCRETE
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03300 - Cast in Place Concrete
Section 03420 - Precast Concrete Lintels
DIVISION 10, SPECIALTIES
Section 10100 - Chalkboards, Markerboards and Tackboards
Section 10260 - Comer Guards
Section 10440 - Specialty Signs
Section 10520 - Portable Fire Extinguishers
Section 10531 - Aluminum Walkway Covers
Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT
Section 11132 - Projection Screens
Section 11458 - Disappearing Stairs
DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGS
Section 12290 - Manufactured Casework: Light Commercial
DIVISION 13 , SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13122 - Metal Building Systems
DIVISION 145 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
This Section Not Used.
DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL
Section 15055 - Common Piping Requirements
Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation
Section 15110 - Valves
Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping
Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 15183 - Refrigerant Piping
Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15425 - Plumbing Specialties
Section 15480 - Domestic Water ,Heaters
Section 15736 - Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units ( 15 Tons and Smaller)
Section 15738 - Split-System Air-Conditioning Units
Section 15810 - Ducts and Accessories
Section 15838 - Power Ventilators
Section 15855 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Section 15981 - Performance Verification, Final
DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL
Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
DIVISION 10, SPECIALTIES
Section 10100 - Chalkboards, Markerboards and Tackboards
Section 10260 - Comer Guards
Section 10440 - Specialty Signs
Section 10520 - Portable Fire Extinguishers
Section 10531 - Aluminum Walkway Covers
Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT
Section 11132 - Projection Screens
Section 11458 - Disappearing Stairs
DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGS
Section 12290 - Manufactured Casework: Light Commercial
DIVISION 13 , SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13122 - Metal Building Systems
DIVISION 145 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
This Section Not Used.
DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL
Section 15055 - Common Piping Requirements
Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation
Section 15110 - Valves
Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping
Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 15183 - Refrigerant Piping
Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15425 - Plumbing Specialties
Section 15480 - Domestic Water ,Heaters
Section 15736 - Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units ( 15 Tons and Smaller)
Section 15738 - Split-System Air-Conditioning Units
Section 15810 - Ducts and Accessories
Section 15838 - Power Ventilators
Section 15855 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Section 15981 - Performance Verification, Final
DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL
Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
Section 16145 - Lighting Control Devices
Section 16231 - Packaged Engine Generators
Section 16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Section 16511 - Interior Lighting
C:050605 VB3 .doc/paul
Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
Section 16145 - Lighting Control Devices
Section 16231 - Packaged Engine Generators
Section 16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Section 16511 - Interior Lighting
C:050605 VB3 .doc/paul
Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
Section 16145 - Lighting Control Devices
Section 16231 - Packaged Engine Generators
Section 16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Section 16511 - Interior Lighting
C:050605 VB3 .doc/paul
SECTION 01100 - DEFINITIONS
of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contr ct
documents, apply generally to the work:
A. The term "Owner", or pronouns in place of same, where used in this Projec
Manual shall mean the individual or group for which work is to be perfo ed under
an agreement with the Contractor.
B . The term "Architect" , where used in this Project Manual shall mean t firm of
Edlund, Dritenbas, Binkley Architect's and Associates, P .A .
C. The term " General Contractor" , "Contractor of Record", or "Con actor" vrhere
used in this Project Manual, shall mean the Contractor to whom e Contract for the
work described and specified herein, and shown on the accomp nying Drawings,
has been awarded by the Owner.
D . The term " Subcontractor" , or "Prime Subcontractor" , wher sed in this Project
Manual shall mean all other contractors operating under ontractual
agreement for specific work on this project with the Co actor.
E. " Owner' s Representative" shall mean that individual individuals designated to
represent the Owner in decisions effecting the work The Owner' s Representative
will be designated prior to beginning of constructi
F. General Requirements : Provisions of Division / ections of these specifications.
G . Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, gra p ics or schedules, or written into other
portions of contract documents . Terms suc as "shown". "noted" , " scheduled" and
" specified" have the same meaning as "in ' ated", and are used to assist the reader
in locating particular information.
H . Directed, Requested, Approved, Acce ed, etc. : These terms imply "by the
Architect" of the Owner's Represent ive unless otherwise indicated.
I. Approved by Architect: In no cas eleases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill
requirement of the Contract Doc ments.
J. Project Site : Space available Contractor at location of project, either exclusively
" or to be shared with separat ontractors, for performance of the work . ■-
K. Furnish: Supply and deli v _ r to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, a d similar subsequent requirements.
i
01100-1
DIVISION 4, MASONRY
Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry
Section 04270 - Glass Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5, METALS
Section 05030 - Powdered Coating
Section 05120 - Structural Steel
Section 05400 - Lightgauge Metal Framing
Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
Section 06076 - Preservative Treatment
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7, THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07160 - Underslab Vapor Retarder
Section 07200 - Insulation
Section 07610 - Metal Roof and Fascia Panels (Standing Seam)
Section 07710 - Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8, DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 08200 - Wood Doors
Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors
Section 08400 - Entrance Storefront Doors
Section 08410 - Flush Glazed Storefront Windows
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows
Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
Section 08710 - Finish Hardware Schedule
Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 9, FINISHES
Section 09100 - Lathing and Stucco
Section 09230 - Cement Backing Board
Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile Work
Section 09510 - Lay in Panel Ceilings
Section 09655 - Vinyl Transition Molding
Section 09680 - Carpeting: Commercial Application
Section 09900 - Painting
SECTION 01100 - DEFINITIONS
of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contr ct
documents, apply generally to the work:
A. The term "Owner", or pronouns in place of same, where used in this Projec
Manual shall mean the individual or group for which work is to be perfo ed under
an agreement with the Contractor.
B . The term "Architect" , where used in this Project Manual shall mean t firm of
Edlund, Dritenbas, Binkley Architect's and Associates, P .A .
C. The term " General Contractor" , "Contractor of Record", or "Con actor" vrhere
used in this Project Manual, shall mean the Contractor to whom e Contract for the
work described and specified herein, and shown on the accomp nying Drawings,
has been awarded by the Owner.
D . The term " Subcontractor" , or "Prime Subcontractor" , wher sed in this Project
Manual shall mean all other contractors operating under ontractual
agreement for specific work on this project with the Co actor.
E. " Owner' s Representative" shall mean that individual individuals designated to
represent the Owner in decisions effecting the work The Owner' s Representative
will be designated prior to beginning of constructi
F. General Requirements : Provisions of Division / ections of these specifications.
G . Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, gra p ics or schedules, or written into other
portions of contract documents . Terms suc as "shown". "noted" , " scheduled" and
" specified" have the same meaning as "in ' ated", and are used to assist the reader
in locating particular information.
H . Directed, Requested, Approved, Acce ed, etc. : These terms imply "by the
Architect" of the Owner's Represent ive unless otherwise indicated.
I. Approved by Architect: In no cas eleases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill
requirement of the Contract Doc ments.
J. Project Site : Space available Contractor at location of project, either exclusively
" or to be shared with separat ontractors, for performance of the work . ■-
K. Furnish: Supply and deli v _ r to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, a d similar subsequent requirements.
i
01100-1
SECTION 01100 - DEFINITIONS
of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contr ct
documents, apply generally to the work:
A. The term "Owner", or pronouns in place of same, where used in this Projec
Manual shall mean the individual or group for which work is to be perfo ed under
an agreement with the Contractor.
B . The term "Architect" , where used in this Project Manual shall mean t firm of
Edlund, Dritenbas, Binkley Architect's and Associates, P .A .
C. The term " General Contractor" , "Contractor of Record", or "Con actor" vrhere
used in this Project Manual, shall mean the Contractor to whom e Contract for the
work described and specified herein, and shown on the accomp nying Drawings,
has been awarded by the Owner.
D . The term " Subcontractor" , or "Prime Subcontractor" , wher sed in this Project
Manual shall mean all other contractors operating under ontractual
agreement for specific work on this project with the Co actor.
E. " Owner' s Representative" shall mean that individual individuals designated to
represent the Owner in decisions effecting the work The Owner' s Representative
will be designated prior to beginning of constructi
F. General Requirements : Provisions of Division / ections of these specifications.
G . Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, gra p ics or schedules, or written into other
portions of contract documents . Terms suc as "shown". "noted" , " scheduled" and
" specified" have the same meaning as "in ' ated", and are used to assist the reader
in locating particular information.
H . Directed, Requested, Approved, Acce ed, etc. : These terms imply "by the
Architect" of the Owner's Represent ive unless otherwise indicated.
I. Approved by Architect: In no cas eleases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill
requirement of the Contract Doc ments.
J. Project Site : Space available Contractor at location of project, either exclusively
" or to be shared with separat ontractors, for performance of the work . ■-
K. Furnish: Supply and deli v _ r to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, a d similar subsequent requirements.
i
01100-1
L. Project Manual : As used in these Contract Dcluments includes the Bidding
Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, d the Specifications . '
o M . Product: As used in these Contract Docu ent includes materials, systems, and
equipment.
N. Install : Operations at project site, in riding unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, apply g, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning and similar r uirements.
O. Provide: Furnish and install , c plete and ready for intended use.
P . Installer: Entity (firm or pe on) engaged to install work, by Contractor,
subcontractor or sub- subc ntractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in
work that are engaged t nstall .
Q. Overlapping/Conflic g Requirements: Most stringent requirements apply and will
be enforced, unless ore detailed language written directly into Contract
Documents clear] indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Where
optional require ents are specified in a parallel manner, option is intended to be
Contractor' s u ss otherwise indicated .
R. Minimum quirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum
acceptable evel of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry.
S . The to " or equal" where used in the Project Manual shall in all cases mean an
appro d equal as determined by the Architect.
T. Co ract Documents : shall consist of all plans, specs, bid documents, addendum,
a lication form, permits, and any other documents accumulated in the
rformance of the construction of this project.
U . Substantial Completion : The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof, is the Date certified by the Architect when construction
is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner
can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof, for the use for which
it is intended , as expressed in the Contract Documents .
V . The term "Engineer" shall mean the individual or individuals designated to
represent the Owner or Architect in decisions affecting the work.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
l -
01100-2
L. Project Manual : As used in these Contract Dcluments includes the Bidding
Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, d the Specifications . '
o M . Product: As used in these Contract Docu ent includes materials, systems, and
equipment.
N. Install : Operations at project site, in riding unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, apply g, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning and similar r uirements.
O. Provide: Furnish and install , c plete and ready for intended use.
P . Installer: Entity (firm or pe on) engaged to install work, by Contractor,
subcontractor or sub- subc ntractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in
work that are engaged t nstall .
Q. Overlapping/Conflic g Requirements: Most stringent requirements apply and will
be enforced, unless ore detailed language written directly into Contract
Documents clear] indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Where
optional require ents are specified in a parallel manner, option is intended to be
Contractor' s u ss otherwise indicated .
R. Minimum quirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum
acceptable evel of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry.
S . The to " or equal" where used in the Project Manual shall in all cases mean an
appro d equal as determined by the Architect.
T. Co ract Documents : shall consist of all plans, specs, bid documents, addendum,
a lication form, permits, and any other documents accumulated in the
rformance of the construction of this project.
U . Substantial Completion : The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof, is the Date certified by the Architect when construction
is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner
can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof, for the use for which
it is intended , as expressed in the Contract Documents .
V . The term "Engineer" shall mean the individual or individuals designated to
represent the Owner or Architect in decisions affecting the work.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
l -
01100-2
L. Project Manual : As used in these Contract Dcluments includes the Bidding
Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, d the Specifications . '
o M . Product: As used in these Contract Docu ent includes materials, systems, and
equipment.
N. Install : Operations at project site, in riding unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, apply g, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning and similar r uirements.
O. Provide: Furnish and install , c plete and ready for intended use.
P . Installer: Entity (firm or pe on) engaged to install work, by Contractor,
subcontractor or sub- subc ntractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in
work that are engaged t nstall .
Q. Overlapping/Conflic g Requirements: Most stringent requirements apply and will
be enforced, unless ore detailed language written directly into Contract
Documents clear] indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Where
optional require ents are specified in a parallel manner, option is intended to be
Contractor' s u ss otherwise indicated .
R. Minimum quirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum
acceptable evel of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry.
S . The to " or equal" where used in the Project Manual shall in all cases mean an
appro d equal as determined by the Architect.
T. Co ract Documents : shall consist of all plans, specs, bid documents, addendum,
a lication form, permits, and any other documents accumulated in the
rformance of the construction of this project.
U . Substantial Completion : The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof, is the Date certified by the Architect when construction
is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner
can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof, for the use for which
it is intended , as expressed in the Contract Documents .
V . The term "Engineer" shall mean the individual or individuals designated to
represent the Owner or Architect in decisions affecting the work.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
l -
01100-2
SECTION 01200 - CONTRACTORS GENERAL NOTES
1 . 01 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE
FOLLOWING :
A. The Contractor shall warranty and guarantee all materials and workmanship for a
period of ( 1 ) year from the date of completion.
B . The Contractor shall secure Final Inspection and Acceptance, prior to the Release of
Final Payment.
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Workmans Compensation and Builders
Risk Insurance with the limits required by law and as specified herein.
D . All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Substitutions will be allowed.
but only with the Architects prior written approval. Verbal approvals to Contractors
request for substitution are non-binding unless they are backed up with written
documentation from the Architect.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the manufacturer' s installation
instructions and catalog cuts.
F. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall perform all work in accordance with the best
trade practices typical to the projects geographical location.
G. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner, executed "Final
Release of Lien" forms from all parties having lien rights against the Owner.
H . Unless where noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the labor, material ,
equipment, and incidentals, including all testing as required in the Specifications by an
independent testing laboratory, necessary for a complete and operating project.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades and/or Subcontractors and shall
notify the Architect that all long-lead items for the project have been ordered as
scheduled.
2 .01 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Each Contractor shall carefully examine the site before submitting his bid. No allowance
will be made him for a lack of full knowledge of all conditions at the site, except such
underground conditions as are indeterminable before the commencement of the work.
i'
01200-1
DIVISION 10, SPECIALTIES
Section 10100 - Chalkboards, Markerboards and Tackboards
Section 10260 - Comer Guards
Section 10440 - Specialty Signs
Section 10520 - Portable Fire Extinguishers
Section 10531 - Aluminum Walkway Covers
Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11, EQUIPMENT
Section 11132 - Projection Screens
Section 11458 - Disappearing Stairs
DIVISION 12, FURNISHINGS
Section 12290 - Manufactured Casework: Light Commercial
DIVISION 13 , SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13122 - Metal Building Systems
DIVISION 145 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
This Section Not Used.
DIVISION 15, MECHANICAL
Section 15055 - Common Piping Requirements
Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation
Section 15110 - Valves
Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping
Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
Section 15183 - Refrigerant Piping
Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixtures
Section 15425 - Plumbing Specialties
Section 15480 - Domestic Water ,Heaters
Section 15736 - Self-Contained Air-Conditioning Units ( 15 Tons and Smaller)
Section 15738 - Split-System Air-Conditioning Units
Section 15810 - Ducts and Accessories
Section 15838 - Power Ventilators
Section 15855 - Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 15900 - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
Section 15981 - Performance Verification, Final
DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL
Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding
Section 16120 - Conductors and Cables
SECTION 01200 - CONTRACTORS GENERAL NOTES
1 . 01 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE
FOLLOWING :
A. The Contractor shall warranty and guarantee all materials and workmanship for a
period of ( 1 ) year from the date of completion.
B . The Contractor shall secure Final Inspection and Acceptance, prior to the Release of
Final Payment.
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Workmans Compensation and Builders
Risk Insurance with the limits required by law and as specified herein.
D . All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Substitutions will be allowed.
but only with the Architects prior written approval. Verbal approvals to Contractors
request for substitution are non-binding unless they are backed up with written
documentation from the Architect.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the manufacturer' s installation
instructions and catalog cuts.
F. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall perform all work in accordance with the best
trade practices typical to the projects geographical location.
G. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner, executed "Final
Release of Lien" forms from all parties having lien rights against the Owner.
H . Unless where noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the labor, material ,
equipment, and incidentals, including all testing as required in the Specifications by an
independent testing laboratory, necessary for a complete and operating project.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades and/or Subcontractors and shall
notify the Architect that all long-lead items for the project have been ordered as
scheduled.
2 .01 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Each Contractor shall carefully examine the site before submitting his bid. No allowance
will be made him for a lack of full knowledge of all conditions at the site, except such
underground conditions as are indeterminable before the commencement of the work.
i'
01200-1
SECTION 01200 - CONTRACTORS GENERAL NOTES
1 . 01 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE
FOLLOWING :
A. The Contractor shall warranty and guarantee all materials and workmanship for a
period of ( 1 ) year from the date of completion.
B . The Contractor shall secure Final Inspection and Acceptance, prior to the Release of
Final Payment.
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Workmans Compensation and Builders
Risk Insurance with the limits required by law and as specified herein.
D . All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Substitutions will be allowed.
but only with the Architects prior written approval. Verbal approvals to Contractors
request for substitution are non-binding unless they are backed up with written
documentation from the Architect.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the manufacturer' s installation
instructions and catalog cuts.
F. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall perform all work in accordance with the best
trade practices typical to the projects geographical location.
G. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner, executed "Final
Release of Lien" forms from all parties having lien rights against the Owner.
H . Unless where noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the labor, material ,
equipment, and incidentals, including all testing as required in the Specifications by an
independent testing laboratory, necessary for a complete and operating project.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades and/or Subcontractors and shall
notify the Architect that all long-lead items for the project have been ordered as
scheduled.
2 .01 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Each Contractor shall carefully examine the site before submitting his bid. No allowance
will be made him for a lack of full knowledge of all conditions at the site, except such
underground conditions as are indeterminable before the commencement of the work.
i'
01200-1
3 . 01 SURVEY
The Contractor is responsible for staking out the building lines and certifying the slab
elevation prior to the pouring of any concrete slabs . When the project is located within a
flood zone, a copy of said slab survey shall be supplied to the Owner for his Flood
Insurance qualification purposes .
4 . 01 OMISSIONS
A . The drawings and specifications are intended to cooperate. Anything shown on the
drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or anything not
expressly set forth in either, but which is reasonably implied, shall be furnished as if
specifically shown and mentioned in both without extra charge.
B . Should anything be omitted from the drawings which is necessary for the proper
construction of the work herein described, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to so
notify the Owner in writing, if recognized, with a copy to the Architect. In the event of
the Contractor failing to give notice, of a recognized error in the plans, he shall bear
the extra cost in his/her work caused thereby without extra charge to the Owner as
referenced in A .I . A. 201 .
5 . 01 DIMENSIONS
i Figures given on the drawings govern scaled measurements and larger scale governs
smaller. Do not scale the blueline prints.
6 . 01 INSPECTIONS
The Architect will review with the General Contractor, prior to the beginning of
construction, all mandatory inspections . The General Contractor shall afford the inspector
every facility for inspecting the work/materials. No piping, wiring, ducts, etc. , shall be
covered up until properly inspected and approved, and until certificates, if required, shall
have been issued for same. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of each inspection
being requested of the Building Department. The Contractor shall give the Architect a
minimum of 24 hours advanced notice of a required or periodically requested inspection .
7 . 01 PROTECTION/SECURITY/STORAGE
The General Contractor shall provide and maintain the physical security of the property by
providing normal lock up measures to preclude trespassing, burglary, and vandalism . All
materials in or designed for the work shall be, at all times, suitably housed or protected
with particular care being taken of all finished items. Building materials, Contractor' s
equipment, etc. , may be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to
the approval of the Owner. Whenever the Contractor makes a request for payment on f -
materials stored off-site, a Certificate of Insurance for that material must be attached . t
01200-2
3 . 01 SURVEY
The Contractor is responsible for staking out the building lines and certifying the slab
elevation prior to the pouring of any concrete slabs . When the project is located within a
flood zone, a copy of said slab survey shall be supplied to the Owner for his Flood
Insurance qualification purposes .
4 . 01 OMISSIONS
A . The drawings and specifications are intended to cooperate. Anything shown on the
drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or anything not
expressly set forth in either, but which is reasonably implied, shall be furnished as if
specifically shown and mentioned in both without extra charge.
B . Should anything be omitted from the drawings which is necessary for the proper
construction of the work herein described, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to so
notify the Owner in writing, if recognized, with a copy to the Architect. In the event of
the Contractor failing to give notice, of a recognized error in the plans, he shall bear
the extra cost in his/her work caused thereby without extra charge to the Owner as
referenced in A .I . A. 201 .
5 . 01 DIMENSIONS
i Figures given on the drawings govern scaled measurements and larger scale governs
smaller. Do not scale the blueline prints.
6 . 01 INSPECTIONS
The Architect will review with the General Contractor, prior to the beginning of
construction, all mandatory inspections . The General Contractor shall afford the inspector
every facility for inspecting the work/materials. No piping, wiring, ducts, etc. , shall be
covered up until properly inspected and approved, and until certificates, if required, shall
have been issued for same. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of each inspection
being requested of the Building Department. The Contractor shall give the Architect a
minimum of 24 hours advanced notice of a required or periodically requested inspection .
7 . 01 PROTECTION/SECURITY/STORAGE
The General Contractor shall provide and maintain the physical security of the property by
providing normal lock up measures to preclude trespassing, burglary, and vandalism . All
materials in or designed for the work shall be, at all times, suitably housed or protected
with particular care being taken of all finished items. Building materials, Contractor' s
equipment, etc. , may be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to
the approval of the Owner. Whenever the Contractor makes a request for payment on f -
materials stored off-site, a Certificate of Insurance for that material must be attached . t
01200-2
3 . 01 SURVEY
The Contractor is responsible for staking out the building lines and certifying the slab
elevation prior to the pouring of any concrete slabs . When the project is located within a
flood zone, a copy of said slab survey shall be supplied to the Owner for his Flood
Insurance qualification purposes .
4 . 01 OMISSIONS
A . The drawings and specifications are intended to cooperate. Anything shown on the
drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or anything not
expressly set forth in either, but which is reasonably implied, shall be furnished as if
specifically shown and mentioned in both without extra charge.
B . Should anything be omitted from the drawings which is necessary for the proper
construction of the work herein described, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to so
notify the Owner in writing, if recognized, with a copy to the Architect. In the event of
the Contractor failing to give notice, of a recognized error in the plans, he shall bear
the extra cost in his/her work caused thereby without extra charge to the Owner as
referenced in A .I . A. 201 .
5 . 01 DIMENSIONS
i Figures given on the drawings govern scaled measurements and larger scale governs
smaller. Do not scale the blueline prints.
6 . 01 INSPECTIONS
The Architect will review with the General Contractor, prior to the beginning of
construction, all mandatory inspections . The General Contractor shall afford the inspector
every facility for inspecting the work/materials. No piping, wiring, ducts, etc. , shall be
covered up until properly inspected and approved, and until certificates, if required, shall
have been issued for same. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of each inspection
being requested of the Building Department. The Contractor shall give the Architect a
minimum of 24 hours advanced notice of a required or periodically requested inspection .
7 . 01 PROTECTION/SECURITY/STORAGE
The General Contractor shall provide and maintain the physical security of the property by
providing normal lock up measures to preclude trespassing, burglary, and vandalism . All
materials in or designed for the work shall be, at all times, suitably housed or protected
with particular care being taken of all finished items. Building materials, Contractor' s
equipment, etc. , may be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to
the approval of the Owner. Whenever the Contractor makes a request for payment on f -
materials stored off-site, a Certificate of Insurance for that material must be attached . t
01200-2
When any room in the building is utilized as a storage space, shop, etc ., the parties making
such use of those rooms shall be held responsible for any repairs, patching and cleaning
that may arise from such use. The Owner, at any time during the construction of the
project, may direct the Contractor to move materials stored in the building when it
becomes necessary and this will be accomplished at no additional charge to the Owner.
8. 01 CLEANING
The building must be kept free from all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish at all times, at
the completion of the work all paint spots must be removed from the finished floors, walls,
window and door frames and any glass where required. Finished glass scratched or etched
due to cleaning shall be replaced by the Contractor. Limits of acceptance, of any scratched
or etched glass, shall be made by the Owner.
9. 01 GLASS BREAKAGE
The Contractor, before acceptance of the building, shall replace all glass that may have
become broken, or damaged from any cause .
10 . 01 DOCUMENT EXISTING DAMAGE
The Contractor, prior to mobilizing on the site, shall document any existing damage to
items such as interior ceilings, driveways, interior and exterior walls, floors, floor
` coverings, curbs, sidewalks , glass breakage, sprinkler heads, etc.
The Contractor will be responsible for repairing any materials, directly and indirectly
damaged, as a result of his work on the job site.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01200-3
Section 16130 - Raceways and Boxes
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices
Section 16145 - Lighting Control Devices
Section 16231 - Packaged Engine Generators
Section 16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
Section 16511 - Interior Lighting
C:050605 VB3 .doc/paul
When any room in the building is utilized as a storage space, shop, etc ., the parties making
such use of those rooms shall be held responsible for any repairs, patching and cleaning
that may arise from such use. The Owner, at any time during the construction of the
project, may direct the Contractor to move materials stored in the building when it
becomes necessary and this will be accomplished at no additional charge to the Owner.
8. 01 CLEANING
The building must be kept free from all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish at all times, at
the completion of the work all paint spots must be removed from the finished floors, walls,
window and door frames and any glass where required. Finished glass scratched or etched
due to cleaning shall be replaced by the Contractor. Limits of acceptance, of any scratched
or etched glass, shall be made by the Owner.
9. 01 GLASS BREAKAGE
The Contractor, before acceptance of the building, shall replace all glass that may have
become broken, or damaged from any cause .
10 . 01 DOCUMENT EXISTING DAMAGE
The Contractor, prior to mobilizing on the site, shall document any existing damage to
items such as interior ceilings, driveways, interior and exterior walls, floors, floor
` coverings, curbs, sidewalks , glass breakage, sprinkler heads, etc.
The Contractor will be responsible for repairing any materials, directly and indirectly
damaged, as a result of his work on the job site.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01200-3
When any room in the building is utilized as a storage space, shop, etc ., the parties making
such use of those rooms shall be held responsible for any repairs, patching and cleaning
that may arise from such use. The Owner, at any time during the construction of the
project, may direct the Contractor to move materials stored in the building when it
becomes necessary and this will be accomplished at no additional charge to the Owner.
8. 01 CLEANING
The building must be kept free from all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish at all times, at
the completion of the work all paint spots must be removed from the finished floors, walls,
window and door frames and any glass where required. Finished glass scratched or etched
due to cleaning shall be replaced by the Contractor. Limits of acceptance, of any scratched
or etched glass, shall be made by the Owner.
9. 01 GLASS BREAKAGE
The Contractor, before acceptance of the building, shall replace all glass that may have
become broken, or damaged from any cause .
10 . 01 DOCUMENT EXISTING DAMAGE
The Contractor, prior to mobilizing on the site, shall document any existing damage to
items such as interior ceilings, driveways, interior and exterior walls, floors, floor
` coverings, curbs, sidewalks , glass breakage, sprinkler heads, etc.
The Contractor will be responsible for repairing any materials, directly and indirectly
damaged, as a result of his work on the job site.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01200-3
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
' j
J PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply to required submittals, related to units of work, not to
administrative submittals such as payment requests, insurance certificates and progress
reports. In addition to specific provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions
related to submittals, individual specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 contain
submittal requirements, specific requirements in other sections have precedence over
general requirements of this section .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General : Coordinate submittals with progress schedule and actual progress of work;
allow ten ( 10) working days for Architect ' s and Engineer ' s processing of submittals
requiring review and approval - Use transmittal form to establish complete record or
submittals. Provide copies required by governing authorities, which are in addition to
copies specified for submittal to the Architect.
1 B . Shop drawings: shall be submitted for manufactured or fabricated materials as called
for in the separate specification section. Drawings shall be fully identifiable with
project name, location, supplier' s name, date, drawing number, specifications section
reference, etc. . . The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no
delay in his work or in that of any Subcontractor, four (4) copies of all shop
drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades to the
Architect for approval and (1) one copy of the shop drawings to the Owner's
representative for review and comment. The Contractor shall make no deviation
from the approved shop drawings and/or the changes made thereto by the Architect, if
any. Additional prints, as may be required by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly schedule the submission of
shop drawings for approval, to allow adequate time for the checking of drawings,
manufacturer/fabrication of items, and the shipment of items to the job site in
sufficient time so as to prevent any delay in the Progress Schedule.
D. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the preparation of
shop drawings of those items which will be furnished by more than one manufacturer,
but are designed to interface with the overall project when installed.
01300-1
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
' j
J PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply to required submittals, related to units of work, not to
administrative submittals such as payment requests, insurance certificates and progress
reports. In addition to specific provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions
related to submittals, individual specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 contain
submittal requirements, specific requirements in other sections have precedence over
general requirements of this section .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General : Coordinate submittals with progress schedule and actual progress of work;
allow ten ( 10) working days for Architect ' s and Engineer ' s processing of submittals
requiring review and approval - Use transmittal form to establish complete record or
submittals. Provide copies required by governing authorities, which are in addition to
copies specified for submittal to the Architect.
1 B . Shop drawings: shall be submitted for manufactured or fabricated materials as called
for in the separate specification section. Drawings shall be fully identifiable with
project name, location, supplier' s name, date, drawing number, specifications section
reference, etc. . . The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no
delay in his work or in that of any Subcontractor, four (4) copies of all shop
drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades to the
Architect for approval and (1) one copy of the shop drawings to the Owner's
representative for review and comment. The Contractor shall make no deviation
from the approved shop drawings and/or the changes made thereto by the Architect, if
any. Additional prints, as may be required by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly schedule the submission of
shop drawings for approval, to allow adequate time for the checking of drawings,
manufacturer/fabrication of items, and the shipment of items to the job site in
sufficient time so as to prevent any delay in the Progress Schedule.
D. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the preparation of
shop drawings of those items which will be furnished by more than one manufacturer,
but are designed to interface with the overall project when installed.
01300-1
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
' j
J PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply to required submittals, related to units of work, not to
administrative submittals such as payment requests, insurance certificates and progress
reports. In addition to specific provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions
related to submittals, individual specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 contain
submittal requirements, specific requirements in other sections have precedence over
general requirements of this section .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General : Coordinate submittals with progress schedule and actual progress of work;
allow ten ( 10) working days for Architect ' s and Engineer ' s processing of submittals
requiring review and approval - Use transmittal form to establish complete record or
submittals. Provide copies required by governing authorities, which are in addition to
copies specified for submittal to the Architect.
1 B . Shop drawings: shall be submitted for manufactured or fabricated materials as called
for in the separate specification section. Drawings shall be fully identifiable with
project name, location, supplier' s name, date, drawing number, specifications section
reference, etc. . . The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no
delay in his work or in that of any Subcontractor, four (4) copies of all shop
drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades to the
Architect for approval and (1) one copy of the shop drawings to the Owner's
representative for review and comment. The Contractor shall make no deviation
from the approved shop drawings and/or the changes made thereto by the Architect, if
any. Additional prints, as may be required by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly schedule the submission of
shop drawings for approval, to allow adequate time for the checking of drawings,
manufacturer/fabrication of items, and the shipment of items to the job site in
sufficient time so as to prevent any delay in the Progress Schedule.
D. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the preparation of
shop drawings of those items which will be furnished by more than one manufacturer,
but are designed to interface with the overall project when installed.
01300-1
E. Shop Drawings submitted to the Architect for his approval shall first show evidence of
being checked by the Contractor, the prima-facie evidence of which shall be a 0
"CHECKED" stamp marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" on each
copy of each shop drawings, placed thereon by the Contractor. Shop drawings
received without the Contractor' s " CHECKED" stamp will be cause for
immediate return without further action by the Architect until properly
resubmitted . Each drawing correctly submitted will be checked by the
Architect and marked by him in one of the following ways :
a. REVIEWED : NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN
b . REVIEWED : NOTE COMMENTS AND MAKE
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED
c. REVIEWED : REVISE AND RESUBMIT
d . REVIEWED : REJECTED
F . Copies of Product Data: mark each copy to indicate actual product to be provided;
show selections from among options in manufacturer' s printed product data. Submit
six copies; two copies of which will be returned where required for maintenance
manuals ; and an additional copy to be maintained at project site for reference purposes .
Do not proceed with installation of manufactured products until a copy of related
product data is in installer' s possession.
2 .02 SUBSTITUTIONS
A . Approval Required:
1 . The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract
Documents.
2 . All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes
and performance, shall require approval by the Architect before being
incorporated into the work.
3 . Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods unless such substitution has
been specifically approved for this work by the Architect, in writing.
B . "Or Equal" :
1 . Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Architect" occurs
in the Contract Documents, do not assume that materials , equipment or
methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically
approved in writing by the Architect.
2. The decision of the Architect shall be final .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01300 -2
SECTION 01100 - DEFINITIONS
of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contr ct
documents, apply generally to the work:
A. The term "Owner", or pronouns in place of same, where used in this Projec
Manual shall mean the individual or group for which work is to be perfo ed under
an agreement with the Contractor.
B . The term "Architect" , where used in this Project Manual shall mean t firm of
Edlund, Dritenbas, Binkley Architect's and Associates, P .A .
C. The term " General Contractor" , "Contractor of Record", or "Con actor" vrhere
used in this Project Manual, shall mean the Contractor to whom e Contract for the
work described and specified herein, and shown on the accomp nying Drawings,
has been awarded by the Owner.
D . The term " Subcontractor" , or "Prime Subcontractor" , wher sed in this Project
Manual shall mean all other contractors operating under ontractual
agreement for specific work on this project with the Co actor.
E. " Owner' s Representative" shall mean that individual individuals designated to
represent the Owner in decisions effecting the work The Owner' s Representative
will be designated prior to beginning of constructi
F. General Requirements : Provisions of Division / ections of these specifications.
G . Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, gra p ics or schedules, or written into other
portions of contract documents . Terms suc as "shown". "noted" , " scheduled" and
" specified" have the same meaning as "in ' ated", and are used to assist the reader
in locating particular information.
H . Directed, Requested, Approved, Acce ed, etc. : These terms imply "by the
Architect" of the Owner's Represent ive unless otherwise indicated.
I. Approved by Architect: In no cas eleases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill
requirement of the Contract Doc ments.
J. Project Site : Space available Contractor at location of project, either exclusively
" or to be shared with separat ontractors, for performance of the work . ■-
K. Furnish: Supply and deli v _ r to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, a d similar subsequent requirements.
i
01100-1
E. Shop Drawings submitted to the Architect for his approval shall first show evidence of
being checked by the Contractor, the prima-facie evidence of which shall be a 0
"CHECKED" stamp marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" on each
copy of each shop drawings, placed thereon by the Contractor. Shop drawings
received without the Contractor' s " CHECKED" stamp will be cause for
immediate return without further action by the Architect until properly
resubmitted . Each drawing correctly submitted will be checked by the
Architect and marked by him in one of the following ways :
a. REVIEWED : NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN
b . REVIEWED : NOTE COMMENTS AND MAKE
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED
c. REVIEWED : REVISE AND RESUBMIT
d . REVIEWED : REJECTED
F . Copies of Product Data: mark each copy to indicate actual product to be provided;
show selections from among options in manufacturer' s printed product data. Submit
six copies; two copies of which will be returned where required for maintenance
manuals ; and an additional copy to be maintained at project site for reference purposes .
Do not proceed with installation of manufactured products until a copy of related
product data is in installer' s possession.
2 .02 SUBSTITUTIONS
A . Approval Required:
1 . The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract
Documents.
2 . All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes
and performance, shall require approval by the Architect before being
incorporated into the work.
3 . Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods unless such substitution has
been specifically approved for this work by the Architect, in writing.
B . "Or Equal" :
1 . Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Architect" occurs
in the Contract Documents, do not assume that materials , equipment or
methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically
approved in writing by the Architect.
2. The decision of the Architect shall be final .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01300 -2
E. Shop Drawings submitted to the Architect for his approval shall first show evidence of
being checked by the Contractor, the prima-facie evidence of which shall be a 0
"CHECKED" stamp marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" on each
copy of each shop drawings, placed thereon by the Contractor. Shop drawings
received without the Contractor' s " CHECKED" stamp will be cause for
immediate return without further action by the Architect until properly
resubmitted . Each drawing correctly submitted will be checked by the
Architect and marked by him in one of the following ways :
a. REVIEWED : NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN
b . REVIEWED : NOTE COMMENTS AND MAKE
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED
c. REVIEWED : REVISE AND RESUBMIT
d . REVIEWED : REJECTED
F . Copies of Product Data: mark each copy to indicate actual product to be provided;
show selections from among options in manufacturer' s printed product data. Submit
six copies; two copies of which will be returned where required for maintenance
manuals ; and an additional copy to be maintained at project site for reference purposes .
Do not proceed with installation of manufactured products until a copy of related
product data is in installer' s possession.
2 .02 SUBSTITUTIONS
A . Approval Required:
1 . The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract
Documents.
2 . All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes
and performance, shall require approval by the Architect before being
incorporated into the work.
3 . Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods unless such substitution has
been specifically approved for this work by the Architect, in writing.
B . "Or Equal" :
1 . Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Architect" occurs
in the Contract Documents, do not assume that materials , equipment or
methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically
approved in writing by the Architect.
2. The decision of the Architect shall be final .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01300 -2
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL :
The work of this section includes Quality Assurance; and the independent
laboratory and field sampling, testing, inspections, supervision and reports of those
materials required by the various sections of these specifications. Tests and inspections
shall be performed by a recognized Testing Laboratory selected by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect.
1 .02 COOPERATION:
A. Testing Laboratory shall cooperate with all trades whose work affects or is affected
by the tests and inspections .
B . Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance necessary in taking samples,
making field tests and making inspections, and he shall schedule and coordinate his
work to hold costs of tests and inspections to a reasonable minimum .
1 .03 PAYMENTS :
A . Costs for tests and inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
B . If the results of any test or inspection indicates failure to meet the specified
requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of retesting or
reinspection.
C. Marmer of Work: When in the opinion of the Architect, tests or inspections are
required because of the manner in which the Contractor does his work, such as
questionable quality of materials and/or workmanship, questionable sources of
material, substitution of materials or sources of same for those previously accepted,
or failure or material to comply with specification or plan requirements ; the costs
for such tests or inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
D . Should the Contractor refuse to perform such tests, the direct cost of testing,
incurred by the Owner, shall be deducted from the Contract sum for construction.
1 .04 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS :
The Architect reserves the right to demand for test or special examination any material or
part thereof to insure compliance with the specification and he may reject any material or
part judged defective as a result of such tests and the Contractor shall replace such
1 defective material or part with material or part that does comply with the specifications at
no additional expense to the Owner.
01400-1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL :
The work of this section includes Quality Assurance; and the independent
laboratory and field sampling, testing, inspections, supervision and reports of those
materials required by the various sections of these specifications. Tests and inspections
shall be performed by a recognized Testing Laboratory selected by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect.
1 .02 COOPERATION:
A. Testing Laboratory shall cooperate with all trades whose work affects or is affected
by the tests and inspections .
B . Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance necessary in taking samples,
making field tests and making inspections, and he shall schedule and coordinate his
work to hold costs of tests and inspections to a reasonable minimum .
1 .03 PAYMENTS :
A . Costs for tests and inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
B . If the results of any test or inspection indicates failure to meet the specified
requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of retesting or
reinspection.
C. Marmer of Work: When in the opinion of the Architect, tests or inspections are
required because of the manner in which the Contractor does his work, such as
questionable quality of materials and/or workmanship, questionable sources of
material, substitution of materials or sources of same for those previously accepted,
or failure or material to comply with specification or plan requirements ; the costs
for such tests or inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
D . Should the Contractor refuse to perform such tests, the direct cost of testing,
incurred by the Owner, shall be deducted from the Contract sum for construction.
1 .04 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS :
The Architect reserves the right to demand for test or special examination any material or
part thereof to insure compliance with the specification and he may reject any material or
part judged defective as a result of such tests and the Contractor shall replace such
1 defective material or part with material or part that does comply with the specifications at
no additional expense to the Owner.
01400-1
L. Project Manual : As used in these Contract Dcluments includes the Bidding
Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, d the Specifications . '
o M . Product: As used in these Contract Docu ent includes materials, systems, and
equipment.
N. Install : Operations at project site, in riding unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, apply g, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning and similar r uirements.
O. Provide: Furnish and install , c plete and ready for intended use.
P . Installer: Entity (firm or pe on) engaged to install work, by Contractor,
subcontractor or sub- subc ntractor. Installers are required to be skilled experts in
work that are engaged t nstall .
Q. Overlapping/Conflic g Requirements: Most stringent requirements apply and will
be enforced, unless ore detailed language written directly into Contract
Documents clear] indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Where
optional require ents are specified in a parallel manner, option is intended to be
Contractor' s u ss otherwise indicated .
R. Minimum quirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum
acceptable evel of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry.
S . The to " or equal" where used in the Project Manual shall in all cases mean an
appro d equal as determined by the Architect.
T. Co ract Documents : shall consist of all plans, specs, bid documents, addendum,
a lication form, permits, and any other documents accumulated in the
rformance of the construction of this project.
U . Substantial Completion : The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof, is the Date certified by the Architect when construction
is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner
can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof, for the use for which
it is intended , as expressed in the Contract Documents .
V . The term "Engineer" shall mean the individual or individuals designated to
represent the Owner or Architect in decisions affecting the work.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
l -
01100-2
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL :
The work of this section includes Quality Assurance; and the independent
laboratory and field sampling, testing, inspections, supervision and reports of those
materials required by the various sections of these specifications. Tests and inspections
shall be performed by a recognized Testing Laboratory selected by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect.
1 .02 COOPERATION:
A. Testing Laboratory shall cooperate with all trades whose work affects or is affected
by the tests and inspections .
B . Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance necessary in taking samples,
making field tests and making inspections, and he shall schedule and coordinate his
work to hold costs of tests and inspections to a reasonable minimum .
1 .03 PAYMENTS :
A . Costs for tests and inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
B . If the results of any test or inspection indicates failure to meet the specified
requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of retesting or
reinspection.
C. Marmer of Work: When in the opinion of the Architect, tests or inspections are
required because of the manner in which the Contractor does his work, such as
questionable quality of materials and/or workmanship, questionable sources of
material, substitution of materials or sources of same for those previously accepted,
or failure or material to comply with specification or plan requirements ; the costs
for such tests or inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
D . Should the Contractor refuse to perform such tests, the direct cost of testing,
incurred by the Owner, shall be deducted from the Contract sum for construction.
1 .04 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS :
The Architect reserves the right to demand for test or special examination any material or
part thereof to insure compliance with the specification and he may reject any material or
part judged defective as a result of such tests and the Contractor shall replace such
1 defective material or part with material or part that does comply with the specifications at
no additional expense to the Owner.
01400-1
1 .05 REPORTS :
Test and inspection reports shall be written immediately upon conclusion of each ,..
procedure ;Copies shall be provided to the following:
Architect
Contractor
1 .06 TEST CRITERIA :
The specific test and inspection procedures and their required results are enumerated herein
by reference to recognized standards and shall be the required method for testing and
judging the results unless deviations from the standards are specifically mentioned .
1 .07 STANDARDS :
Applicable Standards listed in these Specifications include, but are not necessarily limited
to, standards promulgated by the following agencies and organizations.
1 . AASHTO = American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ,
341 National Press Building, Washington, D . C . 20004 .
2 . ACI = American Concrete Institute , Box 19150, Redford , Station, Detroit,
Michigan 48219 . i
3 . AISC = American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1221 Avenue of the
Americas, New York, NY 10020 .
4 . ANSI = American National Standards Institute (successor USASI and ASA) 1430
Broadway, New York, NY 10018
5 . ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19103
6 . AWS = American Welding Society, Inc. , 2501 N .W. 7th Street, Miami , FL 33125
7 . AWWA = American Water Works Association, Inc. , 6666 West Quincy Ave. ,
Denver, CO 80235
8 . CRSI = Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 228 North Lasalle Street, Chicago, IL
60610
9 . CS =Commercial Standard ofNBS, U . S . Department of Commerce, Government
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402
10 . FGMA = Flat Glass Marketing Association, 3310 Harrison, Topeka, KS 66611
01400-2
SECTION 01200 - CONTRACTORS GENERAL NOTES
1 . 01 THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE
FOLLOWING :
A. The Contractor shall warranty and guarantee all materials and workmanship for a
period of ( 1 ) year from the date of completion.
B . The Contractor shall secure Final Inspection and Acceptance, prior to the Release of
Final Payment.
C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain Workmans Compensation and Builders
Risk Insurance with the limits required by law and as specified herein.
D . All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Substitutions will be allowed.
but only with the Architects prior written approval. Verbal approvals to Contractors
request for substitution are non-binding unless they are backed up with written
documentation from the Architect.
E. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the manufacturer' s installation
instructions and catalog cuts.
F. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall perform all work in accordance with the best
trade practices typical to the projects geographical location.
G. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner, executed "Final
Release of Lien" forms from all parties having lien rights against the Owner.
H . Unless where noted otherwise, the Contractor shall provide all the labor, material ,
equipment, and incidentals, including all testing as required in the Specifications by an
independent testing laboratory, necessary for a complete and operating project.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all trades and/or Subcontractors and shall
notify the Architect that all long-lead items for the project have been ordered as
scheduled.
2 .01 EXAMINATION OF SITE
Each Contractor shall carefully examine the site before submitting his bid. No allowance
will be made him for a lack of full knowledge of all conditions at the site, except such
underground conditions as are indeterminable before the commencement of the work.
i'
01200-1
1 .05 REPORTS :
Test and inspection reports shall be written immediately upon conclusion of each ,..
procedure ;Copies shall be provided to the following:
Architect
Contractor
1 .06 TEST CRITERIA :
The specific test and inspection procedures and their required results are enumerated herein
by reference to recognized standards and shall be the required method for testing and
judging the results unless deviations from the standards are specifically mentioned .
1 .07 STANDARDS :
Applicable Standards listed in these Specifications include, but are not necessarily limited
to, standards promulgated by the following agencies and organizations.
1 . AASHTO = American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ,
341 National Press Building, Washington, D . C . 20004 .
2 . ACI = American Concrete Institute , Box 19150, Redford , Station, Detroit,
Michigan 48219 . i
3 . AISC = American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1221 Avenue of the
Americas, New York, NY 10020 .
4 . ANSI = American National Standards Institute (successor USASI and ASA) 1430
Broadway, New York, NY 10018
5 . ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19103
6 . AWS = American Welding Society, Inc. , 2501 N .W. 7th Street, Miami , FL 33125
7 . AWWA = American Water Works Association, Inc. , 6666 West Quincy Ave. ,
Denver, CO 80235
8 . CRSI = Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 228 North Lasalle Street, Chicago, IL
60610
9 . CS =Commercial Standard ofNBS, U . S . Department of Commerce, Government
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402
10 . FGMA = Flat Glass Marketing Association, 3310 Harrison, Topeka, KS 66611
01400-2
1 .05 REPORTS :
Test and inspection reports shall be written immediately upon conclusion of each ,..
procedure ;Copies shall be provided to the following:
Architect
Contractor
1 .06 TEST CRITERIA :
The specific test and inspection procedures and their required results are enumerated herein
by reference to recognized standards and shall be the required method for testing and
judging the results unless deviations from the standards are specifically mentioned .
1 .07 STANDARDS :
Applicable Standards listed in these Specifications include, but are not necessarily limited
to, standards promulgated by the following agencies and organizations.
1 . AASHTO = American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ,
341 National Press Building, Washington, D . C . 20004 .
2 . ACI = American Concrete Institute , Box 19150, Redford , Station, Detroit,
Michigan 48219 . i
3 . AISC = American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1221 Avenue of the
Americas, New York, NY 10020 .
4 . ANSI = American National Standards Institute (successor USASI and ASA) 1430
Broadway, New York, NY 10018
5 . ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19103
6 . AWS = American Welding Society, Inc. , 2501 N .W. 7th Street, Miami , FL 33125
7 . AWWA = American Water Works Association, Inc. , 6666 West Quincy Ave. ,
Denver, CO 80235
8 . CRSI = Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 228 North Lasalle Street, Chicago, IL
60610
9 . CS =Commercial Standard ofNBS, U . S . Department of Commerce, Government
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402
10 . FGMA = Flat Glass Marketing Association, 3310 Harrison, Topeka, KS 66611
01400-2
11 . NAAMM = The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 1033
South Boulevard, Oak Park, IL 60302
12 . NEC = National Electrical Code (see NFPA)
13 . NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street, New
York, NY 10017
14 . NFPA = National Fire Protection Association (Life Safety Code) 470 Atlantic
Avenue, Boston, MA 02210
15 . SBCC = Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 900 Montclair Road,
Birmingham, AL 35213 .
16 . FBC = Florida Building Code, latest adopted addition.
'END OF SECTION " *
1
01400-3
11 . NAAMM = The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 1033
South Boulevard, Oak Park, IL 60302
12 . NEC = National Electrical Code (see NFPA)
13 . NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street, New
York, NY 10017
14 . NFPA = National Fire Protection Association (Life Safety Code) 470 Atlantic
Avenue, Boston, MA 02210
15 . SBCC = Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 900 Montclair Road,
Birmingham, AL 35213 .
16 . FBC = Florida Building Code, latest adopted addition.
'END OF SECTION " *
1
01400-3
3 . 01 SURVEY
The Contractor is responsible for staking out the building lines and certifying the slab
elevation prior to the pouring of any concrete slabs . When the project is located within a
flood zone, a copy of said slab survey shall be supplied to the Owner for his Flood
Insurance qualification purposes .
4 . 01 OMISSIONS
A . The drawings and specifications are intended to cooperate. Anything shown on the
drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or anything not
expressly set forth in either, but which is reasonably implied, shall be furnished as if
specifically shown and mentioned in both without extra charge.
B . Should anything be omitted from the drawings which is necessary for the proper
construction of the work herein described, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to so
notify the Owner in writing, if recognized, with a copy to the Architect. In the event of
the Contractor failing to give notice, of a recognized error in the plans, he shall bear
the extra cost in his/her work caused thereby without extra charge to the Owner as
referenced in A .I . A. 201 .
5 . 01 DIMENSIONS
i Figures given on the drawings govern scaled measurements and larger scale governs
smaller. Do not scale the blueline prints.
6 . 01 INSPECTIONS
The Architect will review with the General Contractor, prior to the beginning of
construction, all mandatory inspections . The General Contractor shall afford the inspector
every facility for inspecting the work/materials. No piping, wiring, ducts, etc. , shall be
covered up until properly inspected and approved, and until certificates, if required, shall
have been issued for same. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of each inspection
being requested of the Building Department. The Contractor shall give the Architect a
minimum of 24 hours advanced notice of a required or periodically requested inspection .
7 . 01 PROTECTION/SECURITY/STORAGE
The General Contractor shall provide and maintain the physical security of the property by
providing normal lock up measures to preclude trespassing, burglary, and vandalism . All
materials in or designed for the work shall be, at all times, suitably housed or protected
with particular care being taken of all finished items. Building materials, Contractor' s
equipment, etc. , may be stored on the premises but the placing of same shall be subject to
the approval of the Owner. Whenever the Contractor makes a request for payment on f -
materials stored off-site, a Certificate of Insurance for that material must be attached . t
01200-2
11 . NAAMM = The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 1033
South Boulevard, Oak Park, IL 60302
12 . NEC = National Electrical Code (see NFPA)
13 . NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street, New
York, NY 10017
14 . NFPA = National Fire Protection Association (Life Safety Code) 470 Atlantic
Avenue, Boston, MA 02210
15 . SBCC = Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 900 Montclair Road,
Birmingham, AL 35213 .
16 . FBC = Florida Building Code, latest adopted addition.
'END OF SECTION " *
1
01400-3
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PAR 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
Refer to General Conditions for commitments which result in requirements for Contractor
to provide temporary facilities as may be required for performance of the work and
fulfillment of the Contract. This section specifies certain minimum temporary facilities
to be provided regardless of methods and means selected for performance of the work,
but not by way of limitation and not assured for compliance with governing regulation.
Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractor' s option, subject to Owner' s
acceptance. to
facilities is defined to exclude +cols anal construction machines,
testing, demolition, alterations, soil borings, mock-ups and similar items. The contractor
shall be responsible for the cost of all consumed utilities until such time as the Owner is
issued the "Certificate of Occupancy" .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 DEWATERING
Maintain site and construction work free of water accumulation. Do not endanger the
work or adjacent properties. Maintain protection against flooding. Protect existing
drainage systems .
2 . 02 POWER DISTRIBUTION
Provide weatherproof, grounded circuits with groundfault interruption feature, with
proper power characteristics and either permanently wired or plug--in-connections as
appropriate for intended use. Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each
circuit at distribution panel . Space 4'gang convenience outlets (20 Amp circuit) so that
every portion of work can be reached with a 100-foot extension cord .
2 . 03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
Provide lighting of intensity and qualify sufficient for proper and safe performance of the
work, and for access thereto.
2 . 04 TEMPORARY DRIVES
Where feasible, use subbase and base construction of permanent drives and paving as
temporary paved construction areas ; and delay installation of finish paving courses until
possibility of damage from construction operations has been minimized. Otherwise,
01500-1
When any room in the building is utilized as a storage space, shop, etc ., the parties making
such use of those rooms shall be held responsible for any repairs, patching and cleaning
that may arise from such use. The Owner, at any time during the construction of the
project, may direct the Contractor to move materials stored in the building when it
becomes necessary and this will be accomplished at no additional charge to the Owner.
8. 01 CLEANING
The building must be kept free from all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish at all times, at
the completion of the work all paint spots must be removed from the finished floors, walls,
window and door frames and any glass where required. Finished glass scratched or etched
due to cleaning shall be replaced by the Contractor. Limits of acceptance, of any scratched
or etched glass, shall be made by the Owner.
9. 01 GLASS BREAKAGE
The Contractor, before acceptance of the building, shall replace all glass that may have
become broken, or damaged from any cause .
10 . 01 DOCUMENT EXISTING DAMAGE
The Contractor, prior to mobilizing on the site, shall document any existing damage to
items such as interior ceilings, driveways, interior and exterior walls, floors, floor
` coverings, curbs, sidewalks , glass breakage, sprinkler heads, etc.
The Contractor will be responsible for repairing any materials, directly and indirectly
damaged, as a result of his work on the job site.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01200-3
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PAR 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
Refer to General Conditions for commitments which result in requirements for Contractor
to provide temporary facilities as may be required for performance of the work and
fulfillment of the Contract. This section specifies certain minimum temporary facilities
to be provided regardless of methods and means selected for performance of the work,
but not by way of limitation and not assured for compliance with governing regulation.
Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractor' s option, subject to Owner' s
acceptance. to
facilities is defined to exclude +cols anal construction machines,
testing, demolition, alterations, soil borings, mock-ups and similar items. The contractor
shall be responsible for the cost of all consumed utilities until such time as the Owner is
issued the "Certificate of Occupancy" .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 DEWATERING
Maintain site and construction work free of water accumulation. Do not endanger the
work or adjacent properties. Maintain protection against flooding. Protect existing
drainage systems .
2 . 02 POWER DISTRIBUTION
Provide weatherproof, grounded circuits with groundfault interruption feature, with
proper power characteristics and either permanently wired or plug--in-connections as
appropriate for intended use. Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each
circuit at distribution panel . Space 4'gang convenience outlets (20 Amp circuit) so that
every portion of work can be reached with a 100-foot extension cord .
2 . 03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
Provide lighting of intensity and qualify sufficient for proper and safe performance of the
work, and for access thereto.
2 . 04 TEMPORARY DRIVES
Where feasible, use subbase and base construction of permanent drives and paving as
temporary paved construction areas ; and delay installation of finish paving courses until
possibility of damage from construction operations has been minimized. Otherwise,
01500-1
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PAR 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
Refer to General Conditions for commitments which result in requirements for Contractor
to provide temporary facilities as may be required for performance of the work and
fulfillment of the Contract. This section specifies certain minimum temporary facilities
to be provided regardless of methods and means selected for performance of the work,
but not by way of limitation and not assured for compliance with governing regulation.
Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractor' s option, subject to Owner' s
acceptance. to
facilities is defined to exclude +cols anal construction machines,
testing, demolition, alterations, soil borings, mock-ups and similar items. The contractor
shall be responsible for the cost of all consumed utilities until such time as the Owner is
issued the "Certificate of Occupancy" .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 DEWATERING
Maintain site and construction work free of water accumulation. Do not endanger the
work or adjacent properties. Maintain protection against flooding. Protect existing
drainage systems .
2 . 02 POWER DISTRIBUTION
Provide weatherproof, grounded circuits with groundfault interruption feature, with
proper power characteristics and either permanently wired or plug--in-connections as
appropriate for intended use. Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each
circuit at distribution panel . Space 4'gang convenience outlets (20 Amp circuit) so that
every portion of work can be reached with a 100-foot extension cord .
2 . 03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
Provide lighting of intensity and qualify sufficient for proper and safe performance of the
work, and for access thereto.
2 . 04 TEMPORARY DRIVES
Where feasible, use subbase and base construction of permanent drives and paving as
temporary paved construction areas ; and delay installation of finish paving courses until
possibility of damage from construction operations has been minimized. Otherwise,
01500-1
provide not less than compacted subgrade of satisfactory soil material . Remove
temporary paving when no longer needed.
2 . 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Provide necessary connections, piping, valves, meters, and hoses from the distribution
points to points on the site where water and electrical power are necessary to carry on the
work. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary utilities.
2 .06 HOISTING. GENERAL
Provide cranes, hoists, and similar temporary construction facilities as needed to
adequately perform the work. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and governing
regulations for installation, operation and removal .
2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES
Provide miscellaneous facilities as needed, including temporary stairs , ramps, ladders ,
runways staging, shoring, scaffolding, railings, dust controls, bracings, barriers closures,
platforms, temporary partitions , waste chutes, storage shed , and similar items .
2 ,08 TEMPORARY TOILETS {
Where permitted by governing regulations, provide single-occupant, self-contained units
of either chemical aerated recirculation type of combustion type; glass fiber reinforced
polyester enclosure ; equipped with both urinal and stool fixtures. Supply units with
tissue and, where not located nearby, separate wash facilities, supply with wet-type hand
towels and waste containers. Locate units so that personnel will travel no more than 200',
including distance horizontally, to reach a unit.
2 .09 LOCKUP AND SECURITY
As construction of building structure or shell progress and it becomes feasible to secure
project against intrusion, provide temporary security enclosure, doors and locks as
necessary to prevent unauthorized entrance . Deliver, store and lockup materials and
equipment in a manner which will prevent theft and vandalism.
2 . 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Review exposure to possible environmental problems , with Architect. Establish
procedures and discipline among tradesmen and provide needed facilities which will
protect against environmental problems (pollution of air, water and soil , excessive noise,
and similar problems) .
01500 -2 ��
provide not less than compacted subgrade of satisfactory soil material . Remove
temporary paving when no longer needed.
2 . 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Provide necessary connections, piping, valves, meters, and hoses from the distribution
points to points on the site where water and electrical power are necessary to carry on the
work. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary utilities.
2 .06 HOISTING. GENERAL
Provide cranes, hoists, and similar temporary construction facilities as needed to
adequately perform the work. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and governing
regulations for installation, operation and removal .
2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES
Provide miscellaneous facilities as needed, including temporary stairs , ramps, ladders ,
runways staging, shoring, scaffolding, railings, dust controls, bracings, barriers closures,
platforms, temporary partitions , waste chutes, storage shed , and similar items .
2 ,08 TEMPORARY TOILETS {
Where permitted by governing regulations, provide single-occupant, self-contained units
of either chemical aerated recirculation type of combustion type; glass fiber reinforced
polyester enclosure ; equipped with both urinal and stool fixtures. Supply units with
tissue and, where not located nearby, separate wash facilities, supply with wet-type hand
towels and waste containers. Locate units so that personnel will travel no more than 200',
including distance horizontally, to reach a unit.
2 .09 LOCKUP AND SECURITY
As construction of building structure or shell progress and it becomes feasible to secure
project against intrusion, provide temporary security enclosure, doors and locks as
necessary to prevent unauthorized entrance . Deliver, store and lockup materials and
equipment in a manner which will prevent theft and vandalism.
2 . 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Review exposure to possible environmental problems , with Architect. Establish
procedures and discipline among tradesmen and provide needed facilities which will
protect against environmental problems (pollution of air, water and soil , excessive noise,
and similar problems) .
01500 -2 ��
r . �
`,
�`�
�-
provide not less than compacted subgrade of satisfactory soil material . Remove
temporary paving when no longer needed.
2 . 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Provide necessary connections, piping, valves, meters, and hoses from the distribution
points to points on the site where water and electrical power are necessary to carry on the
work. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary utilities.
2 .06 HOISTING. GENERAL
Provide cranes, hoists, and similar temporary construction facilities as needed to
adequately perform the work. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and governing
regulations for installation, operation and removal .
2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES
Provide miscellaneous facilities as needed, including temporary stairs , ramps, ladders ,
runways staging, shoring, scaffolding, railings, dust controls, bracings, barriers closures,
platforms, temporary partitions , waste chutes, storage shed , and similar items .
2 ,08 TEMPORARY TOILETS {
Where permitted by governing regulations, provide single-occupant, self-contained units
of either chemical aerated recirculation type of combustion type; glass fiber reinforced
polyester enclosure ; equipped with both urinal and stool fixtures. Supply units with
tissue and, where not located nearby, separate wash facilities, supply with wet-type hand
towels and waste containers. Locate units so that personnel will travel no more than 200',
including distance horizontally, to reach a unit.
2 .09 LOCKUP AND SECURITY
As construction of building structure or shell progress and it becomes feasible to secure
project against intrusion, provide temporary security enclosure, doors and locks as
necessary to prevent unauthorized entrance . Deliver, store and lockup materials and
equipment in a manner which will prevent theft and vandalism.
2 . 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Review exposure to possible environmental problems , with Architect. Establish
procedures and discipline among tradesmen and provide needed facilities which will
protect against environmental problems (pollution of air, water and soil , excessive noise,
and similar problems) .
01500 -2 ��
2 . 11 TEMPORARY WATER
The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall utilize a temporary water service as required
for construction. The Contractor shall request, apply for, and pay the connection fee. The
Contractor shall incur the meter cost and all monthly water usage costs, payable to the
Utility Company having jurisdiction over the site. The Contractor shall utilized the water
for construction and to sustain any specified landscaping.
2 . 12 JOB SITE PHONE AND FIELD OFFICE
The Centracter will be required to engage the local telephone company to install and
maintain a jobsite telephone and fax machine. In lieu of a jobsite telephone, a cell phone
with voice mail capability for the job superintendent is acceptable. The Contractor shall
provide the phone number to the Owner and the Architect. Unless stipulated otherwise, a
job site Field Office is required for all projects.
2 . 13 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
The Contractor will be required to erect temporary galvanized chain link fencing, posts
and gates to secure the construction and mobilization areas. Refer to the plans for
suggested location of temporary fencing. The Contractor shall be responsible for
reviewing the proposed location of the fencing with the Architect or Owner prior to
erecting the fence. Minimum fence and gate height shall be 6 feet. Tops of galvanized
fencing shall have turned down safety edges. Gates shall be locked at the end of the days
construction . All locks shall be supplied by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15 - Mechanical, and
Division 16 - Electrical .
B . Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service and modify and extend
systems as work progress requires.
i
01500-3
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
' j
J PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply to required submittals, related to units of work, not to
administrative submittals such as payment requests, insurance certificates and progress
reports. In addition to specific provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions
related to submittals, individual specification sections of Divisions 2 through 16 contain
submittal requirements, specific requirements in other sections have precedence over
general requirements of this section .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General : Coordinate submittals with progress schedule and actual progress of work;
allow ten ( 10) working days for Architect ' s and Engineer ' s processing of submittals
requiring review and approval - Use transmittal form to establish complete record or
submittals. Provide copies required by governing authorities, which are in addition to
copies specified for submittal to the Architect.
1 B . Shop drawings: shall be submitted for manufactured or fabricated materials as called
for in the separate specification section. Drawings shall be fully identifiable with
project name, location, supplier' s name, date, drawing number, specifications section
reference, etc. . . The Contractor shall submit, with such promptness as to cause no
delay in his work or in that of any Subcontractor, four (4) copies of all shop
drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades to the
Architect for approval and (1) one copy of the shop drawings to the Owner's
representative for review and comment. The Contractor shall make no deviation
from the approved shop drawings and/or the changes made thereto by the Architect, if
any. Additional prints, as may be required by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. shall
be supplied by the Contractor.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly schedule the submission of
shop drawings for approval, to allow adequate time for the checking of drawings,
manufacturer/fabrication of items, and the shipment of items to the job site in
sufficient time so as to prevent any delay in the Progress Schedule.
D. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the preparation of
shop drawings of those items which will be furnished by more than one manufacturer,
but are designed to interface with the overall project when installed.
01300-1
2 . 11 TEMPORARY WATER
The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall utilize a temporary water service as required
for construction. The Contractor shall request, apply for, and pay the connection fee. The
Contractor shall incur the meter cost and all monthly water usage costs, payable to the
Utility Company having jurisdiction over the site. The Contractor shall utilized the water
for construction and to sustain any specified landscaping.
2 . 12 JOB SITE PHONE AND FIELD OFFICE
The Centracter will be required to engage the local telephone company to install and
maintain a jobsite telephone and fax machine. In lieu of a jobsite telephone, a cell phone
with voice mail capability for the job superintendent is acceptable. The Contractor shall
provide the phone number to the Owner and the Architect. Unless stipulated otherwise, a
job site Field Office is required for all projects.
2 . 13 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
The Contractor will be required to erect temporary galvanized chain link fencing, posts
and gates to secure the construction and mobilization areas. Refer to the plans for
suggested location of temporary fencing. The Contractor shall be responsible for
reviewing the proposed location of the fencing with the Architect or Owner prior to
erecting the fence. Minimum fence and gate height shall be 6 feet. Tops of galvanized
fencing shall have turned down safety edges. Gates shall be locked at the end of the days
construction . All locks shall be supplied by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15 - Mechanical, and
Division 16 - Electrical .
B . Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service and modify and extend
systems as work progress requires.
i
01500-3
2 . 11 TEMPORARY WATER
The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall utilize a temporary water service as required
for construction. The Contractor shall request, apply for, and pay the connection fee. The
Contractor shall incur the meter cost and all monthly water usage costs, payable to the
Utility Company having jurisdiction over the site. The Contractor shall utilized the water
for construction and to sustain any specified landscaping.
2 . 12 JOB SITE PHONE AND FIELD OFFICE
The Centracter will be required to engage the local telephone company to install and
maintain a jobsite telephone and fax machine. In lieu of a jobsite telephone, a cell phone
with voice mail capability for the job superintendent is acceptable. The Contractor shall
provide the phone number to the Owner and the Architect. Unless stipulated otherwise, a
job site Field Office is required for all projects.
2 . 13 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
The Contractor will be required to erect temporary galvanized chain link fencing, posts
and gates to secure the construction and mobilization areas. Refer to the plans for
suggested location of temporary fencing. The Contractor shall be responsible for
reviewing the proposed location of the fencing with the Architect or Owner prior to
erecting the fence. Minimum fence and gate height shall be 6 feet. Tops of galvanized
fencing shall have turned down safety edges. Gates shall be locked at the end of the days
construction . All locks shall be supplied by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15 - Mechanical, and
Division 16 - Electrical .
B . Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service and modify and extend
systems as work progress requires.
i
01500-3
3 . 02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required and leave the site in a clean condition.
B . Clear. and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01500-4
3 . 02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required and leave the site in a clean condition.
B . Clear. and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01500-4
E. Shop Drawings submitted to the Architect for his approval shall first show evidence of
being checked by the Contractor, the prima-facie evidence of which shall be a 0
"CHECKED" stamp marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" on each
copy of each shop drawings, placed thereon by the Contractor. Shop drawings
received without the Contractor' s " CHECKED" stamp will be cause for
immediate return without further action by the Architect until properly
resubmitted . Each drawing correctly submitted will be checked by the
Architect and marked by him in one of the following ways :
a. REVIEWED : NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN
b . REVIEWED : NOTE COMMENTS AND MAKE
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED
c. REVIEWED : REVISE AND RESUBMIT
d . REVIEWED : REJECTED
F . Copies of Product Data: mark each copy to indicate actual product to be provided;
show selections from among options in manufacturer' s printed product data. Submit
six copies; two copies of which will be returned where required for maintenance
manuals ; and an additional copy to be maintained at project site for reference purposes .
Do not proceed with installation of manufactured products until a copy of related
product data is in installer' s possession.
2 .02 SUBSTITUTIONS
A . Approval Required:
1 . The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract
Documents.
2 . All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes
and performance, shall require approval by the Architect before being
incorporated into the work.
3 . Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods unless such substitution has
been specifically approved for this work by the Architect, in writing.
B . "Or Equal" :
1 . Where the phrase "or equal" or "or equal as approved by the Architect" occurs
in the Contract Documents, do not assume that materials , equipment or
methods will be approved as equal unless the item has been specifically
approved in writing by the Architect.
2. The decision of the Architect shall be final .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01300 -2
3 . 02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required and leave the site in a clean condition.
B . Clear. and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01500-4
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply primarily to closeout of actual physical work, not to
administrative matters such as final payment and changeover of insurance. Specific
requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section.
1 . 02 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A . Record Drawings : Maintain a complete set of blue/blackline prints of contract
drawings and shop drawings for record mark-up purposes throughout the Contract
Time. Mark-up drawings during the course of the work to show changes and actual
installation conditions, sufficient to form a complete record for Owner' s purposes .
Give particular attention to work for Owner ' s purposes . Give particular attention to
work which will be concealed and difficult to measure and record at a later date,
particularly work which may require servicing or replacement during the life of the
project. Request subcontractors and mechanics marking the prints to sign and date
each mark-up. Bind prints into manageable sets, with durable paper covers,
appropriately labeled. Record drawings to be available at time of landscaping.
B . Operation and Maintenance Manuals : Provide (4) four 3-ring vinyl-covered
binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed .
Include operating and maintenance instructions ; extended to cover emergencies,
spare parts, warranties, inspection, procedures, diagrams, safety, security, and
similar appropriate data for each system or equipment item. Provide names and
phone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers as a cover sheet in each binder.
1 .03 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
Require each installer of systems requiring continued operation/maintenance by Owner' s
operating personnel , to provide on location instruction to Owner' s personnel, sufficient to
ensure safe, secure, efficient, non-failing utilization and operation of systems. Provide
instructions for the following categories of work:
Mechanical, electrical and electronic systems (not limited to work of Divisions 15
and 16) . Live plant materials, lawns and irrigation systems well, pump, potable
water treatment systems, fire sprinklers, security system, and fire alarm control
system .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 FINAL CLEANING
01700-1
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL :
The work of this section includes Quality Assurance; and the independent
laboratory and field sampling, testing, inspections, supervision and reports of those
materials required by the various sections of these specifications. Tests and inspections
shall be performed by a recognized Testing Laboratory selected by the Contractor and
approved by the Architect.
1 .02 COOPERATION:
A. Testing Laboratory shall cooperate with all trades whose work affects or is affected
by the tests and inspections .
B . Contractor shall cooperate with and provide assistance necessary in taking samples,
making field tests and making inspections, and he shall schedule and coordinate his
work to hold costs of tests and inspections to a reasonable minimum .
1 .03 PAYMENTS :
A . Costs for tests and inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
B . If the results of any test or inspection indicates failure to meet the specified
requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of retesting or
reinspection.
C. Marmer of Work: When in the opinion of the Architect, tests or inspections are
required because of the manner in which the Contractor does his work, such as
questionable quality of materials and/or workmanship, questionable sources of
material, substitution of materials or sources of same for those previously accepted,
or failure or material to comply with specification or plan requirements ; the costs
for such tests or inspections shall be incurred by the Contractor.
D . Should the Contractor refuse to perform such tests, the direct cost of testing,
incurred by the Owner, shall be deducted from the Contract sum for construction.
1 .04 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS :
The Architect reserves the right to demand for test or special examination any material or
part thereof to insure compliance with the specification and he may reject any material or
part judged defective as a result of such tests and the Contractor shall replace such
1 defective material or part with material or part that does comply with the specifications at
no additional expense to the Owner.
01400-1
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply primarily to closeout of actual physical work, not to
administrative matters such as final payment and changeover of insurance. Specific
requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section.
1 . 02 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A . Record Drawings : Maintain a complete set of blue/blackline prints of contract
drawings and shop drawings for record mark-up purposes throughout the Contract
Time. Mark-up drawings during the course of the work to show changes and actual
installation conditions, sufficient to form a complete record for Owner' s purposes .
Give particular attention to work for Owner ' s purposes . Give particular attention to
work which will be concealed and difficult to measure and record at a later date,
particularly work which may require servicing or replacement during the life of the
project. Request subcontractors and mechanics marking the prints to sign and date
each mark-up. Bind prints into manageable sets, with durable paper covers,
appropriately labeled. Record drawings to be available at time of landscaping.
B . Operation and Maintenance Manuals : Provide (4) four 3-ring vinyl-covered
binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed .
Include operating and maintenance instructions ; extended to cover emergencies,
spare parts, warranties, inspection, procedures, diagrams, safety, security, and
similar appropriate data for each system or equipment item. Provide names and
phone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers as a cover sheet in each binder.
1 .03 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
Require each installer of systems requiring continued operation/maintenance by Owner' s
operating personnel , to provide on location instruction to Owner' s personnel, sufficient to
ensure safe, secure, efficient, non-failing utilization and operation of systems. Provide
instructions for the following categories of work:
Mechanical, electrical and electronic systems (not limited to work of Divisions 15
and 16) . Live plant materials, lawns and irrigation systems well, pump, potable
water treatment systems, fire sprinklers, security system, and fire alarm control
system .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 FINAL CLEANING
01700-1
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply primarily to closeout of actual physical work, not to
administrative matters such as final payment and changeover of insurance. Specific
requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section.
1 . 02 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A . Record Drawings : Maintain a complete set of blue/blackline prints of contract
drawings and shop drawings for record mark-up purposes throughout the Contract
Time. Mark-up drawings during the course of the work to show changes and actual
installation conditions, sufficient to form a complete record for Owner' s purposes .
Give particular attention to work for Owner ' s purposes . Give particular attention to
work which will be concealed and difficult to measure and record at a later date,
particularly work which may require servicing or replacement during the life of the
project. Request subcontractors and mechanics marking the prints to sign and date
each mark-up. Bind prints into manageable sets, with durable paper covers,
appropriately labeled. Record drawings to be available at time of landscaping.
B . Operation and Maintenance Manuals : Provide (4) four 3-ring vinyl-covered
binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed .
Include operating and maintenance instructions ; extended to cover emergencies,
spare parts, warranties, inspection, procedures, diagrams, safety, security, and
similar appropriate data for each system or equipment item. Provide names and
phone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers as a cover sheet in each binder.
1 .03 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
Require each installer of systems requiring continued operation/maintenance by Owner' s
operating personnel , to provide on location instruction to Owner' s personnel, sufficient to
ensure safe, secure, efficient, non-failing utilization and operation of systems. Provide
instructions for the following categories of work:
Mechanical, electrical and electronic systems (not limited to work of Divisions 15
and 16) . Live plant materials, lawns and irrigation systems well, pump, potable
water treatment systems, fire sprinklers, security system, and fire alarm control
system .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 FINAL CLEANING
01700-1
At closeout time, clean or reclean entire work to normal level for "first class"
mainteriance/cleaning of building projects of a similar nature . Remove non-permanent \ J
protection and labels, polish glass, clean exposed finished, touch-up minor finish damage,
clean or replace filters of mechanical systems, remove debris and broom-clean non-
occupied spaces, sanitize plumbing facilities, clean light fixtures and replace burned-
out/dimmed lamps , sweep and wash paved areas, police yards and grounds to the property
line, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a "clean" condition as
determined by Architect and Owner' s Representative.
3 . 02 PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A . Prerequisites : Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before
requesting the Architect' s inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for
substantial completion :
Complete installation of building and equipment to such level as the Owner could,
if necessary, occupy the facilities .
Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements ,
inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of
work, enabling Owner' s unrestricted occupancy and use.
Complete instruction of Owners operating personnel, and start-up of systems .
Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools .
B . Inspection Procedures : Upon completion of Contractor' s request for inspection the
Architect will either proceed with inspection or advice Contractor of prerequisites
not fulfilled . Following initial inspection, the Architect will either prepare
certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be
performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and
assured that work has been substantially completed . Results of completed
inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.
3 . 03 PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Upon receipt of Contractor ' s notice that work has been completed, including punch-list
items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because
of acceptable circumstances, the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of
reinspection the Architect will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or
advise contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final
acceptance, if necessary, procedure will be repeated.
* * *END OF SECTION'''
01700-2
At closeout time, clean or reclean entire work to normal level for "first class"
mainteriance/cleaning of building projects of a similar nature . Remove non-permanent \ J
protection and labels, polish glass, clean exposed finished, touch-up minor finish damage,
clean or replace filters of mechanical systems, remove debris and broom-clean non-
occupied spaces, sanitize plumbing facilities, clean light fixtures and replace burned-
out/dimmed lamps , sweep and wash paved areas, police yards and grounds to the property
line, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a "clean" condition as
determined by Architect and Owner' s Representative.
3 . 02 PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A . Prerequisites : Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before
requesting the Architect' s inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for
substantial completion :
Complete installation of building and equipment to such level as the Owner could,
if necessary, occupy the facilities .
Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements ,
inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of
work, enabling Owner' s unrestricted occupancy and use.
Complete instruction of Owners operating personnel, and start-up of systems .
Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools .
B . Inspection Procedures : Upon completion of Contractor' s request for inspection the
Architect will either proceed with inspection or advice Contractor of prerequisites
not fulfilled . Following initial inspection, the Architect will either prepare
certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be
performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and
assured that work has been substantially completed . Results of completed
inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.
3 . 03 PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Upon receipt of Contractor ' s notice that work has been completed, including punch-list
items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because
of acceptable circumstances, the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of
reinspection the Architect will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or
advise contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final
acceptance, if necessary, procedure will be repeated.
* * *END OF SECTION'''
01700-2
1 .05 REPORTS :
Test and inspection reports shall be written immediately upon conclusion of each ,..
procedure ;Copies shall be provided to the following:
Architect
Contractor
1 .06 TEST CRITERIA :
The specific test and inspection procedures and their required results are enumerated herein
by reference to recognized standards and shall be the required method for testing and
judging the results unless deviations from the standards are specifically mentioned .
1 .07 STANDARDS :
Applicable Standards listed in these Specifications include, but are not necessarily limited
to, standards promulgated by the following agencies and organizations.
1 . AASHTO = American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ,
341 National Press Building, Washington, D . C . 20004 .
2 . ACI = American Concrete Institute , Box 19150, Redford , Station, Detroit,
Michigan 48219 . i
3 . AISC = American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1221 Avenue of the
Americas, New York, NY 10020 .
4 . ANSI = American National Standards Institute (successor USASI and ASA) 1430
Broadway, New York, NY 10018
5 . ASTM = American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, PA 19103
6 . AWS = American Welding Society, Inc. , 2501 N .W. 7th Street, Miami , FL 33125
7 . AWWA = American Water Works Association, Inc. , 6666 West Quincy Ave. ,
Denver, CO 80235
8 . CRSI = Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 228 North Lasalle Street, Chicago, IL
60610
9 . CS =Commercial Standard ofNBS, U . S . Department of Commerce, Government
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402
10 . FGMA = Flat Glass Marketing Association, 3310 Harrison, Topeka, KS 66611
01400-2
At closeout time, clean or reclean entire work to normal level for "first class"
mainteriance/cleaning of building projects of a similar nature . Remove non-permanent \ J
protection and labels, polish glass, clean exposed finished, touch-up minor finish damage,
clean or replace filters of mechanical systems, remove debris and broom-clean non-
occupied spaces, sanitize plumbing facilities, clean light fixtures and replace burned-
out/dimmed lamps , sweep and wash paved areas, police yards and grounds to the property
line, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a "clean" condition as
determined by Architect and Owner' s Representative.
3 . 02 PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A . Prerequisites : Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before
requesting the Architect' s inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for
substantial completion :
Complete installation of building and equipment to such level as the Owner could,
if necessary, occupy the facilities .
Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements ,
inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of
work, enabling Owner' s unrestricted occupancy and use.
Complete instruction of Owners operating personnel, and start-up of systems .
Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools .
B . Inspection Procedures : Upon completion of Contractor' s request for inspection the
Architect will either proceed with inspection or advice Contractor of prerequisites
not fulfilled . Following initial inspection, the Architect will either prepare
certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be
performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and
assured that work has been substantially completed . Results of completed
inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.
3 . 03 PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Upon receipt of Contractor ' s notice that work has been completed, including punch-list
items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because
of acceptable circumstances, the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of
reinspection the Architect will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or
advise contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final
acceptance, if necessary, procedure will be repeated.
* * *END OF SECTION'''
01700-2
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The General Conditions of the Contract, including the General Requirements of Sections
01100 through 01820 shall be considered a part of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work Included:
1 . Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of.
a. Drawings
b . Specifications
C , Addenda Issued by the Architect and Owner
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract
e . Architect' s field orders or written instructions
f. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
g . Field test records and reports
B . Related Requirements :
1 . Section 01300 : Submittals
1 .03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES :
A. Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction.
B . File documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes .
C . Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect.
1 .04 RECORDING:
A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letters .
B . Provide one set of as-built mark-up plans to the Architect for electronic recording
of the final built project. Marks shall be in red ball-point pen . (No marker pens).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
01720-1
1
11 . NAAMM = The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, 1033
South Boulevard, Oak Park, IL 60302
12 . NEC = National Electrical Code (see NFPA)
13 . NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 155 East 44th Street, New
York, NY 10017
14 . NFPA = National Fire Protection Association (Life Safety Code) 470 Atlantic
Avenue, Boston, MA 02210
15 . SBCC = Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 900 Montclair Road,
Birmingham, AL 35213 .
16 . FBC = Florida Building Code, latest adopted addition.
'END OF SECTION " *
1
01400-3
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The General Conditions of the Contract, including the General Requirements of Sections
01100 through 01820 shall be considered a part of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work Included:
1 . Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of.
a. Drawings
b . Specifications
C , Addenda Issued by the Architect and Owner
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract
e . Architect' s field orders or written instructions
f. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
g . Field test records and reports
B . Related Requirements :
1 . Section 01300 : Submittals
1 .03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES :
A. Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction.
B . File documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes .
C . Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect.
1 .04 RECORDING:
A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letters .
B . Provide one set of as-built mark-up plans to the Architect for electronic recording
of the final built project. Marks shall be in red ball-point pen . (No marker pens).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
01720-1
1
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The General Conditions of the Contract, including the General Requirements of Sections
01100 through 01820 shall be considered a part of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work Included:
1 . Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of.
a. Drawings
b . Specifications
C , Addenda Issued by the Architect and Owner
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract
e . Architect' s field orders or written instructions
f. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
g . Field test records and reports
B . Related Requirements :
1 . Section 01300 : Submittals
1 .03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES :
A. Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction.
B . File documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes .
C . Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect.
1 .04 RECORDING:
A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letters .
B . Provide one set of as-built mark-up plans to the Architect for electronic recording
of the final built project. Marks shall be in red ball-point pen . (No marker pens).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
01720-1
1
DIVISION 2 , SITE WORK
j SECTION 02010 - SITE CONDITIONS & SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
As per the Subsurface Investigation and Engineering Report included in this specification
section and as prepared by the Owners ' s geotechnical testing company engineer. The reportis
titled Geotechnical Exploration for the Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex,
Indian River County Project No. 0710. A.M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825-2.
02010-1
DIVISION 2 , SITE WORK
j SECTION 02010 - SITE CONDITIONS & SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
As per the Subsurface Investigation and Engineering Report included in this specification
section and as prepared by the Owners ' s geotechnical testing company engineer. The reportis
titled Geotechnical Exploration for the Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex,
Indian River County Project No. 0710. A.M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825-2.
02010-1
DIVISION 2 , SITE WORK
j SECTION 02010 - SITE CONDITIONS & SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
As per the Subsurface Investigation and Engineering Report included in this specification
section and as prepared by the Owners ' s geotechnical testing company engineer. The reportis
titled Geotechnical Exploration for the Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex,
Indian River County Project No. 0710. A.M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825-2.
02010-1
1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
PROPOSED INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA
IRC PROJECT NO. 0710
PROJECT NO. PSL1825-1
APRIL 2007
z
i
Pre ared for
Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Attn: Mr. Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25"' Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
t
Prepared b
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
590 N. W. Mercantile Place
Port St. Lucie, Florida 34986
Phone : (772) 924.3575 t
Fax : (772) 924-3580 i
F
Id
t
4
}
t
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PAR 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
Refer to General Conditions for commitments which result in requirements for Contractor
to provide temporary facilities as may be required for performance of the work and
fulfillment of the Contract. This section specifies certain minimum temporary facilities
to be provided regardless of methods and means selected for performance of the work,
but not by way of limitation and not assured for compliance with governing regulation.
Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractor' s option, subject to Owner' s
acceptance. to
facilities is defined to exclude +cols anal construction machines,
testing, demolition, alterations, soil borings, mock-ups and similar items. The contractor
shall be responsible for the cost of all consumed utilities until such time as the Owner is
issued the "Certificate of Occupancy" .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 DEWATERING
Maintain site and construction work free of water accumulation. Do not endanger the
work or adjacent properties. Maintain protection against flooding. Protect existing
drainage systems .
2 . 02 POWER DISTRIBUTION
Provide weatherproof, grounded circuits with groundfault interruption feature, with
proper power characteristics and either permanently wired or plug--in-connections as
appropriate for intended use. Provide overload-protected disconnect switch for each
circuit at distribution panel . Space 4'gang convenience outlets (20 Amp circuit) so that
every portion of work can be reached with a 100-foot extension cord .
2 . 03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
Provide lighting of intensity and qualify sufficient for proper and safe performance of the
work, and for access thereto.
2 . 04 TEMPORARY DRIVES
Where feasible, use subbase and base construction of permanent drives and paving as
temporary paved construction areas ; and delay installation of finish paving courses until
possibility of damage from construction operations has been minimized. Otherwise,
01500-1
1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
PROPOSED INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA
IRC PROJECT NO. 0710
PROJECT NO. PSL1825-1
APRIL 2007
z
i
Pre ared for
Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Attn: Mr. Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25"' Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
t
Prepared b
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
590 N. W. Mercantile Place
Port St. Lucie, Florida 34986
Phone : (772) 924.3575 t
Fax : (772) 924-3580 i
F
Id
t
4
}
t
1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
PROPOSED INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA
IRC PROJECT NO. 0710
PROJECT NO. PSL1825-1
APRIL 2007
z
i
Pre ared for
Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Attn: Mr. Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25"' Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
t
Prepared b
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
590 N. W. Mercantile Place
Port St. Lucie, Florida 34986
Phone : (772) 924.3575 t
Fax : (772) 924-3580 i
F
Id
t
4
}
t
_ A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LuaE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772) 924-3580 FAX
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25 `h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re : Geotechnical Exploration
Proposed Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825- 1
Ladies and Gentlemen :
A. M. Engineering and. Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical exploration report for
E
the referenced project . These services were performed in general accordance with our proposal
dated March 8 , 2007 , and your authorization to proceed. After a brief executive summary, this
letter presents our understanding of the project, a description of the explorations, a summary of
the site and subsurface conditions, and our conclusions and recommendations for the foundations
and pavements of the proposed construction .
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Portions of the southwest quadrant of the site were not accessible due to dense vegetation .
Additional borings should be performed when the site has been cleared to verify the uniformity
of the soil conditions in the previously unexplored area.
Based on the available data from the borings the soils at the project site are generally suitable for
supporting the proposed structures on conventional shallow foundations proportioned using a
maximum bearing capacity of 2 ,500 psf.
The project site requires standard site preparation including clearing, proof-rolling and surface
compaction prior to constructing the foundation pads. As much as 2 feet of soils with significant
amounts of organics will need to be stripped in some areas of the site. The foundation pads
should consist of compacted lifts of suitable soil . The soil density should be tested before placing
steel for the foundation.
Additional details are provided in the body of the report.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 % acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31 S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by 1
77`h Street.
1
t
3
_ A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LuaE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772) 924-3580 FAX
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25 `h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re : Geotechnical Exploration
Proposed Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825- 1
Ladies and Gentlemen :
A. M. Engineering and. Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical exploration report for
E
the referenced project . These services were performed in general accordance with our proposal
dated March 8 , 2007 , and your authorization to proceed. After a brief executive summary, this
letter presents our understanding of the project, a description of the explorations, a summary of
the site and subsurface conditions, and our conclusions and recommendations for the foundations
and pavements of the proposed construction .
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Portions of the southwest quadrant of the site were not accessible due to dense vegetation .
Additional borings should be performed when the site has been cleared to verify the uniformity
of the soil conditions in the previously unexplored area.
Based on the available data from the borings the soils at the project site are generally suitable for
supporting the proposed structures on conventional shallow foundations proportioned using a
maximum bearing capacity of 2 ,500 psf.
The project site requires standard site preparation including clearing, proof-rolling and surface
compaction prior to constructing the foundation pads. As much as 2 feet of soils with significant
amounts of organics will need to be stripped in some areas of the site. The foundation pads
should consist of compacted lifts of suitable soil . The soil density should be tested before placing
steel for the foundation.
Additional details are provided in the body of the report.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 % acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31 S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by 1
77`h Street.
1
t
3
provide not less than compacted subgrade of satisfactory soil material . Remove
temporary paving when no longer needed.
2 . 05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Provide necessary connections, piping, valves, meters, and hoses from the distribution
points to points on the site where water and electrical power are necessary to carry on the
work. Upon completion of the work, remove all temporary utilities.
2 .06 HOISTING. GENERAL
Provide cranes, hoists, and similar temporary construction facilities as needed to
adequately perform the work. Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and governing
regulations for installation, operation and removal .
2 . 07 MISCELLANEOUS FACILITIES
Provide miscellaneous facilities as needed, including temporary stairs , ramps, ladders ,
runways staging, shoring, scaffolding, railings, dust controls, bracings, barriers closures,
platforms, temporary partitions , waste chutes, storage shed , and similar items .
2 ,08 TEMPORARY TOILETS {
Where permitted by governing regulations, provide single-occupant, self-contained units
of either chemical aerated recirculation type of combustion type; glass fiber reinforced
polyester enclosure ; equipped with both urinal and stool fixtures. Supply units with
tissue and, where not located nearby, separate wash facilities, supply with wet-type hand
towels and waste containers. Locate units so that personnel will travel no more than 200',
including distance horizontally, to reach a unit.
2 .09 LOCKUP AND SECURITY
As construction of building structure or shell progress and it becomes feasible to secure
project against intrusion, provide temporary security enclosure, doors and locks as
necessary to prevent unauthorized entrance . Deliver, store and lockup materials and
equipment in a manner which will prevent theft and vandalism.
2 . 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Review exposure to possible environmental problems , with Architect. Establish
procedures and discipline among tradesmen and provide needed facilities which will
protect against environmental problems (pollution of air, water and soil , excessive noise,
and similar problems) .
01500 -2 ��
_ A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LuaE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772) 924-3580 FAX
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25 `h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re : Geotechnical Exploration
Proposed Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825- 1
Ladies and Gentlemen :
A. M. Engineering and. Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical exploration report for
E
the referenced project . These services were performed in general accordance with our proposal
dated March 8 , 2007 , and your authorization to proceed. After a brief executive summary, this
letter presents our understanding of the project, a description of the explorations, a summary of
the site and subsurface conditions, and our conclusions and recommendations for the foundations
and pavements of the proposed construction .
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Portions of the southwest quadrant of the site were not accessible due to dense vegetation .
Additional borings should be performed when the site has been cleared to verify the uniformity
of the soil conditions in the previously unexplored area.
Based on the available data from the borings the soils at the project site are generally suitable for
supporting the proposed structures on conventional shallow foundations proportioned using a
maximum bearing capacity of 2 ,500 psf.
The project site requires standard site preparation including clearing, proof-rolling and surface
compaction prior to constructing the foundation pads. As much as 2 feet of soils with significant
amounts of organics will need to be stripped in some areas of the site. The foundation pads
should consist of compacted lifts of suitable soil . The soil density should be tested before placing
steel for the foundation.
Additional details are provided in the body of the report.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 % acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31 S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by 1
77`h Street.
1
t
3
i
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - 1
The proposed construction consists of three single story CBS buildings with associated parking f
areas and a stormwater management area. The buildings range in size from 1 ,750 square feet to
3 ,600 square feet. A future 3 ,600 square foot addition is planned on the east side of the 3 ,600
square foot office building . Also a 2 ,400 square foot pole bam is proposed in the northeast
corner near the stormwater management pond. Monolithic foundation systems are planned for
the buildings . We have not received any information regarding loading for the structures. We
estimate that the maximum column and wall loads will be 40 kips and 3 kips per linear foot,
respectively. We estimate that 1 to 2 feet of fill will be required to raise the current grade of the
site in the construction area to final design grade for the access drives and the foundation pad.
If the actual loads are substantially larger than those estimated or the amount of fill is less, A. M .
Engineering should be advised promptly so that we can review our recommendations and revise
them if necessary.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 11 , 2007 , with four (4) Cone
Penetrometer (CPT) soundings and fifteen ( 15 ) Auger (AB) borings . Hand Cone Penetrometer
(HCP) readings were taken at one-foot intervals in boring AB - 11 in the southwest corner of the
proposed future office addition. The CPT soundings were performed in general compliance with
ASTM D 3441 , "Deep Quasi-Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soils", and the
auger borings with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger
Borings" . The HCP test, in conjunction with information about the soil type , is empirically
correlated to the relative density of subsurface soils .
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan. Access to
portions of the southwest corner of the site was limited due to heavy vegetation. The borings
were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to distinguishable
landmarks. GPS coordinates obtained at each CPT location are included on the logs . The depths
on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the time the borings were completed.
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
We reviewed the USGS 7 .5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach. The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD. The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site, the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral ` G ' Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area, _
Florida, issued by the U .S . Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
2
2 . 11 TEMPORARY WATER
The Contractor and his Subcontractors shall utilize a temporary water service as required
for construction. The Contractor shall request, apply for, and pay the connection fee. The
Contractor shall incur the meter cost and all monthly water usage costs, payable to the
Utility Company having jurisdiction over the site. The Contractor shall utilized the water
for construction and to sustain any specified landscaping.
2 . 12 JOB SITE PHONE AND FIELD OFFICE
The Centracter will be required to engage the local telephone company to install and
maintain a jobsite telephone and fax machine. In lieu of a jobsite telephone, a cell phone
with voice mail capability for the job superintendent is acceptable. The Contractor shall
provide the phone number to the Owner and the Architect. Unless stipulated otherwise, a
job site Field Office is required for all projects.
2 . 13 TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
The Contractor will be required to erect temporary galvanized chain link fencing, posts
and gates to secure the construction and mobilization areas. Refer to the plans for
suggested location of temporary fencing. The Contractor shall be responsible for
reviewing the proposed location of the fencing with the Architect or Owner prior to
erecting the fence. Minimum fence and gate height shall be 6 feet. Tops of galvanized
fencing shall have turned down safety edges. Gates shall be locked at the end of the days
construction . All locks shall be supplied by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15 - Mechanical, and
Division 16 - Electrical .
B . Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service and modify and extend
systems as work progress requires.
i
01500-3
i
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - 1
The proposed construction consists of three single story CBS buildings with associated parking f
areas and a stormwater management area. The buildings range in size from 1 ,750 square feet to
3 ,600 square feet. A future 3 ,600 square foot addition is planned on the east side of the 3 ,600
square foot office building . Also a 2 ,400 square foot pole bam is proposed in the northeast
corner near the stormwater management pond. Monolithic foundation systems are planned for
the buildings . We have not received any information regarding loading for the structures. We
estimate that the maximum column and wall loads will be 40 kips and 3 kips per linear foot,
respectively. We estimate that 1 to 2 feet of fill will be required to raise the current grade of the
site in the construction area to final design grade for the access drives and the foundation pad.
If the actual loads are substantially larger than those estimated or the amount of fill is less, A. M .
Engineering should be advised promptly so that we can review our recommendations and revise
them if necessary.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 11 , 2007 , with four (4) Cone
Penetrometer (CPT) soundings and fifteen ( 15 ) Auger (AB) borings . Hand Cone Penetrometer
(HCP) readings were taken at one-foot intervals in boring AB - 11 in the southwest corner of the
proposed future office addition. The CPT soundings were performed in general compliance with
ASTM D 3441 , "Deep Quasi-Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soils", and the
auger borings with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger
Borings" . The HCP test, in conjunction with information about the soil type , is empirically
correlated to the relative density of subsurface soils .
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan. Access to
portions of the southwest corner of the site was limited due to heavy vegetation. The borings
were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to distinguishable
landmarks. GPS coordinates obtained at each CPT location are included on the logs . The depths
on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the time the borings were completed.
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
We reviewed the USGS 7 .5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach. The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD. The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site, the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral ` G ' Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area, _
Florida, issued by the U .S . Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
2
i
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - 1
The proposed construction consists of three single story CBS buildings with associated parking f
areas and a stormwater management area. The buildings range in size from 1 ,750 square feet to
3 ,600 square feet. A future 3 ,600 square foot addition is planned on the east side of the 3 ,600
square foot office building . Also a 2 ,400 square foot pole bam is proposed in the northeast
corner near the stormwater management pond. Monolithic foundation systems are planned for
the buildings . We have not received any information regarding loading for the structures. We
estimate that the maximum column and wall loads will be 40 kips and 3 kips per linear foot,
respectively. We estimate that 1 to 2 feet of fill will be required to raise the current grade of the
site in the construction area to final design grade for the access drives and the foundation pad.
If the actual loads are substantially larger than those estimated or the amount of fill is less, A. M .
Engineering should be advised promptly so that we can review our recommendations and revise
them if necessary.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 11 , 2007 , with four (4) Cone
Penetrometer (CPT) soundings and fifteen ( 15 ) Auger (AB) borings . Hand Cone Penetrometer
(HCP) readings were taken at one-foot intervals in boring AB - 11 in the southwest corner of the
proposed future office addition. The CPT soundings were performed in general compliance with
ASTM D 3441 , "Deep Quasi-Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soils", and the
auger borings with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger
Borings" . The HCP test, in conjunction with information about the soil type , is empirically
correlated to the relative density of subsurface soils .
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan. Access to
portions of the southwest corner of the site was limited due to heavy vegetation. The borings
were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to distinguishable
landmarks. GPS coordinates obtained at each CPT location are included on the logs . The depths
on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the time the borings were completed.
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
We reviewed the USGS 7 .5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach. The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD. The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site, the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral ` G ' Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area, _
Florida, issued by the U .S . Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
2
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Eoration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC rojectxplNo- 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
The CPT soundings and the HCP readings in A13 - 11 indicated uniform soil conditions below the
Proposed structures. A summary of the data from the CPT soundings is presented in Table 1 .
TABLE 1 : SUMMARY OF CPT DATA
M- t
RLooseto
ion
0 - 2to loose
2 - 4m
4 - 8to loose
ium dense
m
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The foundation recommendations presented in this section arecontingent on the proper
;.
pr- of-the _site. a& contingent
Preparation_Recommendations is
section of this
report, and on the maximum foundation loads stated in the Project Information section is
this report. of
After the project site has been prepared per the recommendation of this report, the proposed
structures can be supported on conventional shallow spread footings or thickened edge
monolithic slabs . The footings can be proportioned using a maximum net soil bearing pressure of
2 ,500 pounds per square foot (psf) . Although computed footing dimensions may be less, we
recommend minimum widths of 16 inches for strip footings and 24 inches for square footings. Y
The bottom of the footings should bear at least one foot below the adjacent exterior grade.
After the footings have been excavated, a representative of A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
should evaluate the bottom of the footings with respect to the boring data and assess if a suitable
bearing layer is present. Our representative should perform density tests to confirm that the
density of the upper foot of soil in the bottom of the footings is at least 95 percent of the
modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). If the soil in the bottom of the footings €
is loosened during excavation or`'if the footings are over-excavated and then backfilled to design
grade, the footing subgrade should be compacted with a vibratory plate compactor until the
required density is attained.
t
For the loads indicated in the Project Information section, we anticipate that the total settlement
will be less than 1 inch, and the differential settlement between adjacent similarly loaded
footings will be on the order of %: inch . Because of the granular nature of the subsurface soils ,
the majority of the settlement due to the dead loads should occur during construction ; post-
construction settlement should be minimal .
l
4 j
}
I
a
E
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Eoration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC rojectxplNo- 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
The CPT soundings and the HCP readings in A13 - 11 indicated uniform soil conditions below the
Proposed structures. A summary of the data from the CPT soundings is presented in Table 1 .
TABLE 1 : SUMMARY OF CPT DATA
M- t
RLooseto
ion
0 - 2to loose
2 - 4m
4 - 8to loose
ium dense
m
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The foundation recommendations presented in this section arecontingent on the proper
;.
pr- of-the _site. a& contingent
Preparation_Recommendations is
section of this
report, and on the maximum foundation loads stated in the Project Information section is
this report. of
After the project site has been prepared per the recommendation of this report, the proposed
structures can be supported on conventional shallow spread footings or thickened edge
monolithic slabs . The footings can be proportioned using a maximum net soil bearing pressure of
2 ,500 pounds per square foot (psf) . Although computed footing dimensions may be less, we
recommend minimum widths of 16 inches for strip footings and 24 inches for square footings. Y
The bottom of the footings should bear at least one foot below the adjacent exterior grade.
After the footings have been excavated, a representative of A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
should evaluate the bottom of the footings with respect to the boring data and assess if a suitable
bearing layer is present. Our representative should perform density tests to confirm that the
density of the upper foot of soil in the bottom of the footings is at least 95 percent of the
modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). If the soil in the bottom of the footings €
is loosened during excavation or`'if the footings are over-excavated and then backfilled to design
grade, the footing subgrade should be compacted with a vibratory plate compactor until the
required density is attained.
t
For the loads indicated in the Project Information section, we anticipate that the total settlement
will be less than 1 inch, and the differential settlement between adjacent similarly loaded
footings will be on the order of %: inch . Because of the granular nature of the subsurface soils ,
the majority of the settlement due to the dead loads should occur during construction ; post-
construction settlement should be minimal .
l
4 j
}
I
a
E
3 . 02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no
longer required and leave the site in a clean condition.
B . Clear. and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
01500-4
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Eoration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC rojectxplNo- 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
The CPT soundings and the HCP readings in A13 - 11 indicated uniform soil conditions below the
Proposed structures. A summary of the data from the CPT soundings is presented in Table 1 .
TABLE 1 : SUMMARY OF CPT DATA
M- t
RLooseto
ion
0 - 2to loose
2 - 4m
4 - 8to loose
ium dense
m
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The foundation recommendations presented in this section arecontingent on the proper
;.
pr- of-the _site. a& contingent
Preparation_Recommendations is
section of this
report, and on the maximum foundation loads stated in the Project Information section is
this report. of
After the project site has been prepared per the recommendation of this report, the proposed
structures can be supported on conventional shallow spread footings or thickened edge
monolithic slabs . The footings can be proportioned using a maximum net soil bearing pressure of
2 ,500 pounds per square foot (psf) . Although computed footing dimensions may be less, we
recommend minimum widths of 16 inches for strip footings and 24 inches for square footings. Y
The bottom of the footings should bear at least one foot below the adjacent exterior grade.
After the footings have been excavated, a representative of A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
should evaluate the bottom of the footings with respect to the boring data and assess if a suitable
bearing layer is present. Our representative should perform density tests to confirm that the
density of the upper foot of soil in the bottom of the footings is at least 95 percent of the
modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). If the soil in the bottom of the footings €
is loosened during excavation or`'if the footings are over-excavated and then backfilled to design
grade, the footing subgrade should be compacted with a vibratory plate compactor until the
required density is attained.
t
For the loads indicated in the Project Information section, we anticipate that the total settlement
will be less than 1 inch, and the differential settlement between adjacent similarly loaded
footings will be on the order of %: inch . Because of the granular nature of the subsurface soils ,
the majority of the settlement due to the dead loads should occur during construction ; post-
construction settlement should be minimal .
l
4 j
}
I
a
E
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. -
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 - 1
Floor Slabs
A conventional slab-on- grade can be used for the ground floor of the structures . The upper one
foot of subgrade below the floor slabs should be compacted to 98 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) prior to placement of the concrete. An estimated modulus
of subgrade reaction of 200 pounds per cubic inch (pci) can be used for design of the slab-on-
grade. The floor slabs should have a minimum thickness of four inches.
Control joints should also be incorporated in the slabs at intervals (in feet) of two to three times
the thickness of the slab (in inches) to control shrinkage cracks . The joints should be sawn as
soon as the slabs can support loads, but not so soon as to cause raveling of the concrete surface
and aggregate during sawing. Typically the cuts need to be made within two to eight hours
after placement of the concrete (before shrinkage cracks can begin). The minimum saw-cut
depths should be one quarter of the slab thickness.
A moisture barrier is recommended beneath the floor slabs to prevent moisture migration from
the underlying soil resulting indampnessof the slab.
SITE PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS
i
Stripping, Proof-rolling and Proof-compaction
The construction area should be stripped of all surface vegetation, top soil , trees, roots, debris
and other deleterious matter within and at least five feet beyond the perimeter of the proposed
buildings and in all paved areas . Any areas to receive fill should be likewise stripped. The depth
of the stripping will vary from 6 to 24 inches across the site. A 2 foot thick layer of sand with
surface organics and organic.silt was encountered in borings AB-7 , AB-8 and AB- 11 .
The cleared areas should then be proof-rolled and compacted with a 15-ton (minimum) vibratory
roller operating at a "slow walk" speed. The vibratory compactor should make at least eight
overlapping passes over the entire cleared area, four passes in one direction and four more at a
right angle to the first four passes. Proof-rolling helps to detect any soft or loose zones and
buried debris. If unstable areas are encountered, the project engineer or the geotechnical
consultant should be advised, the matter investigated and the problem resolved. Because the
initial proof-rolling is very critical, we recommend that a representative of A. M.
Engineering and Testing, Inc. monitor the operation.
{
After proof-rolling, the cleared areas should be compacted until the upper 2 feet of soil achieve a
density of at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) . A
representative of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. should check the compaction with field
density tests prior to placing any fill
5
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 GENERAL
The provisions of this section apply primarily to closeout of actual physical work, not to
administrative matters such as final payment and changeover of insurance. Specific
requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section.
1 . 02 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A . Record Drawings : Maintain a complete set of blue/blackline prints of contract
drawings and shop drawings for record mark-up purposes throughout the Contract
Time. Mark-up drawings during the course of the work to show changes and actual
installation conditions, sufficient to form a complete record for Owner' s purposes .
Give particular attention to work for Owner ' s purposes . Give particular attention to
work which will be concealed and difficult to measure and record at a later date,
particularly work which may require servicing or replacement during the life of the
project. Request subcontractors and mechanics marking the prints to sign and date
each mark-up. Bind prints into manageable sets, with durable paper covers,
appropriately labeled. Record drawings to be available at time of landscaping.
B . Operation and Maintenance Manuals : Provide (4) four 3-ring vinyl-covered
binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed .
Include operating and maintenance instructions ; extended to cover emergencies,
spare parts, warranties, inspection, procedures, diagrams, safety, security, and
similar appropriate data for each system or equipment item. Provide names and
phone numbers of all subcontractors and suppliers as a cover sheet in each binder.
1 .03 OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
Require each installer of systems requiring continued operation/maintenance by Owner' s
operating personnel , to provide on location instruction to Owner' s personnel, sufficient to
ensure safe, secure, efficient, non-failing utilization and operation of systems. Provide
instructions for the following categories of work:
Mechanical, electrical and electronic systems (not limited to work of Divisions 15
and 16) . Live plant materials, lawns and irrigation systems well, pump, potable
water treatment systems, fire sprinklers, security system, and fire alarm control
system .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 FINAL CLEANING
01700-1
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. -
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 - 1
Floor Slabs
A conventional slab-on- grade can be used for the ground floor of the structures . The upper one
foot of subgrade below the floor slabs should be compacted to 98 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) prior to placement of the concrete. An estimated modulus
of subgrade reaction of 200 pounds per cubic inch (pci) can be used for design of the slab-on-
grade. The floor slabs should have a minimum thickness of four inches.
Control joints should also be incorporated in the slabs at intervals (in feet) of two to three times
the thickness of the slab (in inches) to control shrinkage cracks . The joints should be sawn as
soon as the slabs can support loads, but not so soon as to cause raveling of the concrete surface
and aggregate during sawing. Typically the cuts need to be made within two to eight hours
after placement of the concrete (before shrinkage cracks can begin). The minimum saw-cut
depths should be one quarter of the slab thickness.
A moisture barrier is recommended beneath the floor slabs to prevent moisture migration from
the underlying soil resulting indampnessof the slab.
SITE PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS
i
Stripping, Proof-rolling and Proof-compaction
The construction area should be stripped of all surface vegetation, top soil , trees, roots, debris
and other deleterious matter within and at least five feet beyond the perimeter of the proposed
buildings and in all paved areas . Any areas to receive fill should be likewise stripped. The depth
of the stripping will vary from 6 to 24 inches across the site. A 2 foot thick layer of sand with
surface organics and organic.silt was encountered in borings AB-7 , AB-8 and AB- 11 .
The cleared areas should then be proof-rolled and compacted with a 15-ton (minimum) vibratory
roller operating at a "slow walk" speed. The vibratory compactor should make at least eight
overlapping passes over the entire cleared area, four passes in one direction and four more at a
right angle to the first four passes. Proof-rolling helps to detect any soft or loose zones and
buried debris. If unstable areas are encountered, the project engineer or the geotechnical
consultant should be advised, the matter investigated and the problem resolved. Because the
initial proof-rolling is very critical, we recommend that a representative of A. M.
Engineering and Testing, Inc. monitor the operation.
{
After proof-rolling, the cleared areas should be compacted until the upper 2 feet of soil achieve a
density of at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) . A
representative of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. should check the compaction with field
density tests prior to placing any fill
5
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. -
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 - 1
Floor Slabs
A conventional slab-on- grade can be used for the ground floor of the structures . The upper one
foot of subgrade below the floor slabs should be compacted to 98 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) prior to placement of the concrete. An estimated modulus
of subgrade reaction of 200 pounds per cubic inch (pci) can be used for design of the slab-on-
grade. The floor slabs should have a minimum thickness of four inches.
Control joints should also be incorporated in the slabs at intervals (in feet) of two to three times
the thickness of the slab (in inches) to control shrinkage cracks . The joints should be sawn as
soon as the slabs can support loads, but not so soon as to cause raveling of the concrete surface
and aggregate during sawing. Typically the cuts need to be made within two to eight hours
after placement of the concrete (before shrinkage cracks can begin). The minimum saw-cut
depths should be one quarter of the slab thickness.
A moisture barrier is recommended beneath the floor slabs to prevent moisture migration from
the underlying soil resulting indampnessof the slab.
SITE PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS
i
Stripping, Proof-rolling and Proof-compaction
The construction area should be stripped of all surface vegetation, top soil , trees, roots, debris
and other deleterious matter within and at least five feet beyond the perimeter of the proposed
buildings and in all paved areas . Any areas to receive fill should be likewise stripped. The depth
of the stripping will vary from 6 to 24 inches across the site. A 2 foot thick layer of sand with
surface organics and organic.silt was encountered in borings AB-7 , AB-8 and AB- 11 .
The cleared areas should then be proof-rolled and compacted with a 15-ton (minimum) vibratory
roller operating at a "slow walk" speed. The vibratory compactor should make at least eight
overlapping passes over the entire cleared area, four passes in one direction and four more at a
right angle to the first four passes. Proof-rolling helps to detect any soft or loose zones and
buried debris. If unstable areas are encountered, the project engineer or the geotechnical
consultant should be advised, the matter investigated and the problem resolved. Because the
initial proof-rolling is very critical, we recommend that a representative of A. M.
Engineering and Testing, Inc. monitor the operation.
{
After proof-rolling, the cleared areas should be compacted until the upper 2 feet of soil achieve a
density of at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) . A
representative of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. should check the compaction with field
density tests prior to placing any fill
5
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A . M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 - 1
i
Earthwork Recommendations
Fill should be "clean" sand with less than five percent fines (percent of dry weight passing a U. S .
x
No . 200 sieve). Higher fine contents can be used but more construction control is necessary . f
Backfill behind walls should be very pervious, with no more than three percent fines . Hand
operated equipment should be used when in close proximity to walls or other structures that
could be adversely affected by vibrations or heavy equipment.
t
Where fill is to be placed on the existing � und, the surface must be
previous section. The outer edges of the fill should extend uffic ently bey ndreparedsthe buildingsinch icatc' intto
provide slopes with a minimum horizontal to vertical ratio of4(H): 1 (V) from approximately five
feet outside the building perimeters to the existing grade. The fill should be placed in 12-inch
thick compacted lifts with each lift compacted to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). The compaction should be checked with field density
tests.
Fill that is -placed in confined areas such as utility trenches. or. holes should be compacted -in six
to eight inch thick lifts to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density
(ASTM D 1557).
Groundwater Control
Groundwater was encountered between depths of 3 '/4 and 6 feet during our explorations . We
estimate that the average wet season high water table will be strongly influenced by the adjacent
Lateral ` G ' Canal , and will be 1 to 2 feet above the canal level depending on the distance to the
canal . However, should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the
normally anticipated rainfall quantities, the groundwater levet may exceed our estimate of the
average wet season high groundwater level .
Some dewatering may be required for excavations that will extend to within 2 feet above the
groundwater table and for deep excavations such as sewer and utility trenches. Although the
actual dewatering methods should be determined by the contractor, the use of well points and
sump pumps in the excavation usually is adequate for most dewatering operations. We
recommend that the contract documents require an accurate determination of the ground water
level immediately prior to initiating any dewatering operation.
Positive drainage should be maintained at the site during construction and throughout the life of
the project.
6
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A . M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 - 1
i
Earthwork Recommendations
Fill should be "clean" sand with less than five percent fines (percent of dry weight passing a U. S .
x
No . 200 sieve). Higher fine contents can be used but more construction control is necessary . f
Backfill behind walls should be very pervious, with no more than three percent fines . Hand
operated equipment should be used when in close proximity to walls or other structures that
could be adversely affected by vibrations or heavy equipment.
t
Where fill is to be placed on the existing � und, the surface must be
previous section. The outer edges of the fill should extend uffic ently bey ndreparedsthe buildingsinch icatc' intto
provide slopes with a minimum horizontal to vertical ratio of4(H): 1 (V) from approximately five
feet outside the building perimeters to the existing grade. The fill should be placed in 12-inch
thick compacted lifts with each lift compacted to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). The compaction should be checked with field density
tests.
Fill that is -placed in confined areas such as utility trenches. or. holes should be compacted -in six
to eight inch thick lifts to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density
(ASTM D 1557).
Groundwater Control
Groundwater was encountered between depths of 3 '/4 and 6 feet during our explorations . We
estimate that the average wet season high water table will be strongly influenced by the adjacent
Lateral ` G ' Canal , and will be 1 to 2 feet above the canal level depending on the distance to the
canal . However, should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the
normally anticipated rainfall quantities, the groundwater levet may exceed our estimate of the
average wet season high groundwater level .
Some dewatering may be required for excavations that will extend to within 2 feet above the
groundwater table and for deep excavations such as sewer and utility trenches. Although the
actual dewatering methods should be determined by the contractor, the use of well points and
sump pumps in the excavation usually is adequate for most dewatering operations. We
recommend that the contract documents require an accurate determination of the ground water
level immediately prior to initiating any dewatering operation.
Positive drainage should be maintained at the site during construction and throughout the life of
the project.
6
At closeout time, clean or reclean entire work to normal level for "first class"
mainteriance/cleaning of building projects of a similar nature . Remove non-permanent \ J
protection and labels, polish glass, clean exposed finished, touch-up minor finish damage,
clean or replace filters of mechanical systems, remove debris and broom-clean non-
occupied spaces, sanitize plumbing facilities, clean light fixtures and replace burned-
out/dimmed lamps , sweep and wash paved areas, police yards and grounds to the property
line, and perform similar cleanup operations needed to produce a "clean" condition as
determined by Architect and Owner' s Representative.
3 . 02 PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A . Prerequisites : Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before
requesting the Architect' s inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for
substantial completion :
Complete installation of building and equipment to such level as the Owner could,
if necessary, occupy the facilities .
Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements ,
inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of
work, enabling Owner' s unrestricted occupancy and use.
Complete instruction of Owners operating personnel, and start-up of systems .
Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools .
B . Inspection Procedures : Upon completion of Contractor' s request for inspection the
Architect will either proceed with inspection or advice Contractor of prerequisites
not fulfilled . Following initial inspection, the Architect will either prepare
certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be
performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and
assured that work has been substantially completed . Results of completed
inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.
3 . 03 PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Upon receipt of Contractor ' s notice that work has been completed, including punch-list
items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because
of acceptable circumstances, the Architect will reinspect the work. Upon completion of
reinspection the Architect will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or
advise contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final
acceptance, if necessary, procedure will be repeated.
* * *END OF SECTION'''
01700-2
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A . M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 - 1
i
Earthwork Recommendations
Fill should be "clean" sand with less than five percent fines (percent of dry weight passing a U. S .
x
No . 200 sieve). Higher fine contents can be used but more construction control is necessary . f
Backfill behind walls should be very pervious, with no more than three percent fines . Hand
operated equipment should be used when in close proximity to walls or other structures that
could be adversely affected by vibrations or heavy equipment.
t
Where fill is to be placed on the existing � und, the surface must be
previous section. The outer edges of the fill should extend uffic ently bey ndreparedsthe buildingsinch icatc' intto
provide slopes with a minimum horizontal to vertical ratio of4(H): 1 (V) from approximately five
feet outside the building perimeters to the existing grade. The fill should be placed in 12-inch
thick compacted lifts with each lift compacted to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). The compaction should be checked with field density
tests.
Fill that is -placed in confined areas such as utility trenches. or. holes should be compacted -in six
to eight inch thick lifts to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density
(ASTM D 1557).
Groundwater Control
Groundwater was encountered between depths of 3 '/4 and 6 feet during our explorations . We
estimate that the average wet season high water table will be strongly influenced by the adjacent
Lateral ` G ' Canal , and will be 1 to 2 feet above the canal level depending on the distance to the
canal . However, should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the
normally anticipated rainfall quantities, the groundwater levet may exceed our estimate of the
average wet season high groundwater level .
Some dewatering may be required for excavations that will extend to within 2 feet above the
groundwater table and for deep excavations such as sewer and utility trenches. Although the
actual dewatering methods should be determined by the contractor, the use of well points and
sump pumps in the excavation usually is adequate for most dewatering operations. We
recommend that the contract documents require an accurate determination of the ground water
level immediately prior to initiating any dewatering operation.
Positive drainage should be maintained at the site during construction and throughout the life of
the project.
6
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - I
SUITABILITY OF FILL FROM PROPOSED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT POND
In general, the soils designated on the boring logs as "fine sand" or "fine sand, trace silt" dry
rapidly and compact easily, even under wet conditions. These soils perform well for building
foundations or roadway fill . The soils designated "fine sand, little silt" may need some drying
time, but are suitable as fill for buildings and roadways .
PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The soil conditions at the auger boring locations are adequate for a pavement section using
standard local materials . The pavement area should be prepared in accordance with the "Site
Preparation Recommendations" section of this report. We recommend that the proposed
pavement grades provide at least 18 inches of separation between the bottom of the base course
and the average wet season high water table. f
The pavement section should be designed for the anticipated vehicle loads and frequencies. The
stabilized subgrade should have a mirumum LBR value of 40, and should be compacted to at
least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The base
course should be FDOT approved limerock, crushed concrete or coquina, with a minimum LBR
value of 100 . The base course should be placed in lifts not to exceed six inches, and compacted
to at least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The
surface course should be FDOT Type S - 1 or S -3 asphaltic concrete, and should be compacted to
at least 95 percent of the maximum laboratory Marshall density .
ADDITIONAL EXPLORATIONS
Additional explorations should be completed in the areas that were previously inaccessible,
specifically the southwest comer of the office building and the paved areas to the west of the
building, to verify the uniformity of the subsurface conditions below the proposed construction . }
CLOSURE
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Public Works, Engineering
Division and the designers of the previously described project, and may only be applied to this
specific project. The right to rely on this report may not be assigned without written permission
of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida . No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made . We do not
guarantee performance in any respect, only that our work meets normal standards of professional
care. Our recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us , the results of
our field explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface
conditions that may exist between our borings and in unexplored areas of the site. The nature and
7
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The General Conditions of the Contract, including the General Requirements of Sections
01100 through 01820 shall be considered a part of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Work Included:
1 . Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of.
a. Drawings
b . Specifications
C , Addenda Issued by the Architect and Owner
d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract
e . Architect' s field orders or written instructions
f. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
g . Field test records and reports
B . Related Requirements :
1 . Section 01300 : Submittals
1 .03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES :
A. Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction.
B . File documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes .
C . Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect.
1 .04 RECORDING:
A. Label each document "Project Record" in neat large printed letters .
B . Provide one set of as-built mark-up plans to the Architect for electronic recording
of the final built project. Marks shall be in red ball-point pen . (No marker pens).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
01720-1
1
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - I
SUITABILITY OF FILL FROM PROPOSED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT POND
In general, the soils designated on the boring logs as "fine sand" or "fine sand, trace silt" dry
rapidly and compact easily, even under wet conditions. These soils perform well for building
foundations or roadway fill . The soils designated "fine sand, little silt" may need some drying
time, but are suitable as fill for buildings and roadways .
PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The soil conditions at the auger boring locations are adequate for a pavement section using
standard local materials . The pavement area should be prepared in accordance with the "Site
Preparation Recommendations" section of this report. We recommend that the proposed
pavement grades provide at least 18 inches of separation between the bottom of the base course
and the average wet season high water table. f
The pavement section should be designed for the anticipated vehicle loads and frequencies. The
stabilized subgrade should have a mirumum LBR value of 40, and should be compacted to at
least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The base
course should be FDOT approved limerock, crushed concrete or coquina, with a minimum LBR
value of 100 . The base course should be placed in lifts not to exceed six inches, and compacted
to at least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The
surface course should be FDOT Type S - 1 or S -3 asphaltic concrete, and should be compacted to
at least 95 percent of the maximum laboratory Marshall density .
ADDITIONAL EXPLORATIONS
Additional explorations should be completed in the areas that were previously inaccessible,
specifically the southwest comer of the office building and the paved areas to the west of the
building, to verify the uniformity of the subsurface conditions below the proposed construction . }
CLOSURE
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Public Works, Engineering
Division and the designers of the previously described project, and may only be applied to this
specific project. The right to rely on this report may not be assigned without written permission
of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida . No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made . We do not
guarantee performance in any respect, only that our work meets normal standards of professional
care. Our recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us , the results of
our field explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface
conditions that may exist between our borings and in unexplored areas of the site. The nature and
7
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - I
SUITABILITY OF FILL FROM PROPOSED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT POND
In general, the soils designated on the boring logs as "fine sand" or "fine sand, trace silt" dry
rapidly and compact easily, even under wet conditions. These soils perform well for building
foundations or roadway fill . The soils designated "fine sand, little silt" may need some drying
time, but are suitable as fill for buildings and roadways .
PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The soil conditions at the auger boring locations are adequate for a pavement section using
standard local materials . The pavement area should be prepared in accordance with the "Site
Preparation Recommendations" section of this report. We recommend that the proposed
pavement grades provide at least 18 inches of separation between the bottom of the base course
and the average wet season high water table. f
The pavement section should be designed for the anticipated vehicle loads and frequencies. The
stabilized subgrade should have a mirumum LBR value of 40, and should be compacted to at
least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The base
course should be FDOT approved limerock, crushed concrete or coquina, with a minimum LBR
value of 100 . The base course should be placed in lifts not to exceed six inches, and compacted
to at least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The
surface course should be FDOT Type S - 1 or S -3 asphaltic concrete, and should be compacted to
at least 95 percent of the maximum laboratory Marshall density .
ADDITIONAL EXPLORATIONS
Additional explorations should be completed in the areas that were previously inaccessible,
specifically the southwest comer of the office building and the paved areas to the west of the
building, to verify the uniformity of the subsurface conditions below the proposed construction . }
CLOSURE
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Public Works, Engineering
Division and the designers of the previously described project, and may only be applied to this
specific project. The right to rely on this report may not be assigned without written permission
of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida . No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made . We do not
guarantee performance in any respect, only that our work meets normal standards of professional
care. Our recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us , the results of
our field explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface
conditions that may exist between our borings and in unexplored areas of the site. The nature and
7
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
— Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complexe IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
extent of such variations may not become evident until further explorations are made or
conssuch
ions be
Engin ring and Ttion is esting, Inc .be requested ted to otbserve the actualdsite conditions end a d re-evaluate
alua e
our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns, including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included of "the scope of work. Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation wetland" areas. III
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
Of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information ,
please call us .
f
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. NEERING AND TESTING, INC.
f`40 —
ichael McCready, E. I . ✓� S, '
ebecca Gr t As
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engineer
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGAIMMhs]
k
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
CPT Sounding Logs (4)
Boring Logs ( 15)
f
E
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
IlSery
eroDatalIndion River County Public Works, Engineering Division Indian River County Parks Maimenence CompferURC ,RalectN . 0701) - PSLI8250orirsgsV
Yi
- Reportdoc
S
8
'r
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
— Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complexe IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
extent of such variations may not become evident until further explorations are made or
conssuch
ions be
Engin ring and Ttion is esting, Inc .be requested ted to otbserve the actualdsite conditions end a d re-evaluate
alua e
our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns, including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included of "the scope of work. Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation wetland" areas. III
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
Of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information ,
please call us .
f
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. NEERING AND TESTING, INC.
f`40 —
ichael McCready, E. I . ✓� S, '
ebecca Gr t As
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engineer
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGAIMMhs]
k
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
CPT Sounding Logs (4)
Boring Logs ( 15)
f
E
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
IlSery
eroDatalIndion River County Public Works, Engineering Division Indian River County Parks Maimenence CompferURC ,RalectN . 0701) - PSLI8250orirsgsV
Yi
- Reportdoc
S
8
'r
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
— Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complexe IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
extent of such variations may not become evident until further explorations are made or
conssuch
ions be
Engin ring and Ttion is esting, Inc .be requested ted to otbserve the actualdsite conditions end a d re-evaluate
alua e
our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns, including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included of "the scope of work. Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation wetland" areas. III
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
Of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information ,
please call us .
f
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. NEERING AND TESTING, INC.
f`40 —
ichael McCready, E. I . ✓� S, '
ebecca Gr t As
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engineer
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGAIMMhs]
k
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
CPT Sounding Logs (4)
Boring Logs ( 15)
f
E
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
IlSery
eroDatalIndion River County Public Works, Engineering Division Indian River County Parks Maimenence CompferURC ,RalectN . 0701) - PSLI8250orirsgsV
Yi
- Reportdoc
S
8
'r
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION {
L CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
Cate o Particle Diameter
Silt and Clay Less than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) [not visible to human
e
Sand Fine - 0.0029 inch to 0.017 inch (0.074 mm to 0-42 mm)
Medium — 0.017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2 . 0 mm)
Coarse — 0 . 079 inch to 0 . 19 inch 2.0 to 4 .75 nun
Gravel Fine — 0 . 19 inch to 0.75 inch
Coarse — 0. 75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components*
(Shell, Silt, etc. ) *
2% to 5°/n Trace 1 % to 2%
5% to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12% to 30% Some
4% to 8%
30% to 50% And Greater than 80A
* Approximations based on visual examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses ,
if available.
III . CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE, N ,
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE, 9
all
DS with little or no GRAVEL SILTS and CLAYS
CPT Cone
ot Relative HCP Blows / foot Consistency Resistance
Density Resistance * N C (tsf)
Ve loose 0 - 20 0 - 2 Ve soft 0 - 3
5 - 10Loose 21 - 35 3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 35 - 70+ 5 _ g Firm
21 - 30 Medium dense NA 9 — 15 Stiff 13 — 25
Dense NA 16 - 30 Ve stiff 25 - 50
0 Ve dense NA Over 30 Hard Over 50
Penetrometer (HCP) readings are empirically .
correlated and depend on Soil type.
DIVISION 2 , SITE WORK
j SECTION 02010 - SITE CONDITIONS & SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
As per the Subsurface Investigation and Engineering Report included in this specification
section and as prepared by the Owners ' s geotechnical testing company engineer. The reportis
titled Geotechnical Exploration for the Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex,
Indian River County Project No. 0710. A.M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825-2.
02010-1
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION {
L CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
Cate o Particle Diameter
Silt and Clay Less than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) [not visible to human
e
Sand Fine - 0.0029 inch to 0.017 inch (0.074 mm to 0-42 mm)
Medium — 0.017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2 . 0 mm)
Coarse — 0 . 079 inch to 0 . 19 inch 2.0 to 4 .75 nun
Gravel Fine — 0 . 19 inch to 0.75 inch
Coarse — 0. 75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components*
(Shell, Silt, etc. ) *
2% to 5°/n Trace 1 % to 2%
5% to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12% to 30% Some
4% to 8%
30% to 50% And Greater than 80A
* Approximations based on visual examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses ,
if available.
III . CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE, N ,
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE, 9
all
DS with little or no GRAVEL SILTS and CLAYS
CPT Cone
ot Relative HCP Blows / foot Consistency Resistance
Density Resistance * N C (tsf)
Ve loose 0 - 20 0 - 2 Ve soft 0 - 3
5 - 10Loose 21 - 35 3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 35 - 70+ 5 _ g Firm
21 - 30 Medium dense NA 9 — 15 Stiff 13 — 25
Dense NA 16 - 30 Ve stiff 25 - 50
0 Ve dense NA Over 30 Hard Over 50
Penetrometer (HCP) readings are empirically .
correlated and depend on Soil type.
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION {
L CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
Cate o Particle Diameter
Silt and Clay Less than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) [not visible to human
e
Sand Fine - 0.0029 inch to 0.017 inch (0.074 mm to 0-42 mm)
Medium — 0.017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2 . 0 mm)
Coarse — 0 . 079 inch to 0 . 19 inch 2.0 to 4 .75 nun
Gravel Fine — 0 . 19 inch to 0.75 inch
Coarse — 0. 75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components*
(Shell, Silt, etc. ) *
2% to 5°/n Trace 1 % to 2%
5% to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12% to 30% Some
4% to 8%
30% to 50% And Greater than 80A
* Approximations based on visual examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses ,
if available.
III . CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE, N ,
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE, 9
all
DS with little or no GRAVEL SILTS and CLAYS
CPT Cone
ot Relative HCP Blows / foot Consistency Resistance
Density Resistance * N C (tsf)
Ve loose 0 - 20 0 - 2 Ve soft 0 - 3
5 - 10Loose 21 - 35 3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 35 - 70+ 5 _ g Firm
21 - 30 Medium dense NA 9 — 15 Stiff 13 — 25
Dense NA 16 - 30 Ve stiff 25 - 50
0 Ve dense NA Over 30 Hard Over 50
Penetrometer (HCP) readings are empirically .
correlated and depend on Soil type.
I �
k ,Y SW-2
AB 5 AB 4 AB 3 � CPT 1
m
AB-8 AB-7 AB-6
O CPT-3 40
> * u
,x
SW— I
CPT-4
AB-10
WZ
r xle
MHWEEE IHOBATHCAO
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS DATE:
APRIL 11 , 2007
BORING LOCATION PLAN [ l�r,`U�"AC.JY PROTECT NO:
PSLISZS- 1
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATIONS A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex 590MW. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT S7. LUC[E, FLORIDA 34986
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA s
TEL: (772) 924_3575 FAX: (772) 924-3580 t
F
4
I �
k ,Y SW-2
AB 5 AB 4 AB 3 � CPT 1
m
AB-8 AB-7 AB-6
O CPT-3 40
> * u
,x
SW— I
CPT-4
AB-10
WZ
r xle
MHWEEE IHOBATHCAO
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS DATE:
APRIL 11 , 2007
BORING LOCATION PLAN [ l�r,`U�"AC.JY PROTECT NO:
PSLISZS- 1
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATIONS A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex 590MW. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT S7. LUC[E, FLORIDA 34986
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA s
TEL: (772) 924_3575 FAX: (772) 924-3580 t
F
4
I �
k ,Y SW-2
AB 5 AB 4 AB 3 � CPT 1
m
AB-8 AB-7 AB-6
O CPT-3 40
> * u
,x
SW— I
CPT-4
AB-10
WZ
r xle
MHWEEE IHOBATHCAO
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS DATE:
APRIL 11 , 2007
BORING LOCATION PLAN [ l�r,`U�"AC.JY PROTECT NO:
PSLISZS- 1
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATIONS A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex 590MW. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT S7. LUC[E, FLORIDA 34986
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA s
TEL: (772) 924_3575 FAX: (772) 924-3580 t
F
4
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N .W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711 -
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
1840 25th Street Project No . PSL1825
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 Lab No , 1
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Field Crew J . C.IA. R.
Indian River County, Florida Rig # PayStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 1 N27 .73494° W80 .44255°
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
g
P P+S qc FR Meters 0
3 6 19.8 0.2
14 23 28 3.8 0.4
26 34 52 3.3 0.6 1 T j
26 39 52 2.8 0 .8 IJ yli
34 45 68 1 .4 1
35 42 70 1 .3 1 .2
19 26 38 2 .4 1 .4 5 5
18 25 36 2.9 1 .6
19 27 38 2.8 1 .8
19 27 38 21 2 I p
' 16 22 32 2. 1 22
13 18 26 4 .6 2.4 - IIT
18 27 36 3.7 2-6
37 47 74 1 .8 2.8 ' 1 i -+- �I
65 75 130 1 .5 3 10 1 I��-L iTl% -I 10
5065. 100 2.0 3. 2 1 , �_(�_ ' -• - 7
65 80 130 1 .0 3.4
80 90 160 0. 8 3 .6 _ _ I i
1 _ ,-J i 1 1
50 60 100 1 .3 3.83 Ir i 1 ' 1-- -
30 40 60 2.2 4
15 25 30 3 .5 4.2
10 18 20 5. 3 4.41
12 20 24 4.4 4 .6 15 I j
12 20 24 4.4 4.8
12 20 24 6. 1 5 1 1
21 32 42 0IV.0 5 .2 f I Y L I �.
o
1 1 w
i
zo j- 20
1 I �
i1 �r
25 1 i 25 !�
IyI} I
.h
30
30
-
lil iI ii IF
r
I � I
35 i_t �_ 35
-- _ - -F-- i-
I I S I ! I 1 I I
1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES
PROPOSED INDIAN RIVER COUNTY
MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA
IRC PROJECT NO. 0710
PROJECT NO. PSL1825-1
APRIL 2007
z
i
Pre ared for
Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Attn: Mr. Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25"' Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
t
Prepared b
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
590 N. W. Mercantile Place
Port St. Lucie, Florida 34986
Phone : (772) 924.3575 t
Fax : (772) 924-3580 i
F
Id
t
4
}
t
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N .W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711 -
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
1840 25th Street Project No . PSL1825
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 Lab No , 1
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Field Crew J . C.IA. R.
Indian River County, Florida Rig # PayStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 1 N27 .73494° W80 .44255°
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
g
P P+S qc FR Meters 0
3 6 19.8 0.2
14 23 28 3.8 0.4
26 34 52 3.3 0.6 1 T j
26 39 52 2.8 0 .8 IJ yli
34 45 68 1 .4 1
35 42 70 1 .3 1 .2
19 26 38 2 .4 1 .4 5 5
18 25 36 2.9 1 .6
19 27 38 2.8 1 .8
19 27 38 21 2 I p
' 16 22 32 2. 1 22
13 18 26 4 .6 2.4 - IIT
18 27 36 3.7 2-6
37 47 74 1 .8 2.8 ' 1 i -+- �I
65 75 130 1 .5 3 10 1 I��-L iTl% -I 10
5065. 100 2.0 3. 2 1 , �_(�_ ' -• - 7
65 80 130 1 .0 3.4
80 90 160 0. 8 3 .6 _ _ I i
1 _ ,-J i 1 1
50 60 100 1 .3 3.83 Ir i 1 ' 1-- -
30 40 60 2.2 4
15 25 30 3 .5 4.2
10 18 20 5. 3 4.41
12 20 24 4.4 4 .6 15 I j
12 20 24 4.4 4.8
12 20 24 6. 1 5 1 1
21 32 42 0IV.0 5 .2 f I Y L I �.
o
1 1 w
i
zo j- 20
1 I �
i1 �r
25 1 i 25 !�
IyI} I
.h
30
30
-
lil iI ii IF
r
I � I
35 i_t �_ 35
-- _ - -F-- i-
I I S I ! I 1 I I
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N .W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711 -
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
1840 25th Street Project No . PSL1825
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 Lab No , 1
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Field Crew J . C.IA. R.
Indian River County, Florida Rig # PayStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 1 N27 .73494° W80 .44255°
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
g
P P+S qc FR Meters 0
3 6 19.8 0.2
14 23 28 3.8 0.4
26 34 52 3.3 0.6 1 T j
26 39 52 2.8 0 .8 IJ yli
34 45 68 1 .4 1
35 42 70 1 .3 1 .2
19 26 38 2 .4 1 .4 5 5
18 25 36 2.9 1 .6
19 27 38 2.8 1 .8
19 27 38 21 2 I p
' 16 22 32 2. 1 22
13 18 26 4 .6 2.4 - IIT
18 27 36 3.7 2-6
37 47 74 1 .8 2.8 ' 1 i -+- �I
65 75 130 1 .5 3 10 1 I��-L iTl% -I 10
5065. 100 2.0 3. 2 1 , �_(�_ ' -• - 7
65 80 130 1 .0 3.4
80 90 160 0. 8 3 .6 _ _ I i
1 _ ,-J i 1 1
50 60 100 1 .3 3.83 Ir i 1 ' 1-- -
30 40 60 2.2 4
15 25 30 3 .5 4.2
10 18 20 5. 3 4.41
12 20 24 4.4 4 .6 15 I j
12 20 24 4.4 4.8
12 20 24 6. 1 5 1 1
21 32 42 0IV.0 5 .2 f I Y L I �.
o
1 1 w
i
zo j- 20
1 I �
i1 �r
25 1 i 25 !�
IyI} I
.h
30
30
-
lil iI ii IF
r
I � I
35 i_t �_ 35
-- _ - -F-- i-
I I S I ! I 1 I I
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
PORT ST. LUCIE
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE , FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575
FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6267i.
STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL 1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No. 1
Indian River County, Florida
Field Crew J. C./A. R. I
Rig # PayStar i
Location CPT - 2 N27. 734930 W80. 44278' Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF I
Depth 0 50 100 Friction Ratio y
P P+S qc FR Meters 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
e
7 14 2.829 0.2 0 1 •' I I 0
7 10 14 4. 7 0.4 1
19 16 38 4.8 0.6 I -f P
16 27 32 4.5 3.8 0.8
21 32 42 3.5 1 -2
12 23 24 2.8 1 .4
12 17 24 3.9 1 ,6 5
8 15 16 5. 0 1 .8 5
7 13 14 3,8 2 i.
14 18 28 6. 1 2.2
28 41 56 3.3 2.4
38 52 76 2. 6 2.6
50 65 100 2.0 �
50 65 10 2.8
0 20 3 10
55 70 110 2.4 3.2 III iT� -j--
60 80 120 1 . 710
3.4
50 65 100 2.0
3.6 i l
35 50 70 2.6
26 40 52 2.5 4 -i---�-�-
1 20 30 40 4.0 4.2
�I
16 28 32 5.4 4 .4
12 25 24 7
26 40 52 . 7 4 .6 15 !.�
3 .8 4.8 I I l -II 15 -i-�
35 50 70 3.4 5 '-
32 50 64 0.0 5 .2
1
n I
v I
20
20 -j
I
25
j
25
1
71
jT
30 --I P.
-r-�
1 � 1 : I � I �� I � '• 1 � � I I� � � � i I
35iil �
35
_ j`
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
PORT ST. LUCIE
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE , FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575
FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6267i.
STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL 1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No. 1
Indian River County, Florida
Field Crew J. C./A. R. I
Rig # PayStar i
Location CPT - 2 N27. 734930 W80. 44278' Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF I
Depth 0 50 100 Friction Ratio y
P P+S qc FR Meters 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
e
7 14 2.829 0.2 0 1 •' I I 0
7 10 14 4. 7 0.4 1
19 16 38 4.8 0.6 I -f P
16 27 32 4.5 3.8 0.8
21 32 42 3.5 1 -2
12 23 24 2.8 1 .4
12 17 24 3.9 1 ,6 5
8 15 16 5. 0 1 .8 5
7 13 14 3,8 2 i.
14 18 28 6. 1 2.2
28 41 56 3.3 2.4
38 52 76 2. 6 2.6
50 65 100 2.0 �
50 65 10 2.8
0 20 3 10
55 70 110 2.4 3.2 III iT� -j--
60 80 120 1 . 710
3.4
50 65 100 2.0
3.6 i l
35 50 70 2.6
26 40 52 2.5 4 -i---�-�-
1 20 30 40 4.0 4.2
�I
16 28 32 5.4 4 .4
12 25 24 7
26 40 52 . 7 4 .6 15 !.�
3 .8 4.8 I I l -II 15 -i-�
35 50 70 3.4 5 '-
32 50 64 0.0 5 .2
1
n I
v I
20
20 -j
I
25
j
25
1
71
jT
30 --I P.
-r-�
1 � 1 : I � I �� I � '• 1 � � I I� � � � i I
35iil �
35
_ j`
� l
��
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
PORT ST. LUCIE
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE , FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575
FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6267i.
STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL 1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No. 1
Indian River County, Florida
Field Crew J. C./A. R. I
Rig # PayStar i
Location CPT - 2 N27. 734930 W80. 44278' Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF I
Depth 0 50 100 Friction Ratio y
P P+S qc FR Meters 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
e
7 14 2.829 0.2 0 1 •' I I 0
7 10 14 4. 7 0.4 1
19 16 38 4.8 0.6 I -f P
16 27 32 4.5 3.8 0.8
21 32 42 3.5 1 -2
12 23 24 2.8 1 .4
12 17 24 3.9 1 ,6 5
8 15 16 5. 0 1 .8 5
7 13 14 3,8 2 i.
14 18 28 6. 1 2.2
28 41 56 3.3 2.4
38 52 76 2. 6 2.6
50 65 100 2.0 �
50 65 10 2.8
0 20 3 10
55 70 110 2.4 3.2 III iT� -j--
60 80 120 1 . 710
3.4
50 65 100 2.0
3.6 i l
35 50 70 2.6
26 40 52 2.5 4 -i---�-�-
1 20 30 40 4.0 4.2
�I
16 28 32 5.4 4 .4
12 25 24 7
26 40 52 . 7 4 .6 15 !.�
3 .8 4.8 I I l -II 15 -i-�
35 50 70 3.4 5 '-
32 50 64 0.0 5 .2
1
n I
v I
20
20 -j
I
25
j
25
1
71
jT
30 --I P.
-r-�
1 � 1 : I � I �� I � '• 1 � � I I� � � � i I
35iil �
35
_ j`
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
project No . PSL1825
1840 25th Street Lab No. 1
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 R .
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Rig # Pa Field Crew J .C.IA../A.
Indian River County, Florida yStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 3 N27.73458" W80 .44290 °
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
B
Depth o 50 too 150 200 250 g 0 2 4 1 6
P P+S qc FR Meters 0 I I _
10 6.6 0.2
5 I
9 14 18 51 0.4 F11
18 25 36 4.8 0.6
21 34 42 2.5 0.8
19 27 38 6.6 1
21 40 42 6 .0 1 .2 -- 1-I 5 I I
30 49 60 3.3 1 .4 5
25 40 50 4 .2 1 .6 _ t
13 29 26 6.6 1 .8
12 25 24 6. 1 2
16 27 32 5.6 2.2 --
16 30 32 6.2 2-4
y
1 r
16 31 32 fi.2 2.6
25 40 50 4.0 2.8 - _ ' 10
35 50 70 2.8 3 10
35 50 70 1 .9 3.2 -I-
50 60 100 2.0 3-6
50 65 100 2 . 0 3.6
50 65 100 1 .3 3.8 ,
-�
50 60 100 2 .0 4 I 25 411 40 s0 2.6 4.2 ' !
19 29 38 2.4 4.4 111 , 1 I L _ 15
10 17 20 7 .3 4 .6 15
18 29 36 4 .8 4.8
22 35 44 4 .5 5 tr
26 41 52 0 .0 5.2 •>= t
t1
u I i
❑ -I
20 20
I
' I i
i
(
' I 1 TI i I t 25 -
25
:
:
30 I- �-i I I� '_f i----a .I�'�-r- 30
- ---- -
1
' i . l rl I� ! ! I j i I
-
!
35
I
' li III ' li ! i ! Iii ! 5
rr,
_ A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LuaE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772) 924-3580 FAX
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E .
1840 25 `h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re : Geotechnical Exploration
Proposed Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825- 1
Ladies and Gentlemen :
A. M. Engineering and. Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical exploration report for
E
the referenced project . These services were performed in general accordance with our proposal
dated March 8 , 2007 , and your authorization to proceed. After a brief executive summary, this
letter presents our understanding of the project, a description of the explorations, a summary of
the site and subsurface conditions, and our conclusions and recommendations for the foundations
and pavements of the proposed construction .
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Portions of the southwest quadrant of the site were not accessible due to dense vegetation .
Additional borings should be performed when the site has been cleared to verify the uniformity
of the soil conditions in the previously unexplored area.
Based on the available data from the borings the soils at the project site are generally suitable for
supporting the proposed structures on conventional shallow foundations proportioned using a
maximum bearing capacity of 2 ,500 psf.
The project site requires standard site preparation including clearing, proof-rolling and surface
compaction prior to constructing the foundation pads. As much as 2 feet of soils with significant
amounts of organics will need to be stripped in some areas of the site. The foundation pads
should consist of compacted lifts of suitable soil . The soil density should be tested before placing
steel for the foundation.
Additional details are provided in the body of the report.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 % acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31 S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by 1
77`h Street.
1
t
3
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
project No . PSL1825
1840 25th Street Lab No. 1
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 R .
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Rig # Pa Field Crew J .C.IA../A.
Indian River County, Florida yStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 3 N27.73458" W80 .44290 °
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
B
Depth o 50 too 150 200 250 g 0 2 4 1 6
P P+S qc FR Meters 0 I I _
10 6.6 0.2
5 I
9 14 18 51 0.4 F11
18 25 36 4.8 0.6
21 34 42 2.5 0.8
19 27 38 6.6 1
21 40 42 6 .0 1 .2 -- 1-I 5 I I
30 49 60 3.3 1 .4 5
25 40 50 4 .2 1 .6 _ t
13 29 26 6.6 1 .8
12 25 24 6. 1 2
16 27 32 5.6 2.2 --
16 30 32 6.2 2-4
y
1 r
16 31 32 fi.2 2.6
25 40 50 4.0 2.8 - _ ' 10
35 50 70 2.8 3 10
35 50 70 1 .9 3.2 -I-
50 60 100 2.0 3-6
50 65 100 2 . 0 3.6
50 65 100 1 .3 3.8 ,
-�
50 60 100 2 .0 4 I 25 411 40 s0 2.6 4.2 ' !
19 29 38 2.4 4.4 111 , 1 I L _ 15
10 17 20 7 .3 4 .6 15
18 29 36 4 .8 4.8
22 35 44 4 .5 5 tr
26 41 52 0 .0 5.2 •>= t
t1
u I i
❑ -I
20 20
I
' I i
i
(
' I 1 TI i I t 25 -
25
:
:
30 I- �-i I I� '_f i----a .I�'�-r- 30
- ---- -
1
' i . l rl I� ! ! I j i I
-
!
35
I
' li III ' li ! i ! Iii ! 5
rr,
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
project No . PSL1825
1840 25th Street Lab No. 1
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 R .
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Rig # Pa Field Crew J .C.IA../A.
Indian River County, Florida yStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 3 N27.73458" W80 .44290 °
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
B
Depth o 50 too 150 200 250 g 0 2 4 1 6
P P+S qc FR Meters 0 I I _
10 6.6 0.2
5 I
9 14 18 51 0.4 F11
18 25 36 4.8 0.6
21 34 42 2.5 0.8
19 27 38 6.6 1
21 40 42 6 .0 1 .2 -- 1-I 5 I I
30 49 60 3.3 1 .4 5
25 40 50 4 .2 1 .6 _ t
13 29 26 6.6 1 .8
12 25 24 6. 1 2
16 27 32 5.6 2.2 --
16 30 32 6.2 2-4
y
1 r
16 31 32 fi.2 2.6
25 40 50 4.0 2.8 - _ ' 10
35 50 70 2.8 3 10
35 50 70 1 .9 3.2 -I-
50 60 100 2.0 3-6
50 65 100 2 . 0 3.6
50 65 100 1 .3 3.8 ,
-�
50 60 100 2 .0 4 I 25 411 40 s0 2.6 4.2 ' !
19 29 38 2.4 4.4 111 , 1 I L _ 15
10 17 20 7 .3 4 .6 15
18 29 36 4 .8 4.8
22 35 44 4 .5 5 tr
26 41 52 0 .0 5.2 •>= t
t1
u I i
❑ -I
20 20
I
' I i
i
(
' I 1 TI i I t 25 -
25
:
:
30 I- �-i I I� '_f i----a .I�'�-r- 30
- ---- -
1
' i . l rl I� ! ! I j i I
-
!
35
I
' li III ' li ! i ! Iii ! 5
rr,
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO772
( ) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7771
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No . 1
Indian River County, Florida
Rig # ayStPaySt
p Field Crew r
ar
Location CPT - 4 N27 . 734380 W80.442670 Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
P P+ S qc FR Meters 0
7 14 5.657 0.2 1 0
s 11 10 11 . 9 0.4 I _
16 25 32 5.0 06 I
28 40 56 3.5 0.8
20 35 40 5.3 1
16 32 32 4. 1 12 l
15 25 30 4.4 1 .4 1 1 �-
20 30 40 5.0 1 .6 5 5
16 31 32 5.0 1 .8 - I I
10 22 20 5.9 2 j
7 16 14 8.5 - 2. 2
8 17 16 14 .0 2.4
23 40 46 4 .9 26 I --h-
23 4046 5.7 2.8 h-I i
30 50 60 3. 3 3 10 I I -
50 65 100 2 .6 3.2 T IIr-r-_f 10
I I , �1
50 70 100 2-6 3.4 l _. 1
50 70 100 2. 6 3.6 --
50 70 100 2-0 3.8 ( �- h I _ i- LI- - 1 .�
40 55 80 3.5 4
20 41 40 2.6 4.2 - - --
12 20 24
398.8 4.4 - - - ` I
55 78 25 4 .6 15
55 70 110 2.4 4.8 l I I ' r l I i I 15
60 80 120 2.2 5 -
60 80 120 0. 0 5.2 .r
t
20 l l� I � I '
20
I �-IF ' }
25 I -'+1 j
_ 25
l it }t
_ -
30 30
_ 35 - a_�
- .. . I � ' 35
Ili I
i
I
F
t
rr
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO772
( ) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7771
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No . 1
Indian River County, Florida
Rig # ayStPaySt
p Field Crew r
ar
Location CPT - 4 N27 . 734380 W80.442670 Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
P P+ S qc FR Meters 0
7 14 5.657 0.2 1 0
s 11 10 11 . 9 0.4 I _
16 25 32 5.0 06 I
28 40 56 3.5 0.8
20 35 40 5.3 1
16 32 32 4. 1 12 l
15 25 30 4.4 1 .4 1 1 �-
20 30 40 5.0 1 .6 5 5
16 31 32 5.0 1 .8 - I I
10 22 20 5.9 2 j
7 16 14 8.5 - 2. 2
8 17 16 14 .0 2.4
23 40 46 4 .9 26 I --h-
23 4046 5.7 2.8 h-I i
30 50 60 3. 3 3 10 I I -
50 65 100 2 .6 3.2 T IIr-r-_f 10
I I , �1
50 70 100 2-6 3.4 l _. 1
50 70 100 2. 6 3.6 --
50 70 100 2-0 3.8 ( �- h I _ i- LI- - 1 .�
40 55 80 3.5 4
20 41 40 2.6 4.2 - - --
12 20 24
398.8 4.4 - - - ` I
55 78 25 4 .6 15
55 70 110 2.4 4.8 l I I ' r l I i I 15
60 80 120 2.2 5 -
60 80 120 0. 0 5.2 .r
t
20 l l� I � I '
20
I �-IF ' }
25 I -'+1 j
_ 25
l it }t
_ -
30 30
_ 35 - a_�
- .. . I � ' 35
Ili I
i
I
F
t
rr
i
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - 1
The proposed construction consists of three single story CBS buildings with associated parking f
areas and a stormwater management area. The buildings range in size from 1 ,750 square feet to
3 ,600 square feet. A future 3 ,600 square foot addition is planned on the east side of the 3 ,600
square foot office building . Also a 2 ,400 square foot pole bam is proposed in the northeast
corner near the stormwater management pond. Monolithic foundation systems are planned for
the buildings . We have not received any information regarding loading for the structures. We
estimate that the maximum column and wall loads will be 40 kips and 3 kips per linear foot,
respectively. We estimate that 1 to 2 feet of fill will be required to raise the current grade of the
site in the construction area to final design grade for the access drives and the foundation pad.
If the actual loads are substantially larger than those estimated or the amount of fill is less, A. M .
Engineering should be advised promptly so that we can review our recommendations and revise
them if necessary.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 11 , 2007 , with four (4) Cone
Penetrometer (CPT) soundings and fifteen ( 15 ) Auger (AB) borings . Hand Cone Penetrometer
(HCP) readings were taken at one-foot intervals in boring AB - 11 in the southwest corner of the
proposed future office addition. The CPT soundings were performed in general compliance with
ASTM D 3441 , "Deep Quasi-Static, Cone and Friction-Cone Penetration Tests of Soils", and the
auger borings with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger
Borings" . The HCP test, in conjunction with information about the soil type , is empirically
correlated to the relative density of subsurface soils .
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan. Access to
portions of the southwest corner of the site was limited due to heavy vegetation. The borings
were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to distinguishable
landmarks. GPS coordinates obtained at each CPT location are included on the logs . The depths
on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the time the borings were completed.
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
We reviewed the USGS 7 .5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach. The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD. The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site, the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral ` G ' Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area, _
Florida, issued by the U .S . Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
2
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO772
( ) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7771
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No . 1
Indian River County, Florida
Rig # ayStPaySt
p Field Crew r
ar
Location CPT - 4 N27 . 734380 W80.442670 Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
P P+ S qc FR Meters 0
7 14 5.657 0.2 1 0
s 11 10 11 . 9 0.4 I _
16 25 32 5.0 06 I
28 40 56 3.5 0.8
20 35 40 5.3 1
16 32 32 4. 1 12 l
15 25 30 4.4 1 .4 1 1 �-
20 30 40 5.0 1 .6 5 5
16 31 32 5.0 1 .8 - I I
10 22 20 5.9 2 j
7 16 14 8.5 - 2. 2
8 17 16 14 .0 2.4
23 40 46 4 .9 26 I --h-
23 4046 5.7 2.8 h-I i
30 50 60 3. 3 3 10 I I -
50 65 100 2 .6 3.2 T IIr-r-_f 10
I I , �1
50 70 100 2-6 3.4 l _. 1
50 70 100 2. 6 3.6 --
50 70 100 2-0 3.8 ( �- h I _ i- LI- - 1 .�
40 55 80 3.5 4
20 41 40 2.6 4.2 - - --
12 20 24
398.8 4.4 - - - ` I
55 78 25 4 .6 15
55 70 110 2.4 4.8 l I I ' r l I i I 15
60 80 120 2.2 5 -
60 80 120 0. 0 5.2 .r
t
20 l l� I � I '
20
I �-IF ' }
25 I -'+1 j
_ 25
l it }t
_ -
30 30
_ 35 - a_�
- .. . I � ' 35
Ili I
i
I
F
t
rr
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N . W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580 l
-1
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10 , 2007 E
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician: S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 2 1
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 4 Light brown fine sand
4 - 6 Brown fine sand
Y
Water table at 4 '/4 feet below ffound.surface
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 4
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Grau fine sand
2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6 - 8 Brown fine sand, trace silt
Water table at 5 '/4 feet below 8round surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below Eound surface
IlServer-arnelrompanyUM Datallndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Compf" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSL18751Boringsll - AB @ CPT (1-7).doc
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Eoration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC rojectxplNo- 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
The CPT soundings and the HCP readings in A13 - 11 indicated uniform soil conditions below the
Proposed structures. A summary of the data from the CPT soundings is presented in Table 1 .
TABLE 1 : SUMMARY OF CPT DATA
M- t
RLooseto
ion
0 - 2to loose
2 - 4m
4 - 8to loose
ium dense
m
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The foundation recommendations presented in this section arecontingent on the proper
;.
pr- of-the _site. a& contingent
Preparation_Recommendations is
section of this
report, and on the maximum foundation loads stated in the Project Information section is
this report. of
After the project site has been prepared per the recommendation of this report, the proposed
structures can be supported on conventional shallow spread footings or thickened edge
monolithic slabs . The footings can be proportioned using a maximum net soil bearing pressure of
2 ,500 pounds per square foot (psf) . Although computed footing dimensions may be less, we
recommend minimum widths of 16 inches for strip footings and 24 inches for square footings. Y
The bottom of the footings should bear at least one foot below the adjacent exterior grade.
After the footings have been excavated, a representative of A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
should evaluate the bottom of the footings with respect to the boring data and assess if a suitable
bearing layer is present. Our representative should perform density tests to confirm that the
density of the upper foot of soil in the bottom of the footings is at least 95 percent of the
modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). If the soil in the bottom of the footings €
is loosened during excavation or`'if the footings are over-excavated and then backfilled to design
grade, the footing subgrade should be compacted with a vibratory plate compactor until the
required density is attained.
t
For the loads indicated in the Project Information section, we anticipate that the total settlement
will be less than 1 inch, and the differential settlement between adjacent similarly loaded
footings will be on the order of %: inch . Because of the granular nature of the subsurface soils ,
the majority of the settlement due to the dead loads should occur during construction ; post-
construction settlement should be minimal .
l
4 j
}
I
a
E
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N . W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580 l
-1
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10 , 2007 E
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician: S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 2 1
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 4 Light brown fine sand
4 - 6 Brown fine sand
Y
Water table at 4 '/4 feet below ffound.surface
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 4
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Grau fine sand
2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6 - 8 Brown fine sand, trace silt
Water table at 5 '/4 feet below 8round surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below Eound surface
IlServer-arnelrompanyUM Datallndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Compf" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSL18751Boringsll - AB @ CPT (1-7).doc
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N . W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580 l
-1
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10 , 2007 E
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician: S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 2 1
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 4 Light brown fine sand
4 - 6 Brown fine sand
Y
Water table at 4 '/4 feet below ffound.surface
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 4
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Grau fine sand
2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6 - 8 Brown fine sand, trace silt
Water table at 5 '/4 feet below 8round surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below Eound surface
IlServer-arnelrompanyUM Datallndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Compf" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSL18751Boringsll - AB @ CPT (1-7).doc
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No :
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 103 2007
Technician: S. Couboy
TEST LOCATION : AB - I N27. 73407a W80 .442390
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, :consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Brown fine sand, trace roots
I - 4I Li ht brown fine sand
4 2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li in brown fine sand
f
Water table at 5 feet below Eound surface !
TEST LOCATION : AB - 2 N27.734560 W80 .442450
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Brown fine sand, trace silt
t
f,
t
2
F
t
1
t
k
1
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION: AB - 3 N27.734960 W80.442640 i
feet
Depth p ( ) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
1 V2 4'/2 Li ht brown fine and
4 %2 - 5 '/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Brown to light brown fine sand
Water table at 3'/a feet below round surface
S
s
t
F. IAMDalaVndian River County Pubfic Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parke Maintenance Comples (IRCProject Na. 0701) - PSLI87511 - ABI-
( / O) doc t
a.
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No :
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 103 2007
Technician: S. Couboy
TEST LOCATION : AB - I N27. 73407a W80 .442390
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, :consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Brown fine sand, trace roots
I - 4I Li ht brown fine sand
4 2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li in brown fine sand
f
Water table at 5 feet below Eound surface !
TEST LOCATION : AB - 2 N27.734560 W80 .442450
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Brown fine sand, trace silt
t
f,
t
2
F
t
1
t
k
1
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION: AB - 3 N27.734960 W80.442640 i
feet
Depth p ( ) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
1 V2 4'/2 Li ht brown fine and
4 %2 - 5 '/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Brown to light brown fine sand
Water table at 3'/a feet below round surface
S
s
t
F. IAMDalaVndian River County Pubfic Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parke Maintenance Comples (IRCProject Na. 0701) - PSLI87511 - ABI-
( / O) doc t
a.
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. -
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No . 0710
A . M . Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 - 1
Floor Slabs
A conventional slab-on- grade can be used for the ground floor of the structures . The upper one
foot of subgrade below the floor slabs should be compacted to 98 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) prior to placement of the concrete. An estimated modulus
of subgrade reaction of 200 pounds per cubic inch (pci) can be used for design of the slab-on-
grade. The floor slabs should have a minimum thickness of four inches.
Control joints should also be incorporated in the slabs at intervals (in feet) of two to three times
the thickness of the slab (in inches) to control shrinkage cracks . The joints should be sawn as
soon as the slabs can support loads, but not so soon as to cause raveling of the concrete surface
and aggregate during sawing. Typically the cuts need to be made within two to eight hours
after placement of the concrete (before shrinkage cracks can begin). The minimum saw-cut
depths should be one quarter of the slab thickness.
A moisture barrier is recommended beneath the floor slabs to prevent moisture migration from
the underlying soil resulting indampnessof the slab.
SITE PREPARATION RECOMMENDATIONS
i
Stripping, Proof-rolling and Proof-compaction
The construction area should be stripped of all surface vegetation, top soil , trees, roots, debris
and other deleterious matter within and at least five feet beyond the perimeter of the proposed
buildings and in all paved areas . Any areas to receive fill should be likewise stripped. The depth
of the stripping will vary from 6 to 24 inches across the site. A 2 foot thick layer of sand with
surface organics and organic.silt was encountered in borings AB-7 , AB-8 and AB- 11 .
The cleared areas should then be proof-rolled and compacted with a 15-ton (minimum) vibratory
roller operating at a "slow walk" speed. The vibratory compactor should make at least eight
overlapping passes over the entire cleared area, four passes in one direction and four more at a
right angle to the first four passes. Proof-rolling helps to detect any soft or loose zones and
buried debris. If unstable areas are encountered, the project engineer or the geotechnical
consultant should be advised, the matter investigated and the problem resolved. Because the
initial proof-rolling is very critical, we recommend that a representative of A. M.
Engineering and Testing, Inc. monitor the operation.
{
After proof-rolling, the cleared areas should be compacted until the upper 2 feet of soil achieve a
density of at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557) . A
representative of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. should check the compaction with field
density tests prior to placing any fill
5
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No :
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 103 2007
Technician: S. Couboy
TEST LOCATION : AB - I N27. 73407a W80 .442390
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, :consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Brown fine sand, trace roots
I - 4I Li ht brown fine sand
4 2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li in brown fine sand
f
Water table at 5 feet below Eound surface !
TEST LOCATION : AB - 2 N27.734560 W80 .442450
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Brown fine sand, trace silt
t
f,
t
2
F
t
1
t
k
1
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION: AB - 3 N27.734960 W80.442640 i
feet
Depth p ( ) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
1 V2 4'/2 Li ht brown fine and
4 %2 - 5 '/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Brown to light brown fine sand
Water table at 3'/a feet below round surface
S
s
t
F. IAMDalaVndian River County Pubfic Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parke Maintenance Comples (IRCProject Na. 0701) - PSLI87511 - ABI-
( / O) doc t
a.
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. Lucm, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 t
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
t
ClienIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10, 2007
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician : S . Couboy 4
TEST LOCATION : AB - 4 MT734980 W80.442820
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Li ht brown fine sand
1 - 2 Ve light brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand
4 - 5 '/z Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
F
r
1
Water table at 4 '/a feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 5 N27 .734970 W80.443010 (
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) t
0 - 2 Brown fine sand
2 - 4 Brown to li ht brown fine sand
4 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand k
f
(
E
Water table at 6 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 6 N27 .734620 W80.442550
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1/2 Gra fine sand
yz 2 Very li ht brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand i
4 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt I
41/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6
i
Water table at 4 '/z feet below ground surface
F: UM DalaVndinn River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Complex (1RC Pr`jecl No. 0701) - PSLI825V - AR (1 -10).doc
n
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A . M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 - 1
i
Earthwork Recommendations
Fill should be "clean" sand with less than five percent fines (percent of dry weight passing a U. S .
x
No . 200 sieve). Higher fine contents can be used but more construction control is necessary . f
Backfill behind walls should be very pervious, with no more than three percent fines . Hand
operated equipment should be used when in close proximity to walls or other structures that
could be adversely affected by vibrations or heavy equipment.
t
Where fill is to be placed on the existing � und, the surface must be
previous section. The outer edges of the fill should extend uffic ently bey ndreparedsthe buildingsinch icatc' intto
provide slopes with a minimum horizontal to vertical ratio of4(H): 1 (V) from approximately five
feet outside the building perimeters to the existing grade. The fill should be placed in 12-inch
thick compacted lifts with each lift compacted to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor
maximum dry density (ASTM D 1557). The compaction should be checked with field density
tests.
Fill that is -placed in confined areas such as utility trenches. or. holes should be compacted -in six
to eight inch thick lifts to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density
(ASTM D 1557).
Groundwater Control
Groundwater was encountered between depths of 3 '/4 and 6 feet during our explorations . We
estimate that the average wet season high water table will be strongly influenced by the adjacent
Lateral ` G ' Canal , and will be 1 to 2 feet above the canal level depending on the distance to the
canal . However, should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the
normally anticipated rainfall quantities, the groundwater levet may exceed our estimate of the
average wet season high groundwater level .
Some dewatering may be required for excavations that will extend to within 2 feet above the
groundwater table and for deep excavations such as sewer and utility trenches. Although the
actual dewatering methods should be determined by the contractor, the use of well points and
sump pumps in the excavation usually is adequate for most dewatering operations. We
recommend that the contract documents require an accurate determination of the ground water
level immediately prior to initiating any dewatering operation.
Positive drainage should be maintained at the site during construction and throughout the life of
the project.
6
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. Lucm, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 t
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
t
ClienIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10, 2007
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician : S . Couboy 4
TEST LOCATION : AB - 4 MT734980 W80.442820
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Li ht brown fine sand
1 - 2 Ve light brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand
4 - 5 '/z Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
F
r
1
Water table at 4 '/a feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 5 N27 .734970 W80.443010 (
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) t
0 - 2 Brown fine sand
2 - 4 Brown to li ht brown fine sand
4 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand k
f
(
E
Water table at 6 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 6 N27 .734620 W80.442550
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1/2 Gra fine sand
yz 2 Very li ht brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand i
4 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt I
41/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6
i
Water table at 4 '/z feet below ground surface
F: UM DalaVndinn River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Complex (1RC Pr`jecl No. 0701) - PSLI825V - AR (1 -10).doc
n
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. Lucm, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 t
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
t
ClienIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10, 2007
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician : S . Couboy 4
TEST LOCATION : AB - 4 MT734980 W80.442820
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Li ht brown fine sand
1 - 2 Ve light brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand
4 - 5 '/z Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
F
r
1
Water table at 4 '/a feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 5 N27 .734970 W80.443010 (
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) t
0 - 2 Brown fine sand
2 - 4 Brown to li ht brown fine sand
4 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand k
f
(
E
Water table at 6 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 6 N27 .734620 W80.442550
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1/2 Gra fine sand
yz 2 Very li ht brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand i
4 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt I
41/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6
i
Water table at 4 '/z feet below ground surface
F: UM DalaVndinn River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Complex (1RC Pr`jecl No. 0701) - PSLI825V - AR (1 -10).doc
n
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, EngineeringDivision
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Project No : PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida Lab No : I
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date:
April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 7 N27-734570 W80.442320 l
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) 1
0 - 2 Dark brown fine sand, little silt, trace roots
2 - 4 Brown fine sand
4 - 5 Li h[ brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
)
i
Water table at 4V feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 8 N27. 734640 W80.443030
i Depth (feet) Description� p (color, texture, consistency, remarks) -
0 - 1 Gra fine sand
Li ht a fine sand
1 '/: - 2 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt, trace to little roots
2 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt, trace roots
4 %, - 5 %, Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
5 'h - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 9 N27. 734020 W80.442990
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 % Gray fine sand, little roots
1V2 - 2
Brown fine sand, trace roots
2 - 3 Brown fine sand
3 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, little silt
Water table at 5 %i feet below ground surface
I"Server-amelcompanylAM Data t1ndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County PSL182518oringsll - AB (1-10).doc Parks Maintenence
Comples (IRC Project No. 0701) -
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, EngineeringDivision
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Project No : PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida Lab No : I
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date:
April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 7 N27-734570 W80.442320 l
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) 1
0 - 2 Dark brown fine sand, little silt, trace roots
2 - 4 Brown fine sand
4 - 5 Li h[ brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
)
i
Water table at 4V feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 8 N27. 734640 W80.443030
i Depth (feet) Description� p (color, texture, consistency, remarks) -
0 - 1 Gra fine sand
Li ht a fine sand
1 '/: - 2 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt, trace to little roots
2 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt, trace roots
4 %, - 5 %, Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
5 'h - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 9 N27. 734020 W80.442990
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 % Gray fine sand, little roots
1V2 - 2
Brown fine sand, trace roots
2 - 3 Brown fine sand
3 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, little silt
Water table at 5 %i feet below ground surface
I"Server-amelcompanylAM Data t1ndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County PSL182518oringsll - AB (1-10).doc Parks Maintenence
Comples (IRC Project No. 0701) -
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC.
Geotechnical Exploration
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL1825 - I
SUITABILITY OF FILL FROM PROPOSED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT POND
In general, the soils designated on the boring logs as "fine sand" or "fine sand, trace silt" dry
rapidly and compact easily, even under wet conditions. These soils perform well for building
foundations or roadway fill . The soils designated "fine sand, little silt" may need some drying
time, but are suitable as fill for buildings and roadways .
PAVEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The soil conditions at the auger boring locations are adequate for a pavement section using
standard local materials . The pavement area should be prepared in accordance with the "Site
Preparation Recommendations" section of this report. We recommend that the proposed
pavement grades provide at least 18 inches of separation between the bottom of the base course
and the average wet season high water table. f
The pavement section should be designed for the anticipated vehicle loads and frequencies. The
stabilized subgrade should have a mirumum LBR value of 40, and should be compacted to at
least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The base
course should be FDOT approved limerock, crushed concrete or coquina, with a minimum LBR
value of 100 . The base course should be placed in lifts not to exceed six inches, and compacted
to at least 98 percent of the modified Proctor maximum dry density (AASHTO T- 180) . The
surface course should be FDOT Type S - 1 or S -3 asphaltic concrete, and should be compacted to
at least 95 percent of the maximum laboratory Marshall density .
ADDITIONAL EXPLORATIONS
Additional explorations should be completed in the areas that were previously inaccessible,
specifically the southwest comer of the office building and the paved areas to the west of the
building, to verify the uniformity of the subsurface conditions below the proposed construction . }
CLOSURE
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Public Works, Engineering
Division and the designers of the previously described project, and may only be applied to this
specific project. The right to rely on this report may not be assigned without written permission
of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida . No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made . We do not
guarantee performance in any respect, only that our work meets normal standards of professional
care. Our recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us , the results of
our field explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface
conditions that may exist between our borings and in unexplored areas of the site. The nature and
7
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, EngineeringDivision
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Project No : PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida Lab No : I
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date:
April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 7 N27-734570 W80.442320 l
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) 1
0 - 2 Dark brown fine sand, little silt, trace roots
2 - 4 Brown fine sand
4 - 5 Li h[ brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
)
i
Water table at 4V feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 8 N27. 734640 W80.443030
i Depth (feet) Description� p (color, texture, consistency, remarks) -
0 - 1 Gra fine sand
Li ht a fine sand
1 '/: - 2 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt, trace to little roots
2 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt, trace roots
4 %, - 5 %, Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
5 'h - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 9 N27. 734020 W80.442990
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 % Gray fine sand, little roots
1V2 - 2
Brown fine sand, trace roots
2 - 3 Brown fine sand
3 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, little silt
Water table at 5 %i feet below ground surface
I"Server-amelcompanylAM Data t1ndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County PSL182518oringsll - AB (1-10).doc Parks Maintenence
Comples (IRC Project No. 0701) -
A, M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N-W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Lab No: 1
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Test Date: April 10 , 2007
Indian River County, Florida
Technician : S. Conboy
Elevation : Existing Grade
TEST LOCATION : AB - 10 N27 .734030 W80.442770
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
i
0 - 1 % Li ht gray fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 Dark brown organically stained fine sand, little silt not cemented
2 - 41/2 Li ht brown fine sand
4'/x - 5 'h Brown fine sand
5 '/z - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
t
4
Water table at 53/4 feet be ' --- -
TEST
elow ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
4
i
J
Water table at feet below ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below ound surface
IIServer-a nelcompanyUM DafaVndian River Counry Public 'Works, Engineering Division - Indian River Counry Parks Mainrenence COMP'" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSLI825lRoringsW - All (1-10)-doc
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
— Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complexe IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825- 1
extent of such variations may not become evident until further explorations are made or
conssuch
ions be
Engin ring and Ttion is esting, Inc .be requested ted to otbserve the actualdsite conditions end a d re-evaluate
alua e
our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns, including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included of "the scope of work. Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation wetland" areas. III
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
Of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information ,
please call us .
f
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. NEERING AND TESTING, INC.
f`40 —
ichael McCready, E. I . ✓� S, '
ebecca Gr t As
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engineer
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGAIMMhs]
k
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
CPT Sounding Logs (4)
Boring Logs ( 15)
f
E
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
IlSery
eroDatalIndion River County Public Works, Engineering Division Indian River County Parks Maimenence CompferURC ,RalectN . 0701) - PSLI8250orirsgsV
Yi
- Reportdoc
S
8
'r
A, M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N-W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Lab No: 1
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Test Date: April 10 , 2007
Indian River County, Florida
Technician : S. Conboy
Elevation : Existing Grade
TEST LOCATION : AB - 10 N27 .734030 W80.442770
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
i
0 - 1 % Li ht gray fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 Dark brown organically stained fine sand, little silt not cemented
2 - 41/2 Li ht brown fine sand
4'/x - 5 'h Brown fine sand
5 '/z - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
t
4
Water table at 53/4 feet be ' --- -
TEST
elow ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
4
i
J
Water table at feet below ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below ound surface
IIServer-a nelcompanyUM DafaVndian River Counry Public 'Works, Engineering Division - Indian River Counry Parks Mainrenence COMP'" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSLI825lRoringsW - All (1-10)-doc
A, M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N-W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Lab No: 1
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Test Date: April 10 , 2007
Indian River County, Florida
Technician : S. Conboy
Elevation : Existing Grade
TEST LOCATION : AB - 10 N27 .734030 W80.442770
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
i
0 - 1 % Li ht gray fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 Dark brown organically stained fine sand, little silt not cemented
2 - 41/2 Li ht brown fine sand
4'/x - 5 'h Brown fine sand
5 '/z - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
t
4
Water table at 53/4 feet be ' --- -
TEST
elow ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
4
i
J
Water table at feet below ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below ound surface
IIServer-a nelcompanyUM DafaVndian River Counry Public 'Works, Engineering Division - Indian River Counry Parks Mainrenence COMP'" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSLI825lRoringsW - All (1-10)-doc
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFicE — (772) 924.3580 FAx
AUGER BORINGS WITH HAND CONE PENETROMETER (HCP) TESTS
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSLI825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No:
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation: Existing Grade Test Date : April 103 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 11 N27.73420a W80.44253 °
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) HCP
0 - 2V= Dark brown fine sand, little surface or anics Depth Reading
2V2 - 3 Brown to dark brown fine sand, trace to little silt 1 15
3 - 6 Brown fine sand 2 55
6 - 8 Li ht broom fine sand 3 55
4 40
5 50
6 50
7 30
8 45
9 50
10 70+
Water table at 5'/4 feet below ound surface I 1 70+
MWater
Depth HCP
(feet) n (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Depth Reading 7
I j
2 E
3
4
5 9
t
6
7
8
9
10 s
below round surface a`
r
k
3
f
i
3
Il Server-amel companywm DomVndion River Counry Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Maintenence Complex (IRC Project
No. 0701) - PSLI82518oringsll - AR w NCP (I).doc
's
t
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFicE — (772) 924.3580 FAx
AUGER BORINGS WITH HAND CONE PENETROMETER (HCP) TESTS
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSLI825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No:
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation: Existing Grade Test Date : April 103 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 11 N27.73420a W80.44253 °
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) HCP
0 - 2V= Dark brown fine sand, little surface or anics Depth Reading
2V2 - 3 Brown to dark brown fine sand, trace to little silt 1 15
3 - 6 Brown fine sand 2 55
6 - 8 Li ht broom fine sand 3 55
4 40
5 50
6 50
7 30
8 45
9 50
10 70+
Water table at 5'/4 feet below ound surface I 1 70+
MWater
Depth HCP
(feet) n (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Depth Reading 7
I j
2 E
3
4
5 9
t
6
7
8
9
10 s
below round surface a`
r
k
3
f
i
3
Il Server-amel companywm DomVndion River Counry Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Maintenence Complex (IRC Project
No. 0701) - PSLI82518oringsll - AR w NCP (I).doc
's
t
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION {
L CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
Cate o Particle Diameter
Silt and Clay Less than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) [not visible to human
e
Sand Fine - 0.0029 inch to 0.017 inch (0.074 mm to 0-42 mm)
Medium — 0.017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2 . 0 mm)
Coarse — 0 . 079 inch to 0 . 19 inch 2.0 to 4 .75 nun
Gravel Fine — 0 . 19 inch to 0.75 inch
Coarse — 0. 75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components*
(Shell, Silt, etc. ) *
2% to 5°/n Trace 1 % to 2%
5% to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12% to 30% Some
4% to 8%
30% to 50% And Greater than 80A
* Approximations based on visual examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses ,
if available.
III . CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE, N ,
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE, 9
all
DS with little or no GRAVEL SILTS and CLAYS
CPT Cone
ot Relative HCP Blows / foot Consistency Resistance
Density Resistance * N C (tsf)
Ve loose 0 - 20 0 - 2 Ve soft 0 - 3
5 - 10Loose 21 - 35 3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 35 - 70+ 5 _ g Firm
21 - 30 Medium dense NA 9 — 15 Stiff 13 — 25
Dense NA 16 - 30 Ve stiff 25 - 50
0 Ve dense NA Over 30 Hard Over 50
Penetrometer (HCP) readings are empirically .
correlated and depend on Soil type.
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFicE — (772) 924.3580 FAx
AUGER BORINGS WITH HAND CONE PENETROMETER (HCP) TESTS
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSLI825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No:
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation: Existing Grade Test Date : April 103 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 11 N27.73420a W80.44253 °
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) HCP
0 - 2V= Dark brown fine sand, little surface or anics Depth Reading
2V2 - 3 Brown to dark brown fine sand, trace to little silt 1 15
3 - 6 Brown fine sand 2 55
6 - 8 Li ht broom fine sand 3 55
4 40
5 50
6 50
7 30
8 45
9 50
10 70+
Water table at 5'/4 feet below ound surface I 1 70+
MWater
Depth HCP
(feet) n (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Depth Reading 7
I j
2 E
3
4
5 9
t
6
7
8
9
10 s
below round surface a`
r
k
3
f
i
3
Il Server-amel companywm DomVndion River Counry Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Maintenence Complex (IRC Project
No. 0701) - PSLI82518oringsll - AR w NCP (I).doc
's
t
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772j924-3580 Fax
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E.
1840 25'h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re: Geotechnical Services for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 -2
Ladies and Gentlemen:
A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical report for the
referenced project. This letter describes the project and its location, explains our field
explorations and findings , presents background information from outside references, discusses
our findings and concludes with our estimate of the average wet season high water table.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 '/z acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by
77"' Street.
The project consists of a maintenance complex with access drives and parking areas. Stormwater
runoff will be handled with a pond located in the northeast comer of the site.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 10, 2007, with two (2)
Auger borings in the proposed pond . The auger borings were performed in general accordance
with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings".
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan . The
borings were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to
distinguishable landmarks . The depths on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the t
time the borings were completed. I f
In addition to the stormwater management explorations, A. M . Engineering also completed the
geotechnical explorations for the proposed Indian River County Engineering Departments '
- I .
Maintenance Complex submitted under separate report numbered PSL1825
a
x�
r,
I �
k ,Y SW-2
AB 5 AB 4 AB 3 � CPT 1
m
AB-8 AB-7 AB-6
O CPT-3 40
> * u
,x
SW— I
CPT-4
AB-10
WZ
r xle
MHWEEE IHOBATHCAO
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS DATE:
APRIL 11 , 2007
BORING LOCATION PLAN [ l�r,`U�"AC.JY PROTECT NO:
PSLISZS- 1
GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATIONS A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex 590MW. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT S7. LUC[E, FLORIDA 34986
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY, FLORIDA s
TEL: (772) 924_3575 FAX: (772) 924-3580 t
F
4
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772j924-3580 Fax
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E.
1840 25'h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re: Geotechnical Services for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 -2
Ladies and Gentlemen:
A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical report for the
referenced project. This letter describes the project and its location, explains our field
explorations and findings , presents background information from outside references, discusses
our findings and concludes with our estimate of the average wet season high water table.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 '/z acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by
77"' Street.
The project consists of a maintenance complex with access drives and parking areas. Stormwater
runoff will be handled with a pond located in the northeast comer of the site.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 10, 2007, with two (2)
Auger borings in the proposed pond . The auger borings were performed in general accordance
with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings".
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan . The
borings were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to
distinguishable landmarks . The depths on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the t
time the borings were completed. I f
In addition to the stormwater management explorations, A. M . Engineering also completed the
geotechnical explorations for the proposed Indian River County Engineering Departments '
- I .
Maintenance Complex submitted under separate report numbered PSL1825
a
x�
r,
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772j924-3580 Fax
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E.
1840 25'h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re: Geotechnical Services for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 -2
Ladies and Gentlemen:
A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical report for the
referenced project. This letter describes the project and its location, explains our field
explorations and findings , presents background information from outside references, discusses
our findings and concludes with our estimate of the average wet season high water table.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 '/z acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by
77"' Street.
The project consists of a maintenance complex with access drives and parking areas. Stormwater
runoff will be handled with a pond located in the northeast comer of the site.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 10, 2007, with two (2)
Auger borings in the proposed pond . The auger borings were performed in general accordance
with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings".
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan . The
borings were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to
distinguishable landmarks . The depths on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the t
time the borings were completed. I f
In addition to the stormwater management explorations, A. M . Engineering also completed the
geotechnical explorations for the proposed Indian River County Engineering Departments '
- I .
Maintenance Complex submitted under separate report numbered PSL1825
a
x�
r,
` I
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. d
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning \
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
FINDINGS
The terrain at the project site was relatively flat . The grade at the project site was estimated to be
even with 77`h Street at the time of our explorations . Vegetation at the site included pines,
palmettos, oaks, shrubs and some cleared areas . A 3 -foot deep swale ran along the south side of
the site, and the Lateral "G" Canal along the east side.
Based on the spot elevations in the Site Plan prepared by Carter Associates , Inc . (not dated), the
ground surface in the proposed pond sloped up from approximately elevation 18 . 5 feet on the
north end to 20 feet on the south end . The bottom of the adjacent Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 13 . 5 feet, and the banks were between elevation 20 and 21 feet. The ground
surface sloped down from elevation 22 feet on the west side of the site to below 19 feet in the
northeast corner where the proposed pond is located.
The subsurface soils encountered in the borings consisted of fine sand with minimal silt from the
existing ground surface to the bottom of the borings at depths of 11 feet. These findings were
consistent with the borings performed throughout the remainder of the site.
Ground water was encountered at 5 and 3 '/4 feet below existing grade at the completion of the
borings, approximately elevation 15 feet . The water level in the Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 6 feet below existing grade; about 2 feet of water were observed. The elevation of
the water surface was between 14 and 15 feet. It should be noted that there were heavy
downpours in the area the night before our field explorations, ddd
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
we reviewed the USGS 7 . 5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach . The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD . The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site; the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral "G" Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area,
Florida, issued by the U . S. Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
three soil types occur within the area of the project site: Myakka fine sand (5) covers the western
portion of the site, EauGallie fine sand (3) the majority of the eastern side of the site, and
Pomello sand, 0 to 5 percent Slopes (21 ) the northeastern and southeastern edges of the site. It
should be noted that the Soil Survey generally extends to a maximum depth of 80 inches
(approximately 6'/4 feet) below ground surface and is not indicative of deeper soil conditions.
The USDA Soil Survey describes Myakka fine sand and EauGallie fine sand as nearly level, /—
poorly drained soils on broad flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is within 10
2
` I
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. d
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning \
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
FINDINGS
The terrain at the project site was relatively flat . The grade at the project site was estimated to be
even with 77`h Street at the time of our explorations . Vegetation at the site included pines,
palmettos, oaks, shrubs and some cleared areas . A 3 -foot deep swale ran along the south side of
the site, and the Lateral "G" Canal along the east side.
Based on the spot elevations in the Site Plan prepared by Carter Associates , Inc . (not dated), the
ground surface in the proposed pond sloped up from approximately elevation 18 . 5 feet on the
north end to 20 feet on the south end . The bottom of the adjacent Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 13 . 5 feet, and the banks were between elevation 20 and 21 feet. The ground
surface sloped down from elevation 22 feet on the west side of the site to below 19 feet in the
northeast corner where the proposed pond is located.
The subsurface soils encountered in the borings consisted of fine sand with minimal silt from the
existing ground surface to the bottom of the borings at depths of 11 feet. These findings were
consistent with the borings performed throughout the remainder of the site.
Ground water was encountered at 5 and 3 '/4 feet below existing grade at the completion of the
borings, approximately elevation 15 feet . The water level in the Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 6 feet below existing grade; about 2 feet of water were observed. The elevation of
the water surface was between 14 and 15 feet. It should be noted that there were heavy
downpours in the area the night before our field explorations, ddd
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
we reviewed the USGS 7 . 5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach . The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD . The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site; the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral "G" Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area,
Florida, issued by the U . S. Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
three soil types occur within the area of the project site: Myakka fine sand (5) covers the western
portion of the site, EauGallie fine sand (3) the majority of the eastern side of the site, and
Pomello sand, 0 to 5 percent Slopes (21 ) the northeastern and southeastern edges of the site. It
should be noted that the Soil Survey generally extends to a maximum depth of 80 inches
(approximately 6'/4 feet) below ground surface and is not indicative of deeper soil conditions.
The USDA Soil Survey describes Myakka fine sand and EauGallie fine sand as nearly level, /—
poorly drained soils on broad flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is within 10
2
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N .W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711 -
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
1840 25th Street Project No . PSL1825
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 Lab No , 1
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Field Crew J . C.IA. R.
Indian River County, Florida Rig # PayStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 1 N27 .73494° W80 .44255°
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
g
P P+S qc FR Meters 0
3 6 19.8 0.2
14 23 28 3.8 0.4
26 34 52 3.3 0.6 1 T j
26 39 52 2.8 0 .8 IJ yli
34 45 68 1 .4 1
35 42 70 1 .3 1 .2
19 26 38 2 .4 1 .4 5 5
18 25 36 2.9 1 .6
19 27 38 2.8 1 .8
19 27 38 21 2 I p
' 16 22 32 2. 1 22
13 18 26 4 .6 2.4 - IIT
18 27 36 3.7 2-6
37 47 74 1 .8 2.8 ' 1 i -+- �I
65 75 130 1 .5 3 10 1 I��-L iTl% -I 10
5065. 100 2.0 3. 2 1 , �_(�_ ' -• - 7
65 80 130 1 .0 3.4
80 90 160 0. 8 3 .6 _ _ I i
1 _ ,-J i 1 1
50 60 100 1 .3 3.83 Ir i 1 ' 1-- -
30 40 60 2.2 4
15 25 30 3 .5 4.2
10 18 20 5. 3 4.41
12 20 24 4.4 4 .6 15 I j
12 20 24 4.4 4.8
12 20 24 6. 1 5 1 1
21 32 42 0IV.0 5 .2 f I Y L I �.
o
1 1 w
i
zo j- 20
1 I �
i1 �r
25 1 i 25 !�
IyI} I
.h
30
30
-
lil iI ii IF
r
I � I
35 i_t �_ 35
-- _ - -F-- i-
I I S I ! I 1 I I
` I
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. d
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning \
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
FINDINGS
The terrain at the project site was relatively flat . The grade at the project site was estimated to be
even with 77`h Street at the time of our explorations . Vegetation at the site included pines,
palmettos, oaks, shrubs and some cleared areas . A 3 -foot deep swale ran along the south side of
the site, and the Lateral "G" Canal along the east side.
Based on the spot elevations in the Site Plan prepared by Carter Associates , Inc . (not dated), the
ground surface in the proposed pond sloped up from approximately elevation 18 . 5 feet on the
north end to 20 feet on the south end . The bottom of the adjacent Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 13 . 5 feet, and the banks were between elevation 20 and 21 feet. The ground
surface sloped down from elevation 22 feet on the west side of the site to below 19 feet in the
northeast corner where the proposed pond is located.
The subsurface soils encountered in the borings consisted of fine sand with minimal silt from the
existing ground surface to the bottom of the borings at depths of 11 feet. These findings were
consistent with the borings performed throughout the remainder of the site.
Ground water was encountered at 5 and 3 '/4 feet below existing grade at the completion of the
borings, approximately elevation 15 feet . The water level in the Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 6 feet below existing grade; about 2 feet of water were observed. The elevation of
the water surface was between 14 and 15 feet. It should be noted that there were heavy
downpours in the area the night before our field explorations, ddd
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
we reviewed the USGS 7 . 5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach . The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD . The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site; the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral "G" Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area,
Florida, issued by the U . S. Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
three soil types occur within the area of the project site: Myakka fine sand (5) covers the western
portion of the site, EauGallie fine sand (3) the majority of the eastern side of the site, and
Pomello sand, 0 to 5 percent Slopes (21 ) the northeastern and southeastern edges of the site. It
should be noted that the Soil Survey generally extends to a maximum depth of 80 inches
(approximately 6'/4 feet) below ground surface and is not indicative of deeper soil conditions.
The USDA Soil Survey describes Myakka fine sand and EauGallie fine sand as nearly level, /—
poorly drained soils on broad flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is within 10
2
MEMNON
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 -2
inches of the ground surface for 1 up to 4 months per year. The Soil Survey describes Po
sand, 0 to 5 percent slopes as a nearly level to gently sloping and moderately well drained smello generally at oil on
low ridges and knolls on the flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is
a depth of 24 to 40 inches for about 1 to 4 months during the wet season. The three soil profiles
generally consist of fine sand with little silt to depths of 6'/a feet. The soil profile for Myakka fine
/ to 43/4 feet,
sand includes a layer of weakly cemented sand with trace to little silt at a depth of 4'
and the soil profile for EauGallie fine sand includes a layer of sand with some silt and clay at a
depth of 4 to 5 %4 feet.
SFWMD WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT RAINFALL INFORMATION
The rainfall has been considerably lower than normal during the three months prior to our
explorations . According to the SFWMD the rainfall in Martin and St. Lucie Counties during the
30 days prior to April 10, 2007, was 41 percent of the normal; during the 30 days prior to March
lM 2007, the rainfall was 15 percent of normal; and during the 30 days prior to February 10,
2007, it was 18 percent of normal. Furthermore, a news release from the SFWMD (January 4,
2007) indicated that despite above average December rains , 2006 ranked as the sixth driest on
record. The Martin/St. Lucie Basin received only 61 percent of the expected historical average
rainfall .
„\ gg
DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS 1
The subsurface soils encountered in the auger borings corresponded well with the information
presented in the Soil Survey.
The recent rainfall history indicates that the observed water table levels are lower than normal.
I
Ground water and surface runoff will tend to flow towards the site and the canal since they are
located in the low area paralleling the coastal ridge. The presence of the Lateral "G" Canal
adjacent to the proposed pond and the pervious nature of the soils underlying the pond area
indicate that the actual wet season water table levels will be strongly influenced by the water
level of the canal .
a
Based on the above data and the results of our field exploration , we estimate that the average wet
season high water table level is I foot or less above the level of the Lateral "G" Canal . However,
should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the normally anticipated
rainfall quantities, the groundwater level may exceed our estimate of the average wet season
high groundwater level .
LIMITATIONS
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Engineering Department in the
design and construction of the previously described project. The right to rely on this report may
_ not be assigned without written permission of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
F
3
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
PORT ST. LUCIE
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE , FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575
FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6267i.
STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL 1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No. 1
Indian River County, Florida
Field Crew J. C./A. R. I
Rig # PayStar i
Location CPT - 2 N27. 734930 W80. 44278' Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF I
Depth 0 50 100 Friction Ratio y
P P+S qc FR Meters 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
e
7 14 2.829 0.2 0 1 •' I I 0
7 10 14 4. 7 0.4 1
19 16 38 4.8 0.6 I -f P
16 27 32 4.5 3.8 0.8
21 32 42 3.5 1 -2
12 23 24 2.8 1 .4
12 17 24 3.9 1 ,6 5
8 15 16 5. 0 1 .8 5
7 13 14 3,8 2 i.
14 18 28 6. 1 2.2
28 41 56 3.3 2.4
38 52 76 2. 6 2.6
50 65 100 2.0 �
50 65 10 2.8
0 20 3 10
55 70 110 2.4 3.2 III iT� -j--
60 80 120 1 . 710
3.4
50 65 100 2.0
3.6 i l
35 50 70 2.6
26 40 52 2.5 4 -i---�-�-
1 20 30 40 4.0 4.2
�I
16 28 32 5.4 4 .4
12 25 24 7
26 40 52 . 7 4 .6 15 !.�
3 .8 4.8 I I l -II 15 -i-�
35 50 70 3.4 5 '-
32 50 64 0.0 5 .2
1
n I
v I
20
20 -j
I
25
j
25
1
71
jT
30 --I P.
-r-�
1 � 1 : I � I �� I � '• 1 � � I I� � � � i I
35iil �
35
_ j`
MEMNON
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 -2
inches of the ground surface for 1 up to 4 months per year. The Soil Survey describes Po
sand, 0 to 5 percent slopes as a nearly level to gently sloping and moderately well drained smello generally at oil on
low ridges and knolls on the flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is
a depth of 24 to 40 inches for about 1 to 4 months during the wet season. The three soil profiles
generally consist of fine sand with little silt to depths of 6'/a feet. The soil profile for Myakka fine
/ to 43/4 feet,
sand includes a layer of weakly cemented sand with trace to little silt at a depth of 4'
and the soil profile for EauGallie fine sand includes a layer of sand with some silt and clay at a
depth of 4 to 5 %4 feet.
SFWMD WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT RAINFALL INFORMATION
The rainfall has been considerably lower than normal during the three months prior to our
explorations . According to the SFWMD the rainfall in Martin and St. Lucie Counties during the
30 days prior to April 10, 2007, was 41 percent of the normal; during the 30 days prior to March
lM 2007, the rainfall was 15 percent of normal; and during the 30 days prior to February 10,
2007, it was 18 percent of normal. Furthermore, a news release from the SFWMD (January 4,
2007) indicated that despite above average December rains , 2006 ranked as the sixth driest on
record. The Martin/St. Lucie Basin received only 61 percent of the expected historical average
rainfall .
„\ gg
DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS 1
The subsurface soils encountered in the auger borings corresponded well with the information
presented in the Soil Survey.
The recent rainfall history indicates that the observed water table levels are lower than normal.
I
Ground water and surface runoff will tend to flow towards the site and the canal since they are
located in the low area paralleling the coastal ridge. The presence of the Lateral "G" Canal
adjacent to the proposed pond and the pervious nature of the soils underlying the pond area
indicate that the actual wet season water table levels will be strongly influenced by the water
level of the canal .
a
Based on the above data and the results of our field exploration , we estimate that the average wet
season high water table level is I foot or less above the level of the Lateral "G" Canal . However,
should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the normally anticipated
rainfall quantities, the groundwater level may exceed our estimate of the average wet season
high groundwater level .
LIMITATIONS
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Engineering Department in the
design and construction of the previously described project. The right to rely on this report may
_ not be assigned without written permission of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
F
3
MEMNON
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 -2
inches of the ground surface for 1 up to 4 months per year. The Soil Survey describes Po
sand, 0 to 5 percent slopes as a nearly level to gently sloping and moderately well drained smello generally at oil on
low ridges and knolls on the flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is
a depth of 24 to 40 inches for about 1 to 4 months during the wet season. The three soil profiles
generally consist of fine sand with little silt to depths of 6'/a feet. The soil profile for Myakka fine
/ to 43/4 feet,
sand includes a layer of weakly cemented sand with trace to little silt at a depth of 4'
and the soil profile for EauGallie fine sand includes a layer of sand with some silt and clay at a
depth of 4 to 5 %4 feet.
SFWMD WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT RAINFALL INFORMATION
The rainfall has been considerably lower than normal during the three months prior to our
explorations . According to the SFWMD the rainfall in Martin and St. Lucie Counties during the
30 days prior to April 10, 2007, was 41 percent of the normal; during the 30 days prior to March
lM 2007, the rainfall was 15 percent of normal; and during the 30 days prior to February 10,
2007, it was 18 percent of normal. Furthermore, a news release from the SFWMD (January 4,
2007) indicated that despite above average December rains , 2006 ranked as the sixth driest on
record. The Martin/St. Lucie Basin received only 61 percent of the expected historical average
rainfall .
„\ gg
DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS 1
The subsurface soils encountered in the auger borings corresponded well with the information
presented in the Soil Survey.
The recent rainfall history indicates that the observed water table levels are lower than normal.
I
Ground water and surface runoff will tend to flow towards the site and the canal since they are
located in the low area paralleling the coastal ridge. The presence of the Lateral "G" Canal
adjacent to the proposed pond and the pervious nature of the soils underlying the pond area
indicate that the actual wet season water table levels will be strongly influenced by the water
level of the canal .
a
Based on the above data and the results of our field exploration , we estimate that the average wet
season high water table level is I foot or less above the level of the Lateral "G" Canal . However,
should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the normally anticipated
rainfall quantities, the groundwater level may exceed our estimate of the average wet season
high groundwater level .
LIMITATIONS
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Engineering Department in the
design and construction of the previously described project. The right to rely on this report may
_ not be assigned without written permission of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
F
3
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. {
Geotechnical Exploration for Stom-1water Management Planning e
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida. No other warranty, expressed or implied , is made. Our
recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us, the results of our field
explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface conditions that
may exist in unexplored areas of the site . The nature and extent of such variations may not
become evident until further explorations are made or construction is underway. Should such
variations be observed, we recommend that A. M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. be requested to
observe the actual site conditions and re-evaluate our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns , including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included in the scope of work . Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation of "wetland" areas .
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information,
please call us .
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. I
���
E
ichael McCready, I ebecca Grant Aseoii , P .E.
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engrnecr
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGA/MM
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
Boring Logs (2)
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
Merver-amelcompanylAM DatakIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainienence Complex -
(IRC Project No. 0701) - PSL18250oringsi2 - Stonnwater Report doc
4
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. {
Geotechnical Exploration for Stom-1water Management Planning e
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida. No other warranty, expressed or implied , is made. Our
recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us, the results of our field
explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface conditions that
may exist in unexplored areas of the site . The nature and extent of such variations may not
become evident until further explorations are made or construction is underway. Should such
variations be observed, we recommend that A. M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. be requested to
observe the actual site conditions and re-evaluate our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns , including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included in the scope of work . Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation of "wetland" areas .
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information,
please call us .
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. I
���
E
ichael McCready, I ebecca Grant Aseoii , P .E.
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engrnecr
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGA/MM
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
Boring Logs (2)
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
Merver-amelcompanylAM DatakIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainienence Complex -
(IRC Project No. 0701) - PSL18250oringsi2 - Stonnwater Report doc
4
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO (772) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7711
Client Indian River County Public Works , Engineering Division Date 11 -Apr-07
project No . PSL1825
1840 25th Street Lab No. 1
Vero Beach , Florida 32960 R .
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Rig # Pa Field Crew J .C.IA../A.
Indian River County, Florida yStar
Elevation Existing Grade
Location CPT - 3 N27.73458" W80 .44290 °
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
B
Depth o 50 too 150 200 250 g 0 2 4 1 6
P P+S qc FR Meters 0 I I _
10 6.6 0.2
5 I
9 14 18 51 0.4 F11
18 25 36 4.8 0.6
21 34 42 2.5 0.8
19 27 38 6.6 1
21 40 42 6 .0 1 .2 -- 1-I 5 I I
30 49 60 3.3 1 .4 5
25 40 50 4 .2 1 .6 _ t
13 29 26 6.6 1 .8
12 25 24 6. 1 2
16 27 32 5.6 2.2 --
16 30 32 6.2 2-4
y
1 r
16 31 32 fi.2 2.6
25 40 50 4.0 2.8 - _ ' 10
35 50 70 2.8 3 10
35 50 70 1 .9 3.2 -I-
50 60 100 2.0 3-6
50 65 100 2 . 0 3.6
50 65 100 1 .3 3.8 ,
-�
50 60 100 2 .0 4 I 25 411 40 s0 2.6 4.2 ' !
19 29 38 2.4 4.4 111 , 1 I L _ 15
10 17 20 7 .3 4 .6 15
18 29 36 4 .8 4.8
22 35 44 4 .5 5 tr
26 41 52 0 .0 5.2 •>= t
t1
u I i
❑ -I
20 20
I
' I i
i
(
' I 1 TI i I t 25 -
25
:
:
30 I- �-i I I� '_f i----a .I�'�-r- 30
- ---- -
1
' i . l rl I� ! ! I j i I
-
!
35
I
' li III ' li ! i ! Iii ! 5
rr,
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. {
Geotechnical Exploration for Stom-1water Management Planning e
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida. No other warranty, expressed or implied , is made. Our
recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us, the results of our field
explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface conditions that
may exist in unexplored areas of the site . The nature and extent of such variations may not
become evident until further explorations are made or construction is underway. Should such
variations be observed, we recommend that A. M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. be requested to
observe the actual site conditions and re-evaluate our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns , including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included in the scope of work . Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation of "wetland" areas .
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information,
please call us .
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. I
���
E
ichael McCready, I ebecca Grant Aseoii , P .E.
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engrnecr
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGA/MM
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
Boring Logs (2)
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
Merver-amelcompanylAM DatakIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainienence Complex -
(IRC Project No. 0701) - PSL18250oringsi2 - Stonnwater Report doc
4
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION
I . CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
!GNravelFine
Particle Diameter
than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) (not visible to human
— 0. 0029 inch to 0. 017 inch (0.074 mm to 0.42 nun)
um — 0. 017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2.0 mm)
se — 0.079 inch to 0. 19 inch ( 2. 0 to 4. 75 mm)
— 0. 19 inch to 0. 75 inch
Coarse — 0.75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
3
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
R
t
f
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components *
(Shell, Silt, etc .)* t
0% to 5 % Trace 1 % to 2 %
5 % to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12 % to 30% Some 4% to 8 %
30% to 50%
And Greater than 8 %
* Approximations based on visual, examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses,
if available.
III. CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE N #
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE
SANDS and GRAVEL1
SILTS and CLAYS
Blows / foot Relative Cone Blows / foot Cone
N Density Resistance N Consistency Resistance
(ts ge
(ts
0 - 4 Ve loose 0 - 15 0 - 2 Vsa soft 0 - 3
5 - 10 Loose 20 - 40
3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 40 - 80 5 - 8 Firm 7 - 12
21 — 30 Medium dense 85 — 120 9 - 15 Stiff 13 - 25
31 - 50 Dense 125 - 200 16 - 30 Verystiff 25 - 50 -`
Over 50 Ve dense Over 200 Over 30 Hard Over 50
--
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N. W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PORT ST. LUCIE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 VERO772
( ) 567-6167 STUART (772) 283-7771
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
1840 25th Street Date 11 -Apr-07
Vero Beach, Florida 32960 Project No. PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No . 1
Indian River County, Florida
Rig # ayStPaySt
p Field Crew r
ar
Location CPT - 4 N27 . 734380 W80.442670 Elevation Existing Grade
Cone Bearing - TSF Friction Ratio
Depth 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 2 4 6 8
P P+ S qc FR Meters 0
7 14 5.657 0.2 1 0
s 11 10 11 . 9 0.4 I _
16 25 32 5.0 06 I
28 40 56 3.5 0.8
20 35 40 5.3 1
16 32 32 4. 1 12 l
15 25 30 4.4 1 .4 1 1 �-
20 30 40 5.0 1 .6 5 5
16 31 32 5.0 1 .8 - I I
10 22 20 5.9 2 j
7 16 14 8.5 - 2. 2
8 17 16 14 .0 2.4
23 40 46 4 .9 26 I --h-
23 4046 5.7 2.8 h-I i
30 50 60 3. 3 3 10 I I -
50 65 100 2 .6 3.2 T IIr-r-_f 10
I I , �1
50 70 100 2-6 3.4 l _. 1
50 70 100 2. 6 3.6 --
50 70 100 2-0 3.8 ( �- h I _ i- LI- - 1 .�
40 55 80 3.5 4
20 41 40 2.6 4.2 - - --
12 20 24
398.8 4.4 - - - ` I
55 78 25 4 .6 15
55 70 110 2.4 4.8 l I I ' r l I i I 15
60 80 120 2.2 5 -
60 80 120 0. 0 5.2 .r
t
20 l l� I � I '
20
I �-IF ' }
25 I -'+1 j
_ 25
l it }t
_ -
30 30
_ 35 - a_�
- .. . I � ' 35
Ili I
i
I
F
t
rr
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION
I . CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
!GNravelFine
Particle Diameter
than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) (not visible to human
— 0. 0029 inch to 0. 017 inch (0.074 mm to 0.42 nun)
um — 0. 017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2.0 mm)
se — 0.079 inch to 0. 19 inch ( 2. 0 to 4. 75 mm)
— 0. 19 inch to 0. 75 inch
Coarse — 0.75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
3
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
R
t
f
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components *
(Shell, Silt, etc .)* t
0% to 5 % Trace 1 % to 2 %
5 % to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12 % to 30% Some 4% to 8 %
30% to 50%
And Greater than 8 %
* Approximations based on visual, examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses,
if available.
III. CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE N #
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE
SANDS and GRAVEL1
SILTS and CLAYS
Blows / foot Relative Cone Blows / foot Cone
N Density Resistance N Consistency Resistance
(ts ge
(ts
0 - 4 Ve loose 0 - 15 0 - 2 Vsa soft 0 - 3
5 - 10 Loose 20 - 40
3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 40 - 80 5 - 8 Firm 7 - 12
21 — 30 Medium dense 85 — 120 9 - 15 Stiff 13 - 25
31 - 50 Dense 125 - 200 16 - 30 Verystiff 25 - 50 -`
Over 50 Ve dense Over 200 Over 30 Hard Over 50
--
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION
I . CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
!GNravelFine
Particle Diameter
than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) (not visible to human
— 0. 0029 inch to 0. 017 inch (0.074 mm to 0.42 nun)
um — 0. 017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2.0 mm)
se — 0.079 inch to 0. 19 inch ( 2. 0 to 4. 75 mm)
— 0. 19 inch to 0. 75 inch
Coarse — 0.75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
3
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
R
t
f
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components *
(Shell, Silt, etc .)* t
0% to 5 % Trace 1 % to 2 %
5 % to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12 % to 30% Some 4% to 8 %
30% to 50%
And Greater than 8 %
* Approximations based on visual, examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses,
if available.
III. CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE N #
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE
SANDS and GRAVEL1
SILTS and CLAYS
Blows / foot Relative Cone Blows / foot Cone
N Density Resistance N Consistency Resistance
(ts ge
(ts
0 - 4 Ve loose 0 - 15 0 - 2 Vsa soft 0 - 3
5 - 10 Loose 20 - 40
3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 40 - 80 5 - 8 Firm 7 - 12
21 — 30 Medium dense 85 — 120 9 - 15 Stiff 13 - 25
31 - 50 Dense 125 - 200 16 - 30 Verystiff 25 - 50 -`
Over 50 Ve dense Over 200 Over 30 Hard Over 50
--
5
/ d
i i,u dl a r 1 Vj axi
Va
s r
\
A � yyy
t y
IT
q� t1
' ° ar P J :rW P-I aH r` t h Sxt ti 2mj"' { h x 41 f S x OC4
x Y r a rLZ
c
41,
lr
5
/ d
i i,u dl a r 1 Vj axi
Va
s r
\
A � yyy
t y
IT
q� t1
' ° ar P J :rW P-I aH r` t h Sxt ti 2mj"' { h x 41 f S x OC4
x Y r a rLZ
c
41,
lr
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N . W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580 l
-1
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10 , 2007 E
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician: S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 2 1
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 4 Light brown fine sand
4 - 6 Brown fine sand
Y
Water table at 4 '/4 feet below ffound.surface
TEST LOCATION : AB @ CPT - 4
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Grau fine sand
2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6 - 8 Brown fine sand, trace silt
Water table at 5 '/4 feet below 8round surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below Eound surface
IlServer-arnelrompanyUM Datallndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Compf" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSL18751Boringsll - AB @ CPT (1-7).doc
5
/ d
i i,u dl a r 1 Vj axi
Va
s r
\
A � yyy
t y
IT
q� t1
' ° ar P J :rW P-I aH r` t h Sxt ti 2mj"' { h x 41 f S x OC4
x Y r a rLZ
c
41,
lr
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W- MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client: Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex ProjectLab No:: PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida 2
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: SW - 1 N27 . 73457° W80.442250
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 '/2 Li ht brown fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 %2 Brown fine sand
2 %2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 8 %2 Brown fine sand , trace silt
8V2 1 1 Brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below around surface
TEST LOCATION : SW - 2 N27. 73497° W80 .44225 °
t
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Li ht brown fine sand, trace roots
1 %2 - 2 %2 Dark brown Fne sand, trace silt
2 '/2 - 8 Gra ish brown fine sand
8 - 9V2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
9 %2 - 1 1 Brown fine sand
(
r
(
Water table at 314 feet below ground surface _
k
TEST LOCATION: AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet)
Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) .t
t
i
)
1
Water table at feet below ound surface
`s
Il Ser ver-amelcon2panYUMDafaVndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - r
PS118251Boringsl2 - SW (1-2)-dot g Indian River Caun(y Parks Maintenance Complex (IRC Projec( Na. O70IJ - T.
i
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No :
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 103 2007
Technician: S. Couboy
TEST LOCATION : AB - I N27. 73407a W80 .442390
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, :consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Brown fine sand, trace roots
I - 4I Li ht brown fine sand
4 2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li in brown fine sand
f
Water table at 5 feet below Eound surface !
TEST LOCATION : AB - 2 N27.734560 W80 .442450
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Brown fine sand, trace silt
t
f,
t
2
F
t
1
t
k
1
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION: AB - 3 N27.734960 W80.442640 i
feet
Depth p ( ) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Ve li ht brown fine sand
1 V2 4'/2 Li ht brown fine and
4 %2 - 5 '/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Brown to light brown fine sand
Water table at 3'/a feet below round surface
S
s
t
F. IAMDalaVndian River County Pubfic Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parke Maintenance Comples (IRCProject Na. 0701) - PSLI87511 - ABI-
( / O) doc t
a.
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W- MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client: Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex ProjectLab No:: PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida 2
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: SW - 1 N27 . 73457° W80.442250
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 '/2 Li ht brown fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 %2 Brown fine sand
2 %2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 8 %2 Brown fine sand , trace silt
8V2 1 1 Brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below around surface
TEST LOCATION : SW - 2 N27. 73497° W80 .44225 °
t
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Li ht brown fine sand, trace roots
1 %2 - 2 %2 Dark brown Fne sand, trace silt
2 '/2 - 8 Gra ish brown fine sand
8 - 9V2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
9 %2 - 1 1 Brown fine sand
(
r
(
Water table at 314 feet below ground surface _
k
TEST LOCATION: AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet)
Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) .t
t
i
)
1
Water table at feet below ound surface
`s
Il Ser ver-amelcon2panYUMDafaVndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - r
PS118251Boringsl2 - SW (1-2)-dot g Indian River Caun(y Parks Maintenance Complex (IRC Projec( Na. O70IJ - T.
i
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W- MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client: Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex ProjectLab No:: PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida 2
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: SW - 1 N27 . 73457° W80.442250
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 '/2 Li ht brown fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 %2 Brown fine sand
2 %2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 8 %2 Brown fine sand , trace silt
8V2 1 1 Brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below around surface
TEST LOCATION : SW - 2 N27. 73497° W80 .44225 °
t
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Li ht brown fine sand, trace roots
1 %2 - 2 %2 Dark brown Fne sand, trace silt
2 '/2 - 8 Gra ish brown fine sand
8 - 9V2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
9 %2 - 1 1 Brown fine sand
(
r
(
Water table at 314 feet below ground surface _
k
TEST LOCATION: AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet)
Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) .t
t
i
)
1
Water table at feet below ound surface
`s
Il Ser ver-amelcon2panYUMDafaVndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - r
PS118251Boringsl2 - SW (1-2)-dot g Indian River Caun(y Parks Maintenance Complex (IRC Projec( Na. O70IJ - T.
i
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and all operations required to
clear and grub portions of the site, and areas outside the site within the Indian River County
road right-of-way and the Indian River Farms Water Control District canal right-of-way, as
needed to access the limits of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - None
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the complete removal and disposal of all trees, brush,
logs, stumps, roots, weeds, rubbish, rocks, structures designated to be removed, concrete and
other deleterious material and obstructions resting upon or protruding through the surface of
the ground. Stumps, roots 3 " and over and similar obstructions shall be removed to a
minimum depth of 2 feet below the existing ground. All structural items shall be excavated
to full depth, completely removed, and the excavation backfilled per these specifications .
3 .02 DISPOSAL
A. Burning On Site
1 . Burning of cleared and grubbed materials shall not be permitted on site.
B . Off Site Disposal
1 . All material shall be hauled off site by the Contractor for disposal in an
approved manner.
2 . The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with the
provisions of all necessary permits .
3 . All necessary permit fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
4. No material shall be buried on site.
END OF SECTION
02110 - 1 02110 Cleaning and Grubbing
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and all operations required to
clear and grub portions of the site, and areas outside the site within the Indian River County
road right-of-way and the Indian River Farms Water Control District canal right-of-way, as
needed to access the limits of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - None
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the complete removal and disposal of all trees, brush,
logs, stumps, roots, weeds, rubbish, rocks, structures designated to be removed, concrete and
other deleterious material and obstructions resting upon or protruding through the surface of
the ground. Stumps, roots 3 " and over and similar obstructions shall be removed to a
minimum depth of 2 feet below the existing ground. All structural items shall be excavated
to full depth, completely removed, and the excavation backfilled per these specifications .
3 .02 DISPOSAL
A. Burning On Site
1 . Burning of cleared and grubbed materials shall not be permitted on site.
B . Off Site Disposal
1 . All material shall be hauled off site by the Contractor for disposal in an
approved manner.
2 . The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with the
provisions of all necessary permits .
3 . All necessary permit fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
4. No material shall be buried on site.
END OF SECTION
02110 - 1 02110 Cleaning and Grubbing
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING , INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. Lucm, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580 t
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
t
ClienIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSL1825
Project Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No : 1
Indian River County, Florida Test Date: April 10, 2007
Elevation : Existing Grade Technician : S . Couboy 4
TEST LOCATION : AB - 4 MT734980 W80.442820
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 Li ht brown fine sand
1 - 2 Ve light brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand
4 - 5 '/z Brown fine sand, trace silt
5 '/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
F
r
1
Water table at 4 '/a feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 5 N27 .734970 W80.443010 (
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) t
0 - 2 Brown fine sand
2 - 4 Brown to li ht brown fine sand
4 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand k
f
(
E
Water table at 6 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 6 N27 .734620 W80.442550
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1/2 Gra fine sand
yz 2 Very li ht brown fine sand
2 - 4 Li ht brown fine sand i
4 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt I
41/2 - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
6
i
Water table at 4 '/z feet below ground surface
F: UM DalaVndinn River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainlenence Complex (1RC Pr`jecl No. 0701) - PSLI825V - AR (1 -10).doc
n
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and all operations required to
clear and grub portions of the site, and areas outside the site within the Indian River County
road right-of-way and the Indian River Farms Water Control District canal right-of-way, as
needed to access the limits of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - None
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the complete removal and disposal of all trees, brush,
logs, stumps, roots, weeds, rubbish, rocks, structures designated to be removed, concrete and
other deleterious material and obstructions resting upon or protruding through the surface of
the ground. Stumps, roots 3 " and over and similar obstructions shall be removed to a
minimum depth of 2 feet below the existing ground. All structural items shall be excavated
to full depth, completely removed, and the excavation backfilled per these specifications .
3 .02 DISPOSAL
A. Burning On Site
1 . Burning of cleared and grubbed materials shall not be permitted on site.
B . Off Site Disposal
1 . All material shall be hauled off site by the Contractor for disposal in an
approved manner.
2 . The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with the
provisions of all necessary permits .
3 . All necessary permit fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
4. No material shall be buried on site.
END OF SECTION
02110 - 1 02110 Cleaning and Grubbing
SECTION 02204 - GRASSING BY SODDING
—� 1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and supervision required
to prepare the soil, fine grade the area and establish a healthy stand of grass by
sodding of the areas so designated on the drawings and as specified herein.
2• GENERAL
A . PREPARATION
1 ) The area to be sodded shall be clear of old sod and weeds. The area shall be
fine graded and the surface loosened, by scarifying, if necessary. If the soil
is dry it shall be moistened to provide an optimum growing condition .
B . FERTILIZER
1 ) Fertilizer shall be uniformly spread over the area to be sodded at the rate of
400 to 500 pounds per acre. The fertilizer shall have a chemical designation
of 12-8 - 8 . Soil which has a PH of 5 . 0 or lower shall, if directed by the
Engineer, have an application of dolomite lime stone, but the amount of
dolomite applied shall not raise the PH above 6 . 0.
i
C . SOD
1 ) The sod shall be St. Augustine Floratam and/or Argentine Bahia as
specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sod shall be of a tough
texture with a good mat of roots . It shall be free of weeds and other
objectionable grasses . Approximately three days prior to cutting the sod, it
shall be closely mowed and raked to remove excess growth and debris. The
sod shall be cut with sufficient thickness to retain the root system intact.
There shall be a minimum of delay between the cutting of the sod and the
laying so that it is live, fresh and uninjured when laid.
D . LAYING
1 ) No sod shall be laid until the Owner/Engineer has approved the condition of
the prepared area. The sod shall be placed with the edges in close contact.
Where the sod is laid on a slope the pieces of sod shall be laid with staggered
joints to minimize erosion along the joints and where the sod is laid in
drainage swales and ditches the joints shall be staggered in the line of flow
for the same reason. Afler the sod is laid it shall -be brought into close contact
with the soil by tamping, light rolling or other acceptable means. Where the
sod may slide due to the steep slope it shall be pegged to firm soil with wood
- pegs .
02204-1
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAx (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, EngineeringDivision
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Project No : PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida Lab No : I
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date:
April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 7 N27-734570 W80.442320 l
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) 1
0 - 2 Dark brown fine sand, little silt, trace roots
2 - 4 Brown fine sand
4 - 5 Li h[ brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
)
i
Water table at 4V feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 8 N27. 734640 W80.443030
i Depth (feet) Description� p (color, texture, consistency, remarks) -
0 - 1 Gra fine sand
Li ht a fine sand
1 '/: - 2 Dark brown fine sand, trace silt, trace to little roots
2 - 41/2 Brown fine sand, trace silt, trace roots
4 %, - 5 %, Dark brown fine sand, trace silt
5 'h - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below ground surface
TEST LOCATION : AB - 9 N27. 734020 W80.442990
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 % Gray fine sand, little roots
1V2 - 2
Brown fine sand, trace roots
2 - 3 Brown fine sand
3 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 6 Dark brown fine sand, little silt
Water table at 5 %i feet below ground surface
I"Server-amelcompanylAM Data t1ndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - Indian River County PSL182518oringsll - AB (1-10).doc Parks Maintenence
Comples (IRC Project No. 0701) -
SECTION 02204 - GRASSING BY SODDING
—� 1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and supervision required
to prepare the soil, fine grade the area and establish a healthy stand of grass by
sodding of the areas so designated on the drawings and as specified herein.
2• GENERAL
A . PREPARATION
1 ) The area to be sodded shall be clear of old sod and weeds. The area shall be
fine graded and the surface loosened, by scarifying, if necessary. If the soil
is dry it shall be moistened to provide an optimum growing condition .
B . FERTILIZER
1 ) Fertilizer shall be uniformly spread over the area to be sodded at the rate of
400 to 500 pounds per acre. The fertilizer shall have a chemical designation
of 12-8 - 8 . Soil which has a PH of 5 . 0 or lower shall, if directed by the
Engineer, have an application of dolomite lime stone, but the amount of
dolomite applied shall not raise the PH above 6 . 0.
i
C . SOD
1 ) The sod shall be St. Augustine Floratam and/or Argentine Bahia as
specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sod shall be of a tough
texture with a good mat of roots . It shall be free of weeds and other
objectionable grasses . Approximately three days prior to cutting the sod, it
shall be closely mowed and raked to remove excess growth and debris. The
sod shall be cut with sufficient thickness to retain the root system intact.
There shall be a minimum of delay between the cutting of the sod and the
laying so that it is live, fresh and uninjured when laid.
D . LAYING
1 ) No sod shall be laid until the Owner/Engineer has approved the condition of
the prepared area. The sod shall be placed with the edges in close contact.
Where the sod is laid on a slope the pieces of sod shall be laid with staggered
joints to minimize erosion along the joints and where the sod is laid in
drainage swales and ditches the joints shall be staggered in the line of flow
for the same reason. Afler the sod is laid it shall -be brought into close contact
with the soil by tamping, light rolling or other acceptable means. Where the
sod may slide due to the steep slope it shall be pegged to firm soil with wood
- pegs .
02204-1
SECTION 02204 - GRASSING BY SODDING
—� 1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and supervision required
to prepare the soil, fine grade the area and establish a healthy stand of grass by
sodding of the areas so designated on the drawings and as specified herein.
2• GENERAL
A . PREPARATION
1 ) The area to be sodded shall be clear of old sod and weeds. The area shall be
fine graded and the surface loosened, by scarifying, if necessary. If the soil
is dry it shall be moistened to provide an optimum growing condition .
B . FERTILIZER
1 ) Fertilizer shall be uniformly spread over the area to be sodded at the rate of
400 to 500 pounds per acre. The fertilizer shall have a chemical designation
of 12-8 - 8 . Soil which has a PH of 5 . 0 or lower shall, if directed by the
Engineer, have an application of dolomite lime stone, but the amount of
dolomite applied shall not raise the PH above 6 . 0.
i
C . SOD
1 ) The sod shall be St. Augustine Floratam and/or Argentine Bahia as
specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sod shall be of a tough
texture with a good mat of roots . It shall be free of weeds and other
objectionable grasses . Approximately three days prior to cutting the sod, it
shall be closely mowed and raked to remove excess growth and debris. The
sod shall be cut with sufficient thickness to retain the root system intact.
There shall be a minimum of delay between the cutting of the sod and the
laying so that it is live, fresh and uninjured when laid.
D . LAYING
1 ) No sod shall be laid until the Owner/Engineer has approved the condition of
the prepared area. The sod shall be placed with the edges in close contact.
Where the sod is laid on a slope the pieces of sod shall be laid with staggered
joints to minimize erosion along the joints and where the sod is laid in
drainage swales and ditches the joints shall be staggered in the line of flow
for the same reason. Afler the sod is laid it shall -be brought into close contact
with the soil by tamping, light rolling or other acceptable means. Where the
sod may slide due to the steep slope it shall be pegged to firm soil with wood
- pegs .
02204-1
E. WATERING
1 ) The sod shall be kept watered on an as needed basis for the duration of the
contract period and in no case for less than two weeks . When the grass is
watered it should be at the rate of one inch or 620 gallons per 1000 square feetO
per application. NOTE : In the event there is no irrigation system in the
area to receive the sod, the Contractor is responsible for pulling hoses
from existing hose bibs or water source in the area, for irrigating and
maintaining the sod . The cost of the water will be incurred by the
Contractor.
F . MAINTENANCE
1 ) The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the sodded area in a satisfactory
condition until final acceptance of the project or until the end of the two weeks
watering period, which ever is later, (see paragraph E above). Such
maintenance shall include the filling, leveling and repair of any washed or
eroded areas and the resodding of any areas which have been damaged or are
not growing satisfactorily.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
t�
02204-2
E. WATERING
1 ) The sod shall be kept watered on an as needed basis for the duration of the
contract period and in no case for less than two weeks . When the grass is
watered it should be at the rate of one inch or 620 gallons per 1000 square feetO
per application. NOTE : In the event there is no irrigation system in the
area to receive the sod, the Contractor is responsible for pulling hoses
from existing hose bibs or water source in the area, for irrigating and
maintaining the sod . The cost of the water will be incurred by the
Contractor.
F . MAINTENANCE
1 ) The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the sodded area in a satisfactory
condition until final acceptance of the project or until the end of the two weeks
watering period, which ever is later, (see paragraph E above). Such
maintenance shall include the filling, leveling and repair of any washed or
eroded areas and the resodding of any areas which have been damaged or are
not growing satisfactorily.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
t�
02204-2
A, M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N-W. MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client : Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No: PSL1825
Lab No: 1
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Test Date: April 10 , 2007
Indian River County, Florida
Technician : S. Conboy
Elevation : Existing Grade
TEST LOCATION : AB - 10 N27 .734030 W80.442770
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
i
0 - 1 % Li ht gray fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 Dark brown organically stained fine sand, little silt not cemented
2 - 41/2 Li ht brown fine sand
4'/x - 5 'h Brown fine sand
5 '/z - 6 Li ht brown fine sand
t
4
Water table at 53/4 feet be ' --- -
TEST
elow ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
4
i
J
Water table at feet below ound surface
TEST LOCATION : AB -
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Water table at feet below ound surface
IIServer-a nelcompanyUM DafaVndian River Counry Public 'Works, Engineering Division - Indian River Counry Parks Mainrenence COMP'" (IRC Project No. 0701) -
PSLI825lRoringsW - All (1-10)-doc
E. WATERING
1 ) The sod shall be kept watered on an as needed basis for the duration of the
contract period and in no case for less than two weeks . When the grass is
watered it should be at the rate of one inch or 620 gallons per 1000 square feetO
per application. NOTE : In the event there is no irrigation system in the
area to receive the sod, the Contractor is responsible for pulling hoses
from existing hose bibs or water source in the area, for irrigating and
maintaining the sod . The cost of the water will be incurred by the
Contractor.
F . MAINTENANCE
1 ) The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the sodded area in a satisfactory
condition until final acceptance of the project or until the end of the two weeks
watering period, which ever is later, (see paragraph E above). Such
maintenance shall include the filling, leveling and repair of any washed or
eroded areas and the resodding of any areas which have been damaged or are
not growing satisfactorily.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
t�
02204-2
SECTION 02206 - SITE CLEANUP & RESTORATION
1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
required or necessary to clean up the site after the construction is completed and to
restore items disturbed or damaged due to his construction operation .
2• GENERAL
A . During the progress of the project, the work and the adjacent areas affected thereby
shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition. All rubbish, surplus materials, and
unused construction equipment shall be removed . All damage shall be repaired so
that the public and private property owners will be inconvenienced as little as
possible.
B . Where material or debris has been deposited in watercourses, ditches, gutters, drains,
or catch-basins as a result of the Contractor' s operations, such material or debris shall
be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the work,
and the ditches, channels, drains, etc., shall be kept clean .
C . Before the completion ofthe project, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise especially
directed or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and
structures which he builds; remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other
construction equipment furnished by him; remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover
all organic matter and material containing organic matter in, under, and around
privies, houses, and other buildings used by him; remove all rubbish from any
grounds which he has occupied ; and leave the roads, all parts of the premises and
adjacent property affected by his operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition .
D . It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair, rebuild, or restore to its
former conditions, any and all portions of existing utilities, structures, equipment,
appurtenances, trees and shrubs, or facilities, other than those to be paid for under the
specifications, which may be disturbed or damaged due to his construction operations .
E. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed by him
and his subcontractors and on completion of the work shall deliver the facilities
undamaged and in fresh and new-appearing condition.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
_. 02206-1
A . M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LucIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFicE — (772) 924.3580 FAx
AUGER BORINGS WITH HAND CONE PENETROMETER (HCP) TESTS
Client Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division Project No : PSLI825
Project: Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex Lab No:
Indian River County, Florida 1
Elevation: Existing Grade Test Date : April 103 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: AB - 11 N27.73420a W80.44253 °
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) HCP
0 - 2V= Dark brown fine sand, little surface or anics Depth Reading
2V2 - 3 Brown to dark brown fine sand, trace to little silt 1 15
3 - 6 Brown fine sand 2 55
6 - 8 Li ht broom fine sand 3 55
4 40
5 50
6 50
7 30
8 45
9 50
10 70+
Water table at 5'/4 feet below ound surface I 1 70+
MWater
Depth HCP
(feet) n (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
Depth Reading 7
I j
2 E
3
4
5 9
t
6
7
8
9
10 s
below round surface a`
r
k
3
f
i
3
Il Server-amel companywm DomVndion River Counry Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Maintenence Complex (IRC Project
No. 0701) - PSLI82518oringsll - AR w NCP (I).doc
's
t
SECTION 02206 - SITE CLEANUP & RESTORATION
1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
required or necessary to clean up the site after the construction is completed and to
restore items disturbed or damaged due to his construction operation .
2• GENERAL
A . During the progress of the project, the work and the adjacent areas affected thereby
shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition. All rubbish, surplus materials, and
unused construction equipment shall be removed . All damage shall be repaired so
that the public and private property owners will be inconvenienced as little as
possible.
B . Where material or debris has been deposited in watercourses, ditches, gutters, drains,
or catch-basins as a result of the Contractor' s operations, such material or debris shall
be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the work,
and the ditches, channels, drains, etc., shall be kept clean .
C . Before the completion ofthe project, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise especially
directed or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and
structures which he builds; remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other
construction equipment furnished by him; remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover
all organic matter and material containing organic matter in, under, and around
privies, houses, and other buildings used by him; remove all rubbish from any
grounds which he has occupied ; and leave the roads, all parts of the premises and
adjacent property affected by his operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition .
D . It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair, rebuild, or restore to its
former conditions, any and all portions of existing utilities, structures, equipment,
appurtenances, trees and shrubs, or facilities, other than those to be paid for under the
specifications, which may be disturbed or damaged due to his construction operations .
E. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed by him
and his subcontractors and on completion of the work shall deliver the facilities
undamaged and in fresh and new-appearing condition.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
_. 02206-1
SECTION 02206 - SITE CLEANUP & RESTORATION
1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
required or necessary to clean up the site after the construction is completed and to
restore items disturbed or damaged due to his construction operation .
2• GENERAL
A . During the progress of the project, the work and the adjacent areas affected thereby
shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition. All rubbish, surplus materials, and
unused construction equipment shall be removed . All damage shall be repaired so
that the public and private property owners will be inconvenienced as little as
possible.
B . Where material or debris has been deposited in watercourses, ditches, gutters, drains,
or catch-basins as a result of the Contractor' s operations, such material or debris shall
be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the work,
and the ditches, channels, drains, etc., shall be kept clean .
C . Before the completion ofthe project, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise especially
directed or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and
structures which he builds; remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other
construction equipment furnished by him; remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover
all organic matter and material containing organic matter in, under, and around
privies, houses, and other buildings used by him; remove all rubbish from any
grounds which he has occupied ; and leave the roads, all parts of the premises and
adjacent property affected by his operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition .
D . It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair, rebuild, or restore to its
former conditions, any and all portions of existing utilities, structures, equipment,
appurtenances, trees and shrubs, or facilities, other than those to be paid for under the
specifications, which may be disturbed or damaged due to his construction operations .
E. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed by him
and his subcontractors and on completion of the work shall deliver the facilities
undamaged and in fresh and new-appearing condition.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
_. 02206-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02220
CIVIL SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A10. 6( 1990) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations
1 .02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Owner's Representative.
Remove rubbish and debris daily from the project site; do not allow accumulations inside or
outside the buildings. The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and
materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris . Rubbish and debris shall be removed
from the property daily, unless otherwise directed, to avoid accumulation at the demolition ' t
site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Owner' s
Representative.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
Work Plan:
When the extents of demolition are extensive, the Owner shall require a Work Plan. The
procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall be set forth in the Work Plan.
The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, including procedures and
methods to provide necessary supports, lateral bracing and shoring when required, careful
removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which
is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection
Of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and
equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations. The Work Plan
shall include procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be
salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility
services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and
of the sequence of operations .
A Work Plan is not required for this project.
1 .04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. hi addition to the
requirements of the "Contract Clauses," safety requirements shall conform with ANSI
A10 .6.
02220 - 1 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02220
CIVIL SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A10. 6( 1990) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations
1 .02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Owner's Representative.
Remove rubbish and debris daily from the project site; do not allow accumulations inside or
outside the buildings. The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and
materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris . Rubbish and debris shall be removed
from the property daily, unless otherwise directed, to avoid accumulation at the demolition ' t
site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Owner' s
Representative.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
Work Plan:
When the extents of demolition are extensive, the Owner shall require a Work Plan. The
procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall be set forth in the Work Plan.
The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, including procedures and
methods to provide necessary supports, lateral bracing and shoring when required, careful
removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which
is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection
Of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and
equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations. The Work Plan
shall include procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be
salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility
services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and
of the sequence of operations .
A Work Plan is not required for this project.
1 .04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. hi addition to the
requirements of the "Contract Clauses," safety requirements shall conform with ANSI
A10 .6.
02220 - 1 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02220
CIVIL SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A10. 6( 1990) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations
1 .02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Owner's Representative.
Remove rubbish and debris daily from the project site; do not allow accumulations inside or
outside the buildings. The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and
materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris . Rubbish and debris shall be removed
from the property daily, unless otherwise directed, to avoid accumulation at the demolition ' t
site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Owner' s
Representative.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
Work Plan:
When the extents of demolition are extensive, the Owner shall require a Work Plan. The
procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall be set forth in the Work Plan.
The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, including procedures and
methods to provide necessary supports, lateral bracing and shoring when required, careful
removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which
is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection
Of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and
equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations. The Work Plan
shall include procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be
salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility
services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and
of the sequence of operations .
A Work Plan is not required for this project.
1 .04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. hi addition to the
requirements of the "Contract Clauses," safety requirements shall conform with ANSI
A10 .6.
02220 - 1 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
A. Notifications
Furnish timely notification to the Owner's Representative in writing 10 working days prior
to the commencement of work.
1 .05 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in
the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Sweep pavements as
often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage.
1 .06 PROTECTION
A. Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic
barricades with flashing lights.
B . Existing Work
Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine
the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The Contractor shall
take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be
reused, or to remain the property of the Owner; any damaged items shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall coordinate the
work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing,
and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not
overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to
remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by
demolition or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have
Owner's Representative approval .
C. Protected Trees
Protected trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition, and
which are indicated to be left in place, shall be protected by a minimum 4 foot high fence.
The fence shall be securely erected around the critical root zone of individual trees or
follow the outer perimeter of branches (drip line) of clumps of trees. Any tree designated
to remain which are damaged during the work under this contract shall be replaced in kind
or as approved by the Owner's Representative. Owner' s representative shall inspect fence
Prior to any nearby work commencing.
D. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities
and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering
of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical
utilities. The Contractor shall ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left
unsupported and shall be responsible for placing and securing bracing, shoring, or lateral
02220 - 2 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
A . M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC .
590 N.W. MERCANTILE PLACE
PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
(772) 924-3575 OFFICE - (772j924-3580 Fax
April 30, 2007
Indian River County Engineering Department
Attn : Chris Kafer, P.E.
1840 25'h Street
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
Re: Geotechnical Services for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL1825 -2
Ladies and Gentlemen:
A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc. is pleased to submit this geotechnical report for the
referenced project. This letter describes the project and its location, explains our field
explorations and findings , presents background information from outside references, discusses
our findings and concludes with our estimate of the average wet season high water table.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project site is an approximately 4 '/z acre tract in the southwestern quadrant of Section 33 ,
Township 31S , Range 39E. The east end is bounded by the lateral ` G ' canal and the south end by
77"' Street.
The project consists of a maintenance complex with access drives and parking areas. Stormwater
runoff will be handled with a pond located in the northeast comer of the site.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The subsurface conditions at the project site were explored on April 10, 2007, with two (2)
Auger borings in the proposed pond . The auger borings were performed in general accordance
with ASTM D 1452, "Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings".
The approximate locations of the explorations are noted on the Boring Location Plan . The
borings were located based on the provided plans, tree survey and estimated distances to
distinguishable landmarks . The depths on the boring logs are below the ground surface at the t
time the borings were completed. I f
In addition to the stormwater management explorations, A. M . Engineering also completed the
geotechnical explorations for the proposed Indian River County Engineering Departments '
- I .
Maintenance Complex submitted under separate report numbered PSL1825
a
x�
r,
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
A. Notifications
Furnish timely notification to the Owner's Representative in writing 10 working days prior
to the commencement of work.
1 .05 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in
the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Sweep pavements as
often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage.
1 .06 PROTECTION
A. Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic
barricades with flashing lights.
B . Existing Work
Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine
the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The Contractor shall
take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be
reused, or to remain the property of the Owner; any damaged items shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall coordinate the
work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing,
and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not
overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to
remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by
demolition or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have
Owner's Representative approval .
C. Protected Trees
Protected trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition, and
which are indicated to be left in place, shall be protected by a minimum 4 foot high fence.
The fence shall be securely erected around the critical root zone of individual trees or
follow the outer perimeter of branches (drip line) of clumps of trees. Any tree designated
to remain which are damaged during the work under this contract shall be replaced in kind
or as approved by the Owner's Representative. Owner' s representative shall inspect fence
Prior to any nearby work commencing.
D. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities
and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering
of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical
utilities. The Contractor shall ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left
unsupported and shall be responsible for placing and securing bracing, shoring, or lateral
02220 - 2 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
A. Notifications
Furnish timely notification to the Owner's Representative in writing 10 working days prior
to the commencement of work.
1 .05 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in
the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Sweep pavements as
often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage.
1 .06 PROTECTION
A. Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic
barricades with flashing lights.
B . Existing Work
Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine
the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The Contractor shall
take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be
reused, or to remain the property of the Owner; any damaged items shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall coordinate the
work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing,
and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not
overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to
remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by
demolition or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have
Owner's Representative approval .
C. Protected Trees
Protected trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition, and
which are indicated to be left in place, shall be protected by a minimum 4 foot high fence.
The fence shall be securely erected around the critical root zone of individual trees or
follow the outer perimeter of branches (drip line) of clumps of trees. Any tree designated
to remain which are damaged during the work under this contract shall be replaced in kind
or as approved by the Owner's Representative. Owner' s representative shall inspect fence
Prior to any nearby work commencing.
D. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities
and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering
of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical
utilities. The Contractor shall ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left
unsupported and shall be responsible for placing and securing bracing, shoring, or lateral
02220 - 2 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
Performed under this contract.
E. Protection of Personnel
During the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the
areas being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and
around the demolition site.
1 .07 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be
permitted.
1 .08 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled
in the trades involved. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged
items with new undamaged items as approved by the Owner' s Representative.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A. Utilities and Related Equipment
Remove existing utilities, as indicated or as deemed necessary during uncovering by the '-
work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the
specific utility and approved by the Owner ' s Representative. When utility lines are
encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Owner ' s Representative shall be
notified prior to further work in that area.
B . Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated on the Drawings. At
the connection of new asphalt to existing asphalt, the asphalt, including aggregate base
shall be scarified to a depth of I % inches below new finish grade. Provide neat sawcuts at
limits of pavement removal as indicated.
C. Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Make each cut in
concrete perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break
out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished
work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.
02220 - 3 02220 — Civil site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
Performed under this contract.
E. Protection of Personnel
During the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the
areas being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and
around the demolition site.
1 .07 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be
permitted.
1 .08 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled
in the trades involved. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged
items with new undamaged items as approved by the Owner' s Representative.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A. Utilities and Related Equipment
Remove existing utilities, as indicated or as deemed necessary during uncovering by the '-
work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the
specific utility and approved by the Owner ' s Representative. When utility lines are
encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Owner ' s Representative shall be
notified prior to further work in that area.
B . Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated on the Drawings. At
the connection of new asphalt to existing asphalt, the asphalt, including aggregate base
shall be scarified to a depth of I % inches below new finish grade. Provide neat sawcuts at
limits of pavement removal as indicated.
C. Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Make each cut in
concrete perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break
out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished
work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.
02220 - 3 02220 — Civil site Demolition
` I
A. M . ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. d
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning \
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
FINDINGS
The terrain at the project site was relatively flat . The grade at the project site was estimated to be
even with 77`h Street at the time of our explorations . Vegetation at the site included pines,
palmettos, oaks, shrubs and some cleared areas . A 3 -foot deep swale ran along the south side of
the site, and the Lateral "G" Canal along the east side.
Based on the spot elevations in the Site Plan prepared by Carter Associates , Inc . (not dated), the
ground surface in the proposed pond sloped up from approximately elevation 18 . 5 feet on the
north end to 20 feet on the south end . The bottom of the adjacent Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 13 . 5 feet, and the banks were between elevation 20 and 21 feet. The ground
surface sloped down from elevation 22 feet on the west side of the site to below 19 feet in the
northeast corner where the proposed pond is located.
The subsurface soils encountered in the borings consisted of fine sand with minimal silt from the
existing ground surface to the bottom of the borings at depths of 11 feet. These findings were
consistent with the borings performed throughout the remainder of the site.
Ground water was encountered at 5 and 3 '/4 feet below existing grade at the completion of the
borings, approximately elevation 15 feet . The water level in the Lateral "G" Canal was
approximately 6 feet below existing grade; about 2 feet of water were observed. The elevation of
the water surface was between 14 and 15 feet. It should be noted that there were heavy
downpours in the area the night before our field explorations, ddd
USGS TOPOGRAPHICAL AND USDA SOIL SURVEY INFORMATION
we reviewed the USGS 7 . 5 -minute series quadrangle topographic map of the area, entitled Vero
Beach . The map was revised based on aerial photographs taken in 1983 . The USGS map showed
the project site is located in a relatively flat, low, wooded area with an elevation between 15 and
20 feet NGVD . The site is between the Atlantic Coastal Ridge on the east and the slightly higher
savannas on the west. A mine or quarry with two lakes/pits is east and southeast of the project
site; the water surfaces are between elevations 20 and 25 feet NGVD . The Lateral "G" Canal is
located east of the project site and there are several small lakes and other canals in the area.
The site is shown on sheet number 21 of the Soil Survey of the Indian River County Area,
Florida, issued by the U . S. Dept. of Agriculture in January 1987 . According to the Soil Survey
three soil types occur within the area of the project site: Myakka fine sand (5) covers the western
portion of the site, EauGallie fine sand (3) the majority of the eastern side of the site, and
Pomello sand, 0 to 5 percent Slopes (21 ) the northeastern and southeastern edges of the site. It
should be noted that the Soil Survey generally extends to a maximum depth of 80 inches
(approximately 6'/4 feet) below ground surface and is not indicative of deeper soil conditions.
The USDA Soil Survey describes Myakka fine sand and EauGallie fine sand as nearly level, /—
poorly drained soils on broad flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is within 10
2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
Performed under this contract.
E. Protection of Personnel
During the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the
areas being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and
around the demolition site.
1 .07 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be
permitted.
1 .08 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled
in the trades involved. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged
items with new undamaged items as approved by the Owner' s Representative.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A. Utilities and Related Equipment
Remove existing utilities, as indicated or as deemed necessary during uncovering by the '-
work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the
specific utility and approved by the Owner ' s Representative. When utility lines are
encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Owner ' s Representative shall be
notified prior to further work in that area.
B . Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated on the Drawings. At
the connection of new asphalt to existing asphalt, the asphalt, including aggregate base
shall be scarified to a depth of I % inches below new finish grade. Provide neat sawcuts at
limits of pavement removal as indicated.
C. Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Make each cut in
concrete perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break
out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished
work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.
02220 - 3 02220 — Civil site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A. Title to Materials
Except where specified in other sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not
reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Owner's
property. Title to materials resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Owner's Representative of the
Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Owner 's
Representative to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or
loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Materials and equipment shall
not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site .
B . Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment indicated on the Drawings to be reused or
relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses . See Section 02300 —
"Site Earthwork" for disposition of all unsuitable fill material encountered on site.
C. Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are indicated on the Drawings and/orspecified to
be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of theOwner, and
deliver to a storage site located on the Owner' s property.
Contractor shall salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
Material salvaged for the Contractor shall be stored as approved by the Owner' s
Representative and shall be removed from Owner property before completion of the
contract. Material salvaged for the Contractor shall not be sold on the site.
Salvaged items to remain the property of the Owner shall be removed in a manner to
prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage
or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or storage shall be repaired or
replaced to match existing items. Containers shall be properly identified as to contents.
D. Unsalvageable Material
Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to
remain in place, shall be disposed at a legal disposal site approved by the Owner' s
Representative.
3 .03 CLEANUP
Debris and rubbish shall be removed from the project site. Debris shall be removed and
transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local
regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply.
END OF SECTION
02220 - 4 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
MEMNON
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
Geotechnical Exploration for Stormwater Management Planning
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex , IRC Project No . 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No. PSL 1825 -2
inches of the ground surface for 1 up to 4 months per year. The Soil Survey describes Po
sand, 0 to 5 percent slopes as a nearly level to gently sloping and moderately well drained smello generally at oil on
low ridges and knolls on the flatwoods. The water table with unimproved drainage is
a depth of 24 to 40 inches for about 1 to 4 months during the wet season. The three soil profiles
generally consist of fine sand with little silt to depths of 6'/a feet. The soil profile for Myakka fine
/ to 43/4 feet,
sand includes a layer of weakly cemented sand with trace to little silt at a depth of 4'
and the soil profile for EauGallie fine sand includes a layer of sand with some silt and clay at a
depth of 4 to 5 %4 feet.
SFWMD WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT RAINFALL INFORMATION
The rainfall has been considerably lower than normal during the three months prior to our
explorations . According to the SFWMD the rainfall in Martin and St. Lucie Counties during the
30 days prior to April 10, 2007, was 41 percent of the normal; during the 30 days prior to March
lM 2007, the rainfall was 15 percent of normal; and during the 30 days prior to February 10,
2007, it was 18 percent of normal. Furthermore, a news release from the SFWMD (January 4,
2007) indicated that despite above average December rains , 2006 ranked as the sixth driest on
record. The Martin/St. Lucie Basin received only 61 percent of the expected historical average
rainfall .
„\ gg
DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS 1
The subsurface soils encountered in the auger borings corresponded well with the information
presented in the Soil Survey.
The recent rainfall history indicates that the observed water table levels are lower than normal.
I
Ground water and surface runoff will tend to flow towards the site and the canal since they are
located in the low area paralleling the coastal ridge. The presence of the Lateral "G" Canal
adjacent to the proposed pond and the pervious nature of the soils underlying the pond area
indicate that the actual wet season water table levels will be strongly influenced by the water
level of the canal .
a
Based on the above data and the results of our field exploration , we estimate that the average wet
season high water table level is I foot or less above the level of the Lateral "G" Canal . However,
should rainfall intensity and duration or total rainfall quantities exceed the normally anticipated
rainfall quantities, the groundwater level may exceed our estimate of the average wet season
high groundwater level .
LIMITATIONS
This report is for the exclusive use of the Indian River County Engineering Department in the
design and construction of the previously described project. The right to rely on this report may
_ not be assigned without written permission of A. M. Engineering and Testing, Inc.
F
3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A. Title to Materials
Except where specified in other sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not
reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Owner's
property. Title to materials resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Owner's Representative of the
Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Owner 's
Representative to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or
loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Materials and equipment shall
not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site .
B . Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment indicated on the Drawings to be reused or
relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses . See Section 02300 —
"Site Earthwork" for disposition of all unsuitable fill material encountered on site.
C. Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are indicated on the Drawings and/orspecified to
be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of theOwner, and
deliver to a storage site located on the Owner' s property.
Contractor shall salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
Material salvaged for the Contractor shall be stored as approved by the Owner' s
Representative and shall be removed from Owner property before completion of the
contract. Material salvaged for the Contractor shall not be sold on the site.
Salvaged items to remain the property of the Owner shall be removed in a manner to
prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage
or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or storage shall be repaired or
replaced to match existing items. Containers shall be properly identified as to contents.
D. Unsalvageable Material
Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to
remain in place, shall be disposed at a legal disposal site approved by the Owner' s
Representative.
3 .03 CLEANUP
Debris and rubbish shall be removed from the project site. Debris shall be removed and
transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local
regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply.
END OF SECTION
02220 - 4 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A. Title to Materials
Except where specified in other sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not
reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Owner's
property. Title to materials resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Owner's Representative of the
Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Owner 's
Representative to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or
loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Materials and equipment shall
not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site .
B . Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment indicated on the Drawings to be reused or
relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses . See Section 02300 —
"Site Earthwork" for disposition of all unsuitable fill material encountered on site.
C. Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are indicated on the Drawings and/orspecified to
be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of theOwner, and
deliver to a storage site located on the Owner' s property.
Contractor shall salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
Material salvaged for the Contractor shall be stored as approved by the Owner' s
Representative and shall be removed from Owner property before completion of the
contract. Material salvaged for the Contractor shall not be sold on the site.
Salvaged items to remain the property of the Owner shall be removed in a manner to
prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage
or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or storage shall be repaired or
replaced to match existing items. Containers shall be properly identified as to contents.
D. Unsalvageable Material
Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to
remain in place, shall be disposed at a legal disposal site approved by the Owner' s
Representative.
3 .03 CLEANUP
Debris and rubbish shall be removed from the project site. Debris shall be removed and
transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local
regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply.
END OF SECTION
02220 - 4 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
SECTION 02250 - SOIL POISONING
A . Compound application shall be done by an established and certified pest control
organization as per Section 815 -3 . 8 of Section 815 of the Minimum Property
Standards for 1 & 2 living units, Federal Housing Administration (November 1966) .
B . The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee stating the
concentration of the poison utilized, the rate and the method of application . The
guarantee shall be for a period of not less than five (5) years, with the cost for a five
(5) year inspection and protection program to be included in the base bid.
C. The Contractor shall not begin soil treatment until such time as the subgrade
preparation is completed and ready for the vapor barrier installation.
D. The below listed chemicals are toxic to plant and animal life and are to be applied,
with due caution, only by experienced personnel . Apply to those areas to be treated,
one ( 1 ) of the following chemicals, at not less than the designated concentration
applied in a water emulsion .
1 . Dursban TC 1 %
2 . Probuild TC 1 %
3 . Premise 1 %
4 . Termidor 1 %
1
E. Apply an overall treatment of toxicant, at a rate of one ( 1 ) gallon per ten ( 10 square
feet, under the entire area ofthe building floor slab and to a distance of 5 '- 0 " beyond
the building perimeter where it is abutted by a slab/walkway or paving. Apply
additional toxicant, at a rate of two (2) gallons per lin. ft. , to expansion joints and
where the floor slab is penetrated by floor drains.
* '' END OF SECTION * x *
02250- 1
SECTION 02250 - SOIL POISONING
A . Compound application shall be done by an established and certified pest control
organization as per Section 815 -3 . 8 of Section 815 of the Minimum Property
Standards for 1 & 2 living units, Federal Housing Administration (November 1966) .
B . The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee stating the
concentration of the poison utilized, the rate and the method of application . The
guarantee shall be for a period of not less than five (5) years, with the cost for a five
(5) year inspection and protection program to be included in the base bid.
C. The Contractor shall not begin soil treatment until such time as the subgrade
preparation is completed and ready for the vapor barrier installation.
D. The below listed chemicals are toxic to plant and animal life and are to be applied,
with due caution, only by experienced personnel . Apply to those areas to be treated,
one ( 1 ) of the following chemicals, at not less than the designated concentration
applied in a water emulsion .
1 . Dursban TC 1 %
2 . Probuild TC 1 %
3 . Premise 1 %
4 . Termidor 1 %
1
E. Apply an overall treatment of toxicant, at a rate of one ( 1 ) gallon per ten ( 10 square
feet, under the entire area ofthe building floor slab and to a distance of 5 '- 0 " beyond
the building perimeter where it is abutted by a slab/walkway or paving. Apply
additional toxicant, at a rate of two (2) gallons per lin. ft. , to expansion joints and
where the floor slab is penetrated by floor drains.
* '' END OF SECTION * x *
02250- 1
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. {
Geotechnical Exploration for Stom-1water Management Planning e
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex, IRC Project No. 0710
A. M. Engineering Project No . PSL 1825 -2
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices in the State of Florida. No other warranty, expressed or implied , is made. Our
recommendations are based on the project information furnished to us, the results of our field
explorations and our past experience. They do not reflect variations in subsurface conditions that
may exist in unexplored areas of the site . The nature and extent of such variations may not
become evident until further explorations are made or construction is underway. Should such
variations be observed, we recommend that A. M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. be requested to
observe the actual site conditions and re-evaluate our recommendations, if necessary.
Environmental concerns , including (but not limited to) the possibility that hazardous materials or
petroleum contaminated soils or groundwater may be present on the project site, were not
included in the scope of work . Furthermore, our explorations did not include determination or
delineation of "wetland" areas .
GPS readings at a specific location are subject to some variability due to the satellite coverage
and local conditions. An accuracy of approximately 20 feet is commonplace.
A . M . Engineering and Testing, Inc. has appreciated the opportunity to assist you with this phase
of your project. If you have any questions regarding this report or need any further information,
please call us .
Respectfully submitted,
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC. I
���
E
ichael McCready, I ebecca Grant Aseoii , P .E.
Staff Engineer Senior Geotechnical Engrnecr
Florida Registration No. 51863
RGA/MM
Attachments : Key to Soil Classification
Boring Location Plan
Boring Logs (2)
Copies : Client (2)
Carter Associates (2)
Merver-amelcompanylAM DatakIndian River County Public Works, Engineering Division - Indian River County Parks Mainienence Complex -
(IRC Project No. 0701) - PSL18250oringsi2 - Stonnwater Report doc
4
SECTION 02250 - SOIL POISONING
A . Compound application shall be done by an established and certified pest control
organization as per Section 815 -3 . 8 of Section 815 of the Minimum Property
Standards for 1 & 2 living units, Federal Housing Administration (November 1966) .
B . The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee stating the
concentration of the poison utilized, the rate and the method of application . The
guarantee shall be for a period of not less than five (5) years, with the cost for a five
(5) year inspection and protection program to be included in the base bid.
C. The Contractor shall not begin soil treatment until such time as the subgrade
preparation is completed and ready for the vapor barrier installation.
D. The below listed chemicals are toxic to plant and animal life and are to be applied,
with due caution, only by experienced personnel . Apply to those areas to be treated,
one ( 1 ) of the following chemicals, at not less than the designated concentration
applied in a water emulsion .
1 . Dursban TC 1 %
2 . Probuild TC 1 %
3 . Premise 1 %
4 . Termidor 1 %
1
E. Apply an overall treatment of toxicant, at a rate of one ( 1 ) gallon per ten ( 10 square
feet, under the entire area ofthe building floor slab and to a distance of 5 '- 0 " beyond
the building perimeter where it is abutted by a slab/walkway or paving. Apply
additional toxicant, at a rate of two (2) gallons per lin. ft. , to expansion joints and
where the floor slab is penetrated by floor drains.
* '' END OF SECTION * x *
02250- 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORT{ INCLUDED
b
A . The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment, material and
transportation necessary to provide temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control
as required by appropriate government agency permits, the plans and as noted in this
specification. The Contractor shall execute and provide all necessary BMP 's, monitor ng
and maintenance as outlined in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
developed for this project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
N/A
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to clearing and commencing
earthwork or as soon as practical as site work progresses.
3 . 02 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMP 's)
A. Stabilization of Denuded Areas: No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty
30 calendar days (or 72 hours for sloped banks of 3 : 1 orgreater), excluding travel ways,
unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Engineer. During construction, denuded areas
shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter, seed and mulch, sod or some other
permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any
portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established
permanent soil stabilization measures per the construction drawings, whether by impervious
surface or landscaping.
B . Protection and Stabilization of Stockpiles : Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all
times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control
of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the
expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized
stockpile remain after thin 30 calendar days.
C. Protection of Existing Storm Sewer Systems: During construction, all storm sewer inlets
shall be protected by approved sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc. ,
which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which
must be approved by the Owner's Engineer.
D. Sediment Trapping Measures: Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences,
berms, sediment barriers (hay bales), vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap
02270 - 1 02270 — Erosion Control
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION
I . CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL CONSTITUENTS BY PARTICLE SIZE *
!GNravelFine
Particle Diameter
than 0. 0029 inch (0.074 mm) (not visible to human
— 0. 0029 inch to 0. 017 inch (0.074 mm to 0.42 nun)
um — 0. 017 inch to 0 .079 inch (0.42 to 2.0 mm)
se — 0.079 inch to 0. 19 inch ( 2. 0 to 4. 75 mm)
— 0. 19 inch to 0. 75 inch
Coarse — 0.75 inch to 3 inches
Cobbles 3 to 12 inches
Boulders Greater than 12 inches
* Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487-93)
3
II . AMOUNT OF MINOR CONSTITUENTS IN SOIL
R
t
f
Content of Minor SOIL Constituents Modifier Content of ORGANIC Components *
(Shell, Silt, etc .)* t
0% to 5 % Trace 1 % to 2 %
5 % to 12% Little 2% to 4 %
12 % to 30% Some 4% to 8 %
30% to 50%
And Greater than 8 %
* Approximations based on visual, examination of samples and results of laboratory analyses,
if available.
III. CORRELATION OF RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
WITH STANDARD PENETRATION RESISTANCE N #
AND CONE PENETROMETER RESISTANCE
SANDS and GRAVEL1
SILTS and CLAYS
Blows / foot Relative Cone Blows / foot Cone
N Density Resistance N Consistency Resistance
(ts ge
(ts
0 - 4 Ve loose 0 - 15 0 - 2 Vsa soft 0 - 3
5 - 10 Loose 20 - 40
3 - 4 Soft 4 - 6
11 - 20 Firm 40 - 80 5 - 8 Firm 7 - 12
21 — 30 Medium dense 85 — 120 9 - 15 Stiff 13 - 25
31 - 50 Dense 125 - 200 16 - 30 Verystiff 25 - 50 -`
Over 50 Ve dense Over 200 Over 30 Hard Over 50
--
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORT{ INCLUDED
b
A . The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment, material and
transportation necessary to provide temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control
as required by appropriate government agency permits, the plans and as noted in this
specification. The Contractor shall execute and provide all necessary BMP 's, monitor ng
and maintenance as outlined in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
developed for this project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
N/A
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to clearing and commencing
earthwork or as soon as practical as site work progresses.
3 . 02 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMP 's)
A. Stabilization of Denuded Areas: No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty
30 calendar days (or 72 hours for sloped banks of 3 : 1 orgreater), excluding travel ways,
unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Engineer. During construction, denuded areas
shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter, seed and mulch, sod or some other
permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any
portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established
permanent soil stabilization measures per the construction drawings, whether by impervious
surface or landscaping.
B . Protection and Stabilization of Stockpiles : Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all
times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control
of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the
expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized
stockpile remain after thin 30 calendar days.
C. Protection of Existing Storm Sewer Systems: During construction, all storm sewer inlets
shall be protected by approved sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc. ,
which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which
must be approved by the Owner's Engineer.
D. Sediment Trapping Measures: Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences,
berms, sediment barriers (hay bales), vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap
02270 - 1 02270 — Erosion Control
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORT{ INCLUDED
b
A . The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment, material and
transportation necessary to provide temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control
as required by appropriate government agency permits, the plans and as noted in this
specification. The Contractor shall execute and provide all necessary BMP 's, monitor ng
and maintenance as outlined in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
developed for this project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
N/A
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to clearing and commencing
earthwork or as soon as practical as site work progresses.
3 . 02 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMP 's)
A. Stabilization of Denuded Areas: No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty
30 calendar days (or 72 hours for sloped banks of 3 : 1 orgreater), excluding travel ways,
unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Engineer. During construction, denuded areas
shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter, seed and mulch, sod or some other
permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any
portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established
permanent soil stabilization measures per the construction drawings, whether by impervious
surface or landscaping.
B . Protection and Stabilization of Stockpiles : Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all
times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control
of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the
expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized
stockpile remain after thin 30 calendar days.
C. Protection of Existing Storm Sewer Systems: During construction, all storm sewer inlets
shall be protected by approved sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc. ,
which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which
must be approved by the Owner's Engineer.
D. Sediment Trapping Measures: Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences,
berms, sediment barriers (hay bales), vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap
02270 - 1 02270 — Erosion Control
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
sediment and/or prevent the transportation of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into
existing water bodies, must be installed, constructed or, in case of vegetative buffers,
protected from disturbance, as a fust step in the land alteration process .
E. W orking in or Crossing Waterways or Water Bodies: Land alteration and construction shall
be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent
buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible,
and barriers shall be used to prevent access . Where in channel work cannot be avoided,
precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development
and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during
land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel
work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream
side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity.
Whenever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be
provided by the Contractor and removed when construction completed. The area of the
crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed
prior to any construction activity.
F . Swales, Ditches and Channels:: All swales; ditches and channel leading from the. site shall.
be sodded within three (3 ) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc . ; including
detention areas will be sodded prior to substantial completion.
G . Underground Utility Construction: The construction of underground utility lines and other
structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
1 . No more than 100 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any time;
2 . Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be
cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the
slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
3 . 03 PERFORMANCE
A. Maintenance: All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially
after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
B . Compliance: Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine
and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as, but not limited to, issuance of a
" Stop Work Order" .
END OF SECTION
02270 — Erosion Control
02270 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
sediment and/or prevent the transportation of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into
existing water bodies, must be installed, constructed or, in case of vegetative buffers,
protected from disturbance, as a fust step in the land alteration process .
E. W orking in or Crossing Waterways or Water Bodies: Land alteration and construction shall
be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent
buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible,
and barriers shall be used to prevent access . Where in channel work cannot be avoided,
precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development
and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during
land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel
work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream
side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity.
Whenever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be
provided by the Contractor and removed when construction completed. The area of the
crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed
prior to any construction activity.
F . Swales, Ditches and Channels:: All swales; ditches and channel leading from the. site shall.
be sodded within three (3 ) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc . ; including
detention areas will be sodded prior to substantial completion.
G . Underground Utility Construction: The construction of underground utility lines and other
structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
1 . No more than 100 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any time;
2 . Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be
cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the
slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
3 . 03 PERFORMANCE
A. Maintenance: All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially
after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
B . Compliance: Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine
and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as, but not limited to, issuance of a
" Stop Work Order" .
END OF SECTION
02270 — Erosion Control
02270 - 2
5
/ d
i i,u dl a r 1 Vj axi
Va
s r
\
A � yyy
t y
IT
q� t1
' ° ar P J :rW P-I aH r` t h Sxt ti 2mj"' { h x 41 f S x OC4
x Y r a rLZ
c
41,
lr
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
sediment and/or prevent the transportation of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into
existing water bodies, must be installed, constructed or, in case of vegetative buffers,
protected from disturbance, as a fust step in the land alteration process .
E. W orking in or Crossing Waterways or Water Bodies: Land alteration and construction shall
be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent
buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible,
and barriers shall be used to prevent access . Where in channel work cannot be avoided,
precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development
and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during
land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel
work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream
side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity.
Whenever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be
provided by the Contractor and removed when construction completed. The area of the
crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed
prior to any construction activity.
F . Swales, Ditches and Channels:: All swales; ditches and channel leading from the. site shall.
be sodded within three (3 ) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc . ; including
detention areas will be sodded prior to substantial completion.
G . Underground Utility Construction: The construction of underground utility lines and other
structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
1 . No more than 100 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any time;
2 . Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be
cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the
slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
3 . 03 PERFORMANCE
A. Maintenance: All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially
after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
B . Compliance: Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine
and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as, but not limited to, issuance of a
" Stop Work Order" .
END OF SECTION
02270 — Erosion Control
02270 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02300
SITE EARTHWORK
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1 .02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, pavements and landscaped areas.
2 . Excavating and backfilling for underground sewers, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances.
3 . Excavating, backfilling and grading for ditches, berms and swales.
B . Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16
sections for excavating and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and
electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances.
tv,
C. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is
specified elsewhere in Division 2.
1 . 03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and
subsequent disposal of materials removed.
B . Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations
or dimensions without specific direction of the Project Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Project Architect/Engineer, shall be at the
Contractor' s expense.
1 . Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by
extending indicated bottom of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill maybe used to bring elevations to proper
position, when acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer.
C. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as
specified for authorized excavations as same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Project Architect/Engineer.
D. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify
the Project Architect/Engineer, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Project
Architect/Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are
unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace
excavated material as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. The Contract Sum maybe
adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.
02300 - 1 02300 — Site Earthwork
A. M. ENGINEERING AND TESTING, INC.
590 N.W- MERCANTILE PLACE, PORT ST. LUCIE, FLORIDA 34986
PHONE (772) 924-3575 FAX (772) 924-3580
AUGER BORINGS (ASTM D-1452)
Client: Indian River County Public Works, Engineering Division
Project : Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex ProjectLab No:: PSL1825
Indian River County, Florida 2
Elevation : Existing Grade Test Date: April 10, 2007
Technician : S. Conboy
TEST LOCATION: SW - 1 N27 . 73457° W80.442250
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 '/2 Li ht brown fine sand
1 '/2 - 2 %2 Brown fine sand
2 %2 - 5 Li ht brown fine sand
5 - 8 %2 Brown fine sand , trace silt
8V2 1 1 Brown fine sand
Water table at 5 feet below around surface
TEST LOCATION : SW - 2 N27. 73497° W80 .44225 °
t
Depth (feet) Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks)
0 - 1 %2 Li ht brown fine sand, trace roots
1 %2 - 2 %2 Dark brown Fne sand, trace silt
2 '/2 - 8 Gra ish brown fine sand
8 - 9V2 Brown fine sand, trace silt
9 %2 - 1 1 Brown fine sand
(
r
(
Water table at 314 feet below ground surface _
k
TEST LOCATION: AB -
Depth
B -Depth (feet)
Description (color, texture, consistency, remarks) .t
t
i
)
1
Water table at feet below ound surface
`s
Il Ser ver-amelcon2panYUMDafaVndian River County Public Works. Engineering Division - r
PS118251Boringsl2 - SW (1-2)-dot g Indian River Caun(y Parks Maintenance Complex (IRC Projec( Na. O70IJ - T.
i
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02300
SITE EARTHWORK
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1 .02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, pavements and landscaped areas.
2 . Excavating and backfilling for underground sewers, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances.
3 . Excavating, backfilling and grading for ditches, berms and swales.
B . Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16
sections for excavating and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and
electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances.
tv,
C. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is
specified elsewhere in Division 2.
1 . 03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and
subsequent disposal of materials removed.
B . Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations
or dimensions without specific direction of the Project Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Project Architect/Engineer, shall be at the
Contractor' s expense.
1 . Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by
extending indicated bottom of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill maybe used to bring elevations to proper
position, when acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer.
C. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as
specified for authorized excavations as same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Project Architect/Engineer.
D. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify
the Project Architect/Engineer, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Project
Architect/Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are
unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace
excavated material as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. The Contract Sum maybe
adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.
02300 - 1 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02300
SITE EARTHWORK
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1 .02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, pavements and landscaped areas.
2 . Excavating and backfilling for underground sewers, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances.
3 . Excavating, backfilling and grading for ditches, berms and swales.
B . Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16
sections for excavating and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and
electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances.
tv,
C. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is
specified elsewhere in Division 2.
1 . 03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and
subsequent disposal of materials removed.
B . Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations
or dimensions without specific direction of the Project Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Project Architect/Engineer, shall be at the
Contractor' s expense.
1 . Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by
extending indicated bottom of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill maybe used to bring elevations to proper
position, when acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer.
C. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as
specified for authorized excavations as same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Project Architect/Engineer.
D. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify
the Project Architect/Engineer, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Project
Architect/Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are
unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace
excavated material as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. The Contract Sum maybe
adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.
02300 - 1 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on a unit
cost basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in the work.
E. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular sub-
base (if required), base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
F. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features
occurring above or below ground surface.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to the Project Architect/Engineer from the
testing services, with copy to Contractor, and Owner:
1 . Test reports on borrow material.
2. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with
specified requirements.
3 . Field reports : in-place soil density tests.
4. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered.
5 . Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of
each strata tested.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Trenching to comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P. Contractor to
provide written assurance of compliance.
C. Testing and Inspection Service : The Contractor will employ and pay for a qualified
independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and
inspection service during earthwork operations.
D. Degree of Compaction: Required compaction is expressed as a percentage of maximum density
by test procedures of ASTM D 1557.
1 .06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Bidders shall inform themselves of location and nature of work, character of equipment and
facilities needed for performance of work, general and local conditions prevailing at site, and
other matters which may in any way affect work under this contract in accordance with
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B . Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design
and are available to the Contractor for review and compliance with recommendations.
Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy of continuity
between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this data by the Contractor.
02300 - 2 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on a unit
cost basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in the work.
E. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular sub-
base (if required), base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
F. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features
occurring above or below ground surface.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to the Project Architect/Engineer from the
testing services, with copy to Contractor, and Owner:
1 . Test reports on borrow material.
2. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with
specified requirements.
3 . Field reports : in-place soil density tests.
4. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered.
5 . Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of
each strata tested.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Trenching to comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P. Contractor to
provide written assurance of compliance.
C. Testing and Inspection Service : The Contractor will employ and pay for a qualified
independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and
inspection service during earthwork operations.
D. Degree of Compaction: Required compaction is expressed as a percentage of maximum density
by test procedures of ASTM D 1557.
1 .06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Bidders shall inform themselves of location and nature of work, character of equipment and
facilities needed for performance of work, general and local conditions prevailing at site, and
other matters which may in any way affect work under this contract in accordance with
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B . Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design
and are available to the Contractor for review and compliance with recommendations.
Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy of continuity
between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this data by the Contractor.
02300 - 2 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on a unit
cost basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in the work.
E. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular sub-
base (if required), base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
F. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features
occurring above or below ground surface.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to the Project Architect/Engineer from the
testing services, with copy to Contractor, and Owner:
1 . Test reports on borrow material.
2. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with
specified requirements.
3 . Field reports : in-place soil density tests.
4. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered.
5 . Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of
each strata tested.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Trenching to comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P. Contractor to
provide written assurance of compliance.
C. Testing and Inspection Service : The Contractor will employ and pay for a qualified
independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and
inspection service during earthwork operations.
D. Degree of Compaction: Required compaction is expressed as a percentage of maximum density
by test procedures of ASTM D 1557.
1 .06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Bidders shall inform themselves of location and nature of work, character of equipment and
facilities needed for performance of work, general and local conditions prevailing at site, and
other matters which may in any way affect work under this contract in accordance with
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B . Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design
and are available to the Contractor for review and compliance with recommendations.
Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy of continuity
between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this data by the Contractor.
02300 - 2 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by
Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum
will be authorized for such additional exploration.
2. The Soils Report shall be a part of these specifications and shall have the same
force and effect as the specifications.
C. Existing Utilities : Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities
are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations.
1 . Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult Project Architect/Engineer and utility owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective
services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities immediately to
satisfaction of utility owners.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others,
during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by the Project
Architect/Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have
been provided.
a. Provide a minimum of 48 -hour notice to the Project Architect/ Engineer,,
and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
3 . Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated
to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are
active.
D. Use of Explosives : Use of explosives is not permitted.
E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work'
and post with warning lights.
1 . Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
3 . Perform excavation by hand within drip-line of large trees selected to remain.
Protect root systems from damage or dry out to the greatest extent possible. Maintain
moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap.
F. Maintain existing bench marks, monuments and other reference points, if disturbed or
destroyed, replace as directed by the project Architect/Engineer.
G. Condition of Premises: Accept site as found and excavate, fill and backfill site as indicated on
the drawings and as specified in this Section.
02300 - 3 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and all operations required to
clear and grub portions of the site, and areas outside the site within the Indian River County
road right-of-way and the Indian River Farms Water Control District canal right-of-way, as
needed to access the limits of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - None
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the complete removal and disposal of all trees, brush,
logs, stumps, roots, weeds, rubbish, rocks, structures designated to be removed, concrete and
other deleterious material and obstructions resting upon or protruding through the surface of
the ground. Stumps, roots 3 " and over and similar obstructions shall be removed to a
minimum depth of 2 feet below the existing ground. All structural items shall be excavated
to full depth, completely removed, and the excavation backfilled per these specifications .
3 .02 DISPOSAL
A. Burning On Site
1 . Burning of cleared and grubbed materials shall not be permitted on site.
B . Off Site Disposal
1 . All material shall be hauled off site by the Contractor for disposal in an
approved manner.
2 . The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and complying with the
provisions of all necessary permits .
3 . All necessary permit fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
4. No material shall be buried on site.
END OF SECTION
02110 - 1 02110 Cleaning and Grubbing
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by
Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum
will be authorized for such additional exploration.
2. The Soils Report shall be a part of these specifications and shall have the same
force and effect as the specifications.
C. Existing Utilities : Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities
are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations.
1 . Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult Project Architect/Engineer and utility owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective
services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities immediately to
satisfaction of utility owners.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others,
during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by the Project
Architect/Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have
been provided.
a. Provide a minimum of 48 -hour notice to the Project Architect/ Engineer,,
and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
3 . Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated
to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are
active.
D. Use of Explosives : Use of explosives is not permitted.
E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work'
and post with warning lights.
1 . Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
3 . Perform excavation by hand within drip-line of large trees selected to remain.
Protect root systems from damage or dry out to the greatest extent possible. Maintain
moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap.
F. Maintain existing bench marks, monuments and other reference points, if disturbed or
destroyed, replace as directed by the project Architect/Engineer.
G. Condition of Premises: Accept site as found and excavate, fill and backfill site as indicated on
the drawings and as specified in this Section.
02300 - 3 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by
Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum
will be authorized for such additional exploration.
2. The Soils Report shall be a part of these specifications and shall have the same
force and effect as the specifications.
C. Existing Utilities : Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities
are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations.
1 . Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult Project Architect/Engineer and utility owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective
services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities immediately to
satisfaction of utility owners.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others,
during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by the Project
Architect/Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have
been provided.
a. Provide a minimum of 48 -hour notice to the Project Architect/ Engineer,,
and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
3 . Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated
to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are
active.
D. Use of Explosives : Use of explosives is not permitted.
E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work'
and post with warning lights.
1 . Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
3 . Perform excavation by hand within drip-line of large trees selected to remain.
Protect root systems from damage or dry out to the greatest extent possible. Maintain
moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap.
F. Maintain existing bench marks, monuments and other reference points, if disturbed or
destroyed, replace as directed by the project Architect/Engineer.
G. Condition of Premises: Accept site as found and excavate, fill and backfill site as indicated on
the drawings and as specified in this Section.
02300 - 3 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. "Satisfactory Fill Materials" include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW and
SP properly worked by Contractor to obtain optimum moisture and compaction. Within 2 feet
of the surface of the indicated grade, limit rock size to 3 inches. Below 2 feet of the surface of
indicated grade, limit rock size to 12 inches.
B . "Unsatisfactory Materials" include materials other than "Satisfactory Fill Materials": however,
materials of any classification that are detemrined by testing laboratory as too wet or too soft
for providing a stable foundation for structure, paving and walks will be classified as
"unsatisfactory".
C. "Select Fill Material" Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone,
crushed slag, or uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less than 5%
fines passing a No . 200 sieve.
D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 - 1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4
sieve.
E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2
inches in any dimension, debris, waste, muck, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3 .02 GENERAL
A. Public Safety: Accomplish work in a manner that provides for safety of the public and workers
and provides for the protection of property.
B . Construction: Do not close, obstruct or store material or equipment in streets, sidewalks, alleys
or passageways without a permit in accordance with local ordinances, regulations, codes and
Owner approval.
C. Interference : Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads and other facilities.
D. Debris Removal : Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on site.
1 . If Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, Owner reserves the right to
cause same to be removed at Contractor's expense.
E. Erosion Repair: Take every precaution and temporary measure to prevent damage from erosion
of freshly graded areas.
02300 — Site. Earthwork
02300 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. "Satisfactory Fill Materials" include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW and
SP properly worked by Contractor to obtain optimum moisture and compaction. Within 2 feet
of the surface of the indicated grade, limit rock size to 3 inches. Below 2 feet of the surface of
indicated grade, limit rock size to 12 inches.
B . "Unsatisfactory Materials" include materials other than "Satisfactory Fill Materials": however,
materials of any classification that are detemrined by testing laboratory as too wet or too soft
for providing a stable foundation for structure, paving and walks will be classified as
"unsatisfactory".
C. "Select Fill Material" Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone,
crushed slag, or uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less than 5%
fines passing a No . 200 sieve.
D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 - 1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4
sieve.
E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2
inches in any dimension, debris, waste, muck, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3 .02 GENERAL
A. Public Safety: Accomplish work in a manner that provides for safety of the public and workers
and provides for the protection of property.
B . Construction: Do not close, obstruct or store material or equipment in streets, sidewalks, alleys
or passageways without a permit in accordance with local ordinances, regulations, codes and
Owner approval.
C. Interference : Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads and other facilities.
D. Debris Removal : Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on site.
1 . If Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, Owner reserves the right to
cause same to be removed at Contractor's expense.
E. Erosion Repair: Take every precaution and temporary measure to prevent damage from erosion
of freshly graded areas.
02300 — Site. Earthwork
02300 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. "Satisfactory Fill Materials" include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW and
SP properly worked by Contractor to obtain optimum moisture and compaction. Within 2 feet
of the surface of the indicated grade, limit rock size to 3 inches. Below 2 feet of the surface of
indicated grade, limit rock size to 12 inches.
B . "Unsatisfactory Materials" include materials other than "Satisfactory Fill Materials": however,
materials of any classification that are detemrined by testing laboratory as too wet or too soft
for providing a stable foundation for structure, paving and walks will be classified as
"unsatisfactory".
C. "Select Fill Material" Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone,
crushed slag, or uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less than 5%
fines passing a No . 200 sieve.
D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 - 1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4
sieve.
E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2
inches in any dimension, debris, waste, muck, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3 .02 GENERAL
A. Public Safety: Accomplish work in a manner that provides for safety of the public and workers
and provides for the protection of property.
B . Construction: Do not close, obstruct or store material or equipment in streets, sidewalks, alleys
or passageways without a permit in accordance with local ordinances, regulations, codes and
Owner approval.
C. Interference : Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads and other facilities.
D. Debris Removal : Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on site.
1 . If Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, Owner reserves the right to
cause same to be removed at Contractor's expense.
E. Erosion Repair: Take every precaution and temporary measure to prevent damage from erosion
of freshly graded areas.
02300 — Site. Earthwork
02300 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
1 . Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes where
settlement/washing occurs prior to acceptance of work.
2. Temporary Structures : Remove temporary structures when no longer required.
3 .03 LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Be responsible for surveys, measurements and layouts required for proper execution of work.
1 . Layout lines and grades from existing survey control system and as shown on the
Drawings.
B . Locate by stake and mark locations and elevations of the following:
1 . Elevations of existing earth cut and fill.
2 . Final grades for landscape contours.
3 . Other items as required to execute work under this Section of the specifications.
3 .04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3 .05 STRIPPING
A. Strip turf, organic material, muck surface litter, rubble and overburden for entire depth of root
system of grass or other vegetation and/or to bottom of muck layer within all areas of
construction as indicated on Site Plan(s).
B. Stockpile clean topsoil on site to be used in the final grading work as an underlayment for sod
and landscaping proposed for the site.
3 . 06 EXCAVATION
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
B. Begin excavation after stripping, clearing and compaction where applicable, has been
completed.
C. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless
of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
D. Excavations for appurtenances and structures shall conform to dimensions and elevations and
shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of
forms and installation of services, except where the concrete for walls and footings is
authorized to be deposited directly against excavation surfaces. All excavation below general
machine excavation for footings and foundations shall be hand worked. Bottoms of all
(footings and appurtenances) shall be on level planes.
E. Remove "unsatisfactory materials" encountered from the building areas.
02300 - 5 02300 — Site Earthwork
SECTION 02204 - GRASSING BY SODDING
—� 1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment and supervision required
to prepare the soil, fine grade the area and establish a healthy stand of grass by
sodding of the areas so designated on the drawings and as specified herein.
2• GENERAL
A . PREPARATION
1 ) The area to be sodded shall be clear of old sod and weeds. The area shall be
fine graded and the surface loosened, by scarifying, if necessary. If the soil
is dry it shall be moistened to provide an optimum growing condition .
B . FERTILIZER
1 ) Fertilizer shall be uniformly spread over the area to be sodded at the rate of
400 to 500 pounds per acre. The fertilizer shall have a chemical designation
of 12-8 - 8 . Soil which has a PH of 5 . 0 or lower shall, if directed by the
Engineer, have an application of dolomite lime stone, but the amount of
dolomite applied shall not raise the PH above 6 . 0.
i
C . SOD
1 ) The sod shall be St. Augustine Floratam and/or Argentine Bahia as
specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sod shall be of a tough
texture with a good mat of roots . It shall be free of weeds and other
objectionable grasses . Approximately three days prior to cutting the sod, it
shall be closely mowed and raked to remove excess growth and debris. The
sod shall be cut with sufficient thickness to retain the root system intact.
There shall be a minimum of delay between the cutting of the sod and the
laying so that it is live, fresh and uninjured when laid.
D . LAYING
1 ) No sod shall be laid until the Owner/Engineer has approved the condition of
the prepared area. The sod shall be placed with the edges in close contact.
Where the sod is laid on a slope the pieces of sod shall be laid with staggered
joints to minimize erosion along the joints and where the sod is laid in
drainage swales and ditches the joints shall be staggered in the line of flow
for the same reason. Afler the sod is laid it shall -be brought into close contact
with the soil by tamping, light rolling or other acceptable means. Where the
sod may slide due to the steep slope it shall be pegged to firm soil with wood
- pegs .
02204-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
1 . Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes where
settlement/washing occurs prior to acceptance of work.
2. Temporary Structures : Remove temporary structures when no longer required.
3 .03 LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Be responsible for surveys, measurements and layouts required for proper execution of work.
1 . Layout lines and grades from existing survey control system and as shown on the
Drawings.
B . Locate by stake and mark locations and elevations of the following:
1 . Elevations of existing earth cut and fill.
2 . Final grades for landscape contours.
3 . Other items as required to execute work under this Section of the specifications.
3 .04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3 .05 STRIPPING
A. Strip turf, organic material, muck surface litter, rubble and overburden for entire depth of root
system of grass or other vegetation and/or to bottom of muck layer within all areas of
construction as indicated on Site Plan(s).
B. Stockpile clean topsoil on site to be used in the final grading work as an underlayment for sod
and landscaping proposed for the site.
3 . 06 EXCAVATION
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
B. Begin excavation after stripping, clearing and compaction where applicable, has been
completed.
C. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless
of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
D. Excavations for appurtenances and structures shall conform to dimensions and elevations and
shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of
forms and installation of services, except where the concrete for walls and footings is
authorized to be deposited directly against excavation surfaces. All excavation below general
machine excavation for footings and foundations shall be hand worked. Bottoms of all
(footings and appurtenances) shall be on level planes.
E. Remove "unsatisfactory materials" encountered from the building areas.
02300 - 5 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
1 . Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes where
settlement/washing occurs prior to acceptance of work.
2. Temporary Structures : Remove temporary structures when no longer required.
3 .03 LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Be responsible for surveys, measurements and layouts required for proper execution of work.
1 . Layout lines and grades from existing survey control system and as shown on the
Drawings.
B . Locate by stake and mark locations and elevations of the following:
1 . Elevations of existing earth cut and fill.
2 . Final grades for landscape contours.
3 . Other items as required to execute work under this Section of the specifications.
3 .04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3 .05 STRIPPING
A. Strip turf, organic material, muck surface litter, rubble and overburden for entire depth of root
system of grass or other vegetation and/or to bottom of muck layer within all areas of
construction as indicated on Site Plan(s).
B. Stockpile clean topsoil on site to be used in the final grading work as an underlayment for sod
and landscaping proposed for the site.
3 . 06 EXCAVATION
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
B. Begin excavation after stripping, clearing and compaction where applicable, has been
completed.
C. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless
of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
D. Excavations for appurtenances and structures shall conform to dimensions and elevations and
shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of
forms and installation of services, except where the concrete for walls and footings is
authorized to be deposited directly against excavation surfaces. All excavation below general
machine excavation for footings and foundations shall be hand worked. Bottoms of all
(footings and appurtenances) shall be on level planes.
E. Remove "unsatisfactory materials" encountered from the building areas.
02300 - 5 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
F. Excavate in such a manner that quick and efficient drainage of stormwater will be affected.
G. Classify excavated materials and stockpile separately suitable soils foruse as backfill materials.
If sufficient quantities of excavated materials meeting requirements for backfill are not
available on site, provide materials meeting these requirements.
H. Stockpile excavated material suitable for use as fill and backfill.
3 .07 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having
jurisdiction. Comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P .
B . Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space
restrictions or stability of material excavated.
C. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition for all trenches in excess of 5 feet
deep. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period that excavations
will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses .
3 . 08 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area.
1 . Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points,
sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components
necessary to convey water away from excavations .
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or runoff areas . Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
B. Dewater excavations for inspection and for construction so that no concrete or fill is placed in
water and so that concrete less than 8 hours of age is not subjected to ground water pressure.
C. Keep excavations free of water while backfilling and construction therein takes place.
D. Dispose of water, resulting from dewatering operations in accordance with city, county, state
and federal regulations.
E. Conduct operations so that stormwater runoff sediment is not discharged to the adjacent lakes,
waterways, sewers, streets and adjacent properties.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
F. Excavate in such a manner that quick and efficient drainage of stormwater will be affected.
G. Classify excavated materials and stockpile separately suitable soils foruse as backfill materials.
If sufficient quantities of excavated materials meeting requirements for backfill are not
available on site, provide materials meeting these requirements.
H. Stockpile excavated material suitable for use as fill and backfill.
3 .07 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having
jurisdiction. Comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P .
B . Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space
restrictions or stability of material excavated.
C. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition for all trenches in excess of 5 feet
deep. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period that excavations
will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses .
3 . 08 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area.
1 . Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points,
sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components
necessary to convey water away from excavations .
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or runoff areas . Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
B. Dewater excavations for inspection and for construction so that no concrete or fill is placed in
water and so that concrete less than 8 hours of age is not subjected to ground water pressure.
C. Keep excavations free of water while backfilling and construction therein takes place.
D. Dispose of water, resulting from dewatering operations in accordance with city, county, state
and federal regulations.
E. Conduct operations so that stormwater runoff sediment is not discharged to the adjacent lakes,
waterways, sewers, streets and adjacent properties.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 6
E. WATERING
1 ) The sod shall be kept watered on an as needed basis for the duration of the
contract period and in no case for less than two weeks . When the grass is
watered it should be at the rate of one inch or 620 gallons per 1000 square feetO
per application. NOTE : In the event there is no irrigation system in the
area to receive the sod, the Contractor is responsible for pulling hoses
from existing hose bibs or water source in the area, for irrigating and
maintaining the sod . The cost of the water will be incurred by the
Contractor.
F . MAINTENANCE
1 ) The Contractor shall, at his expense, maintain the sodded area in a satisfactory
condition until final acceptance of the project or until the end of the two weeks
watering period, which ever is later, (see paragraph E above). Such
maintenance shall include the filling, leveling and repair of any washed or
eroded areas and the resodding of any areas which have been damaged or are
not growing satisfactorily.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
t�
02204-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
F. Excavate in such a manner that quick and efficient drainage of stormwater will be affected.
G. Classify excavated materials and stockpile separately suitable soils foruse as backfill materials.
If sufficient quantities of excavated materials meeting requirements for backfill are not
available on site, provide materials meeting these requirements.
H. Stockpile excavated material suitable for use as fill and backfill.
3 .07 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having
jurisdiction. Comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P .
B . Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space
restrictions or stability of material excavated.
C. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition for all trenches in excess of 5 feet
deep. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period that excavations
will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses .
3 . 08 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area.
1 . Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points,
sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components
necessary to convey water away from excavations .
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or runoff areas . Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
B. Dewater excavations for inspection and for construction so that no concrete or fill is placed in
water and so that concrete less than 8 hours of age is not subjected to ground water pressure.
C. Keep excavations free of water while backfilling and construction therein takes place.
D. Dispose of water, resulting from dewatering operations in accordance with city, county, state
and federal regulations.
E. Conduct operations so that stormwater runoff sediment is not discharged to the adjacent lakes,
waterways, sewers, streets and adjacent properties.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .09 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where needed or as directed by
the Owner's Representative. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1 . Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within
drip line of trees indicated to remain.
2. Materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill shall be stockpiled and exchanged
with over excavated material from the lake systems.
3 . 10 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0. 10 foot,
and extending a sufficient distance from the footings and foundations to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction for inspection.
1 . Excavations for footings and foundations:
a. In areas of approved compacted subgrades, do not disturb bottom of:
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete
reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave
solid base to receive other work.
b. In areas requiring material exchange or densification prior to excavations,
the Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of the Geotechnical
Engineering Report for preparation of building subgrades prior to-
excavation.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance
of plus or minus 0. 10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction
for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surfaces.
3 . 11 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and
grades as indicated.
3 . 12 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT
A. Excavate trenches per requirements of Divisions 2, 15 and 16 to uniform width,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 9 to 12 inches
of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated
slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed
soil.
02300 - 7 02300 - Site Earthwork
SECTION 02206 - SITE CLEANUP & RESTORATION
1 . SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and materials
required or necessary to clean up the site after the construction is completed and to
restore items disturbed or damaged due to his construction operation .
2• GENERAL
A . During the progress of the project, the work and the adjacent areas affected thereby
shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition. All rubbish, surplus materials, and
unused construction equipment shall be removed . All damage shall be repaired so
that the public and private property owners will be inconvenienced as little as
possible.
B . Where material or debris has been deposited in watercourses, ditches, gutters, drains,
or catch-basins as a result of the Contractor' s operations, such material or debris shall
be entirely removed and satisfactorily disposed of during the progress of the work,
and the ditches, channels, drains, etc., shall be kept clean .
C . Before the completion ofthe project, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise especially
directed or permitted in writing, tear down and remove all temporary buildings and
structures which he builds; remove all temporary works, tools, and machinery or other
construction equipment furnished by him; remove, acceptably disinfect, and cover
all organic matter and material containing organic matter in, under, and around
privies, houses, and other buildings used by him; remove all rubbish from any
grounds which he has occupied ; and leave the roads, all parts of the premises and
adjacent property affected by his operations, in a neat and satisfactory condition .
D . It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair, rebuild, or restore to its
former conditions, any and all portions of existing utilities, structures, equipment,
appurtenances, trees and shrubs, or facilities, other than those to be paid for under the
specifications, which may be disturbed or damaged due to his construction operations .
E. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials and equipment installed by him
and his subcontractors and on completion of the work shall deliver the facilities
undamaged and in fresh and new-appearing condition.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
_. 02206-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .09 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where needed or as directed by
the Owner's Representative. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1 . Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within
drip line of trees indicated to remain.
2. Materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill shall be stockpiled and exchanged
with over excavated material from the lake systems.
3 . 10 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0. 10 foot,
and extending a sufficient distance from the footings and foundations to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction for inspection.
1 . Excavations for footings and foundations:
a. In areas of approved compacted subgrades, do not disturb bottom of:
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete
reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave
solid base to receive other work.
b. In areas requiring material exchange or densification prior to excavations,
the Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of the Geotechnical
Engineering Report for preparation of building subgrades prior to-
excavation.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance
of plus or minus 0. 10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction
for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surfaces.
3 . 11 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and
grades as indicated.
3 . 12 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT
A. Excavate trenches per requirements of Divisions 2, 15 and 16 to uniform width,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 9 to 12 inches
of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated
slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed
soil.
02300 - 7 02300 - Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .09 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where needed or as directed by
the Owner's Representative. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1 . Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within
drip line of trees indicated to remain.
2. Materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill shall be stockpiled and exchanged
with over excavated material from the lake systems.
3 . 10 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0. 10 foot,
and extending a sufficient distance from the footings and foundations to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction for inspection.
1 . Excavations for footings and foundations:
a. In areas of approved compacted subgrades, do not disturb bottom of:
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete
reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave
solid base to receive other work.
b. In areas requiring material exchange or densification prior to excavations,
the Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of the Geotechnical
Engineering Report for preparation of building subgrades prior to-
excavation.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance
of plus or minus 0. 10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction
for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surfaces.
3 . 11 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and
grades as indicated.
3 . 12 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT
A. Excavate trenches per requirements of Divisions 2, 15 and 16 to uniform width,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 9 to 12 inches
of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated
slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed
soil.
02300 - 7 02300 - Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
L Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand
excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on
undisturbed soil.
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench
to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill
depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve
pipe bell of loads and to ensure continuous bearing ofpipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 . 13 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A. The work consists of compaction of existing earth surfaces, (excluding rock), after excavation,
filling and compaction of said area to levels required with suitable backfill material.
B . Materials: "Satisfactory Fill Materials" shall be used in general fills and backfills. ALL fill
used under sloped ramps to be paved and within the MSE wall structure shall be "Select Fill
Material".
C. Filling and Backfilling: Place "Satisfactory Fill Material" in horizontal layers not exceeding 12
inches in loose depth. Compact as specified herein. No material shall be placed on surfaces that
are muddy.
D. Reconditioning of Subgrade: Where approved compacted subgrades are disturbed by the
Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weather, subgrade shall be scarified and
compacted as specified herein before to required density prior to further construction thereon.
Recompaction over underground utilities shall be by power driven hand tampers.
E. -Backfilling: Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been
accepted, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested, and accepted, forms
removed, and excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated
finish subgrade. Backfill shall not be placed in wet areas. Backfill materials and compaction
shall be as specified herein. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not
be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to height of backfill
above top of footing; area remaining shall be compacted by power-driven hand tampers
suitable for material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to avoid
damage.
F. Protection : Settlement or washing that occurs in backfilled areas prior to acceptance of work
shall be repaired and grades re-established to required elevations and slope.
G. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or
wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall
footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.
H. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is
authorized by the Project Arcbitect/Bngineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or
displacement of pipe systems.
02300 - 8 02300 - Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
L Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand
excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on
undisturbed soil.
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench
to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill
depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve
pipe bell of loads and to ensure continuous bearing ofpipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 . 13 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A. The work consists of compaction of existing earth surfaces, (excluding rock), after excavation,
filling and compaction of said area to levels required with suitable backfill material.
B . Materials: "Satisfactory Fill Materials" shall be used in general fills and backfills. ALL fill
used under sloped ramps to be paved and within the MSE wall structure shall be "Select Fill
Material".
C. Filling and Backfilling: Place "Satisfactory Fill Material" in horizontal layers not exceeding 12
inches in loose depth. Compact as specified herein. No material shall be placed on surfaces that
are muddy.
D. Reconditioning of Subgrade: Where approved compacted subgrades are disturbed by the
Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weather, subgrade shall be scarified and
compacted as specified herein before to required density prior to further construction thereon.
Recompaction over underground utilities shall be by power driven hand tampers.
E. -Backfilling: Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been
accepted, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested, and accepted, forms
removed, and excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated
finish subgrade. Backfill shall not be placed in wet areas. Backfill materials and compaction
shall be as specified herein. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not
be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to height of backfill
above top of footing; area remaining shall be compacted by power-driven hand tampers
suitable for material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to avoid
damage.
F. Protection : Settlement or washing that occurs in backfilled areas prior to acceptance of work
shall be repaired and grades re-established to required elevations and slope.
G. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or
wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall
footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.
H. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is
authorized by the Project Arcbitect/Bngineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or
displacement of pipe systems.
02300 - 8 02300 - Site Earthwork
� )
��
, ,
c�
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
L Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand
excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on
undisturbed soil.
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench
to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill
depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve
pipe bell of loads and to ensure continuous bearing ofpipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 . 13 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A. The work consists of compaction of existing earth surfaces, (excluding rock), after excavation,
filling and compaction of said area to levels required with suitable backfill material.
B . Materials: "Satisfactory Fill Materials" shall be used in general fills and backfills. ALL fill
used under sloped ramps to be paved and within the MSE wall structure shall be "Select Fill
Material".
C. Filling and Backfilling: Place "Satisfactory Fill Material" in horizontal layers not exceeding 12
inches in loose depth. Compact as specified herein. No material shall be placed on surfaces that
are muddy.
D. Reconditioning of Subgrade: Where approved compacted subgrades are disturbed by the
Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weather, subgrade shall be scarified and
compacted as specified herein before to required density prior to further construction thereon.
Recompaction over underground utilities shall be by power driven hand tampers.
E. -Backfilling: Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been
accepted, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested, and accepted, forms
removed, and excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated
finish subgrade. Backfill shall not be placed in wet areas. Backfill materials and compaction
shall be as specified herein. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not
be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to height of backfill
above top of footing; area remaining shall be compacted by power-driven hand tampers
suitable for material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to avoid
damage.
F. Protection : Settlement or washing that occurs in backfilled areas prior to acceptance of work
shall be repaired and grades re-established to required elevations and slope.
G. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or
wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall
footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.
H. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is
authorized by the Project Arcbitect/Bngineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or
displacement of pipe systems.
02300 - 8 02300 - Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
1 . Inspection, testing and approval by Owner's Representative, and locations
(horizontal and vertical) of underground utilities have been performed and recorded.
2 Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.
Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in
manner to prevent settlement of the structure of utilities, or leave in place if
required.
3 . Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
3 . 14 GRADING
A. General : Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform
levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and
existing grades. Grading between indicated elevations and/or contours to be uniform,
continuous and sloped as indicated on the drawings.
B . Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from
structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes as
follows:
1 . Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive stockpiled topsoil to within not
more than 0. 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations.
2. Walks : Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with
finish surface not more than 0 . 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation.
3 . Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section,
with finish surface not more than %, inch above or below required subgrade
elevation.
C . Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of %z
inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
D. Compaction : After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage
of maximum or relative density for each classification.
3 . 15 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE COURSE
A. General: Sub-base course consists of placing sub-base material, in layers of specified thickness,
over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course.
1 . Refer to Drawings and other Division 2 Paving and Sub-base Sections for paving
specifications.
B . Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope
of sub-base course.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02220
CIVIL SITE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A10. 6( 1990) Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations
1 .02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Owner's Representative.
Remove rubbish and debris daily from the project site; do not allow accumulations inside or
outside the buildings. The work includes demolition, salvage of identified items and
materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris . Rubbish and debris shall be removed
from the property daily, unless otherwise directed, to avoid accumulation at the demolition ' t
site. Materials that cannot be removed daily shall be stored in areas specified by the Owner' s
Representative.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
Work Plan:
When the extents of demolition are extensive, the Owner shall require a Work Plan. The
procedures proposed for the accomplishment of the work shall be set forth in the Work Plan.
The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, including procedures and
methods to provide necessary supports, lateral bracing and shoring when required, careful
removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which
is to remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress, and timely disconnection
Of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods and
equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations. The Work Plan
shall include procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be
salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility
services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and
of the sequence of operations .
A Work Plan is not required for this project.
1 .04 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. hi addition to the
requirements of the "Contract Clauses," safety requirements shall conform with ANSI
A10 .6.
02220 - 1 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
1 . Inspection, testing and approval by Owner's Representative, and locations
(horizontal and vertical) of underground utilities have been performed and recorded.
2 Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.
Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in
manner to prevent settlement of the structure of utilities, or leave in place if
required.
3 . Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
3 . 14 GRADING
A. General : Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform
levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and
existing grades. Grading between indicated elevations and/or contours to be uniform,
continuous and sloped as indicated on the drawings.
B . Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from
structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes as
follows:
1 . Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive stockpiled topsoil to within not
more than 0. 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations.
2. Walks : Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with
finish surface not more than 0 . 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation.
3 . Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section,
with finish surface not more than %, inch above or below required subgrade
elevation.
C . Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of %z
inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
D. Compaction : After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage
of maximum or relative density for each classification.
3 . 15 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE COURSE
A. General: Sub-base course consists of placing sub-base material, in layers of specified thickness,
over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course.
1 . Refer to Drawings and other Division 2 Paving and Sub-base Sections for paving
specifications.
B . Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope
of sub-base course.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
1 . Inspection, testing and approval by Owner's Representative, and locations
(horizontal and vertical) of underground utilities have been performed and recorded.
2 Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.
Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in
manner to prevent settlement of the structure of utilities, or leave in place if
required.
3 . Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
3 . 14 GRADING
A. General : Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform
levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and
existing grades. Grading between indicated elevations and/or contours to be uniform,
continuous and sloped as indicated on the drawings.
B . Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from
structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes as
follows:
1 . Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive stockpiled topsoil to within not
more than 0. 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations.
2. Walks : Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with
finish surface not more than 0 . 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation.
3 . Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section,
with finish surface not more than %, inch above or below required subgrade
elevation.
C . Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of %z
inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
D. Compaction : After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage
of maximum or relative density for each classification.
3 . 15 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE COURSE
A. General: Sub-base course consists of placing sub-base material, in layers of specified thickness,
over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course.
1 . Refer to Drawings and other Division 2 Paving and Sub-base Sections for paving
specifications.
B . Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope
of sub-base course.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of sub-base course to prevent lateral movement.
Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to
thickness of each sub-base course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-inch minimum width of
shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of sub-base course.
D. Placing: Place sub-base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting sub-base material during placement operations.
1 . When a compacted sub-base course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material
in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in
thickness when compacted.
3 . 16 FILL AND GRADING FOR GRASSED AREAS
A. Fill Material under Grassed Areas : Clean, satisfactory fill, free from rock and debris and of
such quality to not interfere with future installation of grass.
B . Filling and Grading for Grassed Areas: Rough grade shall be 6 inches below finish grade and
the 4 inches of base material shall be omitted.
1 . Topping: 6 inches of compacted topsoil as specified in SECTION 02302- EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
C. Filling and Grading for Landscaped Areas other than Grass: Similar, with variations per
specific plant material, as defined , illustrated and specified on the Landscape Plans.
3 . 17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Specified Tests shall be performed by the Contractor ' s Testing Agency, at the Contractor' s
expense, with results forwarded to the Project Architect/Engineer for review.
B . Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve
each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.
C. Tests of Materials shall be as follows:
1 . Soil Classification:
a. One test from each type of material encountered and/or proposed to be used.
2. Laboratory Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
a. According to ASTM D1557 one test for each material encountered and/or
proposed.
b. Field Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
c. According to ASTM D1556 one test per layer of fill per 10,000 square feet of
area, plus one test per 10,000 square feet of subgrade in cut.
3 . Control: Fill and topsoil mixture may be inspected at any stage of operation to
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of sub-base course to prevent lateral movement.
Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to
thickness of each sub-base course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-inch minimum width of
shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of sub-base course.
D. Placing: Place sub-base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting sub-base material during placement operations.
1 . When a compacted sub-base course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material
in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in
thickness when compacted.
3 . 16 FILL AND GRADING FOR GRASSED AREAS
A. Fill Material under Grassed Areas : Clean, satisfactory fill, free from rock and debris and of
such quality to not interfere with future installation of grass.
B . Filling and Grading for Grassed Areas: Rough grade shall be 6 inches below finish grade and
the 4 inches of base material shall be omitted.
1 . Topping: 6 inches of compacted topsoil as specified in SECTION 02302- EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
C. Filling and Grading for Landscaped Areas other than Grass: Similar, with variations per
specific plant material, as defined , illustrated and specified on the Landscape Plans.
3 . 17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Specified Tests shall be performed by the Contractor ' s Testing Agency, at the Contractor' s
expense, with results forwarded to the Project Architect/Engineer for review.
B . Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve
each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.
C. Tests of Materials shall be as follows:
1 . Soil Classification:
a. One test from each type of material encountered and/or proposed to be used.
2. Laboratory Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
a. According to ASTM D1557 one test for each material encountered and/or
proposed.
b. Field Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
c. According to ASTM D1556 one test per layer of fill per 10,000 square feet of
area, plus one test per 10,000 square feet of subgrade in cut.
3 . Control: Fill and topsoil mixture may be inspected at any stage of operation to
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of sub-base course to prevent lateral movement.
Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to
thickness of each sub-base course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-inch minimum width of
shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of sub-base course.
D. Placing: Place sub-base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting sub-base material during placement operations.
1 . When a compacted sub-base course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material
in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in
thickness when compacted.
3 . 16 FILL AND GRADING FOR GRASSED AREAS
A. Fill Material under Grassed Areas : Clean, satisfactory fill, free from rock and debris and of
such quality to not interfere with future installation of grass.
B . Filling and Grading for Grassed Areas: Rough grade shall be 6 inches below finish grade and
the 4 inches of base material shall be omitted.
1 . Topping: 6 inches of compacted topsoil as specified in SECTION 02302- EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
C. Filling and Grading for Landscaped Areas other than Grass: Similar, with variations per
specific plant material, as defined , illustrated and specified on the Landscape Plans.
3 . 17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Specified Tests shall be performed by the Contractor ' s Testing Agency, at the Contractor' s
expense, with results forwarded to the Project Architect/Engineer for review.
B . Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve
each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.
C. Tests of Materials shall be as follows:
1 . Soil Classification:
a. One test from each type of material encountered and/or proposed to be used.
2. Laboratory Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
a. According to ASTM D1557 one test for each material encountered and/or
proposed.
b. Field Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
c. According to ASTM D1556 one test per layer of fill per 10,000 square feet of
area, plus one test per 10,000 square feet of subgrade in cut.
3 . Control: Fill and topsoil mixture may be inspected at any stage of operation to
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
determine compaction characteristics, densities and freedom from organic and
plastic materials.
D. Perform field density tests in accordance with methods listed in Item C.
1 . Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform
at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification
and approval of each footing subgrade may be used on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Project
Architect/Engineer.
2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer
than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every
200 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than
three tests.
3 . Foundation Wall Backfill : Perform at least two field density tests at locations and
elevations as directed.
4. If in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, and based on testing service
reports and inspections, any subgrade or fills that have been placed which are below
specified densities shall require additional compaction and testing until the specified
density is obtained.
E. Notification:
1 . Give sufficient notification of placing orders for fill and topsoil with supplier to
permit full inspection including testing for compaction characteristics at source of
supply.
2. Obtain approval from Project Architect/Engineer before placing topsoil mixture at
project site; without exception.
3 . 18 EROSION CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of the project. Repair and re-
establish grades to required elevations and slopes where erosion has occurred prior to Owners
acceptance of the work.
B. The Contractor shall install erosion control methods adjacent to any lakes, ditches and/or
wetlands which are adjacent to the project site whereby the quality of such would be degraded
by runoff, erosion and sedimentation in accordance with the plans, permits and the Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan.
3 . 19 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas : Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B . Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
02300 - 11 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
A. Notifications
Furnish timely notification to the Owner's Representative in writing 10 working days prior
to the commencement of work.
1 .05 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in
the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Sweep pavements as
often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage.
1 .06 PROTECTION
A. Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic
barricades with flashing lights.
B . Existing Work
Before beginning any demolition work, the Contractor shall survey the site and examine
the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The Contractor shall
take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be
reused, or to remain the property of the Owner; any damaged items shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall coordinate the
work of this section with all other work and shall construct and maintain shoring, bracing,
and supports as required. The Contractor shall ensure that structural elements are not
overloaded and shall be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to
remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by
demolition or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement must have
Owner's Representative approval .
C. Protected Trees
Protected trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition, and
which are indicated to be left in place, shall be protected by a minimum 4 foot high fence.
The fence shall be securely erected around the critical root zone of individual trees or
follow the outer perimeter of branches (drip line) of clumps of trees. Any tree designated
to remain which are damaged during the work under this contract shall be replaced in kind
or as approved by the Owner's Representative. Owner' s representative shall inspect fence
Prior to any nearby work commencing.
D. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities
and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering
of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical
utilities. The Contractor shall ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left
unsupported and shall be responsible for placing and securing bracing, shoring, or lateral
02220 - 2 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
determine compaction characteristics, densities and freedom from organic and
plastic materials.
D. Perform field density tests in accordance with methods listed in Item C.
1 . Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform
at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification
and approval of each footing subgrade may be used on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Project
Architect/Engineer.
2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer
than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every
200 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than
three tests.
3 . Foundation Wall Backfill : Perform at least two field density tests at locations and
elevations as directed.
4. If in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, and based on testing service
reports and inspections, any subgrade or fills that have been placed which are below
specified densities shall require additional compaction and testing until the specified
density is obtained.
E. Notification:
1 . Give sufficient notification of placing orders for fill and topsoil with supplier to
permit full inspection including testing for compaction characteristics at source of
supply.
2. Obtain approval from Project Architect/Engineer before placing topsoil mixture at
project site; without exception.
3 . 18 EROSION CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of the project. Repair and re-
establish grades to required elevations and slopes where erosion has occurred prior to Owners
acceptance of the work.
B. The Contractor shall install erosion control methods adjacent to any lakes, ditches and/or
wetlands which are adjacent to the project site whereby the quality of such would be degraded
by runoff, erosion and sedimentation in accordance with the plans, permits and the Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan.
3 . 19 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas : Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B . Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
02300 - 11 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
determine compaction characteristics, densities and freedom from organic and
plastic materials.
D. Perform field density tests in accordance with methods listed in Item C.
1 . Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform
at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification
and approval of each footing subgrade may be used on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Project
Architect/Engineer.
2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer
than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every
200 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than
three tests.
3 . Foundation Wall Backfill : Perform at least two field density tests at locations and
elevations as directed.
4. If in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, and based on testing service
reports and inspections, any subgrade or fills that have been placed which are below
specified densities shall require additional compaction and testing until the specified
density is obtained.
E. Notification:
1 . Give sufficient notification of placing orders for fill and topsoil with supplier to
permit full inspection including testing for compaction characteristics at source of
supply.
2. Obtain approval from Project Architect/Engineer before placing topsoil mixture at
project site; without exception.
3 . 18 EROSION CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of the project. Repair and re-
establish grades to required elevations and slopes where erosion has occurred prior to Owners
acceptance of the work.
B. The Contractor shall install erosion control methods adjacent to any lakes, ditches and/or
wetlands which are adjacent to the project site whereby the quality of such would be degraded
by runoff, erosion and sedimentation in accordance with the plans, permits and the Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan.
3 . 19 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas : Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B . Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
02300 - 11 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact
to required density prior to further construction.
D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project
warranty period in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface
treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3 .20 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property: Contractor shall remove waste materials, includingtrash, and
debris, and dispose of it off of Owner's property at a landfill or equivalent site, approved by the
local Government Authorities.
END OF SECTION
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact
to required density prior to further construction.
D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project
warranty period in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface
treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3 .20 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property: Contractor shall remove waste materials, includingtrash, and
debris, and dispose of it off of Owner's property at a landfill or equivalent site, approved by the
local Government Authorities.
END OF SECTION
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact
to required density prior to further construction.
D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project
warranty period in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface
treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3 .20 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property: Contractor shall remove waste materials, includingtrash, and
debris, and dispose of it off of Owner's property at a landfill or equivalent site, approved by the
local Government Authorities.
END OF SECTION
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02302
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1 . ASTM C 33 ( 1999; Rev. A) Concrete Aggregates
2 . ASTM C 136( 1996 ; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
3 . ASTM D 698 ( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort ( 12, 400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m))
4 . ASTM D 1140( 1997) Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 (75-
Micrometer) Sieve
5 , ASTM D 1556(1990; R 1996) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method
6 . ASTM D 1557( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56 ,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))
7 . ASTM D 232 ] ( 1989; R 1995) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for .<
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
8 . ASTM D 2487( 1998) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)
9 . ASTM D 2922( 1996) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
10 , ASTM D 3017( 1996) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
11 . ASTM D 4318 ( 1998) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
B . AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
I . AWWA C600(1999) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their
Appurtenances
1 .02 DEFINITIONS
A . Hard Materials
02302 - 1 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work
Performed under this contract.
E. Protection of Personnel
During the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the condition of the
areas being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and
around the demolition site.
1 .07 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be
permitted.
1 .08 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled
in the trades involved. Repair items to be relocated which are damaged or replace damaged
items with new undamaged items as approved by the Owner' s Representative.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
A. Utilities and Related Equipment
Remove existing utilities, as indicated or as deemed necessary during uncovering by the '-
work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the
specific utility and approved by the Owner ' s Representative. When utility lines are
encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the Owner ' s Representative shall be
notified prior to further work in that area.
B . Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs as indicated on the Drawings. At
the connection of new asphalt to existing asphalt, the asphalt, including aggregate base
shall be scarified to a depth of I % inches below new finish grade. Provide neat sawcuts at
limits of pavement removal as indicated.
C. Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of not less than 2 inches. Make each cut in
concrete perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break
out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished
work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be
concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.
02220 - 3 02220 — Civil site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02302
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1 . ASTM C 33 ( 1999; Rev. A) Concrete Aggregates
2 . ASTM C 136( 1996 ; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
3 . ASTM D 698 ( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort ( 12, 400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m))
4 . ASTM D 1140( 1997) Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 (75-
Micrometer) Sieve
5 , ASTM D 1556(1990; R 1996) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method
6 . ASTM D 1557( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56 ,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))
7 . ASTM D 232 ] ( 1989; R 1995) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for .<
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
8 . ASTM D 2487( 1998) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)
9 . ASTM D 2922( 1996) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
10 , ASTM D 3017( 1996) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
11 . ASTM D 4318 ( 1998) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
B . AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
I . AWWA C600(1999) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their
Appurtenances
1 .02 DEFINITIONS
A . Hard Materials
02302 - 1 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02302
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1 . ASTM C 33 ( 1999; Rev. A) Concrete Aggregates
2 . ASTM C 136( 1996 ; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
3 . ASTM D 698 ( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort ( 12, 400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m))
4 . ASTM D 1140( 1997) Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 (75-
Micrometer) Sieve
5 , ASTM D 1556(1990; R 1996) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method
6 . ASTM D 1557( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56 ,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))
7 . ASTM D 232 ] ( 1989; R 1995) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for .<
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
8 . ASTM D 2487( 1998) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)
9 . ASTM D 2922( 1996) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
10 , ASTM D 3017( 1996) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
11 . ASTM D 4318 ( 1998) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
B . AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
I . AWWA C600(1999) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their
Appurtenances
1 .02 DEFINITIONS
A . Hard Materials
02302 - 1 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included
in the definition of " rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment,
ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal .
B . Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated
masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling
and blasting, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-
mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or
concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 /2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will
not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed
merely to increase production.
C . Cohesive Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as
GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater
than zero.
D . Cohesionless Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified . as GW, GP , SW, and SP . Materials classified as GM and
SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines have a plasticity index of zero .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports to be obtained and.paid for by Contractor :
Fill and backfill optimum density test where specified .
Select material .optimum:density and gradation.tests c:
Compaction density tests where specified
In-place density tests where specified
1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials .
1 . 05 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
A. Surface elevations are as indicated.
B . Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time
subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at
the time of construction.
C . Material character is indicated by the boring logs .
D. Blasting will not be per fitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included
in the definition of " rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment,
ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal .
B . Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated
masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling
and blasting, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-
mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or
concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 /2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will
not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed
merely to increase production.
C . Cohesive Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as
GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater
than zero.
D . Cohesionless Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified . as GW, GP , SW, and SP . Materials classified as GM and
SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines have a plasticity index of zero .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports to be obtained and.paid for by Contractor :
Fill and backfill optimum density test where specified .
Select material .optimum:density and gradation.tests c:
Compaction density tests where specified
In-place density tests where specified
1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials .
1 . 05 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
A. Surface elevations are as indicated.
B . Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time
subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at
the time of construction.
C . Material character is indicated by the boring logs .
D. Blasting will not be per fitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included
in the definition of " rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment,
ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal .
B . Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated
masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling
and blasting, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-
mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or
concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 /2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will
not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed
merely to increase production.
C . Cohesive Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as
GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater
than zero.
D . Cohesionless Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified . as GW, GP , SW, and SP . Materials classified as GM and
SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines have a plasticity index of zero .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports to be obtained and.paid for by Contractor :
Fill and backfill optimum density test where specified .
Select material .optimum:density and gradation.tests c:
Compaction density tests where specified
In-place density tests where specified
1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials .
1 . 05 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
A. Surface elevations are as indicated.
B . Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time
subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at
the time of construction.
C . Material character is indicated by the boring logs .
D. Blasting will not be per fitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . 01 SOIL MATERIALS
Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious
OF objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-
halfthe lift thickness at the intended location.
A. Common Fill
Common shall consist of sandy-loam, sand, gravel, soft shale, or crushed stone. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge of what constitutes suitable and unsuitable material for backfill from "on-
site excavations , "
B . Select Material
Select Fill shall consist of uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less
than 5 % fines passing a No. 200 sieve. Laboratory test results
Engineer for his approval, of this fill shall be submitted to the
C. Topsoil
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of., subsoil;
;stumps ; rocks larger than 1 inch diameter; brush; weeds; toxic substances; and other material -'
detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORT{
3 :01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, and brush within the clearing
limits . Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 3 inches in diameter to at
least 24 inches below existing surface.
B . Stripping
Strip existing topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches without contamination by subsoil material.
topsoil separately from
Remove all existing topsoil with organic roots and materials . Stockpile
Other excavated material and locate convenient to areas for soils exchange.
C. Unsuitable Material
All cleared, grubbed and demolished material deemed unsuitable shall be stockpiled on-site by
the Contractor for disposal by soils exchange with material over excavated from the proposed
stormwater management tract(s) .
D. Disposal
In all areas where excavation is to be done, all earth, rock, muck and other materials shall be
removed and separated as to suitable and unsuitable material for backfill as defined herein.
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later
02302 - 3 02,302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
A. Title to Materials
Except where specified in other sections, all materials and equipment removed, and not
reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Owner's
property. Title to materials resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Owner's Representative of the
Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Owner 's
Representative to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or
loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Materials and equipment shall
not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site .
B . Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment indicated on the Drawings to be reused or
relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses . See Section 02300 —
"Site Earthwork" for disposition of all unsuitable fill material encountered on site.
C. Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are indicated on the Drawings and/orspecified to
be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of theOwner, and
deliver to a storage site located on the Owner' s property.
Contractor shall salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
Material salvaged for the Contractor shall be stored as approved by the Owner' s
Representative and shall be removed from Owner property before completion of the
contract. Material salvaged for the Contractor shall not be sold on the site.
Salvaged items to remain the property of the Owner shall be removed in a manner to
prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage
or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or storage shall be repaired or
replaced to match existing items. Containers shall be properly identified as to contents.
D. Unsalvageable Material
Concrete, masonry, and other noncombustible material, except concrete permitted to
remain in place, shall be disposed at a legal disposal site approved by the Owner' s
Representative.
3 .03 CLEANUP
Debris and rubbish shall be removed from the project site. Debris shall be removed and
transported in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Local
regulations regarding hauling and disposal shall apply.
END OF SECTION
02220 - 4 02220 — Civil Site Demolition
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . 01 SOIL MATERIALS
Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious
OF objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-
halfthe lift thickness at the intended location.
A. Common Fill
Common shall consist of sandy-loam, sand, gravel, soft shale, or crushed stone. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge of what constitutes suitable and unsuitable material for backfill from "on-
site excavations , "
B . Select Material
Select Fill shall consist of uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less
than 5 % fines passing a No. 200 sieve. Laboratory test results
Engineer for his approval, of this fill shall be submitted to the
C. Topsoil
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of., subsoil;
;stumps ; rocks larger than 1 inch diameter; brush; weeds; toxic substances; and other material -'
detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORT{
3 :01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, and brush within the clearing
limits . Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 3 inches in diameter to at
least 24 inches below existing surface.
B . Stripping
Strip existing topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches without contamination by subsoil material.
topsoil separately from
Remove all existing topsoil with organic roots and materials . Stockpile
Other excavated material and locate convenient to areas for soils exchange.
C. Unsuitable Material
All cleared, grubbed and demolished material deemed unsuitable shall be stockpiled on-site by
the Contractor for disposal by soils exchange with material over excavated from the proposed
stormwater management tract(s) .
D. Disposal
In all areas where excavation is to be done, all earth, rock, muck and other materials shall be
removed and separated as to suitable and unsuitable material for backfill as defined herein.
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later
02302 - 3 02,302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . 01 SOIL MATERIALS
Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious
OF objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-
halfthe lift thickness at the intended location.
A. Common Fill
Common shall consist of sandy-loam, sand, gravel, soft shale, or crushed stone. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge of what constitutes suitable and unsuitable material for backfill from "on-
site excavations , "
B . Select Material
Select Fill shall consist of uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less
than 5 % fines passing a No. 200 sieve. Laboratory test results
Engineer for his approval, of this fill shall be submitted to the
C. Topsoil
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of., subsoil;
;stumps ; rocks larger than 1 inch diameter; brush; weeds; toxic substances; and other material -'
detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORT{
3 :01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, and brush within the clearing
limits . Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 3 inches in diameter to at
least 24 inches below existing surface.
B . Stripping
Strip existing topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches without contamination by subsoil material.
topsoil separately from
Remove all existing topsoil with organic roots and materials . Stockpile
Other excavated material and locate convenient to areas for soils exchange.
C. Unsuitable Material
All cleared, grubbed and demolished material deemed unsuitable shall be stockpiled on-site by
the Contractor for disposal by soils exchange with material over excavated from the proposed
stormwater management tract(s) .
D. Disposal
In all areas where excavation is to be done, all earth, rock, muck and other materials shall be
removed and separated as to suitable and unsuitable material for backfill as defined herein.
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later
02302 - 3 02,302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
disposal by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site
stormwater management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as
not to endanger the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site
location. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of
suitable material from the stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over
excavated volume with the unsuitable material. All over excavated material shall be utilized and
spread on the project site. Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable
material to be exchanged . Waste, brush, refuse, stumps, roots, timber, etc . shall be removed
from the site and disposed of in an approved manner.
E . Removal of Muck, Rock and Other Unsuitable Material
All muck, rock , clay, marl, gravel , boulders , heterogeneous fill material and any other organic
or unsuitable "materials of excavation" encountered under pavement areas, structures and
utilities shall be excavated and removed. Also any "unforeseen obstacles" such as buried trees or
timbers, abandoned utilities, metal objects , concrete masses, or any other type of debris
encountered shall be removed .
All areas under proposed pavements or structures, which are indicated by testing to have more
than trace amounts of silt and/or clay within the top several feet of existing grade shall be "proof
rolled" using a vibratory compactor . Should the existing material continuously yield or "pump"
during the proof rolling, the Engineer shall be notified and a determination made as to the
amount of stripping needed to accomplish a stabilized foundation. .
Stripping shall be accomplished to clean in-place sand or other suitable material as approved by
the Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material within areas which are to receive footings, slabs or
other foundations shall be completed for the full area under such structures and to ten feet
minimum outside the maximum perimeter. Where pavement is to be placed, said removal shall
include all area under the surface and extend to the outside of any shoulders, under any
sidewalks and bike paths, or as directed by the Engineer.
All roots , stumps, logs, limbs, timbers, boulders , or any material which is not suitable for
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly and excavated and disposed of by the
Contractor at his expense.
Removal of all "materials of excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be paid for under the
heading of "Excavation and Hauling" .
3 . 02 PROTECTION
A. Sheeting and Bracing
1 . Where excavations may endanger workmen, existing structures, utilities or other
facilities, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to immediately install and maintain
adequate sheeting and bracing per OSHA specifications in order to protect said facility. No
work shall proceed in such excavations until the sheeting and bracing has been properly
and completely installed , The sheeting thus installed shall be removed as the work
progresses or, at the discretion of the Engineer, be cut off below finished grade and left in
place. Sheeting and bracing may be either steel or wood at the option of the Contractor.
2 . Sheeting and bracing shall be installed in a manner that will allow for removal without
injuring or endangering workmen, the work, adjacent structures, and the like. Voids caused
by withdrawal of sheeting shall be promptly and completely filled with sand and
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
disposal by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site
stormwater management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as
not to endanger the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site
location. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of
suitable material from the stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over
excavated volume with the unsuitable material. All over excavated material shall be utilized and
spread on the project site. Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable
material to be exchanged . Waste, brush, refuse, stumps, roots, timber, etc . shall be removed
from the site and disposed of in an approved manner.
E . Removal of Muck, Rock and Other Unsuitable Material
All muck, rock , clay, marl, gravel , boulders , heterogeneous fill material and any other organic
or unsuitable "materials of excavation" encountered under pavement areas, structures and
utilities shall be excavated and removed. Also any "unforeseen obstacles" such as buried trees or
timbers, abandoned utilities, metal objects , concrete masses, or any other type of debris
encountered shall be removed .
All areas under proposed pavements or structures, which are indicated by testing to have more
than trace amounts of silt and/or clay within the top several feet of existing grade shall be "proof
rolled" using a vibratory compactor . Should the existing material continuously yield or "pump"
during the proof rolling, the Engineer shall be notified and a determination made as to the
amount of stripping needed to accomplish a stabilized foundation. .
Stripping shall be accomplished to clean in-place sand or other suitable material as approved by
the Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material within areas which are to receive footings, slabs or
other foundations shall be completed for the full area under such structures and to ten feet
minimum outside the maximum perimeter. Where pavement is to be placed, said removal shall
include all area under the surface and extend to the outside of any shoulders, under any
sidewalks and bike paths, or as directed by the Engineer.
All roots , stumps, logs, limbs, timbers, boulders , or any material which is not suitable for
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly and excavated and disposed of by the
Contractor at his expense.
Removal of all "materials of excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be paid for under the
heading of "Excavation and Hauling" .
3 . 02 PROTECTION
A. Sheeting and Bracing
1 . Where excavations may endanger workmen, existing structures, utilities or other
facilities, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to immediately install and maintain
adequate sheeting and bracing per OSHA specifications in order to protect said facility. No
work shall proceed in such excavations until the sheeting and bracing has been properly
and completely installed , The sheeting thus installed shall be removed as the work
progresses or, at the discretion of the Engineer, be cut off below finished grade and left in
place. Sheeting and bracing may be either steel or wood at the option of the Contractor.
2 . Sheeting and bracing shall be installed in a manner that will allow for removal without
injuring or endangering workmen, the work, adjacent structures, and the like. Voids caused
by withdrawal of sheeting shall be promptly and completely filled with sand and
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
disposal by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site
stormwater management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as
not to endanger the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site
location. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of
suitable material from the stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over
excavated volume with the unsuitable material. All over excavated material shall be utilized and
spread on the project site. Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable
material to be exchanged . Waste, brush, refuse, stumps, roots, timber, etc . shall be removed
from the site and disposed of in an approved manner.
E . Removal of Muck, Rock and Other Unsuitable Material
All muck, rock , clay, marl, gravel , boulders , heterogeneous fill material and any other organic
or unsuitable "materials of excavation" encountered under pavement areas, structures and
utilities shall be excavated and removed. Also any "unforeseen obstacles" such as buried trees or
timbers, abandoned utilities, metal objects , concrete masses, or any other type of debris
encountered shall be removed .
All areas under proposed pavements or structures, which are indicated by testing to have more
than trace amounts of silt and/or clay within the top several feet of existing grade shall be "proof
rolled" using a vibratory compactor . Should the existing material continuously yield or "pump"
during the proof rolling, the Engineer shall be notified and a determination made as to the
amount of stripping needed to accomplish a stabilized foundation. .
Stripping shall be accomplished to clean in-place sand or other suitable material as approved by
the Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material within areas which are to receive footings, slabs or
other foundations shall be completed for the full area under such structures and to ten feet
minimum outside the maximum perimeter. Where pavement is to be placed, said removal shall
include all area under the surface and extend to the outside of any shoulders, under any
sidewalks and bike paths, or as directed by the Engineer.
All roots , stumps, logs, limbs, timbers, boulders , or any material which is not suitable for
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly and excavated and disposed of by the
Contractor at his expense.
Removal of all "materials of excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be paid for under the
heading of "Excavation and Hauling" .
3 . 02 PROTECTION
A. Sheeting and Bracing
1 . Where excavations may endanger workmen, existing structures, utilities or other
facilities, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to immediately install and maintain
adequate sheeting and bracing per OSHA specifications in order to protect said facility. No
work shall proceed in such excavations until the sheeting and bracing has been properly
and completely installed , The sheeting thus installed shall be removed as the work
progresses or, at the discretion of the Engineer, be cut off below finished grade and left in
place. Sheeting and bracing may be either steel or wood at the option of the Contractor.
2 . Sheeting and bracing shall be installed in a manner that will allow for removal without
injuring or endangering workmen, the work, adjacent structures, and the like. Voids caused
by withdrawal of sheeting shall be promptly and completely filled with sand and
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
compacted to a degree equal to the surrounding soil .
B . Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during
construction.
1 . Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site
during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall
establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive
surface water runoffaway from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches,
swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils . When
unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
subsequent construction features develop, unsuitable soil support for
remove unsuitable material and provide new soil
material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and
ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary
measures to permit construction to proceed.
2 . Dewatering
All water encountered during excavation shall be promptly and completely removed to a
depth below the exposed excavation surface sufficient to provide a dry working surface.
The excavation shall be kept dry until the work to be built or placed therein has been
completed as specified. Dewatering shall be done in a manner that Will ; notcause '
sloughing or caving of the excavation walls . Water from said dewatering shall be disposed ='
of in a manner as will not result in violations of State water quality standards in receiving
waters , nor cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to the work ,
completed or in progress. Any and all damage caused by dewatering shall be promptly
repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The receiving point for water from said
operation shall be approved by the applicable regulatory agency and the Engineer. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits and any other approval
necessary.
C. Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically
verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting
construction. The Contractor shall contact Call Sunshine at 1 -800-432-4770, 48 hours
prior to commencement of excavation for assistance in locating existing utilities .
D. Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall
be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly
installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged.
3 . 03 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the
specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free
02302 - 5 02302 — Excavation and Fill
SECTION 02250 - SOIL POISONING
A . Compound application shall be done by an established and certified pest control
organization as per Section 815 -3 . 8 of Section 815 of the Minimum Property
Standards for 1 & 2 living units, Federal Housing Administration (November 1966) .
B . The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee stating the
concentration of the poison utilized, the rate and the method of application . The
guarantee shall be for a period of not less than five (5) years, with the cost for a five
(5) year inspection and protection program to be included in the base bid.
C. The Contractor shall not begin soil treatment until such time as the subgrade
preparation is completed and ready for the vapor barrier installation.
D. The below listed chemicals are toxic to plant and animal life and are to be applied,
with due caution, only by experienced personnel . Apply to those areas to be treated,
one ( 1 ) of the following chemicals, at not less than the designated concentration
applied in a water emulsion .
1 . Dursban TC 1 %
2 . Probuild TC 1 %
3 . Premise 1 %
4 . Termidor 1 %
1
E. Apply an overall treatment of toxicant, at a rate of one ( 1 ) gallon per ten ( 10 square
feet, under the entire area ofthe building floor slab and to a distance of 5 '- 0 " beyond
the building perimeter where it is abutted by a slab/walkway or paving. Apply
additional toxicant, at a rate of two (2) gallons per lin. ft. , to expansion joints and
where the floor slab is penetrated by floor drains.
* '' END OF SECTION * x *
02250- 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
compacted to a degree equal to the surrounding soil .
B . Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during
construction.
1 . Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site
during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall
establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive
surface water runoffaway from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches,
swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils . When
unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
subsequent construction features develop, unsuitable soil support for
remove unsuitable material and provide new soil
material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and
ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary
measures to permit construction to proceed.
2 . Dewatering
All water encountered during excavation shall be promptly and completely removed to a
depth below the exposed excavation surface sufficient to provide a dry working surface.
The excavation shall be kept dry until the work to be built or placed therein has been
completed as specified. Dewatering shall be done in a manner that Will ; notcause '
sloughing or caving of the excavation walls . Water from said dewatering shall be disposed ='
of in a manner as will not result in violations of State water quality standards in receiving
waters , nor cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to the work ,
completed or in progress. Any and all damage caused by dewatering shall be promptly
repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The receiving point for water from said
operation shall be approved by the applicable regulatory agency and the Engineer. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits and any other approval
necessary.
C. Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically
verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting
construction. The Contractor shall contact Call Sunshine at 1 -800-432-4770, 48 hours
prior to commencement of excavation for assistance in locating existing utilities .
D. Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall
be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly
installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged.
3 . 03 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the
specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free
02302 - 5 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
compacted to a degree equal to the surrounding soil .
B . Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during
construction.
1 . Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site
during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall
establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive
surface water runoffaway from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches,
swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils . When
unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
subsequent construction features develop, unsuitable soil support for
remove unsuitable material and provide new soil
material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and
ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary
measures to permit construction to proceed.
2 . Dewatering
All water encountered during excavation shall be promptly and completely removed to a
depth below the exposed excavation surface sufficient to provide a dry working surface.
The excavation shall be kept dry until the work to be built or placed therein has been
completed as specified. Dewatering shall be done in a manner that Will ; notcause '
sloughing or caving of the excavation walls . Water from said dewatering shall be disposed ='
of in a manner as will not result in violations of State water quality standards in receiving
waters , nor cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to the work ,
completed or in progress. Any and all damage caused by dewatering shall be promptly
repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The receiving point for water from said
operation shall be approved by the applicable regulatory agency and the Engineer. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits and any other approval
necessary.
C. Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically
verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting
construction. The Contractor shall contact Call Sunshine at 1 -800-432-4770, 48 hours
prior to commencement of excavation for assistance in locating existing utilities .
D. Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall
be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly
installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged.
3 . 03 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the
specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free
02302 - 5 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made
unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Refill with common fill and
compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill
excavations cut below indicated depth with common fill and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D
1557 maximum density .
A. Pipe Trenches
Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of 9 to 12 inches of clearance on both sides of the pipe or conduit. Grade bottom of
trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
B . Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert
elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.
1 . Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units , do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom out to
accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil:
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to
fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1 /4 of the circumference) . Fill depressions with
tamped sand backfill . At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 .04 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours , elevations , and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing
overlaying lift .
A. Unsuitable Material Replacement
1 . Fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in layers not to exceed twelve inches
before compaction . All fill material shall be free from vegetable matter, wood, and other
deleterious substances , and shall not contain rocks or clods having a diameter of more than
three inches.
B . Pre-fill Compaction
1 . Should the pre-fill surface elevation be below that required for the base of proposed
building foundations or paving subgrade, the areas within road rights-of-ways, under
parking areas, and the areas under and within five feet of proposed buildings shall be
precompacted. This precompaction shall be performed equally on existing ground and on
surfaces which have been excavated to remove unsuitable material. The top one foot of
said areas shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of maximum as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . The maximum spacing between density tests shall be 150 feet.
C . Compaction
1 . Backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 .
Equipment suitable and adequate for uniform compaction to the specified density shall be
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made
unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Refill with common fill and
compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill
excavations cut below indicated depth with common fill and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D
1557 maximum density .
A. Pipe Trenches
Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of 9 to 12 inches of clearance on both sides of the pipe or conduit. Grade bottom of
trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
B . Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert
elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.
1 . Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units , do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom out to
accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil:
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to
fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1 /4 of the circumference) . Fill depressions with
tamped sand backfill . At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 .04 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours , elevations , and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing
overlaying lift .
A. Unsuitable Material Replacement
1 . Fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in layers not to exceed twelve inches
before compaction . All fill material shall be free from vegetable matter, wood, and other
deleterious substances , and shall not contain rocks or clods having a diameter of more than
three inches.
B . Pre-fill Compaction
1 . Should the pre-fill surface elevation be below that required for the base of proposed
building foundations or paving subgrade, the areas within road rights-of-ways, under
parking areas, and the areas under and within five feet of proposed buildings shall be
precompacted. This precompaction shall be performed equally on existing ground and on
surfaces which have been excavated to remove unsuitable material. The top one foot of
said areas shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of maximum as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . The maximum spacing between density tests shall be 150 feet.
C . Compaction
1 . Backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 .
Equipment suitable and adequate for uniform compaction to the specified density shall be
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made
unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Refill with common fill and
compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill
excavations cut below indicated depth with common fill and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D
1557 maximum density .
A. Pipe Trenches
Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of 9 to 12 inches of clearance on both sides of the pipe or conduit. Grade bottom of
trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
B . Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert
elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.
1 . Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units , do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom out to
accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil:
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to
fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1 /4 of the circumference) . Fill depressions with
tamped sand backfill . At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 .04 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours , elevations , and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing
overlaying lift .
A. Unsuitable Material Replacement
1 . Fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in layers not to exceed twelve inches
before compaction . All fill material shall be free from vegetable matter, wood, and other
deleterious substances , and shall not contain rocks or clods having a diameter of more than
three inches.
B . Pre-fill Compaction
1 . Should the pre-fill surface elevation be below that required for the base of proposed
building foundations or paving subgrade, the areas within road rights-of-ways, under
parking areas, and the areas under and within five feet of proposed buildings shall be
precompacted. This precompaction shall be performed equally on existing ground and on
surfaces which have been excavated to remove unsuitable material. The top one foot of
said areas shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of maximum as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . The maximum spacing between density tests shall be 150 feet.
C . Compaction
1 . Backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 .
Equipment suitable and adequate for uniform compaction to the specified density shall be
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
used for backfill operations subject to the approval of the Engineer. All compaction
equipment shall be in good working order and any worn or defective equipment shall be
immediately replaced or repaired.
D . Soil Stability and Compaction Control
I . The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent
testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with
the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall
be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
2 . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by
the Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
3 . In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until
the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
4 . In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall
be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill , For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 200 cu. yd. of material shall be performed at the point of; -
use.
5 . Tests for in-place density (percent compaction) shall be taken at locations designated
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall have density tests takenn four (4) separate
i
locations . Each location shall be tested in lifts not to exceed 12-inches n thickness.
E. Trench Backfilling
Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits . Place and
compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 12 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6
inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas .
1 . Bedding Requirements
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for
buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as. specified herein.
Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum
density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D
2321 materials as follows :
Class I : Angular, 0.25 to 1 .5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials
that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed
shells .
Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 . 5 inches, including
i
various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally
granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are
included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 .
02302 - 7 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02270
EROSION CONTROL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORT{ INCLUDED
b
A . The work of this section consists of furnishing all necessary labor, equipment, material and
transportation necessary to provide temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control
as required by appropriate government agency permits, the plans and as noted in this
specification. The Contractor shall execute and provide all necessary BMP 's, monitor ng
and maintenance as outlined in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)
developed for this project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
N/A
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install temporary erosion and sediment control items prior to clearing and commencing
earthwork or as soon as practical as site work progresses.
3 . 02 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMP 's)
A. Stabilization of Denuded Areas: No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty
30 calendar days (or 72 hours for sloped banks of 3 : 1 orgreater), excluding travel ways,
unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Engineer. During construction, denuded areas
shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter, seed and mulch, sod or some other
permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any
portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established
permanent soil stabilization measures per the construction drawings, whether by impervious
surface or landscaping.
B . Protection and Stabilization of Stockpiles : Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all
times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control
of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the
expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized
stockpile remain after thin 30 calendar days.
C. Protection of Existing Storm Sewer Systems: During construction, all storm sewer inlets
shall be protected by approved sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc. ,
which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which
must be approved by the Owner's Engineer.
D. Sediment Trapping Measures: Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences,
berms, sediment barriers (hay bales), vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap
02270 - 1 02270 — Erosion Control
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
used for backfill operations subject to the approval of the Engineer. All compaction
equipment shall be in good working order and any worn or defective equipment shall be
immediately replaced or repaired.
D . Soil Stability and Compaction Control
I . The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent
testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with
the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall
be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
2 . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by
the Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
3 . In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until
the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
4 . In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall
be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill , For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 200 cu. yd. of material shall be performed at the point of; -
use.
5 . Tests for in-place density (percent compaction) shall be taken at locations designated
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall have density tests takenn four (4) separate
i
locations . Each location shall be tested in lifts not to exceed 12-inches n thickness.
E. Trench Backfilling
Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits . Place and
compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 12 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6
inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas .
1 . Bedding Requirements
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for
buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as. specified herein.
Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum
density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D
2321 materials as follows :
Class I : Angular, 0.25 to 1 .5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials
that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed
shells .
Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 . 5 inches, including
i
various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally
granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are
included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 .
02302 - 7 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
used for backfill operations subject to the approval of the Engineer. All compaction
equipment shall be in good working order and any worn or defective equipment shall be
immediately replaced or repaired.
D . Soil Stability and Compaction Control
I . The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent
testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with
the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall
be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
2 . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by
the Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
3 . In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until
the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
4 . In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall
be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill , For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 200 cu. yd. of material shall be performed at the point of; -
use.
5 . Tests for in-place density (percent compaction) shall be taken at locations designated
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall have density tests takenn four (4) separate
i
locations . Each location shall be tested in lifts not to exceed 12-inches n thickness.
E. Trench Backfilling
Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits . Place and
compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 12 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6
inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas .
1 . Bedding Requirements
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for
buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as. specified herein.
Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum
density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D
2321 materials as follows :
Class I : Angular, 0.25 to 1 .5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials
that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed
shells .
Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 . 5 inches, including
i
various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally
granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are
included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 .
02302 - 7 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 05 COMPACTION
Expressed as a percentage of maximum density. Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if
required density exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required.
A. General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the
structure to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 .
3 . 06 FINISH OPERATIONS
A . Grading
Finish grades as indicated on the plans to within two inches . In areas where sodding is required,
finished soil grade shall be set 3 -inches below the plan elevation to compensate for sod
thickness . . For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor's
operations, grade as directed.
B . Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or
reestablish damaged grades , elevations, or slopes .
3 . 07 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later disposal
by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site stormwater
management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as not to endanger
the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site location. All unsuitable -
material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of suitable material from the
stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over excavated volume with the
unsuitable material . All over excavated material shall be utilized and spread on the project site .
Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable material to be exchanged. Waste,
brush, refuse, stumps , roots, timber, etc. shall be removed from the site and disposed of in an
approved manner.
END OF SECTION
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 05 COMPACTION
Expressed as a percentage of maximum density. Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if
required density exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required.
A. General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the
structure to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 .
3 . 06 FINISH OPERATIONS
A . Grading
Finish grades as indicated on the plans to within two inches . In areas where sodding is required,
finished soil grade shall be set 3 -inches below the plan elevation to compensate for sod
thickness . . For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor's
operations, grade as directed.
B . Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or
reestablish damaged grades , elevations, or slopes .
3 . 07 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later disposal
by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site stormwater
management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as not to endanger
the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site location. All unsuitable -
material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of suitable material from the
stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over excavated volume with the
unsuitable material . All over excavated material shall be utilized and spread on the project site .
Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable material to be exchanged. Waste,
brush, refuse, stumps , roots, timber, etc. shall be removed from the site and disposed of in an
approved manner.
END OF SECTION
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
sediment and/or prevent the transportation of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into
existing water bodies, must be installed, constructed or, in case of vegetative buffers,
protected from disturbance, as a fust step in the land alteration process .
E. W orking in or Crossing Waterways or Water Bodies: Land alteration and construction shall
be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent
buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible,
and barriers shall be used to prevent access . Where in channel work cannot be avoided,
precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development
and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during
land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel
work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream
side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity.
Whenever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be
provided by the Contractor and removed when construction completed. The area of the
crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed
prior to any construction activity.
F . Swales, Ditches and Channels:: All swales; ditches and channel leading from the. site shall.
be sodded within three (3 ) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc . ; including
detention areas will be sodded prior to substantial completion.
G . Underground Utility Construction: The construction of underground utility lines and other
structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards:
1 . No more than 100 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any time;
2 . Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be
cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the
slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
3 . 03 PERFORMANCE
A. Maintenance: All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially
after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
B . Compliance: Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine
and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as, but not limited to, issuance of a
" Stop Work Order" .
END OF SECTION
02270 — Erosion Control
02270 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 05 COMPACTION
Expressed as a percentage of maximum density. Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if
required density exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required.
A. General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the
structure to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 .
3 . 06 FINISH OPERATIONS
A . Grading
Finish grades as indicated on the plans to within two inches . In areas where sodding is required,
finished soil grade shall be set 3 -inches below the plan elevation to compensate for sod
thickness . . For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor's
operations, grade as directed.
B . Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or
reestablish damaged grades , elevations, or slopes .
3 . 07 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later disposal
by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site stormwater
management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as not to endanger
the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site location. All unsuitable -
material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of suitable material from the
stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over excavated volume with the
unsuitable material . All over excavated material shall be utilized and spread on the project site .
Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable material to be exchanged. Waste,
brush, refuse, stumps , roots, timber, etc. shall be removed from the site and disposed of in an
approved manner.
END OF SECTION
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02510
WATER MAINS .
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment
and labor required for the installation of water mains as herein described and as shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work
required for the construction of these water mains in accordance with the provisions set forth under
the applicable items of this Specification.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National Standards Institute
(ANSI).
I AWWA C104 (ANSI A21 .4) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe,;
and Fittings for water. -
2. AWWA (ANSI) Clio Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48 -inch for.
water and other liquids .
3 . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron~and Gray-Iron . ,.
Pressure Pipe and Fittings .
4 . AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 .50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
5 . AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in Metal Molds or
Sand Lined Molds -for water of other liquids .
6 . AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 112-inch
for water and other liquids.
7 . . AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water Mains and
Appurtenances.
8 . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inch
through 12-inch .
9. AWWA M23 Manual of Water Supply Practices, "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" .
B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials .
02510 - 1 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02300
SITE EARTHWORK
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to this Section.
1 .02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Preparing of subgrade for building slabs, walks, pavements and landscaped areas.
2 . Excavating and backfilling for underground sewers, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances.
3 . Excavating, backfilling and grading for ditches, berms and swales.
B . Excavating and Backfilling for Mechanical/Electrical Work: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16
sections for excavating and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and
electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances.
tv,
C. Final Grading, together with placement and preparation of topsoil for lawns and planting, is
specified elsewhere in Division 2.
1 . 03 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and
subsequent disposal of materials removed.
B . Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations
or dimensions without specific direction of the Project Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized
excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Project Architect/Engineer, shall be at the
Contractor' s expense.
1 . Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by
extending indicated bottom of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering
required top elevation. Lean concrete fill maybe used to bring elevations to proper
position, when acceptable to the Project Architect/Engineer.
C. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as
specified for authorized excavations as same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Project Architect/Engineer.
D. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify
the Project Architect/Engineer, who will make an inspection of conditions. If the Project
Architect/Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are
unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace
excavated material as directed by the Project Architect/Engineer. The Contract Sum maybe
adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.
02300 - 1 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02510
WATER MAINS .
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment
and labor required for the installation of water mains as herein described and as shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work
required for the construction of these water mains in accordance with the provisions set forth under
the applicable items of this Specification.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National Standards Institute
(ANSI).
I AWWA C104 (ANSI A21 .4) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe,;
and Fittings for water. -
2. AWWA (ANSI) Clio Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48 -inch for.
water and other liquids .
3 . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron~and Gray-Iron . ,.
Pressure Pipe and Fittings .
4 . AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 .50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
5 . AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in Metal Molds or
Sand Lined Molds -for water of other liquids .
6 . AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 112-inch
for water and other liquids.
7 . . AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water Mains and
Appurtenances.
8 . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inch
through 12-inch .
9. AWWA M23 Manual of Water Supply Practices, "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" .
B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials .
02510 - 1 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02510
WATER MAINS .
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment
and labor required for the installation of water mains as herein described and as shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work
required for the construction of these water mains in accordance with the provisions set forth under
the applicable items of this Specification.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National Standards Institute
(ANSI).
I AWWA C104 (ANSI A21 .4) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe,;
and Fittings for water. -
2. AWWA (ANSI) Clio Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48 -inch for.
water and other liquids .
3 . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron~and Gray-Iron . ,.
Pressure Pipe and Fittings .
4 . AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 .50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
5 . AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in Metal Molds or
Sand Lined Molds -for water of other liquids .
6 . AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 112-inch
for water and other liquids.
7 . . AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water Mains and
Appurtenances.
8 . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inch
through 12-inch .
9. AWWA M23 Manual of Water Supply Practices, "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" .
B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials .
02510 - 1 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C , American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1 . AASHTO T-99 (2 .5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99-
801 (Dated 1981 ) .
2 . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 101b . Rammer and an 18-inch drop.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop drawings for the following items .
1 . Material specifications for all pipe types , fittings, joints, joint restraint, specials, and
miscellaneous appurtenances.
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 . 01 PIPE
A. Ductile iron Pipe - All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 ANSI A21 . 51 and
shall be minimum thickness class 50 . All pipe shall be factory lined and coated. The pipe
interior shall be cement lined and seal coated in accordance with AWWA C104. The
exterior of the pipe shall have a minimum 10 mil . thick coating of coal tar epoxy, "Kop-
Coat" Bitumastic 300M or "Proco" EP 214.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three blue color coded stripes. These stripes
shall be applied in the manner as the required . ASTM coding using paint with the word
"Water Main" in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches . As an
alternative to lettering, pipe may. be continuously layered with an attached blue plastic
identification tape marked "Water" .
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, ductile iron pipe shall be furnished in standard
18 or 20 foot laying lengths, and have mechanical joint ends .
B . P .V . C. Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made from Class
12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside diameter of cast iron
pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi.
P .V . C. pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide a light blue color. The pipe shall
be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in
the manner as the required ASTM coding using permanent ink with the word "Water Main"
in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches. As an alternative to
lettering, pipe may be continuously layered with plastic identification tape marked "Water" .
P .V . C. pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
1 . Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a minimum wall
thickness of DR-18 .
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C , American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1 . AASHTO T-99 (2 .5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99-
801 (Dated 1981 ) .
2 . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 101b . Rammer and an 18-inch drop.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop drawings for the following items .
1 . Material specifications for all pipe types , fittings, joints, joint restraint, specials, and
miscellaneous appurtenances.
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 . 01 PIPE
A. Ductile iron Pipe - All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 ANSI A21 . 51 and
shall be minimum thickness class 50 . All pipe shall be factory lined and coated. The pipe
interior shall be cement lined and seal coated in accordance with AWWA C104. The
exterior of the pipe shall have a minimum 10 mil . thick coating of coal tar epoxy, "Kop-
Coat" Bitumastic 300M or "Proco" EP 214.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three blue color coded stripes. These stripes
shall be applied in the manner as the required . ASTM coding using paint with the word
"Water Main" in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches . As an
alternative to lettering, pipe may. be continuously layered with an attached blue plastic
identification tape marked "Water" .
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, ductile iron pipe shall be furnished in standard
18 or 20 foot laying lengths, and have mechanical joint ends .
B . P .V . C. Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made from Class
12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside diameter of cast iron
pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi.
P .V . C. pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide a light blue color. The pipe shall
be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in
the manner as the required ASTM coding using permanent ink with the word "Water Main"
in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches. As an alternative to
lettering, pipe may be continuously layered with plastic identification tape marked "Water" .
P .V . C. pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
1 . Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a minimum wall
thickness of DR-18 .
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C , American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1 . AASHTO T-99 (2 .5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99-
801 (Dated 1981 ) .
2 . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 101b . Rammer and an 18-inch drop.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop drawings for the following items .
1 . Material specifications for all pipe types , fittings, joints, joint restraint, specials, and
miscellaneous appurtenances.
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 . 01 PIPE
A. Ductile iron Pipe - All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 ANSI A21 . 51 and
shall be minimum thickness class 50 . All pipe shall be factory lined and coated. The pipe
interior shall be cement lined and seal coated in accordance with AWWA C104. The
exterior of the pipe shall have a minimum 10 mil . thick coating of coal tar epoxy, "Kop-
Coat" Bitumastic 300M or "Proco" EP 214.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three blue color coded stripes. These stripes
shall be applied in the manner as the required . ASTM coding using paint with the word
"Water Main" in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches . As an
alternative to lettering, pipe may. be continuously layered with an attached blue plastic
identification tape marked "Water" .
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, ductile iron pipe shall be furnished in standard
18 or 20 foot laying lengths, and have mechanical joint ends .
B . P .V . C. Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made from Class
12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside diameter of cast iron
pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi.
P .V . C. pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide a light blue color. The pipe shall
be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in
the manner as the required ASTM coding using permanent ink with the word "Water Main"
in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches. As an alternative to
lettering, pipe may be continuously layered with plastic identification tape marked "Water" .
P .V . C. pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
1 . Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a minimum wall
thickness of DR-18 .
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-B- 11 -85, shall
meet AWWA C 905 standards for potable water application requirements, and shall
be DR- 18 wall thickness .
2 .02 FITTINGS
All underground fittings shall be ductile iron with mechanically restrained joints . Fittings
shall conform to the following:
A. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 " through 12 " shall be compact ductile on conforming to
AWWA C 153 . Fittings shall have a m nimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Fittings shall
have mechanically restrained joints .
B . Fittings for pipe sizes over 12 " shall be ductile or cast iron conforming to AWWA
Cl 10 . Fittings shall have
mechanically restrained joina minimum pressure ratints. psi. Fitt
g of 250 ings shall have
C. All fittings shall be lined and coated as specified for ductile iron pipe.
D. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
2 . 03 JOINTS
A . Push on Joints - Joints for PVC pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber gasket ;. -
Compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl I1 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) . Special.
fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation .
B • Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints shall be used on fittings for changes
in
horizontal or vertical alignment on all pipes, up to 12-inches in diameter. All „-`
mechanical joints shall be restrained as further outlined in these specificationsF
Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with AWWA Cl 11 .
C• Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment of pipe shall be
mechanically restrained. As indicated on the drawings, pipe lengths located
upstream and downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained. Method of
joint restraint shall be as follows :
1 . P. V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with
"EBBA IRON" series 500, or other approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints
on P.V.C. pipe in diameters 4 " through 12 " shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON" series 1500, or other approved restrainer.
2 . P . V. C. pipe in diameters over 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with "UNI_
FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer. Bell and
spigot joints on P.V. C. pipe in diameters over I2 " shall be restrained with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved restrainer.
3 . Mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON", Megalug Series 1100 restrainers, or approved equal . Push-on ductile
iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with pipe manufa
joints, such as U. S . Pipe "TR-FLEX GRIPPER RING" cturer's restrained
, American Pipe "LOK-
RING" or "LOK-FAST" joints, or approved equal.
4. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
02510 - 3 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on a unit
cost basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in the work.
E. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below granular sub-
base (if required), base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
F. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made stationary features
occurring above or below ground surface.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to the Project Architect/Engineer from the
testing services, with copy to Contractor, and Owner:
1 . Test reports on borrow material.
2. Verification of suitability of each footing subgrade material, in accordance with
specified requirements.
3 . Field reports : in-place soil density tests.
4. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered.
5 . Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of
each strata tested.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Trenching to comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P. Contractor to
provide written assurance of compliance.
C. Testing and Inspection Service : The Contractor will employ and pay for a qualified
independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and
inspection service during earthwork operations.
D. Degree of Compaction: Required compaction is expressed as a percentage of maximum density
by test procedures of ASTM D 1557.
1 .06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Bidders shall inform themselves of location and nature of work, character of equipment and
facilities needed for performance of work, general and local conditions prevailing at site, and
other matters which may in any way affect work under this contract in accordance with
DIVISION 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B . Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design
and are available to the Contractor for review and compliance with recommendations.
Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy of continuity
between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this data by the Contractor.
02300 - 2 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-B- 11 -85, shall
meet AWWA C 905 standards for potable water application requirements, and shall
be DR- 18 wall thickness .
2 .02 FITTINGS
All underground fittings shall be ductile iron with mechanically restrained joints . Fittings
shall conform to the following:
A. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 " through 12 " shall be compact ductile on conforming to
AWWA C 153 . Fittings shall have a m nimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Fittings shall
have mechanically restrained joints .
B . Fittings for pipe sizes over 12 " shall be ductile or cast iron conforming to AWWA
Cl 10 . Fittings shall have
mechanically restrained joina minimum pressure ratints. psi. Fitt
g of 250 ings shall have
C. All fittings shall be lined and coated as specified for ductile iron pipe.
D. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
2 . 03 JOINTS
A . Push on Joints - Joints for PVC pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber gasket ;. -
Compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl I1 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) . Special.
fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation .
B • Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints shall be used on fittings for changes
in
horizontal or vertical alignment on all pipes, up to 12-inches in diameter. All „-`
mechanical joints shall be restrained as further outlined in these specificationsF
Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with AWWA Cl 11 .
C• Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment of pipe shall be
mechanically restrained. As indicated on the drawings, pipe lengths located
upstream and downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained. Method of
joint restraint shall be as follows :
1 . P. V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with
"EBBA IRON" series 500, or other approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints
on P.V.C. pipe in diameters 4 " through 12 " shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON" series 1500, or other approved restrainer.
2 . P . V. C. pipe in diameters over 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with "UNI_
FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer. Bell and
spigot joints on P.V. C. pipe in diameters over I2 " shall be restrained with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved restrainer.
3 . Mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON", Megalug Series 1100 restrainers, or approved equal . Push-on ductile
iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with pipe manufa
joints, such as U. S . Pipe "TR-FLEX GRIPPER RING" cturer's restrained
, American Pipe "LOK-
RING" or "LOK-FAST" joints, or approved equal.
4. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
02510 - 3 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-B- 11 -85, shall
meet AWWA C 905 standards for potable water application requirements, and shall
be DR- 18 wall thickness .
2 .02 FITTINGS
All underground fittings shall be ductile iron with mechanically restrained joints . Fittings
shall conform to the following:
A. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 " through 12 " shall be compact ductile on conforming to
AWWA C 153 . Fittings shall have a m nimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Fittings shall
have mechanically restrained joints .
B . Fittings for pipe sizes over 12 " shall be ductile or cast iron conforming to AWWA
Cl 10 . Fittings shall have
mechanically restrained joina minimum pressure ratints. psi. Fitt
g of 250 ings shall have
C. All fittings shall be lined and coated as specified for ductile iron pipe.
D. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
2 . 03 JOINTS
A . Push on Joints - Joints for PVC pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber gasket ;. -
Compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl I1 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) . Special.
fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation .
B • Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints shall be used on fittings for changes
in
horizontal or vertical alignment on all pipes, up to 12-inches in diameter. All „-`
mechanical joints shall be restrained as further outlined in these specificationsF
Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with AWWA Cl 11 .
C• Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment of pipe shall be
mechanically restrained. As indicated on the drawings, pipe lengths located
upstream and downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained. Method of
joint restraint shall be as follows :
1 . P. V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with
"EBBA IRON" series 500, or other approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints
on P.V.C. pipe in diameters 4 " through 12 " shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON" series 1500, or other approved restrainer.
2 . P . V. C. pipe in diameters over 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with "UNI_
FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer. Bell and
spigot joints on P.V. C. pipe in diameters over I2 " shall be restrained with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved restrainer.
3 . Mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON", Megalug Series 1100 restrainers, or approved equal . Push-on ductile
iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with pipe manufa
joints, such as U. S . Pipe "TR-FLEX GRIPPER RING" cturer's restrained
, American Pipe "LOK-
RING" or "LOK-FAST" joints, or approved equal.
4. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
02510 - 3 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D . Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material. The gasket shall
provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. Installation
and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by the manufacturer.
2 .04 FOUNDATION ROCK
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits:
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/ 8 " - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing # 8 - 0 - 5%
2 .05 BURIED IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed over all pipe.
Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width , consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a
solid aluminum foil core. Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, reverse print laminated to
aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed.
Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting . the "American Public
Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted continuously with the following .
words , unless otherwise approved:
"WATER MAIN "
Detectable buried warning tape shall be equal to or better than "PRO-LINE" underground utility
marking tape as manufactured by Pro-Line Safety Products Co . , 1099 Atlantic Drive, Unit # 1 ,
West Chicago , IL.
2 .06 DETECTABLE BURIED TRACE WIRE
single conductor copper wire. PVC color sheathing
Trace wire shall be continuous # 10 THHN,
shall meet the color code of the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK an
AN
The installation and testing of the water main shall be done in accord e witionalV WW
nts
C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V .C. pipe, p
lus described herein or shown on the Plans.
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable, for the
proper installation of all water mains, and appurtenances in the locations shown on the
drawings . Plantings, shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting
from the excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected
and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 . 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D . Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material. The gasket shall
provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. Installation
and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by the manufacturer.
2 .04 FOUNDATION ROCK
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits:
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/ 8 " - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing # 8 - 0 - 5%
2 .05 BURIED IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed over all pipe.
Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width , consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a
solid aluminum foil core. Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, reverse print laminated to
aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed.
Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting . the "American Public
Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted continuously with the following .
words , unless otherwise approved:
"WATER MAIN "
Detectable buried warning tape shall be equal to or better than "PRO-LINE" underground utility
marking tape as manufactured by Pro-Line Safety Products Co . , 1099 Atlantic Drive, Unit # 1 ,
West Chicago , IL.
2 .06 DETECTABLE BURIED TRACE WIRE
single conductor copper wire. PVC color sheathing
Trace wire shall be continuous # 10 THHN,
shall meet the color code of the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK an
AN
The installation and testing of the water main shall be done in accord e witionalV WW
nts
C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V .C. pipe, p
lus described herein or shown on the Plans.
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable, for the
proper installation of all water mains, and appurtenances in the locations shown on the
drawings . Plantings, shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting
from the excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected
and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 . 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D . Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material. The gasket shall
provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. Installation
and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by the manufacturer.
2 .04 FOUNDATION ROCK
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits:
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/ 8 " - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing # 8 - 0 - 5%
2 .05 BURIED IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed over all pipe.
Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width , consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a
solid aluminum foil core. Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, reverse print laminated to
aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed.
Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting . the "American Public
Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted continuously with the following .
words , unless otherwise approved:
"WATER MAIN "
Detectable buried warning tape shall be equal to or better than "PRO-LINE" underground utility
marking tape as manufactured by Pro-Line Safety Products Co . , 1099 Atlantic Drive, Unit # 1 ,
West Chicago , IL.
2 .06 DETECTABLE BURIED TRACE WIRE
single conductor copper wire. PVC color sheathing
Trace wire shall be continuous # 10 THHN,
shall meet the color code of the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK an
AN
The installation and testing of the water main shall be done in accord e witionalV WW
nts
C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V .C. pipe, p
lus described herein or shown on the Plans.
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable, for the
proper installation of all water mains, and appurtenances in the locations shown on the
drawings . Plantings, shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting
from the excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected
and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 . 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .03 TRENCHING
A . Pavement Cutting - Asphaltic pavements shall be cut by pneumatic hammers or mechanical
pavement cutters; saws, or other method approved by the Engineer. Concrete pavement or
concrete base pavement shall be sawed . Both types of pavement shall be cut and removed
Prior to any excavation.
B . Excavation - The excavation in which the pipes and appurtenances are to be constructed shall
be excavated in open cut, except where otherwise stated on the Plans, in such a manner to
such depths and widths as will give suitable room for bracing, supporting, pumping, draining
and for removing from the excavation any material which the Engineer may decide is
inadequate for foundation. The maximum trench width at the ton of the Pipe shall be in
accordance with the trenching details
The Contractor may, where it will not interfere with the work or adjacent structures or
Property, slope the sides of excavation. The sides of the trench may only be sloped from a
point in compliance with the trenching details. No compensation will be allowed for such
excavation and the Contractor shall include its cost in the prices bid.
The materials of excavation shall include all materials encountered, such as clay, sand , rock,
marl, muck, gravel, boulders, heterogeneous fill materials, old timbers, or any combination of
these. Any unforeseen obstacles such as buried trees or timbers, abandoned utilities, metal:,,::
objects, concrete masses or any debris encountered shall be removed. All "materials do
excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be considered as incidental to construction and.
no additional compensation will be allowed.
All roots , stumps , logs, limbs, boulders or any material which is not suitable foss
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly as excavated and dispose& '.
of by the Contractor at his expense.
C . Length of Trench to be Opened - The length of trench to be opened or the area of
surface to be disturbed and unrestored at any time will be limited by the Engineer '
with regard to expeditious construction and the convenience of the Owner.
- Excavation shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the pipe laying without
the consent of the Engineer.
D . Sheeting and Bracing - The Contractor shall be responsible for properly supporting
the sides of all trenches and excavations with timbers or other supports wherever
necessary or required to properly safeguard the trenches, adjacent properties and
structures and at restricted right-of-way. The cost of all necessary timber, sheeting
and bracing whatsoever (left in place or removed), shall be included in the unit
prices bid under force main installation.
Portions of the timber sheeting driven below the elevation of the top of the pipe
shall not be disturbed or removed
Timber sheeting and bracing shall be left in place if so ordered by the Engineer
and/or where shown on the Plans to avoid undermining or otherwise endangering
the work or adjacent structures .
All sheeting left in place shall be cut off or driven at least 18-inches below finished
grade, unless otherwise ordered.
02510 . 5 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by
Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum
will be authorized for such additional exploration.
2. The Soils Report shall be a part of these specifications and shall have the same
force and effect as the specifications.
C. Existing Utilities : Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities
are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations.
1 . Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult Project Architect/Engineer and utility owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective
services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities immediately to
satisfaction of utility owners.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others,
during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by the Project
Architect/Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have
been provided.
a. Provide a minimum of 48 -hour notice to the Project Architect/ Engineer,,
and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
3 . Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated
to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shutoff of services if lines are
active.
D. Use of Explosives : Use of explosives is not permitted.
E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work'
and post with warning lights.
1 . Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards
created by earthwork operations.
3 . Perform excavation by hand within drip-line of large trees selected to remain.
Protect root systems from damage or dry out to the greatest extent possible. Maintain
moist condition for root system and cover exposed roots with moistened burlap.
F. Maintain existing bench marks, monuments and other reference points, if disturbed or
destroyed, replace as directed by the project Architect/Engineer.
G. Condition of Premises: Accept site as found and excavate, fill and backfill site as indicated on
the drawings and as specified in this Section.
02300 - 3 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .03 TRENCHING
A . Pavement Cutting - Asphaltic pavements shall be cut by pneumatic hammers or mechanical
pavement cutters; saws, or other method approved by the Engineer. Concrete pavement or
concrete base pavement shall be sawed . Both types of pavement shall be cut and removed
Prior to any excavation.
B . Excavation - The excavation in which the pipes and appurtenances are to be constructed shall
be excavated in open cut, except where otherwise stated on the Plans, in such a manner to
such depths and widths as will give suitable room for bracing, supporting, pumping, draining
and for removing from the excavation any material which the Engineer may decide is
inadequate for foundation. The maximum trench width at the ton of the Pipe shall be in
accordance with the trenching details
The Contractor may, where it will not interfere with the work or adjacent structures or
Property, slope the sides of excavation. The sides of the trench may only be sloped from a
point in compliance with the trenching details. No compensation will be allowed for such
excavation and the Contractor shall include its cost in the prices bid.
The materials of excavation shall include all materials encountered, such as clay, sand , rock,
marl, muck, gravel, boulders, heterogeneous fill materials, old timbers, or any combination of
these. Any unforeseen obstacles such as buried trees or timbers, abandoned utilities, metal:,,::
objects, concrete masses or any debris encountered shall be removed. All "materials do
excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be considered as incidental to construction and.
no additional compensation will be allowed.
All roots , stumps , logs, limbs, boulders or any material which is not suitable foss
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly as excavated and dispose& '.
of by the Contractor at his expense.
C . Length of Trench to be Opened - The length of trench to be opened or the area of
surface to be disturbed and unrestored at any time will be limited by the Engineer '
with regard to expeditious construction and the convenience of the Owner.
- Excavation shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the pipe laying without
the consent of the Engineer.
D . Sheeting and Bracing - The Contractor shall be responsible for properly supporting
the sides of all trenches and excavations with timbers or other supports wherever
necessary or required to properly safeguard the trenches, adjacent properties and
structures and at restricted right-of-way. The cost of all necessary timber, sheeting
and bracing whatsoever (left in place or removed), shall be included in the unit
prices bid under force main installation.
Portions of the timber sheeting driven below the elevation of the top of the pipe
shall not be disturbed or removed
Timber sheeting and bracing shall be left in place if so ordered by the Engineer
and/or where shown on the Plans to avoid undermining or otherwise endangering
the work or adjacent structures .
All sheeting left in place shall be cut off or driven at least 18-inches below finished
grade, unless otherwise ordered.
02510 . 5 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .03 TRENCHING
A . Pavement Cutting - Asphaltic pavements shall be cut by pneumatic hammers or mechanical
pavement cutters; saws, or other method approved by the Engineer. Concrete pavement or
concrete base pavement shall be sawed . Both types of pavement shall be cut and removed
Prior to any excavation.
B . Excavation - The excavation in which the pipes and appurtenances are to be constructed shall
be excavated in open cut, except where otherwise stated on the Plans, in such a manner to
such depths and widths as will give suitable room for bracing, supporting, pumping, draining
and for removing from the excavation any material which the Engineer may decide is
inadequate for foundation. The maximum trench width at the ton of the Pipe shall be in
accordance with the trenching details
The Contractor may, where it will not interfere with the work or adjacent structures or
Property, slope the sides of excavation. The sides of the trench may only be sloped from a
point in compliance with the trenching details. No compensation will be allowed for such
excavation and the Contractor shall include its cost in the prices bid.
The materials of excavation shall include all materials encountered, such as clay, sand , rock,
marl, muck, gravel, boulders, heterogeneous fill materials, old timbers, or any combination of
these. Any unforeseen obstacles such as buried trees or timbers, abandoned utilities, metal:,,::
objects, concrete masses or any debris encountered shall be removed. All "materials do
excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be considered as incidental to construction and.
no additional compensation will be allowed.
All roots , stumps , logs, limbs, boulders or any material which is not suitable foss
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly as excavated and dispose& '.
of by the Contractor at his expense.
C . Length of Trench to be Opened - The length of trench to be opened or the area of
surface to be disturbed and unrestored at any time will be limited by the Engineer '
with regard to expeditious construction and the convenience of the Owner.
- Excavation shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the pipe laying without
the consent of the Engineer.
D . Sheeting and Bracing - The Contractor shall be responsible for properly supporting
the sides of all trenches and excavations with timbers or other supports wherever
necessary or required to properly safeguard the trenches, adjacent properties and
structures and at restricted right-of-way. The cost of all necessary timber, sheeting
and bracing whatsoever (left in place or removed), shall be included in the unit
prices bid under force main installation.
Portions of the timber sheeting driven below the elevation of the top of the pipe
shall not be disturbed or removed
Timber sheeting and bracing shall be left in place if so ordered by the Engineer
and/or where shown on the Plans to avoid undermining or otherwise endangering
the work or adjacent structures .
All sheeting left in place shall be cut off or driven at least 18-inches below finished
grade, unless otherwise ordered.
02510 . 5 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Great care shall be exercised in the selection of sheeting and bracing of adequate
design, type, size and strength. The adequacy of the timber used for all supporting
and bracing purposes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall use
only men of seasoned experience for this type of work. The sizes and lengths of the
timber used shall conform closely to the needs of the work and oversizing as well as
undersizing should be avoided.
In placing and driving the sheeting, proper workmanship and equipment shall be
used to achieve a true alignment and close contact of the sheeting boards. Timber
sheeting shall be straight and sound, free from shakes, cracks , large or loose knobs
and other defects impairing its strength and durability. It shall be squared to the
required dimension throughout its entire length. If required for the proper execution
of the work where running sand, quicksand or other sem -fluid material difficult to
handle is encountered, the timber sheeting shall be tongue and groove.
The Contractor may, in lieu of sheeting, bracing and shoring to maintain the
allowable trench widths, use a "trench box" ("trench shield" or "mule") provided
pipe sections are secured downstream by a cable(s) stretched through and secured
to the end section of pipe by means of a timber and a cable clamp , all materials
being of adequate size and strength. The cable shall be held taut during the process
of advancing the "box" .
This procedure may be used so long as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the work is
proceeding satisfactorily, The . Engineer may revoke permission to use the "trench
box" at any time he feels unsatisfactory or inadequate work is being performed and
the Contractor shall , without appeal, immediately begin using sheeting„ bracing
and shoring to maintain the allowable trench widths.
At all times, when soil conditions permit, the bottom edge of the "trench box" shall
be no lower than the springline of the pipe, so as to disturb the trench compaction
when advancing the " trench box" .
E, Placing of Excavated Material - All excavated materials shall be placed where
indicated by the Engineer in such a manner as not to endanger the work and so that
free access will be maintained at all times to all parts of the trench and to all fire
hydrants and their gate valves in the vicinity, Such material shall be neatly piled so
as to interfere as little as possible with traffic.
F . Drainage - The Contractor shall furnish sufficient pumping or other dewatering
equipment and shall provide at his own expense satisfactory drainage whenever
needed in trenches and other excavations during the progress of the work and its
completion for inspection. Water shall not be allowed to flow over or raise upon
any concrete, masonry or pipe until work has been inspected and the mortar or
concrete has properly set.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the water table shall be lowered by the
use of a well point system. Open trench pumping may be permitted only upon
approval by the Engineer of the method of pumping and drainage to be used. If
open trench pumping is approved, the water must be conveyed entirely through
approved coarse material placed below the bottom of the "Foundation" hereinafter
described. The depth
of this coarse material shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Great care shall be exercised in the selection of sheeting and bracing of adequate
design, type, size and strength. The adequacy of the timber used for all supporting
and bracing purposes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall use
only men of seasoned experience for this type of work. The sizes and lengths of the
timber used shall conform closely to the needs of the work and oversizing as well as
undersizing should be avoided.
In placing and driving the sheeting, proper workmanship and equipment shall be
used to achieve a true alignment and close contact of the sheeting boards. Timber
sheeting shall be straight and sound, free from shakes, cracks , large or loose knobs
and other defects impairing its strength and durability. It shall be squared to the
required dimension throughout its entire length. If required for the proper execution
of the work where running sand, quicksand or other sem -fluid material difficult to
handle is encountered, the timber sheeting shall be tongue and groove.
The Contractor may, in lieu of sheeting, bracing and shoring to maintain the
allowable trench widths, use a "trench box" ("trench shield" or "mule") provided
pipe sections are secured downstream by a cable(s) stretched through and secured
to the end section of pipe by means of a timber and a cable clamp , all materials
being of adequate size and strength. The cable shall be held taut during the process
of advancing the "box" .
This procedure may be used so long as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the work is
proceeding satisfactorily, The . Engineer may revoke permission to use the "trench
box" at any time he feels unsatisfactory or inadequate work is being performed and
the Contractor shall , without appeal, immediately begin using sheeting„ bracing
and shoring to maintain the allowable trench widths.
At all times, when soil conditions permit, the bottom edge of the "trench box" shall
be no lower than the springline of the pipe, so as to disturb the trench compaction
when advancing the " trench box" .
E, Placing of Excavated Material - All excavated materials shall be placed where
indicated by the Engineer in such a manner as not to endanger the work and so that
free access will be maintained at all times to all parts of the trench and to all fire
hydrants and their gate valves in the vicinity, Such material shall be neatly piled so
as to interfere as little as possible with traffic.
F . Drainage - The Contractor shall furnish sufficient pumping or other dewatering
equipment and shall provide at his own expense satisfactory drainage whenever
needed in trenches and other excavations during the progress of the work and its
completion for inspection. Water shall not be allowed to flow over or raise upon
any concrete, masonry or pipe until work has been inspected and the mortar or
concrete has properly set.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the water table shall be lowered by the
use of a well point system. Open trench pumping may be permitted only upon
approval by the Engineer of the method of pumping and drainage to be used. If
open trench pumping is approved, the water must be conveyed entirely through
approved coarse material placed below the bottom of the "Foundation" hereinafter
described. The depth
of this coarse material shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Great care shall be exercised in the selection of sheeting and bracing of adequate
design, type, size and strength. The adequacy of the timber used for all supporting
and bracing purposes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall use
only men of seasoned experience for this type of work. The sizes and lengths of the
timber used shall conform closely to the needs of the work and oversizing as well as
undersizing should be avoided.
In placing and driving the sheeting, proper workmanship and equipment shall be
used to achieve a true alignment and close contact of the sheeting boards. Timber
sheeting shall be straight and sound, free from shakes, cracks , large or loose knobs
and other defects impairing its strength and durability. It shall be squared to the
required dimension throughout its entire length. If required for the proper execution
of the work where running sand, quicksand or other sem -fluid material difficult to
handle is encountered, the timber sheeting shall be tongue and groove.
The Contractor may, in lieu of sheeting, bracing and shoring to maintain the
allowable trench widths, use a "trench box" ("trench shield" or "mule") provided
pipe sections are secured downstream by a cable(s) stretched through and secured
to the end section of pipe by means of a timber and a cable clamp , all materials
being of adequate size and strength. The cable shall be held taut during the process
of advancing the "box" .
This procedure may be used so long as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the work is
proceeding satisfactorily, The . Engineer may revoke permission to use the "trench
box" at any time he feels unsatisfactory or inadequate work is being performed and
the Contractor shall , without appeal, immediately begin using sheeting„ bracing
and shoring to maintain the allowable trench widths.
At all times, when soil conditions permit, the bottom edge of the "trench box" shall
be no lower than the springline of the pipe, so as to disturb the trench compaction
when advancing the " trench box" .
E, Placing of Excavated Material - All excavated materials shall be placed where
indicated by the Engineer in such a manner as not to endanger the work and so that
free access will be maintained at all times to all parts of the trench and to all fire
hydrants and their gate valves in the vicinity, Such material shall be neatly piled so
as to interfere as little as possible with traffic.
F . Drainage - The Contractor shall furnish sufficient pumping or other dewatering
equipment and shall provide at his own expense satisfactory drainage whenever
needed in trenches and other excavations during the progress of the work and its
completion for inspection. Water shall not be allowed to flow over or raise upon
any concrete, masonry or pipe until work has been inspected and the mortar or
concrete has properly set.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the water table shall be lowered by the
use of a well point system. Open trench pumping may be permitted only upon
approval by the Engineer of the method of pumping and drainage to be used. If
open trench pumping is approved, the water must be conveyed entirely through
approved coarse material placed below the bottom of the "Foundation" hereinafter
described. The depth
of this coarse material shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Materials and workmanship used for the well point system shall be in keeping with
the approved standard practice. The well point system shall function so as to enable
pipe, concrete cradle and appurtenances to be installed without interference from
running or standing water at the bottom of the trench. The Engineer shall make the
final decision as to the acceptability of the well point system or any part thereof.
Where necessary, pea gravel or graded sand shall be used in conjunction with the
well points as they are installed in insure continuous pumping in the dewatering of
fine material.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the various unit prices bid under water
main installation. .
G• Disposal of Water from Excavations - All water pumped or bailed from trenches or
other excavations shall be conveyed in a proper manner to a suitable point of
discharge by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in
a manner that will not cause injury to public health, private or public property, any
Portion of the work completed or in progress, the surface of the streets, or cause any
impediments to the reasonable use of the site by other Contractors. The Contractor
shall be responsible for complying with all the local regulations and those of the.,
Department of Environmental Regulation regarding pollution of waterways. Should"
the size of Contractor's dewatering equipment, or the quantity of disposed water, oY
the method of disposal require a St . Johns' River Water Mgmt. District permit, the ,'
Contractor shall obtain such permit at no additional expense to the Owner and with
no additional time added to the Contract. The Contractor shall take special f
precautions to eliminate any odor problems resulting from the discharge of sulfide' `
water, such as the use of submerged discharge outlets and overflow basins.
H. Preparation of Trench - Trenching as shown on the Plan details shall be standard fo'r',
this project. The trenches shall be constructed by excavating to the depth indicated
on the Plans . The trenches shall then be manually shaped to fit the bell and lower
quadrant of the pipe barrel :
Mechanical excavation shall be limited to provide an undisturbed trench bottom for
the lower quadrant and bell of the pipe. Final excavation shall require hand shaping
for placement of the pipe. If mechanical overcutting occurs, the pipe bedding shall
consist of four (4) inches of washed and . graded sand or crushed rock on
undisturbed soil .
3 . 03 LAYING OF PIPE
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600 for
ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V. C. pipe. Prior to installation, all pipe and
appurtenances shall be examined for damage and defects. Under no circumstances shall
defective pipe be installed. All lumps, blisters and excess coating materials shall be
removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe. While being placed in the trench, care
shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end
of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall remain in
02510 . 7 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. "Satisfactory Fill Materials" include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW and
SP properly worked by Contractor to obtain optimum moisture and compaction. Within 2 feet
of the surface of the indicated grade, limit rock size to 3 inches. Below 2 feet of the surface of
indicated grade, limit rock size to 12 inches.
B . "Unsatisfactory Materials" include materials other than "Satisfactory Fill Materials": however,
materials of any classification that are detemrined by testing laboratory as too wet or too soft
for providing a stable foundation for structure, paving and walks will be classified as
"unsatisfactory".
C. "Select Fill Material" Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone,
crushed slag, or uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less than 5%
fines passing a No . 200 sieve.
D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1 - 1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4
sieve.
E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2
inches in any dimension, debris, waste, muck, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
3 .02 GENERAL
A. Public Safety: Accomplish work in a manner that provides for safety of the public and workers
and provides for the protection of property.
B . Construction: Do not close, obstruct or store material or equipment in streets, sidewalks, alleys
or passageways without a permit in accordance with local ordinances, regulations, codes and
Owner approval.
C. Interference : Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads and other facilities.
D. Debris Removal : Do not store or permit debris to accumulate on site.
1 . If Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, Owner reserves the right to
cause same to be removed at Contractor's expense.
E. Erosion Repair: Take every precaution and temporary measure to prevent damage from erosion
of freshly graded areas.
02300 — Site. Earthwork
02300 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Materials and workmanship used for the well point system shall be in keeping with
the approved standard practice. The well point system shall function so as to enable
pipe, concrete cradle and appurtenances to be installed without interference from
running or standing water at the bottom of the trench. The Engineer shall make the
final decision as to the acceptability of the well point system or any part thereof.
Where necessary, pea gravel or graded sand shall be used in conjunction with the
well points as they are installed in insure continuous pumping in the dewatering of
fine material.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the various unit prices bid under water
main installation. .
G• Disposal of Water from Excavations - All water pumped or bailed from trenches or
other excavations shall be conveyed in a proper manner to a suitable point of
discharge by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in
a manner that will not cause injury to public health, private or public property, any
Portion of the work completed or in progress, the surface of the streets, or cause any
impediments to the reasonable use of the site by other Contractors. The Contractor
shall be responsible for complying with all the local regulations and those of the.,
Department of Environmental Regulation regarding pollution of waterways. Should"
the size of Contractor's dewatering equipment, or the quantity of disposed water, oY
the method of disposal require a St . Johns' River Water Mgmt. District permit, the ,'
Contractor shall obtain such permit at no additional expense to the Owner and with
no additional time added to the Contract. The Contractor shall take special f
precautions to eliminate any odor problems resulting from the discharge of sulfide' `
water, such as the use of submerged discharge outlets and overflow basins.
H. Preparation of Trench - Trenching as shown on the Plan details shall be standard fo'r',
this project. The trenches shall be constructed by excavating to the depth indicated
on the Plans . The trenches shall then be manually shaped to fit the bell and lower
quadrant of the pipe barrel :
Mechanical excavation shall be limited to provide an undisturbed trench bottom for
the lower quadrant and bell of the pipe. Final excavation shall require hand shaping
for placement of the pipe. If mechanical overcutting occurs, the pipe bedding shall
consist of four (4) inches of washed and . graded sand or crushed rock on
undisturbed soil .
3 . 03 LAYING OF PIPE
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600 for
ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V. C. pipe. Prior to installation, all pipe and
appurtenances shall be examined for damage and defects. Under no circumstances shall
defective pipe be installed. All lumps, blisters and excess coating materials shall be
removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe. While being placed in the trench, care
shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end
of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall remain in
02510 . 7 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Materials and workmanship used for the well point system shall be in keeping with
the approved standard practice. The well point system shall function so as to enable
pipe, concrete cradle and appurtenances to be installed without interference from
running or standing water at the bottom of the trench. The Engineer shall make the
final decision as to the acceptability of the well point system or any part thereof.
Where necessary, pea gravel or graded sand shall be used in conjunction with the
well points as they are installed in insure continuous pumping in the dewatering of
fine material.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the various unit prices bid under water
main installation. .
G• Disposal of Water from Excavations - All water pumped or bailed from trenches or
other excavations shall be conveyed in a proper manner to a suitable point of
discharge by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in
a manner that will not cause injury to public health, private or public property, any
Portion of the work completed or in progress, the surface of the streets, or cause any
impediments to the reasonable use of the site by other Contractors. The Contractor
shall be responsible for complying with all the local regulations and those of the.,
Department of Environmental Regulation regarding pollution of waterways. Should"
the size of Contractor's dewatering equipment, or the quantity of disposed water, oY
the method of disposal require a St . Johns' River Water Mgmt. District permit, the ,'
Contractor shall obtain such permit at no additional expense to the Owner and with
no additional time added to the Contract. The Contractor shall take special f
precautions to eliminate any odor problems resulting from the discharge of sulfide' `
water, such as the use of submerged discharge outlets and overflow basins.
H. Preparation of Trench - Trenching as shown on the Plan details shall be standard fo'r',
this project. The trenches shall be constructed by excavating to the depth indicated
on the Plans . The trenches shall then be manually shaped to fit the bell and lower
quadrant of the pipe barrel :
Mechanical excavation shall be limited to provide an undisturbed trench bottom for
the lower quadrant and bell of the pipe. Final excavation shall require hand shaping
for placement of the pipe. If mechanical overcutting occurs, the pipe bedding shall
consist of four (4) inches of washed and . graded sand or crushed rock on
undisturbed soil .
3 . 03 LAYING OF PIPE
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600 for
ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V. C. pipe. Prior to installation, all pipe and
appurtenances shall be examined for damage and defects. Under no circumstances shall
defective pipe be installed. All lumps, blisters and excess coating materials shall be
removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe. While being placed in the trench, care
shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end
of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall remain in
02510 . 7 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to deflect the pipe
from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are
permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table 5 and 6 in AWWA
Specification C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe.
A. Thrust Restraint - All valves, dead ends , tees, and bends for changes in alignment
shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All items installed in the
mainline which may cause vertical or horizontal thrust forces shall require the item
and appropriate length of upstream and downstream pipe to be mechanically
restrained with approved devices .
B . Backfill
1 . General - Where the trench has been dewatered, backfilling must progress
sufficiently before pumps are shut off to prevent flotation of pipe. Any pipe that
has been displaced perceptibly from its correct position shall be removed and
re-laid properly at the Contractor's expense . Backfilling shall follow pipe laying
within 100 feet, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but shall not be
performed in any case until the Engineer has approved the line for backfilling.
Water shall not be added except as required to obtain Optimum Moisture
Content and " flooding" or "puddling" for compaction will not allowed.
Backfill material shall be free of roots, logs, limbs, clays, large rocks or any
material or debris , detemnned to be unsuitable by the Engineer. The Engineer
may reject any material which he considers unsuitable for backfill .
The compaction procedures specified herein shall be considered " minimum
procedures" to prevent after-settlement and the Contractor shall reopen, refill
and recompact any trenches indicating improper backfill procedures or after-
settlement.
All road crossings shall be backfilled immediately, made passable and
maintained passable until the permanent repair is made.
2 . State Owned Rights-Of-Way Under Pavements - The initial lift (stage 1 ) shall
consist of clean, fine, select materials , not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the
haunches of the pipe. The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6" .
The initial lift shall be manually compacted to 100% of the maximum density
as determined by AASHTO T-99 . Subsequent lifts (stage 2) to 12" above the
pipe shall be constructed as specified for stage 1 , except that had operated
mechanical tampers may be used. Additional lifts in stage 2, from 12" above
the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be carefully backfilled with material free
from organic material and stones or clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the
final 6-inch layer) in diameter, and mechanically compacted in 6-inch layers to
an average maximum density of 100% as determined by AASHTOT-99 .
3 . All Other Areas Under Pavements - The initial lift shall consist of clean, fine,
select materials, not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the haunches of the pipe.
The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 4" . The initial lift shall be
manually compacted to 95 % of the maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . Subsequent lifts to 12" above the pipe shall be constructed as
specified for the initial lift, except that had operated mechanical tampers may
be used. Additional lifts from 12" above the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be
carefully backfilled with material free from organic material and stones or
02510 — Water Mains
02610 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to deflect the pipe
from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are
permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table 5 and 6 in AWWA
Specification C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe.
A. Thrust Restraint - All valves, dead ends , tees, and bends for changes in alignment
shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All items installed in the
mainline which may cause vertical or horizontal thrust forces shall require the item
and appropriate length of upstream and downstream pipe to be mechanically
restrained with approved devices .
B . Backfill
1 . General - Where the trench has been dewatered, backfilling must progress
sufficiently before pumps are shut off to prevent flotation of pipe. Any pipe that
has been displaced perceptibly from its correct position shall be removed and
re-laid properly at the Contractor's expense . Backfilling shall follow pipe laying
within 100 feet, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but shall not be
performed in any case until the Engineer has approved the line for backfilling.
Water shall not be added except as required to obtain Optimum Moisture
Content and " flooding" or "puddling" for compaction will not allowed.
Backfill material shall be free of roots, logs, limbs, clays, large rocks or any
material or debris , detemnned to be unsuitable by the Engineer. The Engineer
may reject any material which he considers unsuitable for backfill .
The compaction procedures specified herein shall be considered " minimum
procedures" to prevent after-settlement and the Contractor shall reopen, refill
and recompact any trenches indicating improper backfill procedures or after-
settlement.
All road crossings shall be backfilled immediately, made passable and
maintained passable until the permanent repair is made.
2 . State Owned Rights-Of-Way Under Pavements - The initial lift (stage 1 ) shall
consist of clean, fine, select materials , not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the
haunches of the pipe. The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6" .
The initial lift shall be manually compacted to 100% of the maximum density
as determined by AASHTO T-99 . Subsequent lifts (stage 2) to 12" above the
pipe shall be constructed as specified for stage 1 , except that had operated
mechanical tampers may be used. Additional lifts in stage 2, from 12" above
the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be carefully backfilled with material free
from organic material and stones or clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the
final 6-inch layer) in diameter, and mechanically compacted in 6-inch layers to
an average maximum density of 100% as determined by AASHTOT-99 .
3 . All Other Areas Under Pavements - The initial lift shall consist of clean, fine,
select materials, not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the haunches of the pipe.
The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 4" . The initial lift shall be
manually compacted to 95 % of the maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . Subsequent lifts to 12" above the pipe shall be constructed as
specified for the initial lift, except that had operated mechanical tampers may
be used. Additional lifts from 12" above the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be
carefully backfilled with material free from organic material and stones or
02510 — Water Mains
02610 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to deflect the pipe
from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are
permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table 5 and 6 in AWWA
Specification C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe.
A. Thrust Restraint - All valves, dead ends , tees, and bends for changes in alignment
shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All items installed in the
mainline which may cause vertical or horizontal thrust forces shall require the item
and appropriate length of upstream and downstream pipe to be mechanically
restrained with approved devices .
B . Backfill
1 . General - Where the trench has been dewatered, backfilling must progress
sufficiently before pumps are shut off to prevent flotation of pipe. Any pipe that
has been displaced perceptibly from its correct position shall be removed and
re-laid properly at the Contractor's expense . Backfilling shall follow pipe laying
within 100 feet, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but shall not be
performed in any case until the Engineer has approved the line for backfilling.
Water shall not be added except as required to obtain Optimum Moisture
Content and " flooding" or "puddling" for compaction will not allowed.
Backfill material shall be free of roots, logs, limbs, clays, large rocks or any
material or debris , detemnned to be unsuitable by the Engineer. The Engineer
may reject any material which he considers unsuitable for backfill .
The compaction procedures specified herein shall be considered " minimum
procedures" to prevent after-settlement and the Contractor shall reopen, refill
and recompact any trenches indicating improper backfill procedures or after-
settlement.
All road crossings shall be backfilled immediately, made passable and
maintained passable until the permanent repair is made.
2 . State Owned Rights-Of-Way Under Pavements - The initial lift (stage 1 ) shall
consist of clean, fine, select materials , not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the
haunches of the pipe. The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6" .
The initial lift shall be manually compacted to 100% of the maximum density
as determined by AASHTO T-99 . Subsequent lifts (stage 2) to 12" above the
pipe shall be constructed as specified for stage 1 , except that had operated
mechanical tampers may be used. Additional lifts in stage 2, from 12" above
the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be carefully backfilled with material free
from organic material and stones or clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the
final 6-inch layer) in diameter, and mechanically compacted in 6-inch layers to
an average maximum density of 100% as determined by AASHTOT-99 .
3 . All Other Areas Under Pavements - The initial lift shall consist of clean, fine,
select materials, not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the haunches of the pipe.
The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 4" . The initial lift shall be
manually compacted to 95 % of the maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . Subsequent lifts to 12" above the pipe shall be constructed as
specified for the initial lift, except that had operated mechanical tampers may
be used. Additional lifts from 12" above the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be
carefully backfilled with material free from organic material and stones or
02510 — Water Mains
02610 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the final 6-final layer) in diameter, and
compacted in 6-inch layers to an average maximum density of 95% as
determined by AASHTO T- 180.
4 . Areas Outside of Pavements - Backfill of all areas outside of pavements shall
be constructed as specified above for "All Other Areas Under Pavements"
except that the additional lifts shall be constructed as specified to the finished
grade.
5 . Density Testing - The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made
by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to demonstrate
conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by
these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or
as deemed necessary by the Engineer. All test results shall be signed and sealed
by a Florida Registered Engineer, and a copy provided to the Owner and
Engineer.
In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction over compacted
material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content
shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different.
material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill. .
As a minimum, in-place density tests shall be performed at the rate of one test
location per 300 lineal feet (or fraction thereof) of trench on the compactedi `
backfill, under each drive lane at all roadway crossings and at all siogmficanV
changes in bedding and backfill material . Tests shall be taken in one foot lifts =.
beginning at one foot above the pipe and ending at the final grade. Test .
locations shall be as directed by the Engineer or his authorized representative. If'
any test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re-excavate andi'c`
recompact the backfill , at his expense, to the extent directed by the
o
tests
Engineer-
until the required shall be the compaction
or the Contractor oand shst of allpbecincludedtor anda n the
cost of installed and completed water main.
C. Installation of Detectable Buried Warning Tape
Tape shall be tied to each valve or fitting and shall run continuously with no splices
between valves or fittings. Tape shall be placed at a maximum depth of 12 inches
below finished grade directly above the pipe centerline. Following placement of
tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or
damage to the tape.
D . Installation of Detectable Buried Trace Wire
Trace wire shall be installed on all pipe, valve and fittings, with splices, branches,
connections and terminations as shown on the plans.
E Separation Requirements
Water mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
proposed sanitary or storm sewer, or any other sanitary hazard. Water mains
crossing sanitary hazards shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical clearance of
02510 - 9 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
1 . Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes where
settlement/washing occurs prior to acceptance of work.
2. Temporary Structures : Remove temporary structures when no longer required.
3 .03 LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS
A. Be responsible for surveys, measurements and layouts required for proper execution of work.
1 . Layout lines and grades from existing survey control system and as shown on the
Drawings.
B . Locate by stake and mark locations and elevations of the following:
1 . Elevations of existing earth cut and fill.
2 . Final grades for landscape contours.
3 . Other items as required to execute work under this Section of the specifications.
3 .04 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3 .05 STRIPPING
A. Strip turf, organic material, muck surface litter, rubble and overburden for entire depth of root
system of grass or other vegetation and/or to bottom of muck layer within all areas of
construction as indicated on Site Plan(s).
B. Stockpile clean topsoil on site to be used in the final grading work as an underlayment for sod
and landscaping proposed for the site.
3 . 06 EXCAVATION
A. Shall be in accordance with SECTION 02302 — EXCAVATION AND FILL.
B. Begin excavation after stripping, clearing and compaction where applicable, has been
completed.
C. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless
of character of materials and obstructions encountered.
D. Excavations for appurtenances and structures shall conform to dimensions and elevations and
shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of
forms and installation of services, except where the concrete for walls and footings is
authorized to be deposited directly against excavation surfaces. All excavation below general
machine excavation for footings and foundations shall be hand worked. Bottoms of all
(footings and appurtenances) shall be on level planes.
E. Remove "unsatisfactory materials" encountered from the building areas.
02300 - 5 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the final 6-final layer) in diameter, and
compacted in 6-inch layers to an average maximum density of 95% as
determined by AASHTO T- 180.
4 . Areas Outside of Pavements - Backfill of all areas outside of pavements shall
be constructed as specified above for "All Other Areas Under Pavements"
except that the additional lifts shall be constructed as specified to the finished
grade.
5 . Density Testing - The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made
by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to demonstrate
conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by
these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or
as deemed necessary by the Engineer. All test results shall be signed and sealed
by a Florida Registered Engineer, and a copy provided to the Owner and
Engineer.
In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction over compacted
material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content
shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different.
material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill. .
As a minimum, in-place density tests shall be performed at the rate of one test
location per 300 lineal feet (or fraction thereof) of trench on the compactedi `
backfill, under each drive lane at all roadway crossings and at all siogmficanV
changes in bedding and backfill material . Tests shall be taken in one foot lifts =.
beginning at one foot above the pipe and ending at the final grade. Test .
locations shall be as directed by the Engineer or his authorized representative. If'
any test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re-excavate andi'c`
recompact the backfill , at his expense, to the extent directed by the
o
tests
Engineer-
until the required shall be the compaction
or the Contractor oand shst of allpbecincludedtor anda n the
cost of installed and completed water main.
C. Installation of Detectable Buried Warning Tape
Tape shall be tied to each valve or fitting and shall run continuously with no splices
between valves or fittings. Tape shall be placed at a maximum depth of 12 inches
below finished grade directly above the pipe centerline. Following placement of
tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or
damage to the tape.
D . Installation of Detectable Buried Trace Wire
Trace wire shall be installed on all pipe, valve and fittings, with splices, branches,
connections and terminations as shown on the plans.
E Separation Requirements
Water mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
proposed sanitary or storm sewer, or any other sanitary hazard. Water mains
crossing sanitary hazards shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical clearance of
02510 - 9 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the final 6-final layer) in diameter, and
compacted in 6-inch layers to an average maximum density of 95% as
determined by AASHTO T- 180.
4 . Areas Outside of Pavements - Backfill of all areas outside of pavements shall
be constructed as specified above for "All Other Areas Under Pavements"
except that the additional lifts shall be constructed as specified to the finished
grade.
5 . Density Testing - The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made
by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to demonstrate
conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by
these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or
as deemed necessary by the Engineer. All test results shall be signed and sealed
by a Florida Registered Engineer, and a copy provided to the Owner and
Engineer.
In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction over compacted
material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content
shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different.
material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill. .
As a minimum, in-place density tests shall be performed at the rate of one test
location per 300 lineal feet (or fraction thereof) of trench on the compactedi `
backfill, under each drive lane at all roadway crossings and at all siogmficanV
changes in bedding and backfill material . Tests shall be taken in one foot lifts =.
beginning at one foot above the pipe and ending at the final grade. Test .
locations shall be as directed by the Engineer or his authorized representative. If'
any test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re-excavate andi'c`
recompact the backfill , at his expense, to the extent directed by the
o
tests
Engineer-
until the required shall be the compaction
or the Contractor oand shst of allpbecincludedtor anda n the
cost of installed and completed water main.
C. Installation of Detectable Buried Warning Tape
Tape shall be tied to each valve or fitting and shall run continuously with no splices
between valves or fittings. Tape shall be placed at a maximum depth of 12 inches
below finished grade directly above the pipe centerline. Following placement of
tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or
damage to the tape.
D . Installation of Detectable Buried Trace Wire
Trace wire shall be installed on all pipe, valve and fittings, with splices, branches,
connections and terminations as shown on the plans.
E Separation Requirements
Water mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
proposed sanitary or storm sewer, or any other sanitary hazard. Water mains
crossing sanitary hazards shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical clearance of
02510 - 9 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sanitary
hazard. Where the water main passes under the sanitary hazard or the 18 inch
clearance cannot be met, the water main shall have a full pipe length centered on
the sanitary hazard. The water main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall
be encased in a minimum of 6 inches of concrete all around.
3 .04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Hydrostatic Tests - The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and shall
perform all work required in connection with the test, including temporary plugs
where required. All pipe shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 p .s .i . The
required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation shall be applied for
not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be made water-
tight if leakage is evident.
No ductile iron pipe installation will be accepted unless and until the leakage
s less
than that as specified under Section 4.2 of the AWWA (ANSI) , PVC
PP
installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as applicable.
3 .05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the original
or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the completion of
backfilling and surface irregularities, that are dangerous or obstructive to traffic, are
to be removed.
Paved sections shall conform in grade with adjacent areas and shall be of at least
equal quality . Design mixes for flexible pavement shall be subject tapproval boy
the Engineer. All damaged or undermined areas of existing pavement,
previously removed, shall be removed and restored to original conditions or in the
specified manner.
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments , or other hard material, lying
on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal; replacement and
restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on drawings .
3 .06 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
The Contractor shall make no connection to the County' s existing water system without the
County first being given adequate notice of the connection and shall have a County
representative present to witness the connection and to operate any existing valves .
END OF SECTION
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sanitary
hazard. Where the water main passes under the sanitary hazard or the 18 inch
clearance cannot be met, the water main shall have a full pipe length centered on
the sanitary hazard. The water main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall
be encased in a minimum of 6 inches of concrete all around.
3 .04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Hydrostatic Tests - The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and shall
perform all work required in connection with the test, including temporary plugs
where required. All pipe shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 p .s .i . The
required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation shall be applied for
not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be made water-
tight if leakage is evident.
No ductile iron pipe installation will be accepted unless and until the leakage
s less
than that as specified under Section 4.2 of the AWWA (ANSI) , PVC
PP
installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as applicable.
3 .05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the original
or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the completion of
backfilling and surface irregularities, that are dangerous or obstructive to traffic, are
to be removed.
Paved sections shall conform in grade with adjacent areas and shall be of at least
equal quality . Design mixes for flexible pavement shall be subject tapproval boy
the Engineer. All damaged or undermined areas of existing pavement,
previously removed, shall be removed and restored to original conditions or in the
specified manner.
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments , or other hard material, lying
on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal; replacement and
restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on drawings .
3 .06 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
The Contractor shall make no connection to the County' s existing water system without the
County first being given adequate notice of the connection and shall have a County
representative present to witness the connection and to operate any existing valves .
END OF SECTION
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sanitary
hazard. Where the water main passes under the sanitary hazard or the 18 inch
clearance cannot be met, the water main shall have a full pipe length centered on
the sanitary hazard. The water main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall
be encased in a minimum of 6 inches of concrete all around.
3 .04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Hydrostatic Tests - The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and shall
perform all work required in connection with the test, including temporary plugs
where required. All pipe shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 p .s .i . The
required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation shall be applied for
not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be made water-
tight if leakage is evident.
No ductile iron pipe installation will be accepted unless and until the leakage
s less
than that as specified under Section 4.2 of the AWWA (ANSI) , PVC
PP
installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as applicable.
3 .05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the original
or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the completion of
backfilling and surface irregularities, that are dangerous or obstructive to traffic, are
to be removed.
Paved sections shall conform in grade with adjacent areas and shall be of at least
equal quality . Design mixes for flexible pavement shall be subject tapproval boy
the Engineer. All damaged or undermined areas of existing pavement,
previously removed, shall be removed and restored to original conditions or in the
specified manner.
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments , or other hard material, lying
on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal; replacement and
restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on drawings .
3 .06 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
The Contractor shall make no connection to the County' s existing water system without the
County first being given adequate notice of the connection and shall have a County
representative present to witness the connection and to operate any existing valves .
END OF SECTION
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02515
GATE VALVES
PARTI - SCOPE
1 . 01 GENERAL
The work to be performed under this item shall include furnishing and installing gate valves as
specified by the Engineer and as shown on the Plans .
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA)
I . AWWA Cl I 1 -80 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings .
2 . AWWA C509-87 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems ,
B . American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A126-84 - Gray-Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe fittings.
=1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A . Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to ?;
the Engineer, for review and approval five fQ sets of shop drawings for the following items ., ;
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the
provisions of the General Conditions .
1 . Gate Valve
2 . Valve Box
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2 . 01 GATE. VALVES (SIZES 4" TO 12")
Gate valves shall be of the solid wedge type with resilient seats, Gate valves shall be mechan cal jointed
W
and meet the requirements of AWA C509-87 .
Valves shall be iron bodied, bronze mounted, utilizing "O-ring" seals . Resilient seat shall be applied to
the gate and shall seal against an epoxy coated metallic surface.
The stem shall be of the non-rising type, operated by a standard AWWA, 2-inch wrench nut. All valves
shall open to the left, using a counterclockwise motion. The stem shall be sealed with a dual " O-ring"
system designed such that the seal above the stem collar can be replaced with the valve under pressure
in the fully open position.
02515 - 1 02515 — Gate Valves
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
F. Excavate in such a manner that quick and efficient drainage of stormwater will be affected.
G. Classify excavated materials and stockpile separately suitable soils foruse as backfill materials.
If sufficient quantities of excavated materials meeting requirements for backfill are not
available on site, provide materials meeting these requirements.
H. Stockpile excavated material suitable for use as fill and backfill.
3 .07 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having
jurisdiction. Comply with OSHA Standard 29CFR, Section 1926-650 subpart P .
B . Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space
restrictions or stability of material excavated.
C. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.
D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights,
stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition for all trenches in excess of 5 feet
deep. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period that excavations
will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses .
3 . 08 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area.
1 . Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points,
sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components
necessary to convey water away from excavations .
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or runoff areas . Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
B. Dewater excavations for inspection and for construction so that no concrete or fill is placed in
water and so that concrete less than 8 hours of age is not subjected to ground water pressure.
C. Keep excavations free of water while backfilling and construction therein takes place.
D. Dispose of water, resulting from dewatering operations in accordance with city, county, state
and federal regulations.
E. Conduct operations so that stormwater runoff sediment is not discharged to the adjacent lakes,
waterways, sewers, streets and adjacent properties.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02515
GATE VALVES
PARTI - SCOPE
1 . 01 GENERAL
The work to be performed under this item shall include furnishing and installing gate valves as
specified by the Engineer and as shown on the Plans .
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA)
I . AWWA Cl I 1 -80 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings .
2 . AWWA C509-87 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems ,
B . American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A126-84 - Gray-Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe fittings.
=1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A . Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to ?;
the Engineer, for review and approval five fQ sets of shop drawings for the following items ., ;
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the
provisions of the General Conditions .
1 . Gate Valve
2 . Valve Box
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2 . 01 GATE. VALVES (SIZES 4" TO 12")
Gate valves shall be of the solid wedge type with resilient seats, Gate valves shall be mechan cal jointed
W
and meet the requirements of AWA C509-87 .
Valves shall be iron bodied, bronze mounted, utilizing "O-ring" seals . Resilient seat shall be applied to
the gate and shall seal against an epoxy coated metallic surface.
The stem shall be of the non-rising type, operated by a standard AWWA, 2-inch wrench nut. All valves
shall open to the left, using a counterclockwise motion. The stem shall be sealed with a dual " O-ring"
system designed such that the seal above the stem collar can be replaced with the valve under pressure
in the fully open position.
02515 - 1 02515 — Gate Valves
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02515
GATE VALVES
PARTI - SCOPE
1 . 01 GENERAL
The work to be performed under this item shall include furnishing and installing gate valves as
specified by the Engineer and as shown on the Plans .
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA)
I . AWWA Cl I 1 -80 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings .
2 . AWWA C509-87 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems ,
B . American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A126-84 - Gray-Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe fittings.
=1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A . Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to ?;
the Engineer, for review and approval five fQ sets of shop drawings for the following items ., ;
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the
provisions of the General Conditions .
1 . Gate Valve
2 . Valve Box
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2 . 01 GATE. VALVES (SIZES 4" TO 12")
Gate valves shall be of the solid wedge type with resilient seats, Gate valves shall be mechan cal jointed
W
and meet the requirements of AWA C509-87 .
Valves shall be iron bodied, bronze mounted, utilizing "O-ring" seals . Resilient seat shall be applied to
the gate and shall seal against an epoxy coated metallic surface.
The stem shall be of the non-rising type, operated by a standard AWWA, 2-inch wrench nut. All valves
shall open to the left, using a counterclockwise motion. The stem shall be sealed with a dual " O-ring"
system designed such that the seal above the stem collar can be replaced with the valve under pressure
in the fully open position.
02515 - 1 02515 — Gate Valves
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Valves shall be rated for a 200 psi working pressure and a minimum body test pressure of 300 psi.
When closed, the valve shall be drip-tight under rated pressure differential applied alternately to each
side of the gate.
The interior of the valve shall be epoxy lined in accordance with AWWA C550 . The exterior of the
valve shall receive a minimum of two, 2 mill dry film thickness, asphaltic coating. All exterior exposed
bolts , studs , and nuts shall be corrosion resistant, zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A153 .
2 .02 VALVE BOXES
All buried valves shall have cast two or three piece valve boxes with cast iron covers . Valve boxes shall
be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and extend to an elevation at or slightly above the valve
bonnet. The barrel shall be one or two-piece, screw type, having 5 - 1 /4 inch shaft. Covers shall have
"WATER" cast into the top for all water main. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended to within
six inches of the top of valve box cover. All valve boxes shall be set in a square concrete valve box
bonnet in accordance with the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 Gate valves shall be installed as typical sections of the pipeline. The requirements for pipeline
foundation and backfill shall be followed in all regards when installing buried service gate valves .
3 . 02 Care shall be taken so that the valve box does not transmit loads directly to the valve body. Valve boxes
shall be installed perpendicular and flush with the ground surface as shown on the Plans.
3 . 03 All gate valves shall be mechanically restrained to the attached pipe sections. Pipe sections both
upstream and downstream of each valve shall be restrained the minimum required length as that shown
for a plug in the Restraint Length Detail on the Drawings .
END OF SECTION
02515 — Gate Valves
02515 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Valves shall be rated for a 200 psi working pressure and a minimum body test pressure of 300 psi.
When closed, the valve shall be drip-tight under rated pressure differential applied alternately to each
side of the gate.
The interior of the valve shall be epoxy lined in accordance with AWWA C550 . The exterior of the
valve shall receive a minimum of two, 2 mill dry film thickness, asphaltic coating. All exterior exposed
bolts , studs , and nuts shall be corrosion resistant, zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A153 .
2 .02 VALVE BOXES
All buried valves shall have cast two or three piece valve boxes with cast iron covers . Valve boxes shall
be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and extend to an elevation at or slightly above the valve
bonnet. The barrel shall be one or two-piece, screw type, having 5 - 1 /4 inch shaft. Covers shall have
"WATER" cast into the top for all water main. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended to within
six inches of the top of valve box cover. All valve boxes shall be set in a square concrete valve box
bonnet in accordance with the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 Gate valves shall be installed as typical sections of the pipeline. The requirements for pipeline
foundation and backfill shall be followed in all regards when installing buried service gate valves .
3 . 02 Care shall be taken so that the valve box does not transmit loads directly to the valve body. Valve boxes
shall be installed perpendicular and flush with the ground surface as shown on the Plans.
3 . 03 All gate valves shall be mechanically restrained to the attached pipe sections. Pipe sections both
upstream and downstream of each valve shall be restrained the minimum required length as that shown
for a plug in the Restraint Length Detail on the Drawings .
END OF SECTION
02515 — Gate Valves
02515 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Valves shall be rated for a 200 psi working pressure and a minimum body test pressure of 300 psi.
When closed, the valve shall be drip-tight under rated pressure differential applied alternately to each
side of the gate.
The interior of the valve shall be epoxy lined in accordance with AWWA C550 . The exterior of the
valve shall receive a minimum of two, 2 mill dry film thickness, asphaltic coating. All exterior exposed
bolts , studs , and nuts shall be corrosion resistant, zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A153 .
2 .02 VALVE BOXES
All buried valves shall have cast two or three piece valve boxes with cast iron covers . Valve boxes shall
be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and extend to an elevation at or slightly above the valve
bonnet. The barrel shall be one or two-piece, screw type, having 5 - 1 /4 inch shaft. Covers shall have
"WATER" cast into the top for all water main. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended to within
six inches of the top of valve box cover. All valve boxes shall be set in a square concrete valve box
bonnet in accordance with the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 Gate valves shall be installed as typical sections of the pipeline. The requirements for pipeline
foundation and backfill shall be followed in all regards when installing buried service gate valves .
3 . 02 Care shall be taken so that the valve box does not transmit loads directly to the valve body. Valve boxes
shall be installed perpendicular and flush with the ground surface as shown on the Plans.
3 . 03 All gate valves shall be mechanically restrained to the attached pipe sections. Pipe sections both
upstream and downstream of each valve shall be restrained the minimum required length as that shown
for a plug in the Restraint Length Detail on the Drawings .
END OF SECTION
02515 — Gate Valves
02515 - 2
SECTION 02516 - SITE CONCRETE CWALKS & SLABS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 -- Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A . Extent of portland cement concrete paving, walks and slabs are shown on the
drawings.
B . Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" Section.
C . Concrete and related sections are specified in Division 3 .
D . Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7 .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Codes and Standards :
Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified.
1 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
i
A . Furnish samples, manufacturer' s product data, test reports, and materials,
certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers .
1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS
A . Traffic Control :
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B . Utilize barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Forms :
Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until
removal . Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects . Use flexible spring
steel forms, masonite or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.
B . Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete. 02516-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .09 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where needed or as directed by
the Owner's Representative. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1 . Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within
drip line of trees indicated to remain.
2. Materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill shall be stockpiled and exchanged
with over excavated material from the lake systems.
3 . 10 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0. 10 foot,
and extending a sufficient distance from the footings and foundations to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction for inspection.
1 . Excavations for footings and foundations:
a. In areas of approved compacted subgrades, do not disturb bottom of:
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete
reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave
solid base to receive other work.
b. In areas requiring material exchange or densification prior to excavations,
the Contractor shall comply with the recommendations of the Geotechnical
Engineering Report for preparation of building subgrades prior to-
excavation.
2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical
Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance
of plus or minus 0. 10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, and other construction
for inspection. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing
surfaces.
3 . 11 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS
A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and
grades as indicated.
3 . 12 TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT
A. Excavate trenches per requirements of Divisions 2, 15 and 16 to uniform width,
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 9 to 12 inches
of clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit.
B. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated
slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed
soil.
02300 - 7 02300 - Site Earthwork
SECTION 02516 - SITE CONCRETE CWALKS & SLABS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 -- Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A . Extent of portland cement concrete paving, walks and slabs are shown on the
drawings.
B . Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" Section.
C . Concrete and related sections are specified in Division 3 .
D . Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7 .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Codes and Standards :
Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified.
1 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
i
A . Furnish samples, manufacturer' s product data, test reports, and materials,
certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers .
1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS
A . Traffic Control :
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B . Utilize barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Forms :
Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until
removal . Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects . Use flexible spring
steel forms, masonite or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.
B . Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete. 02516-1
SECTION 02516 - SITE CONCRETE CWALKS & SLABS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 -- Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A . Extent of portland cement concrete paving, walks and slabs are shown on the
drawings.
B . Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" Section.
C . Concrete and related sections are specified in Division 3 .
D . Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7 .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Codes and Standards :
Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified.
1 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
i
A . Furnish samples, manufacturer' s product data, test reports, and materials,
certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers .
1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS
A . Traffic Control :
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B . Utilize barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Forms :
Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until
removal . Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects . Use flexible spring
steel forms, masonite or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.
B . Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete. 02516-1
C . Reinforcing:
Welded Wire Mesh plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185 , or Fibermesh t,
admixture.
D . Concrete Materials:
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete materials ,
admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.
2 .02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN AND TESTING
A . Design mix to produce standard-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement ,
3/4 " aggregate, air-entrained admixture and water to produce the following
properties:
1 . Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 28 days .
2 . Slump Range: 4 " plus/minus V slump .
3 . Air Content : 5% to 8%.
4 . Water reducing or other supplemental admixtures will not be allowed .
5 . Pea rock pump-mix will not be allowed for any slabs on grade . (�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
placing concrete .
B . Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for
additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been
corrected and are ready to receive concrete.
C . Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured . Install sufficient
quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement .
D . Check completed form work for grade and alignment to following tolerances :
1 . Top of forms not more than 1 /8 " in 10' .
2 . Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4" in 10' .
3 . Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as
required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
02516-2
C . Reinforcing:
Welded Wire Mesh plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185 , or Fibermesh t,
admixture.
D . Concrete Materials:
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete materials ,
admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.
2 .02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN AND TESTING
A . Design mix to produce standard-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement ,
3/4 " aggregate, air-entrained admixture and water to produce the following
properties:
1 . Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 28 days .
2 . Slump Range: 4 " plus/minus V slump .
3 . Air Content : 5% to 8%.
4 . Water reducing or other supplemental admixtures will not be allowed .
5 . Pea rock pump-mix will not be allowed for any slabs on grade . (�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
placing concrete .
B . Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for
additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been
corrected and are ready to receive concrete.
C . Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured . Install sufficient
quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement .
D . Check completed form work for grade and alignment to following tolerances :
1 . Top of forms not more than 1 /8 " in 10' .
2 . Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4" in 10' .
3 . Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as
required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
02516-2
C . Reinforcing:
Welded Wire Mesh plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185 , or Fibermesh t,
admixture.
D . Concrete Materials:
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete materials ,
admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.
2 .02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN AND TESTING
A . Design mix to produce standard-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement ,
3/4 " aggregate, air-entrained admixture and water to produce the following
properties:
1 . Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 28 days .
2 . Slump Range: 4 " plus/minus V slump .
3 . Air Content : 5% to 8%.
4 . Water reducing or other supplemental admixtures will not be allowed .
5 . Pea rock pump-mix will not be allowed for any slabs on grade . (�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
placing concrete .
B . Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for
additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been
corrected and are ready to receive concrete.
C . Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured . Install sufficient
quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement .
D . Check completed form work for grade and alignment to following tolerances :
1 . Top of forms not more than 1 /8 " in 10' .
2 . Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4" in 10' .
3 . Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as
required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
02516-2
3 . 02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT-
A. General :
Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete,
and as herein specified.
B . Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and
grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at
time concrete is placed . Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures
until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
C . Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix . Consolidate
concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator.
Keep vibrator away Ep„1 joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only
square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care
to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
D . Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as
far as possible. If interrupted for more than '/ hour, place a construction joint. Do
not use concrete pumps unless they are capable of delivering 3/4 " rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS :
i
A . General :
Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to-
line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete . Construct transverse joints of
right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Tooled Joints :
Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
C. Construction Joints:
Place construction joints at the end of pours and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than '/ hour, except where such pours
terminate at expansion joints.
D. Sawcut Control Joints shall be cut a minimum of 1 " deep within 24 hours of
concrete placement and located per drawings.
3 . 04 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and
floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust
�l
floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.
02516-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
L Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed,
multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand
excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on
undisturbed soil.
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench
to fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill
depressions with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve
pipe bell of loads and to ensure continuous bearing ofpipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 . 13 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A. The work consists of compaction of existing earth surfaces, (excluding rock), after excavation,
filling and compaction of said area to levels required with suitable backfill material.
B . Materials: "Satisfactory Fill Materials" shall be used in general fills and backfills. ALL fill
used under sloped ramps to be paved and within the MSE wall structure shall be "Select Fill
Material".
C. Filling and Backfilling: Place "Satisfactory Fill Material" in horizontal layers not exceeding 12
inches in loose depth. Compact as specified herein. No material shall be placed on surfaces that
are muddy.
D. Reconditioning of Subgrade: Where approved compacted subgrades are disturbed by the
Contractor's subsequent operations or adverse weather, subgrade shall be scarified and
compacted as specified herein before to required density prior to further construction thereon.
Recompaction over underground utilities shall be by power driven hand tampers.
E. -Backfilling: Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been
accepted, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested, and accepted, forms
removed, and excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated
finish subgrade. Backfill shall not be placed in wet areas. Backfill materials and compaction
shall be as specified herein. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not
be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to height of backfill
above top of footing; area remaining shall be compacted by power-driven hand tampers
suitable for material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to avoid
damage.
F. Protection : Settlement or washing that occurs in backfilled areas prior to acceptance of work
shall be repaired and grades re-established to required elevations and slope.
G. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or
wall footings and that are carried below bottom of such footings or that pass under wall
footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.
H. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is
authorized by the Project Arcbitect/Bngineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or
displacement of pipe systems.
02300 - 8 02300 - Site Earthwork
3 . 02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT-
A. General :
Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete,
and as herein specified.
B . Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and
grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at
time concrete is placed . Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures
until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
C . Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix . Consolidate
concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator.
Keep vibrator away Ep„1 joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only
square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care
to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
D . Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as
far as possible. If interrupted for more than '/ hour, place a construction joint. Do
not use concrete pumps unless they are capable of delivering 3/4 " rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS :
i
A . General :
Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to-
line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete . Construct transverse joints of
right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Tooled Joints :
Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
C. Construction Joints:
Place construction joints at the end of pours and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than '/ hour, except where such pours
terminate at expansion joints.
D. Sawcut Control Joints shall be cut a minimum of 1 " deep within 24 hours of
concrete placement and located per drawings.
3 . 04 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and
floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust
�l
floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.
02516-3
3 . 02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT-
A. General :
Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete,
and as herein specified.
B . Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and
grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at
time concrete is placed . Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures
until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
C . Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix . Consolidate
concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator.
Keep vibrator away Ep„1 joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only
square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care
to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
D . Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as
far as possible. If interrupted for more than '/ hour, place a construction joint. Do
not use concrete pumps unless they are capable of delivering 3/4 " rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS :
i
A . General :
Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to-
line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete . Construct transverse joints of
right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Tooled Joints :
Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
C. Construction Joints:
Place construction joints at the end of pours and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than '/ hour, except where such pours
terminate at expansion joints.
D. Sawcut Control Joints shall be cut a minimum of 1 " deep within 24 hours of
concrete placement and located per drawings.
3 . 04 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and
floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust
�l
floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.
02516-3
B . After floating, test surface to trueness with a 10' straightedge . Distribute concrete
as required to remove surface irregularities , and refloat repaired areas to provide a �, \
continuous smooth finish.
C . Work edges of slabs, back top edge of curb , and formed joints with an edging tool,
and round to 1/2" radius , unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on
concrete surface.
D . After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows:
1 . Broom finish, by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface,
perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine
line texture acceptable to Architect.
E . Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form
removal , clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honey-combed areas .
Remove and replace areas of sections with major defects, as directed by Architect .
3 .05 CURING
A . Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements
of Division 3 sections . Use moist-curing methods for initial curing whenever (�
possible . ,` J
3 . 06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A . Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.
B . Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine
magnitude of cracks or defective areas . Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy
resin grout.
C . Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work . Exclude traffic from
pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is
permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur.
D . Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other
foreign material just prior to final inspection.
* * *END OF SECTION '
02516-4
B . After floating, test surface to trueness with a 10' straightedge . Distribute concrete
as required to remove surface irregularities , and refloat repaired areas to provide a �, \
continuous smooth finish.
C . Work edges of slabs, back top edge of curb , and formed joints with an edging tool,
and round to 1/2" radius , unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on
concrete surface.
D . After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows:
1 . Broom finish, by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface,
perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine
line texture acceptable to Architect.
E . Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form
removal , clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honey-combed areas .
Remove and replace areas of sections with major defects, as directed by Architect .
3 .05 CURING
A . Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements
of Division 3 sections . Use moist-curing methods for initial curing whenever (�
possible . ,` J
3 . 06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A . Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.
B . Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine
magnitude of cracks or defective areas . Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy
resin grout.
C . Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work . Exclude traffic from
pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is
permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur.
D . Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other
foreign material just prior to final inspection.
* * *END OF SECTION '
02516-4
B . After floating, test surface to trueness with a 10' straightedge . Distribute concrete
as required to remove surface irregularities , and refloat repaired areas to provide a �, \
continuous smooth finish.
C . Work edges of slabs, back top edge of curb , and formed joints with an edging tool,
and round to 1/2" radius , unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on
concrete surface.
D . After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows:
1 . Broom finish, by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface,
perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine
line texture acceptable to Architect.
E . Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form
removal , clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honey-combed areas .
Remove and replace areas of sections with major defects, as directed by Architect .
3 .05 CURING
A . Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements
of Division 3 sections . Use moist-curing methods for initial curing whenever (�
possible . ,` J
3 . 06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A . Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.
B . Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine
magnitude of cracks or defective areas . Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy
resin grout.
C . Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work . Exclude traffic from
pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is
permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur.
D . Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other
foreign material just prior to final inspection.
* * *END OF SECTION '
02516-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02518
NUSCELLANEOUS WATER APPURTENANCES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established reputable firms
who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be
furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best
practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable.
1 .02 All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which
they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.
PART 2 - PIPE TAPPING SADDLES
2 . 01 WATER SUPPLY TAP
Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of high strength iron bodies, coated with a minimum 12 mills
of fusion bonded epoxy. The body shall incorporate a Buba- N rubber gasket conforming to ASTM-
D2000 and be provided with a F.I.P . threaded top. The saddle shall be double bolted, with the band,
bolts and all hardware of type 304 stainless steel. The tapping saddles shall be "Ford" model FC202,
or approved equal.
2 .02 FORCE MAIN TAP AND VALVE
Tapping sleeves shall be long body, mechanical joint end with flanged outlet, ductile iron
construction, split in two sections and designed for assembly around the main without halting
service. The sleeve shall be suitable for use with the type and O.D . of pipe being tapped.
Tapping valves ends shall be a standard flange (for bolting to the sleeve) by mechanical joint.
Valves shall have oversized seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters and, except as
otherwise specified, shall be similar in construction and operation to AWWA C509 gate valves
(NRS). Tapping valves and sleeves shall be cold water pressure rated at 200 psi minimum for valve
sizes up to 12 inches or less and 150 psi minimum for valve size over 12 inches. Tapping sleeves
and valves shall be "Mueller" or approved equal .
PART 3 - CORPORATION STOPS
Corporation stops for use with polyethylene pipe shall be of the ball type, constructed of 85-5-5-5
brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have an M.I.P.T. end by
compression end with split gland retainer. Corporation stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards.
Corporation stops shall be "Ford", model FBI 101 , or approved equal.
PART 4 - CURB STOP
Curb stop for connecting the polyethylene water service line to P. V.C. pipe shall be of the ball type,
constructed of 85-5-5-5 brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have a
compression end by F.I.P.T. end. The curb stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards. Curb stop shall
be a "Ford", model KV43, or approved equal.
02518 - 1 02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:
1 . Inspection, testing and approval by Owner's Representative, and locations
(horizontal and vertical) of underground utilities have been performed and recorded.
2 Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials.
Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in
manner to prevent settlement of the structure of utilities, or leave in place if
required.
3 . Removal of trash and debris from excavation.
3 . 14 GRADING
A. General : Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform
levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and
existing grades. Grading between indicated elevations and/or contours to be uniform,
continuous and sloped as indicated on the drawings.
B . Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from
structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes as
follows:
1 . Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive stockpiled topsoil to within not
more than 0. 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevations.
2. Walks : Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade, and cross-section, with
finish surface not more than 0 . 10 foot above or below required subgrade elevation.
3 . Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section,
with finish surface not more than %, inch above or below required subgrade
elevation.
C . Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of %z
inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
D. Compaction : After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage
of maximum or relative density for each classification.
3 . 15 PAVEMENT SUB-BASE COURSE
A. General: Sub-base course consists of placing sub-base material, in layers of specified thickness,
over subgrade surface to support a pavement base course.
1 . Refer to Drawings and other Division 2 Paving and Sub-base Sections for paving
specifications.
B . Grade Control: During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope
of sub-base course.
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02518
NUSCELLANEOUS WATER APPURTENANCES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established reputable firms
who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be
furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best
practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable.
1 .02 All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which
they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.
PART 2 - PIPE TAPPING SADDLES
2 . 01 WATER SUPPLY TAP
Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of high strength iron bodies, coated with a minimum 12 mills
of fusion bonded epoxy. The body shall incorporate a Buba- N rubber gasket conforming to ASTM-
D2000 and be provided with a F.I.P . threaded top. The saddle shall be double bolted, with the band,
bolts and all hardware of type 304 stainless steel. The tapping saddles shall be "Ford" model FC202,
or approved equal.
2 .02 FORCE MAIN TAP AND VALVE
Tapping sleeves shall be long body, mechanical joint end with flanged outlet, ductile iron
construction, split in two sections and designed for assembly around the main without halting
service. The sleeve shall be suitable for use with the type and O.D . of pipe being tapped.
Tapping valves ends shall be a standard flange (for bolting to the sleeve) by mechanical joint.
Valves shall have oversized seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters and, except as
otherwise specified, shall be similar in construction and operation to AWWA C509 gate valves
(NRS). Tapping valves and sleeves shall be cold water pressure rated at 200 psi minimum for valve
sizes up to 12 inches or less and 150 psi minimum for valve size over 12 inches. Tapping sleeves
and valves shall be "Mueller" or approved equal .
PART 3 - CORPORATION STOPS
Corporation stops for use with polyethylene pipe shall be of the ball type, constructed of 85-5-5-5
brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have an M.I.P.T. end by
compression end with split gland retainer. Corporation stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards.
Corporation stops shall be "Ford", model FBI 101 , or approved equal.
PART 4 - CURB STOP
Curb stop for connecting the polyethylene water service line to P. V.C. pipe shall be of the ball type,
constructed of 85-5-5-5 brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have a
compression end by F.I.P.T. end. The curb stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards. Curb stop shall
be a "Ford", model KV43, or approved equal.
02518 - 1 02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02518
NUSCELLANEOUS WATER APPURTENANCES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established reputable firms
who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be
furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best
practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable.
1 .02 All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which
they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.
PART 2 - PIPE TAPPING SADDLES
2 . 01 WATER SUPPLY TAP
Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of high strength iron bodies, coated with a minimum 12 mills
of fusion bonded epoxy. The body shall incorporate a Buba- N rubber gasket conforming to ASTM-
D2000 and be provided with a F.I.P . threaded top. The saddle shall be double bolted, with the band,
bolts and all hardware of type 304 stainless steel. The tapping saddles shall be "Ford" model FC202,
or approved equal.
2 .02 FORCE MAIN TAP AND VALVE
Tapping sleeves shall be long body, mechanical joint end with flanged outlet, ductile iron
construction, split in two sections and designed for assembly around the main without halting
service. The sleeve shall be suitable for use with the type and O.D . of pipe being tapped.
Tapping valves ends shall be a standard flange (for bolting to the sleeve) by mechanical joint.
Valves shall have oversized seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters and, except as
otherwise specified, shall be similar in construction and operation to AWWA C509 gate valves
(NRS). Tapping valves and sleeves shall be cold water pressure rated at 200 psi minimum for valve
sizes up to 12 inches or less and 150 psi minimum for valve size over 12 inches. Tapping sleeves
and valves shall be "Mueller" or approved equal .
PART 3 - CORPORATION STOPS
Corporation stops for use with polyethylene pipe shall be of the ball type, constructed of 85-5-5-5
brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have an M.I.P.T. end by
compression end with split gland retainer. Corporation stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards.
Corporation stops shall be "Ford", model FBI 101 , or approved equal.
PART 4 - CURB STOP
Curb stop for connecting the polyethylene water service line to P. V.C. pipe shall be of the ball type,
constructed of 85-5-5-5 brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have a
compression end by F.I.P.T. end. The curb stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards. Curb stop shall
be a "Ford", model KV43, or approved equal.
02518 - 1 02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 5 - FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
4.01 Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on the Drawings or as
further specified hereafter.
Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall be of steel and shall
be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 413 , Baker Allsteel, or equal . The coupling shall be provided
with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts and nuts unless indicated otherwise.
All couplings shall be famished with the pipe stop removed.
Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the liquid within
a pipe.
PART 6 - POLYETHYLENE WATER SERVICE PIPE
Potable water service pipe shall be single piece, SDR9, PE-3408 polyethylene pipe, conforming to
AW WA-C901 . Polyethylene;pipe ends shall . be provided with stainless steel tube stiffeners .
Joints for plastic tubing shall be of the compression type, utilizing at totallyconfined grip seal and
coupling nut, along with a split clamp locking device.
END OF SECTION
02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
02518 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 5 - FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
4.01 Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on the Drawings or as
further specified hereafter.
Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall be of steel and shall
be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 413 , Baker Allsteel, or equal . The coupling shall be provided
with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts and nuts unless indicated otherwise.
All couplings shall be famished with the pipe stop removed.
Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the liquid within
a pipe.
PART 6 - POLYETHYLENE WATER SERVICE PIPE
Potable water service pipe shall be single piece, SDR9, PE-3408 polyethylene pipe, conforming to
AW WA-C901 . Polyethylene;pipe ends shall . be provided with stainless steel tube stiffeners .
Joints for plastic tubing shall be of the compression type, utilizing at totallyconfined grip seal and
coupling nut, along with a split clamp locking device.
END OF SECTION
02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
02518 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 5 - FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
4.01 Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on the Drawings or as
further specified hereafter.
Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall be of steel and shall
be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 413 , Baker Allsteel, or equal . The coupling shall be provided
with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts and nuts unless indicated otherwise.
All couplings shall be famished with the pipe stop removed.
Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the liquid within
a pipe.
PART 6 - POLYETHYLENE WATER SERVICE PIPE
Potable water service pipe shall be single piece, SDR9, PE-3408 polyethylene pipe, conforming to
AW WA-C901 . Polyethylene;pipe ends shall . be provided with stainless steel tube stiffeners .
Joints for plastic tubing shall be of the compression type, utilizing at totallyconfined grip seal and
coupling nut, along with a split clamp locking device.
END OF SECTION
02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
02518 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02520
TESTING AND DISINFECTING WATER MAINS
PART 1 - DISINFECTING POTABLE WATER PIPELINES
1 . 01 The new water system shall remain disconnected from existing water lines except for the temporary
jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the new water system shall be obtained through the
temporary jumper connection . Flushing shall be accomplished through the new connection only under
direction by the Utility Authority and only after installation of upstream and downstream pressure
gauges .
1 . 02 Before pressure testing against existing water system valves, and before being placed into -vi ce,
of AW
potable water pipelines shall be chlorinated in accordance with the latest edition WA C-651 ,
" Standard Procedure for Disinfecting Water Mains" . The procedure shall be approved by the Engineer.
The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be as shown on the Drawings. Taps for
chlorination and sampling shall be uncovered and backfilled by the Contractor as required.
1 . 03 The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the normal
working pressure but not less than 150 psi . The Contractor shall provide temporary plugs and blocking
necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Corporation cocks at least 3/4-inches in diameter, pip,
riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line.:'
Duration of pressure test shall be at least 2 hours. The cost of these items shall be included as apart ofz'
testing.
1 . 04 The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic pressure test and shall be of not
less than 2 hours duration . All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated';
regardless of total leakage as shown by test. Lines which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested..'
as necessary until test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves ands+
accessories shall be removed and replaced. The pipe section to be tested shall be between valves or int'` '
such sections as may be directed by the Engineer by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as
required . In no case shall the section of line to be hydrostatically tested exceed 2000 feet in length. The
line shall be filled with water and all air removed and the test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe
for the entire test period by means of a force pump to be furnished by the Contractor. Accurate means
shall be provided for measuring the water required to maintain this pressure. The amount of water
required is a measure of the leakage.
1 .05 The Contractor must submit his plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least five (5) working days
before starting the test. The Contractor shall remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and
equipment after completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Any damage to the pipe coating shall be repaired by the Contractor. Lines shall be totally free
and clean prior to final acceptance.
1 . 06 The Engineer or the Engineer's representative must be present during testing.
PART 2 - PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS OF UNDERGROUND PRESSURE PIPING
2 . 01 Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with Section 4 of AWWA
Standard C-600, with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges, meters, pressure pumps
and other equipment needed to test the line. PVC pipe shall be tested in accordance with
02520 - 1 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of sub-base course to prevent lateral movement.
Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to
thickness of each sub-base course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12-inch minimum width of
shoulder simultaneous with the compaction and rolling of each layer of sub-base course.
D. Placing: Place sub-base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
compacting sub-base material during placement operations.
1 . When a compacted sub-base course is indicated to be 6 inches thick or less, place
material in a single layer. When indicated to be more than 6 inches thick, place material
in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6 inches or less than 3 inches in
thickness when compacted.
3 . 16 FILL AND GRADING FOR GRASSED AREAS
A. Fill Material under Grassed Areas : Clean, satisfactory fill, free from rock and debris and of
such quality to not interfere with future installation of grass.
B . Filling and Grading for Grassed Areas: Rough grade shall be 6 inches below finish grade and
the 4 inches of base material shall be omitted.
1 . Topping: 6 inches of compacted topsoil as specified in SECTION 02302- EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
C. Filling and Grading for Landscaped Areas other than Grass: Similar, with variations per
specific plant material, as defined , illustrated and specified on the Landscape Plans.
3 . 17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Specified Tests shall be performed by the Contractor ' s Testing Agency, at the Contractor' s
expense, with results forwarded to the Project Architect/Engineer for review.
B . Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve
each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed.
C. Tests of Materials shall be as follows:
1 . Soil Classification:
a. One test from each type of material encountered and/or proposed to be used.
2. Laboratory Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
a. According to ASTM D1557 one test for each material encountered and/or
proposed.
b. Field Tests for Moisture Content and Density:
c. According to ASTM D1556 one test per layer of fill per 10,000 square feet of
area, plus one test per 10,000 square feet of subgrade in cut.
3 . Control: Fill and topsoil mixture may be inspected at any stage of operation to
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02520
TESTING AND DISINFECTING WATER MAINS
PART 1 - DISINFECTING POTABLE WATER PIPELINES
1 . 01 The new water system shall remain disconnected from existing water lines except for the temporary
jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the new water system shall be obtained through the
temporary jumper connection . Flushing shall be accomplished through the new connection only under
direction by the Utility Authority and only after installation of upstream and downstream pressure
gauges .
1 . 02 Before pressure testing against existing water system valves, and before being placed into -vi ce,
of AW
potable water pipelines shall be chlorinated in accordance with the latest edition WA C-651 ,
" Standard Procedure for Disinfecting Water Mains" . The procedure shall be approved by the Engineer.
The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be as shown on the Drawings. Taps for
chlorination and sampling shall be uncovered and backfilled by the Contractor as required.
1 . 03 The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the normal
working pressure but not less than 150 psi . The Contractor shall provide temporary plugs and blocking
necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Corporation cocks at least 3/4-inches in diameter, pip,
riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line.:'
Duration of pressure test shall be at least 2 hours. The cost of these items shall be included as apart ofz'
testing.
1 . 04 The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic pressure test and shall be of not
less than 2 hours duration . All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated';
regardless of total leakage as shown by test. Lines which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested..'
as necessary until test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves ands+
accessories shall be removed and replaced. The pipe section to be tested shall be between valves or int'` '
such sections as may be directed by the Engineer by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as
required . In no case shall the section of line to be hydrostatically tested exceed 2000 feet in length. The
line shall be filled with water and all air removed and the test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe
for the entire test period by means of a force pump to be furnished by the Contractor. Accurate means
shall be provided for measuring the water required to maintain this pressure. The amount of water
required is a measure of the leakage.
1 .05 The Contractor must submit his plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least five (5) working days
before starting the test. The Contractor shall remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and
equipment after completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Any damage to the pipe coating shall be repaired by the Contractor. Lines shall be totally free
and clean prior to final acceptance.
1 . 06 The Engineer or the Engineer's representative must be present during testing.
PART 2 - PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS OF UNDERGROUND PRESSURE PIPING
2 . 01 Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with Section 4 of AWWA
Standard C-600, with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges, meters, pressure pumps
and other equipment needed to test the line. PVC pipe shall be tested in accordance with
02520 - 1 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02520
TESTING AND DISINFECTING WATER MAINS
PART 1 - DISINFECTING POTABLE WATER PIPELINES
1 . 01 The new water system shall remain disconnected from existing water lines except for the temporary
jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the new water system shall be obtained through the
temporary jumper connection . Flushing shall be accomplished through the new connection only under
direction by the Utility Authority and only after installation of upstream and downstream pressure
gauges .
1 . 02 Before pressure testing against existing water system valves, and before being placed into -vi ce,
of AW
potable water pipelines shall be chlorinated in accordance with the latest edition WA C-651 ,
" Standard Procedure for Disinfecting Water Mains" . The procedure shall be approved by the Engineer.
The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be as shown on the Drawings. Taps for
chlorination and sampling shall be uncovered and backfilled by the Contractor as required.
1 . 03 The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the normal
working pressure but not less than 150 psi . The Contractor shall provide temporary plugs and blocking
necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Corporation cocks at least 3/4-inches in diameter, pip,
riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line.:'
Duration of pressure test shall be at least 2 hours. The cost of these items shall be included as apart ofz'
testing.
1 . 04 The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic pressure test and shall be of not
less than 2 hours duration . All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated';
regardless of total leakage as shown by test. Lines which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested..'
as necessary until test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves ands+
accessories shall be removed and replaced. The pipe section to be tested shall be between valves or int'` '
such sections as may be directed by the Engineer by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as
required . In no case shall the section of line to be hydrostatically tested exceed 2000 feet in length. The
line shall be filled with water and all air removed and the test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe
for the entire test period by means of a force pump to be furnished by the Contractor. Accurate means
shall be provided for measuring the water required to maintain this pressure. The amount of water
required is a measure of the leakage.
1 .05 The Contractor must submit his plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least five (5) working days
before starting the test. The Contractor shall remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and
equipment after completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Any damage to the pipe coating shall be repaired by the Contractor. Lines shall be totally free
and clean prior to final acceptance.
1 . 06 The Engineer or the Engineer's representative must be present during testing.
PART 2 - PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS OF UNDERGROUND PRESSURE PIPING
2 . 01 Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with Section 4 of AWWA
Standard C-600, with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges, meters, pressure pumps
and other equipment needed to test the line. PVC pipe shall be tested in accordance with
02520 - 1 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
AWWA Standard C605 , "Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water" . Engineer shall be present during all testing, and final inspections . No hydrostatic
testing against existing system valves shall be allowed until the section to be tested has been
bacteriologically cleared.
2 . 02 The new water system shall remain disconnected (connecting valve to be locked in the closed position)
from existing water lines except for the temporary jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the
new water system shall be obtained through the temporary jumper connection. Flushing shall only be
conducted in accordance with the plans.
2 .03 The general procedure for chlorination shall be first to flush all dirty or discolored water from the lines,
and then introduce chlorine in approved dosages in accordance with Table 11 - 1 through a tap at one
end, while water is being withdrawn at the other end of the line . The chlorine solution shall remain in
the pipeline for no less than 24 hours .
2 . 04 Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at their extremities
and replaced with water from the distribution system. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the
replacement water shall then be made in the presence of the Engineer in full accordance with the
AWWA Standard C-651 . The Contractor will be required to re-chlorinate, if necessary. The line shall
not be placed in service until the requirements of the State and County Public Health Department are
met.
2 .05 The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary with an independent commercial laboratory
approved by the Department of Health and Rehabilitative Service (HRS) for the collection and
examination of samples of water from disinfected water mains . These samples shall be examined for
compliance with HRS requirements . Sampling shall be made daily and continuously until two
successive examinations are found satisfactory. Should three examinations be found unsatisfactory, the
line shall be flushed and disinfected again . Certified copies of all laboratory analyses shall be provided
to the Owner. The cost of all sampling, flushing, and disinfecting shall be included in the contract price
and no additional charge shall be made to the Owner for this work. County personnel shall operate all
valves and be present to determine volume of water used for. flushing.
(continued on next page)
02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
02520 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
AWWA Standard C605 , "Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water" . Engineer shall be present during all testing, and final inspections . No hydrostatic
testing against existing system valves shall be allowed until the section to be tested has been
bacteriologically cleared.
2 . 02 The new water system shall remain disconnected (connecting valve to be locked in the closed position)
from existing water lines except for the temporary jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the
new water system shall be obtained through the temporary jumper connection. Flushing shall only be
conducted in accordance with the plans.
2 .03 The general procedure for chlorination shall be first to flush all dirty or discolored water from the lines,
and then introduce chlorine in approved dosages in accordance with Table 11 - 1 through a tap at one
end, while water is being withdrawn at the other end of the line . The chlorine solution shall remain in
the pipeline for no less than 24 hours .
2 . 04 Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at their extremities
and replaced with water from the distribution system. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the
replacement water shall then be made in the presence of the Engineer in full accordance with the
AWWA Standard C-651 . The Contractor will be required to re-chlorinate, if necessary. The line shall
not be placed in service until the requirements of the State and County Public Health Department are
met.
2 .05 The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary with an independent commercial laboratory
approved by the Department of Health and Rehabilitative Service (HRS) for the collection and
examination of samples of water from disinfected water mains . These samples shall be examined for
compliance with HRS requirements . Sampling shall be made daily and continuously until two
successive examinations are found satisfactory. Should three examinations be found unsatisfactory, the
line shall be flushed and disinfected again . Certified copies of all laboratory analyses shall be provided
to the Owner. The cost of all sampling, flushing, and disinfecting shall be included in the contract price
and no additional charge shall be made to the Owner for this work. County personnel shall operate all
valves and be present to determine volume of water used for. flushing.
(continued on next page)
02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
02520 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
AWWA Standard C605 , "Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water" . Engineer shall be present during all testing, and final inspections . No hydrostatic
testing against existing system valves shall be allowed until the section to be tested has been
bacteriologically cleared.
2 . 02 The new water system shall remain disconnected (connecting valve to be locked in the closed position)
from existing water lines except for the temporary jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the
new water system shall be obtained through the temporary jumper connection. Flushing shall only be
conducted in accordance with the plans.
2 .03 The general procedure for chlorination shall be first to flush all dirty or discolored water from the lines,
and then introduce chlorine in approved dosages in accordance with Table 11 - 1 through a tap at one
end, while water is being withdrawn at the other end of the line . The chlorine solution shall remain in
the pipeline for no less than 24 hours .
2 . 04 Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at their extremities
and replaced with water from the distribution system. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the
replacement water shall then be made in the presence of the Engineer in full accordance with the
AWWA Standard C-651 . The Contractor will be required to re-chlorinate, if necessary. The line shall
not be placed in service until the requirements of the State and County Public Health Department are
met.
2 .05 The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary with an independent commercial laboratory
approved by the Department of Health and Rehabilitative Service (HRS) for the collection and
examination of samples of water from disinfected water mains . These samples shall be examined for
compliance with HRS requirements . Sampling shall be made daily and continuously until two
successive examinations are found satisfactory. Should three examinations be found unsatisfactory, the
line shall be flushed and disinfected again . Certified copies of all laboratory analyses shall be provided
to the Owner. The cost of all sampling, flushing, and disinfecting shall be included in the contract price
and no additional charge shall be made to the Owner for this work. County personnel shall operate all
valves and be present to determine volume of water used for. flushing.
(continued on next page)
02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
02520 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
TABLE 11 - 1
Chlorine Required to Produce 25 -mg/L Concentration
in 100 ft. of Pipe by Diameter
--------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe 100-Percent 1 -Percent
Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution
in. Ib. gal.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 0.013 0 . 16
6 0.030 036
8 0 .054 0 .65
10 0.085 1 .02
12 0. 120 1 .44
16 0 .217 2 .60
END OF SECTION
02520 - 3 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
determine compaction characteristics, densities and freedom from organic and
plastic materials.
D. Perform field density tests in accordance with methods listed in Item C.
1 . Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform
at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification
and approval of each footing subgrade may be used on a visual comparison of each
subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to the Project
Architect/Engineer.
2. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of
subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer
than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every
200 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than
three tests.
3 . Foundation Wall Backfill : Perform at least two field density tests at locations and
elevations as directed.
4. If in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, and based on testing service
reports and inspections, any subgrade or fills that have been placed which are below
specified densities shall require additional compaction and testing until the specified
density is obtained.
E. Notification:
1 . Give sufficient notification of placing orders for fill and topsoil with supplier to
permit full inspection including testing for compaction characteristics at source of
supply.
2. Obtain approval from Project Architect/Engineer before placing topsoil mixture at
project site; without exception.
3 . 18 EROSION CONTROL
A. Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of the project. Repair and re-
establish grades to required elevations and slopes where erosion has occurred prior to Owners
acceptance of the work.
B. The Contractor shall install erosion control methods adjacent to any lakes, ditches and/or
wetlands which are adjacent to the project site whereby the quality of such would be degraded
by runoff, erosion and sedimentation in accordance with the plans, permits and the Stormwater
Pollution Prevention Plan.
3 . 19 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas : Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B . Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.
02300 - 11 02300 — Site Earthwork
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
TABLE 11 - 1
Chlorine Required to Produce 25 -mg/L Concentration
in 100 ft. of Pipe by Diameter
--------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe 100-Percent 1 -Percent
Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution
in. Ib. gal.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 0.013 0 . 16
6 0.030 036
8 0 .054 0 .65
10 0.085 1 .02
12 0. 120 1 .44
16 0 .217 2 .60
END OF SECTION
02520 - 3 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
TABLE 11 - 1
Chlorine Required to Produce 25 -mg/L Concentration
in 100 ft. of Pipe by Diameter
--------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe 100-Percent 1 -Percent
Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution
in. Ib. gal.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 0.013 0 . 16
6 0.030 036
8 0 .054 0 .65
10 0.085 1 .02
12 0. 120 1 .44
16 0 .217 2 .60
END OF SECTION
02520 - 3 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02535
FORCE MAINS
1 • GENERAL
A . ScODe
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials,
equipment and labor required for the installation of force mains as herein described and
as shown on the Plans . The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling,
compacting, testing and related work required for the construction of these mains in
accordance with the provisions set forth under the applicable items of this Specification.
B . References
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
1 ) American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) .
a• AWWA C104 (ANSI A21A) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and
Gray- Iron Pipe and Fittings for water.
b • AWWA (ANSI) C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 -in6h
through 48 -inch for water and other liquids.
C . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and
Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d• AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 . 50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
e• AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in
Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or other liquids.
f. AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch
through 1 12-inch for water and other liquids .
g- AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water
Mains and Appurtenances.
h . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure
Pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch.
i . AWWA (ANSI) C905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water
transmission pipe, nominal diameters 14-inch through 36-inch.
02535-1 02535 - FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02535
FORCE MAINS
1 • GENERAL
A . ScODe
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials,
equipment and labor required for the installation of force mains as herein described and
as shown on the Plans . The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling,
compacting, testing and related work required for the construction of these mains in
accordance with the provisions set forth under the applicable items of this Specification.
B . References
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
1 ) American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) .
a• AWWA C104 (ANSI A21A) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and
Gray- Iron Pipe and Fittings for water.
b • AWWA (ANSI) C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 -in6h
through 48 -inch for water and other liquids.
C . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and
Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d• AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 . 50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
e• AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in
Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or other liquids.
f. AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch
through 1 12-inch for water and other liquids .
g- AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water
Mains and Appurtenances.
h . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure
Pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch.
i . AWWA (ANSI) C905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water
transmission pipe, nominal diameters 14-inch through 36-inch.
02535-1 02535 - FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02535
FORCE MAINS
1 • GENERAL
A . ScODe
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials,
equipment and labor required for the installation of force mains as herein described and
as shown on the Plans . The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling,
compacting, testing and related work required for the construction of these mains in
accordance with the provisions set forth under the applicable items of this Specification.
B . References
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
1 ) American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) .
a• AWWA C104 (ANSI A21A) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and
Gray- Iron Pipe and Fittings for water.
b • AWWA (ANSI) C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 -in6h
through 48 -inch for water and other liquids.
C . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and
Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d• AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 . 50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
e• AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in
Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or other liquids.
f. AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch
through 1 12-inch for water and other liquids .
g- AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water
Mains and Appurtenances.
h . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure
Pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch.
i . AWWA (ANSI) C905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water
transmission pipe, nominal diameters 14-inch through 36-inch.
02535-1 02535 - FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials ,
3 ) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
a. AASHTO T-99 (2 . 5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as
modified by T-99 -801 (Dated 1981 ) .
b . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb . Rammer and
an 18 -inch drop .
C . Submittals
1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop
drawings for the following items .
a. Material specifications for all pipe types, fittings , joints, joint restraint,
and specials .
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor
pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions, Article 6 .24 through 6 .28 .
2. MATERIALS
A . Pipe
1 ) High Density Polyethylene (PE) Tubing — HDPE Tubing shall comply with
applicable requirements for PE 3048 extrusion compound polyethylene plastic
material as stated in AWWA Standard Specifications C901 -96, of latest
revision . Tubing shall have a working pressure of 200 psi . Tubing dimensions
and tolerances shall correspond with thealues listed in ASTM D-2239 , with a
standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 9 . The pipe shall be co -extruded with
v
multiple green stripes visible from any pipe quadrant.
2) P .V . C . Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made
from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside
diameter of cast iron pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of
150 psi in accordance with AWWA C-900 . P .V.C . pipe ( 14" through 36") shall
be rated for a minimum pressure of 235 psi in accordance with AWWA C-905 .
P .V .C . pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide the required color.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These
stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using
permanent ink . with the words "Force Main" , in 3/4-inch high letters appearing
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact
to required density prior to further construction.
D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project
warranty period in the opinion of the Project Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface
treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
3 .20 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property: Contractor shall remove waste materials, includingtrash, and
debris, and dispose of it off of Owner's property at a landfill or equivalent site, approved by the
local Government Authorities.
END OF SECTION
02300 — Site Earthwork
02300 - 12
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials ,
3 ) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
a. AASHTO T-99 (2 . 5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as
modified by T-99 -801 (Dated 1981 ) .
b . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb . Rammer and
an 18 -inch drop .
C . Submittals
1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop
drawings for the following items .
a. Material specifications for all pipe types, fittings , joints, joint restraint,
and specials .
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor
pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions, Article 6 .24 through 6 .28 .
2. MATERIALS
A . Pipe
1 ) High Density Polyethylene (PE) Tubing — HDPE Tubing shall comply with
applicable requirements for PE 3048 extrusion compound polyethylene plastic
material as stated in AWWA Standard Specifications C901 -96, of latest
revision . Tubing shall have a working pressure of 200 psi . Tubing dimensions
and tolerances shall correspond with thealues listed in ASTM D-2239 , with a
standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 9 . The pipe shall be co -extruded with
v
multiple green stripes visible from any pipe quadrant.
2) P .V . C . Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made
from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside
diameter of cast iron pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of
150 psi in accordance with AWWA C-900 . P .V.C . pipe ( 14" through 36") shall
be rated for a minimum pressure of 235 psi in accordance with AWWA C-905 .
P .V .C . pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide the required color.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These
stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using
permanent ink . with the words "Force Main" , in 3/4-inch high letters appearing
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials ,
3 ) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
a. AASHTO T-99 (2 . 5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as
modified by T-99 -801 (Dated 1981 ) .
b . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb . Rammer and
an 18 -inch drop .
C . Submittals
1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop
drawings for the following items .
a. Material specifications for all pipe types, fittings , joints, joint restraint,
and specials .
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor
pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions, Article 6 .24 through 6 .28 .
2. MATERIALS
A . Pipe
1 ) High Density Polyethylene (PE) Tubing — HDPE Tubing shall comply with
applicable requirements for PE 3048 extrusion compound polyethylene plastic
material as stated in AWWA Standard Specifications C901 -96, of latest
revision . Tubing shall have a working pressure of 200 psi . Tubing dimensions
and tolerances shall correspond with thealues listed in ASTM D-2239 , with a
standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 9 . The pipe shall be co -extruded with
v
multiple green stripes visible from any pipe quadrant.
2) P .V . C . Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made
from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside
diameter of cast iron pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of
150 psi in accordance with AWWA C-900 . P .V.C . pipe ( 14" through 36") shall
be rated for a minimum pressure of 235 psi in accordance with AWWA C-905 .
P .V .C . pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide the required color.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These
stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using
permanent ink . with the words "Force Main" , in 3/4-inch high letters appearing
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
one or more times every 21 -inches . As an alternative to lettering, pipe may be
continuously spiral wrapped with plastic identification tape marked "Force
Main",
Pipe shall be pigmented brown for force main and purple for reuse main.
P . V. C . pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
a • Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a
minimum wall thickness of DR- ] 8 .
b. Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-
B - 11 - 85, shall meet AWWA C 905
requirements standards for water transmission
, and shall be DR- 18 wall thickness.
B . Fittings
1 ) All fittings for PVC In shall be restrained, or mechanical joints . Mechanical
joints shall conform to AWWA Standard Specifications C- 110/A21 . 10 or
C153/A21 . 53 latest revisions . Fitting shall be fusion-bonded ceramic epoxy:
lined . The epoxy material shall be applied in one coat with a maximum dry film
thickness of 40 . 0 mils and shall be Protecto 401 of approved equal. Fittings:
preSsure rating shall be 350 psi .
2) All PE fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the tubing SDR pressure
rating for which they are made. All fittings shall be brass, compression type;
with clampring and stainless steel tube stiffeners.
3 ) Retainer glands, locking gaskets or thrust blocks for restraint shall not be
-permitted.
C Joints
1 ) Push on Joints - Joints for P.V. C. or D .I. P. pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber
gasket compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl 1 I (ANSI A21 . 11 ) .
Special fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation.
2) Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints may be used for downstream restrained
joint pipe. In this circumstance, the joint shall be restrained in accordance with
the following paragraph C. 3) d.
3 ) Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment, size reduction, valves
and plugs shall all be restrained along with the appropriate number of
downstream and upstream joints. Restraint shall be by the use of mechanic
methods. As indicated on the drawings, al
Pipe lengths located upstream and
downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained . Method of joit
n
restraint shall be as follows :
02535-3 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
one or more times every 21 -inches . As an alternative to lettering, pipe may be
continuously spiral wrapped with plastic identification tape marked "Force
Main",
Pipe shall be pigmented brown for force main and purple for reuse main.
P . V. C . pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
a • Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a
minimum wall thickness of DR- ] 8 .
b. Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-
B - 11 - 85, shall meet AWWA C 905
requirements standards for water transmission
, and shall be DR- 18 wall thickness.
B . Fittings
1 ) All fittings for PVC In shall be restrained, or mechanical joints . Mechanical
joints shall conform to AWWA Standard Specifications C- 110/A21 . 10 or
C153/A21 . 53 latest revisions . Fitting shall be fusion-bonded ceramic epoxy:
lined . The epoxy material shall be applied in one coat with a maximum dry film
thickness of 40 . 0 mils and shall be Protecto 401 of approved equal. Fittings:
preSsure rating shall be 350 psi .
2) All PE fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the tubing SDR pressure
rating for which they are made. All fittings shall be brass, compression type;
with clampring and stainless steel tube stiffeners.
3 ) Retainer glands, locking gaskets or thrust blocks for restraint shall not be
-permitted.
C Joints
1 ) Push on Joints - Joints for P.V. C. or D .I. P. pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber
gasket compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl 1 I (ANSI A21 . 11 ) .
Special fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation.
2) Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints may be used for downstream restrained
joint pipe. In this circumstance, the joint shall be restrained in accordance with
the following paragraph C. 3) d.
3 ) Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment, size reduction, valves
and plugs shall all be restrained along with the appropriate number of
downstream and upstream joints. Restraint shall be by the use of mechanic
methods. As indicated on the drawings, al
Pipe lengths located upstream and
downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained . Method of joit
n
restraint shall be as follows :
02535-3 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
one or more times every 21 -inches . As an alternative to lettering, pipe may be
continuously spiral wrapped with plastic identification tape marked "Force
Main",
Pipe shall be pigmented brown for force main and purple for reuse main.
P . V. C . pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
a • Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a
minimum wall thickness of DR- ] 8 .
b. Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-
B - 11 - 85, shall meet AWWA C 905
requirements standards for water transmission
, and shall be DR- 18 wall thickness.
B . Fittings
1 ) All fittings for PVC In shall be restrained, or mechanical joints . Mechanical
joints shall conform to AWWA Standard Specifications C- 110/A21 . 10 or
C153/A21 . 53 latest revisions . Fitting shall be fusion-bonded ceramic epoxy:
lined . The epoxy material shall be applied in one coat with a maximum dry film
thickness of 40 . 0 mils and shall be Protecto 401 of approved equal. Fittings:
preSsure rating shall be 350 psi .
2) All PE fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the tubing SDR pressure
rating for which they are made. All fittings shall be brass, compression type;
with clampring and stainless steel tube stiffeners.
3 ) Retainer glands, locking gaskets or thrust blocks for restraint shall not be
-permitted.
C Joints
1 ) Push on Joints - Joints for P.V. C. or D .I. P. pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber
gasket compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl 1 I (ANSI A21 . 11 ) .
Special fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation.
2) Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints may be used for downstream restrained
joint pipe. In this circumstance, the joint shall be restrained in accordance with
the following paragraph C. 3) d.
3 ) Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment, size reduction, valves
and plugs shall all be restrained along with the appropriate number of
downstream and upstream joints. Restraint shall be by the use of mechanic
methods. As indicated on the drawings, al
Pipe lengths located upstream and
downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained . Method of joit
n
restraint shall be as follows :
02535-3 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
a. P .V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12" shall be restrained at fittings
with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1300-C, "EBBA IRON" series 500 , or other
approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints on P .V.C . pipe in diameters 4"
through 12" shall be restrained with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1350-C, "EBBA
IRON" series 1500 , or other approved restrainer.
b . P .V . C. pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained at fittings with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer.
Bell and spigot joints on P .V . C , pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained
with "UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved
restrainer.
C. Ductile iron pipe with manufacturer' s mechanical restrained joints using
locking rings or wedges may be utilized. These restraints shall be American
Pipe "LOK-FAST" joints, McWane "SUPER LOCK" or approved equal .
d . Ductile iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joint ends shall be
restrained with Ebba Iron "MEGA-LUG" grip type restrainers, series 1100 .
e. Ductile iron pipe with push
FLANGE
joint ends shall be restrained with "UNI-
FLANGE", large diameter, series 1390 restrainers or approved equal .
f. Retainer glands or locking gaskets shall not be approved as mechanical
restraints .
4) Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material . The
gasket shall provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and
gasket tolerances. Installation and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by
the manufacturer.
D . Foundation Rock
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits :
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/8" - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing #8 - 0 - 5%
E. Buried Trace Wire
All mainlines , fittings and appurtenances installed underground shall have #14 gauge,
type THHN copper trace wire attached for locating purposes. Trace wire shall have a
brown colored sheath for wastewater force mains.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02302
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
1 . ASTM C 33 ( 1999; Rev. A) Concrete Aggregates
2 . ASTM C 136( 1996 ; Rev. A) Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
3 . ASTM D 698 ( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort ( 12, 400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m))
4 . ASTM D 1140( 1997) Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 (75-
Micrometer) Sieve
5 , ASTM D 1556(1990; R 1996) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method
6 . ASTM D 1557( 1991 ; R 1998) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56 ,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))
7 . ASTM D 232 ] ( 1989; R 1995) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for .<
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
8 . ASTM D 2487( 1998) Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)
9 . ASTM D 2922( 1996) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
10 , ASTM D 3017( 1996) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods
(Shallow Depth)
11 . ASTM D 4318 ( 1998) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
B . AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
I . AWWA C600(1999) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their
Appurtenances
1 .02 DEFINITIONS
A . Hard Materials
02302 - 1 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
a. P .V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12" shall be restrained at fittings
with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1300-C, "EBBA IRON" series 500 , or other
approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints on P .V.C . pipe in diameters 4"
through 12" shall be restrained with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1350-C, "EBBA
IRON" series 1500 , or other approved restrainer.
b . P .V . C. pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained at fittings with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer.
Bell and spigot joints on P .V . C , pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained
with "UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved
restrainer.
C. Ductile iron pipe with manufacturer' s mechanical restrained joints using
locking rings or wedges may be utilized. These restraints shall be American
Pipe "LOK-FAST" joints, McWane "SUPER LOCK" or approved equal .
d . Ductile iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joint ends shall be
restrained with Ebba Iron "MEGA-LUG" grip type restrainers, series 1100 .
e. Ductile iron pipe with push
FLANGE
joint ends shall be restrained with "UNI-
FLANGE", large diameter, series 1390 restrainers or approved equal .
f. Retainer glands or locking gaskets shall not be approved as mechanical
restraints .
4) Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material . The
gasket shall provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and
gasket tolerances. Installation and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by
the manufacturer.
D . Foundation Rock
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits :
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/8" - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing #8 - 0 - 5%
E. Buried Trace Wire
All mainlines , fittings and appurtenances installed underground shall have #14 gauge,
type THHN copper trace wire attached for locating purposes. Trace wire shall have a
brown colored sheath for wastewater force mains.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
a. P .V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12" shall be restrained at fittings
with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1300-C, "EBBA IRON" series 500 , or other
approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints on P .V.C . pipe in diameters 4"
through 12" shall be restrained with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1350-C, "EBBA
IRON" series 1500 , or other approved restrainer.
b . P .V . C. pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained at fittings with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer.
Bell and spigot joints on P .V . C , pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained
with "UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved
restrainer.
C. Ductile iron pipe with manufacturer' s mechanical restrained joints using
locking rings or wedges may be utilized. These restraints shall be American
Pipe "LOK-FAST" joints, McWane "SUPER LOCK" or approved equal .
d . Ductile iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joint ends shall be
restrained with Ebba Iron "MEGA-LUG" grip type restrainers, series 1100 .
e. Ductile iron pipe with push
FLANGE
joint ends shall be restrained with "UNI-
FLANGE", large diameter, series 1390 restrainers or approved equal .
f. Retainer glands or locking gaskets shall not be approved as mechanical
restraints .
4) Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material . The
gasket shall provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and
gasket tolerances. Installation and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by
the manufacturer.
D . Foundation Rock
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits :
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/8" - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing #8 - 0 - 5%
E. Buried Trace Wire
All mainlines , fittings and appurtenances installed underground shall have #14 gauge,
type THHN copper trace wire attached for locating purposes. Trace wire shall have a
brown colored sheath for wastewater force mains.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . EXECUTION OF WORK
The installation and testing of the mainlines shall be done in accordance with AWWA (ANSI)
C600 or AWWA publication M23 for P. V. C. pipe, phis the additional requirements described
herein or as shown on the Plans.
A . Preparation
1 ) Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable,
for the proper installation of all mainlines and appurtenances in the locations
shown on the drawings . Plantings, ornamental shrubbery, protected trees, utility
Poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the excavation shall be
transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected and preserved
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Protected trees shall be considered as
all trees outside five (5) feet either side of the mainline to be installed. Only
under special circumstances with Engineer ' s written approval may trees outside
these limits be considered for removal . All debris generated from the clearing
process shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a disposal site approved by the
Engineer.
B Trenchin
1 )
See Section 02302 — Excavation and Fill
C. Lavine of Pipe
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600';
or AWWA M23 as appropriate. Prior to installation, all pipe and appurtenances shall be`
examined for damage and defects . Under no circumstances shall defective pipe be
installed. All lumps , blisters and excess coating materials shall be removed from the
socket and plain ends of each pipe . While being placed in the trench, care shall be taken
to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open
end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall
remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to
deflect the pipe from . a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where
long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table
5 and 6 in AWWA Specification C600.
1 ) Thrust Restraint - All dead ends, valves, tees, and fittings for changes in
alignment shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All changes in
aligmnent shall require the fitting and appropriate length of upstream and
downstream pipe to be mechanically restrained with approved devices .
02535-5 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . EXECUTION OF WORK
The installation and testing of the mainlines shall be done in accordance with AWWA (ANSI)
C600 or AWWA publication M23 for P. V. C. pipe, phis the additional requirements described
herein or as shown on the Plans.
A . Preparation
1 ) Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable,
for the proper installation of all mainlines and appurtenances in the locations
shown on the drawings . Plantings, ornamental shrubbery, protected trees, utility
Poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the excavation shall be
transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected and preserved
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Protected trees shall be considered as
all trees outside five (5) feet either side of the mainline to be installed. Only
under special circumstances with Engineer ' s written approval may trees outside
these limits be considered for removal . All debris generated from the clearing
process shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a disposal site approved by the
Engineer.
B Trenchin
1 )
See Section 02302 — Excavation and Fill
C. Lavine of Pipe
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600';
or AWWA M23 as appropriate. Prior to installation, all pipe and appurtenances shall be`
examined for damage and defects . Under no circumstances shall defective pipe be
installed. All lumps , blisters and excess coating materials shall be removed from the
socket and plain ends of each pipe . While being placed in the trench, care shall be taken
to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open
end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall
remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to
deflect the pipe from . a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where
long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table
5 and 6 in AWWA Specification C600.
1 ) Thrust Restraint - All dead ends, valves, tees, and fittings for changes in
alignment shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All changes in
aligmnent shall require the fitting and appropriate length of upstream and
downstream pipe to be mechanically restrained with approved devices .
02535-5 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included
in the definition of " rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment,
ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal .
B . Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated
masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling
and blasting, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-
mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or
concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 /2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will
not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed
merely to increase production.
C . Cohesive Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as
GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater
than zero.
D . Cohesionless Materials
Materials ASTM D 2487 classified . as GW, GP , SW, and SP . Materials classified as GM and
SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines have a plasticity index of zero .
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports to be obtained and.paid for by Contractor :
Fill and backfill optimum density test where specified .
Select material .optimum:density and gradation.tests c:
Compaction density tests where specified
In-place density tests where specified
1 . 04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials .
1 . 05 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
A. Surface elevations are as indicated.
B . Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time
subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at
the time of construction.
C . Material character is indicated by the boring logs .
D. Blasting will not be per fitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . EXECUTION OF WORK
The installation and testing of the mainlines shall be done in accordance with AWWA (ANSI)
C600 or AWWA publication M23 for P. V. C. pipe, phis the additional requirements described
herein or as shown on the Plans.
A . Preparation
1 ) Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable,
for the proper installation of all mainlines and appurtenances in the locations
shown on the drawings . Plantings, ornamental shrubbery, protected trees, utility
Poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the excavation shall be
transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected and preserved
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Protected trees shall be considered as
all trees outside five (5) feet either side of the mainline to be installed. Only
under special circumstances with Engineer ' s written approval may trees outside
these limits be considered for removal . All debris generated from the clearing
process shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a disposal site approved by the
Engineer.
B Trenchin
1 )
See Section 02302 — Excavation and Fill
C. Lavine of Pipe
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600';
or AWWA M23 as appropriate. Prior to installation, all pipe and appurtenances shall be`
examined for damage and defects . Under no circumstances shall defective pipe be
installed. All lumps , blisters and excess coating materials shall be removed from the
socket and plain ends of each pipe . While being placed in the trench, care shall be taken
to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open
end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall
remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to
deflect the pipe from . a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where
long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table
5 and 6 in AWWA Specification C600.
1 ) Thrust Restraint - All dead ends, valves, tees, and fittings for changes in
alignment shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All changes in
aligmnent shall require the fitting and appropriate length of upstream and
downstream pipe to be mechanically restrained with approved devices .
02535-5 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) Installation of Trace Wire
Trace wire shall run continuously along the pipeline from valve to valve or
fitting. All splices shall be hot-soldered to provide continuity along the entire
installation. Installation and splicing shall be in accordance with the details
shown on the following insert.
3 ) Separation Requirements
Force mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
the proposed water main. Force mains crossing water mains shall be laid to
provide a minimum vertical clearance of 18 inches between the outside of the
bottom of the water main and the outside of the force main. Where the force
main passes over the water main or the 18 inch clearance cannot be met, the
force main shall have a full pipe length centered on the water main. The force
main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall be encased in a minimum
of 6 inches of concrete all around .
D . Field Quality Control
1 ) Hydrostatic Tests_ - The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing materials.
and. shall perform all work required in connection with the test. All pipe shall be
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 100 p . s. i. for force mains and 150 p . s .i . for
reuse mains . The required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation
shall be applied for not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and
joints shall be made water tight if leakage is evident . At a maximum, mains shall
be tested from shut-off valve to shut-off valve. New mains shall be temporarily
plugged or valved .and .pressure tested prior to tie-in or modification of existing
pressure mains .
No ductile iron pipe installations will be accepted unless and until the leakage is
less than that as specified under Section 4. 2 of the AWWA (ANSI) C600, P .V . C.
pipe installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as
applicable.
E . Adjusting and Cleaning
1 ) Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the
original or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the
completion of backfilling and surface irregularities that are dangerous or
obstructive to traffic are to be removed. Paved sections shall conform in grade
with adjacent areas and shall be of at least equal quality. Design mixes for
flexible pavement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All damaged or
undermined areas of existing pavement, not previously removed, shall be
removed and restored to original conditions or in the specified manner.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . 01 SOIL MATERIALS
Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and deleterious
OF objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-
halfthe lift thickness at the intended location.
A. Common Fill
Common shall consist of sandy-loam, sand, gravel, soft shale, or crushed stone. The Engineer
shall be the sole judge of what constitutes suitable and unsuitable material for backfill from "on-
site excavations , "
B . Select Material
Select Fill shall consist of uniform, clean, free draining sand or sand and shell containing less
than 5 % fines passing a No. 200 sieve. Laboratory test results
Engineer for his approval, of this fill shall be submitted to the
C. Topsoil
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of., subsoil;
;stumps ; rocks larger than 1 inch diameter; brush; weeds; toxic substances; and other material -'
detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORT{
3 :01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, and brush within the clearing
limits . Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 3 inches in diameter to at
least 24 inches below existing surface.
B . Stripping
Strip existing topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches without contamination by subsoil material.
topsoil separately from
Remove all existing topsoil with organic roots and materials . Stockpile
Other excavated material and locate convenient to areas for soils exchange.
C. Unsuitable Material
All cleared, grubbed and demolished material deemed unsuitable shall be stockpiled on-site by
the Contractor for disposal by soils exchange with material over excavated from the proposed
stormwater management tract(s) .
D. Disposal
In all areas where excavation is to be done, all earth, rock, muck and other materials shall be
removed and separated as to suitable and unsuitable material for backfill as defined herein.
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later
02302 - 3 02,302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) Installation of Trace Wire
Trace wire shall run continuously along the pipeline from valve to valve or
fitting. All splices shall be hot-soldered to provide continuity along the entire
installation. Installation and splicing shall be in accordance with the details
shown on the following insert.
3 ) Separation Requirements
Force mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
the proposed water main. Force mains crossing water mains shall be laid to
provide a minimum vertical clearance of 18 inches between the outside of the
bottom of the water main and the outside of the force main. Where the force
main passes over the water main or the 18 inch clearance cannot be met, the
force main shall have a full pipe length centered on the water main. The force
main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall be encased in a minimum
of 6 inches of concrete all around .
D . Field Quality Control
1 ) Hydrostatic Tests_ - The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing materials.
and. shall perform all work required in connection with the test. All pipe shall be
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 100 p . s. i. for force mains and 150 p . s .i . for
reuse mains . The required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation
shall be applied for not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and
joints shall be made water tight if leakage is evident . At a maximum, mains shall
be tested from shut-off valve to shut-off valve. New mains shall be temporarily
plugged or valved .and .pressure tested prior to tie-in or modification of existing
pressure mains .
No ductile iron pipe installations will be accepted unless and until the leakage is
less than that as specified under Section 4. 2 of the AWWA (ANSI) C600, P .V . C.
pipe installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as
applicable.
E . Adjusting and Cleaning
1 ) Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the
original or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the
completion of backfilling and surface irregularities that are dangerous or
obstructive to traffic are to be removed. Paved sections shall conform in grade
with adjacent areas and shall be of at least equal quality. Design mixes for
flexible pavement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All damaged or
undermined areas of existing pavement, not previously removed, shall be
removed and restored to original conditions or in the specified manner.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) Installation of Trace Wire
Trace wire shall run continuously along the pipeline from valve to valve or
fitting. All splices shall be hot-soldered to provide continuity along the entire
installation. Installation and splicing shall be in accordance with the details
shown on the following insert.
3 ) Separation Requirements
Force mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
the proposed water main. Force mains crossing water mains shall be laid to
provide a minimum vertical clearance of 18 inches between the outside of the
bottom of the water main and the outside of the force main. Where the force
main passes over the water main or the 18 inch clearance cannot be met, the
force main shall have a full pipe length centered on the water main. The force
main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall be encased in a minimum
of 6 inches of concrete all around .
D . Field Quality Control
1 ) Hydrostatic Tests_ - The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing materials.
and. shall perform all work required in connection with the test. All pipe shall be
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 100 p . s. i. for force mains and 150 p . s .i . for
reuse mains . The required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation
shall be applied for not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and
joints shall be made water tight if leakage is evident . At a maximum, mains shall
be tested from shut-off valve to shut-off valve. New mains shall be temporarily
plugged or valved .and .pressure tested prior to tie-in or modification of existing
pressure mains .
No ductile iron pipe installations will be accepted unless and until the leakage is
less than that as specified under Section 4. 2 of the AWWA (ANSI) C600, P .V . C.
pipe installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as
applicable.
E . Adjusting and Cleaning
1 ) Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the
original or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the
completion of backfilling and surface irregularities that are dangerous or
obstructive to traffic are to be removed. Paved sections shall conform in grade
with adjacent areas and shall be of at least equal quality. Design mixes for
flexible pavement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All damaged or
undermined areas of existing pavement, not previously removed, shall be
removed and restored to original conditions or in the specified manner.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments, or other hard material,
lying on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal,
replacement and restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on
drawings .
F . Connection to Existing Mains
The Contractor shall make no connection to another Contractor' s work or the Owner's
existing mains unless the work has been substantially completed, accepted, and paid for
by the Owner, or expressed written permission to connect to the work has been given by
the other Contractor and said written permission has been forwarded to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
02535-7 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments, or other hard material,
lying on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal,
replacement and restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on
drawings .
F . Connection to Existing Mains
The Contractor shall make no connection to another Contractor' s work or the Owner's
existing mains unless the work has been substantially completed, accepted, and paid for
by the Owner, or expressed written permission to connect to the work has been given by
the other Contractor and said written permission has been forwarded to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
02535-7 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
disposal by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site
stormwater management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as
not to endanger the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site
location. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of
suitable material from the stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over
excavated volume with the unsuitable material. All over excavated material shall be utilized and
spread on the project site. Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable
material to be exchanged . Waste, brush, refuse, stumps, roots, timber, etc . shall be removed
from the site and disposed of in an approved manner.
E . Removal of Muck, Rock and Other Unsuitable Material
All muck, rock , clay, marl, gravel , boulders , heterogeneous fill material and any other organic
or unsuitable "materials of excavation" encountered under pavement areas, structures and
utilities shall be excavated and removed. Also any "unforeseen obstacles" such as buried trees or
timbers, abandoned utilities, metal objects , concrete masses, or any other type of debris
encountered shall be removed .
All areas under proposed pavements or structures, which are indicated by testing to have more
than trace amounts of silt and/or clay within the top several feet of existing grade shall be "proof
rolled" using a vibratory compactor . Should the existing material continuously yield or "pump"
during the proof rolling, the Engineer shall be notified and a determination made as to the
amount of stripping needed to accomplish a stabilized foundation. .
Stripping shall be accomplished to clean in-place sand or other suitable material as approved by
the Engineer. Removal of unsuitable material within areas which are to receive footings, slabs or
other foundations shall be completed for the full area under such structures and to ten feet
minimum outside the maximum perimeter. Where pavement is to be placed, said removal shall
include all area under the surface and extend to the outside of any shoulders, under any
sidewalks and bike paths, or as directed by the Engineer.
All roots , stumps, logs, limbs, timbers, boulders , or any material which is not suitable for
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly and excavated and disposed of by the
Contractor at his expense.
Removal of all "materials of excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be paid for under the
heading of "Excavation and Hauling" .
3 . 02 PROTECTION
A. Sheeting and Bracing
1 . Where excavations may endanger workmen, existing structures, utilities or other
facilities, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to immediately install and maintain
adequate sheeting and bracing per OSHA specifications in order to protect said facility. No
work shall proceed in such excavations until the sheeting and bracing has been properly
and completely installed , The sheeting thus installed shall be removed as the work
progresses or, at the discretion of the Engineer, be cut off below finished grade and left in
place. Sheeting and bracing may be either steel or wood at the option of the Contractor.
2 . Sheeting and bracing shall be installed in a manner that will allow for removal without
injuring or endangering workmen, the work, adjacent structures, and the like. Voids caused
by withdrawal of sheeting shall be promptly and completely filled with sand and
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments, or other hard material,
lying on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal,
replacement and restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on
drawings .
F . Connection to Existing Mains
The Contractor shall make no connection to another Contractor' s work or the Owner's
existing mains unless the work has been substantially completed, accepted, and paid for
by the Owner, or expressed written permission to connect to the work has been given by
the other Contractor and said written permission has been forwarded to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
02535-7 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02538
TESTING FORCE MAINS
1 . SCOPE
A . This Section describes the procedural, material, and acceptance requirements for
cleaning and testing of the mainlines with regard to quality, alignment, tightness, and
overall integrity of the installed system.
2. GENERAL
A . The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials; transportation, pumps, gauges, and
equipment necessary to flush and test the installed pipe system as required by these
Specifications .
13 . The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary connections, corporation stops,
blowoffs, and the like required for flushing and testing, and upon completion of
satisfactory tests, shall remove same and install appropriate plugging/capping devices
or permanent connections as required .
C . The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of` ,
all acceptance testing to be performed . No testing for acceptance of the work shall :
begin until the Owner and Engineer or his authorized representative are present.
D . No interconnection shall be made between the new work and an existing active pipe ; ., ;
system, except that necessary and approved by the Owner for testing, until the work
is approved for use by the Engineer and until all approvals and clearances required by
applicable construction permits for use of the work are issued by the pennitting
agency.
E . At least 3 business days prior to conducting each item of work under this Section, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a description of the specific
equipment, materials, and procedures to be used, plus identification of proposed
water source(s), to be used for this particular work item.
3 . FLUSHING
A . Upon completion of each run of pipe between main valves or between a main valve
and a terminal point, the pipe run shall be flushed with clean water at a minimum full
diameter velocity of 2 . 5 ft./see, in order to remove sand, debris, and other foreign
materials prior to pressure testing.
B . The pipe run to be flushed shall be slowly filled with clean water with all valves open
to allow escape of air pockets . High points in the pipe shall be vented with air release
valves . When the system is full and prior to flushing, all valves shall be fully closed.
02538 - 1 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
compacted to a degree equal to the surrounding soil .
B . Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during
construction.
1 . Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site
during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall
establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive
surface water runoffaway from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches,
swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils . When
unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
subsequent construction features develop, unsuitable soil support for
remove unsuitable material and provide new soil
material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and
ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary
measures to permit construction to proceed.
2 . Dewatering
All water encountered during excavation shall be promptly and completely removed to a
depth below the exposed excavation surface sufficient to provide a dry working surface.
The excavation shall be kept dry until the work to be built or placed therein has been
completed as specified. Dewatering shall be done in a manner that Will ; notcause '
sloughing or caving of the excavation walls . Water from said dewatering shall be disposed ='
of in a manner as will not result in violations of State water quality standards in receiving
waters , nor cause injury to public health nor to public or private property, nor to the work ,
completed or in progress. Any and all damage caused by dewatering shall be promptly
repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The receiving point for water from said
operation shall be approved by the applicable regulatory agency and the Engineer. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining all required permits and any other approval
necessary.
C. Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically
verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting
construction. The Contractor shall contact Call Sunshine at 1 -800-432-4770, 48 hours
prior to commencement of excavation for assistance in locating existing utilities .
D. Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall
be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly
installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged.
3 . 03 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet the
specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free
02302 - 5 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02538
TESTING FORCE MAINS
1 . SCOPE
A . This Section describes the procedural, material, and acceptance requirements for
cleaning and testing of the mainlines with regard to quality, alignment, tightness, and
overall integrity of the installed system.
2. GENERAL
A . The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials; transportation, pumps, gauges, and
equipment necessary to flush and test the installed pipe system as required by these
Specifications .
13 . The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary connections, corporation stops,
blowoffs, and the like required for flushing and testing, and upon completion of
satisfactory tests, shall remove same and install appropriate plugging/capping devices
or permanent connections as required .
C . The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of` ,
all acceptance testing to be performed . No testing for acceptance of the work shall :
begin until the Owner and Engineer or his authorized representative are present.
D . No interconnection shall be made between the new work and an existing active pipe ; ., ;
system, except that necessary and approved by the Owner for testing, until the work
is approved for use by the Engineer and until all approvals and clearances required by
applicable construction permits for use of the work are issued by the pennitting
agency.
E . At least 3 business days prior to conducting each item of work under this Section, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a description of the specific
equipment, materials, and procedures to be used, plus identification of proposed
water source(s), to be used for this particular work item.
3 . FLUSHING
A . Upon completion of each run of pipe between main valves or between a main valve
and a terminal point, the pipe run shall be flushed with clean water at a minimum full
diameter velocity of 2 . 5 ft./see, in order to remove sand, debris, and other foreign
materials prior to pressure testing.
B . The pipe run to be flushed shall be slowly filled with clean water with all valves open
to allow escape of air pockets . High points in the pipe shall be vented with air release
valves . When the system is full and prior to flushing, all valves shall be fully closed.
02538 - 1 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02538
TESTING FORCE MAINS
1 . SCOPE
A . This Section describes the procedural, material, and acceptance requirements for
cleaning and testing of the mainlines with regard to quality, alignment, tightness, and
overall integrity of the installed system.
2. GENERAL
A . The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials; transportation, pumps, gauges, and
equipment necessary to flush and test the installed pipe system as required by these
Specifications .
13 . The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary connections, corporation stops,
blowoffs, and the like required for flushing and testing, and upon completion of
satisfactory tests, shall remove same and install appropriate plugging/capping devices
or permanent connections as required .
C . The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of` ,
all acceptance testing to be performed . No testing for acceptance of the work shall :
begin until the Owner and Engineer or his authorized representative are present.
D . No interconnection shall be made between the new work and an existing active pipe ; ., ;
system, except that necessary and approved by the Owner for testing, until the work
is approved for use by the Engineer and until all approvals and clearances required by
applicable construction permits for use of the work are issued by the pennitting
agency.
E . At least 3 business days prior to conducting each item of work under this Section, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a description of the specific
equipment, materials, and procedures to be used, plus identification of proposed
water source(s), to be used for this particular work item.
3 . FLUSHING
A . Upon completion of each run of pipe between main valves or between a main valve
and a terminal point, the pipe run shall be flushed with clean water at a minimum full
diameter velocity of 2 . 5 ft./see, in order to remove sand, debris, and other foreign
materials prior to pressure testing.
B . The pipe run to be flushed shall be slowly filled with clean water with all valves open
to allow escape of air pockets . High points in the pipe shall be vented with air release
valves . When the system is full and prior to flushing, all valves shall be fully closed.
02538 - 1 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Flushing shall continue until a minimum water volume of two times the aggregate
pipe vohune has passed through the pipe section being cleaned. The aggregate pipe
volume shall include all pipe carrying flushing water from the point of introduction
to the work to the point(s) of discharge from the run being cleaned.
D . For nominal pipe sizes of 6 inches and smaller, the pipe shall be flushed through a
discharge extension of at least the full pipe diameter. For nominal pipe sizes greater
than 6 inches, a 6 inch diameter discharge extension pipe, connected to the work with
reducer(s) , may be used in lieu of a full diameter blowoff.
E . Flushing water shall be carried beyond the trench and shall be discharged in a manner
that will not cause erosion nor structural damage on or off-site, and will not cause
contravention of State water quality standards in receiving surface waters . The
Contractor shall provide adequate extension pipe, sedimentation basin(s) , and/or
diffusion devices as necessary to prevent such damage .
4 . HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE AND PRESSURE TESTING
A . Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with
Section 4 of AWWA C-600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor
shall famish all gauges , _meters,. pressurepumps and other equipment needed to test
the line. P .V . C . pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of
AWWA M23 . Upon completion of flushing, the installed pipe system shall be tested
for tightness under a continuous hydrostatic gauge pressure of 25 psi and then 100 or
150 psi as applicable, + 5 psi as applicable, determined at the lowest point in the
system , for a period of 2 hours. The allowable leakage rate shall not exceed that
defined in and specified by AWWA C600- 82 or AWWA M23 ,
B . If the work is subject to acceptance by a municipal or private utility with its own
adopted test requirements more stringent than those stated herein with regard to
pressure, duration, and/or allowable leakage rate, such requirements shall supersede
these specifications .
C . Testing shall be performed separately on each valved-off section of the installed
system . Testing shall be against closed in-line valves with each valve in the system
subject to the full test pressure differential for full test time at least once during the
course of testing.
D . Allowable leakage shall be calculated based on the pipe diameters) and total laid
length of the nm being tested, with no additional allowance for fittings , or joints . No
visible leakage shall be allowed.
If visible leakage is noted during the course of testing, or if allowable leakage is
exceeded, such leakage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
test repeated or extended for an additional period up to the full test time with suitable
adjustment for previous make-up water used, at the Engineer's discretion .
02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
02538 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Flushing shall continue until a minimum water volume of two times the aggregate
pipe vohune has passed through the pipe section being cleaned. The aggregate pipe
volume shall include all pipe carrying flushing water from the point of introduction
to the work to the point(s) of discharge from the run being cleaned.
D . For nominal pipe sizes of 6 inches and smaller, the pipe shall be flushed through a
discharge extension of at least the full pipe diameter. For nominal pipe sizes greater
than 6 inches, a 6 inch diameter discharge extension pipe, connected to the work with
reducer(s) , may be used in lieu of a full diameter blowoff.
E . Flushing water shall be carried beyond the trench and shall be discharged in a manner
that will not cause erosion nor structural damage on or off-site, and will not cause
contravention of State water quality standards in receiving surface waters . The
Contractor shall provide adequate extension pipe, sedimentation basin(s) , and/or
diffusion devices as necessary to prevent such damage .
4 . HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE AND PRESSURE TESTING
A . Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with
Section 4 of AWWA C-600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor
shall famish all gauges , _meters,. pressurepumps and other equipment needed to test
the line. P .V . C . pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of
AWWA M23 . Upon completion of flushing, the installed pipe system shall be tested
for tightness under a continuous hydrostatic gauge pressure of 25 psi and then 100 or
150 psi as applicable, + 5 psi as applicable, determined at the lowest point in the
system , for a period of 2 hours. The allowable leakage rate shall not exceed that
defined in and specified by AWWA C600- 82 or AWWA M23 ,
B . If the work is subject to acceptance by a municipal or private utility with its own
adopted test requirements more stringent than those stated herein with regard to
pressure, duration, and/or allowable leakage rate, such requirements shall supersede
these specifications .
C . Testing shall be performed separately on each valved-off section of the installed
system . Testing shall be against closed in-line valves with each valve in the system
subject to the full test pressure differential for full test time at least once during the
course of testing.
D . Allowable leakage shall be calculated based on the pipe diameters) and total laid
length of the nm being tested, with no additional allowance for fittings , or joints . No
visible leakage shall be allowed.
If visible leakage is noted during the course of testing, or if allowable leakage is
exceeded, such leakage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
test repeated or extended for an additional period up to the full test time with suitable
adjustment for previous make-up water used, at the Engineer's discretion .
02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
02538 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made
unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Refill with common fill and
compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill
excavations cut below indicated depth with common fill and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D
1557 maximum density .
A. Pipe Trenches
Excavate trenches to uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a
minimum of 9 to 12 inches of clearance on both sides of the pipe or conduit. Grade bottom of
trenches to provide uniform support for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
B . Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert
elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.
1 . Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and
backfill with a 6-inch layer of tamped sand or gravel prior to installation of pipe.
2. For pipes or conduit less than 6 inches in nominal size, and for flat-bottomed, multiple-
duct conduit units , do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand-excavate bottom out to
accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil:
3 . For pipes and equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to
fit bottom of pipe for 90 degrees (bottom 1 /4 of the circumference) . Fill depressions with
tamped sand backfill . At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve pipe bell of loads and to
ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on bearing surface.
3 .04 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours , elevations , and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before placing
overlaying lift .
A. Unsuitable Material Replacement
1 . Fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in layers not to exceed twelve inches
before compaction . All fill material shall be free from vegetable matter, wood, and other
deleterious substances , and shall not contain rocks or clods having a diameter of more than
three inches.
B . Pre-fill Compaction
1 . Should the pre-fill surface elevation be below that required for the base of proposed
building foundations or paving subgrade, the areas within road rights-of-ways, under
parking areas, and the areas under and within five feet of proposed buildings shall be
precompacted. This precompaction shall be performed equally on existing ground and on
surfaces which have been excavated to remove unsuitable material. The top one foot of
said areas shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of maximum as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . The maximum spacing between density tests shall be 150 feet.
C . Compaction
1 . Backfill material shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 .
Equipment suitable and adequate for uniform compaction to the specified density shall be
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Flushing shall continue until a minimum water volume of two times the aggregate
pipe vohune has passed through the pipe section being cleaned. The aggregate pipe
volume shall include all pipe carrying flushing water from the point of introduction
to the work to the point(s) of discharge from the run being cleaned.
D . For nominal pipe sizes of 6 inches and smaller, the pipe shall be flushed through a
discharge extension of at least the full pipe diameter. For nominal pipe sizes greater
than 6 inches, a 6 inch diameter discharge extension pipe, connected to the work with
reducer(s) , may be used in lieu of a full diameter blowoff.
E . Flushing water shall be carried beyond the trench and shall be discharged in a manner
that will not cause erosion nor structural damage on or off-site, and will not cause
contravention of State water quality standards in receiving surface waters . The
Contractor shall provide adequate extension pipe, sedimentation basin(s) , and/or
diffusion devices as necessary to prevent such damage .
4 . HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE AND PRESSURE TESTING
A . Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with
Section 4 of AWWA C-600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor
shall famish all gauges , _meters,. pressurepumps and other equipment needed to test
the line. P .V . C . pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of
AWWA M23 . Upon completion of flushing, the installed pipe system shall be tested
for tightness under a continuous hydrostatic gauge pressure of 25 psi and then 100 or
150 psi as applicable, + 5 psi as applicable, determined at the lowest point in the
system , for a period of 2 hours. The allowable leakage rate shall not exceed that
defined in and specified by AWWA C600- 82 or AWWA M23 ,
B . If the work is subject to acceptance by a municipal or private utility with its own
adopted test requirements more stringent than those stated herein with regard to
pressure, duration, and/or allowable leakage rate, such requirements shall supersede
these specifications .
C . Testing shall be performed separately on each valved-off section of the installed
system . Testing shall be against closed in-line valves with each valve in the system
subject to the full test pressure differential for full test time at least once during the
course of testing.
D . Allowable leakage shall be calculated based on the pipe diameters) and total laid
length of the nm being tested, with no additional allowance for fittings , or joints . No
visible leakage shall be allowed.
If visible leakage is noted during the course of testing, or if allowable leakage is
exceeded, such leakage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
test repeated or extended for an additional period up to the full test time with suitable
adjustment for previous make-up water used, at the Engineer's discretion .
02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
02538 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. The pumping/pressurizing and make-up water measuring equipment shall be
provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to testing. The
pressurizing equipment shall be designed and operated in a manner that will
minimize pressure surging and pulsing within the pipe.
F . The Contractor shall provide and install a temporary valved tap with a 1 /4" FPT
connection to receive the pressure gauge in each pipe run to be tested. Upon
satisfactory completion of testing, the Contractor shall remove and plug the pipe.
G. In preparation for testing, the pipe shall be slowly filled with clean water from an
approved source, taking care to purge all air pockets . Water remaining in the pipe
system after flushing may be used and supplemented as necessary with prior approval
by the Engineer, and clean test water may be reused for sequential testing of pipe
segments .
H . In conducting the test, water shall be pumped into the full pipe until test pressure is
attained, and make-up water shall be added as soon as the pressure drops to 5 psi
below test pressure . All make-up water shall be accurately measured, and the total
test leakage shall be defined as the volume of make-up water added.
I. Should the tested section fail to meet these requirements , the Contractor shall, athisown expense, locate and repair the defects
and retest the section until it is acceptable.
J . Immediately upon completion of a passing pressure test, all valves shall be operated '
to insure their full opening and closing.
END OF SECTION -
02538 - 3 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
used for backfill operations subject to the approval of the Engineer. All compaction
equipment shall be in good working order and any worn or defective equipment shall be
immediately replaced or repaired.
D . Soil Stability and Compaction Control
I . The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent
testing laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with
the stability and compaction levels required by these specifications . Compaction tests shall
be taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
2 . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by
the Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
such documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
3 . In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until
the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
4 . In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall
be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill , For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 200 cu. yd. of material shall be performed at the point of; -
use.
5 . Tests for in-place density (percent compaction) shall be taken at locations designated
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall have density tests takenn four (4) separate
i
locations . Each location shall be tested in lifts not to exceed 12-inches n thickness.
E. Trench Backfilling
Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and acceptance of work permits . Place and
compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 12 inch lifts to top of trench and in 6
inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas .
1 . Bedding Requirements
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for
buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as. specified herein.
Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum
density. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D
2321 materials as follows :
Class I : Angular, 0.25 to 1 .5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials
that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed
shells .
Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 . 5 inches, including
i
various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally
granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are
included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 .
02302 - 7 02302 — Excavation and Fill
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. The pumping/pressurizing and make-up water measuring equipment shall be
provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to testing. The
pressurizing equipment shall be designed and operated in a manner that will
minimize pressure surging and pulsing within the pipe.
F . The Contractor shall provide and install a temporary valved tap with a 1 /4" FPT
connection to receive the pressure gauge in each pipe run to be tested. Upon
satisfactory completion of testing, the Contractor shall remove and plug the pipe.
G. In preparation for testing, the pipe shall be slowly filled with clean water from an
approved source, taking care to purge all air pockets . Water remaining in the pipe
system after flushing may be used and supplemented as necessary with prior approval
by the Engineer, and clean test water may be reused for sequential testing of pipe
segments .
H . In conducting the test, water shall be pumped into the full pipe until test pressure is
attained, and make-up water shall be added as soon as the pressure drops to 5 psi
below test pressure . All make-up water shall be accurately measured, and the total
test leakage shall be defined as the volume of make-up water added.
I. Should the tested section fail to meet these requirements , the Contractor shall, athisown expense, locate and repair the defects
and retest the section until it is acceptable.
J . Immediately upon completion of a passing pressure test, all valves shall be operated '
to insure their full opening and closing.
END OF SECTION -
02538 - 3 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. The pumping/pressurizing and make-up water measuring equipment shall be
provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to testing. The
pressurizing equipment shall be designed and operated in a manner that will
minimize pressure surging and pulsing within the pipe.
F . The Contractor shall provide and install a temporary valved tap with a 1 /4" FPT
connection to receive the pressure gauge in each pipe run to be tested. Upon
satisfactory completion of testing, the Contractor shall remove and plug the pipe.
G. In preparation for testing, the pipe shall be slowly filled with clean water from an
approved source, taking care to purge all air pockets . Water remaining in the pipe
system after flushing may be used and supplemented as necessary with prior approval
by the Engineer, and clean test water may be reused for sequential testing of pipe
segments .
H . In conducting the test, water shall be pumped into the full pipe until test pressure is
attained, and make-up water shall be added as soon as the pressure drops to 5 psi
below test pressure . All make-up water shall be accurately measured, and the total
test leakage shall be defined as the volume of make-up water added.
I. Should the tested section fail to meet these requirements , the Contractor shall, athisown expense, locate and repair the defects
and retest the section until it is acceptable.
J . Immediately upon completion of a passing pressure test, all valves shall be operated '
to insure their full opening and closing.
END OF SECTION -
02538 - 3 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02630
STORM SEWERAGE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced:
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
L AASHTO M 288(1992) - Standard Specification for Interim Geotextile
Specification for Highway Applications
2. AASHTO T180 — Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils Using a I01b . Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
B . American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA)
1 . ACPA 01 - 103 ( 1988) - Concrete Pipe Installation Manual
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A 48( 1994) — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
2. ASTM A 798(1994) - Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated
Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications
3 . ASTM A 849(2000) — Standard Specification for Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings
and Linings for Corrugated Steel Pipe
4. ASTM C 139( 1995; Rev A) - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units
for Construction of Catch Basins and Structures
5 . ASTM C 32(1993) - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made
from Clay or Shale)
6. ASTM C 76( 1995) - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
7 . ASTM C 387(2000el ) - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined
Materials for Mortar and Concrete
8. ASTM C 1450(2004) — Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement
Storm Drainage Pipe
D. Florida Department of Transportation — Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
02630 - 1 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02630
STORM SEWERAGE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced:
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
L AASHTO M 288(1992) - Standard Specification for Interim Geotextile
Specification for Highway Applications
2. AASHTO T180 — Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils Using a I01b . Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
B . American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA)
1 . ACPA 01 - 103 ( 1988) - Concrete Pipe Installation Manual
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A 48( 1994) — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
2. ASTM A 798(1994) - Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated
Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications
3 . ASTM A 849(2000) — Standard Specification for Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings
and Linings for Corrugated Steel Pipe
4. ASTM C 139( 1995; Rev A) - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units
for Construction of Catch Basins and Structures
5 . ASTM C 32(1993) - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made
from Clay or Shale)
6. ASTM C 76( 1995) - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
7 . ASTM C 387(2000el ) - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined
Materials for Mortar and Concrete
8. ASTM C 1450(2004) — Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement
Storm Drainage Pipe
D. Florida Department of Transportation — Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
02630 - 1 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 05 COMPACTION
Expressed as a percentage of maximum density. Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if
required density exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required.
A. General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the
structure to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 .
3 . 06 FINISH OPERATIONS
A . Grading
Finish grades as indicated on the plans to within two inches . In areas where sodding is required,
finished soil grade shall be set 3 -inches below the plan elevation to compensate for sod
thickness . . For existing grades that will remain but which were disturbed by Contractor's
operations, grade as directed.
B . Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur. Repair or
reestablish damaged grades , elevations, or slopes .
3 . 07 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall temporarily stockpile all unsuitable fill and backfill material for later disposal
by soils exchange from suitable material to be over excavated from the on-site stormwater
management lakes. The stockpiled material shall be piled in an orderly manner so as not to endanger
the work or obstruct roadways or drainage within the designated job site location. All unsuitable -
material shall be disposed of by over excavating an equal volume of suitable material from the
stormwater management lakes and subsequently filling the over excavated volume with the
unsuitable material . All over excavated material shall be utilized and spread on the project site .
Hazardous or waste materials shall not be used in the unsuitable material to be exchanged. Waste,
brush, refuse, stumps , roots, timber, etc. shall be removed from the site and disposed of in an
approved manner.
END OF SECTION
02302 — Excavation and Fill
02302 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02630
STORM SEWERAGE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced:
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
L AASHTO M 288(1992) - Standard Specification for Interim Geotextile
Specification for Highway Applications
2. AASHTO T180 — Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils Using a I01b . Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
B . American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA)
1 . ACPA 01 - 103 ( 1988) - Concrete Pipe Installation Manual
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A 48( 1994) — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
2. ASTM A 798(1994) - Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated
Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications
3 . ASTM A 849(2000) — Standard Specification for Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings
and Linings for Corrugated Steel Pipe
4. ASTM C 139( 1995; Rev A) - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units
for Construction of Catch Basins and Structures
5 . ASTM C 32(1993) - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made
from Clay or Shale)
6. ASTM C 76( 1995) - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
7 . ASTM C 387(2000el ) - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined
Materials for Mortar and Concrete
8. ASTM C 1450(2004) — Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement
Storm Drainage Pipe
D. Florida Department of Transportation — Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
02630 - 1 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1 . AW WA C 210(latest edition) — Liquid-Epoxy Coating System for the Interior and
Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Coordination Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Drawings," of this
section.
B. Product Data
Five (5) copies of Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following:
Piping
Gaskets
Compression Joints
Frames, Covers and Gratings
Precast Concrete Structures
Precast Concrete Base Sections
A Work Plan shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Plans, " of this
section.
Proposed Schedules
Methods
Materials
Equipment
1 .03 DRAWINGS
Contractor shall submit Coordination Drawings interferences for construction. Details of catch
basins and Structures shall be shown with proper elevations .
1 .04 PLANS
A Work Plan shall be submitted noting Proposed Schedules, Methods, Materials and Equipment.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BONDING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Coating and Sealing
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849, when using materials previously coal-
tar coated and for each uncoated ferrous piece used underground.
Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 trowel
consistency.
02630 - 2 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02510
WATER MAINS .
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials, equipment
and labor required for the installation of water mains as herein described and as shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compacting, testing and related work
required for the construction of these water mains in accordance with the provisions set forth under
the applicable items of this Specification.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National Standards Institute
(ANSI).
I AWWA C104 (ANSI A21 .4) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe,;
and Fittings for water. -
2. AWWA (ANSI) Clio Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3-inch through 48 -inch for.
water and other liquids .
3 . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron~and Gray-Iron . ,.
Pressure Pipe and Fittings .
4 . AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 .50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
5 . AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in Metal Molds or
Sand Lined Molds -for water of other liquids .
6 . AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 112-inch
for water and other liquids.
7 . . AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water Mains and
Appurtenances.
8 . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inch
through 12-inch .
9. AWWA M23 Manual of Water Supply Practices, "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" .
B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials .
02510 - 1 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1 . AW WA C 210(latest edition) — Liquid-Epoxy Coating System for the Interior and
Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Coordination Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Drawings," of this
section.
B. Product Data
Five (5) copies of Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following:
Piping
Gaskets
Compression Joints
Frames, Covers and Gratings
Precast Concrete Structures
Precast Concrete Base Sections
A Work Plan shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Plans, " of this
section.
Proposed Schedules
Methods
Materials
Equipment
1 .03 DRAWINGS
Contractor shall submit Coordination Drawings interferences for construction. Details of catch
basins and Structures shall be shown with proper elevations .
1 .04 PLANS
A Work Plan shall be submitted noting Proposed Schedules, Methods, Materials and Equipment.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BONDING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Coating and Sealing
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849, when using materials previously coal-
tar coated and for each uncoated ferrous piece used underground.
Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 trowel
consistency.
02630 - 2 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1 . AW WA C 210(latest edition) — Liquid-Epoxy Coating System for the Interior and
Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Coordination Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Drawings," of this
section.
B. Product Data
Five (5) copies of Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following:
Piping
Gaskets
Compression Joints
Frames, Covers and Gratings
Precast Concrete Structures
Precast Concrete Base Sections
A Work Plan shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Plans, " of this
section.
Proposed Schedules
Methods
Materials
Equipment
1 .03 DRAWINGS
Contractor shall submit Coordination Drawings interferences for construction. Details of catch
basins and Structures shall be shown with proper elevations .
1 .04 PLANS
A Work Plan shall be submitted noting Proposed Schedules, Methods, Materials and Equipment.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BONDING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Coating and Sealing
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849, when using materials previously coal-
tar coated and for each uncoated ferrous piece used underground.
Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 trowel
consistency.
02630 - 2 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
B . Epoxy Bonding Compound
Epoxy adhesive material shall be in accordance with AW WA C210.
2 .02 FILTER MATERIAL
A. Filter Fabric
Fabric shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 288, and be water pervious, made of
Polyester materials. Where required, fabric shall be Amoco Propex 4545, or equal,
approved by Engineer prior to ordering.
B . Filter Aggregate
Aggregate shall be clean gravel free from organic materials, clay, or other deleterious
materials .
2.03 MANHOLE AND CATCH-BASINMATERIALS
Water, for use with concrete block and brick, shall be clean and potable .
A. Concrete Block and Mortar
Concrete block shall be in accordance with ASTM C 139 .
Concrete Mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C 387, Type M
B . Brick and Mortar
Brick shall conform to ASTM C 32, Grade MS
Brick Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 387
2. 04 CONDUIT PIPING, JOINTS, FITTINGS AND GASKETS
A. Corrugated Steel Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "CMP", the drainage pipe and required coupling
bands shall be corrugated galvanized steel and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 943 of the FDOT Specifications .
B. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "Aluminum CMP" or " CAP", the drainage pipe
and required coupling bands shall be corrugated aluminum and shall conform to the
requirements of Section 945 of the FDOT Specifications .
C. Concrete Pipe
1 . Where shown on the Drawings as RCP, the drainage pipes shall be steel
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C76 (Class III) and
Sections 941 and 942 of the FDOT Specifications (2002), unless otherwise
02630 - 3 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
B . Epoxy Bonding Compound
Epoxy adhesive material shall be in accordance with AW WA C210.
2 .02 FILTER MATERIAL
A. Filter Fabric
Fabric shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 288, and be water pervious, made of
Polyester materials. Where required, fabric shall be Amoco Propex 4545, or equal,
approved by Engineer prior to ordering.
B . Filter Aggregate
Aggregate shall be clean gravel free from organic materials, clay, or other deleterious
materials .
2.03 MANHOLE AND CATCH-BASINMATERIALS
Water, for use with concrete block and brick, shall be clean and potable .
A. Concrete Block and Mortar
Concrete block shall be in accordance with ASTM C 139 .
Concrete Mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C 387, Type M
B . Brick and Mortar
Brick shall conform to ASTM C 32, Grade MS
Brick Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 387
2. 04 CONDUIT PIPING, JOINTS, FITTINGS AND GASKETS
A. Corrugated Steel Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "CMP", the drainage pipe and required coupling
bands shall be corrugated galvanized steel and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 943 of the FDOT Specifications .
B. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "Aluminum CMP" or " CAP", the drainage pipe
and required coupling bands shall be corrugated aluminum and shall conform to the
requirements of Section 945 of the FDOT Specifications .
C. Concrete Pipe
1 . Where shown on the Drawings as RCP, the drainage pipes shall be steel
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C76 (Class III) and
Sections 941 and 942 of the FDOT Specifications (2002), unless otherwise
02630 - 3 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C , American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1 . AASHTO T-99 (2 .5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as modified by T-99-
801 (Dated 1981 ) .
2 . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 101b . Rammer and an 18-inch drop.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop drawings for the following items .
1 . Material specifications for all pipe types , fittings, joints, joint restraint, specials, and
miscellaneous appurtenances.
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor prior to
submission to the Engineer.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 . 01 PIPE
A. Ductile iron Pipe - All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151 ANSI A21 . 51 and
shall be minimum thickness class 50 . All pipe shall be factory lined and coated. The pipe
interior shall be cement lined and seal coated in accordance with AWWA C104. The
exterior of the pipe shall have a minimum 10 mil . thick coating of coal tar epoxy, "Kop-
Coat" Bitumastic 300M or "Proco" EP 214.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three blue color coded stripes. These stripes
shall be applied in the manner as the required . ASTM coding using paint with the word
"Water Main" in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches . As an
alternative to lettering, pipe may. be continuously layered with an attached blue plastic
identification tape marked "Water" .
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, ductile iron pipe shall be furnished in standard
18 or 20 foot laying lengths, and have mechanical joint ends .
B . P .V . C. Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made from Class
12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside diameter of cast iron
pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi.
P .V . C. pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide a light blue color. The pipe shall
be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These stripes shall be applied in
the manner as the required ASTM coding using permanent ink with the word "Water Main"
in 1 -inch high letters appearing one or more times every 24-inches. As an alternative to
lettering, pipe may be continuously layered with plastic identification tape marked "Water" .
P .V . C. pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
1 . Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a minimum wall
thickness of DR-18 .
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
B . Epoxy Bonding Compound
Epoxy adhesive material shall be in accordance with AW WA C210.
2 .02 FILTER MATERIAL
A. Filter Fabric
Fabric shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 288, and be water pervious, made of
Polyester materials. Where required, fabric shall be Amoco Propex 4545, or equal,
approved by Engineer prior to ordering.
B . Filter Aggregate
Aggregate shall be clean gravel free from organic materials, clay, or other deleterious
materials .
2.03 MANHOLE AND CATCH-BASINMATERIALS
Water, for use with concrete block and brick, shall be clean and potable .
A. Concrete Block and Mortar
Concrete block shall be in accordance with ASTM C 139 .
Concrete Mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C 387, Type M
B . Brick and Mortar
Brick shall conform to ASTM C 32, Grade MS
Brick Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 387
2. 04 CONDUIT PIPING, JOINTS, FITTINGS AND GASKETS
A. Corrugated Steel Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "CMP", the drainage pipe and required coupling
bands shall be corrugated galvanized steel and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 943 of the FDOT Specifications .
B. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "Aluminum CMP" or " CAP", the drainage pipe
and required coupling bands shall be corrugated aluminum and shall conform to the
requirements of Section 945 of the FDOT Specifications .
C. Concrete Pipe
1 . Where shown on the Drawings as RCP, the drainage pipes shall be steel
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C76 (Class III) and
Sections 941 and 942 of the FDOT Specifications (2002), unless otherwise
02630 - 3 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
noted.
2 . Where shown on the Drawings as FRCP, the drainage pipes shall be fiber
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C1450 (Class III)
and Sections 430 and 449 of the FDOT Specifications (2004), unless otherwise
noted.
D. PVC Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as PVC, the drainage pipe and fittings shall be Sch.
40, Polyvinyl Chloride, and shall conform to the requirements of Section 9484 of
the FDOT Specifications, unless otherwise noted.
E. Polyethylene Under Drain Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as Under Drain Pipe, the pipe and fittings shall be
double wall, perforated polyethylene . The pipe shall have a protective, polyester
sock and O-ring, gasketed, bell and spigot joints. Pipe shall be type N- 12, as
manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc . (or approved equal).
F. Bituminous Pipe Coating
Where shown on the Drawings as Asphalt Coated, metal pipe, "ACCMP" , the pipe
and fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and out, in conformance with Section
943 of the FDOT Specifications .
G. Mitered End Sections
Mitered end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O .T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 272, 273 or 274) called for on the Drawings.
H. Flared End Sections
Flared end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O.T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 270) called for on the Drawings.
2.05 FRAMES, COVERS AND GRATINGS
Manhole, catch-basin, and sump frames, covers, and gratings shall be in accordance with
F.D.O.T. - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
(2002) - SECTION 425 - Inlets, Structures and Junction Boxes
Cast iron materials shall be provided. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30,
minimum.
Gratings shall be as specified in the plans.
2.06 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES, RISERS AND PRECAST CONCRETE BASE SECTIONS
Concrete Structures, risers, base sections, and tops shall be pre-cast and conform to ASTM C
478 .
Precast parts shall be as shown in the plans.
02630 - 4 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2 . Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-B- 11 -85, shall
meet AWWA C 905 standards for potable water application requirements, and shall
be DR- 18 wall thickness .
2 .02 FITTINGS
All underground fittings shall be ductile iron with mechanically restrained joints . Fittings
shall conform to the following:
A. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 " through 12 " shall be compact ductile on conforming to
AWWA C 153 . Fittings shall have a m nimum pressure rating of 350 psi. Fittings shall
have mechanically restrained joints .
B . Fittings for pipe sizes over 12 " shall be ductile or cast iron conforming to AWWA
Cl 10 . Fittings shall have
mechanically restrained joina minimum pressure ratints. psi. Fitt
g of 250 ings shall have
C. All fittings shall be lined and coated as specified for ductile iron pipe.
D. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
2 . 03 JOINTS
A . Push on Joints - Joints for PVC pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber gasket ;. -
Compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl I1 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) . Special.
fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation .
B • Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints shall be used on fittings for changes
in
horizontal or vertical alignment on all pipes, up to 12-inches in diameter. All „-`
mechanical joints shall be restrained as further outlined in these specificationsF
Mechanical joints shall be in accordance with AWWA Cl 11 .
C• Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment of pipe shall be
mechanically restrained. As indicated on the drawings, pipe lengths located
upstream and downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained. Method of
joint restraint shall be as follows :
1 . P. V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with
"EBBA IRON" series 500, or other approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints
on P.V.C. pipe in diameters 4 " through 12 " shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON" series 1500, or other approved restrainer.
2 . P . V. C. pipe in diameters over 12 " shall be restrained at fittings with "UNI_
FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer. Bell and
spigot joints on P.V. C. pipe in diameters over I2 " shall be restrained with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved restrainer.
3 . Mechanical joint ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with "EBBA
IRON", Megalug Series 1100 restrainers, or approved equal . Push-on ductile
iron pipe and fittings shall be restrained with pipe manufa
joints, such as U. S . Pipe "TR-FLEX GRIPPER RING" cturer's restrained
, American Pipe "LOK-
RING" or "LOK-FAST" joints, or approved equal.
4. Retainer glands using point load set screws for restraint shall not be permitted.
02510 - 3 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
noted.
2 . Where shown on the Drawings as FRCP, the drainage pipes shall be fiber
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C1450 (Class III)
and Sections 430 and 449 of the FDOT Specifications (2004), unless otherwise
noted.
D. PVC Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as PVC, the drainage pipe and fittings shall be Sch.
40, Polyvinyl Chloride, and shall conform to the requirements of Section 9484 of
the FDOT Specifications, unless otherwise noted.
E. Polyethylene Under Drain Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as Under Drain Pipe, the pipe and fittings shall be
double wall, perforated polyethylene . The pipe shall have a protective, polyester
sock and O-ring, gasketed, bell and spigot joints. Pipe shall be type N- 12, as
manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc . (or approved equal).
F. Bituminous Pipe Coating
Where shown on the Drawings as Asphalt Coated, metal pipe, "ACCMP" , the pipe
and fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and out, in conformance with Section
943 of the FDOT Specifications .
G. Mitered End Sections
Mitered end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O .T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 272, 273 or 274) called for on the Drawings.
H. Flared End Sections
Flared end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O.T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 270) called for on the Drawings.
2.05 FRAMES, COVERS AND GRATINGS
Manhole, catch-basin, and sump frames, covers, and gratings shall be in accordance with
F.D.O.T. - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
(2002) - SECTION 425 - Inlets, Structures and Junction Boxes
Cast iron materials shall be provided. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30,
minimum.
Gratings shall be as specified in the plans.
2.06 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES, RISERS AND PRECAST CONCRETE BASE SECTIONS
Concrete Structures, risers, base sections, and tops shall be pre-cast and conform to ASTM C
478 .
Precast parts shall be as shown in the plans.
02630 - 4 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
noted.
2 . Where shown on the Drawings as FRCP, the drainage pipes shall be fiber
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C1450 (Class III)
and Sections 430 and 449 of the FDOT Specifications (2004), unless otherwise
noted.
D. PVC Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as PVC, the drainage pipe and fittings shall be Sch.
40, Polyvinyl Chloride, and shall conform to the requirements of Section 9484 of
the FDOT Specifications, unless otherwise noted.
E. Polyethylene Under Drain Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as Under Drain Pipe, the pipe and fittings shall be
double wall, perforated polyethylene . The pipe shall have a protective, polyester
sock and O-ring, gasketed, bell and spigot joints. Pipe shall be type N- 12, as
manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc . (or approved equal).
F. Bituminous Pipe Coating
Where shown on the Drawings as Asphalt Coated, metal pipe, "ACCMP" , the pipe
and fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and out, in conformance with Section
943 of the FDOT Specifications .
G. Mitered End Sections
Mitered end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O .T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 272, 273 or 274) called for on the Drawings.
H. Flared End Sections
Flared end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O.T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 270) called for on the Drawings.
2.05 FRAMES, COVERS AND GRATINGS
Manhole, catch-basin, and sump frames, covers, and gratings shall be in accordance with
F.D.O.T. - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
(2002) - SECTION 425 - Inlets, Structures and Junction Boxes
Cast iron materials shall be provided. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30,
minimum.
Gratings shall be as specified in the plans.
2.06 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES, RISERS AND PRECAST CONCRETE BASE SECTIONS
Concrete Structures, risers, base sections, and tops shall be pre-cast and conform to ASTM C
478 .
Precast parts shall be as shown in the plans.
02630 - 4 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions : Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter. The maximum allowable dimension of a stone
or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches. If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B . All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at a location
acceptable to Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall , coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide far natural
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .02 GRADING
Grading shall be performed in accordance with Section 02302 EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
3 . 03 PIPE INSTALLATION
All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding. The free-water surface
shall be lowered to at least 12 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or
structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding, haunching, and
initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling, the water level shall be
kept sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the
required density, and until required density tests have been performed.
A_ Pipe Installation
Excavations shall be trimmed to required elevations . Objects which impair backfilling or
compaction shall be removed. Over-excavation shall be corrected with fill material of
coarse aggregate.
Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects before installing. Defective materials shall
be removed from site.
Pipe interior shall be cleaned before installation. Pipe ends shall be sealed when work is
not in progress.
Pipe shall be laid to line and grade, with bell end upstream.
Maximum deviation from design elevation shall not exceed 0. 1 feet at any point in the
system.
02630 - 5 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions : Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter. The maximum allowable dimension of a stone
or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches. If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B . All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at a location
acceptable to Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall , coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide far natural
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .02 GRADING
Grading shall be performed in accordance with Section 02302 EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
3 . 03 PIPE INSTALLATION
All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding. The free-water surface
shall be lowered to at least 12 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or
structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding, haunching, and
initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling, the water level shall be
kept sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the
required density, and until required density tests have been performed.
A_ Pipe Installation
Excavations shall be trimmed to required elevations . Objects which impair backfilling or
compaction shall be removed. Over-excavation shall be corrected with fill material of
coarse aggregate.
Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects before installing. Defective materials shall
be removed from site.
Pipe interior shall be cleaned before installation. Pipe ends shall be sealed when work is
not in progress.
Pipe shall be laid to line and grade, with bell end upstream.
Maximum deviation from design elevation shall not exceed 0. 1 feet at any point in the
system.
02630 - 5 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D . Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material. The gasket shall
provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and gasket tolerances. Installation
and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by the manufacturer.
2 .04 FOUNDATION ROCK
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits:
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/ 8 " - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing # 8 - 0 - 5%
2 .05 BURIED IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Detectable buried identification tape shall be installed over all pipe.
Tape shall be 2 inches minimum width , consisting of a minimum 5 mil overall thickness with a
solid aluminum foil core. Construction shall be 2 mil clear film, reverse print laminated to
aluminum foil to 2 mil clear film, making the film permanently printed.
Tape shall be furnished in manufacturers' standard roll length, meeting . the "American Public
Works Association" (APWA) color code, and shall be imprinted continuously with the following .
words , unless otherwise approved:
"WATER MAIN "
Detectable buried warning tape shall be equal to or better than "PRO-LINE" underground utility
marking tape as manufactured by Pro-Line Safety Products Co . , 1099 Atlantic Drive, Unit # 1 ,
West Chicago , IL.
2 .06 DETECTABLE BURIED TRACE WIRE
single conductor copper wire. PVC color sheathing
Trace wire shall be continuous # 10 THHN,
shall meet the color code of the "American Public Works Association" (APWA) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK an
AN
The installation and testing of the water main shall be done in accord e witionalV WW
nts
C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V .C. pipe, p
lus described herein or shown on the Plans.
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable, for the
proper installation of all water mains, and appurtenances in the locations shown on the
drawings . Plantings, shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting
from the excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected
and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 . 4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions : Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter. The maximum allowable dimension of a stone
or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches. If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B . All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at a location
acceptable to Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall , coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide far natural
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .02 GRADING
Grading shall be performed in accordance with Section 02302 EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
3 . 03 PIPE INSTALLATION
All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding. The free-water surface
shall be lowered to at least 12 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or
structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding, haunching, and
initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling, the water level shall be
kept sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the
required density, and until required density tests have been performed.
A_ Pipe Installation
Excavations shall be trimmed to required elevations . Objects which impair backfilling or
compaction shall be removed. Over-excavation shall be corrected with fill material of
coarse aggregate.
Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects before installing. Defective materials shall
be removed from site.
Pipe interior shall be cleaned before installation. Pipe ends shall be sealed when work is
not in progress.
Pipe shall be laid to line and grade, with bell end upstream.
Maximum deviation from design elevation shall not exceed 0. 1 feet at any point in the
system.
02630 - 5 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Unless otherwise specified herein or directed by the Engineer, all pipe and fittings
shall be laid and joined in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's directions
with regard to allowable barrel and joint deflection, spigot seating depth, gasket
placement, lubrication, bolt torque, field cutting/trimming, and pushing/pulling
methods for joint assembly.
2. Prior to placing in the trench, each pipe section, joint, and fitting shall be checked
for damage or defects such as cracks, blisters, coating/lining separation, gouges, and
the like. Any damage or defective materials found shall not be installed unless
approved by the Engineer, and shall be marked "REJECTED" and immediately
removed from the work site.
3 . Prior to installation, the interior of all pipe and fittings shall be inspected for debris,
sediment accumulation, sand, and the like, and shall be cleaned as required to
remove such foreign matter. Joint surfaces such as gaskets, gasket grooves, spigots,
and bells shall be cleaned of sand and grit prior to joining.
4 . Gasket lubricants shall be stored and applied in a manner that will prevent
significant contamination or pick-up of sand and grit.
5 . The pipe spigot shall be centered in and aligned with its mating bell prior to
insertion and forced evenly in a straight line to seating depth, taking care not to
over-bell the joint. Where required, deflections shall be made after the joint is
seated.
6. Joining shall generally be done by hand or by push-bar with a cushion block
whenever pipe size and weight permit. When a mechanical pushing/pulling device
such as chain-puller, come-along, and the like is required, the device shall be usedsin
a manner that will not deform gouge, chip, or otherwise damage the pipe or cause
significant disturbance of the prepared bedding. In no case shall joints be mad&Fby ;
"popping-on" or swinging the spigot into the bell to seat the joint.
7. Fittings and appurtenances shall be fully, independently supported on the bedding or
on a permanent foundation so as not to bear on the pipe upon completion of the
installation.
8 . The installed piping system shall be kept free of dirt, trench water, and other foreign
matter during the progress of the work, and all open ends of the line shall be sealed
with watertight plugs whenever work is not in progress .
9 . Empty installed pipe shall be secured against flotation due to potential trench
flooding by timely placement of sufficient backfill or approved anchoring devices
sufficient to resist pipe buoyancy.
B. Corrugated Metal Pipe Installation
Corrugated pipe with fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, and in accordance with ASTM A 798 .
02630 - 6 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .03 TRENCHING
A . Pavement Cutting - Asphaltic pavements shall be cut by pneumatic hammers or mechanical
pavement cutters; saws, or other method approved by the Engineer. Concrete pavement or
concrete base pavement shall be sawed . Both types of pavement shall be cut and removed
Prior to any excavation.
B . Excavation - The excavation in which the pipes and appurtenances are to be constructed shall
be excavated in open cut, except where otherwise stated on the Plans, in such a manner to
such depths and widths as will give suitable room for bracing, supporting, pumping, draining
and for removing from the excavation any material which the Engineer may decide is
inadequate for foundation. The maximum trench width at the ton of the Pipe shall be in
accordance with the trenching details
The Contractor may, where it will not interfere with the work or adjacent structures or
Property, slope the sides of excavation. The sides of the trench may only be sloped from a
point in compliance with the trenching details. No compensation will be allowed for such
excavation and the Contractor shall include its cost in the prices bid.
The materials of excavation shall include all materials encountered, such as clay, sand , rock,
marl, muck, gravel, boulders, heterogeneous fill materials, old timbers, or any combination of
these. Any unforeseen obstacles such as buried trees or timbers, abandoned utilities, metal:,,::
objects, concrete masses or any debris encountered shall be removed. All "materials do
excavation" and "unforeseen obstacles" will be considered as incidental to construction and.
no additional compensation will be allowed.
All roots , stumps , logs, limbs, boulders or any material which is not suitable foss
backfill material shall be removed from the site promptly as excavated and dispose& '.
of by the Contractor at his expense.
C . Length of Trench to be Opened - The length of trench to be opened or the area of
surface to be disturbed and unrestored at any time will be limited by the Engineer '
with regard to expeditious construction and the convenience of the Owner.
- Excavation shall not advance more than 100 feet ahead of the pipe laying without
the consent of the Engineer.
D . Sheeting and Bracing - The Contractor shall be responsible for properly supporting
the sides of all trenches and excavations with timbers or other supports wherever
necessary or required to properly safeguard the trenches, adjacent properties and
structures and at restricted right-of-way. The cost of all necessary timber, sheeting
and bracing whatsoever (left in place or removed), shall be included in the unit
prices bid under force main installation.
Portions of the timber sheeting driven below the elevation of the top of the pipe
shall not be disturbed or removed
Timber sheeting and bracing shall be left in place if so ordered by the Engineer
and/or where shown on the Plans to avoid undermining or otherwise endangering
the work or adjacent structures .
All sheeting left in place shall be cut off or driven at least 18-inches below finished
grade, unless otherwise ordered.
02510 . 5 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Unless otherwise specified herein or directed by the Engineer, all pipe and fittings
shall be laid and joined in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's directions
with regard to allowable barrel and joint deflection, spigot seating depth, gasket
placement, lubrication, bolt torque, field cutting/trimming, and pushing/pulling
methods for joint assembly.
2. Prior to placing in the trench, each pipe section, joint, and fitting shall be checked
for damage or defects such as cracks, blisters, coating/lining separation, gouges, and
the like. Any damage or defective materials found shall not be installed unless
approved by the Engineer, and shall be marked "REJECTED" and immediately
removed from the work site.
3 . Prior to installation, the interior of all pipe and fittings shall be inspected for debris,
sediment accumulation, sand, and the like, and shall be cleaned as required to
remove such foreign matter. Joint surfaces such as gaskets, gasket grooves, spigots,
and bells shall be cleaned of sand and grit prior to joining.
4 . Gasket lubricants shall be stored and applied in a manner that will prevent
significant contamination or pick-up of sand and grit.
5 . The pipe spigot shall be centered in and aligned with its mating bell prior to
insertion and forced evenly in a straight line to seating depth, taking care not to
over-bell the joint. Where required, deflections shall be made after the joint is
seated.
6. Joining shall generally be done by hand or by push-bar with a cushion block
whenever pipe size and weight permit. When a mechanical pushing/pulling device
such as chain-puller, come-along, and the like is required, the device shall be usedsin
a manner that will not deform gouge, chip, or otherwise damage the pipe or cause
significant disturbance of the prepared bedding. In no case shall joints be mad&Fby ;
"popping-on" or swinging the spigot into the bell to seat the joint.
7. Fittings and appurtenances shall be fully, independently supported on the bedding or
on a permanent foundation so as not to bear on the pipe upon completion of the
installation.
8 . The installed piping system shall be kept free of dirt, trench water, and other foreign
matter during the progress of the work, and all open ends of the line shall be sealed
with watertight plugs whenever work is not in progress .
9 . Empty installed pipe shall be secured against flotation due to potential trench
flooding by timely placement of sufficient backfill or approved anchoring devices
sufficient to resist pipe buoyancy.
B. Corrugated Metal Pipe Installation
Corrugated pipe with fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, and in accordance with ASTM A 798 .
02630 - 6 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Unless otherwise specified herein or directed by the Engineer, all pipe and fittings
shall be laid and joined in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's directions
with regard to allowable barrel and joint deflection, spigot seating depth, gasket
placement, lubrication, bolt torque, field cutting/trimming, and pushing/pulling
methods for joint assembly.
2. Prior to placing in the trench, each pipe section, joint, and fitting shall be checked
for damage or defects such as cracks, blisters, coating/lining separation, gouges, and
the like. Any damage or defective materials found shall not be installed unless
approved by the Engineer, and shall be marked "REJECTED" and immediately
removed from the work site.
3 . Prior to installation, the interior of all pipe and fittings shall be inspected for debris,
sediment accumulation, sand, and the like, and shall be cleaned as required to
remove such foreign matter. Joint surfaces such as gaskets, gasket grooves, spigots,
and bells shall be cleaned of sand and grit prior to joining.
4 . Gasket lubricants shall be stored and applied in a manner that will prevent
significant contamination or pick-up of sand and grit.
5 . The pipe spigot shall be centered in and aligned with its mating bell prior to
insertion and forced evenly in a straight line to seating depth, taking care not to
over-bell the joint. Where required, deflections shall be made after the joint is
seated.
6. Joining shall generally be done by hand or by push-bar with a cushion block
whenever pipe size and weight permit. When a mechanical pushing/pulling device
such as chain-puller, come-along, and the like is required, the device shall be usedsin
a manner that will not deform gouge, chip, or otherwise damage the pipe or cause
significant disturbance of the prepared bedding. In no case shall joints be mad&Fby ;
"popping-on" or swinging the spigot into the bell to seat the joint.
7. Fittings and appurtenances shall be fully, independently supported on the bedding or
on a permanent foundation so as not to bear on the pipe upon completion of the
installation.
8 . The installed piping system shall be kept free of dirt, trench water, and other foreign
matter during the progress of the work, and all open ends of the line shall be sealed
with watertight plugs whenever work is not in progress .
9 . Empty installed pipe shall be secured against flotation due to potential trench
flooding by timely placement of sufficient backfill or approved anchoring devices
sufficient to resist pipe buoyancy.
B. Corrugated Metal Pipe Installation
Corrugated pipe with fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, and in accordance with ASTM A 798 .
02630 - 6 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Installation
Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, and ACPA 01 -103 .
3 .04 PIPE BEDDING
A. Class A (Concrete Cradle or Concrete Arch Bedding)
I . This class of bedding shall be used only where specifically shown in the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer. If the use of a concrete cradle is required the pipe shall
be bedded in a monolithic cradle of a 1 ,500 PSI concrete with a minimum thickness
equal to 1/4 the outside pipe diameter or to a minimum of four inches under the
barrel, whichever is greatest, and extending up to the sides of the pipe to a height
equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The cradle shall have an overall width
equal to 1 - 1 /4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width equal to the
outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
2. If a concrete arch is required, the pipe shall be embedded in carefully compacted
Type 1 material having a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside pipe diameter
or to a minimum of four inches under the barrel, which ever is greater, and
extending up the sides for a height equal to 1 /2 of the outside pipe diameter. The top
half of the pipe shall be covered with a monolithic Class C concrete arch having a ` ?
minimum thickness equal to 1/4 the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum of "
four inches over the crown of the pipe, whichever is greater, and extending down the
sides for a depth equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The arch shall have an
over all width equal to 1 1/4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width
equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
B. Class B (First-Class Bedding)
1 . Where Class B Bedding is required, the trench shall be excavated below the planned
bottom of the pipe to a depth equal to 1 /4 the nominal diameter of the pipe, or 6
inches, whichever is greater. The over excavated depth shall be backfilled using
either Type 1 or Type 3 materials carefully compacted and shaped using hand tools
so as to provide a uniform support for the lower portion of the pipe barrel. Shaping
under the pipe bells shall be so that the bell does not support the pipe and joints can
be made without bedding material interference.
2. At the option of the Contractor, Class B Bedding may be used in place of Class C
(Ordinary Bedding) provided that the exercise of this option shall create no
additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing
of those portions of the project on which he proposes to exercise this option.
C. Class C (Ordinary Bedding)
1 . The bottom of the trench shall be hand shaped to provide a firm bedding for the
utility pipe. The utility shall be firmly bedded in undisturbed firm soil . The bedding
shall be shaped so that the pipe will be in continuous contact therewith for its full
length and shall provide a minimum bottom segment for the pipe equal to 0.6 of the
outside diameter of the barrel . Excavation under the bell shall be sufficient so that
the bell does not support the pipe and the joint can be made without interference.
02630 - 7 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Installation
Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, and ACPA 01 -103 .
3 .04 PIPE BEDDING
A. Class A (Concrete Cradle or Concrete Arch Bedding)
I . This class of bedding shall be used only where specifically shown in the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer. If the use of a concrete cradle is required the pipe shall
be bedded in a monolithic cradle of a 1 ,500 PSI concrete with a minimum thickness
equal to 1/4 the outside pipe diameter or to a minimum of four inches under the
barrel, whichever is greatest, and extending up to the sides of the pipe to a height
equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The cradle shall have an overall width
equal to 1 - 1 /4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width equal to the
outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
2. If a concrete arch is required, the pipe shall be embedded in carefully compacted
Type 1 material having a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside pipe diameter
or to a minimum of four inches under the barrel, which ever is greater, and
extending up the sides for a height equal to 1 /2 of the outside pipe diameter. The top
half of the pipe shall be covered with a monolithic Class C concrete arch having a ` ?
minimum thickness equal to 1/4 the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum of "
four inches over the crown of the pipe, whichever is greater, and extending down the
sides for a depth equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The arch shall have an
over all width equal to 1 1/4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width
equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
B. Class B (First-Class Bedding)
1 . Where Class B Bedding is required, the trench shall be excavated below the planned
bottom of the pipe to a depth equal to 1 /4 the nominal diameter of the pipe, or 6
inches, whichever is greater. The over excavated depth shall be backfilled using
either Type 1 or Type 3 materials carefully compacted and shaped using hand tools
so as to provide a uniform support for the lower portion of the pipe barrel. Shaping
under the pipe bells shall be so that the bell does not support the pipe and joints can
be made without bedding material interference.
2. At the option of the Contractor, Class B Bedding may be used in place of Class C
(Ordinary Bedding) provided that the exercise of this option shall create no
additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing
of those portions of the project on which he proposes to exercise this option.
C. Class C (Ordinary Bedding)
1 . The bottom of the trench shall be hand shaped to provide a firm bedding for the
utility pipe. The utility shall be firmly bedded in undisturbed firm soil . The bedding
shall be shaped so that the pipe will be in continuous contact therewith for its full
length and shall provide a minimum bottom segment for the pipe equal to 0.6 of the
outside diameter of the barrel . Excavation under the bell shall be sufficient so that
the bell does not support the pipe and the joint can be made without interference.
02630 - 7 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Great care shall be exercised in the selection of sheeting and bracing of adequate
design, type, size and strength. The adequacy of the timber used for all supporting
and bracing purposes shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall use
only men of seasoned experience for this type of work. The sizes and lengths of the
timber used shall conform closely to the needs of the work and oversizing as well as
undersizing should be avoided.
In placing and driving the sheeting, proper workmanship and equipment shall be
used to achieve a true alignment and close contact of the sheeting boards. Timber
sheeting shall be straight and sound, free from shakes, cracks , large or loose knobs
and other defects impairing its strength and durability. It shall be squared to the
required dimension throughout its entire length. If required for the proper execution
of the work where running sand, quicksand or other sem -fluid material difficult to
handle is encountered, the timber sheeting shall be tongue and groove.
The Contractor may, in lieu of sheeting, bracing and shoring to maintain the
allowable trench widths, use a "trench box" ("trench shield" or "mule") provided
pipe sections are secured downstream by a cable(s) stretched through and secured
to the end section of pipe by means of a timber and a cable clamp , all materials
being of adequate size and strength. The cable shall be held taut during the process
of advancing the "box" .
This procedure may be used so long as, in the opinion of the Engineer, the work is
proceeding satisfactorily, The . Engineer may revoke permission to use the "trench
box" at any time he feels unsatisfactory or inadequate work is being performed and
the Contractor shall , without appeal, immediately begin using sheeting„ bracing
and shoring to maintain the allowable trench widths.
At all times, when soil conditions permit, the bottom edge of the "trench box" shall
be no lower than the springline of the pipe, so as to disturb the trench compaction
when advancing the " trench box" .
E, Placing of Excavated Material - All excavated materials shall be placed where
indicated by the Engineer in such a manner as not to endanger the work and so that
free access will be maintained at all times to all parts of the trench and to all fire
hydrants and their gate valves in the vicinity, Such material shall be neatly piled so
as to interfere as little as possible with traffic.
F . Drainage - The Contractor shall furnish sufficient pumping or other dewatering
equipment and shall provide at his own expense satisfactory drainage whenever
needed in trenches and other excavations during the progress of the work and its
completion for inspection. Water shall not be allowed to flow over or raise upon
any concrete, masonry or pipe until work has been inspected and the mortar or
concrete has properly set.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the water table shall be lowered by the
use of a well point system. Open trench pumping may be permitted only upon
approval by the Engineer of the method of pumping and drainage to be used. If
open trench pumping is approved, the water must be conveyed entirely through
approved coarse material placed below the bottom of the "Foundation" hereinafter
described. The depth
of this coarse material shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Installation
Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, and ACPA 01 -103 .
3 .04 PIPE BEDDING
A. Class A (Concrete Cradle or Concrete Arch Bedding)
I . This class of bedding shall be used only where specifically shown in the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer. If the use of a concrete cradle is required the pipe shall
be bedded in a monolithic cradle of a 1 ,500 PSI concrete with a minimum thickness
equal to 1/4 the outside pipe diameter or to a minimum of four inches under the
barrel, whichever is greatest, and extending up to the sides of the pipe to a height
equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The cradle shall have an overall width
equal to 1 - 1 /4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width equal to the
outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
2. If a concrete arch is required, the pipe shall be embedded in carefully compacted
Type 1 material having a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside pipe diameter
or to a minimum of four inches under the barrel, which ever is greater, and
extending up the sides for a height equal to 1 /2 of the outside pipe diameter. The top
half of the pipe shall be covered with a monolithic Class C concrete arch having a ` ?
minimum thickness equal to 1/4 the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum of "
four inches over the crown of the pipe, whichever is greater, and extending down the
sides for a depth equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The arch shall have an
over all width equal to 1 1/4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width
equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
B. Class B (First-Class Bedding)
1 . Where Class B Bedding is required, the trench shall be excavated below the planned
bottom of the pipe to a depth equal to 1 /4 the nominal diameter of the pipe, or 6
inches, whichever is greater. The over excavated depth shall be backfilled using
either Type 1 or Type 3 materials carefully compacted and shaped using hand tools
so as to provide a uniform support for the lower portion of the pipe barrel. Shaping
under the pipe bells shall be so that the bell does not support the pipe and joints can
be made without bedding material interference.
2. At the option of the Contractor, Class B Bedding may be used in place of Class C
(Ordinary Bedding) provided that the exercise of this option shall create no
additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing
of those portions of the project on which he proposes to exercise this option.
C. Class C (Ordinary Bedding)
1 . The bottom of the trench shall be hand shaped to provide a firm bedding for the
utility pipe. The utility shall be firmly bedded in undisturbed firm soil . The bedding
shall be shaped so that the pipe will be in continuous contact therewith for its full
length and shall provide a minimum bottom segment for the pipe equal to 0.6 of the
outside diameter of the barrel . Excavation under the bell shall be sufficient so that
the bell does not support the pipe and the joint can be made without interference.
02630 - 7 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D. Unsuitable Bedding Material
1 . Class C Bedding shall be used for all pipeline construction unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings or unless unsuitable material is encountered at the bedding surface.
In the event that the materials encountered at normal bottom of trench excavation
are, in the judgment of the Engineer, unsuitable to act as foundation for the pipe,
such material shall be excavated for the full width of the trench to the depth
necessary to obtain a suitable foundation. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the necessity for and extent of the material to be removed and the
Contractor shall remove such unsuitable material as soon as possible and backfill in
accordance with the requirements for Class B Bedding. All unsuitable material shall
be disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .05 PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Initial Backfill
1 . Initial backfill shall be placed as soon as possible after laying the pipe and shall
maintain a pace with the pipe laying so that no more than five pipe joints separate
laying and backfilling operations. Initial back fill shall include all haunching and
backfill from the top of the bedding to a compacted depth of twelve inches over the
pipe. All haunching and backfilling shall be done in the dry.
2. Initial backfill shall be done as specified below:
a. Haunching of the pipe shall be by hand placement and compaction of material
in maximum 4 inch layers from the bottom of the trench to the springline of the
pipe, taking care to fill all voids below and around the pipe. Backfilling shall
be carefully continued in layers not exceeding 6 inches in thickness for the full
trench width until the compacted fill is 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
b. During initial backfilling the fill shall be deposited evenly along both sides of
the pipe from a height not to exceed 2 feet above the top of pipe, and fill shall
not be dropped directly on the unprotected pipe surface.
C. Where thrust blocks, encasement, or other cast-in-place concrete items are
below grade, no backfilling shall start until the specific items have been
inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
d. The backfill to one foot above the top of the utility shall be thoroughly
compacted with curved end tamping bars under and on each side of the pipe
and flat tamped between the pipe and trench wall and shall be completed
before the remainder of the trench is backfilled. Initial backfill shall be
compacted to 100 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-
180. No subsequent backfill will be permitted until the initial backfill has been
accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
3 .06 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Excavation for drainage structures shall be of sufficient size to permit construction of the
structure to progress without hindrance from the walls of the excavation or from sloughed
materials. No less than 12 inches clearance shall be provided between excavation walls
and walls of the structure. If soil conditions encountered at the bottom of the excavation
02630 - 8 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Materials and workmanship used for the well point system shall be in keeping with
the approved standard practice. The well point system shall function so as to enable
pipe, concrete cradle and appurtenances to be installed without interference from
running or standing water at the bottom of the trench. The Engineer shall make the
final decision as to the acceptability of the well point system or any part thereof.
Where necessary, pea gravel or graded sand shall be used in conjunction with the
well points as they are installed in insure continuous pumping in the dewatering of
fine material.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the various unit prices bid under water
main installation. .
G• Disposal of Water from Excavations - All water pumped or bailed from trenches or
other excavations shall be conveyed in a proper manner to a suitable point of
discharge by the Contractor at his own expense.
The Contractor shall provide for the disposal of water removed from excavations in
a manner that will not cause injury to public health, private or public property, any
Portion of the work completed or in progress, the surface of the streets, or cause any
impediments to the reasonable use of the site by other Contractors. The Contractor
shall be responsible for complying with all the local regulations and those of the.,
Department of Environmental Regulation regarding pollution of waterways. Should"
the size of Contractor's dewatering equipment, or the quantity of disposed water, oY
the method of disposal require a St . Johns' River Water Mgmt. District permit, the ,'
Contractor shall obtain such permit at no additional expense to the Owner and with
no additional time added to the Contract. The Contractor shall take special f
precautions to eliminate any odor problems resulting from the discharge of sulfide' `
water, such as the use of submerged discharge outlets and overflow basins.
H. Preparation of Trench - Trenching as shown on the Plan details shall be standard fo'r',
this project. The trenches shall be constructed by excavating to the depth indicated
on the Plans . The trenches shall then be manually shaped to fit the bell and lower
quadrant of the pipe barrel :
Mechanical excavation shall be limited to provide an undisturbed trench bottom for
the lower quadrant and bell of the pipe. Final excavation shall require hand shaping
for placement of the pipe. If mechanical overcutting occurs, the pipe bedding shall
consist of four (4) inches of washed and . graded sand or crushed rock on
undisturbed soil .
3 . 03 LAYING OF PIPE
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600 for
ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V. C. pipe. Prior to installation, all pipe and
appurtenances shall be examined for damage and defects. Under no circumstances shall
defective pipe be installed. All lumps, blisters and excess coating materials shall be
removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe. While being placed in the trench, care
shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end
of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall remain in
02510 . 7 02510 - Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D. Unsuitable Bedding Material
1 . Class C Bedding shall be used for all pipeline construction unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings or unless unsuitable material is encountered at the bedding surface.
In the event that the materials encountered at normal bottom of trench excavation
are, in the judgment of the Engineer, unsuitable to act as foundation for the pipe,
such material shall be excavated for the full width of the trench to the depth
necessary to obtain a suitable foundation. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the necessity for and extent of the material to be removed and the
Contractor shall remove such unsuitable material as soon as possible and backfill in
accordance with the requirements for Class B Bedding. All unsuitable material shall
be disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .05 PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Initial Backfill
1 . Initial backfill shall be placed as soon as possible after laying the pipe and shall
maintain a pace with the pipe laying so that no more than five pipe joints separate
laying and backfilling operations. Initial back fill shall include all haunching and
backfill from the top of the bedding to a compacted depth of twelve inches over the
pipe. All haunching and backfilling shall be done in the dry.
2. Initial backfill shall be done as specified below:
a. Haunching of the pipe shall be by hand placement and compaction of material
in maximum 4 inch layers from the bottom of the trench to the springline of the
pipe, taking care to fill all voids below and around the pipe. Backfilling shall
be carefully continued in layers not exceeding 6 inches in thickness for the full
trench width until the compacted fill is 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
b. During initial backfilling the fill shall be deposited evenly along both sides of
the pipe from a height not to exceed 2 feet above the top of pipe, and fill shall
not be dropped directly on the unprotected pipe surface.
C. Where thrust blocks, encasement, or other cast-in-place concrete items are
below grade, no backfilling shall start until the specific items have been
inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
d. The backfill to one foot above the top of the utility shall be thoroughly
compacted with curved end tamping bars under and on each side of the pipe
and flat tamped between the pipe and trench wall and shall be completed
before the remainder of the trench is backfilled. Initial backfill shall be
compacted to 100 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-
180. No subsequent backfill will be permitted until the initial backfill has been
accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
3 .06 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Excavation for drainage structures shall be of sufficient size to permit construction of the
structure to progress without hindrance from the walls of the excavation or from sloughed
materials. No less than 12 inches clearance shall be provided between excavation walls
and walls of the structure. If soil conditions encountered at the bottom of the excavation
02630 - 8 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D. Unsuitable Bedding Material
1 . Class C Bedding shall be used for all pipeline construction unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings or unless unsuitable material is encountered at the bedding surface.
In the event that the materials encountered at normal bottom of trench excavation
are, in the judgment of the Engineer, unsuitable to act as foundation for the pipe,
such material shall be excavated for the full width of the trench to the depth
necessary to obtain a suitable foundation. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the necessity for and extent of the material to be removed and the
Contractor shall remove such unsuitable material as soon as possible and backfill in
accordance with the requirements for Class B Bedding. All unsuitable material shall
be disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .05 PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Initial Backfill
1 . Initial backfill shall be placed as soon as possible after laying the pipe and shall
maintain a pace with the pipe laying so that no more than five pipe joints separate
laying and backfilling operations. Initial back fill shall include all haunching and
backfill from the top of the bedding to a compacted depth of twelve inches over the
pipe. All haunching and backfilling shall be done in the dry.
2. Initial backfill shall be done as specified below:
a. Haunching of the pipe shall be by hand placement and compaction of material
in maximum 4 inch layers from the bottom of the trench to the springline of the
pipe, taking care to fill all voids below and around the pipe. Backfilling shall
be carefully continued in layers not exceeding 6 inches in thickness for the full
trench width until the compacted fill is 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
b. During initial backfilling the fill shall be deposited evenly along both sides of
the pipe from a height not to exceed 2 feet above the top of pipe, and fill shall
not be dropped directly on the unprotected pipe surface.
C. Where thrust blocks, encasement, or other cast-in-place concrete items are
below grade, no backfilling shall start until the specific items have been
inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
d. The backfill to one foot above the top of the utility shall be thoroughly
compacted with curved end tamping bars under and on each side of the pipe
and flat tamped between the pipe and trench wall and shall be completed
before the remainder of the trench is backfilled. Initial backfill shall be
compacted to 100 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-
180. No subsequent backfill will be permitted until the initial backfill has been
accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
3 .06 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Excavation for drainage structures shall be of sufficient size to permit construction of the
structure to progress without hindrance from the walls of the excavation or from sloughed
materials. No less than 12 inches clearance shall be provided between excavation walls
and walls of the structure. If soil conditions encountered at the bottom of the excavation
02630 - 8 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
would in the sole opinion of the Engineer be unsuitable for foundation, the Contractor
shall remove and dispose of the unsuitable material to the depth where suitable bearing
can be obtained. The determination of the necessity for and the extent of additional
excavation shall be made by the Engineer, who shall inform the Contractor in writing
regarding such necessity and the extent. This excavation shall then be backfilled to the
appropriate grade with Type I or Type 3 backfill material, placed in maximum 12- inch
layers and compacted to a density equal to 100 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 .
B . Installation of drainage structures shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings
and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section 425 of the 1986 Edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Backfill shall
be placed in lifts not to exceed 12 inches loose depth and compacted to 95 percent of
maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 in unpaved areas and to required subgrade density
in areas of paving or curbing.
Backfill shall not be placed against cast-in-place concrete structures until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to resist the load without damage, and in no case, less than
seven days after the concrete was placed.
3 .07 SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL
A. Subsequent backfill is that backfill between the initial backfill and the finished ground
level or bottom of sub base.
B. Subsequent backfill material shall be placed full trench width in horizontal layers not
exceeding 12 inches loose depth and compacted by power-operated tampers, rollers, or
vibratory equipment to a density equal to 98 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 for pipe placed under and adjacent to roadways or paved
surfaces, and 95 percent under areas where no pavement is to be constructed and
vehicular traffic is not to pass over the pipe . Each layer shall be compacted -to the
specified density prior to placing subsequent layers. The thickness of the loose layer may
be increased when in-place density tests show that the specified density can be obtained.
3 .08 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions: Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter, and the maximum allowable dimension of a
stone or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches . If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B. All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at an acceptable
location, by Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide for natural
02630 - 9 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
would in the sole opinion of the Engineer be unsuitable for foundation, the Contractor
shall remove and dispose of the unsuitable material to the depth where suitable bearing
can be obtained. The determination of the necessity for and the extent of additional
excavation shall be made by the Engineer, who shall inform the Contractor in writing
regarding such necessity and the extent. This excavation shall then be backfilled to the
appropriate grade with Type I or Type 3 backfill material, placed in maximum 12- inch
layers and compacted to a density equal to 100 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 .
B . Installation of drainage structures shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings
and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section 425 of the 1986 Edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Backfill shall
be placed in lifts not to exceed 12 inches loose depth and compacted to 95 percent of
maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 in unpaved areas and to required subgrade density
in areas of paving or curbing.
Backfill shall not be placed against cast-in-place concrete structures until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to resist the load without damage, and in no case, less than
seven days after the concrete was placed.
3 .07 SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL
A. Subsequent backfill is that backfill between the initial backfill and the finished ground
level or bottom of sub base.
B. Subsequent backfill material shall be placed full trench width in horizontal layers not
exceeding 12 inches loose depth and compacted by power-operated tampers, rollers, or
vibratory equipment to a density equal to 98 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 for pipe placed under and adjacent to roadways or paved
surfaces, and 95 percent under areas where no pavement is to be constructed and
vehicular traffic is not to pass over the pipe . Each layer shall be compacted -to the
specified density prior to placing subsequent layers. The thickness of the loose layer may
be increased when in-place density tests show that the specified density can be obtained.
3 .08 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions: Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter, and the maximum allowable dimension of a
stone or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches . If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B. All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at an acceptable
location, by Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide for natural
02630 - 9 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to deflect the pipe
from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are
permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table 5 and 6 in AWWA
Specification C600 for ductile iron pipe or AWWA M23 for P .V . C . pipe.
A. Thrust Restraint - All valves, dead ends , tees, and bends for changes in alignment
shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All items installed in the
mainline which may cause vertical or horizontal thrust forces shall require the item
and appropriate length of upstream and downstream pipe to be mechanically
restrained with approved devices .
B . Backfill
1 . General - Where the trench has been dewatered, backfilling must progress
sufficiently before pumps are shut off to prevent flotation of pipe. Any pipe that
has been displaced perceptibly from its correct position shall be removed and
re-laid properly at the Contractor's expense . Backfilling shall follow pipe laying
within 100 feet, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, but shall not be
performed in any case until the Engineer has approved the line for backfilling.
Water shall not be added except as required to obtain Optimum Moisture
Content and " flooding" or "puddling" for compaction will not allowed.
Backfill material shall be free of roots, logs, limbs, clays, large rocks or any
material or debris , detemnned to be unsuitable by the Engineer. The Engineer
may reject any material which he considers unsuitable for backfill .
The compaction procedures specified herein shall be considered " minimum
procedures" to prevent after-settlement and the Contractor shall reopen, refill
and recompact any trenches indicating improper backfill procedures or after-
settlement.
All road crossings shall be backfilled immediately, made passable and
maintained passable until the permanent repair is made.
2 . State Owned Rights-Of-Way Under Pavements - The initial lift (stage 1 ) shall
consist of clean, fine, select materials , not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the
haunches of the pipe. The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 6" .
The initial lift shall be manually compacted to 100% of the maximum density
as determined by AASHTO T-99 . Subsequent lifts (stage 2) to 12" above the
pipe shall be constructed as specified for stage 1 , except that had operated
mechanical tampers may be used. Additional lifts in stage 2, from 12" above
the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be carefully backfilled with material free
from organic material and stones or clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the
final 6-inch layer) in diameter, and mechanically compacted in 6-inch layers to
an average maximum density of 100% as determined by AASHTOT-99 .
3 . All Other Areas Under Pavements - The initial lift shall consist of clean, fine,
select materials, not exceeding 3/4" in diameter under the haunches of the pipe.
The material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 4" . The initial lift shall be
manually compacted to 95 % of the maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180 . Subsequent lifts to 12" above the pipe shall be constructed as
specified for the initial lift, except that had operated mechanical tampers may
be used. Additional lifts from 12" above the pipe to the top of subgrade shall be
carefully backfilled with material free from organic material and stones or
02510 — Water Mains
02610 - 8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
would in the sole opinion of the Engineer be unsuitable for foundation, the Contractor
shall remove and dispose of the unsuitable material to the depth where suitable bearing
can be obtained. The determination of the necessity for and the extent of additional
excavation shall be made by the Engineer, who shall inform the Contractor in writing
regarding such necessity and the extent. This excavation shall then be backfilled to the
appropriate grade with Type I or Type 3 backfill material, placed in maximum 12- inch
layers and compacted to a density equal to 100 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 .
B . Installation of drainage structures shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings
and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section 425 of the 1986 Edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Backfill shall
be placed in lifts not to exceed 12 inches loose depth and compacted to 95 percent of
maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 in unpaved areas and to required subgrade density
in areas of paving or curbing.
Backfill shall not be placed against cast-in-place concrete structures until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to resist the load without damage, and in no case, less than
seven days after the concrete was placed.
3 .07 SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL
A. Subsequent backfill is that backfill between the initial backfill and the finished ground
level or bottom of sub base.
B. Subsequent backfill material shall be placed full trench width in horizontal layers not
exceeding 12 inches loose depth and compacted by power-operated tampers, rollers, or
vibratory equipment to a density equal to 98 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 for pipe placed under and adjacent to roadways or paved
surfaces, and 95 percent under areas where no pavement is to be constructed and
vehicular traffic is not to pass over the pipe . Each layer shall be compacted -to the
specified density prior to placing subsequent layers. The thickness of the loose layer may
be increased when in-place density tests show that the specified density can be obtained.
3 .08 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions: Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter, and the maximum allowable dimension of a
stone or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches . If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B. All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at an acceptable
location, by Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide for natural
02630 - 9 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .09 COMPACTION
Puddling or jetting shall not be permitted when compacting bedding materials.
3 . 10 DENSITY TESTS
A. The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing
laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with the
stability and compaction levels required by these specifications. Compaction tests shall be
taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the
Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such
documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
C. In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until the
tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
D. In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be
performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 5000 cu . yd. of material shall be performed at the point
of use.
E. Generally, in-place density tests shall be performed at each structure and at approximately
50 foot intervals along pipe installations for each lift, or; at a minimum, one test near each - '
end of individual pipe installations for each 12 inch lift. Additional density tests may be
required by the Engineer. If any tests results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re
excavate and recompact the backfill at his expense until the required compaction is
obtained.
3 . 11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Installed pipe shall be inspected by Engineer. Displaced or misaligned pipe, infiltration,
accumulation of debris, or other defects shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3 . 12 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
During the installation of Drainage Pipe and Structures the Contractor shall keep
accurate Record Drawings of the construction showing the location of all changes in
alignment, services, utility crossings, and similar data. Items shall be located from
permanent objects such as centerline of street, manholes, valves, etc. Upon completion
of the project the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer an As-Built Drawing showing
the above information.
END OF SECTION
02630 - 10 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Clumps exceeding 3 -inches (2-inches in the final 6-final layer) in diameter, and
compacted in 6-inch layers to an average maximum density of 95% as
determined by AASHTO T- 180.
4 . Areas Outside of Pavements - Backfill of all areas outside of pavements shall
be constructed as specified above for "All Other Areas Under Pavements"
except that the additional lifts shall be constructed as specified to the finished
grade.
5 . Density Testing - The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made
by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to demonstrate
conformance of his work with the stability and compaction levels required by
these specifications . Compaction tests shall be taken at intervals listed herein or
as deemed necessary by the Engineer. All test results shall be signed and sealed
by a Florida Registered Engineer, and a copy provided to the Owner and
Engineer.
In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction over compacted
material until the tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content
shall be performed on a representative sample of each inherently different.
material to be used for compacted backfill or embankment fill. .
As a minimum, in-place density tests shall be performed at the rate of one test
location per 300 lineal feet (or fraction thereof) of trench on the compactedi `
backfill, under each drive lane at all roadway crossings and at all siogmficanV
changes in bedding and backfill material . Tests shall be taken in one foot lifts =.
beginning at one foot above the pipe and ending at the final grade. Test .
locations shall be as directed by the Engineer or his authorized representative. If'
any test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re-excavate andi'c`
recompact the backfill , at his expense, to the extent directed by the
o
tests
Engineer-
until the required shall be the compaction
or the Contractor oand shst of allpbecincludedtor anda n the
cost of installed and completed water main.
C. Installation of Detectable Buried Warning Tape
Tape shall be tied to each valve or fitting and shall run continuously with no splices
between valves or fittings. Tape shall be placed at a maximum depth of 12 inches
below finished grade directly above the pipe centerline. Following placement of
tape, the trench shall be backfilled with due caution to prevent displacement or
damage to the tape.
D . Installation of Detectable Buried Trace Wire
Trace wire shall be installed on all pipe, valve and fittings, with splices, branches,
connections and terminations as shown on the plans.
E Separation Requirements
Water mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
proposed sanitary or storm sewer, or any other sanitary hazard. Water mains
crossing sanitary hazards shall be laid to provide a minimum vertical clearance of
02510 - 9 02510 — Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .09 COMPACTION
Puddling or jetting shall not be permitted when compacting bedding materials.
3 . 10 DENSITY TESTS
A. The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing
laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with the
stability and compaction levels required by these specifications. Compaction tests shall be
taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the
Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such
documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
C. In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until the
tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
D. In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be
performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 5000 cu . yd. of material shall be performed at the point
of use.
E. Generally, in-place density tests shall be performed at each structure and at approximately
50 foot intervals along pipe installations for each lift, or; at a minimum, one test near each - '
end of individual pipe installations for each 12 inch lift. Additional density tests may be
required by the Engineer. If any tests results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re
excavate and recompact the backfill at his expense until the required compaction is
obtained.
3 . 11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Installed pipe shall be inspected by Engineer. Displaced or misaligned pipe, infiltration,
accumulation of debris, or other defects shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3 . 12 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
During the installation of Drainage Pipe and Structures the Contractor shall keep
accurate Record Drawings of the construction showing the location of all changes in
alignment, services, utility crossings, and similar data. Items shall be located from
permanent objects such as centerline of street, manholes, valves, etc. Upon completion
of the project the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer an As-Built Drawing showing
the above information.
END OF SECTION
02630 - 10 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .09 COMPACTION
Puddling or jetting shall not be permitted when compacting bedding materials.
3 . 10 DENSITY TESTS
A. The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing
laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with the
stability and compaction levels required by these specifications. Compaction tests shall be
taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the
Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such
documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
C. In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until the
tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
D. In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be
performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 5000 cu . yd. of material shall be performed at the point
of use.
E. Generally, in-place density tests shall be performed at each structure and at approximately
50 foot intervals along pipe installations for each lift, or; at a minimum, one test near each - '
end of individual pipe installations for each 12 inch lift. Additional density tests may be
required by the Engineer. If any tests results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re
excavate and recompact the backfill at his expense until the required compaction is
obtained.
3 . 11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Installed pipe shall be inspected by Engineer. Displaced or misaligned pipe, infiltration,
accumulation of debris, or other defects shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3 . 12 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
During the installation of Drainage Pipe and Structures the Contractor shall keep
accurate Record Drawings of the construction showing the location of all changes in
alignment, services, utility crossings, and similar data. Items shall be located from
permanent objects such as centerline of street, manholes, valves, etc. Upon completion
of the project the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer an As-Built Drawing showing
the above information.
END OF SECTION
02630 - 10 02630 — Storm Sewage
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02714
STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a stabilized subgrade course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (2006)
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2 . ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001 ) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate
in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
1 .03 DESCRIPTION
The subgrade will be constructed such that after being compacted it will conform to the lines and
grades as shown on the Drawings. The subgrade shall be Type-13 (LBR), stabilized and constructed
in accordance with the latest edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications, Section 160 .
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 The subgrade shall have a minimum Florida Bearing Value of 50 as determined by the Florida Soil
Bearing Test. In an area where the bearing value is less than 50, stabilizing material approved by the
Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor, spread and mixed in accordance with Section 160-5 .3
"Mixing" of the 2006 Edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 The subgrade shall be shaped, graded, and rolled to conform to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings . Fine grading of the subgrade to its final profile shall be accomplished after the existing
ground has been excavated as close as possible to the design elevations . In fill areas, fine grading of
the subgrade shall be accomplished after fill is spread and compacted in accordance with Section 5
of these Specifications.
02714 - 1 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02714
STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a stabilized subgrade course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (2006)
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2 . ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001 ) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate
in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
1 .03 DESCRIPTION
The subgrade will be constructed such that after being compacted it will conform to the lines and
grades as shown on the Drawings. The subgrade shall be Type-13 (LBR), stabilized and constructed
in accordance with the latest edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications, Section 160 .
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 The subgrade shall have a minimum Florida Bearing Value of 50 as determined by the Florida Soil
Bearing Test. In an area where the bearing value is less than 50, stabilizing material approved by the
Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor, spread and mixed in accordance with Section 160-5 .3
"Mixing" of the 2006 Edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 The subgrade shall be shaped, graded, and rolled to conform to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings . Fine grading of the subgrade to its final profile shall be accomplished after the existing
ground has been excavated as close as possible to the design elevations . In fill areas, fine grading of
the subgrade shall be accomplished after fill is spread and compacted in accordance with Section 5
of these Specifications.
02714 - 1 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
18 inches between the outside of the water main and the outside of the sanitary
hazard. Where the water main passes under the sanitary hazard or the 18 inch
clearance cannot be met, the water main shall have a full pipe length centered on
the sanitary hazard. The water main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall
be encased in a minimum of 6 inches of concrete all around.
3 .04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Hydrostatic Tests - The Contractor shall provide all necessary material and shall
perform all work required in connection with the test, including temporary plugs
where required. All pipe shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 p .s .i . The
required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation shall be applied for
not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and joints shall be made water-
tight if leakage is evident.
No ductile iron pipe installation will be accepted unless and until the leakage
s less
than that as specified under Section 4.2 of the AWWA (ANSI) , PVC
PP
installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as applicable.
3 .05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the original
or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the completion of
backfilling and surface irregularities, that are dangerous or obstructive to traffic, are
to be removed.
Paved sections shall conform in grade with adjacent areas and shall be of at least
equal quality . Design mixes for flexible pavement shall be subject tapproval boy
the Engineer. All damaged or undermined areas of existing pavement,
previously removed, shall be removed and restored to original conditions or in the
specified manner.
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments , or other hard material, lying
on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal; replacement and
restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on drawings .
3 .06 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
The Contractor shall make no connection to the County' s existing water system without the
County first being given adequate notice of the connection and shall have a County
representative present to witness the connection and to operate any existing valves .
END OF SECTION
02510 — Water Mains
02510 - 10
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02714
STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a stabilized subgrade course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (2006)
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2 . ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001 ) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate
in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
1 .03 DESCRIPTION
The subgrade will be constructed such that after being compacted it will conform to the lines and
grades as shown on the Drawings. The subgrade shall be Type-13 (LBR), stabilized and constructed
in accordance with the latest edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications, Section 160 .
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 The subgrade shall have a minimum Florida Bearing Value of 50 as determined by the Florida Soil
Bearing Test. In an area where the bearing value is less than 50, stabilizing material approved by the
Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor, spread and mixed in accordance with Section 160-5 .3
"Mixing" of the 2006 Edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 The subgrade shall be shaped, graded, and rolled to conform to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings . Fine grading of the subgrade to its final profile shall be accomplished after the existing
ground has been excavated as close as possible to the design elevations . In fill areas, fine grading of
the subgrade shall be accomplished after fill is spread and compacted in accordance with Section 5
of these Specifications.
02714 - 1 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 Record Drawing elevations shall be confirmed to meet design drawing grades prior to placement of
base material.
3 .03 The top of the subgrade in both cuts and fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density to the depth specified on the Plans. The required density shall be maintained
until the base course has been constructed. The subgrade shall be compacted with an approved self-
propelled steel drum or pneumatic tired roller weighing not less than 8 tons. All hollows and
depressions which develop under rolling shall be filled in with suitable material . The process of
grading and rolling shall be repeated until no depressions develop. After compaction, the top surface
of the fine grade shall be true to line and grade at all locations. If the fine grade becomes rutted or
displaced due to any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall regrade it and recompact it. Ditches,
drains, and swales shall be maintained along the completed subgrade section after their construction.
3 .04 In no case shall the Contractor proceed to construct the base course on the subgrade until the
subgrade has been tested for Florida Bearing Values, compaction, checked for line and grade, and
approval given by the Engineer.
3 . 05 Material and Compaction Testing
A. Florida Bearing Value tests on the subgrade shall be taken at a minimum of four (4) test
locations per 10,000 sf of area to be paved, where designated by the Engineer.
B . The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the
Modified Proctor Test procedures of AASHTO T180 (Method D as modified by the
F.D .O.T.) . The percentage compaction and in place density shall be determined according
to procedures of ASTM D2167 "Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Rubber Balloon
Method" or the nuclear method ASTM D2922 .
C. Each material which is inherently different in composition from other subgrade material
and which is used over a widespread area of the project, will necessitate an additional
Modified Proctor Test.
END OF SECTION
02714 - 2 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02515
GATE VALVES
PARTI - SCOPE
1 . 01 GENERAL
The work to be performed under this item shall include furnishing and installing gate valves as
specified by the Engineer and as shown on the Plans .
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A . American Water Works Association (AWWA)
I . AWWA Cl I 1 -80 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings .
2 . AWWA C509-87 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems ,
B . American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A126-84 - Gray-Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe fittings.
=1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A . Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor shall furnish to ?;
the Engineer, for review and approval five fQ sets of shop drawings for the following items ., ;
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the
provisions of the General Conditions .
1 . Gate Valve
2 . Valve Box
PART 2 - MATERIAL
2 . 01 GATE. VALVES (SIZES 4" TO 12")
Gate valves shall be of the solid wedge type with resilient seats, Gate valves shall be mechan cal jointed
W
and meet the requirements of AWA C509-87 .
Valves shall be iron bodied, bronze mounted, utilizing "O-ring" seals . Resilient seat shall be applied to
the gate and shall seal against an epoxy coated metallic surface.
The stem shall be of the non-rising type, operated by a standard AWWA, 2-inch wrench nut. All valves
shall open to the left, using a counterclockwise motion. The stem shall be sealed with a dual " O-ring"
system designed such that the seal above the stem collar can be replaced with the valve under pressure
in the fully open position.
02515 - 1 02515 — Gate Valves
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 Record Drawing elevations shall be confirmed to meet design drawing grades prior to placement of
base material.
3 .03 The top of the subgrade in both cuts and fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density to the depth specified on the Plans. The required density shall be maintained
until the base course has been constructed. The subgrade shall be compacted with an approved self-
propelled steel drum or pneumatic tired roller weighing not less than 8 tons. All hollows and
depressions which develop under rolling shall be filled in with suitable material . The process of
grading and rolling shall be repeated until no depressions develop. After compaction, the top surface
of the fine grade shall be true to line and grade at all locations. If the fine grade becomes rutted or
displaced due to any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall regrade it and recompact it. Ditches,
drains, and swales shall be maintained along the completed subgrade section after their construction.
3 .04 In no case shall the Contractor proceed to construct the base course on the subgrade until the
subgrade has been tested for Florida Bearing Values, compaction, checked for line and grade, and
approval given by the Engineer.
3 . 05 Material and Compaction Testing
A. Florida Bearing Value tests on the subgrade shall be taken at a minimum of four (4) test
locations per 10,000 sf of area to be paved, where designated by the Engineer.
B . The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the
Modified Proctor Test procedures of AASHTO T180 (Method D as modified by the
F.D .O.T.) . The percentage compaction and in place density shall be determined according
to procedures of ASTM D2167 "Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Rubber Balloon
Method" or the nuclear method ASTM D2922 .
C. Each material which is inherently different in composition from other subgrade material
and which is used over a widespread area of the project, will necessitate an additional
Modified Proctor Test.
END OF SECTION
02714 - 2 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 Record Drawing elevations shall be confirmed to meet design drawing grades prior to placement of
base material.
3 .03 The top of the subgrade in both cuts and fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density to the depth specified on the Plans. The required density shall be maintained
until the base course has been constructed. The subgrade shall be compacted with an approved self-
propelled steel drum or pneumatic tired roller weighing not less than 8 tons. All hollows and
depressions which develop under rolling shall be filled in with suitable material . The process of
grading and rolling shall be repeated until no depressions develop. After compaction, the top surface
of the fine grade shall be true to line and grade at all locations. If the fine grade becomes rutted or
displaced due to any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall regrade it and recompact it. Ditches,
drains, and swales shall be maintained along the completed subgrade section after their construction.
3 .04 In no case shall the Contractor proceed to construct the base course on the subgrade until the
subgrade has been tested for Florida Bearing Values, compaction, checked for line and grade, and
approval given by the Engineer.
3 . 05 Material and Compaction Testing
A. Florida Bearing Value tests on the subgrade shall be taken at a minimum of four (4) test
locations per 10,000 sf of area to be paved, where designated by the Engineer.
B . The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the
Modified Proctor Test procedures of AASHTO T180 (Method D as modified by the
F.D .O.T.) . The percentage compaction and in place density shall be determined according
to procedures of ASTM D2167 "Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Rubber Balloon
Method" or the nuclear method ASTM D2922 .
C. Each material which is inherently different in composition from other subgrade material
and which is used over a widespread area of the project, will necessitate an additional
Modified Proctor Test.
END OF SECTION
02714 - 2 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02722
CEMENTED COQUINA SHELL BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a Coquina shell base course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 250 — Shell
2 . Section 915 - Cemented Coquina Shell Material
3 . Section 300 — Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses
4 . Section 916 — Bituminous Materials
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. .
Rammer and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2. ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon
method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 Coquina shell shall conform to the requirements of Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications, latest
edition, Section 915, and shall be from a source acceptable to Florida D.O.T. The material shall have
a minimum LBR value of 100. Prior to placement, the material shall be crushed or broken to such a
size that no less than 97 percent by weight will pass a 3 1/2 inch sieve and no more than 20 percent
dry weight shall wash through a No. 200 sieve. No visible clay or organic matter will be permitted.
02722 - 1 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02722
CEMENTED COQUINA SHELL BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a Coquina shell base course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 250 — Shell
2 . Section 915 - Cemented Coquina Shell Material
3 . Section 300 — Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses
4 . Section 916 — Bituminous Materials
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. .
Rammer and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2. ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon
method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 Coquina shell shall conform to the requirements of Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications, latest
edition, Section 915, and shall be from a source acceptable to Florida D.O.T. The material shall have
a minimum LBR value of 100. Prior to placement, the material shall be crushed or broken to such a
size that no less than 97 percent by weight will pass a 3 1/2 inch sieve and no more than 20 percent
dry weight shall wash through a No. 200 sieve. No visible clay or organic matter will be permitted.
02722 - 1 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Valves shall be rated for a 200 psi working pressure and a minimum body test pressure of 300 psi.
When closed, the valve shall be drip-tight under rated pressure differential applied alternately to each
side of the gate.
The interior of the valve shall be epoxy lined in accordance with AWWA C550 . The exterior of the
valve shall receive a minimum of two, 2 mill dry film thickness, asphaltic coating. All exterior exposed
bolts , studs , and nuts shall be corrosion resistant, zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A153 .
2 .02 VALVE BOXES
All buried valves shall have cast two or three piece valve boxes with cast iron covers . Valve boxes shall
be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and extend to an elevation at or slightly above the valve
bonnet. The barrel shall be one or two-piece, screw type, having 5 - 1 /4 inch shaft. Covers shall have
"WATER" cast into the top for all water main. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended to within
six inches of the top of valve box cover. All valve boxes shall be set in a square concrete valve box
bonnet in accordance with the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 Gate valves shall be installed as typical sections of the pipeline. The requirements for pipeline
foundation and backfill shall be followed in all regards when installing buried service gate valves .
3 . 02 Care shall be taken so that the valve box does not transmit loads directly to the valve body. Valve boxes
shall be installed perpendicular and flush with the ground surface as shown on the Plans.
3 . 03 All gate valves shall be mechanically restrained to the attached pipe sections. Pipe sections both
upstream and downstream of each valve shall be restrained the minimum required length as that shown
for a plug in the Restraint Length Detail on the Drawings .
END OF SECTION
02515 — Gate Valves
02515 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02722
CEMENTED COQUINA SHELL BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a Coquina shell base course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 250 — Shell
2 . Section 915 - Cemented Coquina Shell Material
3 . Section 300 — Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses
4 . Section 916 — Bituminous Materials
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. .
Rammer and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2. ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon
method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 Coquina shell shall conform to the requirements of Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications, latest
edition, Section 915, and shall be from a source acceptable to Florida D.O.T. The material shall have
a minimum LBR value of 100. Prior to placement, the material shall be crushed or broken to such a
size that no less than 97 percent by weight will pass a 3 1/2 inch sieve and no more than 20 percent
dry weight shall wash through a No. 200 sieve. No visible clay or organic matter will be permitted.
02722 - 1 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL
The base course shall be constructed in accordance with the lines, grades, and typical section as
shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted construction shall conform to the provisions of
Florida D .O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 250, latest
edition.
After the subgrade is completed and approved, the Contractor shall furnish and spread the coquina
shell in a uniform distribution. Spread thickness shall be a minimum of 9 inches. Segregated areas of
fine or course rock will not be permitted. Such areas shall be removed and replaced with properly
graded rock.
After the spreading is completed, the entire surface shall be compacted, scarified and shaped so as to
produce the required grade and cross section after compaction.
3 .02 COMPACTION
The required compaction of the coquina shell base course shall be a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density.
No Jess than 8- 10 ton steel drum or pneumatic fired roller shall be used to compact the base course.
All depressions shall be filled and the process of rolling and filling shall continue until a thoroughly
compacted uniform surface is produced. During final compaction operations, if blading of any area is
necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compaction operations for such areas shall
be completed prior to making the field density-compaction test on the finished base.
Should the subgrade material become mixed with the base course material at any time, the
Contractor shall remove the mixture, reshape and recompact the subgrade, replace the materials
removed with additional coquina shell and reshape and recompact the coquina shell base at no cost
to the Owner.
If cracks or checks appear in the base which would impair the structural integrity of the base in the
opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the cracks or checks by rescarifying, reshaping,
refilling with coquina shell where necessary, and recompacting at no cost to the Owner.
The finished coquina shell base shall be checked for thickness at intervals of not more than 300 feet
on center. Finished thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings. Any areas which are less than 1/2
inch of the specified thickness shall be corrected by scarifying and adding rock. The scarifying shall
extend for 50 feet either side of the deficient area. Areas which are less than 1 /2 inch deficient in
thickness shall be corrected if the Engineer determines that the area is extensive or may adversely
affect the quality of the finished work.
3 .03 PRIME COAT
The prime coat shall be a rapid curing liquid cut back asphalt equal or equivalent to RC-70 or RC-
250 at the Contractor's option, and conforming to Sections 300 and 916-2 of the latest edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
02722 - 2 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
SECTION 02516 - SITE CONCRETE CWALKS & SLABS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division 1 -- Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A . Extent of portland cement concrete paving, walks and slabs are shown on the
drawings.
B . Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" Section.
C . Concrete and related sections are specified in Division 3 .
D . Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7 .
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Codes and Standards :
Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified.
1 1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
i
A . Furnish samples, manufacturer' s product data, test reports, and materials,
certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers .
1 . 04 JOB CONDITIONS
A . Traffic Control :
Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B . Utilize barricades, warning signs and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Forms :
Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until
removal . Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects . Use flexible spring
steel forms, masonite or laminated boards to form radius bends as required.
B . Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete. 02516-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL
The base course shall be constructed in accordance with the lines, grades, and typical section as
shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted construction shall conform to the provisions of
Florida D .O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 250, latest
edition.
After the subgrade is completed and approved, the Contractor shall furnish and spread the coquina
shell in a uniform distribution. Spread thickness shall be a minimum of 9 inches. Segregated areas of
fine or course rock will not be permitted. Such areas shall be removed and replaced with properly
graded rock.
After the spreading is completed, the entire surface shall be compacted, scarified and shaped so as to
produce the required grade and cross section after compaction.
3 .02 COMPACTION
The required compaction of the coquina shell base course shall be a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density.
No Jess than 8- 10 ton steel drum or pneumatic fired roller shall be used to compact the base course.
All depressions shall be filled and the process of rolling and filling shall continue until a thoroughly
compacted uniform surface is produced. During final compaction operations, if blading of any area is
necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compaction operations for such areas shall
be completed prior to making the field density-compaction test on the finished base.
Should the subgrade material become mixed with the base course material at any time, the
Contractor shall remove the mixture, reshape and recompact the subgrade, replace the materials
removed with additional coquina shell and reshape and recompact the coquina shell base at no cost
to the Owner.
If cracks or checks appear in the base which would impair the structural integrity of the base in the
opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the cracks or checks by rescarifying, reshaping,
refilling with coquina shell where necessary, and recompacting at no cost to the Owner.
The finished coquina shell base shall be checked for thickness at intervals of not more than 300 feet
on center. Finished thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings. Any areas which are less than 1/2
inch of the specified thickness shall be corrected by scarifying and adding rock. The scarifying shall
extend for 50 feet either side of the deficient area. Areas which are less than 1 /2 inch deficient in
thickness shall be corrected if the Engineer determines that the area is extensive or may adversely
affect the quality of the finished work.
3 .03 PRIME COAT
The prime coat shall be a rapid curing liquid cut back asphalt equal or equivalent to RC-70 or RC-
250 at the Contractor's option, and conforming to Sections 300 and 916-2 of the latest edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
02722 - 2 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL
The base course shall be constructed in accordance with the lines, grades, and typical section as
shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted construction shall conform to the provisions of
Florida D .O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 250, latest
edition.
After the subgrade is completed and approved, the Contractor shall furnish and spread the coquina
shell in a uniform distribution. Spread thickness shall be a minimum of 9 inches. Segregated areas of
fine or course rock will not be permitted. Such areas shall be removed and replaced with properly
graded rock.
After the spreading is completed, the entire surface shall be compacted, scarified and shaped so as to
produce the required grade and cross section after compaction.
3 .02 COMPACTION
The required compaction of the coquina shell base course shall be a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density.
No Jess than 8- 10 ton steel drum or pneumatic fired roller shall be used to compact the base course.
All depressions shall be filled and the process of rolling and filling shall continue until a thoroughly
compacted uniform surface is produced. During final compaction operations, if blading of any area is
necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compaction operations for such areas shall
be completed prior to making the field density-compaction test on the finished base.
Should the subgrade material become mixed with the base course material at any time, the
Contractor shall remove the mixture, reshape and recompact the subgrade, replace the materials
removed with additional coquina shell and reshape and recompact the coquina shell base at no cost
to the Owner.
If cracks or checks appear in the base which would impair the structural integrity of the base in the
opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the cracks or checks by rescarifying, reshaping,
refilling with coquina shell where necessary, and recompacting at no cost to the Owner.
The finished coquina shell base shall be checked for thickness at intervals of not more than 300 feet
on center. Finished thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings. Any areas which are less than 1/2
inch of the specified thickness shall be corrected by scarifying and adding rock. The scarifying shall
extend for 50 feet either side of the deficient area. Areas which are less than 1 /2 inch deficient in
thickness shall be corrected if the Engineer determines that the area is extensive or may adversely
affect the quality of the finished work.
3 .03 PRIME COAT
The prime coat shall be a rapid curing liquid cut back asphalt equal or equivalent to RC-70 or RC-
250 at the Contractor's option, and conforming to Sections 300 and 916-2 of the latest edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
02722 - 2 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The surface of the base material shall be cleaned after final compaction and the moisture content of
the base shall not exceed 90 percent of the optimum moisture before the prime coat is applied. The
prime coat shall be applied uniformly with a pressure distributor. The entire length of the spray bar
shall be set at the height above the surface recommended by the Manufacturer for even distribution.
The prime coat shall be applied to the finished base course at the rate of 0. 15 gallons per square yard
at a temperature between 100°F to 150°F. The prime coat shall be applied such that a period of no
longer than two (2) hours lapse prior to application of the asphaltic concrete wearing course, unless
the prime coat is covered with sand or screenings as outlined in Section 300-6. 5 of the latest edition
of the Florida D .O.T. Specifications.
3 .04 TESTING
The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the Modified
Proctor Test procedures of ASTM-D1557 or AASHTO-T180 (Method D). At a minimum, one (1)
Modified Proctor Test shall be performed for each 10,000 square feet of base material on
representative samples from location(s) designated by the Engineer. The percentage compaction and
in-place density shall be determined according to procedures of ASTM-132167 "Test for Density of
Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method" or the nuclear method ASTM- D2922. In-place density
testing shall be performed at a minimum rate of four (4) Modified Proctor tests per 10,000 square
feet of area to be paved unless quality control measures allow the Engineer to dictate fewer tests.
END OF SECTION
02722 - 3 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The surface of the base material shall be cleaned after final compaction and the moisture content of
the base shall not exceed 90 percent of the optimum moisture before the prime coat is applied. The
prime coat shall be applied uniformly with a pressure distributor. The entire length of the spray bar
shall be set at the height above the surface recommended by the Manufacturer for even distribution.
The prime coat shall be applied to the finished base course at the rate of 0. 15 gallons per square yard
at a temperature between 100°F to 150°F. The prime coat shall be applied such that a period of no
longer than two (2) hours lapse prior to application of the asphaltic concrete wearing course, unless
the prime coat is covered with sand or screenings as outlined in Section 300-6. 5 of the latest edition
of the Florida D .O.T. Specifications.
3 .04 TESTING
The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the Modified
Proctor Test procedures of ASTM-D1557 or AASHTO-T180 (Method D). At a minimum, one (1)
Modified Proctor Test shall be performed for each 10,000 square feet of base material on
representative samples from location(s) designated by the Engineer. The percentage compaction and
in-place density shall be determined according to procedures of ASTM-132167 "Test for Density of
Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method" or the nuclear method ASTM- D2922. In-place density
testing shall be performed at a minimum rate of four (4) Modified Proctor tests per 10,000 square
feet of area to be paved unless quality control measures allow the Engineer to dictate fewer tests.
END OF SECTION
02722 - 3 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
C . Reinforcing:
Welded Wire Mesh plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185 , or Fibermesh t,
admixture.
D . Concrete Materials:
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 Sections for concrete materials ,
admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required.
2 .02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN AND TESTING
A . Design mix to produce standard-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement ,
3/4 " aggregate, air-entrained admixture and water to produce the following
properties:
1 . Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 28 days .
2 . Slump Range: 4 " plus/minus V slump .
3 . Air Content : 5% to 8%.
4 . Water reducing or other supplemental admixtures will not be allowed .
5 . Pea rock pump-mix will not be allowed for any slabs on grade . (�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before
placing concrete .
B . Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for
additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been
corrected and are ready to receive concrete.
C . Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured . Install sufficient
quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement .
D . Check completed form work for grade and alignment to following tolerances :
1 . Top of forms not more than 1 /8 " in 10' .
2 . Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4" in 10' .
3 . Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as
required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.
02516-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The surface of the base material shall be cleaned after final compaction and the moisture content of
the base shall not exceed 90 percent of the optimum moisture before the prime coat is applied. The
prime coat shall be applied uniformly with a pressure distributor. The entire length of the spray bar
shall be set at the height above the surface recommended by the Manufacturer for even distribution.
The prime coat shall be applied to the finished base course at the rate of 0. 15 gallons per square yard
at a temperature between 100°F to 150°F. The prime coat shall be applied such that a period of no
longer than two (2) hours lapse prior to application of the asphaltic concrete wearing course, unless
the prime coat is covered with sand or screenings as outlined in Section 300-6. 5 of the latest edition
of the Florida D .O.T. Specifications.
3 .04 TESTING
The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the Modified
Proctor Test procedures of ASTM-D1557 or AASHTO-T180 (Method D). At a minimum, one (1)
Modified Proctor Test shall be performed for each 10,000 square feet of base material on
representative samples from location(s) designated by the Engineer. The percentage compaction and
in-place density shall be determined according to procedures of ASTM-132167 "Test for Density of
Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method" or the nuclear method ASTM- D2922. In-place density
testing shall be performed at a minimum rate of four (4) Modified Proctor tests per 10,000 square
feet of area to be paved unless quality control measures allow the Engineer to dictate fewer tests.
END OF SECTION
02722 - 3 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02741
ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this item shall include the selling, delivering and installing of
asphalt concrete surface courses as herein specified. Final asphalt concrete surface course shall
be completed within 30 days after placement of any temporary asphalt surface course.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be :
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 300 - Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses .
2. Section 320 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - Plant, Methods and Equipment .
3 . Section 330 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - General Construction Requirements.
4. Section 334 — Superpave Asphalt Concrete.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer' s Data - Prior to fabrication or installation of the final asphalt; concrete
surface course, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval'the
following:
1 . Certification from the asphalt supplier that their plant meets or exceeds the
requirements of Section 320 above.
2. Asphalt mix design with supporting test data indicating compliance with all mix
design criteria.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 PRIME AND TACK COAT
A. Prime Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases. Prime coat material shall be Cut-back
Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250, conforming to the Florida D.O .T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-3 .
B . Prime Coat Cover Material shall consist of sand or screenings, conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
902,
C. Tack Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases and existing pavement immediately prior
to surfacing. Tack coat material shall be Asphalt Grade RA-500 or Emulsified Asphalt
02741 - 1 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
3 . 02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT-
A. General :
Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete,
and as herein specified.
B . Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and
grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at
time concrete is placed . Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures
until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
C . Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of mix . Consolidate
concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator.
Keep vibrator away Ep„1 joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only
square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care
to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
D . Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as
far as possible. If interrupted for more than '/ hour, place a construction joint. Do
not use concrete pumps unless they are capable of delivering 3/4 " rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS :
i
A . General :
Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true-to-
line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete . Construct transverse joints of
right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Tooled Joints :
Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a
recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
C. Construction Joints:
Place construction joints at the end of pours and at locations where placement
operations are stopped for a period of more than '/ hour, except where such pours
terminate at expansion joints.
D. Sawcut Control Joints shall be cut a minimum of 1 " deep within 24 hours of
concrete placement and located per drawings.
3 . 04 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and
floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust
�l
floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.
02516-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02741
ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this item shall include the selling, delivering and installing of
asphalt concrete surface courses as herein specified. Final asphalt concrete surface course shall
be completed within 30 days after placement of any temporary asphalt surface course.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be :
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 300 - Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses .
2. Section 320 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - Plant, Methods and Equipment .
3 . Section 330 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - General Construction Requirements.
4. Section 334 — Superpave Asphalt Concrete.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer' s Data - Prior to fabrication or installation of the final asphalt; concrete
surface course, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval'the
following:
1 . Certification from the asphalt supplier that their plant meets or exceeds the
requirements of Section 320 above.
2. Asphalt mix design with supporting test data indicating compliance with all mix
design criteria.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 PRIME AND TACK COAT
A. Prime Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases. Prime coat material shall be Cut-back
Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250, conforming to the Florida D.O .T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-3 .
B . Prime Coat Cover Material shall consist of sand or screenings, conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
902,
C. Tack Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases and existing pavement immediately prior
to surfacing. Tack coat material shall be Asphalt Grade RA-500 or Emulsified Asphalt
02741 - 1 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02741
ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this item shall include the selling, delivering and installing of
asphalt concrete surface courses as herein specified. Final asphalt concrete surface course shall
be completed within 30 days after placement of any temporary asphalt surface course.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be :
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 300 - Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses .
2. Section 320 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - Plant, Methods and Equipment .
3 . Section 330 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - General Construction Requirements.
4. Section 334 — Superpave Asphalt Concrete.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer' s Data - Prior to fabrication or installation of the final asphalt; concrete
surface course, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval'the
following:
1 . Certification from the asphalt supplier that their plant meets or exceeds the
requirements of Section 320 above.
2. Asphalt mix design with supporting test data indicating compliance with all mix
design criteria.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 PRIME AND TACK COAT
A. Prime Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases. Prime coat material shall be Cut-back
Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250, conforming to the Florida D.O .T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-3 .
B . Prime Coat Cover Material shall consist of sand or screenings, conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
902,
C. Tack Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases and existing pavement immediately prior
to surfacing. Tack coat material shall be Asphalt Grade RA-500 or Emulsified Asphalt
02741 - 1 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Grades Rs- 1 or RS-2, conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-2.
2.02 SUPERPAVE ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Asphalt used for structural, leveling or patching courses shall be Type SP- 12.5,
conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course
depending on planned thickness.
B . Asphalt used for final surface course shall be Type SP-9.5 , conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course depending on planned thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 CLEANING, SURFACES
Prior to the laying of any surface courses, the surface of the pavement or base to be covered shall
be cleaned of all loose and deleterious material by the use of power brooming or hand brooming
where necessary. All such material shall be collected and disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .02 APPLICATION OF PRIME AND TACK COATS
A. Prime Coat material shall be heated to a suitable temperature and applied to the base in a
thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0. 1 and 0 . 15 gallons per square yard, as determined
by the Engineer. The prime coat shall be applied using a pressure distributor. Uniformly
cover the primed surface with a light application of cover material. Roll the covered prime
coat with a traffic roller to provide a dense mat.
B. Where primed base courses have become dirty or lost their bonding effect and on all
underlying asphalt courses, a tack coat shall be required. Tack coat material shall be heated
to a suitable temperature and applied in a thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0.02 and
0.08 gallons per square yard. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the
surface course installation to permit drying but not so far in advance as to lose its
adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust. The tack coat shall be kept free from
traffic until the surface course has been laid.
3 .03 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The batching of aggregates, fillers and asphalt binder as well as the mixing and heating of the
mixture shall conform to the Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 330 . The "Master Temperature Range" for all mix designs
shall be the accepted mix design temperature t 30 degrees Fahrenheit ff). Any load or portion
of a load measured by the Engineer's Representative which is outside the "Master Temperature
Range" shall be rejected prior to installation.
3 .04 TRANSPORTATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The surface course shall be transported in tight sealing vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign
material. The inside surface of the truck bodies shall be thinly coated with soapy water or an
acceptable asphalt release agent prior to receiving asphalt concrete. . Diesel, kerosene, gasoline or
02741 - 2 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Grades Rs- 1 or RS-2, conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-2.
2.02 SUPERPAVE ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Asphalt used for structural, leveling or patching courses shall be Type SP- 12.5,
conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course
depending on planned thickness.
B . Asphalt used for final surface course shall be Type SP-9.5 , conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course depending on planned thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 CLEANING, SURFACES
Prior to the laying of any surface courses, the surface of the pavement or base to be covered shall
be cleaned of all loose and deleterious material by the use of power brooming or hand brooming
where necessary. All such material shall be collected and disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .02 APPLICATION OF PRIME AND TACK COATS
A. Prime Coat material shall be heated to a suitable temperature and applied to the base in a
thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0. 1 and 0 . 15 gallons per square yard, as determined
by the Engineer. The prime coat shall be applied using a pressure distributor. Uniformly
cover the primed surface with a light application of cover material. Roll the covered prime
coat with a traffic roller to provide a dense mat.
B. Where primed base courses have become dirty or lost their bonding effect and on all
underlying asphalt courses, a tack coat shall be required. Tack coat material shall be heated
to a suitable temperature and applied in a thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0.02 and
0.08 gallons per square yard. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the
surface course installation to permit drying but not so far in advance as to lose its
adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust. The tack coat shall be kept free from
traffic until the surface course has been laid.
3 .03 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The batching of aggregates, fillers and asphalt binder as well as the mixing and heating of the
mixture shall conform to the Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 330 . The "Master Temperature Range" for all mix designs
shall be the accepted mix design temperature t 30 degrees Fahrenheit ff). Any load or portion
of a load measured by the Engineer's Representative which is outside the "Master Temperature
Range" shall be rejected prior to installation.
3 .04 TRANSPORTATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The surface course shall be transported in tight sealing vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign
material. The inside surface of the truck bodies shall be thinly coated with soapy water or an
acceptable asphalt release agent prior to receiving asphalt concrete. . Diesel, kerosene, gasoline or
02741 - 2 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
B . After floating, test surface to trueness with a 10' straightedge . Distribute concrete
as required to remove surface irregularities , and refloat repaired areas to provide a �, \
continuous smooth finish.
C . Work edges of slabs, back top edge of curb , and formed joints with an edging tool,
and round to 1/2" radius , unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on
concrete surface.
D . After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows:
1 . Broom finish, by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface,
perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine
line texture acceptable to Architect.
E . Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form
removal , clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honey-combed areas .
Remove and replace areas of sections with major defects, as directed by Architect .
3 .05 CURING
A . Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements
of Division 3 sections . Use moist-curing methods for initial curing whenever (�
possible . ,` J
3 . 06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A . Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.
B . Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine
magnitude of cracks or defective areas . Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory
pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy
resin grout.
C . Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work . Exclude traffic from
pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is
permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur.
D . Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other
foreign material just prior to final inspection.
* * *END OF SECTION '
02516-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Grades Rs- 1 or RS-2, conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-2.
2.02 SUPERPAVE ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Asphalt used for structural, leveling or patching courses shall be Type SP- 12.5,
conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course
depending on planned thickness.
B . Asphalt used for final surface course shall be Type SP-9.5 , conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course depending on planned thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 CLEANING, SURFACES
Prior to the laying of any surface courses, the surface of the pavement or base to be covered shall
be cleaned of all loose and deleterious material by the use of power brooming or hand brooming
where necessary. All such material shall be collected and disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .02 APPLICATION OF PRIME AND TACK COATS
A. Prime Coat material shall be heated to a suitable temperature and applied to the base in a
thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0. 1 and 0 . 15 gallons per square yard, as determined
by the Engineer. The prime coat shall be applied using a pressure distributor. Uniformly
cover the primed surface with a light application of cover material. Roll the covered prime
coat with a traffic roller to provide a dense mat.
B. Where primed base courses have become dirty or lost their bonding effect and on all
underlying asphalt courses, a tack coat shall be required. Tack coat material shall be heated
to a suitable temperature and applied in a thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0.02 and
0.08 gallons per square yard. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the
surface course installation to permit drying but not so far in advance as to lose its
adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust. The tack coat shall be kept free from
traffic until the surface course has been laid.
3 .03 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The batching of aggregates, fillers and asphalt binder as well as the mixing and heating of the
mixture shall conform to the Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 330 . The "Master Temperature Range" for all mix designs
shall be the accepted mix design temperature t 30 degrees Fahrenheit ff). Any load or portion
of a load measured by the Engineer's Representative which is outside the "Master Temperature
Range" shall be rejected prior to installation.
3 .04 TRANSPORTATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The surface course shall be transported in tight sealing vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign
material. The inside surface of the truck bodies shall be thinly coated with soapy water or an
acceptable asphalt release agent prior to receiving asphalt concrete. . Diesel, kerosene, gasoline or
02741 - 2 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
any other hazardous or environmentally detrimental material shall not be used to lubricate the
truck bed. Cover each load during cool and cloudy weather when there is a possibility of rain.
3 .05 PATCHING AND LEVELING COURSES
Where asphalt concrete is to be installed on an existing paved surface or old base which is
irregular, or where indicated on the Plans, the existing surface shall be brought to proper grade
and cross section by the application of patching or leveling courses.
3 .06 PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The placement of asphalt concrete for patching, leveling and subsequent courses shall conform
to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition,
Section 330-9.
3 .07 COMPACTING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall provide a separate set of rollers, with their operators, for each paving or
leveling train crew working at the job. All coverage requirements for rolling shall be conducted
before the surface temperature of the asphalt concrete drops to the extent that effective
compaction can not be achieved or the rollers begin to damage the pavement course. Compaction
and joints for as freshly laid asphalt concrete courses shall be installed in compliance with the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition Section
330- 10 and 330-11 .
3 . 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The longitudinal installation of all asphalt concrete courses shall be required to be checked
by a rolling straightedge. The straightedge shall have a minimum effective length of 15
feet. The finished surface of base or structural surface courses shall not vary more than 3/8
inch from the straightedge applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. The : finished
surface of final surface courses shall not vary more than 3/ 16 inch from the straightedge
applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. Any pavement section exceeding the
above tolerances maybe rejected by the Engineer.
B . The transverse cross slope shall be checked at up to 10 locations for each days work.
When the difference between the measured cross slope and the design cross slope varies
by more than f 0.2% for travel lanes or t 0.5% for shoulders, the paving operation shall be
stopped and corrected. Should the average measurement for the 10 locations be above the
specified tolerance, the measured pavement section may be rejected by the Engineer.
3 .07 CORRECTING UNACCEPTABLE ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall be required to correct rejected pavement sections by; removing and replacing;
overlaying; or other method in compliance with the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 330- 12 .4.
END OF SECTION
02741 - 3 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02518
NUSCELLANEOUS WATER APPURTENANCES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established reputable firms
who are fully experienced and qualified in the manufacture of the particular equipment to be
furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best
practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications as applicable.
1 .02 All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which
they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.
PART 2 - PIPE TAPPING SADDLES
2 . 01 WATER SUPPLY TAP
Tapping saddles shall be manufactured of high strength iron bodies, coated with a minimum 12 mills
of fusion bonded epoxy. The body shall incorporate a Buba- N rubber gasket conforming to ASTM-
D2000 and be provided with a F.I.P . threaded top. The saddle shall be double bolted, with the band,
bolts and all hardware of type 304 stainless steel. The tapping saddles shall be "Ford" model FC202,
or approved equal.
2 .02 FORCE MAIN TAP AND VALVE
Tapping sleeves shall be long body, mechanical joint end with flanged outlet, ductile iron
construction, split in two sections and designed for assembly around the main without halting
service. The sleeve shall be suitable for use with the type and O.D . of pipe being tapped.
Tapping valves ends shall be a standard flange (for bolting to the sleeve) by mechanical joint.
Valves shall have oversized seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters and, except as
otherwise specified, shall be similar in construction and operation to AWWA C509 gate valves
(NRS). Tapping valves and sleeves shall be cold water pressure rated at 200 psi minimum for valve
sizes up to 12 inches or less and 150 psi minimum for valve size over 12 inches. Tapping sleeves
and valves shall be "Mueller" or approved equal .
PART 3 - CORPORATION STOPS
Corporation stops for use with polyethylene pipe shall be of the ball type, constructed of 85-5-5-5
brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have an M.I.P.T. end by
compression end with split gland retainer. Corporation stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards.
Corporation stops shall be "Ford", model FBI 101 , or approved equal.
PART 4 - CURB STOP
Curb stop for connecting the polyethylene water service line to P. V.C. pipe shall be of the ball type,
constructed of 85-5-5-5 brass alloy conforming to ASTM-B62. The corporation stop shall have a
compression end by F.I.P.T. end. The curb stop shall meet AWWA-C800 standards. Curb stop shall
be a "Ford", model KV43, or approved equal.
02518 - 1 02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
any other hazardous or environmentally detrimental material shall not be used to lubricate the
truck bed. Cover each load during cool and cloudy weather when there is a possibility of rain.
3 .05 PATCHING AND LEVELING COURSES
Where asphalt concrete is to be installed on an existing paved surface or old base which is
irregular, or where indicated on the Plans, the existing surface shall be brought to proper grade
and cross section by the application of patching or leveling courses.
3 .06 PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The placement of asphalt concrete for patching, leveling and subsequent courses shall conform
to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition,
Section 330-9.
3 .07 COMPACTING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall provide a separate set of rollers, with their operators, for each paving or
leveling train crew working at the job. All coverage requirements for rolling shall be conducted
before the surface temperature of the asphalt concrete drops to the extent that effective
compaction can not be achieved or the rollers begin to damage the pavement course. Compaction
and joints for as freshly laid asphalt concrete courses shall be installed in compliance with the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition Section
330- 10 and 330-11 .
3 . 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The longitudinal installation of all asphalt concrete courses shall be required to be checked
by a rolling straightedge. The straightedge shall have a minimum effective length of 15
feet. The finished surface of base or structural surface courses shall not vary more than 3/8
inch from the straightedge applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. The : finished
surface of final surface courses shall not vary more than 3/ 16 inch from the straightedge
applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. Any pavement section exceeding the
above tolerances maybe rejected by the Engineer.
B . The transverse cross slope shall be checked at up to 10 locations for each days work.
When the difference between the measured cross slope and the design cross slope varies
by more than f 0.2% for travel lanes or t 0.5% for shoulders, the paving operation shall be
stopped and corrected. Should the average measurement for the 10 locations be above the
specified tolerance, the measured pavement section may be rejected by the Engineer.
3 .07 CORRECTING UNACCEPTABLE ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall be required to correct rejected pavement sections by; removing and replacing;
overlaying; or other method in compliance with the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 330- 12 .4.
END OF SECTION
02741 - 3 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
any other hazardous or environmentally detrimental material shall not be used to lubricate the
truck bed. Cover each load during cool and cloudy weather when there is a possibility of rain.
3 .05 PATCHING AND LEVELING COURSES
Where asphalt concrete is to be installed on an existing paved surface or old base which is
irregular, or where indicated on the Plans, the existing surface shall be brought to proper grade
and cross section by the application of patching or leveling courses.
3 .06 PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The placement of asphalt concrete for patching, leveling and subsequent courses shall conform
to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition,
Section 330-9.
3 .07 COMPACTING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall provide a separate set of rollers, with their operators, for each paving or
leveling train crew working at the job. All coverage requirements for rolling shall be conducted
before the surface temperature of the asphalt concrete drops to the extent that effective
compaction can not be achieved or the rollers begin to damage the pavement course. Compaction
and joints for as freshly laid asphalt concrete courses shall be installed in compliance with the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition Section
330- 10 and 330-11 .
3 . 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The longitudinal installation of all asphalt concrete courses shall be required to be checked
by a rolling straightedge. The straightedge shall have a minimum effective length of 15
feet. The finished surface of base or structural surface courses shall not vary more than 3/8
inch from the straightedge applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. The : finished
surface of final surface courses shall not vary more than 3/ 16 inch from the straightedge
applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. Any pavement section exceeding the
above tolerances maybe rejected by the Engineer.
B . The transverse cross slope shall be checked at up to 10 locations for each days work.
When the difference between the measured cross slope and the design cross slope varies
by more than f 0.2% for travel lanes or t 0.5% for shoulders, the paving operation shall be
stopped and corrected. Should the average measurement for the 10 locations be above the
specified tolerance, the measured pavement section may be rejected by the Engineer.
3 .07 CORRECTING UNACCEPTABLE ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall be required to correct rejected pavement sections by; removing and replacing;
overlaying; or other method in compliance with the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 330- 12 .4.
END OF SECTION
02741 - 3 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02752
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
A. The work covered under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
construction of a stabilized subgrade and concrete paving upon said subgrade.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to providing the materials, Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer, for review and approval, five (5) sets of shop drawings for: concrete mix.-
admixtures; steel reinforcing; and joint sealer. All drawings shall be reviewed, approved
and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions.
1 . 03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel or concrete, the Engineer and Contractor
Representatives shall check the finished subgrade section for line and grade.
B . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform tests for bearing values and density, prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel
or concrete.
C . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform concrete cylinder compressive strength tests.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2. 01 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, materials and personnel necessary for the proper placing, finishing, and curing of
the concrete pavement shall be on the project and in good working condition before the
Contractor will be permitted to begin placing concrete. Throughout the construction of the project,
the Contractor shall maintain the equipment in good working condition to assure the proper
prosecution of the work. At a minimum the following equipment shall provided:
A. Chutes, Wheelbarrows, Concrete Pumps — shall be provided where necessary to assure
the concrete is properly placed and spread with no undo delays.
B . Vibrators - Approved vibrators for consolidating concrete along the faces and comers of
forms and adjacent to joints shall be provided. All necessary power sources shall be
provided by the Contractor.
02752 - 1 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02752
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
A. The work covered under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
construction of a stabilized subgrade and concrete paving upon said subgrade.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to providing the materials, Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer, for review and approval, five (5) sets of shop drawings for: concrete mix.-
admixtures; steel reinforcing; and joint sealer. All drawings shall be reviewed, approved
and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions.
1 . 03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel or concrete, the Engineer and Contractor
Representatives shall check the finished subgrade section for line and grade.
B . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform tests for bearing values and density, prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel
or concrete.
C . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform concrete cylinder compressive strength tests.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2. 01 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, materials and personnel necessary for the proper placing, finishing, and curing of
the concrete pavement shall be on the project and in good working condition before the
Contractor will be permitted to begin placing concrete. Throughout the construction of the project,
the Contractor shall maintain the equipment in good working condition to assure the proper
prosecution of the work. At a minimum the following equipment shall provided:
A. Chutes, Wheelbarrows, Concrete Pumps — shall be provided where necessary to assure
the concrete is properly placed and spread with no undo delays.
B . Vibrators - Approved vibrators for consolidating concrete along the faces and comers of
forms and adjacent to joints shall be provided. All necessary power sources shall be
provided by the Contractor.
02752 - 1 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 5 - FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
4.01 Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on the Drawings or as
further specified hereafter.
Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall be of steel and shall
be Dresser Style 38, Smith Blair Style 413 , Baker Allsteel, or equal . The coupling shall be provided
with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts and nuts unless indicated otherwise.
All couplings shall be famished with the pipe stop removed.
Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for exposure to the liquid within
a pipe.
PART 6 - POLYETHYLENE WATER SERVICE PIPE
Potable water service pipe shall be single piece, SDR9, PE-3408 polyethylene pipe, conforming to
AW WA-C901 . Polyethylene;pipe ends shall . be provided with stainless steel tube stiffeners .
Joints for plastic tubing shall be of the compression type, utilizing at totallyconfined grip seal and
coupling nut, along with a split clamp locking device.
END OF SECTION
02518 — Miscellaneous Water Appurtenances
02518 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02752
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
A. The work covered under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
construction of a stabilized subgrade and concrete paving upon said subgrade.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to providing the materials, Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer, for review and approval, five (5) sets of shop drawings for: concrete mix.-
admixtures; steel reinforcing; and joint sealer. All drawings shall be reviewed, approved
and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions.
1 . 03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel or concrete, the Engineer and Contractor
Representatives shall check the finished subgrade section for line and grade.
B . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform tests for bearing values and density, prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel
or concrete.
C . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform concrete cylinder compressive strength tests.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2. 01 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, materials and personnel necessary for the proper placing, finishing, and curing of
the concrete pavement shall be on the project and in good working condition before the
Contractor will be permitted to begin placing concrete. Throughout the construction of the project,
the Contractor shall maintain the equipment in good working condition to assure the proper
prosecution of the work. At a minimum the following equipment shall provided:
A. Chutes, Wheelbarrows, Concrete Pumps — shall be provided where necessary to assure
the concrete is properly placed and spread with no undo delays.
B . Vibrators - Approved vibrators for consolidating concrete along the faces and comers of
forms and adjacent to joints shall be provided. All necessary power sources shall be
provided by the Contractor.
02752 - 1 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Hand tools - The Contractor shall furnish all other equipment, hand tools (shovels,
spades, hand trowels, float trowels, etc.) and supplies which are necessary for the proper
prosecution of the work.
D . Leveling Equipment - Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall provide mechanical equipment of either the slip form or form paving
type which will strike off, consolidate, and finish the pavement to the required cross
section.
E. Concrete Saw - Concrete saw(s) shall be capable of cutting hardened concrete neatly to the
dimensions specified on the Plans. The saw(s) shall be equipped with a suitable guard and
protective eye ware.
F. Joint Scaling Equipment - Sealing equipment shall be capable of installing the sealant in
joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .
G. Membrane Compound Sprayer - A pressure sprayer capable of applying a continuous
uniform film shall be required.
2. 02 FORMS
A. Unless special provision is made for use of wood, all side forms for this work-,shall be of
metal of a depth at least equal to the edge thickness of the pavement, except that it is
permissible to increase the depth of forms by fastening boards under the forms. The
sections shall have a length of at least ten feet each, except on curves of less than 150 foot
radius, where other materials may be used as provided in Paragraph C, below. Forms with
a height of eight or more inches shall have a base width of at least eight inches. Other
forms shall have a minimum base width of six inches. When set to grade and staked in
place, the maximum deviation of the top surface of any section from a straight line shall
not exceed 1 /8 inch.
B . The method of connection between sections shall be such that the formed joint shall be
free from play or movement in any direction. The bracing and support must be ample to
prevent the deflection of the forms under the pressure of the concrete or the weight or
thrust of the machinery operating on the forms.
C. Flexible steel or wood forms may be used only when specifically provided for on the plans
with the exception that their use is herein approved for all curves having a radius of less
than 150 feet. Wood forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the pavement.
Forms shall be held by stakes and securely braced at any point where necessary so that no
movement will result from pressure of the concrete or the weight or thrust of machinery
operating on the forms .
2. 03 REINFORCING STEEL
A. If reinforcing is called for on the Plans, the reinforcing steel shall conform to the
following:
02752 - 2 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02520
TESTING AND DISINFECTING WATER MAINS
PART 1 - DISINFECTING POTABLE WATER PIPELINES
1 . 01 The new water system shall remain disconnected from existing water lines except for the temporary
jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the new water system shall be obtained through the
temporary jumper connection . Flushing shall be accomplished through the new connection only under
direction by the Utility Authority and only after installation of upstream and downstream pressure
gauges .
1 . 02 Before pressure testing against existing water system valves, and before being placed into -vi ce,
of AW
potable water pipelines shall be chlorinated in accordance with the latest edition WA C-651 ,
" Standard Procedure for Disinfecting Water Mains" . The procedure shall be approved by the Engineer.
The location of the chlorination and sampling points will be as shown on the Drawings. Taps for
chlorination and sampling shall be uncovered and backfilled by the Contractor as required.
1 . 03 The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be 50 percent above the normal
working pressure but not less than 150 psi . The Contractor shall provide temporary plugs and blocking
necessary to maintain the required test pressure. Corporation cocks at least 3/4-inches in diameter, pip,
riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-end in order to bleed air from the line.:'
Duration of pressure test shall be at least 2 hours. The cost of these items shall be included as apart ofz'
testing.
1 . 04 The leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the hydrostatic pressure test and shall be of not
less than 2 hours duration . All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated';
regardless of total leakage as shown by test. Lines which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested..'
as necessary until test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves ands+
accessories shall be removed and replaced. The pipe section to be tested shall be between valves or int'` '
such sections as may be directed by the Engineer by shutting valves or installing temporary plugs as
required . In no case shall the section of line to be hydrostatically tested exceed 2000 feet in length. The
line shall be filled with water and all air removed and the test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe
for the entire test period by means of a force pump to be furnished by the Contractor. Accurate means
shall be provided for measuring the water required to maintain this pressure. The amount of water
required is a measure of the leakage.
1 .05 The Contractor must submit his plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least five (5) working days
before starting the test. The Contractor shall remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and
equipment after completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer. Any damage to the pipe coating shall be repaired by the Contractor. Lines shall be totally free
and clean prior to final acceptance.
1 . 06 The Engineer or the Engineer's representative must be present during testing.
PART 2 - PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS OF UNDERGROUND PRESSURE PIPING
2 . 01 Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with Section 4 of AWWA
Standard C-600, with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges, meters, pressure pumps
and other equipment needed to test the line. PVC pipe shall be tested in accordance with
02520 - 1 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Hand tools - The Contractor shall furnish all other equipment, hand tools (shovels,
spades, hand trowels, float trowels, etc.) and supplies which are necessary for the proper
prosecution of the work.
D . Leveling Equipment - Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall provide mechanical equipment of either the slip form or form paving
type which will strike off, consolidate, and finish the pavement to the required cross
section.
E. Concrete Saw - Concrete saw(s) shall be capable of cutting hardened concrete neatly to the
dimensions specified on the Plans. The saw(s) shall be equipped with a suitable guard and
protective eye ware.
F. Joint Scaling Equipment - Sealing equipment shall be capable of installing the sealant in
joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .
G. Membrane Compound Sprayer - A pressure sprayer capable of applying a continuous
uniform film shall be required.
2. 02 FORMS
A. Unless special provision is made for use of wood, all side forms for this work-,shall be of
metal of a depth at least equal to the edge thickness of the pavement, except that it is
permissible to increase the depth of forms by fastening boards under the forms. The
sections shall have a length of at least ten feet each, except on curves of less than 150 foot
radius, where other materials may be used as provided in Paragraph C, below. Forms with
a height of eight or more inches shall have a base width of at least eight inches. Other
forms shall have a minimum base width of six inches. When set to grade and staked in
place, the maximum deviation of the top surface of any section from a straight line shall
not exceed 1 /8 inch.
B . The method of connection between sections shall be such that the formed joint shall be
free from play or movement in any direction. The bracing and support must be ample to
prevent the deflection of the forms under the pressure of the concrete or the weight or
thrust of the machinery operating on the forms.
C. Flexible steel or wood forms may be used only when specifically provided for on the plans
with the exception that their use is herein approved for all curves having a radius of less
than 150 feet. Wood forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the pavement.
Forms shall be held by stakes and securely braced at any point where necessary so that no
movement will result from pressure of the concrete or the weight or thrust of machinery
operating on the forms .
2. 03 REINFORCING STEEL
A. If reinforcing is called for on the Plans, the reinforcing steel shall conform to the
following:
02752 - 2 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Hand tools - The Contractor shall furnish all other equipment, hand tools (shovels,
spades, hand trowels, float trowels, etc.) and supplies which are necessary for the proper
prosecution of the work.
D . Leveling Equipment - Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall provide mechanical equipment of either the slip form or form paving
type which will strike off, consolidate, and finish the pavement to the required cross
section.
E. Concrete Saw - Concrete saw(s) shall be capable of cutting hardened concrete neatly to the
dimensions specified on the Plans. The saw(s) shall be equipped with a suitable guard and
protective eye ware.
F. Joint Scaling Equipment - Sealing equipment shall be capable of installing the sealant in
joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .
G. Membrane Compound Sprayer - A pressure sprayer capable of applying a continuous
uniform film shall be required.
2. 02 FORMS
A. Unless special provision is made for use of wood, all side forms for this work-,shall be of
metal of a depth at least equal to the edge thickness of the pavement, except that it is
permissible to increase the depth of forms by fastening boards under the forms. The
sections shall have a length of at least ten feet each, except on curves of less than 150 foot
radius, where other materials may be used as provided in Paragraph C, below. Forms with
a height of eight or more inches shall have a base width of at least eight inches. Other
forms shall have a minimum base width of six inches. When set to grade and staked in
place, the maximum deviation of the top surface of any section from a straight line shall
not exceed 1 /8 inch.
B . The method of connection between sections shall be such that the formed joint shall be
free from play or movement in any direction. The bracing and support must be ample to
prevent the deflection of the forms under the pressure of the concrete or the weight or
thrust of the machinery operating on the forms.
C. Flexible steel or wood forms may be used only when specifically provided for on the plans
with the exception that their use is herein approved for all curves having a radius of less
than 150 feet. Wood forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the pavement.
Forms shall be held by stakes and securely braced at any point where necessary so that no
movement will result from pressure of the concrete or the weight or thrust of machinery
operating on the forms .
2. 03 REINFORCING STEEL
A. If reinforcing is called for on the Plans, the reinforcing steel shall conform to the
following:
02752 - 2 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Welded Wire Mats (No Rolled Fabrics) - ASTM A- 185
Deformed Bars - ASTM A615 Grade 60
B . All reinforcing shall be adequately supported on mortar blocks or plastic chairs at the
proper elevation.
2. 04 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Proportioning
The actual proportions of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and
admixtures to be used for various strength mixes shall be determined by an approved
testing laboratory with the mix having the signature and seal of a State of Florida
registered professional engineer. The concrete shall be in accordance with the American
Concrete Institute (ACI) standard 318-77, section 4.2 through 4 . 8 (excluding section
4. 6), or other pre-approved methods so as to produce a workable concrete having the
properties of strength, slump and air content set out elsewhere in the Contract
Documents. No materials or mixes not currently approved shall be submitted by the
Contractor for use in this project.
B . Portland Cement
The cement used to manufacture concrete shall comply with Florida D. O.T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 206 Edition, Section 921 . The cement .'
used to manufacture concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 85 or M 240. If requested
by the Engineer, the cement supplier shall submit a certification that the cement ,used on
the project conforms to the applicable specifications with complete mill analysis for
every 200 tons used.
C . Aggregate
Aggregate shall conform to ASTM-C-33 , or to Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 901 and 902.
D. Admixtures
Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM-C-260. Type A water reducing
admixtures (normal setting) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type D water reducing
admixtures (retarders) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type E water reducing
admixtures (accelerating) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Fly ash shall conform to
ASTM-C-618 Type F with the following restriction: Sulfur trioxide shall not exceed 5 . 0
percent, and loss of ignition shall not exceed 5 . 0 percent.
E. Water
Water shall conform to Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
02752 - 3 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Welded Wire Mats (No Rolled Fabrics) - ASTM A- 185
Deformed Bars - ASTM A615 Grade 60
B . All reinforcing shall be adequately supported on mortar blocks or plastic chairs at the
proper elevation.
2. 04 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Proportioning
The actual proportions of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and
admixtures to be used for various strength mixes shall be determined by an approved
testing laboratory with the mix having the signature and seal of a State of Florida
registered professional engineer. The concrete shall be in accordance with the American
Concrete Institute (ACI) standard 318-77, section 4.2 through 4 . 8 (excluding section
4. 6), or other pre-approved methods so as to produce a workable concrete having the
properties of strength, slump and air content set out elsewhere in the Contract
Documents. No materials or mixes not currently approved shall be submitted by the
Contractor for use in this project.
B . Portland Cement
The cement used to manufacture concrete shall comply with Florida D. O.T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 206 Edition, Section 921 . The cement .'
used to manufacture concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 85 or M 240. If requested
by the Engineer, the cement supplier shall submit a certification that the cement ,used on
the project conforms to the applicable specifications with complete mill analysis for
every 200 tons used.
C . Aggregate
Aggregate shall conform to ASTM-C-33 , or to Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 901 and 902.
D. Admixtures
Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM-C-260. Type A water reducing
admixtures (normal setting) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type D water reducing
admixtures (retarders) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type E water reducing
admixtures (accelerating) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Fly ash shall conform to
ASTM-C-618 Type F with the following restriction: Sulfur trioxide shall not exceed 5 . 0
percent, and loss of ignition shall not exceed 5 . 0 percent.
E. Water
Water shall conform to Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
02752 - 3 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
AWWA Standard C605 , "Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water" . Engineer shall be present during all testing, and final inspections . No hydrostatic
testing against existing system valves shall be allowed until the section to be tested has been
bacteriologically cleared.
2 . 02 The new water system shall remain disconnected (connecting valve to be locked in the closed position)
from existing water lines except for the temporary jumper connection. All water used to fill and test the
new water system shall be obtained through the temporary jumper connection. Flushing shall only be
conducted in accordance with the plans.
2 .03 The general procedure for chlorination shall be first to flush all dirty or discolored water from the lines,
and then introduce chlorine in approved dosages in accordance with Table 11 - 1 through a tap at one
end, while water is being withdrawn at the other end of the line . The chlorine solution shall remain in
the pipeline for no less than 24 hours .
2 . 04 Following the chlorination period, all treated water shall be flushed from the lines at their extremities
and replaced with water from the distribution system. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the
replacement water shall then be made in the presence of the Engineer in full accordance with the
AWWA Standard C-651 . The Contractor will be required to re-chlorinate, if necessary. The line shall
not be placed in service until the requirements of the State and County Public Health Department are
met.
2 .05 The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary with an independent commercial laboratory
approved by the Department of Health and Rehabilitative Service (HRS) for the collection and
examination of samples of water from disinfected water mains . These samples shall be examined for
compliance with HRS requirements . Sampling shall be made daily and continuously until two
successive examinations are found satisfactory. Should three examinations be found unsatisfactory, the
line shall be flushed and disinfected again . Certified copies of all laboratory analyses shall be provided
to the Owner. The cost of all sampling, flushing, and disinfecting shall be included in the contract price
and no additional charge shall be made to the Owner for this work. County personnel shall operate all
valves and be present to determine volume of water used for. flushing.
(continued on next page)
02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
02520 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Welded Wire Mats (No Rolled Fabrics) - ASTM A- 185
Deformed Bars - ASTM A615 Grade 60
B . All reinforcing shall be adequately supported on mortar blocks or plastic chairs at the
proper elevation.
2. 04 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Proportioning
The actual proportions of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and
admixtures to be used for various strength mixes shall be determined by an approved
testing laboratory with the mix having the signature and seal of a State of Florida
registered professional engineer. The concrete shall be in accordance with the American
Concrete Institute (ACI) standard 318-77, section 4.2 through 4 . 8 (excluding section
4. 6), or other pre-approved methods so as to produce a workable concrete having the
properties of strength, slump and air content set out elsewhere in the Contract
Documents. No materials or mixes not currently approved shall be submitted by the
Contractor for use in this project.
B . Portland Cement
The cement used to manufacture concrete shall comply with Florida D. O.T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 206 Edition, Section 921 . The cement .'
used to manufacture concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 85 or M 240. If requested
by the Engineer, the cement supplier shall submit a certification that the cement ,used on
the project conforms to the applicable specifications with complete mill analysis for
every 200 tons used.
C . Aggregate
Aggregate shall conform to ASTM-C-33 , or to Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 901 and 902.
D. Admixtures
Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM-C-260. Type A water reducing
admixtures (normal setting) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type D water reducing
admixtures (retarders) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type E water reducing
admixtures (accelerating) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Fly ash shall conform to
ASTM-C-618 Type F with the following restriction: Sulfur trioxide shall not exceed 5 . 0
percent, and loss of ignition shall not exceed 5 . 0 percent.
E. Water
Water shall conform to Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
02752 - 3 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Construction, 206 Edition, Section 923 . If the water is of questionable quality, it shall
be tested in accordance with AASHTO-T-26, "Standard Method of Test for Quality of
Water to be Used in Concrete" .
F. Pozzolans and Slag
Pozzolans and Slag shall conform to the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 929.
G. Concrete Strength
Concrete shall meet the minimum compressive strength (f.' in psi) as indicated in the
Contract Documents at 28 days. Conformance to strength requirements shall be
determined by ACI Standard 318-77, sections 4. 8 . 2 .3 and 4 . 8 . 3 .
H . Air Content
The amount of air entrainment shall be between 3 and 6 percent.
1. Slump
The mixture shall contain no more water than is necessary to produce concrete which is
workable and plastic. Water added at the batch plant and at the job site together shall
not exceed the specified W/C ratio. The minimum slump necessary to place the concrete
satisfactorily shall be used. Slumps should be maintained so as not to exceed 2 thru 4 -
1 /2 inches for non-vibratory placement and 1 thru 3 inches for vibrated placement.
2 . 05 CONSTRUCTION JOINT MATERIALS
Joint construction and sealing materials shall be as follows :
A. Sheet metal bottom strips for expansion joints shall be galvanized sheet metal of
0.0157-inch (30 gauge) minimum thickness, conforming to ASTM A525 .
B . Preformed Joint Filler shall be of the cellulose fiber type, conforming to AASHTO - M
213 . Material shall be of the "Sealtight" line as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or
approved equal.
C. Preformed Elastomeric Seals shall be of the open cell compression type, conforming to
the Florida D. O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
D. Bond Breaker Rod shall be closed cell, expanded polyethylene foam rods conforming to
the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
E. Liquid Joint Sealant shall be : a hot — applied, polymeric sealing compound conforming
02752 - 4 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
TABLE 11 - 1
Chlorine Required to Produce 25 -mg/L Concentration
in 100 ft. of Pipe by Diameter
--------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe 100-Percent 1 -Percent
Diameter Chlorine Chlorine Solution
in. Ib. gal.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 0.013 0 . 16
6 0.030 036
8 0 .054 0 .65
10 0.085 1 .02
12 0. 120 1 .44
16 0 .217 2 .60
END OF SECTION
02520 - 3 02520 — Testing and Disinfecting Water Mains
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Construction, 206 Edition, Section 923 . If the water is of questionable quality, it shall
be tested in accordance with AASHTO-T-26, "Standard Method of Test for Quality of
Water to be Used in Concrete" .
F. Pozzolans and Slag
Pozzolans and Slag shall conform to the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 929.
G. Concrete Strength
Concrete shall meet the minimum compressive strength (f.' in psi) as indicated in the
Contract Documents at 28 days. Conformance to strength requirements shall be
determined by ACI Standard 318-77, sections 4. 8 . 2 .3 and 4 . 8 . 3 .
H . Air Content
The amount of air entrainment shall be between 3 and 6 percent.
1. Slump
The mixture shall contain no more water than is necessary to produce concrete which is
workable and plastic. Water added at the batch plant and at the job site together shall
not exceed the specified W/C ratio. The minimum slump necessary to place the concrete
satisfactorily shall be used. Slumps should be maintained so as not to exceed 2 thru 4 -
1 /2 inches for non-vibratory placement and 1 thru 3 inches for vibrated placement.
2 . 05 CONSTRUCTION JOINT MATERIALS
Joint construction and sealing materials shall be as follows :
A. Sheet metal bottom strips for expansion joints shall be galvanized sheet metal of
0.0157-inch (30 gauge) minimum thickness, conforming to ASTM A525 .
B . Preformed Joint Filler shall be of the cellulose fiber type, conforming to AASHTO - M
213 . Material shall be of the "Sealtight" line as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or
approved equal.
C. Preformed Elastomeric Seals shall be of the open cell compression type, conforming to
the Florida D. O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
D. Bond Breaker Rod shall be closed cell, expanded polyethylene foam rods conforming to
the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
E. Liquid Joint Sealant shall be : a hot — applied, polymeric sealing compound conforming
02752 - 4 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
to AASHTO - M 173 . Material shall be "Sealtight" # 164 as manufactured by W.R.
Meadows; a low modulus, one part silicone sealant; or approved equal conforming to
the Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
2 .06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compounds for concrete shall be the pigmented type conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO — M 148 (Type 2), conforming to the Florida D. O.T.
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925.
B . Polyethylene Film may be used for curing when, in conjunction with protection of the
pavement from inclement weather, the polyethylene film is applied over the entire
pavement and maintained intact for a minimum of three (3) days. Polyethylene film and
it' s use shall conform to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The bottom of the excavation for the concrete pavement or top of the earth fill under the
pavement shall be known as the pavement subgrade and shall conform to the lines, grade
and cross sections shown on the plans.
B . The subgrade shall be placed or prepared upon ground which has been cleared, grubbed
and, if necessary, demucked. If the subgrade is upon a filled embankment, :the fill material
shall be free from all unsuitable materials such as muck, rubbish, stumps, brush; clay
pockets, etc. which will not compact into stable and durable foundation for the subgrade.
Fill or the excavated bedding of the subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum density of
95 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180.
C. Subgrade material shall be composed primarily of granular soils with no more than a
moderate amount of silt or clay and shall meet both the following bearing values :
- Minimum Lime Rock Bearing Ratio (LBR) — 40.
- Florida Bearing Value (FBV) — 50.
The subgrade shall be compacted and shaped to the plan cross section. Compaction
shall be to a minimum density of 98 percent of maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180. The finished surface shall be free of loose material .
D. Mortar blocks or plastic chairs specifically designed for such purpose shall be evenly
placed on the finished subgrade to adequately support and center the reinforcing steel in
the concrete pour.
02752 - 5 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Construction, 206 Edition, Section 923 . If the water is of questionable quality, it shall
be tested in accordance with AASHTO-T-26, "Standard Method of Test for Quality of
Water to be Used in Concrete" .
F. Pozzolans and Slag
Pozzolans and Slag shall conform to the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 929.
G. Concrete Strength
Concrete shall meet the minimum compressive strength (f.' in psi) as indicated in the
Contract Documents at 28 days. Conformance to strength requirements shall be
determined by ACI Standard 318-77, sections 4. 8 . 2 .3 and 4 . 8 . 3 .
H . Air Content
The amount of air entrainment shall be between 3 and 6 percent.
1. Slump
The mixture shall contain no more water than is necessary to produce concrete which is
workable and plastic. Water added at the batch plant and at the job site together shall
not exceed the specified W/C ratio. The minimum slump necessary to place the concrete
satisfactorily shall be used. Slumps should be maintained so as not to exceed 2 thru 4 -
1 /2 inches for non-vibratory placement and 1 thru 3 inches for vibrated placement.
2 . 05 CONSTRUCTION JOINT MATERIALS
Joint construction and sealing materials shall be as follows :
A. Sheet metal bottom strips for expansion joints shall be galvanized sheet metal of
0.0157-inch (30 gauge) minimum thickness, conforming to ASTM A525 .
B . Preformed Joint Filler shall be of the cellulose fiber type, conforming to AASHTO - M
213 . Material shall be of the "Sealtight" line as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or
approved equal.
C. Preformed Elastomeric Seals shall be of the open cell compression type, conforming to
the Florida D. O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
D. Bond Breaker Rod shall be closed cell, expanded polyethylene foam rods conforming to
the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
E. Liquid Joint Sealant shall be : a hot — applied, polymeric sealing compound conforming
02752 - 4 02752 — Concrete Paving
/ . J
�. _ .
i
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
to AASHTO - M 173 . Material shall be "Sealtight" # 164 as manufactured by W.R.
Meadows; a low modulus, one part silicone sealant; or approved equal conforming to
the Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
2 .06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compounds for concrete shall be the pigmented type conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO — M 148 (Type 2), conforming to the Florida D. O.T.
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925.
B . Polyethylene Film may be used for curing when, in conjunction with protection of the
pavement from inclement weather, the polyethylene film is applied over the entire
pavement and maintained intact for a minimum of three (3) days. Polyethylene film and
it' s use shall conform to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The bottom of the excavation for the concrete pavement or top of the earth fill under the
pavement shall be known as the pavement subgrade and shall conform to the lines, grade
and cross sections shown on the plans.
B . The subgrade shall be placed or prepared upon ground which has been cleared, grubbed
and, if necessary, demucked. If the subgrade is upon a filled embankment, :the fill material
shall be free from all unsuitable materials such as muck, rubbish, stumps, brush; clay
pockets, etc. which will not compact into stable and durable foundation for the subgrade.
Fill or the excavated bedding of the subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum density of
95 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180.
C. Subgrade material shall be composed primarily of granular soils with no more than a
moderate amount of silt or clay and shall meet both the following bearing values :
- Minimum Lime Rock Bearing Ratio (LBR) — 40.
- Florida Bearing Value (FBV) — 50.
The subgrade shall be compacted and shaped to the plan cross section. Compaction
shall be to a minimum density of 98 percent of maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180. The finished surface shall be free of loose material .
D. Mortar blocks or plastic chairs specifically designed for such purpose shall be evenly
placed on the finished subgrade to adequately support and center the reinforcing steel in
the concrete pour.
02752 - 5 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 02 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Lap splices of deformed bars shall be 24 times the nominal bar diameter in the
longitudinal direction. Splices of W.W. Fabric shall be a minimum or six (6) inches .
B. Deformed bars shall be tied with soft iron wire at the intersection of the longitudinal and
lateral bars .
3 .03 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Concrete pavement shall be constructed on the prepared subgrade in accordance with
these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades,
thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Plans . The subgrade shall be wet
down just prior to placing the concrete to minimize loss of water from the concrete, but
there shall be no standing water when the concrete is being placed.
B . MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete mixed in truck mixers shall be at the speed designated as mixing speed by the
manufacturer for a total of 75 - 100 revolutions of the drum unless additional water is
added in conformance with paragraph C, below. Time of mixing in a central mix plant
shall be a minimum of sixty (60) seconds.
C . TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
Concrete may be transported any distance providing it is discharged on the subgrade
within the required slump range and meets the time requirements of paragraphD,
below. If additional water is required to maintain the specified slumps of concrete
transported in truck mixers, it may be added with the permission of the Engineer' s
Representative only. In this case, a minimum of 20 additional revolutions of mixer
dr-art at mixing speed shall be requiredbeforedischarging of the concrete.
D . CONCRETE TIME LIMIT
The length of time that the concrete can be held in the truck shall conform to the
following :
1 . Air temperature of 45 degrees F. to 80 degrees F. = 90 minutes maximum.
2. Air temperature over 80 degrees F. with a retarder added to the mix = 90 minutes
maximum.
3 . Air temperature over 80 degrees F. without a retarder added to the mix = 60 minutes
maximum.
E. PLACING CONCRETE
02752 - 6 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02535
FORCE MAINS
1 • GENERAL
A . ScODe
The work to be performed under this Item shall include the furnishing of all materials,
equipment and labor required for the installation of force mains as herein described and
as shown on the Plans . The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling,
compacting, testing and related work required for the construction of these mains in
accordance with the provisions set forth under the applicable items of this Specification.
B . References
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
1 ) American Water Works Association (AWWA) and American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) .
a• AWWA C104 (ANSI A21A) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and
Gray- Iron Pipe and Fittings for water.
b • AWWA (ANSI) C110 Gray-Iron and Ductile-Iron Fittings, 3 -in6h
through 48 -inch for water and other liquids.
C . AWWA C111 (ANSI A21 . 11 ) Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and
Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
d• AWWA C150 (ANSI A21 . 50) Thickness Design of ductile-Iron Pipe.
e• AWWA C151 (ANSI A21 . 51 ) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally cast in
Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds for water or other liquids.
f. AWWA C153 (ANSI A21 . 53) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch
through 1 12-inch for water and other liquids .
g- AWWA (ANSI) C600 Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water
Mains and Appurtenances.
h . AWWA (ANSI) C900 Standard for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure
Pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch.
i . AWWA (ANSI) C905 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water
transmission pipe, nominal diameters 14-inch through 36-inch.
02535-1 02535 - FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 02 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Lap splices of deformed bars shall be 24 times the nominal bar diameter in the
longitudinal direction. Splices of W.W. Fabric shall be a minimum or six (6) inches .
B. Deformed bars shall be tied with soft iron wire at the intersection of the longitudinal and
lateral bars .
3 .03 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Concrete pavement shall be constructed on the prepared subgrade in accordance with
these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades,
thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Plans . The subgrade shall be wet
down just prior to placing the concrete to minimize loss of water from the concrete, but
there shall be no standing water when the concrete is being placed.
B . MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete mixed in truck mixers shall be at the speed designated as mixing speed by the
manufacturer for a total of 75 - 100 revolutions of the drum unless additional water is
added in conformance with paragraph C, below. Time of mixing in a central mix plant
shall be a minimum of sixty (60) seconds.
C . TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
Concrete may be transported any distance providing it is discharged on the subgrade
within the required slump range and meets the time requirements of paragraphD,
below. If additional water is required to maintain the specified slumps of concrete
transported in truck mixers, it may be added with the permission of the Engineer' s
Representative only. In this case, a minimum of 20 additional revolutions of mixer
dr-art at mixing speed shall be requiredbeforedischarging of the concrete.
D . CONCRETE TIME LIMIT
The length of time that the concrete can be held in the truck shall conform to the
following :
1 . Air temperature of 45 degrees F. to 80 degrees F. = 90 minutes maximum.
2. Air temperature over 80 degrees F. with a retarder added to the mix = 90 minutes
maximum.
3 . Air temperature over 80 degrees F. without a retarder added to the mix = 60 minutes
maximum.
E. PLACING CONCRETE
02752 - 6 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The concrete shall be deposited on the grade in such a manner as to require as little re-
handling as possible. It shall be deposited in successive batches in a continuous
operation. The concrete shall be consolidated by suitable means so as to preclude the
formation of voids or honeycomb pockets .
F. PLACING IN COLD WEATHER
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting concrete placed in cold weather and
any concrete damaged by frost action shall be removed and replaced at his expense.
3 .04 FINISHING
A. The concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and finished with mechanical equipment
in such a manner that after final finishing, it shall conform to the pavement cross section
shown on the Plans. Hand finishing will be permitted in narrow widths, areas of
irregular dimensions, and in the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, to
finish the concrete already deposited on the grade.
B . FINAL SURFACE FINISH
The finished surface of the concrete pavement shall have a uniform skid resistant `
texture formed by a burlap drag or a stiff broom as required by the. Engineer's
Representative.
C . PAVEMENT EXPOSED TO RAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION
1 . The Contractor shall have, always available, materials to protect the surface of the
plastic concrete against rain. Areas of the pavement surface where the texture has
been damaged by the protective cover shall be re-textured and cured unless the
concrete has hardened. Areas of pavement surface that exhibit a smooth sandy
appearance after the rain ceases shall be textured and cured by method approved by
Engineer. An attempt shall be made to impart the specified texture to these areas
before applying the membrane curing material . No other remedial work shall be
required. Areas that have suffered some surface erosion and have coarse aggregate
exposed shall be reworked by hand methods or with the finishing machine when
the form paving method is used. Fresh concrete containing the same materials and
properties as the pavement concrete shall be added to maintain an adequate supply
in front of the screeds or machine to assure replacement of the concrete eroded
from the surface. The surface shall then be textured and cured as specified.
2. If pavement edges have been severely eroded and the concrete has not set, the
edges shall be repaired by setting side forms and replacing eroded concrete. After
the side forms are set, fresh concrete shall be placed and finished prior to texturing
and curing. After the pavement has hardened, remedial work shall not be permitted.
Areas that do not comply with these Specifications shall be corrected after the
curing period has terminated.
02752 - 7 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
to AASHTO - M 173 . Material shall be "Sealtight" # 164 as manufactured by W.R.
Meadows; a low modulus, one part silicone sealant; or approved equal conforming to
the Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
2 .06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compounds for concrete shall be the pigmented type conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO — M 148 (Type 2), conforming to the Florida D. O.T.
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925.
B . Polyethylene Film may be used for curing when, in conjunction with protection of the
pavement from inclement weather, the polyethylene film is applied over the entire
pavement and maintained intact for a minimum of three (3) days. Polyethylene film and
it' s use shall conform to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The bottom of the excavation for the concrete pavement or top of the earth fill under the
pavement shall be known as the pavement subgrade and shall conform to the lines, grade
and cross sections shown on the plans.
B . The subgrade shall be placed or prepared upon ground which has been cleared, grubbed
and, if necessary, demucked. If the subgrade is upon a filled embankment, :the fill material
shall be free from all unsuitable materials such as muck, rubbish, stumps, brush; clay
pockets, etc. which will not compact into stable and durable foundation for the subgrade.
Fill or the excavated bedding of the subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum density of
95 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180.
C. Subgrade material shall be composed primarily of granular soils with no more than a
moderate amount of silt or clay and shall meet both the following bearing values :
- Minimum Lime Rock Bearing Ratio (LBR) — 40.
- Florida Bearing Value (FBV) — 50.
The subgrade shall be compacted and shaped to the plan cross section. Compaction
shall be to a minimum density of 98 percent of maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180. The finished surface shall be free of loose material .
D. Mortar blocks or plastic chairs specifically designed for such purpose shall be evenly
placed on the finished subgrade to adequately support and center the reinforcing steel in
the concrete pour.
02752 - 5 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D- 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Moldings and Extrusion Materials ,
3 ) American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
a. AASHTO T-99 (2 . 5 kg.) Rammer and a 12- inch (305 mm) Drop, as
modified by T-99 -801 (Dated 1981 ) .
b . AASHTO T- 180 Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb . Rammer and
an 18 -inch drop .
C . Submittals
1 ) Shop Drawings - Prior to any fabrication or installation work, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval five (5) sets of shop
drawings for the following items .
a. Material specifications for all pipe types, fittings , joints, joint restraint,
and specials .
All drawings shall be reviewed, approved and stamped by the Contractor
pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions, Article 6 .24 through 6 .28 .
2. MATERIALS
A . Pipe
1 ) High Density Polyethylene (PE) Tubing — HDPE Tubing shall comply with
applicable requirements for PE 3048 extrusion compound polyethylene plastic
material as stated in AWWA Standard Specifications C901 -96, of latest
revision . Tubing shall have a working pressure of 200 psi . Tubing dimensions
and tolerances shall correspond with thealues listed in ASTM D-2239 , with a
standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 9 . The pipe shall be co -extruded with
v
multiple green stripes visible from any pipe quadrant.
2) P .V . C . Pipe - Polyvinyl Chloride, ASTM D1784 pressure pipe shall be made
from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B material and conform with the outside
diameter of cast iron pipe.
P .V . C . pipe (4" through 12") shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of
150 psi in accordance with AWWA C-900 . P .V.C . pipe ( 14" through 36") shall
be rated for a minimum pressure of 235 psi in accordance with AWWA C-905 .
P .V .C . pipe shall be pigmented during extrusion to provide the required color.
The pipe shall be marked the entire length with three color coded stripes . These
stripes shall be applied in the manner as the required ASTM coding using
permanent ink . with the words "Force Main" , in 3/4-inch high letters appearing
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The concrete shall be deposited on the grade in such a manner as to require as little re-
handling as possible. It shall be deposited in successive batches in a continuous
operation. The concrete shall be consolidated by suitable means so as to preclude the
formation of voids or honeycomb pockets .
F. PLACING IN COLD WEATHER
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting concrete placed in cold weather and
any concrete damaged by frost action shall be removed and replaced at his expense.
3 .04 FINISHING
A. The concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and finished with mechanical equipment
in such a manner that after final finishing, it shall conform to the pavement cross section
shown on the Plans. Hand finishing will be permitted in narrow widths, areas of
irregular dimensions, and in the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, to
finish the concrete already deposited on the grade.
B . FINAL SURFACE FINISH
The finished surface of the concrete pavement shall have a uniform skid resistant `
texture formed by a burlap drag or a stiff broom as required by the. Engineer's
Representative.
C . PAVEMENT EXPOSED TO RAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION
1 . The Contractor shall have, always available, materials to protect the surface of the
plastic concrete against rain. Areas of the pavement surface where the texture has
been damaged by the protective cover shall be re-textured and cured unless the
concrete has hardened. Areas of pavement surface that exhibit a smooth sandy
appearance after the rain ceases shall be textured and cured by method approved by
Engineer. An attempt shall be made to impart the specified texture to these areas
before applying the membrane curing material . No other remedial work shall be
required. Areas that have suffered some surface erosion and have coarse aggregate
exposed shall be reworked by hand methods or with the finishing machine when
the form paving method is used. Fresh concrete containing the same materials and
properties as the pavement concrete shall be added to maintain an adequate supply
in front of the screeds or machine to assure replacement of the concrete eroded
from the surface. The surface shall then be textured and cured as specified.
2. If pavement edges have been severely eroded and the concrete has not set, the
edges shall be repaired by setting side forms and replacing eroded concrete. After
the side forms are set, fresh concrete shall be placed and finished prior to texturing
and curing. After the pavement has hardened, remedial work shall not be permitted.
Areas that do not comply with these Specifications shall be corrected after the
curing period has terminated.
02752 - 7 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .05 CURING
A. After finishing operations have been completed and immediately after the free water has
left the surface, the surface of the slab and, for slip formed pavements, the sides of the
slab shall be coated and sealed with a uniform layer of membrane curing compound
applied at the rate of not less than one gallon per 200 square feet of surface. When the
forms are removed, curing compound shall be applied to the sides of the slab.
B . Areas in which the curing membrane is damaged within a period of three (3) days shall
be resprayed with curing compound.
3 .06 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Traverse and longitudinal joints shall be constructed to the dimensions and at the spacing
shown on the Plans and Details. Transverse joints shall extend the entire width of the
pavement and through the curbs. Joints may be formed in the plastic concrete or sawed
after the concrete has hardened .
B . Formed joints may be constructed by installing a parting strip to be left in place or by
depressing an approved tool into the plastic concrete.
C . Sawing of joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficientlyto permit
sawing without excessive raveling and before uncontrolled cracking occurs . If necessary,
the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night, regardless of weather
conditions .
D. Where construction methods require joint seaing, all joints shall be sealed before the
pavement is exposed to traffic, including construction traffic. Prior to';: sealing, all ;
foreign material shall be removed from the joints and the joints shall be thoroughly dry.
3 . 07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
All longitudinal joints may be construction joints at the contractor's option. Transverse
construction joints shall be installed whenever the placing of concrete is suspended a
sufficient length of time that the concrete may harden.
3 .08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Before the pavement will be considered for acceptance, all items shall be completed in
substantial accordance with the Plans and Specifications . All equipment, surplus materials,
and construction debris shall be removed from the project.
B . The pavement shall be closed to traffic after the concrete is placed, until 28 day test
cylinders indicate the section has reached the specified compressive strength under
ordinary field conditions.
END OF SECTION
02752 - 8 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
one or more times every 21 -inches . As an alternative to lettering, pipe may be
continuously spiral wrapped with plastic identification tape marked "Force
Main",
Pipe shall be pigmented brown for force main and purple for reuse main.
P . V. C . pipe sizes shall conform to the following:
a • Pipe sizes 4" through 12" shall conform to AWWA C900 and have a
minimum wall thickness of DR- ] 8 .
b. Pipe sizes over 12-inch shall be manufactured in accordance with UNI-
B - 11 - 85, shall meet AWWA C 905
requirements standards for water transmission
, and shall be DR- 18 wall thickness.
B . Fittings
1 ) All fittings for PVC In shall be restrained, or mechanical joints . Mechanical
joints shall conform to AWWA Standard Specifications C- 110/A21 . 10 or
C153/A21 . 53 latest revisions . Fitting shall be fusion-bonded ceramic epoxy:
lined . The epoxy material shall be applied in one coat with a maximum dry film
thickness of 40 . 0 mils and shall be Protecto 401 of approved equal. Fittings:
preSsure rating shall be 350 psi .
2) All PE fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the tubing SDR pressure
rating for which they are made. All fittings shall be brass, compression type;
with clampring and stainless steel tube stiffeners.
3 ) Retainer glands, locking gaskets or thrust blocks for restraint shall not be
-permitted.
C Joints
1 ) Push on Joints - Joints for P.V. C. or D .I. P. pipe shall be bell and spigot, rubber
gasket compression, push-on type as specified in AWWA Cl 1 I (ANSI A21 . 11 ) .
Special fittings and joints shall be considered for specific installation.
2) Mechanical Joints - Mechanical joints may be used for downstream restrained
joint pipe. In this circumstance, the joint shall be restrained in accordance with
the following paragraph C. 3) d.
3 ) Restrained Joints - Fittings used for changes in alignment, size reduction, valves
and plugs shall all be restrained along with the appropriate number of
downstream and upstream joints. Restraint shall be by the use of mechanic
methods. As indicated on the drawings, al
Pipe lengths located upstream and
downstream of restrained fittings shall also be restrained . Method of joit
n
restraint shall be as follows :
02535-3 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .05 CURING
A. After finishing operations have been completed and immediately after the free water has
left the surface, the surface of the slab and, for slip formed pavements, the sides of the
slab shall be coated and sealed with a uniform layer of membrane curing compound
applied at the rate of not less than one gallon per 200 square feet of surface. When the
forms are removed, curing compound shall be applied to the sides of the slab.
B . Areas in which the curing membrane is damaged within a period of three (3) days shall
be resprayed with curing compound.
3 .06 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Traverse and longitudinal joints shall be constructed to the dimensions and at the spacing
shown on the Plans and Details. Transverse joints shall extend the entire width of the
pavement and through the curbs. Joints may be formed in the plastic concrete or sawed
after the concrete has hardened .
B . Formed joints may be constructed by installing a parting strip to be left in place or by
depressing an approved tool into the plastic concrete.
C . Sawing of joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficientlyto permit
sawing without excessive raveling and before uncontrolled cracking occurs . If necessary,
the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night, regardless of weather
conditions .
D. Where construction methods require joint seaing, all joints shall be sealed before the
pavement is exposed to traffic, including construction traffic. Prior to';: sealing, all ;
foreign material shall be removed from the joints and the joints shall be thoroughly dry.
3 . 07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
All longitudinal joints may be construction joints at the contractor's option. Transverse
construction joints shall be installed whenever the placing of concrete is suspended a
sufficient length of time that the concrete may harden.
3 .08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Before the pavement will be considered for acceptance, all items shall be completed in
substantial accordance with the Plans and Specifications . All equipment, surplus materials,
and construction debris shall be removed from the project.
B . The pavement shall be closed to traffic after the concrete is placed, until 28 day test
cylinders indicate the section has reached the specified compressive strength under
ordinary field conditions.
END OF SECTION
02752 - 8 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02761
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing reflectorized traffic line paint and/or
thermoplastic for edge stripes, center stripes, lane stripes, and plastic reflective pavement
markers upon the roadway surface in accordance with the plans and specifications.
1 . 02 REFER'P ICES
A. This section references the following documents. They are a part of this section insofar as
specified and modified herein . In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail .
Reference Title
F.D .O .T. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition).
PART - MATERIALS
2 .01 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic markers shall be methyl methacrylate or acrylonitrile butarine styrene in
accordance with Section 706-2 , F.D. O.T. Markers shall be in the shape of a frustrum of a
pyramid, filled with a thermosetting compound. Markers used for restoration in areas
damaged by construction shall be of the same size, shape, color, and have the same optical
qualities of the original marker. Markers used for hydrant location identification shall be
blue, have bidirectional optical properties, and have a minimum area for each reflective
face of not less than 3 .25 square inches.
2 . 02 PAVEMENT STRIPING MATERIALS
A. Traffic Line Paint
1 . Traffic line paint shall be furnished in accordance with F.D.O.T. Section 971 - 12
and shall be formulas; Code T- 1 (white),Code T-2 (yellow). Blue tinted paint
otherwise meeting the requirements of F.D.O .T. Section 971 - 12 shall be used for
handicapped symbols and line delineators.
B . THERMOPLASTIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
1 . Traffic line or marking thermoplastic compound shall be furnished in accordance
with F.D.O.T. Section 711 and shall be white or yellow as required.
02761 - 1 02761 Pavement Markings
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 02 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Lap splices of deformed bars shall be 24 times the nominal bar diameter in the
longitudinal direction. Splices of W.W. Fabric shall be a minimum or six (6) inches .
B. Deformed bars shall be tied with soft iron wire at the intersection of the longitudinal and
lateral bars .
3 .03 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Concrete pavement shall be constructed on the prepared subgrade in accordance with
these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades,
thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Plans . The subgrade shall be wet
down just prior to placing the concrete to minimize loss of water from the concrete, but
there shall be no standing water when the concrete is being placed.
B . MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete mixed in truck mixers shall be at the speed designated as mixing speed by the
manufacturer for a total of 75 - 100 revolutions of the drum unless additional water is
added in conformance with paragraph C, below. Time of mixing in a central mix plant
shall be a minimum of sixty (60) seconds.
C . TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
Concrete may be transported any distance providing it is discharged on the subgrade
within the required slump range and meets the time requirements of paragraphD,
below. If additional water is required to maintain the specified slumps of concrete
transported in truck mixers, it may be added with the permission of the Engineer' s
Representative only. In this case, a minimum of 20 additional revolutions of mixer
dr-art at mixing speed shall be requiredbeforedischarging of the concrete.
D . CONCRETE TIME LIMIT
The length of time that the concrete can be held in the truck shall conform to the
following :
1 . Air temperature of 45 degrees F. to 80 degrees F. = 90 minutes maximum.
2. Air temperature over 80 degrees F. with a retarder added to the mix = 90 minutes
maximum.
3 . Air temperature over 80 degrees F. without a retarder added to the mix = 60 minutes
maximum.
E. PLACING CONCRETE
02752 - 6 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
a. P .V.C. pipe in diameters 4" through 12" shall be restrained at fittings
with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1300-C, "EBBA IRON" series 500 , or other
approved restrainer. Bell and spigot joints on P .V.C . pipe in diameters 4"
through 12" shall be restrained with "UNI-FLANGE" series 1350-C, "EBBA
IRON" series 1500 , or other approved restrainer.
b . P .V . C. pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained at fittings with
"UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1300-C, or other approved restrainer.
Bell and spigot joints on P .V . C , pipe in diameters over 12" shall be restrained
with "UNI-FLANGE" large diameter series 1350-C, or other approved
restrainer.
C. Ductile iron pipe with manufacturer' s mechanical restrained joints using
locking rings or wedges may be utilized. These restraints shall be American
Pipe "LOK-FAST" joints, McWane "SUPER LOCK" or approved equal .
d . Ductile iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joint ends shall be
restrained with Ebba Iron "MEGA-LUG" grip type restrainers, series 1100 .
e. Ductile iron pipe with push
FLANGE
joint ends shall be restrained with "UNI-
FLANGE", large diameter, series 1390 restrainers or approved equal .
f. Retainer glands or locking gaskets shall not be approved as mechanical
restraints .
4) Gaskets - All gaskets shall be manufactured of an elastomeric material . The
gasket shall provide a positive, tight seal under all combinations of joint and
gasket tolerances. Installation and lubrication of gaskets shall be as directed by
the manufacturer.
D . Foundation Rock
A sieve analysis of Foundation Rock shall conform to the following limits :
Passing 3 /4" - 100%
Passing 3/8" - 20 - 55 %
Passing #4 - 0 - 10%
Passing #8 - 0 - 5%
E. Buried Trace Wire
All mainlines , fittings and appurtenances installed underground shall have #14 gauge,
type THHN copper trace wire attached for locating purposes. Trace wire shall have a
brown colored sheath for wastewater force mains.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02761
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing reflectorized traffic line paint and/or
thermoplastic for edge stripes, center stripes, lane stripes, and plastic reflective pavement
markers upon the roadway surface in accordance with the plans and specifications.
1 . 02 REFER'P ICES
A. This section references the following documents. They are a part of this section insofar as
specified and modified herein . In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail .
Reference Title
F.D .O .T. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition).
PART - MATERIALS
2 .01 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic markers shall be methyl methacrylate or acrylonitrile butarine styrene in
accordance with Section 706-2 , F.D. O.T. Markers shall be in the shape of a frustrum of a
pyramid, filled with a thermosetting compound. Markers used for restoration in areas
damaged by construction shall be of the same size, shape, color, and have the same optical
qualities of the original marker. Markers used for hydrant location identification shall be
blue, have bidirectional optical properties, and have a minimum area for each reflective
face of not less than 3 .25 square inches.
2 . 02 PAVEMENT STRIPING MATERIALS
A. Traffic Line Paint
1 . Traffic line paint shall be furnished in accordance with F.D.O.T. Section 971 - 12
and shall be formulas; Code T- 1 (white),Code T-2 (yellow). Blue tinted paint
otherwise meeting the requirements of F.D.O .T. Section 971 - 12 shall be used for
handicapped symbols and line delineators.
B . THERMOPLASTIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
1 . Traffic line or marking thermoplastic compound shall be furnished in accordance
with F.D.O.T. Section 711 and shall be white or yellow as required.
02761 - 1 02761 Pavement Markings
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX ( l
C. GLASS BEADS FOR TRAFFIC LINE STRIPES OR MARKINGS J
1 . Glass beads for reflective traffic paint or thermoplastic compound shall be
furnished in accordance with Section 971 - 13 , F.D.O.T.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
A . Where disturbed or destroyed by construction, pavement stripes and markings shall be
restored at the original locations and to the original lines . pavement marking-in public
right-of ways shall be restored and/or installed with thermoplastic traffic markings5
otherwise painted traffic markings may be used .
B . Plastic reflectorized pavement markers for hydrant valve location shall be installed on
centerline stripes or at the pavement centerline for unstriped roadways. Each hydrant valve
installed under or adjacent to paved areas shall receive a reflectorized marker.
3 .02 PAINTED TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
A . Painted traffic stripes and markings shall be installed in accordance with F .D.O.T. , Section
710 .
3 .03 THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC MARKINGS
A . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall be installed in accordance with the F.D .O.T., Section J
711 . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall not be applied to new asphalt pavements within
30 days of asphalt placement.
3 .04 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic reflective pavement markers shall be installed in accordance with F.D.O .T., Section
706 at the locations indicated on the plans and blue markers shall be installed in the
centerline of drive isle at each hydrant valve location adjacent to paved surface courses.
END OF SECTION
f
I
02761 Pavement Markings
02761 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . EXECUTION OF WORK
The installation and testing of the mainlines shall be done in accordance with AWWA (ANSI)
C600 or AWWA publication M23 for P. V. C. pipe, phis the additional requirements described
herein or as shown on the Plans.
A . Preparation
1 ) Clearing - The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary, where applicable,
for the proper installation of all mainlines and appurtenances in the locations
shown on the drawings . Plantings, ornamental shrubbery, protected trees, utility
Poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the excavation shall be
transplanted, relocated, braced, shored or otherwise protected and preserved
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Protected trees shall be considered as
all trees outside five (5) feet either side of the mainline to be installed. Only
under special circumstances with Engineer ' s written approval may trees outside
these limits be considered for removal . All debris generated from the clearing
process shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a disposal site approved by the
Engineer.
B Trenchin
1 )
See Section 02302 — Excavation and Fill
C. Lavine of Pipe
All pipe, fittings and valves shall be installed according to AWWA Specification C600';
or AWWA M23 as appropriate. Prior to installation, all pipe and appurtenances shall be`
examined for damage and defects . Under no circumstances shall defective pipe be
installed. All lumps , blisters and excess coating materials shall be removed from the
socket and plain ends of each pipe . While being placed in the trench, care shall be taken
to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe
brought to correct line and grade. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open
end of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. When practical, the plug shall
remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. When it is necessary to
deflect the pipe from . a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane, or where
long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that of Table
5 and 6 in AWWA Specification C600.
1 ) Thrust Restraint - All dead ends, valves, tees, and fittings for changes in
alignment shall be appropriately restrained against pipeline thrust. All changes in
aligmnent shall require the fitting and appropriate length of upstream and
downstream pipe to be mechanically restrained with approved devices .
02535-5 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX ( l
C. GLASS BEADS FOR TRAFFIC LINE STRIPES OR MARKINGS J
1 . Glass beads for reflective traffic paint or thermoplastic compound shall be
furnished in accordance with Section 971 - 13 , F.D.O.T.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
A . Where disturbed or destroyed by construction, pavement stripes and markings shall be
restored at the original locations and to the original lines . pavement marking-in public
right-of ways shall be restored and/or installed with thermoplastic traffic markings5
otherwise painted traffic markings may be used .
B . Plastic reflectorized pavement markers for hydrant valve location shall be installed on
centerline stripes or at the pavement centerline for unstriped roadways. Each hydrant valve
installed under or adjacent to paved areas shall receive a reflectorized marker.
3 .02 PAINTED TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
A . Painted traffic stripes and markings shall be installed in accordance with F .D.O.T. , Section
710 .
3 .03 THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC MARKINGS
A . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall be installed in accordance with the F.D .O.T., Section J
711 . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall not be applied to new asphalt pavements within
30 days of asphalt placement.
3 .04 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic reflective pavement markers shall be installed in accordance with F.D.O .T., Section
706 at the locations indicated on the plans and blue markers shall be installed in the
centerline of drive isle at each hydrant valve location adjacent to paved surface courses.
END OF SECTION
f
I
02761 Pavement Markings
02761 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. References signify current revisions .
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A 53 Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes
ASTM B 241 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Seamless Extruded Tube
ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM F 883 Padlocks
ASTM F1083 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1043 Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings :on Metal >
Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework
ASTM F1234 Protective Coatings on Steel Framework for Fences
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO M111 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
AASHTO M181 Chain-Link Fence
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
Product Manual - Standard Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
Submit five copies of the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
Gates
Gate Operators
Post spacing
Location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts
02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
02821 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The concrete shall be deposited on the grade in such a manner as to require as little re-
handling as possible. It shall be deposited in successive batches in a continuous
operation. The concrete shall be consolidated by suitable means so as to preclude the
formation of voids or honeycomb pockets .
F. PLACING IN COLD WEATHER
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting concrete placed in cold weather and
any concrete damaged by frost action shall be removed and replaced at his expense.
3 .04 FINISHING
A. The concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and finished with mechanical equipment
in such a manner that after final finishing, it shall conform to the pavement cross section
shown on the Plans. Hand finishing will be permitted in narrow widths, areas of
irregular dimensions, and in the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, to
finish the concrete already deposited on the grade.
B . FINAL SURFACE FINISH
The finished surface of the concrete pavement shall have a uniform skid resistant `
texture formed by a burlap drag or a stiff broom as required by the. Engineer's
Representative.
C . PAVEMENT EXPOSED TO RAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION
1 . The Contractor shall have, always available, materials to protect the surface of the
plastic concrete against rain. Areas of the pavement surface where the texture has
been damaged by the protective cover shall be re-textured and cured unless the
concrete has hardened. Areas of pavement surface that exhibit a smooth sandy
appearance after the rain ceases shall be textured and cured by method approved by
Engineer. An attempt shall be made to impart the specified texture to these areas
before applying the membrane curing material . No other remedial work shall be
required. Areas that have suffered some surface erosion and have coarse aggregate
exposed shall be reworked by hand methods or with the finishing machine when
the form paving method is used. Fresh concrete containing the same materials and
properties as the pavement concrete shall be added to maintain an adequate supply
in front of the screeds or machine to assure replacement of the concrete eroded
from the surface. The surface shall then be textured and cured as specified.
2. If pavement edges have been severely eroded and the concrete has not set, the
edges shall be repaired by setting side forms and replacing eroded concrete. After
the side forms are set, fresh concrete shall be placed and finished prior to texturing
and curing. After the pavement has hardened, remedial work shall not be permitted.
Areas that do not comply with these Specifications shall be corrected after the
curing period has terminated.
02752 - 7 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
2) Installation of Trace Wire
Trace wire shall run continuously along the pipeline from valve to valve or
fitting. All splices shall be hot-soldered to provide continuity along the entire
installation. Installation and splicing shall be in accordance with the details
shown on the following insert.
3 ) Separation Requirements
Force mains shall be laid at least ten ( 10) feet horizontally from any existing or
the proposed water main. Force mains crossing water mains shall be laid to
provide a minimum vertical clearance of 18 inches between the outside of the
bottom of the water main and the outside of the force main. Where the force
main passes over the water main or the 18 inch clearance cannot be met, the
force main shall have a full pipe length centered on the water main. The force
main pipe section shall be ductile iron pipe or it shall be encased in a minimum
of 6 inches of concrete all around .
D . Field Quality Control
1 ) Hydrostatic Tests_ - The Contractor shall provide all necessary testing materials.
and. shall perform all work required in connection with the test. All pipe shall be
tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 100 p . s. i. for force mains and 150 p . s .i . for
reuse mains . The required pressure as measured at the point of highest elevation
shall be applied for not less than two hours, and all pipe, fittings, valves and
joints shall be made water tight if leakage is evident . At a maximum, mains shall
be tested from shut-off valve to shut-off valve. New mains shall be temporarily
plugged or valved .and .pressure tested prior to tie-in or modification of existing
pressure mains .
No ductile iron pipe installations will be accepted unless and until the leakage is
less than that as specified under Section 4. 2 of the AWWA (ANSI) C600, P .V . C.
pipe installations shall meet the leakage requirements of AWWA M23 as
applicable.
E . Adjusting and Cleaning
1 ) Restoring Surfaces - The top surfaces of the backfill shall be restored to the
original or planned conditions . Trenches shall be carefully examined upon the
completion of backfilling and surface irregularities that are dangerous or
obstructive to traffic are to be removed. Paved sections shall conform in grade
with adjacent areas and shall be of at least equal quality. Design mixes for
flexible pavement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All damaged or
undermined areas of existing pavement, not previously removed, shall be
removed and restored to original conditions or in the specified manner.
02535 — FORCE MAIN
02535-6
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. References signify current revisions .
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A 53 Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes
ASTM B 241 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Seamless Extruded Tube
ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM F 883 Padlocks
ASTM F1083 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1043 Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings :on Metal >
Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework
ASTM F1234 Protective Coatings on Steel Framework for Fences
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO M111 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
AASHTO M181 Chain-Link Fence
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
Product Manual - Standard Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
Submit five copies of the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
Gates
Gate Operators
Post spacing
Location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts
02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
02821 - 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
& Product Data:
Chain-link fencing components
Accessories
Manufacturer' s catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions and maintenance data
C. Samples :
1 ' x I ' minimum of each type of fence fabric.
D. Test Reports:
Weight in ounces for zinc coating
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition . Store materials off the ground to provide
protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
1 .04 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall provide a one-year warranty period on all components of the fence and gates.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide each type of steel fence and gates as a complete unit produced by a singlemanufacturer,
including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings.
Comply with standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer' s Institute Product Manual - Standard
Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric and Industrial Steel Specifications for
fence posts, gates and accessories, and as herein specified.
A. Required Report Data
Submit reports of listing of chain-link fencing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for
zinc coating, and/or chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CHAIN-LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES
Chain link fabric, posts, rails, truss rods, tension wires, tie wires, stretcher bars, gates and all
miscellaneous fittings and hardware shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 . Stipulated
AASHTO and ASTM signify current reference. The Contractor may elect to use either one or the other
types of material from the component options listed above. Combinations of optional materials shall
not be used on the same project.
A. Fabric
Chain link fabric shall be 2 - inch mesh with twisted and barbed selvage top and bottom.
Chain link fabric shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 , 9 gage Min. (coated core
wire diameter), core wire-zinc coated steel.
02821 - 2 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Equipment shall not travel over loose rock fragments, or other hard material,
lying on sections of pavement which are not to be removed. Removal,
replacement and restoration of areas of pavement shall be as indicated on
drawings .
F . Connection to Existing Mains
The Contractor shall make no connection to another Contractor' s work or the Owner's
existing mains unless the work has been substantially completed, accepted, and paid for
by the Owner, or expressed written permission to connect to the work has been given by
the other Contractor and said written permission has been forwarded to the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
02535-7 02535 — FORCE MAIN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
& Product Data:
Chain-link fencing components
Accessories
Manufacturer' s catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions and maintenance data
C. Samples :
1 ' x I ' minimum of each type of fence fabric.
D. Test Reports:
Weight in ounces for zinc coating
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition . Store materials off the ground to provide
protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
1 .04 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall provide a one-year warranty period on all components of the fence and gates.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide each type of steel fence and gates as a complete unit produced by a singlemanufacturer,
including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings.
Comply with standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer' s Institute Product Manual - Standard
Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric and Industrial Steel Specifications for
fence posts, gates and accessories, and as herein specified.
A. Required Report Data
Submit reports of listing of chain-link fencing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for
zinc coating, and/or chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CHAIN-LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES
Chain link fabric, posts, rails, truss rods, tension wires, tie wires, stretcher bars, gates and all
miscellaneous fittings and hardware shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 . Stipulated
AASHTO and ASTM signify current reference. The Contractor may elect to use either one or the other
types of material from the component options listed above. Combinations of optional materials shall
not be used on the same project.
A. Fabric
Chain link fabric shall be 2 - inch mesh with twisted and barbed selvage top and bottom.
Chain link fabric shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 , 9 gage Min. (coated core
wire diameter), core wire-zinc coated steel.
02821 - 2 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Height of fabric shall be 6 feet as indicated on the Drawings.
B . Gates
1 . Swing Gates
a. All gates other than the entrance slide gates, shall be double swing type. Framing
and bracing members shall be round, of steel or aluminum alloy. Steel member
finish shall be zinc-coated or aluminum-coated. Gate frames and braces of steel
construction shall be a minimum 1 . 90 inches OD, with 0 . 120 inches minimum wall
thickness. Aluminum pipe frames and intermediate braces shall be a minimum
1 . 869 inches OD, with 0.940 lb/ft of length. Gate fabric shall be as specified for
fencing fabric. Coating for steel latches, stops, hinges, keepers, and accessories
shall be galvanized. Gate leaves more than 8 feet wide shall have intermediate
members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate
leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach
gate fabric to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's standards, except that
welding will not be permitted.
b. Hinges : Provide 1 - 1 /2 pair of hinges for each leaf 6 feet or over in height. Hinges
shall be non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree swing, and of suitable size
and weight to support gate.
C. Latch: Provide forked type for single gates 10 feet wide or less . Provide plunger
bar type complete with flush plate set in concrete for all double gates and single
gates over 10 feet. Padlock eye shall be an integral part of latch construction.
C. Posts, Top Rails, Bottom Rails and Braces
1 . Line post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 .8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083, and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b. Aluminum coated steel pipe: ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy. 6063, T6 .
2. Corner, end, and pull post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml l 1
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
3 . Rail options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 1 '/4 " nominal dia. galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8
oz/sf: ASTM A53 Table X2, ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe- 1 '/q "nominal dia. coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf: Spec.
Subarticle 966- 1 .5.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- 1 V4 "nominal dia. : ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
4. Minimum Dimensions(inches) :
a. Line Posts : Pipe O.D. = C(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = D (see table), Concrete
Setting Diameter = G(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = H(see table)
b. Comer, End, and Pull Posts: Pipe O.D. = A(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = B(see
table), Concrete Setting Diameter = E(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = F(see
table)
02821 - 3 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .05 CURING
A. After finishing operations have been completed and immediately after the free water has
left the surface, the surface of the slab and, for slip formed pavements, the sides of the
slab shall be coated and sealed with a uniform layer of membrane curing compound
applied at the rate of not less than one gallon per 200 square feet of surface. When the
forms are removed, curing compound shall be applied to the sides of the slab.
B . Areas in which the curing membrane is damaged within a period of three (3) days shall
be resprayed with curing compound.
3 .06 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Traverse and longitudinal joints shall be constructed to the dimensions and at the spacing
shown on the Plans and Details. Transverse joints shall extend the entire width of the
pavement and through the curbs. Joints may be formed in the plastic concrete or sawed
after the concrete has hardened .
B . Formed joints may be constructed by installing a parting strip to be left in place or by
depressing an approved tool into the plastic concrete.
C . Sawing of joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficientlyto permit
sawing without excessive raveling and before uncontrolled cracking occurs . If necessary,
the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night, regardless of weather
conditions .
D. Where construction methods require joint seaing, all joints shall be sealed before the
pavement is exposed to traffic, including construction traffic. Prior to';: sealing, all ;
foreign material shall be removed from the joints and the joints shall be thoroughly dry.
3 . 07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
All longitudinal joints may be construction joints at the contractor's option. Transverse
construction joints shall be installed whenever the placing of concrete is suspended a
sufficient length of time that the concrete may harden.
3 .08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Before the pavement will be considered for acceptance, all items shall be completed in
substantial accordance with the Plans and Specifications . All equipment, surplus materials,
and construction debris shall be removed from the project.
B . The pavement shall be closed to traffic after the concrete is placed, until 28 day test
cylinders indicate the section has reached the specified compressive strength under
ordinary field conditions.
END OF SECTION
02752 - 8 02752 — Concrete Paving
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Height of fabric shall be 6 feet as indicated on the Drawings.
B . Gates
1 . Swing Gates
a. All gates other than the entrance slide gates, shall be double swing type. Framing
and bracing members shall be round, of steel or aluminum alloy. Steel member
finish shall be zinc-coated or aluminum-coated. Gate frames and braces of steel
construction shall be a minimum 1 . 90 inches OD, with 0 . 120 inches minimum wall
thickness. Aluminum pipe frames and intermediate braces shall be a minimum
1 . 869 inches OD, with 0.940 lb/ft of length. Gate fabric shall be as specified for
fencing fabric. Coating for steel latches, stops, hinges, keepers, and accessories
shall be galvanized. Gate leaves more than 8 feet wide shall have intermediate
members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate
leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach
gate fabric to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's standards, except that
welding will not be permitted.
b. Hinges : Provide 1 - 1 /2 pair of hinges for each leaf 6 feet or over in height. Hinges
shall be non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree swing, and of suitable size
and weight to support gate.
C. Latch: Provide forked type for single gates 10 feet wide or less . Provide plunger
bar type complete with flush plate set in concrete for all double gates and single
gates over 10 feet. Padlock eye shall be an integral part of latch construction.
C. Posts, Top Rails, Bottom Rails and Braces
1 . Line post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 .8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083, and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b. Aluminum coated steel pipe: ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy. 6063, T6 .
2. Corner, end, and pull post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml l 1
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
3 . Rail options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 1 '/4 " nominal dia. galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8
oz/sf: ASTM A53 Table X2, ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe- 1 '/q "nominal dia. coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf: Spec.
Subarticle 966- 1 .5.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- 1 V4 "nominal dia. : ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
4. Minimum Dimensions(inches) :
a. Line Posts : Pipe O.D. = C(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = D (see table), Concrete
Setting Diameter = G(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = H(see table)
b. Comer, End, and Pull Posts: Pipe O.D. = A(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = B(see
table), Concrete Setting Diameter = E(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = F(see
table)
02821 - 3 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Fence Height Table of Dimensions (inches)
feet) A B C D E F G H
Up to 4 23/8 0. 154 15/8 0. 140 10 24 8 24
Over 4 to 5 23/8 0. 154 17/8 0 . 145 10 24 8 24
Over 5 to 6 23/8 0 . 154 17/8 0. 145 10 24 8 24
Over 6 to 8 23/8 0. 154 23/8 0. 154 10 36 10 36
Over 8 to 10 27/8 0.203 23/8 0. 154 12 40 10 40
Over 10 to 12 27/8 0.203 27/8 0.203 12 42 12 42
D. Tension wire options:
1 . No. 7 gage steel wire zinc galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf: AASHTO M181 .
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a wire diameter of 0.1875' or larger.
3 . No. 7 gage aluminum coated steel wire coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf: AASHTO M181
E. Tie wire and hog ring options:
1 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - steel wire galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf.
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a minimum gage matching that of the fabric .
3 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - aluminum coated steel wire coated at the gate of 0.40 oz/sf.
F. Fencing Accessories
Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.
G. Concrete
ASTM C 94, using 3/4 inch maximum-size aggregate, and having minimum compressive
strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.
I. Grout
Provide grout of proportions one part Portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand
and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
J. Padlocks
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary padlocks on all gates until the Owner occupies the
project.
02821 - 4 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02538
TESTING FORCE MAINS
1 . SCOPE
A . This Section describes the procedural, material, and acceptance requirements for
cleaning and testing of the mainlines with regard to quality, alignment, tightness, and
overall integrity of the installed system.
2. GENERAL
A . The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials; transportation, pumps, gauges, and
equipment necessary to flush and test the installed pipe system as required by these
Specifications .
13 . The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary connections, corporation stops,
blowoffs, and the like required for flushing and testing, and upon completion of
satisfactory tests, shall remove same and install appropriate plugging/capping devices
or permanent connections as required .
C . The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of` ,
all acceptance testing to be performed . No testing for acceptance of the work shall :
begin until the Owner and Engineer or his authorized representative are present.
D . No interconnection shall be made between the new work and an existing active pipe ; ., ;
system, except that necessary and approved by the Owner for testing, until the work
is approved for use by the Engineer and until all approvals and clearances required by
applicable construction permits for use of the work are issued by the pennitting
agency.
E . At least 3 business days prior to conducting each item of work under this Section, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a description of the specific
equipment, materials, and procedures to be used, plus identification of proposed
water source(s), to be used for this particular work item.
3 . FLUSHING
A . Upon completion of each run of pipe between main valves or between a main valve
and a terminal point, the pipe run shall be flushed with clean water at a minimum full
diameter velocity of 2 . 5 ft./see, in order to remove sand, debris, and other foreign
materials prior to pressure testing.
B . The pipe run to be flushed shall be slowly filled with clean water with all valves open
to allow escape of air pockets . High points in the pipe shall be vented with air release
valves . When the system is full and prior to flushing, all valves shall be fully closed.
02538 - 1 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Fence Height Table of Dimensions (inches)
feet) A B C D E F G H
Up to 4 23/8 0. 154 15/8 0. 140 10 24 8 24
Over 4 to 5 23/8 0. 154 17/8 0 . 145 10 24 8 24
Over 5 to 6 23/8 0 . 154 17/8 0. 145 10 24 8 24
Over 6 to 8 23/8 0. 154 23/8 0. 154 10 36 10 36
Over 8 to 10 27/8 0.203 23/8 0. 154 12 40 10 40
Over 10 to 12 27/8 0.203 27/8 0.203 12 42 12 42
D. Tension wire options:
1 . No. 7 gage steel wire zinc galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf: AASHTO M181 .
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a wire diameter of 0.1875' or larger.
3 . No. 7 gage aluminum coated steel wire coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf: AASHTO M181
E. Tie wire and hog ring options:
1 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - steel wire galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf.
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a minimum gage matching that of the fabric .
3 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - aluminum coated steel wire coated at the gate of 0.40 oz/sf.
F. Fencing Accessories
Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.
G. Concrete
ASTM C 94, using 3/4 inch maximum-size aggregate, and having minimum compressive
strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.
I. Grout
Provide grout of proportions one part Portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand
and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
J. Padlocks
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary padlocks on all gates until the Owner occupies the
project.
02821 - 4 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SITE PREPARATION
A. Clearing and Grading
Clear fence line of brush and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded, compacted
fence line prior to fencing installation. Compact fill used to establish fence line.
B . Excavation
Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete-embedded items, except in bedrock. If
bedrock is encountered, continue excavation to depth indicated or 18 inches into bedrock,
whichever is less, with a diameter in bedrock a minimum of 2 inches larger than outside
diameter of post. Clear post holes of loose material. Dispose of waste material.
3 .02 FENCE INSTALLATION
Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Secure fastening and hinge hardware in
place to fence framework by peening or welding. Allow for proper operation of components. Coat
peened or welded areas with a repair coating matching original coating. Install fence.; in accordance
with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.
A. Post Spacing
Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feet on center. Provide gate
posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing
in both directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in
grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts.
B . Post Setting
Set posts plumb. Allow concrete and grout to cure a minimum of 7 days before performing
other work on posts.
C. Earth and Bedrock
Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated, except in bedrock. Compact concrete to
eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set posts with a minimum of one
inch of grout around each post. Work grout into hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome
shape.
D. Concrete Slabs and Walls
Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 12
inches. Fill sleeve joint with lead, non-shrink grout, or other approved material. Set posts for
support of removable fence sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold
posts aligned and plumb without use of lead or setting material .
E. Bracing
02821 - 5 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02761
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing reflectorized traffic line paint and/or
thermoplastic for edge stripes, center stripes, lane stripes, and plastic reflective pavement
markers upon the roadway surface in accordance with the plans and specifications.
1 . 02 REFER'P ICES
A. This section references the following documents. They are a part of this section insofar as
specified and modified herein . In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail .
Reference Title
F.D .O .T. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition).
PART - MATERIALS
2 .01 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic markers shall be methyl methacrylate or acrylonitrile butarine styrene in
accordance with Section 706-2 , F.D. O.T. Markers shall be in the shape of a frustrum of a
pyramid, filled with a thermosetting compound. Markers used for restoration in areas
damaged by construction shall be of the same size, shape, color, and have the same optical
qualities of the original marker. Markers used for hydrant location identification shall be
blue, have bidirectional optical properties, and have a minimum area for each reflective
face of not less than 3 .25 square inches.
2 . 02 PAVEMENT STRIPING MATERIALS
A. Traffic Line Paint
1 . Traffic line paint shall be furnished in accordance with F.D.O.T. Section 971 - 12
and shall be formulas; Code T- 1 (white),Code T-2 (yellow). Blue tinted paint
otherwise meeting the requirements of F.D.O .T. Section 971 - 12 shall be used for
handicapped symbols and line delineators.
B . THERMOPLASTIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
1 . Traffic line or marking thermoplastic compound shall be furnished in accordance
with F.D.O.T. Section 711 and shall be white or yellow as required.
02761 - 1 02761 Pavement Markings
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Flushing shall continue until a minimum water volume of two times the aggregate
pipe vohune has passed through the pipe section being cleaned. The aggregate pipe
volume shall include all pipe carrying flushing water from the point of introduction
to the work to the point(s) of discharge from the run being cleaned.
D . For nominal pipe sizes of 6 inches and smaller, the pipe shall be flushed through a
discharge extension of at least the full pipe diameter. For nominal pipe sizes greater
than 6 inches, a 6 inch diameter discharge extension pipe, connected to the work with
reducer(s) , may be used in lieu of a full diameter blowoff.
E . Flushing water shall be carried beyond the trench and shall be discharged in a manner
that will not cause erosion nor structural damage on or off-site, and will not cause
contravention of State water quality standards in receiving surface waters . The
Contractor shall provide adequate extension pipe, sedimentation basin(s) , and/or
diffusion devices as necessary to prevent such damage .
4 . HYDROSTATIC LEAKAGE AND PRESSURE TESTING
A . Hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests for ductile iron pipe shall conform with
Section 4 of AWWA C-600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor
shall famish all gauges , _meters,. pressurepumps and other equipment needed to test
the line. P .V . C . pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable sections of
AWWA M23 . Upon completion of flushing, the installed pipe system shall be tested
for tightness under a continuous hydrostatic gauge pressure of 25 psi and then 100 or
150 psi as applicable, + 5 psi as applicable, determined at the lowest point in the
system , for a period of 2 hours. The allowable leakage rate shall not exceed that
defined in and specified by AWWA C600- 82 or AWWA M23 ,
B . If the work is subject to acceptance by a municipal or private utility with its own
adopted test requirements more stringent than those stated herein with regard to
pressure, duration, and/or allowable leakage rate, such requirements shall supersede
these specifications .
C . Testing shall be performed separately on each valved-off section of the installed
system . Testing shall be against closed in-line valves with each valve in the system
subject to the full test pressure differential for full test time at least once during the
course of testing.
D . Allowable leakage shall be calculated based on the pipe diameters) and total laid
length of the nm being tested, with no additional allowance for fittings , or joints . No
visible leakage shall be allowed.
If visible leakage is noted during the course of testing, or if allowable leakage is
exceeded, such leakage shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the
test repeated or extended for an additional period up to the full test time with suitable
adjustment for previous make-up water used, at the Engineer's discretion .
02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
02538 - 2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SITE PREPARATION
A. Clearing and Grading
Clear fence line of brush and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded, compacted
fence line prior to fencing installation. Compact fill used to establish fence line.
B . Excavation
Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete-embedded items, except in bedrock. If
bedrock is encountered, continue excavation to depth indicated or 18 inches into bedrock,
whichever is less, with a diameter in bedrock a minimum of 2 inches larger than outside
diameter of post. Clear post holes of loose material. Dispose of waste material.
3 .02 FENCE INSTALLATION
Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Secure fastening and hinge hardware in
place to fence framework by peening or welding. Allow for proper operation of components. Coat
peened or welded areas with a repair coating matching original coating. Install fence.; in accordance
with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.
A. Post Spacing
Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feet on center. Provide gate
posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing
in both directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in
grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts.
B . Post Setting
Set posts plumb. Allow concrete and grout to cure a minimum of 7 days before performing
other work on posts.
C. Earth and Bedrock
Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated, except in bedrock. Compact concrete to
eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set posts with a minimum of one
inch of grout around each post. Work grout into hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome
shape.
D. Concrete Slabs and Walls
Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 12
inches. Fill sleeve joint with lead, non-shrink grout, or other approved material. Set posts for
support of removable fence sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold
posts aligned and plumb without use of lead or setting material .
E. Bracing
02821 - 5 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
MENNEN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a
compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and two diagonal truss
rods and truss tighteners used as tension members.
F. Top Rail
Install top rails before installing chain-link fabric . Pass top rail through intermediate post
caps. Provide expansion coupling spaced as indicated.
G. Bottom Tension Wire
Install bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top
and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.
H. Fabric
Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top rail and bottom rail and top wire and bottom wire,
close to both sides of each post and at maximum intervals of 24 inches on center. Secure
fabric to posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally
weaving to integral fastening loops of end, comer, pull, and gate posts for full length of each
post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured. Install fabric so that
bottom of fabric is 2 inches above ground level . Install fence fabric to provide, approximately
2 inch deflection at center of fabric span between two posts, when a force of approximately
30 pounds is applied perpendicular to fabric. Fabric should return to its original position
when force is removed.
3 .03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Post Caps
Design post caps to accommodate top rail . Install post caps as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Gates
Install swing gates to swing through 180 degrees from closed to open. Install sliding
cantilever gates to clear the opening dimension(s) shown on plans .
C. Padlocks
Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or
gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.
3 .04 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the site. Restore disturbed ground
areas to original condition.
END OF SECTION
02821 - 6 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. The pumping/pressurizing and make-up water measuring equipment shall be
provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior to testing. The
pressurizing equipment shall be designed and operated in a manner that will
minimize pressure surging and pulsing within the pipe.
F . The Contractor shall provide and install a temporary valved tap with a 1 /4" FPT
connection to receive the pressure gauge in each pipe run to be tested. Upon
satisfactory completion of testing, the Contractor shall remove and plug the pipe.
G. In preparation for testing, the pipe shall be slowly filled with clean water from an
approved source, taking care to purge all air pockets . Water remaining in the pipe
system after flushing may be used and supplemented as necessary with prior approval
by the Engineer, and clean test water may be reused for sequential testing of pipe
segments .
H . In conducting the test, water shall be pumped into the full pipe until test pressure is
attained, and make-up water shall be added as soon as the pressure drops to 5 psi
below test pressure . All make-up water shall be accurately measured, and the total
test leakage shall be defined as the volume of make-up water added.
I. Should the tested section fail to meet these requirements , the Contractor shall, athisown expense, locate and repair the defects
and retest the section until it is acceptable.
J . Immediately upon completion of a passing pressure test, all valves shall be operated '
to insure their full opening and closing.
END OF SECTION -
02538 - 3 02539 - TESTING FORCE MAINS
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX ( l
C. GLASS BEADS FOR TRAFFIC LINE STRIPES OR MARKINGS J
1 . Glass beads for reflective traffic paint or thermoplastic compound shall be
furnished in accordance with Section 971 - 13 , F.D.O.T.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
A . Where disturbed or destroyed by construction, pavement stripes and markings shall be
restored at the original locations and to the original lines . pavement marking-in public
right-of ways shall be restored and/or installed with thermoplastic traffic markings5
otherwise painted traffic markings may be used .
B . Plastic reflectorized pavement markers for hydrant valve location shall be installed on
centerline stripes or at the pavement centerline for unstriped roadways. Each hydrant valve
installed under or adjacent to paved areas shall receive a reflectorized marker.
3 .02 PAINTED TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
A . Painted traffic stripes and markings shall be installed in accordance with F .D.O.T. , Section
710 .
3 .03 THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC MARKINGS
A . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall be installed in accordance with the F.D .O.T., Section J
711 . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall not be applied to new asphalt pavements within
30 days of asphalt placement.
3 .04 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic reflective pavement markers shall be installed in accordance with F.D.O .T., Section
706 at the locations indicated on the plans and blue markers shall be installed in the
centerline of drive isle at each hydrant valve location adjacent to paved surface courses.
END OF SECTION
f
I
02761 Pavement Markings
02761 - 2
MENNEN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a
compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and two diagonal truss
rods and truss tighteners used as tension members.
F. Top Rail
Install top rails before installing chain-link fabric . Pass top rail through intermediate post
caps. Provide expansion coupling spaced as indicated.
G. Bottom Tension Wire
Install bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top
and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.
H. Fabric
Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top rail and bottom rail and top wire and bottom wire,
close to both sides of each post and at maximum intervals of 24 inches on center. Secure
fabric to posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally
weaving to integral fastening loops of end, comer, pull, and gate posts for full length of each
post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured. Install fabric so that
bottom of fabric is 2 inches above ground level . Install fence fabric to provide, approximately
2 inch deflection at center of fabric span between two posts, when a force of approximately
30 pounds is applied perpendicular to fabric. Fabric should return to its original position
when force is removed.
3 .03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Post Caps
Design post caps to accommodate top rail . Install post caps as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Gates
Install swing gates to swing through 180 degrees from closed to open. Install sliding
cantilever gates to clear the opening dimension(s) shown on plans .
C. Padlocks
Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or
gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.
3 .04 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the site. Restore disturbed ground
areas to original condition.
END OF SECTION
02821 - 6 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Qualifications of Workmen:
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and the
requirements of this work, and who shall direct all work performed under
this Section.
B . Codes and Standards :
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of Building Code
that has jurisdiction and Occupational Safety and Health Act.
2. Where provision of pertinent codes and standards conflict with the
requirements of this Section of these Specifications, the more stringent
provisions shall govern.
j3 . Product Standard PS 1 -83 for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
4. American Concrete Institute Standard recommended practice for concrete
formwork, ACI 347 -latest edition.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Lumber:
I . All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as
allowed for under Re-use of Forms in Part 3 of this Section of the
Specifications. All form lumber shall be one of the following, a
combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Engineer.
a. "Plyform", Class 15/8 " or 3/4" PS 1066, C-D exterior plywood,
bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association.
b. Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four (4)
sides .
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
03100-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. References signify current revisions .
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A 53 Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes
ASTM B 241 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Seamless Extruded Tube
ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM F 883 Padlocks
ASTM F1083 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1043 Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings :on Metal >
Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework
ASTM F1234 Protective Coatings on Steel Framework for Fences
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO M111 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
AASHTO M181 Chain-Link Fence
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
Product Manual - Standard Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
Submit five copies of the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
Gates
Gate Operators
Post spacing
Location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts
02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
02821 - 1
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Qualifications of Workmen:
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and the
requirements of this work, and who shall direct all work performed under
this Section.
B . Codes and Standards :
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of Building Code
that has jurisdiction and Occupational Safety and Health Act.
2. Where provision of pertinent codes and standards conflict with the
requirements of this Section of these Specifications, the more stringent
provisions shall govern.
j3 . Product Standard PS 1 -83 for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
4. American Concrete Institute Standard recommended practice for concrete
formwork, ACI 347 -latest edition.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Lumber:
I . All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as
allowed for under Re-use of Forms in Part 3 of this Section of the
Specifications. All form lumber shall be one of the following, a
combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Engineer.
a. "Plyform", Class 15/8 " or 3/4" PS 1066, C-D exterior plywood,
bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association.
b. Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four (4)
sides .
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
03100-1
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of
concrete formwork, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance
approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection and Soil Treatment:
1 . Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is completed to the point where
this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all pertinent codes
and regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design.
3 . Treat underlying soil to prevent vegetation growth and insect infestation .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of mortar, and able to withstand pressures without excessive
deflection when filled with wet concrete.
B . Embedded Items :
1 . Set all required steel frames, angles, grilles, bolts, inserts, and other such
items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed.
C. Bracing:
1 . Properly brace and fie the forms together so as to maintain position and
shape and to ensure safety to personnel.
2 . Construct all bracing and supporting members of amply size and strength to
safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which
they may be subjected.
3 . Space the forms the proper distance apart and securely tie them together,
using metal spreader ties that provide positive tying and accurate spreading.
03100-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02630
STORM SEWERAGE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced:
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
L AASHTO M 288(1992) - Standard Specification for Interim Geotextile
Specification for Highway Applications
2. AASHTO T180 — Moisture-Density Relationship of Soils Using a I01b . Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
B . American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA)
1 . ACPA 01 - 103 ( 1988) - Concrete Pipe Installation Manual
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM A 48( 1994) — Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
2. ASTM A 798(1994) - Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated
Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications
3 . ASTM A 849(2000) — Standard Specification for Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings
and Linings for Corrugated Steel Pipe
4. ASTM C 139( 1995; Rev A) - Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units
for Construction of Catch Basins and Structures
5 . ASTM C 32(1993) - Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made
from Clay or Shale)
6. ASTM C 76( 1995) - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
7 . ASTM C 387(2000el ) - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined
Materials for Mortar and Concrete
8. ASTM C 1450(2004) — Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement
Storm Drainage Pipe
D. Florida Department of Transportation — Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
02630 - 1 02630 — Storm Sewage
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of
concrete formwork, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance
approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection and Soil Treatment:
1 . Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is completed to the point where
this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all pertinent codes
and regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design.
3 . Treat underlying soil to prevent vegetation growth and insect infestation .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of mortar, and able to withstand pressures without excessive
deflection when filled with wet concrete.
B . Embedded Items :
1 . Set all required steel frames, angles, grilles, bolts, inserts, and other such
items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed.
C. Bracing:
1 . Properly brace and fie the forms together so as to maintain position and
shape and to ensure safety to personnel.
2 . Construct all bracing and supporting members of amply size and strength to
safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which
they may be subjected.
3 . Space the forms the proper distance apart and securely tie them together,
using metal spreader ties that provide positive tying and accurate spreading.
03100-2
3 .03 RE-USE OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Re-use of forms shall be subject to advance written approval of the
Structural Engineer or his designer.
B . Requirements :
1 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule of placement of
concrete from the schedule obtainable if all form were new.
2 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms no
less acceptable appearance to finished exposed concrete.
3 . 04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. General :
1 . Minimum periods to form removal after concrete placement shall be as
follows :
JSlabs and curbs 24 hours
Vertical walls (4'-0 " Ht.) 36 hours
Vertical walls (over 4'-0" Ht.) 7 days
2 . Removal of formwork may be extended if deemed necessary by the
Structural Engineer.
B . Removal :
1 . Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping
off inside the wall surface and point up and rubbing the resulting pockets to
match the surrounding areas.
2 . Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader rods and sleeve nuts, using
water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement
grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one
( 1 ) part Portland cement and two and one-half (2- 1 /2) parts sand; apply
grout immediately after removing forms .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
03100-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
& Product Data:
Chain-link fencing components
Accessories
Manufacturer' s catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions and maintenance data
C. Samples :
1 ' x I ' minimum of each type of fence fabric.
D. Test Reports:
Weight in ounces for zinc coating
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition . Store materials off the ground to provide
protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
1 .04 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall provide a one-year warranty period on all components of the fence and gates.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide each type of steel fence and gates as a complete unit produced by a singlemanufacturer,
including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings.
Comply with standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer' s Institute Product Manual - Standard
Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric and Industrial Steel Specifications for
fence posts, gates and accessories, and as herein specified.
A. Required Report Data
Submit reports of listing of chain-link fencing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for
zinc coating, and/or chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CHAIN-LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES
Chain link fabric, posts, rails, truss rods, tension wires, tie wires, stretcher bars, gates and all
miscellaneous fittings and hardware shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 . Stipulated
AASHTO and ASTM signify current reference. The Contractor may elect to use either one or the other
types of material from the component options listed above. Combinations of optional materials shall
not be used on the same project.
A. Fabric
Chain link fabric shall be 2 - inch mesh with twisted and barbed selvage top and bottom.
Chain link fabric shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 , 9 gage Min. (coated core
wire diameter), core wire-zinc coated steel.
02821 - 2 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
3 .03 RE-USE OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Re-use of forms shall be subject to advance written approval of the
Structural Engineer or his designer.
B . Requirements :
1 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule of placement of
concrete from the schedule obtainable if all form were new.
2 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms no
less acceptable appearance to finished exposed concrete.
3 . 04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. General :
1 . Minimum periods to form removal after concrete placement shall be as
follows :
JSlabs and curbs 24 hours
Vertical walls (4'-0 " Ht.) 36 hours
Vertical walls (over 4'-0" Ht.) 7 days
2 . Removal of formwork may be extended if deemed necessary by the
Structural Engineer.
B . Removal :
1 . Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping
off inside the wall surface and point up and rubbing the resulting pockets to
match the surrounding areas.
2 . Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader rods and sleeve nuts, using
water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement
grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one
( 1 ) part Portland cement and two and one-half (2- 1 /2) parts sand; apply
grout immediately after removing forms .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
03100-3
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their
installation and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.
B . Codes and Standards
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the Building Code
that has jurisdiction.
2 . Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this
Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
1 A . Shop Drawings
1 . Within thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract, and before any concrete
reinforcement materials are fabricated and/or delivered to the job site,
submit Shop Drawings to the Architect.
2 . Do not fabricate and/or deliver concrete reinforcement to the job site until
receipt of Shop Drawings approval from the Architect.
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
1 . Use all means necessary to protect concrete reinforcement before, during,
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades .
2 . Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease,
and other bond-breaking coatings.
B. Placements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
03200-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
1 . AW WA C 210(latest edition) — Liquid-Epoxy Coating System for the Interior and
Exterior of Special Sections, Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
Coordination Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Drawings," of this
section.
B. Product Data
Five (5) copies of Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following:
Piping
Gaskets
Compression Joints
Frames, Covers and Gratings
Precast Concrete Structures
Precast Concrete Base Sections
A Work Plan shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Plans, " of this
section.
Proposed Schedules
Methods
Materials
Equipment
1 .03 DRAWINGS
Contractor shall submit Coordination Drawings interferences for construction. Details of catch
basins and Structures shall be shown with proper elevations .
1 .04 PLANS
A Work Plan shall be submitted noting Proposed Schedules, Methods, Materials and Equipment.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BONDING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Coating and Sealing
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849
Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849, when using materials previously coal-
tar coated and for each uncoated ferrous piece used underground.
Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 trowel
consistency.
02630 - 2 02630 — Storm Sewage
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their
installation and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.
B . Codes and Standards
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the Building Code
that has jurisdiction.
2 . Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this
Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
1 A . Shop Drawings
1 . Within thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract, and before any concrete
reinforcement materials are fabricated and/or delivered to the job site,
submit Shop Drawings to the Architect.
2 . Do not fabricate and/or deliver concrete reinforcement to the job site until
receipt of Shop Drawings approval from the Architect.
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
1 . Use all means necessary to protect concrete reinforcement before, during,
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades .
2 . Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease,
and other bond-breaking coatings.
B. Placements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
03200-1
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 4'
A . All concrete reinforcement materials shall be new, free from rust, and complying
with the following reference standards unless otherwise specified on the drawings .
I , Bars for reinforcement: "Specifications for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A-615 , latest editions, Grade 60 .
2 . Wire for reinforcement: " Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement" , ASTM A- 82 .
3 . Wire fabric: "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" ,
ASTM A- 185 , latest edition.
2 . 02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation of concrete reinforcement, shall be as selected by the Contractor
subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A . Inspection
I . Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the
installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to
the point where this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with
all pertinent codes and regulations, the approved Shop Drawings, and the
original design.
B . Discrepancies
I . In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2 . Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
( 03200-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Height of fabric shall be 6 feet as indicated on the Drawings.
B . Gates
1 . Swing Gates
a. All gates other than the entrance slide gates, shall be double swing type. Framing
and bracing members shall be round, of steel or aluminum alloy. Steel member
finish shall be zinc-coated or aluminum-coated. Gate frames and braces of steel
construction shall be a minimum 1 . 90 inches OD, with 0 . 120 inches minimum wall
thickness. Aluminum pipe frames and intermediate braces shall be a minimum
1 . 869 inches OD, with 0.940 lb/ft of length. Gate fabric shall be as specified for
fencing fabric. Coating for steel latches, stops, hinges, keepers, and accessories
shall be galvanized. Gate leaves more than 8 feet wide shall have intermediate
members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate
leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach
gate fabric to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's standards, except that
welding will not be permitted.
b. Hinges : Provide 1 - 1 /2 pair of hinges for each leaf 6 feet or over in height. Hinges
shall be non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree swing, and of suitable size
and weight to support gate.
C. Latch: Provide forked type for single gates 10 feet wide or less . Provide plunger
bar type complete with flush plate set in concrete for all double gates and single
gates over 10 feet. Padlock eye shall be an integral part of latch construction.
C. Posts, Top Rails, Bottom Rails and Braces
1 . Line post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 .8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083, and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b. Aluminum coated steel pipe: ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy. 6063, T6 .
2. Corner, end, and pull post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml l 1
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
3 . Rail options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 1 '/4 " nominal dia. galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8
oz/sf: ASTM A53 Table X2, ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe- 1 '/q "nominal dia. coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf: Spec.
Subarticle 966- 1 .5.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- 1 V4 "nominal dia. : ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
4. Minimum Dimensions(inches) :
a. Line Posts : Pipe O.D. = C(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = D (see table), Concrete
Setting Diameter = G(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = H(see table)
b. Comer, End, and Pull Posts: Pipe O.D. = A(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = B(see
table), Concrete Setting Diameter = E(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = F(see
table)
02821 - 3 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 4'
A . All concrete reinforcement materials shall be new, free from rust, and complying
with the following reference standards unless otherwise specified on the drawings .
I , Bars for reinforcement: "Specifications for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A-615 , latest editions, Grade 60 .
2 . Wire for reinforcement: " Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement" , ASTM A- 82 .
3 . Wire fabric: "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" ,
ASTM A- 185 , latest edition.
2 . 02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation of concrete reinforcement, shall be as selected by the Contractor
subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A . Inspection
I . Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the
installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to
the point where this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with
all pertinent codes and regulations, the approved Shop Drawings, and the
original design.
B . Discrepancies
I . In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2 . Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
( 03200-2
3 . 02 BENDING
A. General
1 . Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the approved Shop
Drawings and ASTM A-615 .
2 . Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or on the
approved Shop Drawings.
3 . Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material.
3 .03 PLACING
A. General
1 . Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete
reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by means of approved
metal chairs, spacers, and metal hangers.
B . Clearance
1 . Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half ( 1 - 1 /2)
times the nominal diameter of round bars.
2 . Provide minimum concrete covering of reinforcement as shown or noted on
the Drawings .
3 . 04 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT
A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust
scale loose mill scale, oil paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce
the bond between steel and concrete .
PART 4 - ITEM OF PAYMENT
No separate Payment shall be made for work specified in this Section. Payment for work
specified in this Section shall be included in Payment made for other Sections .
'END OF SECTION* * *
i
03200-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
B . Epoxy Bonding Compound
Epoxy adhesive material shall be in accordance with AW WA C210.
2 .02 FILTER MATERIAL
A. Filter Fabric
Fabric shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 288, and be water pervious, made of
Polyester materials. Where required, fabric shall be Amoco Propex 4545, or equal,
approved by Engineer prior to ordering.
B . Filter Aggregate
Aggregate shall be clean gravel free from organic materials, clay, or other deleterious
materials .
2.03 MANHOLE AND CATCH-BASINMATERIALS
Water, for use with concrete block and brick, shall be clean and potable .
A. Concrete Block and Mortar
Concrete block shall be in accordance with ASTM C 139 .
Concrete Mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C 387, Type M
B . Brick and Mortar
Brick shall conform to ASTM C 32, Grade MS
Brick Mortar shall conform to ASTM C 387
2. 04 CONDUIT PIPING, JOINTS, FITTINGS AND GASKETS
A. Corrugated Steel Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "CMP", the drainage pipe and required coupling
bands shall be corrugated galvanized steel and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 943 of the FDOT Specifications .
B. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as "Aluminum CMP" or " CAP", the drainage pipe
and required coupling bands shall be corrugated aluminum and shall conform to the
requirements of Section 945 of the FDOT Specifications .
C. Concrete Pipe
1 . Where shown on the Drawings as RCP, the drainage pipes shall be steel
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C76 (Class III) and
Sections 941 and 942 of the FDOT Specifications (2002), unless otherwise
02630 - 3 02630 — Storm Sewage
3 . 02 BENDING
A. General
1 . Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the approved Shop
Drawings and ASTM A-615 .
2 . Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or on the
approved Shop Drawings.
3 . Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material.
3 .03 PLACING
A. General
1 . Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete
reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by means of approved
metal chairs, spacers, and metal hangers.
B . Clearance
1 . Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half ( 1 - 1 /2)
times the nominal diameter of round bars.
2 . Provide minimum concrete covering of reinforcement as shown or noted on
the Drawings .
3 . 04 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT
A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust
scale loose mill scale, oil paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce
the bond between steel and concrete .
PART 4 - ITEM OF PAYMENT
No separate Payment shall be made for work specified in this Section. Payment for work
specified in this Section shall be included in Payment made for other Sections .
'END OF SECTION* * *
i
03200-3
SECTION 03300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Formwork Section 03100
B . Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
C . Unit Masonry Section 04200
D . Underslab Vapor Retarder Section 07160
E . Metal Building Systems Section 13122
F . Plumbing Section 15000
G . Electrical Section 16000
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . C-31 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
2 . C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
3 . C-39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
1
4. C-42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
5 . C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete
6. C- 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland- Cement Concrete
7. C- 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
8. C- 172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
B . ACI standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI-318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
2. Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI-301 (Latest Editions),
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, except as modified by the
supplemental requirements herein.
3 . ACI 318 Detailing Standards .
4. ACI 315 Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings
5 . CRSI 347R Recommended Practice for Placing reinforcing bars .
}
03300- 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Fence Height Table of Dimensions (inches)
feet) A B C D E F G H
Up to 4 23/8 0. 154 15/8 0. 140 10 24 8 24
Over 4 to 5 23/8 0. 154 17/8 0 . 145 10 24 8 24
Over 5 to 6 23/8 0 . 154 17/8 0. 145 10 24 8 24
Over 6 to 8 23/8 0. 154 23/8 0. 154 10 36 10 36
Over 8 to 10 27/8 0.203 23/8 0. 154 12 40 10 40
Over 10 to 12 27/8 0.203 27/8 0.203 12 42 12 42
D. Tension wire options:
1 . No. 7 gage steel wire zinc galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf: AASHTO M181 .
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a wire diameter of 0.1875' or larger.
3 . No. 7 gage aluminum coated steel wire coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf: AASHTO M181
E. Tie wire and hog ring options:
1 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - steel wire galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf.
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a minimum gage matching that of the fabric .
3 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - aluminum coated steel wire coated at the gate of 0.40 oz/sf.
F. Fencing Accessories
Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.
G. Concrete
ASTM C 94, using 3/4 inch maximum-size aggregate, and having minimum compressive
strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.
I. Grout
Provide grout of proportions one part Portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand
and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
J. Padlocks
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary padlocks on all gates until the Owner occupies the
project.
02821 - 4 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
3
SECTION 03300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Formwork Section 03100
B . Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
C . Unit Masonry Section 04200
D . Underslab Vapor Retarder Section 07160
E . Metal Building Systems Section 13122
F . Plumbing Section 15000
G . Electrical Section 16000
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . C-31 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
2 . C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
3 . C-39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
1
4. C-42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
5 . C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete
6. C- 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland- Cement Concrete
7. C- 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
8. C- 172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
B . ACI standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI-318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
2. Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI-301 (Latest Editions),
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, except as modified by the
supplemental requirements herein.
3 . ACI 318 Detailing Standards .
4. ACI 315 Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings
5 . CRSI 347R Recommended Practice for Placing reinforcing bars .
}
03300- 1
1 .03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A . All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM recommendations referred to herein. )
B . Tests shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by the Architect.
C . Contractor will pay for testing, including tests which indicated failure; in which case
that test and all costs incurred as a result thereof, shall be paid for by the Contractor.
D . Standard slump tests shall be taken of the concrete sample for each strength test and
whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. The maximum slump of concrete
shall be 4 " plus/minus 111
, unless specifically otherwise noted.
E . Concrete that fails by test shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
F . Test for strength shall be made as follows :
1 . Slump Test : One test for each load of concrete at the point of discharge taken
out of a wheelbarrow and not out of the chute. Maximum slump measurements
as stated above .
2 . Compressive Strength Test : Randomly test cylinders taken at each major pour;
footings , floor slabs, columns and tie-beams . Two (2) specimens are to be tested /r
( at 7 days and two (2) specimens tested at 28 days. Hold one cylinder for firture \
use if test does not comply at 28 days .
3 . All test results are to be reported , in writing, to the Owner, and the Architect.
Test results should stipulate the day the tests were performed .
4 . Samples for testing shall be taken at 1 /4 and 3 /4 points of the load discharged
from the mixer.
5 . If necessary, comply with Architect or Engineer' s request for additional
cylinders, slump or load test .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Cement shall be Portland cement, ASTM CA 50 .
B . Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-33 .
C . Mixing water for concrete shall be potable and meet the requirements of ASTM C-94 .
r
03300 -2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
noted.
2 . Where shown on the Drawings as FRCP, the drainage pipes shall be fiber
reinforced concrete pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM C1450 (Class III)
and Sections 430 and 449 of the FDOT Specifications (2004), unless otherwise
noted.
D. PVC Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as PVC, the drainage pipe and fittings shall be Sch.
40, Polyvinyl Chloride, and shall conform to the requirements of Section 9484 of
the FDOT Specifications, unless otherwise noted.
E. Polyethylene Under Drain Pipe
Where shown on the Drawings as Under Drain Pipe, the pipe and fittings shall be
double wall, perforated polyethylene . The pipe shall have a protective, polyester
sock and O-ring, gasketed, bell and spigot joints. Pipe shall be type N- 12, as
manufactured by Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc . (or approved equal).
F. Bituminous Pipe Coating
Where shown on the Drawings as Asphalt Coated, metal pipe, "ACCMP" , the pipe
and fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and out, in conformance with Section
943 of the FDOT Specifications .
G. Mitered End Sections
Mitered end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O .T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 272, 273 or 274) called for on the Drawings.
H. Flared End Sections
Flared end sections shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable D.O.T.
Road Design Standard Index (No. 270) called for on the Drawings.
2.05 FRAMES, COVERS AND GRATINGS
Manhole, catch-basin, and sump frames, covers, and gratings shall be in accordance with
F.D.O.T. - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
(2002) - SECTION 425 - Inlets, Structures and Junction Boxes
Cast iron materials shall be provided. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A 48, Class 30,
minimum.
Gratings shall be as specified in the plans.
2.06 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES, RISERS AND PRECAST CONCRETE BASE SECTIONS
Concrete Structures, risers, base sections, and tops shall be pre-cast and conform to ASTM C
478 .
Precast parts shall be as shown in the plans.
02630 - 4 02630 — Storm Sewage
1 .03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A . All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM recommendations referred to herein. )
B . Tests shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by the Architect.
C . Contractor will pay for testing, including tests which indicated failure; in which case
that test and all costs incurred as a result thereof, shall be paid for by the Contractor.
D . Standard slump tests shall be taken of the concrete sample for each strength test and
whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. The maximum slump of concrete
shall be 4 " plus/minus 111
, unless specifically otherwise noted.
E . Concrete that fails by test shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
F . Test for strength shall be made as follows :
1 . Slump Test : One test for each load of concrete at the point of discharge taken
out of a wheelbarrow and not out of the chute. Maximum slump measurements
as stated above .
2 . Compressive Strength Test : Randomly test cylinders taken at each major pour;
footings , floor slabs, columns and tie-beams . Two (2) specimens are to be tested /r
( at 7 days and two (2) specimens tested at 28 days. Hold one cylinder for firture \
use if test does not comply at 28 days .
3 . All test results are to be reported , in writing, to the Owner, and the Architect.
Test results should stipulate the day the tests were performed .
4 . Samples for testing shall be taken at 1 /4 and 3 /4 points of the load discharged
from the mixer.
5 . If necessary, comply with Architect or Engineer' s request for additional
cylinders, slump or load test .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Cement shall be Portland cement, ASTM CA 50 .
B . Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-33 .
C . Mixing water for concrete shall be potable and meet the requirements of ASTM C-94 .
r
03300 -2
2 . 02 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchor slots, reglets and inserts of type, size and spacing required by trades involved,
and shown on plans.
B . Vapor Barrier: 6 mil Polyethylene Film, such as "visqueen". Refer to the Building
Plan Sections for specific applications .
C . Vapor Retarder: 10 mil vapor retarder such as Perminator by WJ Meadows. Refer to
the Building Plan Sections for specific applications.
D . Chemical Curing Compound: Application of a curing compound shall be made to all
slabs and such application shall conform to ASTM C-309 . The compound shall be
applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after
any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete
surface. It shall not be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other
material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent
bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to
receive bonded applications.
Acceptable materials shall be one of the following :
1 . Burke Company Aqua resin Cure
2 . Sika Corporation Sikagard Cure/Hard
3 . Sonneborn Hydrocide
E . Expansion Joint Water Stops: Continuous, pre-formed, finned, center bulb type,
polyvinyl chloride, of sufficient width to provide 3 " minimum embedment in concrete
each side. Equal to Greenstreak #703 .
F. Pre-molded Joint Filler : Bituminous Fiber Type, ASTM D- 1751 -83 and D 545 - 77 equal
to "Celotex Flexcell" of thickness and width indicated or required .
G . Reinforcement shall be cleaned of all scale and excessive rust. All reinforcement shall
be set with the standard accessories as per ACI 315 -74 . Minimum coverage of
reinforcement shall be as follows :
a, Footings — 3 " minimum.
b. Slabs - 3/4' minimum.
C. Beams and Columns — 1 - 1 /2" minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A. Concrete Mix :
1 . All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed and in accordance with ASTM
_ Specifications C-94 (Latest Edition) .
S
J
03300-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SITE PREPARATION
A. Clearing and Grading
Clear fence line of brush and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded, compacted
fence line prior to fencing installation. Compact fill used to establish fence line.
B . Excavation
Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete-embedded items, except in bedrock. If
bedrock is encountered, continue excavation to depth indicated or 18 inches into bedrock,
whichever is less, with a diameter in bedrock a minimum of 2 inches larger than outside
diameter of post. Clear post holes of loose material. Dispose of waste material.
3 .02 FENCE INSTALLATION
Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Secure fastening and hinge hardware in
place to fence framework by peening or welding. Allow for proper operation of components. Coat
peened or welded areas with a repair coating matching original coating. Install fence.; in accordance
with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.
A. Post Spacing
Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feet on center. Provide gate
posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing
in both directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in
grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts.
B . Post Setting
Set posts plumb. Allow concrete and grout to cure a minimum of 7 days before performing
other work on posts.
C. Earth and Bedrock
Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated, except in bedrock. Compact concrete to
eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set posts with a minimum of one
inch of grout around each post. Work grout into hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome
shape.
D. Concrete Slabs and Walls
Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 12
inches. Fill sleeve joint with lead, non-shrink grout, or other approved material. Set posts for
support of removable fence sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold
posts aligned and plumb without use of lead or setting material .
E. Bracing
02821 - 5 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
2 . 02 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchor slots, reglets and inserts of type, size and spacing required by trades involved,
and shown on plans.
B . Vapor Barrier: 6 mil Polyethylene Film, such as "visqueen". Refer to the Building
Plan Sections for specific applications .
C . Vapor Retarder: 10 mil vapor retarder such as Perminator by WJ Meadows. Refer to
the Building Plan Sections for specific applications.
D . Chemical Curing Compound: Application of a curing compound shall be made to all
slabs and such application shall conform to ASTM C-309 . The compound shall be
applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after
any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete
surface. It shall not be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other
material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent
bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to
receive bonded applications.
Acceptable materials shall be one of the following :
1 . Burke Company Aqua resin Cure
2 . Sika Corporation Sikagard Cure/Hard
3 . Sonneborn Hydrocide
E . Expansion Joint Water Stops: Continuous, pre-formed, finned, center bulb type,
polyvinyl chloride, of sufficient width to provide 3 " minimum embedment in concrete
each side. Equal to Greenstreak #703 .
F. Pre-molded Joint Filler : Bituminous Fiber Type, ASTM D- 1751 -83 and D 545 - 77 equal
to "Celotex Flexcell" of thickness and width indicated or required .
G . Reinforcement shall be cleaned of all scale and excessive rust. All reinforcement shall
be set with the standard accessories as per ACI 315 -74 . Minimum coverage of
reinforcement shall be as follows :
a, Footings — 3 " minimum.
b. Slabs - 3/4' minimum.
C. Beams and Columns — 1 - 1 /2" minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A. Concrete Mix :
1 . All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed and in accordance with ASTM
_ Specifications C-94 (Latest Edition) .
S
J
03300-3
2 . Minimum 5 bags cement per yard of concrete. (( 1l
B . Concrete Strength: 1. J
1 . Unless specifically noted otherwise, all concrete shall have a minimum
compressive strength of f c = 3000 psi .
2 . A design mix shall be prepared by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer
employed by the concrete supplier.
3 . The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer the concrete materials and
the concrete mix designs proposed for use with a written request for acceptance.
This submittal shall include the results of all testing performed to qualify the
materials and to establish the mix designs .
C . Job Tempering:
1 . All Concrete shall be placed within 1 - 1 /2 hours after introduction of water to the
mix .
2 . Under no condition may additional water be added that exceeds the allowable
gallons stipulated on the batch ticket.
3 . Submit time stamped batching tickets on delivery of concrete to job site. r/
4 . All concrete where water has been added will be removed and replace with
proper concrete at no cost to the Owner.
S . When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 75 minutes . When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3 .02 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A . Review: No concrete shall be placed until all reinforcing steel, pipes, sleeves, inserts,
etc. have been set in place and reviewed by the Owner' s representative. Contractor
shall notify the Architect of scheduled pours 24 hours prior to pouring.
B . Placing: Concrete shall be placed in properly cleaned and prepared forms in accordance
with the requirements of ACI=301 . Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that
the concrete is at all times plastic.
C . Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients
and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is
maintained . All other requirements of ACI-301 shall be followed .
1
03300-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions : Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter. The maximum allowable dimension of a stone
or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches. If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B . All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at a location
acceptable to Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall , coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide far natural
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .02 GRADING
Grading shall be performed in accordance with Section 02302 EXCAVATION
AND FILL.
3 . 03 PIPE INSTALLATION
All pipe and structures shall be installed on dry, firm bedding. The free-water surface
shall be lowered to at least 12 inches below the bedding surface prior to placing pipe or
structures and shall be maintained at that depth throughout bedding, haunching, and
initial backfilling of the work. During subsequent backfilling, the water level shall be
kept sufficiently below the working surface to allow compaction of backfill to the
required density, and until required density tests have been performed.
A_ Pipe Installation
Excavations shall be trimmed to required elevations . Objects which impair backfilling or
compaction shall be removed. Over-excavation shall be corrected with fill material of
coarse aggregate.
Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects before installing. Defective materials shall
be removed from site.
Pipe interior shall be cleaned before installation. Pipe ends shall be sealed when work is
not in progress.
Pipe shall be laid to line and grade, with bell end upstream.
Maximum deviation from design elevation shall not exceed 0. 1 feet at any point in the
system.
02630 - 5 02630 — Storm Sewage
2 . Minimum 5 bags cement per yard of concrete. (( 1l
B . Concrete Strength: 1. J
1 . Unless specifically noted otherwise, all concrete shall have a minimum
compressive strength of f c = 3000 psi .
2 . A design mix shall be prepared by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer
employed by the concrete supplier.
3 . The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer the concrete materials and
the concrete mix designs proposed for use with a written request for acceptance.
This submittal shall include the results of all testing performed to qualify the
materials and to establish the mix designs .
C . Job Tempering:
1 . All Concrete shall be placed within 1 - 1 /2 hours after introduction of water to the
mix .
2 . Under no condition may additional water be added that exceeds the allowable
gallons stipulated on the batch ticket.
3 . Submit time stamped batching tickets on delivery of concrete to job site. r/
4 . All concrete where water has been added will be removed and replace with
proper concrete at no cost to the Owner.
S . When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 75 minutes . When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3 .02 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A . Review: No concrete shall be placed until all reinforcing steel, pipes, sleeves, inserts,
etc. have been set in place and reviewed by the Owner' s representative. Contractor
shall notify the Architect of scheduled pours 24 hours prior to pouring.
B . Placing: Concrete shall be placed in properly cleaned and prepared forms in accordance
with the requirements of ACI=301 . Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that
the concrete is at all times plastic.
C . Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients
and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is
maintained . All other requirements of ACI-301 shall be followed .
1
03300-4
D . Depositing : Concrete shall be deposited continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be deposited on concrete which is hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
E . Consolidation: All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding, or
forking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around
embedded items, and into corner of forms eliminating all air or stone pockets which
may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness .
F. All slabs on grade are to be Regular '/4 rock concrete at 3000 psi ultimate strength at 28
days. NO PUMP MIX (pea rock) WILL BE ACCEPTED for any slab on prepared
grade . This does not prohibit the pumping of the regular '/ rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints :
1 . Locate as shown on the drawings or near points of minimum shear and as
approved by Architect/Engineer for beam or slabs . Construction joints shall be
straight saw-cut by a walk behind motorized saw, tooled , mechanical or actual
cold joints as called out on the plans.
2 . Locate joints in vertical members, walls at underside of floors or beams, and at
tops of footings .
3 . Floor slabs keyed joints maximum spacing 20' plus or minus each direction
unless otherwise noted.
A . Expansion Joints -
1 .
oints :1 . Locate as shown on drawings .
2 . Joints in walkways maximum at 20' o.c. , snap lines and saw-cut 1 /8 " wide by 1 "
deep between expansion joints in equal bays at not over 5 ' o .c. , within 24 hours
of concrete placement or until concrete is traffrcable with power saw.
3 . Joints shall be straight and smooth. They shall have hardened before fresh
concrete is deposited against them.
4 . Do not place expansion joints where slabs are up against the exterior of masonry
walls, unless otherwise detailed on plans . Do not place any expansion material
on the inside face of masonry walls where slabs are poured against same walls .
5 . After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous
operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or
joints, is completed.
03300-5
MENNEN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a
compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and two diagonal truss
rods and truss tighteners used as tension members.
F. Top Rail
Install top rails before installing chain-link fabric . Pass top rail through intermediate post
caps. Provide expansion coupling spaced as indicated.
G. Bottom Tension Wire
Install bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top
and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.
H. Fabric
Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top rail and bottom rail and top wire and bottom wire,
close to both sides of each post and at maximum intervals of 24 inches on center. Secure
fabric to posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally
weaving to integral fastening loops of end, comer, pull, and gate posts for full length of each
post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured. Install fabric so that
bottom of fabric is 2 inches above ground level . Install fence fabric to provide, approximately
2 inch deflection at center of fabric span between two posts, when a force of approximately
30 pounds is applied perpendicular to fabric. Fabric should return to its original position
when force is removed.
3 .03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Post Caps
Design post caps to accommodate top rail . Install post caps as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Gates
Install swing gates to swing through 180 degrees from closed to open. Install sliding
cantilever gates to clear the opening dimension(s) shown on plans .
C. Padlocks
Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or
gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.
3 .04 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the site. Restore disturbed ground
areas to original condition.
END OF SECTION
02821 - 6 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
D . Depositing : Concrete shall be deposited continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be deposited on concrete which is hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
E . Consolidation: All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding, or
forking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around
embedded items, and into corner of forms eliminating all air or stone pockets which
may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness .
F. All slabs on grade are to be Regular '/4 rock concrete at 3000 psi ultimate strength at 28
days. NO PUMP MIX (pea rock) WILL BE ACCEPTED for any slab on prepared
grade . This does not prohibit the pumping of the regular '/ rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints :
1 . Locate as shown on the drawings or near points of minimum shear and as
approved by Architect/Engineer for beam or slabs . Construction joints shall be
straight saw-cut by a walk behind motorized saw, tooled , mechanical or actual
cold joints as called out on the plans.
2 . Locate joints in vertical members, walls at underside of floors or beams, and at
tops of footings .
3 . Floor slabs keyed joints maximum spacing 20' plus or minus each direction
unless otherwise noted.
A . Expansion Joints -
1 .
oints :1 . Locate as shown on drawings .
2 . Joints in walkways maximum at 20' o.c. , snap lines and saw-cut 1 /8 " wide by 1 "
deep between expansion joints in equal bays at not over 5 ' o .c. , within 24 hours
of concrete placement or until concrete is traffrcable with power saw.
3 . Joints shall be straight and smooth. They shall have hardened before fresh
concrete is deposited against them.
4 . Do not place expansion joints where slabs are up against the exterior of masonry
walls, unless otherwise detailed on plans . Do not place any expansion material
on the inside face of masonry walls where slabs are poured against same walls .
5 . After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous
operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or
joints, is completed.
03300-5
3 . 04 CURING
A. Begin curing of concrete as soon as practicable after placing, but not more than 3 hours
thereafter. Provide a total wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees F minimum
temperature .
B . Curing of structural members shall begin immediately after removal of forms .
C . Apply curing compounds as specified above, clear for exposed slabs. Compound used
on floors that are to receive tile or other additional finish shall be compatible with
adhesives and finish materials . Apply first coat of curing compound as soon as possible
after pouring .
3 . 05 FINISHES
A. Formed Surfaces :
1 . Finishes - Defined :
a. Rough Form Finish: Reasonable true to line and place . Tie holes and
defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1 /4" in height shall be
chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the
texture imparted by the forms .
t �
b. Smooth Form Finish: The form facing material shall produce a smooth,
hard, uniform texture on the concrete . It may be plywood, tempered
concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, or other material capable of
producing the desired finish. The arrangement of the facing material
shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the
practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing
capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grain,
torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will
impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tie holes
and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. It is
the intention of this surface to produce an Architectural Surface suitable
for public view as a completed surface to receive paint. Strict quality
control of this surface shall be required. See ACI 301 .
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: To be applied to all smooth form finishes . (All
work will conform with ACI Standard 301 -latest edition) to produce a
smooth architectural effect.
2 . Finishes - Unspecified Buildings: If the finish is unspecified, the following
finishes shall be used as applicable.
03300-6 i
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
I . Unless otherwise specified herein or directed by the Engineer, all pipe and fittings
shall be laid and joined in accordance with the appropriate manufacturer's directions
with regard to allowable barrel and joint deflection, spigot seating depth, gasket
placement, lubrication, bolt torque, field cutting/trimming, and pushing/pulling
methods for joint assembly.
2. Prior to placing in the trench, each pipe section, joint, and fitting shall be checked
for damage or defects such as cracks, blisters, coating/lining separation, gouges, and
the like. Any damage or defective materials found shall not be installed unless
approved by the Engineer, and shall be marked "REJECTED" and immediately
removed from the work site.
3 . Prior to installation, the interior of all pipe and fittings shall be inspected for debris,
sediment accumulation, sand, and the like, and shall be cleaned as required to
remove such foreign matter. Joint surfaces such as gaskets, gasket grooves, spigots,
and bells shall be cleaned of sand and grit prior to joining.
4 . Gasket lubricants shall be stored and applied in a manner that will prevent
significant contamination or pick-up of sand and grit.
5 . The pipe spigot shall be centered in and aligned with its mating bell prior to
insertion and forced evenly in a straight line to seating depth, taking care not to
over-bell the joint. Where required, deflections shall be made after the joint is
seated.
6. Joining shall generally be done by hand or by push-bar with a cushion block
whenever pipe size and weight permit. When a mechanical pushing/pulling device
such as chain-puller, come-along, and the like is required, the device shall be usedsin
a manner that will not deform gouge, chip, or otherwise damage the pipe or cause
significant disturbance of the prepared bedding. In no case shall joints be mad&Fby ;
"popping-on" or swinging the spigot into the bell to seat the joint.
7. Fittings and appurtenances shall be fully, independently supported on the bedding or
on a permanent foundation so as not to bear on the pipe upon completion of the
installation.
8 . The installed piping system shall be kept free of dirt, trench water, and other foreign
matter during the progress of the work, and all open ends of the line shall be sealed
with watertight plugs whenever work is not in progress .
9 . Empty installed pipe shall be secured against flotation due to potential trench
flooding by timely placement of sufficient backfill or approved anchoring devices
sufficient to resist pipe buoyancy.
B. Corrugated Metal Pipe Installation
Corrugated pipe with fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, and in accordance with ASTM A 798 .
02630 - 6 02630 — Storm Sewage
3 . 04 CURING
A. Begin curing of concrete as soon as practicable after placing, but not more than 3 hours
thereafter. Provide a total wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees F minimum
temperature .
B . Curing of structural members shall begin immediately after removal of forms .
C . Apply curing compounds as specified above, clear for exposed slabs. Compound used
on floors that are to receive tile or other additional finish shall be compatible with
adhesives and finish materials . Apply first coat of curing compound as soon as possible
after pouring .
3 . 05 FINISHES
A. Formed Surfaces :
1 . Finishes - Defined :
a. Rough Form Finish: Reasonable true to line and place . Tie holes and
defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1 /4" in height shall be
chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the
texture imparted by the forms .
t �
b. Smooth Form Finish: The form facing material shall produce a smooth,
hard, uniform texture on the concrete . It may be plywood, tempered
concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, or other material capable of
producing the desired finish. The arrangement of the facing material
shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the
practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing
capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grain,
torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will
impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tie holes
and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. It is
the intention of this surface to produce an Architectural Surface suitable
for public view as a completed surface to receive paint. Strict quality
control of this surface shall be required. See ACI 301 .
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: To be applied to all smooth form finishes . (All
work will conform with ACI Standard 301 -latest edition) to produce a
smooth architectural effect.
2 . Finishes - Unspecified Buildings: If the finish is unspecified, the following
finishes shall be used as applicable.
03300-6 i
a. Rough Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view,
including concrete to receive stucco .
b. Smooth Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces exposed to view.
C . Smooth Rubbed Finish: Concrete shall have a Smooth Rubbed Finish
applied to produce an architectural effect.
3 . Patching : Immediately after stripping forms patch all defective areas with mortar
similar to the concrete mix except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted .
Bulges, minor honeycomb and other minor defects, as designated by the
Architect, shall be patched only where exposed to view. Clean, dampen, and fill
tie holes with patching mortar. All patching shall follow procedures and
conform to ACI 301 .
a . Major defective areas, as judged by the Owner' s representative including
those resulting from leakage of forms, excessive honeycomb, large
bulges and large offsets at form joints, shall be chipped away down to
sound concrete. The patching mortar shall be pressed in for a complete
bond and finished to match adjacent areas, or where defective areas
impair the strength of the member in question, as judged by the Owner' s
representative, the member shall be removed or united as determined by
the Owner' s representative.
b . Minor defective areas, as judged by the Owner ' s representative including
honeycomb, air bubbles, holes resulting from removal of ties, and those
resulting from leakage of forms shall be patched with grout without
resorting to chipping. Minor bulges and offsets at form joints: shall- be
finished as specified herein below.
B . Uniform Surfaces — Flatwork-
1 . General : Grade and screed the surfaces to the exact elevation, or slope shown or
required . Make proper allowances for setting beds for ceramic tile. After
screeding tamp mixture thoroughly to drive the coarse aggregate down from the
surfaces and apply the applicable finish specified hereinafter. Always slope
exterior walks away from the building at 1 /8 " per foot. Uncovered walks slope at
1 /8 " perfootor crown. Covered walks between buildings always slope to drain
to the exterior and away from the buildings. At cross intersections of the walks,
and at exterior doors, warp the surfaces to drain water from the walls. Provide
control joints as indicated on drawings. Follow the requirements and procedures
of ACI 301 .
2 . Finishes - Definitions (See also ACI 301 ) •
03300-7
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Qualifications of Workmen:
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and the
requirements of this work, and who shall direct all work performed under
this Section.
B . Codes and Standards :
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of Building Code
that has jurisdiction and Occupational Safety and Health Act.
2. Where provision of pertinent codes and standards conflict with the
requirements of this Section of these Specifications, the more stringent
provisions shall govern.
j3 . Product Standard PS 1 -83 for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
4. American Concrete Institute Standard recommended practice for concrete
formwork, ACI 347 -latest edition.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Lumber:
I . All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as
allowed for under Re-use of Forms in Part 3 of this Section of the
Specifications. All form lumber shall be one of the following, a
combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Engineer.
a. "Plyform", Class 15/8 " or 3/4" PS 1066, C-D exterior plywood,
bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association.
b. Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four (4)
sides .
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
03100-1
a. Rough Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view,
including concrete to receive stucco .
b. Smooth Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces exposed to view.
C . Smooth Rubbed Finish: Concrete shall have a Smooth Rubbed Finish
applied to produce an architectural effect.
3 . Patching : Immediately after stripping forms patch all defective areas with mortar
similar to the concrete mix except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted .
Bulges, minor honeycomb and other minor defects, as designated by the
Architect, shall be patched only where exposed to view. Clean, dampen, and fill
tie holes with patching mortar. All patching shall follow procedures and
conform to ACI 301 .
a . Major defective areas, as judged by the Owner' s representative including
those resulting from leakage of forms, excessive honeycomb, large
bulges and large offsets at form joints, shall be chipped away down to
sound concrete. The patching mortar shall be pressed in for a complete
bond and finished to match adjacent areas, or where defective areas
impair the strength of the member in question, as judged by the Owner' s
representative, the member shall be removed or united as determined by
the Owner' s representative.
b . Minor defective areas, as judged by the Owner ' s representative including
honeycomb, air bubbles, holes resulting from removal of ties, and those
resulting from leakage of forms shall be patched with grout without
resorting to chipping. Minor bulges and offsets at form joints: shall- be
finished as specified herein below.
B . Uniform Surfaces — Flatwork-
1 . General : Grade and screed the surfaces to the exact elevation, or slope shown or
required . Make proper allowances for setting beds for ceramic tile. After
screeding tamp mixture thoroughly to drive the coarse aggregate down from the
surfaces and apply the applicable finish specified hereinafter. Always slope
exterior walks away from the building at 1 /8 " per foot. Uncovered walks slope at
1 /8 " perfootor crown. Covered walks between buildings always slope to drain
to the exterior and away from the buildings. At cross intersections of the walks,
and at exterior doors, warp the surfaces to drain water from the walls. Provide
control joints as indicated on drawings. Follow the requirements and procedures
of ACI 301 .
2 . Finishes - Definitions (See also ACI 301 ) •
03300-7
a. Scratched Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated
and leveled to a Class B tolerance, surface shall be roughened with stiff
brush, rates or metal lath roller, before final set.
b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and
leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until water sheen has
disappeared and/or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper
operations of a power driven float. Consolidate with power driven float,
check trueness of surface, fill low spots and cut down high spots to achieve
Class B tolerance. Then, re-float to uniform, smooth, granular texture .
C . Troweled Finish: Finish same as above for floated finish and in addition,
steel trowel the surface by hand to produce a smooth, glassy, impervious
surface free of trowel marks to a Class A tolerance . On surfaces intended
to support floor coverings, defects of sufficient magnitude to show through
the floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
d . Broom Finish : Finish same as above for floated finish to a Class B
tolerance and then draw a broom or burlap belt across surface transversely.
C . Finishes - Unspecified
1 . When type of finish is not specified, the following shall be applicable:
a. Scratched Finish: For surfaces to receive bonded cementitious application,
i . e . ceramic tile, single ply epoxy flooring etc. , refer to drawings for
locations of specific floor coverings.
b. Troweled Finish: For surfaces intended as smooth walking surfaces or for /
receipt of floor coverings .
G. Broom Finish: For exterior walks , loggias , curbs and where indicated on
drawings.
d . Float Finish: Exterior platforms , steps, stairways, landings, and ramps .
D . Specific Finish Locations :
1 . Slab areas to receive ceramic tile, resilient floor coverings, specialized
gymnasium flooring, or slabs within a minimum of 2 feet each side of accordion
doors shall be "dead level" - Class A. All other slab
areas - Class B .
E . Tolerances for finishes as specified shall be as follows :
1 . Class A - True planes within 1 /8 " in 10 ft.
2 . Class B - True planes within 1 /4" in 10 ft.
03300-8
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Installation
Reinforced concrete pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, and ACPA 01 -103 .
3 .04 PIPE BEDDING
A. Class A (Concrete Cradle or Concrete Arch Bedding)
I . This class of bedding shall be used only where specifically shown in the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer. If the use of a concrete cradle is required the pipe shall
be bedded in a monolithic cradle of a 1 ,500 PSI concrete with a minimum thickness
equal to 1/4 the outside pipe diameter or to a minimum of four inches under the
barrel, whichever is greatest, and extending up to the sides of the pipe to a height
equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The cradle shall have an overall width
equal to 1 - 1 /4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width equal to the
outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
2. If a concrete arch is required, the pipe shall be embedded in carefully compacted
Type 1 material having a minimum thickness equal to 1 /4 the outside pipe diameter
or to a minimum of four inches under the barrel, which ever is greater, and
extending up the sides for a height equal to 1 /2 of the outside pipe diameter. The top
half of the pipe shall be covered with a monolithic Class C concrete arch having a ` ?
minimum thickness equal to 1/4 the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum of "
four inches over the crown of the pipe, whichever is greater, and extending down the
sides for a depth equal to 1/2 of the outside pipe diameter. The arch shall have an
over all width equal to 1 1/4 of the outside diameter of the pipe or a minimum width
equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus eight inches, whichever is greater.
B. Class B (First-Class Bedding)
1 . Where Class B Bedding is required, the trench shall be excavated below the planned
bottom of the pipe to a depth equal to 1 /4 the nominal diameter of the pipe, or 6
inches, whichever is greater. The over excavated depth shall be backfilled using
either Type 1 or Type 3 materials carefully compacted and shaped using hand tools
so as to provide a uniform support for the lower portion of the pipe barrel. Shaping
under the pipe bells shall be so that the bell does not support the pipe and joints can
be made without bedding material interference.
2. At the option of the Contractor, Class B Bedding may be used in place of Class C
(Ordinary Bedding) provided that the exercise of this option shall create no
additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing
of those portions of the project on which he proposes to exercise this option.
C. Class C (Ordinary Bedding)
1 . The bottom of the trench shall be hand shaped to provide a firm bedding for the
utility pipe. The utility shall be firmly bedded in undisturbed firm soil . The bedding
shall be shaped so that the pipe will be in continuous contact therewith for its full
length and shall provide a minimum bottom segment for the pipe equal to 0.6 of the
outside diameter of the barrel . Excavation under the bell shall be sufficient so that
the bell does not support the pipe and the joint can be made without interference.
02630 - 7 02630 — Storm Sewage
� )
-�
C
a. Scratched Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated
and leveled to a Class B tolerance, surface shall be roughened with stiff
brush, rates or metal lath roller, before final set.
b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and
leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until water sheen has
disappeared and/or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper
operations of a power driven float. Consolidate with power driven float,
check trueness of surface, fill low spots and cut down high spots to achieve
Class B tolerance. Then, re-float to uniform, smooth, granular texture .
C . Troweled Finish: Finish same as above for floated finish and in addition,
steel trowel the surface by hand to produce a smooth, glassy, impervious
surface free of trowel marks to a Class A tolerance . On surfaces intended
to support floor coverings, defects of sufficient magnitude to show through
the floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
d . Broom Finish : Finish same as above for floated finish to a Class B
tolerance and then draw a broom or burlap belt across surface transversely.
C . Finishes - Unspecified
1 . When type of finish is not specified, the following shall be applicable:
a. Scratched Finish: For surfaces to receive bonded cementitious application,
i . e . ceramic tile, single ply epoxy flooring etc. , refer to drawings for
locations of specific floor coverings.
b. Troweled Finish: For surfaces intended as smooth walking surfaces or for /
receipt of floor coverings .
G. Broom Finish: For exterior walks , loggias , curbs and where indicated on
drawings.
d . Float Finish: Exterior platforms , steps, stairways, landings, and ramps .
D . Specific Finish Locations :
1 . Slab areas to receive ceramic tile, resilient floor coverings, specialized
gymnasium flooring, or slabs within a minimum of 2 feet each side of accordion
doors shall be "dead level" - Class A. All other slab
areas - Class B .
E . Tolerances for finishes as specified shall be as follows :
1 . Class A - True planes within 1 /8 " in 10 ft.
2 . Class B - True planes within 1 /4" in 10 ft.
03300-8
NOTE : Tolerances shall be measured by placing a 10-ft. straightedge anywhere in any direction.
J. 'END OF SECTION * * *
,l
03300-9
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of
concrete formwork, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance
approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection and Soil Treatment:
1 . Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is completed to the point where
this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all pertinent codes
and regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design.
3 . Treat underlying soil to prevent vegetation growth and insect infestation .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of mortar, and able to withstand pressures without excessive
deflection when filled with wet concrete.
B . Embedded Items :
1 . Set all required steel frames, angles, grilles, bolts, inserts, and other such
items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed.
C. Bracing:
1 . Properly brace and fie the forms together so as to maintain position and
shape and to ensure safety to personnel.
2 . Construct all bracing and supporting members of amply size and strength to
safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which
they may be subjected.
3 . Space the forms the proper distance apart and securely tie them together,
using metal spreader ties that provide positive tying and accurate spreading.
03100-2
NOTE : Tolerances shall be measured by placing a 10-ft. straightedge anywhere in any direction.
J. 'END OF SECTION * * *
,l
03300-9
SECTION 03420 - PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Furnish and install all required Precast Lintels and Door Headers in the locations called
out on the architectural and structural drawings as manufactured by WEKIWA
CONCRETE PRODUCTS, INC . or an approved equal . Lintels available through CSR
Rinker.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Concrete Formwork Section 03100
Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
Cast in place Concrete Section 03300
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
L ASTM A615 (Grade 60) for reinforcing bars .
2 . ASTM A416, 7 wire for prestress strands.
B . ACI Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI 315 , Detail Reinforcement.
2. Concrete Operations shall comply with ACI Standards .
3 . Design and Construction shall conform to the specification of the national
concrete masonry association and ACI 530.
4 . ACI 318 -95, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete .
C . Florida Building Code, latest edition.
D . American Society of Civil Engineers minimum design loads for Buildings and
Other Structures (ASCE 7-95) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 days :
1 . Pre-cast w/standard reinforcement- 3500 PSI .
2 . Pre-cast w/prestress reinforcement- 5000 PSI.
3 . Concrete Fill (placed in field)- 3000 PSI.
2 . 02 MASONRY
A. Minimum masonry unit strength fm 1500 PSI.
B . Mortar shall be type-M .
03420-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
D. Unsuitable Bedding Material
1 . Class C Bedding shall be used for all pipeline construction unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings or unless unsuitable material is encountered at the bedding surface.
In the event that the materials encountered at normal bottom of trench excavation
are, in the judgment of the Engineer, unsuitable to act as foundation for the pipe,
such material shall be excavated for the full width of the trench to the depth
necessary to obtain a suitable foundation. The Engineer will notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the necessity for and extent of the material to be removed and the
Contractor shall remove such unsuitable material as soon as possible and backfill in
accordance with the requirements for Class B Bedding. All unsuitable material shall
be disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .05 PIPE TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Initial Backfill
1 . Initial backfill shall be placed as soon as possible after laying the pipe and shall
maintain a pace with the pipe laying so that no more than five pipe joints separate
laying and backfilling operations. Initial back fill shall include all haunching and
backfill from the top of the bedding to a compacted depth of twelve inches over the
pipe. All haunching and backfilling shall be done in the dry.
2. Initial backfill shall be done as specified below:
a. Haunching of the pipe shall be by hand placement and compaction of material
in maximum 4 inch layers from the bottom of the trench to the springline of the
pipe, taking care to fill all voids below and around the pipe. Backfilling shall
be carefully continued in layers not exceeding 6 inches in thickness for the full
trench width until the compacted fill is 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
b. During initial backfilling the fill shall be deposited evenly along both sides of
the pipe from a height not to exceed 2 feet above the top of pipe, and fill shall
not be dropped directly on the unprotected pipe surface.
C. Where thrust blocks, encasement, or other cast-in-place concrete items are
below grade, no backfilling shall start until the specific items have been
inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
d. The backfill to one foot above the top of the utility shall be thoroughly
compacted with curved end tamping bars under and on each side of the pipe
and flat tamped between the pipe and trench wall and shall be completed
before the remainder of the trench is backfilled. Initial backfill shall be
compacted to 100 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-
180. No subsequent backfill will be permitted until the initial backfill has been
accepted by the Engineer or his authorized representative.
3 .06 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Excavation for drainage structures shall be of sufficient size to permit construction of the
structure to progress without hindrance from the walls of the excavation or from sloughed
materials. No less than 12 inches clearance shall be provided between excavation walls
and walls of the structure. If soil conditions encountered at the bottom of the excavation
02630 - 8 02630 — Storm Sewage
( �
��
C
SECTION 03420 - PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Furnish and install all required Precast Lintels and Door Headers in the locations called
out on the architectural and structural drawings as manufactured by WEKIWA
CONCRETE PRODUCTS, INC . or an approved equal . Lintels available through CSR
Rinker.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Concrete Formwork Section 03100
Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
Cast in place Concrete Section 03300
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
L ASTM A615 (Grade 60) for reinforcing bars .
2 . ASTM A416, 7 wire for prestress strands.
B . ACI Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI 315 , Detail Reinforcement.
2. Concrete Operations shall comply with ACI Standards .
3 . Design and Construction shall conform to the specification of the national
concrete masonry association and ACI 530.
4 . ACI 318 -95, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete .
C . Florida Building Code, latest edition.
D . American Society of Civil Engineers minimum design loads for Buildings and
Other Structures (ASCE 7-95) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 days :
1 . Pre-cast w/standard reinforcement- 3500 PSI .
2 . Pre-cast w/prestress reinforcement- 5000 PSI.
3 . Concrete Fill (placed in field)- 3000 PSI.
2 . 02 MASONRY
A. Minimum masonry unit strength fm 1500 PSI.
B . Mortar shall be type-M .
03420-1
2 .03 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615 (grade 60) . -
B . Prestress Strands : ASTM A416, 7 -wire.
C . Steel is placed in the precast lintel at time of fabrication.
D . Minimum coverage of steel to be 3/4 inch for top bars and 1 . 5 inches for bottom
bars .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times
to assure continuity of installation.
B . Store units at project site to ensure against cracking, distortion, staining, or other
physical damage, and so that markings are visible.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A . Lift and support units at designated lift points . Shoring of precast units
shall be installed and removed solely by the contractor under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer. ,
B . Minimum bearing required at each end is 4 inches . Bearing preferred is 8 inches . -�
C. Do not install any damaged units .
3 .03 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast concrete units
that meet requirements of this section. The contractor shall also be responsible
for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from
corrections to precast lintels .
* * *END OF SECTION'
03420-2
3 .03 RE-USE OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Re-use of forms shall be subject to advance written approval of the
Structural Engineer or his designer.
B . Requirements :
1 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule of placement of
concrete from the schedule obtainable if all form were new.
2 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms no
less acceptable appearance to finished exposed concrete.
3 . 04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. General :
1 . Minimum periods to form removal after concrete placement shall be as
follows :
JSlabs and curbs 24 hours
Vertical walls (4'-0 " Ht.) 36 hours
Vertical walls (over 4'-0" Ht.) 7 days
2 . Removal of formwork may be extended if deemed necessary by the
Structural Engineer.
B . Removal :
1 . Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping
off inside the wall surface and point up and rubbing the resulting pockets to
match the surrounding areas.
2 . Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader rods and sleeve nuts, using
water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement
grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one
( 1 ) part Portland cement and two and one-half (2- 1 /2) parts sand; apply
grout immediately after removing forms .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
03100-3
2 .03 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615 (grade 60) . -
B . Prestress Strands : ASTM A416, 7 -wire.
C . Steel is placed in the precast lintel at time of fabrication.
D . Minimum coverage of steel to be 3/4 inch for top bars and 1 . 5 inches for bottom
bars .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times
to assure continuity of installation.
B . Store units at project site to ensure against cracking, distortion, staining, or other
physical damage, and so that markings are visible.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A . Lift and support units at designated lift points . Shoring of precast units
shall be installed and removed solely by the contractor under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer. ,
B . Minimum bearing required at each end is 4 inches . Bearing preferred is 8 inches . -�
C. Do not install any damaged units .
3 .03 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast concrete units
that meet requirements of this section. The contractor shall also be responsible
for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from
corrections to precast lintels .
* * *END OF SECTION'
03420-2
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
1 PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Edition)
ASTM C90 Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block
ASTM C270 Type-M mortar.
ASTM C150-98 Type I portland cement.
ASTM C207-97 Hydrated Lime
B . Construction Tolerances :
1 . Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, do not exceed 1 /4" .
2 . Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed
minus 1 /4 " nor plus
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer ' s specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type
complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage,
installations and protection.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each day' s work to protect completed work that has not had
enough time for the mortar to cure and is still subject to rain damage.
B . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place .
04230-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
would in the sole opinion of the Engineer be unsuitable for foundation, the Contractor
shall remove and dispose of the unsuitable material to the depth where suitable bearing
can be obtained. The determination of the necessity for and the extent of additional
excavation shall be made by the Engineer, who shall inform the Contractor in writing
regarding such necessity and the extent. This excavation shall then be backfilled to the
appropriate grade with Type I or Type 3 backfill material, placed in maximum 12- inch
layers and compacted to a density equal to 100 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 .
B . Installation of drainage structures shall conform to the details as shown on the Drawings
and, unless otherwise specified, shall conform with Section 425 of the 1986 Edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Backfill shall
be placed in lifts not to exceed 12 inches loose depth and compacted to 95 percent of
maximum density per AASHTO T- 180 in unpaved areas and to required subgrade density
in areas of paving or curbing.
Backfill shall not be placed against cast-in-place concrete structures until the concrete has
attained sufficient strength to resist the load without damage, and in no case, less than
seven days after the concrete was placed.
3 .07 SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL
A. Subsequent backfill is that backfill between the initial backfill and the finished ground
level or bottom of sub base.
B. Subsequent backfill material shall be placed full trench width in horizontal layers not
exceeding 12 inches loose depth and compacted by power-operated tampers, rollers, or
vibratory equipment to a density equal to 98 percent of the maximum density as
determined by AASHTO T- 180 for pipe placed under and adjacent to roadways or paved
surfaces, and 95 percent under areas where no pavement is to be constructed and
vehicular traffic is not to pass over the pipe . Each layer shall be compacted -to the
specified density prior to placing subsequent layers. The thickness of the loose layer may
be increased when in-place density tests show that the specified density can be obtained.
3 .08 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Type 2 material shall be used for initial backfill and subsequent backfill with the
following conditions: Initial backfill shall be predominately sandy material free from rock
or stone greater than 1 1/2 inches diameter, and the maximum allowable dimension of a
stone or rock fragment for subsequent backfill shall be 6 inches . If in the opinion of the
Engineer the Type 2 material will not provide adequate and uniform support for load
distribution to the pipe, the Contractor shall obtain and place either Type 1 or Type 3
backfill as determined by the Engineer.
B. All excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be placed on site at an acceptable
location, by Owner, or hauled off the job at the price set forth in the accepted Bid
Documents. All material that is brought in from other sources for backfill shall be at the
price set forth in the Contract.
C. Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the
trenches where space is available to protect against caving or sloughing into the trench.
Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall coordinate the
site location with the Engineer and shall maintain his operations to provide for natural
02630 - 9 02630 — Storm Sewage
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
1 PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Edition)
ASTM C90 Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block
ASTM C270 Type-M mortar.
ASTM C150-98 Type I portland cement.
ASTM C207-97 Hydrated Lime
B . Construction Tolerances :
1 . Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, do not exceed 1 /4" .
2 . Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed
minus 1 /4 " nor plus
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer ' s specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type
complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage,
installations and protection.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each day' s work to protect completed work that has not had
enough time for the mortar to cure and is still subject to rain damage.
B . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place .
04230-1
C . Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such l
masonry. J
D . Protect sill, ledges, finished door and window frames and projections from
droppings of mortar.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 . MATERIALS
Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block: ASTM C90- Grade N , Type II, cured 28 days
Mortar: Type "M", ASTM C270
Cement : ASTM C150-98, Type I
Hydrated Lime : ASTM C 207 -97
Sand: Clean Masons Sand
Water:
Potable
2 . 02 CONCRETE BLOCK
A . Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type , face
size, exposed face and, under each form of block included, for weight classification.
1 . Grade N, Type II C .M .U . , normal weight unit, fm ' 1500 psi .
2 . Size: Manufacturer' s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16"
long X 8 " high ( 15 - 5 /8" x 7 - 5/8 " actual) X thicknesses indicated . Splits
and halves as appropriate for coursing in vertical and horizontal directions .
3 . Hollow Load-Bearing Block: ASTM C-90 and as follows :
a. Weight Classification: Normal weight .
b. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block types when
fire rated walls occur. es for
C . Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block o
receive
finished block to receive paint or standard stucco block tto
stucco .
2 .03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C- 150, Type 1, except Type III maybe used for cold
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
required mortar color.
B . Hydrated Lime: ASTM C-297 , Type S .
04230-2 \
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their
installation and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.
B . Codes and Standards
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the Building Code
that has jurisdiction.
2 . Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this
Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
1 A . Shop Drawings
1 . Within thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract, and before any concrete
reinforcement materials are fabricated and/or delivered to the job site,
submit Shop Drawings to the Architect.
2 . Do not fabricate and/or deliver concrete reinforcement to the job site until
receipt of Shop Drawings approval from the Architect.
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
1 . Use all means necessary to protect concrete reinforcement before, during,
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades .
2 . Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease,
and other bond-breaking coatings.
B. Placements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
03200-1
C . Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such l
masonry. J
D . Protect sill, ledges, finished door and window frames and projections from
droppings of mortar.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 . MATERIALS
Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block: ASTM C90- Grade N , Type II, cured 28 days
Mortar: Type "M", ASTM C270
Cement : ASTM C150-98, Type I
Hydrated Lime : ASTM C 207 -97
Sand: Clean Masons Sand
Water:
Potable
2 . 02 CONCRETE BLOCK
A . Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type , face
size, exposed face and, under each form of block included, for weight classification.
1 . Grade N, Type II C .M .U . , normal weight unit, fm ' 1500 psi .
2 . Size: Manufacturer' s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16"
long X 8 " high ( 15 - 5 /8" x 7 - 5/8 " actual) X thicknesses indicated . Splits
and halves as appropriate for coursing in vertical and horizontal directions .
3 . Hollow Load-Bearing Block: ASTM C-90 and as follows :
a. Weight Classification: Normal weight .
b. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block types when
fire rated walls occur. es for
C . Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block o
receive
finished block to receive paint or standard stucco block tto
stucco .
2 .03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C- 150, Type 1, except Type III maybe used for cold
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
required mortar color.
B . Hydrated Lime: ASTM C-297 , Type S .
04230-2 \
C . Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C- 144, except for joints less than 1 /4 " use aggregate
graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
D . Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C-404 .
E. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type-M, 2,500 p . s.i .
151
F. Joint Reinforcement :/�Pide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed
continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 %
with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated
below:
1 . Width:
Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2 " less
than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar
coverage of not less than 5/8 " on joint faces exposed to exterior and '/i
elsewhere .
2 . Wire Size for Side Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
3 - Wire Size for Cross Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
4 . For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side
` rods :
-- a. Truss design, as manufactured by Dur-o-wall , (or approved equal),
with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 " o. c. Units to be 9
gauge hot dipped galvanized.
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Bars :
Deformed steel, ATSM A-615 , Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No . 18 .
B . Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips:
Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry walls : size and configuration as indicated.
1 . Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000,
Designation 2AA-805 .
C . Bond Breaker Strips :
Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D-226, Type I (No.
15 asphalt felt) .
D . Metal cavity caps in lieu of waste mortar shipping bags .
04230-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. No excavated material shall be placed
on private property without the consent of the property owner.
3 .09 COMPACTION
Puddling or jetting shall not be permitted when compacting bedding materials.
3 . 10 DENSITY TESTS
A. The Contractor shall arrange to have sufficient soil tests made by an independent testing
laboratory selected by the Engineer to demonstrate conformance of his work with the
stability and compaction levels required by these specifications. Compaction tests shall be
taken at intervals listed herein or as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
B . Any proposed alternative test methods to those specified herein must be approved by the
Engineer prior to testing. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide such
documentation of a proposed alternative test method as the Engineer may require to
evaluate the method for approval.
C. In no case shall the Contractor proceed with construction on compacted material until the
tests prove satisfactory and approval is given by the Engineer.
D. In general, at least one test for maximum dry density/optimum moisture content shall be
performed on a representative sample of each inherently different material to be used for
compacted backfill or embankment fill . For material of uniform composition and textural
class, a minimum of one test per 5000 cu . yd. of material shall be performed at the point
of use.
E. Generally, in-place density tests shall be performed at each structure and at approximately
50 foot intervals along pipe installations for each lift, or; at a minimum, one test near each - '
end of individual pipe installations for each 12 inch lift. Additional density tests may be
required by the Engineer. If any tests results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall re
excavate and recompact the backfill at his expense until the required compaction is
obtained.
3 . 11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Installed pipe shall be inspected by Engineer. Displaced or misaligned pipe, infiltration,
accumulation of debris, or other defects shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3 . 12 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
During the installation of Drainage Pipe and Structures the Contractor shall keep
accurate Record Drawings of the construction showing the location of all changes in
alignment, services, utility crossings, and similar data. Items shall be located from
permanent objects such as centerline of street, manholes, valves, etc. Upon completion
of the project the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer an As-Built Drawing showing
the above information.
END OF SECTION
02630 - 10 02630 — Storm Sewage
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 4'
A . All concrete reinforcement materials shall be new, free from rust, and complying
with the following reference standards unless otherwise specified on the drawings .
I , Bars for reinforcement: "Specifications for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A-615 , latest editions, Grade 60 .
2 . Wire for reinforcement: " Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement" , ASTM A- 82 .
3 . Wire fabric: "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" ,
ASTM A- 185 , latest edition.
2 . 02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation of concrete reinforcement, shall be as selected by the Contractor
subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A . Inspection
I . Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the
installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to
the point where this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with
all pertinent codes and regulations, the approved Shop Drawings, and the
original design.
B . Discrepancies
I . In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2 . Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
( 03200-2
C . Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C- 144, except for joints less than 1 /4 " use aggregate
graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
D . Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C-404 .
E. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type-M, 2,500 p . s.i .
151
F. Joint Reinforcement :/�Pide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed
continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 %
with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated
below:
1 . Width:
Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2 " less
than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar
coverage of not less than 5/8 " on joint faces exposed to exterior and '/i
elsewhere .
2 . Wire Size for Side Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
3 - Wire Size for Cross Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
4 . For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side
` rods :
-- a. Truss design, as manufactured by Dur-o-wall , (or approved equal),
with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 " o. c. Units to be 9
gauge hot dipped galvanized.
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Bars :
Deformed steel, ATSM A-615 , Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No . 18 .
B . Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips:
Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry walls : size and configuration as indicated.
1 . Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000,
Designation 2AA-805 .
C . Bond Breaker Strips :
Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D-226, Type I (No.
15 asphalt felt) .
D . Metal cavity caps in lieu of waste mortar shipping bags .
04230-3
2 .05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General :
Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or
grout.
B . Mixing:
Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical
batch mixer: comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water
content.
C . Mortar for unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C780, proportion Specification, for types of mortar required,
unless otherwise indicated .
D . Grout for Unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C476, 2 , 500 p . s . i . , for grout for use in construction of
reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or
if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement
which will comply completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
( 1 . Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal direction, unless (�
otherwise indicated.
2 . Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least horizontal dimension,
unless otherwise indicated .
E. Masonry Compressive Strength : fm ' 1 , 500 p.s .i. (Minimum) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 . INSTALLATION , GENERAL
A. See Structural and Architectural Drawings for notes and details and masonry
opening requirements . Coordinate all door and window masonry openings with the
scheduled manufacturers per the plans . Tolerances are critical to meet the wind
load performance testing for said openings within the 130 and 140 mph wind speed
zones.
B . Set blocks with 3/8 " full, flush joints in running bond. Use a masonry interlock
(50% masonry bond) at all intersecting walls where possible. All work not plumb,
true and accurate shall be replaced.
C . Store all materials off the ground and protect from all dirt and foreign material .
04230-4
3 . 02 BENDING
A. General
1 . Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the approved Shop
Drawings and ASTM A-615 .
2 . Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or on the
approved Shop Drawings.
3 . Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material.
3 .03 PLACING
A. General
1 . Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete
reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by means of approved
metal chairs, spacers, and metal hangers.
B . Clearance
1 . Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half ( 1 - 1 /2)
times the nominal diameter of round bars.
2 . Provide minimum concrete covering of reinforcement as shown or noted on
the Drawings .
3 . 04 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT
A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust
scale loose mill scale, oil paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce
the bond between steel and concrete .
PART 4 - ITEM OF PAYMENT
No separate Payment shall be made for work specified in this Section. Payment for work
specified in this Section shall be included in Payment made for other Sections .
'END OF SECTION* * *
i
03200-3
2 .05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General :
Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or
grout.
B . Mixing:
Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical
batch mixer: comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water
content.
C . Mortar for unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C780, proportion Specification, for types of mortar required,
unless otherwise indicated .
D . Grout for Unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C476, 2 , 500 p . s . i . , for grout for use in construction of
reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or
if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement
which will comply completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
( 1 . Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal direction, unless (�
otherwise indicated.
2 . Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least horizontal dimension,
unless otherwise indicated .
E. Masonry Compressive Strength : fm ' 1 , 500 p.s .i. (Minimum) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 . INSTALLATION , GENERAL
A. See Structural and Architectural Drawings for notes and details and masonry
opening requirements . Coordinate all door and window masonry openings with the
scheduled manufacturers per the plans . Tolerances are critical to meet the wind
load performance testing for said openings within the 130 and 140 mph wind speed
zones.
B . Set blocks with 3/8 " full, flush joints in running bond. Use a masonry interlock
(50% masonry bond) at all intersecting walls where possible. All work not plumb,
true and accurate shall be replaced.
C . Store all materials off the ground and protect from all dirt and foreign material .
04230-4
D. Do not retemper any mortar. Discard the mortar if it has begun to set.
E. Provide Dur-O-Wall, (or approved equal), truss-type, horizontal reinforcing at
every other block course. At door and window openings, provide continuous Dur-
O-Wall horizontal reinforcing at the first and second block courses above and
below the opening or extend the reinforcing back a minimum of two (2) feet from
the opening. Extend Dur-O-Wall reinforcing 1 - 1 /2 " into concrete columns . Lap
splices shall not be less than 6 " . Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and
expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
F . All cells designated on the drawings to be filled with concrete are to be kept clean
of any and all debris. Provide inspection/clean-out holes at the bottom course.
Inspection holes in finish block shall be neatly saw-cut.
G . All lintels shall have minimum bearing as called out on the Structural Drawings.
H. Do not wet concrete masonry units during installation.
J. Cleaning Reinforcing : Before placing, remove loose rust, and other coatings from
reinforcing.
K. Thickness : Build walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness indicated.
L. Build chases and recesses as shown and required for the work of other
trades. Provide not less than 8 " of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. See plans for specific .
conditions.
M . Leave openings for specialty equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match
work immediately adjacent to the opening.
N . Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work.
Use full-size units without cutting where possible .
P. Use inspection and clean-out holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells, for
grouting lifts over 5 feet high . Clean-out holes should be 4 "w X 8 " h minimum .
See ACI 530-92, Section 4. 3 . 2 . 3 .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1 /4 " in
J 10 ' or 3/8 " in a story height not to exceed 20', nor %" in 40' or more . For external
04230-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02714
STABILIZED SUBGRADE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a stabilized subgrade course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (2006)
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. Rammer
and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2 . ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001 ) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate
in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
1 .03 DESCRIPTION
The subgrade will be constructed such that after being compacted it will conform to the lines and
grades as shown on the Drawings. The subgrade shall be Type-13 (LBR), stabilized and constructed
in accordance with the latest edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications, Section 160 .
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 The subgrade shall have a minimum Florida Bearing Value of 50 as determined by the Florida Soil
Bearing Test. In an area where the bearing value is less than 50, stabilizing material approved by the
Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor, spread and mixed in accordance with Section 160-5 .3
"Mixing" of the 2006 Edition of the Florida D.O.T. Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 The subgrade shall be shaped, graded, and rolled to conform to the lines and grades as shown on the
Drawings . Fine grading of the subgrade to its final profile shall be accomplished after the existing
ground has been excavated as close as possible to the design elevations . In fill areas, fine grading of
the subgrade shall be accomplished after fill is spread and compacted in accordance with Section 5
of these Specifications.
02714 - 1 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
D. Do not retemper any mortar. Discard the mortar if it has begun to set.
E. Provide Dur-O-Wall, (or approved equal), truss-type, horizontal reinforcing at
every other block course. At door and window openings, provide continuous Dur-
O-Wall horizontal reinforcing at the first and second block courses above and
below the opening or extend the reinforcing back a minimum of two (2) feet from
the opening. Extend Dur-O-Wall reinforcing 1 - 1 /2 " into concrete columns . Lap
splices shall not be less than 6 " . Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and
expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
F . All cells designated on the drawings to be filled with concrete are to be kept clean
of any and all debris. Provide inspection/clean-out holes at the bottom course.
Inspection holes in finish block shall be neatly saw-cut.
G . All lintels shall have minimum bearing as called out on the Structural Drawings.
H. Do not wet concrete masonry units during installation.
J. Cleaning Reinforcing : Before placing, remove loose rust, and other coatings from
reinforcing.
K. Thickness : Build walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness indicated.
L. Build chases and recesses as shown and required for the work of other
trades. Provide not less than 8 " of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. See plans for specific .
conditions.
M . Leave openings for specialty equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match
work immediately adjacent to the opening.
N . Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work.
Use full-size units without cutting where possible .
P. Use inspection and clean-out holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells, for
grouting lifts over 5 feet high . Clean-out holes should be 4 "w X 8 " h minimum .
See ACI 530-92, Section 4. 3 . 2 . 3 .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1 /4 " in
J 10 ' or 3/8 " in a story height not to exceed 20', nor %" in 40' or more . For external
04230-5
corners , expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1 /4 " in any story of 20' maximum, nor ''/i' in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of i\ l
head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1 /4" in 10' , ''/Z" maximum . i
B . Variation from Level :
For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels , sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1 /4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in
40' or more . For top surface of bearing walls no not exceed 1 /8 " between adjacent
floor elements in 10' or 1 / 16" within width of a single unit.
C . Variation of Linear Building Line :
For position shown in plan and related portion of columns , walls and partitions, do
not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4 " in 40' or more.
D . Variation in Cross- Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus
1 /4 " nor plus 1/2" .
E . Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness:
Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /811 , with a
maximum thickness limited to 1/2" . Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1 /8" .
3 . 03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS {
A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint widths and to accurately locate openings , movement-type joints, returns and
offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations .
B . Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
C . Stopping and Resuming Work :
Rack back 'h-unit length in each course: do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of
set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry .
D . Built-in Work :
As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items .
1 . Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar,
unless otherwise indicated. Where built-in items are to be embedded in
cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below
and rod mortar or grout into core.
04230-6
SECTION 03300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Formwork Section 03100
B . Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
C . Unit Masonry Section 04200
D . Underslab Vapor Retarder Section 07160
E . Metal Building Systems Section 13122
F . Plumbing Section 15000
G . Electrical Section 16000
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . C-31 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
2 . C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
3 . C-39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
1
4. C-42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
5 . C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete
6. C- 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland- Cement Concrete
7. C- 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
8. C- 172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
B . ACI standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI-318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
2. Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI-301 (Latest Editions),
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, except as modified by the
supplemental requirements herein.
3 . ACI 318 Detailing Standards .
4. ACI 315 Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings
5 . CRSI 347R Recommended Practice for Placing reinforcing bars .
}
03300- 1
corners , expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1 /4 " in any story of 20' maximum, nor ''/i' in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of i\ l
head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1 /4" in 10' , ''/Z" maximum . i
B . Variation from Level :
For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels , sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1 /4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in
40' or more . For top surface of bearing walls no not exceed 1 /8 " between adjacent
floor elements in 10' or 1 / 16" within width of a single unit.
C . Variation of Linear Building Line :
For position shown in plan and related portion of columns , walls and partitions, do
not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4 " in 40' or more.
D . Variation in Cross- Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus
1 /4 " nor plus 1/2" .
E . Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness:
Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /811 , with a
maximum thickness limited to 1/2" . Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1 /8" .
3 . 03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS {
A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint widths and to accurately locate openings , movement-type joints, returns and
offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations .
B . Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
C . Stopping and Resuming Work :
Rack back 'h-unit length in each course: do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of
set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry .
D . Built-in Work :
As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items .
1 . Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar,
unless otherwise indicated. Where built-in items are to be embedded in
cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below
and rod mortar or grout into core.
04230-6
2 . Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 ") under
bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise
indicated.
3 . 04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
B . Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment, if not shown, lay walls with 3/8 " joints.
C . Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by
other materials , unless otherwise indicated .
D . Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
E . Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do
not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in
position . If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in
fresh mortar.
F . Collar Joints:
After each course is laid, fill the vertical longitudinal joint betweenwythes-solidly
and with mortar for all exterior walls .
G. Comers :
Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at comers, unless otherwise
shown .
1 . For horizontally reinforces masonry, provide continuity at corners with
prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding.
H. Intersecting and Abutting Walls:
If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with 8 " maximum offsets and
provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o. c. , vertically, or omit
blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2 '-0 " o. c. vertically. Form
anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1 - 1 /2 " x 1 /4 " x 2'-0" long with ends turned
up not less than 2 " or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar-filled cores.
1
04230-7
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .02 Record Drawing elevations shall be confirmed to meet design drawing grades prior to placement of
base material.
3 .03 The top of the subgrade in both cuts and fills shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density to the depth specified on the Plans. The required density shall be maintained
until the base course has been constructed. The subgrade shall be compacted with an approved self-
propelled steel drum or pneumatic tired roller weighing not less than 8 tons. All hollows and
depressions which develop under rolling shall be filled in with suitable material . The process of
grading and rolling shall be repeated until no depressions develop. After compaction, the top surface
of the fine grade shall be true to line and grade at all locations. If the fine grade becomes rutted or
displaced due to any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall regrade it and recompact it. Ditches,
drains, and swales shall be maintained along the completed subgrade section after their construction.
3 .04 In no case shall the Contractor proceed to construct the base course on the subgrade until the
subgrade has been tested for Florida Bearing Values, compaction, checked for line and grade, and
approval given by the Engineer.
3 . 05 Material and Compaction Testing
A. Florida Bearing Value tests on the subgrade shall be taken at a minimum of four (4) test
locations per 10,000 sf of area to be paved, where designated by the Engineer.
B . The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the
Modified Proctor Test procedures of AASHTO T180 (Method D as modified by the
F.D .O.T.) . The percentage compaction and in place density shall be determined according
to procedures of ASTM D2167 "Test for Density of Soil In Place by the Rubber Balloon
Method" or the nuclear method ASTM D2922 .
C. Each material which is inherently different in composition from other subgrade material
and which is used over a widespread area of the project, will necessitate an additional
Modified Proctor Test.
END OF SECTION
02714 - 2 02714 — Stabilized Subgrade
1 .03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A . All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM recommendations referred to herein. )
B . Tests shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by the Architect.
C . Contractor will pay for testing, including tests which indicated failure; in which case
that test and all costs incurred as a result thereof, shall be paid for by the Contractor.
D . Standard slump tests shall be taken of the concrete sample for each strength test and
whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. The maximum slump of concrete
shall be 4 " plus/minus 111
, unless specifically otherwise noted.
E . Concrete that fails by test shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
F . Test for strength shall be made as follows :
1 . Slump Test : One test for each load of concrete at the point of discharge taken
out of a wheelbarrow and not out of the chute. Maximum slump measurements
as stated above .
2 . Compressive Strength Test : Randomly test cylinders taken at each major pour;
footings , floor slabs, columns and tie-beams . Two (2) specimens are to be tested /r
( at 7 days and two (2) specimens tested at 28 days. Hold one cylinder for firture \
use if test does not comply at 28 days .
3 . All test results are to be reported , in writing, to the Owner, and the Architect.
Test results should stipulate the day the tests were performed .
4 . Samples for testing shall be taken at 1 /4 and 3 /4 points of the load discharged
from the mixer.
5 . If necessary, comply with Architect or Engineer' s request for additional
cylinders, slump or load test .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Cement shall be Portland cement, ASTM CA 50 .
B . Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-33 .
C . Mixing water for concrete shall be potable and meet the requirements of ASTM C-94 .
r
03300 -2
2 . Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 ") under
bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise
indicated.
3 . 04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
B . Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment, if not shown, lay walls with 3/8 " joints.
C . Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by
other materials , unless otherwise indicated .
D . Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
E . Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do
not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in
position . If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in
fresh mortar.
F . Collar Joints:
After each course is laid, fill the vertical longitudinal joint betweenwythes-solidly
and with mortar for all exterior walls .
G. Comers :
Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at comers, unless otherwise
shown .
1 . For horizontally reinforces masonry, provide continuity at corners with
prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding.
H. Intersecting and Abutting Walls:
If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with 8 " maximum offsets and
provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o. c. , vertically, or omit
blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2 '-0 " o. c. vertically. Form
anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1 - 1 /2 " x 1 /4 " x 2'-0" long with ends turned
up not less than 2 " or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar-filled cores.
1
04230-7
J . Non-bearing Interior Partitions:
Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless \ \
otherwise shown.
1 . Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate or metal . Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of
structure above approaches final position.
3 . 05 LINTELS
A. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels . Cure precast lintels
before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
B . For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintels units
with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
C . Provide minimum bearing of 8 " at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. When field observation by the Architect or the Owner' s Agent which generates
questions relating to tolerance or quality control , the Contractor shall employ, at his
own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in performing types of masonry field
quality control tests for masonry indicated . Comply with requirements for
qualification and acceptance per tolerances stipulated within this section .
B . Unit Test Method : For each block type specified per ASTM C90 . .
C . Mortar Tests :
For each type indicated , test mortar by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM
C-780 . Conduct tests no less frequently than that required to evaluate mortar used
to install each increment of masonry units indicated above from which samples are
taken for testing.
D . Prism Test Method:
1 . Compression Test :
If required by Architect, test masonry prisms by methods of sampling and
testing of ASTM E-447 , Method B .
2 . Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
Masonry work, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory if results from construction
quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
4-
04230-8
2 . 02 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchor slots, reglets and inserts of type, size and spacing required by trades involved,
and shown on plans.
B . Vapor Barrier: 6 mil Polyethylene Film, such as "visqueen". Refer to the Building
Plan Sections for specific applications .
C . Vapor Retarder: 10 mil vapor retarder such as Perminator by WJ Meadows. Refer to
the Building Plan Sections for specific applications.
D . Chemical Curing Compound: Application of a curing compound shall be made to all
slabs and such application shall conform to ASTM C-309 . The compound shall be
applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after
any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete
surface. It shall not be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other
material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent
bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to
receive bonded applications.
Acceptable materials shall be one of the following :
1 . Burke Company Aqua resin Cure
2 . Sika Corporation Sikagard Cure/Hard
3 . Sonneborn Hydrocide
E . Expansion Joint Water Stops: Continuous, pre-formed, finned, center bulb type,
polyvinyl chloride, of sufficient width to provide 3 " minimum embedment in concrete
each side. Equal to Greenstreak #703 .
F. Pre-molded Joint Filler : Bituminous Fiber Type, ASTM D- 1751 -83 and D 545 - 77 equal
to "Celotex Flexcell" of thickness and width indicated or required .
G . Reinforcement shall be cleaned of all scale and excessive rust. All reinforcement shall
be set with the standard accessories as per ACI 315 -74 . Minimum coverage of
reinforcement shall be as follows :
a, Footings — 3 " minimum.
b. Slabs - 3/4' minimum.
C. Beams and Columns — 1 - 1 /2" minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A. Concrete Mix :
1 . All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed and in accordance with ASTM
_ Specifications C-94 (Latest Edition) .
S
J
03300-3
J . Non-bearing Interior Partitions:
Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless \ \
otherwise shown.
1 . Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate or metal . Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of
structure above approaches final position.
3 . 05 LINTELS
A. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels . Cure precast lintels
before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
B . For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintels units
with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
C . Provide minimum bearing of 8 " at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. When field observation by the Architect or the Owner' s Agent which generates
questions relating to tolerance or quality control , the Contractor shall employ, at his
own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in performing types of masonry field
quality control tests for masonry indicated . Comply with requirements for
qualification and acceptance per tolerances stipulated within this section .
B . Unit Test Method : For each block type specified per ASTM C90 . .
C . Mortar Tests :
For each type indicated , test mortar by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM
C-780 . Conduct tests no less frequently than that required to evaluate mortar used
to install each increment of masonry units indicated above from which samples are
taken for testing.
D . Prism Test Method:
1 . Compression Test :
If required by Architect, test masonry prisms by methods of sampling and
testing of ASTM E-447 , Method B .
2 . Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
Masonry work, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory if results from construction
quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
4-
04230-8
3 . Protection :
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in an acceptable manner to
ensure that the final unit masonry work is without damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion .
'END OF SECTION* * *
04230-9
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02722
CEMENTED COQUINA SHELL BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and transportation
necessary to construct a Coquina shell base course upon the completed stabilized subgrade.
1 .02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be:
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 250 — Shell
2 . Section 915 - Cemented Coquina Shell Material
3 . Section 300 — Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses
4 . Section 916 — Bituminous Materials
B . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1 . AASHTO T- 180 - Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb. .
Rammer and an 18-inch Drop.
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1 . ASTM D 1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Effort
2. ASTM D 2167 - Density and unit weight of soil in place by the rubber balloon
method
3 . ASTM D 2922 (2001) - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 Coquina shell shall conform to the requirements of Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications, latest
edition, Section 915, and shall be from a source acceptable to Florida D.O.T. The material shall have
a minimum LBR value of 100. Prior to placement, the material shall be crushed or broken to such a
size that no less than 97 percent by weight will pass a 3 1/2 inch sieve and no more than 20 percent
dry weight shall wash through a No. 200 sieve. No visible clay or organic matter will be permitted.
02722 - 1 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
2 . Minimum 5 bags cement per yard of concrete. (( 1l
B . Concrete Strength: 1. J
1 . Unless specifically noted otherwise, all concrete shall have a minimum
compressive strength of f c = 3000 psi .
2 . A design mix shall be prepared by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer
employed by the concrete supplier.
3 . The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer the concrete materials and
the concrete mix designs proposed for use with a written request for acceptance.
This submittal shall include the results of all testing performed to qualify the
materials and to establish the mix designs .
C . Job Tempering:
1 . All Concrete shall be placed within 1 - 1 /2 hours after introduction of water to the
mix .
2 . Under no condition may additional water be added that exceeds the allowable
gallons stipulated on the batch ticket.
3 . Submit time stamped batching tickets on delivery of concrete to job site. r/
4 . All concrete where water has been added will be removed and replace with
proper concrete at no cost to the Owner.
S . When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 75 minutes . When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3 .02 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A . Review: No concrete shall be placed until all reinforcing steel, pipes, sleeves, inserts,
etc. have been set in place and reviewed by the Owner' s representative. Contractor
shall notify the Architect of scheduled pours 24 hours prior to pouring.
B . Placing: Concrete shall be placed in properly cleaned and prepared forms in accordance
with the requirements of ACI=301 . Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that
the concrete is at all times plastic.
C . Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients
and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is
maintained . All other requirements of ACI-301 shall be followed .
1
03300-4
3 . Protection :
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in an acceptable manner to
ensure that the final unit masonry work is without damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion .
'END OF SECTION* * *
04230-9
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Glass Blocks provided by GLASS BLOCK COMPANY.
B . Mortar & Sealants.
C. Glass Block Accessories.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK
A . Section 07600, Flashings.
B . Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
1 .03 PERFORMANCE
A. Furnish all labor and materials to install glass block system detailed and specified,
complete with expansion strips, packing panel reinforcing, panel anchors, asphalt
emulsion, and other items for complete installation.
B . Work not covered as part of installation of glass block system is preparation of
structure for glass block panels, such as chases, stiffeners, lintels, sills, flashings,
except where specified in this Section.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data:
Provide data sheet and installation instructions .
B . Samples :
Submit actual glass block for approval of color, design and pattern .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. GLASS BLOCKS from approved manufacturer.
1 . Non-Load bearing, partially evacuated, hollow glass masonry units permanently
sealed by heat-fused joint.
2. Color: (Clear)
04270-1
D . Depositing : Concrete shall be deposited continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be deposited on concrete which is hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
E . Consolidation: All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding, or
forking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around
embedded items, and into corner of forms eliminating all air or stone pockets which
may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness .
F. All slabs on grade are to be Regular '/4 rock concrete at 3000 psi ultimate strength at 28
days. NO PUMP MIX (pea rock) WILL BE ACCEPTED for any slab on prepared
grade . This does not prohibit the pumping of the regular '/ rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints :
1 . Locate as shown on the drawings or near points of minimum shear and as
approved by Architect/Engineer for beam or slabs . Construction joints shall be
straight saw-cut by a walk behind motorized saw, tooled , mechanical or actual
cold joints as called out on the plans.
2 . Locate joints in vertical members, walls at underside of floors or beams, and at
tops of footings .
3 . Floor slabs keyed joints maximum spacing 20' plus or minus each direction
unless otherwise noted.
A . Expansion Joints -
1 .
oints :1 . Locate as shown on drawings .
2 . Joints in walkways maximum at 20' o.c. , snap lines and saw-cut 1 /8 " wide by 1 "
deep between expansion joints in equal bays at not over 5 ' o .c. , within 24 hours
of concrete placement or until concrete is traffrcable with power saw.
3 . Joints shall be straight and smooth. They shall have hardened before fresh
concrete is deposited against them.
4 . Do not place expansion joints where slabs are up against the exterior of masonry
walls, unless otherwise detailed on plans . Do not place any expansion material
on the inside face of masonry walls where slabs are poured against same walls .
5 . After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous
operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or
joints, is completed.
03300-5
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Glass Blocks provided by GLASS BLOCK COMPANY.
B . Mortar & Sealants.
C. Glass Block Accessories.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK
A . Section 07600, Flashings.
B . Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
1 .03 PERFORMANCE
A. Furnish all labor and materials to install glass block system detailed and specified,
complete with expansion strips, packing panel reinforcing, panel anchors, asphalt
emulsion, and other items for complete installation.
B . Work not covered as part of installation of glass block system is preparation of
structure for glass block panels, such as chases, stiffeners, lintels, sills, flashings,
except where specified in this Section.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data:
Provide data sheet and installation instructions .
B . Samples :
Submit actual glass block for approval of color, design and pattern .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. GLASS BLOCKS from approved manufacturer.
1 . Non-Load bearing, partially evacuated, hollow glass masonry units permanently
sealed by heat-fused joint.
2. Color: (Clear)
04270-1
3 . Size:(actual)
7 -314 in. x 7-3/4 in. x 4 in. thick, impact rated, for mortar installation.
4 . Pattern :
"Endura" for privacy.
5 . Glass Block as Manufactured by:
a. PC Glass Block Products
b. American Glass Block
C . Solaris Glass Blocks
d. Week Glass Blocks
e . Glass Masonry, Inc.
B . Mortar:
1 . Masonry Cement:
ASTM C-91 , white, for high strength use.
2 . Portland Cement:
ASTM C- 150, Type 1 , white .
3 . Hydrated Lime:
ASTM C-2071 Type S , high-calcium, pressure hydrated dolomite with min.
0 .92 percent active ingredients, completely hydrated .
4 . Sand:
ASTM C- 144.
5 . Integral Waterproofer:
Use one of the following:
a. "Anti-Hydro" Waterproofer . Model Hydracide Powder, {
Masterbuilders Co. Model Omicron Motarproofing.
b . Latex Type:
Laticrete International, Model Laticrete 8510 , (high- strength, weather-
resistant mortar and fast-bonding agent) .
C . Glass Block Accessories :
I . Panel Anchors:
No . 20 gauge perforated steel strips, 24" long x 1 -3 /4" wide, galvanized after
perforating with 2" long rounded slots and alternating notches on side of strip.
2 . Expansion Strips:
Dense fibrous glass batt for at head, 3 /8" x 4- 1 /8 " x 24" for chase
construction .
3 . Panel Reinforcing:
Double wire mesh formed of two parallel wires having 2" centers and
electrically welded cross wires on regular intervals, galvanized.
4. Secure perimeter aluminum frame to P .T . 2 X 6 jambs, sill and head with # 8
X 1 ''/2" flat head galvanized screws at 16 inches on center. All screws to be
secured through all shims. Per NOA No . 04-0301 .01 . Secure P .T. jambs in
accordance with plan details.
04270-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 PLACEMENT OF MATERIAL
The base course shall be constructed in accordance with the lines, grades, and typical section as
shown on the Drawings. Unless otherwise noted construction shall conform to the provisions of
Florida D .O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 250, latest
edition.
After the subgrade is completed and approved, the Contractor shall furnish and spread the coquina
shell in a uniform distribution. Spread thickness shall be a minimum of 9 inches. Segregated areas of
fine or course rock will not be permitted. Such areas shall be removed and replaced with properly
graded rock.
After the spreading is completed, the entire surface shall be compacted, scarified and shaped so as to
produce the required grade and cross section after compaction.
3 .02 COMPACTION
The required compaction of the coquina shell base course shall be a minimum of 98 percent of the
maximum dry density.
No Jess than 8- 10 ton steel drum or pneumatic fired roller shall be used to compact the base course.
All depressions shall be filled and the process of rolling and filling shall continue until a thoroughly
compacted uniform surface is produced. During final compaction operations, if blading of any area is
necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compaction operations for such areas shall
be completed prior to making the field density-compaction test on the finished base.
Should the subgrade material become mixed with the base course material at any time, the
Contractor shall remove the mixture, reshape and recompact the subgrade, replace the materials
removed with additional coquina shell and reshape and recompact the coquina shell base at no cost
to the Owner.
If cracks or checks appear in the base which would impair the structural integrity of the base in the
opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the cracks or checks by rescarifying, reshaping,
refilling with coquina shell where necessary, and recompacting at no cost to the Owner.
The finished coquina shell base shall be checked for thickness at intervals of not more than 300 feet
on center. Finished thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings. Any areas which are less than 1/2
inch of the specified thickness shall be corrected by scarifying and adding rock. The scarifying shall
extend for 50 feet either side of the deficient area. Areas which are less than 1 /2 inch deficient in
thickness shall be corrected if the Engineer determines that the area is extensive or may adversely
affect the quality of the finished work.
3 .03 PRIME COAT
The prime coat shall be a rapid curing liquid cut back asphalt equal or equivalent to RC-70 or RC-
250 at the Contractor's option, and conforming to Sections 300 and 916-2 of the latest edition of the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
02722 - 2 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
3 . 04 CURING
A. Begin curing of concrete as soon as practicable after placing, but not more than 3 hours
thereafter. Provide a total wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees F minimum
temperature .
B . Curing of structural members shall begin immediately after removal of forms .
C . Apply curing compounds as specified above, clear for exposed slabs. Compound used
on floors that are to receive tile or other additional finish shall be compatible with
adhesives and finish materials . Apply first coat of curing compound as soon as possible
after pouring .
3 . 05 FINISHES
A. Formed Surfaces :
1 . Finishes - Defined :
a. Rough Form Finish: Reasonable true to line and place . Tie holes and
defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1 /4" in height shall be
chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the
texture imparted by the forms .
t �
b. Smooth Form Finish: The form facing material shall produce a smooth,
hard, uniform texture on the concrete . It may be plywood, tempered
concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, or other material capable of
producing the desired finish. The arrangement of the facing material
shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the
practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing
capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grain,
torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will
impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tie holes
and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. It is
the intention of this surface to produce an Architectural Surface suitable
for public view as a completed surface to receive paint. Strict quality
control of this surface shall be required. See ACI 301 .
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: To be applied to all smooth form finishes . (All
work will conform with ACI Standard 301 -latest edition) to produce a
smooth architectural effect.
2 . Finishes - Unspecified Buildings: If the finish is unspecified, the following
finishes shall be used as applicable.
03300-6 i
3 . Size:(actual)
7 -314 in. x 7-3/4 in. x 4 in. thick, impact rated, for mortar installation.
4 . Pattern :
"Endura" for privacy.
5 . Glass Block as Manufactured by:
a. PC Glass Block Products
b. American Glass Block
C . Solaris Glass Blocks
d. Week Glass Blocks
e . Glass Masonry, Inc.
B . Mortar:
1 . Masonry Cement:
ASTM C-91 , white, for high strength use.
2 . Portland Cement:
ASTM C- 150, Type 1 , white .
3 . Hydrated Lime:
ASTM C-2071 Type S , high-calcium, pressure hydrated dolomite with min.
0 .92 percent active ingredients, completely hydrated .
4 . Sand:
ASTM C- 144.
5 . Integral Waterproofer:
Use one of the following:
a. "Anti-Hydro" Waterproofer . Model Hydracide Powder, {
Masterbuilders Co. Model Omicron Motarproofing.
b . Latex Type:
Laticrete International, Model Laticrete 8510 , (high- strength, weather-
resistant mortar and fast-bonding agent) .
C . Glass Block Accessories :
I . Panel Anchors:
No . 20 gauge perforated steel strips, 24" long x 1 -3 /4" wide, galvanized after
perforating with 2" long rounded slots and alternating notches on side of strip.
2 . Expansion Strips:
Dense fibrous glass batt for at head, 3 /8" x 4- 1 /8 " x 24" for chase
construction .
3 . Panel Reinforcing:
Double wire mesh formed of two parallel wires having 2" centers and
electrically welded cross wires on regular intervals, galvanized.
4. Secure perimeter aluminum frame to P .T . 2 X 6 jambs, sill and head with # 8
X 1 ''/2" flat head galvanized screws at 16 inches on center. All screws to be
secured through all shims. Per NOA No . 04-0301 .01 . Secure P .T. jambs in
accordance with plan details.
04270-2
D . Miscellaneous Accessories :
1 . Asphalt Emulsion :
Henry , s
2 . Packing :
Polyethylene foam, neoprene, or filler compatible with joint sealant as specified
in Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
3 . Sealant:
Non-staining, waterproof joint sealant as specified in Section 07900, Joint
Sealers.
4 . Water Repellant Coating:
Solvent type penetrating, clear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Verify items to be built-in, pocket recesses, or chases to receive glass blocks are
complete, accurately placed and dimensioned.
B . Clean glass block of foreign substances to insure bonding with mortar.
C. Coordinate placement of steel channels.
1
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . General :
1 . Cover sill area with heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to serve as bond breaker
for fire rated panel systems and allow to dry before placing mortar.
2 . Adhere expansion strips in place at head and j ambs using asphalt emulsion and
insure strips extend to sill in order to isolate glass block from adjacent
construction.
B . Mortar:
1 . Mix mortar materials minimum 3 minutes with maximum amount of water to
produce workable consistency in mechanical batch mixer, to comply with
ASTM C-780.
2 . Fire Rated Panels - Type S :
1 part masonry cement, 1/2 part portland cement, sand min. 2- 1 /4 to max.
3 times volume of cement.
04270-3
a. Rough Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view,
including concrete to receive stucco .
b. Smooth Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces exposed to view.
C . Smooth Rubbed Finish: Concrete shall have a Smooth Rubbed Finish
applied to produce an architectural effect.
3 . Patching : Immediately after stripping forms patch all defective areas with mortar
similar to the concrete mix except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted .
Bulges, minor honeycomb and other minor defects, as designated by the
Architect, shall be patched only where exposed to view. Clean, dampen, and fill
tie holes with patching mortar. All patching shall follow procedures and
conform to ACI 301 .
a . Major defective areas, as judged by the Owner' s representative including
those resulting from leakage of forms, excessive honeycomb, large
bulges and large offsets at form joints, shall be chipped away down to
sound concrete. The patching mortar shall be pressed in for a complete
bond and finished to match adjacent areas, or where defective areas
impair the strength of the member in question, as judged by the Owner' s
representative, the member shall be removed or united as determined by
the Owner' s representative.
b . Minor defective areas, as judged by the Owner ' s representative including
honeycomb, air bubbles, holes resulting from removal of ties, and those
resulting from leakage of forms shall be patched with grout without
resorting to chipping. Minor bulges and offsets at form joints: shall- be
finished as specified herein below.
B . Uniform Surfaces — Flatwork-
1 . General : Grade and screed the surfaces to the exact elevation, or slope shown or
required . Make proper allowances for setting beds for ceramic tile. After
screeding tamp mixture thoroughly to drive the coarse aggregate down from the
surfaces and apply the applicable finish specified hereinafter. Always slope
exterior walks away from the building at 1 /8 " per foot. Uncovered walks slope at
1 /8 " perfootor crown. Covered walks between buildings always slope to drain
to the exterior and away from the buildings. At cross intersections of the walks,
and at exterior doors, warp the surfaces to drain water from the walls. Provide
control joints as indicated on drawings. Follow the requirements and procedures
of ACI 301 .
2 . Finishes - Definitions (See also ACI 301 ) •
03300-7
D . Miscellaneous Accessories :
1 . Asphalt Emulsion :
Henry , s
2 . Packing :
Polyethylene foam, neoprene, or filler compatible with joint sealant as specified
in Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
3 . Sealant:
Non-staining, waterproof joint sealant as specified in Section 07900, Joint
Sealers.
4 . Water Repellant Coating:
Solvent type penetrating, clear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Verify items to be built-in, pocket recesses, or chases to receive glass blocks are
complete, accurately placed and dimensioned.
B . Clean glass block of foreign substances to insure bonding with mortar.
C. Coordinate placement of steel channels.
1
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . General :
1 . Cover sill area with heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to serve as bond breaker
for fire rated panel systems and allow to dry before placing mortar.
2 . Adhere expansion strips in place at head and j ambs using asphalt emulsion and
insure strips extend to sill in order to isolate glass block from adjacent
construction.
B . Mortar:
1 . Mix mortar materials minimum 3 minutes with maximum amount of water to
produce workable consistency in mechanical batch mixer, to comply with
ASTM C-780.
2 . Fire Rated Panels - Type S :
1 part masonry cement, 1/2 part portland cement, sand min. 2- 1 /4 to max.
3 times volume of cement.
04270-3
3 . Non-Fire Rated Panels:
1 part masonry cement, 1 /4 part portland cement, 1 /4 part lime, sand min . 2- 1 /4
to max . 3 time volume of cement and lime.
4 . Average Compressive Strength:
Type S - 1800 psi at 28 days.
5 . Do not retemper mortar.
C. Setting Glass Block:
1 . Set first course of glass block on full mortar bed over asphalt emulsion or
directly on sill/surface, with no furrowing.
2 . Use rubber mallet to tap units into position; do not use steel tools on glass
blocks for adjustments.
3 . Set each course of glass blocks in full mortar bed, with no furrowing.
4 . Keep expansion strip joints free of mortar.
5 . Rake out joints to accommodate sealant and pointing mortar and brush raked
joints clean for Type S mortar.
6 . Fill raked joints with pointing mortar, packing and working into voids, and t\_,
neatly tool surface to concave joint before mortar achieves final set.
7 . For non-rated panels tool joints concave, as work progresses, to uniform
appearance .
D . Placing Anchors and Reinforcing:
1 . Bend panel anchors within expansion joint, space 24 inches apart vertically to
coincide with panel reinforcing.
2 . Bed panel anchors in mortar joint of glass block panel with min. 12 " of anchor
extending into glass block joint on top of panel reinforcing.
3 . Place panel reinforcing in horizontal joints of glass block panel on 24 " centers
vertically, continuous from side to side.
4 . Lap panel reinforcing min. 6" for sections of insufficient length.
5 . Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcing.
04270-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The surface of the base material shall be cleaned after final compaction and the moisture content of
the base shall not exceed 90 percent of the optimum moisture before the prime coat is applied. The
prime coat shall be applied uniformly with a pressure distributor. The entire length of the spray bar
shall be set at the height above the surface recommended by the Manufacturer for even distribution.
The prime coat shall be applied to the finished base course at the rate of 0. 15 gallons per square yard
at a temperature between 100°F to 150°F. The prime coat shall be applied such that a period of no
longer than two (2) hours lapse prior to application of the asphaltic concrete wearing course, unless
the prime coat is covered with sand or screenings as outlined in Section 300-6. 5 of the latest edition
of the Florida D .O.T. Specifications.
3 .04 TESTING
The maximum density and optimum moisture shall be determined in accordance with the Modified
Proctor Test procedures of ASTM-D1557 or AASHTO-T180 (Method D). At a minimum, one (1)
Modified Proctor Test shall be performed for each 10,000 square feet of base material on
representative samples from location(s) designated by the Engineer. The percentage compaction and
in-place density shall be determined according to procedures of ASTM-132167 "Test for Density of
Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method" or the nuclear method ASTM- D2922. In-place density
testing shall be performed at a minimum rate of four (4) Modified Proctor tests per 10,000 square
feet of area to be paved unless quality control measures allow the Engineer to dictate fewer tests.
END OF SECTION
02722 - 3 02722 — Cemented Coquina Shell Base
a. Scratched Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated
and leveled to a Class B tolerance, surface shall be roughened with stiff
brush, rates or metal lath roller, before final set.
b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and
leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until water sheen has
disappeared and/or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper
operations of a power driven float. Consolidate with power driven float,
check trueness of surface, fill low spots and cut down high spots to achieve
Class B tolerance. Then, re-float to uniform, smooth, granular texture .
C . Troweled Finish: Finish same as above for floated finish and in addition,
steel trowel the surface by hand to produce a smooth, glassy, impervious
surface free of trowel marks to a Class A tolerance . On surfaces intended
to support floor coverings, defects of sufficient magnitude to show through
the floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
d . Broom Finish : Finish same as above for floated finish to a Class B
tolerance and then draw a broom or burlap belt across surface transversely.
C . Finishes - Unspecified
1 . When type of finish is not specified, the following shall be applicable:
a. Scratched Finish: For surfaces to receive bonded cementitious application,
i . e . ceramic tile, single ply epoxy flooring etc. , refer to drawings for
locations of specific floor coverings.
b. Troweled Finish: For surfaces intended as smooth walking surfaces or for /
receipt of floor coverings .
G. Broom Finish: For exterior walks , loggias , curbs and where indicated on
drawings.
d . Float Finish: Exterior platforms , steps, stairways, landings, and ramps .
D . Specific Finish Locations :
1 . Slab areas to receive ceramic tile, resilient floor coverings, specialized
gymnasium flooring, or slabs within a minimum of 2 feet each side of accordion
doors shall be "dead level" - Class A. All other slab
areas - Class B .
E . Tolerances for finishes as specified shall be as follows :
1 . Class A - True planes within 1 /8 " in 10 ft.
2 . Class B - True planes within 1 /4" in 10 ft.
03300-8
3 . Non-Fire Rated Panels:
1 part masonry cement, 1 /4 part portland cement, 1 /4 part lime, sand min . 2- 1 /4
to max . 3 time volume of cement and lime.
4 . Average Compressive Strength:
Type S - 1800 psi at 28 days.
5 . Do not retemper mortar.
C. Setting Glass Block:
1 . Set first course of glass block on full mortar bed over asphalt emulsion or
directly on sill/surface, with no furrowing.
2 . Use rubber mallet to tap units into position; do not use steel tools on glass
blocks for adjustments.
3 . Set each course of glass blocks in full mortar bed, with no furrowing.
4 . Keep expansion strip joints free of mortar.
5 . Rake out joints to accommodate sealant and pointing mortar and brush raked
joints clean for Type S mortar.
6 . Fill raked joints with pointing mortar, packing and working into voids, and t\_,
neatly tool surface to concave joint before mortar achieves final set.
7 . For non-rated panels tool joints concave, as work progresses, to uniform
appearance .
D . Placing Anchors and Reinforcing:
1 . Bend panel anchors within expansion joint, space 24 inches apart vertically to
coincide with panel reinforcing.
2 . Bed panel anchors in mortar joint of glass block panel with min. 12 " of anchor
extending into glass block joint on top of panel reinforcing.
3 . Place panel reinforcing in horizontal joints of glass block panel on 24 " centers
vertically, continuous from side to side.
4 . Lap panel reinforcing min. 6" for sections of insufficient length.
5 . Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcing.
04270-4
6. Apply half width of mortar in joint, do not furrow, and press panel reinforcing
into mortar bed.
7. Apply remaining mortar over panel reinforcing and lay next course of glass
block, full bedded, with no furrowing or mortar.
E. Sealant :
1 . Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers, for materials .
2 . Tape surface of glass block using duct tape or similar material for uniform
sealant appearance.
3 . Install sealant backing rod in joint to required depth.
4 . Apply joint sealant to joint and tool concave.
5 . Remove tape after initial set has been achieved .
F. Tolerances :
1 . Joint Width:
Uniformly 1 /4 "
i
2. Variation from Plane to Unit to Adjacent Unit :
Max. 1 /32 in.
3 . Variation from Panel to Panel :
Max . 1 /16 in .
4 . Pointing Mortar Accommodation :
Rake joints 5/8 in. to 3 /4 in.
3 .03 CLEANING
A. Use wire brush to lightly dislodge extra materials from faces of blocks and edges of
joints, do not scrape or brush joint .
B . Use No. 3 or No. 4 steel wool to remove remaining mortar from faces of glass blocks,
do not rub joints.
C . Apply water repellant coating to mortar joints after completion of cleaning for exterior
glass block panels and interior glass block panels exposed to high incidence of dirt.
J * * *END OF SECTION* * *
04270-5
NOTE : Tolerances shall be measured by placing a 10-ft. straightedge anywhere in any direction.
J. 'END OF SECTION * * *
,l
03300-9
6. Apply half width of mortar in joint, do not furrow, and press panel reinforcing
into mortar bed.
7. Apply remaining mortar over panel reinforcing and lay next course of glass
block, full bedded, with no furrowing or mortar.
E. Sealant :
1 . Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers, for materials .
2 . Tape surface of glass block using duct tape or similar material for uniform
sealant appearance.
3 . Install sealant backing rod in joint to required depth.
4 . Apply joint sealant to joint and tool concave.
5 . Remove tape after initial set has been achieved .
F. Tolerances :
1 . Joint Width:
Uniformly 1 /4 "
i
2. Variation from Plane to Unit to Adjacent Unit :
Max. 1 /32 in.
3 . Variation from Panel to Panel :
Max . 1 /16 in .
4 . Pointing Mortar Accommodation :
Rake joints 5/8 in. to 3 /4 in.
3 .03 CLEANING
A. Use wire brush to lightly dislodge extra materials from faces of blocks and edges of
joints, do not scrape or brush joint .
B . Use No. 3 or No. 4 steel wool to remove remaining mortar from faces of glass blocks,
do not rub joints.
C . Apply water repellant coating to mortar joints after completion of cleaning for exterior
glass block panels and interior glass block panels exposed to high incidence of dirt.
J * * *END OF SECTION* * *
04270-5
DIVISION 51 METALS
SECTION 05030 - POWDERED COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Powdered coating applied to metal surfaces.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A . Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500.
B . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100.
C . Aluminum Door Frames , Entrances and Storefronts - Section 08400.
D. Aluminum Windows - Section 08520-
E. Glazed Curtain Walls - Section 08900 .
F. Louvers And Vents - Section 10200 ,
G. Sectional Overhead Doors - Section 08360 .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Properly identified product data.
C . Manufacturer' s full range of custom colors , texture and gloss.
B . Manufacturer ' s data sheet including cleaning recommendations .
1 . 04 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturer' s Association (AAMA) :
1 . AAMA 605 .2 -90 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, with the following exceptions.
a) Five year South Florida exposure test will be met effective March 1996.
b) Due to environmental considerations acid chromate surface preparation is
not used.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
I . ASTM D117- 89 Guide to Test Methods and Specifications For Electrical
Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin.
2 . ASTM D522-85 Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings
With Conical Mandrel Apparatus.
J 3 . ASTM D523 - 85 Test Method for Specular Gloss .
05030-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02741
ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 SCOPE
The work to be performed under this item shall include the selling, delivering and installing of
asphalt concrete surface courses as herein specified. Final asphalt concrete surface course shall
be completed within 30 days after placement of any temporary asphalt surface course.
1 . 02 REFERENCES
Standards applicable in this Specification shall be :
A. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition)
1 . Section 300 - Prime and Tack Coats for Base Courses .
2. Section 320 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - Plant, Methods and Equipment .
3 . Section 330 - Hot Bituminous Mixtures - General Construction Requirements.
4. Section 334 — Superpave Asphalt Concrete.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer' s Data - Prior to fabrication or installation of the final asphalt; concrete
surface course, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for review and approval'the
following:
1 . Certification from the asphalt supplier that their plant meets or exceeds the
requirements of Section 320 above.
2. Asphalt mix design with supporting test data indicating compliance with all mix
design criteria.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2 .01 PRIME AND TACK COAT
A. Prime Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases. Prime coat material shall be Cut-back
Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250, conforming to the Florida D.O .T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-3 .
B . Prime Coat Cover Material shall consist of sand or screenings, conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
902,
C. Tack Coat shall be applied on all prepared bases and existing pavement immediately prior
to surfacing. Tack coat material shall be Asphalt Grade RA-500 or Emulsified Asphalt
02741 - 1 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
� �
< w�-�
�
i
DIVISION 51 METALS
SECTION 05030 - POWDERED COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Powdered coating applied to metal surfaces.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A . Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500.
B . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100.
C . Aluminum Door Frames , Entrances and Storefronts - Section 08400.
D. Aluminum Windows - Section 08520-
E. Glazed Curtain Walls - Section 08900 .
F. Louvers And Vents - Section 10200 ,
G. Sectional Overhead Doors - Section 08360 .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Properly identified product data.
C . Manufacturer' s full range of custom colors , texture and gloss.
B . Manufacturer ' s data sheet including cleaning recommendations .
1 . 04 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturer' s Association (AAMA) :
1 . AAMA 605 .2 -90 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, with the following exceptions.
a) Five year South Florida exposure test will be met effective March 1996.
b) Due to environmental considerations acid chromate surface preparation is
not used.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
I . ASTM D117- 89 Guide to Test Methods and Specifications For Electrical
Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin.
2 . ASTM D522-85 Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings
With Conical Mandrel Apparatus.
J 3 . ASTM D523 - 85 Test Method for Specular Gloss .
05030-1
4 . ASTM D2247 -87 Practice For Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%
Humidity.
5 . ASTM D2794-84 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings on the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) .
6 . ASTM D3359-87 Method For Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B .
7 . ASTM D3363 -74 Test Method For Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
1 . 05 _QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall have produced the coating products
for not less than five years and shall be capable of furnishing both products and
instructions for touch-up.
B . The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall provide each applicator or fabricator
of items which receive the coating with 3 by 5 inch samples of color(s) to be used, as
standard of uniform quality during the shop finishing operation.
C . Items to be coated in the powdered coating shop shall be protected in their bare metal
state while in transit to the powdered coating shop.
1 .06 GUARANTY
A . After final acceptance, furnish Owner written guarantee against defective organic
powdered coating material and application for a period of six (6) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS
A . "Arcbkote 6000 " Powdered Coating by Arch Aluminum and Glass Co . , 1400 S .W .
Th Court, Suite F . , Pompano Beach, FL 33069 , (561 ) 785 -9600, (Dade) 947-8745 .
1 . Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC , dry powder including
resins and pigments according with requirements of AAMA 605 .2 .
2 . Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to
clean up .
3 . Color shall be custom color per Architect' s selection.
B . "Tiger Drylac" Powder Coatings
2605 Beltline Avenue
Reading, PA. 19605
Tel . (215) 921 -9697
2 . 02 PRODUCT QUALITY AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC, dry powder including resins and
pigments according with requirements of HAMA 605 .2 . 05030-2
SECTION 03420 - PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Furnish and install all required Precast Lintels and Door Headers in the locations called
out on the architectural and structural drawings as manufactured by WEKIWA
CONCRETE PRODUCTS, INC . or an approved equal . Lintels available through CSR
Rinker.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Concrete Formwork Section 03100
Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
Cast in place Concrete Section 03300
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
L ASTM A615 (Grade 60) for reinforcing bars .
2 . ASTM A416, 7 wire for prestress strands.
B . ACI Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI 315 , Detail Reinforcement.
2. Concrete Operations shall comply with ACI Standards .
3 . Design and Construction shall conform to the specification of the national
concrete masonry association and ACI 530.
4 . ACI 318 -95, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete .
C . Florida Building Code, latest edition.
D . American Society of Civil Engineers minimum design loads for Buildings and
Other Structures (ASCE 7-95) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 days :
1 . Pre-cast w/standard reinforcement- 3500 PSI .
2 . Pre-cast w/prestress reinforcement- 5000 PSI.
3 . Concrete Fill (placed in field)- 3000 PSI.
2 . 02 MASONRY
A. Minimum masonry unit strength fm 1500 PSI.
B . Mortar shall be type-M .
03420-1
4 . ASTM D2247 -87 Practice For Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%
Humidity.
5 . ASTM D2794-84 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings on the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) .
6 . ASTM D3359-87 Method For Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B .
7 . ASTM D3363 -74 Test Method For Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
1 . 05 _QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall have produced the coating products
for not less than five years and shall be capable of furnishing both products and
instructions for touch-up.
B . The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall provide each applicator or fabricator
of items which receive the coating with 3 by 5 inch samples of color(s) to be used, as
standard of uniform quality during the shop finishing operation.
C . Items to be coated in the powdered coating shop shall be protected in their bare metal
state while in transit to the powdered coating shop.
1 .06 GUARANTY
A . After final acceptance, furnish Owner written guarantee against defective organic
powdered coating material and application for a period of six (6) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS
A . "Arcbkote 6000 " Powdered Coating by Arch Aluminum and Glass Co . , 1400 S .W .
Th Court, Suite F . , Pompano Beach, FL 33069 , (561 ) 785 -9600, (Dade) 947-8745 .
1 . Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC , dry powder including
resins and pigments according with requirements of AAMA 605 .2 .
2 . Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to
clean up .
3 . Color shall be custom color per Architect' s selection.
B . "Tiger Drylac" Powder Coatings
2605 Beltline Avenue
Reading, PA. 19605
Tel . (215) 921 -9697
2 . 02 PRODUCT QUALITY AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC, dry powder including resins and
pigments according with requirements of HAMA 605 .2 . 05030-2
B . Powder Coating Characteristics :
_ Glossy Semi Gloss Mat
Surface Surface Surface
Thickness 2 . 503 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils
/60-90 /60-90 /60-90
Gloss 80-90 55-65 15 -25
Cross Hatch
Adhesion (2) Pass 100% Pass 100% Pass 100%
Mandrel Bending (3) 1 /8 "/3mm 5/32 "/4mm 3/161 /5mm
Erichsen Cupping
ISO 1520 5/ 16111/81nm 1 /4 "/7mm 3/ 1675mm
Impression
Hardness (4) 95 95 95
Impact Test (5 ) Up to 160 " Up to 160 " Up to 160 "
/lb. /lb. /lb .
Pencil Hardness (6) 2H (min .) 2H (min.) 2H (min.)
Dry Mill Test OK OK OK
Salt Spray Test (7) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
max .undercut. max .undercut. max .undercut.
Humidity 1 / 16" m
/ Im 1 / 16 "/Inure 1 / 16 "/ lmm
Resistance ( 8) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
min.blisters min .blisters min.blisters
1 / 16 "/ 1mm 1 / 16 "/ lmm 1 / 16"/ Imm
( 1 ) Gloss According to Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D523 .
(2) Cross Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D3359 Method B .
(3 ) Mandrel Bending Test, Astm D522 .
(4) Impression hardness according to Buchholz ISO 2215 .
(5) Impact Test, ASTM D2794, 1 / 10 " distortion.
(6) Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363 .
(7) Saltspray Resistance Test, ASTM DI 17.
(8) Humidity Resistance Test, ASTM D2247.
2 .03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to clean up.
2 . 04 SHOP APPLICATION CONDITIONS
A. Apply and cure coating in dust free surroundings, in a humidity range of 30 to 85
percent, and in a surrounding air temperature of not less than 50 degrees F .
B . Do not apply coatings to surfaces which are dirty, dusty, rusty, damp or oily.
05030-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Grades Rs- 1 or RS-2, conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 916-2.
2.02 SUPERPAVE ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Asphalt used for structural, leveling or patching courses shall be Type SP- 12.5,
conforming to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course
depending on planned thickness.
B . Asphalt used for final surface course shall be Type SP-9.5 , conforming to the Florida
D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section
334. Asphalt gradation shall be fine or course depending on planned thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 CLEANING, SURFACES
Prior to the laying of any surface courses, the surface of the pavement or base to be covered shall
be cleaned of all loose and deleterious material by the use of power brooming or hand brooming
where necessary. All such material shall be collected and disposed of by the Contractor.
3 .02 APPLICATION OF PRIME AND TACK COATS
A. Prime Coat material shall be heated to a suitable temperature and applied to the base in a
thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0. 1 and 0 . 15 gallons per square yard, as determined
by the Engineer. The prime coat shall be applied using a pressure distributor. Uniformly
cover the primed surface with a light application of cover material. Roll the covered prime
coat with a traffic roller to provide a dense mat.
B. Where primed base courses have become dirty or lost their bonding effect and on all
underlying asphalt courses, a tack coat shall be required. Tack coat material shall be heated
to a suitable temperature and applied in a thin, uniform layer at a rate of between 0.02 and
0.08 gallons per square yard. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the
surface course installation to permit drying but not so far in advance as to lose its
adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust. The tack coat shall be kept free from
traffic until the surface course has been laid.
3 .03 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The batching of aggregates, fillers and asphalt binder as well as the mixing and heating of the
mixture shall conform to the Florida D.O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, latest edition, Section 330 . The "Master Temperature Range" for all mix designs
shall be the accepted mix design temperature t 30 degrees Fahrenheit ff). Any load or portion
of a load measured by the Engineer's Representative which is outside the "Master Temperature
Range" shall be rejected prior to installation.
3 .04 TRANSPORTATION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE
The surface course shall be transported in tight sealing vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign
material. The inside surface of the truck bodies shall be thinly coated with soapy water or an
acceptable asphalt release agent prior to receiving asphalt concrete. . Diesel, kerosene, gasoline or
02741 - 2 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
2 .03 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615 (grade 60) . -
B . Prestress Strands : ASTM A416, 7 -wire.
C . Steel is placed in the precast lintel at time of fabrication.
D . Minimum coverage of steel to be 3/4 inch for top bars and 1 . 5 inches for bottom
bars .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times
to assure continuity of installation.
B . Store units at project site to ensure against cracking, distortion, staining, or other
physical damage, and so that markings are visible.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A . Lift and support units at designated lift points . Shoring of precast units
shall be installed and removed solely by the contractor under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer. ,
B . Minimum bearing required at each end is 4 inches . Bearing preferred is 8 inches . -�
C. Do not install any damaged units .
3 .03 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast concrete units
that meet requirements of this section. The contractor shall also be responsible
for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from
corrections to precast lintels .
* * *END OF SECTION'
03420-2
B . Powder Coating Characteristics :
_ Glossy Semi Gloss Mat
Surface Surface Surface
Thickness 2 . 503 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils
/60-90 /60-90 /60-90
Gloss 80-90 55-65 15 -25
Cross Hatch
Adhesion (2) Pass 100% Pass 100% Pass 100%
Mandrel Bending (3) 1 /8 "/3mm 5/32 "/4mm 3/161 /5mm
Erichsen Cupping
ISO 1520 5/ 16111/81nm 1 /4 "/7mm 3/ 1675mm
Impression
Hardness (4) 95 95 95
Impact Test (5 ) Up to 160 " Up to 160 " Up to 160 "
/lb. /lb. /lb .
Pencil Hardness (6) 2H (min .) 2H (min.) 2H (min.)
Dry Mill Test OK OK OK
Salt Spray Test (7) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
max .undercut. max .undercut. max .undercut.
Humidity 1 / 16" m
/ Im 1 / 16 "/Inure 1 / 16 "/ lmm
Resistance ( 8) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
min.blisters min .blisters min.blisters
1 / 16 "/ 1mm 1 / 16 "/ lmm 1 / 16"/ Imm
( 1 ) Gloss According to Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D523 .
(2) Cross Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D3359 Method B .
(3 ) Mandrel Bending Test, Astm D522 .
(4) Impression hardness according to Buchholz ISO 2215 .
(5) Impact Test, ASTM D2794, 1 / 10 " distortion.
(6) Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363 .
(7) Saltspray Resistance Test, ASTM DI 17.
(8) Humidity Resistance Test, ASTM D2247.
2 .03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to clean up.
2 . 04 SHOP APPLICATION CONDITIONS
A. Apply and cure coating in dust free surroundings, in a humidity range of 30 to 85
percent, and in a surrounding air temperature of not less than 50 degrees F .
B . Do not apply coatings to surfaces which are dirty, dusty, rusty, damp or oily.
05030-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Aluminum: Clean with chemicals or etch to remove grease, dirt and loose oxide film
using manufacturer' s recommended products .
B . Previously Powdered Coated Metal (touch-up) : Remove dirt, grease and bond
breaking substances and roughen area to be touched up with finabrasiveve paper and
touch-up with air dry spray supplied by applicator.
C . Prepare surfaces to receive powder coating and shop apply powder coating in
accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations .
3 .02 COLOR MATCHING
A . Powdered coating shall be formulated and applied so as to maintain uniform color,
texture and gloss .
B . All applications of powder coatings shall maintain uniform color, texture , gloss and
quality of application to match accepted sample .
3 . 03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A . Apply powder coating system according to manufacturer' s published
recommendations.
B . Due to the sensitivity of these coatings to dust pickup during their extended curing
times , apply all coats of powder coating system at shop or factory, under dust free,
temperature and humidity-controlled conditions.
3 .04 POWDERED COATING APPLICATION
A. Pneumatically feed dry powder to spray gun. Impact a low amperage , high voltage
charge to the powder.
B . Uniformly spray apply powdered coating to electrically grounded metal surfaces.
C . Allow sprayed surfaces to bake in ovens at temperatures recommended by coating
manufacturer.
D . Finished surfaces shall be fully and uniformly coated without pinholes, bubbles, sag,
runs, lumps, marks or discoloration. Surface finish shall be of uniform color, texture
and gloss.
05030-4
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
1 PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Edition)
ASTM C90 Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block
ASTM C270 Type-M mortar.
ASTM C150-98 Type I portland cement.
ASTM C207-97 Hydrated Lime
B . Construction Tolerances :
1 . Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, do not exceed 1 /4" .
2 . Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed
minus 1 /4 " nor plus
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer ' s specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type
complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage,
installations and protection.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each day' s work to protect completed work that has not had
enough time for the mortar to cure and is still subject to rain damage.
B . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place .
04230-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Aluminum: Clean with chemicals or etch to remove grease, dirt and loose oxide film
using manufacturer' s recommended products .
B . Previously Powdered Coated Metal (touch-up) : Remove dirt, grease and bond
breaking substances and roughen area to be touched up with finabrasiveve paper and
touch-up with air dry spray supplied by applicator.
C . Prepare surfaces to receive powder coating and shop apply powder coating in
accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations .
3 .02 COLOR MATCHING
A . Powdered coating shall be formulated and applied so as to maintain uniform color,
texture and gloss .
B . All applications of powder coatings shall maintain uniform color, texture , gloss and
quality of application to match accepted sample .
3 . 03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A . Apply powder coating system according to manufacturer' s published
recommendations.
B . Due to the sensitivity of these coatings to dust pickup during their extended curing
times , apply all coats of powder coating system at shop or factory, under dust free,
temperature and humidity-controlled conditions.
3 .04 POWDERED COATING APPLICATION
A. Pneumatically feed dry powder to spray gun. Impact a low amperage , high voltage
charge to the powder.
B . Uniformly spray apply powdered coating to electrically grounded metal surfaces.
C . Allow sprayed surfaces to bake in ovens at temperatures recommended by coating
manufacturer.
D . Finished surfaces shall be fully and uniformly coated without pinholes, bubbles, sag,
runs, lumps, marks or discoloration. Surface finish shall be of uniform color, texture
and gloss.
05030-4
J . 05 TOUCH-UP
A. After powder coating has been in place at least 15 days, and within 30days of
Architect-Engineer' s inspection of the product prior to certification that the work is
complete, check all powder coated surfaces for damage, missed areas and
discoloration.
B . Prepare surfaces and touch-up damaged, missed and discolored areas to bring coating
system to full dry film thickness, in color and gloss matching that of adjacent coated
areas .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
05030-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
any other hazardous or environmentally detrimental material shall not be used to lubricate the
truck bed. Cover each load during cool and cloudy weather when there is a possibility of rain.
3 .05 PATCHING AND LEVELING COURSES
Where asphalt concrete is to be installed on an existing paved surface or old base which is
irregular, or where indicated on the Plans, the existing surface shall be brought to proper grade
and cross section by the application of patching or leveling courses.
3 .06 PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The placement of asphalt concrete for patching, leveling and subsequent courses shall conform
to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition,
Section 330-9.
3 .07 COMPACTING ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall provide a separate set of rollers, with their operators, for each paving or
leveling train crew working at the job. All coverage requirements for rolling shall be conducted
before the surface temperature of the asphalt concrete drops to the extent that effective
compaction can not be achieved or the rollers begin to damage the pavement course. Compaction
and joints for as freshly laid asphalt concrete courses shall be installed in compliance with the
Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition Section
330- 10 and 330-11 .
3 . 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The longitudinal installation of all asphalt concrete courses shall be required to be checked
by a rolling straightedge. The straightedge shall have a minimum effective length of 15
feet. The finished surface of base or structural surface courses shall not vary more than 3/8
inch from the straightedge applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. The : finished
surface of final surface courses shall not vary more than 3/ 16 inch from the straightedge
applied parallel to the centerline of the pavement. Any pavement section exceeding the
above tolerances maybe rejected by the Engineer.
B . The transverse cross slope shall be checked at up to 10 locations for each days work.
When the difference between the measured cross slope and the design cross slope varies
by more than f 0.2% for travel lanes or t 0.5% for shoulders, the paving operation shall be
stopped and corrected. Should the average measurement for the 10 locations be above the
specified tolerance, the measured pavement section may be rejected by the Engineer.
3 .07 CORRECTING UNACCEPTABLE ASPHALT CONCRETE
The Contractor shall be required to correct rejected pavement sections by; removing and replacing;
overlaying; or other method in compliance with the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 330- 12 .4.
END OF SECTION
02741 - 3 02741 — Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course
C . Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such l
masonry. J
D . Protect sill, ledges, finished door and window frames and projections from
droppings of mortar.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 . MATERIALS
Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block: ASTM C90- Grade N , Type II, cured 28 days
Mortar: Type "M", ASTM C270
Cement : ASTM C150-98, Type I
Hydrated Lime : ASTM C 207 -97
Sand: Clean Masons Sand
Water:
Potable
2 . 02 CONCRETE BLOCK
A . Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type , face
size, exposed face and, under each form of block included, for weight classification.
1 . Grade N, Type II C .M .U . , normal weight unit, fm ' 1500 psi .
2 . Size: Manufacturer' s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16"
long X 8 " high ( 15 - 5 /8" x 7 - 5/8 " actual) X thicknesses indicated . Splits
and halves as appropriate for coursing in vertical and horizontal directions .
3 . Hollow Load-Bearing Block: ASTM C-90 and as follows :
a. Weight Classification: Normal weight .
b. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block types when
fire rated walls occur. es for
C . Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block o
receive
finished block to receive paint or standard stucco block tto
stucco .
2 .03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C- 150, Type 1, except Type III maybe used for cold
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
required mortar color.
B . Hydrated Lime: ASTM C-297 , Type S .
04230-2 \
J . 05 TOUCH-UP
A. After powder coating has been in place at least 15 days, and within 30days of
Architect-Engineer' s inspection of the product prior to certification that the work is
complete, check all powder coated surfaces for damage, missed areas and
discoloration.
B . Prepare surfaces and touch-up damaged, missed and discolored areas to bring coating
system to full dry film thickness, in color and gloss matching that of adjacent coated
areas .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
05030-5
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes the labor and materials required for the proper completion of
structural steel work as shown on the drawings or specified .
B . Generally, this work is as follows :
1 . Furnishing, fabrication and erection of all structural steel beams, columns,
trusses, attached lintels, column base and cap plates, including all bolts and
welding as required for the complete installation of the work.
2 . Furnishing all anchor bolts and leveling plates for installationunder other
sections .
3 . Shop painting and field touch-up of all steel .
4 . Erection drawings and shop details.
5 . Providing all tools, equipment and temporary bracing required for safe,
proper and expeditious erection of the work.
6 . Furnishing of all loose lintels.
C . Related work of other sections :
Steel Joists Section 05210
Metal Decking Section 05300
Painting Section 09900
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : All structural steel work shall comply with the
Specifications or the "Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings", latest edition, issued by the American Institute for Steel Construction,
and shall comply with the requirements of local building codes .
B . All welding shall be done by the electric arc process and conform to the Code of
05120- 1
C . Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C- 144, except for joints less than 1 /4 " use aggregate
graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
D . Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C-404 .
E. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type-M, 2,500 p . s.i .
151
F. Joint Reinforcement :/�Pide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed
continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 %
with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated
below:
1 . Width:
Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2 " less
than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar
coverage of not less than 5/8 " on joint faces exposed to exterior and '/i
elsewhere .
2 . Wire Size for Side Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
3 - Wire Size for Cross Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
4 . For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side
` rods :
-- a. Truss design, as manufactured by Dur-o-wall , (or approved equal),
with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 " o. c. Units to be 9
gauge hot dipped galvanized.
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Bars :
Deformed steel, ATSM A-615 , Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No . 18 .
B . Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips:
Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry walls : size and configuration as indicated.
1 . Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000,
Designation 2AA-805 .
C . Bond Breaker Strips :
Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D-226, Type I (No.
15 asphalt felt) .
D . Metal cavity caps in lieu of waste mortar shipping bags .
04230-3
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes the labor and materials required for the proper completion of
structural steel work as shown on the drawings or specified .
B . Generally, this work is as follows :
1 . Furnishing, fabrication and erection of all structural steel beams, columns,
trusses, attached lintels, column base and cap plates, including all bolts and
welding as required for the complete installation of the work.
2 . Furnishing all anchor bolts and leveling plates for installationunder other
sections .
3 . Shop painting and field touch-up of all steel .
4 . Erection drawings and shop details.
5 . Providing all tools, equipment and temporary bracing required for safe,
proper and expeditious erection of the work.
6 . Furnishing of all loose lintels.
C . Related work of other sections :
Steel Joists Section 05210
Metal Decking Section 05300
Painting Section 09900
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : All structural steel work shall comply with the
Specifications or the "Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings", latest edition, issued by the American Institute for Steel Construction,
and shall comply with the requirements of local building codes .
B . All welding shall be done by the electric arc process and conform to the Code of
05120- 1
Are and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society .
All welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with this code,
and holding current certificates. `
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Supplementary
Conditions, at earliest possible date to insure timely delivery and proper
coordination of work by others . No variation from design sizes will be permitted
but recommendations for modification of connections or details to better suit
fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed, in writing to
the attention of the Architect.
B . Shop Drawings shall include erection plans , details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained . Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the approval seal and signature of the licensed
professional engineer who supervised their preparation shall be used in the field and
all other shop drawings will be considered void .
E _ Work under this section includes responsibility for dimensions to be correlated and
confirmed in the field and for information that pertains solely to fabrication
processes and to techniques of construction.
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members which are required by other
trades .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36 . Steel shall be new, clean, and
straight (foreign steel not acceptable) .
B . High tensile strength bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A325 , or
A490 .
C . Ordinary unfinished bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 .
D . Are welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM Standards Spec. A233 , latest
edition.
05120-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02752
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE
A. The work covered under this section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the
construction of a stabilized subgrade and concrete paving upon said subgrade.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Prior to providing the materials, Contractor shall furnish to the
Engineer, for review and approval, five (5) sets of shop drawings for: concrete mix.-
admixtures; steel reinforcing; and joint sealer. All drawings shall be reviewed, approved
and stamped by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of the General Conditions.
1 . 03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel or concrete, the Engineer and Contractor
Representatives shall check the finished subgrade section for line and grade.
B . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform tests for bearing values and density, prior to the placement of any reinforcing steel
or concrete.
C . The Contractor shall engage the services and pay for an independent testing laboratory to
perform concrete cylinder compressive strength tests.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2. 01 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, materials and personnel necessary for the proper placing, finishing, and curing of
the concrete pavement shall be on the project and in good working condition before the
Contractor will be permitted to begin placing concrete. Throughout the construction of the project,
the Contractor shall maintain the equipment in good working condition to assure the proper
prosecution of the work. At a minimum the following equipment shall provided:
A. Chutes, Wheelbarrows, Concrete Pumps — shall be provided where necessary to assure
the concrete is properly placed and spread with no undo delays.
B . Vibrators - Approved vibrators for consolidating concrete along the faces and comers of
forms and adjacent to joints shall be provided. All necessary power sources shall be
provided by the Contractor.
02752 - 1 02752 — Concrete Paving
2 .05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General :
Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or
grout.
B . Mixing:
Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical
batch mixer: comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water
content.
C . Mortar for unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C780, proportion Specification, for types of mortar required,
unless otherwise indicated .
D . Grout for Unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C476, 2 , 500 p . s . i . , for grout for use in construction of
reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or
if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement
which will comply completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
( 1 . Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal direction, unless (�
otherwise indicated.
2 . Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least horizontal dimension,
unless otherwise indicated .
E. Masonry Compressive Strength : fm ' 1 , 500 p.s .i. (Minimum) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 . INSTALLATION , GENERAL
A. See Structural and Architectural Drawings for notes and details and masonry
opening requirements . Coordinate all door and window masonry openings with the
scheduled manufacturers per the plans . Tolerances are critical to meet the wind
load performance testing for said openings within the 130 and 140 mph wind speed
zones.
B . Set blocks with 3/8 " full, flush joints in running bond. Use a masonry interlock
(50% masonry bond) at all intersecting walls where possible. All work not plumb,
true and accurate shall be replaced.
C . Store all materials off the ground and protect from all dirt and foreign material .
04230-4
Are and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society .
All welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with this code,
and holding current certificates. `
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Supplementary
Conditions, at earliest possible date to insure timely delivery and proper
coordination of work by others . No variation from design sizes will be permitted
but recommendations for modification of connections or details to better suit
fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed, in writing to
the attention of the Architect.
B . Shop Drawings shall include erection plans , details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained . Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the approval seal and signature of the licensed
professional engineer who supervised their preparation shall be used in the field and
all other shop drawings will be considered void .
E _ Work under this section includes responsibility for dimensions to be correlated and
confirmed in the field and for information that pertains solely to fabrication
processes and to techniques of construction.
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members which are required by other
trades .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36 . Steel shall be new, clean, and
straight (foreign steel not acceptable) .
B . High tensile strength bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A325 , or
A490 .
C . Ordinary unfinished bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 .
D . Are welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM Standards Spec. A233 , latest
edition.
05120-2
E. Shop coat of paint shall be Manufacturer' s Standard Shop Primer, or approved
equal .
2 . 02 FIELD COORDINATION
A. All measurements shall be verified in the field, particularly for work installed
before delivery of steel . Contractor shall notify Architect in writing of any
discrepancy between elevations , locations, conditions, etc. , shown on the drawings
and those actually encountered in the field, and shall not proceed with the work
until discrepancies have been resolved.
B . The Contractor shall check all drawings and shall be responsible for completeness
and correct Iittirgc of all work .
C. All anchor bolts and plates required to be set in concrete shall be furnished and
delivered, together with templates and/or instructions for setting, in ample time for
installation by other trades.
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A . Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints
between components parts . If straightening or flattening is required, it shall be
done in a manner that will not damage the material.
B . Columns and stiffeners shall be milled at bearing ends to true surface, at right
angles to the axis or at the proper angle, to insure uniform bearing. .,i ,
C. Column base plates shall be of sizes indicated on the drawings, with straight and
true top and bottom surfaces. Base plates may be straightened by pressing to obtain
satisfactory contact bearing .
D . Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched 1 / 16" larger than the normal diameter of
the bolts. Burning to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted. Holes that must be
enlarged shall be remade . Bolts shall fit holes snugly and nuts shall be drawn up
tight and shall have full grip in bolts.
E . Provisions of work by other trades : Open holes or studs shall be provided for
attaching of work by other trades which adjoins, attaches to, or connects with
Structural Steel. Particular notice shall be given to requirements where
miscellaneous metal adjoins structural steel .
F. All exposed steel shall be free of stampings, mill scale or imperfections. All cuts
and notches at exposed steel shall be ground and finished smooth. All welds on
exposed structural steel shall be filled having an additional bead or beads as
required , and ground smooth to receive shop primer coat.
05120-3
D. Do not retemper any mortar. Discard the mortar if it has begun to set.
E. Provide Dur-O-Wall, (or approved equal), truss-type, horizontal reinforcing at
every other block course. At door and window openings, provide continuous Dur-
O-Wall horizontal reinforcing at the first and second block courses above and
below the opening or extend the reinforcing back a minimum of two (2) feet from
the opening. Extend Dur-O-Wall reinforcing 1 - 1 /2 " into concrete columns . Lap
splices shall not be less than 6 " . Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and
expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
F . All cells designated on the drawings to be filled with concrete are to be kept clean
of any and all debris. Provide inspection/clean-out holes at the bottom course.
Inspection holes in finish block shall be neatly saw-cut.
G . All lintels shall have minimum bearing as called out on the Structural Drawings.
H. Do not wet concrete masonry units during installation.
J. Cleaning Reinforcing : Before placing, remove loose rust, and other coatings from
reinforcing.
K. Thickness : Build walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness indicated.
L. Build chases and recesses as shown and required for the work of other
trades. Provide not less than 8 " of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. See plans for specific .
conditions.
M . Leave openings for specialty equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match
work immediately adjacent to the opening.
N . Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work.
Use full-size units without cutting where possible .
P. Use inspection and clean-out holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells, for
grouting lifts over 5 feet high . Clean-out holes should be 4 "w X 8 " h minimum .
See ACI 530-92, Section 4. 3 . 2 . 3 .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1 /4 " in
J 10 ' or 3/8 " in a story height not to exceed 20', nor %" in 40' or more . For external
04230-5
E. Shop coat of paint shall be Manufacturer' s Standard Shop Primer, or approved
equal .
2 . 02 FIELD COORDINATION
A. All measurements shall be verified in the field, particularly for work installed
before delivery of steel . Contractor shall notify Architect in writing of any
discrepancy between elevations , locations, conditions, etc. , shown on the drawings
and those actually encountered in the field, and shall not proceed with the work
until discrepancies have been resolved.
B . The Contractor shall check all drawings and shall be responsible for completeness
and correct Iittirgc of all work .
C. All anchor bolts and plates required to be set in concrete shall be furnished and
delivered, together with templates and/or instructions for setting, in ample time for
installation by other trades.
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A . Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints
between components parts . If straightening or flattening is required, it shall be
done in a manner that will not damage the material.
B . Columns and stiffeners shall be milled at bearing ends to true surface, at right
angles to the axis or at the proper angle, to insure uniform bearing. .,i ,
C. Column base plates shall be of sizes indicated on the drawings, with straight and
true top and bottom surfaces. Base plates may be straightened by pressing to obtain
satisfactory contact bearing .
D . Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched 1 / 16" larger than the normal diameter of
the bolts. Burning to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted. Holes that must be
enlarged shall be remade . Bolts shall fit holes snugly and nuts shall be drawn up
tight and shall have full grip in bolts.
E . Provisions of work by other trades : Open holes or studs shall be provided for
attaching of work by other trades which adjoins, attaches to, or connects with
Structural Steel. Particular notice shall be given to requirements where
miscellaneous metal adjoins structural steel .
F. All exposed steel shall be free of stampings, mill scale or imperfections. All cuts
and notches at exposed steel shall be ground and finished smooth. All welds on
exposed structural steel shall be filled having an additional bead or beads as
required , and ground smooth to receive shop primer coat.
05120-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION {\ l
3 . 01 ERECTION J
A . Columns and struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept plumb during erection for which all temporary ,
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns.
B . The Building Erector sub-contracted with the General Contractor shall provide all
necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc. ,
that may be required to erect the structural frame and maintain it in alignment until
the building is completed, including any extra guying after completion of decking.
C . Welding and bolting of all connections shall follow the setting of the steel as
closely as plumbing and alignment will permit.
D . Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment. Any work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
E. Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure, \
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect, or personnel
having legitimate business at the site. Location of supports for derricks , hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studied by the General Contractor, and shall
be reviewed by the Architect if any questions arise .
F . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the written permission of the Architect.
G. Self-lubricating bearing plate assemblies shall be installed in the field. After
installation, a protective covering shall be provided to insure that no dirt, or other
injurious materials comes in contact with the bearing surfaces.
3 .02 CONNECTIONS
A. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise shown on plans .
B . Field connections shall be welded where specifically shown. All other field
connections shall be bolted with 3/4 " minimum A307 machine bolts, except for the
following, which must be made with 3/4" minimum A325 high strength bolts :
Connections of beams supporting roof mounted machinery. /
Other connections as noted on the structural drawings . t
05120 -4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
C . Hand tools - The Contractor shall furnish all other equipment, hand tools (shovels,
spades, hand trowels, float trowels, etc.) and supplies which are necessary for the proper
prosecution of the work.
D . Leveling Equipment - Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing, the
Contractor shall provide mechanical equipment of either the slip form or form paving
type which will strike off, consolidate, and finish the pavement to the required cross
section.
E. Concrete Saw - Concrete saw(s) shall be capable of cutting hardened concrete neatly to the
dimensions specified on the Plans. The saw(s) shall be equipped with a suitable guard and
protective eye ware.
F. Joint Scaling Equipment - Sealing equipment shall be capable of installing the sealant in
joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .
G. Membrane Compound Sprayer - A pressure sprayer capable of applying a continuous
uniform film shall be required.
2. 02 FORMS
A. Unless special provision is made for use of wood, all side forms for this work-,shall be of
metal of a depth at least equal to the edge thickness of the pavement, except that it is
permissible to increase the depth of forms by fastening boards under the forms. The
sections shall have a length of at least ten feet each, except on curves of less than 150 foot
radius, where other materials may be used as provided in Paragraph C, below. Forms with
a height of eight or more inches shall have a base width of at least eight inches. Other
forms shall have a minimum base width of six inches. When set to grade and staked in
place, the maximum deviation of the top surface of any section from a straight line shall
not exceed 1 /8 inch.
B . The method of connection between sections shall be such that the formed joint shall be
free from play or movement in any direction. The bracing and support must be ample to
prevent the deflection of the forms under the pressure of the concrete or the weight or
thrust of the machinery operating on the forms.
C. Flexible steel or wood forms may be used only when specifically provided for on the plans
with the exception that their use is herein approved for all curves having a radius of less
than 150 feet. Wood forms shall be equal in depth to the edge thickness of the pavement.
Forms shall be held by stakes and securely braced at any point where necessary so that no
movement will result from pressure of the concrete or the weight or thrust of machinery
operating on the forms .
2. 03 REINFORCING STEEL
A. If reinforcing is called for on the Plans, the reinforcing steel shall conform to the
following:
02752 - 2 02752 — Concrete Paving
corners , expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1 /4 " in any story of 20' maximum, nor ''/i' in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of i\ l
head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1 /4" in 10' , ''/Z" maximum . i
B . Variation from Level :
For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels , sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1 /4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in
40' or more . For top surface of bearing walls no not exceed 1 /8 " between adjacent
floor elements in 10' or 1 / 16" within width of a single unit.
C . Variation of Linear Building Line :
For position shown in plan and related portion of columns , walls and partitions, do
not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4 " in 40' or more.
D . Variation in Cross- Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus
1 /4 " nor plus 1/2" .
E . Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness:
Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /811 , with a
maximum thickness limited to 1/2" . Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1 /8" .
3 . 03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS {
A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint widths and to accurately locate openings , movement-type joints, returns and
offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations .
B . Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
C . Stopping and Resuming Work :
Rack back 'h-unit length in each course: do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of
set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry .
D . Built-in Work :
As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items .
1 . Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar,
unless otherwise indicated. Where built-in items are to be embedded in
cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below
and rod mortar or grout into core.
04230-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION {\ l
3 . 01 ERECTION J
A . Columns and struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept plumb during erection for which all temporary ,
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns.
B . The Building Erector sub-contracted with the General Contractor shall provide all
necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc. ,
that may be required to erect the structural frame and maintain it in alignment until
the building is completed, including any extra guying after completion of decking.
C . Welding and bolting of all connections shall follow the setting of the steel as
closely as plumbing and alignment will permit.
D . Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment. Any work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
E. Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure, \
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect, or personnel
having legitimate business at the site. Location of supports for derricks , hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studied by the General Contractor, and shall
be reviewed by the Architect if any questions arise .
F . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the written permission of the Architect.
G. Self-lubricating bearing plate assemblies shall be installed in the field. After
installation, a protective covering shall be provided to insure that no dirt, or other
injurious materials comes in contact with the bearing surfaces.
3 .02 CONNECTIONS
A. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise shown on plans .
B . Field connections shall be welded where specifically shown. All other field
connections shall be bolted with 3/4 " minimum A307 machine bolts, except for the
following, which must be made with 3/4" minimum A325 high strength bolts :
Connections of beams supporting roof mounted machinery. /
Other connections as noted on the structural drawings . t
05120 -4
C . Where bolted connections are used , they shall be standard beam connections as
detailed in the AISC Manual, having a strength at least equal to one-half the
tabulated load capacity of the AISC Manual .
D . Where welded connections are used, they shall be Welded Frame Beam
Connections, as detailed in the AISC Manual, but of a length and capacity at least
equal to that of "Minimum Beam Connections".
E. Where the combination of shop welding and field bolting is used, the appropriate
portions of the bolted and welded standards specified above shall be combined.
F. High tensile bolts shall be installed in accordance with the March 1964
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, approved by
the Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation using the Turn-of-nut method with one washer. However, bolts shall
be designed as A307 bolts for all connections in which they are used.
G. Common machine bolts shall have shanks of proper length to provide full grip.
H. Provide approved lock washers to prevent slipping of nuts .
3 . 03 PAINTING
jA . All structural steel , not encased in concrete, shall be prepared for painting
according to Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-AP3 Power Tool Cleaning
and shall receive one shop coat of 1 mil . maximum thick paint.
B . Paint, if manufacturer shop primer, shall be thinned with the building
manufacturers approved material and applied at a spreading rate of 400 s .f. per
gallon. The thinner shall be compatible with the finished painting materials and
methods of application.
C . The Contractor shall submit the name and characteristics of proposed paint to the
Architect for approval . All paint shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer' s recommendations to achieve the above desired results. The prime
coat shall be compatible with the finish paint.
D. After erection, all bolts, welds and serious abrasions to the shop coat shall be
painted with one coat of the material used for the shop coat.
E. Steel beams and girders encased or partially encased in concrete shall not be
painted where encasement occurs .
F. Steel beams and girders scheduled to receive sprayed on fireproofing shall not be
painted.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
05120-5
2 . Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 ") under
bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise
indicated.
3 . 04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
B . Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment, if not shown, lay walls with 3/8 " joints.
C . Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by
other materials , unless otherwise indicated .
D . Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
E . Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do
not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in
position . If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in
fresh mortar.
F . Collar Joints:
After each course is laid, fill the vertical longitudinal joint betweenwythes-solidly
and with mortar for all exterior walls .
G. Comers :
Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at comers, unless otherwise
shown .
1 . For horizontally reinforces masonry, provide continuity at corners with
prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding.
H. Intersecting and Abutting Walls:
If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with 8 " maximum offsets and
provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o. c. , vertically, or omit
blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2 '-0 " o. c. vertically. Form
anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1 - 1 /2 " x 1 /4 " x 2'-0" long with ends turned
up not less than 2 " or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar-filled cores.
1
04230-7
C . Where bolted connections are used , they shall be standard beam connections as
detailed in the AISC Manual, having a strength at least equal to one-half the
tabulated load capacity of the AISC Manual .
D . Where welded connections are used, they shall be Welded Frame Beam
Connections, as detailed in the AISC Manual, but of a length and capacity at least
equal to that of "Minimum Beam Connections".
E. Where the combination of shop welding and field bolting is used, the appropriate
portions of the bolted and welded standards specified above shall be combined.
F. High tensile bolts shall be installed in accordance with the March 1964
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, approved by
the Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation using the Turn-of-nut method with one washer. However, bolts shall
be designed as A307 bolts for all connections in which they are used.
G. Common machine bolts shall have shanks of proper length to provide full grip.
H. Provide approved lock washers to prevent slipping of nuts .
3 . 03 PAINTING
jA . All structural steel , not encased in concrete, shall be prepared for painting
according to Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-AP3 Power Tool Cleaning
and shall receive one shop coat of 1 mil . maximum thick paint.
B . Paint, if manufacturer shop primer, shall be thinned with the building
manufacturers approved material and applied at a spreading rate of 400 s .f. per
gallon. The thinner shall be compatible with the finished painting materials and
methods of application.
C . The Contractor shall submit the name and characteristics of proposed paint to the
Architect for approval . All paint shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer' s recommendations to achieve the above desired results. The prime
coat shall be compatible with the finish paint.
D. After erection, all bolts, welds and serious abrasions to the shop coat shall be
painted with one coat of the material used for the shop coat.
E. Steel beams and girders encased or partially encased in concrete shall not be
painted where encasement occurs .
F. Steel beams and girders scheduled to receive sprayed on fireproofing shall not be
painted.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
05120-5
SECTION 05400 - LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS IN OTHER SECTIONS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of lightgage metal framing (LtGMFrm) is shown on drawings .
Types of lightgage metal framing units include the following: "C" shaped steel studs.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Components Design : Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance
with AICS "Specification for design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
B . Fire-Rated Assemblies : Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated
for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing
regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
C . Manufacturers offering products complying with requirements for lightgage metal
framing components include the following :
L Shaped load bearing studs, 1 -5/8 " flange :
Alabama Metal Industries
Marino Ware
Dietrick
Roll Form Products, Inc.
U. S . Steel Corp .
Wheeling Corrugating Co .
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Products data: Submit manufacturer ' s product information and installation instructions
for each items of lightgage framing and accessories .
B . Shop Drawine • Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not
fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer' s product data. Signed and sealed
Shop Drawings required by a Florida Registered Structural Engineer.
Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations,
number, type, locations and spacing, Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices,
accessories, and details required for proper installation.
05400- 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Welded Wire Mats (No Rolled Fabrics) - ASTM A- 185
Deformed Bars - ASTM A615 Grade 60
B . All reinforcing shall be adequately supported on mortar blocks or plastic chairs at the
proper elevation.
2. 04 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Proportioning
The actual proportions of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water and
admixtures to be used for various strength mixes shall be determined by an approved
testing laboratory with the mix having the signature and seal of a State of Florida
registered professional engineer. The concrete shall be in accordance with the American
Concrete Institute (ACI) standard 318-77, section 4.2 through 4 . 8 (excluding section
4. 6), or other pre-approved methods so as to produce a workable concrete having the
properties of strength, slump and air content set out elsewhere in the Contract
Documents. No materials or mixes not currently approved shall be submitted by the
Contractor for use in this project.
B . Portland Cement
The cement used to manufacture concrete shall comply with Florida D. O.T. Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 206 Edition, Section 921 . The cement .'
used to manufacture concrete shall conform to AASHTO M 85 or M 240. If requested
by the Engineer, the cement supplier shall submit a certification that the cement ,used on
the project conforms to the applicable specifications with complete mill analysis for
every 200 tons used.
C . Aggregate
Aggregate shall conform to ASTM-C-33 , or to Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 901 and 902.
D. Admixtures
Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM-C-260. Type A water reducing
admixtures (normal setting) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type D water reducing
admixtures (retarders) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Type E water reducing
admixtures (accelerating) shall conform to ASTM-C-494. Fly ash shall conform to
ASTM-C-618 Type F with the following restriction: Sulfur trioxide shall not exceed 5 . 0
percent, and loss of ignition shall not exceed 5 . 0 percent.
E. Water
Water shall conform to Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
02752 - 3 02752 — Concrete Paving
J . Non-bearing Interior Partitions:
Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless \ \
otherwise shown.
1 . Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate or metal . Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of
structure above approaches final position.
3 . 05 LINTELS
A. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels . Cure precast lintels
before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
B . For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintels units
with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
C . Provide minimum bearing of 8 " at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. When field observation by the Architect or the Owner' s Agent which generates
questions relating to tolerance or quality control , the Contractor shall employ, at his
own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in performing types of masonry field
quality control tests for masonry indicated . Comply with requirements for
qualification and acceptance per tolerances stipulated within this section .
B . Unit Test Method : For each block type specified per ASTM C90 . .
C . Mortar Tests :
For each type indicated , test mortar by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM
C-780 . Conduct tests no less frequently than that required to evaluate mortar used
to install each increment of masonry units indicated above from which samples are
taken for testing.
D . Prism Test Method:
1 . Compression Test :
If required by Architect, test masonry prisms by methods of sampling and
testing of ASTM E-447 , Method B .
2 . Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
Masonry work, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory if results from construction
quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
4-
04230-8
SECTION 05400 - LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS IN OTHER SECTIONS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of lightgage metal framing (LtGMFrm) is shown on drawings .
Types of lightgage metal framing units include the following: "C" shaped steel studs.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Components Design : Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance
with AICS "Specification for design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
B . Fire-Rated Assemblies : Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated
for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing
regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
C . Manufacturers offering products complying with requirements for lightgage metal
framing components include the following :
L Shaped load bearing studs, 1 -5/8 " flange :
Alabama Metal Industries
Marino Ware
Dietrick
Roll Form Products, Inc.
U. S . Steel Corp .
Wheeling Corrugating Co .
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Products data: Submit manufacturer ' s product information and installation instructions
for each items of lightgage framing and accessories .
B . Shop Drawine • Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not
fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer' s product data. Signed and sealed
Shop Drawings required by a Florida Registered Structural Engineer.
Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations,
number, type, locations and spacing, Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices,
accessories, and details required for proper installation.
05400- 1
1 0 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to protect site in manufacturer' s �.
unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off
ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable water proof coverings .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components : With each type of metal framing required, provide
manufacturer' s standard steel runners (tracks, blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes,
reinforcements, fasteners) , and accessories recommended by manufacturer for
applications indicated as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.
B . Materials and Finishes
For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality
steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570 , or A 611 .
For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33 ,000 psi ; ASTM A 466 , A 570, Or
A 611 . Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM
A 525 for minimum G 60 coating at exterior wall panel studs . Provide prime coated
finish with one coat of shop- applied redoxide, zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-
inhibitive primer for interior studs . "C"-Shape Studs : Manufacturer' s standard load- � ^
bearing steel studs of size shape, and as located on the drawings with 1 -5/8 " ( 1 .625 ")
flange and flange return to lip .
GAGES AS DETERMINED BY THE FOLLOWING CHART:
(Interior Framing: Limiting Heights - ST Style Studs. Stud gages apply for single and
double layers of gypsum application on walls using L/360 allowable deflection) with no midspan
wall blocking, cats, lateral bracing, or cold rolled channel bracing run through stud perforations.
Allowable heights can be exceeded by 20% when continuous wall bracing or blocking is provided.
STUD WIDTH STUD SPACING MAX. HGT. 25 GA MAX. HGT. 22 GA MAX. HGT. 20 GA
3-5/8" 16" o/c 10'-0" I2'-0 " 14'-0 "
3-5/8 " 24" o/c 8'-0 " 10'-0" 12'-0"
611 16 " o/c 151-01 ? 171-0, l 19'-011
6" 24" o/c 131-0.O 151-011 17p-0lt
2 . 02 FABRICATION
A. General : Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection.
Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded.
Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. Stud
panels to be rechecked for plumbness after installation .
B . Fastenings : Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by
welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
05400-2
3 . Protection :
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in an acceptable manner to
ensure that the final unit masonry work is without damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion .
'END OF SECTION* * *
04230-9
1 0 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to protect site in manufacturer' s �.
unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off
ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable water proof coverings .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components : With each type of metal framing required, provide
manufacturer' s standard steel runners (tracks, blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes,
reinforcements, fasteners) , and accessories recommended by manufacturer for
applications indicated as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.
B . Materials and Finishes
For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality
steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570 , or A 611 .
For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33 ,000 psi ; ASTM A 466 , A 570, Or
A 611 . Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM
A 525 for minimum G 60 coating at exterior wall panel studs . Provide prime coated
finish with one coat of shop- applied redoxide, zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-
inhibitive primer for interior studs . "C"-Shape Studs : Manufacturer' s standard load- � ^
bearing steel studs of size shape, and as located on the drawings with 1 -5/8 " ( 1 .625 ")
flange and flange return to lip .
GAGES AS DETERMINED BY THE FOLLOWING CHART:
(Interior Framing: Limiting Heights - ST Style Studs. Stud gages apply for single and
double layers of gypsum application on walls using L/360 allowable deflection) with no midspan
wall blocking, cats, lateral bracing, or cold rolled channel bracing run through stud perforations.
Allowable heights can be exceeded by 20% when continuous wall bracing or blocking is provided.
STUD WIDTH STUD SPACING MAX. HGT. 25 GA MAX. HGT. 22 GA MAX. HGT. 20 GA
3-5/8" 16" o/c 10'-0" I2'-0 " 14'-0 "
3-5/8 " 24" o/c 8'-0 " 10'-0" 12'-0"
611 16 " o/c 151-01 ? 171-0, l 19'-011
6" 24" o/c 131-0.O 151-011 17p-0lt
2 . 02 FABRICATION
A. General : Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection.
Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded.
Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. Stud
panels to be rechecked for plumbness after installation .
B . Fastenings : Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by
welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
05400-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
Pre-Installation Conference • Prior to star of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project
site with installers of other work including metal panels, door and window frames and mechanical
and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflict, and coordinate layout and
support provisions for interfacing work.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . Manufacturer' s Instructions Install metal framing systems in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed or written instructions and recommendation, and Engineered Shop
Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Runner Tracks : Install continuous tracks sized to match studs . Align tracks accurately
to layout at base and tops of studs . Secure tracks as recommended by stud manuacturer for
type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o .c. spacing for nail or power-
driven fasteners, nor 16 " o .c. for other types of attachment. Spacing of studs at metal wall
panels to be as per panel manufacturers request. Provide
fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
- C . Set studslu umb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb
j
walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements .
D . Where stud system abutts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor
ends of stiffeners to supporting structure .
E. Install supplementary framing wood blocking and bracing at metal framing system
wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services,
casework, heavy trim and furnishing, wall mounted door stops, bathroom grab bars and
similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary
support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer' s
recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading
resulting from item supported .
F. Installation of Wall Stud System Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by
either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges .
G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0' square with double stud at each jamb of frame
except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer' s instructions.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb
studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall .
}} Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated .
J
'END OF SECTION " *
05400 -3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Construction, 206 Edition, Section 923 . If the water is of questionable quality, it shall
be tested in accordance with AASHTO-T-26, "Standard Method of Test for Quality of
Water to be Used in Concrete" .
F. Pozzolans and Slag
Pozzolans and Slag shall conform to the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for
Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 929.
G. Concrete Strength
Concrete shall meet the minimum compressive strength (f.' in psi) as indicated in the
Contract Documents at 28 days. Conformance to strength requirements shall be
determined by ACI Standard 318-77, sections 4. 8 . 2 .3 and 4 . 8 . 3 .
H . Air Content
The amount of air entrainment shall be between 3 and 6 percent.
1. Slump
The mixture shall contain no more water than is necessary to produce concrete which is
workable and plastic. Water added at the batch plant and at the job site together shall
not exceed the specified W/C ratio. The minimum slump necessary to place the concrete
satisfactorily shall be used. Slumps should be maintained so as not to exceed 2 thru 4 -
1 /2 inches for non-vibratory placement and 1 thru 3 inches for vibrated placement.
2 . 05 CONSTRUCTION JOINT MATERIALS
Joint construction and sealing materials shall be as follows :
A. Sheet metal bottom strips for expansion joints shall be galvanized sheet metal of
0.0157-inch (30 gauge) minimum thickness, conforming to ASTM A525 .
B . Preformed Joint Filler shall be of the cellulose fiber type, conforming to AASHTO - M
213 . Material shall be of the "Sealtight" line as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or
approved equal.
C. Preformed Elastomeric Seals shall be of the open cell compression type, conforming to
the Florida D. O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
D. Bond Breaker Rod shall be closed cell, expanded polyethylene foam rods conforming to
the Florida D. O .T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
E. Liquid Joint Sealant shall be : a hot — applied, polymeric sealing compound conforming
02752 - 4 02752 — Concrete Paving
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
Pre-Installation Conference • Prior to star of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project
site with installers of other work including metal panels, door and window frames and mechanical
and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflict, and coordinate layout and
support provisions for interfacing work.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . Manufacturer' s Instructions Install metal framing systems in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed or written instructions and recommendation, and Engineered Shop
Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Runner Tracks : Install continuous tracks sized to match studs . Align tracks accurately
to layout at base and tops of studs . Secure tracks as recommended by stud manuacturer for
type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o .c. spacing for nail or power-
driven fasteners, nor 16 " o .c. for other types of attachment. Spacing of studs at metal wall
panels to be as per panel manufacturers request. Provide
fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
- C . Set studslu umb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb
j
walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements .
D . Where stud system abutts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor
ends of stiffeners to supporting structure .
E. Install supplementary framing wood blocking and bracing at metal framing system
wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services,
casework, heavy trim and furnishing, wall mounted door stops, bathroom grab bars and
similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary
support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer' s
recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading
resulting from item supported .
F. Installation of Wall Stud System Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by
either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges .
G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0' square with double stud at each jamb of frame
except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer' s instructions.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb
studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall .
}} Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated .
J
'END OF SECTION " *
05400 -3
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service, to complete the
miscellaneous metals work and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified
herein or both, except for items specifically indicated as "NOT 11\4 CONTRACT"
(NIC).
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1 . Roof opening framing - (Roof Drains, Roof Curbs, Roof Scuttles, Vent Fans ,
Exhaust Fans) .
2 . Miscellaneous anchors and fastenings.
3 . Piping, RWL, Chilled Water Line (Supports for hangers).
4. Steel & Alum. ladders to Scuttles & Mezzanines.
5 . Miscellaneous Angles .
6 . Louver Door Security Panels .
7 . Safety Nosings .
8 . Masonry Openings for Exhaust Fans .
9. Folding Door Support Framing .
10. Recessed Ceiling Framing Supports.
11 . Shop Coat Painting of All Items.
1 . 03 WORK OF OTHER SECTION
A. Structural Metal Section 05100
B . Painting Section 09900
C . Mechanical Section 15000
1 . 04 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A . This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require submission
by the Contractor tot he Consultant for approval .
05500- 1
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Glass Blocks provided by GLASS BLOCK COMPANY.
B . Mortar & Sealants.
C. Glass Block Accessories.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK
A . Section 07600, Flashings.
B . Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
1 .03 PERFORMANCE
A. Furnish all labor and materials to install glass block system detailed and specified,
complete with expansion strips, packing panel reinforcing, panel anchors, asphalt
emulsion, and other items for complete installation.
B . Work not covered as part of installation of glass block system is preparation of
structure for glass block panels, such as chases, stiffeners, lintels, sills, flashings,
except where specified in this Section.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data:
Provide data sheet and installation instructions .
B . Samples :
Submit actual glass block for approval of color, design and pattern .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. GLASS BLOCKS from approved manufacturer.
1 . Non-Load bearing, partially evacuated, hollow glass masonry units permanently
sealed by heat-fused joint.
2. Color: (Clear)
04270-1
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service, to complete the
miscellaneous metals work and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified
herein or both, except for items specifically indicated as "NOT 11\4 CONTRACT"
(NIC).
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1 . Roof opening framing - (Roof Drains, Roof Curbs, Roof Scuttles, Vent Fans ,
Exhaust Fans) .
2 . Miscellaneous anchors and fastenings.
3 . Piping, RWL, Chilled Water Line (Supports for hangers).
4. Steel & Alum. ladders to Scuttles & Mezzanines.
5 . Miscellaneous Angles .
6 . Louver Door Security Panels .
7 . Safety Nosings .
8 . Masonry Openings for Exhaust Fans .
9. Folding Door Support Framing .
10. Recessed Ceiling Framing Supports.
11 . Shop Coat Painting of All Items.
1 . 03 WORK OF OTHER SECTION
A. Structural Metal Section 05100
B . Painting Section 09900
C . Mechanical Section 15000
1 . 04 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A . This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require submission
by the Contractor tot he Consultant for approval .
05500- 1
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the contract
Documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility . \
C . Submit samples, certificate and shop drawings as required or requested by the
Architect/Engineer whether included in this list or not, and as requested on the
drawings .
D . Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, notarized and signed by an officer of the
company and shall state the required information explicitly and specifically. Said
certificates shall bear the Notary' s embossed seal.
1 .05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated items in accordance with Contract Conditions,
plus plan locations .
B . Coordinate roof framing opening supports with Steel Joists Shop Drawings . Submit
steel Joist and Miscellaneous Metal Shop Drawings as prescribed.
1 . 06 QUALITY STANDARDS
Conform to applicable portions of the following :
A . American Institute of Steel Construction (A.I. S .C.)
B . American Welding Society (A .W. S .)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Steel shapes - ASTM A-36
B . Steel pipe -ASTM A-36, galvanized where called for.
C . Bolts - ASTM A- 325 , galvanized for exterior use, and where called for on plans.
D . All exterior steel items to be hot dipped galvanized.
E . Aluminum pipe - ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T6 .
F . Stainless Steel plate, angles and fabricated hangers, 9304 Stainless.
2 . 02 STEEL & ALUMINUM LADDERS
A. Fabricate to size and detail, with welded joints dressed smooth.
B . Erect ladders as indicated, securely fastened to structure .
C . Steel ladders to be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A- 123 -59T.
05500-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
to AASHTO - M 173 . Material shall be "Sealtight" # 164 as manufactured by W.R.
Meadows; a low modulus, one part silicone sealant; or approved equal conforming to
the Florida D . O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest
edition, Section 932.
2 .06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compounds for concrete shall be the pigmented type conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO — M 148 (Type 2), conforming to the Florida D. O.T.
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925.
B . Polyethylene Film may be used for curing when, in conjunction with protection of the
pavement from inclement weather, the polyethylene film is applied over the entire
pavement and maintained intact for a minimum of three (3) days. Polyethylene film and
it' s use shall conform to the Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction, latest edition, Section 925 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION OF WORK
3 .01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The bottom of the excavation for the concrete pavement or top of the earth fill under the
pavement shall be known as the pavement subgrade and shall conform to the lines, grade
and cross sections shown on the plans.
B . The subgrade shall be placed or prepared upon ground which has been cleared, grubbed
and, if necessary, demucked. If the subgrade is upon a filled embankment, :the fill material
shall be free from all unsuitable materials such as muck, rubbish, stumps, brush; clay
pockets, etc. which will not compact into stable and durable foundation for the subgrade.
Fill or the excavated bedding of the subgrade shall be compacted to a minimum density of
95 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO T- 180.
C. Subgrade material shall be composed primarily of granular soils with no more than a
moderate amount of silt or clay and shall meet both the following bearing values :
- Minimum Lime Rock Bearing Ratio (LBR) — 40.
- Florida Bearing Value (FBV) — 50.
The subgrade shall be compacted and shaped to the plan cross section. Compaction
shall be to a minimum density of 98 percent of maximum density as determined by
AASHTO T- 180. The finished surface shall be free of loose material .
D. Mortar blocks or plastic chairs specifically designed for such purpose shall be evenly
placed on the finished subgrade to adequately support and center the reinforcing steel in
the concrete pour.
02752 - 5 02752 — Concrete Paving
3 . Size:(actual)
7 -314 in. x 7-3/4 in. x 4 in. thick, impact rated, for mortar installation.
4 . Pattern :
"Endura" for privacy.
5 . Glass Block as Manufactured by:
a. PC Glass Block Products
b. American Glass Block
C . Solaris Glass Blocks
d. Week Glass Blocks
e . Glass Masonry, Inc.
B . Mortar:
1 . Masonry Cement:
ASTM C-91 , white, for high strength use.
2 . Portland Cement:
ASTM C- 150, Type 1 , white .
3 . Hydrated Lime:
ASTM C-2071 Type S , high-calcium, pressure hydrated dolomite with min.
0 .92 percent active ingredients, completely hydrated .
4 . Sand:
ASTM C- 144.
5 . Integral Waterproofer:
Use one of the following:
a. "Anti-Hydro" Waterproofer . Model Hydracide Powder, {
Masterbuilders Co. Model Omicron Motarproofing.
b . Latex Type:
Laticrete International, Model Laticrete 8510 , (high- strength, weather-
resistant mortar and fast-bonding agent) .
C . Glass Block Accessories :
I . Panel Anchors:
No . 20 gauge perforated steel strips, 24" long x 1 -3 /4" wide, galvanized after
perforating with 2" long rounded slots and alternating notches on side of strip.
2 . Expansion Strips:
Dense fibrous glass batt for at head, 3 /8" x 4- 1 /8 " x 24" for chase
construction .
3 . Panel Reinforcing:
Double wire mesh formed of two parallel wires having 2" centers and
electrically welded cross wires on regular intervals, galvanized.
4. Secure perimeter aluminum frame to P .T . 2 X 6 jambs, sill and head with # 8
X 1 ''/2" flat head galvanized screws at 16 inches on center. All screws to be
secured through all shims. Per NOA No . 04-0301 .01 . Secure P .T. jambs in
accordance with plan details.
04270-2
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the contract
Documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility . \
C . Submit samples, certificate and shop drawings as required or requested by the
Architect/Engineer whether included in this list or not, and as requested on the
drawings .
D . Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, notarized and signed by an officer of the
company and shall state the required information explicitly and specifically. Said
certificates shall bear the Notary' s embossed seal.
1 .05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated items in accordance with Contract Conditions,
plus plan locations .
B . Coordinate roof framing opening supports with Steel Joists Shop Drawings . Submit
steel Joist and Miscellaneous Metal Shop Drawings as prescribed.
1 . 06 QUALITY STANDARDS
Conform to applicable portions of the following :
A . American Institute of Steel Construction (A.I. S .C.)
B . American Welding Society (A .W. S .)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Steel shapes - ASTM A-36
B . Steel pipe -ASTM A-36, galvanized where called for.
C . Bolts - ASTM A- 325 , galvanized for exterior use, and where called for on plans.
D . All exterior steel items to be hot dipped galvanized.
E . Aluminum pipe - ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T6 .
F . Stainless Steel plate, angles and fabricated hangers, 9304 Stainless.
2 . 02 STEEL & ALUMINUM LADDERS
A. Fabricate to size and detail, with welded joints dressed smooth.
B . Erect ladders as indicated, securely fastened to structure .
C . Steel ladders to be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A- 123 -59T.
05500-2
2 .03 LOUVER DOOR SECURITY PANELS
A. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors, wire mesh security panels.
1 . Wire Mesh : 10 gauge steel wire woven into 1 " diamond mesh securely clinched
to frames .
2 . Frames : 3/4" cold rolled channels drilled at 6 " o.c. through both flanges to
receive # 10 self tapping non-corrosive machine screws with tamper proof
heads.
3 . Mesh and frames to be hot dipped galvanized material.
4 . Apply panels to exterior face on doors with non-removable head screws.
Completely cover louvers .
2 . 04 FASTENERS
A. General : Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-coated fasteners
where built into exterior walls where fasteners are not exposed . Select fasteners for
the type, grade and class required .
`• B . Bolts and Nuts : Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307 , Grade A.
C . Lae Bolts : Square head type, FS FF-B- 561 .
D . Machine Screws : Cadmium plated steel, FS FF- S-92
E . Wood Screws : Flat head carbon steel, FS FF- S - 111 .
F. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92 .
G . Masom Anchorage Devices - Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325 .
H. Toggle Bolts : Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588 , type, class and style as required.
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84 .
2 .05 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Fabricate bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels
and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork, and for anchoring securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Provide straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items as specified on the
drawings .
05500-3
D . Miscellaneous Accessories :
1 . Asphalt Emulsion :
Henry , s
2 . Packing :
Polyethylene foam, neoprene, or filler compatible with joint sealant as specified
in Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
3 . Sealant:
Non-staining, waterproof joint sealant as specified in Section 07900, Joint
Sealers.
4 . Water Repellant Coating:
Solvent type penetrating, clear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Verify items to be built-in, pocket recesses, or chases to receive glass blocks are
complete, accurately placed and dimensioned.
B . Clean glass block of foreign substances to insure bonding with mortar.
C. Coordinate placement of steel channels.
1
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . General :
1 . Cover sill area with heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to serve as bond breaker
for fire rated panel systems and allow to dry before placing mortar.
2 . Adhere expansion strips in place at head and j ambs using asphalt emulsion and
insure strips extend to sill in order to isolate glass block from adjacent
construction.
B . Mortar:
1 . Mix mortar materials minimum 3 minutes with maximum amount of water to
produce workable consistency in mechanical batch mixer, to comply with
ASTM C-780.
2 . Fire Rated Panels - Type S :
1 part masonry cement, 1/2 part portland cement, sand min. 2- 1 /4 to max.
3 times volume of cement.
04270-3
2 .03 LOUVER DOOR SECURITY PANELS
A. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors, wire mesh security panels.
1 . Wire Mesh : 10 gauge steel wire woven into 1 " diamond mesh securely clinched
to frames .
2 . Frames : 3/4" cold rolled channels drilled at 6 " o.c. through both flanges to
receive # 10 self tapping non-corrosive machine screws with tamper proof
heads.
3 . Mesh and frames to be hot dipped galvanized material.
4 . Apply panels to exterior face on doors with non-removable head screws.
Completely cover louvers .
2 . 04 FASTENERS
A. General : Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-coated fasteners
where built into exterior walls where fasteners are not exposed . Select fasteners for
the type, grade and class required .
`• B . Bolts and Nuts : Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307 , Grade A.
C . Lae Bolts : Square head type, FS FF-B- 561 .
D . Machine Screws : Cadmium plated steel, FS FF- S-92
E . Wood Screws : Flat head carbon steel, FS FF- S - 111 .
F. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92 .
G . Masom Anchorage Devices - Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325 .
H. Toggle Bolts : Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588 , type, class and style as required.
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84 .
2 .05 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Fabricate bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels
and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork, and for anchoring securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Provide straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items as specified on the
drawings .
05500-3
B . Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required . Furnish
malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections;
elsewhere, furnish steel washers .
2 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS
A . Fabricate all steel headers, angles, channels, ladders, steel shapes, inserts , anchors,
brackets, support framing, as indicated and/or detailed on plans.
2 . 07 SHOP COAT PAINT
A . Apply shop coat paint to all ferrous metal.
B . Apply shop touch-up coat paint to all galvanized metals .
C . Aluminum products to be mill finish unless called out otherwise on the drawings.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
05500-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 . 02 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Lap splices of deformed bars shall be 24 times the nominal bar diameter in the
longitudinal direction. Splices of W.W. Fabric shall be a minimum or six (6) inches .
B. Deformed bars shall be tied with soft iron wire at the intersection of the longitudinal and
lateral bars .
3 .03 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Concrete pavement shall be constructed on the prepared subgrade in accordance with
these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades,
thickness, and typical cross sections shown on the Plans . The subgrade shall be wet
down just prior to placing the concrete to minimize loss of water from the concrete, but
there shall be no standing water when the concrete is being placed.
B . MIXING CONCRETE
Concrete mixed in truck mixers shall be at the speed designated as mixing speed by the
manufacturer for a total of 75 - 100 revolutions of the drum unless additional water is
added in conformance with paragraph C, below. Time of mixing in a central mix plant
shall be a minimum of sixty (60) seconds.
C . TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
Concrete may be transported any distance providing it is discharged on the subgrade
within the required slump range and meets the time requirements of paragraphD,
below. If additional water is required to maintain the specified slumps of concrete
transported in truck mixers, it may be added with the permission of the Engineer' s
Representative only. In this case, a minimum of 20 additional revolutions of mixer
dr-art at mixing speed shall be requiredbeforedischarging of the concrete.
D . CONCRETE TIME LIMIT
The length of time that the concrete can be held in the truck shall conform to the
following :
1 . Air temperature of 45 degrees F. to 80 degrees F. = 90 minutes maximum.
2. Air temperature over 80 degrees F. with a retarder added to the mix = 90 minutes
maximum.
3 . Air temperature over 80 degrees F. without a retarder added to the mix = 60 minutes
maximum.
E. PLACING CONCRETE
02752 - 6 02752 — Concrete Paving
3 . Non-Fire Rated Panels:
1 part masonry cement, 1 /4 part portland cement, 1 /4 part lime, sand min . 2- 1 /4
to max . 3 time volume of cement and lime.
4 . Average Compressive Strength:
Type S - 1800 psi at 28 days.
5 . Do not retemper mortar.
C. Setting Glass Block:
1 . Set first course of glass block on full mortar bed over asphalt emulsion or
directly on sill/surface, with no furrowing.
2 . Use rubber mallet to tap units into position; do not use steel tools on glass
blocks for adjustments.
3 . Set each course of glass blocks in full mortar bed, with no furrowing.
4 . Keep expansion strip joints free of mortar.
5 . Rake out joints to accommodate sealant and pointing mortar and brush raked
joints clean for Type S mortar.
6 . Fill raked joints with pointing mortar, packing and working into voids, and t\_,
neatly tool surface to concave joint before mortar achieves final set.
7 . For non-rated panels tool joints concave, as work progresses, to uniform
appearance .
D . Placing Anchors and Reinforcing:
1 . Bend panel anchors within expansion joint, space 24 inches apart vertically to
coincide with panel reinforcing.
2 . Bed panel anchors in mortar joint of glass block panel with min. 12 " of anchor
extending into glass block joint on top of panel reinforcing.
3 . Place panel reinforcing in horizontal joints of glass block panel on 24 " centers
vertically, continuous from side to side.
4 . Lap panel reinforcing min. 6" for sections of insufficient length.
5 . Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcing.
04270-4
B . Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required . Furnish
malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections;
elsewhere, furnish steel washers .
2 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS
A . Fabricate all steel headers, angles, channels, ladders, steel shapes, inserts , anchors,
brackets, support framing, as indicated and/or detailed on plans.
2 . 07 SHOP COAT PAINT
A . Apply shop coat paint to all ferrous metal.
B . Apply shop touch-up coat paint to all galvanized metals .
C . Aluminum products to be mill finish unless called out otherwise on the drawings.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
05500-4
SECTION 06076 - PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
(PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD)
PART 1 GENERAL
Installer Note: Osmose Advance Guard Borate PTW, when treated to a .42 DOT retention, is highly
effective in resisting decay, subterranean termites, dry wood termites, Formosan termites, carpenter
ants, wood-boring beetles and many other insects . Advance Guard PTW is noncorrosive, easy to
handle and workable with common tools. It is available for aboveground , weather protected
applications where insect and decay resistant construction materials are recommended. Advance
Guard PTW is intended to be used for framing and applications where the wood is not in direct
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water during its service life .
Normal exposure to weather during ordinary construction will not adversely affect the treatment in
the product. Advance Guard PTW is not recommended for use in decks or other outdoor structures
exposed to weathering.
1 . 01 SUMMARY
A . Section Includes : Insect and decay protection treatment for wood products specified in
other Division 6 sections, including:
1 . Sill plates in contact with masonry.
2 . Wood blocking and furring in contact with masonry .
B . Related Sections : Section(s) related to this section include :
1 . Rough Carpentry: Section 06100
2 . Finish Carpentry : Section 06200
3 . Fabricated Wood Trusses : Section 06192
1 . 02 REFERENCES
A. General : Standards listed by reference; including revisions by issuing authority, form a part
of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing
authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by
issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing
authority abbreviation and standard designation.
B . Advance Guard PTW does not need to meet American Wood-Preservers' Association
(AWPA) standards but it does nonetheless meet:
1 . AWPA C9 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Treatment .
2. AWPA C31 Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously
Protected from Liquid Water — Treatment by Pressure Processes.
3 . AWPA P5 Standard for Waterbome Preservatives.
C . National Evaluation Services, Inc. (NES).
1 . National Evaluation Report (NER) : Report No. NER-648 .
�l
06076-1
6. Apply half width of mortar in joint, do not furrow, and press panel reinforcing
into mortar bed.
7. Apply remaining mortar over panel reinforcing and lay next course of glass
block, full bedded, with no furrowing or mortar.
E. Sealant :
1 . Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers, for materials .
2 . Tape surface of glass block using duct tape or similar material for uniform
sealant appearance.
3 . Install sealant backing rod in joint to required depth.
4 . Apply joint sealant to joint and tool concave.
5 . Remove tape after initial set has been achieved .
F. Tolerances :
1 . Joint Width:
Uniformly 1 /4 "
i
2. Variation from Plane to Unit to Adjacent Unit :
Max. 1 /32 in.
3 . Variation from Panel to Panel :
Max . 1 /16 in .
4 . Pointing Mortar Accommodation :
Rake joints 5/8 in. to 3 /4 in.
3 .03 CLEANING
A. Use wire brush to lightly dislodge extra materials from faces of blocks and edges of
joints, do not scrape or brush joint .
B . Use No. 3 or No. 4 steel wool to remove remaining mortar from faces of glass blocks,
do not rub joints.
C . Apply water repellant coating to mortar joints after completion of cleaning for exterior
glass block panels and interior glass block panels exposed to high incidence of dirt.
J * * *END OF SECTION* * *
04270-5
SECTION 06076 - PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
(PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD)
PART 1 GENERAL
Installer Note: Osmose Advance Guard Borate PTW, when treated to a .42 DOT retention, is highly
effective in resisting decay, subterranean termites, dry wood termites, Formosan termites, carpenter
ants, wood-boring beetles and many other insects . Advance Guard PTW is noncorrosive, easy to
handle and workable with common tools. It is available for aboveground , weather protected
applications where insect and decay resistant construction materials are recommended. Advance
Guard PTW is intended to be used for framing and applications where the wood is not in direct
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water during its service life .
Normal exposure to weather during ordinary construction will not adversely affect the treatment in
the product. Advance Guard PTW is not recommended for use in decks or other outdoor structures
exposed to weathering.
1 . 01 SUMMARY
A . Section Includes : Insect and decay protection treatment for wood products specified in
other Division 6 sections, including:
1 . Sill plates in contact with masonry.
2 . Wood blocking and furring in contact with masonry .
B . Related Sections : Section(s) related to this section include :
1 . Rough Carpentry: Section 06100
2 . Finish Carpentry : Section 06200
3 . Fabricated Wood Trusses : Section 06192
1 . 02 REFERENCES
A. General : Standards listed by reference; including revisions by issuing authority, form a part
of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing
authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by
issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing
authority abbreviation and standard designation.
B . Advance Guard PTW does not need to meet American Wood-Preservers' Association
(AWPA) standards but it does nonetheless meet:
1 . AWPA C9 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Treatment .
2. AWPA C31 Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously
Protected from Liquid Water — Treatment by Pressure Processes.
3 . AWPA P5 Standard for Waterbome Preservatives.
C . National Evaluation Services, Inc. (NES).
1 . National Evaluation Report (NER) : Report No. NER-648 .
�l
06076-1
1 . 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements : Provide borate wood preservative treatment which will
perform in accordance with manufacturer' s stated performance criteria without defects,
damage or failure.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. General : Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B . Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer' s SPEC-DATATM product
sheet, for specified products .
C . Quality Assurance Submittals : Submit the following :
1 . Test Reports : Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties .
2 . Evaluation Report: NER-648
3 . Certificates : Certification from treating plant certifying wood treatment applied
complies with the criteria and physical requirements for borate preservative treated
wood products as specified herein.
4 . Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Source Quality : Obtain borate preservative treated wood products from a single approved
source .
B . Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications : Wood treatment plant experienced in performing
work of this section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that required for
this project, licensed by the manufacturer.
C . Independent third party inspection.
D . Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT), if required.
E . Regulatory Requirements: Provide borate preservative treatment that complies with local
regulatory requirements .
1 . FBC 2001 requirements for insect and decay preservative treated wood .
F . Quality Mark: All borate preservative treated wood members shall bear a permanent ink
stamp indicating the following:
1 . Manufacturer' s name .
2. Treatment plant name.
3 . Quality mark of an AWPA approved independent inspection agency.
4 . Symbol "SBX" (sodium borate), preservative retention level and date of treatment .
5 . AWPA treatment standard, wood species and the words "Above Ground and
Continuously Protected from Liquid Water. "
06076-2
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
The concrete shall be deposited on the grade in such a manner as to require as little re-
handling as possible. It shall be deposited in successive batches in a continuous
operation. The concrete shall be consolidated by suitable means so as to preclude the
formation of voids or honeycomb pockets .
F. PLACING IN COLD WEATHER
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting concrete placed in cold weather and
any concrete damaged by frost action shall be removed and replaced at his expense.
3 .04 FINISHING
A. The concrete shall be struck off, consolidated and finished with mechanical equipment
in such a manner that after final finishing, it shall conform to the pavement cross section
shown on the Plans. Hand finishing will be permitted in narrow widths, areas of
irregular dimensions, and in the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, to
finish the concrete already deposited on the grade.
B . FINAL SURFACE FINISH
The finished surface of the concrete pavement shall have a uniform skid resistant `
texture formed by a burlap drag or a stiff broom as required by the. Engineer's
Representative.
C . PAVEMENT EXPOSED TO RAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION
1 . The Contractor shall have, always available, materials to protect the surface of the
plastic concrete against rain. Areas of the pavement surface where the texture has
been damaged by the protective cover shall be re-textured and cured unless the
concrete has hardened. Areas of pavement surface that exhibit a smooth sandy
appearance after the rain ceases shall be textured and cured by method approved by
Engineer. An attempt shall be made to impart the specified texture to these areas
before applying the membrane curing material . No other remedial work shall be
required. Areas that have suffered some surface erosion and have coarse aggregate
exposed shall be reworked by hand methods or with the finishing machine when
the form paving method is used. Fresh concrete containing the same materials and
properties as the pavement concrete shall be added to maintain an adequate supply
in front of the screeds or machine to assure replacement of the concrete eroded
from the surface. The surface shall then be textured and cured as specified.
2. If pavement edges have been severely eroded and the concrete has not set, the
edges shall be repaired by setting side forms and replacing eroded concrete. After
the side forms are set, fresh concrete shall be placed and finished prior to texturing
and curing. After the pavement has hardened, remedial work shall not be permitted.
Areas that do not comply with these Specifications shall be corrected after the
curing period has terminated.
02752 - 7 02752 — Concrete Paving
1 . 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements : Provide borate wood preservative treatment which will
perform in accordance with manufacturer' s stated performance criteria without defects,
damage or failure.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. General : Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B . Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer' s SPEC-DATATM product
sheet, for specified products .
C . Quality Assurance Submittals : Submit the following :
1 . Test Reports : Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties .
2 . Evaluation Report: NER-648
3 . Certificates : Certification from treating plant certifying wood treatment applied
complies with the criteria and physical requirements for borate preservative treated
wood products as specified herein.
4 . Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Source Quality : Obtain borate preservative treated wood products from a single approved
source .
B . Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications : Wood treatment plant experienced in performing
work of this section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that required for
this project, licensed by the manufacturer.
C . Independent third party inspection.
D . Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT), if required.
E . Regulatory Requirements: Provide borate preservative treatment that complies with local
regulatory requirements .
1 . FBC 2001 requirements for insect and decay preservative treated wood .
F . Quality Mark: All borate preservative treated wood members shall bear a permanent ink
stamp indicating the following:
1 . Manufacturer' s name .
2. Treatment plant name.
3 . Quality mark of an AWPA approved independent inspection agency.
4 . Symbol "SBX" (sodium borate), preservative retention level and date of treatment .
5 . AWPA treatment standard, wood species and the words "Above Ground and
Continuously Protected from Liquid Water. "
06076-2
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General : Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B . Exposure : Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage or installation. Store
material off ground and under cover. Allow materials exposed to incidental moisture to dry
thoroughly prior to covering with vapor or moisture retarding finish materials.
1 .07 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty : Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions .
Osmose, Inc. , offers a 20 year limited warranty against structural damage due to termites,
carpenter ants and fungal decay under the Advance Guard Residential Limited Warranty
when treated to .42 DOT retention. Consult manufacturer for complete details .
B . Manufacturer' s Warranty: Submit, for Owner' s acceptance, manufacturer' s standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official . Manufacturer' s warranty is in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents .
1 . Warranty Period : Twenty (20) years .
PART2PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BORATE PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer: Osmose, Inc . - Wood Preserving Division .
1 . Contact : PO Drawer O, 1016 Everee Inn Road, Griffin, GA 30224-0249 ; _
Telephone : (800) 241 -0240, (770) 233 -4200 ;
Fax : (770) 229-5225 ; E-mail : treatedwoodVosmose. com ; Web site :
wW1A7.0sm0se .com, Na��rNv. timberspecialties .com .
Note : Advance Guard borate preservative treated wood products are intended for ,
aboveground, weather protected applications only. They are not to be used in areas subject to
precipitation, wetting, dampness or condensation. Advance Guard wood products must be
typically kiln dried after treatment (KDAT) to a maximum moisture content of 19% for
lumber and 18 % for plywood. Wood treated with Advance Guard ' s EPA registered Tim-bor®
Industrial Wood Preservative is easy to work with common tools . The product is colorless and
nonblooming. It will not darken or discolor most woods .
B . Proprietary Product(s)/System(s) : Advance Guard Preservative treated wood Products.
C . Borate Preservative Treatment : Disodium octoborate tetrahydrate (DOT) treatment for
insect and decay protective pressure treatment of wood as produced by manufacturer' s
licensed treatment plants, producing material meeting the following minimum standards :
1 . Preservative Treatment Standard: AWPA P5 .
2 . Structural Lumber Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA C31 .
3 . Plywood Treatment Standard : Comply with AWPA C9 .
4. Treatment Level : Provide borate preservative treatment retention level
06076-3
DIVISION 51 METALS
SECTION 05030 - POWDERED COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Powdered coating applied to metal surfaces.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A . Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500.
B . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100.
C . Aluminum Door Frames , Entrances and Storefronts - Section 08400.
D. Aluminum Windows - Section 08520-
E. Glazed Curtain Walls - Section 08900 .
F. Louvers And Vents - Section 10200 ,
G. Sectional Overhead Doors - Section 08360 .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Properly identified product data.
C . Manufacturer' s full range of custom colors , texture and gloss.
B . Manufacturer ' s data sheet including cleaning recommendations .
1 . 04 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturer' s Association (AAMA) :
1 . AAMA 605 .2 -90 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, with the following exceptions.
a) Five year South Florida exposure test will be met effective March 1996.
b) Due to environmental considerations acid chromate surface preparation is
not used.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
I . ASTM D117- 89 Guide to Test Methods and Specifications For Electrical
Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin.
2 . ASTM D522-85 Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings
With Conical Mandrel Apparatus.
J 3 . ASTM D523 - 85 Test Method for Specular Gloss .
05030-1
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General : Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B . Exposure : Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage or installation. Store
material off ground and under cover. Allow materials exposed to incidental moisture to dry
thoroughly prior to covering with vapor or moisture retarding finish materials.
1 .07 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty : Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions .
Osmose, Inc. , offers a 20 year limited warranty against structural damage due to termites,
carpenter ants and fungal decay under the Advance Guard Residential Limited Warranty
when treated to .42 DOT retention. Consult manufacturer for complete details .
B . Manufacturer' s Warranty: Submit, for Owner' s acceptance, manufacturer' s standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official . Manufacturer' s warranty is in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents .
1 . Warranty Period : Twenty (20) years .
PART2PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BORATE PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer: Osmose, Inc . - Wood Preserving Division .
1 . Contact : PO Drawer O, 1016 Everee Inn Road, Griffin, GA 30224-0249 ; _
Telephone : (800) 241 -0240, (770) 233 -4200 ;
Fax : (770) 229-5225 ; E-mail : treatedwoodVosmose. com ; Web site :
wW1A7.0sm0se .com, Na��rNv. timberspecialties .com .
Note : Advance Guard borate preservative treated wood products are intended for ,
aboveground, weather protected applications only. They are not to be used in areas subject to
precipitation, wetting, dampness or condensation. Advance Guard wood products must be
typically kiln dried after treatment (KDAT) to a maximum moisture content of 19% for
lumber and 18 % for plywood. Wood treated with Advance Guard ' s EPA registered Tim-bor®
Industrial Wood Preservative is easy to work with common tools . The product is colorless and
nonblooming. It will not darken or discolor most woods .
B . Proprietary Product(s)/System(s) : Advance Guard Preservative treated wood Products.
C . Borate Preservative Treatment : Disodium octoborate tetrahydrate (DOT) treatment for
insect and decay protective pressure treatment of wood as produced by manufacturer' s
licensed treatment plants, producing material meeting the following minimum standards :
1 . Preservative Treatment Standard: AWPA P5 .
2 . Structural Lumber Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA C31 .
3 . Plywood Treatment Standard : Comply with AWPA C9 .
4. Treatment Level : Provide borate preservative treatment retention level
06076-3
recommended by manufacturer to provide the following minimum protection, as
indicated on wood product quality stamp specified in Quality Assurance article : .42
DOT retention if warranty is required or expected. `
a . Protection against North American subterranean termites, decay and insects , J
and Formosan termites : 0 .42 pcf (6 . 7 kg/m 3 ) DOT retention (0 .28 pcf (4 . 5
kg/m 3 ) B203) minimum retention (required for warranty) .
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions : No substitutions permitted .
2 .03 RELATED MATERIALS
Note : Wood species qualifying under Advance Guard warranties include a variety of
softwood lumber and plywood. Approved softwood lumber types are Douglas fir, hem-fir,
Southern pine and spruce-pine-fir . Approved plywood types are: Southern yellow pine and
Douglas fir.
A. Wood Materials : Refer to Division 6 Sections for related wood materials required to be
treated as specified herein.
B . Field Applied End Coat : Preservative solution approved by preservative treated wood
manufacturer for application:
1 . Osmose, Inc . , Tim-bor disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT), 10% solution.
2 . Copper Naphthenate, 2% solution, copper metal basis.
3 . Other preservative approved by Advance Guard manufacturer. f
2 . 04 SOURCE QUALITY
A . Tests, Inspections : Do not conceal applied treated material with subsequent trades work
until the Architect has approved the installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer' s product data, including product literature,
technical bulletins, product wraps and labels and product catalog installation instructions for
installation.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Select borate preservative treated wood members in accordance with appropriate untreated
lumber and plywood span tables . Provide ventilation of building cavities as required by code.
B . Install borate preservative treated wood in accordance with requirements of applicable
codes and related Division 6 sections . Avoid milling operations that could adversely affect
preservative characteristics of borate preservative treated wood.
06076-4
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
3 .05 CURING
A. After finishing operations have been completed and immediately after the free water has
left the surface, the surface of the slab and, for slip formed pavements, the sides of the
slab shall be coated and sealed with a uniform layer of membrane curing compound
applied at the rate of not less than one gallon per 200 square feet of surface. When the
forms are removed, curing compound shall be applied to the sides of the slab.
B . Areas in which the curing membrane is damaged within a period of three (3) days shall
be resprayed with curing compound.
3 .06 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION JOINTS
A. Traverse and longitudinal joints shall be constructed to the dimensions and at the spacing
shown on the Plans and Details. Transverse joints shall extend the entire width of the
pavement and through the curbs. Joints may be formed in the plastic concrete or sawed
after the concrete has hardened .
B . Formed joints may be constructed by installing a parting strip to be left in place or by
depressing an approved tool into the plastic concrete.
C . Sawing of joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficientlyto permit
sawing without excessive raveling and before uncontrolled cracking occurs . If necessary,
the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night, regardless of weather
conditions .
D. Where construction methods require joint seaing, all joints shall be sealed before the
pavement is exposed to traffic, including construction traffic. Prior to';: sealing, all ;
foreign material shall be removed from the joints and the joints shall be thoroughly dry.
3 . 07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
All longitudinal joints may be construction joints at the contractor's option. Transverse
construction joints shall be installed whenever the placing of concrete is suspended a
sufficient length of time that the concrete may harden.
3 .08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Before the pavement will be considered for acceptance, all items shall be completed in
substantial accordance with the Plans and Specifications . All equipment, surplus materials,
and construction debris shall be removed from the project.
B . The pavement shall be closed to traffic after the concrete is placed, until 28 day test
cylinders indicate the section has reached the specified compressive strength under
ordinary field conditions.
END OF SECTION
02752 - 8 02752 — Concrete Paving
4 . ASTM D2247 -87 Practice For Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%
Humidity.
5 . ASTM D2794-84 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings on the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) .
6 . ASTM D3359-87 Method For Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B .
7 . ASTM D3363 -74 Test Method For Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
1 . 05 _QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall have produced the coating products
for not less than five years and shall be capable of furnishing both products and
instructions for touch-up.
B . The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall provide each applicator or fabricator
of items which receive the coating with 3 by 5 inch samples of color(s) to be used, as
standard of uniform quality during the shop finishing operation.
C . Items to be coated in the powdered coating shop shall be protected in their bare metal
state while in transit to the powdered coating shop.
1 .06 GUARANTY
A . After final acceptance, furnish Owner written guarantee against defective organic
powdered coating material and application for a period of six (6) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS
A . "Arcbkote 6000 " Powdered Coating by Arch Aluminum and Glass Co . , 1400 S .W .
Th Court, Suite F . , Pompano Beach, FL 33069 , (561 ) 785 -9600, (Dade) 947-8745 .
1 . Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC , dry powder including
resins and pigments according with requirements of AAMA 605 .2 .
2 . Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to
clean up .
3 . Color shall be custom color per Architect' s selection.
B . "Tiger Drylac" Powder Coatings
2605 Beltline Avenue
Reading, PA. 19605
Tel . (215) 921 -9697
2 . 02 PRODUCT QUALITY AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC, dry powder including resins and
pigments according with requirements of HAMA 605 .2 . 05030-2
recommended by manufacturer to provide the following minimum protection, as
indicated on wood product quality stamp specified in Quality Assurance article : .42
DOT retention if warranty is required or expected. `
a . Protection against North American subterranean termites, decay and insects , J
and Formosan termites : 0 .42 pcf (6 . 7 kg/m 3 ) DOT retention (0 .28 pcf (4 . 5
kg/m 3 ) B203) minimum retention (required for warranty) .
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions : No substitutions permitted .
2 .03 RELATED MATERIALS
Note : Wood species qualifying under Advance Guard warranties include a variety of
softwood lumber and plywood. Approved softwood lumber types are Douglas fir, hem-fir,
Southern pine and spruce-pine-fir . Approved plywood types are: Southern yellow pine and
Douglas fir.
A. Wood Materials : Refer to Division 6 Sections for related wood materials required to be
treated as specified herein.
B . Field Applied End Coat : Preservative solution approved by preservative treated wood
manufacturer for application:
1 . Osmose, Inc . , Tim-bor disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT), 10% solution.
2 . Copper Naphthenate, 2% solution, copper metal basis.
3 . Other preservative approved by Advance Guard manufacturer. f
2 . 04 SOURCE QUALITY
A . Tests, Inspections : Do not conceal applied treated material with subsequent trades work
until the Architect has approved the installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer' s product data, including product literature,
technical bulletins, product wraps and labels and product catalog installation instructions for
installation.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Select borate preservative treated wood members in accordance with appropriate untreated
lumber and plywood span tables . Provide ventilation of building cavities as required by code.
B . Install borate preservative treated wood in accordance with requirements of applicable
codes and related Division 6 sections . Avoid milling operations that could adversely affect
preservative characteristics of borate preservative treated wood.
06076-4
C . End Cut Treatment : Treat end cuts of borate preservative treated wood members over 2
inches (51 mm) in thickness with field applied end coat prior to installation for Spruce-Pine-
Fir (SPF) and Douglas Fir (DF) only.
D. Sill Plate: Where applicable, provide sill plate of Borate preservative treated wood or CCA
pressure treated wood.
E. Install using fasteners required by applicable code for use with untreated lumber and
plywood.
3 . 03 FINISHING
A . For painting or staining of Advance Guard PTW, a light sanding or brushing is all that is
necessary to ensure proper coating adhesion . Complete application recommendations are
available from the manufacturer. Avoid frequent or prolonged inhalation of sawdust from
treated wood. When sawing and machining treated wood, wear a dust mask. When power
sawing or machining, wear goggles to protect eyes from flying particles . Surfaces must be
clean and dry before application.
B . Prepare borate preservative treated wood for application of finishes in accordance with
manufacturer' s recommendations . Sand surfaces lightly, clean and check for moisture prior
to finishing.
C . Apply paint or stain in accordance with Section 09900"Painting. "
3 . 04 PROTECTION
A . Protection : Protect borate preservative treated wood from damage during construction .
Protect from moisture prior to installation of finishes.
"END OF SECTION * * *
'i
06076-5
B . Powder Coating Characteristics :
_ Glossy Semi Gloss Mat
Surface Surface Surface
Thickness 2 . 503 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils
/60-90 /60-90 /60-90
Gloss 80-90 55-65 15 -25
Cross Hatch
Adhesion (2) Pass 100% Pass 100% Pass 100%
Mandrel Bending (3) 1 /8 "/3mm 5/32 "/4mm 3/161 /5mm
Erichsen Cupping
ISO 1520 5/ 16111/81nm 1 /4 "/7mm 3/ 1675mm
Impression
Hardness (4) 95 95 95
Impact Test (5 ) Up to 160 " Up to 160 " Up to 160 "
/lb. /lb. /lb .
Pencil Hardness (6) 2H (min .) 2H (min.) 2H (min.)
Dry Mill Test OK OK OK
Salt Spray Test (7) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
max .undercut. max .undercut. max .undercut.
Humidity 1 / 16" m
/ Im 1 / 16 "/Inure 1 / 16 "/ lmm
Resistance ( 8) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
min.blisters min .blisters min.blisters
1 / 16 "/ 1mm 1 / 16 "/ lmm 1 / 16"/ Imm
( 1 ) Gloss According to Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D523 .
(2) Cross Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D3359 Method B .
(3 ) Mandrel Bending Test, Astm D522 .
(4) Impression hardness according to Buchholz ISO 2215 .
(5) Impact Test, ASTM D2794, 1 / 10 " distortion.
(6) Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363 .
(7) Saltspray Resistance Test, ASTM DI 17.
(8) Humidity Resistance Test, ASTM D2247.
2 .03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to clean up.
2 . 04 SHOP APPLICATION CONDITIONS
A. Apply and cure coating in dust free surroundings, in a humidity range of 30 to 85
percent, and in a surrounding air temperature of not less than 50 degrees F .
B . Do not apply coatings to surfaces which are dirty, dusty, rusty, damp or oily.
05030-3
C . End Cut Treatment : Treat end cuts of borate preservative treated wood members over 2
inches (51 mm) in thickness with field applied end coat prior to installation for Spruce-Pine-
Fir (SPF) and Douglas Fir (DF) only.
D. Sill Plate: Where applicable, provide sill plate of Borate preservative treated wood or CCA
pressure treated wood.
E. Install using fasteners required by applicable code for use with untreated lumber and
plywood.
3 . 03 FINISHING
A . For painting or staining of Advance Guard PTW, a light sanding or brushing is all that is
necessary to ensure proper coating adhesion . Complete application recommendations are
available from the manufacturer. Avoid frequent or prolonged inhalation of sawdust from
treated wood. When sawing and machining treated wood, wear a dust mask. When power
sawing or machining, wear goggles to protect eyes from flying particles . Surfaces must be
clean and dry before application.
B . Prepare borate preservative treated wood for application of finishes in accordance with
manufacturer' s recommendations . Sand surfaces lightly, clean and check for moisture prior
to finishing.
C . Apply paint or stain in accordance with Section 09900"Painting. "
3 . 04 PROTECTION
A . Protection : Protect borate preservative treated wood from damage during construction .
Protect from moisture prior to installation of finishes.
"END OF SECTION * * *
'i
06076-5
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated . Types of
work in this section include, but are not limited to, rough carpentry for:
1 . Nailers & dead wood
2 . Cant strip
3 . Wood roof curb supports
4 . Door frame bracing
5 . Chalk, tack board, backing
6 . Casework backing
7 . Plumbing backing - (Supports)
8 . Projection screen backing
9 . Window stripping
10. Recessed clock/speakers (framed opening)
11 . Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets (framed opening) RWL - Access: to clean
out.
12 . Toilet partition backing
13 . Recessed electrical panels backing
14 . Mirror backing
15 . Acoustical backing
16 . Ceiling trim backing
B . Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood treatment Data• Submit treatment manufacturer' s instructions for proper use of
each type of treated material .
B . Pressure Treatment: For each type of specified, include certification by treating plant
stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and
conformance with applicable standards.
06100- 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02761
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION
A. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing reflectorized traffic line paint and/or
thermoplastic for edge stripes, center stripes, lane stripes, and plastic reflective pavement
markers upon the roadway surface in accordance with the plans and specifications.
1 . 02 REFER'P ICES
A. This section references the following documents. They are a part of this section insofar as
specified and modified herein . In case of conflict between the requirements of this section
and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail .
Reference Title
F.D .O .T. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition).
PART - MATERIALS
2 .01 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic markers shall be methyl methacrylate or acrylonitrile butarine styrene in
accordance with Section 706-2 , F.D. O.T. Markers shall be in the shape of a frustrum of a
pyramid, filled with a thermosetting compound. Markers used for restoration in areas
damaged by construction shall be of the same size, shape, color, and have the same optical
qualities of the original marker. Markers used for hydrant location identification shall be
blue, have bidirectional optical properties, and have a minimum area for each reflective
face of not less than 3 .25 square inches.
2 . 02 PAVEMENT STRIPING MATERIALS
A. Traffic Line Paint
1 . Traffic line paint shall be furnished in accordance with F.D.O.T. Section 971 - 12
and shall be formulas; Code T- 1 (white),Code T-2 (yellow). Blue tinted paint
otherwise meeting the requirements of F.D.O .T. Section 971 - 12 shall be used for
handicapped symbols and line delineators.
B . THERMOPLASTIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
1 . Traffic line or marking thermoplastic compound shall be furnished in accordance
with F.D.O.T. Section 711 and shall be white or yellow as required.
02761 - 1 02761 Pavement Markings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Aluminum: Clean with chemicals or etch to remove grease, dirt and loose oxide film
using manufacturer' s recommended products .
B . Previously Powdered Coated Metal (touch-up) : Remove dirt, grease and bond
breaking substances and roughen area to be touched up with finabrasiveve paper and
touch-up with air dry spray supplied by applicator.
C . Prepare surfaces to receive powder coating and shop apply powder coating in
accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations .
3 .02 COLOR MATCHING
A . Powdered coating shall be formulated and applied so as to maintain uniform color,
texture and gloss .
B . All applications of powder coatings shall maintain uniform color, texture , gloss and
quality of application to match accepted sample .
3 . 03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A . Apply powder coating system according to manufacturer' s published
recommendations.
B . Due to the sensitivity of these coatings to dust pickup during their extended curing
times , apply all coats of powder coating system at shop or factory, under dust free,
temperature and humidity-controlled conditions.
3 .04 POWDERED COATING APPLICATION
A. Pneumatically feed dry powder to spray gun. Impact a low amperage , high voltage
charge to the powder.
B . Uniformly spray apply powdered coating to electrically grounded metal surfaces.
C . Allow sprayed surfaces to bake in ovens at temperatures recommended by coating
manufacturer.
D . Finished surfaces shall be fully and uniformly coated without pinholes, bubbles, sag,
runs, lumps, marks or discoloration. Surface finish shall be of uniform color, texture
and gloss.
05030-4
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated . Types of
work in this section include, but are not limited to, rough carpentry for:
1 . Nailers & dead wood
2 . Cant strip
3 . Wood roof curb supports
4 . Door frame bracing
5 . Chalk, tack board, backing
6 . Casework backing
7 . Plumbing backing - (Supports)
8 . Projection screen backing
9 . Window stripping
10. Recessed clock/speakers (framed opening)
11 . Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets (framed opening) RWL - Access: to clean
out.
12 . Toilet partition backing
13 . Recessed electrical panels backing
14 . Mirror backing
15 . Acoustical backing
16 . Ceiling trim backing
B . Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood treatment Data• Submit treatment manufacturer' s instructions for proper use of
each type of treated material .
B . Pressure Treatment: For each type of specified, include certification by treating plant
stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and
conformance with applicable standards.
06100- 1
C . For water-borne preservatives, include statement, that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to a maximum of 15 % prior to shipment to project site.
D . Fire-retardant treatment: Include certification by treatment plant that treatment material
complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished
surfaces .
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
Delivery and Storage : Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air
circulation within stacks .
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for an accurate
fit . Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
proper attachment of other work.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A . Lumber Standards : Comply with PS 20 . `
B . Plywood Standards : Comply with PS 1 . /
C . Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or
without finish .
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions . Provided actual
sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Provide
dressed lumber, S4S , unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 10%
maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B . Framing Lumber: (2" through 4" thick)
C . For light framing (less than 6" wide) , provide the following grade and species :
Construction grades, any species .
06100 -2
J . 05 TOUCH-UP
A. After powder coating has been in place at least 15 days, and within 30days of
Architect-Engineer' s inspection of the product prior to certification that the work is
complete, check all powder coated surfaces for damage, missed areas and
discoloration.
B . Prepare surfaces and touch-up damaged, missed and discolored areas to bring coating
system to full dry film thickness, in color and gloss matching that of adjacent coated
areas .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
05030-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX ( l
C. GLASS BEADS FOR TRAFFIC LINE STRIPES OR MARKINGS J
1 . Glass beads for reflective traffic paint or thermoplastic compound shall be
furnished in accordance with Section 971 - 13 , F.D.O.T.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
A . Where disturbed or destroyed by construction, pavement stripes and markings shall be
restored at the original locations and to the original lines . pavement marking-in public
right-of ways shall be restored and/or installed with thermoplastic traffic markings5
otherwise painted traffic markings may be used .
B . Plastic reflectorized pavement markers for hydrant valve location shall be installed on
centerline stripes or at the pavement centerline for unstriped roadways. Each hydrant valve
installed under or adjacent to paved areas shall receive a reflectorized marker.
3 .02 PAINTED TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS
A . Painted traffic stripes and markings shall be installed in accordance with F .D.O.T. , Section
710 .
3 .03 THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC MARKINGS
A . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall be installed in accordance with the F.D .O.T., Section J
711 . Thermoplastic traffic markings shall not be applied to new asphalt pavements within
30 days of asphalt placement.
3 .04 PLASTIC REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
A . Plastic reflective pavement markers shall be installed in accordance with F.D.O .T., Section
706 at the locations indicated on the plans and blue markers shall be installed in the
centerline of drive isle at each hydrant valve location adjacent to paved surface courses.
END OF SECTION
f
I
02761 Pavement Markings
02761 - 2
C . For water-borne preservatives, include statement, that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to a maximum of 15 % prior to shipment to project site.
D . Fire-retardant treatment: Include certification by treatment plant that treatment material
complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished
surfaces .
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
Delivery and Storage : Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air
circulation within stacks .
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for an accurate
fit . Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
proper attachment of other work.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A . Lumber Standards : Comply with PS 20 . `
B . Plywood Standards : Comply with PS 1 . /
C . Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or
without finish .
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions . Provided actual
sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Provide
dressed lumber, S4S , unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 10%
maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B . Framing Lumber: (2" through 4" thick)
C . For light framing (less than 6" wide) , provide the following grade and species :
Construction grades, any species .
06100 -2
D . Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work
including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members . Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and
as follows .
Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
E. Grade : Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size
lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No . 2
boards (SPIB or WWPA) .
F. Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed in finished work supply the following :
1 . Where painted finish is indicated, provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade
A face exposed and Grade C concealed, for exterior use; and provide A-D/INT-
APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior
use.
2. Concealed Plywood : Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide
C-D Plugged/INT-APA .
3 . For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide 3/4 " fire-
l
retardant treated plywood with exterior glue .
1 2. 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners and Anchorages Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as
recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal`
Specifications ' for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices .
Provide metal hangers and frazrting anchors of the size and type recommended by the
manufacturer for each use including recommended nails .
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide stainless steel fasteners.
Interior work shall utilize hot dipped galvanized.
B . Building Pa ear Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 154 or 30 #, ASTM D226 .
2 .04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment : Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd", "P .T. "
or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements
of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPA standards listed
below. Mark each treated items with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements .
06100-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications
are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. References signify current revisions .
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A 53 Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes
ASTM B 241 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Seamless Extruded Tube
ASTM C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM F 883 Padlocks
ASTM F1083 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1043 Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings :on Metal >
Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework
ASTM F1234 Protective Coatings on Steel Framework for Fences
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
AASHTO M111 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
AASHTO M181 Chain-Link Fence
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
Product Manual - Standard Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
Submit five copies of the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
Gates
Gate Operators
Post spacing
Location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts
02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
02821 - 1
i—� ( �'
',e.�
D . Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work
including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members . Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and
as follows .
Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
E. Grade : Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size
lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No . 2
boards (SPIB or WWPA) .
F. Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed in finished work supply the following :
1 . Where painted finish is indicated, provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade
A face exposed and Grade C concealed, for exterior use; and provide A-D/INT-
APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior
use.
2. Concealed Plywood : Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide
C-D Plugged/INT-APA .
3 . For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide 3/4 " fire-
l
retardant treated plywood with exterior glue .
1 2. 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners and Anchorages Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as
recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal`
Specifications ' for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices .
Provide metal hangers and frazrting anchors of the size and type recommended by the
manufacturer for each use including recommended nails .
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide stainless steel fasteners.
Interior work shall utilize hot dipped galvanized.
B . Building Pa ear Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 154 or 30 #, ASTM D226 .
2 .04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment : Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd", "P .T. "
or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements
of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPA standards listed
below. Mark each treated items with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements .
06100-3
B . Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15 . Treat
indicated items and the following :
Wood cants, nailers, cures, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and water proofing. Wood sills, sleepers ,
blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
C . Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where "FR-S " lumber or plywood is specified or otherwise
indicated, provide materials which comply with AWPA standards for pressure
impregnations with fire-retardant chemicals, and which have a flame spread rating of
not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84 , and
show no increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon
continuation of test for an additional 20 minutes .
Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19%.
Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant lumber or plywood .
D . Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A . Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units
which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B . Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and
true and accurately cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and
as required by recognized standards . Countersink nail head on exposed carpentry work
and fill holes .
D . Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.
06100-4
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes the labor and materials required for the proper completion of
structural steel work as shown on the drawings or specified .
B . Generally, this work is as follows :
1 . Furnishing, fabrication and erection of all structural steel beams, columns,
trusses, attached lintels, column base and cap plates, including all bolts and
welding as required for the complete installation of the work.
2 . Furnishing all anchor bolts and leveling plates for installationunder other
sections .
3 . Shop painting and field touch-up of all steel .
4 . Erection drawings and shop details.
5 . Providing all tools, equipment and temporary bracing required for safe,
proper and expeditious erection of the work.
6 . Furnishing of all loose lintels.
C . Related work of other sections :
Steel Joists Section 05210
Metal Decking Section 05300
Painting Section 09900
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : All structural steel work shall comply with the
Specifications or the "Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings", latest edition, issued by the American Institute for Steel Construction,
and shall comply with the requirements of local building codes .
B . All welding shall be done by the electric arc process and conform to the Code of
05120- 1
B . Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15 . Treat
indicated items and the following :
Wood cants, nailers, cures, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and water proofing. Wood sills, sleepers ,
blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
C . Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where "FR-S " lumber or plywood is specified or otherwise
indicated, provide materials which comply with AWPA standards for pressure
impregnations with fire-retardant chemicals, and which have a flame spread rating of
not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84 , and
show no increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon
continuation of test for an additional 20 minutes .
Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19%.
Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant lumber or plywood .
D . Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A . Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units
which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B . Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and
true and accurately cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and
as required by recognized standards . Countersink nail head on exposed carpentry work
and fill holes .
D . Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.
06100-4
3 . 02 WOOD GROUNDS NAILERS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS
A . Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to
be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B . Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C . Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1 'h " wide and thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3 . 03 WOOD FURRING (WD-FUR)
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges of openings . Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finished work.
B . Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 "x3 " furring'
at 2 'o .c. , horizontally and vertically. Structural framing to receive furring will dictate
the spacing, size and type of furring. Refer to drawings and details .
3 . 04 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL (WD-FRM)
A . Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as
shown, or if not show, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing''
of National Forest Productions Association . Do not splice structural members between
supports.
B . Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of
"Manual for Housing Framing" and other recommendations of the N.F .P.A .
3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (PWD)
A. Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA), for the
installation of plywood and per the current edition of the Florida Building Code
nailing patterns.
3 . 06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 . All work shall comply with the standards of the American Institute of Timber
Construction, AWI, API, AWPA, and local codes and regulations.
2. All framing shall be square, plumb and true .
3 . All furring shall be shimmed to a plumb, true surface.
06100-5
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
& Product Data:
Chain-link fencing components
Accessories
Manufacturer' s catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions and maintenance data
C. Samples :
1 ' x I ' minimum of each type of fence fabric.
D. Test Reports:
Weight in ounces for zinc coating
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition . Store materials off the ground to provide
protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
1 .04 WARRANTY
The manufacturer shall provide a one-year warranty period on all components of the fence and gates.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide each type of steel fence and gates as a complete unit produced by a singlemanufacturer,
including necessary erection accessories, fittings and fastenings.
Comply with standards of the Chain Link Fence Manufacturer' s Institute Product Manual - Standard
Guide for Metallic-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence & Fabric and Industrial Steel Specifications for
fence posts, gates and accessories, and as herein specified.
A. Required Report Data
Submit reports of listing of chain-link fencing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for
zinc coating, and/or chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CHAIN-LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES
Chain link fabric, posts, rails, truss rods, tension wires, tie wires, stretcher bars, gates and all
miscellaneous fittings and hardware shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 . Stipulated
AASHTO and ASTM signify current reference. The Contractor may elect to use either one or the other
types of material from the component options listed above. Combinations of optional materials shall
not be used on the same project.
A. Fabric
Chain link fabric shall be 2 - inch mesh with twisted and barbed selvage top and bottom.
Chain link fabric shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M181 , 9 gage Min. (coated core
wire diameter), core wire-zinc coated steel.
02821 - 2 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
Are and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society .
All welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with this code,
and holding current certificates. `
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Supplementary
Conditions, at earliest possible date to insure timely delivery and proper
coordination of work by others . No variation from design sizes will be permitted
but recommendations for modification of connections or details to better suit
fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed, in writing to
the attention of the Architect.
B . Shop Drawings shall include erection plans , details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained . Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the approval seal and signature of the licensed
professional engineer who supervised their preparation shall be used in the field and
all other shop drawings will be considered void .
E _ Work under this section includes responsibility for dimensions to be correlated and
confirmed in the field and for information that pertains solely to fabrication
processes and to techniques of construction.
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members which are required by other
trades .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36 . Steel shall be new, clean, and
straight (foreign steel not acceptable) .
B . High tensile strength bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A325 , or
A490 .
C . Ordinary unfinished bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 .
D . Are welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM Standards Spec. A233 , latest
edition.
05120-2
3 . 02 WOOD GROUNDS NAILERS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS
A . Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to
be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B . Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C . Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1 'h " wide and thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3 . 03 WOOD FURRING (WD-FUR)
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges of openings . Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finished work.
B . Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 "x3 " furring'
at 2 'o .c. , horizontally and vertically. Structural framing to receive furring will dictate
the spacing, size and type of furring. Refer to drawings and details .
3 . 04 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL (WD-FRM)
A . Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as
shown, or if not show, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing''
of National Forest Productions Association . Do not splice structural members between
supports.
B . Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of
"Manual for Housing Framing" and other recommendations of the N.F .P.A .
3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (PWD)
A. Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA), for the
installation of plywood and per the current edition of the Florida Building Code
nailing patterns.
3 . 06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 . All work shall comply with the standards of the American Institute of Timber
Construction, AWI, API, AWPA, and local codes and regulations.
2. All framing shall be square, plumb and true .
3 . All furring shall be shimmed to a plumb, true surface.
06100-5
4 . All lumber in contact with masonry shall be #2 yellow pine, pressure treated.
5 . Coordinate blocking and backing requirements of all trades and provide where
indicated and required.
6 . Provide solid blocking behind all shower valves .
7 . Provide rough openings for all manufactured items such as medicine cabinets, fire
extinguisher cabinets, etc.
8 . Provide wood fire cats in all interior and exterior frame walls where vertical cavity
exceeds 8 feet and where soffits adjoin vertical walls.
9 . Construct 3/4 inch BC plywood plenum bases, including vertical sides, for all Closet
Mounted Air-Handling Units. Line interiors with 5/8 " type "X" gypsum board to
comply with non-combustible plenum requirements .
* * *END OF SECTION'
06100-6
E. Shop coat of paint shall be Manufacturer' s Standard Shop Primer, or approved
equal .
2 . 02 FIELD COORDINATION
A. All measurements shall be verified in the field, particularly for work installed
before delivery of steel . Contractor shall notify Architect in writing of any
discrepancy between elevations , locations, conditions, etc. , shown on the drawings
and those actually encountered in the field, and shall not proceed with the work
until discrepancies have been resolved.
B . The Contractor shall check all drawings and shall be responsible for completeness
and correct Iittirgc of all work .
C. All anchor bolts and plates required to be set in concrete shall be furnished and
delivered, together with templates and/or instructions for setting, in ample time for
installation by other trades.
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A . Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints
between components parts . If straightening or flattening is required, it shall be
done in a manner that will not damage the material.
B . Columns and stiffeners shall be milled at bearing ends to true surface, at right
angles to the axis or at the proper angle, to insure uniform bearing. .,i ,
C. Column base plates shall be of sizes indicated on the drawings, with straight and
true top and bottom surfaces. Base plates may be straightened by pressing to obtain
satisfactory contact bearing .
D . Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched 1 / 16" larger than the normal diameter of
the bolts. Burning to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted. Holes that must be
enlarged shall be remade . Bolts shall fit holes snugly and nuts shall be drawn up
tight and shall have full grip in bolts.
E . Provisions of work by other trades : Open holes or studs shall be provided for
attaching of work by other trades which adjoins, attaches to, or connects with
Structural Steel. Particular notice shall be given to requirements where
miscellaneous metal adjoins structural steel .
F. All exposed steel shall be free of stampings, mill scale or imperfections. All cuts
and notches at exposed steel shall be ground and finished smooth. All welds on
exposed structural steel shall be filled having an additional bead or beads as
required , and ground smooth to receive shop primer coat.
05120-3
4 . All lumber in contact with masonry shall be #2 yellow pine, pressure treated.
5 . Coordinate blocking and backing requirements of all trades and provide where
indicated and required.
6 . Provide solid blocking behind all shower valves .
7 . Provide rough openings for all manufactured items such as medicine cabinets, fire
extinguisher cabinets, etc.
8 . Provide wood fire cats in all interior and exterior frame walls where vertical cavity
exceeds 8 feet and where soffits adjoin vertical walls.
9 . Construct 3/4 inch BC plywood plenum bases, including vertical sides, for all Closet
Mounted Air-Handling Units. Line interiors with 5/8 " type "X" gypsum board to
comply with non-combustible plenum requirements .
* * *END OF SECTION'
06100-6
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
B . Wood Doors Section 08200
C . Finish Hardware Section 08700
D . Chalkboards, Tackboards, & Pegboards Section 10100
E. Plastic Laminated Toilet Partitions Section 10160
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - STANDARDS
A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are hereby made a part of this Specification. Any reference to
Premium, Custom or Economy shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI
Standards .
B . Any items not given a specific quality grade, shall be custom grade.
C . Products of other manufacturers may be proposed under conditions as set forth in
the Contract Conditions of these Specifications .
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A . Deliver manufactured material in original packages .
B . Store all finish materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage
and exposure to the elements .
1 .04 MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK
Shelving not included in Casework Specifications nor in Casework Drawings :
A. SWI Custom Grade if stained.
B . AWI Economy Grade if painted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR WOODWORK FOR PAINT FINISH
A (Quality Grade - Economy grade requirements of AWI Quality Standards.
B. Wood S ecies : B and better V . G. Fir, Birch, or where indicated on Drawings - B
and better Oak.
06200-1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Height of fabric shall be 6 feet as indicated on the Drawings.
B . Gates
1 . Swing Gates
a. All gates other than the entrance slide gates, shall be double swing type. Framing
and bracing members shall be round, of steel or aluminum alloy. Steel member
finish shall be zinc-coated or aluminum-coated. Gate frames and braces of steel
construction shall be a minimum 1 . 90 inches OD, with 0 . 120 inches minimum wall
thickness. Aluminum pipe frames and intermediate braces shall be a minimum
1 . 869 inches OD, with 0.940 lb/ft of length. Gate fabric shall be as specified for
fencing fabric. Coating for steel latches, stops, hinges, keepers, and accessories
shall be galvanized. Gate leaves more than 8 feet wide shall have intermediate
members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate
leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach
gate fabric to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's standards, except that
welding will not be permitted.
b. Hinges : Provide 1 - 1 /2 pair of hinges for each leaf 6 feet or over in height. Hinges
shall be non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree swing, and of suitable size
and weight to support gate.
C. Latch: Provide forked type for single gates 10 feet wide or less . Provide plunger
bar type complete with flush plate set in concrete for all double gates and single
gates over 10 feet. Padlock eye shall be an integral part of latch construction.
C. Posts, Top Rails, Bottom Rails and Braces
1 . Line post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 .8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083, and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b. Aluminum coated steel pipe: ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy. 6063, T6 .
2. Corner, end, and pull post options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf. ASTM A53 Table X2,
ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml l 1
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe ASTM A53 Table X2 coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
3 . Rail options:
a. Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 1 '/4 " nominal dia. galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8
oz/sf: ASTM A53 Table X2, ASTM F1083 , and AASHTO Ml 11 .
b . Aluminum coated steel pipe- 1 '/q "nominal dia. coated at the rate of 0.40 oz/sf: Spec.
Subarticle 966- 1 .5.
c. Aluminum alloy pipe- 1 V4 "nominal dia. : ASTM B241 or B221 , Alloy 6063 , T6.
4. Minimum Dimensions(inches) :
a. Line Posts : Pipe O.D. = C(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = D (see table), Concrete
Setting Diameter = G(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = H(see table)
b. Comer, End, and Pull Posts: Pipe O.D. = A(see table), Pipe Wall Thickness = B(see
table), Concrete Setting Diameter = E(see table), Concrete Setting Depth = F(see
table)
02821 - 3 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
PART 3 - EXECUTION {\ l
3 . 01 ERECTION J
A . Columns and struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept plumb during erection for which all temporary ,
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns.
B . The Building Erector sub-contracted with the General Contractor shall provide all
necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc. ,
that may be required to erect the structural frame and maintain it in alignment until
the building is completed, including any extra guying after completion of decking.
C . Welding and bolting of all connections shall follow the setting of the steel as
closely as plumbing and alignment will permit.
D . Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment. Any work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
E. Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure, \
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect, or personnel
having legitimate business at the site. Location of supports for derricks , hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studied by the General Contractor, and shall
be reviewed by the Architect if any questions arise .
F . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the written permission of the Architect.
G. Self-lubricating bearing plate assemblies shall be installed in the field. After
installation, a protective covering shall be provided to insure that no dirt, or other
injurious materials comes in contact with the bearing surfaces.
3 .02 CONNECTIONS
A. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise shown on plans .
B . Field connections shall be welded where specifically shown. All other field
connections shall be bolted with 3/4 " minimum A307 machine bolts, except for the
following, which must be made with 3/4" minimum A325 high strength bolts :
Connections of beams supporting roof mounted machinery. /
Other connections as noted on the structural drawings . t
05120 -4
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
B . Wood Doors Section 08200
C . Finish Hardware Section 08700
D . Chalkboards, Tackboards, & Pegboards Section 10100
E. Plastic Laminated Toilet Partitions Section 10160
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - STANDARDS
A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are hereby made a part of this Specification. Any reference to
Premium, Custom or Economy shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI
Standards .
B . Any items not given a specific quality grade, shall be custom grade.
C . Products of other manufacturers may be proposed under conditions as set forth in
the Contract Conditions of these Specifications .
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A . Deliver manufactured material in original packages .
B . Store all finish materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage
and exposure to the elements .
1 .04 MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK
Shelving not included in Casework Specifications nor in Casework Drawings :
A. SWI Custom Grade if stained.
B . AWI Economy Grade if painted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR WOODWORK FOR PAINT FINISH
A (Quality Grade - Economy grade requirements of AWI Quality Standards.
B. Wood S ecies : B and better V . G. Fir, Birch, or where indicated on Drawings - B
and better Oak.
06200-1
C . Plywood: All plywood shall be exterior grade, Group 1 , A, B , Veneer grades . This
shall include any plywood shelving to receive paint as indicated on the casework
drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF WOODWORK
A . Only experienced finish carpenters are to work on exposed woodwork .
B . Erect all work plumb, level and true to the line and detail.
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
D . Nailing: Use finish nails and counter sink. Fill holes with putty after prime coat.
E . Sand all finish woodwork and leave ready for finishing.
3 . 02 DOORS
A . Install doors as provided under other Sections of these Specifications .
B . Install doors true and plumb with equal clearances at jambs and head. _
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
3 . 03 HARDWARE
Install finish hardware as specified under another Section of these Specifications .
A . Installation of all finish hardware shall be by a skilled and experienced mechanic in
a neat and workmanlike manner. Where required, the hardware shall be removed
for application of finishes and fully protected until final installation.
B . Carefully tag and file all keys in the key file and deliver all keys to the Owner' s
representative at the completion of the job . See Finish Hardware for detailed
specifications and instructions.
3 . 04 CLEAN UP
A. Leave all work in neat and in a finished condition.
B . Remove all debris as result of work under this Section of these Specifications .
* * *END OF SECTION * "
06200-2
C . Where bolted connections are used , they shall be standard beam connections as
detailed in the AISC Manual, having a strength at least equal to one-half the
tabulated load capacity of the AISC Manual .
D . Where welded connections are used, they shall be Welded Frame Beam
Connections, as detailed in the AISC Manual, but of a length and capacity at least
equal to that of "Minimum Beam Connections".
E. Where the combination of shop welding and field bolting is used, the appropriate
portions of the bolted and welded standards specified above shall be combined.
F. High tensile bolts shall be installed in accordance with the March 1964
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, approved by
the Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation using the Turn-of-nut method with one washer. However, bolts shall
be designed as A307 bolts for all connections in which they are used.
G. Common machine bolts shall have shanks of proper length to provide full grip.
H. Provide approved lock washers to prevent slipping of nuts .
3 . 03 PAINTING
jA . All structural steel , not encased in concrete, shall be prepared for painting
according to Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-AP3 Power Tool Cleaning
and shall receive one shop coat of 1 mil . maximum thick paint.
B . Paint, if manufacturer shop primer, shall be thinned with the building
manufacturers approved material and applied at a spreading rate of 400 s .f. per
gallon. The thinner shall be compatible with the finished painting materials and
methods of application.
C . The Contractor shall submit the name and characteristics of proposed paint to the
Architect for approval . All paint shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer' s recommendations to achieve the above desired results. The prime
coat shall be compatible with the finish paint.
D. After erection, all bolts, welds and serious abrasions to the shop coat shall be
painted with one coat of the material used for the shop coat.
E. Steel beams and girders encased or partially encased in concrete shall not be
painted where encasement occurs .
F. Steel beams and girders scheduled to receive sprayed on fireproofing shall not be
painted.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
05120-5
C . Plywood: All plywood shall be exterior grade, Group 1 , A, B , Veneer grades . This
shall include any plywood shelving to receive paint as indicated on the casework
drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF WOODWORK
A . Only experienced finish carpenters are to work on exposed woodwork .
B . Erect all work plumb, level and true to the line and detail.
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
D . Nailing: Use finish nails and counter sink. Fill holes with putty after prime coat.
E . Sand all finish woodwork and leave ready for finishing.
3 . 02 DOORS
A . Install doors as provided under other Sections of these Specifications .
B . Install doors true and plumb with equal clearances at jambs and head. _
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
3 . 03 HARDWARE
Install finish hardware as specified under another Section of these Specifications .
A . Installation of all finish hardware shall be by a skilled and experienced mechanic in
a neat and workmanlike manner. Where required, the hardware shall be removed
for application of finishes and fully protected until final installation.
B . Carefully tag and file all keys in the key file and deliver all keys to the Owner' s
representative at the completion of the job . See Finish Hardware for detailed
specifications and instructions.
3 . 04 CLEAN UP
A. Leave all work in neat and in a finished condition.
B . Remove all debris as result of work under this Section of these Specifications .
* * *END OF SECTION * "
06200-2
SECTION 07160 — UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A . Surface preparation.
B . Application of underslab vaporproofing membrane.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 — Cast in Place Concrete
B . Section 09650 — Resilient Tile Flooring
1 . 03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Soil Or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
2 . ASTM E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs .
1 3 . ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials .
4 . ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
B . American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1 . ACI 302 . 1 R-96 Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less
than 10 mils thick.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures .
B . Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions.
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
_ B . Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07160- 1
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Fence Height Table of Dimensions (inches)
feet) A B C D E F G H
Up to 4 23/8 0. 154 15/8 0. 140 10 24 8 24
Over 4 to 5 23/8 0. 154 17/8 0 . 145 10 24 8 24
Over 5 to 6 23/8 0 . 154 17/8 0. 145 10 24 8 24
Over 6 to 8 23/8 0. 154 23/8 0. 154 10 36 10 36
Over 8 to 10 27/8 0.203 23/8 0. 154 12 40 10 40
Over 10 to 12 27/8 0.203 27/8 0.203 12 42 12 42
D. Tension wire options:
1 . No. 7 gage steel wire zinc galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf: AASHTO M181 .
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a wire diameter of 0.1875' or larger.
3 . No. 7 gage aluminum coated steel wire coated at the rate of 0 .40 oz/sf: AASHTO M181
E. Tie wire and hog ring options:
1 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - steel wire galvanized at the rate of 1 . 8 oz/sf.
2. Aluminum alloy wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061 ,
Temper T89 or T94, with a minimum gage matching that of the fabric .
3 . Same gage (Min.) as the fabric - aluminum coated steel wire coated at the gate of 0.40 oz/sf.
F. Fencing Accessories
Provide wire ties constructed of the same material as the fencing fabric.
G. Concrete
ASTM C 94, using 3/4 inch maximum-size aggregate, and having minimum compressive
strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days.
I. Grout
Provide grout of proportions one part Portland cement to three parts clean, well-graded sand
and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
J. Padlocks
CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary padlocks on all gates until the Owner occupies the
project.
02821 - 4 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
SECTION 07160 — UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A . Surface preparation.
B . Application of underslab vaporproofing membrane.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 — Cast in Place Concrete
B . Section 09650 — Resilient Tile Flooring
1 . 03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Soil Or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
2 . ASTM E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs .
1 3 . ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials .
4 . ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
B . American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1 . ACI 302 . 1 R-96 Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less
than 10 mils thick.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures .
B . Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions.
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
_ B . Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07160- 1
C . Stack membrane on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate warping.
D . Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or
contamination.
1 .06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A . Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the
elements .
B . Do not apply on frozen ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURER
A . W . R. MEADOWS , INC., PO Box 338 , Hampshire, Illinois 60140-0338 . (800)
342- 5976 . (847) 683 -4500 . Fax (847) 683 -4544 . Website : www.wrmeadows .com.
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder
1 . Performance Based Specification: Vapor Retarder membrane must meet or
exceed all requirements of ASTM E 1745 Classes A, B , & C . J
a. Minimum Permeance ASTM E 96 : 0 .034 Perms
b . Resistance to Organisms and Substrates in Contact with Soil ASTM E
154, Section 13 : 0 . 051 Perms
C . Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 , Section 9 : 52 LBS . Force/Inch
d . Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 , Method B : 3 ,770 Grams
e . Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E 1745 : Meets or exceeds Class A, B &
C
f. Thickness of Retarder (plastic) ACI 302 . 1 R-96 : Not less than 10 mils
2 . Proprietary Based Specification:
a. PERMINATOR 10 mil by W . R. MEADOWS .
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Seam Tape
1 . High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum
width 4 inches .
07160-2
SECTION 05400 - LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS IN OTHER SECTIONS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of lightgage metal framing (LtGMFrm) is shown on drawings .
Types of lightgage metal framing units include the following: "C" shaped steel studs.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Components Design : Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance
with AICS "Specification for design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
B . Fire-Rated Assemblies : Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated
for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing
regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
C . Manufacturers offering products complying with requirements for lightgage metal
framing components include the following :
L Shaped load bearing studs, 1 -5/8 " flange :
Alabama Metal Industries
Marino Ware
Dietrick
Roll Form Products, Inc.
U. S . Steel Corp .
Wheeling Corrugating Co .
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Products data: Submit manufacturer ' s product information and installation instructions
for each items of lightgage framing and accessories .
B . Shop Drawine • Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not
fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer' s product data. Signed and sealed
Shop Drawings required by a Florida Registered Structural Engineer.
Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations,
number, type, locations and spacing, Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices,
accessories, and details required for proper installation.
05400- 1
C . Stack membrane on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate warping.
D . Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or
contamination.
1 .06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A . Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the
elements .
B . Do not apply on frozen ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURER
A . W . R. MEADOWS , INC., PO Box 338 , Hampshire, Illinois 60140-0338 . (800)
342- 5976 . (847) 683 -4500 . Fax (847) 683 -4544 . Website : www.wrmeadows .com.
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder
1 . Performance Based Specification: Vapor Retarder membrane must meet or
exceed all requirements of ASTM E 1745 Classes A, B , & C . J
a. Minimum Permeance ASTM E 96 : 0 .034 Perms
b . Resistance to Organisms and Substrates in Contact with Soil ASTM E
154, Section 13 : 0 . 051 Perms
C . Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 , Section 9 : 52 LBS . Force/Inch
d . Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 , Method B : 3 ,770 Grams
e . Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E 1745 : Meets or exceeds Class A, B &
C
f. Thickness of Retarder (plastic) ACI 302 . 1 R-96 : Not less than 10 mils
2 . Proprietary Based Specification:
a. PERMINATOR 10 mil by W . R. MEADOWS .
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Seam Tape
1 . High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum
width 4 inches .
07160-2
B . Pipe Boots
1 . Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape
per manufacturer's instructions .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 EXAMINATION
A . Examine surfaces to receive membrane . Notify Architect if surfaces are not
acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable
conditions have been corrected .
3 .02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions .
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A . Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E
1643 -98 .
B . Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
pour.
r
C . Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls .
D . Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape .
E . Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot .
F . No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
G . Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged
area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
1
07 ] 60-3
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SITE PREPARATION
A. Clearing and Grading
Clear fence line of brush and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded, compacted
fence line prior to fencing installation. Compact fill used to establish fence line.
B . Excavation
Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete-embedded items, except in bedrock. If
bedrock is encountered, continue excavation to depth indicated or 18 inches into bedrock,
whichever is less, with a diameter in bedrock a minimum of 2 inches larger than outside
diameter of post. Clear post holes of loose material. Dispose of waste material.
3 .02 FENCE INSTALLATION
Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Secure fastening and hinge hardware in
place to fence framework by peening or welding. Allow for proper operation of components. Coat
peened or welded areas with a repair coating matching original coating. Install fence.; in accordance
with fence manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.
A. Post Spacing
Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feet on center. Provide gate
posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing
in both directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in
grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, comer, end, and pull posts.
B . Post Setting
Set posts plumb. Allow concrete and grout to cure a minimum of 7 days before performing
other work on posts.
C. Earth and Bedrock
Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated, except in bedrock. Compact concrete to
eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set posts with a minimum of one
inch of grout around each post. Work grout into hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome
shape.
D. Concrete Slabs and Walls
Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 12
inches. Fill sleeve joint with lead, non-shrink grout, or other approved material. Set posts for
support of removable fence sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold
posts aligned and plumb without use of lead or setting material .
E. Bracing
02821 - 5 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
1 0 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to protect site in manufacturer' s �.
unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off
ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable water proof coverings .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components : With each type of metal framing required, provide
manufacturer' s standard steel runners (tracks, blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes,
reinforcements, fasteners) , and accessories recommended by manufacturer for
applications indicated as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.
B . Materials and Finishes
For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality
steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570 , or A 611 .
For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33 ,000 psi ; ASTM A 466 , A 570, Or
A 611 . Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM
A 525 for minimum G 60 coating at exterior wall panel studs . Provide prime coated
finish with one coat of shop- applied redoxide, zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-
inhibitive primer for interior studs . "C"-Shape Studs : Manufacturer' s standard load- � ^
bearing steel studs of size shape, and as located on the drawings with 1 -5/8 " ( 1 .625 ")
flange and flange return to lip .
GAGES AS DETERMINED BY THE FOLLOWING CHART:
(Interior Framing: Limiting Heights - ST Style Studs. Stud gages apply for single and
double layers of gypsum application on walls using L/360 allowable deflection) with no midspan
wall blocking, cats, lateral bracing, or cold rolled channel bracing run through stud perforations.
Allowable heights can be exceeded by 20% when continuous wall bracing or blocking is provided.
STUD WIDTH STUD SPACING MAX. HGT. 25 GA MAX. HGT. 22 GA MAX. HGT. 20 GA
3-5/8" 16" o/c 10'-0" I2'-0 " 14'-0 "
3-5/8 " 24" o/c 8'-0 " 10'-0" 12'-0"
611 16 " o/c 151-01 ? 171-0, l 19'-011
6" 24" o/c 131-0.O 151-011 17p-0lt
2 . 02 FABRICATION
A. General : Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection.
Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded.
Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. Stud
panels to be rechecked for plumbness after installation .
B . Fastenings : Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by
welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
05400-2
B . Pipe Boots
1 . Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape
per manufacturer's instructions .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 EXAMINATION
A . Examine surfaces to receive membrane . Notify Architect if surfaces are not
acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable
conditions have been corrected .
3 .02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions .
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A . Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E
1643 -98 .
B . Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
pour.
r
C . Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls .
D . Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape .
E . Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot .
F . No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
G . Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged
area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
1
07 ] 60-3
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION
PART 1 - CEILINGS :
1 .01 When Wood Trusses in combination with Vented Soffits : Provide (R- 19, R-28 or R-30 as
called out on the wall sections) Batt insulation - installed between the bottom chords of the pre-
engineered roof trusses. Install in all ceiling spaces as shown on the drawings and building
sections.
1 .02 When Wood Trusses in combination with Non-Vented Soffits : Provide sprayed insulation to
the underside of the plywood decking as manufactured by leynene to a minimum R-Rating of
20 .0. Refer to Section 07205 for manufacturer' s data and the plans for actual placement .
1 , 03 When Steel Joists : (Three methods)
A. Provide R- 19 nailable rigid roofing deck secured to pan-deck as per drawings .
B . Provide (R- 19) Batt insulation - laid on top of the suspended acoustical panels when
no insulation is provided on the metal roof decking. Refer to drawings for placement .
C . Provide (R- 19 overall average) EPS roof deck insulation as an integral pour with the
lightweight concrete decking. Refer to drawings for placement and thicknesses.
1 .04 When Concrete Joists and Deck • Provide roof top insulation board per plans for uppermost
floor. No ceiling insulation for all lower floor/ceiling assemblies .
1 .05 When Ceiling Assembly is used as a return airplenum - Insulation within the plenum space
must meet flame spread and smoke development ratings of the SBC for an exposed
installation .
PART 1 - EXTERIOR WALLS -
2 . 01 When Concrete Block Walls • (Two Methods)
A. Provide furring on the interior face of the block walls as per plans and place rigid
insulation of thickness called out on the wall sections.
B . Fill the exterior block cells with CoreFil1500 amino-plast, Class-A, Foam insulation,
(or an approved equal product) . The thermal properties for an 8 " block/601bs. Density
wall assembly is R- 14 .2 . Install in strict compliance with manufacturers application
procedures. Thermco Foam Insulation is an approved equal product.
2.02 When Wood Frame or Steel Assembly Walls R- 11 in 3 1/2" walls, and R- 19 in 5 %2 " walls .
Utilize foil faced or waxed Kraft paper faced fiberglass batt insulation. V .B . to weather side.
07200- 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
Pre-Installation Conference • Prior to star of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project
site with installers of other work including metal panels, door and window frames and mechanical
and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflict, and coordinate layout and
support provisions for interfacing work.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . Manufacturer' s Instructions Install metal framing systems in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed or written instructions and recommendation, and Engineered Shop
Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Runner Tracks : Install continuous tracks sized to match studs . Align tracks accurately
to layout at base and tops of studs . Secure tracks as recommended by stud manuacturer for
type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o .c. spacing for nail or power-
driven fasteners, nor 16 " o .c. for other types of attachment. Spacing of studs at metal wall
panels to be as per panel manufacturers request. Provide
fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
- C . Set studslu umb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb
j
walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements .
D . Where stud system abutts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor
ends of stiffeners to supporting structure .
E. Install supplementary framing wood blocking and bracing at metal framing system
wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services,
casework, heavy trim and furnishing, wall mounted door stops, bathroom grab bars and
similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary
support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer' s
recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading
resulting from item supported .
F. Installation of Wall Stud System Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by
either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges .
G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0' square with double stud at each jamb of frame
except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer' s instructions.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb
studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall .
}} Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated .
J
'END OF SECTION " *
05400 -3
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION
PART 1 - CEILINGS :
1 .01 When Wood Trusses in combination with Vented Soffits : Provide (R- 19, R-28 or R-30 as
called out on the wall sections) Batt insulation - installed between the bottom chords of the pre-
engineered roof trusses. Install in all ceiling spaces as shown on the drawings and building
sections.
1 .02 When Wood Trusses in combination with Non-Vented Soffits : Provide sprayed insulation to
the underside of the plywood decking as manufactured by leynene to a minimum R-Rating of
20 .0. Refer to Section 07205 for manufacturer' s data and the plans for actual placement .
1 , 03 When Steel Joists : (Three methods)
A. Provide R- 19 nailable rigid roofing deck secured to pan-deck as per drawings .
B . Provide (R- 19) Batt insulation - laid on top of the suspended acoustical panels when
no insulation is provided on the metal roof decking. Refer to drawings for placement .
C . Provide (R- 19 overall average) EPS roof deck insulation as an integral pour with the
lightweight concrete decking. Refer to drawings for placement and thicknesses.
1 .04 When Concrete Joists and Deck • Provide roof top insulation board per plans for uppermost
floor. No ceiling insulation for all lower floor/ceiling assemblies .
1 .05 When Ceiling Assembly is used as a return airplenum - Insulation within the plenum space
must meet flame spread and smoke development ratings of the SBC for an exposed
installation .
PART 1 - EXTERIOR WALLS -
2 . 01 When Concrete Block Walls • (Two Methods)
A. Provide furring on the interior face of the block walls as per plans and place rigid
insulation of thickness called out on the wall sections.
B . Fill the exterior block cells with CoreFil1500 amino-plast, Class-A, Foam insulation,
(or an approved equal product) . The thermal properties for an 8 " block/601bs. Density
wall assembly is R- 14 .2 . Install in strict compliance with manufacturers application
procedures. Thermco Foam Insulation is an approved equal product.
2.02 When Wood Frame or Steel Assembly Walls R- 11 in 3 1/2" walls, and R- 19 in 5 %2 " walls .
Utilize foil faced or waxed Kraft paper faced fiberglass batt insulation. V .B . to weather side.
07200- 1
2 .03 When Insulated Concrete Tilt-wall Sandwich Panels : Provide extruded Dow STYROFOAM
Brand rigid blue board insulation with heat formed, regular spaced holes identifying ` l
connector plate locations . Thicknesses per the plan with a minimum of 1 '/z inch thickness in J
all applications.
PART 3 - INTERIOR WALLS :
3 . 01 Framed Walls Wood or Metal Stud : 3 - 1 /2 " Sound Batt insulation where shown on the plans .
Staples or Adhesive : As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 4 - ATTIC BARRIERS :
4 . 01 When called out on the plans, provide a roll foil vapor barrier as manufactured by Fi-Foil.
L .ocation, type, and application method as called out on the sections and details. Staples and
tape as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 5 - INSTALLATION :
5 . 01 Allow proper air space for thermal insulation, using flanges provided, in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed instructions.
5 . 02 When utilizing a vented soffit assembly, provide a minimum of a 2 " air space at all perimeter
overhangs between the insulation face and the underside of roof decking. Utilize vinyl or
cardboard prefab vent sleeves as required to maintain said clearance. J
5 . 03 Concealed Installation: in buildings of any type construction, shall have a flame spread
rating of not more than 75 and .a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 . 04 Exposed Installation: in buildings of any type construction , shall have a flame spread rating
of not more than 25 and a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 .05 Vapor Retarders : in order to prevent indoor air quality problems in hot, humid climates , vapor
retarders such as asphalt impregnated felts, polyethelenes , or "Tyvics", should be placed on
the outside, or weather side, of the insulation.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
07200-2
MENNEN
INDIAN RIVER COUNTY PARKS COMPLEX
Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a
compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and two diagonal truss
rods and truss tighteners used as tension members.
F. Top Rail
Install top rails before installing chain-link fabric . Pass top rail through intermediate post
caps. Provide expansion coupling spaced as indicated.
G. Bottom Tension Wire
Install bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top
and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.
H. Fabric
Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top rail and bottom rail and top wire and bottom wire,
close to both sides of each post and at maximum intervals of 24 inches on center. Secure
fabric to posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally
weaving to integral fastening loops of end, comer, pull, and gate posts for full length of each
post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured. Install fabric so that
bottom of fabric is 2 inches above ground level . Install fence fabric to provide, approximately
2 inch deflection at center of fabric span between two posts, when a force of approximately
30 pounds is applied perpendicular to fabric. Fabric should return to its original position
when force is removed.
3 .03 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Post Caps
Design post caps to accommodate top rail . Install post caps as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Gates
Install swing gates to swing through 180 degrees from closed to open. Install sliding
cantilever gates to clear the opening dimension(s) shown on plans .
C. Padlocks
Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or
gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.
3 .04 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the site. Restore disturbed ground
areas to original condition.
END OF SECTION
02821 - 6 02821 — Chain Link Fence and Gates
J
�_.
2 .03 When Insulated Concrete Tilt-wall Sandwich Panels : Provide extruded Dow STYROFOAM
Brand rigid blue board insulation with heat formed, regular spaced holes identifying ` l
connector plate locations . Thicknesses per the plan with a minimum of 1 '/z inch thickness in J
all applications.
PART 3 - INTERIOR WALLS :
3 . 01 Framed Walls Wood or Metal Stud : 3 - 1 /2 " Sound Batt insulation where shown on the plans .
Staples or Adhesive : As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 4 - ATTIC BARRIERS :
4 . 01 When called out on the plans, provide a roll foil vapor barrier as manufactured by Fi-Foil.
L .ocation, type, and application method as called out on the sections and details. Staples and
tape as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 5 - INSTALLATION :
5 . 01 Allow proper air space for thermal insulation, using flanges provided, in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed instructions.
5 . 02 When utilizing a vented soffit assembly, provide a minimum of a 2 " air space at all perimeter
overhangs between the insulation face and the underside of roof decking. Utilize vinyl or
cardboard prefab vent sleeves as required to maintain said clearance. J
5 . 03 Concealed Installation: in buildings of any type construction, shall have a flame spread
rating of not more than 75 and .a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 . 04 Exposed Installation: in buildings of any type construction , shall have a flame spread rating
of not more than 25 and a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 .05 Vapor Retarders : in order to prevent indoor air quality problems in hot, humid climates , vapor
retarders such as asphalt impregnated felts, polyethelenes , or "Tyvics", should be placed on
the outside, or weather side, of the insulation.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
07200-2
SECTION 07610 - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND FASCIA PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys,
hips, ridges , eaves, corners , rakes and miscellaneous flashing and atttaching devices. All
roofing assemblies and accessories shall be manufactured by one of the following:
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-231 - 8127
B . AEICOR Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-432- 1802
C . AEP SPAN
Phone : 1 - 800- 527-2503
D . AMP, Atlanta Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 -800- 554- 1097
E . BUTLER Manufacturing Company
Phone : 1 -816- 968- 2380
F . DELCOA Metal Roofing Manufacturer
Phone : 1 - 800-375 -METAL
G. UNA-CLAD, Copper Sales, Inc.
H. McELROY METALS , INC.
Phone 1 - 800-950-6533
J . PAC-CLAD / Petersen Aluminum
Phone 1 -800-272-4482
K. ENGLERT, INC.
Phone 732-826-8614
1 .02 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store panels and materials properly and adequately to protect from damage and entrapped
water.
J
07610- 1
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service, to complete the
miscellaneous metals work and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified
herein or both, except for items specifically indicated as "NOT 11\4 CONTRACT"
(NIC).
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1 . Roof opening framing - (Roof Drains, Roof Curbs, Roof Scuttles, Vent Fans ,
Exhaust Fans) .
2 . Miscellaneous anchors and fastenings.
3 . Piping, RWL, Chilled Water Line (Supports for hangers).
4. Steel & Alum. ladders to Scuttles & Mezzanines.
5 . Miscellaneous Angles .
6 . Louver Door Security Panels .
7 . Safety Nosings .
8 . Masonry Openings for Exhaust Fans .
9. Folding Door Support Framing .
10. Recessed Ceiling Framing Supports.
11 . Shop Coat Painting of All Items.
1 . 03 WORK OF OTHER SECTION
A. Structural Metal Section 05100
B . Painting Section 09900
C . Mechanical Section 15000
1 . 04 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A . This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require submission
by the Contractor tot he Consultant for approval .
05500- 1
SECTION 07610 - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND FASCIA PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys,
hips, ridges , eaves, corners , rakes and miscellaneous flashing and atttaching devices. All
roofing assemblies and accessories shall be manufactured by one of the following:
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-231 - 8127
B . AEICOR Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-432- 1802
C . AEP SPAN
Phone : 1 - 800- 527-2503
D . AMP, Atlanta Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 -800- 554- 1097
E . BUTLER Manufacturing Company
Phone : 1 -816- 968- 2380
F . DELCOA Metal Roofing Manufacturer
Phone : 1 - 800-375 -METAL
G. UNA-CLAD, Copper Sales, Inc.
H. McELROY METALS , INC.
Phone 1 - 800-950-6533
J . PAC-CLAD / Petersen Aluminum
Phone 1 -800-272-4482
K. ENGLERT, INC.
Phone 732-826-8614
1 .02 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store panels and materials properly and adequately to protect from damage and entrapped
water.
J
07610- 1
1 . 03 WARRANTY
Submit a written three (3) year warranty from installer and manufacturer against leaks, �, )
defective workmanship and materials . Submit manufacturer' s written finish warranty that
applies. Shall meet Underwriter' s Laboratory UL90 classification. Provide manufacturer' s
standard twenty (20) year warranty against color change or chalking.
1 .04 REFERENCES
A . S .M .A .C .N .A . (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor' s National
Association).
B . N .R.C .A. (The National Roofing Contractors Association) . Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual, including construction details, and Handbook of Accepted
Roofing Knowledge.
C . Manufacturer' s Construction Details Handbook.
D . ASTM A-653 -97
E. ASTM A-525 - 86
F . ASTM A-792-86
G . ASTM B-209
H . ASTM B -370
J . Aluminum Association.
1 . 05 SUBMITTALS
A . Installing contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings showing layout of panels,
anchoring details, joint details , trim, flashing and accessories . Show details of
weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work.
B . Installing contractor shall submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with
factory finish.
C . Installing contractor shall submit calculations with registered engineer seal , verifying
roof panel and attachment method resists wind pressure imposed on it pursuant to
applicable building codes.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 METAL ROOF AND/OR FASCIA PANELS :
As manufactured by one of the approved Manufacturing Corporations .
NOTE : Match existing panel color and profiles when connecting to existing buildings.
2 . 02 SHEET MATERIALS
A . Panel configuration to be a structural standing seam. Panel widths and seam heights
will vary with project type. Refer to the Construction Drawings for required panel widths `
and seam types. Panel color as specified by the Architect on the construction documents .
07610-2
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Qualifications of Workmen:
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and the
requirements of this work, and who shall direct all work performed under
this Section.
B . Codes and Standards :
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of Building Code
that has jurisdiction and Occupational Safety and Health Act.
2. Where provision of pertinent codes and standards conflict with the
requirements of this Section of these Specifications, the more stringent
provisions shall govern.
j3 . Product Standard PS 1 -83 for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
4. American Concrete Institute Standard recommended practice for concrete
formwork, ACI 347 -latest edition.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Lumber:
I . All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as
allowed for under Re-use of Forms in Part 3 of this Section of the
Specifications. All form lumber shall be one of the following, a
combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Engineer.
a. "Plyform", Class 15/8 " or 3/4" PS 1066, C-D exterior plywood,
bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association.
b. Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four (4)
sides .
2.02 OTHER MATERIALS
03100-1
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the contract
Documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility . \
C . Submit samples, certificate and shop drawings as required or requested by the
Architect/Engineer whether included in this list or not, and as requested on the
drawings .
D . Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, notarized and signed by an officer of the
company and shall state the required information explicitly and specifically. Said
certificates shall bear the Notary' s embossed seal.
1 .05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated items in accordance with Contract Conditions,
plus plan locations .
B . Coordinate roof framing opening supports with Steel Joists Shop Drawings . Submit
steel Joist and Miscellaneous Metal Shop Drawings as prescribed.
1 . 06 QUALITY STANDARDS
Conform to applicable portions of the following :
A . American Institute of Steel Construction (A.I. S .C.)
B . American Welding Society (A .W. S .)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Steel shapes - ASTM A-36
B . Steel pipe -ASTM A-36, galvanized where called for.
C . Bolts - ASTM A- 325 , galvanized for exterior use, and where called for on plans.
D . All exterior steel items to be hot dipped galvanized.
E . Aluminum pipe - ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T6 .
F . Stainless Steel plate, angles and fabricated hangers, 9304 Stainless.
2 . 02 STEEL & ALUMINUM LADDERS
A. Fabricate to size and detail, with welded joints dressed smooth.
B . Erect ladders as indicated, securely fastened to structure .
C . Steel ladders to be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A- 123 -59T.
05500-2
1 . 03 WARRANTY
Submit a written three (3) year warranty from installer and manufacturer against leaks, �, )
defective workmanship and materials . Submit manufacturer' s written finish warranty that
applies. Shall meet Underwriter' s Laboratory UL90 classification. Provide manufacturer' s
standard twenty (20) year warranty against color change or chalking.
1 .04 REFERENCES
A . S .M .A .C .N .A . (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor' s National
Association).
B . N .R.C .A. (The National Roofing Contractors Association) . Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual, including construction details, and Handbook of Accepted
Roofing Knowledge.
C . Manufacturer' s Construction Details Handbook.
D . ASTM A-653 -97
E. ASTM A-525 - 86
F . ASTM A-792-86
G . ASTM B-209
H . ASTM B -370
J . Aluminum Association.
1 . 05 SUBMITTALS
A . Installing contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings showing layout of panels,
anchoring details, joint details , trim, flashing and accessories . Show details of
weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work.
B . Installing contractor shall submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with
factory finish.
C . Installing contractor shall submit calculations with registered engineer seal , verifying
roof panel and attachment method resists wind pressure imposed on it pursuant to
applicable building codes.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 METAL ROOF AND/OR FASCIA PANELS :
As manufactured by one of the approved Manufacturing Corporations .
NOTE : Match existing panel color and profiles when connecting to existing buildings.
2 . 02 SHEET MATERIALS
A . Panel configuration to be a structural standing seam. Panel widths and seam heights
will vary with project type. Refer to the Construction Drawings for required panel widths `
and seam types. Panel color as specified by the Architect on the construction documents .
07610-2
Single lengths, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer' s specifications .
B . Panels shall be one of the following types as called out on the Construction
Documents .
1 . Steel shall be ASTM A653 - 97 Grade C, G90, Coating ASTM 525 - 86 Hot
Dipped Galvanized, 24 gauge galvalume ASTM A- 792- 86 . Maximum panel
length is 65 '.
2 . Aluminum shall be ASTM B-209 in . 032 inch or . 040 inch thickness with an
H- 14 temper.
3 . Copper shall be ASTM B-370 colled rolled in 16 or 20 ounce.
2. 03 FASTENING
Fastening is to be installed at spacings per manufacturer' s specifications at perimeters and
field. Fasteners shall be stainless and shall be a minimum of # 8 wafer head type screws
comparable with the material being used, concealed at all times. If and exposed fastener
must be used, it can only be a 444 pop rivet of the same material (or compatable) and
finish as the roof panels.
2 . 04 FLASHINGS
Flashings are to be of the same gauge, material and finish.
2 . 05 ACCESSORIES
All accessories must be of compatible materials to the metal panels .
2 . 06 FINISH
Finish shall be Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating applied on the
Manufacturer' s Coil Coating Line with a top side film thickness of 0.70 to 0. 90 mil over
0.25 to 0. 31 mil prime coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 0 . 95 to 1 .25 mil .
Bottom side shall be coated with a primer with a dry film thickness of 0 .25 mil . Finish
shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by Kynar 500
or Hylar 5000 finish supplier.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 Install metal roof/fascia systems per the manufacturer ' s specifications.
i
07610-3
2 .03 LOUVER DOOR SECURITY PANELS
A. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors, wire mesh security panels.
1 . Wire Mesh : 10 gauge steel wire woven into 1 " diamond mesh securely clinched
to frames .
2 . Frames : 3/4" cold rolled channels drilled at 6 " o.c. through both flanges to
receive # 10 self tapping non-corrosive machine screws with tamper proof
heads.
3 . Mesh and frames to be hot dipped galvanized material.
4 . Apply panels to exterior face on doors with non-removable head screws.
Completely cover louvers .
2 . 04 FASTENERS
A. General : Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-coated fasteners
where built into exterior walls where fasteners are not exposed . Select fasteners for
the type, grade and class required .
`• B . Bolts and Nuts : Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307 , Grade A.
C . Lae Bolts : Square head type, FS FF-B- 561 .
D . Machine Screws : Cadmium plated steel, FS FF- S-92
E . Wood Screws : Flat head carbon steel, FS FF- S - 111 .
F. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92 .
G . Masom Anchorage Devices - Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325 .
H. Toggle Bolts : Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588 , type, class and style as required.
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84 .
2 .05 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Fabricate bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels
and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork, and for anchoring securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Provide straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items as specified on the
drawings .
05500-3
� )
-�
C
Single lengths, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer' s specifications .
B . Panels shall be one of the following types as called out on the Construction
Documents .
1 . Steel shall be ASTM A653 - 97 Grade C, G90, Coating ASTM 525 - 86 Hot
Dipped Galvanized, 24 gauge galvalume ASTM A- 792- 86 . Maximum panel
length is 65 '.
2 . Aluminum shall be ASTM B-209 in . 032 inch or . 040 inch thickness with an
H- 14 temper.
3 . Copper shall be ASTM B-370 colled rolled in 16 or 20 ounce.
2. 03 FASTENING
Fastening is to be installed at spacings per manufacturer' s specifications at perimeters and
field. Fasteners shall be stainless and shall be a minimum of # 8 wafer head type screws
comparable with the material being used, concealed at all times. If and exposed fastener
must be used, it can only be a 444 pop rivet of the same material (or compatable) and
finish as the roof panels.
2 . 04 FLASHINGS
Flashings are to be of the same gauge, material and finish.
2 . 05 ACCESSORIES
All accessories must be of compatible materials to the metal panels .
2 . 06 FINISH
Finish shall be Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating applied on the
Manufacturer' s Coil Coating Line with a top side film thickness of 0.70 to 0. 90 mil over
0.25 to 0. 31 mil prime coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 0 . 95 to 1 .25 mil .
Bottom side shall be coated with a primer with a dry film thickness of 0 .25 mil . Finish
shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by Kynar 500
or Hylar 5000 finish supplier.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 Install metal roof/fascia systems per the manufacturer ' s specifications.
i
07610-3
3 .02 Installers shall be a certified installer, certified by the manufacturer of the respective
roofing/fascia systems . Written proof of certification shall be provided to the Architect ( \
prior to installation.
3 .03 Upon completion of the metal roof/fascia system installation, an inspection will be made
by a roofing/fascia system representative . Corrections to the installation of the
roofing/fascia system, as deemed necessary by the roofing/fascia system representative,
will be made at no additional cost to the Owner in order that the Warranty may be issued.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
07610 -4
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of
concrete formwork, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance
approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection and Soil Treatment:
1 . Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all
other trades and verify that all such work is completed to the point where
this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all pertinent codes
and regulations, the referenced standards, and the original design.
3 . Treat underlying soil to prevent vegetation growth and insect infestation .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of mortar, and able to withstand pressures without excessive
deflection when filled with wet concrete.
B . Embedded Items :
1 . Set all required steel frames, angles, grilles, bolts, inserts, and other such
items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed.
C. Bracing:
1 . Properly brace and fie the forms together so as to maintain position and
shape and to ensure safety to personnel.
2 . Construct all bracing and supporting members of amply size and strength to
safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which
they may be subjected.
3 . Space the forms the proper distance apart and securely tie them together,
using metal spreader ties that provide positive tying and accurate spreading.
03100-2
B . Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required . Furnish
malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections;
elsewhere, furnish steel washers .
2 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS
A . Fabricate all steel headers, angles, channels, ladders, steel shapes, inserts , anchors,
brackets, support framing, as indicated and/or detailed on plans.
2 . 07 SHOP COAT PAINT
A . Apply shop coat paint to all ferrous metal.
B . Apply shop touch-up coat paint to all galvanized metals .
C . Aluminum products to be mill finish unless called out otherwise on the drawings.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
05500-4
3 .02 Installers shall be a certified installer, certified by the manufacturer of the respective
roofing/fascia systems . Written proof of certification shall be provided to the Architect ( \
prior to installation.
3 .03 Upon completion of the metal roof/fascia system installation, an inspection will be made
by a roofing/fascia system representative . Corrections to the installation of the
roofing/fascia system, as deemed necessary by the roofing/fascia system representative,
will be made at no additional cost to the Owner in order that the Warranty may be issued.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
07610 -4
SECTION 07710 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. The gutter and downspout system shall be an Industrial Series as manufactured by
Southern Aluminum Finishing Company or an approved equal .
B . Furnish and install a perimeter gutter and downspout system as located on the
drawings . The size shall be as per the details on the drawings. The gutter and
downspouts shall be manufactured of aluminum, .040 thickness .
Colors : Metal Buildings Match Wall Panel Color E. S .P . finish.
Stucco Buildings Match Wall Paint Color Acrylic Latex
Giitteru Shall be tapered and iIOtched to provide a i " teieSCop3iag lapjoir'it. Gutters
shall be pre-punched at 12 " on center to provide for thermal movement.
D . Provide manufacturer ' s support brackets and interior straps . Brackets shall be a
compatible material to gutter with matching finish and color.
2 .01 INSTALLATION -
A . Support Bracket Installation :
Install support brackets at 30 " on center to allow a maximum 1 /8 " slope per 40 feet
of gutter. Attach brackets with 2 " x 410 stainless wood screws.
B . Gutter Installation :
Install gutter from left to right (roofside into support brackets . Lap each telescoping
section a distance of 1 " seal and rivet at 2 " on center. Nail or screw rear of gutter
with 1 - 1 /2 " stainless fasteners.
C . Inside Strap Installation:
Install straps at 30 " on center alternating with support brackets. Strap shall be
hooked into leading edge of gutter and riveted at its rear side. Strap must not be
fastened in a way that might restrain thermal movement.
D . Expansion Joints :
Install manufacturer' s standard elastomeric expansion joint assembly, at 40'-0 "
intervals.
E. Miter Comers : Install manufacturer' s welded miters at comers .
F. End Caps/Terminations :
Install manufacturer' s end caps at all end terminations.
- , G. Outlets :
Field cut outlet hole in a neat workmanlike manner. Hole shall be located 1 " from
backside of gutter.
07710-1
SECTION 06076 - PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
(PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD)
PART 1 GENERAL
Installer Note: Osmose Advance Guard Borate PTW, when treated to a .42 DOT retention, is highly
effective in resisting decay, subterranean termites, dry wood termites, Formosan termites, carpenter
ants, wood-boring beetles and many other insects . Advance Guard PTW is noncorrosive, easy to
handle and workable with common tools. It is available for aboveground , weather protected
applications where insect and decay resistant construction materials are recommended. Advance
Guard PTW is intended to be used for framing and applications where the wood is not in direct
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water during its service life .
Normal exposure to weather during ordinary construction will not adversely affect the treatment in
the product. Advance Guard PTW is not recommended for use in decks or other outdoor structures
exposed to weathering.
1 . 01 SUMMARY
A . Section Includes : Insect and decay protection treatment for wood products specified in
other Division 6 sections, including:
1 . Sill plates in contact with masonry.
2 . Wood blocking and furring in contact with masonry .
B . Related Sections : Section(s) related to this section include :
1 . Rough Carpentry: Section 06100
2 . Finish Carpentry : Section 06200
3 . Fabricated Wood Trusses : Section 06192
1 . 02 REFERENCES
A. General : Standards listed by reference; including revisions by issuing authority, form a part
of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing
authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by
issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing
authority abbreviation and standard designation.
B . Advance Guard PTW does not need to meet American Wood-Preservers' Association
(AWPA) standards but it does nonetheless meet:
1 . AWPA C9 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Treatment .
2. AWPA C31 Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously
Protected from Liquid Water — Treatment by Pressure Processes.
3 . AWPA P5 Standard for Waterbome Preservatives.
C . National Evaluation Services, Inc. (NES).
1 . National Evaluation Report (NER) : Report No. NER-648 .
�l
06076-1
( �
��
C
SECTION 07710 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. The gutter and downspout system shall be an Industrial Series as manufactured by
Southern Aluminum Finishing Company or an approved equal .
B . Furnish and install a perimeter gutter and downspout system as located on the
drawings . The size shall be as per the details on the drawings. The gutter and
downspouts shall be manufactured of aluminum, .040 thickness .
Colors : Metal Buildings Match Wall Panel Color E. S .P . finish.
Stucco Buildings Match Wall Paint Color Acrylic Latex
Giitteru Shall be tapered and iIOtched to provide a i " teieSCop3iag lapjoir'it. Gutters
shall be pre-punched at 12 " on center to provide for thermal movement.
D . Provide manufacturer ' s support brackets and interior straps . Brackets shall be a
compatible material to gutter with matching finish and color.
2 .01 INSTALLATION -
A . Support Bracket Installation :
Install support brackets at 30 " on center to allow a maximum 1 /8 " slope per 40 feet
of gutter. Attach brackets with 2 " x 410 stainless wood screws.
B . Gutter Installation :
Install gutter from left to right (roofside into support brackets . Lap each telescoping
section a distance of 1 " seal and rivet at 2 " on center. Nail or screw rear of gutter
with 1 - 1 /2 " stainless fasteners.
C . Inside Strap Installation:
Install straps at 30 " on center alternating with support brackets. Strap shall be
hooked into leading edge of gutter and riveted at its rear side. Strap must not be
fastened in a way that might restrain thermal movement.
D . Expansion Joints :
Install manufacturer' s standard elastomeric expansion joint assembly, at 40'-0 "
intervals.
E. Miter Comers : Install manufacturer' s welded miters at comers .
F. End Caps/Terminations :
Install manufacturer' s end caps at all end terminations.
- , G. Outlets :
Field cut outlet hole in a neat workmanlike manner. Hole shall be located 1 " from
backside of gutter.
07710-1
H . Downspouts :
Install downspouts at centers/locations per the drawings and building elevations. 1
Utilize extruded or formed-closed type downspouts with thickness and finish as )
listed in this specification. Utilize the manufacturer' s connecting sleeves at all
joints .
1 . When a surface water shed collection system is called for on the
drawings, provide kick-out elbows at the termination base of each
downspout at 45 or 75 degrees and provide concrete splash blocks at
each downspout to control erosion.
2 . When a subgrade water collection system is called for on the drawings ,
provide a direct tie-in to the underground roof drainage and collection
system .
J . Wall Brackets :
Install manufacturer' s wall brackets on downspouts at a maximum spacing of 5' .
Secure to stucco with 1 . 5 " stainless expansion fasteners . Fasten downspouts with
(4) 1 /811 x 3/8 " pop-rivets per bracket .
K . Outlet Tubes :
Provide stainless steel outlet tubes at connections of gutters to downspouts with '/2"
flanges riveted in place with (4) 1 /8 " x 1 /4 " pop rivets. Hold downspouts 1 " off of
the wall .
* * *END OF SECTION '
07710-2
3 .03 RE-USE OF FORMS
A. General:
1 . Re-use of forms shall be subject to advance written approval of the
Structural Engineer or his designer.
B . Requirements :
1 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule of placement of
concrete from the schedule obtainable if all form were new.
2 . Except as specifically approved in advance by the Structural Engineer, re-
use of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms no
less acceptable appearance to finished exposed concrete.
3 . 04 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. General :
1 . Minimum periods to form removal after concrete placement shall be as
follows :
JSlabs and curbs 24 hours
Vertical walls (4'-0 " Ht.) 36 hours
Vertical walls (over 4'-0" Ht.) 7 days
2 . Removal of formwork may be extended if deemed necessary by the
Structural Engineer.
B . Removal :
1 . Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping
off inside the wall surface and point up and rubbing the resulting pockets to
match the surrounding areas.
2 . Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader rods and sleeve nuts, using
water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement
grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one
( 1 ) part Portland cement and two and one-half (2- 1 /2) parts sand; apply
grout immediately after removing forms .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
03100-3
1 . 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements : Provide borate wood preservative treatment which will
perform in accordance with manufacturer' s stated performance criteria without defects,
damage or failure.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. General : Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B . Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer' s SPEC-DATATM product
sheet, for specified products .
C . Quality Assurance Submittals : Submit the following :
1 . Test Reports : Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties .
2 . Evaluation Report: NER-648
3 . Certificates : Certification from treating plant certifying wood treatment applied
complies with the criteria and physical requirements for borate preservative treated
wood products as specified herein.
4 . Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Source Quality : Obtain borate preservative treated wood products from a single approved
source .
B . Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications : Wood treatment plant experienced in performing
work of this section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that required for
this project, licensed by the manufacturer.
C . Independent third party inspection.
D . Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT), if required.
E . Regulatory Requirements: Provide borate preservative treatment that complies with local
regulatory requirements .
1 . FBC 2001 requirements for insect and decay preservative treated wood .
F . Quality Mark: All borate preservative treated wood members shall bear a permanent ink
stamp indicating the following:
1 . Manufacturer' s name .
2. Treatment plant name.
3 . Quality mark of an AWPA approved independent inspection agency.
4 . Symbol "SBX" (sodium borate), preservative retention level and date of treatment .
5 . AWPA treatment standard, wood species and the words "Above Ground and
Continuously Protected from Liquid Water. "
06076-2
H . Downspouts :
Install downspouts at centers/locations per the drawings and building elevations. 1
Utilize extruded or formed-closed type downspouts with thickness and finish as )
listed in this specification. Utilize the manufacturer' s connecting sleeves at all
joints .
1 . When a surface water shed collection system is called for on the
drawings, provide kick-out elbows at the termination base of each
downspout at 45 or 75 degrees and provide concrete splash blocks at
each downspout to control erosion.
2 . When a subgrade water collection system is called for on the drawings ,
provide a direct tie-in to the underground roof drainage and collection
system .
J . Wall Brackets :
Install manufacturer' s wall brackets on downspouts at a maximum spacing of 5' .
Secure to stucco with 1 . 5 " stainless expansion fasteners . Fasten downspouts with
(4) 1 /811 x 3/8 " pop-rivets per bracket .
K . Outlet Tubes :
Provide stainless steel outlet tubes at connections of gutters to downspouts with '/2"
flanges riveted in place with (4) 1 /8 " x 1 /4 " pop rivets. Hold downspouts 1 " off of
the wall .
* * *END OF SECTION '
07710-2
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes jomt -sealants for tite following applications, including those specified by reference
to this Section: following applications :
1 . Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces :
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry concrete walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and
elevator entrances.
f Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated .
2 . Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
b. Other joints as indicated .
B . Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing' for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall' for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to
reduce sound transmission.
3 . Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile Work" for sealing tile joints.
4. Division 9 Section "Lay-in Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical
ceilings.
1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomerici.oint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
07900 - 1
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General : Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B . Exposure : Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage or installation. Store
material off ground and under cover. Allow materials exposed to incidental moisture to dry
thoroughly prior to covering with vapor or moisture retarding finish materials.
1 .07 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty : Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions .
Osmose, Inc. , offers a 20 year limited warranty against structural damage due to termites,
carpenter ants and fungal decay under the Advance Guard Residential Limited Warranty
when treated to .42 DOT retention. Consult manufacturer for complete details .
B . Manufacturer' s Warranty: Submit, for Owner' s acceptance, manufacturer' s standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official . Manufacturer' s warranty is in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents .
1 . Warranty Period : Twenty (20) years .
PART2PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BORATE PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer: Osmose, Inc . - Wood Preserving Division .
1 . Contact : PO Drawer O, 1016 Everee Inn Road, Griffin, GA 30224-0249 ; _
Telephone : (800) 241 -0240, (770) 233 -4200 ;
Fax : (770) 229-5225 ; E-mail : treatedwoodVosmose. com ; Web site :
wW1A7.0sm0se .com, Na��rNv. timberspecialties .com .
Note : Advance Guard borate preservative treated wood products are intended for ,
aboveground, weather protected applications only. They are not to be used in areas subject to
precipitation, wetting, dampness or condensation. Advance Guard wood products must be
typically kiln dried after treatment (KDAT) to a maximum moisture content of 19% for
lumber and 18 % for plywood. Wood treated with Advance Guard ' s EPA registered Tim-bor®
Industrial Wood Preservative is easy to work with common tools . The product is colorless and
nonblooming. It will not darken or discolor most woods .
B . Proprietary Product(s)/System(s) : Advance Guard Preservative treated wood Products.
C . Borate Preservative Treatment : Disodium octoborate tetrahydrate (DOT) treatment for
insect and decay protective pressure treatment of wood as produced by manufacturer' s
licensed treatment plants, producing material meeting the following minimum standards :
1 . Preservative Treatment Standard: AWPA P5 .
2 . Structural Lumber Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA C31 .
3 . Plywood Treatment Standard : Comply with AWPA C9 .
4. Treatment Level : Provide borate preservative treatment retention level
06076-3
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes jomt -sealants for tite following applications, including those specified by reference
to this Section: following applications :
1 . Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces :
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry concrete walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and
elevator entrances.
f Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated .
2 . Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
b. Other joints as indicated .
B . Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing' for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall' for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to
reduce sound transmission.
3 . Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile Work" for sealing tile joints.
4. Division 9 Section "Lay-in Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical
ceilings.
1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomerici.oint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
07900 - 1
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B . Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing
the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.
E. SWRJ Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant
Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in
optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in " Quality Assurance"
Article.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application .
I. Product Test Reports : Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements .
J . Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation
of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding
the Notice to Proceed with commencement of the Work.
I . Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 .
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3 . Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance
with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods .
07900 - 2
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workmen
1 . Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during
execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar
with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their
installation and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.
B . Codes and Standards
1 . Comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the Building Code
that has jurisdiction.
2 . Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this
Specification, the more stringent provisions shall govern.
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
1 A . Shop Drawings
1 . Within thirty-five (35) days after award of Contract, and before any concrete
reinforcement materials are fabricated and/or delivered to the job site,
submit Shop Drawings to the Architect.
2 . Do not fabricate and/or deliver concrete reinforcement to the job site until
receipt of Shop Drawings approval from the Architect.
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection
1 . Use all means necessary to protect concrete reinforcement before, during,
and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all
other trades .
2 . Store in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt, grease,
and other bond-breaking coatings.
B. Placements
In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the
Owner.
03200-1
recommended by manufacturer to provide the following minimum protection, as
indicated on wood product quality stamp specified in Quality Assurance article : .42
DOT retention if warranty is required or expected. `
a . Protection against North American subterranean termites, decay and insects , J
and Formosan termites : 0 .42 pcf (6 . 7 kg/m 3 ) DOT retention (0 .28 pcf (4 . 5
kg/m 3 ) B203) minimum retention (required for warranty) .
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions : No substitutions permitted .
2 .03 RELATED MATERIALS
Note : Wood species qualifying under Advance Guard warranties include a variety of
softwood lumber and plywood. Approved softwood lumber types are Douglas fir, hem-fir,
Southern pine and spruce-pine-fir . Approved plywood types are: Southern yellow pine and
Douglas fir.
A. Wood Materials : Refer to Division 6 Sections for related wood materials required to be
treated as specified herein.
B . Field Applied End Coat : Preservative solution approved by preservative treated wood
manufacturer for application:
1 . Osmose, Inc . , Tim-bor disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT), 10% solution.
2 . Copper Naphthenate, 2% solution, copper metal basis.
3 . Other preservative approved by Advance Guard manufacturer. f
2 . 04 SOURCE QUALITY
A . Tests, Inspections : Do not conceal applied treated material with subsequent trades work
until the Architect has approved the installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer' s product data, including product literature,
technical bulletins, product wraps and labels and product catalog installation instructions for
installation.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Select borate preservative treated wood members in accordance with appropriate untreated
lumber and plywood span tables . Provide ventilation of building cavities as required by code.
B . Install borate preservative treated wood in accordance with requirements of applicable
codes and related Division 6 sections . Avoid milling operations that could adversely affect
preservative characteristics of borate preservative treated wood.
06076-4
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B . Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing
the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.
E. SWRJ Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant
Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in
optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in " Quality Assurance"
Article.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application .
I. Product Test Reports : Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements .
J . Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation
of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding
the Notice to Proceed with commencement of the Work.
I . Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 .
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3 . Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance
with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods .
07900 - 2
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion
to Projectjoint substrates as follows:
1 . Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when testjoints will be erected.
4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to jo nt substrates
or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint
substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
5 . Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates dwing testing.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A . Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions :
1 . When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by,joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3 . Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated .
4 . Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1 . Warranty Period: two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants
from the following:
1 . Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or
errors attributable to design or construction.
2 . Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3 . Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
07900 - 3
C . End Cut Treatment : Treat end cuts of borate preservative treated wood members over 2
inches (51 mm) in thickness with field applied end coat prior to installation for Spruce-Pine-
Fir (SPF) and Douglas Fir (DF) only.
D. Sill Plate: Where applicable, provide sill plate of Borate preservative treated wood or CCA
pressure treated wood.
E. Install using fasteners required by applicable code for use with untreated lumber and
plywood.
3 . 03 FINISHING
A . For painting or staining of Advance Guard PTW, a light sanding or brushing is all that is
necessary to ensure proper coating adhesion . Complete application recommendations are
available from the manufacturer. Avoid frequent or prolonged inhalation of sawdust from
treated wood. When sawing and machining treated wood, wear a dust mask. When power
sawing or machining, wear goggles to protect eyes from flying particles . Surfaces must be
clean and dry before application.
B . Prepare borate preservative treated wood for application of finishes in accordance with
manufacturer' s recommendations . Sand surfaces lightly, clean and check for moisture prior
to finishing.
C . Apply paint or stain in accordance with Section 09900"Painting. "
3 . 04 PROTECTION
A . Protection : Protect borate preservative treated wood from damage during construction .
Protect from moisture prior to installation of finishes.
"END OF SECTION * * *
'i
06076-5
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 4'
A . All concrete reinforcement materials shall be new, free from rust, and complying
with the following reference standards unless otherwise specified on the drawings .
I , Bars for reinforcement: "Specifications for Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement", ASTM A-615 , latest editions, Grade 60 .
2 . Wire for reinforcement: " Specifications for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement" , ASTM A- 82 .
3 . Wire fabric: "Specifications for Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" ,
ASTM A- 185 , latest edition.
2 . 02 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation of concrete reinforcement, shall be as selected by the Contractor
subject to the approval of the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A . Inspection
I . Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the
installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to
the point where this installation may properly commence.
2 . Verify that concrete reinforcement may be installed in strict accordance with
all pertinent codes and regulations, the approved Shop Drawings, and the
original design.
B . Discrepancies
I . In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
2 . Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.
( 03200-2
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion
to Projectjoint substrates as follows:
1 . Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when testjoints will be erected.
4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to jo nt substrates
or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint
substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
5 . Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates dwing testing.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A . Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions :
1 . When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by,joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3 . Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated .
4 . Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1 . Warranty Period: two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants
from the following:
1 . Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or
errors attributable to design or construction.
2 . Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3 . Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
07900 - 3
PART2 - PRODUCTS �` \
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
2 .3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
type, grade, class, and uses related toexposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177 .2600.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant:
1 . Available Products:
a. Pacific Polymers, Inc. ; Elastosea1230 Type I (Gun Grade).
b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-7000.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3 . Class: 25 .
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
B . Available Products:
1 . Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
2 . Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc. ; Sonolac.
3 . Tremco; Tremflex 834 .
07900 - 4
3 . 02 BENDING
A. General
1 . Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the approved Shop
Drawings and ASTM A-615 .
2 . Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings or on the
approved Shop Drawings.
3 . Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material.
3 .03 PLACING
A. General
1 . Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete
reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by means of approved
metal chairs, spacers, and metal hangers.
B . Clearance
1 . Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half ( 1 - 1 /2)
times the nominal diameter of round bars.
2 . Provide minimum concrete covering of reinforcement as shown or noted on
the Drawings .
3 . 04 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT
A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust
scale loose mill scale, oil paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce
the bond between steel and concrete .
PART 4 - ITEM OF PAYMENT
No separate Payment shall be made for work specified in this Section. Payment for work
specified in this Section shall be included in Payment made for other Sections .
'END OF SECTION* * *
i
03200-3
l �
`�_J
i
\.
PART2 - PRODUCTS �` \
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
2 .3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
type, grade, class, and uses related toexposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177 .2600.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant:
1 . Available Products:
a. Pacific Polymers, Inc. ; Elastosea1230 Type I (Gun Grade).
b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-7000.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3 . Class: 25 .
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
B . Available Products:
1 . Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
2 . Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc. ; Sonolac.
3 . Tremco; Tremflex 834 .
07900 - 4
2 .5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
_ A . Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed
joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1 . Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2 .6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance. Backing rods used in combination with silicone sealants shall be soft rod "open cell" to
prevent off-grassing bubbles in the cured surface. All other backing rods shall be "closed cell".
C . Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. When proposing paintable silicones using acrylic latex paints make special consideration that these
products must be painted within seven days of placement of sealants. Refer to manufacturer' s literature
for proper sequence of applications.
2 .7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to
joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to j oints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 EXAMINATION
07900 - 5
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated . Types of
work in this section include, but are not limited to, rough carpentry for:
1 . Nailers & dead wood
2 . Cant strip
3 . Wood roof curb supports
4 . Door frame bracing
5 . Chalk, tack board, backing
6 . Casework backing
7 . Plumbing backing - (Supports)
8 . Projection screen backing
9 . Window stripping
10. Recessed clock/speakers (framed opening)
11 . Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets (framed opening) RWL - Access: to clean
out.
12 . Toilet partition backing
13 . Recessed electrical panels backing
14 . Mirror backing
15 . Acoustical backing
16 . Ceiling trim backing
B . Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood treatment Data• Submit treatment manufacturer' s instructions for proper use of
each type of treated material .
B . Pressure Treatment: For each type of specified, include certification by treating plant
stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and
conformance with applicable standards.
06100- 1
2 .5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
_ A . Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed
joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1 . Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2 .6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance. Backing rods used in combination with silicone sealants shall be soft rod "open cell" to
prevent off-grassing bubbles in the cured surface. All other backing rods shall be "closed cell".
C . Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. When proposing paintable silicones using acrylic latex paints make special consideration that these
products must be painted within seven days of placement of sealants. Refer to manufacturer' s literature
for proper sequence of applications.
2 .7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to
joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to j oints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 EXAMINATION
07900 - 5
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant )
performance.
B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected .
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements :
1 . Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations
above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates
include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3 . Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4 . Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion ofjoint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates
include the following:
a . Metal .
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not
allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
07900 - 6
SECTION 03300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Formwork Section 03100
B . Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
C . Unit Masonry Section 04200
D . Underslab Vapor Retarder Section 07160
E . Metal Building Systems Section 13122
F . Plumbing Section 15000
G . Electrical Section 16000
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . C-31 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field
2 . C-33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
3 . C-39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
1
4. C-42 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
5 . C-94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete
6. C- 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland- Cement Concrete
7. C- 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
8. C- 172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
B . ACI standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI-318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
2. Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI-301 (Latest Editions),
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, except as modified by the
supplemental requirements herein.
3 . ACI 318 Detailing Standards .
4. ACI 315 Specifications for structural Concrete for Buildings
5 . CRSI 347R Recommended Practice for Placing reinforcing bars .
}
03300- 1
C . For water-borne preservatives, include statement, that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to a maximum of 15 % prior to shipment to project site.
D . Fire-retardant treatment: Include certification by treatment plant that treatment material
complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished
surfaces .
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
Delivery and Storage : Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air
circulation within stacks .
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for an accurate
fit . Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
proper attachment of other work.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A . Lumber Standards : Comply with PS 20 . `
B . Plywood Standards : Comply with PS 1 . /
C . Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or
without finish .
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions . Provided actual
sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Provide
dressed lumber, S4S , unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 10%
maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B . Framing Lumber: (2" through 4" thick)
C . For light framing (less than 6" wide) , provide the following grade and species :
Construction grades, any species .
06100 -2
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant )
performance.
B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected .
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements :
1 . Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations
above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates
include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3 . Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4 . Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion ofjoint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates
include the following:
a . Metal .
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not
allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
07900 - 6
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard : Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings .
3 . Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
of j oints.
F. Install sealants us ng proven tech^.iques hat comply wif the 'UIlow ug and at t he Barite lime backings are
installed:
1 . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates .
2- Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3 . - Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants : Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to elirninate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1 1 . Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints .
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do - not discolor -
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3 . Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4 . Provide flushjoint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193 .
5 . Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in
ASTM C 1193 .
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooledjoints .
IT Install sealants to size and shape shown on drawings, or, if not shown, with slightly concave surfaces .
a. The minimum opening should be 1 /4 ".
b. The opening should be at least 4 times the maximum movement of the sealant.
c. The sealant should be more than 1 /4 " and less than 1/2" deep.
d. The depth of the sealant should be no greater than the width.
e. No joint to receive sealant should be less than 1/4" deep.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows :
I . Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows :
07900 - 7
D . Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work
including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members . Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and
as follows .
Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
E. Grade : Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size
lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No . 2
boards (SPIB or WWPA) .
F. Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed in finished work supply the following :
1 . Where painted finish is indicated, provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade
A face exposed and Grade C concealed, for exterior use; and provide A-D/INT-
APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior
use.
2. Concealed Plywood : Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide
C-D Plugged/INT-APA .
3 . For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide 3/4 " fire-
l
retardant treated plywood with exterior glue .
1 2. 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners and Anchorages Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as
recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal`
Specifications ' for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices .
Provide metal hangers and frazrting anchors of the size and type recommended by the
manufacturer for each use including recommended nails .
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide stainless steel fasteners.
Interior work shall utilize hot dipped galvanized.
B . Building Pa ear Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 154 or 30 #, ASTM D226 .
2 .04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment : Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd", "P .T. "
or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements
of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPA standards listed
below. Mark each treated items with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements .
06100-3
1 .03 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A . All tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM recommendations referred to herein. )
B . Tests shall be performed by an independent laboratory approved by the Architect.
C . Contractor will pay for testing, including tests which indicated failure; in which case
that test and all costs incurred as a result thereof, shall be paid for by the Contractor.
D . Standard slump tests shall be taken of the concrete sample for each strength test and
whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. The maximum slump of concrete
shall be 4 " plus/minus 111
, unless specifically otherwise noted.
E . Concrete that fails by test shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
F . Test for strength shall be made as follows :
1 . Slump Test : One test for each load of concrete at the point of discharge taken
out of a wheelbarrow and not out of the chute. Maximum slump measurements
as stated above .
2 . Compressive Strength Test : Randomly test cylinders taken at each major pour;
footings , floor slabs, columns and tie-beams . Two (2) specimens are to be tested /r
( at 7 days and two (2) specimens tested at 28 days. Hold one cylinder for firture \
use if test does not comply at 28 days .
3 . All test results are to be reported , in writing, to the Owner, and the Architect.
Test results should stipulate the day the tests were performed .
4 . Samples for testing shall be taken at 1 /4 and 3 /4 points of the load discharged
from the mixer.
5 . If necessary, comply with Architect or Engineer' s request for additional
cylinders, slump or load test .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Cement shall be Portland cement, ASTM CA 50 .
B . Aggregates for normal weight concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-33 .
C . Mixing water for concrete shall be potable and meet the requirements of ASTM C-94 .
r
03300 -2
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard : Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings .
3 . Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
of j oints.
F. Install sealants us ng proven tech^.iques hat comply wif the 'UIlow ug and at t he Barite lime backings are
installed:
1 . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates .
2- Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3 . - Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants : Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to elirninate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1 1 . Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints .
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do - not discolor -
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3 . Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4 . Provide flushjoint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193 .
5 . Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in
ASTM C 1193 .
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooledjoints .
IT Install sealants to size and shape shown on drawings, or, if not shown, with slightly concave surfaces .
a. The minimum opening should be 1 /4 ".
b. The opening should be at least 4 times the maximum movement of the sealant.
c. The sealant should be more than 1 /4 " and less than 1/2" deep.
d. The depth of the sealant should be no greater than the width.
e. No joint to receive sealant should be less than 1/4" deep.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows :
I . Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows :
07900 - 7
a. Perform 10 tests for the fust 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant andjoint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2 . Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull
Tab in Appendix XI in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application
indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by
extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side . Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
3 . Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with
specified requirements . Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4 . Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements .
S . Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names
of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion
results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration; and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used
originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant
contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results : Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance
with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements . Retest failed applications until test
results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3 .5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
* * * END OF SECTION
07900 - 8
2 . 02 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchor slots, reglets and inserts of type, size and spacing required by trades involved,
and shown on plans.
B . Vapor Barrier: 6 mil Polyethylene Film, such as "visqueen". Refer to the Building
Plan Sections for specific applications .
C . Vapor Retarder: 10 mil vapor retarder such as Perminator by WJ Meadows. Refer to
the Building Plan Sections for specific applications.
D . Chemical Curing Compound: Application of a curing compound shall be made to all
slabs and such application shall conform to ASTM C-309 . The compound shall be
applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after
any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete
surface. It shall not be used on any surface against which additional concrete or other
material is to be bonded unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent
bond, or unless positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to
receive bonded applications.
Acceptable materials shall be one of the following :
1 . Burke Company Aqua resin Cure
2 . Sika Corporation Sikagard Cure/Hard
3 . Sonneborn Hydrocide
E . Expansion Joint Water Stops: Continuous, pre-formed, finned, center bulb type,
polyvinyl chloride, of sufficient width to provide 3 " minimum embedment in concrete
each side. Equal to Greenstreak #703 .
F. Pre-molded Joint Filler : Bituminous Fiber Type, ASTM D- 1751 -83 and D 545 - 77 equal
to "Celotex Flexcell" of thickness and width indicated or required .
G . Reinforcement shall be cleaned of all scale and excessive rust. All reinforcement shall
be set with the standard accessories as per ACI 315 -74 . Minimum coverage of
reinforcement shall be as follows :
a, Footings — 3 " minimum.
b. Slabs - 3/4' minimum.
C. Beams and Columns — 1 - 1 /2" minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A. Concrete Mix :
1 . All cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed and in accordance with ASTM
_ Specifications C-94 (Latest Edition) .
S
J
03300-3
B . Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15 . Treat
indicated items and the following :
Wood cants, nailers, cures, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and water proofing. Wood sills, sleepers ,
blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
C . Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where "FR-S " lumber or plywood is specified or otherwise
indicated, provide materials which comply with AWPA standards for pressure
impregnations with fire-retardant chemicals, and which have a flame spread rating of
not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84 , and
show no increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon
continuation of test for an additional 20 minutes .
Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19%.
Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant lumber or plywood .
D . Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A . Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units
which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B . Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and
true and accurately cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and
as required by recognized standards . Countersink nail head on exposed carpentry work
and fill holes .
D . Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.
06100-4
a. Perform 10 tests for the fust 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant andjoint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2 . Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull
Tab in Appendix XI in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application
indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by
extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side . Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
3 . Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with
specified requirements . Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4 . Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements .
S . Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names
of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion
results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration; and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used
originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant
contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results : Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance
with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements . Retest failed applications until test
results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3 .5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
* * * END OF SECTION
07900 - 8
DIVISION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Wood Doors
B . Finish Hardware Section 08200
Section 08700
C . Painting
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
Hollow Metal Work shall be manufactured by one of the following or equal :
A . Ceco Corporation
B . Steelcraft
C. Firedoor Corporation of Florida
D. Quality Engineered Products Co . , Inc. , Tampa, FL
E. Republic Steel Doors & Frames, Pembroke Park, FL
F. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
G. Curries
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS - SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Contract Conditions, covering each type
of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented
by suitable schedules covering doors and frames.
B . Show glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors .
1 .04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Delivery:
Deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers or wrappings
clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and brand designation, door schedule
number, referenced specification number, type, class and rating as applicable.
B. Storage:
Store products in an approved dry area; protected from contact with soil and from
exposure to the elements. Keep products dry at all times.
C . Handling:
' Handle products in a manner that will prevent breakage and damage to products .
J
08100-1
3 . 02 WOOD GROUNDS NAILERS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS
A . Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to
be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B . Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C . Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1 'h " wide and thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3 . 03 WOOD FURRING (WD-FUR)
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges of openings . Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finished work.
B . Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 "x3 " furring'
at 2 'o .c. , horizontally and vertically. Structural framing to receive furring will dictate
the spacing, size and type of furring. Refer to drawings and details .
3 . 04 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL (WD-FRM)
A . Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as
shown, or if not show, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing''
of National Forest Productions Association . Do not splice structural members between
supports.
B . Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of
"Manual for Housing Framing" and other recommendations of the N.F .P.A .
3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (PWD)
A. Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA), for the
installation of plywood and per the current edition of the Florida Building Code
nailing patterns.
3 . 06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 . All work shall comply with the standards of the American Institute of Timber
Construction, AWI, API, AWPA, and local codes and regulations.
2. All framing shall be square, plumb and true .
3 . All furring shall be shimmed to a plumb, true surface.
06100-5
2 . Minimum 5 bags cement per yard of concrete. (( 1l
B . Concrete Strength: 1. J
1 . Unless specifically noted otherwise, all concrete shall have a minimum
compressive strength of f c = 3000 psi .
2 . A design mix shall be prepared by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer
employed by the concrete supplier.
3 . The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer the concrete materials and
the concrete mix designs proposed for use with a written request for acceptance.
This submittal shall include the results of all testing performed to qualify the
materials and to establish the mix designs .
C . Job Tempering:
1 . All Concrete shall be placed within 1 - 1 /2 hours after introduction of water to the
mix .
2 . Under no condition may additional water be added that exceeds the allowable
gallons stipulated on the batch ticket.
3 . Submit time stamped batching tickets on delivery of concrete to job site. r/
4 . All concrete where water has been added will be removed and replace with
proper concrete at no cost to the Owner.
S . When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 75 minutes . When air temperature is higher than 90 degrees,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
3 .02 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A . Review: No concrete shall be placed until all reinforcing steel, pipes, sleeves, inserts,
etc. have been set in place and reviewed by the Owner' s representative. Contractor
shall notify the Architect of scheduled pours 24 hours prior to pouring.
B . Placing: Concrete shall be placed in properly cleaned and prepared forms in accordance
with the requirements of ACI=301 . Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that
the concrete is at all times plastic.
C . Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as
rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients
and in a manner which will assure that the required quality of the concrete is
maintained . All other requirements of ACI-301 shall be followed .
1
03300-4
DIVISION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Wood Doors
B . Finish Hardware Section 08200
Section 08700
C . Painting
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
Hollow Metal Work shall be manufactured by one of the following or equal :
A . Ceco Corporation
B . Steelcraft
C. Firedoor Corporation of Florida
D. Quality Engineered Products Co . , Inc. , Tampa, FL
E. Republic Steel Doors & Frames, Pembroke Park, FL
F. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
G. Curries
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS - SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Contract Conditions, covering each type
of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented
by suitable schedules covering doors and frames.
B . Show glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors .
1 .04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Delivery:
Deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers or wrappings
clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and brand designation, door schedule
number, referenced specification number, type, class and rating as applicable.
B. Storage:
Store products in an approved dry area; protected from contact with soil and from
exposure to the elements. Keep products dry at all times.
C . Handling:
' Handle products in a manner that will prevent breakage and damage to products .
J
08100-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ll
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Frames (Door)
I . Exterior : 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated, bonderized sheet steel .
Exterior: 14 gauge A- 60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel, over G-0" in
width. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on all frames mounted to brick
veneers or prclmished split-faced masonry products in lieu of the
standard 1 /2 " .
2 . Interior: 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel .
Interior: over 4'-0 : in width, 14 gauge. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on
all frames rnounted to brick veneers or grefinished split-faced masonry
products in lieu of the standard 1 /2 " .
B . Hardware Reinforcement (Frame - Steel
g uge by 1 - 112 " or 1 -5 /8" x 10"
? . Hinges :
2 . Closers and holders : 12 gauge by 16 "
3 . Strikes : 1 - 1 /4" x 4-7 /8 " ANSI 16gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. 16 gauge
1 - 118 " x 3 - 1 /2" deadlock strike 12 gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. No lip 16 gauge
C . Frames (Window)
I . Exterior: 14 gauge A-60 galycoated, bonderized sheet steel
2 . Interior : 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel
D . Doors
1 . Exterior:
Face sheets 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI 100
Grade 1II, Model 2, full flush, hollow metal, seamless construction. Closed
top and bottom edges flush with face sheets . Extra heavy duty .
2 . Interior : 100
Face sheet's 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI Closed ed
Grade 11I, Model 3 , full flush, hollow metal , seamless construction.
top and bottom edged flush with face sheets.
3 . Internal Stiffeners :
Currie 707 with polystyrene core or approved equal.
4 . Sound Deadening:
Type standard with the manufacturer.
08100-2
D . Depositing : Concrete shall be deposited continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be deposited on concrete which is hardened sufficiently to cause the
formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
E . Consolidation: All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding, or
forking so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around
embedded items, and into corner of forms eliminating all air or stone pockets which
may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness .
F. All slabs on grade are to be Regular '/4 rock concrete at 3000 psi ultimate strength at 28
days. NO PUMP MIX (pea rock) WILL BE ACCEPTED for any slab on prepared
grade . This does not prohibit the pumping of the regular '/ rock mix.
3 . 03 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints :
1 . Locate as shown on the drawings or near points of minimum shear and as
approved by Architect/Engineer for beam or slabs . Construction joints shall be
straight saw-cut by a walk behind motorized saw, tooled , mechanical or actual
cold joints as called out on the plans.
2 . Locate joints in vertical members, walls at underside of floors or beams, and at
tops of footings .
3 . Floor slabs keyed joints maximum spacing 20' plus or minus each direction
unless otherwise noted.
A . Expansion Joints -
1 .
oints :1 . Locate as shown on drawings .
2 . Joints in walkways maximum at 20' o.c. , snap lines and saw-cut 1 /8 " wide by 1 "
deep between expansion joints in equal bays at not over 5 ' o .c. , within 24 hours
of concrete placement or until concrete is traffrcable with power saw.
3 . Joints shall be straight and smooth. They shall have hardened before fresh
concrete is deposited against them.
4 . Do not place expansion joints where slabs are up against the exterior of masonry
walls, unless otherwise detailed on plans . Do not place any expansion material
on the inside face of masonry walls where slabs are poured against same walls .
5 . After concreting has been started, it should be carried on as a continuous
operation until placing of a panel or section, as determined by its boundaries or
joints, is completed.
03300-5
4 . All lumber in contact with masonry shall be #2 yellow pine, pressure treated.
5 . Coordinate blocking and backing requirements of all trades and provide where
indicated and required.
6 . Provide solid blocking behind all shower valves .
7 . Provide rough openings for all manufactured items such as medicine cabinets, fire
extinguisher cabinets, etc.
8 . Provide wood fire cats in all interior and exterior frame walls where vertical cavity
exceeds 8 feet and where soffits adjoin vertical walls.
9 . Construct 3/4 inch BC plywood plenum bases, including vertical sides, for all Closet
Mounted Air-Handling Units. Line interiors with 5/8 " type "X" gypsum board to
comply with non-combustible plenum requirements .
* * *END OF SECTION'
06100-6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ll
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Frames (Door)
I . Exterior : 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated, bonderized sheet steel .
Exterior: 14 gauge A- 60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel, over G-0" in
width. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on all frames mounted to brick
veneers or prclmished split-faced masonry products in lieu of the
standard 1 /2 " .
2 . Interior: 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel .
Interior: over 4'-0 : in width, 14 gauge. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on
all frames rnounted to brick veneers or grefinished split-faced masonry
products in lieu of the standard 1 /2 " .
B . Hardware Reinforcement (Frame - Steel
g uge by 1 - 112 " or 1 -5 /8" x 10"
? . Hinges :
2 . Closers and holders : 12 gauge by 16 "
3 . Strikes : 1 - 1 /4" x 4-7 /8 " ANSI 16gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. 16 gauge
1 - 118 " x 3 - 1 /2" deadlock strike 12 gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. No lip 16 gauge
C . Frames (Window)
I . Exterior: 14 gauge A-60 galycoated, bonderized sheet steel
2 . Interior : 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel
D . Doors
1 . Exterior:
Face sheets 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI 100
Grade 1II, Model 2, full flush, hollow metal, seamless construction. Closed
top and bottom edges flush with face sheets . Extra heavy duty .
2 . Interior : 100
Face sheet's 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI Closed ed
Grade 11I, Model 3 , full flush, hollow metal , seamless construction.
top and bottom edged flush with face sheets.
3 . Internal Stiffeners :
Currie 707 with polystyrene core or approved equal.
4 . Sound Deadening:
Type standard with the manufacturer.
08100-2
5 • Hardware Reinforcement - Steel :
a. Hinges : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /2 " or 1 -5/8 " x 10 "
b. Closers and Holders : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/4 " x 10 "
C. Locks : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 "
d• Push/pull plates :
16 ga. x 14 " x 14 "
e. Panic bars : 3 " x 8 " and 4 " x 24 " (24 ga.)
E Glazing and louver beads : 18 ga.
9 - Coordinator Reinf : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/8 " x 15 - 1 /2 "
6• Clips, Anchors, Bolts, Screws and Rivets:
Steel, types standard with the manufacturer.
7 . Metallic filler.
FS TT-F-322
8 . Shop Primer:
Baked-on rust- inhibitive. ASTM - B117 Federal Specification TT-P-636
9. Field Painting:
See Section 09900
2 .02 FABRICATION
A . Frames
1 • Formed to profile as shown on drawings, constructed with square corners;
and free of defects, warps or buckle.
2 • Welded-type - for concrete; masonry construction and metal stud
construction .
3 . Comers and connections welded with exposed welds ground flush and
smooth.
4. Reinforcement :
As per Section 2 . 01 B,(3) above.
5 . Frames punched to receive rubber silencers, three each door on lock side
and two at head of double doors .
6 . Provide removable spreaders attached to bottom of door frames, to insure
correct alignment during shipping and installation.
7 At angle type thresholds, note
tower floor level . h frames and extend exterior portion down to
-- � lo
08100-3
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
B . Wood Doors Section 08200
C . Finish Hardware Section 08700
D . Chalkboards, Tackboards, & Pegboards Section 10100
E. Plastic Laminated Toilet Partitions Section 10160
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - STANDARDS
A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are hereby made a part of this Specification. Any reference to
Premium, Custom or Economy shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI
Standards .
B . Any items not given a specific quality grade, shall be custom grade.
C . Products of other manufacturers may be proposed under conditions as set forth in
the Contract Conditions of these Specifications .
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A . Deliver manufactured material in original packages .
B . Store all finish materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage
and exposure to the elements .
1 .04 MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK
Shelving not included in Casework Specifications nor in Casework Drawings :
A. SWI Custom Grade if stained.
B . AWI Economy Grade if painted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR WOODWORK FOR PAINT FINISH
A (Quality Grade - Economy grade requirements of AWI Quality Standards.
B. Wood S ecies : B and better V . G. Fir, Birch, or where indicated on Drawings - B
and better Oak.
06200-1
3 . 04 CURING
A. Begin curing of concrete as soon as practicable after placing, but not more than 3 hours
thereafter. Provide a total wet cure time of 7 days minimum at 50 degrees F minimum
temperature .
B . Curing of structural members shall begin immediately after removal of forms .
C . Apply curing compounds as specified above, clear for exposed slabs. Compound used
on floors that are to receive tile or other additional finish shall be compatible with
adhesives and finish materials . Apply first coat of curing compound as soon as possible
after pouring .
3 . 05 FINISHES
A. Formed Surfaces :
1 . Finishes - Defined :
a. Rough Form Finish: Reasonable true to line and place . Tie holes and
defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1 /4" in height shall be
chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the
texture imparted by the forms .
t �
b. Smooth Form Finish: The form facing material shall produce a smooth,
hard, uniform texture on the concrete . It may be plywood, tempered
concrete-form-grade hardboard, metal, or other material capable of
producing the desired finish. The arrangement of the facing material
shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the
practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing
capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material with raised grain,
torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will
impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. Tie holes
and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. It is
the intention of this surface to produce an Architectural Surface suitable
for public view as a completed surface to receive paint. Strict quality
control of this surface shall be required. See ACI 301 .
C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: To be applied to all smooth form finishes . (All
work will conform with ACI Standard 301 -latest edition) to produce a
smooth architectural effect.
2 . Finishes - Unspecified Buildings: If the finish is unspecified, the following
finishes shall be used as applicable.
03300-6 i
5 • Hardware Reinforcement - Steel :
a. Hinges : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /2 " or 1 -5/8 " x 10 "
b. Closers and Holders : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/4 " x 10 "
C. Locks : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 "
d• Push/pull plates :
16 ga. x 14 " x 14 "
e. Panic bars : 3 " x 8 " and 4 " x 24 " (24 ga.)
E Glazing and louver beads : 18 ga.
9 - Coordinator Reinf : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/8 " x 15 - 1 /2 "
6• Clips, Anchors, Bolts, Screws and Rivets:
Steel, types standard with the manufacturer.
7 . Metallic filler.
FS TT-F-322
8 . Shop Primer:
Baked-on rust- inhibitive. ASTM - B117 Federal Specification TT-P-636
9. Field Painting:
See Section 09900
2 .02 FABRICATION
A . Frames
1 • Formed to profile as shown on drawings, constructed with square corners;
and free of defects, warps or buckle.
2 • Welded-type - for concrete; masonry construction and metal stud
construction .
3 . Comers and connections welded with exposed welds ground flush and
smooth.
4. Reinforcement :
As per Section 2 . 01 B,(3) above.
5 . Frames punched to receive rubber silencers, three each door on lock side
and two at head of double doors .
6 . Provide removable spreaders attached to bottom of door frames, to insure
correct alignment during shipping and installation.
7 At angle type thresholds, note
tower floor level . h frames and extend exterior portion down to
-- � lo
08100-3
g . Provide sheet metal grout guards in frames at all lock bolts and tapped
hardware locations.
9 . Do not fill frames with mortar unless specifically called out on the
drawings .
10 . Do not fill mullions , including removable mullions, with mortar unless
specifically called out on the drawings .
11 . silencers shall be installed in frames after doors are installed and painting is
completed.
B . Anchors
1 . Provide 16 gauge angle shaped floor slips welded to jambs and punched for
two 3 /8 " diameter bolts each.
2 . Provide adjustable length clip angles as required.
3 . Jamb Anchors
a. Frames set in masonry :
For doors not more than 7 ft . High, provide not less than
`
long adjustable 14 gauge corrugated galvanized masonry anchors for
each jamb over 7 feet, not less than 4 for each jamb .
b. Frames set against previously placed masonry or concrete:
For doors not more than 7 feet high, by approval of Owner' s
representative only punch each frame jamb and dimple countersink
for not less that three 3 /8 " diameter flat head screws. For doors
over 7 feet high, punch less that four 318 diameter flat head screws .
Provide pipe sleeves with spacers welded into each jamb at each
fastening location. Provide 3/8 " diameter galvanized sasrequired .
tla
ead
screws with approved expansion anchors or togg
After installing flat head screws fill head of countersink screw with
body filler then sand flush with frame.
c. Frames set in metal stud partitions:
Provide 16 gauge metal jamb anchor clips welded in each jamb at
following locations:
One at top, one 12 " down from top and 24 " o .c. for remainder of
jamb frames.
C . Doors
1 . Internal stiffeners spaced at not over 6" o .c.
08100-4
a. Rough Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces not exposed to public view,
including concrete to receive stucco .
b. Smooth Form Finish : For all concrete surfaces exposed to view.
C . Smooth Rubbed Finish: Concrete shall have a Smooth Rubbed Finish
applied to produce an architectural effect.
3 . Patching : Immediately after stripping forms patch all defective areas with mortar
similar to the concrete mix except that coarse aggregate shall be omitted .
Bulges, minor honeycomb and other minor defects, as designated by the
Architect, shall be patched only where exposed to view. Clean, dampen, and fill
tie holes with patching mortar. All patching shall follow procedures and
conform to ACI 301 .
a . Major defective areas, as judged by the Owner' s representative including
those resulting from leakage of forms, excessive honeycomb, large
bulges and large offsets at form joints, shall be chipped away down to
sound concrete. The patching mortar shall be pressed in for a complete
bond and finished to match adjacent areas, or where defective areas
impair the strength of the member in question, as judged by the Owner' s
representative, the member shall be removed or united as determined by
the Owner' s representative.
b . Minor defective areas, as judged by the Owner ' s representative including
honeycomb, air bubbles, holes resulting from removal of ties, and those
resulting from leakage of forms shall be patched with grout without
resorting to chipping. Minor bulges and offsets at form joints: shall- be
finished as specified herein below.
B . Uniform Surfaces — Flatwork-
1 . General : Grade and screed the surfaces to the exact elevation, or slope shown or
required . Make proper allowances for setting beds for ceramic tile. After
screeding tamp mixture thoroughly to drive the coarse aggregate down from the
surfaces and apply the applicable finish specified hereinafter. Always slope
exterior walks away from the building at 1 /8 " per foot. Uncovered walks slope at
1 /8 " perfootor crown. Covered walks between buildings always slope to drain
to the exterior and away from the buildings. At cross intersections of the walks,
and at exterior doors, warp the surfaces to drain water from the walls. Provide
control joints as indicated on drawings. Follow the requirements and procedures
of ACI 301 .
2 . Finishes - Definitions (See also ACI 301 ) •
03300-7
C . Plywood: All plywood shall be exterior grade, Group 1 , A, B , Veneer grades . This
shall include any plywood shelving to receive paint as indicated on the casework
drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF WOODWORK
A . Only experienced finish carpenters are to work on exposed woodwork .
B . Erect all work plumb, level and true to the line and detail.
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
D . Nailing: Use finish nails and counter sink. Fill holes with putty after prime coat.
E . Sand all finish woodwork and leave ready for finishing.
3 . 02 DOORS
A . Install doors as provided under other Sections of these Specifications .
B . Install doors true and plumb with equal clearances at jambs and head. _
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
3 . 03 HARDWARE
Install finish hardware as specified under another Section of these Specifications .
A . Installation of all finish hardware shall be by a skilled and experienced mechanic in
a neat and workmanlike manner. Where required, the hardware shall be removed
for application of finishes and fully protected until final installation.
B . Carefully tag and file all keys in the key file and deliver all keys to the Owner' s
representative at the completion of the job . See Finish Hardware for detailed
specifications and instructions.
3 . 04 CLEAN UP
A. Leave all work in neat and in a finished condition.
B . Remove all debris as result of work under this Section of these Specifications .
* * *END OF SECTION * "
06200-2
g . Provide sheet metal grout guards in frames at all lock bolts and tapped
hardware locations.
9 . Do not fill frames with mortar unless specifically called out on the
drawings .
10 . Do not fill mullions , including removable mullions, with mortar unless
specifically called out on the drawings .
11 . silencers shall be installed in frames after doors are installed and painting is
completed.
B . Anchors
1 . Provide 16 gauge angle shaped floor slips welded to jambs and punched for
two 3 /8 " diameter bolts each.
2 . Provide adjustable length clip angles as required.
3 . Jamb Anchors
a. Frames set in masonry :
For doors not more than 7 ft . High, provide not less than
`
long adjustable 14 gauge corrugated galvanized masonry anchors for
each jamb over 7 feet, not less than 4 for each jamb .
b. Frames set against previously placed masonry or concrete:
For doors not more than 7 feet high, by approval of Owner' s
representative only punch each frame jamb and dimple countersink
for not less that three 3 /8 " diameter flat head screws. For doors
over 7 feet high, punch less that four 318 diameter flat head screws .
Provide pipe sleeves with spacers welded into each jamb at each
fastening location. Provide 3/8 " diameter galvanized sasrequired .
tla
ead
screws with approved expansion anchors or togg
After installing flat head screws fill head of countersink screw with
body filler then sand flush with frame.
c. Frames set in metal stud partitions:
Provide 16 gauge metal jamb anchor clips welded in each jamb at
following locations:
One at top, one 12 " down from top and 24 " o .c. for remainder of
jamb frames.
C . Doors
1 . Internal stiffeners spaced at not over 6" o .c.
08100-4
2 . Face sheets spot welded to internal stiffeners at not over 5 " apart and in a
1
manner that will prevent the welds from showing on the exposed side of
face sheets .
3 . Hardware reinforcement welded in place as required for hardware
application. (See Section 2 . 02) .
4 . Sound deadening :
Interior surfaces treated with a sound deadening material to eliminate
metallic ring.
5 . Provide 16 gauge pre-bonderized zinc coated steel perimeter channels.
Bevel stile edges 1 /8 " in 2 ".
6 Spot-weld channels to face sheets 3 " o. c.
7• Close tops of all exterior out swinging doors flush with steel channels .
Close flush and seal watertight.
8 . Grind welds off smooth and flush.
9 Fold edge construction not acceptable .
10. At angle type thresholds, extend height of door by one inch over height
indicated in Door Schedule.
D . Doors With Glass Panels
1 Openings formed so that no bead is required on outside face of doors .
2 . Bead provided on both faces of doors and secured with oval head
countersink screws on the inside face.
E. Doors with Louvers
I Exterior:
Provide 16 gauge electro zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and weatherproof "z" type louvers full thickness of door welded into doors.
2 . Interior :
Provide 18 gauge elector zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and inverted "Y" type louvers full thickness of door, welded into doors.
3 . Provide special size and shape louvers as shown .
4 . Louver Door Security Panels :
Woven wire mesh. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors.
08100-5
SECTION 07160 — UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A . Surface preparation.
B . Application of underslab vaporproofing membrane.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 — Cast in Place Concrete
B . Section 09650 — Resilient Tile Flooring
1 . 03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Soil Or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
2 . ASTM E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs .
1 3 . ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials .
4 . ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
B . American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1 . ACI 302 . 1 R-96 Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less
than 10 mils thick.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures .
B . Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions.
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
_ B . Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07160- 1
a. Scratched Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated
and leveled to a Class B tolerance, surface shall be roughened with stiff
brush, rates or metal lath roller, before final set.
b. Floated Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and
leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until water sheen has
disappeared and/or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper
operations of a power driven float. Consolidate with power driven float,
check trueness of surface, fill low spots and cut down high spots to achieve
Class B tolerance. Then, re-float to uniform, smooth, granular texture .
C . Troweled Finish: Finish same as above for floated finish and in addition,
steel trowel the surface by hand to produce a smooth, glassy, impervious
surface free of trowel marks to a Class A tolerance . On surfaces intended
to support floor coverings, defects of sufficient magnitude to show through
the floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
d . Broom Finish : Finish same as above for floated finish to a Class B
tolerance and then draw a broom or burlap belt across surface transversely.
C . Finishes - Unspecified
1 . When type of finish is not specified, the following shall be applicable:
a. Scratched Finish: For surfaces to receive bonded cementitious application,
i . e . ceramic tile, single ply epoxy flooring etc. , refer to drawings for
locations of specific floor coverings.
b. Troweled Finish: For surfaces intended as smooth walking surfaces or for /
receipt of floor coverings .
G. Broom Finish: For exterior walks , loggias , curbs and where indicated on
drawings.
d . Float Finish: Exterior platforms , steps, stairways, landings, and ramps .
D . Specific Finish Locations :
1 . Slab areas to receive ceramic tile, resilient floor coverings, specialized
gymnasium flooring, or slabs within a minimum of 2 feet each side of accordion
doors shall be "dead level" - Class A. All other slab
areas - Class B .
E . Tolerances for finishes as specified shall be as follows :
1 . Class A - True planes within 1 /8 " in 10 ft.
2 . Class B - True planes within 1 /4" in 10 ft.
03300-8
2 . Face sheets spot welded to internal stiffeners at not over 5 " apart and in a
1
manner that will prevent the welds from showing on the exposed side of
face sheets .
3 . Hardware reinforcement welded in place as required for hardware
application. (See Section 2 . 02) .
4 . Sound deadening :
Interior surfaces treated with a sound deadening material to eliminate
metallic ring.
5 . Provide 16 gauge pre-bonderized zinc coated steel perimeter channels.
Bevel stile edges 1 /8 " in 2 ".
6 Spot-weld channels to face sheets 3 " o. c.
7• Close tops of all exterior out swinging doors flush with steel channels .
Close flush and seal watertight.
8 . Grind welds off smooth and flush.
9 Fold edge construction not acceptable .
10. At angle type thresholds, extend height of door by one inch over height
indicated in Door Schedule.
D . Doors With Glass Panels
1 Openings formed so that no bead is required on outside face of doors .
2 . Bead provided on both faces of doors and secured with oval head
countersink screws on the inside face.
E. Doors with Louvers
I Exterior:
Provide 16 gauge electro zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and weatherproof "z" type louvers full thickness of door welded into doors.
2 . Interior :
Provide 18 gauge elector zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and inverted "Y" type louvers full thickness of door, welded into doors.
3 . Provide special size and shape louvers as shown .
4 . Louver Door Security Panels :
Woven wire mesh. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors.
08100-5
F . Screens
Where louvers are indicated on exterior doors provide 18 x 14 .011 " alloy number )
302/304 stainless steel wire cloth secured in removable .015 inch stainless steel
alloy number 302/304 roll-formed frames . Mount screens on interior of doors with
stainless steel screws.
G. Fire Door Assemblies
1 . Fire door assemblies, including frames and hardware, shall meet fire test
and rating requirements in accordance with the procedure of Underwriters
Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories . Provide appropriate labels on
doors and frame .
2 . Fabrication and assembly requirements necessary to obtain labels will take
precedence over requirements shown or specified, except where
requirements shown or specified exceed the sizes or gauges required for
labeling .
3 . Required ratings are as shown on drawings .
FI. Finish Hardware Coordination
Metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the factory for application of finish �
e finish hardware
hardware at the job site . Templates are to be supplied by th
manufacturer to assure accurate preparation of doors and frames in accordance with
the Hardware Schedule.
1. Shop Painting by Manufacturer
1 . Imperfections spot glazed with metallic filler and sand smooth.
2 . Doors and frames shall be cleaned thoroughly in preparation to receive
manufacturer' s shop primer .
3 . After cleaning and treating the frames, the manufacturer shall apply a coat
of baked-on-rust-inhibitive primer prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. General :
1 . Install new doors and frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly �-
clean and prime prior to installation.
08100-6
NOTE : Tolerances shall be measured by placing a 10-ft. straightedge anywhere in any direction.
J. 'END OF SECTION * * *
,l
03300-9
C . Stack membrane on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate warping.
D . Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or
contamination.
1 .06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A . Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the
elements .
B . Do not apply on frozen ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURER
A . W . R. MEADOWS , INC., PO Box 338 , Hampshire, Illinois 60140-0338 . (800)
342- 5976 . (847) 683 -4500 . Fax (847) 683 -4544 . Website : www.wrmeadows .com.
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder
1 . Performance Based Specification: Vapor Retarder membrane must meet or
exceed all requirements of ASTM E 1745 Classes A, B , & C . J
a. Minimum Permeance ASTM E 96 : 0 .034 Perms
b . Resistance to Organisms and Substrates in Contact with Soil ASTM E
154, Section 13 : 0 . 051 Perms
C . Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 , Section 9 : 52 LBS . Force/Inch
d . Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 , Method B : 3 ,770 Grams
e . Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E 1745 : Meets or exceeds Class A, B &
C
f. Thickness of Retarder (plastic) ACI 302 . 1 R-96 : Not less than 10 mils
2 . Proprietary Based Specification:
a. PERMINATOR 10 mil by W . R. MEADOWS .
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Seam Tape
1 . High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum
width 4 inches .
07160-2
F . Screens
Where louvers are indicated on exterior doors provide 18 x 14 .011 " alloy number )
302/304 stainless steel wire cloth secured in removable .015 inch stainless steel
alloy number 302/304 roll-formed frames . Mount screens on interior of doors with
stainless steel screws.
G. Fire Door Assemblies
1 . Fire door assemblies, including frames and hardware, shall meet fire test
and rating requirements in accordance with the procedure of Underwriters
Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories . Provide appropriate labels on
doors and frame .
2 . Fabrication and assembly requirements necessary to obtain labels will take
precedence over requirements shown or specified, except where
requirements shown or specified exceed the sizes or gauges required for
labeling .
3 . Required ratings are as shown on drawings .
FI. Finish Hardware Coordination
Metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the factory for application of finish �
e finish hardware
hardware at the job site . Templates are to be supplied by th
manufacturer to assure accurate preparation of doors and frames in accordance with
the Hardware Schedule.
1. Shop Painting by Manufacturer
1 . Imperfections spot glazed with metallic filler and sand smooth.
2 . Doors and frames shall be cleaned thoroughly in preparation to receive
manufacturer' s shop primer .
3 . After cleaning and treating the frames, the manufacturer shall apply a coat
of baked-on-rust-inhibitive primer prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. General :
1 . Install new doors and frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly �-
clean and prime prior to installation.
08100-6
2 . Install new window frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly
clean and prime prior to installation.
3 Prior to applying finish paint, areas where prime coat has been damaged
shall have any rust removed, sanded smooth and touched up with same
primer as applied at shop.
4 . Finish paint doors and frames as indicated in Section 09900 PAINTING , in
colors as called out on the Interior Design Plans or Painting Schedule.
B . Deliver the work, ready to set up and erect in place as rapidly as the general
construction work permits . Set work in place in accordance with approved setting
drawings, in plumb and level positions, strongly secured against displacement and
with built-in anchors. In masonry construction, set frames in advance of masonry
work.
C . Fastening :
Secure each frame floor clip to concrete floor with two 3/8 " diameter cadmium
plated bolts set in drilled tamp-ins or self-drilling concrete anchors . Install jamb
anchors as called for in 2/02, B . 3 . NOTE : Do not fill any frames with mortar unless
specifically called out on the plans.
D. Bracing :
Brace frame jambs and heads receiving poured concrete adequately to resist
deflection : brace frames in masonry walls and partitions adequately so the walls and
Partitions may be erected against same.
fit
E . Install doors after masonry work and plastering have been completed and accurately
fit and adjust doors to work properly. Application finish hardware and door
installation is specified in Division.
3 . 02 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces of doors and frames by the
procedure recommended by the Door Manufacturer.
B . Clean up all rubbish and debris caused by this work and remove from the site.
Leave areas surrounding openings in a broom-clean condition .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08100-7
B . Pipe Boots
1 . Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape
per manufacturer's instructions .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 EXAMINATION
A . Examine surfaces to receive membrane . Notify Architect if surfaces are not
acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable
conditions have been corrected .
3 .02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions .
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A . Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E
1643 -98 .
B . Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
pour.
r
C . Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls .
D . Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape .
E . Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot .
F . No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
G . Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged
area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
1
07 ] 60-3
� �
< w�-�
�
i
2 . Install new window frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly
clean and prime prior to installation.
3 Prior to applying finish paint, areas where prime coat has been damaged
shall have any rust removed, sanded smooth and touched up with same
primer as applied at shop.
4 . Finish paint doors and frames as indicated in Section 09900 PAINTING , in
colors as called out on the Interior Design Plans or Painting Schedule.
B . Deliver the work, ready to set up and erect in place as rapidly as the general
construction work permits . Set work in place in accordance with approved setting
drawings, in plumb and level positions, strongly secured against displacement and
with built-in anchors. In masonry construction, set frames in advance of masonry
work.
C . Fastening :
Secure each frame floor clip to concrete floor with two 3/8 " diameter cadmium
plated bolts set in drilled tamp-ins or self-drilling concrete anchors . Install jamb
anchors as called for in 2/02, B . 3 . NOTE : Do not fill any frames with mortar unless
specifically called out on the plans.
D. Bracing :
Brace frame jambs and heads receiving poured concrete adequately to resist
deflection : brace frames in masonry walls and partitions adequately so the walls and
Partitions may be erected against same.
fit
E . Install doors after masonry work and plastering have been completed and accurately
fit and adjust doors to work properly. Application finish hardware and door
installation is specified in Division.
3 . 02 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces of doors and frames by the
procedure recommended by the Door Manufacturer.
B . Clean up all rubbish and debris caused by this work and remove from the site.
Leave areas surrounding openings in a broom-clean condition .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08100-7
SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENE
RAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Section 08100
B . Finish Hardware
D. Finish Carpentry Section 08700
E. Painting
Section 06200
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Products of the following manufacturers or equal are acceptable :
A . Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. (Formerly Weyerhaeuser Company)
B . Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division
C. Ipik Door Co ., Inc.
D. VT Industries, Inc. , Holstein, Iowa
E. Southwood Door, A Division of OSHKOSH
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
B . Shop D� Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
C. Specific Product Warranty- Submit written agreement on door manufacturer' s standard
form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of
core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
NWMA and AWI.
1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet
"Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions, and as
otherwise indicated.
B . Packer doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer' s standard method.
08200- 1
SECTION 03420 - PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Furnish and install all required Precast Lintels and Door Headers in the locations called
out on the architectural and structural drawings as manufactured by WEKIWA
CONCRETE PRODUCTS, INC . or an approved equal . Lintels available through CSR
Rinker.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Concrete Formwork Section 03100
Concrete Reinforcement Section 03200
Cast in place Concrete Section 03300
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Editions) :
L ASTM A615 (Grade 60) for reinforcing bars .
2 . ASTM A416, 7 wire for prestress strands.
B . ACI Standards (Latest Editions) :
1 . ACI 315 , Detail Reinforcement.
2. Concrete Operations shall comply with ACI Standards .
3 . Design and Construction shall conform to the specification of the national
concrete masonry association and ACI 530.
4 . ACI 318 -95, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete .
C . Florida Building Code, latest edition.
D . American Society of Civil Engineers minimum design loads for Buildings and
Other Structures (ASCE 7-95) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete Compressive Strength at 28 days :
1 . Pre-cast w/standard reinforcement- 3500 PSI .
2 . Pre-cast w/prestress reinforcement- 5000 PSI.
3 . Concrete Fill (placed in field)- 3000 PSI.
2 . 02 MASONRY
A. Minimum masonry unit strength fm 1500 PSI.
B . Mortar shall be type-M .
03420-1
SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENE
RAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Section 08100
B . Finish Hardware
D. Finish Carpentry Section 08700
E. Painting
Section 06200
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Products of the following manufacturers or equal are acceptable :
A . Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. (Formerly Weyerhaeuser Company)
B . Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division
C. Ipik Door Co ., Inc.
D. VT Industries, Inc. , Holstein, Iowa
E. Southwood Door, A Division of OSHKOSH
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
B . Shop D� Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
C. Specific Product Warranty- Submit written agreement on door manufacturer' s standard
form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of
core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
NWMA and AWI.
1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet
"Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions, and as
otherwise indicated.
B . Packer doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer' s standard method.
08200- 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 SOLID CORE DOORS (Locations as called out on the Door Schedules)
A . 20 minute at interior locations and offices as indicated on plans . Provide 1 hour label
at interior 1 hour rated fire wall assemblies and 1 '/2 hour label at 2 hour rated wall
assemblies as per the Life Safety Plans or Building Plans .
B . Standard: Meet or exceed NWMA Industry Standard I. S . 1 -78 Series and Architectural
woodwork Institute Type SLC and FD .
C. Veneer : stain grade birch per door schedule .
D . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
E . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
F . Core: Staved hardwood lumber blocks bonded under pressure with 100% glue
coverage; mineral core at label doors .
G . Glue : Type I (face assembly) and type II (core assembly) .
H. Lights and Louvers: Cut to size as indicated on drawings . Provide type 2 stops for
lights . —'
J . Guarantee: 10 years , interior use only.
2 . 02 HOLLOW CORE DOORS (Located as called out on the door schedules)
A . Veneer: stain grade birch per door schedule .
B . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
C . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
D . Glue : Type I (face assembly)
E. Guarantee: 10 years, interior use only.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 I__NSPECTION
A. Veri that door frames are of type required for the door and are installed as required
for proper installation of doors .
08200-2
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION
PART 1 - CEILINGS :
1 .01 When Wood Trusses in combination with Vented Soffits : Provide (R- 19, R-28 or R-30 as
called out on the wall sections) Batt insulation - installed between the bottom chords of the pre-
engineered roof trusses. Install in all ceiling spaces as shown on the drawings and building
sections.
1 .02 When Wood Trusses in combination with Non-Vented Soffits : Provide sprayed insulation to
the underside of the plywood decking as manufactured by leynene to a minimum R-Rating of
20 .0. Refer to Section 07205 for manufacturer' s data and the plans for actual placement .
1 , 03 When Steel Joists : (Three methods)
A. Provide R- 19 nailable rigid roofing deck secured to pan-deck as per drawings .
B . Provide (R- 19) Batt insulation - laid on top of the suspended acoustical panels when
no insulation is provided on the metal roof decking. Refer to drawings for placement .
C . Provide (R- 19 overall average) EPS roof deck insulation as an integral pour with the
lightweight concrete decking. Refer to drawings for placement and thicknesses.
1 .04 When Concrete Joists and Deck • Provide roof top insulation board per plans for uppermost
floor. No ceiling insulation for all lower floor/ceiling assemblies .
1 .05 When Ceiling Assembly is used as a return airplenum - Insulation within the plenum space
must meet flame spread and smoke development ratings of the SBC for an exposed
installation .
PART 1 - EXTERIOR WALLS -
2 . 01 When Concrete Block Walls • (Two Methods)
A. Provide furring on the interior face of the block walls as per plans and place rigid
insulation of thickness called out on the wall sections.
B . Fill the exterior block cells with CoreFil1500 amino-plast, Class-A, Foam insulation,
(or an approved equal product) . The thermal properties for an 8 " block/601bs. Density
wall assembly is R- 14 .2 . Install in strict compliance with manufacturers application
procedures. Thermco Foam Insulation is an approved equal product.
2.02 When Wood Frame or Steel Assembly Walls R- 11 in 3 1/2" walls, and R- 19 in 5 %2 " walls .
Utilize foil faced or waxed Kraft paper faced fiberglass batt insulation. V .B . to weather side.
07200- 1
2 .03 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615 (grade 60) . -
B . Prestress Strands : ASTM A416, 7 -wire.
C . Steel is placed in the precast lintel at time of fabrication.
D . Minimum coverage of steel to be 3/4 inch for top bars and 1 . 5 inches for bottom
bars .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times
to assure continuity of installation.
B . Store units at project site to ensure against cracking, distortion, staining, or other
physical damage, and so that markings are visible.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A . Lift and support units at designated lift points . Shoring of precast units
shall be installed and removed solely by the contractor under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer. ,
B . Minimum bearing required at each end is 4 inches . Bearing preferred is 8 inches . -�
C. Do not install any damaged units .
3 .03 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with precast concrete units
that meet requirements of this section. The contractor shall also be responsible
for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from
corrections to precast lintels .
* * *END OF SECTION'
03420-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 SOLID CORE DOORS (Locations as called out on the Door Schedules)
A . 20 minute at interior locations and offices as indicated on plans . Provide 1 hour label
at interior 1 hour rated fire wall assemblies and 1 '/2 hour label at 2 hour rated wall
assemblies as per the Life Safety Plans or Building Plans .
B . Standard: Meet or exceed NWMA Industry Standard I. S . 1 -78 Series and Architectural
woodwork Institute Type SLC and FD .
C. Veneer : stain grade birch per door schedule .
D . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
E . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
F . Core: Staved hardwood lumber blocks bonded under pressure with 100% glue
coverage; mineral core at label doors .
G . Glue : Type I (face assembly) and type II (core assembly) .
H. Lights and Louvers: Cut to size as indicated on drawings . Provide type 2 stops for
lights . —'
J . Guarantee: 10 years , interior use only.
2 . 02 HOLLOW CORE DOORS (Located as called out on the door schedules)
A . Veneer: stain grade birch per door schedule .
B . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
C . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
D . Glue : Type I (face assembly)
E. Guarantee: 10 years, interior use only.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 I__NSPECTION
A. Veri that door frames are of type required for the door and are installed as required
for proper installation of doors .
08200-2
B . Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors .
C. Dono_ t� labels from rated doors or cover with paint .
3 .02INSTALLATION
A. Fitting and machinin :
L Fit doors for width by planing; for height by sawing.
a. . '/ " from bottom (3/16 over threshold, saddle or carpet)
b . 1 /8 " maximum frame top and sides .
c. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1 /8 " to 1 /2 " .
2 . Machine doors for hardware.
3 . Cut light and louver openings in door not exceeding maximum 40% of height and 5 "
from door edge.
4 . Seal all job site cut surfaces with two coats of paint or polyurethane before final
hanging.
B . Installation of Doors : Install in accordance with requirements of NWMA Standard
Door Guarantee, and manufacturer' s instructions .
} C . Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with
requirements of NFPA No. 80.
D. Finishing - Door shall be field painted or polyurethaned, per Interior Finish Schedule
and in accordance with Section 09900, PAINTING .
3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Re lace or re-hang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely.
B. Replace doors damaged during the construction period or that show glue spots.
C. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
D. Replace doors that are warped and that pull away from door stops.
E. Adjust all pocket doors so that door faces do not rub jambs or frames, and the doors
hang plumb in the openings . All pocket doors shall utilize 5- 1 /2 " frames and have steel
frame stiffeners to prevent frame distortion.
* * *END OF SECTION** *
08200-3
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
1 PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and schedule.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASTM Standards (Latest Edition)
ASTM C90 Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block
ASTM C270 Type-M mortar.
ASTM C150-98 Type I portland cement.
ASTM C207-97 Hydrated Lime
B . Construction Tolerances :
1 . Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, do not exceed 1 /4" .
2 . Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed
minus 1 /4 " nor plus
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer ' s specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type
complies with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage,
installations and protection.
1 . 05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof
sheeting at end of each day' s work to protect completed work that has not had
enough time for the mortar to cure and is still subject to rain damage.
B . Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place .
04230-1
2 .03 When Insulated Concrete Tilt-wall Sandwich Panels : Provide extruded Dow STYROFOAM
Brand rigid blue board insulation with heat formed, regular spaced holes identifying ` l
connector plate locations . Thicknesses per the plan with a minimum of 1 '/z inch thickness in J
all applications.
PART 3 - INTERIOR WALLS :
3 . 01 Framed Walls Wood or Metal Stud : 3 - 1 /2 " Sound Batt insulation where shown on the plans .
Staples or Adhesive : As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 4 - ATTIC BARRIERS :
4 . 01 When called out on the plans, provide a roll foil vapor barrier as manufactured by Fi-Foil.
L .ocation, type, and application method as called out on the sections and details. Staples and
tape as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 5 - INSTALLATION :
5 . 01 Allow proper air space for thermal insulation, using flanges provided, in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed instructions.
5 . 02 When utilizing a vented soffit assembly, provide a minimum of a 2 " air space at all perimeter
overhangs between the insulation face and the underside of roof decking. Utilize vinyl or
cardboard prefab vent sleeves as required to maintain said clearance. J
5 . 03 Concealed Installation: in buildings of any type construction, shall have a flame spread
rating of not more than 75 and .a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 . 04 Exposed Installation: in buildings of any type construction , shall have a flame spread rating
of not more than 25 and a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 .05 Vapor Retarders : in order to prevent indoor air quality problems in hot, humid climates , vapor
retarders such as asphalt impregnated felts, polyethelenes , or "Tyvics", should be placed on
the outside, or weather side, of the insulation.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
07200-2
B . Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors .
C. Dono_ t� labels from rated doors or cover with paint .
3 .02INSTALLATION
A. Fitting and machinin :
L Fit doors for width by planing; for height by sawing.
a. . '/ " from bottom (3/16 over threshold, saddle or carpet)
b . 1 /8 " maximum frame top and sides .
c. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1 /8 " to 1 /2 " .
2 . Machine doors for hardware.
3 . Cut light and louver openings in door not exceeding maximum 40% of height and 5 "
from door edge.
4 . Seal all job site cut surfaces with two coats of paint or polyurethane before final
hanging.
B . Installation of Doors : Install in accordance with requirements of NWMA Standard
Door Guarantee, and manufacturer' s instructions .
} C . Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with
requirements of NFPA No. 80.
D. Finishing - Door shall be field painted or polyurethaned, per Interior Finish Schedule
and in accordance with Section 09900, PAINTING .
3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Re lace or re-hang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely.
B. Replace doors damaged during the construction period or that show glue spots.
C. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
D. Replace doors that are warped and that pull away from door stops.
E. Adjust all pocket doors so that door faces do not rub jambs or frames, and the doors
hang plumb in the openings . All pocket doors shall utilize 5- 1 /2 " frames and have steel
frame stiffeners to prevent frame distortion.
* * *END OF SECTION** *
08200-3
SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this section shall be
produced by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of similar products
and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect, such as
those manufacturers listed above.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work included : Provide and install all aluminum sectional doors as scheduled and
detailed in the construction documents and as specified herein. Related work :
Preparation of opening, galvanized steel jambs, stru
work, electrical wiring, glazing de ctural work, miscellaneous iron
specified) and custom painting are in the scope
of work of other divisions or trades.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
A. All doors specified under this Section shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors shall be Aluminum or Galvanized Steel Sectional Overhead type as
manufactured by one of the following companies :
I • Clopay Building Products Company.
2 • Fimbel Door Corporation
3 • ideal Garage Doors
4. Amarr Garage Doors
5 • Arm-R-Lite
6 • Raynor
7. Wayne Dalton
8 . Overhead Door Corporation
9 . Windsor Door
2.02 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS
A. Provide each door as one complete unit including sections, brackets, tracks,
insulation, finish, counterbalance mechanisms and hardware to suit opening with
available headroom. All door sections shall be 2 " thick and shall be constructed of
aluminum extrusions produced from 6063 -T6 alloy or 18 gauge galvanized steel .
Doors to have six (6) or seven (7) sections.
J
08360- 1
SECTION 07610 - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND FASCIA PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys,
hips, ridges , eaves, corners , rakes and miscellaneous flashing and atttaching devices. All
roofing assemblies and accessories shall be manufactured by one of the following:
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-231 - 8127
B . AEICOR Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-432- 1802
C . AEP SPAN
Phone : 1 - 800- 527-2503
D . AMP, Atlanta Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 -800- 554- 1097
E . BUTLER Manufacturing Company
Phone : 1 -816- 968- 2380
F . DELCOA Metal Roofing Manufacturer
Phone : 1 - 800-375 -METAL
G. UNA-CLAD, Copper Sales, Inc.
H. McELROY METALS , INC.
Phone 1 - 800-950-6533
J . PAC-CLAD / Petersen Aluminum
Phone 1 -800-272-4482
K. ENGLERT, INC.
Phone 732-826-8614
1 .02 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store panels and materials properly and adequately to protect from damage and entrapped
water.
J
07610- 1
C . Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such l
masonry. J
D . Protect sill, ledges, finished door and window frames and projections from
droppings of mortar.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 . MATERIALS
Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Block: ASTM C90- Grade N , Type II, cured 28 days
Mortar: Type "M", ASTM C270
Cement : ASTM C150-98, Type I
Hydrated Lime : ASTM C 207 -97
Sand: Clean Masons Sand
Water:
Potable
2 . 02 CONCRETE BLOCK
A . Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Grade, Type , face
size, exposed face and, under each form of block included, for weight classification.
1 . Grade N, Type II C .M .U . , normal weight unit, fm ' 1500 psi .
2 . Size: Manufacturer' s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16"
long X 8 " high ( 15 - 5 /8" x 7 - 5/8 " actual) X thicknesses indicated . Splits
and halves as appropriate for coursing in vertical and horizontal directions .
3 . Hollow Load-Bearing Block: ASTM C-90 and as follows :
a. Weight Classification: Normal weight .
b. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block types when
fire rated walls occur. es for
C . Refer to the Architectural Drawings for specific block o
receive
finished block to receive paint or standard stucco block tto
stucco .
2 .03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C- 150, Type 1, except Type III maybe used for cold
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
required mortar color.
B . Hydrated Lime: ASTM C-297 , Type S .
04230-2 \
SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this section shall be
produced by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of similar products
and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect, such as
those manufacturers listed above.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work included : Provide and install all aluminum sectional doors as scheduled and
detailed in the construction documents and as specified herein. Related work :
Preparation of opening, galvanized steel jambs, stru
work, electrical wiring, glazing de ctural work, miscellaneous iron
specified) and custom painting are in the scope
of work of other divisions or trades.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
A. All doors specified under this Section shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors shall be Aluminum or Galvanized Steel Sectional Overhead type as
manufactured by one of the following companies :
I • Clopay Building Products Company.
2 • Fimbel Door Corporation
3 • ideal Garage Doors
4. Amarr Garage Doors
5 • Arm-R-Lite
6 • Raynor
7. Wayne Dalton
8 . Overhead Door Corporation
9 . Windsor Door
2.02 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS
A. Provide each door as one complete unit including sections, brackets, tracks,
insulation, finish, counterbalance mechanisms and hardware to suit opening with
available headroom. All door sections shall be 2 " thick and shall be constructed of
aluminum extrusions produced from 6063 -T6 alloy or 18 gauge galvanized steel .
Doors to have six (6) or seven (7) sections.
J
08360- 1
B . Rails and stiles shall have .060" minimum wall thickness . Meeting rails shall have
offset interlocking joints to provide a weathertight closure and assure alignment the
full width of each section. Stiles and rails shall be miter-cut and securely joined .
Minimum stile and rail dimensions shall be 6" for vertical end stiles and 6" for top
and bottom rails . Center stiles at 2" minimum and meeting rails at 2 1 /8 "
minimum . Panels shall be .040" aluminum or galvanized sheet set in place by
inside snap-in type glazing bead.
2 .03 WEATHER SEAL
A. Bottom door section shall have continuous flexible tubular vinyl weatherseal
applied at factory to extruded aluminum retainer.
2 .04 FINISH
A. All extrusion and panel faces shall be powder coated with Tiger Drylac Powder
Coating, Color # RAL 9016 or it RAL 9010 in a smooth semi-gloss surface finish .
Coating shall be Series 19 , six (6) year coating. Alternate finish manufacturers
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to acceptance, bid, application
of finish and installation of doors. Coating companies certification of applied
product shall accompany the doors to the jobsite .
2.05 GLAZING
A. (When Specified) . Glass lite sizes depend on door size, stile and rail arrangements,
and shall be substituted for aluminum panels as directed by Architect. Openings
shall accommade-iodate standard 3/ 16" Double Strength B-g (DSB) g ( /
2 .06 COUNTERBALANCE
A. Counterbalance shall be oil-tempered helical-wound, torsion springs mounted on a
crossheader shaft . Springs shall be engineered for industrial application and shall
comply with durability properties specified under National Association of Garage
Door Manufacturer' s specification 102- 1988 . Springs installed shall be the Extra
High Cycle type. Stainless steel aircraft-type lift cables shall have a minimum
safety factor of 7 to 1 .
2 .07 TRACK
A. Galvanized steel track shall be 3 " . Steel brackets or continuous steel angles shall e
used for installing tracks on P .T. wood jambs . Vertical track shall be inclined
through the use of adjustable brackets to assure weathertight closure
d angles as
Horizontal track shall be reinforced with factory-app galvanized
required .
2.08 HARDWARE
A. All roller brackets and hinges shall be 14 gauge heavy-duty commercial grade
galvanized steel . All rollers shall have ball bearings with case-hardened steel races .
Lock shall be end stile friction type for inside security locking .
08360-2
C . Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C- 144, except for joints less than 1 /4 " use aggregate
graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
D . Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C-404 .
E. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type-M, 2,500 p . s.i .
151
F. Joint Reinforcement :/�Pide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed
continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 %
with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated
below:
1 . Width:
Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2 " less
than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar
coverage of not less than 5/8 " on joint faces exposed to exterior and '/i
elsewhere .
2 . Wire Size for Side Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
3 - Wire Size for Cross Rods : 9 gauge galvanized.
4 . For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side
` rods :
-- a. Truss design, as manufactured by Dur-o-wall , (or approved equal),
with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 " o. c. Units to be 9
gauge hot dipped galvanized.
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Reinforcing Bars :
Deformed steel, ATSM A-615 , Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No . 18 .
B . Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips:
Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry walls : size and configuration as indicated.
1 . Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000,
Designation 2AA-805 .
C . Bond Breaker Strips :
Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D-226, Type I (No.
15 asphalt felt) .
D . Metal cavity caps in lieu of waste mortar shipping bags .
04230-3
1 . 03 WARRANTY
Submit a written three (3) year warranty from installer and manufacturer against leaks, �, )
defective workmanship and materials . Submit manufacturer' s written finish warranty that
applies. Shall meet Underwriter' s Laboratory UL90 classification. Provide manufacturer' s
standard twenty (20) year warranty against color change or chalking.
1 .04 REFERENCES
A . S .M .A .C .N .A . (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor' s National
Association).
B . N .R.C .A. (The National Roofing Contractors Association) . Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual, including construction details, and Handbook of Accepted
Roofing Knowledge.
C . Manufacturer' s Construction Details Handbook.
D . ASTM A-653 -97
E. ASTM A-525 - 86
F . ASTM A-792-86
G . ASTM B-209
H . ASTM B -370
J . Aluminum Association.
1 . 05 SUBMITTALS
A . Installing contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings showing layout of panels,
anchoring details, joint details , trim, flashing and accessories . Show details of
weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work.
B . Installing contractor shall submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with
factory finish.
C . Installing contractor shall submit calculations with registered engineer seal , verifying
roof panel and attachment method resists wind pressure imposed on it pursuant to
applicable building codes.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 METAL ROOF AND/OR FASCIA PANELS :
As manufactured by one of the approved Manufacturing Corporations .
NOTE : Match existing panel color and profiles when connecting to existing buildings.
2 . 02 SHEET MATERIALS
A . Panel configuration to be a structural standing seam. Panel widths and seam heights
will vary with project type. Refer to the Construction Drawings for required panel widths `
and seam types. Panel color as specified by the Architect on the construction documents .
07610-2
B . Rails and stiles shall have .060" minimum wall thickness . Meeting rails shall have
offset interlocking joints to provide a weathertight closure and assure alignment the
full width of each section. Stiles and rails shall be miter-cut and securely joined .
Minimum stile and rail dimensions shall be 6" for vertical end stiles and 6" for top
and bottom rails . Center stiles at 2" minimum and meeting rails at 2 1 /8 "
minimum . Panels shall be .040" aluminum or galvanized sheet set in place by
inside snap-in type glazing bead.
2 .03 WEATHER SEAL
A. Bottom door section shall have continuous flexible tubular vinyl weatherseal
applied at factory to extruded aluminum retainer.
2 .04 FINISH
A. All extrusion and panel faces shall be powder coated with Tiger Drylac Powder
Coating, Color # RAL 9016 or it RAL 9010 in a smooth semi-gloss surface finish .
Coating shall be Series 19 , six (6) year coating. Alternate finish manufacturers
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to acceptance, bid, application
of finish and installation of doors. Coating companies certification of applied
product shall accompany the doors to the jobsite .
2.05 GLAZING
A. (When Specified) . Glass lite sizes depend on door size, stile and rail arrangements,
and shall be substituted for aluminum panels as directed by Architect. Openings
shall accommade-iodate standard 3/ 16" Double Strength B-g (DSB) g ( /
2 .06 COUNTERBALANCE
A. Counterbalance shall be oil-tempered helical-wound, torsion springs mounted on a
crossheader shaft . Springs shall be engineered for industrial application and shall
comply with durability properties specified under National Association of Garage
Door Manufacturer' s specification 102- 1988 . Springs installed shall be the Extra
High Cycle type. Stainless steel aircraft-type lift cables shall have a minimum
safety factor of 7 to 1 .
2 .07 TRACK
A. Galvanized steel track shall be 3 " . Steel brackets or continuous steel angles shall e
used for installing tracks on P .T. wood jambs . Vertical track shall be inclined
through the use of adjustable brackets to assure weathertight closure
d angles as
Horizontal track shall be reinforced with factory-app galvanized
required .
2.08 HARDWARE
A. All roller brackets and hinges shall be 14 gauge heavy-duty commercial grade
galvanized steel . All rollers shall have ball bearings with case-hardened steel races .
Lock shall be end stile friction type for inside security locking .
08360-2
2.09 WIND-LOAD
A. Doors shall be manufactured to withstand 55# per square foot ( 140 mph wind
speed) . Provide engineered horizontal aluminum or galvanized angle at each pair
stainless
horizontal meeting rails to control deflection. Angles to be secured with
stainless steel screws.
2. 10 OPERATION
A. Doors shall be electrically operated with sealed motors . Push button operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. 01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the sectional overhead doors shall be by the manufacturer ' s qualified
and authorized distributor.
* * *END OF SECTION * * %
08360-3
Single lengths, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer' s specifications .
B . Panels shall be one of the following types as called out on the Construction
Documents .
1 . Steel shall be ASTM A653 - 97 Grade C, G90, Coating ASTM 525 - 86 Hot
Dipped Galvanized, 24 gauge galvalume ASTM A- 792- 86 . Maximum panel
length is 65 '.
2 . Aluminum shall be ASTM B-209 in . 032 inch or . 040 inch thickness with an
H- 14 temper.
3 . Copper shall be ASTM B-370 colled rolled in 16 or 20 ounce.
2. 03 FASTENING
Fastening is to be installed at spacings per manufacturer' s specifications at perimeters and
field. Fasteners shall be stainless and shall be a minimum of # 8 wafer head type screws
comparable with the material being used, concealed at all times. If and exposed fastener
must be used, it can only be a 444 pop rivet of the same material (or compatable) and
finish as the roof panels.
2 . 04 FLASHINGS
Flashings are to be of the same gauge, material and finish.
2 . 05 ACCESSORIES
All accessories must be of compatible materials to the metal panels .
2 . 06 FINISH
Finish shall be Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating applied on the
Manufacturer' s Coil Coating Line with a top side film thickness of 0.70 to 0. 90 mil over
0.25 to 0. 31 mil prime coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 0 . 95 to 1 .25 mil .
Bottom side shall be coated with a primer with a dry film thickness of 0 .25 mil . Finish
shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by Kynar 500
or Hylar 5000 finish supplier.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 Install metal roof/fascia systems per the manufacturer ' s specifications.
i
07610-3
2 .05 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General :
Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds or other
admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or
grout.
B . Mixing:
Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical
batch mixer: comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water
content.
C . Mortar for unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C780, proportion Specification, for types of mortar required,
unless otherwise indicated .
D . Grout for Unit Masonry :
Comply with ASTM C476, 2 , 500 p . s . i . , for grout for use in construction of
reinforced and non-reinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or
if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement
which will comply completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
( 1 . Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal direction, unless (�
otherwise indicated.
2 . Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least horizontal dimension,
unless otherwise indicated .
E. Masonry Compressive Strength : fm ' 1 , 500 p.s .i. (Minimum) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 . INSTALLATION , GENERAL
A. See Structural and Architectural Drawings for notes and details and masonry
opening requirements . Coordinate all door and window masonry openings with the
scheduled manufacturers per the plans . Tolerances are critical to meet the wind
load performance testing for said openings within the 130 and 140 mph wind speed
zones.
B . Set blocks with 3/8 " full, flush joints in running bond. Use a masonry interlock
(50% masonry bond) at all intersecting walls where possible. All work not plumb,
true and accurate shall be replaced.
C . Store all materials off the ground and protect from all dirt and foreign material .
04230-4
2.09 WIND-LOAD
A. Doors shall be manufactured to withstand 55# per square foot ( 140 mph wind
speed) . Provide engineered horizontal aluminum or galvanized angle at each pair
stainless
horizontal meeting rails to control deflection. Angles to be secured with
stainless steel screws.
2. 10 OPERATION
A. Doors shall be electrically operated with sealed motors . Push button operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. 01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the sectional overhead doors shall be by the manufacturer ' s qualified
and authorized distributor.
* * *END OF SECTION * * %
08360-3
SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCE STOREFRONT DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. All entrances stem materials are to be provided by one manufacturer. Entrances
shall be wide OR medium stile doors as detailed on the architectural drawings and
as manufactured to the design and specifications of Arch Aluminum & Glass Co .
All adjacent framing, sidelites and fixed lites shall be of system shown, or approved
equal, and shall be impact rated per FBC 2001 and ASCE7- 98 .
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE : See Door Schedule for Sizes and manufacturers
A . Wide Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with 5 "
stiled and 5 " top rail and 7- 1 /2 " bottom rail . COrner
extruded anti -twist guides with mortisejoinery s ll wialldth
have reinf icing plates,
tension rods . l ry and full width 3/8 ' plated steel
B . Medium Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with
3 - 1 /2 " stiles and a 3 - 1 /2 " top rail and 5 bottom rail .
plates, extruded anti twist guides with mortise Corners shall have reinforcing
steel tension rods . joinery and full width 3 /8 " plated
C• Glazing beads shall be an integral sash, non removal from the exterior with vinyl
bulb inserts for g• g g
/ r1' glazing. Glazing beads for insulated lass are available.
Minimum bite on tempered glass shall be 1 /2 " in door leafs and fixed lite transoms .
D. All aluminum components shall be of 6063 alloy with T-5 temper. All screws shall
be of plated steel . All steel in contact with aluminum shall be plated or painted .
PART =HARDWARE
A. Arch ' s standard hardware shall consist of AR- 800 pull handles and H-2 push bars
with 1 - 1 /2 pair Hager #23439, 4- 1 /2 " brass butt hinges or offset cast aluminum
Pivot hinges international #OP- 160 at each end and intermediate cast aluminum
hinges 41P- 1900 at midspan of each leaf.
B . Locks: two point concealed vertical rod panic hardware in door pairs .
C . Please be advised that the door manufacturer should provide all entrance hardware.
Arch can provide hardware from virtually all hardware manufacturers . In the event
that hardware is to be provided by others, such hardware must be received by Arch
before fabrication can begin.
08400-1
D. Do not retemper any mortar. Discard the mortar if it has begun to set.
E. Provide Dur-O-Wall, (or approved equal), truss-type, horizontal reinforcing at
every other block course. At door and window openings, provide continuous Dur-
O-Wall horizontal reinforcing at the first and second block courses above and
below the opening or extend the reinforcing back a minimum of two (2) feet from
the opening. Extend Dur-O-Wall reinforcing 1 - 1 /2 " into concrete columns . Lap
splices shall not be less than 6 " . Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and
expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
F . All cells designated on the drawings to be filled with concrete are to be kept clean
of any and all debris. Provide inspection/clean-out holes at the bottom course.
Inspection holes in finish block shall be neatly saw-cut.
G . All lintels shall have minimum bearing as called out on the Structural Drawings.
H. Do not wet concrete masonry units during installation.
J. Cleaning Reinforcing : Before placing, remove loose rust, and other coatings from
reinforcing.
K. Thickness : Build walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of
nominal thickness indicated.
L. Build chases and recesses as shown and required for the work of other
trades. Provide not less than 8 " of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. See plans for specific .
conditions.
M . Leave openings for specialty equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match
work immediately adjacent to the opening.
N . Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work.
Use full-size units without cutting where possible .
P. Use inspection and clean-out holes at bottom of wall reinforced vertical cells, for
grouting lifts over 5 feet high . Clean-out holes should be 4 "w X 8 " h minimum .
See ACI 530-92, Section 4. 3 . 2 . 3 .
3 .02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb :
For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1 /4 " in
J 10 ' or 3/8 " in a story height not to exceed 20', nor %" in 40' or more . For external
04230-5
3 .02 Installers shall be a certified installer, certified by the manufacturer of the respective
roofing/fascia systems . Written proof of certification shall be provided to the Architect ( \
prior to installation.
3 .03 Upon completion of the metal roof/fascia system installation, an inspection will be made
by a roofing/fascia system representative . Corrections to the installation of the
roofing/fascia system, as deemed necessary by the roofing/fascia system representative,
will be made at no additional cost to the Owner in order that the Warranty may be issued.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
07610 -4
SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCE STOREFRONT DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. All entrances stem materials are to be provided by one manufacturer. Entrances
shall be wide OR medium stile doors as detailed on the architectural drawings and
as manufactured to the design and specifications of Arch Aluminum & Glass Co .
All adjacent framing, sidelites and fixed lites shall be of system shown, or approved
equal, and shall be impact rated per FBC 2001 and ASCE7- 98 .
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE : See Door Schedule for Sizes and manufacturers
A . Wide Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with 5 "
stiled and 5 " top rail and 7- 1 /2 " bottom rail . COrner
extruded anti -twist guides with mortisejoinery s ll wialldth
have reinf icing plates,
tension rods . l ry and full width 3/8 ' plated steel
B . Medium Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with
3 - 1 /2 " stiles and a 3 - 1 /2 " top rail and 5 bottom rail .
plates, extruded anti twist guides with mortise Corners shall have reinforcing
steel tension rods . joinery and full width 3 /8 " plated
C• Glazing beads shall be an integral sash, non removal from the exterior with vinyl
bulb inserts for g• g g
/ r1' glazing. Glazing beads for insulated lass are available.
Minimum bite on tempered glass shall be 1 /2 " in door leafs and fixed lite transoms .
D. All aluminum components shall be of 6063 alloy with T-5 temper. All screws shall
be of plated steel . All steel in contact with aluminum shall be plated or painted .
PART =HARDWARE
A. Arch ' s standard hardware shall consist of AR- 800 pull handles and H-2 push bars
with 1 - 1 /2 pair Hager #23439, 4- 1 /2 " brass butt hinges or offset cast aluminum
Pivot hinges international #OP- 160 at each end and intermediate cast aluminum
hinges 41P- 1900 at midspan of each leaf.
B . Locks: two point concealed vertical rod panic hardware in door pairs .
C . Please be advised that the door manufacturer should provide all entrance hardware.
Arch can provide hardware from virtually all hardware manufacturers . In the event
that hardware is to be provided by others, such hardware must be received by Arch
before fabrication can begin.
08400-1
PART5 - FASTENERS - J
A . Typical anchors:
1 . Into 2X wood bucks or wood structure 414 SMS or 1 /4" dia. tapcons with 1 - 1 /2
minimum total embed .
2. Into 1X wood bucks or into masonry 1 /4" dia. Tapcons with 1 - 1 /4" minimum
embed into masonry .
NOTE : All wood bucks provided by the general contractor must sustain the loads
imposed by the glazing system and transfer them to the building structure.
PART_ 6...FINISH
A. All exp_ os faces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Alumimmn sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic o schedule on the
treatment. Color shall be one of the following and p
er plans : AA M12 C22 A42/44
a) Dark Bronze M12 C22 A40
b) Medium Bronze AA
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21 J
AA M12 C22 A44
d) Black
2 . Powder coated material when called out on the door schedule, shall be given an
acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 1000- 1 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 603 . 8 - 85
b) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
3 . The option and color selected for this project is : (IRC Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016-white, with a 6 year warranty).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
t
08400-2
SECTION 07710 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. The gutter and downspout system shall be an Industrial Series as manufactured by
Southern Aluminum Finishing Company or an approved equal .
B . Furnish and install a perimeter gutter and downspout system as located on the
drawings . The size shall be as per the details on the drawings. The gutter and
downspouts shall be manufactured of aluminum, .040 thickness .
Colors : Metal Buildings Match Wall Panel Color E. S .P . finish.
Stucco Buildings Match Wall Paint Color Acrylic Latex
Giitteru Shall be tapered and iIOtched to provide a i " teieSCop3iag lapjoir'it. Gutters
shall be pre-punched at 12 " on center to provide for thermal movement.
D . Provide manufacturer ' s support brackets and interior straps . Brackets shall be a
compatible material to gutter with matching finish and color.
2 .01 INSTALLATION -
A . Support Bracket Installation :
Install support brackets at 30 " on center to allow a maximum 1 /8 " slope per 40 feet
of gutter. Attach brackets with 2 " x 410 stainless wood screws.
B . Gutter Installation :
Install gutter from left to right (roofside into support brackets . Lap each telescoping
section a distance of 1 " seal and rivet at 2 " on center. Nail or screw rear of gutter
with 1 - 1 /2 " stainless fasteners.
C . Inside Strap Installation:
Install straps at 30 " on center alternating with support brackets. Strap shall be
hooked into leading edge of gutter and riveted at its rear side. Strap must not be
fastened in a way that might restrain thermal movement.
D . Expansion Joints :
Install manufacturer' s standard elastomeric expansion joint assembly, at 40'-0 "
intervals.
E. Miter Comers : Install manufacturer' s welded miters at comers .
F. End Caps/Terminations :
Install manufacturer' s end caps at all end terminations.
- , G. Outlets :
Field cut outlet hole in a neat workmanlike manner. Hole shall be located 1 " from
backside of gutter.
07710-1
corners , expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1 /4 " in any story of 20' maximum, nor ''/i' in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of i\ l
head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1 /4" in 10' , ''/Z" maximum . i
B . Variation from Level :
For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels , sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1 /4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in
40' or more . For top surface of bearing walls no not exceed 1 /8 " between adjacent
floor elements in 10' or 1 / 16" within width of a single unit.
C . Variation of Linear Building Line :
For position shown in plan and related portion of columns , walls and partitions, do
not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4 " in 40' or more.
D . Variation in Cross- Sectional Dimensions :
For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus
1 /4 " nor plus 1/2" .
E . Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness:
Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1 /811 , with a
maximum thickness limited to 1/2" . Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1 /8" .
3 . 03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS {
A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint widths and to accurately locate openings , movement-type joints, returns and
offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations .
B . Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses
accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
C . Stopping and Resuming Work :
Rack back 'h-unit length in each course: do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of
set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry .
D . Built-in Work :
As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items .
1 . Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar,
unless otherwise indicated. Where built-in items are to be embedded in
cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below
and rod mortar or grout into core.
04230-6
PART5 - FASTENERS - J
A . Typical anchors:
1 . Into 2X wood bucks or wood structure 414 SMS or 1 /4" dia. tapcons with 1 - 1 /2
minimum total embed .
2. Into 1X wood bucks or into masonry 1 /4" dia. Tapcons with 1 - 1 /4" minimum
embed into masonry .
NOTE : All wood bucks provided by the general contractor must sustain the loads
imposed by the glazing system and transfer them to the building structure.
PART_ 6...FINISH
A. All exp_ os faces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Alumimmn sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic o schedule on the
treatment. Color shall be one of the following and p
er plans : AA M12 C22 A42/44
a) Dark Bronze M12 C22 A40
b) Medium Bronze AA
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21 J
AA M12 C22 A44
d) Black
2 . Powder coated material when called out on the door schedule, shall be given an
acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 1000- 1 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 603 . 8 - 85
b) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
3 . The option and color selected for this project is : (IRC Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016-white, with a 6 year warranty).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
t
08400-2
SECTION 08410 - FLUSH GLAZE STOREFRONT WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Store front framing shall be impact rated and detailed on the Architectural drawings
and as manufactured to the design and specifications of one of the following :
Arch Aluminum & Glass Company or Kawneer.
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Framing System shall have a face dimension of 1 .250 " and a depth of 4- 1 /2 " for
both vertical and horizontal members . (Sections may vary w/manufacturer) All
sections shall be of extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and a TS temper. Glazing Gaskets
shall be of EPDM or pvc extrusions. Assembly screws shall be of plated steel _ Glass
shall have a minimum bite of 5/8 " on the perimeter. Glass type shall be as defined on
the window schedule. All storefront framing and glass assemblies shall be impact
rated .
PART�IMSH
A . All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes. Aluminum
sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide
treatment. Color shall be:
a) Dark Bronze AA M12 C22
b) Medium Bronze A42/44
AA M12 C22 A40
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d) Black AA M12 C22 A44
2 . Powder coated material shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with
one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
b) TIGER DRYLAC- SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
B . The option and color selected for this project is : (For the I.R.C. Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016 - white, with a 6 year warranty).
PART 4 - ERECTION
A. The Flush Glazed storefronts stem specified shall be installed, in properly prepared
openings, level, plumb and in alignment and consistent with acceptable erection
techniques and practices . Frames shall be secured to the walls/jambs with approved
fasteners at 12 " on center and in accordance with the plan details.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08410- 1
2 . Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 ") under
bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise
indicated.
3 . 04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
B . Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment, if not shown, lay walls with 3/8 " joints.
C . Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by
other materials , unless otherwise indicated .
D . Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
E . Remove masonry units disturbed after laying, clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do
not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in
position . If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in
fresh mortar.
F . Collar Joints:
After each course is laid, fill the vertical longitudinal joint betweenwythes-solidly
and with mortar for all exterior walls .
G. Comers :
Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at comers, unless otherwise
shown .
1 . For horizontally reinforces masonry, provide continuity at corners with
prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry bonding.
H. Intersecting and Abutting Walls:
If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with 8 " maximum offsets and
provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o. c. , vertically, or omit
blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2 '-0 " o. c. vertically. Form
anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1 - 1 /2 " x 1 /4 " x 2'-0" long with ends turned
up not less than 2 " or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar-filled cores.
1
04230-7
H . Downspouts :
Install downspouts at centers/locations per the drawings and building elevations. 1
Utilize extruded or formed-closed type downspouts with thickness and finish as )
listed in this specification. Utilize the manufacturer' s connecting sleeves at all
joints .
1 . When a surface water shed collection system is called for on the
drawings, provide kick-out elbows at the termination base of each
downspout at 45 or 75 degrees and provide concrete splash blocks at
each downspout to control erosion.
2 . When a subgrade water collection system is called for on the drawings ,
provide a direct tie-in to the underground roof drainage and collection
system .
J . Wall Brackets :
Install manufacturer' s wall brackets on downspouts at a maximum spacing of 5' .
Secure to stucco with 1 . 5 " stainless expansion fasteners . Fasten downspouts with
(4) 1 /811 x 3/8 " pop-rivets per bracket .
K . Outlet Tubes :
Provide stainless steel outlet tubes at connections of gutters to downspouts with '/2"
flanges riveted in place with (4) 1 /8 " x 1 /4 " pop rivets. Hold downspouts 1 " off of
the wall .
* * *END OF SECTION '
07710-2
SECTION 08410 - FLUSH GLAZE STOREFRONT WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Store front framing shall be impact rated and detailed on the Architectural drawings
and as manufactured to the design and specifications of one of the following :
Arch Aluminum & Glass Company or Kawneer.
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Framing System shall have a face dimension of 1 .250 " and a depth of 4- 1 /2 " for
both vertical and horizontal members . (Sections may vary w/manufacturer) All
sections shall be of extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and a TS temper. Glazing Gaskets
shall be of EPDM or pvc extrusions. Assembly screws shall be of plated steel _ Glass
shall have a minimum bite of 5/8 " on the perimeter. Glass type shall be as defined on
the window schedule. All storefront framing and glass assemblies shall be impact
rated .
PART�IMSH
A . All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes. Aluminum
sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide
treatment. Color shall be:
a) Dark Bronze AA M12 C22
b) Medium Bronze A42/44
AA M12 C22 A40
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d) Black AA M12 C22 A44
2 . Powder coated material shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with
one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
b) TIGER DRYLAC- SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
B . The option and color selected for this project is : (For the I.R.C. Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016 - white, with a 6 year warranty).
PART 4 - ERECTION
A. The Flush Glazed storefronts stem specified shall be installed, in properly prepared
openings, level, plumb and in alignment and consistent with acceptable erection
techniques and practices . Frames shall be secured to the walls/jambs with approved
fasteners at 12 " on center and in accordance with the plan details.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08410- 1
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor for this section shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment
necessary to deliver and install all windows as specified and/or as indicated on
Drawings . Shop drawings are required for this portion of the work.
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
A. Aluminum windows shall be manufactured by one of the following :
I • Superior Window Corporation
2 . Windor Corp.
3 . E. S .P. Window Corporation
4 . C . G.I. Construction Glass Industries, Miami
S . Alcan Building Products
6. Alenco Windows
7. Kinco, Inc .
8 . P. G. T. Progressive Glass Technologies
9 . T.M. Windows
B . All manufacturers windows shall comply with the following:
HC- 110 Rated with 3/16 " glass (non-impact)
HC-70 Rated with Sentryglas (impact resistant)
HC-90/120/220 Rated with SaJlex Laminated glass (impact resistant)
DH-HC-50 AAMA Rating
ANSI/AAMA Specification 302 .9 -- 1977
C1201 (Safety glaze certain fixed lights)
ASTME 283073 , E330-707 E331 -70
ASTMC6P3CB & A (insulated glass)
AAMA Specification DHBIHP96 and HSB2HP63
No water infiltration at 16. 5 PSF of positive pressure
Air Infiltration = . 07 CFM/SQ.FT. (Or les) at pressure differential of 6.24 PSF
Products must have current dade county (or equivalent testing) approval
1 . 03 MATERIALS
A. Frames, sash and vent members shall be constructed of extruded 6063 -T6
aluminum alloy, unless otherwise specified. Glazing beads shall be extruded 6063 -
TS aluminum alloy.
i
08520-1
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes jomt -sealants for tite following applications, including those specified by reference
to this Section: following applications :
1 . Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces :
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry concrete walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and
elevator entrances.
f Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated .
2 . Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
b. Other joints as indicated .
B . Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing' for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall' for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to
reduce sound transmission.
3 . Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile Work" for sealing tile joints.
4. Division 9 Section "Lay-in Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical
ceilings.
1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomerici.oint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
07900 - 1
J . Non-bearing Interior Partitions:
Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless \ \
otherwise shown.
1 . Wedge non-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate or metal . Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of
structure above approaches final position.
3 . 05 LINTELS
A. Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels . Cure precast lintels
before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
B . For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintels units
with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
C . Provide minimum bearing of 8 " at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. When field observation by the Architect or the Owner' s Agent which generates
questions relating to tolerance or quality control , the Contractor shall employ, at his
own expense, a testing laboratory experienced in performing types of masonry field
quality control tests for masonry indicated . Comply with requirements for
qualification and acceptance per tolerances stipulated within this section .
B . Unit Test Method : For each block type specified per ASTM C90 . .
C . Mortar Tests :
For each type indicated , test mortar by methods of sampling and testing of ASTM
C-780 . Conduct tests no less frequently than that required to evaluate mortar used
to install each increment of masonry units indicated above from which samples are
taken for testing.
D . Prism Test Method:
1 . Compression Test :
If required by Architect, test masonry prisms by methods of sampling and
testing of ASTM E-447 , Method B .
2 . Evaluation of Quality Control Tests:
Masonry work, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory if results from construction
quality control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.
4-
04230-8
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor for this section shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment
necessary to deliver and install all windows as specified and/or as indicated on
Drawings . Shop drawings are required for this portion of the work.
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
A. Aluminum windows shall be manufactured by one of the following :
I • Superior Window Corporation
2 . Windor Corp.
3 . E. S .P. Window Corporation
4 . C . G.I. Construction Glass Industries, Miami
S . Alcan Building Products
6. Alenco Windows
7. Kinco, Inc .
8 . P. G. T. Progressive Glass Technologies
9 . T.M. Windows
B . All manufacturers windows shall comply with the following:
HC- 110 Rated with 3/16 " glass (non-impact)
HC-70 Rated with Sentryglas (impact resistant)
HC-90/120/220 Rated with SaJlex Laminated glass (impact resistant)
DH-HC-50 AAMA Rating
ANSI/AAMA Specification 302 .9 -- 1977
C1201 (Safety glaze certain fixed lights)
ASTME 283073 , E330-707 E331 -70
ASTMC6P3CB & A (insulated glass)
AAMA Specification DHBIHP96 and HSB2HP63
No water infiltration at 16. 5 PSF of positive pressure
Air Infiltration = . 07 CFM/SQ.FT. (Or les) at pressure differential of 6.24 PSF
Products must have current dade county (or equivalent testing) approval
1 . 03 MATERIALS
A. Frames, sash and vent members shall be constructed of extruded 6063 -T6
aluminum alloy, unless otherwise specified. Glazing beads shall be extruded 6063 -
TS aluminum alloy.
i
08520-1
1 . 04 CONSTRUCTION of
-3/4 " inches and a
thickness
mum depth
A. Frme
of .a080 at frame ,S090 members hallat vent and ave a 1 045 at glaz nglbead! through the main members
of the vertical frame jambs.
1 .05 HA__RDWARE
A. Windows shall be provided with adjustable spiral sash balances or block and tackle
balances . Suitable latches shall be provided to maintain the sash secure when in a
sash must also have an integrally extruded hand lift for
closed position. Louver
manually opening or closing the lower sash.
1 .06 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. The vertical portion of all sash members shall be provided with wool pile fabric
weather stripping on both the interior and exterior faces to properly contact main
frame . All joints between frame jambs and sill shall be scaled with butyl
compound .
1 . 07 GLAZING
A. All sash members shall be glazed with specified glass and shall be back bedded
ound. Glass shall be retained by extruded bead . Finish to
with butyl glazing comp
match window finish.
] . p8 SCREENS aluminum with
A Scded
reens
shall be fabricated frames shall be famom ished to match window fmishn wall thickness
Scr
1 . 09 FINISH
A. All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Aluminum sections shall be coated with one of the following options .
] , Anodized material :
shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment and the
color shall be one of the following:
a. Dark Bronze AA M12 C22 A42/44
b. Medium Bronze AA M12 C22 A40
C . Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d . Black AA M12 C22 A44
08520-2
3 . Protection :
Provide final protection and maintain conditions in an acceptable manner to
ensure that the final unit masonry work is without damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion .
'END OF SECTION* * *
04230-9
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B . Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing
the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.
E. SWRJ Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant
Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in
optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in " Quality Assurance"
Article.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application .
I. Product Test Reports : Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements .
J . Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation
of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding
the Notice to Proceed with commencement of the Work.
I . Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 .
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3 . Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance
with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods .
07900 - 2
1 . 04 CONSTRUCTION of
-3/4 " inches and a
thickness
mum depth
A. Frme
of .a080 at frame ,S090 members hallat vent and ave a 1 045 at glaz nglbead! through the main members
of the vertical frame jambs.
1 .05 HA__RDWARE
A. Windows shall be provided with adjustable spiral sash balances or block and tackle
balances . Suitable latches shall be provided to maintain the sash secure when in a
sash must also have an integrally extruded hand lift for
closed position. Louver
manually opening or closing the lower sash.
1 .06 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. The vertical portion of all sash members shall be provided with wool pile fabric
weather stripping on both the interior and exterior faces to properly contact main
frame . All joints between frame jambs and sill shall be scaled with butyl
compound .
1 . 07 GLAZING
A. All sash members shall be glazed with specified glass and shall be back bedded
ound. Glass shall be retained by extruded bead . Finish to
with butyl glazing comp
match window finish.
] . p8 SCREENS aluminum with
A Scded
reens
shall be fabricated frames shall be famom ished to match window fmishn wall thickness
Scr
1 . 09 FINISH
A. All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Aluminum sections shall be coated with one of the following options .
] , Anodized material :
shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment and the
color shall be one of the following:
a. Dark Bronze AA M12 C22 A42/44
b. Medium Bronze AA M12 C22 A40
C . Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d . Black AA M12 C22 A44
08520-2
2 • Powder coated material :
shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following :
a• ARCHKOTE 6000 - 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 . 2- 85
b. TIGER DRYLAC - SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
Electrostatically sprayed and baked on enamel and the color shall be as
Selected by the Architect.
3 • Clear Anodized Finish on factory Aluminum .
4 . Natural Mill Finish aluminum .
B . The option and color selected for this project is : Single hung windows with white
powdercoated frames, RAL 9010, with non-impact rated insulated glass . Gr
tint exterior pane and clear interior pane. Operable impact shutters shaay
ll be
provided per the plans at each window.
1 . 10 GRILLES
A . When called for, shall be constructed of extruded aluminum and are snapped in
place, or fixed, on either the inside face and/or outside face of the glass. The color
of the grilles shall match the window frames .
2 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Shall be in accordance with approved testing data and in accordance with the
Architect's details for adjacent sealants, interior and exterior finishes .
B . Fasteners shall be of the type and locations as called out in the product testing data.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08520-3
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion
to Projectjoint substrates as follows:
1 . Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when testjoints will be erected.
4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to jo nt substrates
or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint
substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
5 . Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates dwing testing.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A . Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions :
1 . When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by,joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3 . Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated .
4 . Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1 . Warranty Period: two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants
from the following:
1 . Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or
errors attributable to design or construction.
2 . Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3 . Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
07900 - 3
2 • Powder coated material :
shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following :
a• ARCHKOTE 6000 - 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 . 2- 85
b. TIGER DRYLAC - SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
Electrostatically sprayed and baked on enamel and the color shall be as
Selected by the Architect.
3 • Clear Anodized Finish on factory Aluminum .
4 . Natural Mill Finish aluminum .
B . The option and color selected for this project is : Single hung windows with white
powdercoated frames, RAL 9010, with non-impact rated insulated glass . Gr
tint exterior pane and clear interior pane. Operable impact shutters shaay
ll be
provided per the plans at each window.
1 . 10 GRILLES
A . When called for, shall be constructed of extruded aluminum and are snapped in
place, or fixed, on either the inside face and/or outside face of the glass. The color
of the grilles shall match the window frames .
2 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Shall be in accordance with approved testing data and in accordance with the
Architect's details for adjacent sealants, interior and exterior finishes .
B . Fasteners shall be of the type and locations as called out in the product testing data.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08520-3
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A . Rough Hardware
B . Casework Hardware
C . Installation of Hardware
1 . 02 GENERAL
A. All exterior doors shall open outward or in direction of travel to an exit.
B . Copies of the Hardware Schedule, templates and keying schedules shall be submitted
to the Architect and approved before ordering.
C . Exchange schedules and template lists, with related trades, for coordination with their
Shop Drawings.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
\ A . The hardware supplier shall provide a written guarantee that all materials furnished
under this Section will be free from defects in the materials and the workmanship for
a period of one ( 1 ) year from the date of a final " Certificate of Acceptance".
B . The hardware supplier, after a complete and thorough inspection by the Architect,
shall further certify that all items furnished under this Section have been properly
located , in accordance with the Hardware Schedule and the manufacturer ' s
instructions.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A . Three (3) copies of the Hardware Schedule shall be submitted for approval . Door
numbers and hardware groups are not to be changed.
B . Approval of the Hardware Schedule shall be for type, operation and finish only.
1 . 05 DELIVERY
A. Each item of hardware shall be delivered to job site, packaged separately, complete
with the necessary fasteners, screws and anchors. Provide templates and/or
instructions as required.
j B . Mark each item so as to correspond with the Hardware Schedule, identifying contents
- J and defining location.
08700- 1
SECTION 04270 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Glass Blocks provided by GLASS BLOCK COMPANY.
B . Mortar & Sealants.
C. Glass Block Accessories.
1 . 02 RELATED WORK
A . Section 07600, Flashings.
B . Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
1 .03 PERFORMANCE
A. Furnish all labor and materials to install glass block system detailed and specified,
complete with expansion strips, packing panel reinforcing, panel anchors, asphalt
emulsion, and other items for complete installation.
B . Work not covered as part of installation of glass block system is preparation of
structure for glass block panels, such as chases, stiffeners, lintels, sills, flashings,
except where specified in this Section.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data:
Provide data sheet and installation instructions .
B . Samples :
Submit actual glass block for approval of color, design and pattern .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. GLASS BLOCKS from approved manufacturer.
1 . Non-Load bearing, partially evacuated, hollow glass masonry units permanently
sealed by heat-fused joint.
2. Color: (Clear)
04270-1
PART2 - PRODUCTS �` \
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
2 .3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
type, grade, class, and uses related toexposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177 .2600.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant:
1 . Available Products:
a. Pacific Polymers, Inc. ; Elastosea1230 Type I (Gun Grade).
b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-7000.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3 . Class: 25 .
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
B . Available Products:
1 . Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
2 . Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc. ; Sonolac.
3 . Tremco; Tremflex 834 .
07900 - 4
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A . Rough Hardware
B . Casework Hardware
C . Installation of Hardware
1 . 02 GENERAL
A. All exterior doors shall open outward or in direction of travel to an exit.
B . Copies of the Hardware Schedule, templates and keying schedules shall be submitted
to the Architect and approved before ordering.
C . Exchange schedules and template lists, with related trades, for coordination with their
Shop Drawings.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
\ A . The hardware supplier shall provide a written guarantee that all materials furnished
under this Section will be free from defects in the materials and the workmanship for
a period of one ( 1 ) year from the date of a final " Certificate of Acceptance".
B . The hardware supplier, after a complete and thorough inspection by the Architect,
shall further certify that all items furnished under this Section have been properly
located , in accordance with the Hardware Schedule and the manufacturer ' s
instructions.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A . Three (3) copies of the Hardware Schedule shall be submitted for approval . Door
numbers and hardware groups are not to be changed.
B . Approval of the Hardware Schedule shall be for type, operation and finish only.
1 . 05 DELIVERY
A. Each item of hardware shall be delivered to job site, packaged separately, complete
with the necessary fasteners, screws and anchors. Provide templates and/or
instructions as required.
j B . Mark each item so as to correspond with the Hardware Schedule, identifying contents
- J and defining location.
08700- 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 HINGES
A . All Hinges shall be STANLEY , HAGER, McKINNEY.
B . Use three hinges per door leaf on all doors up to a door height of 7 -6 " and an extra
hinge for each additional thirty (30) inches of door height as noted .
C . providthe
groupse Provode non-removable wsize and type hinges unless ise noted in the hardware
removable pins for exterior doors.
I . Exterior Doors : Stainless Steel
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2"
2 . Interior Doors with US26D finish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
3 . Interior Doors without Closfinish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
D . Finish {
I . Exterior Doors: Stainless Steel
2 . Interior Doors : Satin Chromium Plated Finish
2 .02 LOCKS & EXIT DEVICES
A . All locksets shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE. All
locks shall have a minimum throw of ''/z" . Finish to be per the Finish Hardware
Schedule. Functioning of the locks shall be as designated in the hardware groups.
2 .03 CLOSING DEVICES
losers shall be provided by one manufacturer and guaranteed for
A . All hydraulic door c
five (5) years.
B . Door Closers shall be LCN at all doors per schedule, fully hydraulic , full rack and
pinion action. Closers shall have a separate adjustments for latch speed, general
speed and back check. All closers and accessories, except special purpose types,
whether applied to hinge side , stop face, over door or on bracket, shall be non-handed.
All closers are to be installed on the room side of the door except where noted in the
Hardware Schedule. All closers are to be installed with thru-bolts and five screws
in the foot. 08700-2
2 .5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
_ A . Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed
joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1 . Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2 .6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance. Backing rods used in combination with silicone sealants shall be soft rod "open cell" to
prevent off-grassing bubbles in the cured surface. All other backing rods shall be "closed cell".
C . Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. When proposing paintable silicones using acrylic latex paints make special consideration that these
products must be painted within seven days of placement of sealants. Refer to manufacturer' s literature
for proper sequence of applications.
2 .7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to
joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to j oints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 EXAMINATION
07900 - 5
3 . Size:(actual)
7 -314 in. x 7-3/4 in. x 4 in. thick, impact rated, for mortar installation.
4 . Pattern :
"Endura" for privacy.
5 . Glass Block as Manufactured by:
a. PC Glass Block Products
b. American Glass Block
C . Solaris Glass Blocks
d. Week Glass Blocks
e . Glass Masonry, Inc.
B . Mortar:
1 . Masonry Cement:
ASTM C-91 , white, for high strength use.
2 . Portland Cement:
ASTM C- 150, Type 1 , white .
3 . Hydrated Lime:
ASTM C-2071 Type S , high-calcium, pressure hydrated dolomite with min.
0 .92 percent active ingredients, completely hydrated .
4 . Sand:
ASTM C- 144.
5 . Integral Waterproofer:
Use one of the following:
a. "Anti-Hydro" Waterproofer . Model Hydracide Powder, {
Masterbuilders Co. Model Omicron Motarproofing.
b . Latex Type:
Laticrete International, Model Laticrete 8510 , (high- strength, weather-
resistant mortar and fast-bonding agent) .
C . Glass Block Accessories :
I . Panel Anchors:
No . 20 gauge perforated steel strips, 24" long x 1 -3 /4" wide, galvanized after
perforating with 2" long rounded slots and alternating notches on side of strip.
2 . Expansion Strips:
Dense fibrous glass batt for at head, 3 /8" x 4- 1 /8 " x 24" for chase
construction .
3 . Panel Reinforcing:
Double wire mesh formed of two parallel wires having 2" centers and
electrically welded cross wires on regular intervals, galvanized.
4. Secure perimeter aluminum frame to P .T . 2 X 6 jambs, sill and head with # 8
X 1 ''/2" flat head galvanized screws at 16 inches on center. All screws to be
secured through all shims. Per NOA No . 04-0301 .01 . Secure P .T. jambs in
accordance with plan details.
04270-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 HINGES
A . All Hinges shall be STANLEY , HAGER, McKINNEY.
B . Use three hinges per door leaf on all doors up to a door height of 7 -6 " and an extra
hinge for each additional thirty (30) inches of door height as noted .
C . providthe
groupse Provode non-removable wsize and type hinges unless ise noted in the hardware
removable pins for exterior doors.
I . Exterior Doors : Stainless Steel
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2"
2 . Interior Doors with US26D finish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
3 . Interior Doors without Closfinish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
D . Finish {
I . Exterior Doors: Stainless Steel
2 . Interior Doors : Satin Chromium Plated Finish
2 .02 LOCKS & EXIT DEVICES
A . All locksets shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE. All
locks shall have a minimum throw of ''/z" . Finish to be per the Finish Hardware
Schedule. Functioning of the locks shall be as designated in the hardware groups.
2 .03 CLOSING DEVICES
losers shall be provided by one manufacturer and guaranteed for
A . All hydraulic door c
five (5) years.
B . Door Closers shall be LCN at all doors per schedule, fully hydraulic , full rack and
pinion action. Closers shall have a separate adjustments for latch speed, general
speed and back check. All closers and accessories, except special purpose types,
whether applied to hinge side , stop face, over door or on bracket, shall be non-handed.
All closers are to be installed on the room side of the door except where noted in the
Hardware Schedule. All closers are to be installed with thru-bolts and five screws
in the foot. 08700-2
2 . 04 STOPS
A . Wall Stops shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE
SCHEDULE, Model WB I I or 50C/60C as required by the wall conditions . Wall
stops to be utilized on interior/exterior frame walls to have solid wood backing to
Prevent drywall failure. Wall Stops WBI I should be mounted to the wood base .
Areas with Vinyl or Ceramic Tile Base should utilize the wall stops 50C/60C.
2 . 05 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP
A . Thresholds and Weather stripping shall be PEMKO, to match the types and sizes
indicated on the Hardware Schedule or detailed on the drawings .
B - Provide screws and anchors as required .
C . Finish to be per Schedule.
2 . 06 PLACEMENT OF HARDWARd
Various items shall have the following heights and locations, unless otherwise indicated .
(Heights are shown from finish floor to center line of item) :
J
A. Hinges : Standard Placement
B . Cylindrical Lockset 38 "
C . Closer per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of opening. All closers
to be mounted on room side of door.
D . Stops:
I • Wall : On wall where knob or pull hits.
2 • Floor: As per standard practice.
3 • Chain Door: As per standard practice.
4. Over-Head : Per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of
opening. All Over-Head stops to be mounted on room side of door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 KEYING
A. All cylinder locks shall be keyed to Owner' s EXISTING system. Coordinate with
Owner as to manufacturer and type. .
B . Submit keying schedule, based on the instructions and prior approval of the Owner' s
representative, for final approval before ordering locks.
08700.3
D . Miscellaneous Accessories :
1 . Asphalt Emulsion :
Henry , s
2 . Packing :
Polyethylene foam, neoprene, or filler compatible with joint sealant as specified
in Section 07900, Joint Sealers.
3 . Sealant:
Non-staining, waterproof joint sealant as specified in Section 07900, Joint
Sealers.
4 . Water Repellant Coating:
Solvent type penetrating, clear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Verify items to be built-in, pocket recesses, or chases to receive glass blocks are
complete, accurately placed and dimensioned.
B . Clean glass block of foreign substances to insure bonding with mortar.
C. Coordinate placement of steel channels.
1
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . General :
1 . Cover sill area with heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to serve as bond breaker
for fire rated panel systems and allow to dry before placing mortar.
2 . Adhere expansion strips in place at head and j ambs using asphalt emulsion and
insure strips extend to sill in order to isolate glass block from adjacent
construction.
B . Mortar:
1 . Mix mortar materials minimum 3 minutes with maximum amount of water to
produce workable consistency in mechanical batch mixer, to comply with
ASTM C-780.
2 . Fire Rated Panels - Type S :
1 part masonry cement, 1/2 part portland cement, sand min. 2- 1 /4 to max.
3 times volume of cement.
04270-3
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant )
performance.
B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected .
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements :
1 . Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations
above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates
include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3 . Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4 . Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion ofjoint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates
include the following:
a . Metal .
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not
allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
07900 - 6
2 . 04 STOPS
A . Wall Stops shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE
SCHEDULE, Model WB I I or 50C/60C as required by the wall conditions . Wall
stops to be utilized on interior/exterior frame walls to have solid wood backing to
Prevent drywall failure. Wall Stops WBI I should be mounted to the wood base .
Areas with Vinyl or Ceramic Tile Base should utilize the wall stops 50C/60C.
2 . 05 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP
A . Thresholds and Weather stripping shall be PEMKO, to match the types and sizes
indicated on the Hardware Schedule or detailed on the drawings .
B - Provide screws and anchors as required .
C . Finish to be per Schedule.
2 . 06 PLACEMENT OF HARDWARd
Various items shall have the following heights and locations, unless otherwise indicated .
(Heights are shown from finish floor to center line of item) :
J
A. Hinges : Standard Placement
B . Cylindrical Lockset 38 "
C . Closer per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of opening. All closers
to be mounted on room side of door.
D . Stops:
I • Wall : On wall where knob or pull hits.
2 • Floor: As per standard practice.
3 • Chain Door: As per standard practice.
4. Over-Head : Per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of
opening. All Over-Head stops to be mounted on room side of door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 KEYING
A. All cylinder locks shall be keyed to Owner' s EXISTING system. Coordinate with
Owner as to manufacturer and type. .
B . Submit keying schedule, based on the instructions and prior approval of the Owner' s
representative, for final approval before ordering locks.
08700.3
C . Delivery l
l . All locks are to be delivered to hn job te wthomaster the
key, if required rmanent Y All . l
locks are to be keyed to the existing owner' s
2 . A representative of the Hardware Supplier, uponthe completion of the project,
shall check all locks for proper location, operation and keying as well as
deactivate the construction-key operation and transfer all locks to a permanent
key operation .
ly
3 . All permanent keys
number d location hand all bshall oberturned identified
directly tagged
the t Owner' s
representative.
4 _ Furnish six (6) master keys of each set to the Owner .
3 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE GROUP NUMBERS
The following Hardware Schedule is to be used as a general guide . Special or unusual
conditions not covered in the schedule will have hardware of a similar type and quality to
meet the job conditions , and it shall be the hardware consultant' s responsibility to insure that
all hardware is supplied to meet job requirements and produce a complete job .
GENERAL NOTES
1 . HARDWARE LISTED TAKEN FROM THE FOLLOWING CATALOGS :
HAGER Butts
CORBIN -RUSSWIN Locks
LCN Closers
GLYNN JOHNSON Stops
PEMKO Thresholds
Weather Stripping
* A *END OF SECTION '
08700-4
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard : Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings .
3 . Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
of j oints.
F. Install sealants us ng proven tech^.iques hat comply wif the 'UIlow ug and at t he Barite lime backings are
installed:
1 . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates .
2- Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3 . - Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants : Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to elirninate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1 1 . Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints .
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do - not discolor -
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3 . Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4 . Provide flushjoint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193 .
5 . Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in
ASTM C 1193 .
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooledjoints .
IT Install sealants to size and shape shown on drawings, or, if not shown, with slightly concave surfaces .
a. The minimum opening should be 1 /4 ".
b. The opening should be at least 4 times the maximum movement of the sealant.
c. The sealant should be more than 1 /4 " and less than 1/2" deep.
d. The depth of the sealant should be no greater than the width.
e. No joint to receive sealant should be less than 1/4" deep.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows :
I . Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows :
07900 - 7
3 . Non-Fire Rated Panels:
1 part masonry cement, 1 /4 part portland cement, 1 /4 part lime, sand min . 2- 1 /4
to max . 3 time volume of cement and lime.
4 . Average Compressive Strength:
Type S - 1800 psi at 28 days.
5 . Do not retemper mortar.
C. Setting Glass Block:
1 . Set first course of glass block on full mortar bed over asphalt emulsion or
directly on sill/surface, with no furrowing.
2 . Use rubber mallet to tap units into position; do not use steel tools on glass
blocks for adjustments.
3 . Set each course of glass blocks in full mortar bed, with no furrowing.
4 . Keep expansion strip joints free of mortar.
5 . Rake out joints to accommodate sealant and pointing mortar and brush raked
joints clean for Type S mortar.
6 . Fill raked joints with pointing mortar, packing and working into voids, and t\_,
neatly tool surface to concave joint before mortar achieves final set.
7 . For non-rated panels tool joints concave, as work progresses, to uniform
appearance .
D . Placing Anchors and Reinforcing:
1 . Bend panel anchors within expansion joint, space 24 inches apart vertically to
coincide with panel reinforcing.
2 . Bed panel anchors in mortar joint of glass block panel with min. 12 " of anchor
extending into glass block joint on top of panel reinforcing.
3 . Place panel reinforcing in horizontal joints of glass block panel on 24 " centers
vertically, continuous from side to side.
4 . Lap panel reinforcing min. 6" for sections of insufficient length.
5 . Do not bridge expansion joints with panel reinforcing.
04270-4
C . Delivery l
l . All locks are to be delivered to hn job te wthomaster the
key, if required rmanent Y All . l
locks are to be keyed to the existing owner' s
2 . A representative of the Hardware Supplier, uponthe completion of the project,
shall check all locks for proper location, operation and keying as well as
deactivate the construction-key operation and transfer all locks to a permanent
key operation .
ly
3 . All permanent keys
number d location hand all bshall oberturned identified
directly tagged
the t Owner' s
representative.
4 _ Furnish six (6) master keys of each set to the Owner .
3 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE GROUP NUMBERS
The following Hardware Schedule is to be used as a general guide . Special or unusual
conditions not covered in the schedule will have hardware of a similar type and quality to
meet the job conditions , and it shall be the hardware consultant' s responsibility to insure that
all hardware is supplied to meet job requirements and produce a complete job .
GENERAL NOTES
1 . HARDWARE LISTED TAKEN FROM THE FOLLOWING CATALOGS :
HAGER Butts
CORBIN -RUSSWIN Locks
LCN Closers
GLYNN JOHNSON Stops
PEMKO Thresholds
Weather Stripping
* A *END OF SECTION '
08700-4
SLC ETON x V " ^ DOOR I WISH HA R71 W A b G SCHEDULE(INDiANRNERCOUNTyI'ARKSMAm W � � .uW � • nr+iluLL�
NANCE COMPLEX PROJECT)
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The Door Hardware Schedule has been prepared by:
Lotspeich Company of Florida, Inc.
7435 Central Industrial Drive
Riviera Beach , FL 33404
Phone : 561-848-3040
Fax : 561 -843-9020
Consultant: Mr. Ed Cutler
Date : 6 March 2009
The following Schedule shall be utilized by the General Contractor to establiash
price for door hardware. The Contractor's Final Door Schedule for
construction purposes complete with manufacturer's catalog cuts, must be
submitted to the Architect for review in accordance with the Su
of this specifications manual. bmittal Section
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08710-1
6. Apply half width of mortar in joint, do not furrow, and press panel reinforcing
into mortar bed.
7. Apply remaining mortar over panel reinforcing and lay next course of glass
block, full bedded, with no furrowing or mortar.
E. Sealant :
1 . Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealers, for materials .
2 . Tape surface of glass block using duct tape or similar material for uniform
sealant appearance.
3 . Install sealant backing rod in joint to required depth.
4 . Apply joint sealant to joint and tool concave.
5 . Remove tape after initial set has been achieved .
F. Tolerances :
1 . Joint Width:
Uniformly 1 /4 "
i
2. Variation from Plane to Unit to Adjacent Unit :
Max. 1 /32 in.
3 . Variation from Panel to Panel :
Max . 1 /16 in .
4 . Pointing Mortar Accommodation :
Rake joints 5/8 in. to 3 /4 in.
3 .03 CLEANING
A. Use wire brush to lightly dislodge extra materials from faces of blocks and edges of
joints, do not scrape or brush joint .
B . Use No. 3 or No. 4 steel wool to remove remaining mortar from faces of glass blocks,
do not rub joints.
C . Apply water repellant coating to mortar joints after completion of cleaning for exterior
glass block panels and interior glass block panels exposed to high incidence of dirt.
J * * *END OF SECTION* * *
04270-5
a. Perform 10 tests for the fust 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant andjoint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2 . Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull
Tab in Appendix XI in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application
indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by
extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side . Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
3 . Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with
specified requirements . Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4 . Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements .
S . Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names
of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion
results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration; and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used
originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant
contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results : Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance
with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements . Retest failed applications until test
results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3 .5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
* * * END OF SECTION
07900 - 8
SLC ETON x V " ^ DOOR I WISH HA R71 W A b G SCHEDULE(INDiANRNERCOUNTyI'ARKSMAm W � � .uW � • nr+iluLL�
NANCE COMPLEX PROJECT)
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The Door Hardware Schedule has been prepared by:
Lotspeich Company of Florida, Inc.
7435 Central Industrial Drive
Riviera Beach , FL 33404
Phone : 561-848-3040
Fax : 561 -843-9020
Consultant: Mr. Ed Cutler
Date : 6 March 2009
The following Schedule shall be utilized by the General Contractor to establiash
price for door hardware. The Contractor's Final Door Schedule for
construction purposes complete with manufacturer's catalog cuts, must be
submitted to the Architect for review in accordance with the Su
of this specifications manual. bmittal Section
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08710-1
® Since 1928
Lff
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT / DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
DIVISION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Wood Doors
B . Finish Hardware Section 08200
Section 08700
C . Painting
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
Hollow Metal Work shall be manufactured by one of the following or equal :
A . Ceco Corporation
B . Steelcraft
C. Firedoor Corporation of Florida
D. Quality Engineered Products Co . , Inc. , Tampa, FL
E. Republic Steel Doors & Frames, Pembroke Park, FL
F. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
G. Curries
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS - SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Contract Conditions, covering each type
of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented
by suitable schedules covering doors and frames.
B . Show glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors .
1 .04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Delivery:
Deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers or wrappings
clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and brand designation, door schedule
number, referenced specification number, type, class and rating as applicable.
B. Storage:
Store products in an approved dry area; protected from contact with soil and from
exposure to the elements. Keep products dry at all times.
C . Handling:
' Handle products in a manner that will prevent breakage and damage to products .
J
08100-1
® Since 1928
Lff
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT / DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL
- - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON
HA HAGER
IV H . B . IVES
LC LCN CLOSERS
LU LUND EQUIPMENT CO . INC
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
VO VON DUPRIN
I
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY
US26D CHROMIUM PLATED , DULL
26D SATIN CHROME
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
SP28 LACQUER SPRAYED ALUMINUM
DIVISION 51 METALS
SECTION 05030 - POWDERED COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Powdered coating applied to metal surfaces.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A . Miscellaneous Metals - Section 05500.
B . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100.
C . Aluminum Door Frames , Entrances and Storefronts - Section 08400.
D. Aluminum Windows - Section 08520-
E. Glazed Curtain Walls - Section 08900 .
F. Louvers And Vents - Section 10200 ,
G. Sectional Overhead Doors - Section 08360 .
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Properly identified product data.
C . Manufacturer' s full range of custom colors , texture and gloss.
B . Manufacturer ' s data sheet including cleaning recommendations .
1 . 04 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturer' s Association (AAMA) :
1 . AAMA 605 .2 -90 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels, with the following exceptions.
a) Five year South Florida exposure test will be met effective March 1996.
b) Due to environmental considerations acid chromate surface preparation is
not used.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
I . ASTM D117- 89 Guide to Test Methods and Specifications For Electrical
Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin.
2 . ASTM D522-85 Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings
With Conical Mandrel Apparatus.
J 3 . ASTM D523 - 85 Test Method for Specular Gloss .
05030-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ll
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Frames (Door)
I . Exterior : 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated, bonderized sheet steel .
Exterior: 14 gauge A- 60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel, over G-0" in
width. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on all frames mounted to brick
veneers or prclmished split-faced masonry products in lieu of the
standard 1 /2 " .
2 . Interior: 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel .
Interior: over 4'-0 : in width, 14 gauge. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on
all frames rnounted to brick veneers or grefinished split-faced masonry
products in lieu of the standard 1 /2 " .
B . Hardware Reinforcement (Frame - Steel
g uge by 1 - 112 " or 1 -5 /8" x 10"
? . Hinges :
2 . Closers and holders : 12 gauge by 16 "
3 . Strikes : 1 - 1 /4" x 4-7 /8 " ANSI 16gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. 16 gauge
1 - 118 " x 3 - 1 /2" deadlock strike 12 gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. No lip 16 gauge
C . Frames (Window)
I . Exterior: 14 gauge A-60 galycoated, bonderized sheet steel
2 . Interior : 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel
D . Doors
1 . Exterior:
Face sheets 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI 100
Grade 1II, Model 2, full flush, hollow metal, seamless construction. Closed
top and bottom edges flush with face sheets . Extra heavy duty .
2 . Interior : 100
Face sheet's 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI Closed ed
Grade 11I, Model 3 , full flush, hollow metal , seamless construction.
top and bottom edged flush with face sheets.
3 . Internal Stiffeners :
Currie 707 with polystyrene core or approved equal.
4 . Sound Deadening:
Type standard with the manufacturer.
08100-2
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL
- - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON
HA HAGER
IV H . B . IVES
LC LCN CLOSERS
LU LUND EQUIPMENT CO . INC
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
VO VON DUPRIN
I
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY
US26D CHROMIUM PLATED , DULL
26D SATIN CHROME
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
SP28 LACQUER SPRAYED ALUMINUM
Door Index Page 3
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 2
5 4
6 5
] 6
8 ]
9 8
10 SA
11 9
12 5A
13 9
14 9
15 30
16 10
17 11
16 11
19 11
20 11
21 7A
22 12
23 6
24 5
9999 13
5 • Hardware Reinforcement - Steel :
a. Hinges : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /2 " or 1 -5/8 " x 10 "
b. Closers and Holders : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/4 " x 10 "
C. Locks : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 "
d• Push/pull plates :
16 ga. x 14 " x 14 "
e. Panic bars : 3 " x 8 " and 4 " x 24 " (24 ga.)
E Glazing and louver beads : 18 ga.
9 - Coordinator Reinf : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/8 " x 15 - 1 /2 "
6• Clips, Anchors, Bolts, Screws and Rivets:
Steel, types standard with the manufacturer.
7 . Metallic filler.
FS TT-F-322
8 . Shop Primer:
Baked-on rust- inhibitive. ASTM - B117 Federal Specification TT-P-636
9. Field Painting:
See Section 09900
2 .02 FABRICATION
A . Frames
1 • Formed to profile as shown on drawings, constructed with square corners;
and free of defects, warps or buckle.
2 • Welded-type - for concrete; masonry construction and metal stud
construction .
3 . Comers and connections welded with exposed welds ground flush and
smooth.
4. Reinforcement :
As per Section 2 . 01 B,(3) above.
5 . Frames punched to receive rubber silencers, three each door on lock side
and two at head of double doors .
6 . Provide removable spreaders attached to bottom of door frames, to insure
correct alignment during shipping and installation.
7 At angle type thresholds, note
tower floor level . h frames and extend exterior portion down to
-- � lo
08100-3
4 . ASTM D2247 -87 Practice For Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100%
Humidity.
5 . ASTM D2794-84 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings on the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact) .
6 . ASTM D3359-87 Method For Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test, Method B .
7 . ASTM D3363 -74 Test Method For Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
1 . 05 _QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall have produced the coating products
for not less than five years and shall be capable of furnishing both products and
instructions for touch-up.
B . The manufacturer of the powdered coating shall provide each applicator or fabricator
of items which receive the coating with 3 by 5 inch samples of color(s) to be used, as
standard of uniform quality during the shop finishing operation.
C . Items to be coated in the powdered coating shop shall be protected in their bare metal
state while in transit to the powdered coating shop.
1 .06 GUARANTY
A . After final acceptance, furnish Owner written guarantee against defective organic
powdered coating material and application for a period of six (6) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS
A . "Arcbkote 6000 " Powdered Coating by Arch Aluminum and Glass Co . , 1400 S .W .
Th Court, Suite F . , Pompano Beach, FL 33069 , (561 ) 785 -9600, (Dade) 947-8745 .
1 . Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC , dry powder including
resins and pigments according with requirements of AAMA 605 .2 .
2 . Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to
clean up .
3 . Color shall be custom color per Architect' s selection.
B . "Tiger Drylac" Powder Coatings
2605 Beltline Avenue
Reading, PA. 19605
Tel . (215) 921 -9697
2 . 02 PRODUCT QUALITY AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Powdered coating composed of pure polyester TGIC, dry powder including resins and
pigments according with requirements of HAMA 605 .2 . 05030-2
Door Index Page 3
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 2
5 4
6 5
] 6
8 ]
9 8
10 SA
11 9
12 5A
13 9
14 9
15 30
16 10
17 11
16 11
19 11
20 11
21 7A
22 12
23 6
24 5
9999 13
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 4
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 1
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM RECEPTION 1 90 - LHR
TYPE AL 310 " X 716 " ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS & FRAME
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
BALANCE OF HARDWARE PROVIDED BY
STOREFRONT CONTRACTOR .
Heading # 2
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " -
X 13 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE V BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
2 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F . X 996L - R&V LHR US26D/ US32D VO E1
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 2 , 4 )
2 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 . X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
I
I
B . Powder Coating Characteristics :
_ Glossy Semi Gloss Mat
Surface Surface Surface
Thickness 2 . 503 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils 2 . 5 -3 . 5 mils
/60-90 /60-90 /60-90
Gloss 80-90 55-65 15 -25
Cross Hatch
Adhesion (2) Pass 100% Pass 100% Pass 100%
Mandrel Bending (3) 1 /8 "/3mm 5/32 "/4mm 3/161 /5mm
Erichsen Cupping
ISO 1520 5/ 16111/81nm 1 /4 "/7mm 3/ 1675mm
Impression
Hardness (4) 95 95 95
Impact Test (5 ) Up to 160 " Up to 160 " Up to 160 "
/lb. /lb. /lb .
Pencil Hardness (6) 2H (min .) 2H (min.) 2H (min.)
Dry Mill Test OK OK OK
Salt Spray Test (7) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
max .undercut. max .undercut. max .undercut.
Humidity 1 / 16" m
/ Im 1 / 16 "/Inure 1 / 16 "/ lmm
Resistance ( 8) 3000 h test, 3000 h test, 3000 h test,
min.blisters min .blisters min.blisters
1 / 16 "/ 1mm 1 / 16 "/ lmm 1 / 16"/ Imm
( 1 ) Gloss According to Gardner 60 Degrees, ASTM D523 .
(2) Cross Hatch Adhesion, ASTM D3359 Method B .
(3 ) Mandrel Bending Test, Astm D522 .
(4) Impression hardness according to Buchholz ISO 2215 .
(5) Impact Test, ASTM D2794, 1 / 10 " distortion.
(6) Pencil Hardness, ASTM D3363 .
(7) Saltspray Resistance Test, ASTM DI 17.
(8) Humidity Resistance Test, ASTM D2247.
2 .03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide sandblast and cleaning materials as needed to prepare surfaces and to clean up.
2 . 04 SHOP APPLICATION CONDITIONS
A. Apply and cure coating in dust free surroundings, in a humidity range of 30 to 85
percent, and in a surrounding air temperature of not less than 50 degrees F .
B . Do not apply coatings to surfaces which are dirty, dusty, rusty, damp or oily.
05030-3
g . Provide sheet metal grout guards in frames at all lock bolts and tapped
hardware locations.
9 . Do not fill frames with mortar unless specifically called out on the
drawings .
10 . Do not fill mullions , including removable mullions, with mortar unless
specifically called out on the drawings .
11 . silencers shall be installed in frames after doors are installed and painting is
completed.
B . Anchors
1 . Provide 16 gauge angle shaped floor slips welded to jambs and punched for
two 3 /8 " diameter bolts each.
2 . Provide adjustable length clip angles as required.
3 . Jamb Anchors
a. Frames set in masonry :
For doors not more than 7 ft . High, provide not less than
`
long adjustable 14 gauge corrugated galvanized masonry anchors for
each jamb over 7 feet, not less than 4 for each jamb .
b. Frames set against previously placed masonry or concrete:
For doors not more than 7 feet high, by approval of Owner' s
representative only punch each frame jamb and dimple countersink
for not less that three 3 /8 " diameter flat head screws. For doors
over 7 feet high, punch less that four 318 diameter flat head screws .
Provide pipe sleeves with spacers welded into each jamb at each
fastening location. Provide 3/8 " diameter galvanized sasrequired .
tla
ead
screws with approved expansion anchors or togg
After installing flat head screws fill head of countersink screw with
body filler then sand flush with frame.
c. Frames set in metal stud partitions:
Provide 16 gauge metal jamb anchor clips welded in each jamb at
following locations:
One at top, one 12 " down from top and 24 " o .c. for remainder of
jamb frames.
C . Doors
1 . Internal stiffeners spaced at not over 6" o .c.
08100-4
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 4
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 1
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM RECEPTION 1 90 - LHR
TYPE AL 310 " X 716 " ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS & FRAME
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
BALANCE OF HARDWARE PROVIDED BY
STOREFRONT CONTRACTOR .
Heading # 2
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " -
X 13 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE V BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
2 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F . X 996L - R&V LHR US26D/ US32D VO E1
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 2 , 4 )
2 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 . X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
I
I
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 5
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 3
1 SGL DOOR 3 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Bl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1/ 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 POWER TRANSFER EPT 10 SP28 VO E10
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X E996L - R&V LHR US26D / US32D VO E2
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 3 )
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 X2 VO Ell
1 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
1 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " - PE W7
1 THRESHOLD 2005- AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
CARD READER PROVIDED BY SECURITY
CONTRACTOR
COMPLIES NOR 08 - 0715 . 03 + / - 60 PSF
2 . Face sheets spot welded to internal stiffeners at not over 5 " apart and in a
1
manner that will prevent the welds from showing on the exposed side of
face sheets .
3 . Hardware reinforcement welded in place as required for hardware
application. (See Section 2 . 02) .
4 . Sound deadening :
Interior surfaces treated with a sound deadening material to eliminate
metallic ring.
5 . Provide 16 gauge pre-bonderized zinc coated steel perimeter channels.
Bevel stile edges 1 /8 " in 2 ".
6 Spot-weld channels to face sheets 3 " o. c.
7• Close tops of all exterior out swinging doors flush with steel channels .
Close flush and seal watertight.
8 . Grind welds off smooth and flush.
9 Fold edge construction not acceptable .
10. At angle type thresholds, extend height of door by one inch over height
indicated in Door Schedule.
D . Doors With Glass Panels
1 Openings formed so that no bead is required on outside face of doors .
2 . Bead provided on both faces of doors and secured with oval head
countersink screws on the inside face.
E. Doors with Louvers
I Exterior:
Provide 16 gauge electro zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and weatherproof "z" type louvers full thickness of door welded into doors.
2 . Interior :
Provide 18 gauge elector zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and inverted "Y" type louvers full thickness of door, welded into doors.
3 . Provide special size and shape louvers as shown .
4 . Louver Door Security Panels :
Woven wire mesh. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors.
08100-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A . Aluminum: Clean with chemicals or etch to remove grease, dirt and loose oxide film
using manufacturer' s recommended products .
B . Previously Powdered Coated Metal (touch-up) : Remove dirt, grease and bond
breaking substances and roughen area to be touched up with finabrasiveve paper and
touch-up with air dry spray supplied by applicator.
C . Prepare surfaces to receive powder coating and shop apply powder coating in
accordance with manufacturer' s recommendations .
3 .02 COLOR MATCHING
A . Powdered coating shall be formulated and applied so as to maintain uniform color,
texture and gloss .
B . All applications of powder coatings shall maintain uniform color, texture , gloss and
quality of application to match accepted sample .
3 . 03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A . Apply powder coating system according to manufacturer' s published
recommendations.
B . Due to the sensitivity of these coatings to dust pickup during their extended curing
times , apply all coats of powder coating system at shop or factory, under dust free,
temperature and humidity-controlled conditions.
3 .04 POWDERED COATING APPLICATION
A. Pneumatically feed dry powder to spray gun. Impact a low amperage , high voltage
charge to the powder.
B . Uniformly spray apply powdered coating to electrically grounded metal surfaces.
C . Allow sprayed surfaces to bake in ovens at temperatures recommended by coating
manufacturer.
D . Finished surfaces shall be fully and uniformly coated without pinholes, bubbles, sag,
runs, lumps, marks or discoloration. Surface finish shall be of uniform color, texture
and gloss.
05030-4
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 5
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 3
1 SGL DOOR 3 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Bl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1/ 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 POWER TRANSFER EPT 10 SP28 VO E10
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X E996L - R&V LHR US26D / US32D VO E2
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 3 )
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 X2 VO Ell
1 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
1 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " - PE W7
1 THRESHOLD 2005- AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
CARD READER PROVIDED BY SECURITY
CONTRACTOR
COMPLIES NOR 08 - 0715 . 03 + / - 60 PSF
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 6
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
I
i
Heading # 4
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM ELECTRIC / PHONE 6 90 - RHR
i
TYPE D1 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC Ll
10 - 072 ( 5 )
1 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE WS
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6 i
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ' 0 " SF Wl
. 4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2 i
1 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
Heading # 5
1 SGL DOOR 6 RECEPTION 1 TO MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 24 EXIT CORRIDOR 22 TO BREAK ROOM 4 90 - RH i
TYPE _A1 - 45 310 " X 710 " X . 1 - 3 / 411 NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC1
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 23GW US32D HA S1
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
i
J . 05 TOUCH-UP
A. After powder coating has been in place at least 15 days, and within 30days of
Architect-Engineer' s inspection of the product prior to certification that the work is
complete, check all powder coated surfaces for damage, missed areas and
discoloration.
B . Prepare surfaces and touch-up damaged, missed and discolored areas to bring coating
system to full dry film thickness, in color and gloss matching that of adjacent coated
areas .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
05030-5
F . Screens
Where louvers are indicated on exterior doors provide 18 x 14 .011 " alloy number )
302/304 stainless steel wire cloth secured in removable .015 inch stainless steel
alloy number 302/304 roll-formed frames . Mount screens on interior of doors with
stainless steel screws.
G. Fire Door Assemblies
1 . Fire door assemblies, including frames and hardware, shall meet fire test
and rating requirements in accordance with the procedure of Underwriters
Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories . Provide appropriate labels on
doors and frame .
2 . Fabrication and assembly requirements necessary to obtain labels will take
precedence over requirements shown or specified, except where
requirements shown or specified exceed the sizes or gauges required for
labeling .
3 . Required ratings are as shown on drawings .
FI. Finish Hardware Coordination
Metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the factory for application of finish �
e finish hardware
hardware at the job site . Templates are to be supplied by th
manufacturer to assure accurate preparation of doors and frames in accordance with
the Hardware Schedule.
1. Shop Painting by Manufacturer
1 . Imperfections spot glazed with metallic filler and sand smooth.
2 . Doors and frames shall be cleaned thoroughly in preparation to receive
manufacturer' s shop primer .
3 . After cleaning and treating the frames, the manufacturer shall apply a coat
of baked-on-rust-inhibitive primer prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. General :
1 . Install new doors and frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly �-
clean and prime prior to installation.
08100-6
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 6
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
I
i
Heading # 4
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM ELECTRIC / PHONE 6 90 - RHR
i
TYPE D1 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC Ll
10 - 072 ( 5 )
1 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE WS
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6 i
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ' 0 " SF Wl
. 4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2 i
1 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
Heading # 5
1 SGL DOOR 6 RECEPTION 1 TO MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 24 EXIT CORRIDOR 22 TO BREAK ROOM 4 90 - RH i
TYPE _A1 - 45 310 " X 710 " X . 1 - 3 / 411 NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC1
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 23GW US32D HA S1
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
i
' h
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 7
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading ## 5A
1 SGL DOOR 12 HALL 20 TO CONFERENCE 14 90 - LH
TYPE El 3101' X 790 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LCI
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
Heading # 6
1 SGL DOOR 7 HALL 19 FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 23 HALL 22 FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Al - 45 3101' X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE RHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 7 )
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE LHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 23 )
2 CLOSER 4041 EDA TBSRT AL LC C6
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 341" US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D FIA S1A
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
2 . Install new window frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly
clean and prime prior to installation.
3 Prior to applying finish paint, areas where prime coat has been damaged
shall have any rust removed, sanded smooth and touched up with same
primer as applied at shop.
4 . Finish paint doors and frames as indicated in Section 09900 PAINTING , in
colors as called out on the Interior Design Plans or Painting Schedule.
B . Deliver the work, ready to set up and erect in place as rapidly as the general
construction work permits . Set work in place in accordance with approved setting
drawings, in plumb and level positions, strongly secured against displacement and
with built-in anchors. In masonry construction, set frames in advance of masonry
work.
C . Fastening :
Secure each frame floor clip to concrete floor with two 3/8 " diameter cadmium
plated bolts set in drilled tamp-ins or self-drilling concrete anchors . Install jamb
anchors as called for in 2/02, B . 3 . NOTE : Do not fill any frames with mortar unless
specifically called out on the plans.
D. Bracing :
Brace frame jambs and heads receiving poured concrete adequately to resist
deflection : brace frames in masonry walls and partitions adequately so the walls and
Partitions may be erected against same.
fit
E . Install doors after masonry work and plastering have been completed and accurately
fit and adjust doors to work properly. Application finish hardware and door
installation is specified in Division.
3 . 02 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces of doors and frames by the
procedure recommended by the Door Manufacturer.
B . Clean up all rubbish and debris caused by this work and remove from the site.
Leave areas surrounding openings in a broom-clean condition .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08100-7
i—� ( �'
',e.�
' h
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 7
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading ## 5A
1 SGL DOOR 12 HALL 20 TO CONFERENCE 14 90 - LH
TYPE El 3101' X 790 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LCI
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
Heading # 6
1 SGL DOOR 7 HALL 19 FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 23 HALL 22 FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Al - 45 3101' X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE RHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 7 )
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE LHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 23 )
2 CLOSER 4041 EDA TBSRT AL LC C6
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 341" US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D FIA S1A
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 8
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading #{ 7
1 SGL DOOR 8 FILE STORAGE 10 FROM MECHANICAL ROOM 90 - RHR
TYPE E1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C5
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
1 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 430 CRL X 36 " ( 8 ) LH PE W16
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APl
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 7A
1 SGL DOOR 21 LOUNGE 4 TO STORAGE 5 90 - RH
TYPE E1 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET N7D80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes the labor and materials required for the proper completion of
structural steel work as shown on the drawings or specified .
B . Generally, this work is as follows :
1 . Furnishing, fabrication and erection of all structural steel beams, columns,
trusses, attached lintels, column base and cap plates, including all bolts and
welding as required for the complete installation of the work.
2 . Furnishing all anchor bolts and leveling plates for installationunder other
sections .
3 . Shop painting and field touch-up of all steel .
4 . Erection drawings and shop details.
5 . Providing all tools, equipment and temporary bracing required for safe,
proper and expeditious erection of the work.
6 . Furnishing of all loose lintels.
C . Related work of other sections :
Steel Joists Section 05210
Metal Decking Section 05300
Painting Section 09900
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards : All structural steel work shall comply with the
Specifications or the "Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings", latest edition, issued by the American Institute for Steel Construction,
and shall comply with the requirements of local building codes .
B . All welding shall be done by the electric arc process and conform to the Code of
05120- 1
n
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 8
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading #{ 7
1 SGL DOOR 8 FILE STORAGE 10 FROM MECHANICAL ROOM 90 - RHR
TYPE E1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C5
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
1 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 430 CRL X 36 " ( 8 ) LH PE W16
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APl
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 7A
1 SGL DOOR 21 LOUNGE 4 TO STORAGE 5 90 - RH
TYPE E1 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET N7D80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 9
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 8
1 SGL DOOR 9 HALL 20 FROM ADMINISTRATION 18 90 - LHR
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 HEDA TBSRT ( 9 ) RH AL LC C4
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 . DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
I
Heading ## 8A
1 SGL DOOR 10 HALL 20 TO FILE STORAGE 16 90 - RH
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE 13B1279 4 '1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENE
RAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Section 08100
B . Finish Hardware
D. Finish Carpentry Section 08700
E. Painting
Section 06200
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Products of the following manufacturers or equal are acceptable :
A . Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. (Formerly Weyerhaeuser Company)
B . Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division
C. Ipik Door Co ., Inc.
D. VT Industries, Inc. , Holstein, Iowa
E. Southwood Door, A Division of OSHKOSH
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
B . Shop D� Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
C. Specific Product Warranty- Submit written agreement on door manufacturer' s standard
form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of
core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
NWMA and AWI.
1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet
"Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions, and as
otherwise indicated.
B . Packer doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer' s standard method.
08200- 1
Are and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society .
All welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with this code,
and holding current certificates. `
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Supplementary
Conditions, at earliest possible date to insure timely delivery and proper
coordination of work by others . No variation from design sizes will be permitted
but recommendations for modification of connections or details to better suit
fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed, in writing to
the attention of the Architect.
B . Shop Drawings shall include erection plans , details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained . Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the approval seal and signature of the licensed
professional engineer who supervised their preparation shall be used in the field and
all other shop drawings will be considered void .
E _ Work under this section includes responsibility for dimensions to be correlated and
confirmed in the field and for information that pertains solely to fabrication
processes and to techniques of construction.
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members which are required by other
trades .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36 . Steel shall be new, clean, and
straight (foreign steel not acceptable) .
B . High tensile strength bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A325 , or
A490 .
C . Ordinary unfinished bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 .
D . Are welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM Standards Spec. A233 , latest
edition.
05120-2
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 9
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 8
1 SGL DOOR 9 HALL 20 FROM ADMINISTRATION 18 90 - LHR
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 HEDA TBSRT ( 9 ) RH AL LC C4
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 . DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
I
Heading ## 8A
1 SGL DOOR 10 HALL 20 TO FILE STORAGE 16 90 - RH
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE 13B1279 4 '1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCADMIN PAGE - 10
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 9
1 SGL DOOR 11 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 17 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 13 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 15 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 14 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 13 90 - RH
TYPE Al 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
9 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
3 LOCKSET ND53TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC3
10 - 025
3 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
9 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
3 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 10
1 SGL DOOR 15 HALL 19 TO WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 16 HALL 19 TO MENS VESTIBULE 11 90 - RH
TYPE E1 310 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D HA F2
2 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D HA F3
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " x 3411 US32D HA Pi
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
6 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
E. Shop coat of paint shall be Manufacturer' s Standard Shop Primer, or approved
equal .
2 . 02 FIELD COORDINATION
A. All measurements shall be verified in the field, particularly for work installed
before delivery of steel . Contractor shall notify Architect in writing of any
discrepancy between elevations , locations, conditions, etc. , shown on the drawings
and those actually encountered in the field, and shall not proceed with the work
until discrepancies have been resolved.
B . The Contractor shall check all drawings and shall be responsible for completeness
and correct Iittirgc of all work .
C. All anchor bolts and plates required to be set in concrete shall be furnished and
delivered, together with templates and/or instructions for setting, in ample time for
installation by other trades.
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A . Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends, and open joints
between components parts . If straightening or flattening is required, it shall be
done in a manner that will not damage the material.
B . Columns and stiffeners shall be milled at bearing ends to true surface, at right
angles to the axis or at the proper angle, to insure uniform bearing. .,i ,
C. Column base plates shall be of sizes indicated on the drawings, with straight and
true top and bottom surfaces. Base plates may be straightened by pressing to obtain
satisfactory contact bearing .
D . Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched 1 / 16" larger than the normal diameter of
the bolts. Burning to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted. Holes that must be
enlarged shall be remade . Bolts shall fit holes snugly and nuts shall be drawn up
tight and shall have full grip in bolts.
E . Provisions of work by other trades : Open holes or studs shall be provided for
attaching of work by other trades which adjoins, attaches to, or connects with
Structural Steel. Particular notice shall be given to requirements where
miscellaneous metal adjoins structural steel .
F. All exposed steel shall be free of stampings, mill scale or imperfections. All cuts
and notches at exposed steel shall be ground and finished smooth. All welds on
exposed structural steel shall be filled having an additional bead or beads as
required , and ground smooth to receive shop primer coat.
05120-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 SOLID CORE DOORS (Locations as called out on the Door Schedules)
A . 20 minute at interior locations and offices as indicated on plans . Provide 1 hour label
at interior 1 hour rated fire wall assemblies and 1 '/2 hour label at 2 hour rated wall
assemblies as per the Life Safety Plans or Building Plans .
B . Standard: Meet or exceed NWMA Industry Standard I. S . 1 -78 Series and Architectural
woodwork Institute Type SLC and FD .
C. Veneer : stain grade birch per door schedule .
D . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
E . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
F . Core: Staved hardwood lumber blocks bonded under pressure with 100% glue
coverage; mineral core at label doors .
G . Glue : Type I (face assembly) and type II (core assembly) .
H. Lights and Louvers: Cut to size as indicated on drawings . Provide type 2 stops for
lights . —'
J . Guarantee: 10 years , interior use only.
2 . 02 HOLLOW CORE DOORS (Located as called out on the door schedules)
A . Veneer: stain grade birch per door schedule .
B . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
C . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
D . Glue : Type I (face assembly)
E. Guarantee: 10 years, interior use only.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 I__NSPECTION
A. Veri that door frames are of type required for the door and are installed as required
for proper installation of doors .
08200-2
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCADMIN PAGE - 10
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 9
1 SGL DOOR 11 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 17 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 13 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 15 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 14 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 13 90 - RH
TYPE Al 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
9 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
3 LOCKSET ND53TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC3
10 - 025
3 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
9 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
3 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 10
1 SGL DOOR 15 HALL 19 TO WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 16 HALL 19 TO MENS VESTIBULE 11 90 - RH
TYPE E1 310 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D HA F2
2 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D HA F3
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " x 3411 US32D HA Pi
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
6 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 11
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 11
1 SGL DOOR 17 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS TOILET ROOM 9 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 18 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS TOILET ROOM 10 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 19 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS SHOWERS 7 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 20 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS SHOWERS 8 90 - LH
TYPE El 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
12 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
4 PRIVACY SET ND40S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC5
4 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
4 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
4 COAT HOOK 937P X 3 3 / 4 US26D HA M5
4 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
12 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
Heading # 12
1 SGL DOOR 22 HALL 20 TO CLOSET BI - FOLD
TYPE F ( 4 ) 113 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 8 " FULL LOUVERED BIFOLD DOORS
1 BI - FOLD DOOR SET 9570 X 60 HA M2
2 KNOB 521 B X 1 " 26D IV M3
2 KNOB BACK PLATE 513 B X 1 1 / 2 " 26D IV M3A
Heading # 13
1 SGL DOOR 9999 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
1 KEY CABINET 1203 - A LU M4
B . Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors .
C. Dono_ t� labels from rated doors or cover with paint .
3 .02INSTALLATION
A. Fitting and machinin :
L Fit doors for width by planing; for height by sawing.
a. . '/ " from bottom (3/16 over threshold, saddle or carpet)
b . 1 /8 " maximum frame top and sides .
c. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1 /8 " to 1 /2 " .
2 . Machine doors for hardware.
3 . Cut light and louver openings in door not exceeding maximum 40% of height and 5 "
from door edge.
4 . Seal all job site cut surfaces with two coats of paint or polyurethane before final
hanging.
B . Installation of Doors : Install in accordance with requirements of NWMA Standard
Door Guarantee, and manufacturer' s instructions .
} C . Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with
requirements of NFPA No. 80.
D. Finishing - Door shall be field painted or polyurethaned, per Interior Finish Schedule
and in accordance with Section 09900, PAINTING .
3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Re lace or re-hang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely.
B. Replace doors damaged during the construction period or that show glue spots.
C. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
D. Replace doors that are warped and that pull away from door stops.
E. Adjust all pocket doors so that door faces do not rub jambs or frames, and the doors
hang plumb in the openings . All pocket doors shall utilize 5- 1 /2 " frames and have steel
frame stiffeners to prevent frame distortion.
* * *END OF SECTION** *
08200-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION {\ l
3 . 01 ERECTION J
A . Columns and struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept plumb during erection for which all temporary ,
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns.
B . The Building Erector sub-contracted with the General Contractor shall provide all
necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc. ,
that may be required to erect the structural frame and maintain it in alignment until
the building is completed, including any extra guying after completion of decking.
C . Welding and bolting of all connections shall follow the setting of the steel as
closely as plumbing and alignment will permit.
D . Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment. Any work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
E. Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure, \
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect, or personnel
having legitimate business at the site. Location of supports for derricks , hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studied by the General Contractor, and shall
be reviewed by the Architect if any questions arise .
F . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the written permission of the Architect.
G. Self-lubricating bearing plate assemblies shall be installed in the field. After
installation, a protective covering shall be provided to insure that no dirt, or other
injurious materials comes in contact with the bearing surfaces.
3 .02 CONNECTIONS
A. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise shown on plans .
B . Field connections shall be welded where specifically shown. All other field
connections shall be bolted with 3/4 " minimum A307 machine bolts, except for the
following, which must be made with 3/4" minimum A325 high strength bolts :
Connections of beams supporting roof mounted machinery. /
Other connections as noted on the structural drawings . t
05120 -4
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 11
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 11
1 SGL DOOR 17 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS TOILET ROOM 9 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 18 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS TOILET ROOM 10 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 19 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS SHOWERS 7 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 20 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS SHOWERS 8 90 - LH
TYPE El 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
12 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
4 PRIVACY SET ND40S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC5
4 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
4 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
4 COAT HOOK 937P X 3 3 / 4 US26D HA M5
4 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
12 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
Heading # 12
1 SGL DOOR 22 HALL 20 TO CLOSET BI - FOLD
TYPE F ( 4 ) 113 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 8 " FULL LOUVERED BIFOLD DOORS
1 BI - FOLD DOOR SET 9570 X 60 HA M2
2 KNOB 521 B X 1 " 26D IV M3
2 KNOB BACK PLATE 513 B X 1 1 / 2 " 26D IV M3A
Heading # 13
1 SGL DOOR 9999 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
1 KEY CABINET 1203 - A LU M4
® Since 1928 .
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC.
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT /DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
C . Where bolted connections are used , they shall be standard beam connections as
detailed in the AISC Manual, having a strength at least equal to one-half the
tabulated load capacity of the AISC Manual .
D . Where welded connections are used, they shall be Welded Frame Beam
Connections, as detailed in the AISC Manual, but of a length and capacity at least
equal to that of "Minimum Beam Connections".
E. Where the combination of shop welding and field bolting is used, the appropriate
portions of the bolted and welded standards specified above shall be combined.
F. High tensile bolts shall be installed in accordance with the March 1964
Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, approved by
the Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering
Foundation using the Turn-of-nut method with one washer. However, bolts shall
be designed as A307 bolts for all connections in which they are used.
G. Common machine bolts shall have shanks of proper length to provide full grip.
H. Provide approved lock washers to prevent slipping of nuts .
3 . 03 PAINTING
jA . All structural steel , not encased in concrete, shall be prepared for painting
according to Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-AP3 Power Tool Cleaning
and shall receive one shop coat of 1 mil . maximum thick paint.
B . Paint, if manufacturer shop primer, shall be thinned with the building
manufacturers approved material and applied at a spreading rate of 400 s .f. per
gallon. The thinner shall be compatible with the finished painting materials and
methods of application.
C . The Contractor shall submit the name and characteristics of proposed paint to the
Architect for approval . All paint shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer' s recommendations to achieve the above desired results. The prime
coat shall be compatible with the finish paint.
D. After erection, all bolts, welds and serious abrasions to the shop coat shall be
painted with one coat of the material used for the shop coat.
E. Steel beams and girders encased or partially encased in concrete shall not be
painted where encasement occurs .
F. Steel beams and girders scheduled to receive sprayed on fireproofing shall not be
painted.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
05120-5
® Since 1928 .
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC.
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT /DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON - -
HA HAGER .
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE , PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY.
I
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
. 630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading -
1 14
2 - 14 -
3 15 -
SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this section shall be
produced by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of similar products
and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect, such as
those manufacturers listed above.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work included : Provide and install all aluminum sectional doors as scheduled and
detailed in the construction documents and as specified herein. Related work :
Preparation of opening, galvanized steel jambs, stru
work, electrical wiring, glazing de ctural work, miscellaneous iron
specified) and custom painting are in the scope
of work of other divisions or trades.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
A. All doors specified under this Section shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors shall be Aluminum or Galvanized Steel Sectional Overhead type as
manufactured by one of the following companies :
I • Clopay Building Products Company.
2 • Fimbel Door Corporation
3 • ideal Garage Doors
4. Amarr Garage Doors
5 • Arm-R-Lite
6 • Raynor
7. Wayne Dalton
8 . Overhead Door Corporation
9 . Windsor Door
2.02 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS
A. Provide each door as one complete unit including sections, brackets, tracks,
insulation, finish, counterbalance mechanisms and hardware to suit opening with
available headroom. All door sections shall be 2 " thick and shall be constructed of
aluminum extrusions produced from 6063 -T6 alloy or 18 gauge galvanized steel .
Doors to have six (6) or seven (7) sections.
J
08360- 1
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON - -
HA HAGER .
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE , PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY.
I
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
. 630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading -
1 14
2 - 14 -
3 15 -
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT PAGE - 3
I
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM MECHANIC BAY 1 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 7101 ' ' X . 1 - 3 / 411. FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC C1
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 '!
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6'
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1.
- D - RESTRICTED KWY
t
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
SECTION 05400 - LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS IN OTHER SECTIONS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of lightgage metal framing (LtGMFrm) is shown on drawings .
Types of lightgage metal framing units include the following: "C" shaped steel studs.
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Components Design : Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance
with AICS "Specification for design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members".
B . Fire-Rated Assemblies : Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated
for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing
regulations, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
C . Manufacturers offering products complying with requirements for lightgage metal
framing components include the following :
L Shaped load bearing studs, 1 -5/8 " flange :
Alabama Metal Industries
Marino Ware
Dietrick
Roll Form Products, Inc.
U. S . Steel Corp .
Wheeling Corrugating Co .
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Products data: Submit manufacturer ' s product information and installation instructions
for each items of lightgage framing and accessories .
B . Shop Drawine • Submit shop drawings for special components and installations not
fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer' s product data. Signed and sealed
Shop Drawings required by a Florida Registered Structural Engineer.
Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations,
number, type, locations and spacing, Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices,
accessories, and details required for proper installation.
05400- 1
B . Rails and stiles shall have .060" minimum wall thickness . Meeting rails shall have
offset interlocking joints to provide a weathertight closure and assure alignment the
full width of each section. Stiles and rails shall be miter-cut and securely joined .
Minimum stile and rail dimensions shall be 6" for vertical end stiles and 6" for top
and bottom rails . Center stiles at 2" minimum and meeting rails at 2 1 /8 "
minimum . Panels shall be .040" aluminum or galvanized sheet set in place by
inside snap-in type glazing bead.
2 .03 WEATHER SEAL
A. Bottom door section shall have continuous flexible tubular vinyl weatherseal
applied at factory to extruded aluminum retainer.
2 .04 FINISH
A. All extrusion and panel faces shall be powder coated with Tiger Drylac Powder
Coating, Color # RAL 9016 or it RAL 9010 in a smooth semi-gloss surface finish .
Coating shall be Series 19 , six (6) year coating. Alternate finish manufacturers
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to acceptance, bid, application
of finish and installation of doors. Coating companies certification of applied
product shall accompany the doors to the jobsite .
2.05 GLAZING
A. (When Specified) . Glass lite sizes depend on door size, stile and rail arrangements,
and shall be substituted for aluminum panels as directed by Architect. Openings
shall accommade-iodate standard 3/ 16" Double Strength B-g (DSB) g ( /
2 .06 COUNTERBALANCE
A. Counterbalance shall be oil-tempered helical-wound, torsion springs mounted on a
crossheader shaft . Springs shall be engineered for industrial application and shall
comply with durability properties specified under National Association of Garage
Door Manufacturer' s specification 102- 1988 . Springs installed shall be the Extra
High Cycle type. Stainless steel aircraft-type lift cables shall have a minimum
safety factor of 7 to 1 .
2 .07 TRACK
A. Galvanized steel track shall be 3 " . Steel brackets or continuous steel angles shall e
used for installing tracks on P .T. wood jambs . Vertical track shall be inclined
through the use of adjustable brackets to assure weathertight closure
d angles as
Horizontal track shall be reinforced with factory-app galvanized
required .
2.08 HARDWARE
A. All roller brackets and hinges shall be 14 gauge heavy-duty commercial grade
galvanized steel . All rollers shall have ball bearings with case-hardened steel races .
Lock shall be end stile friction type for inside security locking .
08360-2
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT PAGE - 3
I
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM MECHANIC BAY 1 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 7101 ' ' X . 1 - 3 / 411. FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC C1
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 '!
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6'
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1.
- D - RESTRICTED KWY
t
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT
PAGE - 4 i
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX .
i
Heading # 15
1 SGL DOOR 3 MECHANIC BAY 1 FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 2 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L1
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 9045 US32D GL S4
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
i
2.09 WIND-LOAD
A. Doors shall be manufactured to withstand 55# per square foot ( 140 mph wind
speed) . Provide engineered horizontal aluminum or galvanized angle at each pair
stainless
horizontal meeting rails to control deflection. Angles to be secured with
stainless steel screws.
2. 10 OPERATION
A. Doors shall be electrically operated with sealed motors . Push button operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. 01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the sectional overhead doors shall be by the manufacturer ' s qualified
and authorized distributor.
* * *END OF SECTION * * %
08360-3
1 0 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to protect site in manufacturer' s �.
unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off
ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable water proof coverings .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components : With each type of metal framing required, provide
manufacturer' s standard steel runners (tracks, blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes,
reinforcements, fasteners) , and accessories recommended by manufacturer for
applications indicated as needed to provide a complete metal framing system.
B . Materials and Finishes
For 16 gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality
steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 40,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570 , or A 611 .
For 18 gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33 ,000 psi ; ASTM A 466 , A 570, Or
A 611 . Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM
A 525 for minimum G 60 coating at exterior wall panel studs . Provide prime coated
finish with one coat of shop- applied redoxide, zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-
inhibitive primer for interior studs . "C"-Shape Studs : Manufacturer' s standard load- � ^
bearing steel studs of size shape, and as located on the drawings with 1 -5/8 " ( 1 .625 ")
flange and flange return to lip .
GAGES AS DETERMINED BY THE FOLLOWING CHART:
(Interior Framing: Limiting Heights - ST Style Studs. Stud gages apply for single and
double layers of gypsum application on walls using L/360 allowable deflection) with no midspan
wall blocking, cats, lateral bracing, or cold rolled channel bracing run through stud perforations.
Allowable heights can be exceeded by 20% when continuous wall bracing or blocking is provided.
STUD WIDTH STUD SPACING MAX. HGT. 25 GA MAX. HGT. 22 GA MAX. HGT. 20 GA
3-5/8" 16" o/c 10'-0" I2'-0 " 14'-0 "
3-5/8 " 24" o/c 8'-0 " 10'-0" 12'-0"
611 16 " o/c 151-01 ? 171-0, l 19'-011
6" 24" o/c 131-0.O 151-011 17p-0lt
2 . 02 FABRICATION
A. General : Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection.
Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded.
Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. Stud
panels to be rechecked for plumbness after installation .
B . Fastenings : Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by
welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
05400-2
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT
PAGE - 4 i
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX .
i
Heading # 15
1 SGL DOOR 3 MECHANIC BAY 1 FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 2 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L1
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 9045 US32D GL S4
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
i
Since 1928
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
STORAGE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX i
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
I
i
ARCHITECT/DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE. D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
j
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC . '
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 -848 - 3040 i
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 9 , 2009
i
j
i
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
Pre-Installation Conference • Prior to star of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project
site with installers of other work including metal panels, door and window frames and mechanical
and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflict, and coordinate layout and
support provisions for interfacing work.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A . Manufacturer' s Instructions Install metal framing systems in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed or written instructions and recommendation, and Engineered Shop
Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Runner Tracks : Install continuous tracks sized to match studs . Align tracks accurately
to layout at base and tops of studs . Secure tracks as recommended by stud manuacturer for
type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o .c. spacing for nail or power-
driven fasteners, nor 16 " o .c. for other types of attachment. Spacing of studs at metal wall
panels to be as per panel manufacturers request. Provide
fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
- C . Set studslu umb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb
j
walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements .
D . Where stud system abutts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor
ends of stiffeners to supporting structure .
E. Install supplementary framing wood blocking and bracing at metal framing system
wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services,
casework, heavy trim and furnishing, wall mounted door stops, bathroom grab bars and
similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary
support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer' s
recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading
resulting from item supported .
F. Installation of Wall Stud System Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by
either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges .
G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0' square with double stud at each jamb of frame
except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer' s instructions.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb
studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall .
}} Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated .
J
'END OF SECTION " *
05400 -3
�: �
�;
C
Since 1928
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
STORAGE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX i
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
I
i
ARCHITECT/DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE. D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
j
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC . '
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 -848 - 3040 i
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 9 , 2009
i
j
i
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST .PAGE - 2
STORAGE 'BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HA HAGER
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GREY GREY
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading
2 16
3 - 17
4 14
5 14
6 14
7 14
8 14
9 14
SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCE STOREFRONT DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. All entrances stem materials are to be provided by one manufacturer. Entrances
shall be wide OR medium stile doors as detailed on the architectural drawings and
as manufactured to the design and specifications of Arch Aluminum & Glass Co .
All adjacent framing, sidelites and fixed lites shall be of system shown, or approved
equal, and shall be impact rated per FBC 2001 and ASCE7- 98 .
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE : See Door Schedule for Sizes and manufacturers
A . Wide Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with 5 "
stiled and 5 " top rail and 7- 1 /2 " bottom rail . COrner
extruded anti -twist guides with mortisejoinery s ll wialldth
have reinf icing plates,
tension rods . l ry and full width 3/8 ' plated steel
B . Medium Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with
3 - 1 /2 " stiles and a 3 - 1 /2 " top rail and 5 bottom rail .
plates, extruded anti twist guides with mortise Corners shall have reinforcing
steel tension rods . joinery and full width 3 /8 " plated
C• Glazing beads shall be an integral sash, non removal from the exterior with vinyl
bulb inserts for g• g g
/ r1' glazing. Glazing beads for insulated lass are available.
Minimum bite on tempered glass shall be 1 /2 " in door leafs and fixed lite transoms .
D. All aluminum components shall be of 6063 alloy with T-5 temper. All screws shall
be of plated steel . All steel in contact with aluminum shall be plated or painted .
PART =HARDWARE
A. Arch ' s standard hardware shall consist of AR- 800 pull handles and H-2 push bars
with 1 - 1 /2 pair Hager #23439, 4- 1 /2 " brass butt hinges or offset cast aluminum
Pivot hinges international #OP- 160 at each end and intermediate cast aluminum
hinges 41P- 1900 at midspan of each leaf.
B . Locks: two point concealed vertical rod panic hardware in door pairs .
C . Please be advised that the door manufacturer should provide all entrance hardware.
Arch can provide hardware from virtually all hardware manufacturers . In the event
that hardware is to be provided by others, such hardware must be received by Arch
before fabrication can begin.
08400-1
J
�_.
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST .PAGE - 2
STORAGE 'BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HA HAGER
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GREY GREY
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading
2 16
3 - 17
4 14
5 14
6 14
7 14
8 14
9 14
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 3
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 6 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 5 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 6 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 4 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 7 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 8 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 2 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 9 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 1 90 - RHR
TYPE Dl 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
18 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
6 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 415 , 617 , j
8 , 9 )
6 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
6 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
6 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV l X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
6 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
6 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3101, SF
24 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
6 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE Y17
6 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
6 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
i
I
I
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service, to complete the
miscellaneous metals work and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified
herein or both, except for items specifically indicated as "NOT 11\4 CONTRACT"
(NIC).
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1 . Roof opening framing - (Roof Drains, Roof Curbs, Roof Scuttles, Vent Fans ,
Exhaust Fans) .
2 . Miscellaneous anchors and fastenings.
3 . Piping, RWL, Chilled Water Line (Supports for hangers).
4. Steel & Alum. ladders to Scuttles & Mezzanines.
5 . Miscellaneous Angles .
6 . Louver Door Security Panels .
7 . Safety Nosings .
8 . Masonry Openings for Exhaust Fans .
9. Folding Door Support Framing .
10. Recessed Ceiling Framing Supports.
11 . Shop Coat Painting of All Items.
1 . 03 WORK OF OTHER SECTION
A. Structural Metal Section 05100
B . Painting Section 09900
C . Mechanical Section 15000
1 . 04 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A . This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require submission
by the Contractor tot he Consultant for approval .
05500- 1
PART5 - FASTENERS - J
A . Typical anchors:
1 . Into 2X wood bucks or wood structure 414 SMS or 1 /4" dia. tapcons with 1 - 1 /2
minimum total embed .
2. Into 1X wood bucks or into masonry 1 /4" dia. Tapcons with 1 - 1 /4" minimum
embed into masonry .
NOTE : All wood bucks provided by the general contractor must sustain the loads
imposed by the glazing system and transfer them to the building structure.
PART_ 6...FINISH
A. All exp_ os faces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Alumimmn sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic o schedule on the
treatment. Color shall be one of the following and p
er plans : AA M12 C22 A42/44
a) Dark Bronze M12 C22 A40
b) Medium Bronze AA
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21 J
AA M12 C22 A44
d) Black
2 . Powder coated material when called out on the door schedule, shall be given an
acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 1000- 1 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 603 . 8 - 85
b) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
3 . The option and color selected for this project is : (IRC Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016-white, with a 6 year warranty).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
t
08400-2
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 3
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 6 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 5 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 6 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 4 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 7 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 8 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 2 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 9 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 1 90 - RHR
TYPE Dl 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
18 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
6 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 415 , 617 , j
8 , 9 )
6 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
6 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
6 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV l X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
6 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
6 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3101, SF
24 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
6 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE Y17
6 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
6 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
i
I
I
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 4
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading # 16
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 7 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 8 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH FIM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ! 0 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APL
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF .
i
I
i
SECTION 08410 - FLUSH GLAZE STOREFRONT WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Store front framing shall be impact rated and detailed on the Architectural drawings
and as manufactured to the design and specifications of one of the following :
Arch Aluminum & Glass Company or Kawneer.
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Framing System shall have a face dimension of 1 .250 " and a depth of 4- 1 /2 " for
both vertical and horizontal members . (Sections may vary w/manufacturer) All
sections shall be of extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and a TS temper. Glazing Gaskets
shall be of EPDM or pvc extrusions. Assembly screws shall be of plated steel _ Glass
shall have a minimum bite of 5/8 " on the perimeter. Glass type shall be as defined on
the window schedule. All storefront framing and glass assemblies shall be impact
rated .
PART�IMSH
A . All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes. Aluminum
sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide
treatment. Color shall be:
a) Dark Bronze AA M12 C22
b) Medium Bronze A42/44
AA M12 C22 A40
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d) Black AA M12 C22 A44
2 . Powder coated material shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with
one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
b) TIGER DRYLAC- SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
B . The option and color selected for this project is : (For the I.R.C. Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016 - white, with a 6 year warranty).
PART 4 - ERECTION
A. The Flush Glazed storefronts stem specified shall be installed, in properly prepared
openings, level, plumb and in alignment and consistent with acceptable erection
techniques and practices . Frames shall be secured to the walls/jambs with approved
fasteners at 12 " on center and in accordance with the plan details.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08410- 1
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the contract
Documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility . \
C . Submit samples, certificate and shop drawings as required or requested by the
Architect/Engineer whether included in this list or not, and as requested on the
drawings .
D . Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, notarized and signed by an officer of the
company and shall state the required information explicitly and specifically. Said
certificates shall bear the Notary' s embossed seal.
1 .05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated items in accordance with Contract Conditions,
plus plan locations .
B . Coordinate roof framing opening supports with Steel Joists Shop Drawings . Submit
steel Joist and Miscellaneous Metal Shop Drawings as prescribed.
1 . 06 QUALITY STANDARDS
Conform to applicable portions of the following :
A . American Institute of Steel Construction (A.I. S .C.)
B . American Welding Society (A .W. S .)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BASIC MATERIALS
A. Steel shapes - ASTM A-36
B . Steel pipe -ASTM A-36, galvanized where called for.
C . Bolts - ASTM A- 325 , galvanized for exterior use, and where called for on plans.
D . All exterior steel items to be hot dipped galvanized.
E . Aluminum pipe - ASTM B 221 for 6063 -T6 .
F . Stainless Steel plate, angles and fabricated hangers, 9304 Stainless.
2 . 02 STEEL & ALUMINUM LADDERS
A. Fabricate to size and detail, with welded joints dressed smooth.
B . Erect ladders as indicated, securely fastened to structure .
C . Steel ladders to be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A- 123 -59T.
05500-2
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 4
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading # 16
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 7 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 8 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH FIM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ! 0 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APL
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF .
i
I
i
09 MAR 09 JOBV IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 5
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
j
i
Heading # 17
1 SGL DOOR 3 STORAGE BAY 6 TO ELECTRIC ROOM 9 90 - RH
TYPE Dl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
1 LOCKSET L9080T 06A 50 - 231 RH 630 SC L4
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
2 .03 LOUVER DOOR SECURITY PANELS
A. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors, wire mesh security panels.
1 . Wire Mesh : 10 gauge steel wire woven into 1 " diamond mesh securely clinched
to frames .
2 . Frames : 3/4" cold rolled channels drilled at 6 " o.c. through both flanges to
receive # 10 self tapping non-corrosive machine screws with tamper proof
heads.
3 . Mesh and frames to be hot dipped galvanized material.
4 . Apply panels to exterior face on doors with non-removable head screws.
Completely cover louvers .
2 . 04 FASTENERS
A. General : Provide stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-coated fasteners
where built into exterior walls where fasteners are not exposed . Select fasteners for
the type, grade and class required .
`• B . Bolts and Nuts : Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A307 , Grade A.
C . Lae Bolts : Square head type, FS FF-B- 561 .
D . Machine Screws : Cadmium plated steel, FS FF- S-92
E . Wood Screws : Flat head carbon steel, FS FF- S - 111 .
F. Plain Washers : Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92 .
G . Masom Anchorage Devices - Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325 .
H. Toggle Bolts : Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588 , type, class and style as required.
I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84 .
2 .05 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Fabricate bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels
and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting
woodwork, and for anchoring securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Provide straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items as specified on the
drawings .
05500-3
09 MAR 09 JOBV IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 5
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
j
i
Heading # 17
1 SGL DOOR 3 STORAGE BAY 6 TO ELECTRIC ROOM 9 90 - RH
TYPE Dl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
1 LOCKSET L9080T 06A 50 - 231 RH 630 SC L4
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor for this section shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment
necessary to deliver and install all windows as specified and/or as indicated on
Drawings . Shop drawings are required for this portion of the work.
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
A. Aluminum windows shall be manufactured by one of the following :
I • Superior Window Corporation
2 . Windor Corp.
3 . E. S .P. Window Corporation
4 . C . G.I. Construction Glass Industries, Miami
S . Alcan Building Products
6. Alenco Windows
7. Kinco, Inc .
8 . P. G. T. Progressive Glass Technologies
9 . T.M. Windows
B . All manufacturers windows shall comply with the following:
HC- 110 Rated with 3/16 " glass (non-impact)
HC-70 Rated with Sentryglas (impact resistant)
HC-90/120/220 Rated with SaJlex Laminated glass (impact resistant)
DH-HC-50 AAMA Rating
ANSI/AAMA Specification 302 .9 -- 1977
C1201 (Safety glaze certain fixed lights)
ASTME 283073 , E330-707 E331 -70
ASTMC6P3CB & A (insulated glass)
AAMA Specification DHBIHP96 and HSB2HP63
No water infiltration at 16. 5 PSF of positive pressure
Air Infiltration = . 07 CFM/SQ.FT. (Or les) at pressure differential of 6.24 PSF
Products must have current dade county (or equivalent testing) approval
1 . 03 MATERIALS
A. Frames, sash and vent members shall be constructed of extruded 6063 -T6
aluminum alloy, unless otherwise specified. Glazing beads shall be extruded 6063 -
TS aluminum alloy.
i
08520-1
B . Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required . Furnish
malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections;
elsewhere, furnish steel washers .
2 . 06 MISCELLANEOUS
A . Fabricate all steel headers, angles, channels, ladders, steel shapes, inserts , anchors,
brackets, support framing, as indicated and/or detailed on plans.
2 . 07 SHOP COAT PAINT
A . Apply shop coat paint to all ferrous metal.
B . Apply shop touch-up coat paint to all galvanized metals .
C . Aluminum products to be mill finish unless called out otherwise on the drawings.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
05500-4
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PARTI - GENERAL
i
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Definition: "glass includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass .
"Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass . Types of work
in this section include glass and glazing for:
Window units sidelites, transoms
Window wall
Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed".
B . Packaged mirror units are specified as "accessories" in section 10800 .
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/pattem of glass :
ASG Industries . Inc.
1 Guardian Industries Corporation
Ford Glass Company
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company
PPG Industries, Inc .
Visteon
B . Certificate: Submit certificates from respective-1nanufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements .
C . Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Assoc.
(FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards .
D . InstallerQualifications - Installation contractor specializing in glazing, with a minimum
of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and also being an approved installer
for the glazing product supplier.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 GLASS PRODUCTS
Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass : Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3
i (glazing select), fully tempered. Other glass products for impact resistance are called out
08800- 1
SECTION 06076 - PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
(PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD)
PART 1 GENERAL
Installer Note: Osmose Advance Guard Borate PTW, when treated to a .42 DOT retention, is highly
effective in resisting decay, subterranean termites, dry wood termites, Formosan termites, carpenter
ants, wood-boring beetles and many other insects . Advance Guard PTW is noncorrosive, easy to
handle and workable with common tools. It is available for aboveground , weather protected
applications where insect and decay resistant construction materials are recommended. Advance
Guard PTW is intended to be used for framing and applications where the wood is not in direct
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water during its service life .
Normal exposure to weather during ordinary construction will not adversely affect the treatment in
the product. Advance Guard PTW is not recommended for use in decks or other outdoor structures
exposed to weathering.
1 . 01 SUMMARY
A . Section Includes : Insect and decay protection treatment for wood products specified in
other Division 6 sections, including:
1 . Sill plates in contact with masonry.
2 . Wood blocking and furring in contact with masonry .
B . Related Sections : Section(s) related to this section include :
1 . Rough Carpentry: Section 06100
2 . Finish Carpentry : Section 06200
3 . Fabricated Wood Trusses : Section 06192
1 . 02 REFERENCES
A. General : Standards listed by reference; including revisions by issuing authority, form a part
of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing
authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by
issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing
authority abbreviation and standard designation.
B . Advance Guard PTW does not need to meet American Wood-Preservers' Association
(AWPA) standards but it does nonetheless meet:
1 . AWPA C9 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Treatment .
2. AWPA C31 Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously
Protected from Liquid Water — Treatment by Pressure Processes.
3 . AWPA P5 Standard for Waterbome Preservatives.
C . National Evaluation Services, Inc. (NES).
1 . National Evaluation Report (NER) : Report No. NER-648 .
�l
06076-1
1 . 04 CONSTRUCTION of
-3/4 " inches and a
thickness
mum depth
A. Frme
of .a080 at frame ,S090 members hallat vent and ave a 1 045 at glaz nglbead! through the main members
of the vertical frame jambs.
1 .05 HA__RDWARE
A. Windows shall be provided with adjustable spiral sash balances or block and tackle
balances . Suitable latches shall be provided to maintain the sash secure when in a
sash must also have an integrally extruded hand lift for
closed position. Louver
manually opening or closing the lower sash.
1 .06 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. The vertical portion of all sash members shall be provided with wool pile fabric
weather stripping on both the interior and exterior faces to properly contact main
frame . All joints between frame jambs and sill shall be scaled with butyl
compound .
1 . 07 GLAZING
A. All sash members shall be glazed with specified glass and shall be back bedded
ound. Glass shall be retained by extruded bead . Finish to
with butyl glazing comp
match window finish.
] . p8 SCREENS aluminum with
A Scded
reens
shall be fabricated frames shall be famom ished to match window fmishn wall thickness
Scr
1 . 09 FINISH
A. All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Aluminum sections shall be coated with one of the following options .
] , Anodized material :
shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment and the
color shall be one of the following:
a. Dark Bronze AA M12 C22 A42/44
b. Medium Bronze AA M12 C22 A40
C . Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d . Black AA M12 C22 A44
08520-2
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PARTI - GENERAL
i
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Definition: "glass includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass .
"Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass . Types of work
in this section include glass and glazing for:
Window units sidelites, transoms
Window wall
Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed".
B . Packaged mirror units are specified as "accessories" in section 10800 .
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/pattem of glass :
ASG Industries . Inc.
1 Guardian Industries Corporation
Ford Glass Company
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company
PPG Industries, Inc .
Visteon
B . Certificate: Submit certificates from respective-1nanufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements .
C . Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Assoc.
(FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards .
D . InstallerQualifications - Installation contractor specializing in glazing, with a minimum
of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and also being an approved installer
for the glazing product supplier.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 GLASS PRODUCTS
Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass : Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3
i (glazing select), fully tempered. Other glass products for impact resistance are called out
08800- 1
on the drawings and may include, but are not limited to, safety laminate heat strengthed
glass with an .090 innerliner . Thicknesses of laminated glass vary from 3/8 inch to 9/ 16
inch. Frames to receive the glass vary to achieve various levels of impact resistance per ll
local and state codes. Refer to the drawings for a description of each glazed opening. l
2 . 02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS
A . General : provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors, or black if no
color is os selected. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for selection of
hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of
installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials, and
variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the
installation.
B . 2-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant (2Ps-GS) : Elastomeric polysulfide sealant
complying with FS TTS-227 , Class A, Type 2 ; specially compounded and tested to
show a minimum of 20 years resistance to deterioration in normal glazing applications.
Use for exterior applications.
C . Acrylic Emulsion Glazing Sealant (AcEm-GS) : Emulsion of acrylic, with or without
latex rubber modification; compounded specifically for glazing; non-hardening, non-
staining, and non-bleeding. Use for interior applications.
2 .03 GLAZING GASKETS
A . Polvvinvl Chloride Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the
profile and hardness shown, or as required for watertight construction; comply with
ASTM D 2287 .
B . Cellular Neoprene Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded/molded, closed-cell ,
integral-skinned neoprene of profile required to maintain watertight seal ; comply with
ASTM C509, Type II, black.
C . Vinvl Foam Glazing Tape (VF-GT) : Closed cell flexible, self-adhesive, non extruding,
polyvinyl chloride foam tape ; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed,
watertight installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel ;
comply with ASTM C 1667 .
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant of gasket manufacturer.
B . Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70-90 durometer hardness , with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
C. Spacers: Neoprene of EPDM, 40- 50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility
0-2
with sealants used.
2 • Powder coated material :
shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following :
a• ARCHKOTE 6000 - 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 . 2- 85
b. TIGER DRYLAC - SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
Electrostatically sprayed and baked on enamel and the color shall be as
Selected by the Architect.
3 • Clear Anodized Finish on factory Aluminum .
4 . Natural Mill Finish aluminum .
B . The option and color selected for this project is : Single hung windows with white
powdercoated frames, RAL 9010, with non-impact rated insulated glass . Gr
tint exterior pane and clear interior pane. Operable impact shutters shaay
ll be
provided per the plans at each window.
1 . 10 GRILLES
A . When called for, shall be constructed of extruded aluminum and are snapped in
place, or fixed, on either the inside face and/or outside face of the glass. The color
of the grilles shall match the window frames .
2 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Shall be in accordance with approved testing data and in accordance with the
Architect's details for adjacent sealants, interior and exterior finishes .
B . Fasteners shall be of the type and locations as called out in the product testing data.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08520-3
1 . 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements : Provide borate wood preservative treatment which will
perform in accordance with manufacturer' s stated performance criteria without defects,
damage or failure.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. General : Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B . Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer' s SPEC-DATATM product
sheet, for specified products .
C . Quality Assurance Submittals : Submit the following :
1 . Test Reports : Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties .
2 . Evaluation Report: NER-648
3 . Certificates : Certification from treating plant certifying wood treatment applied
complies with the criteria and physical requirements for borate preservative treated
wood products as specified herein.
4 . Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Source Quality : Obtain borate preservative treated wood products from a single approved
source .
B . Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications : Wood treatment plant experienced in performing
work of this section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that required for
this project, licensed by the manufacturer.
C . Independent third party inspection.
D . Kiln Dried After Treatment (KDAT), if required.
E . Regulatory Requirements: Provide borate preservative treatment that complies with local
regulatory requirements .
1 . FBC 2001 requirements for insect and decay preservative treated wood .
F . Quality Mark: All borate preservative treated wood members shall bear a permanent ink
stamp indicating the following:
1 . Manufacturer' s name .
2. Treatment plant name.
3 . Quality mark of an AWPA approved independent inspection agency.
4 . Symbol "SBX" (sodium borate), preservative retention level and date of treatment .
5 . AWPA treatment standard, wood species and the words "Above Ground and
Continuously Protected from Liquid Water. "
06076-2
on the drawings and may include, but are not limited to, safety laminate heat strengthed
glass with an .090 innerliner . Thicknesses of laminated glass vary from 3/8 inch to 9/ 16
inch. Frames to receive the glass vary to achieve various levels of impact resistance per ll
local and state codes. Refer to the drawings for a description of each glazed opening. l
2 . 02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS
A . General : provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors, or black if no
color is os selected. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for selection of
hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of
installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials, and
variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the
installation.
B . 2-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant (2Ps-GS) : Elastomeric polysulfide sealant
complying with FS TTS-227 , Class A, Type 2 ; specially compounded and tested to
show a minimum of 20 years resistance to deterioration in normal glazing applications.
Use for exterior applications.
C . Acrylic Emulsion Glazing Sealant (AcEm-GS) : Emulsion of acrylic, with or without
latex rubber modification; compounded specifically for glazing; non-hardening, non-
staining, and non-bleeding. Use for interior applications.
2 .03 GLAZING GASKETS
A . Polvvinvl Chloride Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the
profile and hardness shown, or as required for watertight construction; comply with
ASTM D 2287 .
B . Cellular Neoprene Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded/molded, closed-cell ,
integral-skinned neoprene of profile required to maintain watertight seal ; comply with
ASTM C509, Type II, black.
C . Vinvl Foam Glazing Tape (VF-GT) : Closed cell flexible, self-adhesive, non extruding,
polyvinyl chloride foam tape ; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed,
watertight installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel ;
comply with ASTM C 1667 .
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant of gasket manufacturer.
B . Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70-90 durometer hardness , with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
C. Spacers: Neoprene of EPDM, 40- 50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility
0-2
with sealants used.
D. Compressed Filler (Rod) Ccn-FR) - Closed cell or waterproof jacketed roof stock of
synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible
and resilient, with 5 - 10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as
otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind
loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss
or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
B . Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with
significant edge damage or other imperfections.
C . Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation .
D . Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of
glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with
recommendations of Flat Glass Market Assoc. "Glazing Manual", except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
3 . 02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate . Remove lacquer
from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used .
B . Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3 .03 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in still rabbit, located 1 /4 of glass width from each
comer. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.
B . Provide spacers inside and out, or proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than
50 united inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing.
Provide 1 /8 " minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape used thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern , draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
08800-3
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General : Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections.
B . Exposure : Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage or installation. Store
material off ground and under cover. Allow materials exposed to incidental moisture to dry
thoroughly prior to covering with vapor or moisture retarding finish materials.
1 .07 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty : Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions .
Osmose, Inc. , offers a 20 year limited warranty against structural damage due to termites,
carpenter ants and fungal decay under the Advance Guard Residential Limited Warranty
when treated to .42 DOT retention. Consult manufacturer for complete details .
B . Manufacturer' s Warranty: Submit, for Owner' s acceptance, manufacturer' s standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official . Manufacturer' s warranty is in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents .
1 . Warranty Period : Twenty (20) years .
PART2PRODUCTS
2 . 01 BORATE PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturer: Osmose, Inc . - Wood Preserving Division .
1 . Contact : PO Drawer O, 1016 Everee Inn Road, Griffin, GA 30224-0249 ; _
Telephone : (800) 241 -0240, (770) 233 -4200 ;
Fax : (770) 229-5225 ; E-mail : treatedwoodVosmose. com ; Web site :
wW1A7.0sm0se .com, Na��rNv. timberspecialties .com .
Note : Advance Guard borate preservative treated wood products are intended for ,
aboveground, weather protected applications only. They are not to be used in areas subject to
precipitation, wetting, dampness or condensation. Advance Guard wood products must be
typically kiln dried after treatment (KDAT) to a maximum moisture content of 19% for
lumber and 18 % for plywood. Wood treated with Advance Guard ' s EPA registered Tim-bor®
Industrial Wood Preservative is easy to work with common tools . The product is colorless and
nonblooming. It will not darken or discolor most woods .
B . Proprietary Product(s)/System(s) : Advance Guard Preservative treated wood Products.
C . Borate Preservative Treatment : Disodium octoborate tetrahydrate (DOT) treatment for
insect and decay protective pressure treatment of wood as produced by manufacturer' s
licensed treatment plants, producing material meeting the following minimum standards :
1 . Preservative Treatment Standard: AWPA P5 .
2 . Structural Lumber Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA C31 .
3 . Plywood Treatment Standard : Comply with AWPA C9 .
4. Treatment Level : Provide borate preservative treatment retention level
06076-3
� )
C
D. Compressed Filler (Rod) Ccn-FR) - Closed cell or waterproof jacketed roof stock of
synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible
and resilient, with 5 - 10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as
otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind
loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss
or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
B . Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with
significant edge damage or other imperfections.
C . Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation .
D . Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of
glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with
recommendations of Flat Glass Market Assoc. "Glazing Manual", except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
3 . 02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate . Remove lacquer
from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used .
B . Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3 .03 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in still rabbit, located 1 /4 of glass width from each
comer. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.
B . Provide spacers inside and out, or proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than
50 united inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing.
Provide 1 /8 " minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape used thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern , draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
08800-3
D . Voids and Filler Rods : Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or
installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not. leave voids in sill
charnels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and
type of glass, and complying with manufacturer' s recommendations .
E . Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
F . Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial
"wash" away from glass . Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out
of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets .
G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after
installation, and eliminated stains and discolorations .
H . Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
"walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with
matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured
heel bead .
I . Gasket Glazing : Miter cut and bond ends together at comers where gaskets are used for
channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or
leaks in glazing system.
J . Structural Gasket Glazing : Cut zipper strips slightly long, to ensure tight closure .
Lubricate zipper strip and use special tool to install zipper. Do not lubricate glazing
channel or anchorage rabbet. Comply with details as shown and manufacturer' s
instructions, including possible use of liquid sealants and weep holes .
3 . 03 CURE PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A . Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass . Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass . Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealants for
high early strength and durability.
B . Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, etched, abraded or
damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents
and vandalism.
C . Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project.
Comply with glass product manufacturer' s recommendations for final cleaning. Sub-
contractors performing glass and window cleaning must be fully insured to replace
damaged glass as a direct result of their negligence . The general contractor is
ultimately responsible for replacing all damaged glass . (`
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08800-4
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A . Rough Hardware
B . Casework Hardware
C . Installation of Hardware
1 . 02 GENERAL
A. All exterior doors shall open outward or in direction of travel to an exit.
B . Copies of the Hardware Schedule, templates and keying schedules shall be submitted
to the Architect and approved before ordering.
C . Exchange schedules and template lists, with related trades, for coordination with their
Shop Drawings.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
\ A . The hardware supplier shall provide a written guarantee that all materials furnished
under this Section will be free from defects in the materials and the workmanship for
a period of one ( 1 ) year from the date of a final " Certificate of Acceptance".
B . The hardware supplier, after a complete and thorough inspection by the Architect,
shall further certify that all items furnished under this Section have been properly
located , in accordance with the Hardware Schedule and the manufacturer ' s
instructions.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A . Three (3) copies of the Hardware Schedule shall be submitted for approval . Door
numbers and hardware groups are not to be changed.
B . Approval of the Hardware Schedule shall be for type, operation and finish only.
1 . 05 DELIVERY
A. Each item of hardware shall be delivered to job site, packaged separately, complete
with the necessary fasteners, screws and anchors. Provide templates and/or
instructions as required.
j B . Mark each item so as to correspond with the Hardware Schedule, identifying contents
- J and defining location.
08700- 1
recommended by manufacturer to provide the following minimum protection, as
indicated on wood product quality stamp specified in Quality Assurance article : .42
DOT retention if warranty is required or expected. `
a . Protection against North American subterranean termites, decay and insects , J
and Formosan termites : 0 .42 pcf (6 . 7 kg/m 3 ) DOT retention (0 .28 pcf (4 . 5
kg/m 3 ) B203) minimum retention (required for warranty) .
2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions : No substitutions permitted .
2 .03 RELATED MATERIALS
Note : Wood species qualifying under Advance Guard warranties include a variety of
softwood lumber and plywood. Approved softwood lumber types are Douglas fir, hem-fir,
Southern pine and spruce-pine-fir . Approved plywood types are: Southern yellow pine and
Douglas fir.
A. Wood Materials : Refer to Division 6 Sections for related wood materials required to be
treated as specified herein.
B . Field Applied End Coat : Preservative solution approved by preservative treated wood
manufacturer for application:
1 . Osmose, Inc . , Tim-bor disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT), 10% solution.
2 . Copper Naphthenate, 2% solution, copper metal basis.
3 . Other preservative approved by Advance Guard manufacturer. f
2 . 04 SOURCE QUALITY
A . Tests, Inspections : Do not conceal applied treated material with subsequent trades work
until the Architect has approved the installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 . 01 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer' s product data, including product literature,
technical bulletins, product wraps and labels and product catalog installation instructions for
installation.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Select borate preservative treated wood members in accordance with appropriate untreated
lumber and plywood span tables . Provide ventilation of building cavities as required by code.
B . Install borate preservative treated wood in accordance with requirements of applicable
codes and related Division 6 sections . Avoid milling operations that could adversely affect
preservative characteristics of borate preservative treated wood.
06076-4
D . Voids and Filler Rods : Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or
installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not. leave voids in sill
charnels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and
type of glass, and complying with manufacturer' s recommendations .
E . Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
F . Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial
"wash" away from glass . Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out
of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets .
G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after
installation, and eliminated stains and discolorations .
H . Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
"walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with
matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured
heel bead .
I . Gasket Glazing : Miter cut and bond ends together at comers where gaskets are used for
channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or
leaks in glazing system.
J . Structural Gasket Glazing : Cut zipper strips slightly long, to ensure tight closure .
Lubricate zipper strip and use special tool to install zipper. Do not lubricate glazing
channel or anchorage rabbet. Comply with details as shown and manufacturer' s
instructions, including possible use of liquid sealants and weep holes .
3 . 03 CURE PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A . Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass . Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass . Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealants for
high early strength and durability.
B . Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, etched, abraded or
damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents
and vandalism.
C . Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project.
Comply with glass product manufacturer' s recommendations for final cleaning. Sub-
contractors performing glass and window cleaning must be fully insured to replace
damaged glass as a direct result of their negligence . The general contractor is
ultimately responsible for replacing all damaged glass . (`
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08800-4
DIVISION 9. FINISHES
SECTION 09100 - LATIIING AND STUCCO
1.01 GENERAL ,
1 . All applicable provisions of the General Conditions are a part of this section.
2. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc ., and services necessary and
incidental to the complete fabrication, furnishing and erection of this section as
shown, noted, detailed and reasonably implied on the drawings and in the
specifications.
3. All lathing, plastering, and stucco work, in addition to conforming to this section,
shall conform to the American National Standards Specifications A42.2 and A42 .3 .
1 .02 MATERIALS :
Stucco
1 . Do not use any precolored stucco mixes.
/1 2 . Premix stucco bag mix shall conform to ASTM C-926, Gray.
3 . Sand shall be clean, sharp, fine, sand conforming to ASTM C- 144 .
4. Water shall be clean, fresh, portable and free from mineral organic substances that ,
would affect the set of stucco.
Metal Lath
1 . Self-furring metal lath shall be expanded metal lath with staggered indentations
spaced 3 - 1/2" apart horizontally and 2" apart vertically with indentations of depth to
hold lath a minimum of 1/4" away from back-up material. Lath shall be hot dipped
galvanized for interior and exterior use and shall weigh 3 .4 pounds per square yard.
2. Metal lath to be used where supports are spaced over 16" on centers shall be hot
dipped galvanized, expanded metal lath stiffened with 3/8 " ribs spaced 4" on center,
weighing a minimum of 3.4 pounds per square yard.
3 . Sheets secured to supports at intervals not exceeding six inches (0) . Place ties
where sides of sheets lap at supports, and at side laps or sheets between supports .
Tie wire to be not less than 18 ga. galvanized wire.
09100-1
C . End Cut Treatment : Treat end cuts of borate preservative treated wood members over 2
inches (51 mm) in thickness with field applied end coat prior to installation for Spruce-Pine-
Fir (SPF) and Douglas Fir (DF) only.
D. Sill Plate: Where applicable, provide sill plate of Borate preservative treated wood or CCA
pressure treated wood.
E. Install using fasteners required by applicable code for use with untreated lumber and
plywood.
3 . 03 FINISHING
A . For painting or staining of Advance Guard PTW, a light sanding or brushing is all that is
necessary to ensure proper coating adhesion . Complete application recommendations are
available from the manufacturer. Avoid frequent or prolonged inhalation of sawdust from
treated wood. When sawing and machining treated wood, wear a dust mask. When power
sawing or machining, wear goggles to protect eyes from flying particles . Surfaces must be
clean and dry before application.
B . Prepare borate preservative treated wood for application of finishes in accordance with
manufacturer' s recommendations . Sand surfaces lightly, clean and check for moisture prior
to finishing.
C . Apply paint or stain in accordance with Section 09900"Painting. "
3 . 04 PROTECTION
A . Protection : Protect borate preservative treated wood from damage during construction .
Protect from moisture prior to installation of finishes.
"END OF SECTION * * *
'i
06076-5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 HINGES
A . All Hinges shall be STANLEY , HAGER, McKINNEY.
B . Use three hinges per door leaf on all doors up to a door height of 7 -6 " and an extra
hinge for each additional thirty (30) inches of door height as noted .
C . providthe
groupse Provode non-removable wsize and type hinges unless ise noted in the hardware
removable pins for exterior doors.
I . Exterior Doors : Stainless Steel
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2"
2 . Interior Doors with US26D finish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
3 . Interior Doors without Closfinish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
D . Finish {
I . Exterior Doors: Stainless Steel
2 . Interior Doors : Satin Chromium Plated Finish
2 .02 LOCKS & EXIT DEVICES
A . All locksets shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE. All
locks shall have a minimum throw of ''/z" . Finish to be per the Finish Hardware
Schedule. Functioning of the locks shall be as designated in the hardware groups.
2 .03 CLOSING DEVICES
losers shall be provided by one manufacturer and guaranteed for
A . All hydraulic door c
five (5) years.
B . Door Closers shall be LCN at all doors per schedule, fully hydraulic , full rack and
pinion action. Closers shall have a separate adjustments for latch speed, general
speed and back check. All closers and accessories, except special purpose types,
whether applied to hinge side , stop face, over door or on bracket, shall be non-handed.
All closers are to be installed on the room side of the door except where noted in the
Hardware Schedule. All closers are to be installed with thru-bolts and five screws
in the foot. 08700-2
DIVISION 9. FINISHES
SECTION 09100 - LATIIING AND STUCCO
1.01 GENERAL ,
1 . All applicable provisions of the General Conditions are a part of this section.
2. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc ., and services necessary and
incidental to the complete fabrication, furnishing and erection of this section as
shown, noted, detailed and reasonably implied on the drawings and in the
specifications.
3. All lathing, plastering, and stucco work, in addition to conforming to this section,
shall conform to the American National Standards Specifications A42.2 and A42 .3 .
1 .02 MATERIALS :
Stucco
1 . Do not use any precolored stucco mixes.
/1 2 . Premix stucco bag mix shall conform to ASTM C-926, Gray.
3 . Sand shall be clean, sharp, fine, sand conforming to ASTM C- 144 .
4. Water shall be clean, fresh, portable and free from mineral organic substances that ,
would affect the set of stucco.
Metal Lath
1 . Self-furring metal lath shall be expanded metal lath with staggered indentations
spaced 3 - 1/2" apart horizontally and 2" apart vertically with indentations of depth to
hold lath a minimum of 1/4" away from back-up material. Lath shall be hot dipped
galvanized for interior and exterior use and shall weigh 3 .4 pounds per square yard.
2. Metal lath to be used where supports are spaced over 16" on centers shall be hot
dipped galvanized, expanded metal lath stiffened with 3/8 " ribs spaced 4" on center,
weighing a minimum of 3.4 pounds per square yard.
3 . Sheets secured to supports at intervals not exceeding six inches (0) . Place ties
where sides of sheets lap at supports, and at side laps or sheets between supports .
Tie wire to be not less than 18 ga. galvanized wire.
09100-1
4. Diamond-mesh lath lapped at sides not less than 1/2" and at ends not less than I " .
�1 End laps of sheets should generally occur only over supports; if between, end of
sheets to be laced or adequately tied with # 18 ga., galvanized, annealed wire.
5 . No paper backed laths will be accepted. Remove paper backings on any laths
supplied to the job site. Utilize 30# felt roofing paper or backing as called out on
the plans .
6. Install according to ASTM C 1063 .
1.03 MIXING AND APPLICATION:
1 . Before the application of stucco masonry, all surfaces shall be clean and free from
defect. Concrete surfaces to receive stucco shall be coated with a bonding agent to
insure proper bond. Dampen masonry surfaces with a fog spray immediately prior
to application so as to prevent excessive withdrawal of moisture from the stucco .
2. Stucco shall be applied in three (3) coats to a total thickness of 3/4" over specified
metal lath and in two (2) coats to a total thickness of 5/8 " on concrete or masonry.
Finish coat to be installed as per manufacturer' s recommendations of approximately
1 /4" thickness with a smooth sponge finish.
3 . Cross rake all scratch coats in order to form a mechanical bond with brown coats .
/1 Lightly cross-scratch all brown coats of plaster in order to form a mechanical bond
with the finish coat.
4 . Keep each base coat moist for at least 48 hours; commence moistening as soon as
plaster is hardened sufficiently to prevent injuries. If atmospheric conditions are
hot and dry, curing time shall be extended as necessary to at no additional cost to
the Owner. Allow base coat to cure for a minimum of seven (7) days before
applying finishing coat.
5 . FINISH COAT shall be free from waves, dents, trowel marks, and shall be a
smooth sponge finish. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1 /4 inch in 10 feet
from a true plane in finished surfaces.
6 . Plaster and stucco used for patching and replacing existing work shall be mixed,
applied and finished to match adjacent surfaces.
1 .04 CLEANING:
1 . After completion of work, all scaffolding, tools, and other equipment shall be
removed from the building, taking care not to damage work of other trades. All
cement plaster rubbish shall be removed and the building left broom clean.
09100-2
2 . 04 STOPS
A . Wall Stops shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE
SCHEDULE, Model WB I I or 50C/60C as required by the wall conditions . Wall
stops to be utilized on interior/exterior frame walls to have solid wood backing to
Prevent drywall failure. Wall Stops WBI I should be mounted to the wood base .
Areas with Vinyl or Ceramic Tile Base should utilize the wall stops 50C/60C.
2 . 05 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP
A . Thresholds and Weather stripping shall be PEMKO, to match the types and sizes
indicated on the Hardware Schedule or detailed on the drawings .
B - Provide screws and anchors as required .
C . Finish to be per Schedule.
2 . 06 PLACEMENT OF HARDWARd
Various items shall have the following heights and locations, unless otherwise indicated .
(Heights are shown from finish floor to center line of item) :
J
A. Hinges : Standard Placement
B . Cylindrical Lockset 38 "
C . Closer per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of opening. All closers
to be mounted on room side of door.
D . Stops:
I • Wall : On wall where knob or pull hits.
2 • Floor: As per standard practice.
3 • Chain Door: As per standard practice.
4. Over-Head : Per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of
opening. All Over-Head stops to be mounted on room side of door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 KEYING
A. All cylinder locks shall be keyed to Owner' s EXISTING system. Coordinate with
Owner as to manufacturer and type. .
B . Submit keying schedule, based on the instructions and prior approval of the Owner' s
representative, for final approval before ordering locks.
08700.3
l �
`�_J
i
\.
4. Diamond-mesh lath lapped at sides not less than 1/2" and at ends not less than I " .
�1 End laps of sheets should generally occur only over supports; if between, end of
sheets to be laced or adequately tied with # 18 ga., galvanized, annealed wire.
5 . No paper backed laths will be accepted. Remove paper backings on any laths
supplied to the job site. Utilize 30# felt roofing paper or backing as called out on
the plans .
6. Install according to ASTM C 1063 .
1.03 MIXING AND APPLICATION:
1 . Before the application of stucco masonry, all surfaces shall be clean and free from
defect. Concrete surfaces to receive stucco shall be coated with a bonding agent to
insure proper bond. Dampen masonry surfaces with a fog spray immediately prior
to application so as to prevent excessive withdrawal of moisture from the stucco .
2. Stucco shall be applied in three (3) coats to a total thickness of 3/4" over specified
metal lath and in two (2) coats to a total thickness of 5/8 " on concrete or masonry.
Finish coat to be installed as per manufacturer' s recommendations of approximately
1 /4" thickness with a smooth sponge finish.
3 . Cross rake all scratch coats in order to form a mechanical bond with brown coats .
/1 Lightly cross-scratch all brown coats of plaster in order to form a mechanical bond
with the finish coat.
4 . Keep each base coat moist for at least 48 hours; commence moistening as soon as
plaster is hardened sufficiently to prevent injuries. If atmospheric conditions are
hot and dry, curing time shall be extended as necessary to at no additional cost to
the Owner. Allow base coat to cure for a minimum of seven (7) days before
applying finishing coat.
5 . FINISH COAT shall be free from waves, dents, trowel marks, and shall be a
smooth sponge finish. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1 /4 inch in 10 feet
from a true plane in finished surfaces.
6 . Plaster and stucco used for patching and replacing existing work shall be mixed,
applied and finished to match adjacent surfaces.
1 .04 CLEANING:
1 . After completion of work, all scaffolding, tools, and other equipment shall be
removed from the building, taking care not to damage work of other trades. All
cement plaster rubbish shall be removed and the building left broom clean.
09100-2
2. Stucco Contractor is responsible for protecting all existing work, windows, doors,
equipment, etc. from stucco residue during application. Clean any residue that may
exist at completion of work.
1.05 STUCCO ACCESSORIES:
NOTE : REFER TO PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS FOR
SPECIFIC TYPE AND PLACEMENT PER PROJECT.
I . Casing Beads :
a. For interior use shall be formed of 24 gauge Galvanized Steel, ASTM
A525-81 , A527-80, A446 (.0179 thickness G90 gaiv.).
b. For exterior use shall be formed of Solid Zinc Alloy, type #66 as
manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, 466 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Company, type 466X as manufactured by Keene Products or an
approved comparable product. Zinc shall be Ahoy 190, ASTM B69-89
(.0179 thickness).
C. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unplasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), type 6658 or 6675 as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation, or an
approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class 13244C.
2. Interior comer beads shall be fabricated of 26 ga. galvanized, type 1 , as
manufactured by National Gypsum Co. , I -A as manufactured by National Gypsum
Co., l -A as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., or # 1 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Products Co., or an approved comparable product.
3 • Control Joints, Expansion Joints, Channel Reveals ;.
a. For exterior use on flat vertical and horizontal surfaces shall be Solid Zinc
Alloy as manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, Inland Steel Company,
Keene Products, or an approved comparable product. Profiles and
configurations vary greatly; refer to plans and details for product numbers
and applications.
b. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unpiasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation or an approved
comparable product. Profiles and configurations vary greatly; refer to plans
and details for product numbers and applications. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell
class 13244C. ASTM C1063 -86.
4. Inside corner Expansion Jointsforinterior or exterior applications .where depicted
on the drawings, shall be vinyl, Model 3058 or 3075, as manufactured by Vinyl
Corporation, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D-1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM CI063-86.
09100-3
DIVISION 6, CARPENTRY
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Documents and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Definition: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other
sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated . Types of
work in this section include, but are not limited to, rough carpentry for:
1 . Nailers & dead wood
2 . Cant strip
3 . Wood roof curb supports
4 . Door frame bracing
5 . Chalk, tack board, backing
6 . Casework backing
7 . Plumbing backing - (Supports)
8 . Projection screen backing
9 . Window stripping
10. Recessed clock/speakers (framed opening)
11 . Recessed fire extinguisher cabinets (framed opening) RWL - Access: to clean
out.
12 . Toilet partition backing
13 . Recessed electrical panels backing
14 . Mirror backing
15 . Acoustical backing
16 . Ceiling trim backing
B . Finish carpentry is specified in another section within Division 6.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood treatment Data• Submit treatment manufacturer' s instructions for proper use of
each type of treated material .
B . Pressure Treatment: For each type of specified, include certification by treating plant
stating chemicals and process used, net amount of preservative retained and
conformance with applicable standards.
06100- 1
C . Delivery l
l . All locks are to be delivered to hn job te wthomaster the
key, if required rmanent Y All . l
locks are to be keyed to the existing owner' s
2 . A representative of the Hardware Supplier, uponthe completion of the project,
shall check all locks for proper location, operation and keying as well as
deactivate the construction-key operation and transfer all locks to a permanent
key operation .
ly
3 . All permanent keys
number d location hand all bshall oberturned identified
directly tagged
the t Owner' s
representative.
4 _ Furnish six (6) master keys of each set to the Owner .
3 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE GROUP NUMBERS
The following Hardware Schedule is to be used as a general guide . Special or unusual
conditions not covered in the schedule will have hardware of a similar type and quality to
meet the job conditions , and it shall be the hardware consultant' s responsibility to insure that
all hardware is supplied to meet job requirements and produce a complete job .
GENERAL NOTES
1 . HARDWARE LISTED TAKEN FROM THE FOLLOWING CATALOGS :
HAGER Butts
CORBIN -RUSSWIN Locks
LCN Closers
GLYNN JOHNSON Stops
PEMKO Thresholds
Weather Stripping
* A *END OF SECTION '
08700-4
2. Stucco Contractor is responsible for protecting all existing work, windows, doors,
equipment, etc. from stucco residue during application. Clean any residue that may
exist at completion of work.
1.05 STUCCO ACCESSORIES:
NOTE : REFER TO PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS FOR
SPECIFIC TYPE AND PLACEMENT PER PROJECT.
I . Casing Beads :
a. For interior use shall be formed of 24 gauge Galvanized Steel, ASTM
A525-81 , A527-80, A446 (.0179 thickness G90 gaiv.).
b. For exterior use shall be formed of Solid Zinc Alloy, type #66 as
manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, 466 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Company, type 466X as manufactured by Keene Products or an
approved comparable product. Zinc shall be Ahoy 190, ASTM B69-89
(.0179 thickness).
C. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unplasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), type 6658 or 6675 as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation, or an
approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class 13244C.
2. Interior comer beads shall be fabricated of 26 ga. galvanized, type 1 , as
manufactured by National Gypsum Co. , I -A as manufactured by National Gypsum
Co., l -A as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., or # 1 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Products Co., or an approved comparable product.
3 • Control Joints, Expansion Joints, Channel Reveals ;.
a. For exterior use on flat vertical and horizontal surfaces shall be Solid Zinc
Alloy as manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, Inland Steel Company,
Keene Products, or an approved comparable product. Profiles and
configurations vary greatly; refer to plans and details for product numbers
and applications.
b. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unpiasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation or an approved
comparable product. Profiles and configurations vary greatly; refer to plans
and details for product numbers and applications. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell
class 13244C. ASTM C1063 -86.
4. Inside corner Expansion Jointsforinterior or exterior applications .where depicted
on the drawings, shall be vinyl, Model 3058 or 3075, as manufactured by Vinyl
Corporation, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D-1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM CI063-86.
09100-3
5 . Fascia Drip Screed for exterior applications where depicted on the drawings, shall
!-1 be vinyl, Model DS 15-75 by Vinyl Corporation, or Model 540-75 by Plastic
Components, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM C1063-86.
1.06 EXECUTION:
1 . Quality - Follow recommendations and specifications for strict installation. Allow
adequate time for each of three (3) coats to dry before going on with the next coat.
2. Stucco Accessories :
a. The stucco contractor shall request a project walk-around with the
Architect prior to installing any exterior stucco accessories, to insure all
conditions, materials, and applications are understood.
b. Corner beads , for interior applications only, shall be installed on all comers
and edges of comer openings. Comer beads shall extend the full height of
the corners on which they are applied and shall act as a ground.
C. Casing beads shall be applied where stucco stops and other products begin,
or where indicated on plans and details.
n
d. When applying vinyl products, all intersections, end butts and end mitres
shall have manufacturer' s approved sealant placed at raw edges to adhere
the sections prior to application of stucco.
3 . Metal lath shall be applied with long dimension of sheet across supports .
4. Control Joints and Expansion Joints shall be installed in exact locations shown, or ,
as to check shrinkage and expansion cracks. Do not fill any throats of control j oints
with sealants .
5 . Inside-Corner Expansion Joints shall be iustalle(f in exact locations shown on
details.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
'� 09100-4
SLC ETON x V " ^ DOOR I WISH HA R71 W A b G SCHEDULE(INDiANRNERCOUNTyI'ARKSMAm W � � .uW � • nr+iluLL�
NANCE COMPLEX PROJECT)
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The Door Hardware Schedule has been prepared by:
Lotspeich Company of Florida, Inc.
7435 Central Industrial Drive
Riviera Beach , FL 33404
Phone : 561-848-3040
Fax : 561 -843-9020
Consultant: Mr. Ed Cutler
Date : 6 March 2009
The following Schedule shall be utilized by the General Contractor to establiash
price for door hardware. The Contractor's Final Door Schedule for
construction purposes complete with manufacturer's catalog cuts, must be
submitted to the Architect for review in accordance with the Su
of this specifications manual. bmittal Section
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08710-1
C . For water-borne preservatives, include statement, that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to a maximum of 15 % prior to shipment to project site.
D . Fire-retardant treatment: Include certification by treatment plant that treatment material
complies with governing ordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished
surfaces .
1 .04 PRODUCT HANDLING
Delivery and Storage : Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather
and contact with damp or wet surfaces . Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air
circulation within stacks .
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for an accurate
fit . Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
proper attachment of other work.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A . Lumber Standards : Comply with PS 20 . `
B . Plywood Standards : Comply with PS 1 . /
C . Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed with transparent finish or
without finish .
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions . Provided actual
sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. Provide
dressed lumber, S4S , unless otherwise indicated. Provide seasoned lumber with 10%
maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
B . Framing Lumber: (2" through 4" thick)
C . For light framing (less than 6" wide) , provide the following grade and species :
Construction grades, any species .
06100 -2
5 . Fascia Drip Screed for exterior applications where depicted on the drawings, shall
!-1 be vinyl, Model DS 15-75 by Vinyl Corporation, or Model 540-75 by Plastic
Components, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM C1063-86.
1.06 EXECUTION:
1 . Quality - Follow recommendations and specifications for strict installation. Allow
adequate time for each of three (3) coats to dry before going on with the next coat.
2. Stucco Accessories :
a. The stucco contractor shall request a project walk-around with the
Architect prior to installing any exterior stucco accessories, to insure all
conditions, materials, and applications are understood.
b. Corner beads , for interior applications only, shall be installed on all comers
and edges of comer openings. Comer beads shall extend the full height of
the corners on which they are applied and shall act as a ground.
C. Casing beads shall be applied where stucco stops and other products begin,
or where indicated on plans and details.
n
d. When applying vinyl products, all intersections, end butts and end mitres
shall have manufacturer' s approved sealant placed at raw edges to adhere
the sections prior to application of stucco.
3 . Metal lath shall be applied with long dimension of sheet across supports .
4. Control Joints and Expansion Joints shall be installed in exact locations shown, or ,
as to check shrinkage and expansion cracks. Do not fill any throats of control j oints
with sealants .
5 . Inside-Corner Expansion Joints shall be iustalle(f in exact locations shown on
details.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
'� 09100-4
SECTION 09230 - CEMENT BACKING BOARD
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary
conditions and Division- 1 Specifications Sections, addenda apply to work of this section.
1 .02 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
Lightgage Metal Framing Section 05400
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Gypsum Wallboard Section 092.50
Ceramic Tile Section 09300
1 .03 DESCRIPTION:
Extent of cement backing board system work is shown on Drawings and Schedules for
areas receiving ceramic tile.
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Obtain cement board from a single manufacturer.
l
B . Single-Installer Responsibility: A single installer shall perform the work of this
section; and shall be a firm specializing in this work for at least 3 years, capable of
showing successful installations similar to work required for project, using
recommended attachment screws and spacing of screws .
C . ANSI A108 . 11 - 1999 : Interior installation of cementious backer units .
1 .05 SUBMITTALS :
Submit manufacturer' s product data, specifications; and installation instructions for the
cement board systems .
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the original packages, containers, or bundles
bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification.
B. Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water and in
such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Stack cement
boards flat to avoid sagging or damage to edges, or surfaces -
09230-1
D . Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work
including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar
members . Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and
as follows .
Moisture content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
preservative treatment.
E. Grade : Construction Grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size
lumber as required. Provide construction grade boards (RIS or WCLB) or No . 2
boards (SPIB or WWPA) .
F. Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed in finished work supply the following :
1 . Where painted finish is indicated, provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade
A face exposed and Grade C concealed, for exterior use; and provide A-D/INT-
APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior
use.
2. Concealed Plywood : Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide
C-D Plugged/INT-APA .
3 . For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide 3/4 " fire-
l
retardant treated plywood with exterior glue .
1 2. 03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners and Anchorages Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as
recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal`
Specifications ' for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices .
Provide metal hangers and frazrting anchors of the size and type recommended by the
manufacturer for each use including recommended nails .
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of
high relative humidity, provide stainless steel fasteners.
Interior work shall utilize hot dipped galvanized.
B . Building Pa ear Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 154 or 30 #, ASTM D226 .
2 .04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment : Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd", "P .T. "
or "Treated", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements
of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPA standards listed
below. Mark each treated items with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements .
06100-3
SECTION 09230 - CEMENT BACKING BOARD
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary
conditions and Division- 1 Specifications Sections, addenda apply to work of this section.
1 .02 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
Lightgage Metal Framing Section 05400
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Gypsum Wallboard Section 092.50
Ceramic Tile Section 09300
1 .03 DESCRIPTION:
Extent of cement backing board system work is shown on Drawings and Schedules for
areas receiving ceramic tile.
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Obtain cement board from a single manufacturer.
l
B . Single-Installer Responsibility: A single installer shall perform the work of this
section; and shall be a firm specializing in this work for at least 3 years, capable of
showing successful installations similar to work required for project, using
recommended attachment screws and spacing of screws .
C . ANSI A108 . 11 - 1999 : Interior installation of cementious backer units .
1 .05 SUBMITTALS :
Submit manufacturer' s product data, specifications; and installation instructions for the
cement board systems .
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the original packages, containers, or bundles
bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification.
B. Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water and in
such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Stack cement
boards flat to avoid sagging or damage to edges, or surfaces -
09230-1
C . Handle cement boards to prevent damage. Protect metal framing members from
being bent or damaged . Protect gypsum panels in same manner as cement boards . \\
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DUROCK Cement Board Systern
as manufactured by the United States Gypsum Company, unless otherwise
indicated.
B . Equivalent systems of other manufacturers will be accepted under conditions as set
forth in the contract conditions.
C . Materials :
1 . Glass Mesh Mortar Unit (Cement Board) : USG DUROCK Exterior Cement
board 1/2" x 4' x 8 ' .
2. Cement board fasteners :
a. Non-wet areas- 1 1 /4", DUROCK Screws : wafer head with
anti-corrosive coating. Heads recessed or counter sunk .
b . Wet areas- 1 1 /4" , DUROCK Screws : wafer head stainless steel . Heads
recessed or countersunk.
D . Joint Reinforcement: DUROCK Tape (2" wide). NOTE : This portion of the work
is to be performed by the Ceramic Tile contractor per Section 09300.
E. Metal Framing : Comply with ASTM 0645 : Manufactured by the United States
Gypsum Company Min. 22 ga. Must meet ASTM A446, A525 , A568 , A463 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
A. Install metal framing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Stud spacing not to
exceed 16 in . o .c. Provide double studs at ends of each board.
B . Install cement board with rough side facing out and vertical edges over double supports .
Stagger joints in successive courses . Install adjacent board closely but not forced.
C . Fasten boards to framing with DUROCK screws . Space fasteners 8 " o .c. at walls . Locate
perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 " from edges. Counter sink screw heads slightly beneath the
board surface. Provide firm board contact with framing. Pre-drill edge screw locations to
prevent breaking at edges .
09230-2
® Since 1928
Lff
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT / DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
B . Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with
AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15 . Treat
indicated items and the following :
Wood cants, nailers, cures, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and water proofing. Wood sills, sleepers ,
blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
C . Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where "FR-S " lumber or plywood is specified or otherwise
indicated, provide materials which comply with AWPA standards for pressure
impregnations with fire-retardant chemicals, and which have a flame spread rating of
not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84 , and
show no increase in flame spread and significant progressive combustion upon
continuation of test for an additional 20 minutes .
Kiln-dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19%.
Provide UL label on each piece of fire-retardant lumber or plywood .
D . Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A . Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units
which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B . Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and
true and accurately cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and
as required by recognized standards . Countersink nail head on exposed carpentry work
and fill holes .
D . Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials . Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required.
06100-4
C . Handle cement boards to prevent damage. Protect metal framing members from
being bent or damaged . Protect gypsum panels in same manner as cement boards . \\
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DUROCK Cement Board Systern
as manufactured by the United States Gypsum Company, unless otherwise
indicated.
B . Equivalent systems of other manufacturers will be accepted under conditions as set
forth in the contract conditions.
C . Materials :
1 . Glass Mesh Mortar Unit (Cement Board) : USG DUROCK Exterior Cement
board 1/2" x 4' x 8 ' .
2. Cement board fasteners :
a. Non-wet areas- 1 1 /4", DUROCK Screws : wafer head with
anti-corrosive coating. Heads recessed or counter sunk .
b . Wet areas- 1 1 /4" , DUROCK Screws : wafer head stainless steel . Heads
recessed or countersunk.
D . Joint Reinforcement: DUROCK Tape (2" wide). NOTE : This portion of the work
is to be performed by the Ceramic Tile contractor per Section 09300.
E. Metal Framing : Comply with ASTM 0645 : Manufactured by the United States
Gypsum Company Min. 22 ga. Must meet ASTM A446, A525 , A568 , A463 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
A. Install metal framing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Stud spacing not to
exceed 16 in . o .c. Provide double studs at ends of each board.
B . Install cement board with rough side facing out and vertical edges over double supports .
Stagger joints in successive courses . Install adjacent board closely but not forced.
C . Fasten boards to framing with DUROCK screws . Space fasteners 8 " o .c. at walls . Locate
perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 " from edges. Counter sink screw heads slightly beneath the
board surface. Provide firm board contact with framing. Pre-drill edge screw locations to
prevent breaking at edges .
09230-2
D . Joint Reinforcement Tape and Mortar Skim Coat : Apply tape over board joints and interior
corners. Do not overlap. NOTE : This portion of work to be performed by the Ceramic
Tile Contractor per Specification Section 09300.
E. Ceramic Tile: Comply with application requirements of Division-9 Section 09300 .
F . In wet areas, or areas subject to wash down due to periodic maintenance, install moisture
barrier on top of cement board . NOTE : This portion of the work to be performed by the
Ceramic Tile Contractor per specification Section 09300.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
09230-3
3 . 02 WOOD GROUNDS NAILERS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS
A . Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other
work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to
be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
B . Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
C . Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1 'h " wide and thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3 . 03 WOOD FURRING (WD-FUR)
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges of openings . Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finished work.
B . Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling Unless otherwise shown, provide 1 "x3 " furring'
at 2 'o .c. , horizontally and vertically. Structural framing to receive furring will dictate
the spacing, size and type of furring. Refer to drawings and details .
3 . 04 WOOD FRAMING GENERAL (WD-FRM)
A . Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as
shown, or if not show, comply with recommendations of "Manual for House Framing''
of National Forest Productions Association . Do not splice structural members between
supports.
B . Anchor and nail as shown, and to comply with "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of
"Manual for Housing Framing" and other recommendations of the N.F .P.A .
3 . 05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (PWD)
A. Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA), for the
installation of plywood and per the current edition of the Florida Building Code
nailing patterns.
3 . 06 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 . All work shall comply with the standards of the American Institute of Timber
Construction, AWI, API, AWPA, and local codes and regulations.
2. All framing shall be square, plumb and true .
3 . All furring shall be shimmed to a plumb, true surface.
06100-5
D . Joint Reinforcement Tape and Mortar Skim Coat : Apply tape over board joints and interior
corners. Do not overlap. NOTE : This portion of work to be performed by the Ceramic
Tile Contractor per Specification Section 09300.
E. Ceramic Tile: Comply with application requirements of Division-9 Section 09300 .
F . In wet areas, or areas subject to wash down due to periodic maintenance, install moisture
barrier on top of cement board . NOTE : This portion of the work to be performed by the
Ceramic Tile Contractor per specification Section 09300.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
09230-3
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL
- - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON
HA HAGER
IV H . B . IVES
LC LCN CLOSERS
LU LUND EQUIPMENT CO . INC
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
VO VON DUPRIN
I
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY
US26D CHROMIUM PLATED , DULL
26D SATIN CHROME
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
SP28 LACQUER SPRAYED ALUMINUM
4 . All lumber in contact with masonry shall be #2 yellow pine, pressure treated.
5 . Coordinate blocking and backing requirements of all trades and provide where
indicated and required.
6 . Provide solid blocking behind all shower valves .
7 . Provide rough openings for all manufactured items such as medicine cabinets, fire
extinguisher cabinets, etc.
8 . Provide wood fire cats in all interior and exterior frame walls where vertical cavity
exceeds 8 feet and where soffits adjoin vertical walls.
9 . Construct 3/4 inch BC plywood plenum bases, including vertical sides, for all Closet
Mounted Air-Handling Units. Line interiors with 5/8 " type "X" gypsum board to
comply with non-combustible plenum requirements .
* * *END OF SECTION'
06100-6
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Gypsum Board Standard: ASTM C 840
1 .02 MATERIALS :
A. Drywall Materials -, Exposed Gypsum Board ASTM C 36
1 . Long Edges : Standard taper
a. /z" Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
b. %2" Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
C. 5/8 " Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
d. 5/8 " Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
e. 5/8 " Type-X Fire Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
f. 5/8 " Vandal Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
B . Trim Accessories : Provide manufacturer ' s standard metal trim accessories, of the
beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where
semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. See plans and details for specific
locations and conditions .
C . Provide corner beads at external corners . Install with nails or screws at minimum of
l6" on center. No crimp bead will be accepted unless in combination with nails or
screws .
D. Provide edge trim of the shape indicated where edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed; L-type for abutment at edges, other U-
type except special kerfed-type where kerf is provided in adjoining work. See plans
and details for specific locations and conditions.
E. Gypsum Board Fasteners : Self drilling, self tapping, bugle head, screws.
F. Joint tape : ASTM C 475 , performed, Type I1.
G. Joint Compound- ASTM 475, Type I.
H. Provide water-resistant type MR manufactured by United States Gypsum Company
for use with water-resistant backing board and cementitous substrate backing board.
1 .03 DRYWALL INSTALLATION AND FINISHING:
1 . Install gypsum boards- in lengths and directions which will minimize number of end
joints, and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings. Install walls and partitions
with exposed gypsum boards vertical, with joints offset on opposite sides of
09250-1
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
B . Wood Doors Section 08200
C . Finish Hardware Section 08700
D . Chalkboards, Tackboards, & Pegboards Section 10100
E. Plastic Laminated Toilet Partitions Section 10160
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE - STANDARDS
A. The "Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are hereby made a part of this Specification. Any reference to
Premium, Custom or Economy shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI
Standards .
B . Any items not given a specific quality grade, shall be custom grade.
C . Products of other manufacturers may be proposed under conditions as set forth in
the Contract Conditions of these Specifications .
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A . Deliver manufactured material in original packages .
B . Store all finish materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage
and exposure to the elements .
1 .04 MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK
Shelving not included in Casework Specifications nor in Casework Drawings :
A. SWI Custom Grade if stained.
B . AWI Economy Grade if painted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR WOODWORK FOR PAINT FINISH
A (Quality Grade - Economy grade requirements of AWI Quality Standards.
B. Wood S ecies : B and better V . G. Fir, Birch, or where indicated on Drawings - B
and better Oak.
06200-1
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Gypsum Board Standard: ASTM C 840
1 .02 MATERIALS :
A. Drywall Materials -, Exposed Gypsum Board ASTM C 36
1 . Long Edges : Standard taper
a. /z" Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
b. %2" Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
C. 5/8 " Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
d. 5/8 " Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
e. 5/8 " Type-X Fire Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
f. 5/8 " Vandal Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
B . Trim Accessories : Provide manufacturer ' s standard metal trim accessories, of the
beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where
semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. See plans and details for specific
locations and conditions .
C . Provide corner beads at external corners . Install with nails or screws at minimum of
l6" on center. No crimp bead will be accepted unless in combination with nails or
screws .
D. Provide edge trim of the shape indicated where edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed; L-type for abutment at edges, other U-
type except special kerfed-type where kerf is provided in adjoining work. See plans
and details for specific locations and conditions.
E. Gypsum Board Fasteners : Self drilling, self tapping, bugle head, screws.
F. Joint tape : ASTM C 475 , performed, Type I1.
G. Joint Compound- ASTM 475, Type I.
H. Provide water-resistant type MR manufactured by United States Gypsum Company
for use with water-resistant backing board and cementitous substrate backing board.
1 .03 DRYWALL INSTALLATION AND FINISHING:
1 . Install gypsum boards- in lengths and directions which will minimize number of end
joints, and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings. Install walls and partitions
with exposed gypsum boards vertical, with joints offset on opposite sides of
09250-1
partitions . Otherwise, install boards with edges perpendicular to supports, with end
joints staggered over supports, except where recommended in a different
arrangement by manufacturer. Install as per UL4U305 for 1 hour rating when
utilizing rated panels.
2 . Form "Floating" : Construction for gypsum boards at internal corners, except where
special isolation or edge trim is indicated.
3 . Screw gypsum boards to supports .
4 . Drywall Finishing: Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint
compound at joints (both directions) between gypsum boards. Apply compound at
accessory flanges, penetrations, fasteners heads and surface defects .
5 . Apply compound in three (3 ) coats (plus prefill of cracks where recommended by
manufacturer); sand after last two (2) coats to achieve a Level 4 or Level 5 finish
per U . S . Gypsum Corporation guidelines . Refer to the Room Finish Schedule for
level of finish required for this project.
6 . Ceiling Finish as per Finish Schedule on the Construction Plans. Where a textured
ceiling is called for on the drawings the drywall finisher shall provide a 24 " X 24"
sample board for approval by the Owner prior to applying any finished ceiling
textures . {
7 . The drywall installer shall notify the General Contractor of walls out of plumb in
the vertical or horizontal direction, as well as the absence of proper wall, soffit,
overhead deadwood blocking, pipe and wire plate protectors prior to installing
drywall . Finished walls shall be no more than 3/16" out of dead straight within any
(six) 6 foot direction . Walls not conforming to this standard shall be removed and
replaced at the General Contractors expense .
8 . The drywall contractor shall remove all debris associated with his portion of the
work and remove all dried finishing compound from the floors .
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
/r
l
09250-2
Door Index Page 3
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 2
5 4
6 5
] 6
8 ]
9 8
10 SA
11 9
12 5A
13 9
14 9
15 30
16 10
17 11
16 11
19 11
20 11
21 7A
22 12
23 6
24 5
9999 13
C . Plywood: All plywood shall be exterior grade, Group 1 , A, B , Veneer grades . This
shall include any plywood shelving to receive paint as indicated on the casework
drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION OF WOODWORK
A . Only experienced finish carpenters are to work on exposed woodwork .
B . Erect all work plumb, level and true to the line and detail.
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
D . Nailing: Use finish nails and counter sink. Fill holes with putty after prime coat.
E . Sand all finish woodwork and leave ready for finishing.
3 . 02 DOORS
A . Install doors as provided under other Sections of these Specifications .
B . Install doors true and plumb with equal clearances at jambs and head. _
C . Make any adjustments necessary for proper operation.
3 . 03 HARDWARE
Install finish hardware as specified under another Section of these Specifications .
A . Installation of all finish hardware shall be by a skilled and experienced mechanic in
a neat and workmanlike manner. Where required, the hardware shall be removed
for application of finishes and fully protected until final installation.
B . Carefully tag and file all keys in the key file and deliver all keys to the Owner' s
representative at the completion of the job . See Finish Hardware for detailed
specifications and instructions.
3 . 04 CLEAN UP
A. Leave all work in neat and in a finished condition.
B . Remove all debris as result of work under this Section of these Specifications .
* * *END OF SECTION * "
06200-2
partitions . Otherwise, install boards with edges perpendicular to supports, with end
joints staggered over supports, except where recommended in a different
arrangement by manufacturer. Install as per UL4U305 for 1 hour rating when
utilizing rated panels.
2 . Form "Floating" : Construction for gypsum boards at internal corners, except where
special isolation or edge trim is indicated.
3 . Screw gypsum boards to supports .
4 . Drywall Finishing: Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint
compound at joints (both directions) between gypsum boards. Apply compound at
accessory flanges, penetrations, fasteners heads and surface defects .
5 . Apply compound in three (3 ) coats (plus prefill of cracks where recommended by
manufacturer); sand after last two (2) coats to achieve a Level 4 or Level 5 finish
per U . S . Gypsum Corporation guidelines . Refer to the Room Finish Schedule for
level of finish required for this project.
6 . Ceiling Finish as per Finish Schedule on the Construction Plans. Where a textured
ceiling is called for on the drawings the drywall finisher shall provide a 24 " X 24"
sample board for approval by the Owner prior to applying any finished ceiling
textures . {
7 . The drywall installer shall notify the General Contractor of walls out of plumb in
the vertical or horizontal direction, as well as the absence of proper wall, soffit,
overhead deadwood blocking, pipe and wire plate protectors prior to installing
drywall . Finished walls shall be no more than 3/16" out of dead straight within any
(six) 6 foot direction . Walls not conforming to this standard shall be removed and
replaced at the General Contractors expense .
8 . The drywall contractor shall remove all debris associated with his portion of the
work and remove all dried finishing compound from the floors .
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
/r
l
09250-2
SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE WORK
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. Coordination: Coordinate all with other trades whose work affects, connects with,
or is concealed by tile installations . Before proceeding, make certain all required
inspections have been made by local officials and the Architect. .
B . Scone of work:
1 . Preparation of substrate and installation of ceramic the on walls, floors, and
ceilings .
2 . Preparation substrate and installation of dimensional stone on floors and walls.
3 . Installation of waterproofing membrane on prepared substrate.
1 .02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS :
1 . Lightgauge Metal Framing Section 05400
2. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
3 . Lathing and Stucco Section 09100
4 . Cement Backing Board Section 09230
5 . Toilet Accessories Section 10800
6 . Floor Drains and Shower Drains Section 15421
1 .03 QUALITY STANDARDS :
A. Conform to applicable portions of the following :
1 . ANSI A108 . 1A- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile in the wet-set method,
with portland cement mortar.
2 . ANSI A109 . IB - 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile on a cured portland
cement mortar setting bed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortar.
3 . ANSI A108 .5 - 1999: Installation of ceramic tile with dry-set portland
cement mortar or latex-portland cement mortar.
4 . ANSI A108 . 13 - 1999 : Installation of load bearing, bonded, waterproof
membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone.
5 . ANSI A118 .4- 1999 : Specifications for latex-portland cement mortar.
6. ANSI A108 . 8- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile with chemical resistant
furan resin mortar and grout.
7 . Tile Council of America, Inc . : The Industry' s Guide for Installation
Practices 2003 -2004 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 41st Edition.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit samples of all ceramic tiles and dimensional stone scheduled for
installation.
B . Submit samples of the waterproofing membrane/system proposed for installation.
C. Submit manufacturer' s product data for tile setting compound and grout proposed
for installation.
09300-1
SECTION 07160 — UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A . Surface preparation.
B . Application of underslab vaporproofing membrane.
1 . 02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 — Cast in Place Concrete
B . Section 09650 — Resilient Tile Flooring
1 . 03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1 . ASTM E 1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Soil Or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
2 . ASTM E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs .
1 3 . ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials .
4 . ASTM E 1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders
Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.
B . American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1 . ACI 302 . 1 R-96 Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less
than 10 mils thick.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures .
B . Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions.
1 . 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
_ B . Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07160- 1
SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE WORK
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. Coordination: Coordinate all with other trades whose work affects, connects with,
or is concealed by tile installations . Before proceeding, make certain all required
inspections have been made by local officials and the Architect. .
B . Scone of work:
1 . Preparation of substrate and installation of ceramic the on walls, floors, and
ceilings .
2 . Preparation substrate and installation of dimensional stone on floors and walls.
3 . Installation of waterproofing membrane on prepared substrate.
1 .02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS :
1 . Lightgauge Metal Framing Section 05400
2. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
3 . Lathing and Stucco Section 09100
4 . Cement Backing Board Section 09230
5 . Toilet Accessories Section 10800
6 . Floor Drains and Shower Drains Section 15421
1 .03 QUALITY STANDARDS :
A. Conform to applicable portions of the following :
1 . ANSI A108 . 1A- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile in the wet-set method,
with portland cement mortar.
2 . ANSI A109 . IB - 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile on a cured portland
cement mortar setting bed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortar.
3 . ANSI A108 .5 - 1999: Installation of ceramic tile with dry-set portland
cement mortar or latex-portland cement mortar.
4 . ANSI A108 . 13 - 1999 : Installation of load bearing, bonded, waterproof
membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone.
5 . ANSI A118 .4- 1999 : Specifications for latex-portland cement mortar.
6. ANSI A108 . 8- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile with chemical resistant
furan resin mortar and grout.
7 . Tile Council of America, Inc . : The Industry' s Guide for Installation
Practices 2003 -2004 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 41st Edition.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit samples of all ceramic tiles and dimensional stone scheduled for
installation.
B . Submit samples of the waterproofing membrane/system proposed for installation.
C. Submit manufacturer' s product data for tile setting compound and grout proposed
for installation.
09300-1
2 .01 PRODUCTS : l
A. Recommended Materials : t -
1 . Ceramic tile and dimensional stone: As selected by the Architect or the
Interior Designer. See the Drawing Schedules .
a. All ceramic floor tile located in areas that may become slippery
when wet shall have a non-slip impervious surface. The tile must
meet a coefficient of friction of 0. 5 to 0. 6 using a wet/dry test.
2 . Thin set adhesive per manufacturers recommendations and
specification standards of ` The Tile Council of America' .
3 . Marble : Window stools shall be Georgia or Alabama White domestic
marble, cultured marble, or an approved, comparable product, unless
specified otherwise on the drawings.
4 . Waterproofing Membrane : Laticrete 9235 waterproofing membrane in
combination with Laticrete Reinforcing Membrane installed in accordance
with manufacturer' s recommendations .
5 . Mortar : Laticrete 4237 latex Thin Set Mortar Additive with Laticrete 211
Crete Filler Powder.
6 . Grout : Laticrete Spectra Lock Pro Grout in color selected by the Architect.
3 .01 EXECUTION :
A. Inspection of Surfaces :
1 . Examine surfaces to receive tile, cement substrate backing board, setting
beds, pressure treated wood blocking for mounting of toilet accessories and
grab bars and accessories, before installation begins.
2 . Tile contractor shall be responsible for preparing installed cement backing
board including taping of joints and mortar skimming of all faces to a true
and level surface prior to installation of any ceramic tile.
3 . Walls to receive ceramic tile shall not be out of level and true planes more
than 1 /8 " in 24 inches.
4 . Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
B . Product delivery storage and handling: Deliver all manufactured materials in
original, unbroken containers bearing name of manufacturer, brand and grade seals .
Keep materials dry, clean, and protected against deterioration in any form.
09300-2
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 4
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 1
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM RECEPTION 1 90 - LHR
TYPE AL 310 " X 716 " ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS & FRAME
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
BALANCE OF HARDWARE PROVIDED BY
STOREFRONT CONTRACTOR .
Heading # 2
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " -
X 13 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE V BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
2 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F . X 996L - R&V LHR US26D/ US32D VO E1
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 2 , 4 )
2 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 . X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
I
I
C . Stack membrane on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate warping.
D . Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or
contamination.
1 .06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A . Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the
elements .
B . Do not apply on frozen ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURER
A . W . R. MEADOWS , INC., PO Box 338 , Hampshire, Illinois 60140-0338 . (800)
342- 5976 . (847) 683 -4500 . Fax (847) 683 -4544 . Website : www.wrmeadows .com.
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder
1 . Performance Based Specification: Vapor Retarder membrane must meet or
exceed all requirements of ASTM E 1745 Classes A, B , & C . J
a. Minimum Permeance ASTM E 96 : 0 .034 Perms
b . Resistance to Organisms and Substrates in Contact with Soil ASTM E
154, Section 13 : 0 . 051 Perms
C . Tensile Strength ASTM E 154 , Section 9 : 52 LBS . Force/Inch
d . Puncture Resistance ASTM D 1709 , Method B : 3 ,770 Grams
e . Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E 1745 : Meets or exceeds Class A, B &
C
f. Thickness of Retarder (plastic) ACI 302 . 1 R-96 : Not less than 10 mils
2 . Proprietary Based Specification:
a. PERMINATOR 10 mil by W . R. MEADOWS .
2 . 03 ACCESSORIES
A. Seam Tape
1 . High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum
width 4 inches .
07160-2
2 .01 PRODUCTS : l
A. Recommended Materials : t -
1 . Ceramic tile and dimensional stone: As selected by the Architect or the
Interior Designer. See the Drawing Schedules .
a. All ceramic floor tile located in areas that may become slippery
when wet shall have a non-slip impervious surface. The tile must
meet a coefficient of friction of 0. 5 to 0. 6 using a wet/dry test.
2 . Thin set adhesive per manufacturers recommendations and
specification standards of ` The Tile Council of America' .
3 . Marble : Window stools shall be Georgia or Alabama White domestic
marble, cultured marble, or an approved, comparable product, unless
specified otherwise on the drawings.
4 . Waterproofing Membrane : Laticrete 9235 waterproofing membrane in
combination with Laticrete Reinforcing Membrane installed in accordance
with manufacturer' s recommendations .
5 . Mortar : Laticrete 4237 latex Thin Set Mortar Additive with Laticrete 211
Crete Filler Powder.
6 . Grout : Laticrete Spectra Lock Pro Grout in color selected by the Architect.
3 .01 EXECUTION :
A. Inspection of Surfaces :
1 . Examine surfaces to receive tile, cement substrate backing board, setting
beds, pressure treated wood blocking for mounting of toilet accessories and
grab bars and accessories, before installation begins.
2 . Tile contractor shall be responsible for preparing installed cement backing
board including taping of joints and mortar skimming of all faces to a true
and level surface prior to installation of any ceramic tile.
3 . Walls to receive ceramic tile shall not be out of level and true planes more
than 1 /8 " in 24 inches.
4 . Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
B . Product delivery storage and handling: Deliver all manufactured materials in
original, unbroken containers bearing name of manufacturer, brand and grade seals .
Keep materials dry, clean, and protected against deterioration in any form.
09300-2
C . Installation:
1 Layout all work so that where possible no tiles less that half size occur. In
any event install no half tiles above first course up from the bottom or away
from first vertical course at internal and external corners. Align all joints,
vertically and horizontally. Cut and drill neatly without marrying tile. Rub
smooth any necessary cuts with a fine stone and set no cut edge against any
fixture, cabinet, 01' other tile without a joint at least 1 /16 " wide . Cut, fit .
adjust, and establish tiles neatly and accurately to accommodate accessories,
interruptions, chases, returns, mechanical and electrical outlets, and finish at
their exact location (as determined by jobsite conditions). Maximumand
variation shall be plus-or-minus- 1 /8 " in 2 feet when straight edge is laid
on the surface in any direction.
2 . Provide all required trim pieces as detailed for the various tiles specified.
3 • All floor and wall file to be set using thin-set products as called out in this
section. Utilize proper admixes
applications. When installing pofor exterior installations and frost proof
rcelin the utilizing modified thinset, adhere`. ` `':
to guidelines stipulated in ANSI 1 l 8.4 .
4 • Thoroughly wash out joints and saturate with clean water before
Thoroughly grout into all joints to fill entire len grouting.
with face of tiles making a neatlush
y finished, smooth
surface. Prevent Fill st ming
of grouted joints by applying a clear sealer to all exposed grout joints.
5 Provide preformed metal control joints at door openings and sufficient to
isolate maximum areas of 25 ' X 25 '. Color of control joint preformed infill
to match the selected grout.
6. Installation of waterproofing membrane shall be behind all tiles, full
height and full width within showers or areas subject to periodic washdown
this section.. scheduled maintenance. Utilize materials as specified within
thInsure proper slopes to floor drains. Insure the membrane is
installed continuous into drain or adjacent to drains utilizing a perimeter
weep hole design. Wall membrane laps over the shower pan membrane.
Do not penetrate the membrane with any fasteners within 24 inches above
the finished floor tile. Test shower receptor and drainage fitting for leaks
all concealed stainless steel fasteners in
before commencing tile work. When
installation of grab bars is required, set
a bed of 3M- 5200 white sealant.
09300-3
B . Pipe Boots
1 . Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape
per manufacturer's instructions .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 EXAMINATION
A . Examine surfaces to receive membrane . Notify Architect if surfaces are not
acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable
conditions have been corrected .
3 .02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions .
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A . Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E
1643 -98 .
B . Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
pour.
r
C . Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls .
D . Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape .
E . Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot .
F . No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and
permanent utilities.
G . Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged
area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape .
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
1
07 ] 60-3
C . Installation:
1 Layout all work so that where possible no tiles less that half size occur. In
any event install no half tiles above first course up from the bottom or away
from first vertical course at internal and external corners. Align all joints,
vertically and horizontally. Cut and drill neatly without marrying tile. Rub
smooth any necessary cuts with a fine stone and set no cut edge against any
fixture, cabinet, 01' other tile without a joint at least 1 /16 " wide . Cut, fit .
adjust, and establish tiles neatly and accurately to accommodate accessories,
interruptions, chases, returns, mechanical and electrical outlets, and finish at
their exact location (as determined by jobsite conditions). Maximumand
variation shall be plus-or-minus- 1 /8 " in 2 feet when straight edge is laid
on the surface in any direction.
2 . Provide all required trim pieces as detailed for the various tiles specified.
3 • All floor and wall file to be set using thin-set products as called out in this
section. Utilize proper admixes
applications. When installing pofor exterior installations and frost proof
rcelin the utilizing modified thinset, adhere`. ` `':
to guidelines stipulated in ANSI 1 l 8.4 .
4 • Thoroughly wash out joints and saturate with clean water before
Thoroughly grout into all joints to fill entire len grouting.
with face of tiles making a neatlush
y finished, smooth
surface. Prevent Fill st ming
of grouted joints by applying a clear sealer to all exposed grout joints.
5 Provide preformed metal control joints at door openings and sufficient to
isolate maximum areas of 25 ' X 25 '. Color of control joint preformed infill
to match the selected grout.
6. Installation of waterproofing membrane shall be behind all tiles, full
height and full width within showers or areas subject to periodic washdown
this section.. scheduled maintenance. Utilize materials as specified within
thInsure proper slopes to floor drains. Insure the membrane is
installed continuous into drain or adjacent to drains utilizing a perimeter
weep hole design. Wall membrane laps over the shower pan membrane.
Do not penetrate the membrane with any fasteners within 24 inches above
the finished floor tile. Test shower receptor and drainage fitting for leaks
all concealed stainless steel fasteners in
before commencing tile work. When
installation of grab bars is required, set
a bed of 3M- 5200 white sealant.
09300-3
12t~YI�D
2NIA1Z 2009
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION•
A. Wipe surfaces clean after grouting, remove all traces of mortar and grout.
Do not use acid solution for cleaning glazed tile.
B. Close spaces to traffic or other work until the is f rmly set. Protect all work from
damage at no additional cost to Owner.
** *END OF SECTION* **
09300-44
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 5
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 3
1 SGL DOOR 3 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Bl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1/ 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 POWER TRANSFER EPT 10 SP28 VO E10
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X E996L - R&V LHR US26D / US32D VO E2
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 3 )
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 X2 VO Ell
1 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
1 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " - PE W7
1 THRESHOLD 2005- AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
CARD READER PROVIDED BY SECURITY
CONTRACTOR
COMPLIES NOR 08 - 0715 . 03 + / - 60 PSF
12t~YI�D
2NIA1Z 2009
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION•
A. Wipe surfaces clean after grouting, remove all traces of mortar and grout.
Do not use acid solution for cleaning glazed tile.
B. Close spaces to traffic or other work until the is f rmly set. Protect all work from
damage at no additional cost to Owner.
** *END OF SECTION* **
09300-44
SECTION 09510 - LAY IN PANEL CEILINGS (See schedule next page)
A. GENERAL :
1 . Acceptable Manufacturers :
a. Grid System : Chicago Metallic Corporation
Donn Corporation
U. S . Gypsum Corp.
W.J. Haertel Division; Leslie-Locke
National Rolling Mills Company
b. Lay-in-Panels : Celotex
Armstrong
Conwed
U. S . Gypsum
2 . Product delivery storage and handling : Store materials in protective packaging to
prevent soiling or physical damage.
B. PRODUCTS :
1 . Lay-in Panels : As per the attached schedule included in this specification
i
section, or an approved equal .
2. Grid Systems : With all components conforming to the requirements of ASTM C - -`
635 in a low-sheen, baked-on white enamel finish or in a color to be selected by
the Architect. See the plans for a complete description.
3 . Perimeter Molding: Channel formed, of not less than 22 gauge steel, I " horizontal
exposed face with exposed edge hemmed; low sheen, baked-on white enamel finish
or in a color to be selected by Architect.
4 . Suspension System :
a. Hangers: Annealed zinc-coated wire # 12 gauge or heavier.
b. Carrying Channels : 1 - 1 /2 " x 3/4 x 416 gauge for greater spans.
C. EXECUTION:
1 . Condition of Surfaces : Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly
attached lay in panels for unevenness, irregularities that would affect quality or
execution of work. Install ceiling system in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed specifications .
2. Cleaning : Clean soiled units after installation.
i 3 • Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units.
09510- 1
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION
PART 1 - CEILINGS :
1 .01 When Wood Trusses in combination with Vented Soffits : Provide (R- 19, R-28 or R-30 as
called out on the wall sections) Batt insulation - installed between the bottom chords of the pre-
engineered roof trusses. Install in all ceiling spaces as shown on the drawings and building
sections.
1 .02 When Wood Trusses in combination with Non-Vented Soffits : Provide sprayed insulation to
the underside of the plywood decking as manufactured by leynene to a minimum R-Rating of
20 .0. Refer to Section 07205 for manufacturer' s data and the plans for actual placement .
1 , 03 When Steel Joists : (Three methods)
A. Provide R- 19 nailable rigid roofing deck secured to pan-deck as per drawings .
B . Provide (R- 19) Batt insulation - laid on top of the suspended acoustical panels when
no insulation is provided on the metal roof decking. Refer to drawings for placement .
C . Provide (R- 19 overall average) EPS roof deck insulation as an integral pour with the
lightweight concrete decking. Refer to drawings for placement and thicknesses.
1 .04 When Concrete Joists and Deck • Provide roof top insulation board per plans for uppermost
floor. No ceiling insulation for all lower floor/ceiling assemblies .
1 .05 When Ceiling Assembly is used as a return airplenum - Insulation within the plenum space
must meet flame spread and smoke development ratings of the SBC for an exposed
installation .
PART 1 - EXTERIOR WALLS -
2 . 01 When Concrete Block Walls • (Two Methods)
A. Provide furring on the interior face of the block walls as per plans and place rigid
insulation of thickness called out on the wall sections.
B . Fill the exterior block cells with CoreFil1500 amino-plast, Class-A, Foam insulation,
(or an approved equal product) . The thermal properties for an 8 " block/601bs. Density
wall assembly is R- 14 .2 . Install in strict compliance with manufacturers application
procedures. Thermco Foam Insulation is an approved equal product.
2.02 When Wood Frame or Steel Assembly Walls R- 11 in 3 1/2" walls, and R- 19 in 5 %2 " walls .
Utilize foil faced or waxed Kraft paper faced fiberglass batt insulation. V .B . to weather side.
07200- 1
SECTION 09510 - LAY IN PANEL CEILINGS (See schedule next page)
A. GENERAL :
1 . Acceptable Manufacturers :
a. Grid System : Chicago Metallic Corporation
Donn Corporation
U. S . Gypsum Corp.
W.J. Haertel Division; Leslie-Locke
National Rolling Mills Company
b. Lay-in-Panels : Celotex
Armstrong
Conwed
U. S . Gypsum
2 . Product delivery storage and handling : Store materials in protective packaging to
prevent soiling or physical damage.
B. PRODUCTS :
1 . Lay-in Panels : As per the attached schedule included in this specification
i
section, or an approved equal .
2. Grid Systems : With all components conforming to the requirements of ASTM C - -`
635 in a low-sheen, baked-on white enamel finish or in a color to be selected by
the Architect. See the plans for a complete description.
3 . Perimeter Molding: Channel formed, of not less than 22 gauge steel, I " horizontal
exposed face with exposed edge hemmed; low sheen, baked-on white enamel finish
or in a color to be selected by Architect.
4 . Suspension System :
a. Hangers: Annealed zinc-coated wire # 12 gauge or heavier.
b. Carrying Channels : 1 - 1 /2 " x 3/4 x 416 gauge for greater spans.
C. EXECUTION:
1 . Condition of Surfaces : Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly
attached lay in panels for unevenness, irregularities that would affect quality or
execution of work. Install ceiling system in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed specifications .
2. Cleaning : Clean soiled units after installation.
i 3 • Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units.
09510- 1
SCHEDULE OF SELECTED CEILINGS :
Project: I.R.C. Parks Maintenance Complex l
� J
Location Tyne Lav In Panel & Grid
As Shown on Drawings A. ARMSTRONG 24" X 48 " X 5/8 " , Fissured , 4755NF ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" square lay-in . Color: White, with
15/16" Prelude suspension system . Color- White.
As Shown on Drawings B . . ARMSTRONG 24" X 24" X 5/8 " , Tundra, 4303 ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" beveled tegular edge, Color : White,
with 15/ 16" Prelude suspension system .Color-White.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09510-2
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 6
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
I
i
Heading # 4
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM ELECTRIC / PHONE 6 90 - RHR
i
TYPE D1 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC Ll
10 - 072 ( 5 )
1 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE WS
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6 i
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ' 0 " SF Wl
. 4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2 i
1 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
Heading # 5
1 SGL DOOR 6 RECEPTION 1 TO MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 24 EXIT CORRIDOR 22 TO BREAK ROOM 4 90 - RH i
TYPE _A1 - 45 310 " X 710 " X . 1 - 3 / 411 NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC1
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 23GW US32D HA S1
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
i
2 .03 When Insulated Concrete Tilt-wall Sandwich Panels : Provide extruded Dow STYROFOAM
Brand rigid blue board insulation with heat formed, regular spaced holes identifying ` l
connector plate locations . Thicknesses per the plan with a minimum of 1 '/z inch thickness in J
all applications.
PART 3 - INTERIOR WALLS :
3 . 01 Framed Walls Wood or Metal Stud : 3 - 1 /2 " Sound Batt insulation where shown on the plans .
Staples or Adhesive : As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 4 - ATTIC BARRIERS :
4 . 01 When called out on the plans, provide a roll foil vapor barrier as manufactured by Fi-Foil.
L .ocation, type, and application method as called out on the sections and details. Staples and
tape as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 5 - INSTALLATION :
5 . 01 Allow proper air space for thermal insulation, using flanges provided, in accordance with
manufacturer' s printed instructions.
5 . 02 When utilizing a vented soffit assembly, provide a minimum of a 2 " air space at all perimeter
overhangs between the insulation face and the underside of roof decking. Utilize vinyl or
cardboard prefab vent sleeves as required to maintain said clearance. J
5 . 03 Concealed Installation: in buildings of any type construction, shall have a flame spread
rating of not more than 75 and .a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 . 04 Exposed Installation: in buildings of any type construction , shall have a flame spread rating
of not more than 25 and a smoke development rating of not more than 450 .
5 .05 Vapor Retarders : in order to prevent indoor air quality problems in hot, humid climates , vapor
retarders such as asphalt impregnated felts, polyethelenes , or "Tyvics", should be placed on
the outside, or weather side, of the insulation.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
07200-2
SCHEDULE OF SELECTED CEILINGS :
Project: I.R.C. Parks Maintenance Complex l
� J
Location Tyne Lav In Panel & Grid
As Shown on Drawings A. ARMSTRONG 24" X 48 " X 5/8 " , Fissured , 4755NF ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" square lay-in . Color: White, with
15/16" Prelude suspension system . Color- White.
As Shown on Drawings B . . ARMSTRONG 24" X 24" X 5/8 " , Tundra, 4303 ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" beveled tegular edge, Color : White,
with 15/ 16" Prelude suspension system .Color-White.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09510-2
SECTION 09655 - VINU TRANSITION MOLDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
quarry Provide vinyl transition strips wherever carpet abuts vinyl flooring systems ceramic
determine
porcelain flooring systems. Refer to the lnteriars or Floor Plan Drawings
determine the actual model n � azoic,
umbers specifed and locations, wings to
1 .03 QU�I'1'I' ASSURANCE:
Acceptable Manufacturer: Select product of the
equals: following manufacturer cr approved
TARKETT
JOHNSONITE
MERCER PRODUCTS COMPANY INC
MACKLANBURG-DUNCAN
FLEXCO COMPANY
GENOTEK
1.04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples: Submit samples
color selection, of all materials specified in this Section for a
pproval and
C. Maintenance Data: Furnish
procedures. list of recommended maintenance methods and
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver and Store on the site in ori
until time of use. ginal containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact
1. 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
dTempeinature of the rooms shall be 70 F. (2I CO) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
urg installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
09655-1
SECTION 07610 - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF AND FASCIA PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 The roofing assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys,
hips, ridges , eaves, corners , rakes and miscellaneous flashing and atttaching devices. All
roofing assemblies and accessories shall be manufactured by one of the following:
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-231 - 8127
B . AEICOR Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 - 800-432- 1802
C . AEP SPAN
Phone : 1 - 800- 527-2503
D . AMP, Atlanta Metal Products, Inc.
Phone : 1 -800- 554- 1097
E . BUTLER Manufacturing Company
Phone : 1 -816- 968- 2380
F . DELCOA Metal Roofing Manufacturer
Phone : 1 - 800-375 -METAL
G. UNA-CLAD, Copper Sales, Inc.
H. McELROY METALS , INC.
Phone 1 - 800-950-6533
J . PAC-CLAD / Petersen Aluminum
Phone 1 -800-272-4482
K. ENGLERT, INC.
Phone 732-826-8614
1 .02 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Store panels and materials properly and adequately to protect from damage and entrapped
water.
J
07610- 1
SECTION 09655 - VINU TRANSITION MOLDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
quarry Provide vinyl transition strips wherever carpet abuts vinyl flooring systems ceramic
determine
porcelain flooring systems. Refer to the lnteriars or Floor Plan Drawings
determine the actual model n � azoic,
umbers specifed and locations, wings to
1 .03 QU�I'1'I' ASSURANCE:
Acceptable Manufacturer: Select product of the
equals: following manufacturer cr approved
TARKETT
JOHNSONITE
MERCER PRODUCTS COMPANY INC
MACKLANBURG-DUNCAN
FLEXCO COMPANY
GENOTEK
1.04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples: Submit samples
color selection, of all materials specified in this Section for a
pproval and
C. Maintenance Data: Furnish
procedures. list of recommended maintenance methods and
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver and Store on the site in ori
until time of use. ginal containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact
1. 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
dTempeinature of the rooms shall be 70 F. (2I CO) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
urg installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
09655-1
PART2 - PRODUCT
2 .01 Shall consist of 100% first quality homopolymer,vinyl accessories to act as an edge trim or
transition between dissimilar flooring materials . All trim shall meet the requirements of
the ADA sections 4. 5.2 (changes in level) and 4.5 .3 (carpet-edge trim compliance) .
Colors shall be clear through as indicated on the Interior Drawings.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 .01 Pursuant to manufacturer' s published instructions and RFCI "Recommended Work
Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings" .
3 .02 Lay materials true to line, level, and with tight butt and miter joints.
3 .03 Installations shall be at interior spaces only .
3 .04 Secure the base strips with manufacturer approved adhesives and remove all excess
adhesives with approved thinners upon completion of installations.
PART 4 - WARRANTY
4.01 Manufacturer' s full warranty shall apply.
** * END OF SECTION * * *
09655-2
' h
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 7
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading ## 5A
1 SGL DOOR 12 HALL 20 TO CONFERENCE 14 90 - LH
TYPE El 3101' X 790 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LCI
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
Heading # 6
1 SGL DOOR 7 HALL 19 FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 23 HALL 22 FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Al - 45 3101' X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE RHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 7 )
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE LHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 23 )
2 CLOSER 4041 EDA TBSRT AL LC C6
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 341" US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D FIA S1A
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
1 . 03 WARRANTY
Submit a written three (3) year warranty from installer and manufacturer against leaks, �, )
defective workmanship and materials . Submit manufacturer' s written finish warranty that
applies. Shall meet Underwriter' s Laboratory UL90 classification. Provide manufacturer' s
standard twenty (20) year warranty against color change or chalking.
1 .04 REFERENCES
A . S .M .A .C .N .A . (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor' s National
Association).
B . N .R.C .A. (The National Roofing Contractors Association) . Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual, including construction details, and Handbook of Accepted
Roofing Knowledge.
C . Manufacturer' s Construction Details Handbook.
D . ASTM A-653 -97
E. ASTM A-525 - 86
F . ASTM A-792-86
G . ASTM B-209
H . ASTM B -370
J . Aluminum Association.
1 . 05 SUBMITTALS
A . Installing contractor shall submit detailed shop drawings showing layout of panels,
anchoring details, joint details , trim, flashing and accessories . Show details of
weatherproofing, terminations, and penetrations of metal work.
B . Installing contractor shall submit a sample of each type of roof panel, complete with
factory finish.
C . Installing contractor shall submit calculations with registered engineer seal , verifying
roof panel and attachment method resists wind pressure imposed on it pursuant to
applicable building codes.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 METAL ROOF AND/OR FASCIA PANELS :
As manufactured by one of the approved Manufacturing Corporations .
NOTE : Match existing panel color and profiles when connecting to existing buildings.
2 . 02 SHEET MATERIALS
A . Panel configuration to be a structural standing seam. Panel widths and seam heights
will vary with project type. Refer to the Construction Drawings for required panel widths `
and seam types. Panel color as specified by the Architect on the construction documents .
07610-2
PART2 - PRODUCT
2 .01 Shall consist of 100% first quality homopolymer,vinyl accessories to act as an edge trim or
transition between dissimilar flooring materials . All trim shall meet the requirements of
the ADA sections 4. 5.2 (changes in level) and 4.5 .3 (carpet-edge trim compliance) .
Colors shall be clear through as indicated on the Interior Drawings.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 .01 Pursuant to manufacturer' s published instructions and RFCI "Recommended Work
Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings" .
3 .02 Lay materials true to line, level, and with tight butt and miter joints.
3 .03 Installations shall be at interior spaces only .
3 .04 Secure the base strips with manufacturer approved adhesives and remove all excess
adhesives with approved thinners upon completion of installations.
PART 4 - WARRANTY
4.01 Manufacturer' s full warranty shall apply.
** * END OF SECTION * * *
09655-2
SECTION 09680 - CARPETING : COMMERCIAL APPLICATION
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall go over the work under this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Provide commercial grade carpeting, edge trim and related items and the
installation. Refer to Section 09655. ir
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
Acceptable Manufacture
B. LEES r: Select product of the following manufacturer or a
COMMERCIAL CARPETS
B . COMMERCIAL
approved equal .
C. DUPONT ANTRON
D. ATLAS CARPET MILLS
E. LOTUS CARPETS_.
F. J & J INDUSTRIES
G. SHAW INDUSTRIES
H. COLLINS AND AIKMAN
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
a ,
A. . Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions
for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples : Submit samples of all materials specified in this Section for
color selection.
approval and
C• Maintenance Data : furnish list of recommended maintenance products and
recommended maintenance methods and procedures.
1 .05 PRODUCT HANDLING :
Deliver and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use.
09680-1
Single lengths, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer' s specifications .
B . Panels shall be one of the following types as called out on the Construction
Documents .
1 . Steel shall be ASTM A653 - 97 Grade C, G90, Coating ASTM 525 - 86 Hot
Dipped Galvanized, 24 gauge galvalume ASTM A- 792- 86 . Maximum panel
length is 65 '.
2 . Aluminum shall be ASTM B-209 in . 032 inch or . 040 inch thickness with an
H- 14 temper.
3 . Copper shall be ASTM B-370 colled rolled in 16 or 20 ounce.
2. 03 FASTENING
Fastening is to be installed at spacings per manufacturer' s specifications at perimeters and
field. Fasteners shall be stainless and shall be a minimum of # 8 wafer head type screws
comparable with the material being used, concealed at all times. If and exposed fastener
must be used, it can only be a 444 pop rivet of the same material (or compatable) and
finish as the roof panels.
2 . 04 FLASHINGS
Flashings are to be of the same gauge, material and finish.
2 . 05 ACCESSORIES
All accessories must be of compatible materials to the metal panels .
2 . 06 FINISH
Finish shall be Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating applied on the
Manufacturer' s Coil Coating Line with a top side film thickness of 0.70 to 0. 90 mil over
0.25 to 0. 31 mil prime coat to provide a total dry film thickness of 0 . 95 to 1 .25 mil .
Bottom side shall be coated with a primer with a dry film thickness of 0 .25 mil . Finish
shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility and longevity as specified by Kynar 500
or Hylar 5000 finish supplier.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 . 01 Install metal roof/fascia systems per the manufacturer ' s specifications.
i
07610-3
SECTION 09680 - CARPETING : COMMERCIAL APPLICATION
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall go over the work under this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Provide commercial grade carpeting, edge trim and related items and the
installation. Refer to Section 09655. ir
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
Acceptable Manufacture
B. LEES r: Select product of the following manufacturer or a
COMMERCIAL CARPETS
B . COMMERCIAL
approved equal .
C. DUPONT ANTRON
D. ATLAS CARPET MILLS
E. LOTUS CARPETS_.
F. J & J INDUSTRIES
G. SHAW INDUSTRIES
H. COLLINS AND AIKMAN
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
a ,
A. . Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions
for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples : Submit samples of all materials specified in this Section for
color selection.
approval and
C• Maintenance Data : furnish list of recommended maintenance products and
recommended maintenance methods and procedures.
1 .05 PRODUCT HANDLING :
Deliver and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use.
09680-1
r�v�s� zi>� Ra9
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQI)MMENTS:
Temperature of the rooms shall be 70 F . (21 C.) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
A, Products:
1 Carpet & Pad: Color and style to be selected by the Owner, the Architect, or
the Interior Designer.
B . Materials:
l . Provide a commercial-grade nylon carpet with bonded cushion meeting the
following minimum requirement:
a. TOLERANCES : Specifications are subject to the standard industry
manufacturing tolerances of plus or minus 51%.
b. FLAMMABILITY RATINGS : Shall meet all local , state and federal
requirements for carpet installed in public facilities. Shall meet the
requirements of DAD -C-95 , DOC-FF1 -70, and ASTM-D2859-70T
(pill and Tablet Tests) on the face and on the back. The carpet and
pad, as an assembly, in corridors, stair-ways and other means of
critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts/sq.
egress, shall have a minimum
-950 Flooring Radiant Panel Test
cm. as determined by NBS-IR-75
(NFPA 253 , ASTM-E-648) .
c, ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY: Carpet construction shall contain no
formaldehyde or 4-PC and no significant levels of other volatile
organic chemicals which are known to contribute to the "Sick-
Building Syndrome." Carpet shall have GRI (Green Label
Registration) for a low VOC emitter.
d, PILE YARN: 1235/2 - 100% continuous-filament Type 6.6 soil-
hiding solution-dyed nylon with permanent static-control system.
e. STATIC CONTROL: Carpet shall be furnished with a permanent
static-control system within the face yam to reduce the level of
electrostatic voltage built up in the floor covering below the normal
threshold of human sensitivity, measured at 2500-3500 static volts at
70 degrees F and 20% relative humidity.
f, ANTIMICROBIAL: A permanent, nonleaching antimicrobial shall
be built into the carpet construction.
9. DYE METHOD: Solution-dyed yam system.
09680-2
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 8
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading #{ 7
1 SGL DOOR 8 FILE STORAGE 10 FROM MECHANICAL ROOM 90 - RHR
TYPE E1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C5
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
1 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 430 CRL X 36 " ( 8 ) LH PE W16
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APl
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 7A
1 SGL DOOR 21 LOUNGE 4 TO STORAGE 5 90 - RH
TYPE E1 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET N7D80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
3 .02 Installers shall be a certified installer, certified by the manufacturer of the respective
roofing/fascia systems . Written proof of certification shall be provided to the Architect ( \
prior to installation.
3 .03 Upon completion of the metal roof/fascia system installation, an inspection will be made
by a roofing/fascia system representative . Corrections to the installation of the
roofing/fascia system, as deemed necessary by the roofing/fascia system representative,
will be made at no additional cost to the Owner in order that the Warranty may be issued.
* * *END OF SECTION ''
07610 -4
r�v�s� zi>� Ra9
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQI)MMENTS:
Temperature of the rooms shall be 70 F . (21 C.) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
A, Products:
1 Carpet & Pad: Color and style to be selected by the Owner, the Architect, or
the Interior Designer.
B . Materials:
l . Provide a commercial-grade nylon carpet with bonded cushion meeting the
following minimum requirement:
a. TOLERANCES : Specifications are subject to the standard industry
manufacturing tolerances of plus or minus 51%.
b. FLAMMABILITY RATINGS : Shall meet all local , state and federal
requirements for carpet installed in public facilities. Shall meet the
requirements of DAD -C-95 , DOC-FF1 -70, and ASTM-D2859-70T
(pill and Tablet Tests) on the face and on the back. The carpet and
pad, as an assembly, in corridors, stair-ways and other means of
critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts/sq.
egress, shall have a minimum
-950 Flooring Radiant Panel Test
cm. as determined by NBS-IR-75
(NFPA 253 , ASTM-E-648) .
c, ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY: Carpet construction shall contain no
formaldehyde or 4-PC and no significant levels of other volatile
organic chemicals which are known to contribute to the "Sick-
Building Syndrome." Carpet shall have GRI (Green Label
Registration) for a low VOC emitter.
d, PILE YARN: 1235/2 - 100% continuous-filament Type 6.6 soil-
hiding solution-dyed nylon with permanent static-control system.
e. STATIC CONTROL: Carpet shall be furnished with a permanent
static-control system within the face yam to reduce the level of
electrostatic voltage built up in the floor covering below the normal
threshold of human sensitivity, measured at 2500-3500 static volts at
70 degrees F and 20% relative humidity.
f, ANTIMICROBIAL: A permanent, nonleaching antimicrobial shall
be built into the carpet construction.
9. DYE METHOD: Solution-dyed yam system.
09680-2
"PeUt510 2 MAL> 09
h• CONSTRUCTION: Manufactured through the back with fusion coat
to primary,
applied and secondary closed-cell vinyl cushion permanently fused
I• PITCH, (gauge) : 351 (1 /13 ga.) min.
J • ROWS PER INCH: 20 min.
k• DENSITY: 130 pile tufts/SI min., 6000 density units per formula:
D = 36W D = Density
T W — Pile Weight
T = Pile Thickness
I• PILE HEIGHT: . 125 (1 /8 ") average
In. PILE WEIGHT: 20 oz./Sy min.
M PRIMARY BACKING: 100% synthetic materials, bacteriostatic and
fungistatic, nonallergenic. Shall not mildew, decompose, shrink or
support odor. No organic materials (jute, cotton, kraftcord or
fiberlok) shall be used.
0• FUSION COAT: Vinyl sealant and fusion coat to provide an
effective soil and moisture barrier and sufficient tuft bind to prevent
"Zippering" or edge ravel of surface pile.
P_ SECONDARY BACKING: Carpet shall be permanently fused to
premium-quality, closed-cell vinyl cushion, 5/32" thick, cushion
weight 35. 5 oz./SY, density 18. 5 lbs./CF, compression deflection
min. 71bs./SI, compression set max. 10% (ASTMD- 1667-70).
q• TOTAL WEIGHT: 75 oz./Sy min.
2• MANUFACTURER WARRANTY: 10 year ronprorated warranty against
backing.
C wear, zippering, edge ravel or delamination of secondary
backiCushion resiliency warranted for the life of the carpet.
C. INSTALLATION:
1 • Clean surfaces to be carpeted; scrape up cementitious and resinous deposits;
vacuum, apply sealer on concrete surfaces, adequate to prevent dusting.
09680-3
SECTION 07710 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. The gutter and downspout system shall be an Industrial Series as manufactured by
Southern Aluminum Finishing Company or an approved equal .
B . Furnish and install a perimeter gutter and downspout system as located on the
drawings . The size shall be as per the details on the drawings. The gutter and
downspouts shall be manufactured of aluminum, .040 thickness .
Colors : Metal Buildings Match Wall Panel Color E. S .P . finish.
Stucco Buildings Match Wall Paint Color Acrylic Latex
Giitteru Shall be tapered and iIOtched to provide a i " teieSCop3iag lapjoir'it. Gutters
shall be pre-punched at 12 " on center to provide for thermal movement.
D . Provide manufacturer ' s support brackets and interior straps . Brackets shall be a
compatible material to gutter with matching finish and color.
2 .01 INSTALLATION -
A . Support Bracket Installation :
Install support brackets at 30 " on center to allow a maximum 1 /8 " slope per 40 feet
of gutter. Attach brackets with 2 " x 410 stainless wood screws.
B . Gutter Installation :
Install gutter from left to right (roofside into support brackets . Lap each telescoping
section a distance of 1 " seal and rivet at 2 " on center. Nail or screw rear of gutter
with 1 - 1 /2 " stainless fasteners.
C . Inside Strap Installation:
Install straps at 30 " on center alternating with support brackets. Strap shall be
hooked into leading edge of gutter and riveted at its rear side. Strap must not be
fastened in a way that might restrain thermal movement.
D . Expansion Joints :
Install manufacturer' s standard elastomeric expansion joint assembly, at 40'-0 "
intervals.
E. Miter Comers : Install manufacturer' s welded miters at comers .
F. End Caps/Terminations :
Install manufacturer' s end caps at all end terminations.
- , G. Outlets :
Field cut outlet hole in a neat workmanlike manner. Hole shall be located 1 " from
backside of gutter.
07710-1
"PeUt510 2 MAL> 09
h• CONSTRUCTION: Manufactured through the back with fusion coat
to primary,
applied and secondary closed-cell vinyl cushion permanently fused
I• PITCH, (gauge) : 351 (1 /13 ga.) min.
J • ROWS PER INCH: 20 min.
k• DENSITY: 130 pile tufts/SI min., 6000 density units per formula:
D = 36W D = Density
T W — Pile Weight
T = Pile Thickness
I• PILE HEIGHT: . 125 (1 /8 ") average
In. PILE WEIGHT: 20 oz./Sy min.
M PRIMARY BACKING: 100% synthetic materials, bacteriostatic and
fungistatic, nonallergenic. Shall not mildew, decompose, shrink or
support odor. No organic materials (jute, cotton, kraftcord or
fiberlok) shall be used.
0• FUSION COAT: Vinyl sealant and fusion coat to provide an
effective soil and moisture barrier and sufficient tuft bind to prevent
"Zippering" or edge ravel of surface pile.
P_ SECONDARY BACKING: Carpet shall be permanently fused to
premium-quality, closed-cell vinyl cushion, 5/32" thick, cushion
weight 35. 5 oz./SY, density 18. 5 lbs./CF, compression deflection
min. 71bs./SI, compression set max. 10% (ASTMD- 1667-70).
q• TOTAL WEIGHT: 75 oz./Sy min.
2• MANUFACTURER WARRANTY: 10 year ronprorated warranty against
backing.
C wear, zippering, edge ravel or delamination of secondary
backiCushion resiliency warranted for the life of the carpet.
C. INSTALLATION:
1 • Clean surfaces to be carpeted; scrape up cementitious and resinous deposits;
vacuum, apply sealer on concrete surfaces, adequate to prevent dusting.
09680-3
2 . Pre-plan installation for uniform direction of pattern and lay of pile, and proper
sequencing with other work. Locate seams properly centered under doors and
without seams in direction of traffic as doorways and similar traffic patterns.
Extend carpet under removable obstructions and into closets and alcoves .
3 . Provide stretch-in-tackless installation, using glued and/or nailed tackless stripping .
with edges of carpet concealed. Tape and/or sew seams , after buttering trimmed
edges with seaming cement.
4. Cement cushion to substrate, with taped seams running at 90 degree angle with
carpet seams .
5 . Stretch carpet both directions in accordance with mill ' s instructions ; use power
stretchers except where space is too small .
6. Provide glue- down installation by trimming and fitting carpet widths into each
space prior to application of adhesive . Apply adhesive, butter cut edges with
seaming cement, butting edges tightly together, and roll lightly.
7 . Install edge guards at exposed edges. Bind edges with cloth tape and thread where
not concealable .
8 . Clean adhesive and cement from face of carpet promptly ; replace carpet which
cannot be cleaned .
9 . Save carpet scraps, defined as mill ends less that 9' long, and pieces larger than 3
sq . ft. in area and wider than 8 " , and deliver to Owner' s storage space as directed .
Dispose of smaller pieces.
10 . Vacuum completed carpet installation with beater-in-nozzle type commercial
vacuum cleaner.
11 . Contractor is responsible for providing commercial carpet samples in Owner ' s
preferred color for final approval.
12 . Provide vinyl transition strips at any carpet-to-tile intersections and as shown on
drawings as manufactured by Tarkett or an approved, comparable product. Color to
be as selected by the Owner and the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09680-4
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 9
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 8
1 SGL DOOR 9 HALL 20 FROM ADMINISTRATION 18 90 - LHR
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 HEDA TBSRT ( 9 ) RH AL LC C4
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 . DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
I
Heading ## 8A
1 SGL DOOR 10 HALL 20 TO FILE STORAGE 16 90 - RH
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE 13B1279 4 '1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
H . Downspouts :
Install downspouts at centers/locations per the drawings and building elevations. 1
Utilize extruded or formed-closed type downspouts with thickness and finish as )
listed in this specification. Utilize the manufacturer' s connecting sleeves at all
joints .
1 . When a surface water shed collection system is called for on the
drawings, provide kick-out elbows at the termination base of each
downspout at 45 or 75 degrees and provide concrete splash blocks at
each downspout to control erosion.
2 . When a subgrade water collection system is called for on the drawings ,
provide a direct tie-in to the underground roof drainage and collection
system .
J . Wall Brackets :
Install manufacturer' s wall brackets on downspouts at a maximum spacing of 5' .
Secure to stucco with 1 . 5 " stainless expansion fasteners . Fasten downspouts with
(4) 1 /811 x 3/8 " pop-rivets per bracket .
K . Outlet Tubes :
Provide stainless steel outlet tubes at connections of gutters to downspouts with '/2"
flanges riveted in place with (4) 1 /8 " x 1 /4 " pop rivets. Hold downspouts 1 " off of
the wall .
* * *END OF SECTION '
07710-2
2 . Pre-plan installation for uniform direction of pattern and lay of pile, and proper
sequencing with other work. Locate seams properly centered under doors and
without seams in direction of traffic as doorways and similar traffic patterns.
Extend carpet under removable obstructions and into closets and alcoves .
3 . Provide stretch-in-tackless installation, using glued and/or nailed tackless stripping .
with edges of carpet concealed. Tape and/or sew seams , after buttering trimmed
edges with seaming cement.
4. Cement cushion to substrate, with taped seams running at 90 degree angle with
carpet seams .
5 . Stretch carpet both directions in accordance with mill ' s instructions ; use power
stretchers except where space is too small .
6. Provide glue- down installation by trimming and fitting carpet widths into each
space prior to application of adhesive . Apply adhesive, butter cut edges with
seaming cement, butting edges tightly together, and roll lightly.
7 . Install edge guards at exposed edges. Bind edges with cloth tape and thread where
not concealable .
8 . Clean adhesive and cement from face of carpet promptly ; replace carpet which
cannot be cleaned .
9 . Save carpet scraps, defined as mill ends less that 9' long, and pieces larger than 3
sq . ft. in area and wider than 8 " , and deliver to Owner' s storage space as directed .
Dispose of smaller pieces.
10 . Vacuum completed carpet installation with beater-in-nozzle type commercial
vacuum cleaner.
11 . Contractor is responsible for providing commercial carpet samples in Owner ' s
preferred color for final approval.
12 . Provide vinyl transition strips at any carpet-to-tile intersections and as shown on
drawings as manufactured by Tarkett or an approved, comparable product. Color to
be as selected by the Owner and the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09680-4
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1 .01 GENERAL:
1 - Submittals :
a. In addition to manufacturer' s data, application instructions, and label
analysis for each coating material, submit samples for Architect ' s review of
color and texture only. Resubmit samples if requested until required sheen,
color and texture is achieved . .
b. On 8 " x 8 " hardboard, provide two (2) samples of each color and material,
With texture to simulate finish conditions.
C. On wood surfaces provide two (2) 4 " x 8 " samples for natural and stained
wood finish.
d. On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted
finishes of acceptable samples, for approval by the Architect.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 - Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless otherwise ,
indicated.
2 . Paint exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are
designated. If not designated, colors will be selected by Architect from standard
colors available for the coatings required.
3 . Work Not Included: Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming -of ferrous metal
items and fabricated components are included under their respective trades. Unless
otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces of concealed areas. Finished
metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, and similar metals will
not be painted. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or over any
equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code-
required labels.
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE :
1 • Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing
manufacturer' s name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where indicated in
accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
1.04 PROTAN:
% 1 • Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damage, by cleaning,
repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Architect.
09900-1
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes jomt -sealants for tite following applications, including those specified by reference
to this Section: following applications :
1 . Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces :
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry concrete walls and partitions.
e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows and
elevator entrances.
f Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
g. Other joints as indicated .
2 . Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
b. Other joints as indicated .
B . Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing' for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall' for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to
reduce sound transmission.
3 . Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile Work" for sealing tile joints.
4. Division 9 Section "Lay-in Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical
ceilings.
1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomerici.oint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
07900 - 1
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1 .01 GENERAL:
1 - Submittals :
a. In addition to manufacturer' s data, application instructions, and label
analysis for each coating material, submit samples for Architect ' s review of
color and texture only. Resubmit samples if requested until required sheen,
color and texture is achieved . .
b. On 8 " x 8 " hardboard, provide two (2) samples of each color and material,
With texture to simulate finish conditions.
C. On wood surfaces provide two (2) 4 " x 8 " samples for natural and stained
wood finish.
d. On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted
finishes of acceptable samples, for approval by the Architect.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 - Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless otherwise ,
indicated.
2 . Paint exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are
designated. If not designated, colors will be selected by Architect from standard
colors available for the coatings required.
3 . Work Not Included: Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming -of ferrous metal
items and fabricated components are included under their respective trades. Unless
otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces of concealed areas. Finished
metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, and similar metals will
not be painted. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or over any
equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code-
required labels.
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE :
1 • Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing
manufacturer' s name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where indicated in
accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
1.04 PROTAN:
% 1 • Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damage, by cleaning,
repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Architect.
09900-1
1 .05 PROJECT CONDITIONS : (; 1
I Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 98 degrees . Do not apply paints in rain, fog or
mist; when relative humidity exceeds 95 percent; at temperatures less than 5
degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
2 . Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier
coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Architect in writing of
anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrates primed by others .
3 . Surface Conditions : Apply paint and coatings when the following surface
conditions have been met:
a. Interior Drywall- 12% maximum moisture content.
b . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels- 12% maximum
moisture content.
c. Exposed Wood, Wood Doors, Wood Trim- 15 % maximum moisture
content.
1 .06 EXTRA MATERIALS :
I . Provide a minimum of 1 gallon of each material and color of paint as materials
applied that are packaged and stored with identification labels describing contents .
1 .07 SURFACE PREPARATION :
1 . Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer' s instructions of each substrate condition.
2 . Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and
similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied
protection. Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at
completion of work.
3 . Seal wood required to be job-painted. Prime edges, ends, face, undersides and
backsides of counters, cases, cabinets, counters, etc. Use varnish for back-priming
where transparent finish is required.
4 . Back-prime interior paneling only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
09900-2
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCADMIN PAGE - 10
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 9
1 SGL DOOR 11 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 17 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 13 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 15 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 14 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 13 90 - RH
TYPE Al 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
9 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
3 LOCKSET ND53TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC3
10 - 025
3 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
9 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
3 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 10
1 SGL DOOR 15 HALL 19 TO WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 16 HALL 19 TO MENS VESTIBULE 11 90 - RH
TYPE E1 310 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D HA F2
2 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D HA F3
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " x 3411 US32D HA Pi
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
6 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B . Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing
the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint
sealants in 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.
E. SWRJ Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant
Validation Program.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer.
G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in
optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in " Quality Assurance"
Article.
H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application .
I. Product Test Reports : Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements .
J . Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation
of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding
the Notice to Proceed with commencement of the Work.
I . Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548 .
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3 . Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance
with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
specifications and test methods .
07900 - 2
1 .05 PROJECT CONDITIONS : (; 1
I Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 98 degrees . Do not apply paints in rain, fog or
mist; when relative humidity exceeds 95 percent; at temperatures less than 5
degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
2 . Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier
coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Architect in writing of
anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrates primed by others .
3 . Surface Conditions : Apply paint and coatings when the following surface
conditions have been met:
a. Interior Drywall- 12% maximum moisture content.
b . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels- 12% maximum
moisture content.
c. Exposed Wood, Wood Doors, Wood Trim- 15 % maximum moisture
content.
1 .06 EXTRA MATERIALS :
I . Provide a minimum of 1 gallon of each material and color of paint as materials
applied that are packaged and stored with identification labels describing contents .
1 .07 SURFACE PREPARATION :
1 . Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer' s instructions of each substrate condition.
2 . Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and
similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied
protection. Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at
completion of work.
3 . Seal wood required to be job-painted. Prime edges, ends, face, undersides and
backsides of counters, cases, cabinets, counters, etc. Use varnish for back-priming
where transparent finish is required.
4 . Back-prime interior paneling only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
09900-2
5 . Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of wood doors with heavy coat of varnish or
similar sealer immediately upon delivery to job. Do not paint door UL Labels .
1 .08 MATERIAL PREPARATION :
1 Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
1 .09 APPLICATION :
1 • Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer' s
directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to
which applied, but in no case will spray
Architect. application be used unless approved by
2 • Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
final paint coat, until paint
3 . Paint surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only before
equipment is installed.
4 . Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and edges same as exterior faces, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not paint door UL Labels .
5 . Sand lightly between succeeding enamel, urethane or varnish coats.
6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch
up painted, unless otherwise specified.
7. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which
has not been prime coated by others .
8 . Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading
rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4. 0 mils for entire
coating system of prime and finish coats for (3) coat work.
9• Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 .5 mils for entire coating system
Of prime and finish coat for two (2) coat work.
1 . 10 COMPLETED WORK:
1 Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, finish or repaint
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
09900-3
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion
to Projectjoint substrates as follows:
1 . Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when testjoints will be erected.
4. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to jo nt substrates
or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint
substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
5 . Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive
failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be
considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates dwing testing.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A . Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions :
1 . When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by,joint-sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3 . Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications
indicated .
4 . Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint
substrates.
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1 . Warranty Period: two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants
from the following:
1 . Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or
errors attributable to design or construction.
2 . Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3 . Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
07900 - 3
5 . Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of wood doors with heavy coat of varnish or
similar sealer immediately upon delivery to job. Do not paint door UL Labels .
1 .08 MATERIAL PREPARATION :
1 Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
1 .09 APPLICATION :
1 • Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer' s
directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to
which applied, but in no case will spray
Architect. application be used unless approved by
2 • Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
final paint coat, until paint
3 . Paint surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only before
equipment is installed.
4 . Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and edges same as exterior faces, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not paint door UL Labels .
5 . Sand lightly between succeeding enamel, urethane or varnish coats.
6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch
up painted, unless otherwise specified.
7. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which
has not been prime coated by others .
8 . Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading
rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4. 0 mils for entire
coating system of prime and finish coats for (3) coat work.
9• Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 .5 mils for entire coating system
Of prime and finish coat for two (2) coat work.
1 . 10 COMPLETED WORK:
1 Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, finish or repaint
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
09900-3
1 . 11 TOUCHING UP AND CLEANING :
I . Upon completion, all touching up as required shall be done and paint removed from )
all surfaces which are not specified to receive paint.
1 . 12 PAINT GENERAL:
A. Material Compatibility:
1 , Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience .
2 . For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing
by manufacturer' s of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate
indicated.
C . Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior paints and coatings : Provide
products that comply with the following limits for VOC (Volatile Organic
Compounds) content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59 , subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical
restrictions ; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop :
I . Flat paints and coatings: VOC content of not more than 50g/L.
2 . Nonflat Paints and coatings : VOC content of not more than 150 glL.
3 . Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 .0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings) .
4 . Restricted Components : Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolien.
b . Acrylonitrile .
C . Antimony.
d. Benzene.
C. Butyl benzyl phthalate .
f. Cadmium.
g. Di(2-ethylhexl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i . Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j . 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
1 . Dimethyl phthalate.
in. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
09900-4
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 11
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 11
1 SGL DOOR 17 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS TOILET ROOM 9 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 18 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS TOILET ROOM 10 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 19 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS SHOWERS 7 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 20 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS SHOWERS 8 90 - LH
TYPE El 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
12 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
4 PRIVACY SET ND40S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC5
4 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
4 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
4 COAT HOOK 937P X 3 3 / 4 US26D HA M5
4 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
12 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
Heading # 12
1 SGL DOOR 22 HALL 20 TO CLOSET BI - FOLD
TYPE F ( 4 ) 113 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 8 " FULL LOUVERED BIFOLD DOORS
1 BI - FOLD DOOR SET 9570 X 60 HA M2
2 KNOB 521 B X 1 " 26D IV M3
2 KNOB BACK PLATE 513 B X 1 1 / 2 " 26D IV M3A
Heading # 13
1 SGL DOOR 9999 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
1 KEY CABINET 1203 - A LU M4
PART2 - PRODUCTS �` \
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range .
2 .3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-
applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
type, grade, class, and uses related toexposure and joint substrates.
B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not
stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177 .2600.
D. Single-Component Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant:
1 . Available Products:
a. Pacific Polymers, Inc. ; Elastosea1230 Type I (Gun Grade).
b. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-7000.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3 . Class: 25 .
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.
B . Available Products:
1 . Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
2 . Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc. ; Sonolac.
3 . Tremco; Tremflex 834 .
07900 - 4
1 . 11 TOUCHING UP AND CLEANING :
I . Upon completion, all touching up as required shall be done and paint removed from )
all surfaces which are not specified to receive paint.
1 . 12 PAINT GENERAL:
A. Material Compatibility:
1 , Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience .
2 . For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing
by manufacturer' s of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate
indicated.
C . Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior paints and coatings : Provide
products that comply with the following limits for VOC (Volatile Organic
Compounds) content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59 , subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical
restrictions ; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop :
I . Flat paints and coatings: VOC content of not more than 50g/L.
2 . Nonflat Paints and coatings : VOC content of not more than 150 glL.
3 . Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 .0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings) .
4 . Restricted Components : Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolien.
b . Acrylonitrile .
C . Antimony.
d. Benzene.
C. Butyl benzyl phthalate .
f. Cadmium.
g. Di(2-ethylhexl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i . Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j . 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
1 . Dimethyl phthalate.
in. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
09900-4
o• Hexavalent chromium .
P. Isophorone.
q . Lead .
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalane.
W. Toluene (methylbenzene) .
X . 1 , 1 , 1 -trichloroethane.
Y. Vinyl chloride.
1. 13 PAINTING SCHEDULE
The following paints specified shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturer' s or an approved, comparable product:
I • Benjamin Moore Paints
2• Sherwin Williams Paints
3 . Porter Paints
4. Devoe Paints
5 . MAB Paints
6. ICI Paints
7• Color Wheel Paints
8 . Armourcoat, USA
NOTE : Color selections to be by the Owner, the Architect, and/or the Interior Designer. See
Finishes Schedule on the plans for location of paint. When more than five (5) colors are selected
for interior or for exteriors, a painting upcharge shall be negotiated prior to application of paints.
A . Exterior wood Trim,
Wood Siding,
Fascias, Soffits, Etc. : One ( 1 ) coat sealer primer on all faces and edges. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Exterior Acrylic Latex paint on
exposed surfaces.
B. Interior Drywall; Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Regal AquaVelvet Eggshell
(319) over base sealer coat. Specialty finishes may apply
also.
C. Galvanized Metal : One ( 1 ) coat Benjamin Moore Galvanized Iron Primer. Two
(2) coats Benjamin Moore Meta-lastic Paint.
D . Metal Surfaces : Structural Steel Beams & Columns,
Steel Trusses, Steel Tanks :
09900-5
2 .5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
_ A . Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed
joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
1 . Available Products:
a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
b. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2 .6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to
provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance. Backing rods used in combination with silicone sealants shall be soft rod "open cell" to
prevent off-grassing bubbles in the cured surface. All other backing rods shall be "closed cell".
C . Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint
where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D. When proposing paintable silicones using acrylic latex paints make special consideration that these
products must be painted within seven days of placement of sealants. Refer to manufacturer' s literature
for proper sequence of applications.
2 .7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to
joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to j oints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 EXAMINATION
07900 - 5
o• Hexavalent chromium .
P. Isophorone.
q . Lead .
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalane.
W. Toluene (methylbenzene) .
X . 1 , 1 , 1 -trichloroethane.
Y. Vinyl chloride.
1. 13 PAINTING SCHEDULE
The following paints specified shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturer' s or an approved, comparable product:
I • Benjamin Moore Paints
2• Sherwin Williams Paints
3 . Porter Paints
4. Devoe Paints
5 . MAB Paints
6. ICI Paints
7• Color Wheel Paints
8 . Armourcoat, USA
NOTE : Color selections to be by the Owner, the Architect, and/or the Interior Designer. See
Finishes Schedule on the plans for location of paint. When more than five (5) colors are selected
for interior or for exteriors, a painting upcharge shall be negotiated prior to application of paints.
A . Exterior wood Trim,
Wood Siding,
Fascias, Soffits, Etc. : One ( 1 ) coat sealer primer on all faces and edges. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Exterior Acrylic Latex paint on
exposed surfaces.
B. Interior Drywall; Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Regal AquaVelvet Eggshell
(319) over base sealer coat. Specialty finishes may apply
also.
C. Galvanized Metal : One ( 1 ) coat Benjamin Moore Galvanized Iron Primer. Two
(2) coats Benjamin Moore Meta-lastic Paint.
D . Metal Surfaces : Structural Steel Beams & Columns,
Steel Trusses, Steel Tanks :
09900-5
Exterior Exposed- Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Retard-X Rust Inhibitive
Latex Primer 162 over the shop delivered primer, welds and
bolts . Allow a minimum of 4 hours between coats . Finish i
with two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Eggshell alkyd house
paint 108 .
Interior Exposed- Same applications but one (1 ) coat only of primer and finish.
NOTE: All galvanized metal to be washed with mineral spirits to remove any oil .
E . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels :
One ( 1) coat Benjamin Moore Masonry sealer. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Latex paint.
F. Steel Doors & Frames :
Spot prime with Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust Inhabiter
Red Oxide. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust
Inhibiter (semi- gloss) .
G . Wood Doors and Trim (Painted) :
One (1 ) coat sealer primer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore
enamel.
H . Wood Doors and Trim (Sealed) : —
Three coats of Satin Finish clear urethane, lightly sanded rr
between coats .
J. Aluminum or Steel Handrails :
One coat metal primer and two coats shop applied industrial
enamel .
J - Exposed finish Grade Concrete Block:
One coat block filler and sealer primer. Specialty Paint over
primer in accordance with the Manufacturers Specifications .
g. Exterior Aluminum Tubing and Frames :
One coat metal primer and two coats field applied industrial
enamel utilizing a compressor and spray applicator. Protect
all surrounding finish work from overspray.
L . Exterior Architectural Masonry Units (such as decorative split faced, split ribbed,
and smooth faced colored block, and any manufactured stone such as Herpal),
including the mortar used to set the units, shall be sealed with a water repellent-anti
graffitti coating after installation and cleaning of all block faces . EXCEPTION : If
g ---- - - -
the block manufacturer supplies an ante ral water repellent admixture in their bloc
and a water repellent is added to the grout (mortar) during installation, then no
exterior sealer is required.
09900-6
® Since 1928 .
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC.
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT /DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant )
performance.
B . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected .
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements :
1 . Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations
above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates
include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3 . Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4 . Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion ofjoint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates
include the following:
a . Metal .
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with
joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not
allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
07900 - 6
Exterior Exposed- Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Retard-X Rust Inhibitive
Latex Primer 162 over the shop delivered primer, welds and
bolts . Allow a minimum of 4 hours between coats . Finish i
with two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Eggshell alkyd house
paint 108 .
Interior Exposed- Same applications but one (1 ) coat only of primer and finish.
NOTE: All galvanized metal to be washed with mineral spirits to remove any oil .
E . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels :
One ( 1) coat Benjamin Moore Masonry sealer. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Latex paint.
F. Steel Doors & Frames :
Spot prime with Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust Inhabiter
Red Oxide. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust
Inhibiter (semi- gloss) .
G . Wood Doors and Trim (Painted) :
One (1 ) coat sealer primer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore
enamel.
H . Wood Doors and Trim (Sealed) : —
Three coats of Satin Finish clear urethane, lightly sanded rr
between coats .
J. Aluminum or Steel Handrails :
One coat metal primer and two coats shop applied industrial
enamel .
J - Exposed finish Grade Concrete Block:
One coat block filler and sealer primer. Specialty Paint over
primer in accordance with the Manufacturers Specifications .
g. Exterior Aluminum Tubing and Frames :
One coat metal primer and two coats field applied industrial
enamel utilizing a compressor and spray applicator. Protect
all surrounding finish work from overspray.
L . Exterior Architectural Masonry Units (such as decorative split faced, split ribbed,
and smooth faced colored block, and any manufactured stone such as Herpal),
including the mortar used to set the units, shall be sealed with a water repellent-anti
graffitti coating after installation and cleaning of all block faces . EXCEPTION : If
g ---- - - -
the block manufacturer supplies an ante ral water repellent admixture in their bloc
and a water repellent is added to the grout (mortar) during installation, then no
exterior sealer is required.
09900-6
M. Toilet Room Walls :
Apply water base epoxy coating full height on the walls in toilet
rooms/bathrooms, to achieve an impervious finish . (See NOTE below).
(ON INTERIOR MASONRY) - Semigloss Finish using
Sherwin Williams Paints.
1 " coat: S-W KEM CATI-COAT EPDXYFILLER/SEALER 1342 WA8B42
WA9 (87- 108 sq. ft./gal @ 8- 10 mild dry).
21d coat : S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70B60 V25 .
V coat: S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70/B60 V25, Wails wet, 3
mils wet per coat).
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY EPDXY PAINTS TO ANY INTERIOR FACES OF BARE
BLOCK AT MASONRY EXTERIOR WALLS. UTILIZE LATEX PAINTS WITH
BREATHABILITY OF 1 PERM OR GREATER.
(ON DRYWALL) - Semi-Gloss Finish using Sherwin Williams Paints.
I " coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28 W20Q
dry). (4 mils wet, 1 .2 mils
2" coat: S-W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/B60 V3 .
3rd coat: S -W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/ B60 V3 . ( 10 mils wet,
dry per coat). 6 mils
N. Stained Concrete Floors : Two coats solid color H&C silicone acrylic concrete
sealer. In areas where wet floor conditions exist such as locker rooms, toilet rooms,
etc apply with SharkGrip slip resistant additive over a clean, dirt and dust free,
dry, broom finished slab. Color as selected by the Architect.
P. Specialty Coatings shall be as herein listed. Placement shall be per the In Finish
Schedule.
1 • Apply Armourcoat Duturo in the public corridors when scheduled on the Finish
Schedule. Product Data Sheet shall be supplied to the Architect for approval. Color
shall be selected by the Architect.
` * * END OF THIS SECTION* * *
09900-7
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard : Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1 . Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings .
3 . Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs
of j oints.
F. Install sealants us ng proven tech^.iques hat comply wif the 'UIlow ug and at t he Barite lime backings are
installed:
1 . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates .
2- Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3 . - Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants : Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to elirninate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1 1 . Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints .
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do - not discolor -
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3 . Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4 . Provide flushjoint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193 .
5 . Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in
ASTM C 1193 .
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooledjoints .
IT Install sealants to size and shape shown on drawings, or, if not shown, with slightly concave surfaces .
a. The minimum opening should be 1 /4 ".
b. The opening should be at least 4 times the maximum movement of the sealant.
c. The sealant should be more than 1 /4 " and less than 1/2" deep.
d. The depth of the sealant should be no greater than the width.
e. No joint to receive sealant should be less than 1/4" deep.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows :
I . Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows :
07900 - 7
M. Toilet Room Walls :
Apply water base epoxy coating full height on the walls in toilet
rooms/bathrooms, to achieve an impervious finish . (See NOTE below).
(ON INTERIOR MASONRY) - Semigloss Finish using
Sherwin Williams Paints.
1 " coat: S-W KEM CATI-COAT EPDXYFILLER/SEALER 1342 WA8B42
WA9 (87- 108 sq. ft./gal @ 8- 10 mild dry).
21d coat : S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70B60 V25 .
V coat: S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70/B60 V25, Wails wet, 3
mils wet per coat).
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY EPDXY PAINTS TO ANY INTERIOR FACES OF BARE
BLOCK AT MASONRY EXTERIOR WALLS. UTILIZE LATEX PAINTS WITH
BREATHABILITY OF 1 PERM OR GREATER.
(ON DRYWALL) - Semi-Gloss Finish using Sherwin Williams Paints.
I " coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28 W20Q
dry). (4 mils wet, 1 .2 mils
2" coat: S-W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/B60 V3 .
3rd coat: S -W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/ B60 V3 . ( 10 mils wet,
dry per coat). 6 mils
N. Stained Concrete Floors : Two coats solid color H&C silicone acrylic concrete
sealer. In areas where wet floor conditions exist such as locker rooms, toilet rooms,
etc apply with SharkGrip slip resistant additive over a clean, dirt and dust free,
dry, broom finished slab. Color as selected by the Architect.
P. Specialty Coatings shall be as herein listed. Placement shall be per the In Finish
Schedule.
1 • Apply Armourcoat Duturo in the public corridors when scheduled on the Finish
Schedule. Product Data Sheet shall be supplied to the Architect for approval. Color
shall be selected by the Architect.
` * * END OF THIS SECTION* * *
09900-7
DIVISION 101 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10100 - CHALKBOARDS MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
1 . 01 SCOPE
This section of the Specifications is intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials,
and/or incidentals necessary to the completion of all requirements of the drawings, notes,
schedules, and these Specifications concerning the furnishing of Chalkboards,
Markerboards and Tackboards .
Shop Drawings of all chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, trim, etc., shall be submitted
to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall indicate method of
attachment at various wall conditions.
Approved Manufacturers :
AKI in Davie, Florida
Claridge in Harrison, Arkansas
1 . 02 CHALKBOARD MATERIALS :
Chalkboard shall be porcelain enamel on a minimum of 24 gauge sheet steel .
Writing surface shall have three (3) coats of vitreous enamel for minimum coating of
.006 ".
Back side of facing sheet shall have a minimum of two (2) vitreous protective coats.
Chalkboard shall be factory laminated 1 /2 ° vapor proof fiber board.
Chalkboards are to be in one continuous length where possible unless approved by the
Architect. Where it is not possible to achieve a continuous length provide two (2) equal
Pieces with aluminum "H" joint strip painted to match chalkboard color.
Chalkboard and tackboards colors to be selected by Architect.
1 .03 MARKERBOARD MATERIALS :
Markerboards shall be LCS Porcelain Enamel Steel , 24 gauge over 3/8 " particle board core
with . 015 aluminum sheet backing. Provide standard 5/8 " perimeter and Series 4 mounting
trim along with tray and map rail. Provide music staff lining on Music Room Boards.
Color: white with grey trim.
1 .04 TACKBOARD MATERIALS :
:\ Tackboards shall be No . 2 vinyl over cork backing equal to Vinyl Tac-Tex by Greensteel.
Tackboard colors to be selected by Architect.
10100- 1
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON - -
HA HAGER .
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE , PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY.
I
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
. 630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading -
1 14
2 - 14 -
3 15 -
a. Perform 10 tests for the fust 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of elastomeric
sealant andjoint substrate.
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor
per elevation.
2 . Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull
Tab in Appendix XI in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application
indicated.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by
extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side . Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
3 . Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with
specified requirements . Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.
4 . Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant
manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
C. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements .
S . Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names
of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion
results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration; and sealant dimensions.
6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used
originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant
contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field Test Results : Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance
with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements . Retest failed applications until test
results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3 .5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work.
* * * END OF SECTION
07900 - 8
DIVISION 101 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10100 - CHALKBOARDS MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
1 . 01 SCOPE
This section of the Specifications is intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials,
and/or incidentals necessary to the completion of all requirements of the drawings, notes,
schedules, and these Specifications concerning the furnishing of Chalkboards,
Markerboards and Tackboards .
Shop Drawings of all chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, trim, etc., shall be submitted
to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall indicate method of
attachment at various wall conditions.
Approved Manufacturers :
AKI in Davie, Florida
Claridge in Harrison, Arkansas
1 . 02 CHALKBOARD MATERIALS :
Chalkboard shall be porcelain enamel on a minimum of 24 gauge sheet steel .
Writing surface shall have three (3) coats of vitreous enamel for minimum coating of
.006 ".
Back side of facing sheet shall have a minimum of two (2) vitreous protective coats.
Chalkboard shall be factory laminated 1 /2 ° vapor proof fiber board.
Chalkboards are to be in one continuous length where possible unless approved by the
Architect. Where it is not possible to achieve a continuous length provide two (2) equal
Pieces with aluminum "H" joint strip painted to match chalkboard color.
Chalkboard and tackboards colors to be selected by Architect.
1 .03 MARKERBOARD MATERIALS :
Markerboards shall be LCS Porcelain Enamel Steel , 24 gauge over 3/8 " particle board core
with . 015 aluminum sheet backing. Provide standard 5/8 " perimeter and Series 4 mounting
trim along with tray and map rail. Provide music staff lining on Music Room Boards.
Color: white with grey trim.
1 .04 TACKBOARD MATERIALS :
:\ Tackboards shall be No . 2 vinyl over cork backing equal to Vinyl Tac-Tex by Greensteel.
Tackboard colors to be selected by Architect.
10100- 1
1 .05 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES :
All trimmed Chalkboards and Tackboards shall be framed with extruded aluminum
sections 6063 alloy satin anodized trim.
Trim pieces shall be equal to Greensteel, Inc . , as follows :
a. Top Trim: 469K Display Rail w/ 6900K End Caps
b . Side Trim: 4158K
C. Chalk Tray: #238K 1 /2 00K End Plates
700
d. Mapbooks (8 per board) # 70000K. Aluminum only . Plastic not acceptable.
Chalk trays shall extend the full combined length of all chalk and tackboards, and shall be
secured at 12 " o .c . (Chalk trays not required under separate tackboards).
1 .06 INSTALLATION :
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard shall be surface-mounted using channel trim with
concealed fastenings as specified above and glue to wall to prevent pillowing of chalk,
marker and tackboards . _
�.
(
ith yawl plugs and screws or expansion
Chalk tray shall be secured directly to the wall w
bolts as conditions require . Maximum spacing of fasteners shall be on 12" centers. Top
and side moldings shall be secured in like manner on 20 " center.
Guarantees :
ch
not
Manufacturer shall furnish awritten goazgnnal erastee to ing quality, he originowner that any a
l bo ualsacuilty, oor twenty
retain the original writing quality,
(20) years after original installation, will be replaced and installed without charge to the Owner.
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard installations shall be guaranteed for one ( 1 ) year after
final inspection against faulty materials and workmanship .
* **END OF SECTION* * *
10100-2
DIVISION 8 DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Wood Doors
B . Finish Hardware Section 08200
Section 08700
C . Painting
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
Hollow Metal Work shall be manufactured by one of the following or equal :
A . Ceco Corporation
B . Steelcraft
C. Firedoor Corporation of Florida
D. Quality Engineered Products Co . , Inc. , Tampa, FL
E. Republic Steel Doors & Frames, Pembroke Park, FL
F. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
G. Curries
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS - SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Contract Conditions, covering each type
of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented
by suitable schedules covering doors and frames.
B . Show glass and louver opening sizes and locations in doors .
1 .04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Delivery:
Deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers or wrappings
clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and brand designation, door schedule
number, referenced specification number, type, class and rating as applicable.
B. Storage:
Store products in an approved dry area; protected from contact with soil and from
exposure to the elements. Keep products dry at all times.
C . Handling:
' Handle products in a manner that will prevent breakage and damage to products .
J
08100-1
1 .05 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES :
All trimmed Chalkboards and Tackboards shall be framed with extruded aluminum
sections 6063 alloy satin anodized trim.
Trim pieces shall be equal to Greensteel, Inc . , as follows :
a. Top Trim: 469K Display Rail w/ 6900K End Caps
b . Side Trim: 4158K
C. Chalk Tray: #238K 1 /2 00K End Plates
700
d. Mapbooks (8 per board) # 70000K. Aluminum only . Plastic not acceptable.
Chalk trays shall extend the full combined length of all chalk and tackboards, and shall be
secured at 12 " o .c . (Chalk trays not required under separate tackboards).
1 .06 INSTALLATION :
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard shall be surface-mounted using channel trim with
concealed fastenings as specified above and glue to wall to prevent pillowing of chalk,
marker and tackboards . _
�.
(
ith yawl plugs and screws or expansion
Chalk tray shall be secured directly to the wall w
bolts as conditions require . Maximum spacing of fasteners shall be on 12" centers. Top
and side moldings shall be secured in like manner on 20 " center.
Guarantees :
ch
not
Manufacturer shall furnish awritten goazgnnal erastee to ing quality, he originowner that any a
l bo ualsacuilty, oor twenty
retain the original writing quality,
(20) years after original installation, will be replaced and installed without charge to the Owner.
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard installations shall be guaranteed for one ( 1 ) year after
final inspection against faulty materials and workmanship .
* **END OF SECTION* * *
10100-2
DIVISION 104 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10260 - CORNER GUARDS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and install, as detailed, as located on the Drawings, at all exterior doors woth
drywall comers, and at corridor interior comersm C/S Acrovyn Surface Mounted Corner
Guard 90 degree Models SM20, SSM-20 and the 135 degree Model SM-20M. All as
manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. Or an approved equal . Complete details,
locations and samples of selected models and colors, including end caps, and mounting
hardware shall be submitted to the Architect for approval .
1 .03 APPROVED MANUFACTUEWS ORE UAL :
Construction Specialties, Inc . , Acrovyn
Arden Architectural
Balco Metalines, Inc.
IPC/InPro Corp.
Korogard, RJF International Inc.
Pawling Corporation, Pro Tek
1 .04 MATERIAL .
Corner guards shall be manufactured from . 078 " thick nominal high impact vinyl/acrylic
extrusions, designed to absorb and resist abrasions under impact. The extrusion shall
include a matte finish pebblette grain surface, and be supplied in a Solid Color as called
out on the Interiors Plan . Continuous retainers shall be a minimum .063 " thickness . End
caps and mounting hardware shall be famished to complete the assembly.
1 .05 DESIGN:
Corner guards shall be securely locked in place yet provide for free-floating action to
absorb heavy impact without damage to guard, retainer or adjacent wall . Corner guard
shall be straight and true over full length.
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
10260-1
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT PAGE - 3
I
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM MECHANIC BAY 1 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 7101 ' ' X . 1 - 3 / 411. FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC C1
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 '!
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6'
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1.
- D - RESTRICTED KWY
t
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ll
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A . Frames (Door)
I . Exterior : 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated, bonderized sheet steel .
Exterior: 14 gauge A- 60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel, over G-0" in
width. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on all frames mounted to brick
veneers or prclmished split-faced masonry products in lieu of the
standard 1 /2 " .
2 . Interior: 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel .
Interior: over 4'-0 : in width, 14 gauge. NOTE : Provide 3/4 " back bents on
all frames rnounted to brick veneers or grefinished split-faced masonry
products in lieu of the standard 1 /2 " .
B . Hardware Reinforcement (Frame - Steel
g uge by 1 - 112 " or 1 -5 /8" x 10"
? . Hinges :
2 . Closers and holders : 12 gauge by 16 "
3 . Strikes : 1 - 1 /4" x 4-7 /8 " ANSI 16gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. 16 gauge
1 - 118 " x 3 - 1 /2" deadlock strike 12 gauge
1 - 1 /8 " x 2-3/4" strike reinf. No lip 16 gauge
C . Frames (Window)
I . Exterior: 14 gauge A-60 galycoated, bonderized sheet steel
2 . Interior : 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated, bonderized sheet steel
D . Doors
1 . Exterior:
Face sheets 16 gauge A-60 galv . coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI 100
Grade 1II, Model 2, full flush, hollow metal, seamless construction. Closed
top and bottom edges flush with face sheets . Extra heavy duty .
2 . Interior : 100
Face sheet's 16 gauge A-60 galv. coated bonderized sheet steel . SDI Closed ed
Grade 11I, Model 3 , full flush, hollow metal , seamless construction.
top and bottom edged flush with face sheets.
3 . Internal Stiffeners :
Currie 707 with polystyrene core or approved equal.
4 . Sound Deadening:
Type standard with the manufacturer.
08100-2
DIVISION 104 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10260 - CORNER GUARDS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and install, as detailed, as located on the Drawings, at all exterior doors woth
drywall comers, and at corridor interior comersm C/S Acrovyn Surface Mounted Corner
Guard 90 degree Models SM20, SSM-20 and the 135 degree Model SM-20M. All as
manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. Or an approved equal . Complete details,
locations and samples of selected models and colors, including end caps, and mounting
hardware shall be submitted to the Architect for approval .
1 .03 APPROVED MANUFACTUEWS ORE UAL :
Construction Specialties, Inc . , Acrovyn
Arden Architectural
Balco Metalines, Inc.
IPC/InPro Corp.
Korogard, RJF International Inc.
Pawling Corporation, Pro Tek
1 .04 MATERIAL .
Corner guards shall be manufactured from . 078 " thick nominal high impact vinyl/acrylic
extrusions, designed to absorb and resist abrasions under impact. The extrusion shall
include a matte finish pebblette grain surface, and be supplied in a Solid Color as called
out on the Interiors Plan . Continuous retainers shall be a minimum .063 " thickness . End
caps and mounting hardware shall be famished to complete the assembly.
1 .05 DESIGN:
Corner guards shall be securely locked in place yet provide for free-floating action to
absorb heavy impact without damage to guard, retainer or adjacent wall . Corner guard
shall be straight and true over full length.
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
10260-1
Vinyl/acrylic extrusions shall be U .L. tested, Classified and Labeled reflection a Class I
Fire Rating in accordance with UL-723 (ASTM-E84-91a) (CAN 45102-2-M83 in Canada) f l
test procedures . Chemical and stain resistance shall be per CSAV-280 standards, \
established by manufacturer.
Color shall be integral with components matched in accordance with SAE J- 1545 -(Delta E)
with color difference no greater than 1 . 0 units using the Hunter (Lab) scale . Impact tested
in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM-F476-76.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION '
r
10260-2
5 • Hardware Reinforcement - Steel :
a. Hinges : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /2 " or 1 -5/8 " x 10 "
b. Closers and Holders : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/4 " x 10 "
C. Locks : 7 ga. x 1 - 1 /4 " x 3 "
d• Push/pull plates :
16 ga. x 14 " x 14 "
e. Panic bars : 3 " x 8 " and 4 " x 24 " (24 ga.)
E Glazing and louver beads : 18 ga.
9 - Coordinator Reinf : 12 ga. x 1 - 3/8 " x 15 - 1 /2 "
6• Clips, Anchors, Bolts, Screws and Rivets:
Steel, types standard with the manufacturer.
7 . Metallic filler.
FS TT-F-322
8 . Shop Primer:
Baked-on rust- inhibitive. ASTM - B117 Federal Specification TT-P-636
9. Field Painting:
See Section 09900
2 .02 FABRICATION
A . Frames
1 • Formed to profile as shown on drawings, constructed with square corners;
and free of defects, warps or buckle.
2 • Welded-type - for concrete; masonry construction and metal stud
construction .
3 . Comers and connections welded with exposed welds ground flush and
smooth.
4. Reinforcement :
As per Section 2 . 01 B,(3) above.
5 . Frames punched to receive rubber silencers, three each door on lock side
and two at head of double doors .
6 . Provide removable spreaders attached to bottom of door frames, to insure
correct alignment during shipping and installation.
7 At angle type thresholds, note
tower floor level . h frames and extend exterior portion down to
-- � lo
08100-3
Vinyl/acrylic extrusions shall be U .L. tested, Classified and Labeled reflection a Class I
Fire Rating in accordance with UL-723 (ASTM-E84-91a) (CAN 45102-2-M83 in Canada) f l
test procedures . Chemical and stain resistance shall be per CSAV-280 standards, \
established by manufacturer.
Color shall be integral with components matched in accordance with SAE J- 1545 -(Delta E)
with color difference no greater than 1 . 0 units using the Hunter (Lab) scale . Impact tested
in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM-F476-76.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION '
r
10260-2
SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drams and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Areas of specialty signage may include :
I • Construction Signs
2• Exterior Handicapped Signs at Parking Areas
3 • Toilet Room Handicapped Signs
4 . Interior Room Number and Name Signs
5 • Occupancy Capacity Signs
6. Regulatory Signs
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Uniformityof Manufacturer: For each sign form a graphic image process indicated
furnish products of a single manufacturer.
Americans With Disabilities Act: All signage shall meet the requirements of the A.D.A .
including grade 2 braille raised lettering, etc .
As man---- nufacttued by one of the following approved companies :
ASI Sign Systems, Tampa, FL (813) 620-4360 Attn: Ilene
Advance Corporation, Braille-Tac (800) ,825-0150
The Southwell Corp . San Antonio, TX (210) 223 - 1831
Best MarmL Sign Systems (800) 235-2378
Bunting Graphics Inc. (800) 735-0445
FRS Industries (800) 747-4795
HART Arch. Signage, Chesapeake, VA (804) 420- 1666
Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, NY (518) 370-3433
Metallic Arts, Spokane, WA 1 - 800-541 -3200
In-Pro Signscape, Muskego, WI, inprocorp.com
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :_
A _ _ __ Shone: Submit shop drawings for all items in this Section including all
accessories.
10440-1
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT
PAGE - 4 i
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX .
i
Heading # 15
1 SGL DOOR 3 MECHANIC BAY 1 FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 2 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L1
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 9045 US32D GL S4
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
i
g . Provide sheet metal grout guards in frames at all lock bolts and tapped
hardware locations.
9 . Do not fill frames with mortar unless specifically called out on the
drawings .
10 . Do not fill mullions , including removable mullions, with mortar unless
specifically called out on the drawings .
11 . silencers shall be installed in frames after doors are installed and painting is
completed.
B . Anchors
1 . Provide 16 gauge angle shaped floor slips welded to jambs and punched for
two 3 /8 " diameter bolts each.
2 . Provide adjustable length clip angles as required.
3 . Jamb Anchors
a. Frames set in masonry :
For doors not more than 7 ft . High, provide not less than
`
long adjustable 14 gauge corrugated galvanized masonry anchors for
each jamb over 7 feet, not less than 4 for each jamb .
b. Frames set against previously placed masonry or concrete:
For doors not more than 7 feet high, by approval of Owner' s
representative only punch each frame jamb and dimple countersink
for not less that three 3 /8 " diameter flat head screws. For doors
over 7 feet high, punch less that four 318 diameter flat head screws .
Provide pipe sleeves with spacers welded into each jamb at each
fastening location. Provide 3/8 " diameter galvanized sasrequired .
tla
ead
screws with approved expansion anchors or togg
After installing flat head screws fill head of countersink screw with
body filler then sand flush with frame.
c. Frames set in metal stud partitions:
Provide 16 gauge metal jamb anchor clips welded in each jamb at
following locations:
One at top, one 12 " down from top and 24 " o .c. for remainder of
jamb frames.
C . Doors
1 . Internal stiffeners spaced at not over 6" o .c.
08100-4
SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drams and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Areas of specialty signage may include :
I • Construction Signs
2• Exterior Handicapped Signs at Parking Areas
3 • Toilet Room Handicapped Signs
4 . Interior Room Number and Name Signs
5 • Occupancy Capacity Signs
6. Regulatory Signs
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Uniformityof Manufacturer: For each sign form a graphic image process indicated
furnish products of a single manufacturer.
Americans With Disabilities Act: All signage shall meet the requirements of the A.D.A .
including grade 2 braille raised lettering, etc .
As man---- nufacttued by one of the following approved companies :
ASI Sign Systems, Tampa, FL (813) 620-4360 Attn: Ilene
Advance Corporation, Braille-Tac (800) ,825-0150
The Southwell Corp . San Antonio, TX (210) 223 - 1831
Best MarmL Sign Systems (800) 235-2378
Bunting Graphics Inc. (800) 735-0445
FRS Industries (800) 747-4795
HART Arch. Signage, Chesapeake, VA (804) 420- 1666
Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, NY (518) 370-3433
Metallic Arts, Spokane, WA 1 - 800-541 -3200
In-Pro Signscape, Muskego, WI, inprocorp.com
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :_
A _ _ __ Shone: Submit shop drawings for all items in this Section including all
accessories.
10440-1
B . Submi__. t Samples of all interior signage and graphics .
PART II - PRODUCTS
2 .01 CONSTRUCTION SIGN:
A. Furnish h and install 81 - o' long x 4' - 0' high construction sign, on 3/4 plywood.
B . Locate on site in compliance with Local Permitting Agency requirements and as
directed by Owner.
C. Sign shall have two coats of exterior oil base paint.
D . All work shall be performed by an experienced sign painter.
E. Furnish and install supporting structure.
F . Sian shams ate: Name of Project, Name of owner, Name of Contractor, Name
of Architect, Name of Structural Engineer, Name of Mech/Elec . Engineer and
Name of Civil Engineer. (For all School and Municipal Gvernment projects, verify
the sign information required with the Owner or Owner' s agent prior to painting
sign panel .)
2.02 EXTERIOR HANDICAPPED SIGNS AT PARKING AREAS : t
A . Provide one (1) sign for each handicapped parking space.
B . Sign shall comply with the "Accessibilty Codes and Standards" latest edition, State
of Florida, for the physically handicapped, and F .T .O . 25 or 26 .
C. Sign shall read: "Parking By Disabled Permit Only" depicting National
Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) as detailed. Signs erected after 1 Oct. 1996 must
indicate the dollar penalty for illegal use of the space.
D . Size shall be 1 ' - 0" wide x 16" high, aluminum .
E. Provide standard. painted green steel post set in 6" diameter concrete foundation.
Post and concrete foundation shall be by the Contractor.
F . Height to bottom of sign shall be seven feet minimum and nine feet maximum .
G . Lettering, style shall be Helvetica Medium.
10440-2
2 . Face sheets spot welded to internal stiffeners at not over 5 " apart and in a
1
manner that will prevent the welds from showing on the exposed side of
face sheets .
3 . Hardware reinforcement welded in place as required for hardware
application. (See Section 2 . 02) .
4 . Sound deadening :
Interior surfaces treated with a sound deadening material to eliminate
metallic ring.
5 . Provide 16 gauge pre-bonderized zinc coated steel perimeter channels.
Bevel stile edges 1 /8 " in 2 ".
6 Spot-weld channels to face sheets 3 " o. c.
7• Close tops of all exterior out swinging doors flush with steel channels .
Close flush and seal watertight.
8 . Grind welds off smooth and flush.
9 Fold edge construction not acceptable .
10. At angle type thresholds, extend height of door by one inch over height
indicated in Door Schedule.
D . Doors With Glass Panels
1 Openings formed so that no bead is required on outside face of doors .
2 . Bead provided on both faces of doors and secured with oval head
countersink screws on the inside face.
E. Doors with Louvers
I Exterior:
Provide 16 gauge electro zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and weatherproof "z" type louvers full thickness of door welded into doors.
2 . Interior :
Provide 18 gauge elector zinc coated bonderized sheet steel louver frames
and inverted "Y" type louvers full thickness of door, welded into doors.
3 . Provide special size and shape louvers as shown .
4 . Louver Door Security Panels :
Woven wire mesh. Furnish and install on all exterior metal louver doors.
08100-5
B . Submi__. t Samples of all interior signage and graphics .
PART II - PRODUCTS
2 .01 CONSTRUCTION SIGN:
A. Furnish h and install 81 - o' long x 4' - 0' high construction sign, on 3/4 plywood.
B . Locate on site in compliance with Local Permitting Agency requirements and as
directed by Owner.
C. Sign shall have two coats of exterior oil base paint.
D . All work shall be performed by an experienced sign painter.
E. Furnish and install supporting structure.
F . Sian shams ate: Name of Project, Name of owner, Name of Contractor, Name
of Architect, Name of Structural Engineer, Name of Mech/Elec . Engineer and
Name of Civil Engineer. (For all School and Municipal Gvernment projects, verify
the sign information required with the Owner or Owner' s agent prior to painting
sign panel .)
2.02 EXTERIOR HANDICAPPED SIGNS AT PARKING AREAS : t
A . Provide one (1) sign for each handicapped parking space.
B . Sign shall comply with the "Accessibilty Codes and Standards" latest edition, State
of Florida, for the physically handicapped, and F .T .O . 25 or 26 .
C. Sign shall read: "Parking By Disabled Permit Only" depicting National
Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) as detailed. Signs erected after 1 Oct. 1996 must
indicate the dollar penalty for illegal use of the space.
D . Size shall be 1 ' - 0" wide x 16" high, aluminum .
E. Provide standard. painted green steel post set in 6" diameter concrete foundation.
Post and concrete foundation shall be by the Contractor.
F . Height to bottom of sign shall be seven feet minimum and nine feet maximum .
G . Lettering, style shall be Helvetica Medium.
10440-2
2.03 TOILET ROOM HANDICAPPED SIGN :
A Provide one (1 ) sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each
toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped. Size shall be as per
Signage Legend.
B. Color and Material shall be as per Signage Legend
C. Mo—unting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws at locations
detailed in Architectural Signage.
2.04 "INTERIOR" ROOM NAME AND NUMBER SIGNS AND OCCUPANCY
CAPACITY:
A. Separate signs for room name room mum
ber, or shall be in accordance with the Signage Legend. room canaciry reuwrPd _ Sizes
B. Color shall be as per Signage Legend.
C. Material shall be 1 /8 " thick plastic, or 1 /8 " thick etched zinc, with raised symbol for
identification by blind.
D. Mounting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws or clear silicone`
at locations detailed in Architectural Signage Legend.
1 2 .05 MONUMENT SIGNAGE
i
A. When depicted on the plans, provide individually mounted letters . Letters as
manufactured by the Southwell Company. Letters to be height as scheduled and in
Garamond H444 style in bronze Duranodic Aluminum. Flush mounted letters .
2.06 REGULATORY SIGNAGE
A. Provide standard graphic and descriptive signage at all elevator lobbies stipulating
"In Case of Fire Use Stairs".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer' s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Mount standard Signs on middle of doors at 48 " above the finish floor.
10440-3
Since 1928
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
STORAGE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX i
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
I
i
ARCHITECT/DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE. D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
j
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC . '
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 -848 - 3040 i
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 9 , 2009
i
j
i
F . Screens
Where louvers are indicated on exterior doors provide 18 x 14 .011 " alloy number )
302/304 stainless steel wire cloth secured in removable .015 inch stainless steel
alloy number 302/304 roll-formed frames . Mount screens on interior of doors with
stainless steel screws.
G. Fire Door Assemblies
1 . Fire door assemblies, including frames and hardware, shall meet fire test
and rating requirements in accordance with the procedure of Underwriters
Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories . Provide appropriate labels on
doors and frame .
2 . Fabrication and assembly requirements necessary to obtain labels will take
precedence over requirements shown or specified, except where
requirements shown or specified exceed the sizes or gauges required for
labeling .
3 . Required ratings are as shown on drawings .
FI. Finish Hardware Coordination
Metal doors and frames shall be prepared at the factory for application of finish �
e finish hardware
hardware at the job site . Templates are to be supplied by th
manufacturer to assure accurate preparation of doors and frames in accordance with
the Hardware Schedule.
1. Shop Painting by Manufacturer
1 . Imperfections spot glazed with metallic filler and sand smooth.
2 . Doors and frames shall be cleaned thoroughly in preparation to receive
manufacturer' s shop primer .
3 . After cleaning and treating the frames, the manufacturer shall apply a coat
of baked-on-rust-inhibitive primer prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. General :
1 . Install new doors and frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly �-
clean and prime prior to installation.
08100-6
2.03 TOILET ROOM HANDICAPPED SIGN :
A Provide one (1 ) sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each
toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped. Size shall be as per
Signage Legend.
B. Color and Material shall be as per Signage Legend
C. Mo—unting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws at locations
detailed in Architectural Signage.
2.04 "INTERIOR" ROOM NAME AND NUMBER SIGNS AND OCCUPANCY
CAPACITY:
A. Separate signs for room name room mum
ber, or shall be in accordance with the Signage Legend. room canaciry reuwrPd _ Sizes
B. Color shall be as per Signage Legend.
C. Material shall be 1 /8 " thick plastic, or 1 /8 " thick etched zinc, with raised symbol for
identification by blind.
D. Mounting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws or clear silicone`
at locations detailed in Architectural Signage Legend.
1 2 .05 MONUMENT SIGNAGE
i
A. When depicted on the plans, provide individually mounted letters . Letters as
manufactured by the Southwell Company. Letters to be height as scheduled and in
Garamond H444 style in bronze Duranodic Aluminum. Flush mounted letters .
2.06 REGULATORY SIGNAGE
A. Provide standard graphic and descriptive signage at all elevator lobbies stipulating
"In Case of Fire Use Stairs".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer' s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Mount standard Signs on middle of doors at 48 " above the finish floor.
10440-3
C . Mount A.D .A. Compliant Signs adjacent to door openings, at the latch side, with
the center of the sign at 60" above the finish floor. Where there is no wall space to -\
the latch side of the door, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall .
SIGN
SIGN TYPE "A" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 8 " long or 12" long, square corner 390S
Series with molded plastic frames, (interior only) , White background with 2 " high Jade SC-523
Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for blind. Note :
Utilize 1 '/2" high letters for longer room descriptions to insure that the description will fit on a 12"
long sign.
SIGN TYPE "B" : As manufactured by ASI, 10" high x 20" long, Sign Etch-2, 3 /8 " aluminum
base metal with etched letters. Radiused corner 390R Series design (exterior onlCase Helvetica
background with 5" high paint filled text, Jade SC-523 Letters/Numbers in Upper
Medium Italic, with raised symbols for the blind .
SIGN TYPE " C" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, 390R Series,(interior and
exterior rated), with radiused comers, White background withS schedule,5 Unisex ymbois i symbols for
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, p
blind .
square corner 390S Series
SIGN TYPE "D " : As manufactured by ASWhite
and 12" long,letters n UpperCaseHelvetica Medium.
(interior only), Red background with 1 " high �
I.
SIGN TYPE "E" : As manufactured by ASI, Closed-Circuit TV Door (In Use) Sign: Three (3) SL
Series SLO 66 with Helvetica Regular Lettering. First letter capitalized, remaining letter to be
lower case. Install at location determined by the Architect.
SIGN TYPE "F" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 12" long, Sign Etch- 1 , zinc base metal with
etched letters. Match square corner 3905 Series design (exterior only), Jade SC-523 background
with 1 '/z" high White Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised
symbols for blind .
SIGN TYPE " G" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, - Series, (interior and
exterior rated) , with radiused corners . White background with S- 1 & S-2 2 Symbols in black, and
S
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, per schedule, with raised symbols for
blind.
SIGN TYPE "H" : As manufactured by ASI, 8 " high X 36 " long X 1 /2 " thick, 323BE Series with
beveled edges, aluminum frame . Jade SC-523 background with 5 " high letters/numbers in Upper
Case Helvetica Bold Italic. Exteri_ ur rated•provide Color 1 of letteis/ X hers shall
1 /2" hit . panel.
Where two lines of letters are required, p _
"J" . As manufactured by Wro Signscape, or equal, 8 " X 8" , tact
with
SIGN TYPE i I e sty e, n
ejected molded frames with square corners . Color of sign is red background with lettering.
Signage to read " In case of Fire use Stairs" . 10440-4
2 . Install new window frames in locations shown on drawings . Thoroughly
clean and prime prior to installation.
3 Prior to applying finish paint, areas where prime coat has been damaged
shall have any rust removed, sanded smooth and touched up with same
primer as applied at shop.
4 . Finish paint doors and frames as indicated in Section 09900 PAINTING , in
colors as called out on the Interior Design Plans or Painting Schedule.
B . Deliver the work, ready to set up and erect in place as rapidly as the general
construction work permits . Set work in place in accordance with approved setting
drawings, in plumb and level positions, strongly secured against displacement and
with built-in anchors. In masonry construction, set frames in advance of masonry
work.
C . Fastening :
Secure each frame floor clip to concrete floor with two 3/8 " diameter cadmium
plated bolts set in drilled tamp-ins or self-drilling concrete anchors . Install jamb
anchors as called for in 2/02, B . 3 . NOTE : Do not fill any frames with mortar unless
specifically called out on the plans.
D. Bracing :
Brace frame jambs and heads receiving poured concrete adequately to resist
deflection : brace frames in masonry walls and partitions adequately so the walls and
Partitions may be erected against same.
fit
E . Install doors after masonry work and plastering have been completed and accurately
fit and adjust doors to work properly. Application finish hardware and door
installation is specified in Division.
3 . 02 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces of doors and frames by the
procedure recommended by the Door Manufacturer.
B . Clean up all rubbish and debris caused by this work and remove from the site.
Leave areas surrounding openings in a broom-clean condition .
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08100-7
C . Mount A.D .A. Compliant Signs adjacent to door openings, at the latch side, with
the center of the sign at 60" above the finish floor. Where there is no wall space to -\
the latch side of the door, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall .
SIGN
SIGN TYPE "A" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 8 " long or 12" long, square corner 390S
Series with molded plastic frames, (interior only) , White background with 2 " high Jade SC-523
Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for blind. Note :
Utilize 1 '/2" high letters for longer room descriptions to insure that the description will fit on a 12"
long sign.
SIGN TYPE "B" : As manufactured by ASI, 10" high x 20" long, Sign Etch-2, 3 /8 " aluminum
base metal with etched letters. Radiused corner 390R Series design (exterior onlCase Helvetica
background with 5" high paint filled text, Jade SC-523 Letters/Numbers in Upper
Medium Italic, with raised symbols for the blind .
SIGN TYPE " C" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, 390R Series,(interior and
exterior rated), with radiused comers, White background withS schedule,5 Unisex ymbois i symbols for
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, p
blind .
square corner 390S Series
SIGN TYPE "D " : As manufactured by ASWhite
and 12" long,letters n UpperCaseHelvetica Medium.
(interior only), Red background with 1 " high �
I.
SIGN TYPE "E" : As manufactured by ASI, Closed-Circuit TV Door (In Use) Sign: Three (3) SL
Series SLO 66 with Helvetica Regular Lettering. First letter capitalized, remaining letter to be
lower case. Install at location determined by the Architect.
SIGN TYPE "F" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 12" long, Sign Etch- 1 , zinc base metal with
etched letters. Match square corner 3905 Series design (exterior only), Jade SC-523 background
with 1 '/z" high White Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised
symbols for blind .
SIGN TYPE " G" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, - Series, (interior and
exterior rated) , with radiused corners . White background with S- 1 & S-2 2 Symbols in black, and
S
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, per schedule, with raised symbols for
blind.
SIGN TYPE "H" : As manufactured by ASI, 8 " high X 36 " long X 1 /2 " thick, 323BE Series with
beveled edges, aluminum frame . Jade SC-523 background with 5 " high letters/numbers in Upper
Case Helvetica Bold Italic. Exteri_ ur rated•provide Color 1 of letteis/ X hers shall
1 /2" hit . panel.
Where two lines of letters are required, p _
"J" . As manufactured by Wro Signscape, or equal, 8 " X 8" , tact
with
SIGN TYPE i I e sty e, n
ejected molded frames with square corners . Color of sign is red background with lettering.
Signage to read " In case of Fire use Stairs" . 10440-4
SPECIALTY SIGN SCHEDULE
LOCATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS •
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex
COUNT LOCATION (Three separate buildings in complex)
Administration Buildin
(14) Item # 1
Sign type "A." /STORAGE, MEETING ROOM, MEETING ROOM,
CONFERENCE, OFFICE #19 OFFICE #2 , OFFICE #31
ADMINISTRATION, FILE STORAGE, MECHANICAL RM., MEN,
WOMEN, SHOWER, SHOWER. Secure to the wall at the latch side of the
appropriate door.
(3) Item #2
Sign type "D " / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted'
extinguisher as located on the plans .
i
(4 ) Item 43
Sign type "G" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the
wall at the latch side of the two doors that access the MEN &
WOMEN vestibules and toilet rooms . Mount them side by side below the
room description.
( 1 ) Item 44
Sign type "F" / ELECTRIC / PHONE RM.- located on the wall at
the latch side of the door that accesses the room.
Storage Bay
NO SIGNAGE REQUIRED AT THIS BUILDING.
Maintenance Building
( 1 ) Item # I
Sign type "A" /ELECTRICAL RM. Secure to the wall at the latch side of
- - .-- the appropriate door.
10440-5
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST .PAGE - 2
STORAGE 'BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HA HAGER
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GREY GREY
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading
2 16
3 - 17
4 14
5 14
6 14
7 14
8 14
9 14
n
SPECIALTY SIGN SCHEDULE
LOCATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS •
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex
COUNT LOCATION (Three separate buildings in complex)
Administration Buildin
(14) Item # 1
Sign type "A." /STORAGE, MEETING ROOM, MEETING ROOM,
CONFERENCE, OFFICE #19 OFFICE #2 , OFFICE #31
ADMINISTRATION, FILE STORAGE, MECHANICAL RM., MEN,
WOMEN, SHOWER, SHOWER. Secure to the wall at the latch side of the
appropriate door.
(3) Item #2
Sign type "D " / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted'
extinguisher as located on the plans .
i
(4 ) Item 43
Sign type "G" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the
wall at the latch side of the two doors that access the MEN &
WOMEN vestibules and toilet rooms . Mount them side by side below the
room description.
( 1 ) Item 44
Sign type "F" / ELECTRIC / PHONE RM.- located on the wall at
the latch side of the door that accesses the room.
Storage Bay
NO SIGNAGE REQUIRED AT THIS BUILDING.
Maintenance Building
( 1 ) Item # I
Sign type "A" /ELECTRICAL RM. Secure to the wall at the latch side of
- - .-- the appropriate door.
10440-5
(6) Item 42
Sign type "D" / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted / 1
extinguishers as located on the plans .
(2) Item 43
Sign type "C" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the wall at
the latch side of the doors that accesses the UNISEX restrooms .
Mount them side by side .
(I2) Item #4
Sign type "F" / BAY 41 , BAY #1 , BAY #2 , BAY #2, BAY 93 , BAY 437
BAY #43 BAY 44, BAY #55 BAY #5 , BAY #61 BAY #6 - located on the
wall at the latch side of the door that accesses each storage bay on the west
elevation AND at the left side of each overhead door on the east elevation.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
10440-6
SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENE
RAL
1 . 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Hollow Metal Section 08100
B . Finish Hardware
D. Finish Carpentry Section 08700
E. Painting
Section 06200
Section 09900
1 . 02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Products of the following manufacturers or equal are acceptable :
A . Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. (Formerly Weyerhaeuser Company)
B . Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division
C. Ipik Door Co ., Inc.
D. VT Industries, Inc. , Holstein, Iowa
E. Southwood Door, A Division of OSHKOSH
1 . 03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
B . Shop D� Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door,
elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, and other pertinent data.
C. Specific Product Warranty- Submit written agreement on door manufacturer' s standard
form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or which show telegraphing of
core construction below in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of
NWMA and AWI.
1 . 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A . Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration. Comply with the "On-Site Care" recommendations of NWMA pamphlet
"Care and Finishing of Wood Doors" and with manufacturer's instructions, and as
otherwise indicated.
B . Packer doors at factory prior to shipping using manufacturer' s standard method.
08200- 1
(6) Item 42
Sign type "D" / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted / 1
extinguishers as located on the plans .
(2) Item 43
Sign type "C" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the wall at
the latch side of the doors that accesses the UNISEX restrooms .
Mount them side by side .
(I2) Item #4
Sign type "F" / BAY 41 , BAY #1 , BAY #2 , BAY #2, BAY 93 , BAY 437
BAY #43 BAY 44, BAY #55 BAY #5 , BAY #61 BAY #6 - located on the
wall at the latch side of the door that accesses each storage bay on the west
elevation AND at the left side of each overhead door on the east elevation.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
10440-6
SECTION 10520 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Definition: "Portable fire extinguishers" includes units which can be hand-carried
as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing
systems, unless othen�ise indicated .
B . Extent of fire extinguishers is indicated on drawings with a FE designation.
C. Accessories include : Mounting brackets.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide portable fire extinguishers and accessories by one manufacturer of
contractors choice, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
B . Portable Fire Extinguisher Standard: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which
comply with applicable UL standard and are labeled ny UL . All extinguishers shall
be installed and maintained in accordance with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers . " Install only fully charged fire extinguishers.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data, detail drawings, and
installation instructions for each portable fire extinguisher and/or recessed cabinet
for the project.
B . Schedule : Submit schedule indicating types, quanities, sizes and installation
locations for each portable fire extinguisher and/or cabinet for the project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER' S :
A• Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide extinguishers and
— cabinets.
J.L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen' s Manufacturing Co.
Modern Metal Products by Muckle 10520-1
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 3
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 6 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 5 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 6 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 4 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 7 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 8 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 2 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 9 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 1 90 - RHR
TYPE Dl 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
18 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
6 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 415 , 617 , j
8 , 9 )
6 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
6 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
6 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV l X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
6 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
6 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3101, SF
24 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
6 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE Y17
6 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
6 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
i
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .01 SOLID CORE DOORS (Locations as called out on the Door Schedules)
A . 20 minute at interior locations and offices as indicated on plans . Provide 1 hour label
at interior 1 hour rated fire wall assemblies and 1 '/2 hour label at 2 hour rated wall
assemblies as per the Life Safety Plans or Building Plans .
B . Standard: Meet or exceed NWMA Industry Standard I. S . 1 -78 Series and Architectural
woodwork Institute Type SLC and FD .
C. Veneer : stain grade birch per door schedule .
D . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
E . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
F . Core: Staved hardwood lumber blocks bonded under pressure with 100% glue
coverage; mineral core at label doors .
G . Glue : Type I (face assembly) and type II (core assembly) .
H. Lights and Louvers: Cut to size as indicated on drawings . Provide type 2 stops for
lights . —'
J . Guarantee: 10 years , interior use only.
2 . 02 HOLLOW CORE DOORS (Located as called out on the door schedules)
A . Veneer: stain grade birch per door schedule .
B . Edge Band: Per manufacturers procedures .
C . Crossbands : Per manufacturers procedures .
D . Glue : Type I (face assembly)
E. Guarantee: 10 years, interior use only.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 I__NSPECTION
A. Veri that door frames are of type required for the door and are installed as required
for proper installation of doors .
08200-2
SECTION 10520 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Definition: "Portable fire extinguishers" includes units which can be hand-carried
as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing
systems, unless othen�ise indicated .
B . Extent of fire extinguishers is indicated on drawings with a FE designation.
C. Accessories include : Mounting brackets.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide portable fire extinguishers and accessories by one manufacturer of
contractors choice, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
B . Portable Fire Extinguisher Standard: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which
comply with applicable UL standard and are labeled ny UL . All extinguishers shall
be installed and maintained in accordance with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers . " Install only fully charged fire extinguishers.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data, detail drawings, and
installation instructions for each portable fire extinguisher and/or recessed cabinet
for the project.
B . Schedule : Submit schedule indicating types, quanities, sizes and installation
locations for each portable fire extinguisher and/or cabinet for the project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER' S :
A• Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide extinguishers and
— cabinets.
J.L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen' s Manufacturing Co.
Modern Metal Products by Muckle 10520-1
Potter-Roemer, Inc .
2 .02 MATERIALS - GENERAL :
Provide the following types of extinguishers in accordance with area/occupancy uses:
In General Office Spaces Fire Extinguishers : Multi-purpose dry chemical type (2A- I OBC-
FE) : UL rated 2-A: 10 :B :C , 5 lb . Nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for class A,
Class B , and Class C fires . Equal to J .L. Industries Cosmic 5E.
In Kitchen/Breakroom/Em to ee Lounge Spaces/ Electrical Rooms : Liquid carbon
dioxide, UL rated, 10 Ib nominal capacity, in enamled steel container for class B, and Class
C fires only . Equal to J .L. Industries Sentinal 10 .
In Electronic Equipment/Computer Room : Halotron 1 , or Halonite, clean agent EPA
approved, portable fire extinguisher. Wall bracket mounted, as manufactured by Larsen ' s
Manufacturing Company. Discharges as a liquid and quickly evaporates leaving no residue
to clean-up . Class A,B,C fires , 10 pound nominal capacity.
2 .03 MOUNTING BRACKETS :
Provide manufacturer' s standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of
extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in
manufacturer' s standard plated finish.
Provide a recessed or semi-recessed cabinet, clear anodized aluminum, clear bubble, no
letters on the bubble. NOTE : All semi-recessed cabinets must meet ADA guidelines for
projections into hallways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if
not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and/or bracket-mounted fire
extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION :
Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with a permanently affixed sign with a red
background and white letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface .
Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect or-scheduled in Section 10440 -
Specialty Signs.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
10520-2
B . Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors .
C. Dono_ t� labels from rated doors or cover with paint .
3 .02INSTALLATION
A. Fitting and machinin :
L Fit doors for width by planing; for height by sawing.
a. . '/ " from bottom (3/16 over threshold, saddle or carpet)
b . 1 /8 " maximum frame top and sides .
c. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1 /8 " to 1 /2 " .
2 . Machine doors for hardware.
3 . Cut light and louver openings in door not exceeding maximum 40% of height and 5 "
from door edge.
4 . Seal all job site cut surfaces with two coats of paint or polyurethane before final
hanging.
B . Installation of Doors : Install in accordance with requirements of NWMA Standard
Door Guarantee, and manufacturer' s instructions .
} C . Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with
requirements of NFPA No. 80.
D. Finishing - Door shall be field painted or polyurethaned, per Interior Finish Schedule
and in accordance with Section 09900, PAINTING .
3 . 03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Re lace or re-hang doors which are hingebound and do not swing or operate freely.
B. Replace doors damaged during the construction period or that show glue spots.
C. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
D. Replace doors that are warped and that pull away from door stops.
E. Adjust all pocket doors so that door faces do not rub jambs or frames, and the doors
hang plumb in the openings . All pocket doors shall utilize 5- 1 /2 " frames and have steel
frame stiffeners to prevent frame distortion.
* * *END OF SECTION** *
08200-3
Potter-Roemer, Inc .
2 .02 MATERIALS - GENERAL :
Provide the following types of extinguishers in accordance with area/occupancy uses:
In General Office Spaces Fire Extinguishers : Multi-purpose dry chemical type (2A- I OBC-
FE) : UL rated 2-A: 10 :B :C , 5 lb . Nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for class A,
Class B , and Class C fires . Equal to J .L. Industries Cosmic 5E.
In Kitchen/Breakroom/Em to ee Lounge Spaces/ Electrical Rooms : Liquid carbon
dioxide, UL rated, 10 Ib nominal capacity, in enamled steel container for class B, and Class
C fires only . Equal to J .L. Industries Sentinal 10 .
In Electronic Equipment/Computer Room : Halotron 1 , or Halonite, clean agent EPA
approved, portable fire extinguisher. Wall bracket mounted, as manufactured by Larsen ' s
Manufacturing Company. Discharges as a liquid and quickly evaporates leaving no residue
to clean-up . Class A,B,C fires , 10 pound nominal capacity.
2 .03 MOUNTING BRACKETS :
Provide manufacturer' s standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of
extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in
manufacturer' s standard plated finish.
Provide a recessed or semi-recessed cabinet, clear anodized aluminum, clear bubble, no
letters on the bubble. NOTE : All semi-recessed cabinets must meet ADA guidelines for
projections into hallways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if
not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and/or bracket-mounted fire
extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION :
Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with a permanently affixed sign with a red
background and white letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface .
Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect or-scheduled in Section 10440 -
Specialty Signs.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
10520-2
SECTION 10531 - ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification section, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extend of aluminum walkway covers is indicated on drawings and provisions of
this section.
B . Types of work specified in this section include:
Extruded aluminum fascia systems.
Sheet aluminum fascia systems.
Fascia panel systems.
Metal fascia panel support systems.
Aluminum copings
Aluminum deck .
Aluminum beams & tubing.
j Aluminum fascia panels.
Sheet plates & angles.
C . Sheet metal and flashings not part of aluminum walkway covers are specified in
another Division-7 section.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE : _
A. Industry Standards : Provide products which comply with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ", except as otherwise indicated.
B . Codes: Comply with all local codes and ordinances and latest edition of Standard
Building Code. The wind design for the Aluminum Walkway Covers shall be for a
minimum 100 mph wind, (x 1 . 10 importance factor), per ASCE 7-93 .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation
instructions and general recommendations. Include data substantiating that
materials and performance comply with requirements, and that structure will
- - - -support all-imposed loads-including- chilled water-piping:------ - -- - -
10531 -1
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 4
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading # 16
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 7 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 8 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH FIM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ! 0 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APL
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF .
i
I
i
SECTION 10531 - ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification section, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extend of aluminum walkway covers is indicated on drawings and provisions of
this section.
B . Types of work specified in this section include:
Extruded aluminum fascia systems.
Sheet aluminum fascia systems.
Fascia panel systems.
Metal fascia panel support systems.
Aluminum copings
Aluminum deck .
Aluminum beams & tubing.
j Aluminum fascia panels.
Sheet plates & angles.
C . Sheet metal and flashings not part of aluminum walkway covers are specified in
another Division-7 section.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE : _
A. Industry Standards : Provide products which comply with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ", except as otherwise indicated.
B . Codes: Comply with all local codes and ordinances and latest edition of Standard
Building Code. The wind design for the Aluminum Walkway Covers shall be for a
minimum 100 mph wind, (x 1 . 10 importance factor), per ASCE 7-93 .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation
instructions and general recommendations. Include data substantiating that
materials and performance comply with requirements, and that structure will
- - - -support all-imposed loads-including- chilled water-piping:------ - -- - -
10531 -1
B . Submit for record purposes, signed and sealed computations prepared by an
engineer licensed in the State of Florida showing conformance to the applicable
codes .
C . Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout, joining, profiles,
accessories, anchorages, drainage details, flashing connections and relationship to
supporting structure and to joining roof and wall construction .
D . Indicate, in Section, all lighting fixtures and mechanical and electrical lines run in
walkway soffit chase to assure proper space allotment.
E. Samples : For verification purposes submit completely finished samples for each
component.
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Coordinate work of this section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation to ensure best possible weather resistance, drainage and protection of
materials and finishes against damage.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS :
Subject to compliance with specified requirements and with details shown on drawings, J
provide aluminum walkway covers manufactured by one of the following :
Perfection Metals
Alumax Building Specialties Division
Dittmer Architectural Aluminum
Maple Industries
E.L. Burns Company
Custom Architectural Metals, Orlando
Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc.
AAPCO Protective Covers
2.02 MATERIALS :
A. Aluminum Materials:
l . Aluminum Extrusions : Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated but
not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221
- for- 6063 -T6 .
2 . Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use
intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated.
1-2
SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products used in the work of this section shall be
produced by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the fabrication of similar products
and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect, such as
those manufacturers listed above.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work included : Provide and install all aluminum sectional doors as scheduled and
detailed in the construction documents and as specified herein. Related work :
Preparation of opening, galvanized steel jambs, stru
work, electrical wiring, glazing de ctural work, miscellaneous iron
specified) and custom painting are in the scope
of work of other divisions or trades.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
A. All doors specified under this Section shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors shall be Aluminum or Galvanized Steel Sectional Overhead type as
manufactured by one of the following companies :
I • Clopay Building Products Company.
2 • Fimbel Door Corporation
3 • ideal Garage Doors
4. Amarr Garage Doors
5 • Arm-R-Lite
6 • Raynor
7. Wayne Dalton
8 . Overhead Door Corporation
9 . Windsor Door
2.02 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS
A. Provide each door as one complete unit including sections, brackets, tracks,
insulation, finish, counterbalance mechanisms and hardware to suit opening with
available headroom. All door sections shall be 2 " thick and shall be constructed of
aluminum extrusions produced from 6063 -T6 alloy or 18 gauge galvanized steel .
Doors to have six (6) or seven (7) sections.
J
08360- 1
B . Submit for record purposes, signed and sealed computations prepared by an
engineer licensed in the State of Florida showing conformance to the applicable
codes .
C . Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout, joining, profiles,
accessories, anchorages, drainage details, flashing connections and relationship to
supporting structure and to joining roof and wall construction .
D . Indicate, in Section, all lighting fixtures and mechanical and electrical lines run in
walkway soffit chase to assure proper space allotment.
E. Samples : For verification purposes submit completely finished samples for each
component.
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Coordinate work of this section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation to ensure best possible weather resistance, drainage and protection of
materials and finishes against damage.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS :
Subject to compliance with specified requirements and with details shown on drawings, J
provide aluminum walkway covers manufactured by one of the following :
Perfection Metals
Alumax Building Specialties Division
Dittmer Architectural Aluminum
Maple Industries
E.L. Burns Company
Custom Architectural Metals, Orlando
Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc.
AAPCO Protective Covers
2.02 MATERIALS :
A. Aluminum Materials:
l . Aluminum Extrusions : Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated but
not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221
- for- 6063 -T6 .
2 . Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use
intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated.
1-2
3 . Extruded Aluminum Deck: 3 .25 " high x 5 " wide rectangular profile - 6063
alloy - . 060 gage.
B . Miscellaneous Materials :
1 Exposed Fasteners : Stainless steel, non-magnetic, of type and size standard
with manufacturer for product and application indicated. Match finish of
exposed heads and material being fastened.
2. Concealed Fasteners : Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive
metal as recommended by manufacturer.
3 . Mastic Sealant : Polyisobutylene: non-hardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
ne unigratirg sealant.
2 .03 FABRICATION :
A . Aluminum Walkway Covers to be fabricated and installed as detailed on the
drawings including all necessary accessories.
B . Aluminum Finishes :
General : Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual " for finish designation
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. For components
which are assembles or welded in factory, apply finish after fabrication is
completed .
Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Baked Enamel Finish : Apply baked enamel finish in strict compliance with paint
manufacturer' s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating and painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General : Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with installation of column, flashing, and we
construction; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B . ISOLATION: Where metal surfaces of units are installed in contract with or
corrosive substrates, apply bituminous coating on coneealed-metal surfaces, or
provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer.
J
10531 -3
09 MAR 09 JOBV IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 5
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
j
i
Heading # 17
1 SGL DOOR 3 STORAGE BAY 6 TO ELECTRIC ROOM 9 90 - RH
TYPE Dl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
1 LOCKSET L9080T 06A 50 - 231 RH 630 SC L4
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
B . Rails and stiles shall have .060" minimum wall thickness . Meeting rails shall have
offset interlocking joints to provide a weathertight closure and assure alignment the
full width of each section. Stiles and rails shall be miter-cut and securely joined .
Minimum stile and rail dimensions shall be 6" for vertical end stiles and 6" for top
and bottom rails . Center stiles at 2" minimum and meeting rails at 2 1 /8 "
minimum . Panels shall be .040" aluminum or galvanized sheet set in place by
inside snap-in type glazing bead.
2 .03 WEATHER SEAL
A. Bottom door section shall have continuous flexible tubular vinyl weatherseal
applied at factory to extruded aluminum retainer.
2 .04 FINISH
A. All extrusion and panel faces shall be powder coated with Tiger Drylac Powder
Coating, Color # RAL 9016 or it RAL 9010 in a smooth semi-gloss surface finish .
Coating shall be Series 19 , six (6) year coating. Alternate finish manufacturers
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to acceptance, bid, application
of finish and installation of doors. Coating companies certification of applied
product shall accompany the doors to the jobsite .
2.05 GLAZING
A. (When Specified) . Glass lite sizes depend on door size, stile and rail arrangements,
and shall be substituted for aluminum panels as directed by Architect. Openings
shall accommade-iodate standard 3/ 16" Double Strength B-g (DSB) g ( /
2 .06 COUNTERBALANCE
A. Counterbalance shall be oil-tempered helical-wound, torsion springs mounted on a
crossheader shaft . Springs shall be engineered for industrial application and shall
comply with durability properties specified under National Association of Garage
Door Manufacturer' s specification 102- 1988 . Springs installed shall be the Extra
High Cycle type. Stainless steel aircraft-type lift cables shall have a minimum
safety factor of 7 to 1 .
2 .07 TRACK
A. Galvanized steel track shall be 3 " . Steel brackets or continuous steel angles shall e
used for installing tracks on P .T. wood jambs . Vertical track shall be inclined
through the use of adjustable brackets to assure weathertight closure
d angles as
Horizontal track shall be reinforced with factory-app galvanized
required .
2.08 HARDWARE
A. All roller brackets and hinges shall be 14 gauge heavy-duty commercial grade
galvanized steel . All rollers shall have ball bearings with case-hardened steel races .
Lock shall be end stile friction type for inside security locking .
08360-2
3 . Extruded Aluminum Deck: 3 .25 " high x 5 " wide rectangular profile - 6063
alloy - . 060 gage.
B . Miscellaneous Materials :
1 Exposed Fasteners : Stainless steel, non-magnetic, of type and size standard
with manufacturer for product and application indicated. Match finish of
exposed heads and material being fastened.
2. Concealed Fasteners : Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive
metal as recommended by manufacturer.
3 . Mastic Sealant : Polyisobutylene: non-hardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
ne unigratirg sealant.
2 .03 FABRICATION :
A . Aluminum Walkway Covers to be fabricated and installed as detailed on the
drawings including all necessary accessories.
B . Aluminum Finishes :
General : Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual " for finish designation
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. For components
which are assembles or welded in factory, apply finish after fabrication is
completed .
Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Baked Enamel Finish : Apply baked enamel finish in strict compliance with paint
manufacturer' s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating and painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General : Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with installation of column, flashing, and we
construction; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B . ISOLATION: Where metal surfaces of units are installed in contract with or
corrosive substrates, apply bituminous coating on coneealed-metal surfaces, or
provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer.
J
10531 -3
3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A . Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
Touch-up damages metal coatings .
B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure that work of this
section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
l
---
__ 10531- `�
2.09 WIND-LOAD
A. Doors shall be manufactured to withstand 55# per square foot ( 140 mph wind
speed) . Provide engineered horizontal aluminum or galvanized angle at each pair
stainless
horizontal meeting rails to control deflection. Angles to be secured with
stainless steel screws.
2. 10 OPERATION
A. Doors shall be electrically operated with sealed motors . Push button operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. 01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the sectional overhead doors shall be by the manufacturer ' s qualified
and authorized distributor.
* * *END OF SECTION * * %
08360-3
3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A . Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
Touch-up damages metal coatings .
B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure that work of this
section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
l
---
__ 10531- `�
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division - 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent and location of each types of toilet accessory is shown on drawings.
B . Types of toilet accessories required include the following :
Paper towel dispensers
Toilet tissue dispensers
Grab bars
Soap dispensers
Mirrors
Shower Rods
Diaper Changing Stations
C . Some type of toilet accessories are included as part of toilet partitions elsewhere in
Division 10 .
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; provide PT wood backing as required, coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B . Accessory Locations : Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C . Manufacturer: Provide each type of toilet accessory required as manufactured by
one of the following :
1 . American Specialties Inc.
2 . Bradley Corporation
3 . Hallmark - Nutone
4 . Parker Scovill
5 . Watrous, Inc.
6 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
7. Gamco
. Franklin Brass
9. A & J Washroom Accessories
10. San Jamar Dispensers
10800-1
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PARTI - GENERAL
i
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Definition: "glass includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass .
"Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass . Types of work
in this section include glass and glazing for:
Window units sidelites, transoms
Window wall
Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed".
B . Packaged mirror units are specified as "accessories" in section 10800 .
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/pattem of glass :
ASG Industries . Inc.
1 Guardian Industries Corporation
Ford Glass Company
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company
PPG Industries, Inc .
Visteon
B . Certificate: Submit certificates from respective-1nanufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements .
C . Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Assoc.
(FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards .
D . InstallerQualifications - Installation contractor specializing in glazing, with a minimum
of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and also being an approved installer
for the glazing product supplier.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 GLASS PRODUCTS
Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass : Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3
i (glazing select), fully tempered. Other glass products for impact resistance are called out
08800- 1
�: �
�;
C
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division - 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent and location of each types of toilet accessory is shown on drawings.
B . Types of toilet accessories required include the following :
Paper towel dispensers
Toilet tissue dispensers
Grab bars
Soap dispensers
Mirrors
Shower Rods
Diaper Changing Stations
C . Some type of toilet accessories are included as part of toilet partitions elsewhere in
Division 10 .
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; provide PT wood backing as required, coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B . Accessory Locations : Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C . Manufacturer: Provide each type of toilet accessory required as manufactured by
one of the following :
1 . American Specialties Inc.
2 . Bradley Corporation
3 . Hallmark - Nutone
4 . Parker Scovill
5 . Watrous, Inc.
6 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
7. Gamco
. Franklin Brass
9. A & J Washroom Accessories
10. San Jamar Dispensers
10800-1
11 . Brocar
12 . Koala 1
13 . World Dryer
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data and installation instructions for
each toilet accessory.
B . Setting Drawings : Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions
for installation of anchorage devices and cut out requirements in other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS :
A. Stainless Steel : AISI Type 3021304, with satin No . 4 finish, 22 gage minimum,
unless otherwise indicated.
B . Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A 153 , hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
C . Fasteners : Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed .
2.02 FABRICATION :
A . General : Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not
permitted, except where otherwise indicated . Wherever locks are required for a
particular type of toilet accessory , provide same keying throughout project. Furnish
two keys for each lock.
B . Surfaced-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or
access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 1 ''/z" pin hinges of
same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate
units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access
panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is
fully concealed when unit is closed.
2.03 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS :
-
A. General Toilet Rooms:_ _ Toilet Tissue Dispenser _
- - BOBRICK_B _-. 2740 .
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings (non-oceanfront) : BOBRICK B-2892
C. Public Park Restroom Buildings (oceanfront) : SAN JAMAR St1NR4000TBK
10800-2
SECTION 08400 - ENTRANCE STOREFRONT DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. All entrances stem materials are to be provided by one manufacturer. Entrances
shall be wide OR medium stile doors as detailed on the architectural drawings and
as manufactured to the design and specifications of Arch Aluminum & Glass Co .
All adjacent framing, sidelites and fixed lites shall be of system shown, or approved
equal, and shall be impact rated per FBC 2001 and ASCE7- 98 .
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE : See Door Schedule for Sizes and manufacturers
A . Wide Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with 5 "
stiled and 5 " top rail and 7- 1 /2 " bottom rail . COrner
extruded anti -twist guides with mortisejoinery s ll wialldth
have reinf icing plates,
tension rods . l ry and full width 3/8 ' plated steel
B . Medium Stile doors, when scheduled, shall be composed of tubular extrusions with
3 - 1 /2 " stiles and a 3 - 1 /2 " top rail and 5 bottom rail .
plates, extruded anti twist guides with mortise Corners shall have reinforcing
steel tension rods . joinery and full width 3 /8 " plated
C• Glazing beads shall be an integral sash, non removal from the exterior with vinyl
bulb inserts for g• g g
/ r1' glazing. Glazing beads for insulated lass are available.
Minimum bite on tempered glass shall be 1 /2 " in door leafs and fixed lite transoms .
D. All aluminum components shall be of 6063 alloy with T-5 temper. All screws shall
be of plated steel . All steel in contact with aluminum shall be plated or painted .
PART =HARDWARE
A. Arch ' s standard hardware shall consist of AR- 800 pull handles and H-2 push bars
with 1 - 1 /2 pair Hager #23439, 4- 1 /2 " brass butt hinges or offset cast aluminum
Pivot hinges international #OP- 160 at each end and intermediate cast aluminum
hinges 41P- 1900 at midspan of each leaf.
B . Locks: two point concealed vertical rod panic hardware in door pairs .
C . Please be advised that the door manufacturer should provide all entrance hardware.
Arch can provide hardware from virtually all hardware manufacturers . In the event
that hardware is to be provided by others, such hardware must be received by Arch
before fabrication can begin.
08400-1
on the drawings and may include, but are not limited to, safety laminate heat strengthed
glass with an .090 innerliner . Thicknesses of laminated glass vary from 3/8 inch to 9/ 16
inch. Frames to receive the glass vary to achieve various levels of impact resistance per ll
local and state codes. Refer to the drawings for a description of each glazed opening. l
2 . 02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS
A . General : provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors, or black if no
color is os selected. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for selection of
hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of
installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials, and
variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the
installation.
B . 2-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant (2Ps-GS) : Elastomeric polysulfide sealant
complying with FS TTS-227 , Class A, Type 2 ; specially compounded and tested to
show a minimum of 20 years resistance to deterioration in normal glazing applications.
Use for exterior applications.
C . Acrylic Emulsion Glazing Sealant (AcEm-GS) : Emulsion of acrylic, with or without
latex rubber modification; compounded specifically for glazing; non-hardening, non-
staining, and non-bleeding. Use for interior applications.
2 .03 GLAZING GASKETS
A . Polvvinvl Chloride Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the
profile and hardness shown, or as required for watertight construction; comply with
ASTM D 2287 .
B . Cellular Neoprene Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded/molded, closed-cell ,
integral-skinned neoprene of profile required to maintain watertight seal ; comply with
ASTM C509, Type II, black.
C . Vinvl Foam Glazing Tape (VF-GT) : Closed cell flexible, self-adhesive, non extruding,
polyvinyl chloride foam tape ; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed,
watertight installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel ;
comply with ASTM C 1667 .
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant of gasket manufacturer.
B . Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70-90 durometer hardness , with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
C. Spacers: Neoprene of EPDM, 40- 50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility
0-2
with sealants used.
11 . Brocar
12 . Koala 1
13 . World Dryer
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data and installation instructions for
each toilet accessory.
B . Setting Drawings : Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions
for installation of anchorage devices and cut out requirements in other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS :
A. Stainless Steel : AISI Type 3021304, with satin No . 4 finish, 22 gage minimum,
unless otherwise indicated.
B . Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A 153 , hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
C . Fasteners : Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed .
2.02 FABRICATION :
A . General : Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not
permitted, except where otherwise indicated . Wherever locks are required for a
particular type of toilet accessory , provide same keying throughout project. Furnish
two keys for each lock.
B . Surfaced-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or
access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 1 ''/z" pin hinges of
same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate
units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access
panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is
fully concealed when unit is closed.
2.03 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS :
-
A. General Toilet Rooms:_ _ Toilet Tissue Dispenser _
- - BOBRICK_B _-. 2740 .
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings (non-oceanfront) : BOBRICK B-2892
C. Public Park Restroom Buildings (oceanfront) : SAN JAMAR St1NR4000TBK
10800-2
2.04 SURFACE MOUNTED TOWEL DISPENSERS :
BOBRICK B - 262
2.05 GRAB BARS (GR BR) :
Stainless Steel Type: Equal to Bobrick B-6106 x 36 and B - 6106 x 42 .
2. 06 SOAP DISPENSERS :
Bobrick B -4112 or Bradley 6542 Surface Mounted Dispensers capable of dispersing anti -
bacterial soaps.
2. 07 SHOWER RODS :
Bradley Model 9531 Heavy Duty 1 1 /4 " O.D., 18 ga. Satin finish stainless steel .
2.08 MIRRORS :
A. General Toilet Rooms : Bobrick B - 165, 18 " X 30 " mirror. Satin finish stainless steel
frame with 1 /4 " float/plate glass mirror electrolytically copper plated. Mount with
reflecting surface a maximum of 40 inches above finished floor.
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings : Polished Stainless Steel Mirror BOBRICK B
24 " wide X 48 " high. Same mounting height requirement as above. - 1656;.;;
2.09 HEAVY DUTY CLOTHES HOOK
Bobrick B-2116, heavy duty clothes hook with concealed mounting . Withstands 300- 1 b
downward pull . Hook and flange are one piece brass casting with satin nickelplated finish.
Supply 2 X 6 pressure treated wood backing in wall for proper mounting. Flange diameter
is 2 3/4 " and unit projects 3 7/16" from wall .
2. 10 SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS
Bobrick B -239 X 34, 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 13 " high, 8 " deep.
Anti-slip mop holders have spring loaded rubber cam that grips handles 7/8 " to 1 1 /4 "
diameter. Stainless steel hooks.
2. 11 REVERSIBLE FOLDING SHOWER SEAT
Bobrick B -5181 , complying with ADA accessibility standards. Seat is ivory colored solid
field. Frame and moun
phenolic. Reversible for left or right hand installation in the ting
brackets are type 304 stainless steel and feature a self-locking mechanism. Seat measures
33 " wide, projects 22 5/16" from wall. Average mounting height 17 to 20 " from top of
floor to seat.
J
10800-3
D. Compressed Filler (Rod) Ccn-FR) - Closed cell or waterproof jacketed roof stock of
synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible
and resilient, with 5 - 10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as
otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind
loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss
or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
B . Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with
significant edge damage or other imperfections.
C . Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation .
D . Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of
glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with
recommendations of Flat Glass Market Assoc. "Glazing Manual", except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
3 . 02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate . Remove lacquer
from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used .
B . Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3 .03 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in still rabbit, located 1 /4 of glass width from each
comer. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.
B . Provide spacers inside and out, or proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than
50 united inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing.
Provide 1 /8 " minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape used thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern , draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
08800-3
PART5 - FASTENERS - J
A . Typical anchors:
1 . Into 2X wood bucks or wood structure 414 SMS or 1 /4" dia. tapcons with 1 - 1 /2
minimum total embed .
2. Into 1X wood bucks or into masonry 1 /4" dia. Tapcons with 1 - 1 /4" minimum
embed into masonry .
NOTE : All wood bucks provided by the general contractor must sustain the loads
imposed by the glazing system and transfer them to the building structure.
PART_ 6...FINISH
A. All exp_ os faces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Alumimmn sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic o schedule on the
treatment. Color shall be one of the following and p
er plans : AA M12 C22 A42/44
a) Dark Bronze M12 C22 A40
b) Medium Bronze AA
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21 J
AA M12 C22 A44
d) Black
2 . Powder coated material when called out on the door schedule, shall be given an
acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 1000- 1 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 603 . 8 - 85
b) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
3 . The option and color selected for this project is : (IRC Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016-white, with a 6 year warranty).
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
t
08400-2
2.04 SURFACE MOUNTED TOWEL DISPENSERS :
BOBRICK B - 262
2.05 GRAB BARS (GR BR) :
Stainless Steel Type: Equal to Bobrick B-6106 x 36 and B - 6106 x 42 .
2. 06 SOAP DISPENSERS :
Bobrick B -4112 or Bradley 6542 Surface Mounted Dispensers capable of dispersing anti -
bacterial soaps.
2. 07 SHOWER RODS :
Bradley Model 9531 Heavy Duty 1 1 /4 " O.D., 18 ga. Satin finish stainless steel .
2.08 MIRRORS :
A. General Toilet Rooms : Bobrick B - 165, 18 " X 30 " mirror. Satin finish stainless steel
frame with 1 /4 " float/plate glass mirror electrolytically copper plated. Mount with
reflecting surface a maximum of 40 inches above finished floor.
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings : Polished Stainless Steel Mirror BOBRICK B
24 " wide X 48 " high. Same mounting height requirement as above. - 1656;.;;
2.09 HEAVY DUTY CLOTHES HOOK
Bobrick B-2116, heavy duty clothes hook with concealed mounting . Withstands 300- 1 b
downward pull . Hook and flange are one piece brass casting with satin nickelplated finish.
Supply 2 X 6 pressure treated wood backing in wall for proper mounting. Flange diameter
is 2 3/4 " and unit projects 3 7/16" from wall .
2. 10 SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS
Bobrick B -239 X 34, 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 13 " high, 8 " deep.
Anti-slip mop holders have spring loaded rubber cam that grips handles 7/8 " to 1 1 /4 "
diameter. Stainless steel hooks.
2. 11 REVERSIBLE FOLDING SHOWER SEAT
Bobrick B -5181 , complying with ADA accessibility standards. Seat is ivory colored solid
field. Frame and moun
phenolic. Reversible for left or right hand installation in the ting
brackets are type 304 stainless steel and feature a self-locking mechanism. Seat measures
33 " wide, projects 22 5/16" from wall. Average mounting height 17 to 20 " from top of
floor to seat.
J
10800-3
2. 12 DIAPER CHANGING STATION
Bobrick 13-2200 , Brocar Model 100EH, Koala KB 100-00, or World Dryer ABC- 100 ,
colors grey or white. Sizes are 34 . 5 to 35 inches wide, 19 to 20 inches high, and 4 inches
deep . Changing surface mounted at 34" to 38 " above the finished floor. Use
manufacturer' s mounting hardware and comply with their installation requirements to
support a minimum 100 pound load in the open position. Surface mount only, do not recess
unit.
2.13 INSTALLATION :
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners
which are appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of unit. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
2. 14 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly .
B . Relace damaged or defective units .
C . Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings .
* * * END OF SECTION* * *
10800-4
t`
SECTION 08410 - FLUSH GLAZE STOREFRONT WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Store front framing shall be impact rated and detailed on the Architectural drawings
and as manufactured to the design and specifications of one of the following :
Arch Aluminum & Glass Company or Kawneer.
PART 2 - SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Framing System shall have a face dimension of 1 .250 " and a depth of 4- 1 /2 " for
both vertical and horizontal members . (Sections may vary w/manufacturer) All
sections shall be of extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and a TS temper. Glazing Gaskets
shall be of EPDM or pvc extrusions. Assembly screws shall be of plated steel _ Glass
shall have a minimum bite of 5/8 " on the perimeter. Glass type shall be as defined on
the window schedule. All storefront framing and glass assemblies shall be impact
rated .
PART�IMSH
A . All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes. Aluminum
sections shall be coated with one of the following options :
1 . Anodized material : shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide
treatment. Color shall be:
a) Dark Bronze AA M12 C22
b) Medium Bronze A42/44
AA M12 C22 A40
c) Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d) Black AA M12 C22 A44
2 . Powder coated material shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with
one of the following:
a) ARCHKOTE 6000- 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 .2-85
b) TIGER DRYLAC- SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
B . The option and color selected for this project is : (For the I.R.C. Parks Maintenance
Complex RAL 9016 - white, with a 6 year warranty).
PART 4 - ERECTION
A. The Flush Glazed storefronts stem specified shall be installed, in properly prepared
openings, level, plumb and in alignment and consistent with acceptable erection
techniques and practices . Frames shall be secured to the walls/jambs with approved
fasteners at 12 " on center and in accordance with the plan details.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08410- 1
D . Voids and Filler Rods : Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or
installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not. leave voids in sill
charnels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and
type of glass, and complying with manufacturer' s recommendations .
E . Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
F . Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial
"wash" away from glass . Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out
of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets .
G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after
installation, and eliminated stains and discolorations .
H . Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
"walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with
matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured
heel bead .
I . Gasket Glazing : Miter cut and bond ends together at comers where gaskets are used for
channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or
leaks in glazing system.
J . Structural Gasket Glazing : Cut zipper strips slightly long, to ensure tight closure .
Lubricate zipper strip and use special tool to install zipper. Do not lubricate glazing
channel or anchorage rabbet. Comply with details as shown and manufacturer' s
instructions, including possible use of liquid sealants and weep holes .
3 . 03 CURE PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A . Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass . Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass . Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealants for
high early strength and durability.
B . Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, etched, abraded or
damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents
and vandalism.
C . Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project.
Comply with glass product manufacturer' s recommendations for final cleaning. Sub-
contractors performing glass and window cleaning must be fully insured to replace
damaged glass as a direct result of their negligence . The general contractor is
ultimately responsible for replacing all damaged glass . (`
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08800-4
2. 12 DIAPER CHANGING STATION
Bobrick 13-2200 , Brocar Model 100EH, Koala KB 100-00, or World Dryer ABC- 100 ,
colors grey or white. Sizes are 34 . 5 to 35 inches wide, 19 to 20 inches high, and 4 inches
deep . Changing surface mounted at 34" to 38 " above the finished floor. Use
manufacturer' s mounting hardware and comply with their installation requirements to
support a minimum 100 pound load in the open position. Surface mount only, do not recess
unit.
2.13 INSTALLATION :
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners
which are appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of unit. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
2. 14 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly .
B . Relace damaged or defective units .
C . Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings .
* * * END OF SECTION* * *
10800-4
t`
SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of projection screens is shown on drawings.
B . Types of projection screens required include :
Front projection screens, electrically or manually operated as called out on the
drawings.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from'a
single manufacturer as complete units, including necessary mounting hardware and
,1
accessories.
B. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface : Measure gain of screen viewing
surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photo
goniometer using test methods and test apparatus per FS GG-S-00172D (1 ) for
determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces .
Ratings of "one" refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the
magnesium carbonate surface.
C . Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide projection screen fabrics identical to
those materials which have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame
resistance as indicated below:
NFPA 701 per small scale test.
D . Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew resistant screen fabrics as determined by
Federal Standard 191A/5760.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of screen indicated.
LOS DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver projections screens until building is enclosed, other work within
spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of
screens is ready to take place . 11132-1
DIVISION 9. FINISHES
SECTION 09100 - LATIIING AND STUCCO
1.01 GENERAL ,
1 . All applicable provisions of the General Conditions are a part of this section.
2. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc ., and services necessary and
incidental to the complete fabrication, furnishing and erection of this section as
shown, noted, detailed and reasonably implied on the drawings and in the
specifications.
3. All lathing, plastering, and stucco work, in addition to conforming to this section,
shall conform to the American National Standards Specifications A42.2 and A42 .3 .
1 .02 MATERIALS :
Stucco
1 . Do not use any precolored stucco mixes.
/1 2 . Premix stucco bag mix shall conform to ASTM C-926, Gray.
3 . Sand shall be clean, sharp, fine, sand conforming to ASTM C- 144 .
4. Water shall be clean, fresh, portable and free from mineral organic substances that ,
would affect the set of stucco.
Metal Lath
1 . Self-furring metal lath shall be expanded metal lath with staggered indentations
spaced 3 - 1/2" apart horizontally and 2" apart vertically with indentations of depth to
hold lath a minimum of 1/4" away from back-up material. Lath shall be hot dipped
galvanized for interior and exterior use and shall weigh 3 .4 pounds per square yard.
2. Metal lath to be used where supports are spaced over 16" on centers shall be hot
dipped galvanized, expanded metal lath stiffened with 3/8 " ribs spaced 4" on center,
weighing a minimum of 3.4 pounds per square yard.
3 . Sheets secured to supports at intervals not exceeding six inches (0) . Place ties
where sides of sheets lap at supports, and at side laps or sheets between supports .
Tie wire to be not less than 18 ga. galvanized wire.
09100-1
SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of projection screens is shown on drawings.
B . Types of projection screens required include :
Front projection screens, electrically or manually operated as called out on the
drawings.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from'a
single manufacturer as complete units, including necessary mounting hardware and
,1
accessories.
B. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface : Measure gain of screen viewing
surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photo
goniometer using test methods and test apparatus per FS GG-S-00172D (1 ) for
determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces .
Ratings of "one" refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the
magnesium carbonate surface.
C . Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide projection screen fabrics identical to
those materials which have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame
resistance as indicated below:
NFPA 701 per small scale test.
D . Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew resistant screen fabrics as determined by
Federal Standard 191A/5760.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of screen indicated.
LOS DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver projections screens until building is enclosed, other work within
spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of
screens is ready to take place . 11132-1
B . Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation . �\ l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS )
2 . 01 MANUALLY-OPERATED FRONT PROJECTIONS SCREENS
A. General: Provide manufacturer' s standard units consisting of case, screen,
mounting accessories and other components a required for a complete installation
and complying with descriptive requirements indicated below.
B . Spring-Roller-Operated Projection Screens : Units designed and fabricated for wall
or ceiling installation and complying with the following requirements :
1 . Screen Case: Fabricated in one piece from not less than 22-gage steel with
flat back design, vinyl-covered or baked-enamel finish, and end caps with
integral roller brackets and furnished with universal mounting brackets in
finish matching end caps to enable attachment to wall or ceiling .
2 . Screen: Mildew - and flame-resistant glass fiber fabric with vinyl-coated
viewing surface complying with requirements indicated below, with top
edge mounted on. And securely anchored to, a 3 " diameter rigid steel spring
roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat,
with ends of rod protected by plastic caps containing a screw-attached /
saddle and pull .
Size of Viewing Surface : As indicated.
Type of viewing Surface : Matte white with minimum gain characteristics
complying with FS GG- S-001721) (1 ) for Type A screen surface .
Edge Treatment: Black masking borders .
C . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Series 500 Auditorium; Bretford/Knox Manufacturing Co .
Model C; Da-Lite Screen Co . , Inc.
Luma 2 ; Draper Shade & Screen Co .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. General;_Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen
manufacturer' s instructions .
11132-2 t
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor for this section shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment
necessary to deliver and install all windows as specified and/or as indicated on
Drawings . Shop drawings are required for this portion of the work.
1 . 02 QUALITY CRITERIA
A. Aluminum windows shall be manufactured by one of the following :
I • Superior Window Corporation
2 . Windor Corp.
3 . E. S .P. Window Corporation
4 . C . G.I. Construction Glass Industries, Miami
S . Alcan Building Products
6. Alenco Windows
7. Kinco, Inc .
8 . P. G. T. Progressive Glass Technologies
9 . T.M. Windows
B . All manufacturers windows shall comply with the following:
HC- 110 Rated with 3/16 " glass (non-impact)
HC-70 Rated with Sentryglas (impact resistant)
HC-90/120/220 Rated with SaJlex Laminated glass (impact resistant)
DH-HC-50 AAMA Rating
ANSI/AAMA Specification 302 .9 -- 1977
C1201 (Safety glaze certain fixed lights)
ASTME 283073 , E330-707 E331 -70
ASTMC6P3CB & A (insulated glass)
AAMA Specification DHBIHP96 and HSB2HP63
No water infiltration at 16. 5 PSF of positive pressure
Air Infiltration = . 07 CFM/SQ.FT. (Or les) at pressure differential of 6.24 PSF
Products must have current dade county (or equivalent testing) approval
1 . 03 MATERIALS
A. Frames, sash and vent members shall be constructed of extruded 6063 -T6
aluminum alloy, unless otherwise specified. Glazing beads shall be extruded 6063 -
TS aluminum alloy.
i
08520-1
4. Diamond-mesh lath lapped at sides not less than 1/2" and at ends not less than I " .
�1 End laps of sheets should generally occur only over supports; if between, end of
sheets to be laced or adequately tied with # 18 ga., galvanized, annealed wire.
5 . No paper backed laths will be accepted. Remove paper backings on any laths
supplied to the job site. Utilize 30# felt roofing paper or backing as called out on
the plans .
6. Install according to ASTM C 1063 .
1.03 MIXING AND APPLICATION:
1 . Before the application of stucco masonry, all surfaces shall be clean and free from
defect. Concrete surfaces to receive stucco shall be coated with a bonding agent to
insure proper bond. Dampen masonry surfaces with a fog spray immediately prior
to application so as to prevent excessive withdrawal of moisture from the stucco .
2. Stucco shall be applied in three (3) coats to a total thickness of 3/4" over specified
metal lath and in two (2) coats to a total thickness of 5/8 " on concrete or masonry.
Finish coat to be installed as per manufacturer' s recommendations of approximately
1 /4" thickness with a smooth sponge finish.
3 . Cross rake all scratch coats in order to form a mechanical bond with brown coats .
/1 Lightly cross-scratch all brown coats of plaster in order to form a mechanical bond
with the finish coat.
4 . Keep each base coat moist for at least 48 hours; commence moistening as soon as
plaster is hardened sufficiently to prevent injuries. If atmospheric conditions are
hot and dry, curing time shall be extended as necessary to at no additional cost to
the Owner. Allow base coat to cure for a minimum of seven (7) days before
applying finishing coat.
5 . FINISH COAT shall be free from waves, dents, trowel marks, and shall be a
smooth sponge finish. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1 /4 inch in 10 feet
from a true plane in finished surfaces.
6 . Plaster and stucco used for patching and replacing existing work shall be mixed,
applied and finished to match adjacent surfaces.
1 .04 CLEANING:
1 . After completion of work, all scaffolding, tools, and other equipment shall be
removed from the building, taking care not to damage work of other trades. All
cement plaster rubbish shall be removed and the building left broom clean.
09100-2
B . Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation . �\ l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS )
2 . 01 MANUALLY-OPERATED FRONT PROJECTIONS SCREENS
A. General: Provide manufacturer' s standard units consisting of case, screen,
mounting accessories and other components a required for a complete installation
and complying with descriptive requirements indicated below.
B . Spring-Roller-Operated Projection Screens : Units designed and fabricated for wall
or ceiling installation and complying with the following requirements :
1 . Screen Case: Fabricated in one piece from not less than 22-gage steel with
flat back design, vinyl-covered or baked-enamel finish, and end caps with
integral roller brackets and furnished with universal mounting brackets in
finish matching end caps to enable attachment to wall or ceiling .
2 . Screen: Mildew - and flame-resistant glass fiber fabric with vinyl-coated
viewing surface complying with requirements indicated below, with top
edge mounted on. And securely anchored to, a 3 " diameter rigid steel spring
roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat,
with ends of rod protected by plastic caps containing a screw-attached /
saddle and pull .
Size of Viewing Surface : As indicated.
Type of viewing Surface : Matte white with minimum gain characteristics
complying with FS GG- S-001721) (1 ) for Type A screen surface .
Edge Treatment: Black masking borders .
C . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Series 500 Auditorium; Bretford/Knox Manufacturing Co .
Model C; Da-Lite Screen Co . , Inc.
Luma 2 ; Draper Shade & Screen Co .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. General;_Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen
manufacturer' s instructions .
11132-2 t
B . Install front projection screens with screen cases in positions and relationship to
adjoining work indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner
which produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges
and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when lowered.
3 . 02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite
such protection, damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as
required to restore units to their original, undamaged condition.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
11132-3
2. Stucco Contractor is responsible for protecting all existing work, windows, doors,
equipment, etc. from stucco residue during application. Clean any residue that may
exist at completion of work.
1.05 STUCCO ACCESSORIES:
NOTE : REFER TO PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS FOR
SPECIFIC TYPE AND PLACEMENT PER PROJECT.
I . Casing Beads :
a. For interior use shall be formed of 24 gauge Galvanized Steel, ASTM
A525-81 , A527-80, A446 (.0179 thickness G90 gaiv.).
b. For exterior use shall be formed of Solid Zinc Alloy, type #66 as
manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, 466 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Company, type 466X as manufactured by Keene Products or an
approved comparable product. Zinc shall be Ahoy 190, ASTM B69-89
(.0179 thickness).
C. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unplasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), type 6658 or 6675 as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation, or an
approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class 13244C.
2. Interior comer beads shall be fabricated of 26 ga. galvanized, type 1 , as
manufactured by National Gypsum Co. , I -A as manufactured by National Gypsum
Co., l -A as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., or # 1 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Products Co., or an approved comparable product.
3 • Control Joints, Expansion Joints, Channel Reveals ;.
a. For exterior use on flat vertical and horizontal surfaces shall be Solid Zinc
Alloy as manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, Inland Steel Company,
Keene Products, or an approved comparable product. Profiles and
configurations vary greatly; refer to plans and details for product numbers
and applications.
b. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unpiasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation or an approved
comparable product. Profiles and configurations vary greatly; refer to plans
and details for product numbers and applications. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell
class 13244C. ASTM C1063 -86.
4. Inside corner Expansion Jointsforinterior or exterior applications .where depicted
on the drawings, shall be vinyl, Model 3058 or 3075, as manufactured by Vinyl
Corporation, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D-1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM CI063-86.
09100-3
1 . 04 CONSTRUCTION of
-3/4 " inches and a
thickness
mum depth
A. Frme
of .a080 at frame ,S090 members hallat vent and ave a 1 045 at glaz nglbead! through the main members
of the vertical frame jambs.
1 .05 HA__RDWARE
A. Windows shall be provided with adjustable spiral sash balances or block and tackle
balances . Suitable latches shall be provided to maintain the sash secure when in a
sash must also have an integrally extruded hand lift for
closed position. Louver
manually opening or closing the lower sash.
1 .06 WEATHER STRIPPING
A. The vertical portion of all sash members shall be provided with wool pile fabric
weather stripping on both the interior and exterior faces to properly contact main
frame . All joints between frame jambs and sill shall be scaled with butyl
compound .
1 . 07 GLAZING
A. All sash members shall be glazed with specified glass and shall be back bedded
ound. Glass shall be retained by extruded bead . Finish to
with butyl glazing comp
match window finish.
] . p8 SCREENS aluminum with
A Scded
reens
shall be fabricated frames shall be famom ished to match window fmishn wall thickness
Scr
1 . 09 FINISH
A. All exposed surfaces shall be free from unsightly scratches and blemishes .
Aluminum sections shall be coated with one of the following options .
] , Anodized material :
shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment and the
color shall be one of the following:
a. Dark Bronze AA M12 C22 A42/44
b. Medium Bronze AA M12 C22 A40
C . Clear AA M12 C22 A21
d . Black AA M12 C22 A44
08520-2
B . Install front projection screens with screen cases in positions and relationship to
adjoining work indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner
which produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges
and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when lowered.
3 . 02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite
such protection, damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as
required to restore units to their original, undamaged condition.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
11132-3
SECTION 11458 - DISAPPEARING STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specifications Sections, 06100-Rough Carpentry, 06200-Finish Carpentry,
and 09900-Painting, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and Install, as detailed, and as located on the Drawings, fold-up or sliding
disappearing stairways. Complete trim-out and painting of the finish product is included .
APPROVED I IANUFACTURER'S :
All as manufactured by one of the following approved companies;
A. BESSLER STAIRWAY COMPANY
B . PRECISION LADDERS, LLC
C. STAIR-SCAPE
1 .04 MATERIAL:
Stairway shall be manufacturer of metal, wood or a combination of both. Rated capacities
shall be a minimum of 400 pounds. Units shall be designed
the bottorn
chord of wood trusses with a panel opening width of 2ot30rinchestall s,edtween depending on the
manufacturer and the unit specified. . Refer to building sections to determine the floor to
ceiling height requirements . Handrails on one or both sides are preferred, but are not
required . Wood treads shall be select, kiln dried yellow pine with a steel ladder rod under
each tread for added strength. Any aluminum treads shall be 6 " X width specified X .225 "
alum.- Channel with self-adhesive anti-slip "Flex Tread". Storage cover panel shall be metal
or plywood.
1 .05 DESIGN:
The fully engineered stairs shall retract into its own housing or attic space when not in use .
Units shall lower with pull chain, rope, or a motor supplied by manufacturer, and as
specified on the drawings . Manual storing units require folding up assembly and pushing it
Frames shall be secured to the trusses with stainless steel screws at mounting point
with assistance from a spring loaded or counterbalanced factory installed mechanism.
nts
depicted by the manufacturer. as
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
Stairs shall meet all industry standards and carry a one year warranty. Shop drawing
submittals are required for this item.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
11458-1
2 • Powder coated material :
shall be given an acidic wash and etch and coated with one of the following :
a• ARCHKOTE 6000 - 6 YEAR WARRANTY MEETS OR
EXCEEDS AAMA 605 . 2- 85
b. TIGER DRYLAC - SERIES 19, 6 YEAR WARRANTY
Electrostatically sprayed and baked on enamel and the color shall be as
Selected by the Architect.
3 • Clear Anodized Finish on factory Aluminum .
4 . Natural Mill Finish aluminum .
B . The option and color selected for this project is : Single hung windows with white
powdercoated frames, RAL 9010, with non-impact rated insulated glass . Gr
tint exterior pane and clear interior pane. Operable impact shutters shaay
ll be
provided per the plans at each window.
1 . 10 GRILLES
A . When called for, shall be constructed of extruded aluminum and are snapped in
place, or fixed, on either the inside face and/or outside face of the glass. The color
of the grilles shall match the window frames .
2 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Shall be in accordance with approved testing data and in accordance with the
Architect's details for adjacent sealants, interior and exterior finishes .
B . Fasteners shall be of the type and locations as called out in the product testing data.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08520-3
5 . Fascia Drip Screed for exterior applications where depicted on the drawings, shall
!-1 be vinyl, Model DS 15-75 by Vinyl Corporation, or Model 540-75 by Plastic
Components, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM C1063-86.
1.06 EXECUTION:
1 . Quality - Follow recommendations and specifications for strict installation. Allow
adequate time for each of three (3) coats to dry before going on with the next coat.
2. Stucco Accessories :
a. The stucco contractor shall request a project walk-around with the
Architect prior to installing any exterior stucco accessories, to insure all
conditions, materials, and applications are understood.
b. Corner beads , for interior applications only, shall be installed on all comers
and edges of comer openings. Comer beads shall extend the full height of
the corners on which they are applied and shall act as a ground.
C. Casing beads shall be applied where stucco stops and other products begin,
or where indicated on plans and details.
n
d. When applying vinyl products, all intersections, end butts and end mitres
shall have manufacturer' s approved sealant placed at raw edges to adhere
the sections prior to application of stucco.
3 . Metal lath shall be applied with long dimension of sheet across supports .
4. Control Joints and Expansion Joints shall be installed in exact locations shown, or ,
as to check shrinkage and expansion cracks. Do not fill any throats of control j oints
with sealants .
5 . Inside-Corner Expansion Joints shall be iustalle(f in exact locations shown on
details.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
'� 09100-4
SECTION 11458 - DISAPPEARING STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specifications Sections, 06100-Rough Carpentry, 06200-Finish Carpentry,
and 09900-Painting, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and Install, as detailed, and as located on the Drawings, fold-up or sliding
disappearing stairways. Complete trim-out and painting of the finish product is included .
APPROVED I IANUFACTURER'S :
All as manufactured by one of the following approved companies;
A. BESSLER STAIRWAY COMPANY
B . PRECISION LADDERS, LLC
C. STAIR-SCAPE
1 .04 MATERIAL:
Stairway shall be manufacturer of metal, wood or a combination of both. Rated capacities
shall be a minimum of 400 pounds. Units shall be designed
the bottorn
chord of wood trusses with a panel opening width of 2ot30rinchestall s,edtween depending on the
manufacturer and the unit specified. . Refer to building sections to determine the floor to
ceiling height requirements . Handrails on one or both sides are preferred, but are not
required . Wood treads shall be select, kiln dried yellow pine with a steel ladder rod under
each tread for added strength. Any aluminum treads shall be 6 " X width specified X .225 "
alum.- Channel with self-adhesive anti-slip "Flex Tread". Storage cover panel shall be metal
or plywood.
1 .05 DESIGN:
The fully engineered stairs shall retract into its own housing or attic space when not in use .
Units shall lower with pull chain, rope, or a motor supplied by manufacturer, and as
specified on the drawings . Manual storing units require folding up assembly and pushing it
Frames shall be secured to the trusses with stainless steel screws at mounting point
with assistance from a spring loaded or counterbalanced factory installed mechanism.
nts
depicted by the manufacturer. as
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
Stairs shall meet all industry standards and carry a one year warranty. Shop drawing
submittals are required for this item.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
11458-1
Page 1 of 2
Bessler Stairway Company112
STM
S_ LEft' J
WAY COMPANY
R Division of ASI
Residential and commercial installations, schools, offices, churches , stores.
Easy operation. Safe and convenient use. Superbly engineered for maximum stability. Responds
to the lightest touch. Models and sizes to suit most any budget and space requirement. 400 to 800
lbs. load capacities .
MODEL l00 Our very best. Solid one-
piece stringers and treads of selected 3uggestaa
1x8 dried yellow pine . Ladder rod under Capacily
each tread for added strength and 800lbe.
rigidity. 1 3/8 " GRADE A Hollow Core
Door. Ladder width is 18 7/8 " . Full
length handrail . Shipping weight 'w+k*Mfr rVg
n•
approximately 190 pounds . 71W to
Finished Jambs and Trim not �tN �ges � �*
supplied . d » Pl �
cell In wv la Inramanm 661
B C D E F
A Radius Plumb
Size Floor to Floor Run below Panel Opening Retail
Above HeightAbove Fi 4 (Fig,3) Price
(F. ig.4)
M93) (Fig.3)
� 7 '-7 " to 7110" 4'-4" 3' -2 " 6'-5 " 2 x 5'- 10" $ 1 ,320.00
� 7 ' - I1 to 8' 4" 11 " 3 ' - 8 " 6'- 10" 2'-6" x 5' - 10" $ 1 ,330.00
� 8' -5 " to 8'- 10" 5'-7 " 1 " 7'-3 6" x 5 '- 10 " $ 1 ,350 .00
� 8'- 11 " to 9' _4" 6'-2 " 6" T-7 " 6" x 6' 0" $ 1 ,390 .00
� 9'-5 " to 9'- 10" 6'-4" 9" 8'-0" 2' 6" x 61 -411 $ 15420 .00
6 9'- 1 l " to 10'-4" 6-8 " 5 '-0" 8'-4 " 2'-6" x 6'-8 " $ 15440 .00
10'-5 " to 10' - 71_ 011 51-31 8'-9" 2'-6" x 7' -0" $ 11480 .00
10
10'- 11 " to 11 '- F- 6"
5 .5 „ 9'-2"
I8 114
11458 - 2
SECTION 09230 - CEMENT BACKING BOARD
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary
conditions and Division- 1 Specifications Sections, addenda apply to work of this section.
1 .02 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
Lightgage Metal Framing Section 05400
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Gypsum Wallboard Section 092.50
Ceramic Tile Section 09300
1 .03 DESCRIPTION:
Extent of cement backing board system work is shown on Drawings and Schedules for
areas receiving ceramic tile.
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Obtain cement board from a single manufacturer.
l
B . Single-Installer Responsibility: A single installer shall perform the work of this
section; and shall be a firm specializing in this work for at least 3 years, capable of
showing successful installations similar to work required for project, using
recommended attachment screws and spacing of screws .
C . ANSI A108 . 11 - 1999 : Interior installation of cementious backer units .
1 .05 SUBMITTALS :
Submit manufacturer' s product data, specifications; and installation instructions for the
cement board systems .
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the original packages, containers, or bundles
bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification.
B. Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water and in
such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Stack cement
boards flat to avoid sagging or damage to edges, or surfaces -
09230-1
� )
C
Page 1 of 2
Bessler Stairway Company112
STM
S_ LEft' J
WAY COMPANY
R Division of ASI
Residential and commercial installations, schools, offices, churches , stores.
Easy operation. Safe and convenient use. Superbly engineered for maximum stability. Responds
to the lightest touch. Models and sizes to suit most any budget and space requirement. 400 to 800
lbs. load capacities .
MODEL l00 Our very best. Solid one-
piece stringers and treads of selected 3uggestaa
1x8 dried yellow pine . Ladder rod under Capacily
each tread for added strength and 800lbe.
rigidity. 1 3/8 " GRADE A Hollow Core
Door. Ladder width is 18 7/8 " . Full
length handrail . Shipping weight 'w+k*Mfr rVg
n•
approximately 190 pounds . 71W to
Finished Jambs and Trim not �tN �ges � �*
supplied . d » Pl �
cell In wv la Inramanm 661
B C D E F
A Radius Plumb
Size Floor to Floor Run below Panel Opening Retail
Above HeightAbove Fi 4 (Fig,3) Price
(F. ig.4)
M93) (Fig.3)
� 7 '-7 " to 7110" 4'-4" 3' -2 " 6'-5 " 2 x 5'- 10" $ 1 ,320.00
� 7 ' - I1 to 8' 4" 11 " 3 ' - 8 " 6'- 10" 2'-6" x 5' - 10" $ 1 ,330.00
� 8' -5 " to 8'- 10" 5'-7 " 1 " 7'-3 6" x 5 '- 10 " $ 1 ,350 .00
� 8'- 11 " to 9' _4" 6'-2 " 6" T-7 " 6" x 6' 0" $ 1 ,390 .00
� 9'-5 " to 9'- 10" 6'-4" 9" 8'-0" 2' 6" x 61 -411 $ 15420 .00
6 9'- 1 l " to 10'-4" 6-8 " 5 '-0" 8'-4 " 2'-6" x 6'-8 " $ 15440 .00
10'-5 " to 10' - 71_ 011 51-31 8'-9" 2'-6" x 7' -0" $ 11480 .00
10
10'- 11 " to 11 '- F- 6"
5 .5 „ 9'-2"
I8 114
11458 - 2
Bessler Stairway Company#2 Page 2 of 2
I F- 5 " to 1I '-
10 " 71-911 5 ' 10" 9'- 6 " $ 1 2'- 6 " x 7'-6" 620 . 00
LPP' to8 '- 1 " 6'- 1 " 9'- 10 " ' " x 7'-9"� $ 1 ,710 :00
8 '-6 " 6'-4 " 10'-3 "
2'-6" xH]E800. 0]01
*Prices are F. O.B . Memphis, TN *
ORDERING INFORMATION
Click for Larger Picture
• Orders are to be confirmed in writing to eliminate errors or mistakes. Specify both FLOOR TO
FLOOR and FLOOR TO CEILING measurements when ordering BESSLER one-piece
stairways . (Click Photo for Larger Image)
. BESSLER STAIRWAYS are engineered and custom built to fit and operate within the
requirements as shown in the charts and illustrations, and not subject to cancellation after
construction begins.
• ROUGH OPENING should be 2 " wider and longer than panel size shown.
lit STAIRWAYS ARE SHIPPED UNASSEMBLED
• SPECIFY MODEL AND SIZE ON YOUR ORDER.
For A distributor in your area or for additional information, please E-Mail us at bessler@bessler corn or
call our Customer Service Department at 901 /360- 1900
J n
http://www.bessler.com/rnodl00 .htm 11456 - 3
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A . Rough Hardware
B . Casework Hardware
C . Installation of Hardware
1 . 02 GENERAL
A. All exterior doors shall open outward or in direction of travel to an exit.
B . Copies of the Hardware Schedule, templates and keying schedules shall be submitted
to the Architect and approved before ordering.
C . Exchange schedules and template lists, with related trades, for coordination with their
Shop Drawings.
1 . 03 GUARANTEE
\ A . The hardware supplier shall provide a written guarantee that all materials furnished
under this Section will be free from defects in the materials and the workmanship for
a period of one ( 1 ) year from the date of a final " Certificate of Acceptance".
B . The hardware supplier, after a complete and thorough inspection by the Architect,
shall further certify that all items furnished under this Section have been properly
located , in accordance with the Hardware Schedule and the manufacturer ' s
instructions.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
A . Three (3) copies of the Hardware Schedule shall be submitted for approval . Door
numbers and hardware groups are not to be changed.
B . Approval of the Hardware Schedule shall be for type, operation and finish only.
1 . 05 DELIVERY
A. Each item of hardware shall be delivered to job site, packaged separately, complete
with the necessary fasteners, screws and anchors. Provide templates and/or
instructions as required.
j B . Mark each item so as to correspond with the Hardware Schedule, identifying contents
- J and defining location.
08700- 1
C . Handle cement boards to prevent damage. Protect metal framing members from
being bent or damaged . Protect gypsum panels in same manner as cement boards . \\
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DUROCK Cement Board Systern
as manufactured by the United States Gypsum Company, unless otherwise
indicated.
B . Equivalent systems of other manufacturers will be accepted under conditions as set
forth in the contract conditions.
C . Materials :
1 . Glass Mesh Mortar Unit (Cement Board) : USG DUROCK Exterior Cement
board 1/2" x 4' x 8 ' .
2. Cement board fasteners :
a. Non-wet areas- 1 1 /4", DUROCK Screws : wafer head with
anti-corrosive coating. Heads recessed or counter sunk .
b . Wet areas- 1 1 /4" , DUROCK Screws : wafer head stainless steel . Heads
recessed or countersunk.
D . Joint Reinforcement: DUROCK Tape (2" wide). NOTE : This portion of the work
is to be performed by the Ceramic Tile contractor per Section 09300.
E. Metal Framing : Comply with ASTM 0645 : Manufactured by the United States
Gypsum Company Min. 22 ga. Must meet ASTM A446, A525 , A568 , A463 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
A. Install metal framing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Stud spacing not to
exceed 16 in . o .c. Provide double studs at ends of each board.
B . Install cement board with rough side facing out and vertical edges over double supports .
Stagger joints in successive courses . Install adjacent board closely but not forced.
C . Fasten boards to framing with DUROCK screws . Space fasteners 8 " o .c. at walls . Locate
perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 " from edges. Counter sink screw heads slightly beneath the
board surface. Provide firm board contact with framing. Pre-drill edge screw locations to
prevent breaking at edges .
09230-2
Bessler Stairway Company#2 Page 2 of 2
I F- 5 " to 1I '-
10 " 71-911 5 ' 10" 9'- 6 " $ 1 2'- 6 " x 7'-6" 620 . 00
LPP' to8 '- 1 " 6'- 1 " 9'- 10 " ' " x 7'-9"� $ 1 ,710 :00
8 '-6 " 6'-4 " 10'-3 "
2'-6" xH]E800. 0]01
*Prices are F. O.B . Memphis, TN *
ORDERING INFORMATION
Click for Larger Picture
• Orders are to be confirmed in writing to eliminate errors or mistakes. Specify both FLOOR TO
FLOOR and FLOOR TO CEILING measurements when ordering BESSLER one-piece
stairways . (Click Photo for Larger Image)
. BESSLER STAIRWAYS are engineered and custom built to fit and operate within the
requirements as shown in the charts and illustrations, and not subject to cancellation after
construction begins.
• ROUGH OPENING should be 2 " wider and longer than panel size shown.
lit STAIRWAYS ARE SHIPPED UNASSEMBLED
• SPECIFY MODEL AND SIZE ON YOUR ORDER.
For A distributor in your area or for additional information, please E-Mail us at bessler@bessler corn or
call our Customer Service Department at 901 /360- 1900
J n
http://www.bessler.com/rnodl00 .htm 11456 - 3
Page 1 of 1
Closed- Oattlan (Half of ladder stored over door section Through Stak Opening FjmjA*d remb Md
panel and other half Over attic 1166Y.) 40#11 Om Tom nw s ,6k+d
nmSNED e6ElYkla —� b4 Eee�Fer
5706
FIG4 FIG. 2
�- - PANEL. OPENING --'�
Stairway partly DOW" on panel Opon Position
-- a
// . Tran Above sr eerow
E
A
MUM-
Pu mWIW *W lanwron
PMMr r AI !n«[Kaf }eehl Sn�++ l
Door 0 D6o>+n8 ni. eeor�r
MAMA !bM1 h E4eYetod �._..-- D --._..._
F (i.. 3 .IMs FIG. 4 -
1458 -.4 -
D . Joint Reinforcement Tape and Mortar Skim Coat : Apply tape over board joints and interior
corners. Do not overlap. NOTE : This portion of work to be performed by the Ceramic
Tile Contractor per Specification Section 09300.
E. Ceramic Tile: Comply with application requirements of Division-9 Section 09300 .
F . In wet areas, or areas subject to wash down due to periodic maintenance, install moisture
barrier on top of cement board . NOTE : This portion of the work to be performed by the
Ceramic Tile Contractor per specification Section 09300.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
09230-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 HINGES
A . All Hinges shall be STANLEY , HAGER, McKINNEY.
B . Use three hinges per door leaf on all doors up to a door height of 7 -6 " and an extra
hinge for each additional thirty (30) inches of door height as noted .
C . providthe
groupse Provode non-removable wsize and type hinges unless ise noted in the hardware
removable pins for exterior doors.
I . Exterior Doors : Stainless Steel
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2"
2 . Interior Doors with US26D finish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
3 . Interior Doors without Closfinish
4- 1 /2" x 4- 1 /2" ,
D . Finish {
I . Exterior Doors: Stainless Steel
2 . Interior Doors : Satin Chromium Plated Finish
2 .02 LOCKS & EXIT DEVICES
A . All locksets shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE. All
locks shall have a minimum throw of ''/z" . Finish to be per the Finish Hardware
Schedule. Functioning of the locks shall be as designated in the hardware groups.
2 .03 CLOSING DEVICES
losers shall be provided by one manufacturer and guaranteed for
A . All hydraulic door c
five (5) years.
B . Door Closers shall be LCN at all doors per schedule, fully hydraulic , full rack and
pinion action. Closers shall have a separate adjustments for latch speed, general
speed and back check. All closers and accessories, except special purpose types,
whether applied to hinge side , stop face, over door or on bracket, shall be non-handed.
All closers are to be installed on the room side of the door except where noted in the
Hardware Schedule. All closers are to be installed with thru-bolts and five screws
in the foot. 08700-2
Page 1 of 1
Closed- Oattlan (Half of ladder stored over door section Through Stak Opening FjmjA*d remb Md
panel and other half Over attic 1166Y.) 40#11 Om Tom nw s ,6k+d
nmSNED e6ElYkla —� b4 Eee�Fer
5706
FIG4 FIG. 2
�- - PANEL. OPENING --'�
Stairway partly DOW" on panel Opon Position
-- a
// . Tran Above sr eerow
E
A
MUM-
Pu mWIW *W lanwron
PMMr r AI !n«[Kaf }eehl Sn�++ l
Door 0 D6o>+n8 ni. eeor�r
MAMA !bM1 h E4eYetod �._..-- D --._..._
F (i.. 3 .IMs FIG. 4 -
1458 -.4 -
DIVISIONS 12 FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12290 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK: LIGHT COMMERCIAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
A. References
I ) AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute : Applicable Quality Standards.
2) FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
3) FS MMM-A- 130 - Adhesive, Contact .
4) NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates .
5) ANSI A156 .9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.
6) PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood .
7) PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard .
8) PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK:
1
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service to complete the
casework and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or
both, except as for items specifically indicated as 'NOT IN CONTRACT' (NIC) .
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following :
I . Fabrication of Casework.
2 . Installation.
3 . Accessories .
4 . Hardware.
5 . Filler Panels.
1 .03 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06100, and Finish Carpentry Section 06200 . Provide
blocking within wall floor, or ceiling, required to give adequate support for
casework.
B . Mechanical Division 15000 : Stainless steel sinks and fittings which are integral
with casework, including all work for plumbing rough-in, supply waste and vent,
including shut-off valves at floor or wall . All heating and ventilating ductwork
and grilles in cabinets where required including connections, flashings, caps or
hoods .
12290-1
2 . 04 STOPS
A . Wall Stops shall be AS SPECIFIED ON THE HARDWARE
SCHEDULE, Model WB I I or 50C/60C as required by the wall conditions . Wall
stops to be utilized on interior/exterior frame walls to have solid wood backing to
Prevent drywall failure. Wall Stops WBI I should be mounted to the wood base .
Areas with Vinyl or Ceramic Tile Base should utilize the wall stops 50C/60C.
2 . 05 THRESHOLD WEATHERSTRIP
A . Thresholds and Weather stripping shall be PEMKO, to match the types and sizes
indicated on the Hardware Schedule or detailed on the drawings .
B - Provide screws and anchors as required .
C . Finish to be per Schedule.
2 . 06 PLACEMENT OF HARDWARd
Various items shall have the following heights and locations, unless otherwise indicated .
(Heights are shown from finish floor to center line of item) :
J
A. Hinges : Standard Placement
B . Cylindrical Lockset 38 "
C . Closer per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of opening. All closers
to be mounted on room side of door.
D . Stops:
I • Wall : On wall where knob or pull hits.
2 • Floor: As per standard practice.
3 • Chain Door: As per standard practice.
4. Over-Head : Per manufacturer template to give maximum degree of
opening. All Over-Head stops to be mounted on room side of door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 KEYING
A. All cylinder locks shall be keyed to Owner' s EXISTING system. Coordinate with
Owner as to manufacturer and type. .
B . Submit keying schedule, based on the instructions and prior approval of the Owner' s
representative, for final approval before ordering locks.
08700.3
DIVISIONS 12 FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12290 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK: LIGHT COMMERCIAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
A. References
I ) AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute : Applicable Quality Standards.
2) FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
3) FS MMM-A- 130 - Adhesive, Contact .
4) NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates .
5) ANSI A156 .9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.
6) PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood .
7) PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard .
8) PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK:
1
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service to complete the
casework and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or
both, except as for items specifically indicated as 'NOT IN CONTRACT' (NIC) .
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following :
I . Fabrication of Casework.
2 . Installation.
3 . Accessories .
4 . Hardware.
5 . Filler Panels.
1 .03 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06100, and Finish Carpentry Section 06200 . Provide
blocking within wall floor, or ceiling, required to give adequate support for
casework.
B . Mechanical Division 15000 : Stainless steel sinks and fittings which are integral
with casework, including all work for plumbing rough-in, supply waste and vent,
including shut-off valves at floor or wall . All heating and ventilating ductwork
and grilles in cabinets where required including connections, flashings, caps or
hoods .
12290-1
C . Electrical Division 16000 : Electrical rough-in and connections from rough-in to
cabinet or equipment fixtures and devices requiring same, whatever Type and kind.
1 .04 BIDDING:
Do not bid sections of casework separately. Any item required to make the casework a
complete and workable unit will be by the casework Subcontractor, including installation.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. The " Quality Assurance" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are made part of this specification.
B . All work shall conform to section 400B Architectural Cabinets (Laminate Clad
Cabinets) as defined in the latest edition of the AWI " Quality Standards' unless
detailed as a higher grade .
C . Competence : The approved casework manufacturer must have a reputation for
doing satisfactory work on time and shall have completed comparable work.
D . The woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to
make certain that casework is not delivered until the building and storage areas are
sufficiently dry so that the casework will not be damaged by excessive changes in
moisture content.
1 .06 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS :
A. This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require
submission by the Contractor to the Architect for approval.
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the
contract documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility .
C . Submit samples, product data, certificates and shop drawings as required or
requested by the Architect, whether included in this list or not.
1 . 07 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit complete shop drawings on all items showing details, materials, location in
building and installation requirements prior to starting work.
B . Submit sample cabinet built to specification, prior to starting of work, for approval
of all materials.
C . The casework manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled
by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field
measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor and the 1c2 se9w 2 k
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Gypsum Board Standard: ASTM C 840
1 .02 MATERIALS :
A. Drywall Materials -, Exposed Gypsum Board ASTM C 36
1 . Long Edges : Standard taper
a. /z" Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
b. %2" Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
C. 5/8 " Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
d. 5/8 " Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
e. 5/8 " Type-X Fire Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
f. 5/8 " Vandal Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
B . Trim Accessories : Provide manufacturer ' s standard metal trim accessories, of the
beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where
semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. See plans and details for specific
locations and conditions .
C . Provide corner beads at external corners . Install with nails or screws at minimum of
l6" on center. No crimp bead will be accepted unless in combination with nails or
screws .
D. Provide edge trim of the shape indicated where edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed; L-type for abutment at edges, other U-
type except special kerfed-type where kerf is provided in adjoining work. See plans
and details for specific locations and conditions.
E. Gypsum Board Fasteners : Self drilling, self tapping, bugle head, screws.
F. Joint tape : ASTM C 475 , performed, Type I1.
G. Joint Compound- ASTM 475, Type I.
H. Provide water-resistant type MR manufactured by United States Gypsum Company
for use with water-resistant backing board and cementitous substrate backing board.
1 .03 DRYWALL INSTALLATION AND FINISHING:
1 . Install gypsum boards- in lengths and directions which will minimize number of end
joints, and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings. Install walls and partitions
with exposed gypsum boards vertical, with joints offset on opposite sides of
09250-1
C . Delivery l
l . All locks are to be delivered to hn job te wthomaster the
key, if required rmanent Y All . l
locks are to be keyed to the existing owner' s
2 . A representative of the Hardware Supplier, uponthe completion of the project,
shall check all locks for proper location, operation and keying as well as
deactivate the construction-key operation and transfer all locks to a permanent
key operation .
ly
3 . All permanent keys
number d location hand all bshall oberturned identified
directly tagged
the t Owner' s
representative.
4 _ Furnish six (6) master keys of each set to the Owner .
3 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF HARDWARE GROUP NUMBERS
The following Hardware Schedule is to be used as a general guide . Special or unusual
conditions not covered in the schedule will have hardware of a similar type and quality to
meet the job conditions , and it shall be the hardware consultant' s responsibility to insure that
all hardware is supplied to meet job requirements and produce a complete job .
GENERAL NOTES
1 . HARDWARE LISTED TAKEN FROM THE FOLLOWING CATALOGS :
HAGER Butts
CORBIN -RUSSWIN Locks
LCN Closers
GLYNN JOHNSON Stops
PEMKO Thresholds
Weather Stripping
* A *END OF SECTION '
08700-4
C . Electrical Division 16000 : Electrical rough-in and connections from rough-in to
cabinet or equipment fixtures and devices requiring same, whatever Type and kind.
1 .04 BIDDING:
Do not bid sections of casework separately. Any item required to make the casework a
complete and workable unit will be by the casework Subcontractor, including installation.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. The " Quality Assurance" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are made part of this specification.
B . All work shall conform to section 400B Architectural Cabinets (Laminate Clad
Cabinets) as defined in the latest edition of the AWI " Quality Standards' unless
detailed as a higher grade .
C . Competence : The approved casework manufacturer must have a reputation for
doing satisfactory work on time and shall have completed comparable work.
D . The woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to
make certain that casework is not delivered until the building and storage areas are
sufficiently dry so that the casework will not be damaged by excessive changes in
moisture content.
1 .06 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS :
A. This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require
submission by the Contractor to the Architect for approval.
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the
contract documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility .
C . Submit samples, product data, certificates and shop drawings as required or
requested by the Architect, whether included in this list or not.
1 . 07 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit complete shop drawings on all items showing details, materials, location in
building and installation requirements prior to starting work.
B . Submit sample cabinet built to specification, prior to starting of work, for approval
of all materials.
C . The casework manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled
by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field
measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor and the 1c2 se9w 2 k
manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions .
i' D . Submit samples of laminated plastic for color selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of all items not manufactured by the
casework contractor, as requested by the Architect.
1 .08 DELIVERY9 STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
B . Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding or similar operations
'which could damage, soil or deteriorate the woodwork, have been completed in the
installation areas . If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored
in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting the requirements
specified for the installation area.
1 .09 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A . Conditioning : Woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise the Contractor of
temperature and humidity requirements for the woodwork installation and storage - '
areas.
i
B . Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain
moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1 . 0% tolerance of optimum
moisture content, from date of installation to through remainder of construction
period. Require woodwork manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content ''
and required temperature and humidity conditions .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 WOOD MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Lumber for stiles and rails: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI;
moisture content of 6 to I 1 percent; 8 to 13 percent for damp locations (as defined
by AWI) .
B . All lumber in contact with concrete floor shall be pressure treated .
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Plywood for box construction" to be 3/4 " luan plywood with melamine
finish for bottoms, tops and sides of wall cabinets, ends and sides of base cabinets,
and all shelving. Backs shall be 1 /2 " luan plywood on wall cabinets and 1 /8 "
masonite with hanging rail for base cabinets . All shelving adjustable, line board
with 32 mm system . No shelves or wall cabinets to exceed 33 " wide .
12290-3
SLC ETON x V " ^ DOOR I WISH HA R71 W A b G SCHEDULE(INDiANRNERCOUNTyI'ARKSMAm W � � .uW � • nr+iluLL�
NANCE COMPLEX PROJECT)
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
The Door Hardware Schedule has been prepared by:
Lotspeich Company of Florida, Inc.
7435 Central Industrial Drive
Riviera Beach , FL 33404
Phone : 561-848-3040
Fax : 561 -843-9020
Consultant: Mr. Ed Cutler
Date : 6 March 2009
The following Schedule shall be utilized by the General Contractor to establiash
price for door hardware. The Contractor's Final Door Schedule for
construction purposes complete with manufacturer's catalog cuts, must be
submitted to the Architect for review in accordance with the Su
of this specifications manual. bmittal Section
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08710-1
partitions . Otherwise, install boards with edges perpendicular to supports, with end
joints staggered over supports, except where recommended in a different
arrangement by manufacturer. Install as per UL4U305 for 1 hour rating when
utilizing rated panels.
2 . Form "Floating" : Construction for gypsum boards at internal corners, except where
special isolation or edge trim is indicated.
3 . Screw gypsum boards to supports .
4 . Drywall Finishing: Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint
compound at joints (both directions) between gypsum boards. Apply compound at
accessory flanges, penetrations, fasteners heads and surface defects .
5 . Apply compound in three (3 ) coats (plus prefill of cracks where recommended by
manufacturer); sand after last two (2) coats to achieve a Level 4 or Level 5 finish
per U . S . Gypsum Corporation guidelines . Refer to the Room Finish Schedule for
level of finish required for this project.
6 . Ceiling Finish as per Finish Schedule on the Construction Plans. Where a textured
ceiling is called for on the drawings the drywall finisher shall provide a 24 " X 24"
sample board for approval by the Owner prior to applying any finished ceiling
textures . {
7 . The drywall installer shall notify the General Contractor of walls out of plumb in
the vertical or horizontal direction, as well as the absence of proper wall, soffit,
overhead deadwood blocking, pipe and wire plate protectors prior to installing
drywall . Finished walls shall be no more than 3/16" out of dead straight within any
(six) 6 foot direction . Walls not conforming to this standard shall be removed and
replaced at the General Contractors expense .
8 . The drywall contractor shall remove all debris associated with his portion of the
work and remove all dried finishing compound from the floors .
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
/r
l
09250-2
manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions .
i' D . Submit samples of laminated plastic for color selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of all items not manufactured by the
casework contractor, as requested by the Architect.
1 .08 DELIVERY9 STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
B . Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding or similar operations
'which could damage, soil or deteriorate the woodwork, have been completed in the
installation areas . If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored
in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting the requirements
specified for the installation area.
1 .09 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A . Conditioning : Woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise the Contractor of
temperature and humidity requirements for the woodwork installation and storage - '
areas.
i
B . Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain
moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1 . 0% tolerance of optimum
moisture content, from date of installation to through remainder of construction
period. Require woodwork manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content ''
and required temperature and humidity conditions .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 WOOD MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Lumber for stiles and rails: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI;
moisture content of 6 to I 1 percent; 8 to 13 percent for damp locations (as defined
by AWI) .
B . All lumber in contact with concrete floor shall be pressure treated .
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Plywood for box construction" to be 3/4 " luan plywood with melamine
finish for bottoms, tops and sides of wall cabinets, ends and sides of base cabinets,
and all shelving. Backs shall be 1 /2 " luan plywood on wall cabinets and 1 /8 "
masonite with hanging rail for base cabinets . All shelving adjustable, line board
with 32 mm system . No shelves or wall cabinets to exceed 33 " wide .
12290-3
B . Countertops all 3/4 " plywood construction with 3 /4 " buildup, and all exposed faces
plastic laminate covered . ` J
C . Doors shall be 3 /4" MDF covered with plastic laminate . J
2.03 LAMINATED PLASTIC :
All laminated plastic shall meet NEMA LD-3 Standards and application of various types
shall be as follows :
A. 0 . 050 " Nominal Thickness Standard Quality : Counter tops, backsplashes, counter
edges, all tops, sides and edges of shelving.
B . 0 .04? " Nominal Thickness vertical surface grade: Door and drawer fronts and
edges and other exposed vertical and postformed surfaces .
C . Acceptable Laminate Manufacturers :
1 . Nevamar
2 . Wilsonart
3 . Pionite
4. Formica
5 . Substitutions : Only allowed with prior written approval from the Architect.
2 .04 ACCESSORIES :
A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A- 130 . Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit
application.
B . Fasteners : Size and type to suit application . All base and wall cabinets shall be
screwed together. Dowels are not acceptable .
C . Bolts Nuts Washers Lags Pins and Screws : Of size and type to suit application;
galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed
locations.
2.05 HARDWARE :
A. TYPES AND MANUFATURERS
1 . Hinges: concealed box construction (Grass, Mepla, Blum or an approved
manufacturer of equal quality) .
2 . Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley or approved equal, brushed aluminum wire
Pulls .
3 . Cabinet Locks : CCL or approved equal . ^
4 . Robe Hooks : Ives or Stanley. 12290-4
SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE WORK
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. Coordination: Coordinate all with other trades whose work affects, connects with,
or is concealed by tile installations . Before proceeding, make certain all required
inspections have been made by local officials and the Architect. .
B . Scone of work:
1 . Preparation of substrate and installation of ceramic the on walls, floors, and
ceilings .
2 . Preparation substrate and installation of dimensional stone on floors and walls.
3 . Installation of waterproofing membrane on prepared substrate.
1 .02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS :
1 . Lightgauge Metal Framing Section 05400
2. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
3 . Lathing and Stucco Section 09100
4 . Cement Backing Board Section 09230
5 . Toilet Accessories Section 10800
6 . Floor Drains and Shower Drains Section 15421
1 .03 QUALITY STANDARDS :
A. Conform to applicable portions of the following :
1 . ANSI A108 . 1A- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile in the wet-set method,
with portland cement mortar.
2 . ANSI A109 . IB - 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile on a cured portland
cement mortar setting bed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortar.
3 . ANSI A108 .5 - 1999: Installation of ceramic tile with dry-set portland
cement mortar or latex-portland cement mortar.
4 . ANSI A108 . 13 - 1999 : Installation of load bearing, bonded, waterproof
membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone.
5 . ANSI A118 .4- 1999 : Specifications for latex-portland cement mortar.
6. ANSI A108 . 8- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile with chemical resistant
furan resin mortar and grout.
7 . Tile Council of America, Inc . : The Industry' s Guide for Installation
Practices 2003 -2004 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 41st Edition.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit samples of all ceramic tiles and dimensional stone scheduled for
installation.
B . Submit samples of the waterproofing membrane/system proposed for installation.
C. Submit manufacturer' s product data for tile setting compound and grout proposed
for installation.
09300-1
B . Countertops all 3/4 " plywood construction with 3 /4 " buildup, and all exposed faces
plastic laminate covered . ` J
C . Doors shall be 3 /4" MDF covered with plastic laminate . J
2.03 LAMINATED PLASTIC :
All laminated plastic shall meet NEMA LD-3 Standards and application of various types
shall be as follows :
A. 0 . 050 " Nominal Thickness Standard Quality : Counter tops, backsplashes, counter
edges, all tops, sides and edges of shelving.
B . 0 .04? " Nominal Thickness vertical surface grade: Door and drawer fronts and
edges and other exposed vertical and postformed surfaces .
C . Acceptable Laminate Manufacturers :
1 . Nevamar
2 . Wilsonart
3 . Pionite
4. Formica
5 . Substitutions : Only allowed with prior written approval from the Architect.
2 .04 ACCESSORIES :
A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A- 130 . Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit
application.
B . Fasteners : Size and type to suit application . All base and wall cabinets shall be
screwed together. Dowels are not acceptable .
C . Bolts Nuts Washers Lags Pins and Screws : Of size and type to suit application;
galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed
locations.
2.05 HARDWARE :
A. TYPES AND MANUFATURERS
1 . Hinges: concealed box construction (Grass, Mepla, Blum or an approved
manufacturer of equal quality) .
2 . Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley or approved equal, brushed aluminum wire
Pulls .
3 . Cabinet Locks : CCL or approved equal . ^
4 . Robe Hooks : Ives or Stanley. 12290-4
B . HINGES
1 • 1 Rair for doors up to 48 " in height.
2 • lair for doors over 48 " in height.
C . PULLS
1 . 3 - 1 /3 " brushed aluminum finish.
D . DRAWER GUIDES
1 . Drawer guides all metal, rated for 75 lbs.; 5/8 " plywood drawer bottoms and
backs and 3/4 " MDF (medium density fiberboard) plastic laminate covered
fronts.
E. FILERS
1 Drawer sides, back and front 1 /2 " Plywood with melamine finish, 1 /4 "
Plywood bottoms, with full extension drawer guides rated for 150 lbs .
Provide 3/4 " MDF plastic laminate covered fronts.
2 .07 SEALANT:
- a. Equal to General Electric Silicone Sealant.
2.08 ANCHORS •
A. Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage . Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion-resistances.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt shields for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for
subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.09 CASEWORK FABRICATION:
Detail shall conform to AWI (flush overlay design) and or as shown on drawings.
A. Wood moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity
conditions in the installation areas.
12290-5
® Since 1928
Lff
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT / DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
2 .01 PRODUCTS : l
A. Recommended Materials : t -
1 . Ceramic tile and dimensional stone: As selected by the Architect or the
Interior Designer. See the Drawing Schedules .
a. All ceramic floor tile located in areas that may become slippery
when wet shall have a non-slip impervious surface. The tile must
meet a coefficient of friction of 0. 5 to 0. 6 using a wet/dry test.
2 . Thin set adhesive per manufacturers recommendations and
specification standards of ` The Tile Council of America' .
3 . Marble : Window stools shall be Georgia or Alabama White domestic
marble, cultured marble, or an approved, comparable product, unless
specified otherwise on the drawings.
4 . Waterproofing Membrane : Laticrete 9235 waterproofing membrane in
combination with Laticrete Reinforcing Membrane installed in accordance
with manufacturer' s recommendations .
5 . Mortar : Laticrete 4237 latex Thin Set Mortar Additive with Laticrete 211
Crete Filler Powder.
6 . Grout : Laticrete Spectra Lock Pro Grout in color selected by the Architect.
3 .01 EXECUTION :
A. Inspection of Surfaces :
1 . Examine surfaces to receive tile, cement substrate backing board, setting
beds, pressure treated wood blocking for mounting of toilet accessories and
grab bars and accessories, before installation begins.
2 . Tile contractor shall be responsible for preparing installed cement backing
board including taping of joints and mortar skimming of all faces to a true
and level surface prior to installation of any ceramic tile.
3 . Walls to receive ceramic tile shall not be out of level and true planes more
than 1 /8 " in 24 inches.
4 . Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
B . Product delivery storage and handling: Deliver all manufactured materials in
original, unbroken containers bearing name of manufacturer, brand and grade seals .
Keep materials dry, clean, and protected against deterioration in any form.
09300-2
B . HINGES
1 • 1 Rair for doors up to 48 " in height.
2 • lair for doors over 48 " in height.
C . PULLS
1 . 3 - 1 /3 " brushed aluminum finish.
D . DRAWER GUIDES
1 . Drawer guides all metal, rated for 75 lbs.; 5/8 " plywood drawer bottoms and
backs and 3/4 " MDF (medium density fiberboard) plastic laminate covered
fronts.
E. FILERS
1 Drawer sides, back and front 1 /2 " Plywood with melamine finish, 1 /4 "
Plywood bottoms, with full extension drawer guides rated for 150 lbs .
Provide 3/4 " MDF plastic laminate covered fronts.
2 .07 SEALANT:
- a. Equal to General Electric Silicone Sealant.
2.08 ANCHORS •
A. Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage . Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion-resistances.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt shields for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for
subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.09 CASEWORK FABRICATION:
Detail shall conform to AWI (flush overlay design) and or as shown on drawings.
A. Wood moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity
conditions in the installation areas.
12290-5
B . Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings . Condition to average prevailing humidity ` l
conditions prior to installation. J
C . Fit shelves doors and all edges with plastic laminate edging. Use full length
pieces only . All edges shall be clad in plastic laminate, including a116 edges of
adjustable shelving.
D . Measurements : Before proceeding with fabrication of casework required to be fitted
to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as required for accurate fit. Where sequence of measuring
substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication
(without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for
subsequent scribing and trimming of casework for accurate fit.
E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application and other work
before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible . Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
F . Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes . Make joints hairline .
G . Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern.
H . Mechanically fasten backsplashes to countertops .
1 . Pre-Cut Openings : Fabricate architectural casework with pre-cut openings, where
possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams
for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant
coating.
J . Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1600-B , unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 COORDINATION :
A. Casework manufacturer is responsible for coordinating his work with work of other
trades, such as structural, plumbing, electrical and air conditioning. In so far as
possible, dimensional adjustments are to be determined before fabrication, and
reflected on the Shop Drawings . To minimize changes required by field conditions .
3.02 INSPE�_
12290-6
C . Installation:
1 Layout all work so that where possible no tiles less that half size occur. In
any event install no half tiles above first course up from the bottom or away
from first vertical course at internal and external corners. Align all joints,
vertically and horizontally. Cut and drill neatly without marrying tile. Rub
smooth any necessary cuts with a fine stone and set no cut edge against any
fixture, cabinet, 01' other tile without a joint at least 1 /16 " wide . Cut, fit .
adjust, and establish tiles neatly and accurately to accommodate accessories,
interruptions, chases, returns, mechanical and electrical outlets, and finish at
their exact location (as determined by jobsite conditions). Maximumand
variation shall be plus-or-minus- 1 /8 " in 2 feet when straight edge is laid
on the surface in any direction.
2 . Provide all required trim pieces as detailed for the various tiles specified.
3 • All floor and wall file to be set using thin-set products as called out in this
section. Utilize proper admixes
applications. When installing pofor exterior installations and frost proof
rcelin the utilizing modified thinset, adhere`. ` `':
to guidelines stipulated in ANSI 1 l 8.4 .
4 • Thoroughly wash out joints and saturate with clean water before
Thoroughly grout into all joints to fill entire len grouting.
with face of tiles making a neatlush
y finished, smooth
surface. Prevent Fill st ming
of grouted joints by applying a clear sealer to all exposed grout joints.
5 Provide preformed metal control joints at door openings and sufficient to
isolate maximum areas of 25 ' X 25 '. Color of control joint preformed infill
to match the selected grout.
6. Installation of waterproofing membrane shall be behind all tiles, full
height and full width within showers or areas subject to periodic washdown
this section.. scheduled maintenance. Utilize materials as specified within
thInsure proper slopes to floor drains. Insure the membrane is
installed continuous into drain or adjacent to drains utilizing a perimeter
weep hole design. Wall membrane laps over the shower pan membrane.
Do not penetrate the membrane with any fasteners within 24 inches above
the finished floor tile. Test shower receptor and drainage fitting for leaks
all concealed stainless steel fasteners in
before commencing tile work. When
installation of grab bars is required, set
a bed of 3M- 5200 white sealant.
09300-3
B . Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings . Condition to average prevailing humidity ` l
conditions prior to installation. J
C . Fit shelves doors and all edges with plastic laminate edging. Use full length
pieces only . All edges shall be clad in plastic laminate, including a116 edges of
adjustable shelving.
D . Measurements : Before proceeding with fabrication of casework required to be fitted
to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as required for accurate fit. Where sequence of measuring
substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication
(without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for
subsequent scribing and trimming of casework for accurate fit.
E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application and other work
before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible . Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
F . Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes . Make joints hairline .
G . Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern.
H . Mechanically fasten backsplashes to countertops .
1 . Pre-Cut Openings : Fabricate architectural casework with pre-cut openings, where
possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams
for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant
coating.
J . Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1600-B , unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 COORDINATION :
A. Casework manufacturer is responsible for coordinating his work with work of other
trades, such as structural, plumbing, electrical and air conditioning. In so far as
possible, dimensional adjustments are to be determined before fabrication, and
reflected on the Shop Drawings . To minimize changes required by field conditions .
3.02 INSPE�_
12290-6
A. Prior to installation of casework, examine shop fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
B . Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in the installation
areas prior to installing.
3. 03 INSTALLATION:
A. Pre-Installation Set up a meeting at the project site with the general
contractor prior to delivery of casework and review coordination and environmental
controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to
receive work. Proceed with casework installation only when everyone concerned
agrees that required ambient conditions can be properly maintained .
B . Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates
well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
C . Install casework plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions . Shim as
required using concealed shims . Install to a tolerance of 1 /8 " IIq 8 ' - 0 " for plumb
and level (including tops) ; and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces .
D. Anchorcasework to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates .
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners
and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
E . Cabinets : Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly.
and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of
hardware and accessory items as indicated.
F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated and
secure cabinet and counter bases to the floor using appropriate angles and
anchorages .
G. Use thre__ aded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet
units and countertops.
H. Carefully scribe and cut casework to fit adjoining casework or other building
materials, leaving gaps of 1 /32 " maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for
this purpose but refinish the cut surface.
3 .04 ADJUSTMENT CLEANING FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
a. Repair damaeed and defective casework where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair the casework then replace it.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures
and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
b. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied
12290-7
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL
- - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON
HA HAGER
IV H . B . IVES
LC LCN CLOSERS
LU LUND EQUIPMENT CO . INC
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
VO VON DUPRIN
I
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY
US26D CHROMIUM PLATED , DULL
26D SATIN CHROME
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
SP28 LACQUER SPRAYED ALUMINUM
12t~YI�D
2NIA1Z 2009
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION•
A. Wipe surfaces clean after grouting, remove all traces of mortar and grout.
Do not use acid solution for cleaning glazed tile.
B. Close spaces to traffic or other work until the is f rmly set. Protect all work from
damage at no additional cost to Owner.
** *END OF SECTION* **
09300-44
A. Prior to installation of casework, examine shop fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
B . Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in the installation
areas prior to installing.
3. 03 INSTALLATION:
A. Pre-Installation Set up a meeting at the project site with the general
contractor prior to delivery of casework and review coordination and environmental
controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to
receive work. Proceed with casework installation only when everyone concerned
agrees that required ambient conditions can be properly maintained .
B . Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates
well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
C . Install casework plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions . Shim as
required using concealed shims . Install to a tolerance of 1 /8 " IIq 8 ' - 0 " for plumb
and level (including tops) ; and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces .
D. Anchorcasework to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates .
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners
and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
E . Cabinets : Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly.
and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of
hardware and accessory items as indicated.
F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated and
secure cabinet and counter bases to the floor using appropriate angles and
anchorages .
G. Use thre__ aded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet
units and countertops.
H. Carefully scribe and cut casework to fit adjoining casework or other building
materials, leaving gaps of 1 /32 " maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for
this purpose but refinish the cut surface.
3 .04 ADJUSTMENT CLEANING FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
a. Repair damaeed and defective casework where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair the casework then replace it.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures
and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
b. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied
12290-7
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas .
c. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section to whatever extent
not completed at the shop or prior to installation of casework.
d. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to
Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural casework being without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
e . Caulk top of backsplash at walls with G.E. Silicone Sealant or equal . If wall varies
over 1 /8 " at back splash, the wall is to be re-plastered to correct waves .
f. All casework to receive rubber base at the portion that touched the floor.
* * *END OF SECTION "
12290-8
SECTION 09510 - LAY IN PANEL CEILINGS (See schedule next page)
A. GENERAL :
1 . Acceptable Manufacturers :
a. Grid System : Chicago Metallic Corporation
Donn Corporation
U. S . Gypsum Corp.
W.J. Haertel Division; Leslie-Locke
National Rolling Mills Company
b. Lay-in-Panels : Celotex
Armstrong
Conwed
U. S . Gypsum
2 . Product delivery storage and handling : Store materials in protective packaging to
prevent soiling or physical damage.
B. PRODUCTS :
1 . Lay-in Panels : As per the attached schedule included in this specification
i
section, or an approved equal .
2. Grid Systems : With all components conforming to the requirements of ASTM C - -`
635 in a low-sheen, baked-on white enamel finish or in a color to be selected by
the Architect. See the plans for a complete description.
3 . Perimeter Molding: Channel formed, of not less than 22 gauge steel, I " horizontal
exposed face with exposed edge hemmed; low sheen, baked-on white enamel finish
or in a color to be selected by Architect.
4 . Suspension System :
a. Hangers: Annealed zinc-coated wire # 12 gauge or heavier.
b. Carrying Channels : 1 - 1 /2 " x 3/4 x 416 gauge for greater spans.
C. EXECUTION:
1 . Condition of Surfaces : Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly
attached lay in panels for unevenness, irregularities that would affect quality or
execution of work. Install ceiling system in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed specifications .
2. Cleaning : Clean soiled units after installation.
i 3 • Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units.
09510- 1
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas .
c. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section to whatever extent
not completed at the shop or prior to installation of casework.
d. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to
Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural casework being without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
e . Caulk top of backsplash at walls with G.E. Silicone Sealant or equal . If wall varies
over 1 /8 " at back splash, the wall is to be re-plastered to correct waves .
f. All casework to receive rubber base at the portion that touched the floor.
* * *END OF SECTION "
12290-8
SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
l
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to the
work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION.
A. Extent of metal building systems work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and
as herein specified.
B . Rigid frame, clear span (RF) is a continuous frame building with a minimum roof
slope of 1 : 12 and a maximum roof slope of 4 : 12 consisting of uniform depth or
tapered columns and rafters. Building roof slopes are called out on building plan
sections .
1 . 03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A . Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly
execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of
other sections, including:
Cast in Place Concrete Section 03300
Unit Masonry Section 04200
Reinforced Unit Masonry Section 04230
Structural Steel Section 05120
Metal Decking - - Section 05300
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600
Joint Sealers Section 07900
Lay in Panel Ceilings
Painting Section 09510
Section 09900
Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Work Divisions 15 & 16
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the earliest possible date to insure timely
delivery and proper coordination of work by others. No variation from design sizes
will be permitted, but recommendations for modification of connections or details to
better suit fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed , in
writing to the attention of the Architect. Detailed shop drawings and design
calculations, prepared by the Building System Manufacturer, shall be signed and
sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
13122-1
Door Index Page 3
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading Door No . Heading
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 2
5 4
6 5
] 6
8 ]
9 8
10 SA
11 9
12 5A
13 9
14 9
15 30
16 10
17 11
16 11
19 11
20 11
21 7A
22 12
23 6
24 5
9999 13
SCHEDULE OF SELECTED CEILINGS :
Project: I.R.C. Parks Maintenance Complex l
� J
Location Tyne Lav In Panel & Grid
As Shown on Drawings A. ARMSTRONG 24" X 48 " X 5/8 " , Fissured , 4755NF ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" square lay-in . Color: White, with
15/16" Prelude suspension system . Color- White.
As Shown on Drawings B . . ARMSTRONG 24" X 24" X 5/8 " , Tundra, 4303 ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" beveled tegular edge, Color : White,
with 15/ 16" Prelude suspension system .Color-White.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09510-2
SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
l
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to the
work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION.
A. Extent of metal building systems work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and
as herein specified.
B . Rigid frame, clear span (RF) is a continuous frame building with a minimum roof
slope of 1 : 12 and a maximum roof slope of 4 : 12 consisting of uniform depth or
tapered columns and rafters. Building roof slopes are called out on building plan
sections .
1 . 03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A . Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly
execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of
other sections, including:
Cast in Place Concrete Section 03300
Unit Masonry Section 04200
Reinforced Unit Masonry Section 04230
Structural Steel Section 05120
Metal Decking - - Section 05300
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600
Joint Sealers Section 07900
Lay in Panel Ceilings
Painting Section 09510
Section 09900
Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Work Divisions 15 & 16
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the earliest possible date to insure timely
delivery and proper coordination of work by others. No variation from design sizes
will be permitted, but recommendations for modification of connections or details to
better suit fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed , in
writing to the attention of the Architect. Detailed shop drawings and design
calculations, prepared by the Building System Manufacturer, shall be signed and
sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
13122-1
B . Shop drawings shall include erection plans, details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and j
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained. Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by the Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the Building System Manufacturer' s and Architect' s
(or the Architect' s subcontracted Structural Engineer review stamp) shall be used in
field and all other shop drawings will be considered void.
Work under this section includes
mensions to be
E confirmed in he fabrication processes n gconstruction.
and to t chlelated and
ues of
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members that are required by other trades .
1 . 05 BUILDING ANCHORAGE AND FOUNDATION
A. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column
reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. American
Buildings Company or the approved Building System Manufacturer shall specify
these designs and sizes. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the contractor not the
Building System Manufacturer. `/
B . Refer to Structural Plans and details for engineered foundation and connection
requirements .
1 . 06 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
A. All structural mill sections or welded up plate sections shall be designed in
accordance with AISC' s latest "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ."
B . All cold-formed steel structural members shall be designed in accordance with
AISI ' s latest "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members ."
C . Design loads shall be in accordance with the Florida Building Code latest edition
and as per plans .
D . Limit lateral drift of the metal building as indicated on the structural drawings .
1 .07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. GENERAL: Structural assemblies, shop and field welding, shall meet the
requirements of the AISC specifications. The Building System Manufacturer shall
be a member of the MBMA and the building shall conform to MBMA publication
"Metal Building Systems Manual", latest edition. The use of salvaged, reprocessed
or scrap materials shall not be permitted. 13122-2
SECTION 09655 - VINU TRANSITION MOLDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
quarry Provide vinyl transition strips wherever carpet abuts vinyl flooring systems ceramic
determine
porcelain flooring systems. Refer to the lnteriars or Floor Plan Drawings
determine the actual model n � azoic,
umbers specifed and locations, wings to
1 .03 QU�I'1'I' ASSURANCE:
Acceptable Manufacturer: Select product of the
equals: following manufacturer cr approved
TARKETT
JOHNSONITE
MERCER PRODUCTS COMPANY INC
MACKLANBURG-DUNCAN
FLEXCO COMPANY
GENOTEK
1.04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples: Submit samples
color selection, of all materials specified in this Section for a
pproval and
C. Maintenance Data: Furnish
procedures. list of recommended maintenance methods and
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver and Store on the site in ori
until time of use. ginal containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact
1. 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
dTempeinature of the rooms shall be 70 F. (2I CO) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
urg installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
09655-1
B . Shop drawings shall include erection plans, details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and j
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained. Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by the Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the Building System Manufacturer' s and Architect' s
(or the Architect' s subcontracted Structural Engineer review stamp) shall be used in
field and all other shop drawings will be considered void.
Work under this section includes
mensions to be
E confirmed in he fabrication processes n gconstruction.
and to t chlelated and
ues of
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members that are required by other trades .
1 . 05 BUILDING ANCHORAGE AND FOUNDATION
A. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column
reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. American
Buildings Company or the approved Building System Manufacturer shall specify
these designs and sizes. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the contractor not the
Building System Manufacturer. `/
B . Refer to Structural Plans and details for engineered foundation and connection
requirements .
1 . 06 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
A. All structural mill sections or welded up plate sections shall be designed in
accordance with AISC' s latest "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ."
B . All cold-formed steel structural members shall be designed in accordance with
AISI ' s latest "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members ."
C . Design loads shall be in accordance with the Florida Building Code latest edition
and as per plans .
D . Limit lateral drift of the metal building as indicated on the structural drawings .
1 .07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. GENERAL: Structural assemblies, shop and field welding, shall meet the
requirements of the AISC specifications. The Building System Manufacturer shall
be a member of the MBMA and the building shall conform to MBMA publication
"Metal Building Systems Manual", latest edition. The use of salvaged, reprocessed
or scrap materials shall not be permitted. 13122-2
B . WARRANTIES : The Building manufacturer shall supply the following minimum
warranties :
L BUILDING WARRANTY- manufacturer shall certify that all material and/or
accessories are warranted for a period of one year after delivery against failures
caused by faulty or substandard materials or accessories .
2 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARRANTY (Chalk Rating) :
a. Will not chalk for a period often ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
Panels inclined 16 degrees to 85 degrees from vertical, and will not chalk in
excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
b . Will not chalk for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined not more than 15 degrees from vertical, and will
not chalk in excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when
tested in accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
3 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARANTY (Fade Rating) :
a. Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
panels inclined 16 degrees to 86 degrees from vertical as determined by the
i procedure outlined in ASTM-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess of 5
delta E (Hunter) units for a period often ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244 .
b . Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined more than 15 degrees from vertical as determined
by the procedure outlined in ASTIVl-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess
of 5 delta E (Hunter) units for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244.
4. GALVALUME ROOF PANELS :
a. Will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate within a period of twenty (20)
years after shipment from the building supplier' s plant.
5 . WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY: The Purchaser and Building Systems
Manufacturer shall warrant to the Original Owner that the purchaser shall
repair, or stop any roof leaks due to ordinary wear and tear by the elements, for
a period of ten ( 10) years following the installation of the completed roof
assembly.
C . INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS : The Contractor erecting the metal building
i
shall be thoroughly trained in the Building System Manufacturer' s recommended
methods and procedures as approved by the Building System Manufacturer.
Erecting Contractor shall be licensed or otherwise approved by Building System
Manufacturer.
13122-3
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 4
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 1
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM RECEPTION 1 90 - LHR
TYPE AL 310 " X 716 " ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS & FRAME
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
BALANCE OF HARDWARE PROVIDED BY
STOREFRONT CONTRACTOR .
Heading # 2
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " -
X 13 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE V BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
2 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F . X 996L - R&V LHR US26D/ US32D VO E1
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 2 , 4 )
2 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 . X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
I
I
PART2 - PRODUCT
2 .01 Shall consist of 100% first quality homopolymer,vinyl accessories to act as an edge trim or
transition between dissimilar flooring materials . All trim shall meet the requirements of
the ADA sections 4. 5.2 (changes in level) and 4.5 .3 (carpet-edge trim compliance) .
Colors shall be clear through as indicated on the Interior Drawings.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 .01 Pursuant to manufacturer' s published instructions and RFCI "Recommended Work
Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings" .
3 .02 Lay materials true to line, level, and with tight butt and miter joints.
3 .03 Installations shall be at interior spaces only .
3 .04 Secure the base strips with manufacturer approved adhesives and remove all excess
adhesives with approved thinners upon completion of installations.
PART 4 - WARRANTY
4.01 Manufacturer' s full warranty shall apply.
** * END OF SECTION * * *
09655-2
B . WARRANTIES : The Building manufacturer shall supply the following minimum
warranties :
L BUILDING WARRANTY- manufacturer shall certify that all material and/or
accessories are warranted for a period of one year after delivery against failures
caused by faulty or substandard materials or accessories .
2 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARRANTY (Chalk Rating) :
a. Will not chalk for a period often ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
Panels inclined 16 degrees to 85 degrees from vertical, and will not chalk in
excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
b . Will not chalk for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined not more than 15 degrees from vertical, and will
not chalk in excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when
tested in accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
3 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARANTY (Fade Rating) :
a. Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
panels inclined 16 degrees to 86 degrees from vertical as determined by the
i procedure outlined in ASTM-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess of 5
delta E (Hunter) units for a period often ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244 .
b . Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined more than 15 degrees from vertical as determined
by the procedure outlined in ASTIVl-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess
of 5 delta E (Hunter) units for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244.
4. GALVALUME ROOF PANELS :
a. Will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate within a period of twenty (20)
years after shipment from the building supplier' s plant.
5 . WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY: The Purchaser and Building Systems
Manufacturer shall warrant to the Original Owner that the purchaser shall
repair, or stop any roof leaks due to ordinary wear and tear by the elements, for
a period of ten ( 10) years following the installation of the completed roof
assembly.
C . INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS : The Contractor erecting the metal building
i
shall be thoroughly trained in the Building System Manufacturer' s recommended
methods and procedures as approved by the Building System Manufacturer.
Erecting Contractor shall be licensed or otherwise approved by Building System
Manufacturer.
13122-3
D . RESPONSIBILITY : The Building System Manufacturer shall be responsible or
engineering design and fabrication to meet the specified Regulatory Requirements
and design loads specific herein. The Building System Manufacturer shall also be
responsible for any damages caused by failure to clearly indicate in their submittals
all structural reactions to the foundation system, including those imposed by
secondary members and bracing. All required engineering documentation shall be
signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
E . COORDINATION : The metal building supplier shall coordinate, with the
Contractor, all foundation dimensions and proper placement of all anchor bolts and
related items .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. This specification is based on Building Systems and Components as manufactured
by American Buildings Company .
B . Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include , but are
not limited to the following:
1 . Butler Manufacturing Company _
2 . Ceco Buildings Division
3 . V arco -Pruden Buildings
4 . Metallic Building Company
5 . Whirlwind Building System
6 . Gulf States Manufacturing
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Primary Framing Steel:
1 . Steel for hot-rolled structural sections shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM Specification A-36 .
ld-up sections
be
-PSI minimum yield steel,
2 . Steel or
comparto or exceeding the requirements rablents of ASTM 1570 for sheets and
strips .
B framingSecondary steel to form
struts sections
hall be 5000 mlcomparable to or the
mpurlins ,
requirements of ASTM A570.
C . Roof panel material as specified should be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume
steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield steel and
must meet FBC2003 required impact ratings.
shall be 50,000-PSI. All roof panels
13122-4
SECTION 09680 - CARPETING : COMMERCIAL APPLICATION
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall go over the work under this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Provide commercial grade carpeting, edge trim and related items and the
installation. Refer to Section 09655. ir
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
Acceptable Manufacture
B. LEES r: Select product of the following manufacturer or a
COMMERCIAL CARPETS
B . COMMERCIAL
approved equal .
C. DUPONT ANTRON
D. ATLAS CARPET MILLS
E. LOTUS CARPETS_.
F. J & J INDUSTRIES
G. SHAW INDUSTRIES
H. COLLINS AND AIKMAN
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
a ,
A. . Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions
for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples : Submit samples of all materials specified in this Section for
color selection.
approval and
C• Maintenance Data : furnish list of recommended maintenance products and
recommended maintenance methods and procedures.
1 .05 PRODUCT HANDLING :
Deliver and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use.
09680-1
D . RESPONSIBILITY : The Building System Manufacturer shall be responsible or
engineering design and fabrication to meet the specified Regulatory Requirements
and design loads specific herein. The Building System Manufacturer shall also be
responsible for any damages caused by failure to clearly indicate in their submittals
all structural reactions to the foundation system, including those imposed by
secondary members and bracing. All required engineering documentation shall be
signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
E . COORDINATION : The metal building supplier shall coordinate, with the
Contractor, all foundation dimensions and proper placement of all anchor bolts and
related items .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. This specification is based on Building Systems and Components as manufactured
by American Buildings Company .
B . Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include , but are
not limited to the following:
1 . Butler Manufacturing Company _
2 . Ceco Buildings Division
3 . V arco -Pruden Buildings
4 . Metallic Building Company
5 . Whirlwind Building System
6 . Gulf States Manufacturing
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Primary Framing Steel:
1 . Steel for hot-rolled structural sections shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM Specification A-36 .
ld-up sections
be
-PSI minimum yield steel,
2 . Steel or
comparto or exceeding the requirements rablents of ASTM 1570 for sheets and
strips .
B framingSecondary steel to form
struts sections
hall be 5000 mlcomparable to or the
mpurlins ,
requirements of ASTM A570.
C . Roof panel material as specified should be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume
steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield steel and
must meet FBC2003 required impact ratings.
shall be 50,000-PSI. All roof panels
13122-4
D. Wall panel material as specified shall be 242 26, or 28 gauge zinc coated or
galvalume steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield
steel shall be 50,000-PSI. All wall Panels must meet FBC 2003 required impact
ratings .
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A. General :
1 . All framing members shall be shop fabricated for field bolted assembly. The
surfaces of the bolted connections shall be smooth and free from burrs or
distortions .
2 . All shop connections shall be in accordance with the American Welding
Society Code for Building Construction. Certification of welder
qualification will be furnished when required and specified.
3 . All framing members where necessary shall carry an easily visible
identifying mark.
B . Primary Framing:
1 Rigid Frame : All rigid frames shall be welded, built-up "P' sections. The
columns and the rafters may be either uniform depth or tapered.
2 • Plates, stiffeners, etc . : All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners
shall be factory welded into place on the structural members.
3 . Bolt Holes, etc. : All base plates, splice plates and flanges shall be shop
fabricated to include cable brace or rod brace holes and flange brace holes .
C . Secondary Framing:
I • Purlins and girts shall be cold-formed "Z" or "C" sections with stiffened
flanges . They shall be pre-punched at the factory to provide for field bolting
to the rigid frames. They shall be simple or continuous span as required by
design .
2 . Girts supporting masonry at top of walls shall be "F' sections.
3 . Eave struts shall be unequal flange cold-formed "C" sections.
D. Bracing :
1 . Diagonal Bracing in the roof shall be used to remove longitudinal loads
(wind, crane, etc.) from the structure. This bracing will be furnished to
length and equipped with bevel washers and nuts at each end. It will consist
13122-5
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 5
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 3
1 SGL DOOR 3 EXTERIOR FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Bl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1/ 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 POWER TRANSFER EPT 10 SP28 VO E10
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X E996L - R&V LHR US26D / US32D VO E2
425 - SNB ( QTY - 4 ) 06
( 3 )
1 RIM CYLINDER 20 - 057 ICX 626 SC Al
1 POWER SUPPLY PS873 X2 VO Ell
1 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF W1
4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
1 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " - PE W7
1 THRESHOLD 2005- AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
CARD READER PROVIDED BY SECURITY
CONTRACTOR
COMPLIES NOR 08 - 0715 . 03 + / - 60 PSF
r�v�s� zi>� Ra9
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQI)MMENTS:
Temperature of the rooms shall be 70 F . (21 C.) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
A, Products:
1 Carpet & Pad: Color and style to be selected by the Owner, the Architect, or
the Interior Designer.
B . Materials:
l . Provide a commercial-grade nylon carpet with bonded cushion meeting the
following minimum requirement:
a. TOLERANCES : Specifications are subject to the standard industry
manufacturing tolerances of plus or minus 51%.
b. FLAMMABILITY RATINGS : Shall meet all local , state and federal
requirements for carpet installed in public facilities. Shall meet the
requirements of DAD -C-95 , DOC-FF1 -70, and ASTM-D2859-70T
(pill and Tablet Tests) on the face and on the back. The carpet and
pad, as an assembly, in corridors, stair-ways and other means of
critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts/sq.
egress, shall have a minimum
-950 Flooring Radiant Panel Test
cm. as determined by NBS-IR-75
(NFPA 253 , ASTM-E-648) .
c, ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY: Carpet construction shall contain no
formaldehyde or 4-PC and no significant levels of other volatile
organic chemicals which are known to contribute to the "Sick-
Building Syndrome." Carpet shall have GRI (Green Label
Registration) for a low VOC emitter.
d, PILE YARN: 1235/2 - 100% continuous-filament Type 6.6 soil-
hiding solution-dyed nylon with permanent static-control system.
e. STATIC CONTROL: Carpet shall be furnished with a permanent
static-control system within the face yam to reduce the level of
electrostatic voltage built up in the floor covering below the normal
threshold of human sensitivity, measured at 2500-3500 static volts at
70 degrees F and 20% relative humidity.
f, ANTIMICROBIAL: A permanent, nonleaching antimicrobial shall
be built into the carpet construction.
9. DYE METHOD: Solution-dyed yam system.
09680-2
D. Wall panel material as specified shall be 242 26, or 28 gauge zinc coated or
galvalume steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield
steel shall be 50,000-PSI. All wall Panels must meet FBC 2003 required impact
ratings .
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A. General :
1 . All framing members shall be shop fabricated for field bolted assembly. The
surfaces of the bolted connections shall be smooth and free from burrs or
distortions .
2 . All shop connections shall be in accordance with the American Welding
Society Code for Building Construction. Certification of welder
qualification will be furnished when required and specified.
3 . All framing members where necessary shall carry an easily visible
identifying mark.
B . Primary Framing:
1 Rigid Frame : All rigid frames shall be welded, built-up "P' sections. The
columns and the rafters may be either uniform depth or tapered.
2 • Plates, stiffeners, etc . : All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners
shall be factory welded into place on the structural members.
3 . Bolt Holes, etc. : All base plates, splice plates and flanges shall be shop
fabricated to include cable brace or rod brace holes and flange brace holes .
C . Secondary Framing:
I • Purlins and girts shall be cold-formed "Z" or "C" sections with stiffened
flanges . They shall be pre-punched at the factory to provide for field bolting
to the rigid frames. They shall be simple or continuous span as required by
design .
2 . Girts supporting masonry at top of walls shall be "F' sections.
3 . Eave struts shall be unequal flange cold-formed "C" sections.
D. Bracing :
1 . Diagonal Bracing in the roof shall be used to remove longitudinal loads
(wind, crane, etc.) from the structure. This bracing will be furnished to
length and equipped with bevel washers and nuts at each end. It will consist
13122-5
of rods threaded each end with suitable threaded end anchors . l
2 . Flange Braces_ The compression flange of all primary framing shall be
l / J
braced laterally with angles connecting to the webs of purlins or girts so that
the flange compressive stress is within allowable limits for any combination
of loadings .
3 . Special Bracing_ When diagonal bracing is not permitted in the sidewall , a
rigid frame type portal or fixed base column must be used. Wind bracing in
the roof and/or walls need not be furnished where it can be shown that the
diaphragm strength of the roof and/or wall covering is adequate to resist the
applied wind forces.
2 .04 ROOF COVERING
A . General :
1 . Roof Panels shall be American Buildings Company' s, or an approved
equal, Standing Seam II Panel and Loc-Seam Panel with panel widths as
indicated on the plans . Finish shall be galvalume or premium finish as called
out on plans .
2 . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II Roof Panels as specified
shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American �^
Building Company' s Premium 70 nar 500 finish .
3 . American Buildings Company ' s Loc Seam Panels as specified shall be 24 -
gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American Buildings
Company ' s Premium 70 K nar 500 finish .
NOTE : the profiles, hei hts color and centers called out on the plan sections
and details will take precedence over this spec section descri tion . Technical
descriptions of all other parts of this spec will apply.
B . Panel Description:
] . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II roof panel, or an
approved equal, shall have a configuration consisting of 2 " high (3 "
including seam) by 4-3 /4 " wide rib, spaced on 24 " centers . Panels shall be
joined at the side as with and interlocking seam standing 1 " above the major
rib. Each panel shall provide 24" net coverage in width. The female panel
seam shall have factory applied sealant.
2 . American Buildings Company' s Loc Seam Panel shall have a configuration
12" or 16" wide with V or 2 " high vertical male and female ribs. The
female seam shall have factory applied sealant. The panel seam shall be �
mechanically interlocked by a specially designed electric seaming machine .
13122-6
"PeUt510 2 MAL> 09
h• CONSTRUCTION: Manufactured through the back with fusion coat
to primary,
applied and secondary closed-cell vinyl cushion permanently fused
I• PITCH, (gauge) : 351 (1 /13 ga.) min.
J • ROWS PER INCH: 20 min.
k• DENSITY: 130 pile tufts/SI min., 6000 density units per formula:
D = 36W D = Density
T W — Pile Weight
T = Pile Thickness
I• PILE HEIGHT: . 125 (1 /8 ") average
In. PILE WEIGHT: 20 oz./Sy min.
M PRIMARY BACKING: 100% synthetic materials, bacteriostatic and
fungistatic, nonallergenic. Shall not mildew, decompose, shrink or
support odor. No organic materials (jute, cotton, kraftcord or
fiberlok) shall be used.
0• FUSION COAT: Vinyl sealant and fusion coat to provide an
effective soil and moisture barrier and sufficient tuft bind to prevent
"Zippering" or edge ravel of surface pile.
P_ SECONDARY BACKING: Carpet shall be permanently fused to
premium-quality, closed-cell vinyl cushion, 5/32" thick, cushion
weight 35. 5 oz./SY, density 18. 5 lbs./CF, compression deflection
min. 71bs./SI, compression set max. 10% (ASTMD- 1667-70).
q• TOTAL WEIGHT: 75 oz./Sy min.
2• MANUFACTURER WARRANTY: 10 year ronprorated warranty against
backing.
C wear, zippering, edge ravel or delamination of secondary
backiCushion resiliency warranted for the life of the carpet.
C. INSTALLATION:
1 • Clean surfaces to be carpeted; scrape up cementitious and resinous deposits;
vacuum, apply sealer on concrete surfaces, adequate to prevent dusting.
09680-3
of rods threaded each end with suitable threaded end anchors . l
2 . Flange Braces_ The compression flange of all primary framing shall be
l / J
braced laterally with angles connecting to the webs of purlins or girts so that
the flange compressive stress is within allowable limits for any combination
of loadings .
3 . Special Bracing_ When diagonal bracing is not permitted in the sidewall , a
rigid frame type portal or fixed base column must be used. Wind bracing in
the roof and/or walls need not be furnished where it can be shown that the
diaphragm strength of the roof and/or wall covering is adequate to resist the
applied wind forces.
2 .04 ROOF COVERING
A . General :
1 . Roof Panels shall be American Buildings Company' s, or an approved
equal, Standing Seam II Panel and Loc-Seam Panel with panel widths as
indicated on the plans . Finish shall be galvalume or premium finish as called
out on plans .
2 . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II Roof Panels as specified
shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American �^
Building Company' s Premium 70 nar 500 finish .
3 . American Buildings Company ' s Loc Seam Panels as specified shall be 24 -
gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American Buildings
Company ' s Premium 70 K nar 500 finish .
NOTE : the profiles, hei hts color and centers called out on the plan sections
and details will take precedence over this spec section descri tion . Technical
descriptions of all other parts of this spec will apply.
B . Panel Description:
] . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II roof panel, or an
approved equal, shall have a configuration consisting of 2 " high (3 "
including seam) by 4-3 /4 " wide rib, spaced on 24 " centers . Panels shall be
joined at the side as with and interlocking seam standing 1 " above the major
rib. Each panel shall provide 24" net coverage in width. The female panel
seam shall have factory applied sealant.
2 . American Buildings Company' s Loc Seam Panel shall have a configuration
12" or 16" wide with V or 2 " high vertical male and female ribs. The
female seam shall have factory applied sealant. The panel seam shall be �
mechanically interlocked by a specially designed electric seaming machine .
13122-6
REIlIStr p Q o 4
B. Panel Length: MAR //
I • All roof panels shall be continuous from cave to ridge,
2. 05 MISCELLANEOUS with no end splices.
A• Fasteners:
I • Structural Bolts_ All bolts used in frame splices and in
secondary framing to primary framing connections ofshall be ASTM A307 or ASTM A325
as required by design,
2• Fasteners for the Roof Panel Clips; All Standing Seam lI and Loc-Seam
Panel clips shall be attached to the purlins by means of self-drilling screws,
made of carbon steel No. 12014 x 1 1/4 " hex washer head, cadmium or zinc
Plated- Insure that the fasteners
blanket insulation 6" thick, ' are applicable for use with fiberglass
3 . All Blind Fasteners shall be 1/8 " diameter, high-strength aluminum pop
rivets Type AAp
4. Fasteners for Wall Panels shall be supplied by panel manufacturer and ma
be exposed, semi-concealed, or concealed, and shall m hex washer head,
cadmium or zinc plated. y
2 .06 PANEL CLIPS
A. Panel Clips for the Standing Seam II Roof Panel shall be expansion clips (SSPC
series), two-part assembly. The clip portion shall be 2 %2" wide. The clip portion
shall be die formed SAE 1050 high carbon spring steel and heat treated to Rockwell
45C to SOC; The clip portion shall have a fluorocarbon coating for corrosion
in heig
resistance. The base portion of the clip shall be 2 '/ " or 3 1_/44" for the
ht and 4 3/4" in width. The base shall be die formed from blocks)
galvanized steel. Total expansion capability of the clip 12 assembly shallgauge u 2Y2 tr.
B . Panel Clips (LSEC series) for the Loc-Seam Panel shall be of a two part assembly.
The clip portion shall be a nominal 2 3/8 " or 3 1 /8 " (for thermal blocks) in height
and 3 " in width. The clip
rmed
galvalume steel. The bashall be diel formed be die18 au 2e gauge zinc coated steel or
expansion capability of the clip shall be 1 1/4", g g galvanized steel. Total
2. 07 SEALANTS
A. Closure strips: The corrugations of the roof panels shall be filled with solid or
ridged-cell, preformed rubb
ridge and rake. er, neoprene or polyethylene closures along the cave,
B . Sealing Compounds shall be as specified by the roofing manufacturer.
13122-7
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 6
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
I
i
Heading # 4
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM ELECTRIC / PHONE 6 90 - RHR
i
TYPE D1 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC Ll
10 - 072 ( 5 )
1 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE WS
84 "
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6 i
1 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ' 0 " SF Wl
. 4 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2 i
1 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
Heading # 5
1 SGL DOOR 6 RECEPTION 1 TO MEETING ROOM 3 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 24 EXIT CORRIDOR 22 TO BREAK ROOM 4 90 - RH i
TYPE _A1 - 45 310 " X 710 " X . 1 - 3 / 411 NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC1
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 23GW US32D HA S1
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
i
2 . Pre-plan installation for uniform direction of pattern and lay of pile, and proper
sequencing with other work. Locate seams properly centered under doors and
without seams in direction of traffic as doorways and similar traffic patterns.
Extend carpet under removable obstructions and into closets and alcoves .
3 . Provide stretch-in-tackless installation, using glued and/or nailed tackless stripping .
with edges of carpet concealed. Tape and/or sew seams , after buttering trimmed
edges with seaming cement.
4. Cement cushion to substrate, with taped seams running at 90 degree angle with
carpet seams .
5 . Stretch carpet both directions in accordance with mill ' s instructions ; use power
stretchers except where space is too small .
6. Provide glue- down installation by trimming and fitting carpet widths into each
space prior to application of adhesive . Apply adhesive, butter cut edges with
seaming cement, butting edges tightly together, and roll lightly.
7 . Install edge guards at exposed edges. Bind edges with cloth tape and thread where
not concealable .
8 . Clean adhesive and cement from face of carpet promptly ; replace carpet which
cannot be cleaned .
9 . Save carpet scraps, defined as mill ends less that 9' long, and pieces larger than 3
sq . ft. in area and wider than 8 " , and deliver to Owner' s storage space as directed .
Dispose of smaller pieces.
10 . Vacuum completed carpet installation with beater-in-nozzle type commercial
vacuum cleaner.
11 . Contractor is responsible for providing commercial carpet samples in Owner ' s
preferred color for final approval.
12 . Provide vinyl transition strips at any carpet-to-tile intersections and as shown on
drawings as manufactured by Tarkett or an approved, comparable product. Color to
be as selected by the Owner and the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09680-4
REIlIStr p Q o 4
B. Panel Length: MAR //
I • All roof panels shall be continuous from cave to ridge,
2. 05 MISCELLANEOUS with no end splices.
A• Fasteners:
I • Structural Bolts_ All bolts used in frame splices and in
secondary framing to primary framing connections ofshall be ASTM A307 or ASTM A325
as required by design,
2• Fasteners for the Roof Panel Clips; All Standing Seam lI and Loc-Seam
Panel clips shall be attached to the purlins by means of self-drilling screws,
made of carbon steel No. 12014 x 1 1/4 " hex washer head, cadmium or zinc
Plated- Insure that the fasteners
blanket insulation 6" thick, ' are applicable for use with fiberglass
3 . All Blind Fasteners shall be 1/8 " diameter, high-strength aluminum pop
rivets Type AAp
4. Fasteners for Wall Panels shall be supplied by panel manufacturer and ma
be exposed, semi-concealed, or concealed, and shall m hex washer head,
cadmium or zinc plated. y
2 .06 PANEL CLIPS
A. Panel Clips for the Standing Seam II Roof Panel shall be expansion clips (SSPC
series), two-part assembly. The clip portion shall be 2 %2" wide. The clip portion
shall be die formed SAE 1050 high carbon spring steel and heat treated to Rockwell
45C to SOC; The clip portion shall have a fluorocarbon coating for corrosion
in heig
resistance. The base portion of the clip shall be 2 '/ " or 3 1_/44" for the
ht and 4 3/4" in width. The base shall be die formed from blocks)
galvanized steel. Total expansion capability of the clip 12 assembly shallgauge u 2Y2 tr.
B . Panel Clips (LSEC series) for the Loc-Seam Panel shall be of a two part assembly.
The clip portion shall be a nominal 2 3/8 " or 3 1 /8 " (for thermal blocks) in height
and 3 " in width. The clip
rmed
galvalume steel. The bashall be diel formed be die18 au 2e gauge zinc coated steel or
expansion capability of the clip shall be 1 1/4", g g galvanized steel. Total
2. 07 SEALANTS
A. Closure strips: The corrugations of the roof panels shall be filled with solid or
ridged-cell, preformed rubb
ridge and rake. er, neoprene or polyethylene closures along the cave,
B . Sealing Compounds shall be as specified by the roofing manufacturer.
13122-7
C . Panels side laps shall have factory-applied mastic, Chemseco Sealum SM- 5320T
equal . Its composition shall be 85% to 90% solids by weight . Service temperature
range shall be 60 degree F to +225 degree F .
D . Caulk_ All gutter and downspout joints, rake flashing laps, ridge flashing laps shall
be sealed with white pigmented caulk, Sika Sikaflex 201 or equal . It shall meet of
exceed the requirements of Federal Specification TT-S -00230C, Type II, Class A.
2 . 08 GUTTER FLASHING AND DOWNSPOUT
A. Gutters and Flashing : All standard exterior gutters are 24-gauge aluminum coated
steel with a pre-painted finish in white. Standard rake flashing is 26-gauge
aluminum coated steel with a pre-painted finish in white. In no case shall flashing
be less than 26 gauge steel . Sizes as called out on plans.
B . Downspouts : All downspouts shall be 28 -gauge aluminum coated steel with color
coordinated, pre-painted finish, rectangular in shape .
2 . 09 STRUCTURAL PAINTING
A . All steel framing members shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and lose scale and
given one mil coat of red oxide primer prior to being delivered to the job site.
Primer shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification
TT-P636D . Primer is not intended as a finish coat.
B . Abrasions caused by handling after painting are to be expected . Primer shall be
famished to touch-up these areas by the contractor performing field touch-up of
field painting as specified in the contract documents .
C . Any interior primary structural steel members to receive spray on fire protection
shall not be shop primed. Priming voids the UL Assembly rating.
2 . 10 PANEL FINISH
A. Base Metal shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel .
B . Prime Coat: The base metal shall be pretreated and then primed with an approved
epoxy primer per the metal roofing suppliers standard paint specification.
C . Exterior Coat_ After priming, the exterior side shall be given a finish coat of a 70%
minimum Kynar 500 (PVF2) formulation. The topcoat thickness shall be . 8 mils
minimum. The total film thickness shall be . 9 mils to 1 . 1 mils .
D . Finish shall meet or exceed the following:
I . Accelerated Weathering: No noticeable chalking, fading, loss of adhesion or
other coating deterioration after 2,000 hours (ASTM G-23) .
13122-8
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1 .01 GENERAL:
1 - Submittals :
a. In addition to manufacturer' s data, application instructions, and label
analysis for each coating material, submit samples for Architect ' s review of
color and texture only. Resubmit samples if requested until required sheen,
color and texture is achieved . .
b. On 8 " x 8 " hardboard, provide two (2) samples of each color and material,
With texture to simulate finish conditions.
C. On wood surfaces provide two (2) 4 " x 8 " samples for natural and stained
wood finish.
d. On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted
finishes of acceptable samples, for approval by the Architect.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 - Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless otherwise ,
indicated.
2 . Paint exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are
designated. If not designated, colors will be selected by Architect from standard
colors available for the coatings required.
3 . Work Not Included: Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming -of ferrous metal
items and fabricated components are included under their respective trades. Unless
otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces of concealed areas. Finished
metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, and similar metals will
not be painted. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or over any
equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code-
required labels.
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE :
1 • Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing
manufacturer' s name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where indicated in
accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
1.04 PROTAN:
% 1 • Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damage, by cleaning,
repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Architect.
09900-1
C . Panels side laps shall have factory-applied mastic, Chemseco Sealum SM- 5320T
equal . Its composition shall be 85% to 90% solids by weight . Service temperature
range shall be 60 degree F to +225 degree F .
D . Caulk_ All gutter and downspout joints, rake flashing laps, ridge flashing laps shall
be sealed with white pigmented caulk, Sika Sikaflex 201 or equal . It shall meet of
exceed the requirements of Federal Specification TT-S -00230C, Type II, Class A.
2 . 08 GUTTER FLASHING AND DOWNSPOUT
A. Gutters and Flashing : All standard exterior gutters are 24-gauge aluminum coated
steel with a pre-painted finish in white. Standard rake flashing is 26-gauge
aluminum coated steel with a pre-painted finish in white. In no case shall flashing
be less than 26 gauge steel . Sizes as called out on plans.
B . Downspouts : All downspouts shall be 28 -gauge aluminum coated steel with color
coordinated, pre-painted finish, rectangular in shape .
2 . 09 STRUCTURAL PAINTING
A . All steel framing members shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and lose scale and
given one mil coat of red oxide primer prior to being delivered to the job site.
Primer shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification
TT-P636D . Primer is not intended as a finish coat.
B . Abrasions caused by handling after painting are to be expected . Primer shall be
famished to touch-up these areas by the contractor performing field touch-up of
field painting as specified in the contract documents .
C . Any interior primary structural steel members to receive spray on fire protection
shall not be shop primed. Priming voids the UL Assembly rating.
2 . 10 PANEL FINISH
A. Base Metal shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel .
B . Prime Coat: The base metal shall be pretreated and then primed with an approved
epoxy primer per the metal roofing suppliers standard paint specification.
C . Exterior Coat_ After priming, the exterior side shall be given a finish coat of a 70%
minimum Kynar 500 (PVF2) formulation. The topcoat thickness shall be . 8 mils
minimum. The total film thickness shall be . 9 mils to 1 . 1 mils .
D . Finish shall meet or exceed the following:
I . Accelerated Weathering: No noticeable chalking, fading, loss of adhesion or
other coating deterioration after 2,000 hours (ASTM G-23) .
13122-8
2 . Humidity Resistance_ Less than 5 % of 48 blisters or no loss of adhesion
i
after 1 ,000 hours at 100% relative humidity, 100 degree F (ASTM D2247) .
3 . Adhesion: No coating was removed when tested according to ASTM D3359 .
4. Abrasion Resistance_ The coating shall have a coefficient of abrasion of
65 "/- 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-0968-81 , falling
sand abrasion test.
5 . Specular Gloss : The gloss rating shall be 24-35 units on a 60-degree gloss
meter when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-523 -80 .
6 . Color Retention: Maximum 4E units (Hunter) color change (STM D659).
7 . Chalk Resistance : Minimum rating of 9, (ASTM D659).
8 . Hardness : The coating shall have a minimum hardness of HB -H using Eagle
Turquoise pencils, (ASTM D3363 ).
9. Salt Spray_ The coating has been tested in a 5 % sodium chloride salt spray
for 1000 hours at 95 degrees F . , with less than 3/ 16 " creepage from the
scribe and less than 5 % no. 6 blisters . (ASTM BI 17) . `
E . The interior finish shall have one of the following :
1 . A gray polyester topcoat over an epoxy primer
2 . A . 15 mil epoxy primer and . 35 mil off-white backer
3 A wash coat of 70% Kynar resin of .03 to . 04 mil, dry film thickness over
primer.
4 . A polyester paint, not formulated for exterior weathering, of 1 mil minimum
total thickness over primer, or
5 . An acrylic wash coat, dry film thickness of . 3 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Erection practices shall conform to Section 6, Common Industry Practices found in
the "Low Rise Building Systems Manual", MBMA 1986 . There shall be no field
modifications to primary structural members except as authorized.
3 . 02 ERECTION
-J A. The erection of the metal building and the installation of accessories shall be
13122-9
' h
17 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 7
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading ## 5A
1 SGL DOOR 12 HALL 20 TO CONFERENCE 14 90 - LH
TYPE El 3101' X 790 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 PASSAGE SET ND10S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LCI
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
Heading # 6
1 SGL DOOR 7 HALL 19 FROM MEETING ROOM 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 23 HALL 22 FROM HALL 19 90 - LHR
TYPE Al - 45 3101' X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 / 4 HR " C " LABEL
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE RHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 7 )
1 FIRE EXIT DEVICE 98L - F X 996L - R&V - BE LHR US26D /US32D VO E3A
425 - SNB ( QTY - 6 ) 06
( 23 )
2 CLOSER 4041 EDA TBSRT AL LC C6
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 341" US32D HA F1
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D FIA S1A
2 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
2 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 434 ARL X 36 " PE W15
1 .05 PROJECT CONDITIONS : (; 1
I Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 98 degrees . Do not apply paints in rain, fog or
mist; when relative humidity exceeds 95 percent; at temperatures less than 5
degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
2 . Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier
coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Architect in writing of
anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrates primed by others .
3 . Surface Conditions : Apply paint and coatings when the following surface
conditions have been met:
a. Interior Drywall- 12% maximum moisture content.
b . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels- 12% maximum
moisture content.
c. Exposed Wood, Wood Doors, Wood Trim- 15 % maximum moisture
content.
1 .06 EXTRA MATERIALS :
I . Provide a minimum of 1 gallon of each material and color of paint as materials
applied that are packaged and stored with identification labels describing contents .
1 .07 SURFACE PREPARATION :
1 . Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer' s instructions of each substrate condition.
2 . Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and
similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied
protection. Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at
completion of work.
3 . Seal wood required to be job-painted. Prime edges, ends, face, undersides and
backsides of counters, cases, cabinets, counters, etc. Use varnish for back-priming
where transparent finish is required.
4 . Back-prime interior paneling only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
09900-2
2 . Humidity Resistance_ Less than 5 % of 48 blisters or no loss of adhesion
i
after 1 ,000 hours at 100% relative humidity, 100 degree F (ASTM D2247) .
3 . Adhesion: No coating was removed when tested according to ASTM D3359 .
4. Abrasion Resistance_ The coating shall have a coefficient of abrasion of
65 "/- 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-0968-81 , falling
sand abrasion test.
5 . Specular Gloss : The gloss rating shall be 24-35 units on a 60-degree gloss
meter when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-523 -80 .
6 . Color Retention: Maximum 4E units (Hunter) color change (STM D659).
7 . Chalk Resistance : Minimum rating of 9, (ASTM D659).
8 . Hardness : The coating shall have a minimum hardness of HB -H using Eagle
Turquoise pencils, (ASTM D3363 ).
9. Salt Spray_ The coating has been tested in a 5 % sodium chloride salt spray
for 1000 hours at 95 degrees F . , with less than 3/ 16 " creepage from the
scribe and less than 5 % no. 6 blisters . (ASTM BI 17) . `
E . The interior finish shall have one of the following :
1 . A gray polyester topcoat over an epoxy primer
2 . A . 15 mil epoxy primer and . 35 mil off-white backer
3 A wash coat of 70% Kynar resin of .03 to . 04 mil, dry film thickness over
primer.
4 . A polyester paint, not formulated for exterior weathering, of 1 mil minimum
total thickness over primer, or
5 . An acrylic wash coat, dry film thickness of . 3 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Erection practices shall conform to Section 6, Common Industry Practices found in
the "Low Rise Building Systems Manual", MBMA 1986 . There shall be no field
modifications to primary structural members except as authorized.
3 . 02 ERECTION
-J A. The erection of the metal building and the installation of accessories shall be
13122-9
performed in accordance with erection drawings by a qualified erector using proper
tools and equipment. )
B . Columns and Struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept ph during erection for which all temporary
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns .
C . The Contractor shall provide all necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary
struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc., that may be required to erect the structural frame
and maintain it in alignment until the building is completed.
D . Welding and Bolting of all connection shall follow the setting of the steel as closely
as plumbing and alignment will permit.
E. Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment and work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
F . Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure,
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect or personnel
having legitimate business at the site . Location of supports for derricks, hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studies and shall be reviewed by the
Architect if any questions arise .
G . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the specific written permission of the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
13122-10
5 . Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of wood doors with heavy coat of varnish or
similar sealer immediately upon delivery to job. Do not paint door UL Labels .
1 .08 MATERIAL PREPARATION :
1 Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
1 .09 APPLICATION :
1 • Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer' s
directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to
which applied, but in no case will spray
Architect. application be used unless approved by
2 • Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
final paint coat, until paint
3 . Paint surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only before
equipment is installed.
4 . Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and edges same as exterior faces, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not paint door UL Labels .
5 . Sand lightly between succeeding enamel, urethane or varnish coats.
6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch
up painted, unless otherwise specified.
7. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which
has not been prime coated by others .
8 . Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading
rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4. 0 mils for entire
coating system of prime and finish coats for (3) coat work.
9• Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 .5 mils for entire coating system
Of prime and finish coat for two (2) coat work.
1 . 10 COMPLETED WORK:
1 Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, finish or repaint
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
09900-3
performed in accordance with erection drawings by a qualified erector using proper
tools and equipment. )
B . Columns and Struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept ph during erection for which all temporary
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns .
C . The Contractor shall provide all necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary
struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc., that may be required to erect the structural frame
and maintain it in alignment until the building is completed.
D . Welding and Bolting of all connection shall follow the setting of the steel as closely
as plumbing and alignment will permit.
E. Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment and work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
F . Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure,
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect or personnel
having legitimate business at the site . Location of supports for derricks, hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studies and shall be reviewed by the
Architect if any questions arise .
G . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the specific written permission of the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
13122-10
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic
coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing.
B . Building Attachments : Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval
for fire-protection systems.
C . Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire-
protection systems .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping free of sags and bends .
B . Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections .
C . Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
concrete floor, and roof slabs.
D. Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations : Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast-iron pipes
for wall sleeves.
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations : Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material specified
in Division 7. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of
equipment.
F. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas,
compressed air, and vacuum piping.
G . Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings .to . connect -piping materials of dissimilar metals in
water and steam piping.
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page ] of 1
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 8
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading #{ 7
1 SGL DOOR 8 FILE STORAGE 10 FROM MECHANICAL ROOM 90 - RHR
TYPE E1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 CUSH TBSRT AL LC C5
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 SMOKE SEAL S88 D X 17 ' PE W20
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
1 AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 430 CRL X 36 " ( 8 ) LH PE W16
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APl
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 7A
1 SGL DOOR 21 LOUNGE 4 TO STORAGE 5 90 - RH
TYPE E1 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET N7D80TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC2
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
1 . 11 TOUCHING UP AND CLEANING :
I . Upon completion, all touching up as required shall be done and paint removed from )
all surfaces which are not specified to receive paint.
1 . 12 PAINT GENERAL:
A. Material Compatibility:
1 , Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience .
2 . For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing
by manufacturer' s of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate
indicated.
C . Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior paints and coatings : Provide
products that comply with the following limits for VOC (Volatile Organic
Compounds) content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59 , subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical
restrictions ; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop :
I . Flat paints and coatings: VOC content of not more than 50g/L.
2 . Nonflat Paints and coatings : VOC content of not more than 150 glL.
3 . Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 .0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings) .
4 . Restricted Components : Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolien.
b . Acrylonitrile .
C . Antimony.
d. Benzene.
C. Butyl benzyl phthalate .
f. Cadmium.
g. Di(2-ethylhexl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i . Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j . 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
1 . Dimethyl phthalate.
in. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
09900-4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic
coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing.
B . Building Attachments : Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval
for fire-protection systems.
C . Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire-
protection systems .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping free of sags and bends .
B . Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections .
C . Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
concrete floor, and roof slabs.
D. Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations : Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast-iron pipes
for wall sleeves.
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations : Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material specified
in Division 7. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of
equipment.
F. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas,
compressed air, and vacuum piping.
G . Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings .to . connect -piping materials of dissimilar metals in
water and steam piping.
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page ] of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
3 .2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A . Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel . Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
B Install powder-actuated
drive-pin ess than 4inches (100 mm)
sin concrete rtho k rete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concreten slab
C . Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches ( 100 mm) thick.
D . Support fire-protection system piping independent of other piping.
E. Load Distribution : Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
END OF SECTION 15055
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2
o• Hexavalent chromium .
P. Isophorone.
q . Lead .
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalane.
W. Toluene (methylbenzene) .
X . 1 , 1 , 1 -trichloroethane.
Y. Vinyl chloride.
1. 13 PAINTING SCHEDULE
The following paints specified shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturer' s or an approved, comparable product:
I • Benjamin Moore Paints
2• Sherwin Williams Paints
3 . Porter Paints
4. Devoe Paints
5 . MAB Paints
6. ICI Paints
7• Color Wheel Paints
8 . Armourcoat, USA
NOTE : Color selections to be by the Owner, the Architect, and/or the Interior Designer. See
Finishes Schedule on the plans for location of paint. When more than five (5) colors are selected
for interior or for exteriors, a painting upcharge shall be negotiated prior to application of paints.
A . Exterior wood Trim,
Wood Siding,
Fascias, Soffits, Etc. : One ( 1 ) coat sealer primer on all faces and edges. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Exterior Acrylic Latex paint on
exposed surfaces.
B. Interior Drywall; Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Regal AquaVelvet Eggshell
(319) over base sealer coat. Specialty finishes may apply
also.
C. Galvanized Metal : One ( 1 ) coat Benjamin Moore Galvanized Iron Primer. Two
(2) coats Benjamin Moore Meta-lastic Paint.
D . Metal Surfaces : Structural Steel Beams & Columns,
Steel Trusses, Steel Tanks :
09900-5
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
3 .2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A . Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel . Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
B Install powder-actuated
drive-pin ess than 4inches (100 mm)
sin concrete rtho k rete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concreten slab
C . Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches ( 100 mm) thick.
D . Support fire-protection system piping independent of other piping.
E. Load Distribution : Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
END OF SECTION 15055
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
li SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Summary: Mechanical insulation includes pipe and duct insulation for indoor applications .
B . Submit Product Data for each type of mechanical insulation
C . Quality Assurance : UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum
smoke- developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPE INSULATION
A. Preformed Glass-Fiber Pipe insulation : ASTM C 547, Class 1 , jacketed, with a k-value of
0.26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 10 16/cu. ft.
( 160 kg/cu . m) .
B . Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0 .30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
2 .2 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Insulation : ASTM C 612, Class 113, semirigid, jacketed board with a k-value of
0 .26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 12 Ib/cu . fr.
( 192 kg/cu. m).
B . Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation : ASTM C 553 , Type II, Class F1 , jacketed blankets with a k-
value of 0.31 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Sheet Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0.30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F
( 15 deg C).
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 1 of I
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 9
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 8
1 SGL DOOR 9 HALL 20 FROM ADMINISTRATION 18 90 - LHR
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H3
NRP
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 CLOSER 4041 HEDA TBSRT ( 9 ) RH AL LC C4
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
1 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA Sl
3 . DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
I
Heading ## 8A
1 SGL DOOR 10 HALL 20 TO FILE STORAGE 16 90 - RH
TYPE Al 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE 13B1279 4 '1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
1 LOCKSET ND70TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC4
10 - 025
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 4545 US32D GL S2
1 ANGLE JAMB BRACKET K AJK450 US32D GL S3
( MOUNT OH STOP ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
i
Exterior Exposed- Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Retard-X Rust Inhibitive
Latex Primer 162 over the shop delivered primer, welds and
bolts . Allow a minimum of 4 hours between coats . Finish i
with two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Eggshell alkyd house
paint 108 .
Interior Exposed- Same applications but one (1 ) coat only of primer and finish.
NOTE: All galvanized metal to be washed with mineral spirits to remove any oil .
E . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels :
One ( 1) coat Benjamin Moore Masonry sealer. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Latex paint.
F. Steel Doors & Frames :
Spot prime with Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust Inhabiter
Red Oxide. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust
Inhibiter (semi- gloss) .
G . Wood Doors and Trim (Painted) :
One (1 ) coat sealer primer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore
enamel.
H . Wood Doors and Trim (Sealed) : —
Three coats of Satin Finish clear urethane, lightly sanded rr
between coats .
J. Aluminum or Steel Handrails :
One coat metal primer and two coats shop applied industrial
enamel .
J - Exposed finish Grade Concrete Block:
One coat block filler and sealer primer. Specialty Paint over
primer in accordance with the Manufacturers Specifications .
g. Exterior Aluminum Tubing and Frames :
One coat metal primer and two coats field applied industrial
enamel utilizing a compressor and spray applicator. Protect
all surrounding finish work from overspray.
L . Exterior Architectural Masonry Units (such as decorative split faced, split ribbed,
and smooth faced colored block, and any manufactured stone such as Herpal),
including the mortar used to set the units, shall be sealed with a water repellent-anti
graffitti coating after installation and cleaning of all block faces . EXCEPTION : If
g ---- - - -
the block manufacturer supplies an ante ral water repellent admixture in their bloc
and a water repellent is added to the grout (mortar) during installation, then no
exterior sealer is required.
09900-6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
li SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Summary: Mechanical insulation includes pipe and duct insulation for indoor applications .
B . Submit Product Data for each type of mechanical insulation
C . Quality Assurance : UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum
smoke- developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPE INSULATION
A. Preformed Glass-Fiber Pipe insulation : ASTM C 547, Class 1 , jacketed, with a k-value of
0.26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 10 16/cu. ft.
( 160 kg/cu . m) .
B . Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0 .30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
2 .2 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Insulation : ASTM C 612, Class 113, semirigid, jacketed board with a k-value of
0 .26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 12 Ib/cu . fr.
( 192 kg/cu. m).
B . Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation : ASTM C 553 , Type II, Class F1 , jacketed blankets with a k-
value of 0.31 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Sheet Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0.30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F
( 15 deg C).
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 1 of I
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
B . Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties.
C . Seal vapor-barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections.
D . Coat glass-fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor-barrier coating.
E. Seal ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with adhesive .
F . Roof Penetrations : Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of
the roof flashing.
G . Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal .
H . Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
I . Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Terminate insulation at penetrations through
fire-rated walls and partitions . Seal around penetration with firestopping specified in
Division 7 .
J . Floor Penetrations : Terminate insulation at the underside of the . floor p assembly and at the
floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with firesto n s ecified in Division 7 .
K. Glass-Fiber Insulation Installation : Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and \
joints with vapor-barrier compound .
L . Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation : Seal joints with adhesive.
M . Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following Piping systems:
1 . Domestic hot water.
2 . Recirculated domestic hot water.
3 . Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water piping.
4 . Exposed sanitary drains for handicapped accessible fixtures.
5 . Hydronic heating and cooling piping.
6 . Refrigerant suction piping.
N . Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Flexible connectors .
2 . Fire-protection piping systems .
3 . Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
4 . Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated .
5 . Below-grade piping.
6 . Chrome-plated-pipes and fittings, -except-for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
7 . Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,
and flow regulators.
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 2 of 2
M. Toilet Room Walls :
Apply water base epoxy coating full height on the walls in toilet
rooms/bathrooms, to achieve an impervious finish . (See NOTE below).
(ON INTERIOR MASONRY) - Semigloss Finish using
Sherwin Williams Paints.
1 " coat: S-W KEM CATI-COAT EPDXYFILLER/SEALER 1342 WA8B42
WA9 (87- 108 sq. ft./gal @ 8- 10 mild dry).
21d coat : S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70B60 V25 .
V coat: S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70/B60 V25, Wails wet, 3
mils wet per coat).
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY EPDXY PAINTS TO ANY INTERIOR FACES OF BARE
BLOCK AT MASONRY EXTERIOR WALLS. UTILIZE LATEX PAINTS WITH
BREATHABILITY OF 1 PERM OR GREATER.
(ON DRYWALL) - Semi-Gloss Finish using Sherwin Williams Paints.
I " coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28 W20Q
dry). (4 mils wet, 1 .2 mils
2" coat: S-W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/B60 V3 .
3rd coat: S -W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/ B60 V3 . ( 10 mils wet,
dry per coat). 6 mils
N. Stained Concrete Floors : Two coats solid color H&C silicone acrylic concrete
sealer. In areas where wet floor conditions exist such as locker rooms, toilet rooms,
etc apply with SharkGrip slip resistant additive over a clean, dirt and dust free,
dry, broom finished slab. Color as selected by the Architect.
P. Specialty Coatings shall be as herein listed. Placement shall be per the In Finish
Schedule.
1 • Apply Armourcoat Duturo in the public corridors when scheduled on the Finish
Schedule. Product Data Sheet shall be supplied to the Architect for approval. Color
shall be selected by the Architect.
` * * END OF THIS SECTION* * *
09900-7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
B . Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties.
C . Seal vapor-barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections.
D . Coat glass-fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor-barrier coating.
E. Seal ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with adhesive .
F . Roof Penetrations : Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of
the roof flashing.
G . Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal .
H . Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
I . Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Terminate insulation at penetrations through
fire-rated walls and partitions . Seal around penetration with firestopping specified in
Division 7 .
J . Floor Penetrations : Terminate insulation at the underside of the . floor p assembly and at the
floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with firesto n s ecified in Division 7 .
K. Glass-Fiber Insulation Installation : Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and \
joints with vapor-barrier compound .
L . Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation : Seal joints with adhesive.
M . Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following Piping systems:
1 . Domestic hot water.
2 . Recirculated domestic hot water.
3 . Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water piping.
4 . Exposed sanitary drains for handicapped accessible fixtures.
5 . Hydronic heating and cooling piping.
6 . Refrigerant suction piping.
N . Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Flexible connectors .
2 . Fire-protection piping systems .
3 . Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
4 . Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated .
5 . Below-grade piping.
6 . Chrome-plated-pipes and fittings, -except-for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
7 . Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,
and flow regulators.
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials
and thicknesses:
1 Domestic Hot Water and Recirculated Hot Water: 1 /2-inch ( 12 . 7-mm) flexible
elastomeric pipe insulation.
2 . Sanitary Drains and Storm Water Piping: 1 /2-inch ( 12 .7-mm) flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation .
B . Install duct insulation as follows:
1 . Install insulation continuously on ducts that penetrate walls and floors, except at fire-
rated assemblies terminate insulation at the assembly. Maintain insulation vapor
retarder on cold duct.
2 . Install removable or segmented insulation on access panel and doors.
3 . Install vapor barriers on insulated ducts and plenums with surface operating
temperatures below 60 deg F ( 15 deg C) . Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor
barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
4 Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation
requiring a vapor harrier.
5 . Taper glass-fiber insulation ends at a 45-degree angle and seal with adhesive. Cut ends
of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.
6 . Board Insulation Installation : Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers
and anchor pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches (450 mm) apart each way . and 3 inches
(76 mm) from insulation joints. Apply vapor-barrier coating compound to insulation in
1 contact, open joints, breaks, punctures, and voids in vapor barrier.
7. Blanket Insulation Installation : Bond ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than
24 inches (610 mm) with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) wide
transverse strips on 12-inch (300-mm) centers. Bond ducts having long sides or
diameters 24 inches (610 mm) and larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches (300 mm)
apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of insulation . Overlap
joints 3 inches (76 mm). Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor-barrier
compound .
C . Duct System Applications : Insulate indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ducts.
D. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Fibrous glass ducts.
2 . Metal ducts with duct liner.
3 . Factory- insulated flexible ducts.
4 . Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections .
5 . Flexible connectors .
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
8 . Nameplates and data plates .
E. Duct_ Insulation_ Thickness --and -Application Schedule: Insulate ducts with the following
materials and thicknesses :
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 3 of 3
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCADMIN PAGE - 10
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 9
1 SGL DOOR 11 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 17 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 13 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 15 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 14 HALL 20 TO OFFICE 13 90 - RH
TYPE Al 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " NARROW VISION WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
9 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
3 LOCKSET ND53TD RHO 50 - 231 626 SC LC3
10 - 025
3 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
9 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
3 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
Heading # 10
1 SGL DOOR 15 HALL 19 TO WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 16 HALL 19 TO MENS VESTIBULE 11 90 - RH
TYPE E1 310 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
2 PUSH PLATE 30S 4 X 16 US32D HA F2
2 DOOR PULL 33G 4 X 16 US32D HA F3
2 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " x 3411 US32D HA Pi
2 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
6 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials
and thicknesses:
1 Domestic Hot Water and Recirculated Hot Water: 1 /2-inch ( 12 . 7-mm) flexible
elastomeric pipe insulation.
2 . Sanitary Drains and Storm Water Piping: 1 /2-inch ( 12 .7-mm) flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation .
B . Install duct insulation as follows:
1 . Install insulation continuously on ducts that penetrate walls and floors, except at fire-
rated assemblies terminate insulation at the assembly. Maintain insulation vapor
retarder on cold duct.
2 . Install removable or segmented insulation on access panel and doors.
3 . Install vapor barriers on insulated ducts and plenums with surface operating
temperatures below 60 deg F ( 15 deg C) . Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor
barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
4 Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation
requiring a vapor harrier.
5 . Taper glass-fiber insulation ends at a 45-degree angle and seal with adhesive. Cut ends
of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.
6 . Board Insulation Installation : Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers
and anchor pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches (450 mm) apart each way . and 3 inches
(76 mm) from insulation joints. Apply vapor-barrier coating compound to insulation in
1 contact, open joints, breaks, punctures, and voids in vapor barrier.
7. Blanket Insulation Installation : Bond ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than
24 inches (610 mm) with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) wide
transverse strips on 12-inch (300-mm) centers. Bond ducts having long sides or
diameters 24 inches (610 mm) and larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches (300 mm)
apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of insulation . Overlap
joints 3 inches (76 mm). Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor-barrier
compound .
C . Duct System Applications : Insulate indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ducts.
D. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Fibrous glass ducts.
2 . Metal ducts with duct liner.
3 . Factory- insulated flexible ducts.
4 . Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections .
5 . Flexible connectors .
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
8 . Nameplates and data plates .
E. Duct_ Insulation_ Thickness --and -Application Schedule: Insulate ducts with the following
materials and thicknesses :
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
1 . Concealed Applications: Fiberglass blanket, 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm) thick or Fiberglass {\ 1
board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick. J
2. Exposed Applications : Fiberglass board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 15080
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 4 of 4
DIVISION 101 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10100 - CHALKBOARDS MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
1 . 01 SCOPE
This section of the Specifications is intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials,
and/or incidentals necessary to the completion of all requirements of the drawings, notes,
schedules, and these Specifications concerning the furnishing of Chalkboards,
Markerboards and Tackboards .
Shop Drawings of all chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, trim, etc., shall be submitted
to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall indicate method of
attachment at various wall conditions.
Approved Manufacturers :
AKI in Davie, Florida
Claridge in Harrison, Arkansas
1 . 02 CHALKBOARD MATERIALS :
Chalkboard shall be porcelain enamel on a minimum of 24 gauge sheet steel .
Writing surface shall have three (3) coats of vitreous enamel for minimum coating of
.006 ".
Back side of facing sheet shall have a minimum of two (2) vitreous protective coats.
Chalkboard shall be factory laminated 1 /2 ° vapor proof fiber board.
Chalkboards are to be in one continuous length where possible unless approved by the
Architect. Where it is not possible to achieve a continuous length provide two (2) equal
Pieces with aluminum "H" joint strip painted to match chalkboard color.
Chalkboard and tackboards colors to be selected by Architect.
1 .03 MARKERBOARD MATERIALS :
Markerboards shall be LCS Porcelain Enamel Steel , 24 gauge over 3/8 " particle board core
with . 015 aluminum sheet backing. Provide standard 5/8 " perimeter and Series 4 mounting
trim along with tray and map rail. Provide music staff lining on Music Room Boards.
Color: white with grey trim.
1 .04 TACKBOARD MATERIALS :
:\ Tackboards shall be No . 2 vinyl over cork backing equal to Vinyl Tac-Tex by Greensteel.
Tackboard colors to be selected by Architect.
10100- 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
1 . Concealed Applications: Fiberglass blanket, 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm) thick or Fiberglass {\ 1
board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick. J
2. Exposed Applications : Fiberglass board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 15080
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. End Connections : Threads shall comply with ANSI B1 .20. 1 . Flanges shall comply with ANSI
1316. 1 for cast-iron valves and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall
comply with ANSI 816. 18 .
B . Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-bronze body and bonnet; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc,
copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland , "Teflon " impregnated packing, and malleable-
iron handwheel .
C. Ball Valves : Rated for 150-psig ( 1035 -kPa) saturated steam pressure, 400-psig (2760-kPa)
WOG pressure; 2-piece construction; with bronze body, standard (or regular) port, chrome-
" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem
plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon " or "TFE , and
vinyl-covered steel handle .
D. Plug Valves : Rated at 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern,
square head, and threaded ends.
E . Globe Valves: Class 125 ; body and screwed cast-bronze bonnet; with threaded or solder ends,
brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon "
impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel .
F. Swing Check Valves : Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
and bronze disc; and with threaded or solder ends .
G. Valves for Copper Tube: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and
low-pressure steam service.
H. Valves for Steel Pipe: Threaded ends .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Use gate and ball valves forshutoffduty;--globe -and ballforthrottling duty.
i B . Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support pport where necessary.
15110 VALVES
Page 1 of 1
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCADMIN PAGE - 11
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 11
1 SGL DOOR 17 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS TOILET ROOM 9 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 18 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS TOILET ROOM 10 90 - LH
1 SGL DOOR 19 MENS VESTIBULE 11 TO MENS SHOWERS 7 90 - RH
1 SGL DOOR 20 WOMENS VESTIBULE 12 TO WOMENS SHOWERS 8 90 - LH
TYPE El 31011 X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH WOOD DOOR X HM FRAME
12 HINGE BB1279 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US26D HA H2
4 PRIVACY SET ND40S RHO 10 - 025 626 SC LC5
4 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
4 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
4 COAT HOOK 937P X 3 3 / 4 US26D HA M5
4 WALL STOP 236W US32D HA S1
12 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
Heading # 12
1 SGL DOOR 22 HALL 20 TO CLOSET BI - FOLD
TYPE F ( 4 ) 113 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 8 " FULL LOUVERED BIFOLD DOORS
1 BI - FOLD DOOR SET 9570 X 60 HA M2
2 KNOB 521 B X 1 " 26D IV M3
2 KNOB BACK PLATE 513 B X 1 1 / 2 " 26D IV M3A
Heading # 13
1 SGL DOOR 9999 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
1 KEY CABINET 1203 - A LU M4
1 .05 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES :
All trimmed Chalkboards and Tackboards shall be framed with extruded aluminum
sections 6063 alloy satin anodized trim.
Trim pieces shall be equal to Greensteel, Inc . , as follows :
a. Top Trim: 469K Display Rail w/ 6900K End Caps
b . Side Trim: 4158K
C. Chalk Tray: #238K 1 /2 00K End Plates
700
d. Mapbooks (8 per board) # 70000K. Aluminum only . Plastic not acceptable.
Chalk trays shall extend the full combined length of all chalk and tackboards, and shall be
secured at 12 " o .c . (Chalk trays not required under separate tackboards).
1 .06 INSTALLATION :
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard shall be surface-mounted using channel trim with
concealed fastenings as specified above and glue to wall to prevent pillowing of chalk,
marker and tackboards . _
�.
(
ith yawl plugs and screws or expansion
Chalk tray shall be secured directly to the wall w
bolts as conditions require . Maximum spacing of fasteners shall be on 12" centers. Top
and side moldings shall be secured in like manner on 20 " center.
Guarantees :
ch
not
Manufacturer shall furnish awritten goazgnnal erastee to ing quality, he originowner that any a
l bo ualsacuilty, oor twenty
retain the original writing quality,
(20) years after original installation, will be replaced and installed without charge to the Owner.
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard installations shall be guaranteed for one ( 1 ) year after
final inspection against faulty materials and workmanship .
* **END OF SECTION* * *
10100-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. End Connections : Threads shall comply with ANSI B1 .20. 1 . Flanges shall comply with ANSI
1316. 1 for cast-iron valves and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall
comply with ANSI 816. 18 .
B . Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-bronze body and bonnet; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc,
copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland , "Teflon " impregnated packing, and malleable-
iron handwheel .
C. Ball Valves : Rated for 150-psig ( 1035 -kPa) saturated steam pressure, 400-psig (2760-kPa)
WOG pressure; 2-piece construction; with bronze body, standard (or regular) port, chrome-
" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem
plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon " or "TFE , and
vinyl-covered steel handle .
D. Plug Valves : Rated at 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern,
square head, and threaded ends.
E . Globe Valves: Class 125 ; body and screwed cast-bronze bonnet; with threaded or solder ends,
brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon "
impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel .
F. Swing Check Valves : Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
and bronze disc; and with threaded or solder ends .
G. Valves for Copper Tube: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and
low-pressure steam service.
H. Valves for Steel Pipe: Threaded ends .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Use gate and ball valves forshutoffduty;--globe -and ballforthrottling duty.
i B . Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support pport where necessary.
15110 VALVES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
C. Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment. t l
D . Install 3 -valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling-type valves.
E . Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe .
F . Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G . Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level .
END OF SECTION 15110
15110
VALVES Page 2 of 2
DIVISION 104 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10260 - CORNER GUARDS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and install, as detailed, as located on the Drawings, at all exterior doors woth
drywall comers, and at corridor interior comersm C/S Acrovyn Surface Mounted Corner
Guard 90 degree Models SM20, SSM-20 and the 135 degree Model SM-20M. All as
manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. Or an approved equal . Complete details,
locations and samples of selected models and colors, including end caps, and mounting
hardware shall be submitted to the Architect for approval .
1 .03 APPROVED MANUFACTUEWS ORE UAL :
Construction Specialties, Inc . , Acrovyn
Arden Architectural
Balco Metalines, Inc.
IPC/InPro Corp.
Korogard, RJF International Inc.
Pawling Corporation, Pro Tek
1 .04 MATERIAL .
Corner guards shall be manufactured from . 078 " thick nominal high impact vinyl/acrylic
extrusions, designed to absorb and resist abrasions under impact. The extrusion shall
include a matte finish pebblette grain surface, and be supplied in a Solid Color as called
out on the Interiors Plan . Continuous retainers shall be a minimum .063 " thickness . End
caps and mounting hardware shall be famished to complete the assembly.
1 .05 DESIGN:
Corner guards shall be securely locked in place yet provide for free-floating action to
absorb heavy impact without damage to guard, retainer or adjacent wall . Corner guard
shall be straight and true over full length.
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
10260-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
C. Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment. t l
D . Install 3 -valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling-type valves.
E . Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe .
F . Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G . Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level .
END OF SECTION 15110
15110
VALVES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube : ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
B . Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
C . Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 , Type S, Grade A. Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 , Classes 50 and 51 ; mechanical or push-on joint; with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
E. PVC Plastic, Water Pipe: ASTM D 1785 , Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends .
2 .2 FITTINGS
A . Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 .22.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 . 18 .
C . Bronze Flanges : ASME B16 .24 , Classes 150 and 300.
D. Copper Unions : ASME 1316 . 18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball -and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded
ends. Threads complying with ASME B 1 .20. 1 .
E . Ductile- and Gray-Iron Gasketed Fittings : AWWA C110 standard pattern or ductile- iron
AWWA C153 compact pattern, 250-psig ( 1725 -kPa) minimum pressure rating, with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining and AWWA C1 I rubber gaskets.
F. Ductile- and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings : AWWAC110, 250-prig ( 1725kPa) minimum
pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
G . Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 , made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.
H. Malleable-Iron Unions : ASME BI 6 .39, Classes 150 and 300; hexagonal-stock; with ball-and-
socket joint; metal -to-metal bronze seating surfaces; and female threaded ends with threads
complying with ASME B 1 . 20 . 1 .
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 1 of 1
® Since 1928 .
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC.
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
ARCHITECT /DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC .
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 - 848 - 3040
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 6 , 2009
Vinyl/acrylic extrusions shall be U .L. tested, Classified and Labeled reflection a Class I
Fire Rating in accordance with UL-723 (ASTM-E84-91a) (CAN 45102-2-M83 in Canada) f l
test procedures . Chemical and stain resistance shall be per CSAV-280 standards, \
established by manufacturer.
Color shall be integral with components matched in accordance with SAE J- 1545 -(Delta E)
with color difference no greater than 1 . 0 units using the Hunter (Lab) scale . Impact tested
in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM-F476-76.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION '
r
10260-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube : ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
B . Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
C . Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 , Type S, Grade A. Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 , Classes 50 and 51 ; mechanical or push-on joint; with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
E. PVC Plastic, Water Pipe: ASTM D 1785 , Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends .
2 .2 FITTINGS
A . Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 .22.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 . 18 .
C . Bronze Flanges : ASME B16 .24 , Classes 150 and 300.
D. Copper Unions : ASME 1316 . 18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball -and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded
ends. Threads complying with ASME B 1 .20. 1 .
E . Ductile- and Gray-Iron Gasketed Fittings : AWWA C110 standard pattern or ductile- iron
AWWA C153 compact pattern, 250-psig ( 1725 -kPa) minimum pressure rating, with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining and AWWA C1 I rubber gaskets.
F. Ductile- and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings : AWWAC110, 250-prig ( 1725kPa) minimum
pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
G . Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 , made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.
H. Malleable-Iron Unions : ASME BI 6 .39, Classes 150 and 300; hexagonal-stock; with ball-and-
socket joint; metal -to-metal bronze seating surfaces; and female threaded ends with threads
complying with ASME B 1 . 20 . 1 .
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
I . Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings : ASME B16 .4 , Classes 125 and 250; standard (,
pattern; with threads complying with ASME B1 .20. 1 . l)
J . Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16 . 1 , Classes 125 and 300 .
K. PVC Plastic, Schedule 40, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings : ASTM D 2466 .
2 .3 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Ductile-Iron Pipe Push-On Joints: AWWA CI I I rubber gaskets and lubricant.
B . Ductile-Iron Pipe Mechanical Joints : AWWA C1 I ductile- or gray-iron glands, high-strength
steel bolts and nuts, and rubber gaskets .
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanged Joints: AWWA CI 15 ductile- or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber
gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts .
D . Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
E . Solder Filler Metal : ASTM B 32 , alloys to suit system requirements .
F . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 9 , alloys to suit system requirements .
G . Welding Filler Metals : Comply with AWS D10 . 12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded .
H . Solvent Cements : As recommended by manufacturer.
1 . Plastic Pipe Seals : ASTM F 477 , elastomeric gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications :
1 . Underground, Service Entrance Piping: [Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy,
solder-joint pressure fittings and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 , Sn94, or E solder] or
[Schedule 80 PVC plastic water pipe, Schedule g0 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints] .
2 pressure fittings;Fard copperounions; bronzr tube, eflanges;wrought-copper
andsolderjoints with AlloyrSn95 .
Sn94 or E solder.
32 VALVE APPLICATIONS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 2o f 2
SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drams and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Areas of specialty signage may include :
I • Construction Signs
2• Exterior Handicapped Signs at Parking Areas
3 • Toilet Room Handicapped Signs
4 . Interior Room Number and Name Signs
5 • Occupancy Capacity Signs
6. Regulatory Signs
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Uniformityof Manufacturer: For each sign form a graphic image process indicated
furnish products of a single manufacturer.
Americans With Disabilities Act: All signage shall meet the requirements of the A.D.A .
including grade 2 braille raised lettering, etc .
As man---- nufacttued by one of the following approved companies :
ASI Sign Systems, Tampa, FL (813) 620-4360 Attn: Ilene
Advance Corporation, Braille-Tac (800) ,825-0150
The Southwell Corp . San Antonio, TX (210) 223 - 1831
Best MarmL Sign Systems (800) 235-2378
Bunting Graphics Inc. (800) 735-0445
FRS Industries (800) 747-4795
HART Arch. Signage, Chesapeake, VA (804) 420- 1666
Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, NY (518) 370-3433
Metallic Arts, Spokane, WA 1 - 800-541 -3200
In-Pro Signscape, Muskego, WI, inprocorp.com
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :_
A _ _ __ Shone: Submit shop drawings for all items in this Section including all
accessories.
10440-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
I . Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings : ASME B16 .4 , Classes 125 and 250; standard (,
pattern; with threads complying with ASME B1 .20. 1 . l)
J . Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16 . 1 , Classes 125 and 300 .
K. PVC Plastic, Schedule 40, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings : ASTM D 2466 .
2 .3 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Ductile-Iron Pipe Push-On Joints: AWWA CI I I rubber gaskets and lubricant.
B . Ductile-Iron Pipe Mechanical Joints : AWWA C1 I ductile- or gray-iron glands, high-strength
steel bolts and nuts, and rubber gaskets .
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanged Joints: AWWA CI 15 ductile- or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber
gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts .
D . Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
E . Solder Filler Metal : ASTM B 32 , alloys to suit system requirements .
F . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 9 , alloys to suit system requirements .
G . Welding Filler Metals : Comply with AWS D10 . 12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded .
H . Solvent Cements : As recommended by manufacturer.
1 . Plastic Pipe Seals : ASTM F 477 , elastomeric gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications :
1 . Underground, Service Entrance Piping: [Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy,
solder-joint pressure fittings and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 , Sn94, or E solder] or
[Schedule 80 PVC plastic water pipe, Schedule g0 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints] .
2 pressure fittings;Fard copperounions; bronzr tube, eflanges;wrought-copper
andsolderjoints with AlloyrSn95 .
Sn94 or E solder.
32 VALVE APPLICATIONS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 2o f 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures
or equipment connections and where indicated .
B. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each
plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to
drain water distribution piping system .
D . Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated .
E. Install ball valves in each hot-water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump .
3 .3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A . Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable Plumbing Code and as
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
B . Support vertical piping at each floor.
3 .4 INSPECTING AND CLEANING
A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having .
jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15140
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 3 of 3
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST PAGE - 2
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GL GLYNN JOHNSON - -
HA HAGER .
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE , PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
GREY GREY.
I
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
. 630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading -
1 14
2 - 14 -
3 15 -
B . Submi__. t Samples of all interior signage and graphics .
PART II - PRODUCTS
2 .01 CONSTRUCTION SIGN:
A. Furnish h and install 81 - o' long x 4' - 0' high construction sign, on 3/4 plywood.
B . Locate on site in compliance with Local Permitting Agency requirements and as
directed by Owner.
C. Sign shall have two coats of exterior oil base paint.
D . All work shall be performed by an experienced sign painter.
E. Furnish and install supporting structure.
F . Sian shams ate: Name of Project, Name of owner, Name of Contractor, Name
of Architect, Name of Structural Engineer, Name of Mech/Elec . Engineer and
Name of Civil Engineer. (For all School and Municipal Gvernment projects, verify
the sign information required with the Owner or Owner' s agent prior to painting
sign panel .)
2.02 EXTERIOR HANDICAPPED SIGNS AT PARKING AREAS : t
A . Provide one (1) sign for each handicapped parking space.
B . Sign shall comply with the "Accessibilty Codes and Standards" latest edition, State
of Florida, for the physically handicapped, and F .T .O . 25 or 26 .
C. Sign shall read: "Parking By Disabled Permit Only" depicting National
Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) as detailed. Signs erected after 1 Oct. 1996 must
indicate the dollar penalty for illegal use of the space.
D . Size shall be 1 ' - 0" wide x 16" high, aluminum .
E. Provide standard. painted green steel post set in 6" diameter concrete foundation.
Post and concrete foundation shall be by the Contractor.
F . Height to bottom of sign shall be seven feet minimum and nine feet maximum .
G . Lettering, style shall be Helvetica Medium.
10440-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures
or equipment connections and where indicated .
B. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each
plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to
drain water distribution piping system .
D . Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated .
E. Install ball valves in each hot-water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump .
3 .3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A . Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable Plumbing Code and as
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
B . Support vertical piping at each floor.
3 .4 INSPECTING AND CLEANING
A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having .
jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15140
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 3 of 3
2.03 TOILET ROOM HANDICAPPED SIGN :
A Provide one (1 ) sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each
toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped. Size shall be as per
Signage Legend.
B. Color and Material shall be as per Signage Legend
C. Mo—unting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws at locations
detailed in Architectural Signage.
2.04 "INTERIOR" ROOM NAME AND NUMBER SIGNS AND OCCUPANCY
CAPACITY:
A. Separate signs for room name room mum
ber, or shall be in accordance with the Signage Legend. room canaciry reuwrPd _ Sizes
B. Color shall be as per Signage Legend.
C. Material shall be 1 /8 " thick plastic, or 1 /8 " thick etched zinc, with raised symbol for
identification by blind.
D. Mounting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws or clear silicone`
at locations detailed in Architectural Signage Legend.
1 2 .05 MONUMENT SIGNAGE
i
A. When depicted on the plans, provide individually mounted letters . Letters as
manufactured by the Southwell Company. Letters to be height as scheduled and in
Garamond H444 style in bronze Duranodic Aluminum. Flush mounted letters .
2.06 REGULATORY SIGNAGE
A. Provide standard graphic and descriptive signage at all elevator lobbies stipulating
"In Case of Fire Use Stairs".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer' s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Mount standard Signs on middle of doors at 48 " above the finish floor.
10440-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
B . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe : CISPI 301 .
C . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe : ASTM D 2665 , Schedule 40, plain ends.
2 .2 FITTINGS
A - Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.29.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.23 .
i
- 1 C Wrou ht-Co
g pper, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings: ASME B16. 43 .
D . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16.32 .
E. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings : ASTM A 74, Service class.
F . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301 .
G. Cast-Iron, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16 .45 .
H . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665 , made to ASTM D 3311 ; socket-type; drain,
waste, and vent pipe patterns.
I . Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant.
J . CISPI Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : CISPI310, having
ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 series stainless-steel
clamp assembly. , corrugated shield-and-
K . Cast-Iron-Pipe Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe : Rubber or
elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band assembly, fabricated to match OD of pipes to be
joined.
L. Plastic Pipe Sleeves : ASTM C 564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477 elastomeric
seal.
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT PAGE - 3
I
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM MECHANIC BAY 1 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 7101 ' ' X . 1 - 3 / 411. FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC C1
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 1935 10 " X 34 " US32D HA F1
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 '!
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6'
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 310 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1.
- D - RESTRICTED KWY
t
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
C . Mount A.D .A. Compliant Signs adjacent to door openings, at the latch side, with
the center of the sign at 60" above the finish floor. Where there is no wall space to -\
the latch side of the door, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall .
SIGN
SIGN TYPE "A" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 8 " long or 12" long, square corner 390S
Series with molded plastic frames, (interior only) , White background with 2 " high Jade SC-523
Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for blind. Note :
Utilize 1 '/2" high letters for longer room descriptions to insure that the description will fit on a 12"
long sign.
SIGN TYPE "B" : As manufactured by ASI, 10" high x 20" long, Sign Etch-2, 3 /8 " aluminum
base metal with etched letters. Radiused corner 390R Series design (exterior onlCase Helvetica
background with 5" high paint filled text, Jade SC-523 Letters/Numbers in Upper
Medium Italic, with raised symbols for the blind .
SIGN TYPE " C" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, 390R Series,(interior and
exterior rated), with radiused comers, White background withS schedule,5 Unisex ymbois i symbols for
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, p
blind .
square corner 390S Series
SIGN TYPE "D " : As manufactured by ASWhite
and 12" long,letters n UpperCaseHelvetica Medium.
(interior only), Red background with 1 " high �
I.
SIGN TYPE "E" : As manufactured by ASI, Closed-Circuit TV Door (In Use) Sign: Three (3) SL
Series SLO 66 with Helvetica Regular Lettering. First letter capitalized, remaining letter to be
lower case. Install at location determined by the Architect.
SIGN TYPE "F" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 12" long, Sign Etch- 1 , zinc base metal with
etched letters. Match square corner 3905 Series design (exterior only), Jade SC-523 background
with 1 '/z" high White Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised
symbols for blind .
SIGN TYPE " G" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, - Series, (interior and
exterior rated) , with radiused corners . White background with S- 1 & S-2 2 Symbols in black, and
S
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, per schedule, with raised symbols for
blind.
SIGN TYPE "H" : As manufactured by ASI, 8 " high X 36 " long X 1 /2 " thick, 323BE Series with
beveled edges, aluminum frame . Jade SC-523 background with 5 " high letters/numbers in Upper
Case Helvetica Bold Italic. Exteri_ ur rated•provide Color 1 of letteis/ X hers shall
1 /2" hit . panel.
Where two lines of letters are required, p _
"J" . As manufactured by Wro Signscape, or equal, 8 " X 8" , tact
with
SIGN TYPE i I e sty e, n
ejected molded frames with square corners . Color of sign is red background with lettering.
Signage to read " In case of Fire use Stairs" . 10440-4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
B . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe : CISPI 301 .
C . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe : ASTM D 2665 , Schedule 40, plain ends.
2 .2 FITTINGS
A - Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.29.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.23 .
i
- 1 C Wrou ht-Co
g pper, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings: ASME B16. 43 .
D . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16.32 .
E. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings : ASTM A 74, Service class.
F . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301 .
G. Cast-Iron, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16 .45 .
H . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665 , made to ASTM D 3311 ; socket-type; drain,
waste, and vent pipe patterns.
I . Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant.
J . CISPI Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : CISPI310, having
ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 series stainless-steel
clamp assembly. , corrugated shield-and-
K . Cast-Iron-Pipe Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe : Rubber or
elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band assembly, fabricated to match OD of pipes to be
joined.
L. Plastic Pipe Sleeves : ASTM C 564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477 elastomeric
seal.
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
t
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A . Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron soil pipe fittings; cast-iron, heavy-duty
couplings for hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings ; and hubless joints.
B . PVC plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket-type drain, waste, and vent pipe pattern fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
C . Copper drainage tube, wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy drainage fittings, and soldered
joints with Alloy E or Alloy Sn50 solder.
3 .2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building
sanitary sewer.
B . Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures
or drains-
3 -3
rains_33 INSPECTION
A . Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15150
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 2 of 2
SPECIALTY SIGN SCHEDULE
LOCATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS •
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex
COUNT LOCATION (Three separate buildings in complex)
Administration Buildin
(14) Item # 1
Sign type "A." /STORAGE, MEETING ROOM, MEETING ROOM,
CONFERENCE, OFFICE #19 OFFICE #2 , OFFICE #31
ADMINISTRATION, FILE STORAGE, MECHANICAL RM., MEN,
WOMEN, SHOWER, SHOWER. Secure to the wall at the latch side of the
appropriate door.
(3) Item #2
Sign type "D " / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted'
extinguisher as located on the plans .
i
(4 ) Item 43
Sign type "G" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the
wall at the latch side of the two doors that access the MEN &
WOMEN vestibules and toilet rooms . Mount them side by side below the
room description.
( 1 ) Item 44
Sign type "F" / ELECTRIC / PHONE RM.- located on the wall at
the latch side of the door that accesses the room.
Storage Bay
NO SIGNAGE REQUIRED AT THIS BUILDING.
Maintenance Building
( 1 ) Item # I
Sign type "A" /ELECTRICAL RM. Secure to the wall at the latch side of
- - .-- the appropriate door.
10440-5
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
t
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A . Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron soil pipe fittings; cast-iron, heavy-duty
couplings for hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings ; and hubless joints.
B . PVC plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket-type drain, waste, and vent pipe pattern fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
C . Copper drainage tube, wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy drainage fittings, and soldered
joints with Alloy E or Alloy Sn50 solder.
3 .2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building
sanitary sewer.
B . Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures
or drains-
3 -3
rains_33 INSPECTION
A . Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15150
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A . Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn temper] .
B Soft Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type e L
annealed temper] .
2 - 2 FITTINGS
A Copper Fittings : ASME B 16. 22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern .
l
23 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 8, Classification BAg- 1 (Silver) .
2 .4 VALVES
A . Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings: 500psig (3450kPa) working pressure and 275
deg F ( 135 deg C) working temperature, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Solenoid Valves: Comply with AW 760; 250 deg F ( 121 deg C) temperature rating, 400psig
(2760kPa) working pressure, and 24-V normally closed holding coil .
C. Pressure-Regulating Valves : Direct acting and comply with ARI 770 .
D Pressure-Relief Valves : ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
E. Thermal-Expansion Valves : Comply with ARI 750; with sensing bulb, distributor having side
-gas bypass line
connection for hot , and external equalizer line.
2. 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Strainers : 430-psig (2960-kPa) working pressure .
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCMAINT
PAGE - 4 i
MAINTENANCE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX .
i
Heading # 15
1 SGL DOOR 3 MECHANIC BAY 1 FROM TOOL STORAGE BAY 2 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 3 ' 0 " X 7 ' 0 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9480T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L1
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 OVERHEAD DOOR STOP 9045 US32D GL S4
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA Ml
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC API
D - RESTRICTED KWY
I
i
(6) Item 42
Sign type "D" / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted / 1
extinguishers as located on the plans .
(2) Item 43
Sign type "C" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the wall at
the latch side of the doors that accesses the UNISEX restrooms .
Mount them side by side .
(I2) Item #4
Sign type "F" / BAY 41 , BAY #1 , BAY #2 , BAY #2, BAY 93 , BAY 437
BAY #43 BAY 44, BAY #55 BAY #5 , BAY #61 BAY #6 - located on the
wall at the latch side of the door that accesses each storage bay on the west
elevation AND at the left side of each overhead door on the east elevation.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
10440-6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A . Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn temper] .
B Soft Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type e L
annealed temper] .
2 - 2 FITTINGS
A Copper Fittings : ASME B 16. 22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern .
l
23 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 8, Classification BAg- 1 (Silver) .
2 .4 VALVES
A . Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings: 500psig (3450kPa) working pressure and 275
deg F ( 135 deg C) working temperature, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Solenoid Valves: Comply with AW 760; 250 deg F ( 121 deg C) temperature rating, 400psig
(2760kPa) working pressure, and 24-V normally closed holding coil .
C. Pressure-Regulating Valves : Direct acting and comply with ARI 770 .
D Pressure-Relief Valves : ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
E. Thermal-Expansion Valves : Comply with ARI 750; with sensing bulb, distributor having side
-gas bypass line
connection for hot , and external equalizer line.
2. 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Strainers : 430-psig (2960-kPa) working pressure .
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Moisture/Liquid Indicators : 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure, 200 deg F (93 deg C)
polished, optical viewing window with color-coded
operating temperature, with replaceable, i .
moisture indicator .
C . Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure; with replaceable-
core kit including gaskets, and filter-dryer cartridge.
-kPa) operating pressure; minimum 7 inches (180 mm)
D. Flexible Connectors : 500-psig (3450
long.
E. Mufflers: 5o0-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure .
F . Refrigerant: [ASHRAE 34 , R- 134a] or [ASHRAE 34, R-221 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 .
ments are specified in Division 15 Section " Common Piping
B . Basic piping installation require
Requirements ." l4
C Belowground , install copper tubing in conduit . Vent conduit outdoors.
D . Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
E . Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
F . Provide bypass around moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 inch NPS (DN50) .
G . Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion
valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators .
H . Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection , at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
1 . Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant by following ASHRAE 15
procedures . or for
s at
sor
t and
I ll avalves On suction
taps at and discharge
as bypass Of cOmPrto esson inlet gand outlet andonacheside of
ou]e
strainers.
essor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on systems with
K. Install check valves on compr
multiple-condensers -
Page 2 of 2
15193 REFRIGERANT PIPING
SECTION 10520 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Definition: "Portable fire extinguishers" includes units which can be hand-carried
as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing
systems, unless othen�ise indicated .
B . Extent of fire extinguishers is indicated on drawings with a FE designation.
C. Accessories include : Mounting brackets.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide portable fire extinguishers and accessories by one manufacturer of
contractors choice, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
B . Portable Fire Extinguisher Standard: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which
comply with applicable UL standard and are labeled ny UL . All extinguishers shall
be installed and maintained in accordance with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers . " Install only fully charged fire extinguishers.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data, detail drawings, and
installation instructions for each portable fire extinguisher and/or recessed cabinet
for the project.
B . Schedule : Submit schedule indicating types, quanities, sizes and installation
locations for each portable fire extinguisher and/or cabinet for the project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER' S :
A• Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide extinguishers and
— cabinets.
J.L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen' s Manufacturing Co.
Modern Metal Products by Muckle 10520-1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Moisture/Liquid Indicators : 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure, 200 deg F (93 deg C)
polished, optical viewing window with color-coded
operating temperature, with replaceable, i .
moisture indicator .
C . Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure; with replaceable-
core kit including gaskets, and filter-dryer cartridge.
-kPa) operating pressure; minimum 7 inches (180 mm)
D. Flexible Connectors : 500-psig (3450
long.
E. Mufflers: 5o0-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure .
F . Refrigerant: [ASHRAE 34 , R- 134a] or [ASHRAE 34, R-221 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 .
ments are specified in Division 15 Section " Common Piping
B . Basic piping installation require
Requirements ." l4
C Belowground , install copper tubing in conduit . Vent conduit outdoors.
D . Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
E . Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
F . Provide bypass around moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 inch NPS (DN50) .
G . Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion
valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators .
H . Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection , at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
1 . Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant by following ASHRAE 15
procedures . or for
s at
sor
t and
I ll avalves On suction
taps at and discharge
as bypass Of cOmPrto esson inlet gand outlet andonacheside of
ou]e
strainers.
essor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on systems with
K. Install check valves on compr
multiple-condensers -
Page 2 of 2
15193 REFRIGERANT PIPING
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve
and expansion valve.
M . Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated .
N. Install a full-sized, 3 -valve bypass around each dryer.
O. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
P- Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
Q. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves_
R. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.
S . Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
T. Install pressure-relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors .
1
END OF SECTION 15183
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 3 of 3
Since 1928
LOTSPEICH
CO. OF FL, INC .
* * PROPOSED * *
SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
FOR
STORAGE BUILDING
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX i
5350 77TH STREET
VERO BEACH , FL 32967
I
i
ARCHITECT/DESIGNER : EDLUND - DRITENBAS - BINKLEY ARCHITECTS
65 ROYAL PALM POINTE
SUITE. D
VERO BEACH , FL 32960
PHONE - 772 - 569 - 4320
j
SCHEDULE BY : LOTSPEICH COMPANY OF FLORIDA INC . '
7435 CENTRAL INDUSTRIAL DR .
RIVIERA BEACH , FL 33404
PHONE - 561 -848 - 3040 i
FAX - 561 - 848 - 9020
COORDINATOR : Ed Cutler
DATE : MARCH 9 , 2009
i
j
i
Potter-Roemer, Inc .
2 .02 MATERIALS - GENERAL :
Provide the following types of extinguishers in accordance with area/occupancy uses:
In General Office Spaces Fire Extinguishers : Multi-purpose dry chemical type (2A- I OBC-
FE) : UL rated 2-A: 10 :B :C , 5 lb . Nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for class A,
Class B , and Class C fires . Equal to J .L. Industries Cosmic 5E.
In Kitchen/Breakroom/Em to ee Lounge Spaces/ Electrical Rooms : Liquid carbon
dioxide, UL rated, 10 Ib nominal capacity, in enamled steel container for class B, and Class
C fires only . Equal to J .L. Industries Sentinal 10 .
In Electronic Equipment/Computer Room : Halotron 1 , or Halonite, clean agent EPA
approved, portable fire extinguisher. Wall bracket mounted, as manufactured by Larsen ' s
Manufacturing Company. Discharges as a liquid and quickly evaporates leaving no residue
to clean-up . Class A,B,C fires , 10 pound nominal capacity.
2 .03 MOUNTING BRACKETS :
Provide manufacturer' s standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of
extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in
manufacturer' s standard plated finish.
Provide a recessed or semi-recessed cabinet, clear anodized aluminum, clear bubble, no
letters on the bubble. NOTE : All semi-recessed cabinets must meet ADA guidelines for
projections into hallways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if
not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and/or bracket-mounted fire
extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION :
Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with a permanently affixed sign with a red
background and white letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface .
Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect or-scheduled in Section 10440 -
Specialty Signs.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
10520-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve
and expansion valve.
M . Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated .
N. Install a full-sized, 3 -valve bypass around each dryer.
O. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
P- Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
Q. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves_
R. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.
S . Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
T. Install pressure-relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors .
1
END OF SECTION 15183
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 3 of 3
� �
�j_,
SECTION 10531 - ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification section, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extend of aluminum walkway covers is indicated on drawings and provisions of
this section.
B . Types of work specified in this section include:
Extruded aluminum fascia systems.
Sheet aluminum fascia systems.
Fascia panel systems.
Metal fascia panel support systems.
Aluminum copings
Aluminum deck .
Aluminum beams & tubing.
j Aluminum fascia panels.
Sheet plates & angles.
C . Sheet metal and flashings not part of aluminum walkway covers are specified in
another Division-7 section.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE : _
A. Industry Standards : Provide products which comply with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ", except as otherwise indicated.
B . Codes: Comply with all local codes and ordinances and latest edition of Standard
Building Code. The wind design for the Aluminum Walkway Covers shall be for a
minimum 100 mph wind, (x 1 . 10 importance factor), per ASCE 7-93 .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation
instructions and general recommendations. Include data substantiating that
materials and performance comply with requirements, and that structure will
- - - -support all-imposed loads-including- chilled water-piping:------ - -- - -
10531 -1
� �
�j_,
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A- Submit Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture.
B . Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act, " regarding water flow
rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 WATER CLOSET
A . Vitreous-China Water Closet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
B . Toilet Seat: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
22 LAVATORY
A . Vitreous-China Lavatory: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
C . Drain : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D. Fixture Support: Hanger plate
2 .2 SHOWER
A. Mixing-Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Supplies: Copper tubing with ball , gate, or globe valve if check stops are not included with
faucet.
C . Drain : 2-inch NPS (DN50), nickel-bronze-strainer, floor drain .
D. Trap: 2-inch NPS (DN50) drainage piping.
2 .3 SINK
A Stainless-Steel Sink : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 1 of ]
MANUFACTURERS USED LIST .PAGE - 2
STORAGE 'BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
CODE MANUFACTURERS NAME
- - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HA HAGER
LC LCN CLOSERS
PE PEMKO
SC SCHLAGE
SF STEELCRAFT
FINISH FINISH DESCRIPTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
GREY GREY
US32D STAINLESS STEEL , DULL
AL ALUMINUM
626 SATIN CHROMIUM PLATED
630 SATIN STAINLESS STEEL
Door Index
Door No . Heading
2 16
3 - 17
4 14
5 14
6 14
7 14
8 14
9 14
B . Submit for record purposes, signed and sealed computations prepared by an
engineer licensed in the State of Florida showing conformance to the applicable
codes .
C . Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout, joining, profiles,
accessories, anchorages, drainage details, flashing connections and relationship to
supporting structure and to joining roof and wall construction .
D . Indicate, in Section, all lighting fixtures and mechanical and electrical lines run in
walkway soffit chase to assure proper space allotment.
E. Samples : For verification purposes submit completely finished samples for each
component.
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Coordinate work of this section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation to ensure best possible weather resistance, drainage and protection of
materials and finishes against damage.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS :
Subject to compliance with specified requirements and with details shown on drawings, J
provide aluminum walkway covers manufactured by one of the following :
Perfection Metals
Alumax Building Specialties Division
Dittmer Architectural Aluminum
Maple Industries
E.L. Burns Company
Custom Architectural Metals, Orlando
Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc.
AAPCO Protective Covers
2.02 MATERIALS :
A. Aluminum Materials:
l . Aluminum Extrusions : Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated but
not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221
- for- 6063 -T6 .
2 . Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use
intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated.
1-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A- Submit Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture.
B . Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act, " regarding water flow
rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 WATER CLOSET
A . Vitreous-China Water Closet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
B . Toilet Seat: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
22 LAVATORY
A . Vitreous-China Lavatory: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
C . Drain : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D. Fixture Support: Hanger plate
2 .2 SHOWER
A. Mixing-Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Supplies: Copper tubing with ball , gate, or globe valve if check stops are not included with
faucet.
C . Drain : 2-inch NPS (DN50), nickel-bronze-strainer, floor drain .
D. Trap: 2-inch NPS (DN50) drainage piping.
2 .3 SINK
A Stainless-Steel Sink : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 1 of ]
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Drain(s): See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
2 .4 MOP-SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Mop-Service Basin : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Mounting: Floor.
D . Rim Guard : Manufacturer's standard
E . Drain: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) with grid strainer.
F . P-Trap: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) drainage piping.
G . Mop Rack : Manufacturer' s standard
H . Supplies: 1 /2-inch NPS (DN15) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve .
ounting faucet, wall brace, and hose-book bracket .
I . Reinforcement: Provide for wall-m
2 . 5 SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Sink: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Fixture Mounting: Floor stand
C . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D . Drain(s) : Manufacturer's standard grid drain with 1 - 1 /2-inch NPS (DN40) tubular-brass
tailpiece .
E. Fixture Support: Manufacturers standard steel stand or base unit.
2 .6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATIONS
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 2
3 . Extruded Aluminum Deck: 3 .25 " high x 5 " wide rectangular profile - 6063
alloy - . 060 gage.
B . Miscellaneous Materials :
1 Exposed Fasteners : Stainless steel, non-magnetic, of type and size standard
with manufacturer for product and application indicated. Match finish of
exposed heads and material being fastened.
2. Concealed Fasteners : Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive
metal as recommended by manufacturer.
3 . Mastic Sealant : Polyisobutylene: non-hardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
ne unigratirg sealant.
2 .03 FABRICATION :
A . Aluminum Walkway Covers to be fabricated and installed as detailed on the
drawings including all necessary accessories.
B . Aluminum Finishes :
General : Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual " for finish designation
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. For components
which are assembles or welded in factory, apply finish after fabrication is
completed .
Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Baked Enamel Finish : Apply baked enamel finish in strict compliance with paint
manufacturer' s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating and painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General : Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with installation of column, flashing, and we
construction; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B . ISOLATION: Where metal surfaces of units are installed in contract with or
corrosive substrates, apply bituminous coating on coneealed-metal surfaces, or
provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer.
J
10531 -3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Drain(s): See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
2 .4 MOP-SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Mop-Service Basin : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Mounting: Floor.
D . Rim Guard : Manufacturer's standard
E . Drain: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) with grid strainer.
F . P-Trap: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) drainage piping.
G . Mop Rack : Manufacturer' s standard
H . Supplies: 1 /2-inch NPS (DN15) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve .
ounting faucet, wall brace, and hose-book bracket .
I . Reinforcement: Provide for wall-m
2 . 5 SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Sink: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Fixture Mounting: Floor stand
C . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D . Drain(s) : Manufacturer's standard grid drain with 1 - 1 /2-inch NPS (DN40) tubular-brass
tailpiece .
E. Fixture Support: Manufacturers standard steel stand or base unit.
2 .6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATIONS
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Install fitting insulation kits on handicap-accessible fixtures.
B . Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.
C. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped
People to reach.
D- Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
E. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate
when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
F. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to
wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls .
G. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls .
H. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework .
1. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
J- Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
K . Install individual
c]eanouts at fixture.supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with
I- _ Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
M. Install traps on fixture outlets . Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps . Omit traps on
indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if
location is not indicated .
O. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink.
F. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
Q . Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
R. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
-\ equipment. Install insulation on supplies and drains of handicap-accessible fixtures .
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 3
09 MAR 09 JOB # IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 3
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
Heading # 14
1 SGL DOOR 4 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 6 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 5 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 5 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 6 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 4 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 7 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 3 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 8 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 2 90 - RHR
1 SGL DOOR 9 EXTERIOR FROM BAY 1 90 - RHR
TYPE Dl 3 ' 0 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
18 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA Hl
NRP
6 LOCKSET L9453T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L2
10 - 072 ( 415 , 617 , j
8 , 9 )
6 CLOSER 4041 S - LUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
6 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
6 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV l X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
6 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
6 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3101, SF
24 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
6 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE Y17
6 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
6 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF
i
I
I
3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A . Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
Touch-up damages metal coatings .
B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure that work of this
section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
l
---
__ 10531- `�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Install fitting insulation kits on handicap-accessible fixtures.
B . Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.
C. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped
People to reach.
D- Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
E. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate
when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
F. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to
wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls .
G. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls .
H. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework .
1. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
J- Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
K . Install individual
c]eanouts at fixture.supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with
I- _ Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
M. Install traps on fixture outlets . Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps . Omit traps on
indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if
location is not indicated .
O. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink.
F. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
Q . Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
R. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
-\ equipment. Install insulation on supplies and drains of handicap-accessible fixtures .
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
S . Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and `l
UL 486B . J
END OF SECTION 15410
1.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division - 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent and location of each types of toilet accessory is shown on drawings.
B . Types of toilet accessories required include the following :
Paper towel dispensers
Toilet tissue dispensers
Grab bars
Soap dispensers
Mirrors
Shower Rods
Diaper Changing Stations
C . Some type of toilet accessories are included as part of toilet partitions elsewhere in
Division 10 .
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; provide PT wood backing as required, coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B . Accessory Locations : Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C . Manufacturer: Provide each type of toilet accessory required as manufactured by
one of the following :
1 . American Specialties Inc.
2 . Bradley Corporation
3 . Hallmark - Nutone
4 . Parker Scovill
5 . Watrous, Inc.
6 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
7. Gamco
. Franklin Brass
9. A & J Washroom Accessories
10. San Jamar Dispensers
10800-1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
S . Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and `l
UL 486B . J
END OF SECTION 15410
1.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15425 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A . Floor Drains: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Backflow Preventers: ASSE standard backflow preventers, 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) minimum
working pressure, bronze body with threaded ends, and an inlet strainer.
C. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1001 , with floating disc and atmospheric vent.
D. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1011 , rough bronze, with nonremovable and
manual drain features and garden -hose threaded connection.
E. Water Filters : Cartridge type.
F. Hose Bibbs : Bronze body in rough-bronze finish, with removable composition disc, threaded
or soldered inlet, garden-hose threaded outlet, and loose-key handle.
G . Water Hammer Arrester: Bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas and where indicated . Set tops of drains flush
with finished floor. Set drainelevationdepressed below finished slab elevation as indicated
below :
1 5-Foot ( 1 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius : 1 /2-inch ( 13 -mm) depression .
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 1
09 MAR 09 JOB# IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 4
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
i
Heading # 16
1 SGL DOOR 1 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 7 90 - LHR
1 SGL DOOR 2 EXTERIOR FROM TOILET ROOM 8 90 - LHR
TYPE D1 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH FIM DOOR X HM FRAME
6 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H1
NRP
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 LHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 1 )
1 LOCKSET L9496T 06A 50 - 231 RHR 630 SC L3
L583 - 375 10 - 072 ( 2 )
2 CLOSER 4041 S - CUSH TBSRT AL LC Cl
( MOUNT PA ON PUSH SIDE OF DOOR )
2 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
2 WEATHERSTRIP 303 AV 1 X 36 " + 2 X PE W5
84 "
2 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
2 DOOR BOTTOM ( S ) FAS - SEAL 3 ! 0 " SF Wl
8 WEATHERSTRIP PS - 074 120 " SF W2
2 RAINDRIP 346 C X 40 " PE W7
2 THRESHOLD 2005 AV X 36 " PE TH1
2 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC APL
D - RESTRICTED KWY
COMPLIES NOA 07 - 0829 . 04 + / - 70PSF .
i
I
i
11 . Brocar
12 . Koala 1
13 . World Dryer
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data and installation instructions for
each toilet accessory.
B . Setting Drawings : Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions
for installation of anchorage devices and cut out requirements in other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS :
A. Stainless Steel : AISI Type 3021304, with satin No . 4 finish, 22 gage minimum,
unless otherwise indicated.
B . Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A 153 , hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
C . Fasteners : Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed .
2.02 FABRICATION :
A . General : Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not
permitted, except where otherwise indicated . Wherever locks are required for a
particular type of toilet accessory , provide same keying throughout project. Furnish
two keys for each lock.
B . Surfaced-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or
access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 1 ''/z" pin hinges of
same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate
units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access
panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is
fully concealed when unit is closed.
2.03 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS :
-
A. General Toilet Rooms:_ _ Toilet Tissue Dispenser _
- - BOBRICK_B _-. 2740 .
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings (non-oceanfront) : BOBRICK B-2892
C. Public Park Restroom Buildings (oceanfront) : SAN JAMAR St1NR4000TBK
10800-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15425 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A . Floor Drains: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Backflow Preventers: ASSE standard backflow preventers, 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) minimum
working pressure, bronze body with threaded ends, and an inlet strainer.
C. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1001 , with floating disc and atmospheric vent.
D. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1011 , rough bronze, with nonremovable and
manual drain features and garden -hose threaded connection.
E. Water Filters : Cartridge type.
F. Hose Bibbs : Bronze body in rough-bronze finish, with removable composition disc, threaded
or soldered inlet, garden-hose threaded outlet, and loose-key handle.
G . Water Hammer Arrester: Bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas and where indicated . Set tops of drains flush
with finished floor. Set drainelevationdepressed below finished slab elevation as indicated
below :
1 5-Foot ( 1 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius : 1 /2-inch ( 13 -mm) depression .
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . 10-Foot (3 -m) Drain Area Radius: 3 - 1 /2-inch (90-mm) depression . 1
3 . 15-Foot (4 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 -inch (25-mm) depression. J
4 . 20-Foot (6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /4-inch (32-mm) d deere on .
n
5 . 25 -Foot (7 .6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /2-inch (38-mm) p
D _ Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain.
E. install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes .
END OF SECTION 15425
r
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 2
2.04 SURFACE MOUNTED TOWEL DISPENSERS :
BOBRICK B - 262
2.05 GRAB BARS (GR BR) :
Stainless Steel Type: Equal to Bobrick B-6106 x 36 and B - 6106 x 42 .
2. 06 SOAP DISPENSERS :
Bobrick B -4112 or Bradley 6542 Surface Mounted Dispensers capable of dispersing anti -
bacterial soaps.
2. 07 SHOWER RODS :
Bradley Model 9531 Heavy Duty 1 1 /4 " O.D., 18 ga. Satin finish stainless steel .
2.08 MIRRORS :
A. General Toilet Rooms : Bobrick B - 165, 18 " X 30 " mirror. Satin finish stainless steel
frame with 1 /4 " float/plate glass mirror electrolytically copper plated. Mount with
reflecting surface a maximum of 40 inches above finished floor.
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings : Polished Stainless Steel Mirror BOBRICK B
24 " wide X 48 " high. Same mounting height requirement as above. - 1656;.;;
2.09 HEAVY DUTY CLOTHES HOOK
Bobrick B-2116, heavy duty clothes hook with concealed mounting . Withstands 300- 1 b
downward pull . Hook and flange are one piece brass casting with satin nickelplated finish.
Supply 2 X 6 pressure treated wood backing in wall for proper mounting. Flange diameter
is 2 3/4 " and unit projects 3 7/16" from wall .
2. 10 SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS
Bobrick B -239 X 34, 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 13 " high, 8 " deep.
Anti-slip mop holders have spring loaded rubber cam that grips handles 7/8 " to 1 1 /4 "
diameter. Stainless steel hooks.
2. 11 REVERSIBLE FOLDING SHOWER SEAT
Bobrick B -5181 , complying with ADA accessibility standards. Seat is ivory colored solid
field. Frame and moun
phenolic. Reversible for left or right hand installation in the ting
brackets are type 304 stainless steel and feature a self-locking mechanism. Seat measures
33 " wide, projects 22 5/16" from wall. Average mounting height 17 to 20 " from top of
floor to seat.
J
10800-3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . 10-Foot (3 -m) Drain Area Radius: 3 - 1 /2-inch (90-mm) depression . 1
3 . 15-Foot (4 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 -inch (25-mm) depression. J
4 . 20-Foot (6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /4-inch (32-mm) d deere on .
n
5 . 25 -Foot (7 .6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /2-inch (38-mm) p
D _ Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain.
E. install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes .
END OF SECTION 15425
r
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design
ofNew Low-Rise Residential Buildings. "
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install temperature and pressure-relief valves and extend to closest floor drain .
B . Install vacuum-relief valves and expansion tank in cold-water- inlet piping.
C Install shutoff valves and unions at hot- and cold-water piping connections .
D. Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined -
E- Electrically ground units according to authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15480
15480 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Page ] of I
09 MAR 09 JOBV IRCSTORBAY PAGE - 5
STORAGE BAY
IRC PARKS MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
j
i
Heading # 17
1 SGL DOOR 3 STORAGE BAY 6 TO ELECTRIC ROOM 9 90 - RH
TYPE Dl 310 " X 710 " X 1 - 3 / 4 " FLUSH HM DOOR X HM FRAME
3 HINGE BB1199 4 1 / 2 X 4 1 / 2 US32D HA H4
1 LOCKSET L9080T 06A 50 - 231 RH 630 SC L4
10 - 072 ( 3 )
1 CLOSER 4041 REG TBSRT AL LC C2
( MOUNT RA ON PULL SIDE OF DOOR )
1 PROTECTION PLATE 193S 10 " X 34 " US32D HA Fl
1 WALL STOP 232W US32D HA S1A
1 DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN X 36 " PE W6
1 THRESHOLD 171 A X 36 " PE TH3
3 DOOR SILENCER 307D GREY HA M1
1 CYLINDER CORE 23 - 030 GMK EVEREST 626 SC AP1
D - RESTRICTED KWY
2. 12 DIAPER CHANGING STATION
Bobrick 13-2200 , Brocar Model 100EH, Koala KB 100-00, or World Dryer ABC- 100 ,
colors grey or white. Sizes are 34 . 5 to 35 inches wide, 19 to 20 inches high, and 4 inches
deep . Changing surface mounted at 34" to 38 " above the finished floor. Use
manufacturer' s mounting hardware and comply with their installation requirements to
support a minimum 100 pound load in the open position. Surface mount only, do not recess
unit.
2.13 INSTALLATION :
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners
which are appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of unit. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
2. 14 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly .
B . Relace damaged or defective units .
C . Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings .
* * * END OF SECTION* * *
10800-4
t`
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design
ofNew Low-Rise Residential Buildings. "
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install temperature and pressure-relief valves and extend to closest floor drain .
B . Install vacuum-relief valves and expansion tank in cold-water- inlet piping.
C Install shutoff valves and unions at hot- and cold-water piping connections .
D. Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined -
E- Electrically ground units according to authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15480
15480 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Page ] of I
SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of projection screens is shown on drawings.
B . Types of projection screens required include :
Front projection screens, electrically or manually operated as called out on the
drawings.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from'a
single manufacturer as complete units, including necessary mounting hardware and
,1
accessories.
B. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface : Measure gain of screen viewing
surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photo
goniometer using test methods and test apparatus per FS GG-S-00172D (1 ) for
determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces .
Ratings of "one" refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the
magnesium carbonate surface.
C . Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide projection screen fabrics identical to
those materials which have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame
resistance as indicated below:
NFPA 701 per small scale test.
D . Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew resistant screen fabrics as determined by
Federal Standard 191A/5760.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of screen indicated.
LOS DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver projections screens until building is enclosed, other work within
spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of
screens is ready to take place . 11132-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15736 - SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls; intended for indoor installations.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : For each unit indicated.
B . Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article loo, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1 .4 WARRANTY
A . Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace self-contained air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five
<5> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2 Lennox.
3 . Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
4. Bard.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 1 of 1
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PARTI - GENERAL
i
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A . Definition: "glass includes prime glass, processed glass, and fabricated glass .
"Glazing" includes glass installation and materials used to install glass . Types of work
in this section include glass and glazing for:
Window units sidelites, transoms
Window wall
Entrances and other doors, not indicated as "preglazed".
B . Packaged mirror units are specified as "accessories" in section 10800 .
1 . 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Prime Glass Manufacturer: One of the following for each type/color/pattem of glass :
ASG Industries . Inc.
1 Guardian Industries Corporation
Ford Glass Company
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company
PPG Industries, Inc .
Visteon
B . Certificate: Submit certificates from respective-1nanufacturers attesting that glass and
glazing materials furnished for project comply with requirements .
C . Glazing Standards : Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Assoc.
(FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent
requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards .
D . InstallerQualifications - Installation contractor specializing in glazing, with a minimum
of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and also being an approved installer
for the glazing product supplier.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 GLASS PRODUCTS
Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass : Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3
i (glazing select), fully tempered. Other glass products for impact resistance are called out
08800- 1
B . Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation . �\ l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS )
2 . 01 MANUALLY-OPERATED FRONT PROJECTIONS SCREENS
A. General: Provide manufacturer' s standard units consisting of case, screen,
mounting accessories and other components a required for a complete installation
and complying with descriptive requirements indicated below.
B . Spring-Roller-Operated Projection Screens : Units designed and fabricated for wall
or ceiling installation and complying with the following requirements :
1 . Screen Case: Fabricated in one piece from not less than 22-gage steel with
flat back design, vinyl-covered or baked-enamel finish, and end caps with
integral roller brackets and furnished with universal mounting brackets in
finish matching end caps to enable attachment to wall or ceiling .
2 . Screen: Mildew - and flame-resistant glass fiber fabric with vinyl-coated
viewing surface complying with requirements indicated below, with top
edge mounted on. And securely anchored to, a 3 " diameter rigid steel spring
roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat,
with ends of rod protected by plastic caps containing a screw-attached /
saddle and pull .
Size of Viewing Surface : As indicated.
Type of viewing Surface : Matte white with minimum gain characteristics
complying with FS GG- S-001721) (1 ) for Type A screen surface .
Edge Treatment: Black masking borders .
C . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Series 500 Auditorium; Bretford/Knox Manufacturing Co .
Model C; Da-Lite Screen Co . , Inc.
Luma 2 ; Draper Shade & Screen Co .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. General;_Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen
manufacturer' s instructions .
11132-2 t
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15736 - SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls; intended for indoor installations.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : For each unit indicated.
B . Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article loo, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1 .4 WARRANTY
A . Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace self-contained air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five
<5> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2 Lennox.
3 . Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
4. Bard.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 .2 PACKAGED UNITS
ng of cabinet,
ssembled
-wired unit; consisti
A Description : d,compressor, ev poratortainfaue evaporator acoil , air filters, and controls; and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil; with integral water-cooled condenser.
B . Disconnect Switch : Factory mounted on equipment.
C . Cabinet Frame and Panels : Structural-steel frame with galvanized-steel panels with baked-
enamel finish in color selected by Architect, and with access doors or panels.
1 . Insulation : Minimum 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -num-) thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior
and control panel .
2 . Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
3 . Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with directional louvers .
Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior
4 . Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: .
D . Evaporator Fan: Galvanized-steel, double-width , double-inlet, forward-curved centrifugal fan;
statically and dynamically balanced .
I . Drive: [Belt, with fan mounted on permanently lubricated bearings] or [Direct, with fan
and motor resiliently mounted] .
2 . Fan Sheaves: Cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced , bored to fit shafts and
keyed.
3 . Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when
set at midposition.
4 . Motors: Multispeed, PSC type.
E . Compressor : Hermetically sealed, [reciprocating] or [scroll] type, 3600 rpm maximum, and
resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection .
F. Evaporator Coil : Direct-expansion coil with seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins .
G . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection .
H . Permanent Filters: 1 -inch- (25 -nun-) thick, cleanable panel filters .
1 . Disposable Filters: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.
I . Refrigeration System : Factory assembled and tested, and charged with refrigerant; consisting of
piping and accessories connecting compressor, evaporator coil, and condenser coil, and
including the following:
1 . Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
2 . Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3 . Refrigerant dryer. s
4 . High-pressure switch .
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 2 of 2
B . Install front projection screens with screen cases in positions and relationship to
adjoining work indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner
which produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges
and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when lowered.
3 . 02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite
such protection, damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as
required to restore units to their original, undamaged condition.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
11132-3
on the drawings and may include, but are not limited to, safety laminate heat strengthed
glass with an .090 innerliner . Thicknesses of laminated glass vary from 3/8 inch to 9/ 16
inch. Frames to receive the glass vary to achieve various levels of impact resistance per ll
local and state codes. Refer to the drawings for a description of each glazed opening. l
2 . 02 GLAZING SEALANTS AND COMPONENTS
A . General : provide color of exposed sealant/compound indicated or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer' s standard colors, or black if no
color is os selected. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for selection of
hardness, depending upon the location of each application, conditions at time of
installation, and performance requirements as indicated. Select materials, and
variations or modifications, carefully for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the
installation.
B . 2-Part Polysulfide Glazing Sealant (2Ps-GS) : Elastomeric polysulfide sealant
complying with FS TTS-227 , Class A, Type 2 ; specially compounded and tested to
show a minimum of 20 years resistance to deterioration in normal glazing applications.
Use for exterior applications.
C . Acrylic Emulsion Glazing Sealant (AcEm-GS) : Emulsion of acrylic, with or without
latex rubber modification; compounded specifically for glazing; non-hardening, non-
staining, and non-bleeding. Use for interior applications.
2 .03 GLAZING GASKETS
A . Polvvinvl Chloride Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded, flexible PVC gaskets of the
profile and hardness shown, or as required for watertight construction; comply with
ASTM D 2287 .
B . Cellular Neoprene Glazing Gaskets (PVC-GG) : Extruded/molded, closed-cell ,
integral-skinned neoprene of profile required to maintain watertight seal ; comply with
ASTM C509, Type II, black.
C . Vinvl Foam Glazing Tape (VF-GT) : Closed cell flexible, self-adhesive, non extruding,
polyvinyl chloride foam tape ; recommended by manufacturer for exterior, exposed,
watertight installation of glass, with only nominal pressure in the glazing channel ;
comply with ASTM C 1667 .
2 .04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant of gasket manufacturer.
B . Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 70-90 durometer hardness , with proven
compatibility with sealants used.
C. Spacers: Neoprene of EPDM, 40- 50 durometer hardness with proven compatibility
0-2
with sealants used.
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 .2 PACKAGED UNITS
ng of cabinet,
ssembled
-wired unit; consisti
A Description : d,compressor, ev poratortainfaue evaporator acoil , air filters, and controls; and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil; with integral water-cooled condenser.
B . Disconnect Switch : Factory mounted on equipment.
C . Cabinet Frame and Panels : Structural-steel frame with galvanized-steel panels with baked-
enamel finish in color selected by Architect, and with access doors or panels.
1 . Insulation : Minimum 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -num-) thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior
and control panel .
2 . Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
3 . Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with directional louvers .
Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior
4 . Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: .
D . Evaporator Fan: Galvanized-steel, double-width , double-inlet, forward-curved centrifugal fan;
statically and dynamically balanced .
I . Drive: [Belt, with fan mounted on permanently lubricated bearings] or [Direct, with fan
and motor resiliently mounted] .
2 . Fan Sheaves: Cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced , bored to fit shafts and
keyed.
3 . Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when
set at midposition.
4 . Motors: Multispeed, PSC type.
E . Compressor : Hermetically sealed, [reciprocating] or [scroll] type, 3600 rpm maximum, and
resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection .
F. Evaporator Coil : Direct-expansion coil with seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins .
G . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection .
H . Permanent Filters: 1 -inch- (25 -nun-) thick, cleanable panel filters .
1 . Disposable Filters: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.
I . Refrigeration System : Factory assembled and tested, and charged with refrigerant; consisting of
piping and accessories connecting compressor, evaporator coil, and condenser coil, and
including the following:
1 . Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
2 . Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3 . Refrigerant dryer. s
4 . High-pressure switch .
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
5 . Low-pressure switch .
6 . Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
7. Low-ambient switch .
8 . Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
K. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts, internal-
winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling reset relay.
I - Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.
2 . Adjustable Thermostat: Remote to control the following:
a Supply fan .
b • Compressor.
C. Electric heater.
3 System Selector Switch : Off-heat-auto-cool .
4 . Fan Control Switch : Auto-on .
L. Ventilation Options :
1 Motorized Outside-Air Damper: Motorized, 2-position blade damper allowing induction
Of specified quantity of outside air; with spring-return, low-voltage damper motor. <
PART 3 - EXECUTION
l
i
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Anchor units to structure .
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A . Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
B Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B . Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks . Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 3 of
D. Compressed Filler (Rod) Ccn-FR) - Closed cell or waterproof jacketed roof stock of
synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible
and resilient, with 5 - 10 psi compression strength for 25% deflection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Watertight and airtight installation of each glass product is required, except as
otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind
loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors), without failure including loss
or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight,
deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
B . Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation, and subsequent
operation of glazed components of the work. During installation, discard units with
significant edge damage or other imperfections.
C . Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation .
D . Comply with combined recommendations and technical reports by manufacturers of
glass and glazing products as used in each glazing channel, and with
recommendations of Flat Glass Market Assoc. "Glazing Manual", except where more
stringent requirements are indicated.
3 . 02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean glazing channel and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate . Remove lacquer
from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are used .
B . Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3 .03 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in still rabbit, located 1 /4 of glass width from each
comer. Set blocks in thin course of heel-bead compound, if any.
B . Provide spacers inside and out, or proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than
50 united inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing.
Provide 1 /8 " minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width, except with sealant tape used thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern , draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
08800-3
SECTION 11458 - DISAPPEARING STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specifications Sections, 06100-Rough Carpentry, 06200-Finish Carpentry,
and 09900-Painting, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and Install, as detailed, and as located on the Drawings, fold-up or sliding
disappearing stairways. Complete trim-out and painting of the finish product is included .
APPROVED I IANUFACTURER'S :
All as manufactured by one of the following approved companies;
A. BESSLER STAIRWAY COMPANY
B . PRECISION LADDERS, LLC
C. STAIR-SCAPE
1 .04 MATERIAL:
Stairway shall be manufacturer of metal, wood or a combination of both. Rated capacities
shall be a minimum of 400 pounds. Units shall be designed
the bottorn
chord of wood trusses with a panel opening width of 2ot30rinchestall s,edtween depending on the
manufacturer and the unit specified. . Refer to building sections to determine the floor to
ceiling height requirements . Handrails on one or both sides are preferred, but are not
required . Wood treads shall be select, kiln dried yellow pine with a steel ladder rod under
each tread for added strength. Any aluminum treads shall be 6 " X width specified X .225 "
alum.- Channel with self-adhesive anti-slip "Flex Tread". Storage cover panel shall be metal
or plywood.
1 .05 DESIGN:
The fully engineered stairs shall retract into its own housing or attic space when not in use .
Units shall lower with pull chain, rope, or a motor supplied by manufacturer, and as
specified on the drawings . Manual storing units require folding up assembly and pushing it
Frames shall be secured to the trusses with stainless steel screws at mounting point
with assistance from a spring loaded or counterbalanced factory installed mechanism.
nts
depicted by the manufacturer. as
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
Stairs shall meet all industry standards and carry a one year warranty. Shop drawing
submittals are required for this item.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
11458-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
5 . Low-pressure switch .
6 . Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
7. Low-ambient switch .
8 . Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
K. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts, internal-
winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling reset relay.
I - Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.
2 . Adjustable Thermostat: Remote to control the following:
a Supply fan .
b • Compressor.
C. Electric heater.
3 System Selector Switch : Off-heat-auto-cool .
4 . Fan Control Switch : Auto-on .
L. Ventilation Options :
1 Motorized Outside-Air Damper: Motorized, 2-position blade damper allowing induction
Of specified quantity of outside air; with spring-return, low-voltage damper motor. <
PART 3 - EXECUTION
l
i
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Anchor units to structure .
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A . Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
B Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B . Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks . Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 3 of
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
C . Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
ew components,
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with n
and retest.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
D . Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15736
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 4 of 4
Page 1 of 2
Bessler Stairway Company112
STM
S_ LEft' J
WAY COMPANY
R Division of ASI
Residential and commercial installations, schools, offices, churches , stores.
Easy operation. Safe and convenient use. Superbly engineered for maximum stability. Responds
to the lightest touch. Models and sizes to suit most any budget and space requirement. 400 to 800
lbs. load capacities .
MODEL l00 Our very best. Solid one-
piece stringers and treads of selected 3uggestaa
1x8 dried yellow pine . Ladder rod under Capacily
each tread for added strength and 800lbe.
rigidity. 1 3/8 " GRADE A Hollow Core
Door. Ladder width is 18 7/8 " . Full
length handrail . Shipping weight 'w+k*Mfr rVg
n•
approximately 190 pounds . 71W to
Finished Jambs and Trim not �tN �ges � �*
supplied . d » Pl �
cell In wv la Inramanm 661
B C D E F
A Radius Plumb
Size Floor to Floor Run below Panel Opening Retail
Above HeightAbove Fi 4 (Fig,3) Price
(F. ig.4)
M93) (Fig.3)
� 7 '-7 " to 7110" 4'-4" 3' -2 " 6'-5 " 2 x 5'- 10" $ 1 ,320.00
� 7 ' - I1 to 8' 4" 11 " 3 ' - 8 " 6'- 10" 2'-6" x 5' - 10" $ 1 ,330.00
� 8' -5 " to 8'- 10" 5'-7 " 1 " 7'-3 6" x 5 '- 10 " $ 1 ,350 .00
� 8'- 11 " to 9' _4" 6'-2 " 6" T-7 " 6" x 6' 0" $ 1 ,390 .00
� 9'-5 " to 9'- 10" 6'-4" 9" 8'-0" 2' 6" x 61 -411 $ 15420 .00
6 9'- 1 l " to 10'-4" 6-8 " 5 '-0" 8'-4 " 2'-6" x 6'-8 " $ 15440 .00
10'-5 " to 10' - 71_ 011 51-31 8'-9" 2'-6" x 7' -0" $ 11480 .00
10
10'- 11 " to 11 '- F- 6"
5 .5 „ 9'-2"
I8 114
11458 - 2
D . Voids and Filler Rods : Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or
installing filler rods in channel at heel of jambs and head (do not. leave voids in sill
charnels), except as otherwise indicated and depending on light size, thickness and
type of glass, and complying with manufacturer' s recommendations .
E . Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
F . Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial
"wash" away from glass . Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out
of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets .
G. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass and stops or frames promptly after
installation, and eliminated stains and discolorations .
H . Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not
"walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. Anchor gasket to stop with
matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured
heel bead .
I . Gasket Glazing : Miter cut and bond ends together at comers where gaskets are used for
channel glazing, so that gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or
leaks in glazing system.
J . Structural Gasket Glazing : Cut zipper strips slightly long, to ensure tight closure .
Lubricate zipper strip and use special tool to install zipper. Do not lubricate glazing
channel or anchorage rabbet. Comply with details as shown and manufacturer' s
instructions, including possible use of liquid sealants and weep holes .
3 . 03 CURE PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A . Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass . Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass . Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. Cure sealants for
high early strength and durability.
B . Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, etched, abraded or
damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents
and vandalism.
C . Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project.
Comply with glass product manufacturer' s recommendations for final cleaning. Sub-
contractors performing glass and window cleaning must be fully insured to replace
damaged glass as a direct result of their negligence . The general contractor is
ultimately responsible for replacing all damaged glass . (`
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
08800-4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
C . Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
ew components,
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with n
and retest.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
D . Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15736
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I'll/Ssw'p 2M.LRa°t
SECTION 15738 , SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIOI•IING UNITS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A• This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat
PmnP
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units
units consisting of separate
and may be connected to ducts, are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting,
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A• Product Data; For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B• Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, a
intended use. nd Accessories: Listed and IabeIed as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
1 . 4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace split-system air
gantial Completion.units that fail in materials and work
manufacturer
sh
years from date of Subst
p within five
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
products Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B• Manufacturers : Subject to compliance wi
following: th requirements, provide products by one of the
I • Carrier Air Conditioning, Div. of Carrier Corp.
2• First Co.
3 . Friedrich Air Conditioning Company,
4. Lennox Industries Inc.
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 1 of
DIVISION 9. FINISHES
SECTION 09100 - LATIIING AND STUCCO
1.01 GENERAL ,
1 . All applicable provisions of the General Conditions are a part of this section.
2. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc ., and services necessary and
incidental to the complete fabrication, furnishing and erection of this section as
shown, noted, detailed and reasonably implied on the drawings and in the
specifications.
3. All lathing, plastering, and stucco work, in addition to conforming to this section,
shall conform to the American National Standards Specifications A42.2 and A42 .3 .
1 .02 MATERIALS :
Stucco
1 . Do not use any precolored stucco mixes.
/1 2 . Premix stucco bag mix shall conform to ASTM C-926, Gray.
3 . Sand shall be clean, sharp, fine, sand conforming to ASTM C- 144 .
4. Water shall be clean, fresh, portable and free from mineral organic substances that ,
would affect the set of stucco.
Metal Lath
1 . Self-furring metal lath shall be expanded metal lath with staggered indentations
spaced 3 - 1/2" apart horizontally and 2" apart vertically with indentations of depth to
hold lath a minimum of 1/4" away from back-up material. Lath shall be hot dipped
galvanized for interior and exterior use and shall weigh 3 .4 pounds per square yard.
2. Metal lath to be used where supports are spaced over 16" on centers shall be hot
dipped galvanized, expanded metal lath stiffened with 3/8 " ribs spaced 4" on center,
weighing a minimum of 3.4 pounds per square yard.
3 . Sheets secured to supports at intervals not exceeding six inches (0) . Place ties
where sides of sheets lap at supports, and at side laps or sheets between supports .
Tie wire to be not less than 18 ga. galvanized wire.
09100-1
Bessler Stairway Company#2 Page 2 of 2
I F- 5 " to 1I '-
10 " 71-911 5 ' 10" 9'- 6 " $ 1 2'- 6 " x 7'-6" 620 . 00
LPP' to8 '- 1 " 6'- 1 " 9'- 10 " ' " x 7'-9"� $ 1 ,710 :00
8 '-6 " 6'-4 " 10'-3 "
2'-6" xH]E800. 0]01
*Prices are F. O.B . Memphis, TN *
ORDERING INFORMATION
Click for Larger Picture
• Orders are to be confirmed in writing to eliminate errors or mistakes. Specify both FLOOR TO
FLOOR and FLOOR TO CEILING measurements when ordering BESSLER one-piece
stairways . (Click Photo for Larger Image)
. BESSLER STAIRWAYS are engineered and custom built to fit and operate within the
requirements as shown in the charts and illustrations, and not subject to cancellation after
construction begins.
• ROUGH OPENING should be 2 " wider and longer than panel size shown.
lit STAIRWAYS ARE SHIPPED UNASSEMBLED
• SPECIFY MODEL AND SIZE ON YOUR ORDER.
For A distributor in your area or for additional information, please E-Mail us at bessler@bessler corn or
call our Customer Service Department at 901 /360- 1900
J n
http://www.bessler.com/rnodl00 .htm 11456 - 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I'll/Ssw'p 2M.LRa°t
SECTION 15738 , SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIOI•IING UNITS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A• This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat
PmnP
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units
units consisting of separate
and may be connected to ducts, are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting,
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A• Product Data; For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B• Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, a
intended use. nd Accessories: Listed and IabeIed as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
1 . 4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace split-system air
gantial Completion.units that fail in materials and work
manufacturer
sh
years from date of Subst
p within five
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
products Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B• Manufacturers : Subject to compliance wi
following: th requirements, provide products by one of the
I • Carrier Air Conditioning, Div. of Carrier Corp.
2• First Co.
3 . Friedrich Air Conditioning Company,
4. Lennox Industries Inc.
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 1 of
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON' ENGINEERING SERVICES �ylp 2MARo9
5 . Trane Co . (The); Unitary Products Group.
6. York International Corp.
2.2 EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1 . Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B . Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
1 . Insulation : Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
2 . Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminalbox for overcurrent
protection .
E. Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
F. Fan Motor: Multispeed.
G. Filters: l inch (25 min) thick; in fiberboard frames
23 AIR-COOLED , COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
th removable panels for access to
, weep
A Casing ,holes foreeelwater dra nage,! and mounting holes h baked enamel, rin base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed (reciprocating] or (scroll] type with crankcase heater and
mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Mounting Base: Concrete.
Page 2 of 4
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
Page 1 of 1
Closed- Oattlan (Half of ladder stored over door section Through Stak Opening FjmjA*d remb Md
panel and other half Over attic 1166Y.) 40#11 Om Tom nw s ,6k+d
nmSNED e6ElYkla —� b4 Eee�Fer
5706
FIG4 FIG. 2
�- - PANEL. OPENING --'�
Stairway partly DOW" on panel Opon Position
-- a
// . Tran Above sr eerow
E
A
MUM-
Pu mWIW *W lanwron
PMMr r AI !n«[Kaf }eehl Sn�++ l
Door 0 D6o>+n8 ni. eeor�r
MAMA !bM1 h E4eYetod �._..-- D --._..._
F (i.. 3 .IMs FIG. 4 -
1458 -.4 -
4. Diamond-mesh lath lapped at sides not less than 1/2" and at ends not less than I " .
�1 End laps of sheets should generally occur only over supports; if between, end of
sheets to be laced or adequately tied with # 18 ga., galvanized, annealed wire.
5 . No paper backed laths will be accepted. Remove paper backings on any laths
supplied to the job site. Utilize 30# felt roofing paper or backing as called out on
the plans .
6. Install according to ASTM C 1063 .
1.03 MIXING AND APPLICATION:
1 . Before the application of stucco masonry, all surfaces shall be clean and free from
defect. Concrete surfaces to receive stucco shall be coated with a bonding agent to
insure proper bond. Dampen masonry surfaces with a fog spray immediately prior
to application so as to prevent excessive withdrawal of moisture from the stucco .
2. Stucco shall be applied in three (3) coats to a total thickness of 3/4" over specified
metal lath and in two (2) coats to a total thickness of 5/8 " on concrete or masonry.
Finish coat to be installed as per manufacturer' s recommendations of approximately
1 /4" thickness with a smooth sponge finish.
3 . Cross rake all scratch coats in order to form a mechanical bond with brown coats .
/1 Lightly cross-scratch all brown coats of plaster in order to form a mechanical bond
with the finish coat.
4 . Keep each base coat moist for at least 48 hours; commence moistening as soon as
plaster is hardened sufficiently to prevent injuries. If atmospheric conditions are
hot and dry, curing time shall be extended as necessary to at no additional cost to
the Owner. Allow base coat to cure for a minimum of seven (7) days before
applying finishing coat.
5 . FINISH COAT shall be free from waves, dents, trowel marks, and shall be a
smooth sponge finish. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1 /4 inch in 10 feet
from a true plane in finished surfaces.
6 . Plaster and stucco used for patching and replacing existing work shall be mixed,
applied and finished to match adjacent surfaces.
1 .04 CLEANING:
1 . After completion of work, all scaffolding, tools, and other equipment shall be
removed from the building, taking care not to damage work of other trades. All
cement plaster rubbish shall be removed and the building left broom clean.
09100-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON' ENGINEERING SERVICES �ylp 2MARo9
5 . Trane Co . (The); Unitary Products Group.
6. York International Corp.
2.2 EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1 . Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B . Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
1 . Insulation : Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
2 . Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminalbox for overcurrent
protection .
E. Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
F. Fan Motor: Multispeed.
G. Filters: l inch (25 min) thick; in fiberboard frames
23 AIR-COOLED , COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
th removable panels for access to
, weep
A Casing ,holes foreeelwater dra nage,! and mounting holes h baked enamel, rin base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed (reciprocating] or (scroll] type with crankcase heater and
mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Mounting Base: Concrete.
Page 2 of 4
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
i
/
(3 LRRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
/ IRC Maintenance
2.4 ACCESSORIES W/& 4Z 2NAZ09'
A• Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B• Refrigerant Line Kits : Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with Hazed fttings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 INSTALLATION
A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturers standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
B . Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- ( 100-ntm ) thick,
reinforced concrete base; 4 inches ( 100 mm ) larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete. "
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
C. histall ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. , .,,:;
D. Install compressor-condenser components on neoprene isolators.
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fitti
allow access to unit. ngs. Install tub ng to
B . Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff duty valve and union or flange on the sup1
connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.
P Y
C. Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
D. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. including
B. Leak Test: Ager installation
leaks exist. , charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 3 0f 4
2. Stucco Contractor is responsible for protecting all existing work, windows, doors,
equipment, etc. from stucco residue during application. Clean any residue that may
exist at completion of work.
1.05 STUCCO ACCESSORIES:
NOTE : REFER TO PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS FOR
SPECIFIC TYPE AND PLACEMENT PER PROJECT.
I . Casing Beads :
a. For interior use shall be formed of 24 gauge Galvanized Steel, ASTM
A525-81 , A527-80, A446 (.0179 thickness G90 gaiv.).
b. For exterior use shall be formed of Solid Zinc Alloy, type #66 as
manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, 466 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Company, type 466X as manufactured by Keene Products or an
approved comparable product. Zinc shall be Ahoy 190, ASTM B69-89
(.0179 thickness).
C. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unplasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), type 6658 or 6675 as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation, or an
approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class 13244C.
2. Interior comer beads shall be fabricated of 26 ga. galvanized, type 1 , as
manufactured by National Gypsum Co. , I -A as manufactured by National Gypsum
Co., l -A as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Co., or # 1 as manufactured by Inland
Steel Products Co., or an approved comparable product.
3 • Control Joints, Expansion Joints, Channel Reveals ;.
a. For exterior use on flat vertical and horizontal surfaces shall be Solid Zinc
Alloy as manufactured by U. S . Gypsum Company, Inland Steel Company,
Keene Products, or an approved comparable product. Profiles and
configurations vary greatly; refer to plans and details for product numbers
and applications.
b. For exterior use shall be Rigid Vinyl (PVC, Unpiasticized Polyvinyl
Chloride), as manufactured by Vinyl Corporation or an approved
comparable product. Profiles and configurations vary greatly; refer to plans
and details for product numbers and applications. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell
class 13244C. ASTM C1063 -86.
4. Inside corner Expansion Jointsforinterior or exterior applications .where depicted
on the drawings, shall be vinyl, Model 3058 or 3075, as manufactured by Vinyl
Corporation, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D-1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM CI063-86.
09100-3
DIVISIONS 12 FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12290 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK: LIGHT COMMERCIAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
A. References
I ) AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute : Applicable Quality Standards.
2) FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
3) FS MMM-A- 130 - Adhesive, Contact .
4) NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates .
5) ANSI A156 .9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.
6) PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood .
7) PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard .
8) PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK:
1
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service to complete the
casework and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or
both, except as for items specifically indicated as 'NOT IN CONTRACT' (NIC) .
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following :
I . Fabrication of Casework.
2 . Installation.
3 . Accessories .
4 . Hardware.
5 . Filler Panels.
1 .03 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06100, and Finish Carpentry Section 06200 . Provide
blocking within wall floor, or ceiling, required to give adequate support for
casework.
B . Mechanical Division 15000 : Stainless steel sinks and fittings which are integral
with casework, including all work for plumbing rough-in, supply waste and vent,
including shut-off valves at floor or wall . All heating and ventilating ductwork
and grilles in cabinets where required including connections, flashings, caps or
hoods .
12290-1
i
/
(3 LRRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
/ IRC Maintenance
2.4 ACCESSORIES W/& 4Z 2NAZ09'
A• Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B• Refrigerant Line Kits : Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with Hazed fttings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 INSTALLATION
A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturers standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
B . Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- ( 100-ntm ) thick,
reinforced concrete base; 4 inches ( 100 mm ) larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete. "
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
C. histall ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. , .,,:;
D. Install compressor-condenser components on neoprene isolators.
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fitti
allow access to unit. ngs. Install tub ng to
B . Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff duty valve and union or flange on the sup1
connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.
P Y
C. Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
D. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. including
B. Leak Test: Ager installation
leaks exist. , charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 3 0f 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES P,;e�Q 150 2MAP.
C. Operational Test. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15738
15739 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
page 4 of 4
C . Electrical Division 16000 : Electrical rough-in and connections from rough-in to
cabinet or equipment fixtures and devices requiring same, whatever Type and kind.
1 .04 BIDDING:
Do not bid sections of casework separately. Any item required to make the casework a
complete and workable unit will be by the casework Subcontractor, including installation.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. The " Quality Assurance" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are made part of this specification.
B . All work shall conform to section 400B Architectural Cabinets (Laminate Clad
Cabinets) as defined in the latest edition of the AWI " Quality Standards' unless
detailed as a higher grade .
C . Competence : The approved casework manufacturer must have a reputation for
doing satisfactory work on time and shall have completed comparable work.
D . The woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to
make certain that casework is not delivered until the building and storage areas are
sufficiently dry so that the casework will not be damaged by excessive changes in
moisture content.
1 .06 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS :
A. This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require
submission by the Contractor to the Architect for approval.
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the
contract documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility .
C . Submit samples, product data, certificates and shop drawings as required or
requested by the Architect, whether included in this list or not.
1 . 07 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit complete shop drawings on all items showing details, materials, location in
building and installation requirements prior to starting work.
B . Submit sample cabinet built to specification, prior to starting of work, for approval
of all materials.
C . The casework manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled
by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field
measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor and the 1c2 se9w 2 k
5 . Fascia Drip Screed for exterior applications where depicted on the drawings, shall
!-1 be vinyl, Model DS 15-75 by Vinyl Corporation, or Model 540-75 by Plastic
Components, or an approved comparable product. ASTM D- 1784-81 cell class
13244C. ASTM C1063-86.
1.06 EXECUTION:
1 . Quality - Follow recommendations and specifications for strict installation. Allow
adequate time for each of three (3) coats to dry before going on with the next coat.
2. Stucco Accessories :
a. The stucco contractor shall request a project walk-around with the
Architect prior to installing any exterior stucco accessories, to insure all
conditions, materials, and applications are understood.
b. Corner beads , for interior applications only, shall be installed on all comers
and edges of comer openings. Comer beads shall extend the full height of
the corners on which they are applied and shall act as a ground.
C. Casing beads shall be applied where stucco stops and other products begin,
or where indicated on plans and details.
n
d. When applying vinyl products, all intersections, end butts and end mitres
shall have manufacturer' s approved sealant placed at raw edges to adhere
the sections prior to application of stucco.
3 . Metal lath shall be applied with long dimension of sheet across supports .
4. Control Joints and Expansion Joints shall be installed in exact locations shown, or ,
as to check shrinkage and expansion cracks. Do not fill any throats of control j oints
with sealants .
5 . Inside-Corner Expansion Joints shall be iustalle(f in exact locations shown on
details.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
'� 09100-4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES P,;e�Q 150 2MAP.
C. Operational Test. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15738
15739 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15810 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary : Metal and nonmetal ducts and accessories in pressure classes 2 inch wg (500 Pa) or
less and a maximum velocity of 2400 fpm ( 12 m/s).
B . Submit Product Data for fire dampers and smoke dampers .
C. Submit Shop Drawings detailing duct layout and including locations and types of duct
accessories, duct sizes, transitions, radius and vaned elbows, special supports details, and
inlets and outlet types and locations .
D . Comply with NFPA 90A for systems serving spaces more than 25 , 000 cu. ft . (708 cu . m) in
volume or building Types 11, IV, and V construction over 3 stories in height.
E. Comply with NFPA 90B for systems serving spaces 1 - or 2-family dwellings or serving spaces
less than 25,000 cu . It. (708 cu . m) .
F. Comply with NFPA 96 for systems serving public or private cooking operations, except single-
family residential usage; and includes cooking equipment exhaust hoods, grease-removal
devices, exhaust ductwork, exhaust fans, dampers, fire-extinguishing equipment, and all other
auxiliary or ancillary components of systems or systems that are involved in the capture,
containment, and control of grease- laden cooking effluent.
G . Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.
11. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Qualifications : AABC or NEBB certified .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3 . 1 DUCTS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel : Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653 , G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275)
coating designation with mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to
view.
B . Fibrous Glass Duct Board : Comply with UL 181 , Class 1 , fibrous glass with fire-resistant,
reinforced foil -scrim-kraft barrier, and having the air-side surface treated to prevent erosion .
Thickness: 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm).
C. Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071 , Type II, with an airstream surface coated with a temperature-
resistant coating.
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 09230 - CEMENT BACKING BOARD
PART1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary
conditions and Division- 1 Specifications Sections, addenda apply to work of this section.
1 .02 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
Lightgage Metal Framing Section 05400
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Gypsum Wallboard Section 092.50
Ceramic Tile Section 09300
1 .03 DESCRIPTION:
Extent of cement backing board system work is shown on Drawings and Schedules for
areas receiving ceramic tile.
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Obtain cement board from a single manufacturer.
l
B . Single-Installer Responsibility: A single installer shall perform the work of this
section; and shall be a firm specializing in this work for at least 3 years, capable of
showing successful installations similar to work required for project, using
recommended attachment screws and spacing of screws .
C . ANSI A108 . 11 - 1999 : Interior installation of cementious backer units .
1 .05 SUBMITTALS :
Submit manufacturer' s product data, specifications; and installation instructions for the
cement board systems .
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the original packages, containers, or bundles
bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification.
B. Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water and in
such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Stack cement
boards flat to avoid sagging or damage to edges, or surfaces -
09230-1
manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions .
i' D . Submit samples of laminated plastic for color selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of all items not manufactured by the
casework contractor, as requested by the Architect.
1 .08 DELIVERY9 STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
B . Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding or similar operations
'which could damage, soil or deteriorate the woodwork, have been completed in the
installation areas . If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored
in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting the requirements
specified for the installation area.
1 .09 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A . Conditioning : Woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise the Contractor of
temperature and humidity requirements for the woodwork installation and storage - '
areas.
i
B . Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain
moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1 . 0% tolerance of optimum
moisture content, from date of installation to through remainder of construction
period. Require woodwork manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content ''
and required temperature and humidity conditions .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 WOOD MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Lumber for stiles and rails: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI;
moisture content of 6 to I 1 percent; 8 to 13 percent for damp locations (as defined
by AWI) .
B . All lumber in contact with concrete floor shall be pressure treated .
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Plywood for box construction" to be 3/4 " luan plywood with melamine
finish for bottoms, tops and sides of wall cabinets, ends and sides of base cabinets,
and all shelving. Backs shall be 1 /2 " luan plywood on wall cabinets and 1 /8 "
masonite with hanging rail for base cabinets . All shelving adjustable, line board
with 32 mm system . No shelves or wall cabinets to exceed 33 " wide .
12290-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15810 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary : Metal and nonmetal ducts and accessories in pressure classes 2 inch wg (500 Pa) or
less and a maximum velocity of 2400 fpm ( 12 m/s).
B . Submit Product Data for fire dampers and smoke dampers .
C. Submit Shop Drawings detailing duct layout and including locations and types of duct
accessories, duct sizes, transitions, radius and vaned elbows, special supports details, and
inlets and outlet types and locations .
D . Comply with NFPA 90A for systems serving spaces more than 25 , 000 cu. ft . (708 cu . m) in
volume or building Types 11, IV, and V construction over 3 stories in height.
E. Comply with NFPA 90B for systems serving spaces 1 - or 2-family dwellings or serving spaces
less than 25,000 cu . It. (708 cu . m) .
F. Comply with NFPA 96 for systems serving public or private cooking operations, except single-
family residential usage; and includes cooking equipment exhaust hoods, grease-removal
devices, exhaust ductwork, exhaust fans, dampers, fire-extinguishing equipment, and all other
auxiliary or ancillary components of systems or systems that are involved in the capture,
containment, and control of grease- laden cooking effluent.
G . Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.
11. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Qualifications : AABC or NEBB certified .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3 . 1 DUCTS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel : Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653 , G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275)
coating designation with mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to
view.
B . Fibrous Glass Duct Board : Comply with UL 181 , Class 1 , fibrous glass with fire-resistant,
reinforced foil -scrim-kraft barrier, and having the air-side surface treated to prevent erosion .
Thickness: 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm).
C. Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071 , Type II, with an airstream surface coated with a temperature-
resistant coating.
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
D . Thickness : 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm). t,
g . Adhesive: ASTM C 916, Type I .
F . Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel pin, length required penetrate liner plus a 1 /8- inch
(3-mm) projection maximum into the airstream .
G . Joint and Seam Tape: Comply with UL 181 A .
H . Joint and Seam Sealant: Comply with UL 181 A .
1 . Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication : Comply with SMACNA' s " HVAC Duct Construction
Standard " for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint
types and intervals .
mply with SMACNA' s "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction
J . Fabricate Fibrous Glass Ducts: Co
Standard. "
3 .2 ACCESSORIES
A . Volume-Control Dampers: Factory fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with
required hardware and accessories . Single-blade and multiple opposed -blade, standard leakage
rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications .
�omplete with required hardware and
B Fir esDampeTs: labeled Factory
-faccbdicated fire ng UL 555 , " Standard rd forFire Dampers ."
ampers, c
mlete with
C . Ceiling Fire
accessories . DUL listed and nlabeled; comply dwith the conrequired
struct on det ilsfor the tested
floor/roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
D . Smoke Dampers: Factory-fabricated smoke and fire dampers, complete with required
hardware and accessories . UL labeled according to UL SSSS , " Standard for Leakage Rated
Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems ." Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also
be UL labeled for 1 - 1 /2-hour rating according to UL 555 , " Standard for Fire Dampers . "
E . Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181 , Class 1 .
F . Flexible Ducts : [Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing] or [Factory-
fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1 - 1 /2-inch- (38-mm-) thick,
glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner] .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 2
B . Countertops all 3/4 " plywood construction with 3 /4 " buildup, and all exposed faces
plastic laminate covered . ` J
C . Doors shall be 3 /4" MDF covered with plastic laminate . J
2.03 LAMINATED PLASTIC :
All laminated plastic shall meet NEMA LD-3 Standards and application of various types
shall be as follows :
A. 0 . 050 " Nominal Thickness Standard Quality : Counter tops, backsplashes, counter
edges, all tops, sides and edges of shelving.
B . 0 .04? " Nominal Thickness vertical surface grade: Door and drawer fronts and
edges and other exposed vertical and postformed surfaces .
C . Acceptable Laminate Manufacturers :
1 . Nevamar
2 . Wilsonart
3 . Pionite
4. Formica
5 . Substitutions : Only allowed with prior written approval from the Architect.
2 .04 ACCESSORIES :
A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A- 130 . Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit
application.
B . Fasteners : Size and type to suit application . All base and wall cabinets shall be
screwed together. Dowels are not acceptable .
C . Bolts Nuts Washers Lags Pins and Screws : Of size and type to suit application;
galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed
locations.
2.05 HARDWARE :
A. TYPES AND MANUFATURERS
1 . Hinges: concealed box construction (Grass, Mepla, Blum or an approved
manufacturer of equal quality) .
2 . Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley or approved equal, brushed aluminum wire
Pulls .
3 . Cabinet Locks : CCL or approved equal . ^
4 . Robe Hooks : Ives or Stanley. 12290-4
C . Handle cement boards to prevent damage. Protect metal framing members from
being bent or damaged . Protect gypsum panels in same manner as cement boards . \\
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER:
A . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DUROCK Cement Board Systern
as manufactured by the United States Gypsum Company, unless otherwise
indicated.
B . Equivalent systems of other manufacturers will be accepted under conditions as set
forth in the contract conditions.
C . Materials :
1 . Glass Mesh Mortar Unit (Cement Board) : USG DUROCK Exterior Cement
board 1/2" x 4' x 8 ' .
2. Cement board fasteners :
a. Non-wet areas- 1 1 /4", DUROCK Screws : wafer head with
anti-corrosive coating. Heads recessed or counter sunk .
b . Wet areas- 1 1 /4" , DUROCK Screws : wafer head stainless steel . Heads
recessed or countersunk.
D . Joint Reinforcement: DUROCK Tape (2" wide). NOTE : This portion of the work
is to be performed by the Ceramic Tile contractor per Section 09300.
E. Metal Framing : Comply with ASTM 0645 : Manufactured by the United States
Gypsum Company Min. 22 ga. Must meet ASTM A446, A525 , A568 , A463 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
A. Install metal framing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Stud spacing not to
exceed 16 in . o .c. Provide double studs at ends of each board.
B . Install cement board with rough side facing out and vertical edges over double supports .
Stagger joints in successive courses . Install adjacent board closely but not forced.
C . Fasten boards to framing with DUROCK screws . Space fasteners 8 " o .c. at walls . Locate
perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 " from edges. Counter sink screw heads slightly beneath the
board surface. Provide firm board contact with framing. Pre-drill edge screw locations to
prevent breaking at edges .
09230-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
D . Thickness : 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm). t,
g . Adhesive: ASTM C 916, Type I .
F . Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel pin, length required penetrate liner plus a 1 /8- inch
(3-mm) projection maximum into the airstream .
G . Joint and Seam Tape: Comply with UL 181 A .
H . Joint and Seam Sealant: Comply with UL 181 A .
1 . Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication : Comply with SMACNA' s " HVAC Duct Construction
Standard " for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint
types and intervals .
mply with SMACNA' s "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction
J . Fabricate Fibrous Glass Ducts: Co
Standard. "
3 .2 ACCESSORIES
A . Volume-Control Dampers: Factory fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with
required hardware and accessories . Single-blade and multiple opposed -blade, standard leakage
rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications .
�omplete with required hardware and
B Fir esDampeTs: labeled Factory
-faccbdicated fire ng UL 555 , " Standard rd forFire Dampers ."
ampers, c
mlete with
C . Ceiling Fire
accessories . DUL listed and nlabeled; comply dwith the conrequired
struct on det ilsfor the tested
floor/roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
D . Smoke Dampers: Factory-fabricated smoke and fire dampers, complete with required
hardware and accessories . UL labeled according to UL SSSS , " Standard for Leakage Rated
Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems ." Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also
be UL labeled for 1 - 1 /2-hour rating according to UL 555 , " Standard for Fire Dampers . "
E . Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181 , Class 1 .
F . Flexible Ducts : [Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing] or [Factory-
fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1 - 1 /2-inch- (38-mm-) thick,
glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner] .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEEMIG SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Duct System Pressure Class : Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct
pressure classification indicated .
B . Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.
C . Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures .
D. Dishwasher Exhaust Duct Installation : Comply with SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards . "
E. Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standard . "
F. Support and r- om]eet fibrous glass ducts according to SIVIACNA 's Tihrnns Glass hurt
Construction Standard . "
G . Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in
SMACNA standards .
H. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to
avoid erosion of duct liner.
I Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions .
J- Install fusible links in fire dampers.
3 .2 TESTING, ADJUSTING , AND BALANCING
A . Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to
indicated quantities.
END OF SECTION 15810
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 3
D . Joint Reinforcement Tape and Mortar Skim Coat : Apply tape over board joints and interior
corners. Do not overlap. NOTE : This portion of work to be performed by the Ceramic
Tile Contractor per Specification Section 09300.
E. Ceramic Tile: Comply with application requirements of Division-9 Section 09300 .
F . In wet areas, or areas subject to wash down due to periodic maintenance, install moisture
barrier on top of cement board . NOTE : This portion of the work to be performed by the
Ceramic Tile Contractor per specification Section 09300.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
i
09230-3
B . HINGES
1 • 1 Rair for doors up to 48 " in height.
2 • lair for doors over 48 " in height.
C . PULLS
1 . 3 - 1 /3 " brushed aluminum finish.
D . DRAWER GUIDES
1 . Drawer guides all metal, rated for 75 lbs.; 5/8 " plywood drawer bottoms and
backs and 3/4 " MDF (medium density fiberboard) plastic laminate covered
fronts.
E. FILERS
1 Drawer sides, back and front 1 /2 " Plywood with melamine finish, 1 /4 "
Plywood bottoms, with full extension drawer guides rated for 150 lbs .
Provide 3/4 " MDF plastic laminate covered fronts.
2 .07 SEALANT:
- a. Equal to General Electric Silicone Sealant.
2.08 ANCHORS •
A. Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage . Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion-resistances.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt shields for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for
subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.09 CASEWORK FABRICATION:
Detail shall conform to AWI (flush overlay design) and or as shown on drawings.
A. Wood moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity
conditions in the installation areas.
12290-5
GARRISON ENGINEEMIG SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Duct System Pressure Class : Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct
pressure classification indicated .
B . Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.
C . Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures .
D. Dishwasher Exhaust Duct Installation : Comply with SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards . "
E. Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standard . "
F. Support and r- om]eet fibrous glass ducts according to SIVIACNA 's Tihrnns Glass hurt
Construction Standard . "
G . Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in
SMACNA standards .
H. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to
avoid erosion of duct liner.
I Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions .
J- Install fusible links in fire dampers.
3 .2 TESTING, ADJUSTING , AND BALANCING
A . Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to
indicated quantities.
END OF SECTION 15810
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 3
� )
c�
B . Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings . Condition to average prevailing humidity ` l
conditions prior to installation. J
C . Fit shelves doors and all edges with plastic laminate edging. Use full length
pieces only . All edges shall be clad in plastic laminate, including a116 edges of
adjustable shelving.
D . Measurements : Before proceeding with fabrication of casework required to be fitted
to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as required for accurate fit. Where sequence of measuring
substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication
(without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for
subsequent scribing and trimming of casework for accurate fit.
E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application and other work
before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible . Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
F . Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes . Make joints hairline .
G . Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern.
H . Mechanically fasten backsplashes to countertops .
1 . Pre-Cut Openings : Fabricate architectural casework with pre-cut openings, where
possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams
for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant
coating.
J . Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1600-B , unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 COORDINATION :
A. Casework manufacturer is responsible for coordinating his work with work of other
trades, such as structural, plumbing, electrical and air conditioning. In so far as
possible, dimensional adjustments are to be determined before fabrication, and
reflected on the Shop Drawings . To minimize changes required by field conditions .
3.02 INSPE�_
12290-6
� )
c�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15 83 8 - POWER VENTILATORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B . Submit Shop Drawings, including roof-mounting details .
C . Bear the AMCA seal .
D . Comply with applicable NEMA standards .
E. ComPly with UL 705 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 VENTILATORS AND ACCESSORIES
—� A . Wall -Mounted Ventilators: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
B . Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Ceiling Units : Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
B . Ground power ventilators.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B .
END OF SECTION 15 83 8
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
Page ] of 1
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
1 .01 GENERAL:
A. Gypsum Board Standard: ASTM C 840
1 .02 MATERIALS :
A. Drywall Materials -, Exposed Gypsum Board ASTM C 36
1 . Long Edges : Standard taper
a. /z" Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
b. %2" Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
C. 5/8 " Gypsum Drywall (Regular) .
d. 5/8 " Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
e. 5/8 " Type-X Fire Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
f. 5/8 " Vandal Resistant Gypsum Drywall .
B . Trim Accessories : Provide manufacturer ' s standard metal trim accessories, of the
beaded type with face flanges for concealment in joint compound except where
semi-finishing or exposed type is indicated. See plans and details for specific
locations and conditions .
C . Provide corner beads at external corners . Install with nails or screws at minimum of
l6" on center. No crimp bead will be accepted unless in combination with nails or
screws .
D. Provide edge trim of the shape indicated where edge of gypsum board would
otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed; L-type for abutment at edges, other U-
type except special kerfed-type where kerf is provided in adjoining work. See plans
and details for specific locations and conditions.
E. Gypsum Board Fasteners : Self drilling, self tapping, bugle head, screws.
F. Joint tape : ASTM C 475 , performed, Type I1.
G. Joint Compound- ASTM 475, Type I.
H. Provide water-resistant type MR manufactured by United States Gypsum Company
for use with water-resistant backing board and cementitous substrate backing board.
1 .03 DRYWALL INSTALLATION AND FINISHING:
1 . Install gypsum boards- in lengths and directions which will minimize number of end
joints, and avoid end joints in central area of ceilings. Install walls and partitions
with exposed gypsum boards vertical, with joints offset on opposite sides of
09250-1
A. Prior to installation of casework, examine shop fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
B . Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in the installation
areas prior to installing.
3. 03 INSTALLATION:
A. Pre-Installation Set up a meeting at the project site with the general
contractor prior to delivery of casework and review coordination and environmental
controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to
receive work. Proceed with casework installation only when everyone concerned
agrees that required ambient conditions can be properly maintained .
B . Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates
well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
C . Install casework plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions . Shim as
required using concealed shims . Install to a tolerance of 1 /8 " IIq 8 ' - 0 " for plumb
and level (including tops) ; and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces .
D. Anchorcasework to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates .
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners
and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
E . Cabinets : Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly.
and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of
hardware and accessory items as indicated.
F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated and
secure cabinet and counter bases to the floor using appropriate angles and
anchorages .
G. Use thre__ aded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet
units and countertops.
H. Carefully scribe and cut casework to fit adjoining casework or other building
materials, leaving gaps of 1 /32 " maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for
this purpose but refinish the cut surface.
3 .04 ADJUSTMENT CLEANING FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
a. Repair damaeed and defective casework where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair the casework then replace it.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures
and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
b. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied
12290-7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15 83 8 - POWER VENTILATORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B . Submit Shop Drawings, including roof-mounting details .
C . Bear the AMCA seal .
D . Comply with applicable NEMA standards .
E. ComPly with UL 705 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 VENTILATORS AND ACCESSORIES
—� A . Wall -Mounted Ventilators: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
B . Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Ceiling Units : Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
B . Ground power ventilators.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B .
END OF SECTION 15 83 8
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
Page ] of 1
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas .
c. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section to whatever extent
not completed at the shop or prior to installation of casework.
d. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to
Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural casework being without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
e . Caulk top of backsplash at walls with G.E. Silicone Sealant or equal . If wall varies
over 1 /8 " at back splash, the wall is to be re-plastered to correct waves .
f. All casework to receive rubber base at the portion that touched the floor.
* * *END OF SECTION "
12290-8
partitions . Otherwise, install boards with edges perpendicular to supports, with end
joints staggered over supports, except where recommended in a different
arrangement by manufacturer. Install as per UL4U305 for 1 hour rating when
utilizing rated panels.
2 . Form "Floating" : Construction for gypsum boards at internal corners, except where
special isolation or edge trim is indicated.
3 . Screw gypsum boards to supports .
4 . Drywall Finishing: Except as otherwise indicated, apply joint tape and joint
compound at joints (both directions) between gypsum boards. Apply compound at
accessory flanges, penetrations, fasteners heads and surface defects .
5 . Apply compound in three (3 ) coats (plus prefill of cracks where recommended by
manufacturer); sand after last two (2) coats to achieve a Level 4 or Level 5 finish
per U . S . Gypsum Corporation guidelines . Refer to the Room Finish Schedule for
level of finish required for this project.
6 . Ceiling Finish as per Finish Schedule on the Construction Plans. Where a textured
ceiling is called for on the drawings the drywall finisher shall provide a 24 " X 24"
sample board for approval by the Owner prior to applying any finished ceiling
textures . {
7 . The drywall installer shall notify the General Contractor of walls out of plumb in
the vertical or horizontal direction, as well as the absence of proper wall, soffit,
overhead deadwood blocking, pipe and wire plate protectors prior to installing
drywall . Finished walls shall be no more than 3/16" out of dead straight within any
(six) 6 foot direction . Walls not conforming to this standard shall be removed and
replaced at the General Contractors expense .
8 . The drywall contractor shall remove all debris associated with his portion of the
work and remove all dried finishing compound from the floors .
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
/r
l
09250-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS , AND GRILLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Submit Product Data, including color charts for factory finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 OUTLETS AND INLETS
A Diffusers : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
B . Wall and Ceiling Registers: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
C Wall and Ceiling Grilles: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling- and
wall-mounted items.
B - Locate ceiling diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction 'Reflected
Ceiling Plans . " Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
END OF SECTION 15855
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 09300 - CERAMIC TILE WORK
1 . 01 GENERAL:
A. Coordination: Coordinate all with other trades whose work affects, connects with,
or is concealed by tile installations . Before proceeding, make certain all required
inspections have been made by local officials and the Architect. .
B . Scone of work:
1 . Preparation of substrate and installation of ceramic the on walls, floors, and
ceilings .
2 . Preparation substrate and installation of dimensional stone on floors and walls.
3 . Installation of waterproofing membrane on prepared substrate.
1 .02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS :
1 . Lightgauge Metal Framing Section 05400
2. Rough Carpentry Section 06100
3 . Lathing and Stucco Section 09100
4 . Cement Backing Board Section 09230
5 . Toilet Accessories Section 10800
6 . Floor Drains and Shower Drains Section 15421
1 .03 QUALITY STANDARDS :
A. Conform to applicable portions of the following :
1 . ANSI A108 . 1A- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile in the wet-set method,
with portland cement mortar.
2 . ANSI A109 . IB - 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile on a cured portland
cement mortar setting bed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortar.
3 . ANSI A108 .5 - 1999: Installation of ceramic tile with dry-set portland
cement mortar or latex-portland cement mortar.
4 . ANSI A108 . 13 - 1999 : Installation of load bearing, bonded, waterproof
membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone.
5 . ANSI A118 .4- 1999 : Specifications for latex-portland cement mortar.
6. ANSI A108 . 8- 1999 : Installation of ceramic tile with chemical resistant
furan resin mortar and grout.
7 . Tile Council of America, Inc . : The Industry' s Guide for Installation
Practices 2003 -2004 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 41st Edition.
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit samples of all ceramic tiles and dimensional stone scheduled for
installation.
B . Submit samples of the waterproofing membrane/system proposed for installation.
C. Submit manufacturer' s product data for tile setting compound and grout proposed
for installation.
09300-1
SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
l
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to the
work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION.
A. Extent of metal building systems work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and
as herein specified.
B . Rigid frame, clear span (RF) is a continuous frame building with a minimum roof
slope of 1 : 12 and a maximum roof slope of 4 : 12 consisting of uniform depth or
tapered columns and rafters. Building roof slopes are called out on building plan
sections .
1 . 03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A . Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly
execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of
other sections, including:
Cast in Place Concrete Section 03300
Unit Masonry Section 04200
Reinforced Unit Masonry Section 04230
Structural Steel Section 05120
Metal Decking - - Section 05300
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600
Joint Sealers Section 07900
Lay in Panel Ceilings
Painting Section 09510
Section 09900
Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Work Divisions 15 & 16
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the earliest possible date to insure timely
delivery and proper coordination of work by others. No variation from design sizes
will be permitted, but recommendations for modification of connections or details to
better suit fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed , in
writing to the attention of the Architect. Detailed shop drawings and design
calculations, prepared by the Building System Manufacturer, shall be signed and
sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
13122-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS , AND GRILLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Submit Product Data, including color charts for factory finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 OUTLETS AND INLETS
A Diffusers : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
B . Wall and Ceiling Registers: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
C Wall and Ceiling Grilles: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling- and
wall-mounted items.
B - Locate ceiling diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction 'Reflected
Ceiling Plans . " Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
END OF SECTION 15855
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Page 1 of 1
`, l
� ^�
_.�
(�
B . Shop drawings shall include erection plans, details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and j
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained. Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by the Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the Building System Manufacturer' s and Architect' s
(or the Architect' s subcontracted Structural Engineer review stamp) shall be used in
field and all other shop drawings will be considered void.
Work under this section includes
mensions to be
E confirmed in he fabrication processes n gconstruction.
and to t chlelated and
ues of
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members that are required by other trades .
1 . 05 BUILDING ANCHORAGE AND FOUNDATION
A. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column
reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. American
Buildings Company or the approved Building System Manufacturer shall specify
these designs and sizes. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the contractor not the
Building System Manufacturer. `/
B . Refer to Structural Plans and details for engineered foundation and connection
requirements .
1 . 06 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
A. All structural mill sections or welded up plate sections shall be designed in
accordance with AISC' s latest "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ."
B . All cold-formed steel structural members shall be designed in accordance with
AISI ' s latest "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members ."
C . Design loads shall be in accordance with the Florida Building Code latest edition
and as per plans .
D . Limit lateral drift of the metal building as indicated on the structural drawings .
1 .07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. GENERAL: Structural assemblies, shop and field welding, shall meet the
requirements of the AISC specifications. The Building System Manufacturer shall
be a member of the MBMA and the building shall conform to MBMA publication
"Metal Building Systems Manual", latest edition. The use of salvaged, reprocessed
or scrap materials shall not be permitted. 13122-2
2 .01 PRODUCTS : l
A. Recommended Materials : t -
1 . Ceramic tile and dimensional stone: As selected by the Architect or the
Interior Designer. See the Drawing Schedules .
a. All ceramic floor tile located in areas that may become slippery
when wet shall have a non-slip impervious surface. The tile must
meet a coefficient of friction of 0. 5 to 0. 6 using a wet/dry test.
2 . Thin set adhesive per manufacturers recommendations and
specification standards of ` The Tile Council of America' .
3 . Marble : Window stools shall be Georgia or Alabama White domestic
marble, cultured marble, or an approved, comparable product, unless
specified otherwise on the drawings.
4 . Waterproofing Membrane : Laticrete 9235 waterproofing membrane in
combination with Laticrete Reinforcing Membrane installed in accordance
with manufacturer' s recommendations .
5 . Mortar : Laticrete 4237 latex Thin Set Mortar Additive with Laticrete 211
Crete Filler Powder.
6 . Grout : Laticrete Spectra Lock Pro Grout in color selected by the Architect.
3 .01 EXECUTION :
A. Inspection of Surfaces :
1 . Examine surfaces to receive tile, cement substrate backing board, setting
beds, pressure treated wood blocking for mounting of toilet accessories and
grab bars and accessories, before installation begins.
2 . Tile contractor shall be responsible for preparing installed cement backing
board including taping of joints and mortar skimming of all faces to a true
and level surface prior to installation of any ceramic tile.
3 . Walls to receive ceramic tile shall not be out of level and true planes more
than 1 /8 " in 24 inches.
4 . Do not proceed with installations until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.
B . Product delivery storage and handling: Deliver all manufactured materials in
original, unbroken containers bearing name of manufacturer, brand and grade seals .
Keep materials dry, clean, and protected against deterioration in any form.
09300-2
`, l
� ^�
_.�
(�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary: Electric/electronic controls sequences for HVAC systems and equipment.
B . Submit Shop Drawings detailing operating control sequences of each item of HVAC
equipment and system .
C. Submit Product Data for controllers, sensors, operators, control panels, thermostats,
humidistats, actuators, and control valves and dampers.
D. System Description : See HVAC Plans for control requirements .
E- Operation Sequence : See HVAC Plans for control requirements.
l PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Install control wiring concealed, except in mechanical rooms, and according to requirements
specified in Division 16 sections.
END OF SECTION 15900
15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
Page 1 of 1
C . Installation:
1 Layout all work so that where possible no tiles less that half size occur. In
any event install no half tiles above first course up from the bottom or away
from first vertical course at internal and external corners. Align all joints,
vertically and horizontally. Cut and drill neatly without marrying tile. Rub
smooth any necessary cuts with a fine stone and set no cut edge against any
fixture, cabinet, 01' other tile without a joint at least 1 /16 " wide . Cut, fit .
adjust, and establish tiles neatly and accurately to accommodate accessories,
interruptions, chases, returns, mechanical and electrical outlets, and finish at
their exact location (as determined by jobsite conditions). Maximumand
variation shall be plus-or-minus- 1 /8 " in 2 feet when straight edge is laid
on the surface in any direction.
2 . Provide all required trim pieces as detailed for the various tiles specified.
3 • All floor and wall file to be set using thin-set products as called out in this
section. Utilize proper admixes
applications. When installing pofor exterior installations and frost proof
rcelin the utilizing modified thinset, adhere`. ` `':
to guidelines stipulated in ANSI 1 l 8.4 .
4 • Thoroughly wash out joints and saturate with clean water before
Thoroughly grout into all joints to fill entire len grouting.
with face of tiles making a neatlush
y finished, smooth
surface. Prevent Fill st ming
of grouted joints by applying a clear sealer to all exposed grout joints.
5 Provide preformed metal control joints at door openings and sufficient to
isolate maximum areas of 25 ' X 25 '. Color of control joint preformed infill
to match the selected grout.
6. Installation of waterproofing membrane shall be behind all tiles, full
height and full width within showers or areas subject to periodic washdown
this section.. scheduled maintenance. Utilize materials as specified within
thInsure proper slopes to floor drains. Insure the membrane is
installed continuous into drain or adjacent to drains utilizing a perimeter
weep hole design. Wall membrane laps over the shower pan membrane.
Do not penetrate the membrane with any fasteners within 24 inches above
the finished floor tile. Test shower receptor and drainage fitting for leaks
all concealed stainless steel fasteners in
before commencing tile work. When
installation of grab bars is required, set
a bed of 3M- 5200 white sealant.
09300-3
B . WARRANTIES : The Building manufacturer shall supply the following minimum
warranties :
L BUILDING WARRANTY- manufacturer shall certify that all material and/or
accessories are warranted for a period of one year after delivery against failures
caused by faulty or substandard materials or accessories .
2 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARRANTY (Chalk Rating) :
a. Will not chalk for a period often ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
Panels inclined 16 degrees to 85 degrees from vertical, and will not chalk in
excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
b . Will not chalk for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined not more than 15 degrees from vertical, and will
not chalk in excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when
tested in accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
3 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARANTY (Fade Rating) :
a. Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
panels inclined 16 degrees to 86 degrees from vertical as determined by the
i procedure outlined in ASTM-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess of 5
delta E (Hunter) units for a period often ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244 .
b . Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined more than 15 degrees from vertical as determined
by the procedure outlined in ASTIVl-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess
of 5 delta E (Hunter) units for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244.
4. GALVALUME ROOF PANELS :
a. Will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate within a period of twenty (20)
years after shipment from the building supplier' s plant.
5 . WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY: The Purchaser and Building Systems
Manufacturer shall warrant to the Original Owner that the purchaser shall
repair, or stop any roof leaks due to ordinary wear and tear by the elements, for
a period of ten ( 10) years following the installation of the completed roof
assembly.
C . INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS : The Contractor erecting the metal building
i
shall be thoroughly trained in the Building System Manufacturer' s recommended
methods and procedures as approved by the Building System Manufacturer.
Erecting Contractor shall be licensed or otherwise approved by Building System
Manufacturer.
13122-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary: Electric/electronic controls sequences for HVAC systems and equipment.
B . Submit Shop Drawings detailing operating control sequences of each item of HVAC
equipment and system .
C. Submit Product Data for controllers, sensors, operators, control panels, thermostats,
humidistats, actuators, and control valves and dampers.
D. System Description : See HVAC Plans for control requirements .
E- Operation Sequence : See HVAC Plans for control requirements.
l PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Install control wiring concealed, except in mechanical rooms, and according to requirements
specified in Division 16 sections.
END OF SECTION 15900
15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
Page 1 of 1
t )
C _;
D . RESPONSIBILITY : The Building System Manufacturer shall be responsible or
engineering design and fabrication to meet the specified Regulatory Requirements
and design loads specific herein. The Building System Manufacturer shall also be
responsible for any damages caused by failure to clearly indicate in their submittals
all structural reactions to the foundation system, including those imposed by
secondary members and bracing. All required engineering documentation shall be
signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
E . COORDINATION : The metal building supplier shall coordinate, with the
Contractor, all foundation dimensions and proper placement of all anchor bolts and
related items .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. This specification is based on Building Systems and Components as manufactured
by American Buildings Company .
B . Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include , but are
not limited to the following:
1 . Butler Manufacturing Company _
2 . Ceco Buildings Division
3 . V arco -Pruden Buildings
4 . Metallic Building Company
5 . Whirlwind Building System
6 . Gulf States Manufacturing
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Primary Framing Steel:
1 . Steel for hot-rolled structural sections shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM Specification A-36 .
ld-up sections
be
-PSI minimum yield steel,
2 . Steel or
comparto or exceeding the requirements rablents of ASTM 1570 for sheets and
strips .
B framingSecondary steel to form
struts sections
hall be 5000 mlcomparable to or the
mpurlins ,
requirements of ASTM A570.
C . Roof panel material as specified should be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume
steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield steel and
must meet FBC2003 required impact ratings.
shall be 50,000-PSI. All roof panels
13122-4
12t~YI�D
2NIA1Z 2009
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION•
A. Wipe surfaces clean after grouting, remove all traces of mortar and grout.
Do not use acid solution for cleaning glazed tile.
B. Close spaces to traffic or other work until the is f rmly set. Protect all work from
damage at no additional cost to Owner.
** *END OF SECTION* **
09300-44
t )
C _;
SECTION 15981
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FINAL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .2 SCOPE
A. Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to verify the performance of the
complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described by Division 15 .
Performance verification shall be accomplished by established testing and balancing procedures
as described in this section.
1 . 3 RELATION TO OTHER WORK
A . Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other
sections of Division 15 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.
1 .4 TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY
A . All performance verification shall be performed by an independent test and ba]
(herein referred to as the "T & B Agency") ante agency
g y ) which is fully certified by and acurrent membe -of
the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
1 . 5 CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
A. Performance verification shall be performed as a service of the T & B
Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of the agreement. Agency directly to the
B . Performance verification is specified in this Division 15 only because it relates predominantly
to Division 15 work. However, the inclusion in this Division 15 of this section covering
Performance verification shall not preclude the contractual agreement of the T & B Agency from
contracting directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of such agr
1 . 6 AGENCY APPROVAL eement.
A. Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T & B Agency to the Architect/Engineer for
approval within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed.
B. Include AABC National Project Certification Performance Guaranty.
15981 - 1
SECTION 09510 - LAY IN PANEL CEILINGS (See schedule next page)
A. GENERAL :
1 . Acceptable Manufacturers :
a. Grid System : Chicago Metallic Corporation
Donn Corporation
U. S . Gypsum Corp.
W.J. Haertel Division; Leslie-Locke
National Rolling Mills Company
b. Lay-in-Panels : Celotex
Armstrong
Conwed
U. S . Gypsum
2 . Product delivery storage and handling : Store materials in protective packaging to
prevent soiling or physical damage.
B. PRODUCTS :
1 . Lay-in Panels : As per the attached schedule included in this specification
i
section, or an approved equal .
2. Grid Systems : With all components conforming to the requirements of ASTM C - -`
635 in a low-sheen, baked-on white enamel finish or in a color to be selected by
the Architect. See the plans for a complete description.
3 . Perimeter Molding: Channel formed, of not less than 22 gauge steel, I " horizontal
exposed face with exposed edge hemmed; low sheen, baked-on white enamel finish
or in a color to be selected by Architect.
4 . Suspension System :
a. Hangers: Annealed zinc-coated wire # 12 gauge or heavier.
b. Carrying Channels : 1 - 1 /2 " x 3/4 x 416 gauge for greater spans.
C. EXECUTION:
1 . Condition of Surfaces : Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly
attached lay in panels for unevenness, irregularities that would affect quality or
execution of work. Install ceiling system in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed specifications .
2. Cleaning : Clean soiled units after installation.
i 3 • Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units.
09510- 1
D. Wall panel material as specified shall be 242 26, or 28 gauge zinc coated or
galvalume steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield
steel shall be 50,000-PSI. All wall Panels must meet FBC 2003 required impact
ratings .
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A. General :
1 . All framing members shall be shop fabricated for field bolted assembly. The
surfaces of the bolted connections shall be smooth and free from burrs or
distortions .
2 . All shop connections shall be in accordance with the American Welding
Society Code for Building Construction. Certification of welder
qualification will be furnished when required and specified.
3 . All framing members where necessary shall carry an easily visible
identifying mark.
B . Primary Framing:
1 Rigid Frame : All rigid frames shall be welded, built-up "P' sections. The
columns and the rafters may be either uniform depth or tapered.
2 • Plates, stiffeners, etc . : All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners
shall be factory welded into place on the structural members.
3 . Bolt Holes, etc. : All base plates, splice plates and flanges shall be shop
fabricated to include cable brace or rod brace holes and flange brace holes .
C . Secondary Framing:
I • Purlins and girts shall be cold-formed "Z" or "C" sections with stiffened
flanges . They shall be pre-punched at the factory to provide for field bolting
to the rigid frames. They shall be simple or continuous span as required by
design .
2 . Girts supporting masonry at top of walls shall be "F' sections.
3 . Eave struts shall be unequal flange cold-formed "C" sections.
D. Bracing :
1 . Diagonal Bracing in the roof shall be used to remove longitudinal loads
(wind, crane, etc.) from the structure. This bracing will be furnished to
length and equipped with bevel washers and nuts at each end. It will consist
13122-5
SECTION 15981
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FINAL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .2 SCOPE
A. Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to verify the performance of the
complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described by Division 15 .
Performance verification shall be accomplished by established testing and balancing procedures
as described in this section.
1 . 3 RELATION TO OTHER WORK
A . Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other
sections of Division 15 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.
1 .4 TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY
A . All performance verification shall be performed by an independent test and ba]
(herein referred to as the "T & B Agency") ante agency
g y ) which is fully certified by and acurrent membe -of
the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
1 . 5 CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
A. Performance verification shall be performed as a service of the T & B
Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of the agreement. Agency directly to the
B . Performance verification is specified in this Division 15 only because it relates predominantly
to Division 15 work. However, the inclusion in this Division 15 of this section covering
Performance verification shall not preclude the contractual agreement of the T & B Agency from
contracting directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of such agr
1 . 6 AGENCY APPROVAL eement.
A. Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T & B Agency to the Architect/Engineer for
approval within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed.
B. Include AABC National Project Certification Performance Guaranty.
15981 - 1
1 7 WORK INCLUDED
A. The T & B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services , tools, test
equipment and instruments (except as otherwise specified) to perform the following work and
all other work of this section:
1 . Review the automatic temperature control and air terminal unit specifications r and
their
respective and combined effects on the testing and balancing procedures
hydronic systems.
2. Where in the opinion of the T & B Agency conditions may exist in the system design or
construction that may have the potential of adversely affecting system performance, then the
T & B Agency shall identify the condition and submit in writing recommended correctives
for consideration by the Architect/Engineer.
3 . During construction, review those shop drawings which have relevance to performance
verification to confirm that the required piping, ductwork and equipment, and their
respective specialties and accessories such as gauges, valves , dampers, access doors , etc. ,
are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing d balancing
to be accomplished.
4 . Perform site inspections to verify compliance with documents, and observe pressure tests
on ductwork.
5 . perform a complete air and hydronic test and balance of all heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and exhaust air systems and all water and steam systems shown and described
on the Construction Documents and as further described herein.
6. Submit Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report.
fter
7 . Furnish specifications to Contractor for properly sized fixed sheaves on fan systems a
proper RPM has been established.
l . g EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Prior to balancing and testing the new systems, obtain test data on those existing systems which
es
provided
ary) those existing t s ting sysso that they operate at hm
e saconditions u
lance (if and as
nnder wh ch they
were operating prior to the new work.
B . The above test data shall be provided as part of the test and balance report. The test data shall
and temperatures entering and leaving any equipment items
include the water and air flow rates air conditioning system. However, only the
which is part of the existing heating, ventilating and
fluid affected by the new work need be tested (for example, an air handling unit which is
unaffected on its airside but which is affected on its waterside need only have flow ae water data
obtained). Also, if a piping system branch serves a group of units, then only
15981 -2 `
of rods threaded each end with suitable threaded end anchors . l
2 . Flange Braces_ The compression flange of all primary framing shall be
l / J
braced laterally with angles connecting to the webs of purlins or girts so that
the flange compressive stress is within allowable limits for any combination
of loadings .
3 . Special Bracing_ When diagonal bracing is not permitted in the sidewall , a
rigid frame type portal or fixed base column must be used. Wind bracing in
the roof and/or walls need not be furnished where it can be shown that the
diaphragm strength of the roof and/or wall covering is adequate to resist the
applied wind forces.
2 .04 ROOF COVERING
A . General :
1 . Roof Panels shall be American Buildings Company' s, or an approved
equal, Standing Seam II Panel and Loc-Seam Panel with panel widths as
indicated on the plans . Finish shall be galvalume or premium finish as called
out on plans .
2 . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II Roof Panels as specified
shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American �^
Building Company' s Premium 70 nar 500 finish .
3 . American Buildings Company ' s Loc Seam Panels as specified shall be 24 -
gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American Buildings
Company ' s Premium 70 K nar 500 finish .
NOTE : the profiles, hei hts color and centers called out on the plan sections
and details will take precedence over this spec section descri tion . Technical
descriptions of all other parts of this spec will apply.
B . Panel Description:
] . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II roof panel, or an
approved equal, shall have a configuration consisting of 2 " high (3 "
including seam) by 4-3 /4 " wide rib, spaced on 24 " centers . Panels shall be
joined at the side as with and interlocking seam standing 1 " above the major
rib. Each panel shall provide 24" net coverage in width. The female panel
seam shall have factory applied sealant.
2 . American Buildings Company' s Loc Seam Panel shall have a configuration
12" or 16" wide with V or 2 " high vertical male and female ribs. The
female seam shall have factory applied sealant. The panel seam shall be �
mechanically interlocked by a specially designed electric seaming machine .
13122-6
SCHEDULE OF SELECTED CEILINGS :
Project: I.R.C. Parks Maintenance Complex l
� J
Location Tyne Lav In Panel & Grid
As Shown on Drawings A. ARMSTRONG 24" X 48 " X 5/8 " , Fissured , 4755NF ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" square lay-in . Color: White, with
15/16" Prelude suspension system . Color- White.
As Shown on Drawings B . . ARMSTRONG 24" X 24" X 5/8 " , Tundra, 4303 ,
Reflected Ceiling Plan Class-A, 15/ 16" beveled tegular edge, Color : White,
with 15/ 16" Prelude suspension system .Color-White.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09510-2
1 7 WORK INCLUDED
A. The T & B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services , tools, test
equipment and instruments (except as otherwise specified) to perform the following work and
all other work of this section:
1 . Review the automatic temperature control and air terminal unit specifications r and
their
respective and combined effects on the testing and balancing procedures
hydronic systems.
2. Where in the opinion of the T & B Agency conditions may exist in the system design or
construction that may have the potential of adversely affecting system performance, then the
T & B Agency shall identify the condition and submit in writing recommended correctives
for consideration by the Architect/Engineer.
3 . During construction, review those shop drawings which have relevance to performance
verification to confirm that the required piping, ductwork and equipment, and their
respective specialties and accessories such as gauges, valves , dampers, access doors , etc. ,
are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing d balancing
to be accomplished.
4 . Perform site inspections to verify compliance with documents, and observe pressure tests
on ductwork.
5 . perform a complete air and hydronic test and balance of all heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and exhaust air systems and all water and steam systems shown and described
on the Construction Documents and as further described herein.
6. Submit Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report.
fter
7 . Furnish specifications to Contractor for properly sized fixed sheaves on fan systems a
proper RPM has been established.
l . g EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Prior to balancing and testing the new systems, obtain test data on those existing systems which
es
provided
ary) those existing t s ting sysso that they operate at hm
e saconditions u
lance (if and as
nnder wh ch they
were operating prior to the new work.
B . The above test data shall be provided as part of the test and balance report. The test data shall
and temperatures entering and leaving any equipment items
include the water and air flow rates air conditioning system. However, only the
which is part of the existing heating, ventilating and
fluid affected by the new work need be tested (for example, an air handling unit which is
unaffected on its airside but which is affected on its waterside need only have flow ae water data
obtained). Also, if a piping system branch serves a group of units, then only
15981 -2 `
existing branch need be measured and not necessarily the flow at each air handling unit served
by the branch (unless measurement at each unit is the only way to obtain the branch total flow).
1 . 9 GUARANTY
A. The T & B Agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and
acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect/Engineer may
request a re-check or re-setting of any system component requiring testing and balancing, The
T & B Agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect/Engineer
in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition
to the A.A. B. C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall also be
provided.
PAR12 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. The tangible product of this section shall include the reports and documentation necessary to
verify the systems' performance.
2.2 REPORT
A. The T & B Agency shall in the course of his work record the information herein specified.
Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system. Recorded data shall
be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Construction
Documents. Four (4) copies of the final report signed, bound and indexed shall be submitted
to the Architect/Engineer for his approval or comments.
B . Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10%
from the design, the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations
for corrective action to the Architect/Engineer for his consideration.
C. In those cases where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent
and/or erroneous, the Architect/Engineer may request additional testing and balancing. The T
& B Agencyshall at no additional cost perform such retesting and rebalancing as directed by and
in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Where, in the opinion of the T & B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise
from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T & B Agency shall note same in the
report and submit recommendations for action to the Architect/Engineer.
E. The T & B Agency shall verify that each thermostat and the devices it is controlling, such as
control valves, motorized dampers, VAV boxes, etc. , operate in the exact sequence required.
F. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report:
15981 -3
SECTION 09655 - VINU TRANSITION MOLDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
quarry Provide vinyl transition strips wherever carpet abuts vinyl flooring systems ceramic
determine
porcelain flooring systems. Refer to the lnteriars or Floor Plan Drawings
determine the actual model n � azoic,
umbers specifed and locations, wings to
1 .03 QU�I'1'I' ASSURANCE:
Acceptable Manufacturer: Select product of the
equals: following manufacturer cr approved
TARKETT
JOHNSONITE
MERCER PRODUCTS COMPANY INC
MACKLANBURG-DUNCAN
FLEXCO COMPANY
GENOTEK
1.04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples: Submit samples
color selection, of all materials specified in this Section for a
pproval and
C. Maintenance Data: Furnish
procedures. list of recommended maintenance methods and
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING:
Deliver and Store on the site in ori
until time of use. ginal containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact
1. 06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS:
dTempeinature of the rooms shall be 70 F. (2I CO) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
urg installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
09655-1
REIlIStr p Q o 4
B. Panel Length: MAR //
I • All roof panels shall be continuous from cave to ridge,
2. 05 MISCELLANEOUS with no end splices.
A• Fasteners:
I • Structural Bolts_ All bolts used in frame splices and in
secondary framing to primary framing connections ofshall be ASTM A307 or ASTM A325
as required by design,
2• Fasteners for the Roof Panel Clips; All Standing Seam lI and Loc-Seam
Panel clips shall be attached to the purlins by means of self-drilling screws,
made of carbon steel No. 12014 x 1 1/4 " hex washer head, cadmium or zinc
Plated- Insure that the fasteners
blanket insulation 6" thick, ' are applicable for use with fiberglass
3 . All Blind Fasteners shall be 1/8 " diameter, high-strength aluminum pop
rivets Type AAp
4. Fasteners for Wall Panels shall be supplied by panel manufacturer and ma
be exposed, semi-concealed, or concealed, and shall m hex washer head,
cadmium or zinc plated. y
2 .06 PANEL CLIPS
A. Panel Clips for the Standing Seam II Roof Panel shall be expansion clips (SSPC
series), two-part assembly. The clip portion shall be 2 %2" wide. The clip portion
shall be die formed SAE 1050 high carbon spring steel and heat treated to Rockwell
45C to SOC; The clip portion shall have a fluorocarbon coating for corrosion
in heig
resistance. The base portion of the clip shall be 2 '/ " or 3 1_/44" for the
ht and 4 3/4" in width. The base shall be die formed from blocks)
galvanized steel. Total expansion capability of the clip 12 assembly shallgauge u 2Y2 tr.
B . Panel Clips (LSEC series) for the Loc-Seam Panel shall be of a two part assembly.
The clip portion shall be a nominal 2 3/8 " or 3 1 /8 " (for thermal blocks) in height
and 3 " in width. The clip
rmed
galvalume steel. The bashall be diel formed be die18 au 2e gauge zinc coated steel or
expansion capability of the clip shall be 1 1/4", g g galvanized steel. Total
2. 07 SEALANTS
A. Closure strips: The corrugations of the roof panels shall be filled with solid or
ridged-cell, preformed rubb
ridge and rake. er, neoprene or polyethylene closures along the cave,
B . Sealing Compounds shall be as specified by the roofing manufacturer.
13122-7
existing branch need be measured and not necessarily the flow at each air handling unit served
by the branch (unless measurement at each unit is the only way to obtain the branch total flow).
1 . 9 GUARANTY
A. The T & B Agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and
acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect/Engineer may
request a re-check or re-setting of any system component requiring testing and balancing, The
T & B Agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect/Engineer
in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition
to the A.A. B. C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall also be
provided.
PAR12 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. The tangible product of this section shall include the reports and documentation necessary to
verify the systems' performance.
2.2 REPORT
A. The T & B Agency shall in the course of his work record the information herein specified.
Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system. Recorded data shall
be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Construction
Documents. Four (4) copies of the final report signed, bound and indexed shall be submitted
to the Architect/Engineer for his approval or comments.
B . Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10%
from the design, the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations
for corrective action to the Architect/Engineer for his consideration.
C. In those cases where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent
and/or erroneous, the Architect/Engineer may request additional testing and balancing. The T
& B Agencyshall at no additional cost perform such retesting and rebalancing as directed by and
in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Where, in the opinion of the T & B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise
from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T & B Agency shall note same in the
report and submit recommendations for action to the Architect/Engineer.
E. The T & B Agency shall verify that each thermostat and the devices it is controlling, such as
control valves, motorized dampers, VAV boxes, etc. , operate in the exact sequence required.
F. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report:
15981 -3
1 . Motors:
Manufacturer
Model and serial number
Rated amperage and voltage
Rated horsepower
Rated RPM
Corrected full load amperage
Measured amperage and voltage
Calculated BHP
Measured RPM
Sheave size, type and manufacturer
2 . Fans:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, BI or Air Foil - number of blades
Rated CFM , measured CFM
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Measured pressures - inlet and Outlet Static Pressure
Pulley size, type and manufacturer
Belt size and quantity
Rated TSP
Operating TSP & operating ESP (at discharge side of _
Supply Fan or suction side of Exhaust/Return Fan)
3 . Pum s:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, impeller size
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Rated head, measured head
Rated pressures
Measured discharge pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured suction pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured GPM
Operating bead
Operating RPM
4 AirSyst als (including inlets and outlets
Provide single. line diagrammatic plan locating each air inlet and outlet and its reference
number.
Grille or diffuser reference number and manufacturer.
Grille or diffuser location.
Design velocity.
Design CFM . r
15981 -4
C . Panels side laps shall have factory-applied mastic, Chemseco Sealum SM- 5320T
equal . Its composition shall be 85% to 90% solids by weight . Service temperature
range shall be 60 degree F to +225 degree F .
D . Caulk_ All gutter and downspout joints, rake flashing laps, ridge flashing laps shall
be sealed with white pigmented caulk, Sika Sikaflex 201 or equal . It shall meet of
exceed the requirements of Federal Specification TT-S -00230C, Type II, Class A.
2 . 08 GUTTER FLASHING AND DOWNSPOUT
A. Gutters and Flashing : All standard exterior gutters are 24-gauge aluminum coated
steel with a pre-painted finish in white. Standard rake flashing is 26-gauge
aluminum coated steel with a pre-painted finish in white. In no case shall flashing
be less than 26 gauge steel . Sizes as called out on plans.
B . Downspouts : All downspouts shall be 28 -gauge aluminum coated steel with color
coordinated, pre-painted finish, rectangular in shape .
2 . 09 STRUCTURAL PAINTING
A . All steel framing members shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and lose scale and
given one mil coat of red oxide primer prior to being delivered to the job site.
Primer shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification
TT-P636D . Primer is not intended as a finish coat.
B . Abrasions caused by handling after painting are to be expected . Primer shall be
famished to touch-up these areas by the contractor performing field touch-up of
field painting as specified in the contract documents .
C . Any interior primary structural steel members to receive spray on fire protection
shall not be shop primed. Priming voids the UL Assembly rating.
2 . 10 PANEL FINISH
A. Base Metal shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel .
B . Prime Coat: The base metal shall be pretreated and then primed with an approved
epoxy primer per the metal roofing suppliers standard paint specification.
C . Exterior Coat_ After priming, the exterior side shall be given a finish coat of a 70%
minimum Kynar 500 (PVF2) formulation. The topcoat thickness shall be . 8 mils
minimum. The total film thickness shall be . 9 mils to 1 . 1 mils .
D . Finish shall meet or exceed the following:
I . Accelerated Weathering: No noticeable chalking, fading, loss of adhesion or
other coating deterioration after 2,000 hours (ASTM G-23) .
13122-8
PART2 - PRODUCT
2 .01 Shall consist of 100% first quality homopolymer,vinyl accessories to act as an edge trim or
transition between dissimilar flooring materials . All trim shall meet the requirements of
the ADA sections 4. 5.2 (changes in level) and 4.5 .3 (carpet-edge trim compliance) .
Colors shall be clear through as indicated on the Interior Drawings.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3 .01 Pursuant to manufacturer' s published instructions and RFCI "Recommended Work
Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings" .
3 .02 Lay materials true to line, level, and with tight butt and miter joints.
3 .03 Installations shall be at interior spaces only .
3 .04 Secure the base strips with manufacturer approved adhesives and remove all excess
adhesives with approved thinners upon completion of installations.
PART 4 - WARRANTY
4.01 Manufacturer' s full warranty shall apply.
** * END OF SECTION * * *
09655-2
1 . Motors:
Manufacturer
Model and serial number
Rated amperage and voltage
Rated horsepower
Rated RPM
Corrected full load amperage
Measured amperage and voltage
Calculated BHP
Measured RPM
Sheave size, type and manufacturer
2 . Fans:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, BI or Air Foil - number of blades
Rated CFM , measured CFM
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Measured pressures - inlet and Outlet Static Pressure
Pulley size, type and manufacturer
Belt size and quantity
Rated TSP
Operating TSP & operating ESP (at discharge side of _
Supply Fan or suction side of Exhaust/Return Fan)
3 . Pum s:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, impeller size
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Rated head, measured head
Rated pressures
Measured discharge pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured suction pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured GPM
Operating bead
Operating RPM
4 AirSyst als (including inlets and outlets
Provide single. line diagrammatic plan locating each air inlet and outlet and its reference
number.
Grille or diffuser reference number and manufacturer.
Grille or diffuser location.
Design velocity.
Design CFM . r
15981 -4
Effective area factor and size-
Measured velocity.
Measured CFM
Terminal Unit CFM
G. Other Report Requirements: Where any systems have equipment or components which are not
covered by the above, then the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following data
as applicable to such equipment or systems to confirm actual operation:
1 . All inlet and outlet areas.
2 . All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions.
4 . All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at appropriate locations.
5 . All speeds.
6 . All voltage and ampere ranges .
7. Descriptions of each test method used.
2 -3 INSTRUMENTATION
A. All test and balance equipment and instruments to be furnished by the T & B Agency shall have
been calibrated within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments
to be used shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to commencing test and balancin
operations and shall include equipment and/or instrumentsg
, name, manufacturer, serial number
and certification of last calibration date. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability
shall be accompanied with manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Test and balance equipment
and instruments furnished by the Contractor to the T & B Agency shall be accompanied with
certification as required above. The T & B Agency shall be responsible for the protection from
damage due to accident, abuse or misuse, all equipment and instruments provided by the
Contractor, and shall return same in good working condition at the completion of the test and
balance work to the Contractor. The T & B Agency shall repair at his expense to original
condition and accuracy or replace with like equipment and instruments damaged in the work.
2.4 DIAGRAMS
A. Provide a schematic diagram (i.e., one-line) of duct system(s) tested. Indicate on the diagram
the relative location of all air distribution devices, VAV boxes, heating/cooling coils, points of
data measurements (i .e., Pitot traverse, temperature, static pressure) fans, airhandling units, and
similar equipment included in the system. Diagram shall identify each component tested. Said
identification shall utilize the conventions shown on the drawings (i. e. , AHU- 1 or SF-6) and
correlate with the data sheets provided in the Test and Balance Report.
J
15981 -5
SECTION 09680 - CARPETING : COMMERCIAL APPLICATION
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall go over the work under this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION :
A. Provide commercial grade carpeting, edge trim and related items and the
installation. Refer to Section 09655. ir
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
Acceptable Manufacture
B. LEES r: Select product of the following manufacturer or a
COMMERCIAL CARPETS
B . COMMERCIAL
approved equal .
C. DUPONT ANTRON
D. ATLAS CARPET MILLS
E. LOTUS CARPETS_.
F. J & J INDUSTRIES
G. SHAW INDUSTRIES
H. COLLINS AND AIKMAN
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
a ,
A. . Literature: Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions
for
each type of material specified.
B . Samples : Submit samples of all materials specified in this Section for
color selection.
approval and
C• Maintenance Data : furnish list of recommended maintenance products and
recommended maintenance methods and procedures.
1 .05 PRODUCT HANDLING :
Deliver and store on site in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use.
09680-1
2 . Humidity Resistance_ Less than 5 % of 48 blisters or no loss of adhesion
i
after 1 ,000 hours at 100% relative humidity, 100 degree F (ASTM D2247) .
3 . Adhesion: No coating was removed when tested according to ASTM D3359 .
4. Abrasion Resistance_ The coating shall have a coefficient of abrasion of
65 "/- 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-0968-81 , falling
sand abrasion test.
5 . Specular Gloss : The gloss rating shall be 24-35 units on a 60-degree gloss
meter when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-523 -80 .
6 . Color Retention: Maximum 4E units (Hunter) color change (STM D659).
7 . Chalk Resistance : Minimum rating of 9, (ASTM D659).
8 . Hardness : The coating shall have a minimum hardness of HB -H using Eagle
Turquoise pencils, (ASTM D3363 ).
9. Salt Spray_ The coating has been tested in a 5 % sodium chloride salt spray
for 1000 hours at 95 degrees F . , with less than 3/ 16 " creepage from the
scribe and less than 5 % no. 6 blisters . (ASTM BI 17) . `
E . The interior finish shall have one of the following :
1 . A gray polyester topcoat over an epoxy primer
2 . A . 15 mil epoxy primer and . 35 mil off-white backer
3 A wash coat of 70% Kynar resin of .03 to . 04 mil, dry film thickness over
primer.
4 . A polyester paint, not formulated for exterior weathering, of 1 mil minimum
total thickness over primer, or
5 . An acrylic wash coat, dry film thickness of . 3 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Erection practices shall conform to Section 6, Common Industry Practices found in
the "Low Rise Building Systems Manual", MBMA 1986 . There shall be no field
modifications to primary structural members except as authorized.
3 . 02 ERECTION
-J A. The erection of the metal building and the installation of accessories shall be
13122-9
Effective area factor and size-
Measured velocity.
Measured CFM
Terminal Unit CFM
G. Other Report Requirements: Where any systems have equipment or components which are not
covered by the above, then the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following data
as applicable to such equipment or systems to confirm actual operation:
1 . All inlet and outlet areas.
2 . All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions.
4 . All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at appropriate locations.
5 . All speeds.
6 . All voltage and ampere ranges .
7. Descriptions of each test method used.
2 -3 INSTRUMENTATION
A. All test and balance equipment and instruments to be furnished by the T & B Agency shall have
been calibrated within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments
to be used shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to commencing test and balancin
operations and shall include equipment and/or instrumentsg
, name, manufacturer, serial number
and certification of last calibration date. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability
shall be accompanied with manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Test and balance equipment
and instruments furnished by the Contractor to the T & B Agency shall be accompanied with
certification as required above. The T & B Agency shall be responsible for the protection from
damage due to accident, abuse or misuse, all equipment and instruments provided by the
Contractor, and shall return same in good working condition at the completion of the test and
balance work to the Contractor. The T & B Agency shall repair at his expense to original
condition and accuracy or replace with like equipment and instruments damaged in the work.
2.4 DIAGRAMS
A. Provide a schematic diagram (i.e., one-line) of duct system(s) tested. Indicate on the diagram
the relative location of all air distribution devices, VAV boxes, heating/cooling coils, points of
data measurements (i .e., Pitot traverse, temperature, static pressure) fans, airhandling units, and
similar equipment included in the system. Diagram shall identify each component tested. Said
identification shall utilize the conventions shown on the drawings (i. e. , AHU- 1 or SF-6) and
correlate with the data sheets provided in the Test and Balance Report.
J
15981 -5
2. 5 LOGSANDFORMS t l
A. Logs and forms shall clearly indicate following: /
1 . All inlet and outlet areas .
2. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions .
4 . Allfluidvelocities, flowrates, temperaturesandpressuresatsignificantlocations (e.g. , fluid
pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and
return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.).
5 . All fan speeds .
6 . All motor ampere ranges .
7 . Descriptions of each test method used.
B . Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. Sheaves: The Contractor shall provide applicable fans with V-belt drives and fixed pitch
sheaves . In order to provide the properly sized fixed pitces. h sheave, the Contractor shall initially
provide fans with V -belt drives, variable Agency, will replace these adjustable pitch sheaves with fixed
The Contractor, upon completion Of
system balancing by the T p B Ag Y, p enc The Contractor shall tag the
sheaves of the size and type specified by the T & B Agency.
g Y�
adjustable sheaves , transmit same to Owner, and receive written The
by Owner of acceptance
of these sheaves.
B . Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be undertaken with maximum
attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with
ceiling tile in place and enclosing partitions and doors erected.
C . Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal
operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect and Owner.
D. Where patented measuring stations are installed, each of these is to be read and recorded. In the
anometers, annular
hydronic systems, the permanent devices, such as flow tubes with mercury m
ring systems, ventu i tubes with portable meters, etc. must be used for final measurements after
they are completed, calibrated and in satisfactory condition.
i
15981 -6
performed in accordance with erection drawings by a qualified erector using proper
tools and equipment. )
B . Columns and Struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept ph during erection for which all temporary
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns .
C . The Contractor shall provide all necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary
struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc., that may be required to erect the structural frame
and maintain it in alignment until the building is completed.
D . Welding and Bolting of all connection shall follow the setting of the steel as closely
as plumbing and alignment will permit.
E. Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment and work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
F . Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure,
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect or personnel
having legitimate business at the site . Location of supports for derricks, hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studies and shall be reviewed by the
Architect if any questions arise .
G . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the specific written permission of the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
13122-10
r�v�s� zi>� Ra9
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQI)MMENTS:
Temperature of the rooms shall be 70 F . (21 C.) minimum for 24 hours prior to installation,
during installation, and for 48 hours after installation.
A, Products:
1 Carpet & Pad: Color and style to be selected by the Owner, the Architect, or
the Interior Designer.
B . Materials:
l . Provide a commercial-grade nylon carpet with bonded cushion meeting the
following minimum requirement:
a. TOLERANCES : Specifications are subject to the standard industry
manufacturing tolerances of plus or minus 51%.
b. FLAMMABILITY RATINGS : Shall meet all local , state and federal
requirements for carpet installed in public facilities. Shall meet the
requirements of DAD -C-95 , DOC-FF1 -70, and ASTM-D2859-70T
(pill and Tablet Tests) on the face and on the back. The carpet and
pad, as an assembly, in corridors, stair-ways and other means of
critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts/sq.
egress, shall have a minimum
-950 Flooring Radiant Panel Test
cm. as determined by NBS-IR-75
(NFPA 253 , ASTM-E-648) .
c, ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY: Carpet construction shall contain no
formaldehyde or 4-PC and no significant levels of other volatile
organic chemicals which are known to contribute to the "Sick-
Building Syndrome." Carpet shall have GRI (Green Label
Registration) for a low VOC emitter.
d, PILE YARN: 1235/2 - 100% continuous-filament Type 6.6 soil-
hiding solution-dyed nylon with permanent static-control system.
e. STATIC CONTROL: Carpet shall be furnished with a permanent
static-control system within the face yam to reduce the level of
electrostatic voltage built up in the floor covering below the normal
threshold of human sensitivity, measured at 2500-3500 static volts at
70 degrees F and 20% relative humidity.
f, ANTIMICROBIAL: A permanent, nonleaching antimicrobial shall
be built into the carpet construction.
9. DYE METHOD: Solution-dyed yam system.
09680-2
2. 5 LOGSANDFORMS t l
A. Logs and forms shall clearly indicate following: /
1 . All inlet and outlet areas .
2. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions .
4 . Allfluidvelocities, flowrates, temperaturesandpressuresatsignificantlocations (e.g. , fluid
pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and
return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.).
5 . All fan speeds .
6 . All motor ampere ranges .
7 . Descriptions of each test method used.
B . Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. Sheaves: The Contractor shall provide applicable fans with V-belt drives and fixed pitch
sheaves . In order to provide the properly sized fixed pitces. h sheave, the Contractor shall initially
provide fans with V -belt drives, variable Agency, will replace these adjustable pitch sheaves with fixed
The Contractor, upon completion Of
system balancing by the T p B Ag Y, p enc The Contractor shall tag the
sheaves of the size and type specified by the T & B Agency.
g Y�
adjustable sheaves , transmit same to Owner, and receive written The
by Owner of acceptance
of these sheaves.
B . Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be undertaken with maximum
attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with
ceiling tile in place and enclosing partitions and doors erected.
C . Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal
operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect and Owner.
D. Where patented measuring stations are installed, each of these is to be read and recorded. In the
anometers, annular
hydronic systems, the permanent devices, such as flow tubes with mercury m
ring systems, ventu i tubes with portable meters, etc. must be used for final measurements after
they are completed, calibrated and in satisfactory condition.
i
15981 -6
3 - 2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY
A. The Contractor, prior to commencement of the balancing by the T & B Agency, shall verify in
writing:
1 . That strainers have been removed and cleaned.
2. That all air filters have been installed and are in clean condition.
3 . That expansion tanks have been inspected and that the system is not air bound and is
completely filled with water.
4. That all air vents at coils and high points of the piping systems have been inspected and are
installed and operating freely.
5. That all automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been left or fixed in the
open position for full flow through all devices.
6. That all linkages between valves or dampers and their actuators are secure.
7. That all pumps and fans are operating at the specified RPM.
B . The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the systems as scheduled for balancing, are
operational and ete
at all
ing
uctwork have been
ressure tested and
accepted and all affemc elpg dpi m syystems have beendcleaned, flushed and refiled with prescribed
1 treated water and vented.
/ 3 . 3 PROTECTION OF WORK
A . The Contractor shall protect all mechanical devices during the testing and balancing period The
activities of the T & B Agency will include but not be limited to the adjustments of designated
balancing devices including; adjustment of balancing dampers, adjustment of inlet vane
dampers, adjustment of air extractors, air splitters, or manual dampers, the adjustment of
adjustable sheaves for fan speed, the adjustment of balancing valves, or similar devices. The
existence of the T & B Agency shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
complete operation of the mechanical systems in conformance with the contract documents.
3 .4 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner rectify discrepancies between the actual
installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T & B Agency the discrepancy
will significantly affect system balance and performance.
3 . 5 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE
A. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by providing all labor, equipment, tools and
material required to operate all of the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and
15981 -7
"PeUt510 2 MAL> 09
h• CONSTRUCTION: Manufactured through the back with fusion coat
to primary,
applied and secondary closed-cell vinyl cushion permanently fused
I• PITCH, (gauge) : 351 (1 /13 ga.) min.
J • ROWS PER INCH: 20 min.
k• DENSITY: 130 pile tufts/SI min., 6000 density units per formula:
D = 36W D = Density
T W — Pile Weight
T = Pile Thickness
I• PILE HEIGHT: . 125 (1 /8 ") average
In. PILE WEIGHT: 20 oz./Sy min.
M PRIMARY BACKING: 100% synthetic materials, bacteriostatic and
fungistatic, nonallergenic. Shall not mildew, decompose, shrink or
support odor. No organic materials (jute, cotton, kraftcord or
fiberlok) shall be used.
0• FUSION COAT: Vinyl sealant and fusion coat to provide an
effective soil and moisture barrier and sufficient tuft bind to prevent
"Zippering" or edge ravel of surface pile.
P_ SECONDARY BACKING: Carpet shall be permanently fused to
premium-quality, closed-cell vinyl cushion, 5/32" thick, cushion
weight 35. 5 oz./SY, density 18. 5 lbs./CF, compression deflection
min. 71bs./SI, compression set max. 10% (ASTMD- 1667-70).
q• TOTAL WEIGHT: 75 oz./Sy min.
2• MANUFACTURER WARRANTY: 10 year ronprorated warranty against
backing.
C wear, zippering, edge ravel or delamination of secondary
backiCushion resiliency warranted for the life of the carpet.
C. INSTALLATION:
1 • Clean surfaces to be carpeted; scrape up cementitious and resinous deposits;
vacuum, apply sealer on concrete surfaces, adequate to prevent dusting.
09680-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic
coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing.
B . Building Attachments : Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval
for fire-protection systems.
C . Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire-
protection systems .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping free of sags and bends .
B . Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections .
C . Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
concrete floor, and roof slabs.
D. Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations : Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast-iron pipes
for wall sleeves.
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations : Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material specified
in Division 7. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of
equipment.
F. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas,
compressed air, and vacuum piping.
G . Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings .to . connect -piping materials of dissimilar metals in
water and steam piping.
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page ] of 1
3 - 2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY
A. The Contractor, prior to commencement of the balancing by the T & B Agency, shall verify in
writing:
1 . That strainers have been removed and cleaned.
2. That all air filters have been installed and are in clean condition.
3 . That expansion tanks have been inspected and that the system is not air bound and is
completely filled with water.
4. That all air vents at coils and high points of the piping systems have been inspected and are
installed and operating freely.
5. That all automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been left or fixed in the
open position for full flow through all devices.
6. That all linkages between valves or dampers and their actuators are secure.
7. That all pumps and fans are operating at the specified RPM.
B . The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the systems as scheduled for balancing, are
operational and ete
at all
ing
uctwork have been
ressure tested and
accepted and all affemc elpg dpi m syystems have beendcleaned, flushed and refiled with prescribed
1 treated water and vented.
/ 3 . 3 PROTECTION OF WORK
A . The Contractor shall protect all mechanical devices during the testing and balancing period The
activities of the T & B Agency will include but not be limited to the adjustments of designated
balancing devices including; adjustment of balancing dampers, adjustment of inlet vane
dampers, adjustment of air extractors, air splitters, or manual dampers, the adjustment of
adjustable sheaves for fan speed, the adjustment of balancing valves, or similar devices. The
existence of the T & B Agency shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
complete operation of the mechanical systems in conformance with the contract documents.
3 .4 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner rectify discrepancies between the actual
installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T & B Agency the discrepancy
will significantly affect system balance and performance.
3 . 5 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE
A. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by providing all labor, equipment, tools and
material required to operate all of the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and
15981 -7
balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic
or automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each
working day during the period of final testing and balancing. The Contractor shall assist the T
& B Agency by arranging to have all ceilings, partitions, windows, and doors installed prior to
the scheduled commencement of balancing within each specified area.
B . The Contractor shall provide to the approved T & B Agency a complete set ofp lens and
specifications and an approved copy of all heatingventilatingand air conditioning equipment
shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes , as
well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the T &
B Agency.
3 .6 AIR SYSTEMS
A. The testing and balancing shall include, but is not l mited to, the following requirements:
1 . Adjust fan speeds to deliver the required cfm and static pressure, and record rpm and fall
load amperes .
2 . Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts to verify design cfm. Seal duct access holes
with rubber or metal snap-in plugs.
3 . For each supply air system, verify the quantity of outside air and return air when the system
is operating in the maximum cooling and full heating modes. { _
4. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements, and
\._
also adjust so as to minimize drafts in all areas.
5 . Observe all equipment and exposed ductwork for noise, movement or vibration under
normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect/Engineer.
B . After all air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air
quantities and if temperature in any area . (where such area does not have the particular zone
temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees
plus or minus of the zone areas which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then
notify Architect/Engineer of such conditions and obtain approval to rebalance devices to obtain
air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone ill bo reb lance,
e as even as
possible regardless of calculated design air quantities . After obtaining app
rovaperform such necessary rebalancing.
END OF SECTION
15981 - 8
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
3 .2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A . Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel . Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
B Install powder-actuated
drive-pin ess than 4inches (100 mm)
sin concrete rtho k rete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concreten slab
C . Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches ( 100 mm) thick.
D . Support fire-protection system piping independent of other piping.
E. Load Distribution : Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
END OF SECTION 15055
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2
2 . Pre-plan installation for uniform direction of pattern and lay of pile, and proper
sequencing with other work. Locate seams properly centered under doors and
without seams in direction of traffic as doorways and similar traffic patterns.
Extend carpet under removable obstructions and into closets and alcoves .
3 . Provide stretch-in-tackless installation, using glued and/or nailed tackless stripping .
with edges of carpet concealed. Tape and/or sew seams , after buttering trimmed
edges with seaming cement.
4. Cement cushion to substrate, with taped seams running at 90 degree angle with
carpet seams .
5 . Stretch carpet both directions in accordance with mill ' s instructions ; use power
stretchers except where space is too small .
6. Provide glue- down installation by trimming and fitting carpet widths into each
space prior to application of adhesive . Apply adhesive, butter cut edges with
seaming cement, butting edges tightly together, and roll lightly.
7 . Install edge guards at exposed edges. Bind edges with cloth tape and thread where
not concealable .
8 . Clean adhesive and cement from face of carpet promptly ; replace carpet which
cannot be cleaned .
9 . Save carpet scraps, defined as mill ends less that 9' long, and pieces larger than 3
sq . ft. in area and wider than 8 " , and deliver to Owner' s storage space as directed .
Dispose of smaller pieces.
10 . Vacuum completed carpet installation with beater-in-nozzle type commercial
vacuum cleaner.
11 . Contractor is responsible for providing commercial carpet samples in Owner ' s
preferred color for final approval.
12 . Provide vinyl transition strips at any carpet-to-tile intersections and as shown on
drawings as manufactured by Tarkett or an approved, comparable product. Color to
be as selected by the Owner and the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
09680-4
balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic
or automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each
working day during the period of final testing and balancing. The Contractor shall assist the T
& B Agency by arranging to have all ceilings, partitions, windows, and doors installed prior to
the scheduled commencement of balancing within each specified area.
B . The Contractor shall provide to the approved T & B Agency a complete set ofp lens and
specifications and an approved copy of all heatingventilatingand air conditioning equipment
shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes , as
well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the T &
B Agency.
3 .6 AIR SYSTEMS
A. The testing and balancing shall include, but is not l mited to, the following requirements:
1 . Adjust fan speeds to deliver the required cfm and static pressure, and record rpm and fall
load amperes .
2 . Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts to verify design cfm. Seal duct access holes
with rubber or metal snap-in plugs.
3 . For each supply air system, verify the quantity of outside air and return air when the system
is operating in the maximum cooling and full heating modes. { _
4. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements, and
\._
also adjust so as to minimize drafts in all areas.
5 . Observe all equipment and exposed ductwork for noise, movement or vibration under
normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect/Engineer.
B . After all air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air
quantities and if temperature in any area . (where such area does not have the particular zone
temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees
plus or minus of the zone areas which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then
notify Architect/Engineer of such conditions and obtain approval to rebalance devices to obtain
air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone ill bo reb lance,
e as even as
possible regardless of calculated design air quantities . After obtaining app
rovaperform such necessary rebalancing.
END OF SECTION
15981 - 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Raceways .
2 . Building wire and connectors.
3 - Supporting devices for electrical components-
4. Electrical identification -
5 . Utility company electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7 . Electrical demolition .
8 . Cutting and patching for electrical construction .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A - Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components.
B . Shop Drawings : Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single-line
of electricity-metering component assemblies specific to this Project. diagram
1 -3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices
Article 100 , and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
, by a testing agency acceptable to authoriti
intended use . es having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published
standards.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
1 .4 COORDINATION
A Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and
cable with general construction work.
B . Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 of ]
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1 .01 GENERAL:
1 - Submittals :
a. In addition to manufacturer' s data, application instructions, and label
analysis for each coating material, submit samples for Architect ' s review of
color and texture only. Resubmit samples if requested until required sheen,
color and texture is achieved . .
b. On 8 " x 8 " hardboard, provide two (2) samples of each color and material,
With texture to simulate finish conditions.
C. On wood surfaces provide two (2) 4 " x 8 " samples for natural and stained
wood finish.
d. On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted
finishes of acceptable samples, for approval by the Architect.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 - Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless otherwise ,
indicated.
2 . Paint exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are
designated. If not designated, colors will be selected by Architect from standard
colors available for the coatings required.
3 . Work Not Included: Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming -of ferrous metal
items and fabricated components are included under their respective trades. Unless
otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces of concealed areas. Finished
metals such as anodized aluminum, stainless steel, bronze, and similar metals will
not be painted. Do not paint any moving parts of operating units, or over any
equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates or code-
required labels.
1 . 03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE :
1 • Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing
manufacturer' s name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where indicated in
accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
1.04 PROTAN:
% 1 • Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damage, by cleaning,
repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Architect.
09900-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
li SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Summary: Mechanical insulation includes pipe and duct insulation for indoor applications .
B . Submit Product Data for each type of mechanical insulation
C . Quality Assurance : UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum
smoke- developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPE INSULATION
A. Preformed Glass-Fiber Pipe insulation : ASTM C 547, Class 1 , jacketed, with a k-value of
0.26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 10 16/cu. ft.
( 160 kg/cu . m) .
B . Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0 .30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
2 .2 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Insulation : ASTM C 612, Class 113, semirigid, jacketed board with a k-value of
0 .26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 12 Ib/cu . fr.
( 192 kg/cu. m).
B . Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation : ASTM C 553 , Type II, Class F1 , jacketed blankets with a k-
value of 0.31 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Sheet Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0.30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F
( 15 deg C).
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 1 of I
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Raceways .
2 . Building wire and connectors.
3 - Supporting devices for electrical components-
4. Electrical identification -
5 . Utility company electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7 . Electrical demolition .
8 . Cutting and patching for electrical construction .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A - Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components.
B . Shop Drawings : Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single-line
of electricity-metering component assemblies specific to this Project. diagram
1 -3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices
Article 100 , and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
, by a testing agency acceptable to authoriti
intended use . es having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published
standards.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
1 .4 COORDINATION
A Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and
cable with general construction work.
B . Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 of ]
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES tt l
overhe
d utiffics and
I _ Coordinate
oordina e Inst Nationing and conne on for service entranceion of s and elgectr ciityround meteringa components. 1, /
rvices,
rs for electrical items
at aye concealed by
D . Cooled sturfaces . Access doors and panels afire sh
specified in other portions of this specification .
fin
ied to
E iWhere eltrical n tallation of identificatioadevices with completion tion devices are lof finished field-finished surfaces, coordinate
d surface
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 RACEWAYS
I C80 .3 , zinc-coated steel , with set-screw fittings .
A . EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANS
B . FMC : Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel .
C . IMC : Intermediate metal conduit; ANSI C80 .6, zinc-coated steel , with threaded fittings .
D . LFMC : Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and
mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
E RMC : Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel ; ANSI C80 . 1 .
C : Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings .
F . g
G . Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used .
2 .2 WIRES , CABLES , AND CONNECTIONS
A . Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper .
B . Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG : Stranded copper. ZHWN or
C . Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V , 75 deg C minimum, Type THW , THHN
USE depending on application . .
D . Wire Correctors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, materia], type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
2 .3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-funned steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B . Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
ameter
C at attmaximum of hannel :
inches c ., edges turned towrd web5
Strengths rating o suidt stra lr slotted holes
tural loading.
i
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
B . Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties.
C . Seal vapor-barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections.
D . Coat glass-fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor-barrier coating.
E. Seal ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with adhesive .
F . Roof Penetrations : Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of
the roof flashing.
G . Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal .
H . Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
I . Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Terminate insulation at penetrations through
fire-rated walls and partitions . Seal around penetration with firestopping specified in
Division 7 .
J . Floor Penetrations : Terminate insulation at the underside of the . floor p assembly and at the
floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with firesto n s ecified in Division 7 .
K. Glass-Fiber Insulation Installation : Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and \
joints with vapor-barrier compound .
L . Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation : Seal joints with adhesive.
M . Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following Piping systems:
1 . Domestic hot water.
2 . Recirculated domestic hot water.
3 . Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water piping.
4 . Exposed sanitary drains for handicapped accessible fixtures.
5 . Hydronic heating and cooling piping.
6 . Refrigerant suction piping.
N . Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Flexible connectors .
2 . Fire-protection piping systems .
3 . Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
4 . Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated .
5 . Below-grade piping.
6 . Chrome-plated-pipes and fittings, -except-for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
7 . Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,
and flow regulators.
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 2 of 2
1 .05 PROJECT CONDITIONS : (; 1
I Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 98 degrees . Do not apply paints in rain, fog or
mist; when relative humidity exceeds 95 percent; at temperatures less than 5
degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
2 . Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier
coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Architect in writing of
anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrates primed by others .
3 . Surface Conditions : Apply paint and coatings when the following surface
conditions have been met:
a. Interior Drywall- 12% maximum moisture content.
b . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels- 12% maximum
moisture content.
c. Exposed Wood, Wood Doors, Wood Trim- 15 % maximum moisture
content.
1 .06 EXTRA MATERIALS :
I . Provide a minimum of 1 gallon of each material and color of paint as materials
applied that are packaged and stored with identification labels describing contents .
1 .07 SURFACE PREPARATION :
1 . Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer' s instructions of each substrate condition.
2 . Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and
similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied
protection. Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at
completion of work.
3 . Seal wood required to be job-painted. Prime edges, ends, face, undersides and
backsides of counters, cases, cabinets, counters, etc. Use varnish for back-priming
where transparent finish is required.
4 . Back-prime interior paneling only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on backside.
09900-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES tt l
overhe
d utiffics and
I _ Coordinate
oordina e Inst Nationing and conne on for service entranceion of s and elgectr ciityround meteringa components. 1, /
rvices,
rs for electrical items
at aye concealed by
D . Cooled sturfaces . Access doors and panels afire sh
specified in other portions of this specification .
fin
ied to
E iWhere eltrical n tallation of identificatioadevices with completion tion devices are lof finished field-finished surfaces, coordinate
d surface
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 RACEWAYS
I C80 .3 , zinc-coated steel , with set-screw fittings .
A . EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANS
B . FMC : Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel .
C . IMC : Intermediate metal conduit; ANSI C80 .6, zinc-coated steel , with threaded fittings .
D . LFMC : Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and
mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
E RMC : Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel ; ANSI C80 . 1 .
C : Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings .
F . g
G . Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used .
2 .2 WIRES , CABLES , AND CONNECTIONS
A . Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper .
B . Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG : Stranded copper. ZHWN or
C . Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V , 75 deg C minimum, Type THW , THHN
USE depending on application . .
D . Wire Correctors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, materia], type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
2 .3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-funned steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B . Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
ameter
C at attmaximum of hannel :
inches c ., edges turned towrd web5
Strengths rating o suidt stra lr slotted holes
tural loading.
i
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
D. Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle : Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/ ] 6-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories : Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the
type and size of channel with which used .
1 - Materials : Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel .
F. Raceway and Cable Supports : Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-
type hangers.
G . Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53 , Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel , plain ends.
H . Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarnored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish .
L Expansion Anchors : Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
J . Toggle Bolts : All-steel springhead type.
K . Powder-Driven Threaded Studs : Heat-treated steel .
2 . 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A . Identification Device Colors : Use those prescribed by ANSI A13 . 1 , NFPA 70, and .these
Specifications.
B . Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables : Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
C . Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
D. Color-Coding Cable Ties : Type 6/6 nylon,- self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape
compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and with the following features :
1 • Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2 . Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
3 Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates : Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1 / 16-inch minimum thickness for signs up
l to 20 sq . in. and 1 /8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 3
5 . Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of wood doors with heavy coat of varnish or
similar sealer immediately upon delivery to job. Do not paint door UL Labels .
1 .08 MATERIAL PREPARATION :
1 Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
1 .09 APPLICATION :
1 • Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer' s
directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to
which applied, but in no case will spray
Architect. application be used unless approved by
2 • Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
final paint coat, until paint
3 . Paint surfaces behind movable equipment same as similar exposed surfaces . Paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment with prime coat only before
equipment is installed.
4 . Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and edges same as exterior faces, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not paint door UL Labels .
5 . Sand lightly between succeeding enamel, urethane or varnish coats.
6. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch
up painted, unless otherwise specified.
7. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which
has not been prime coated by others .
8 . Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer' s recommended spreading
rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4. 0 mils for entire
coating system of prime and finish coats for (3) coat work.
9• Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2 .5 mils for entire coating system
Of prime and finish coat for two (2) coat work.
1 . 10 COMPLETED WORK:
1 Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, finish or repaint
work not in compliance with specified requirements.
09900-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials
and thicknesses:
1 Domestic Hot Water and Recirculated Hot Water: 1 /2-inch ( 12 . 7-mm) flexible
elastomeric pipe insulation.
2 . Sanitary Drains and Storm Water Piping: 1 /2-inch ( 12 .7-mm) flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation .
B . Install duct insulation as follows:
1 . Install insulation continuously on ducts that penetrate walls and floors, except at fire-
rated assemblies terminate insulation at the assembly. Maintain insulation vapor
retarder on cold duct.
2 . Install removable or segmented insulation on access panel and doors.
3 . Install vapor barriers on insulated ducts and plenums with surface operating
temperatures below 60 deg F ( 15 deg C) . Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor
barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
4 Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation
requiring a vapor harrier.
5 . Taper glass-fiber insulation ends at a 45-degree angle and seal with adhesive. Cut ends
of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.
6 . Board Insulation Installation : Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers
and anchor pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches (450 mm) apart each way . and 3 inches
(76 mm) from insulation joints. Apply vapor-barrier coating compound to insulation in
1 contact, open joints, breaks, punctures, and voids in vapor barrier.
7. Blanket Insulation Installation : Bond ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than
24 inches (610 mm) with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) wide
transverse strips on 12-inch (300-mm) centers. Bond ducts having long sides or
diameters 24 inches (610 mm) and larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches (300 mm)
apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of insulation . Overlap
joints 3 inches (76 mm). Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor-barrier
compound .
C . Duct System Applications : Insulate indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ducts.
D. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Fibrous glass ducts.
2 . Metal ducts with duct liner.
3 . Factory- insulated flexible ducts.
4 . Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections .
5 . Flexible connectors .
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
8 . Nameplates and data plates .
E. Duct_ Insulation_ Thickness --and -Application Schedule: Insulate ducts with the following
materials and thicknesses :
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
D. Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle : Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/ ] 6-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories : Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the
type and size of channel with which used .
1 - Materials : Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel .
F. Raceway and Cable Supports : Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-
type hangers.
G . Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53 , Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel , plain ends.
H . Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarnored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish .
L Expansion Anchors : Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
J . Toggle Bolts : All-steel springhead type.
K . Powder-Driven Threaded Studs : Heat-treated steel .
2 . 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A . Identification Device Colors : Use those prescribed by ANSI A13 . 1 , NFPA 70, and .these
Specifications.
B . Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables : Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
C . Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
D. Color-Coding Cable Ties : Type 6/6 nylon,- self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape
compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and with the following features :
1 • Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2 . Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
3 Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates : Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1 / 16-inch minimum thickness for signs up
l to 20 sq . in. and 1 /8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES ll
J
G . Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted ; comply with 29 CFR 1910 . 145 , Chapter XVII . Co ors,
legend, and size appropriate to each application .
1 . Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel -finish , punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners. cellulose-acetate butyrate with
2 . Exterior Units: Weather-resistant; nonfading, preprinted,
0 .0396-inch, galvanized-steel backing. 1 /4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
H . Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers .
2 . 5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY' S ELECTRICITY METERING
A . Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for meter socket .
2 . 6 CONCRETE BASES
Materials : As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
A . Concrete Forms and Reinforcement
Place Concrete . "
B . Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength -
PART 3 EXECUTION
trength .PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A . Headroom Maintenance : if mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom .
B . Materials and Components: Install level , plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated .
C . Equipment : Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components .
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations .
D . Right of Way : Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3 .2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoor Installations:
1 . Exposed: RNC .
2 . Concealed: RNC .
3 . Underground, Single Run: RNC .
4 . Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated .
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
1 . Concealed Applications: Fiberglass blanket, 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm) thick or Fiberglass {\ 1
board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick. J
2. Exposed Applications : Fiberglass board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 15080
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 4 of 4
1 . 11 TOUCHING UP AND CLEANING :
I . Upon completion, all touching up as required shall be done and paint removed from )
all surfaces which are not specified to receive paint.
1 . 12 PAINT GENERAL:
A. Material Compatibility:
1 , Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience .
2 . For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing
by manufacturer' s of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate
indicated.
C . Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior paints and coatings : Provide
products that comply with the following limits for VOC (Volatile Organic
Compounds) content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59 , subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical
restrictions ; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied
in a fabrication or finishing shop :
I . Flat paints and coatings: VOC content of not more than 50g/L.
2 . Nonflat Paints and coatings : VOC content of not more than 150 glL.
3 . Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1 .0
percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds
containing one or more benzene rings) .
4 . Restricted Components : Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolien.
b . Acrylonitrile .
C . Antimony.
d. Benzene.
C. Butyl benzyl phthalate .
f. Cadmium.
g. Di(2-ethylhexl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i . Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j . 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
1 . Dimethyl phthalate.
in. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
09900-4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES ll
J
G . Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted ; comply with 29 CFR 1910 . 145 , Chapter XVII . Co ors,
legend, and size appropriate to each application .
1 . Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel -finish , punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners. cellulose-acetate butyrate with
2 . Exterior Units: Weather-resistant; nonfading, preprinted,
0 .0396-inch, galvanized-steel backing. 1 /4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
H . Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers .
2 . 5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY' S ELECTRICITY METERING
A . Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for meter socket .
2 . 6 CONCRETE BASES
Materials : As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
A . Concrete Forms and Reinforcement
Place Concrete . "
B . Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength -
PART 3 EXECUTION
trength .PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A . Headroom Maintenance : if mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom .
B . Materials and Components: Install level , plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated .
C . Equipment : Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components .
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations .
D . Right of Way : Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3 .2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoor Installations:
1 . Exposed: RNC .
2 . Concealed: RNC .
3 . Underground, Single Run: RNC .
4 . Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated .
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Indoor Installations :
I - Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC .
2 . Concealed in Walls or Ceilings : EMT.
3 . In Concrete Slab: EMT.
4 . Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RNC
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations : LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 , unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A . Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and
floors .
B . Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel .
C . Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or woven
Polypropylene or monofilament plastic Line with not less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensile strenh .
Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires . gt
E . Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN 53) and smaller, in
maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent Add
pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.
F. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration , noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. ---Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections .
G . Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface .
3 .4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A . Application : Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as
interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Exposed Feeders : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
C . Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
D. Concealed Feeders in Concrete, below Floors on Grade, in Crawlspaces: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single
J conductors in raceway.
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 5 of 5
o• Hexavalent chromium .
P. Isophorone.
q . Lead .
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalane.
W. Toluene (methylbenzene) .
X . 1 , 1 , 1 -trichloroethane.
Y. Vinyl chloride.
1. 13 PAINTING SCHEDULE
The following paints specified shall be manufactured by one of the following
manufacturer' s or an approved, comparable product:
I • Benjamin Moore Paints
2• Sherwin Williams Paints
3 . Porter Paints
4. Devoe Paints
5 . MAB Paints
6. ICI Paints
7• Color Wheel Paints
8 . Armourcoat, USA
NOTE : Color selections to be by the Owner, the Architect, and/or the Interior Designer. See
Finishes Schedule on the plans for location of paint. When more than five (5) colors are selected
for interior or for exteriors, a painting upcharge shall be negotiated prior to application of paints.
A . Exterior wood Trim,
Wood Siding,
Fascias, Soffits, Etc. : One ( 1 ) coat sealer primer on all faces and edges. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Exterior Acrylic Latex paint on
exposed surfaces.
B. Interior Drywall; Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Regal AquaVelvet Eggshell
(319) over base sealer coat. Specialty finishes may apply
also.
C. Galvanized Metal : One ( 1 ) coat Benjamin Moore Galvanized Iron Primer. Two
(2) coats Benjamin Moore Meta-lastic Paint.
D . Metal Surfaces : Structural Steel Beams & Columns,
Steel Trusses, Steel Tanks :
09900-5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. End Connections : Threads shall comply with ANSI B1 .20. 1 . Flanges shall comply with ANSI
1316. 1 for cast-iron valves and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall
comply with ANSI 816. 18 .
B . Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-bronze body and bonnet; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc,
copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland , "Teflon " impregnated packing, and malleable-
iron handwheel .
C. Ball Valves : Rated for 150-psig ( 1035 -kPa) saturated steam pressure, 400-psig (2760-kPa)
WOG pressure; 2-piece construction; with bronze body, standard (or regular) port, chrome-
" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem
plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon " or "TFE , and
vinyl-covered steel handle .
D. Plug Valves : Rated at 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern,
square head, and threaded ends.
E . Globe Valves: Class 125 ; body and screwed cast-bronze bonnet; with threaded or solder ends,
brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon "
impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel .
F. Swing Check Valves : Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
and bronze disc; and with threaded or solder ends .
G. Valves for Copper Tube: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and
low-pressure steam service.
H. Valves for Steel Pipe: Threaded ends .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Use gate and ball valves forshutoffduty;--globe -and ballforthrottling duty.
i B . Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support pport where necessary.
15110 VALVES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Indoor Installations :
I - Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC .
2 . Concealed in Walls or Ceilings : EMT.
3 . In Concrete Slab: EMT.
4 . Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RNC
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations : LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 , unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A . Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and
floors .
B . Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel .
C . Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or woven
Polypropylene or monofilament plastic Line with not less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensile strenh .
Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires . gt
E . Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN 53) and smaller, in
maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent Add
pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.
F. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration , noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. ---Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections .
G . Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface .
3 .4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A . Application : Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as
interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Exposed Feeders : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
C . Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
D. Concealed Feeders in Concrete, below Floors on Grade, in Crawlspaces: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single
J conductors in raceway.
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 5 of 5
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
I below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in
G . Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete,
raceway .
H . Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway .
3 . 5 WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Make taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
3 .6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A . Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hct-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel
system components.
B . Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C . Strength least four f Su po Ib m Adequate
design carry preset nd future rt loads, times a safety factor of at
3 .7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A . Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 1\
B . Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent 1
minimum in the future.
C . Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps .
lled
D . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls my and fire-rated
holes are used . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies . Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods
unless other fastening methods are indicated :
I Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails.
2 . Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of
wall .
3 . Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around
sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall .
4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts . powder charge and
S . Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts or threaded studs driven by p
provided with lock washers.
6 . Structural Steel : Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock l
washers.
7 . Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws.
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
C. Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment. t l
D . Install 3 -valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling-type valves.
E . Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe .
F . Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G . Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level .
END OF SECTION 15110
15110
VALVES Page 2 of 2
Exterior Exposed- Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Retard-X Rust Inhibitive
Latex Primer 162 over the shop delivered primer, welds and
bolts . Allow a minimum of 4 hours between coats . Finish i
with two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Eggshell alkyd house
paint 108 .
Interior Exposed- Same applications but one (1 ) coat only of primer and finish.
NOTE: All galvanized metal to be washed with mineral spirits to remove any oil .
E . Exterior Stucco and Cementicious Wall Panels :
One ( 1) coat Benjamin Moore Masonry sealer. Two (2)
coats Benjamin Moore Latex paint.
F. Steel Doors & Frames :
Spot prime with Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust Inhabiter
Red Oxide. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore Iron Clad Rust
Inhibiter (semi- gloss) .
G . Wood Doors and Trim (Painted) :
One (1 ) coat sealer primer. Two (2) coats Benjamin Moore
enamel.
H . Wood Doors and Trim (Sealed) : —
Three coats of Satin Finish clear urethane, lightly sanded rr
between coats .
J. Aluminum or Steel Handrails :
One coat metal primer and two coats shop applied industrial
enamel .
J - Exposed finish Grade Concrete Block:
One coat block filler and sealer primer. Specialty Paint over
primer in accordance with the Manufacturers Specifications .
g. Exterior Aluminum Tubing and Frames :
One coat metal primer and two coats field applied industrial
enamel utilizing a compressor and spray applicator. Protect
all surrounding finish work from overspray.
L . Exterior Architectural Masonry Units (such as decorative split faced, split ribbed,
and smooth faced colored block, and any manufactured stone such as Herpal),
including the mortar used to set the units, shall be sealed with a water repellent-anti
graffitti coating after installation and cleaning of all block faces . EXCEPTION : If
g ---- - - -
the block manufacturer supplies an ante ral water repellent admixture in their bloc
and a water repellent is added to the grout (mortar) during installation, then no
exterior sealer is required.
09900-6
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
I below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in
G . Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete,
raceway .
H . Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway .
3 . 5 WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Make taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
3 .6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A . Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hct-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel
system components.
B . Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C . Strength least four f Su po Ib m Adequate
design carry preset nd future rt loads, times a safety factor of at
3 .7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A . Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 1\
B . Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent 1
minimum in the future.
C . Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps .
lled
D . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls my and fire-rated
holes are used . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies . Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods
unless other fastening methods are indicated :
I Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails.
2 . Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of
wall .
3 . Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around
sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall .
4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts . powder charge and
S . Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts or threaded studs driven by p
provided with lock washers.
6 . Structural Steel : Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock l
washers.
7 . Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws.
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
l 8 . Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations : Stainless steel .
9. Light Steel : Sheet-metal screws.
10. Fasteners : Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load .
3 . 8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A . Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B . Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards . Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C . Self-Adhesive Identification Products : Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for
voltage and phase identification .
E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and
communication lines . Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall; use a
1 single line marker.
F . Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 191`0. 145,
Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of items to which they connect . Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation . Install
metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
G . Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations .
3 .9 ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements .
Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.
3 . 10 FIRESTOPPrNTG
A . Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.
Firestopping installation is specified in other sections of these specifications.
3 . 11 CONCRETE BASES
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 7 of 7
M. Toilet Room Walls :
Apply water base epoxy coating full height on the walls in toilet
rooms/bathrooms, to achieve an impervious finish . (See NOTE below).
(ON INTERIOR MASONRY) - Semigloss Finish using
Sherwin Williams Paints.
1 " coat: S-W KEM CATI-COAT EPDXYFILLER/SEALER 1342 WA8B42
WA9 (87- 108 sq. ft./gal @ 8- 10 mild dry).
21d coat : S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70B60 V25 .
V coat: S-W Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70/B60 V25, Wails wet, 3
mils wet per coat).
NOTE: DO NOT APPLY EPDXY PAINTS TO ANY INTERIOR FACES OF BARE
BLOCK AT MASONRY EXTERIOR WALLS. UTILIZE LATEX PAINTS WITH
BREATHABILITY OF 1 PERM OR GREATER.
(ON DRYWALL) - Semi-Gloss Finish using Sherwin Williams Paints.
I " coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28 W20Q
dry). (4 mils wet, 1 .2 mils
2" coat: S-W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/B60 V3 .
3rd coat: S -W Heavy Duty Epoxy, B67 Series/ B60 V3 . ( 10 mils wet,
dry per coat). 6 mils
N. Stained Concrete Floors : Two coats solid color H&C silicone acrylic concrete
sealer. In areas where wet floor conditions exist such as locker rooms, toilet rooms,
etc apply with SharkGrip slip resistant additive over a clean, dirt and dust free,
dry, broom finished slab. Color as selected by the Architect.
P. Specialty Coatings shall be as herein listed. Placement shall be per the In Finish
Schedule.
1 • Apply Armourcoat Duturo in the public corridors when scheduled on the Finish
Schedule. Product Data Sheet shall be supplied to the Architect for approval. Color
shall be selected by the Architect.
` * * END OF THIS SECTION* * *
09900-7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube : ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
B . Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
C . Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 , Type S, Grade A. Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 , Classes 50 and 51 ; mechanical or push-on joint; with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
E. PVC Plastic, Water Pipe: ASTM D 1785 , Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends .
2 .2 FITTINGS
A . Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 .22.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 . 18 .
C . Bronze Flanges : ASME B16 .24 , Classes 150 and 300.
D. Copper Unions : ASME 1316 . 18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball -and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded
ends. Threads complying with ASME B 1 .20. 1 .
E . Ductile- and Gray-Iron Gasketed Fittings : AWWA C110 standard pattern or ductile- iron
AWWA C153 compact pattern, 250-psig ( 1725 -kPa) minimum pressure rating, with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining and AWWA C1 I rubber gaskets.
F. Ductile- and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings : AWWAC110, 250-prig ( 1725kPa) minimum
pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
G . Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 , made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.
H. Malleable-Iron Unions : ASME BI 6 .39, Classes 150 and 300; hexagonal-stock; with ball-and-
socket joint; metal -to-metal bronze seating surfaces; and female threaded ends with threads
complying with ASME B 1 . 20 . 1 .
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
l 8 . Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations : Stainless steel .
9. Light Steel : Sheet-metal screws.
10. Fasteners : Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load .
3 . 8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A . Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B . Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards . Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C . Self-Adhesive Identification Products : Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for
voltage and phase identification .
E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and
communication lines . Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall; use a
1 single line marker.
F . Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 191`0. 145,
Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of items to which they connect . Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation . Install
metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
G . Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations .
3 .9 ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements .
Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.
3 . 10 FIRESTOPPrNTG
A . Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.
Firestopping installation is specified in other sections of these specifications.
3 . 11 CONCRETE BASES
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 7 of 7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer' s anchorage 1
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated .
3 . 12 DEMOLITION
A . Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain . If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality .
B . Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety .
to
C Abandoned
7 ncs below the surk: Cut rface indicated remove buried raceway and wiring, babandoned
in
rf ce of adjacentacent co struction . Cap r cewaysndpath surfac
place, 2hee to
match existing finish .
D . Remove, store, clean , reinstall , reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3 . 13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
-s walls , ats othei involved .surfaces required to
A Cut, channel,hase, and
d , fed ceilings, and
tirades
permt elctri alsPerform cutting
B . Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces .
END OF SECTION 16050
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 8 of 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
I . Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings : ASME B16 .4 , Classes 125 and 250; standard (,
pattern; with threads complying with ASME B1 .20. 1 . l)
J . Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16 . 1 , Classes 125 and 300 .
K. PVC Plastic, Schedule 40, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings : ASTM D 2466 .
2 .3 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Ductile-Iron Pipe Push-On Joints: AWWA CI I I rubber gaskets and lubricant.
B . Ductile-Iron Pipe Mechanical Joints : AWWA C1 I ductile- or gray-iron glands, high-strength
steel bolts and nuts, and rubber gaskets .
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanged Joints: AWWA CI 15 ductile- or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber
gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts .
D . Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
E . Solder Filler Metal : ASTM B 32 , alloys to suit system requirements .
F . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 9 , alloys to suit system requirements .
G . Welding Filler Metals : Comply with AWS D10 . 12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded .
H . Solvent Cements : As recommended by manufacturer.
1 . Plastic Pipe Seals : ASTM F 477 , elastomeric gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications :
1 . Underground, Service Entrance Piping: [Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy,
solder-joint pressure fittings and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 , Sn94, or E solder] or
[Schedule 80 PVC plastic water pipe, Schedule g0 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints] .
2 pressure fittings;Fard copperounions; bronzr tube, eflanges;wrought-copper
andsolderjoints with AlloyrSn95 .
Sn94 or E solder.
32 VALVE APPLICATIONS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 2o f 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer' s anchorage 1
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated .
3 . 12 DEMOLITION
A . Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain . If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality .
B . Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety .
to
C Abandoned
7 ncs below the surk: Cut rface indicated remove buried raceway and wiring, babandoned
in
rf ce of adjacentacent co struction . Cap r cewaysndpath surfac
place, 2hee to
match existing finish .
D . Remove, store, clean , reinstall , reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3 . 13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
-s walls , ats othei involved .surfaces required to
A Cut, channel,hase, and
d , fed ceilings, and
tirades
permt elctri alsPerform cutting
B . Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces .
END OF SECTION 16050
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 8 of 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For ground rods .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
% B - Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2 .
C . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system:
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.
2 . Boggs, Inc.
3 . Chance/Hubbell .
4. Copperweld Corp.
5 . Dessert Corp.
6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
7. Framatome ConnectorsBurndy Electrical .
8 . Galvan Industries, Inc.
9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 1 of ]
DIVISION 101 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10100 - CHALKBOARDS MARKERBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
1 . 01 SCOPE
This section of the Specifications is intended to cover the furnishing of all labor, materials,
and/or incidentals necessary to the completion of all requirements of the drawings, notes,
schedules, and these Specifications concerning the furnishing of Chalkboards,
Markerboards and Tackboards .
Shop Drawings of all chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, trim, etc., shall be submitted
to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall indicate method of
attachment at various wall conditions.
Approved Manufacturers :
AKI in Davie, Florida
Claridge in Harrison, Arkansas
1 . 02 CHALKBOARD MATERIALS :
Chalkboard shall be porcelain enamel on a minimum of 24 gauge sheet steel .
Writing surface shall have three (3) coats of vitreous enamel for minimum coating of
.006 ".
Back side of facing sheet shall have a minimum of two (2) vitreous protective coats.
Chalkboard shall be factory laminated 1 /2 ° vapor proof fiber board.
Chalkboards are to be in one continuous length where possible unless approved by the
Architect. Where it is not possible to achieve a continuous length provide two (2) equal
Pieces with aluminum "H" joint strip painted to match chalkboard color.
Chalkboard and tackboards colors to be selected by Architect.
1 .03 MARKERBOARD MATERIALS :
Markerboards shall be LCS Porcelain Enamel Steel , 24 gauge over 3/8 " particle board core
with . 015 aluminum sheet backing. Provide standard 5/8 " perimeter and Series 4 mounting
trim along with tray and map rail. Provide music staff lining on Music Room Boards.
Color: white with grey trim.
1 .04 TACKBOARD MATERIALS :
:\ Tackboards shall be No . 2 vinyl over cork backing equal to Vinyl Tac-Tex by Greensteel.
Tackboard colors to be selected by Architect.
10100- 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures
or equipment connections and where indicated .
B. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each
plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to
drain water distribution piping system .
D . Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated .
E. Install ball valves in each hot-water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump .
3 .3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A . Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable Plumbing Code and as
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
B . Support vertical piping at each floor.
3 .4 INSPECTING AND CLEANING
A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having .
jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15140
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For ground rods .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
% B - Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2 .
C . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system:
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.
2 . Boggs, Inc.
3 . Chance/Hubbell .
4. Copperweld Corp.
5 . Dessert Corp.
6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
7. Framatome ConnectorsBurndy Electrical .
8 . Galvan Industries, Inc.
9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 1 of ]
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
10 . Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc . (,
I ] . Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
12 . Ideal Industries, Inc _
13 . ILSCO .
14 , Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
15 . Korns, C . C. Co .; Division of Robroy Industries .
16 . Lightning Master Corp .
17 . Lyncole XIT Grounding.
18 . O-Z/Gedney CO . ; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
19 . Raco, Inc . ; Division of Hubbell .
20 . Robbins Lightning, Inc.
21 . Salisbury, W . H . & Co .
22 . Superior Grounding Systems, Inc .
23 . Thomas & Betts, Electrical .
2 .2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A . For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
B . Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation .
C . Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe . On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow . (^
D . Grounding Electrode Conductors : Stranded cable . i
E. Underground Conductors : Bare, tinned, stranded , unless otherwise indicated.
F . Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors : ASTM B 3 .
G . Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8 .
H . Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33 .
1 . Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
J . Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
K . Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution : No . 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
M . Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
N . Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467 ; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items . Exothermic-welded Type, in kit form, (!
selected per manufacturer's written instructions .
] 6060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 2 of 2
1 .05 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES :
All trimmed Chalkboards and Tackboards shall be framed with extruded aluminum
sections 6063 alloy satin anodized trim.
Trim pieces shall be equal to Greensteel, Inc . , as follows :
a. Top Trim: 469K Display Rail w/ 6900K End Caps
b . Side Trim: 4158K
C. Chalk Tray: #238K 1 /2 00K End Plates
700
d. Mapbooks (8 per board) # 70000K. Aluminum only . Plastic not acceptable.
Chalk trays shall extend the full combined length of all chalk and tackboards, and shall be
secured at 12 " o .c . (Chalk trays not required under separate tackboards).
1 .06 INSTALLATION :
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard shall be surface-mounted using channel trim with
concealed fastenings as specified above and glue to wall to prevent pillowing of chalk,
marker and tackboards . _
�.
(
ith yawl plugs and screws or expansion
Chalk tray shall be secured directly to the wall w
bolts as conditions require . Maximum spacing of fasteners shall be on 12" centers. Top
and side moldings shall be secured in like manner on 20 " center.
Guarantees :
ch
not
Manufacturer shall furnish awritten goazgnnal erastee to ing quality, he originowner that any a
l bo ualsacuilty, oor twenty
retain the original writing quality,
(20) years after original installation, will be replaced and installed without charge to the Owner.
Chalkboard, markerboard and tackboard installations shall be guaranteed for one ( 1 ) year after
final inspection against faulty materials and workmanship .
* **END OF SECTION* * *
10100-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
10 . Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc . (,
I ] . Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
12 . Ideal Industries, Inc _
13 . ILSCO .
14 , Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
15 . Korns, C . C. Co .; Division of Robroy Industries .
16 . Lightning Master Corp .
17 . Lyncole XIT Grounding.
18 . O-Z/Gedney CO . ; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
19 . Raco, Inc . ; Division of Hubbell .
20 . Robbins Lightning, Inc.
21 . Salisbury, W . H . & Co .
22 . Superior Grounding Systems, Inc .
23 . Thomas & Betts, Electrical .
2 .2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A . For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
B . Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation .
C . Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe . On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow . (^
D . Grounding Electrode Conductors : Stranded cable . i
E. Underground Conductors : Bare, tinned, stranded , unless otherwise indicated.
F . Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors : ASTM B 3 .
G . Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8 .
H . Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33 .
1 . Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
J . Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
K . Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution : No . 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
M . Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
N . Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467 ; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items . Exothermic-welded Type, in kit form, (!
selected per manufacturer's written instructions .
] 6060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. \ 2 .3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A Ground Rods : Sectional type; copper-clad steel .
I . Size: ''/<" in diameter by 120 inches per section .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials .
B . In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors .
C . Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections.
D . Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated .
1 . Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches''above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1 2 - At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and
down to the indicated height above the floor.
E. Underground Grounding Conductors : Use copper conductor, No . 2/0 AWG minimum . Bury at
least 24 inches below grade .
F. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and
quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larer
nductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicasizes, or more
ted . g
I . Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in feeders and branch circuits .
2 . Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
3 . Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-
circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units .
4 . Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits : Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor
from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service
, unless
Otherwise indicated .
5 . Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits : For designated equipment supplied by a branch
circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic
raceway fitting listed for the purpose . Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and
'\1 install an insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 3 of 3
DIVISION 104 SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10260 - CORNER GUARDS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and install, as detailed, as located on the Drawings, at all exterior doors woth
drywall comers, and at corridor interior comersm C/S Acrovyn Surface Mounted Corner
Guard 90 degree Models SM20, SSM-20 and the 135 degree Model SM-20M. All as
manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. Or an approved equal . Complete details,
locations and samples of selected models and colors, including end caps, and mounting
hardware shall be submitted to the Architect for approval .
1 .03 APPROVED MANUFACTUEWS ORE UAL :
Construction Specialties, Inc . , Acrovyn
Arden Architectural
Balco Metalines, Inc.
IPC/InPro Corp.
Korogard, RJF International Inc.
Pawling Corporation, Pro Tek
1 .04 MATERIAL .
Corner guards shall be manufactured from . 078 " thick nominal high impact vinyl/acrylic
extrusions, designed to absorb and resist abrasions under impact. The extrusion shall
include a matte finish pebblette grain surface, and be supplied in a Solid Color as called
out on the Interiors Plan . Continuous retainers shall be a minimum .063 " thickness . End
caps and mounting hardware shall be famished to complete the assembly.
1 .05 DESIGN:
Corner guards shall be securely locked in place yet provide for free-floating action to
absorb heavy impact without damage to guard, retainer or adjacent wall . Corner guard
shall be straight and true over full length.
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
10260-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
B . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe : CISPI 301 .
C . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe : ASTM D 2665 , Schedule 40, plain ends.
2 .2 FITTINGS
A - Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.29.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.23 .
i
- 1 C Wrou ht-Co
g pper, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings: ASME B16. 43 .
D . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16.32 .
E. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings : ASTM A 74, Service class.
F . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301 .
G. Cast-Iron, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16 .45 .
H . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665 , made to ASTM D 3311 ; socket-type; drain,
waste, and vent pipe patterns.
I . Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant.
J . CISPI Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : CISPI310, having
ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 series stainless-steel
clamp assembly. , corrugated shield-and-
K . Cast-Iron-Pipe Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe : Rubber or
elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band assembly, fabricated to match OD of pipes to be
joined.
L. Plastic Pipe Sleeves : ASTM C 564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477 elastomeric
seal.
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. \ 2 .3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A Ground Rods : Sectional type; copper-clad steel .
I . Size: ''/<" in diameter by 120 inches per section .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials .
B . In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors .
C . Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections.
D . Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated .
1 . Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches''above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1 2 - At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and
down to the indicated height above the floor.
E. Underground Grounding Conductors : Use copper conductor, No . 2/0 AWG minimum . Bury at
least 24 inches below grade .
F. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and
quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larer
nductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicasizes, or more
ted . g
I . Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in feeders and branch circuits .
2 . Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
3 . Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-
circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units .
4 . Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits : Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor
from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service
, unless
Otherwise indicated .
5 . Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits : For designated equipment supplied by a branch
circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic
raceway fitting listed for the purpose . Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and
'\1 install an insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
r terminal of the applicable derived system or service,
equipment grounding conducto
unless otherwise indicated.
6 . Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic
raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables .
7 . Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and
heaters . Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
8 . Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated
c water heater,
rost
heat ngecable.un
Bond conductoro to cheater t uni s, piping, connected n& and f
equipment, and
components.
9 . Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System : Bond electrical power
system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest
point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as
system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
G . Metal Frame Grounding for Buildings : Drive a ground rod at the base of every corner column
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart . Connect rod to
column with an underground grounding conductor. Interconnect
ground
in hes iminimi ntinu om
ous
underground conductor, extending to existing building grounds,
building foundation . Use copper conductor not less than No . 2/0 AWG for underground
conductor, and bury 18 inches below grade, minimum .
feet
) or three
ds
ced
least one-
H odrlengthdfromnseachtother andt two rods locat deatyleastrtheesame distanceofromaothertgrounding
i
electrodes.
1 . Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
2 . Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors . Use exothermic welds,
except as otherwise indicated . Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
copper coating.
1 . Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated . Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
J . Banding Straps and Jumpers : In so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required ; then, use a
bolted clamp . Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
K. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main meta] water service entrances
to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by g clamp
p
connectors . Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end .
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
t
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A . Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron soil pipe fittings; cast-iron, heavy-duty
couplings for hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings ; and hubless joints.
B . PVC plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket-type drain, waste, and vent pipe pattern fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
C . Copper drainage tube, wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy drainage fittings, and soldered
joints with Alloy E or Alloy Sn50 solder.
3 .2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building
sanitary sewer.
B . Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures
or drains-
3 -3
rains_33 INSPECTION
A . Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15150
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 2 of 2
Vinyl/acrylic extrusions shall be U .L. tested, Classified and Labeled reflection a Class I
Fire Rating in accordance with UL-723 (ASTM-E84-91a) (CAN 45102-2-M83 in Canada) f l
test procedures . Chemical and stain resistance shall be per CSAV-280 standards, \
established by manufacturer.
Color shall be integral with components matched in accordance with SAE J- 1545 -(Delta E)
with color difference no greater than 1 . 0 units using the Hunter (Lab) scale . Impact tested
in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM-F476-76.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION '
r
10260-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
r terminal of the applicable derived system or service,
equipment grounding conducto
unless otherwise indicated.
6 . Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic
raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables .
7 . Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and
heaters . Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
8 . Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated
c water heater,
rost
heat ngecable.un
Bond conductoro to cheater t uni s, piping, connected n& and f
equipment, and
components.
9 . Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System : Bond electrical power
system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest
point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as
system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
G . Metal Frame Grounding for Buildings : Drive a ground rod at the base of every corner column
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart . Connect rod to
column with an underground grounding conductor. Interconnect
ground
in hes iminimi ntinu om
ous
underground conductor, extending to existing building grounds,
building foundation . Use copper conductor not less than No . 2/0 AWG for underground
conductor, and bury 18 inches below grade, minimum .
feet
) or three
ds
ced
least one-
H odrlengthdfromnseachtother andt two rods locat deatyleastrtheesame distanceofromaothertgrounding
i
electrodes.
1 . Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
2 . Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors . Use exothermic welds,
except as otherwise indicated . Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
copper coating.
1 . Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated . Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
J . Banding Straps and Jumpers : In so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required ; then, use a
bolted clamp . Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
K. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main meta] water service entrances
to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by g clamp
p
connectors . Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end .
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
M . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system .
N . Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized .
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2 . Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3 . Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
Penetration of moisture to contact surfaces .
4 . Exothermic-Weided Connections : Comply with manufacturer's written instructions .
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
5 . Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors .
6 . Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations : If metallic raceways terminate at „metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor
to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, ,unless
Otherwise indicated.
7 . Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A .
8 . Compression-Type Connections : Use hydraulic compression tools to provide;`correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors . Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to
make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
9. Moisture Protection : If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
O. Overhead Line Grounding: Comply with IEEE C2 except where stricter requirements are
indicated . Use 2 or more parallel ground rods if a single ground rod electrode resistance to
ground exceeds 25 ohms .
1 . Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth .
2 . Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for
underground connections and connections to rods.
3 . Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other groundi
conductor. ng conductors.
4. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding
5 . Protect grounding conductors on surface of wood poles with molding extended from
grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 10440 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drams and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Areas of specialty signage may include :
I • Construction Signs
2• Exterior Handicapped Signs at Parking Areas
3 • Toilet Room Handicapped Signs
4 . Interior Room Number and Name Signs
5 • Occupancy Capacity Signs
6. Regulatory Signs
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Uniformityof Manufacturer: For each sign form a graphic image process indicated
furnish products of a single manufacturer.
Americans With Disabilities Act: All signage shall meet the requirements of the A.D.A .
including grade 2 braille raised lettering, etc .
As man---- nufacttued by one of the following approved companies :
ASI Sign Systems, Tampa, FL (813) 620-4360 Attn: Ilene
Advance Corporation, Braille-Tac (800) ,825-0150
The Southwell Corp . San Antonio, TX (210) 223 - 1831
Best MarmL Sign Systems (800) 235-2378
Bunting Graphics Inc. (800) 735-0445
FRS Industries (800) 747-4795
HART Arch. Signage, Chesapeake, VA (804) 420- 1666
Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, NY (518) 370-3433
Metallic Arts, Spokane, WA 1 - 800-541 -3200
In-Pro Signscape, Muskego, WI, inprocorp.com
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :_
A _ _ __ Shone: Submit shop drawings for all items in this Section including all
accessories.
10440-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A . Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn temper] .
B Soft Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type e L
annealed temper] .
2 - 2 FITTINGS
A Copper Fittings : ASME B 16. 22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern .
l
23 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 8, Classification BAg- 1 (Silver) .
2 .4 VALVES
A . Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings: 500psig (3450kPa) working pressure and 275
deg F ( 135 deg C) working temperature, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Solenoid Valves: Comply with AW 760; 250 deg F ( 121 deg C) temperature rating, 400psig
(2760kPa) working pressure, and 24-V normally closed holding coil .
C. Pressure-Regulating Valves : Direct acting and comply with ARI 770 .
D Pressure-Relief Valves : ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
E. Thermal-Expansion Valves : Comply with ARI 750; with sensing bulb, distributor having side
-gas bypass line
connection for hot , and external equalizer line.
2. 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Strainers : 430-psig (2960-kPa) working pressure .
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
M . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system .
N . Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized .
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2 . Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3 . Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
Penetration of moisture to contact surfaces .
4 . Exothermic-Weided Connections : Comply with manufacturer's written instructions .
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
5 . Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors .
6 . Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations : If metallic raceways terminate at „metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor
to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, ,unless
Otherwise indicated.
7 . Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A .
8 . Compression-Type Connections : Use hydraulic compression tools to provide;`correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors . Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to
make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
9. Moisture Protection : If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
O. Overhead Line Grounding: Comply with IEEE C2 except where stricter requirements are
indicated . Use 2 or more parallel ground rods if a single ground rod electrode resistance to
ground exceeds 25 ohms .
1 . Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth .
2 . Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for
underground connections and connections to rods.
3 . Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other groundi
conductor. ng conductors.
4. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding
5 . Protect grounding conductors on surface of wood poles with molding extended from
grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 5 of 5
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
p . Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches : Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling
pad . Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with 1.
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes . Use tinned-
copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground
pad . Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation .
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1 . After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements .
2 . Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal . Measure
ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation , and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81 .
3 . Provide drawings locating each ground rod , ground rod assembly, and other grounding
electrodes. identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and
include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results .
Describe measures taken to improve test results . Nominal maximum values are as
follows: (,
. .J
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less : 10 ohms .
b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA : 5 ohms .
C. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d . Overhead Distribution Line Equipment: 25 ohms .
e . Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
f. Manhole Grounds : 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION 16060
C
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 6 of 6
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Moisture/Liquid Indicators : 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure, 200 deg F (93 deg C)
polished, optical viewing window with color-coded
operating temperature, with replaceable, i .
moisture indicator .
C . Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure; with replaceable-
core kit including gaskets, and filter-dryer cartridge.
-kPa) operating pressure; minimum 7 inches (180 mm)
D. Flexible Connectors : 500-psig (3450
long.
E. Mufflers: 5o0-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure .
F . Refrigerant: [ASHRAE 34 , R- 134a] or [ASHRAE 34, R-221 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 .
ments are specified in Division 15 Section " Common Piping
B . Basic piping installation require
Requirements ." l4
C Belowground , install copper tubing in conduit . Vent conduit outdoors.
D . Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
E . Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
F . Provide bypass around moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 inch NPS (DN50) .
G . Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion
valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators .
H . Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection , at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
1 . Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant by following ASHRAE 15
procedures . or for
s at
sor
t and
I ll avalves On suction
taps at and discharge
as bypass Of cOmPrto esson inlet gand outlet andonacheside of
ou]e
strainers.
essor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on systems with
K. Install check valves on compr
multiple-condensers -
Page 2 of 2
15193 REFRIGERANT PIPING
B . Submi__. t Samples of all interior signage and graphics .
PART II - PRODUCTS
2 .01 CONSTRUCTION SIGN:
A. Furnish h and install 81 - o' long x 4' - 0' high construction sign, on 3/4 plywood.
B . Locate on site in compliance with Local Permitting Agency requirements and as
directed by Owner.
C. Sign shall have two coats of exterior oil base paint.
D . All work shall be performed by an experienced sign painter.
E. Furnish and install supporting structure.
F . Sian shams ate: Name of Project, Name of owner, Name of Contractor, Name
of Architect, Name of Structural Engineer, Name of Mech/Elec . Engineer and
Name of Civil Engineer. (For all School and Municipal Gvernment projects, verify
the sign information required with the Owner or Owner' s agent prior to painting
sign panel .)
2.02 EXTERIOR HANDICAPPED SIGNS AT PARKING AREAS : t
A . Provide one (1) sign for each handicapped parking space.
B . Sign shall comply with the "Accessibilty Codes and Standards" latest edition, State
of Florida, for the physically handicapped, and F .T .O . 25 or 26 .
C. Sign shall read: "Parking By Disabled Permit Only" depicting National
Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) as detailed. Signs erected after 1 Oct. 1996 must
indicate the dollar penalty for illegal use of the space.
D . Size shall be 1 ' - 0" wide x 16" high, aluminum .
E. Provide standard. painted green steel post set in 6" diameter concrete foundation.
Post and concrete foundation shall be by the Contractor.
F . Height to bottom of sign shall be seven feet minimum and nine feet maximum .
G . Lettering, style shall be Helvetica Medium.
10440-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
p . Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches : Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling
pad . Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with 1.
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes . Use tinned-
copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground
pad . Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation .
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1 . After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements .
2 . Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal . Measure
ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation , and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81 .
3 . Provide drawings locating each ground rod , ground rod assembly, and other grounding
electrodes. identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and
include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results .
Describe measures taken to improve test results . Nominal maximum values are as
follows: (,
. .J
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less : 10 ohms .
b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA : 5 ohms .
C. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d . Overhead Distribution Line Equipment: 25 ohms .
e . Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
f. Manhole Grounds : 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION 16060
C
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports .
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 702
Article 10o, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 - 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
1 . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
Offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2-2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers :
L American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2 General Cable Corporation .
3 . Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 1 of 1
2.03 TOILET ROOM HANDICAPPED SIGN :
A Provide one (1 ) sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each
toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped. Size shall be as per
Signage Legend.
B. Color and Material shall be as per Signage Legend
C. Mo—unting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws at locations
detailed in Architectural Signage.
2.04 "INTERIOR" ROOM NAME AND NUMBER SIGNS AND OCCUPANCY
CAPACITY:
A. Separate signs for room name room mum
ber, or shall be in accordance with the Signage Legend. room canaciry reuwrPd _ Sizes
B. Color shall be as per Signage Legend.
C. Material shall be 1 /8 " thick plastic, or 1 /8 " thick etched zinc, with raised symbol for
identification by blind.
D. Mounting shall be with non-removable head stainless steel screws or clear silicone`
at locations detailed in Architectural Signage Legend.
1 2 .05 MONUMENT SIGNAGE
i
A. When depicted on the plans, provide individually mounted letters . Letters as
manufactured by the Southwell Company. Letters to be height as scheduled and in
Garamond H444 style in bronze Duranodic Aluminum. Flush mounted letters .
2.06 REGULATORY SIGNAGE
A. Provide standard graphic and descriptive signage at all elevator lobbies stipulating
"In Case of Fire Use Stairs".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer' s instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Mount standard Signs on middle of doors at 48 " above the finish floor.
10440-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve
and expansion valve.
M . Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated .
N. Install a full-sized, 3 -valve bypass around each dryer.
O. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
P- Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
Q. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves_
R. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.
S . Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
T. Install pressure-relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors .
1
END OF SECTION 15183
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports .
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 702
Article 10o, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 - 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
1 . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
Offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2-2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers :
L American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2 General Cable Corporation .
3 . Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Refer to Part i " Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable �.
construction, and ratings .
C . Conductor
conductor forNo.Material : Copper c
AWG and smaller, gstranded conductor, solid
stranded forrNo 8 AWG and larger.
D . Conductor insulation Types : Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7 .
2 .3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A . Available Manufacturers :
I . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2AMP Incorporated/Tyco International .
3 . Hubbell/Anderson .
4 . O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
5 . 3M Company; Electrical Products Division .
B . Description : Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated .
PART 3 - EXECUTION (_
3 . 1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS ` J
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway.
B . Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway .
C . Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single conductors
in raceway .
elow Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN -
D . Feeders Concealed in Concrete, b
THWN , single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in
raceway.
ilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single
F . Branch Circuits Concealed in Ce
conductors in raceway.
G . Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN ,
single conductors in raceway.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A . Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated .
t
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 2 of 2
� �
�j_,
C . Mount A.D .A. Compliant Signs adjacent to door openings, at the latch side, with
the center of the sign at 60" above the finish floor. Where there is no wall space to -\
the latch side of the door, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall .
SIGN
SIGN TYPE "A" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 8 " long or 12" long, square corner 390S
Series with molded plastic frames, (interior only) , White background with 2 " high Jade SC-523
Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised symbols for blind. Note :
Utilize 1 '/2" high letters for longer room descriptions to insure that the description will fit on a 12"
long sign.
SIGN TYPE "B" : As manufactured by ASI, 10" high x 20" long, Sign Etch-2, 3 /8 " aluminum
base metal with etched letters. Radiused corner 390R Series design (exterior onlCase Helvetica
background with 5" high paint filled text, Jade SC-523 Letters/Numbers in Upper
Medium Italic, with raised symbols for the blind .
SIGN TYPE " C" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, 390R Series,(interior and
exterior rated), with radiused comers, White background withS schedule,5 Unisex ymbois i symbols for
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, p
blind .
square corner 390S Series
SIGN TYPE "D " : As manufactured by ASWhite
and 12" long,letters n UpperCaseHelvetica Medium.
(interior only), Red background with 1 " high �
I.
SIGN TYPE "E" : As manufactured by ASI, Closed-Circuit TV Door (In Use) Sign: Three (3) SL
Series SLO 66 with Helvetica Regular Lettering. First letter capitalized, remaining letter to be
lower case. Install at location determined by the Architect.
SIGN TYPE "F" : As manufactured by ASI, 3 " high x 12" long, Sign Etch- 1 , zinc base metal with
etched letters. Match square corner 3905 Series design (exterior only), Jade SC-523 background
with 1 '/z" high White Letters/Numbers in Upper Case Helvetica Medium Italic, with raised
symbols for blind .
SIGN TYPE " G" : As manufactured by ASI, 9" square to meet ADA, - Series, (interior and
exterior rated) , with radiused corners . White background with S- 1 & S-2 2 Symbols in black, and
S
S-6 Handicapped symbol in standard blue and white colors, per schedule, with raised symbols for
blind.
SIGN TYPE "H" : As manufactured by ASI, 8 " high X 36 " long X 1 /2 " thick, 323BE Series with
beveled edges, aluminum frame . Jade SC-523 background with 5 " high letters/numbers in Upper
Case Helvetica Bold Italic. Exteri_ ur rated•provide Color 1 of letteis/ X hers shall
1 /2" hit . panel.
Where two lines of letters are required, p _
"J" . As manufactured by Wro Signscape, or equal, 8 " X 8" , tact
with
SIGN TYPE i I e sty e, n
ejected molded frames with square corners . Color of sign is red background with lettering.
Signage to read " In case of Fire use Stairs" . 10440-4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Refer to Part i " Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable �.
construction, and ratings .
C . Conductor
conductor forNo.Material : Copper c
AWG and smaller, gstranded conductor, solid
stranded forrNo 8 AWG and larger.
D . Conductor insulation Types : Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7 .
2 .3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A . Available Manufacturers :
I . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2AMP Incorporated/Tyco International .
3 . Hubbell/Anderson .
4 . O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
5 . 3M Company; Electrical Products Division .
B . Description : Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated .
PART 3 - EXECUTION (_
3 . 1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS ` J
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway.
B . Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway .
C . Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single conductors
in raceway .
elow Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN -
D . Feeders Concealed in Concrete, b
THWN , single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in
raceway.
ilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single
F . Branch Circuits Concealed in Ce
conductors in raceway.
G . Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN ,
single conductors in raceway.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A . Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated .
t
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation . Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values .
C . Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division ] 6 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
F . Sea] around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to other sections of this
specification .
G . Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods . "
H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1 . Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3 . 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
\� A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS , Section 7. 3 . 1 . Certify compliance with test parameters.
B . Test Reports : Prepare a written report to record the following:
] . Test procedures used .
2 . Test results that comply with requirements .
3 . Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements .
END OF SECTION 16120
J
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 3 of 3
SPECIALTY SIGN SCHEDULE
LOCATIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS •
Indian River County Parks Maintenance Complex
COUNT LOCATION (Three separate buildings in complex)
Administration Buildin
(14) Item # 1
Sign type "A." /STORAGE, MEETING ROOM, MEETING ROOM,
CONFERENCE, OFFICE #19 OFFICE #2 , OFFICE #31
ADMINISTRATION, FILE STORAGE, MECHANICAL RM., MEN,
WOMEN, SHOWER, SHOWER. Secure to the wall at the latch side of the
appropriate door.
(3) Item #2
Sign type "D " / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted'
extinguisher as located on the plans .
i
(4 ) Item 43
Sign type "G" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the
wall at the latch side of the two doors that access the MEN &
WOMEN vestibules and toilet rooms . Mount them side by side below the
room description.
( 1 ) Item 44
Sign type "F" / ELECTRIC / PHONE RM.- located on the wall at
the latch side of the door that accesses the room.
Storage Bay
NO SIGNAGE REQUIRED AT THIS BUILDING.
Maintenance Building
( 1 ) Item # I
Sign type "A" /ELECTRICAL RM. Secure to the wall at the latch side of
- - .-- the appropriate door.
10440-5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A- Submit Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture.
B . Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act, " regarding water flow
rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 WATER CLOSET
A . Vitreous-China Water Closet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
B . Toilet Seat: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
22 LAVATORY
A . Vitreous-China Lavatory: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
C . Drain : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D. Fixture Support: Hanger plate
2 .2 SHOWER
A. Mixing-Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Supplies: Copper tubing with ball , gate, or globe valve if check stops are not included with
faucet.
C . Drain : 2-inch NPS (DN50), nickel-bronze-strainer, floor drain .
D. Trap: 2-inch NPS (DN50) drainage piping.
2 .3 SINK
A Stainless-Steel Sink : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 1 of ]
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation . Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values .
C . Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division ] 6 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
F . Sea] around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to other sections of this
specification .
G . Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods . "
H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1 . Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3 . 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
\� A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS , Section 7. 3 . 1 . Certify compliance with test parameters.
B . Test Reports : Prepare a written report to record the following:
] . Test procedures used .
2 . Test results that comply with requirements .
3 . Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements .
END OF SECTION 16120
J
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Drain(s): See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
2 .4 MOP-SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Mop-Service Basin : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Mounting: Floor.
D . Rim Guard : Manufacturer's standard
E . Drain: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) with grid strainer.
F . P-Trap: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) drainage piping.
G . Mop Rack : Manufacturer' s standard
H . Supplies: 1 /2-inch NPS (DNI5) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve .
I . Reinforcement: Provide for wall-mounting faucet, wall brace, and hose-hook bracket .
2 . 5 SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Sink: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Fixture Mounting: Floor stand
C . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D . Drain(s) : Manufacturer's standard grid drain with 1 - 1 /2-inch NPS (DN40) tubular-brass
tailpiece .
E. Fixture Support: Manufacturer's standard steel stand or base unit.
2 .6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATIONS
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 2
(6) Item 42
Sign type "D" / FIRE EXTINGUISHER - located above the wall mounted / 1
extinguishers as located on the plans .
(2) Item 43
Sign type "C" (consists of two signs per count)- located on the wall at
the latch side of the doors that accesses the UNISEX restrooms .
Mount them side by side .
(I2) Item #4
Sign type "F" / BAY 41 , BAY #1 , BAY #2 , BAY #2, BAY 93 , BAY 437
BAY #43 BAY 44, BAY #55 BAY #5 , BAY #61 BAY #6 - located on the
wall at the latch side of the door that accesses each storage bay on the west
elevation AND at the left side of each overhead door on the east elevation.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
10440-6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PARTi - GENERAL
] . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B . See other sections of this specification for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground
utility construction .
C . See other sections of this specification for firestopping materials and installation at
through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. penetrations
D. See Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for supports, anchors, and
identification products.
E. See Division 16 Section " Wiring Devices " for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings,
boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 10520 - PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART I - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section .
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Definition: "Portable fire extinguishers" includes units which can be hand-carried
as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing
systems, unless othen�ise indicated .
B . Extent of fire extinguishers is indicated on drawings with a FE designation.
C. Accessories include : Mounting brackets.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. Provide portable fire extinguishers and accessories by one manufacturer of
contractors choice, unless otherwise acceptable to architect.
B . Portable Fire Extinguisher Standard: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which
comply with applicable UL standard and are labeled ny UL . All extinguishers shall
be installed and maintained in accordance with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers . " Install only fully charged fire extinguishers.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data, detail drawings, and
installation instructions for each portable fire extinguisher and/or recessed cabinet
for the project.
B . Schedule : Submit schedule indicating types, quanities, sizes and installation
locations for each portable fire extinguisher and/or cabinet for the project.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER' S :
A• Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide extinguishers and
— cabinets.
J.L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen' s Manufacturing Co.
Modern Metal Products by Muckle 10520-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Install fitting insulation kits on handicap-accessible fixtures.
B . Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.
C. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped
People to reach.
D- Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
E. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate
when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
F. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to
wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls .
G. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls .
H. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework .
1. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
J- Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
K . Install individual
c]eanouts at fixture.supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with
I- _ Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
M. Install traps on fixture outlets . Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps . Omit traps on
indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if
location is not indicated .
O. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink.
F. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
Q . Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
R. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
-\ equipment. Install insulation on supplies and drains of handicap-accessible fixtures .
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PARTi - GENERAL
] . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B . See other sections of this specification for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground
utility construction .
C . See other sections of this specification for firestopping materials and installation at
through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. penetrations
D. See Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for supports, anchors, and
identification products.
E. See Division 16 Section " Wiring Devices " for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings,
boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers j
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance .with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2 .2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A _ Available Manufacturers:
1 . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2 . Alflex Inc .
3 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
4 . Electri-Flex Co .
S . Grinnell Co ./Tyco International ; Allied Tube and Conduit Div .
6 . LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
7 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8 . O-Z Gedney ; Unit of General Signal .
9 . Wheatland Tube Co .
B . Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80 . 1 .
C . Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80 .5 . /f
D. IMC : ANSI C80 .6 . l i
E. EMT and Fittings : ANSI C80 .3 .
1 . Fittings : Set-screw Type.
F . LFMC : Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G . Fittings : NEMA FB 1 ; compatible with conduit and tubing materials .
2 . 3 ' NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A . Available Manufacturers:
I . American International .
2 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3 . Arnco Corp .
4 . Cantex Inc.
5 . Certainteed Corp. ; Pipe & Plastics Group .
6 . Condux International.
7 . ElecSYS, Inc.
8 . Electri-Flex Co.
9 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11 - RACO ; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 2 of
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
S . Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and `l
UL 486B . J
END OF SECTION 15410
1.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 4 of 4
Potter-Roemer, Inc .
2 .02 MATERIALS - GENERAL :
Provide the following types of extinguishers in accordance with area/occupancy uses:
In General Office Spaces Fire Extinguishers : Multi-purpose dry chemical type (2A- I OBC-
FE) : UL rated 2-A: 10 :B :C , 5 lb . Nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for class A,
Class B , and Class C fires . Equal to J .L. Industries Cosmic 5E.
In Kitchen/Breakroom/Em to ee Lounge Spaces/ Electrical Rooms : Liquid carbon
dioxide, UL rated, 10 Ib nominal capacity, in enamled steel container for class B, and Class
C fires only . Equal to J .L. Industries Sentinal 10 .
In Electronic Equipment/Computer Room : Halotron 1 , or Halonite, clean agent EPA
approved, portable fire extinguisher. Wall bracket mounted, as manufactured by Larsen ' s
Manufacturing Company. Discharges as a liquid and quickly evaporates leaving no residue
to clean-up . Class A,B,C fires , 10 pound nominal capacity.
2 .03 MOUNTING BRACKETS :
Provide manufacturer' s standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgment of
extinguisher, of proper size for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in
manufacturer' s standard plated finish.
Provide a recessed or semi-recessed cabinet, clear anodized aluminum, clear bubble, no
letters on the bubble. NOTE : All semi-recessed cabinets must meet ADA guidelines for
projections into hallways.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION :
Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if
not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.
Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and/or bracket-mounted fire
extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed by Architect.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION :
Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with a permanently affixed sign with a red
background and white letters spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface .
Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect or-scheduled in Section 10440 -
Specialty Signs.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
10520-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers j
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance .with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2 .2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A _ Available Manufacturers:
1 . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2 . Alflex Inc .
3 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
4 . Electri-Flex Co .
S . Grinnell Co ./Tyco International ; Allied Tube and Conduit Div .
6 . LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
7 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8 . O-Z Gedney ; Unit of General Signal .
9 . Wheatland Tube Co .
B . Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80 . 1 .
C . Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80 .5 . /f
D. IMC : ANSI C80 .6 . l i
E. EMT and Fittings : ANSI C80 .3 .
1 . Fittings : Set-screw Type.
F . LFMC : Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G . Fittings : NEMA FB 1 ; compatible with conduit and tubing materials .
2 . 3 ' NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A . Available Manufacturers:
I . American International .
2 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3 . Arnco Corp .
4 . Cantex Inc.
5 . Certainteed Corp. ; Pipe & Plastics Group .
6 . Condux International.
7 . ElecSYS, Inc.
8 . Electri-Flex Co.
9 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11 - RACO ; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 2 of
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
12 . Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
13 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
B . ENT: NEMA TC 13 .
C . RNC : NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC .
D. ENT and RNC Fittings : NEMA TC 3 ; match to conduit or tubing type and material .
E. LFNC: UL 1660.
2 .4 METAL WIREWAYS
A . Available 1:^,anu adorers:
1 Hoffman .
2 . Square D.
B . Material and Construction : Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R.
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
\ D . Select features, unless otherwise indicated , as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
E . Wireway Covers : As indicated .
F . Finish : Manufacturer's standard enamel finish .
2 . 5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Hoffman .
2 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B . Description : PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners .
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
_ - ) 2 . 6 SURFACE RACEWAYS
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 10531 - ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specification section, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extend of aluminum walkway covers is indicated on drawings and provisions of
this section.
B . Types of work specified in this section include:
Extruded aluminum fascia systems.
Sheet aluminum fascia systems.
Fascia panel systems.
Metal fascia panel support systems.
Aluminum copings
Aluminum deck .
Aluminum beams & tubing.
j Aluminum fascia panels.
Sheet plates & angles.
C . Sheet metal and flashings not part of aluminum walkway covers are specified in
another Division-7 section.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE : _
A. Industry Standards : Provide products which comply with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ", except as otherwise indicated.
B . Codes: Comply with all local codes and ordinances and latest edition of Standard
Building Code. The wind design for the Aluminum Walkway Covers shall be for a
minimum 100 mph wind, (x 1 . 10 importance factor), per ASCE 7-93 .
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation
instructions and general recommendations. Include data substantiating that
materials and performance comply with requirements, and that structure will
- - - -support all-imposed loads-including- chilled water-piping:------ - -- - -
10531 -1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15425 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A . Floor Drains: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Backflow Preventers: ASSE standard backflow preventers, 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) minimum
working pressure, bronze body with threaded ends, and an inlet strainer.
C. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1001 , with floating disc and atmospheric vent.
D. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1011 , rough bronze, with nonremovable and
manual drain features and garden -hose threaded connection.
E. Water Filters : Cartridge type.
F. Hose Bibbs : Bronze body in rough-bronze finish, with removable composition disc, threaded
or soldered inlet, garden-hose threaded outlet, and loose-key handle.
G . Water Hammer Arrester: Bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas and where indicated . Set tops of drains flush
with finished floor. Set drainelevationdepressed below finished slab elevation as indicated
below :
1 5-Foot ( 1 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius : 1 /2-inch ( 13 -mm) depression .
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
12 . Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
13 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
B . ENT: NEMA TC 13 .
C . RNC : NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC .
D. ENT and RNC Fittings : NEMA TC 3 ; match to conduit or tubing type and material .
E. LFNC: UL 1660.
2 .4 METAL WIREWAYS
A . Available 1:^,anu adorers:
1 Hoffman .
2 . Square D.
B . Material and Construction : Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R.
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
\ D . Select features, unless otherwise indicated , as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
E . Wireway Covers : As indicated .
F . Finish : Manufacturer's standard enamel finish .
2 . 5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Hoffman .
2 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B . Description : PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners .
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
_ - ) 2 . 6 SURFACE RACEWAYS
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Surface Metal Raceways : Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating.
I . Available Manufacturers :
a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The) .
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation .
C . Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The).
d . Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
B . Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturers standard color.
1 . Available Manufacturers :
a . Butler Manufacturing Co . ; Walker Division .
b . Enduro Composite Systems.
c . Hubbell , Inc. ; Wiring Device Division .
d . Lamson & Sessions, Carlon Electrical Products .
C. Panduit Corp .
f. Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The) .
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
C . Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways .
2 .7 BOXES , ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div . of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2 . Emerson/General Signal ; Appleton Electric Company .
3 . Erickson Electrical Equipment Co .
4 . Hoffman .
5 . Hubbell , Inc . ; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
6 . O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal .
7 . RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
8 . Robroy Industries, Inc. ; Enclosure Division .
9 . Scott Fetzer Co . ; Adalet-PLM Division .
10 . Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
12 . Walker Systems, Inc .; Wiremold Company (The) .
13 . Woodhead, Daniel Company: Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B . Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1 .
C . Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1 , Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D . Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes : NEMA OS 2 .
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . 10-Foot (3 -m) Drain Area Radius: 3 - 1 /2-inch (90-mm) depression . 1
3 . 15-Foot (4 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 -inch (25-mm) depression. J
4 . 20-Foot (6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /4-inch (32-mm) d deere on .
n
5 . 25 -Foot (7 .6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /2-inch (38-mm) p
D _ Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain.
E. install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes .
END OF SECTION 15425
r
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 2
B . Submit for record purposes, signed and sealed computations prepared by an
engineer licensed in the State of Florida showing conformance to the applicable
codes .
C . Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout, joining, profiles,
accessories, anchorages, drainage details, flashing connections and relationship to
supporting structure and to joining roof and wall construction .
D . Indicate, in Section, all lighting fixtures and mechanical and electrical lines run in
walkway soffit chase to assure proper space allotment.
E. Samples : For verification purposes submit completely finished samples for each
component.
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS :
A. Coordinate work of this section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each
installation to ensure best possible weather resistance, drainage and protection of
materials and finishes against damage.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS :
Subject to compliance with specified requirements and with details shown on drawings, J
provide aluminum walkway covers manufactured by one of the following :
Perfection Metals
Alumax Building Specialties Division
Dittmer Architectural Aluminum
Maple Industries
E.L. Burns Company
Custom Architectural Metals, Orlando
Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc.
AAPCO Protective Covers
2.02 MATERIALS :
A. Aluminum Materials:
l . Aluminum Extrusions : Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated but
not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221
- for- 6063 -T6 .
2 . Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use
intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated.
1-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Surface Metal Raceways : Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating.
I . Available Manufacturers :
a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The) .
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation .
C . Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The).
d . Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
B . Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturers standard color.
1 . Available Manufacturers :
a . Butler Manufacturing Co . ; Walker Division .
b . Enduro Composite Systems.
c . Hubbell , Inc. ; Wiring Device Division .
d . Lamson & Sessions, Carlon Electrical Products .
C. Panduit Corp .
f. Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The) .
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
C . Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways .
2 .7 BOXES , ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div . of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2 . Emerson/General Signal ; Appleton Electric Company .
3 . Erickson Electrical Equipment Co .
4 . Hoffman .
5 . Hubbell , Inc . ; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
6 . O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal .
7 . RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
8 . Robroy Industries, Inc. ; Enclosure Division .
9 . Scott Fetzer Co . ; Adalet-PLM Division .
10 . Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
12 . Walker Systems, Inc .; Wiremold Company (The) .
13 . Woodhead, Daniel Company: Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B . Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1 .
C . Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1 , Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D . Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes : NEMA OS 2 .
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\ E. Floor Boxes : Cast metal , fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G . Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA OS 1 .
H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA FB 1 , cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , with continuous hinge cover and flush latch .
1 . Metal Enclosures : Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel .
2 . Nonmetallic Enclosures : Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
J . Cabinets : NEMA 250, Type 1 , galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel . Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
2 . 8 FACTORY FINISHES
A . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-
coat finish ready for field painting.
B . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint
applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
hipping.PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A . Outdoors:
I I Exposed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC80.
2 . Concealed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC40 .
3 Underground, Single Run: RNC or PVC40.
4• Underground, Grouped: RNC or PVC40.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B . Indoors:
1 . Exposed : RNC or PVC40/80.
2. Concealed : RNC or PVC40.
3 . Cormection_to_Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers. and Hydraulic; Pneumatic,
\ Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations : Rigid steel conduit.
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 5 of 5
3 . Extruded Aluminum Deck: 3 .25 " high x 5 " wide rectangular profile - 6063
alloy - . 060 gage.
B . Miscellaneous Materials :
1 Exposed Fasteners : Stainless steel, non-magnetic, of type and size standard
with manufacturer for product and application indicated. Match finish of
exposed heads and material being fastened.
2. Concealed Fasteners : Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive
metal as recommended by manufacturer.
3 . Mastic Sealant : Polyisobutylene: non-hardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
ne unigratirg sealant.
2 .03 FABRICATION :
A . Aluminum Walkway Covers to be fabricated and installed as detailed on the
drawings including all necessary accessories.
B . Aluminum Finishes :
General : Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual " for finish designation
and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. For components
which are assembles or welded in factory, apply finish after fabrication is
completed .
Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Baked Enamel Finish : Apply baked enamel finish in strict compliance with paint
manufacturer' s specifications for cleaning, conversion coating and painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. General : Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with installation of column, flashing, and we
construction; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B . ISOLATION: Where metal surfaces of units are installed in contract with or
corrosive substrates, apply bituminous coating on coneealed-metal surfaces, or
provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer.
J
10531 -3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design
ofNew Low-Rise Residential Buildings. "
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install temperature and pressure-relief valves and extend to closest floor drain .
B . Install vacuum-relief valves and expansion tank in cold-water- inlet piping.
C Install shutoff valves and unions at hot- and cold-water piping connections .
D. Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined -
E- Electrically ground units according to authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15480
15480 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Page ] of I
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\ E. Floor Boxes : Cast metal , fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G . Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA OS 1 .
H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA FB 1 , cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , with continuous hinge cover and flush latch .
1 . Metal Enclosures : Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel .
2 . Nonmetallic Enclosures : Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
J . Cabinets : NEMA 250, Type 1 , galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel . Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
2 . 8 FACTORY FINISHES
A . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-
coat finish ready for field painting.
B . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint
applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
hipping.PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A . Outdoors:
I I Exposed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC80.
2 . Concealed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC40 .
3 Underground, Single Run: RNC or PVC40.
4• Underground, Grouped: RNC or PVC40.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B . Indoors:
1 . Exposed : RNC or PVC40/80.
2. Concealed : RNC or PVC40.
3 . Cormection_to_Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers. and Hydraulic; Pneumatic,
\ Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations : Rigid steel conduit.
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 5 of 5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
5 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , except as follows :
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C . Minimum Raceway Size : 3 /4 - inch trade size.
D . Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location .
1 . Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated .
2 . PVC Externally Coated , Rigid Steel Conduits : Use only fittings approved for use with
that material . Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits .
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
s and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve .
raceways are installed for such circuit
F . Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
32 INSTALLATION
A . Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes .
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B . Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation .
C . Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods . "
D . Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways .
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above finished slab .
F . Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated .
G . Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated .
1 . Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated .
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1 /3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches of concrete cover .
1 . Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2 . Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3 . Run-conduit-larger-than l -inch trade size parallel-or-at-right angles to main-reinforcement. /
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
4 . Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, 1
or IMC before rising above floor.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 6 of 6
3 .02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A . Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
Touch-up damages metal coatings .
B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure that work of this
section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
l
---
__ 10531- `�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
5 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , except as follows :
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C . Minimum Raceway Size : 3 /4 - inch trade size.
D . Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location .
1 . Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated .
2 . PVC Externally Coated , Rigid Steel Conduits : Use only fittings approved for use with
that material . Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits .
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
s and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve .
raceways are installed for such circuit
F . Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
32 INSTALLATION
A . Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes .
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B . Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation .
C . Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods . "
D . Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways .
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above finished slab .
F . Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated .
G . Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated .
1 . Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated .
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1 /3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches of concrete cover .
1 . Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2 . Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3 . Run-conduit-larger-than l -inch trade size parallel-or-at-right angles to main-reinforcement. /
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
4 . Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, 1
or IMC before rising above floor.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
1 . Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible.
1 . Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports .
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways .
J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and makejoints tight .
1 . Use insulating bushings to protect conductors .
K . Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools .
L. Terminations :
1 Where raceways are terminated with lockouts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
2 . Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed .
M . Install pull wires in empty raceways . Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-1b tensile strength . Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
i N . Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two go-
degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements .
O. Stub-up Connections : Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future
equipment connections .
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections .
Q. Surface Raceways : Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals .
R . Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3 .3 PROTECTION
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
conditions and Division - 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this Section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent and location of each types of toilet accessory is shown on drawings.
B . Types of toilet accessories required include the following :
Paper towel dispensers
Toilet tissue dispensers
Grab bars
Soap dispensers
Mirrors
Shower Rods
Diaper Changing Stations
C . Some type of toilet accessories are included as part of toilet partitions elsewhere in
Division 10 .
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A . Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in
concrete or built into masonry; provide PT wood backing as required, coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B . Accessory Locations : Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid
interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C . Manufacturer: Provide each type of toilet accessory required as manufactured by
one of the following :
1 . American Specialties Inc.
2 . Bradley Corporation
3 . Hallmark - Nutone
4 . Parker Scovill
5 . Watrous, Inc.
6 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
7. Gamco
. Franklin Brass
9. A & J Washroom Accessories
10. San Jamar Dispensers
10800-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15736 - SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls; intended for indoor installations.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : For each unit indicated.
B . Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article loo, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1 .4 WARRANTY
A . Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace self-contained air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five
<5> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2 Lennox.
3 . Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
4. Bard.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
1 . Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible.
1 . Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports .
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways .
J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and makejoints tight .
1 . Use insulating bushings to protect conductors .
K . Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools .
L. Terminations :
1 Where raceways are terminated with lockouts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
2 . Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed .
M . Install pull wires in empty raceways . Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-1b tensile strength . Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
i N . Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two go-
degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements .
O. Stub-up Connections : Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future
equipment connections .
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections .
Q. Surface Raceways : Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals .
R . Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3 .3 PROTECTION
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 7 of 7
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
A . Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion .
I . Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2 . Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
4
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 8 of 8
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 .2 PACKAGED UNITS
ng of cabinet,
ssembled
-wired unit; consisti
A Description : d,compressor, ev poratortainfaue evaporator acoil , air filters, and controls; and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil; with integral water-cooled condenser.
B . Disconnect Switch : Factory mounted on equipment.
C . Cabinet Frame and Panels : Structural-steel frame with galvanized-steel panels with baked-
enamel finish in color selected by Architect, and with access doors or panels.
1 . Insulation : Minimum 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -num-) thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior
and control panel .
2 . Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
3 . Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with directional louvers .
Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior
4 . Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: .
D . Evaporator Fan: Galvanized-steel, double-width , double-inlet, forward-curved centrifugal fan;
statically and dynamically balanced .
I . Drive: [Belt, with fan mounted on permanently lubricated bearings] or [Direct, with fan
and motor resiliently mounted] .
2 . Fan Sheaves: Cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced , bored to fit shafts and
keyed.
3 . Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when
set at midposition.
4 . Motors: Multispeed, PSC type.
E . Compressor : Hermetically sealed, [reciprocating] or [scroll] type, 3600 rpm maximum, and
resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection .
F. Evaporator Coil : Direct-expansion coil with seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins .
G . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection .
H . Permanent Filters: 1 -inch- (25 -nun-) thick, cleanable panel filters .
1 . Disposable Filters: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.
I . Refrigeration System : Factory assembled and tested, and charged with refrigerant; consisting of
piping and accessories connecting compressor, evaporator coil, and condenser coil, and
including the following:
1 . Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
2 . Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3 . Refrigerant dryer. s
4 . High-pressure switch .
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 2 of 2
11 . Brocar
12 . Koala 1
13 . World Dryer
1 .04 SUBMITTALS :
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer' s technical data and installation instructions for
each toilet accessory.
B . Setting Drawings : Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions
for installation of anchorage devices and cut out requirements in other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS :
A. Stainless Steel : AISI Type 3021304, with satin No . 4 finish, 22 gage minimum,
unless otherwise indicated.
B . Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices : ASTM A 153 , hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
C . Fasteners : Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of
galvanized steel where concealed .
2.02 FABRICATION :
A . General : Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet accessory units are not
permitted, except where otherwise indicated . Wherever locks are required for a
particular type of toilet accessory , provide same keying throughout project. Furnish
two keys for each lock.
B . Surfaced-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated,
fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or
access panels with continuous piano hinge or minimum of two 1 ''/z" pin hinges of
same metal as unit cabinet. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General : Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate
units of all welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access
panels with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is
fully concealed when unit is closed.
2.03 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS :
-
A. General Toilet Rooms:_ _ Toilet Tissue Dispenser _
- - BOBRICK_B _-. 2740 .
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings (non-oceanfront) : BOBRICK B-2892
C. Public Park Restroom Buildings (oceanfront) : SAN JAMAR St1NR4000TBK
10800-2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
A . Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion .
I . Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2 . Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
4
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 8 of 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
I . Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault
suppression units , circuit interrupters, and integral surge
2 . Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches .
? . Device wall
Plates.
4. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated .
B . Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates .
\ C. Samples : One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified .
D . Field quality-control test reports .
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 7Q
intended use.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements
following: , provide products by one of the
1 . Wiring Devices :
16140
WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
2.04 SURFACE MOUNTED TOWEL DISPENSERS :
BOBRICK B - 262
2.05 GRAB BARS (GR BR) :
Stainless Steel Type: Equal to Bobrick B-6106 x 36 and B - 6106 x 42 .
2. 06 SOAP DISPENSERS :
Bobrick B -4112 or Bradley 6542 Surface Mounted Dispensers capable of dispersing anti -
bacterial soaps.
2. 07 SHOWER RODS :
Bradley Model 9531 Heavy Duty 1 1 /4 " O.D., 18 ga. Satin finish stainless steel .
2.08 MIRRORS :
A. General Toilet Rooms : Bobrick B - 165, 18 " X 30 " mirror. Satin finish stainless steel
frame with 1 /4 " float/plate glass mirror electrolytically copper plated. Mount with
reflecting surface a maximum of 40 inches above finished floor.
B . Public Park Restroom Buildings : Polished Stainless Steel Mirror BOBRICK B
24 " wide X 48 " high. Same mounting height requirement as above. - 1656;.;;
2.09 HEAVY DUTY CLOTHES HOOK
Bobrick B-2116, heavy duty clothes hook with concealed mounting . Withstands 300- 1 b
downward pull . Hook and flange are one piece brass casting with satin nickelplated finish.
Supply 2 X 6 pressure treated wood backing in wall for proper mounting. Flange diameter
is 2 3/4 " and unit projects 3 7/16" from wall .
2. 10 SHELF WITH MOP AND BROOM HOLDERS
Bobrick B -239 X 34, 18 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 13 " high, 8 " deep.
Anti-slip mop holders have spring loaded rubber cam that grips handles 7/8 " to 1 1 /4 "
diameter. Stainless steel hooks.
2. 11 REVERSIBLE FOLDING SHOWER SEAT
Bobrick B -5181 , complying with ADA accessibility standards. Seat is ivory colored solid
field. Frame and moun
phenolic. Reversible for left or right hand installation in the ting
brackets are type 304 stainless steel and feature a self-locking mechanism. Seat measures
33 " wide, projects 22 5/16" from wall. Average mounting height 17 to 20 " from top of
floor to seat.
J
10800-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
5 . Low-pressure switch .
6 . Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
7. Low-ambient switch .
8 . Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
K. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts, internal-
winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling reset relay.
I - Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.
2 . Adjustable Thermostat: Remote to control the following:
a Supply fan .
b • Compressor.
C. Electric heater.
3 System Selector Switch : Off-heat-auto-cool .
4 . Fan Control Switch : Auto-on .
L. Ventilation Options :
1 Motorized Outside-Air Damper: Motorized, 2-position blade damper allowing induction
Of specified quantity of outside air; with spring-return, low-voltage damper motor. <
PART 3 - EXECUTION
l
i
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Anchor units to structure .
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A . Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
B Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B . Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks . Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 3 of
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
I . Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault
suppression units , circuit interrupters, and integral surge
2 . Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches .
? . Device wall
Plates.
4. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated .
B . Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates .
\ C. Samples : One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified .
D . Field quality-control test reports .
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 7Q
intended use.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements
following: , provide products by one of the
1 . Wiring Devices :
16140
WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary .
b . Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc .
C . Hubbell Incorporated ; Wiring Device-Kellems.
d . Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
2 . Multioutlet Assemblies :
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems .
b. Wiremold Company (The) .
3 . Poke-Through , Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles :
a. Hubbell Incorporated ; WiringDevice-Kellems .
b . Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
C . Square D/Groupe Schneider NA .
d . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
e. Wiremold Company (The) .
2 .2 RECEPTACLES
A . Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles : Comply with NEMA WD 1 , NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498 .
B . GFCI Receptacles : Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral �^
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5 -20R duplex receptacle, complying with UL 498 and UL 943 .
Design units for installation in a 2-3 /4-inch - deep outlet box without an adapter.
2 .3 SWITCHES
A . Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C- 896F and UL 20 .
B . Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
C . Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and
removable tab corrector that pen-nit separate or common feed connection .
1 . Switch : 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
2 . Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 , Configuration 5 - 15R.
D . Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral , quiet on/off switches and
audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1 . Control : Continuously adjustable toggle switch with single-pole or three-way switching
to suit connections .
2 . Incandescent Lamp Dimmers : Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable
rotary_.knob, -toggle-switch, or-slider; single- pole with soft tap or -other quiet switch;
EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads .
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
C . Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
ew components,
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with n
and retest.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
D . Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15736
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 4 of 4
2. 12 DIAPER CHANGING STATION
Bobrick 13-2200 , Brocar Model 100EH, Koala KB 100-00, or World Dryer ABC- 100 ,
colors grey or white. Sizes are 34 . 5 to 35 inches wide, 19 to 20 inches high, and 4 inches
deep . Changing surface mounted at 34" to 38 " above the finished floor. Use
manufacturer' s mounting hardware and comply with their installation requirements to
support a minimum 100 pound load in the open position. Surface mount only, do not recess
unit.
2.13 INSTALLATION :
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners
which are appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of unit. Install units
plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated.
2. 14 ADJUST AND CLEAN :
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function
smoothly .
B . Relace damaged or defective units .
C . Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings .
* * * END OF SECTION* * *
10800-4
t`
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary .
b . Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc .
C . Hubbell Incorporated ; Wiring Device-Kellems.
d . Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
2 . Multioutlet Assemblies :
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems .
b. Wiremold Company (The) .
3 . Poke-Through , Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles :
a. Hubbell Incorporated ; WiringDevice-Kellems .
b . Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
C . Square D/Groupe Schneider NA .
d . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
e. Wiremold Company (The) .
2 .2 RECEPTACLES
A . Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles : Comply with NEMA WD 1 , NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498 .
B . GFCI Receptacles : Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral �^
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5 -20R duplex receptacle, complying with UL 498 and UL 943 .
Design units for installation in a 2-3 /4-inch - deep outlet box without an adapter.
2 .3 SWITCHES
A . Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C- 896F and UL 20 .
B . Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
C . Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and
removable tab corrector that pen-nit separate or common feed connection .
1 . Switch : 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
2 . Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 , Configuration 5 - 15R.
D . Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral , quiet on/off switches and
audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1 . Control : Continuously adjustable toggle switch with single-pole or three-way switching
to suit connections .
2 . Incandescent Lamp Dimmers : Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable
rotary_.knob, -toggle-switch, or-slider; single- pole with soft tap or -other quiet switch;
EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads .
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
3 . Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches : Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2 .4 WALL PLATES
A . Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices .
1 - Plate- Securing Screws : Metal with head color to match plate finish .
2 . Material for Unfinished Spaces : Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic .
3 . Material for Wet Locations : Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations. "
2 . 5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies : Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B . Raceway Material : Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish .
C . Wire: No. 12 AWG .
\ 2 . 6 FINISHES
A Color:
1 . Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System : Ivory, unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70.
2 . TVSS Devices: Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B . Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging.
C . Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
1 E . Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
_ l
16140 WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division- 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of projection screens is shown on drawings.
B . Types of projection screens required include :
Front projection screens, electrically or manually operated as called out on the
drawings.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from'a
single manufacturer as complete units, including necessary mounting hardware and
,1
accessories.
B. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface : Measure gain of screen viewing
surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photo
goniometer using test methods and test apparatus per FS GG-S-00172D (1 ) for
determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces .
Ratings of "one" refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the
magnesium carbonate surface.
C . Fire Performance Characteristics : Provide projection screen fabrics identical to
those materials which have undergone testing and passed requirements for flame
resistance as indicated below:
NFPA 701 per small scale test.
D . Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew resistant screen fabrics as determined by
Federal Standard 191A/5760.
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of screen indicated.
LOS DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver projections screens until building is enclosed, other work within
spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of
screens is ready to take place . 11132-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I'll/Ssw'p 2M.LRa°t
SECTION 15738 , SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIOI•IING UNITS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A• This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat
PmnP
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units
units consisting of separate
and may be connected to ducts, are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting,
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A• Product Data; For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B• Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, a
intended use. nd Accessories: Listed and IabeIed as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
1 . 4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace split-system air
gantial Completion.units that fail in materials and work
manufacturer
sh
years from date of Subst
p within five
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
products Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B• Manufacturers : Subject to compliance wi
following: th requirements, provide products by one of the
I • Carrier Air Conditioning, Div. of Carrier Corp.
2• First Co.
3 . Friedrich Air Conditioning Company,
4. Lennox Industries Inc.
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 1 of
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
3 . Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches : Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2 .4 WALL PLATES
A . Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices .
1 - Plate- Securing Screws : Metal with head color to match plate finish .
2 . Material for Unfinished Spaces : Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic .
3 . Material for Wet Locations : Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations. "
2 . 5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies : Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B . Raceway Material : Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish .
C . Wire: No. 12 AWG .
\ 2 . 6 FINISHES
A Color:
1 . Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System : Ivory, unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70.
2 . TVSS Devices: Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B . Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging.
C . Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
1 E . Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
_ l
16140 WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
F . Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and l
furnishings .
3 .2 IDENTIFICATION
A . Comply with Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ."
1 . Receptacles : Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served . Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes .
3 . 3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding. "
B . Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports :
I . After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized , test for
proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements . /
2 . Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions .
B . Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above .
END OF SECTION 16140
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON' ENGINEERING SERVICES �ylp 2MARo9
5 . Trane Co . (The); Unitary Products Group.
6. York International Corp.
2.2 EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1 . Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B . Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
1 . Insulation : Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
2 . Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminalbox for overcurrent
protection .
E. Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
F. Fan Motor: Multispeed.
G. Filters: l inch (25 min) thick; in fiberboard frames
23 AIR-COOLED , COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
th removable panels for access to
, weep
A Casing ,holes foreeelwater dra nage,! and mounting holes h baked enamel, rin base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed (reciprocating] or (scroll] type with crankcase heater and
mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Mounting Base: Concrete.
Page 2 of 4
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
B . Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation . �\ l
PART 2 - PRODUCTS )
2 . 01 MANUALLY-OPERATED FRONT PROJECTIONS SCREENS
A. General: Provide manufacturer' s standard units consisting of case, screen,
mounting accessories and other components a required for a complete installation
and complying with descriptive requirements indicated below.
B . Spring-Roller-Operated Projection Screens : Units designed and fabricated for wall
or ceiling installation and complying with the following requirements :
1 . Screen Case: Fabricated in one piece from not less than 22-gage steel with
flat back design, vinyl-covered or baked-enamel finish, and end caps with
integral roller brackets and furnished with universal mounting brackets in
finish matching end caps to enable attachment to wall or ceiling .
2 . Screen: Mildew - and flame-resistant glass fiber fabric with vinyl-coated
viewing surface complying with requirements indicated below, with top
edge mounted on. And securely anchored to, a 3 " diameter rigid steel spring
roller and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a tubular metal slat,
with ends of rod protected by plastic caps containing a screw-attached /
saddle and pull .
Size of Viewing Surface : As indicated.
Type of viewing Surface : Matte white with minimum gain characteristics
complying with FS GG- S-001721) (1 ) for Type A screen surface .
Edge Treatment: Black masking borders .
C . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Series 500 Auditorium; Bretford/Knox Manufacturing Co .
Model C; Da-Lite Screen Co . , Inc.
Luma 2 ; Draper Shade & Screen Co .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. General;_Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen
manufacturer' s instructions .
11132-2 t
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
F . Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and l
furnishings .
3 .2 IDENTIFICATION
A . Comply with Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ."
1 . Receptacles : Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served . Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes .
3 . 3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding. "
B . Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports :
I . After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized , test for
proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements . /
2 . Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions .
B . Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above .
END OF SECTION 16140
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Time switches .
2 . Photoelectric relays.
3 - Occupancy sensors .
4 . Muhipcle lighting relays.
5 . Multipole lighting contactors .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting control device indicated .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined iin`NFPA 70,
Article IOQ by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with 47 CFR 15 , Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices .
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Contactors and Relays:
-J a. Automatic Switch Co .
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
B . Install front projection screens with screen cases in positions and relationship to
adjoining work indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner
which produces a smoothly operating screen with plumb and straight vertical edges
and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when lowered.
3 . 02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite
such protection, damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as
required to restore units to their original, undamaged condition.
* * *END OF SECTION* * *
i'
11132-3
i
/
(3 LRRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
/ IRC Maintenance
2.4 ACCESSORIES W/& 4Z 2NAZ09'
A• Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B• Refrigerant Line Kits : Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with Hazed fttings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 INSTALLATION
A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturers standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
B . Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- ( 100-ntm ) thick,
reinforced concrete base; 4 inches ( 100 mm ) larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete. "
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
C. histall ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. , .,,:;
D. Install compressor-condenser components on neoprene isolators.
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fitti
allow access to unit. ngs. Install tub ng to
B . Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff duty valve and union or flange on the sup1
connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.
P Y
C. Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
D. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. including
B. Leak Test: Ager installation
leaks exist. , charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 3 0f 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Time switches .
2 . Photoelectric relays.
3 - Occupancy sensors .
4 . Muhipcle lighting relays.
5 . Multipole lighting contactors .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting control device indicated .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined iin`NFPA 70,
Article IOQ by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with 47 CFR 15 , Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices .
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Contactors and Relays:
-J a. Automatic Switch Co .
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp .
c. Cutler-Hammer Products ; Eaton Corporation .
d . Furnas Electric Co.
e. GE Lighting Controls.
f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc .
h. Square D Co . ; Power Management Organization .
i . Zenith Controls, Inc .
2 . Time Switches :
a. Diversified Electronics, Inc .
b. Grasslin Controls Corp.
c. Intermatic, Inc.
d , Leviton Manufacturing.
e. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc .
f. Tork, Inc.
g. Zenith Controls, Inc.
3 . Photoelectric Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation .
b . Area Lighting Research , Inc .
C. Fisher Pierce .
d . Grasslin Controls , Corp. /
C . Intermatic, Inc .
I. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc.
g. Rhodes, M H , Inc .
h . SSAC, Inc.
i . Tork, Inc.
2 .2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A . Line-Voltage Surge Protection : Include in all 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. Comply
with UL 1449 and with ANSI C62 .41 for Category A locations .
2 .3 TIME SWITCHES
A . Description : Solid-state programmable type with alphanumeric display complying with
UL 917 .
1 . Astronomic dial .
2 . Two contacts, rated 30 A at 277-V ac, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2 A at 240-V ac, unless otherwise indicated .
4 . Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays .
5 . Skip-day mode.
2 .4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES P,;e�Q 150 2MAP.
C. Operational Test. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15738
15739 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp .
c. Cutler-Hammer Products ; Eaton Corporation .
d . Furnas Electric Co.
e. GE Lighting Controls.
f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc .
h. Square D Co . ; Power Management Organization .
i . Zenith Controls, Inc .
2 . Time Switches :
a. Diversified Electronics, Inc .
b. Grasslin Controls Corp.
c. Intermatic, Inc.
d , Leviton Manufacturing.
e. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc .
f. Tork, Inc.
g. Zenith Controls, Inc.
3 . Photoelectric Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation .
b . Area Lighting Research , Inc .
C. Fisher Pierce .
d . Grasslin Controls , Corp. /
C . Intermatic, Inc .
I. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc.
g. Rhodes, M H , Inc .
h . SSAC, Inc.
i . Tork, Inc.
2 .2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A . Line-Voltage Surge Protection : Include in all 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. Comply
with UL 1449 and with ANSI C62 .41 for Category A locations .
2 .3 TIME SWITCHES
A . Description : Solid-state programmable type with alphanumeric display complying with
UL 917 .
1 . Astronomic dial .
2 . Two contacts, rated 30 A at 277-V ac, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2 A at 240-V ac, unless otherwise indicated .
4 . Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays .
5 . Skip-day mode.
2 .4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Outdoor Sealed Units : Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A
Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield .
1 . Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn -off
levels.
2 Time Delay: Prevents false operation .
2 . 5 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
A . Description : Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508 and
NEMA ICS 2 .
1 • Listed Current Rating for Switching: C
tungsten filament, inductiveonsistent with type of Load served, including
, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total
harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage : Match control power source .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
1 A . Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and
wall-mounting devices . to center of unit for
3 . 2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
B . Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures .
3 .3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents .
B . Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components .
Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
J
- - 1 . Continuity tests of circuits.
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 11458 - DISAPPEARING STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE :
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specifications Sections, 06100-Rough Carpentry, 06200-Finish Carpentry,
and 09900-Painting, apply to work of this section.
1 .02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Furnish and Install, as detailed, and as located on the Drawings, fold-up or sliding
disappearing stairways. Complete trim-out and painting of the finish product is included .
APPROVED I IANUFACTURER'S :
All as manufactured by one of the following approved companies;
A. BESSLER STAIRWAY COMPANY
B . PRECISION LADDERS, LLC
C. STAIR-SCAPE
1 .04 MATERIAL:
Stairway shall be manufacturer of metal, wood or a combination of both. Rated capacities
shall be a minimum of 400 pounds. Units shall be designed
the bottorn
chord of wood trusses with a panel opening width of 2ot30rinchestall s,edtween depending on the
manufacturer and the unit specified. . Refer to building sections to determine the floor to
ceiling height requirements . Handrails on one or both sides are preferred, but are not
required . Wood treads shall be select, kiln dried yellow pine with a steel ladder rod under
each tread for added strength. Any aluminum treads shall be 6 " X width specified X .225 "
alum.- Channel with self-adhesive anti-slip "Flex Tread". Storage cover panel shall be metal
or plywood.
1 .05 DESIGN:
The fully engineered stairs shall retract into its own housing or attic space when not in use .
Units shall lower with pull chain, rope, or a motor supplied by manufacturer, and as
specified on the drawings . Manual storing units require folding up assembly and pushing it
Frames shall be secured to the trusses with stainless steel screws at mounting point
with assistance from a spring loaded or counterbalanced factory installed mechanism.
nts
depicted by the manufacturer. as
1 .06 PERFORMANCE :
Stairs shall meet all industry standards and carry a one year warranty. Shop drawing
submittals are required for this item.
* * *END OF THIS SECTION* * *
11458-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15810 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary : Metal and nonmetal ducts and accessories in pressure classes 2 inch wg (500 Pa) or
less and a maximum velocity of 2400 fpm ( 12 m/s).
B . Submit Product Data for fire dampers and smoke dampers .
C. Submit Shop Drawings detailing duct layout and including locations and types of duct
accessories, duct sizes, transitions, radius and vaned elbows, special supports details, and
inlets and outlet types and locations .
D . Comply with NFPA 90A for systems serving spaces more than 25 , 000 cu. ft . (708 cu . m) in
volume or building Types 11, IV, and V construction over 3 stories in height.
E. Comply with NFPA 90B for systems serving spaces 1 - or 2-family dwellings or serving spaces
less than 25,000 cu . It. (708 cu . m) .
F. Comply with NFPA 96 for systems serving public or private cooking operations, except single-
family residential usage; and includes cooking equipment exhaust hoods, grease-removal
devices, exhaust ductwork, exhaust fans, dampers, fire-extinguishing equipment, and all other
auxiliary or ancillary components of systems or systems that are involved in the capture,
containment, and control of grease- laden cooking effluent.
G . Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.
11. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Qualifications : AABC or NEBB certified .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3 . 1 DUCTS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel : Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653 , G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275)
coating designation with mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to
view.
B . Fibrous Glass Duct Board : Comply with UL 181 , Class 1 , fibrous glass with fire-resistant,
reinforced foil -scrim-kraft barrier, and having the air-side surface treated to prevent erosion .
Thickness: 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm).
C. Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071 , Type II, with an airstream surface coated with a temperature-
resistant coating.
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Outdoor Sealed Units : Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A
Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield .
1 . Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn -off
levels.
2 Time Delay: Prevents false operation .
2 . 5 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
A . Description : Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508 and
NEMA ICS 2 .
1 • Listed Current Rating for Switching: C
tungsten filament, inductiveonsistent with type of Load served, including
, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total
harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage : Match control power source .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
1 A . Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and
wall-mounting devices . to center of unit for
3 . 2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
B . Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures .
3 .3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents .
B . Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components .
Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
J
- - 1 . Continuity tests of circuits.
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . Operational Tests : Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities - -\
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions . Record )
control settings, operations, and functional observations.
3 . Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
END OF SECTION 16145
t /
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
D . Thickness : 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm). t,
g . Adhesive: ASTM C 916, Type I .
F . Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel pin, length required penetrate liner plus a 1 /8- inch
(3-mm) projection maximum into the airstream .
G . Joint and Seam Tape: Comply with UL 181 A .
H . Joint and Seam Sealant: Comply with UL 181 A .
1 . Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication : Comply with SMACNA' s " HVAC Duct Construction
Standard " for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint
types and intervals .
mply with SMACNA' s "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction
J . Fabricate Fibrous Glass Ducts: Co
Standard. "
3 .2 ACCESSORIES
A . Volume-Control Dampers: Factory fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with
required hardware and accessories . Single-blade and multiple opposed -blade, standard leakage
rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications .
�omplete with required hardware and
B Fir esDampeTs: labeled Factory
-faccbdicated fire ng UL 555 , " Standard rd forFire Dampers ."
ampers, c
mlete with
C . Ceiling Fire
accessories . DUL listed and nlabeled; comply dwith the conrequired
struct on det ilsfor the tested
floor/roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
D . Smoke Dampers: Factory-fabricated smoke and fire dampers, complete with required
hardware and accessories . UL labeled according to UL SSSS , " Standard for Leakage Rated
Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems ." Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also
be UL labeled for 1 - 1 /2-hour rating according to UL 555 , " Standard for Fire Dampers . "
E . Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181 , Class 1 .
F . Flexible Ducts : [Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing] or [Factory-
fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1 - 1 /2-inch- (38-mm-) thick,
glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner] .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 2
Page 1 of 2
Bessler Stairway Company112
STM
S_ LEft' J
WAY COMPANY
R Division of ASI
Residential and commercial installations, schools, offices, churches , stores.
Easy operation. Safe and convenient use. Superbly engineered for maximum stability. Responds
to the lightest touch. Models and sizes to suit most any budget and space requirement. 400 to 800
lbs. load capacities .
MODEL l00 Our very best. Solid one-
piece stringers and treads of selected 3uggestaa
1x8 dried yellow pine . Ladder rod under Capacily
each tread for added strength and 800lbe.
rigidity. 1 3/8 " GRADE A Hollow Core
Door. Ladder width is 18 7/8 " . Full
length handrail . Shipping weight 'w+k*Mfr rVg
n•
approximately 190 pounds . 71W to
Finished Jambs and Trim not �tN �ges � �*
supplied . d » Pl �
cell In wv la Inramanm 661
B C D E F
A Radius Plumb
Size Floor to Floor Run below Panel Opening Retail
Above HeightAbove Fi 4 (Fig,3) Price
(F. ig.4)
M93) (Fig.3)
� 7 '-7 " to 7110" 4'-4" 3' -2 " 6'-5 " 2 x 5'- 10" $ 1 ,320.00
� 7 ' - I1 to 8' 4" 11 " 3 ' - 8 " 6'- 10" 2'-6" x 5' - 10" $ 1 ,330.00
� 8' -5 " to 8'- 10" 5'-7 " 1 " 7'-3 6" x 5 '- 10 " $ 1 ,350 .00
� 8'- 11 " to 9' _4" 6'-2 " 6" T-7 " 6" x 6' 0" $ 1 ,390 .00
� 9'-5 " to 9'- 10" 6'-4" 9" 8'-0" 2' 6" x 61 -411 $ 15420 .00
6 9'- 1 l " to 10'-4" 6-8 " 5 '-0" 8'-4 " 2'-6" x 6'-8 " $ 15440 .00
10'-5 " to 10' - 71_ 011 51-31 8'-9" 2'-6" x 7' -0" $ 11480 .00
10
10'- 11 " to 11 '- F- 6"
5 .5 „ 9'-2"
I8 114
11458 - 2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . Operational Tests : Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities - -\
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions . Record )
control settings, operations, and functional observations.
3 . Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
END OF SECTION 16145
t /
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 4 of 4
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
� SECTION ] 6231 -
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 , 1 STU IMARY
A, This Section includes packaged
features. diesel-engine generator sets with the following
accessory
1 . Battery charger.
2• Belly fuel tank or separate day tank.
3 . Muffler.
4. Outdoor, weatherproof,
5• Audio/Visual Signal, corrosion resistant, sound attenuated enclosure.
6. Remote stop switch with durable acrylic sign ,
7. Starting battery,
g• Engine coolant heater
9. Remote annunciator
1 . 2 SUBiVETTALS
� A. Product Data: For
the generator set and each accessory component indicated.
B• Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations
Of each field connection . , sections, details of installation, and location and size
1 • Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C Certified prototype test reports.
D. Field quality-control test reports.-_
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Manufacturer Qualifications: Specify in the bid a servicecerite r capable of emergency
maintenance and repairs at the Project with eight hours' maximum response time.
this Section through
$• Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxili
one source from a single manufacturer. ary components specified in
C• Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED
ENGINE GENERATOR Page 1 of ] 1
Bessler Stairway Company#2 Page 2 of 2
I F- 5 " to 1I '-
10 " 71-911 5 ' 10" 9'- 6 " $ 1 2'- 6 " x 7'-6" 620 . 00
LPP' to8 '- 1 " 6'- 1 " 9'- 10 " ' " x 7'-9"� $ 1 ,710 :00
8 '-6 " 6'-4 " 10'-3 "
2'-6" xH]E800. 0]01
*Prices are F. O.B . Memphis, TN *
ORDERING INFORMATION
Click for Larger Picture
• Orders are to be confirmed in writing to eliminate errors or mistakes. Specify both FLOOR TO
FLOOR and FLOOR TO CEILING measurements when ordering BESSLER one-piece
stairways . (Click Photo for Larger Image)
. BESSLER STAIRWAYS are engineered and custom built to fit and operate within the
requirements as shown in the charts and illustrations, and not subject to cancellation after
construction begins.
• ROUGH OPENING should be 2 " wider and longer than panel size shown.
lit STAIRWAYS ARE SHIPPED UNASSEMBLED
• SPECIFY MODEL AND SIZE ON YOUR ORDER.
For A distributor in your area or for additional information, please E-Mail us at bessler@bessler corn or
call our Customer Service Department at 901 /360- 1900
J n
http://www.bessler.com/rnodl00 .htm 11456 - 3
GARRISON ENGINEEMIG SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Duct System Pressure Class : Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct
pressure classification indicated .
B . Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.
C . Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures .
D. Dishwasher Exhaust Duct Installation : Comply with SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards . "
E. Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standard . "
F. Support and r- om]eet fibrous glass ducts according to SIVIACNA 's Tihrnns Glass hurt
Construction Standard . "
G . Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in
SMACNA standards .
H. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to
avoid erosion of duct liner.
I Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions .
J- Install fusible links in fire dampers.
3 .2 TESTING, ADJUSTING , AND BALANCING
A . Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to
indicated quantities.
END OF SECTION 15810
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 3
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
� SECTION ] 6231 -
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 , 1 STU IMARY
A, This Section includes packaged
features. diesel-engine generator sets with the following
accessory
1 . Battery charger.
2• Belly fuel tank or separate day tank.
3 . Muffler.
4. Outdoor, weatherproof,
5• Audio/Visual Signal, corrosion resistant, sound attenuated enclosure.
6. Remote stop switch with durable acrylic sign ,
7. Starting battery,
g• Engine coolant heater
9. Remote annunciator
1 . 2 SUBiVETTALS
� A. Product Data: For
the generator set and each accessory component indicated.
B• Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations
Of each field connection . , sections, details of installation, and location and size
1 • Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C Certified prototype test reports.
D. Field quality-control test reports.-_
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Manufacturer Qualifications: Specify in the bid a servicecerite r capable of emergency
maintenance and repairs at the Project with eight hours' maximum response time.
this Section through
$• Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxili
one source from a single manufacturer. ary components specified in
C• Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED
ENGINE GENERATOR Page 1 of ] 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc . IRC Maintenance
E. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.
F. Noise Emission: Not to exceed 87dB maximum noise level at 25 feet from generator due to
sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, eughre cooling air intake and
discharge, and other components of the installation.
CART 2 - PRODUCT
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Baldor Electric Company
2. Caterpillar, Inc .; Engine Div.
3 . Gene= Corp. .
4. Kohler Cc ; Generator Division .
5 . Cummins Power Generation, Inc
6. Winco, hie.
2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET
A. Provide a coordinated assembly of compatible components.
B . Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15 . 1 ;
C . Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a conspicuous nameplate of
component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model
and serial number of item, year of manufacture, and rating information prescribed by the
standards the equipment is built to.
D . Ratings:
I . Genset electrical power output shall be at 60 Hz.
2 . Minimum prime power rating shall be 55kW/55kVA at unity power factor.
3 . Minimum standby power rating shall be 60kW/60kVA at unity power factor.
4 . Voltage output shall be 120/240 volts, single phase, 3 wire.
2.3 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE
A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 4 percent of rated output voltage from no load to
full load. Shall maintain voltage output to within f1 .0% at any power factor between 0 .8 and
1 .0
B . Steady-State Voltage Modulation Frequency: Less than 1 Hz.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 2 of 11
� )
c�
Page 1 of 1
Closed- Oattlan (Half of ladder stored over door section Through Stak Opening FjmjA*d remb Md
panel and other half Over attic 1166Y.) 40#11 Om Tom nw s ,6k+d
nmSNED e6ElYkla —� b4 Eee�Fer
5706
FIG4 FIG. 2
�- - PANEL. OPENING --'�
Stairway partly DOW" on panel Opon Position
-- a
// . Tran Above sr eerow
E
A
MUM-
Pu mWIW *W lanwron
PMMr r AI !n«[Kaf }eehl Sn�++ l
Door 0 D6o>+n8 ni. eeor�r
MAMA !bM1 h E4eYetod �._..-- D --._..._
F (i.. 3 .IMs FIG. 4 -
1458 -.4 -
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc . IRC Maintenance
E. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.
F. Noise Emission: Not to exceed 87dB maximum noise level at 25 feet from generator due to
sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, eughre cooling air intake and
discharge, and other components of the installation.
CART 2 - PRODUCT
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Baldor Electric Company
2. Caterpillar, Inc .; Engine Div.
3 . Gene= Corp. .
4. Kohler Cc ; Generator Division .
5 . Cummins Power Generation, Inc
6. Winco, hie.
2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET
A. Provide a coordinated assembly of compatible components.
B . Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15 . 1 ;
C . Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a conspicuous nameplate of
component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model
and serial number of item, year of manufacture, and rating information prescribed by the
standards the equipment is built to.
D . Ratings:
I . Genset electrical power output shall be at 60 Hz.
2 . Minimum prime power rating shall be 55kW/55kVA at unity power factor.
3 . Minimum standby power rating shall be 60kW/60kVA at unity power factor.
4 . Voltage output shall be 120/240 volts, single phase, 3 wire.
2.3 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE
A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 4 percent of rated output voltage from no load to
full load. Shall maintain voltage output to within f1 .0% at any power factor between 0 .8 and
1 .0
B . Steady-State Voltage Modulation Frequency: Less than 1 Hz.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 2 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
C Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20
increase or decrease, Voltage recovers fo remain Percent variation for 50
three seconds. within the percent step-load
steady-state operating b
D. g and within
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth; 0.5 percent of rated fre
q
E. Steady-State Frequency Stabili
�
load, there are no rando • When system i "On 0Y from no toad to
m s operating at any constant load within rated
huntingspeed de the steady variations outside -
or surging of speed. state operational band and no
F. Transient Frequency PerfonanCe. Less than 5 percent variation for a 50
increase or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within
within five seconds, a the steady-state percent
eP-lo d
G• Output Waveform; At no load harmonic
not exceed 5 percent total and 3 content measured line-to-line or line-
determined accordingto percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor,
NEMA MG I , shall not exceed 50.
H• Sustained Short-
thegenerator andts protective deviCirc;uit Current' er a ces shall sup phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals,
current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear theplyam�mm automa0 Pe
any generator system com Percent of ratedfgll-load
ponent, y, without damage to
�--1 I• Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type M, system requirements.
2.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS
Ad Environmental Conditions:
satisfactorily under the followinugme generator shall be e
damage or de g environmental c quipped to start and : operate
gradation Of capability: conditions without mechanical or electrical
1 , Ambient Tempera
2 Relative Htm e: Minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.
Humid 30 to 100 percent.
3 • Altitude: Sea level to 50 feet.
2. 5 ENGME
A. Description: 4-cycle unit with maximum
Piston
speed of 9 meters per second
B • Comply with NFPA 37.
C. Fuel: Diesel per ASTM D 975, 2-D, (S 15) or (S500).
D. Rated Engiue Speed: 1800rprn.
1. E• Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity Siphons
drainage to an easily removable container
With no disassembly and without use of
Pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances.
16231 OPTIONAL ST
ANDBy SyS ,M PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 3 of 11
DIVISIONS 12 FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12290 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK: LIGHT COMMERCIAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
The Bidding and Contract Documents, General Requirements and Addenda, as may be
issued prior to bidding, shall govern the work under this Section.
A. References
I ) AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute : Applicable Quality Standards.
2) FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood.
3) FS MMM-A- 130 - Adhesive, Contact .
4) NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates .
5) ANSI A156 .9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware.
6) PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood .
7) PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard .
8) PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1 . 02 SCOPE OF THE WORK:
1
A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and service to complete the
casework and related work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or
both, except as for items specifically indicated as 'NOT IN CONTRACT' (NIC) .
B . Including, but not necessarily limited to the following :
I . Fabrication of Casework.
2 . Installation.
3 . Accessories .
4 . Hardware.
5 . Filler Panels.
1 .03 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A. Rough Carpentry, Section 06100, and Finish Carpentry Section 06200 . Provide
blocking within wall floor, or ceiling, required to give adequate support for
casework.
B . Mechanical Division 15000 : Stainless steel sinks and fittings which are integral
with casework, including all work for plumbing rough-in, supply waste and vent,
including shut-off valves at floor or wall . All heating and ventilating ductwork
and grilles in cabinets where required including connections, flashings, caps or
hoods .
12290-1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15 83 8 - POWER VENTILATORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B . Submit Shop Drawings, including roof-mounting details .
C . Bear the AMCA seal .
D . Comply with applicable NEMA standards .
E. ComPly with UL 705 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 VENTILATORS AND ACCESSORIES
—� A . Wall -Mounted Ventilators: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
B . Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Ceiling Units : Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
B . Ground power ventilators.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B .
END OF SECTION 15 83 8
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
Page ] of 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
C Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20
increase or decrease, Voltage recovers fo remain Percent variation for 50
three seconds. within the percent step-load
steady-state operating b
D. g and within
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth; 0.5 percent of rated fre
q
E. Steady-State Frequency Stabili
�
load, there are no rando • When system i "On 0Y from no toad to
m s operating at any constant load within rated
huntingspeed de the steady variations outside -
or surging of speed. state operational band and no
F. Transient Frequency PerfonanCe. Less than 5 percent variation for a 50
increase or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within
within five seconds, a the steady-state percent
eP-lo d
G• Output Waveform; At no load harmonic
not exceed 5 percent total and 3 content measured line-to-line or line-
determined accordingto percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor,
NEMA MG I , shall not exceed 50.
H• Sustained Short-
thegenerator andts protective deviCirc;uit Current' er a ces shall sup phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals,
current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear theplyam�mm automa0 Pe
any generator system com Percent of ratedfgll-load
ponent, y, without damage to
�--1 I• Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type M, system requirements.
2.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS
Ad Environmental Conditions:
satisfactorily under the followinugme generator shall be e
damage or de g environmental c quipped to start and : operate
gradation Of capability: conditions without mechanical or electrical
1 , Ambient Tempera
2 Relative Htm e: Minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.
Humid 30 to 100 percent.
3 • Altitude: Sea level to 50 feet.
2. 5 ENGME
A. Description: 4-cycle unit with maximum
Piston
speed of 9 meters per second
B • Comply with NFPA 37.
C. Fuel: Diesel per ASTM D 975, 2-D, (S 15) or (S500).
D. Rated Engiue Speed: 1800rprn.
1. E• Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity Siphons
drainage to an easily removable container
With no disassembly and without use of
Pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances.
16231 OPTIONAL ST
ANDBy SyS ,M PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 3 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 37. System includes the following:
1 . Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
2 . Relief/Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess
fuel to source.
2 .6 GOVERNOR
A. Type: mechanical
2 .7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator-set
skid and integral eugine-driven coolant pump.
B . Radiator Core Tubes: Nonferrous-metal construction other than aluminum.
C . Coolant: 50% distilled water, 50% ethylene glycol.
2. 8 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A . Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37 .
B. See Plan Sheet F- 1 for additional information:
C. Fuel Oil Tank(s) : Factory-installed and piped, listed unit. Features include the following:
1 . Tank level indicator. -
2 . Capacity: See Plan Sheet F- 1 .
3 . Vandal-resistant fill cap.
4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Residential type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound
level in the 20- to 75-Hz frequency band at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) from exhaust discharge,
is 82 d,BA or less.
B . Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to muffler drain outlet
through a petcock.
C . Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless-steel
pipe.
D. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless-steel expansion joint with liners.
n
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 4 of I 1
C . Electrical Division 16000 : Electrical rough-in and connections from rough-in to
cabinet or equipment fixtures and devices requiring same, whatever Type and kind.
1 .04 BIDDING:
Do not bid sections of casework separately. Any item required to make the casework a
complete and workable unit will be by the casework Subcontractor, including installation.
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE :
A. The " Quality Assurance" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and
by reference are made part of this specification.
B . All work shall conform to section 400B Architectural Cabinets (Laminate Clad
Cabinets) as defined in the latest edition of the AWI " Quality Standards' unless
detailed as a higher grade .
C . Competence : The approved casework manufacturer must have a reputation for
doing satisfactory work on time and shall have completed comparable work.
D . The woodwork Manufacturer and the Contractor shall be jointly responsible to
make certain that casework is not delivered until the building and storage areas are
sufficiently dry so that the casework will not be damaged by excessive changes in
moisture content.
1 .06 LIST OF SAMPLES CERTIFICATES AND SHOP DRAWINGS :
A. This list consists of samples, certificates and shop drawings which require
submission by the Contractor to the Architect for approval.
B . Any omission of items which require the Contractor' s compliance under the
contract documents does not relieve said Contractor from such responsibility .
C . Submit samples, product data, certificates and shop drawings as required or
requested by the Architect, whether included in this list or not.
1 . 07 SUBMITTALS :
A. Submit complete shop drawings on all items showing details, materials, location in
building and installation requirements prior to starting work.
B . Submit sample cabinet built to specification, prior to starting of work, for approval
of all materials.
C . The casework manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled
by job conditions and shall show on his shop drawings all required field
measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor and the 1c2 se9w 2 k
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 37. System includes the following:
1 . Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
2 . Relief/Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess
fuel to source.
2 .6 GOVERNOR
A. Type: mechanical
2 .7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator-set
skid and integral eugine-driven coolant pump.
B . Radiator Core Tubes: Nonferrous-metal construction other than aluminum.
C . Coolant: 50% distilled water, 50% ethylene glycol.
2. 8 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A . Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37 .
B. See Plan Sheet F- 1 for additional information:
C. Fuel Oil Tank(s) : Factory-installed and piped, listed unit. Features include the following:
1 . Tank level indicator. -
2 . Capacity: See Plan Sheet F- 1 .
3 . Vandal-resistant fill cap.
4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Residential type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound
level in the 20- to 75-Hz frequency band at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) from exhaust discharge,
is 82 d,BA or less.
B . Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to muffler drain outlet
through a petcock.
C . Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless-steel
pipe.
D. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless-steel expansion joint with liners.
n
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 4 of I 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc_
IRC' Maintenance
^, E Exhaust Piping External to Engine: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded, black steel, with welded
joints and fittings,
2. 10 COMBUSTION-ATR-INTAKE
A. Description: Standard duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable
"blocked filter" indicator.
dry filter element and
2. 11 STARTING SYSTEM
A• Description: 12 Volt DC electric, with negative ground and including the following items:
I • Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Environmental Conditions "
"Service Conditions" Article above.
2. Cranking Paragraph in
g Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from eng gine
flywheel without binding,
3 . Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.
4• Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range
"Enviromnental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service
specified cranking cycle at Conditions " Article above to provide
least twice without recharging, specified in
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by generator-set
battery capacity indicated. manufacturer for cable length and
accessories . Include interconnecting conductors and connection
6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with s
regulation and 35-A olid state .voltage
7. minimum continuous rating.
Battery Charger: Current-1 miting, automatic-equalizing and float-char in
complies with UL 1236 and includes the following features:
g g type: Unit
a
a• Operation : Equalizing-charging rate of. 10 A is initiated automatically after battery
has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a lower float-charging mode and
continues operating in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b• Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 5 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high te
Automatic mperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c• Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of
rate.
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Ammeter indicates charging
e• Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage, arranged to
close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring
panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do
output of battery charger. Either of latter conditions closes contacts
battery-charger malfunction indication at system that provide a control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 4X, wall-mounted cabinet.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 5 of 11
manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions .
i' D . Submit samples of laminated plastic for color selection.
E. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of all items not manufactured by the
casework contractor, as requested by the Architect.
1 .08 DELIVERY9 STORAGE AND HANDLING :
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration.
B . Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding or similar operations
'which could damage, soil or deteriorate the woodwork, have been completed in the
installation areas . If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored
in other than installation areas, store only in areas meeting the requirements
specified for the installation area.
1 .09 PROJECT CONDITIONS •
A . Conditioning : Woodwork manufacturer and installer shall advise the Contractor of
temperature and humidity requirements for the woodwork installation and storage - '
areas.
i
B . Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain
moisture content of installed woodwork within a 1 . 0% tolerance of optimum
moisture content, from date of installation to through remainder of construction
period. Require woodwork manufacturer to establish optimum moisture content ''
and required temperature and humidity conditions .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 WOOD MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Lumber for stiles and rails: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI;
moisture content of 6 to I 1 percent; 8 to 13 percent for damp locations (as defined
by AWI) .
B . All lumber in contact with concrete floor shall be pressure treated .
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS :
A. Softwood Plywood for box construction" to be 3/4 " luan plywood with melamine
finish for bottoms, tops and sides of wall cabinets, ends and sides of base cabinets,
and all shelving. Backs shall be 1 /2 " luan plywood on wall cabinets and 1 /8 "
masonite with hanging rail for base cabinets . All shelving adjustable, line board
with 32 mm system . No shelves or wall cabinets to exceed 33 " wide .
12290-3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS , AND GRILLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Submit Product Data, including color charts for factory finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 OUTLETS AND INLETS
A Diffusers : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
B . Wall and Ceiling Registers: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
C Wall and Ceiling Grilles: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling- and
wall-mounted items.
B - Locate ceiling diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction 'Reflected
Ceiling Plans . " Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
END OF SECTION 15855
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Page 1 of 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc_
IRC' Maintenance
^, E Exhaust Piping External to Engine: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded, black steel, with welded
joints and fittings,
2. 10 COMBUSTION-ATR-INTAKE
A. Description: Standard duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable
"blocked filter" indicator.
dry filter element and
2. 11 STARTING SYSTEM
A• Description: 12 Volt DC electric, with negative ground and including the following items:
I • Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Environmental Conditions "
"Service Conditions" Article above.
2. Cranking Paragraph in
g Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from eng gine
flywheel without binding,
3 . Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.
4• Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range
"Enviromnental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service
specified cranking cycle at Conditions " Article above to provide
least twice without recharging, specified in
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by generator-set
battery capacity indicated. manufacturer for cable length and
accessories . Include interconnecting conductors and connection
6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with s
regulation and 35-A olid state .voltage
7. minimum continuous rating.
Battery Charger: Current-1 miting, automatic-equalizing and float-char in
complies with UL 1236 and includes the following features:
g g type: Unit
a
a• Operation : Equalizing-charging rate of. 10 A is initiated automatically after battery
has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a lower float-charging mode and
continues operating in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b• Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 5 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high te
Automatic mperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c• Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of
rate.
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Ammeter indicates charging
e• Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage, arranged to
close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring
panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do
output of battery charger. Either of latter conditions closes contacts
battery-charger malfunction indication at system that provide a control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 4X, wall-mounted cabinet.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 5 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering; Inc. JRC Maintenance
2. 12 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Functional Description: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on
position starts the generator set. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set
shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or
derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a
remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down the generator set.
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator
set. A remote annunciator panel shall provide all alarm indications provided at the main panel.
Mounting method isolates the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include those required by NFPA 1. 10 for a
Level 2 system.
D . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include the following:
1 . AC voltmeter.
2 . AC ammeter.
3 . AC frequency meter.
4 . DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5 . Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7 . Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, .phase-selectorswitch(es). '
9 . Generator voltage adjusting rheostat. .
10 . Start-stop switch..
IL Overspeed shutdown device.
12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
13 . Coolant low-level shutdown device.
14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.
15 . Fuel tank derangement alarm .
16 . Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
17 . Low battery alarm.
18 . Battery charger malfunction alarm.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices, and wiring
required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine,
generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's
standard.
F. Audible Alarms: Signal the occurrence Of any events listed below without differentiating
between event types. Locate audible device and silencing means on generator. Connect so that
after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing
switch is reset.
1 . Engine high-temperature shutdown.
2. Lube-oil low-pressure shutdown.
r� 3 . Overspeed shutdown .
4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 6 of 11
`, l
� ^�
_.�
(�
B . Countertops all 3/4 " plywood construction with 3 /4 " buildup, and all exposed faces
plastic laminate covered . ` J
C . Doors shall be 3 /4" MDF covered with plastic laminate . J
2.03 LAMINATED PLASTIC :
All laminated plastic shall meet NEMA LD-3 Standards and application of various types
shall be as follows :
A. 0 . 050 " Nominal Thickness Standard Quality : Counter tops, backsplashes, counter
edges, all tops, sides and edges of shelving.
B . 0 .04? " Nominal Thickness vertical surface grade: Door and drawer fronts and
edges and other exposed vertical and postformed surfaces .
C . Acceptable Laminate Manufacturers :
1 . Nevamar
2 . Wilsonart
3 . Pionite
4. Formica
5 . Substitutions : Only allowed with prior written approval from the Architect.
2 .04 ACCESSORIES :
A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A- 130 . Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit
application.
B . Fasteners : Size and type to suit application . All base and wall cabinets shall be
screwed together. Dowels are not acceptable .
C . Bolts Nuts Washers Lags Pins and Screws : Of size and type to suit application;
galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed
locations.
2.05 HARDWARE :
A. TYPES AND MANUFATURERS
1 . Hinges: concealed box construction (Grass, Mepla, Blum or an approved
manufacturer of equal quality) .
2 . Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley or approved equal, brushed aluminum wire
Pulls .
3 . Cabinet Locks : CCL or approved equal . ^
4 . Robe Hooks : Ives or Stanley. 12290-4
Fort Pierce Engineering; Inc. JRC Maintenance
2. 12 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Functional Description: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on
position starts the generator set. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set
shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or
derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a
remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down the generator set.
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator
set. A remote annunciator panel shall provide all alarm indications provided at the main panel.
Mounting method isolates the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include those required by NFPA 1. 10 for a
Level 2 system.
D . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include the following:
1 . AC voltmeter.
2 . AC ammeter.
3 . AC frequency meter.
4 . DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5 . Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7 . Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, .phase-selectorswitch(es). '
9 . Generator voltage adjusting rheostat. .
10 . Start-stop switch..
IL Overspeed shutdown device.
12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
13 . Coolant low-level shutdown device.
14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.
15 . Fuel tank derangement alarm .
16 . Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
17 . Low battery alarm.
18 . Battery charger malfunction alarm.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices, and wiring
required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine,
generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's
standard.
F. Audible Alarms: Signal the occurrence Of any events listed below without differentiating
between event types. Locate audible device and silencing means on generator. Connect so that
after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing
switch is reset.
1 . Engine high-temperature shutdown.
2. Lube-oil low-pressure shutdown.
r� 3 . Overspeed shutdown .
4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 6 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
!1 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm•
7. Lube-oil loco-pressure prealann.
7• Fuel tank low level.
8• Overcrank shutdown.
9. Coolant low-temperature alarm
10. Control switch not in auto position.
11 . Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
l2. Battery low-voltage alarm.
G. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Outdoor, wall-mounted with sight of and at least 25 feet from
the generator and fuel tanks, NEMA 4X and prominently labeled with a durably ac
using minimum =" white letters on a red background. Push button is protected from accidental
operation. 1y acrylic sign
2. 13 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, m
thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; co
With NEMA AB 1plying
and UL 489.
1 . Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protectio .
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. n
3 . Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when
Protective devices. generator set is shut do
� wn by other
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel .
B . Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case
with UL 489. , electronic-trip type; 10o percent rated complying
I • Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time dela
2. Trip Settings: Matched to generator thermal damage curve as closely as instantaneous.3 • Shunt TriY and instantaneous.
Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down b
Protective devices.
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoringY other
C. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case a panel.
tYP 100 percentrated.
1 . Rating: Matched to generator output rating,
2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by other
Protective devices .
D. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit that continuously monitors current level in
each phase a generator output, integrates generator heating effect over time, and predicts when
thermal damage of the alternator will occur. When signaled b
set protective devices, a shun rip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
Y the protector or other generator-
switch to
disconnect the generator frotn the load circuits. Protector performs the following
functions:
1 • Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 1 10 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 7 of I I
B . HINGES
1 • 1 Rair for doors up to 48 " in height.
2 • lair for doors over 48 " in height.
C . PULLS
1 . 3 - 1 /3 " brushed aluminum finish.
D . DRAWER GUIDES
1 . Drawer guides all metal, rated for 75 lbs.; 5/8 " plywood drawer bottoms and
backs and 3/4 " MDF (medium density fiberboard) plastic laminate covered
fronts.
E. FILERS
1 Drawer sides, back and front 1 /2 " Plywood with melamine finish, 1 /4 "
Plywood bottoms, with full extension drawer guides rated for 150 lbs .
Provide 3/4 " MDF plastic laminate covered fronts.
2 .07 SEALANT:
- a. Equal to General Electric Silicone Sealant.
2.08 ANCHORS •
A. Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure
anchorage . Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion-resistances.
Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt shields for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for
subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.09 CASEWORK FABRICATION:
Detail shall conform to AWI (flush overlay design) and or as shown on drawings.
A. Wood moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity
conditions in the installation areas.
12290-5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary: Electric/electronic controls sequences for HVAC systems and equipment.
B . Submit Shop Drawings detailing operating control sequences of each item of HVAC
equipment and system .
C. Submit Product Data for controllers, sensors, operators, control panels, thermostats,
humidistats, actuators, and control valves and dampers.
D. System Description : See HVAC Plans for control requirements .
E- Operation Sequence : See HVAC Plans for control requirements.
l PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Install control wiring concealed, except in mechanical rooms, and according to requirements
specified in Division 16 sections.
END OF SECTION 15900
15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
Page 1 of 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
!1 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm•
7. Lube-oil loco-pressure prealann.
7• Fuel tank low level.
8• Overcrank shutdown.
9. Coolant low-temperature alarm
10. Control switch not in auto position.
11 . Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
l2. Battery low-voltage alarm.
G. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Outdoor, wall-mounted with sight of and at least 25 feet from
the generator and fuel tanks, NEMA 4X and prominently labeled with a durably ac
using minimum =" white letters on a red background. Push button is protected from accidental
operation. 1y acrylic sign
2. 13 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, m
thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; co
With NEMA AB 1plying
and UL 489.
1 . Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protectio .
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. n
3 . Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when
Protective devices. generator set is shut do
� wn by other
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel .
B . Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case
with UL 489. , electronic-trip type; 10o percent rated complying
I • Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time dela
2. Trip Settings: Matched to generator thermal damage curve as closely as instantaneous.3 • Shunt TriY and instantaneous.
Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down b
Protective devices.
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoringY other
C. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case a panel.
tYP 100 percentrated.
1 . Rating: Matched to generator output rating,
2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by other
Protective devices .
D. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit that continuously monitors current level in
each phase a generator output, integrates generator heating effect over time, and predicts when
thermal damage of the alternator will occur. When signaled b
set protective devices, a shun rip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
Y the protector or other generator-
switch to
disconnect the generator frotn the load circuits. Protector performs the following
functions:
1 • Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 1 10 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 7 of I I
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
2. Under fault conditions, regulates the generator to 300 percent of rated full- load current
for up to 10 seconds .
3 . As heating effect on the generator of overcurrent approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
switch, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated
voltage to avoid overshoot.
2. 14 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
B . Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated integrally with
generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H.
D. Stator-Winding Leads : Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and beat during specifiedintervalsofoperation at 110 percent of
rated capacity.
F . Exciter uses no slip or collector rings, or brushes, . and-is arranged to .sustain generator output
under short-circuit conditions as specified:
G. Enclosure: Dripproo£
H. Voltage Regulator:'- Solid-state type, separate from, exciter; 'providing performance as specified.
1 . Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output- voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
2 . 15 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, rainproof stainless or galvanized steel housing, wind resistant up
to 120 mph. Multiple housing-access panels are lockable and provide adequate access to
components requiring maintenance, Panels are removable by one person without tools.
Instruments and controls are mounted within enclosure.
B . Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system
components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours
with ambient temperature at top of range specified in "Service Conditions" Article.
C. Louvers: Fixed-engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entryof rain and snow.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 8 of 11
t )
C _;
B . Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings . Condition to average prevailing humidity ` l
conditions prior to installation. J
C . Fit shelves doors and all edges with plastic laminate edging. Use full length
pieces only . All edges shall be clad in plastic laminate, including a116 edges of
adjustable shelving.
D . Measurements : Before proceeding with fabrication of casework required to be fitted
to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop
drawing details as required for accurate fit. Where sequence of measuring
substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication
(without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for
subsequent scribing and trimming of casework for accurate fit.
E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application and other work
before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible . Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
F . Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes . Make joints hairline .
G . Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern.
H . Mechanically fasten backsplashes to countertops .
1 . Pre-Cut Openings : Fabricate architectural casework with pre-cut openings, where
possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams
for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant
coating.
J . Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1600-B , unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 COORDINATION :
A. Casework manufacturer is responsible for coordinating his work with work of other
trades, such as structural, plumbing, electrical and air conditioning. In so far as
possible, dimensional adjustments are to be determined before fabrication, and
reflected on the Shop Drawings . To minimize changes required by field conditions .
3.02 INSPE�_
12290-6
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
2. Under fault conditions, regulates the generator to 300 percent of rated full- load current
for up to 10 seconds .
3 . As heating effect on the generator of overcurrent approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
switch, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated
voltage to avoid overshoot.
2. 14 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
B . Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated integrally with
generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H.
D. Stator-Winding Leads : Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and beat during specifiedintervalsofoperation at 110 percent of
rated capacity.
F . Exciter uses no slip or collector rings, or brushes, . and-is arranged to .sustain generator output
under short-circuit conditions as specified:
G. Enclosure: Dripproo£
H. Voltage Regulator:'- Solid-state type, separate from, exciter; 'providing performance as specified.
1 . Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output- voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
2 . 15 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, rainproof stainless or galvanized steel housing, wind resistant up
to 120 mph. Multiple housing-access panels are lockable and provide adequate access to
components requiring maintenance, Panels are removable by one person without tools.
Instruments and controls are mounted within enclosure.
B . Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system
components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours
with ambient temperature at top of range specified in "Service Conditions" Article.
C. Louvers: Fixed-engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entryof rain and snow.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 8 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
2 . 16 FINISHES
A. Description: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and
compatible standard primer.
2. 17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Include prototype testing and Project-specific
equipment manufactured specifically for this Project). equipment testing (testing of
B. Prototype Testing: Performed on a separate engine generator set using same engine model
accessories. ,
constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent
C. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Factory test engine generator set and other system
components and accessories before shipment.
Include the following tests ; Perform tests at rated load and power factor.
1 . Full load run.
Maximum power.
3 - Voltage regulation.
4• Transient and steady-state governing.
5 . Single-step load pickup. ="
6. Safety shutdown.
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written instalalignment
instructions, and with NFPA 110. lation and
E . Set packaged engine generator on concrete base. Cast-in-place concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
I • Support generator-set mounting feet on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points new foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1 - 1 (2-inch
( 19- to 38-111m) gap between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2 • Adjust metal supports or wedges until generator is level.
C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance without removing
connections or accessories.
D. Install exhaust-system piping for diesel engines according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Exhaust shall be directed away from, and generally upward and in the opposition
direction from the nearby fuel dispensers and fuel tank vents.
E. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping 0 1ow
points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of disposition,
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 9 of 11
A. Prior to installation of casework, examine shop fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.
B . Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in the installation
areas prior to installing.
3. 03 INSTALLATION:
A. Pre-Installation Set up a meeting at the project site with the general
contractor prior to delivery of casework and review coordination and environmental
controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to
receive work. Proceed with casework installation only when everyone concerned
agrees that required ambient conditions can be properly maintained .
B . Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates
well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
C . Install casework plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions . Shim as
required using concealed shims . Install to a tolerance of 1 /8 " IIq 8 ' - 0 " for plumb
and level (including tops) ; and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces .
D. Anchorcasework to anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates .
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners
and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
E . Cabinets : Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly.
and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in
openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of
hardware and accessory items as indicated.
F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated and
secure cabinet and counter bases to the floor using appropriate angles and
anchorages .
G. Use thre__ aded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet
units and countertops.
H. Carefully scribe and cut casework to fit adjoining casework or other building
materials, leaving gaps of 1 /32 " maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for
this purpose but refinish the cut surface.
3 .04 ADJUSTMENT CLEANING FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
a. Repair damaeed and defective casework where possible to eliminate defects
functionally and visually; where not possible to repair the casework then replace it.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures
and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
b. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied
12290-7
SECTION 15981
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FINAL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .2 SCOPE
A. Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to verify the performance of the
complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described by Division 15 .
Performance verification shall be accomplished by established testing and balancing procedures
as described in this section.
1 . 3 RELATION TO OTHER WORK
A . Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other
sections of Division 15 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.
1 .4 TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY
A . All performance verification shall be performed by an independent test and ba]
(herein referred to as the "T & B Agency") ante agency
g y ) which is fully certified by and acurrent membe -of
the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
1 . 5 CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
A. Performance verification shall be performed as a service of the T & B
Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of the agreement. Agency directly to the
B . Performance verification is specified in this Division 15 only because it relates predominantly
to Division 15 work. However, the inclusion in this Division 15 of this section covering
Performance verification shall not preclude the contractual agreement of the T & B Agency from
contracting directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of such agr
1 . 6 AGENCY APPROVAL eement.
A. Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T & B Agency to the Architect/Engineer for
approval within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed.
B. Include AABC National Project Certification Performance Guaranty.
15981 - 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
2 . 16 FINISHES
A. Description: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and
compatible standard primer.
2. 17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Include prototype testing and Project-specific
equipment manufactured specifically for this Project). equipment testing (testing of
B. Prototype Testing: Performed on a separate engine generator set using same engine model
accessories. ,
constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent
C. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Factory test engine generator set and other system
components and accessories before shipment.
Include the following tests ; Perform tests at rated load and power factor.
1 . Full load run.
Maximum power.
3 - Voltage regulation.
4• Transient and steady-state governing.
5 . Single-step load pickup. ="
6. Safety shutdown.
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written instalalignment
instructions, and with NFPA 110. lation and
E . Set packaged engine generator on concrete base. Cast-in-place concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
I • Support generator-set mounting feet on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points new foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1 - 1 (2-inch
( 19- to 38-111m) gap between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2 • Adjust metal supports or wedges until generator is level.
C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance without removing
connections or accessories.
D. Install exhaust-system piping for diesel engines according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Exhaust shall be directed away from, and generally upward and in the opposition
direction from the nearby fuel dispensers and fuel tank vents.
E. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping 0 1ow
points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of disposition,
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 9 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorised service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to supervise testing: Report results in writing.
B . Tests: Include the following;
I . Tests recommended by manufacturer.
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 1. 10 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Single-step full-load pickup test.
3 . Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
Perform an integrity load test and a .capacity load test for the ' battery. Verify acceptance
of charge for each element of batteryafter. discharge. Verify measurements are within
manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
S . System Integrity Tests; Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine generator installation before and during system operation.
Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks .
6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer- with 'a scale exceeding 40-inch
wg ( 120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that
back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the
engine.
7. Noise Level Tests : Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from the generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling air intake and discharge, at 25 feet
north, east, south, and west from the generator, and compare measured levels with
required values.
C. Coordinate generator-set test with test for the transfer switch and perform them concurrently.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.
F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 10 of 11
1 7 WORK INCLUDED
A. The T & B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services , tools, test
equipment and instruments (except as otherwise specified) to perform the following work and
all other work of this section:
1 . Review the automatic temperature control and air terminal unit specifications r and
their
respective and combined effects on the testing and balancing procedures
hydronic systems.
2. Where in the opinion of the T & B Agency conditions may exist in the system design or
construction that may have the potential of adversely affecting system performance, then the
T & B Agency shall identify the condition and submit in writing recommended correctives
for consideration by the Architect/Engineer.
3 . During construction, review those shop drawings which have relevance to performance
verification to confirm that the required piping, ductwork and equipment, and their
respective specialties and accessories such as gauges, valves , dampers, access doors , etc. ,
are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing d balancing
to be accomplished.
4 . Perform site inspections to verify compliance with documents, and observe pressure tests
on ductwork.
5 . perform a complete air and hydronic test and balance of all heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and exhaust air systems and all water and steam systems shown and described
on the Construction Documents and as further described herein.
6. Submit Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report.
fter
7 . Furnish specifications to Contractor for properly sized fixed sheaves on fan systems a
proper RPM has been established.
l . g EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Prior to balancing and testing the new systems, obtain test data on those existing systems which
es
provided
ary) those existing t s ting sysso that they operate at hm
e saconditions u
lance (if and as
nnder wh ch they
were operating prior to the new work.
B . The above test data shall be provided as part of the test and balance report. The test data shall
and temperatures entering and leaving any equipment items
include the water and air flow rates air conditioning system. However, only the
which is part of the existing heating, ventilating and
fluid affected by the new work need be tested (for example, an air handling unit which is
unaffected on its airside but which is affected on its waterside need only have flow ae water data
obtained). Also, if a piping system branch serves a group of units, then only
15981 -2 `
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas .
c. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section to whatever extent
not completed at the shop or prior to installation of casework.
d. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in manner acceptable to
Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural casework being without
damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
e . Caulk top of backsplash at walls with G.E. Silicone Sealant or equal . If wall varies
over 1 /8 " at back splash, the wall is to be re-plastered to correct waves .
f. All casework to receive rubber base at the portion that touched the floor.
* * *END OF SECTION "
12290-8
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorised service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to supervise testing: Report results in writing.
B . Tests: Include the following;
I . Tests recommended by manufacturer.
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 1. 10 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Single-step full-load pickup test.
3 . Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
Perform an integrity load test and a .capacity load test for the ' battery. Verify acceptance
of charge for each element of batteryafter. discharge. Verify measurements are within
manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
S . System Integrity Tests; Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine generator installation before and during system operation.
Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks .
6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer- with 'a scale exceeding 40-inch
wg ( 120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that
back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the
engine.
7. Noise Level Tests : Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from the generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling air intake and discharge, at 25 feet
north, east, south, and west from the generator, and compare measured levels with
required values.
C. Coordinate generator-set test with test for the transfer switch and perform them concurrently.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.
F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 10 of 11
Port Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
3 .3 BATTERY EQUALIZA'T'ION
A• Description; Equalize charging of battery
Record individual cell voltages. cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3 .4 DEMONSTRATION
A• Engage afactory-authorized service representative to train O
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. wner's maintenance personnel to
I • Coordinate with training requirements for transfer switch .
END OF SECTION 1623I
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 11 of I 1
SECTION 13122 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
l
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS :
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to the
work of this section.
1 . 02 DESCRIPTION.
A. Extent of metal building systems work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and
as herein specified.
B . Rigid frame, clear span (RF) is a continuous frame building with a minimum roof
slope of 1 : 12 and a maximum roof slope of 4 : 12 consisting of uniform depth or
tapered columns and rafters. Building roof slopes are called out on building plan
sections .
1 . 03 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS :
A . Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections as required to properly
execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of
other sections, including:
Cast in Place Concrete Section 03300
Unit Masonry Section 04200
Reinforced Unit Masonry Section 04230
Structural Steel Section 05120
Metal Decking - - Section 05300
Rough Carpentry Section 06100
Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07600
Joint Sealers Section 07900
Lay in Panel Ceilings
Painting Section 09510
Section 09900
Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Work Divisions 15 & 16
1 . 04 SUBMITTALS •
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted at the earliest possible date to insure timely
delivery and proper coordination of work by others. No variation from design sizes
will be permitted, but recommendations for modification of connections or details to
better suit fabricator' s shop practice will be considered if specifically directed , in
writing to the attention of the Architect. Detailed shop drawings and design
calculations, prepared by the Building System Manufacturer, shall be signed and
sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
13122-1
existing branch need be measured and not necessarily the flow at each air handling unit served
by the branch (unless measurement at each unit is the only way to obtain the branch total flow).
1 . 9 GUARANTY
A. The T & B Agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and
acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect/Engineer may
request a re-check or re-setting of any system component requiring testing and balancing, The
T & B Agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect/Engineer
in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition
to the A.A. B. C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall also be
provided.
PAR12 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. The tangible product of this section shall include the reports and documentation necessary to
verify the systems' performance.
2.2 REPORT
A. The T & B Agency shall in the course of his work record the information herein specified.
Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system. Recorded data shall
be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Construction
Documents. Four (4) copies of the final report signed, bound and indexed shall be submitted
to the Architect/Engineer for his approval or comments.
B . Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10%
from the design, the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations
for corrective action to the Architect/Engineer for his consideration.
C. In those cases where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent
and/or erroneous, the Architect/Engineer may request additional testing and balancing. The T
& B Agencyshall at no additional cost perform such retesting and rebalancing as directed by and
in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Where, in the opinion of the T & B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise
from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T & B Agency shall note same in the
report and submit recommendations for action to the Architect/Engineer.
E. The T & B Agency shall verify that each thermostat and the devices it is controlling, such as
control valves, motorized dampers, VAV boxes, etc. , operate in the exact sequence required.
F. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report:
15981 -3
Port Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
3 .3 BATTERY EQUALIZA'T'ION
A• Description; Equalize charging of battery
Record individual cell voltages. cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3 .4 DEMONSTRATION
A• Engage afactory-authorized service representative to train O
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. wner's maintenance personnel to
I • Coordinate with training requirements for transfer switch .
END OF SECTION 1623I
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 11 of I 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V
and less, used for disconnecting and protection functions.
B . See Division 16 Section "Fuses " for fuses for fusible disconnect switches.
1 -2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of switch and circuit breaker indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers-
C . Field quality-control test reports .
D. Operation and maintenance data.
\� 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Eaton Corp .; Cutler-Hammer Products .
2. General Electric Co. ; Electrical Distribution & Control Division .
3 . Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 1 of 1
1 . Motors:
Manufacturer
Model and serial number
Rated amperage and voltage
Rated horsepower
Rated RPM
Corrected full load amperage
Measured amperage and voltage
Calculated BHP
Measured RPM
Sheave size, type and manufacturer
2 . Fans:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, BI or Air Foil - number of blades
Rated CFM , measured CFM
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Measured pressures - inlet and Outlet Static Pressure
Pulley size, type and manufacturer
Belt size and quantity
Rated TSP
Operating TSP & operating ESP (at discharge side of _
Supply Fan or suction side of Exhaust/Return Fan)
3 . Pum s:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, impeller size
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Rated head, measured head
Rated pressures
Measured discharge pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured suction pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured GPM
Operating bead
Operating RPM
4 AirSyst als (including inlets and outlets
Provide single. line diagrammatic plan locating each air inlet and outlet and its reference
number.
Grille or diffuser reference number and manufacturer.
Grille or diffuser location.
Design velocity.
Design CFM . r
15981 -4
B . Shop drawings shall include erection plans, details of individual members, and
index sheets . If not approved on submittal, shop drawings shall be corrected and j
resubmitted until final approval of Architect is obtained. Fabrications shall not be
started until shop drawings are approved.
C . Detail drawings shall be submitted for reference only and will not be approved or
disapproved by the Architect.
D . Only shop drawings bearing the Building System Manufacturer' s and Architect' s
(or the Architect' s subcontracted Structural Engineer review stamp) shall be used in
field and all other shop drawings will be considered void.
Work under this section includes
mensions to be
E confirmed in he fabrication processes n gconstruction.
and to t chlelated and
ues of
F . Shop drawings shall include all cutting of members that are required by other trades .
1 . 05 BUILDING ANCHORAGE AND FOUNDATION
A. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column
reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. American
Buildings Company or the approved Building System Manufacturer shall specify
these designs and sizes. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the contractor not the
Building System Manufacturer. `/
B . Refer to Structural Plans and details for engineered foundation and connection
requirements .
1 . 06 STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
A. All structural mill sections or welded up plate sections shall be designed in
accordance with AISC' s latest "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings ."
B . All cold-formed steel structural members shall be designed in accordance with
AISI ' s latest "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members ."
C . Design loads shall be in accordance with the Florida Building Code latest edition
and as per plans .
D . Limit lateral drift of the metal building as indicated on the structural drawings .
1 .07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. GENERAL: Structural assemblies, shop and field welding, shall meet the
requirements of the AISC specifications. The Building System Manufacturer shall
be a member of the MBMA and the building shall conform to MBMA publication
"Metal Building Systems Manual", latest edition. The use of salvaged, reprocessed
or scrap materials shall not be permitted. 13122-2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V
and less, used for disconnecting and protection functions.
B . See Division 16 Section "Fuses " for fuses for fusible disconnect switches.
1 -2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of switch and circuit breaker indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers-
C . Field quality-control test reports .
D. Operation and maintenance data.
\� 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Eaton Corp .; Cutler-Hammer Products .
2. General Electric Co. ; Electrical Distribution & Control Division .
3 . Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance /
4 . Square D Co.
2 .2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A . Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with lockable handle, interlocked with
cover.
B . Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked with cover.
2 .3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A . Molded-Casa Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1 , with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1 . Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers : Inverse time-current element for low- level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2 . Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted; field-adjustable trip setting.
3 . Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers : Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1 , RK-5 .
4 . GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity .
B . Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories : Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and ( _J
number of poles.
1 . Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings , and material of conductors .
2 . Application Listing: Appropriate for application ; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3 . Ground-Fault Protection : Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4 . Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of
rated voltage.
2 .4 ENCLOSURES
A . Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:
1 . Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2 . Food Service Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel .
3 . Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2 of 2
B . WARRANTIES : The Building manufacturer shall supply the following minimum
warranties :
L BUILDING WARRANTY- manufacturer shall certify that all material and/or
accessories are warranted for a period of one year after delivery against failures
caused by faulty or substandard materials or accessories .
2 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARRANTY (Chalk Rating) :
a. Will not chalk for a period often ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
Panels inclined 16 degrees to 85 degrees from vertical, and will not chalk in
excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
b . Will not chalk for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined not more than 15 degrees from vertical, and will
not chalk in excess of a number 8 rating for a period of ten ( 10) years when
tested in accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-659.
3 . ROOF AND SIDEWALL PAINT WARANTY (Fade Rating) :
a. Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on roof
panels inclined 16 degrees to 86 degrees from vertical as determined by the
i procedure outlined in ASTM-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess of 5
delta E (Hunter) units for a period often ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244 .
b . Will not fade for a period of ten ( 10) years from date of shipment on
sidewall panels inclined more than 15 degrees from vertical as determined
by the procedure outlined in ASTIVl-D- 1729-82, and will not fade in excess
of 5 delta E (Hunter) units for a period of ten ( 10) years when tested in
accordance with the procedure outlined in ASTM-D-2244.
4. GALVALUME ROOF PANELS :
a. Will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate within a period of twenty (20)
years after shipment from the building supplier' s plant.
5 . WEATHERTIGHTNESS WARRANTY: The Purchaser and Building Systems
Manufacturer shall warrant to the Original Owner that the purchaser shall
repair, or stop any roof leaks due to ordinary wear and tear by the elements, for
a period of ten ( 10) years following the installation of the completed roof
assembly.
C . INSTALLERS QUALIFICATIONS : The Contractor erecting the metal building
i
shall be thoroughly trained in the Building System Manufacturer' s recommended
methods and procedures as approved by the Building System Manufacturer.
Erecting Contractor shall be licensed or otherwise approved by Building System
Manufacturer.
13122-3
Effective area factor and size-
Measured velocity.
Measured CFM
Terminal Unit CFM
G. Other Report Requirements: Where any systems have equipment or components which are not
covered by the above, then the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following data
as applicable to such equipment or systems to confirm actual operation:
1 . All inlet and outlet areas.
2 . All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions.
4 . All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at appropriate locations.
5 . All speeds.
6 . All voltage and ampere ranges .
7. Descriptions of each test method used.
2 -3 INSTRUMENTATION
A. All test and balance equipment and instruments to be furnished by the T & B Agency shall have
been calibrated within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments
to be used shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to commencing test and balancin
operations and shall include equipment and/or instrumentsg
, name, manufacturer, serial number
and certification of last calibration date. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability
shall be accompanied with manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Test and balance equipment
and instruments furnished by the Contractor to the T & B Agency shall be accompanied with
certification as required above. The T & B Agency shall be responsible for the protection from
damage due to accident, abuse or misuse, all equipment and instruments provided by the
Contractor, and shall return same in good working condition at the completion of the test and
balance work to the Contractor. The T & B Agency shall repair at his expense to original
condition and accuracy or replace with like equipment and instruments damaged in the work.
2.4 DIAGRAMS
A. Provide a schematic diagram (i.e., one-line) of duct system(s) tested. Indicate on the diagram
the relative location of all air distribution devices, VAV boxes, heating/cooling coils, points of
data measurements (i .e., Pitot traverse, temperature, static pressure) fans, airhandling units, and
similar equipment included in the system. Diagram shall identify each component tested. Said
identification shall utilize the conventions shown on the drawings (i. e. , AHU- 1 or SF-6) and
correlate with the data sheets provided in the Test and Balance Report.
J
15981 -5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance /
4 . Square D Co.
2 .2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A . Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with lockable handle, interlocked with
cover.
B . Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked with cover.
2 .3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A . Molded-Casa Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1 , with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1 . Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers : Inverse time-current element for low- level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2 . Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted; field-adjustable trip setting.
3 . Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers : Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1 , RK-5 .
4 . GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity .
B . Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories : Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and ( _J
number of poles.
1 . Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings , and material of conductors .
2 . Application Listing: Appropriate for application ; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3 . Ground-Fault Protection : Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4 . Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of
rated voltage.
2 .4 ENCLOSURES
A . Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:
1 . Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2 . Food Service Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel .
3 . Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. l
A . Temporary Provisions : Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of moving parts.
B . Identify components, provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuits
have been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements .
B . Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers: Make internal and external
inspections and perform tests, including the following :
1 Inspect for freedom from Physical d .
r ) amage, proper unit sating, mechanical condition,
enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances, and tightness of
electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is observed on any unit, check
each electrical connection for each switch and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for
compliance with manufacturer's torquing instructions.
2 . Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase-to-phase, and please-to-ground, following
manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use
500-V minimum test voltage for units and circuits rated up to 250 V, 1000-V minimum
test voltage for units rated more than 250 V . Measured insulation resistance`.inust be 25
megohms, minimum , for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 megohms, minimum, for
switches rated more than 250 V.
1 3 . Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper operation .
l C Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches : Include the following:
1 . Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions.
2 . Check adequacy and integrity of fuseholders by removing and installing fuses`
3 . Check integrity of phase barriers.
4 . Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe adequacy of blade
pressure.
D . Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers: hrclude the following:
1 . Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating.
2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating components for proper operation .
E . Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and reinspect and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16410
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 3 of 3
2. 5 LOGSANDFORMS t l
A. Logs and forms shall clearly indicate following: /
1 . All inlet and outlet areas .
2. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions .
4 . Allfluidvelocities, flowrates, temperaturesandpressuresatsignificantlocations (e.g. , fluid
pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and
return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.).
5 . All fan speeds .
6 . All motor ampere ranges .
7 . Descriptions of each test method used.
B . Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. Sheaves: The Contractor shall provide applicable fans with V-belt drives and fixed pitch
sheaves . In order to provide the properly sized fixed pitces. h sheave, the Contractor shall initially
provide fans with V -belt drives, variable Agency, will replace these adjustable pitch sheaves with fixed
The Contractor, upon completion Of
system balancing by the T p B Ag Y, p enc The Contractor shall tag the
sheaves of the size and type specified by the T & B Agency.
g Y�
adjustable sheaves , transmit same to Owner, and receive written The
by Owner of acceptance
of these sheaves.
B . Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be undertaken with maximum
attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with
ceiling tile in place and enclosing partitions and doors erected.
C . Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal
operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect and Owner.
D. Where patented measuring stations are installed, each of these is to be read and recorded. In the
anometers, annular
hydronic systems, the permanent devices, such as flow tubes with mercury m
ring systems, ventu i tubes with portable meters, etc. must be used for final measurements after
they are completed, calibrated and in satisfactory condition.
i
15981 -6
D . RESPONSIBILITY : The Building System Manufacturer shall be responsible or
engineering design and fabrication to meet the specified Regulatory Requirements
and design loads specific herein. The Building System Manufacturer shall also be
responsible for any damages caused by failure to clearly indicate in their submittals
all structural reactions to the foundation system, including those imposed by
secondary members and bracing. All required engineering documentation shall be
signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.
E . COORDINATION : The metal building supplier shall coordinate, with the
Contractor, all foundation dimensions and proper placement of all anchor bolts and
related items .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. This specification is based on Building Systems and Components as manufactured
by American Buildings Company .
B . Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers include , but are
not limited to the following:
1 . Butler Manufacturing Company _
2 . Ceco Buildings Division
3 . V arco -Pruden Buildings
4 . Metallic Building Company
5 . Whirlwind Building System
6 . Gulf States Manufacturing
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Primary Framing Steel:
1 . Steel for hot-rolled structural sections shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM Specification A-36 .
ld-up sections
be
-PSI minimum yield steel,
2 . Steel or
comparto or exceeding the requirements rablents of ASTM 1570 for sheets and
strips .
B framingSecondary steel to form
struts sections
hall be 5000 mlcomparable to or the
mpurlins ,
requirements of ASTM A570.
C . Roof panel material as specified should be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume
steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield steel and
must meet FBC2003 required impact ratings.
shall be 50,000-PSI. All roof panels
13122-4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. l
A . Temporary Provisions : Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of moving parts.
B . Identify components, provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuits
have been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements .
B . Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers: Make internal and external
inspections and perform tests, including the following :
1 Inspect for freedom from Physical d .
r ) amage, proper unit sating, mechanical condition,
enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances, and tightness of
electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is observed on any unit, check
each electrical connection for each switch and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for
compliance with manufacturer's torquing instructions.
2 . Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase-to-phase, and please-to-ground, following
manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use
500-V minimum test voltage for units and circuits rated up to 250 V, 1000-V minimum
test voltage for units rated more than 250 V . Measured insulation resistance`.inust be 25
megohms, minimum , for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 megohms, minimum, for
switches rated more than 250 V.
1 3 . Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper operation .
l C Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches : Include the following:
1 . Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions.
2 . Check adequacy and integrity of fuseholders by removing and installing fuses`
3 . Check integrity of phase barriers.
4 . Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe adequacy of blade
pressure.
D . Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers: hrclude the following:
1 . Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating.
2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating components for proper operation .
E . Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and reinspect and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16410
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
1 . Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts .
2 - Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
1 . 2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation . Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B . Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures . Indicate dimensions, weights,
methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories .
1 . Include wiring diagrams .
,l C . Product Certificates : For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product
/ manufacturer.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
C. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by FMG.
D. NFPA 101 Compliance : Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
igns.PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
_ product selection :
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page I of 1
D. Wall panel material as specified shall be 242 26, or 28 gauge zinc coated or
galvalume steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A463 . Minimum yield
steel shall be 50,000-PSI. All wall Panels must meet FBC 2003 required impact
ratings .
2 . 03 FABRICATION
A. General :
1 . All framing members shall be shop fabricated for field bolted assembly. The
surfaces of the bolted connections shall be smooth and free from burrs or
distortions .
2 . All shop connections shall be in accordance with the American Welding
Society Code for Building Construction. Certification of welder
qualification will be furnished when required and specified.
3 . All framing members where necessary shall carry an easily visible
identifying mark.
B . Primary Framing:
1 Rigid Frame : All rigid frames shall be welded, built-up "P' sections. The
columns and the rafters may be either uniform depth or tapered.
2 • Plates, stiffeners, etc . : All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners
shall be factory welded into place on the structural members.
3 . Bolt Holes, etc. : All base plates, splice plates and flanges shall be shop
fabricated to include cable brace or rod brace holes and flange brace holes .
C . Secondary Framing:
I • Purlins and girts shall be cold-formed "Z" or "C" sections with stiffened
flanges . They shall be pre-punched at the factory to provide for field bolting
to the rigid frames. They shall be simple or continuous span as required by
design .
2 . Girts supporting masonry at top of walls shall be "F' sections.
3 . Eave struts shall be unequal flange cold-formed "C" sections.
D. Bracing :
1 . Diagonal Bracing in the roof shall be used to remove longitudinal loads
(wind, crane, etc.) from the structure. This bracing will be furnished to
length and equipped with bevel washers and nuts at each end. It will consist
13122-5
3 - 2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY
A. The Contractor, prior to commencement of the balancing by the T & B Agency, shall verify in
writing:
1 . That strainers have been removed and cleaned.
2. That all air filters have been installed and are in clean condition.
3 . That expansion tanks have been inspected and that the system is not air bound and is
completely filled with water.
4. That all air vents at coils and high points of the piping systems have been inspected and are
installed and operating freely.
5. That all automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been left or fixed in the
open position for full flow through all devices.
6. That all linkages between valves or dampers and their actuators are secure.
7. That all pumps and fans are operating at the specified RPM.
B . The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the systems as scheduled for balancing, are
operational and ete
at all
ing
uctwork have been
ressure tested and
accepted and all affemc elpg dpi m syystems have beendcleaned, flushed and refiled with prescribed
1 treated water and vented.
/ 3 . 3 PROTECTION OF WORK
A . The Contractor shall protect all mechanical devices during the testing and balancing period The
activities of the T & B Agency will include but not be limited to the adjustments of designated
balancing devices including; adjustment of balancing dampers, adjustment of inlet vane
dampers, adjustment of air extractors, air splitters, or manual dampers, the adjustment of
adjustable sheaves for fan speed, the adjustment of balancing valves, or similar devices. The
existence of the T & B Agency shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
complete operation of the mechanical systems in conformance with the contract documents.
3 .4 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner rectify discrepancies between the actual
installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T & B Agency the discrepancy
will significantly affect system balance and performance.
3 . 5 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE
A. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by providing all labor, equipment, tools and
material required to operate all of the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and
15981 -7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
1 . Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts .
2 - Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
1 . 2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation . Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B . Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures . Indicate dimensions, weights,
methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories .
1 . Include wiring diagrams .
,l C . Product Certificates : For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product
/ manufacturer.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
C. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by FMG.
D. NFPA 101 Compliance : Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
igns.PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
_ product selection :
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page I of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to , products specified.
2 . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified .
2 .2 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A . Fixture Drawing E-7 :
1 . Available Products:
a. As specified on drawings
2 . Voltage: 120/240-V ac.
3 . Mounting: As specified on drawings
4 . Lamps: As specified on drawings.>
2 .3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A . Description : Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated :
1 . Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
2 . Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3 .0 times the line current .
B . Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise
indicated :
I . Comply with NEMA C82 . 11 .
2 . Ballast Type : Instant start, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently
started lamps .
4 . Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to NEMA C82 . 11 .
5 . Transient Voltage Protection : IEEE C62 .41 , Category A .
6 . Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail .
C . Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Type: Electronic.
2 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3 . Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
4 . Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
D . Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum .
2 . Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum . _
3 . Transient Protection : Comply with IEEE C62 .41 for Category Al locations.
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 2
balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic
or automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each
working day during the period of final testing and balancing. The Contractor shall assist the T
& B Agency by arranging to have all ceilings, partitions, windows, and doors installed prior to
the scheduled commencement of balancing within each specified area.
B . The Contractor shall provide to the approved T & B Agency a complete set ofp lens and
specifications and an approved copy of all heatingventilatingand air conditioning equipment
shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes , as
well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the T &
B Agency.
3 .6 AIR SYSTEMS
A. The testing and balancing shall include, but is not l mited to, the following requirements:
1 . Adjust fan speeds to deliver the required cfm and static pressure, and record rpm and fall
load amperes .
2 . Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts to verify design cfm. Seal duct access holes
with rubber or metal snap-in plugs.
3 . For each supply air system, verify the quantity of outside air and return air when the system
is operating in the maximum cooling and full heating modes. { _
4. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements, and
\._
also adjust so as to minimize drafts in all areas.
5 . Observe all equipment and exposed ductwork for noise, movement or vibration under
normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect/Engineer.
B . After all air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air
quantities and if temperature in any area . (where such area does not have the particular zone
temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees
plus or minus of the zone areas which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then
notify Architect/Engineer of such conditions and obtain approval to rebalance devices to obtain
air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone ill bo reb lance,
e as even as
possible regardless of calculated design air quantities . After obtaining app
rovaperform such necessary rebalancing.
END OF SECTION
15981 - 8
of rods threaded each end with suitable threaded end anchors . l
2 . Flange Braces_ The compression flange of all primary framing shall be
l / J
braced laterally with angles connecting to the webs of purlins or girts so that
the flange compressive stress is within allowable limits for any combination
of loadings .
3 . Special Bracing_ When diagonal bracing is not permitted in the sidewall , a
rigid frame type portal or fixed base column must be used. Wind bracing in
the roof and/or walls need not be furnished where it can be shown that the
diaphragm strength of the roof and/or wall covering is adequate to resist the
applied wind forces.
2 .04 ROOF COVERING
A . General :
1 . Roof Panels shall be American Buildings Company' s, or an approved
equal, Standing Seam II Panel and Loc-Seam Panel with panel widths as
indicated on the plans . Finish shall be galvalume or premium finish as called
out on plans .
2 . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II Roof Panels as specified
shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American �^
Building Company' s Premium 70 nar 500 finish .
3 . American Buildings Company ' s Loc Seam Panels as specified shall be 24 -
gauge zinc coated steel or galvalume steel with American Buildings
Company ' s Premium 70 K nar 500 finish .
NOTE : the profiles, hei hts color and centers called out on the plan sections
and details will take precedence over this spec section descri tion . Technical
descriptions of all other parts of this spec will apply.
B . Panel Description:
] . American Buildings Company' s Standing Seam II roof panel, or an
approved equal, shall have a configuration consisting of 2 " high (3 "
including seam) by 4-3 /4 " wide rib, spaced on 24 " centers . Panels shall be
joined at the side as with and interlocking seam standing 1 " above the major
rib. Each panel shall provide 24" net coverage in width. The female panel
seam shall have factory applied sealant.
2 . American Buildings Company' s Loc Seam Panel shall have a configuration
12" or 16" wide with V or 2 " high vertical male and female ribs. The
female seam shall have factory applied sealant. The panel seam shall be �
mechanically interlocked by a specially designed electric seaming machine .
13122-6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to , products specified.
2 . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified .
2 .2 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A . Fixture Drawing E-7 :
1 . Available Products:
a. As specified on drawings
2 . Voltage: 120/240-V ac.
3 . Mounting: As specified on drawings
4 . Lamps: As specified on drawings.>
2 .3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A . Description : Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated :
1 . Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
2 . Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3 .0 times the line current .
B . Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise
indicated :
I . Comply with NEMA C82 . 11 .
2 . Ballast Type : Instant start, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently
started lamps .
4 . Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to NEMA C82 . 11 .
5 . Transient Voltage Protection : IEEE C62 .41 , Category A .
6 . Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail .
C . Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Type: Electronic.
2 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3 . Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
4 . Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
D . Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum .
2 . Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum . _
3 . Transient Protection : Comply with IEEE C62 .41 for Category Al locations.
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\l
2 .4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A . Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and
yield less than 0 .2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1 .
B . T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI
of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless
otherwise indicated .
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches. 1300
initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K. and average
rated life of 20, 000 hours, unless otherwise indicated .
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps : CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 , average rated life of
10
.000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum) .
3 . T4, Twin Tube : Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum).
5 . T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 900 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum) .
7. T43 Double-Twin Tube : Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum ) .
2 . 5 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
1 A . Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports .
B . Single-Stem Hangers: 1 /2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin -Stem Hangers : Two, 1 /2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D . Wires : ASTM A 641 /A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage wire size>.
E . Wires For Humid Spaces : ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/ 16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod .
G . Hook Hangers : Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page 3 of 3
REIlIStr p Q o 4
B. Panel Length: MAR //
I • All roof panels shall be continuous from cave to ridge,
2. 05 MISCELLANEOUS with no end splices.
A• Fasteners:
I • Structural Bolts_ All bolts used in frame splices and in
secondary framing to primary framing connections ofshall be ASTM A307 or ASTM A325
as required by design,
2• Fasteners for the Roof Panel Clips; All Standing Seam lI and Loc-Seam
Panel clips shall be attached to the purlins by means of self-drilling screws,
made of carbon steel No. 12014 x 1 1/4 " hex washer head, cadmium or zinc
Plated- Insure that the fasteners
blanket insulation 6" thick, ' are applicable for use with fiberglass
3 . All Blind Fasteners shall be 1/8 " diameter, high-strength aluminum pop
rivets Type AAp
4. Fasteners for Wall Panels shall be supplied by panel manufacturer and ma
be exposed, semi-concealed, or concealed, and shall m hex washer head,
cadmium or zinc plated. y
2 .06 PANEL CLIPS
A. Panel Clips for the Standing Seam II Roof Panel shall be expansion clips (SSPC
series), two-part assembly. The clip portion shall be 2 %2" wide. The clip portion
shall be die formed SAE 1050 high carbon spring steel and heat treated to Rockwell
45C to SOC; The clip portion shall have a fluorocarbon coating for corrosion
in heig
resistance. The base portion of the clip shall be 2 '/ " or 3 1_/44" for the
ht and 4 3/4" in width. The base shall be die formed from blocks)
galvanized steel. Total expansion capability of the clip 12 assembly shallgauge u 2Y2 tr.
B . Panel Clips (LSEC series) for the Loc-Seam Panel shall be of a two part assembly.
The clip portion shall be a nominal 2 3/8 " or 3 1 /8 " (for thermal blocks) in height
and 3 " in width. The clip
rmed
galvalume steel. The bashall be diel formed be die18 au 2e gauge zinc coated steel or
expansion capability of the clip shall be 1 1/4", g g galvanized steel. Total
2. 07 SEALANTS
A. Closure strips: The corrugations of the roof panels shall be filled with solid or
ridged-cell, preformed rubb
ridge and rake. er, neoprene or polyethylene closures along the cave,
B . Sealing Compounds shall be as specified by the roofing manufacturer.
13122-7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Raceways .
2 . Building wire and connectors.
3 - Supporting devices for electrical components-
4. Electrical identification -
5 . Utility company electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7 . Electrical demolition .
8 . Cutting and patching for electrical construction .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A - Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components.
B . Shop Drawings : Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single-line
of electricity-metering component assemblies specific to this Project. diagram
1 -3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices
Article 100 , and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
, by a testing agency acceptable to authoriti
intended use . es having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published
standards.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
1 .4 COORDINATION
A Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and
cable with general construction work.
B . Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 of ]
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\l
2 .4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A . Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and
yield less than 0 .2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1 .
B . T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI
of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless
otherwise indicated .
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches. 1300
initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K. and average
rated life of 20, 000 hours, unless otherwise indicated .
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps : CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 , average rated life of
10
.000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum) .
3 . T4, Twin Tube : Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum).
5 . T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 900 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum) .
7. T43 Double-Twin Tube : Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum ) .
2 . 5 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
1 A . Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports .
B . Single-Stem Hangers: 1 /2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin -Stem Hangers : Two, 1 /2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D . Wires : ASTM A 641 /A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage wire size>.
E . Wires For Humid Spaces : ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/ 16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod .
G . Hook Hangers : Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Fixtures : Set level , plumb, and square with ceilings and walls . Install lamps in each fixture .
B . Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings : Use grid for support.
1 . Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2 . Support Clips : Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application .
3 . Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid : Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel , and support fixtures independently with at least two 3 /4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees .
4 . Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3 .
C . Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1 . Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2 . Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3 . Continuous Rows : Use tubing or stein for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4 . Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
D. Air-Handling Fixtures : Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16511
l
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES tt l
overhe
d utiffics and
I _ Coordinate
oordina e Inst Nationing and conne on for service entranceion of s and elgectr ciityround meteringa components. 1, /
rvices,
rs for electrical items
at aye concealed by
D . Cooled sturfaces . Access doors and panels afire sh
specified in other portions of this specification .
fin
ied to
E iWhere eltrical n tallation of identificatioadevices with completion tion devices are lof finished field-finished surfaces, coordinate
d surface
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 RACEWAYS
I C80 .3 , zinc-coated steel , with set-screw fittings .
A . EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANS
B . FMC : Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel .
C . IMC : Intermediate metal conduit; ANSI C80 .6, zinc-coated steel , with threaded fittings .
D . LFMC : Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and
mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
E RMC : Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel ; ANSI C80 . 1 .
C : Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings .
F . g
G . Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used .
2 .2 WIRES , CABLES , AND CONNECTIONS
A . Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper .
B . Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG : Stranded copper. ZHWN or
C . Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V , 75 deg C minimum, Type THW , THHN
USE depending on application . .
D . Wire Correctors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, materia], type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
2 .3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-funned steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B . Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
ameter
C at attmaximum of hannel :
inches c ., edges turned towrd web5
Strengths rating o suidt stra lr slotted holes
tural loading.
i
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 2
C . Panels side laps shall have factory-applied mastic, Chemseco Sealum SM- 5320T
equal . Its composition shall be 85% to 90% solids by weight . Service temperature
range shall be 60 degree F to +225 degree F .
D . Caulk_ All gutter and downspout joints, rake flashing laps, ridge flashing laps shall
be sealed with white pigmented caulk, Sika Sikaflex 201 or equal . It shall meet of
exceed the requirements of Federal Specification TT-S -00230C, Type II, Class A.
2 . 08 GUTTER FLASHING AND DOWNSPOUT
A. Gutters and Flashing : All standard exterior gutters are 24-gauge aluminum coated
steel with a pre-painted finish in white. Standard rake flashing is 26-gauge
aluminum coated steel with a pre-painted finish in white. In no case shall flashing
be less than 26 gauge steel . Sizes as called out on plans.
B . Downspouts : All downspouts shall be 28 -gauge aluminum coated steel with color
coordinated, pre-painted finish, rectangular in shape .
2 . 09 STRUCTURAL PAINTING
A . All steel framing members shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and lose scale and
given one mil coat of red oxide primer prior to being delivered to the job site.
Primer shall meet or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification
TT-P636D . Primer is not intended as a finish coat.
B . Abrasions caused by handling after painting are to be expected . Primer shall be
famished to touch-up these areas by the contractor performing field touch-up of
field painting as specified in the contract documents .
C . Any interior primary structural steel members to receive spray on fire protection
shall not be shop primed. Priming voids the UL Assembly rating.
2 . 10 PANEL FINISH
A. Base Metal shall be 24-gauge zinc coated steel .
B . Prime Coat: The base metal shall be pretreated and then primed with an approved
epoxy primer per the metal roofing suppliers standard paint specification.
C . Exterior Coat_ After priming, the exterior side shall be given a finish coat of a 70%
minimum Kynar 500 (PVF2) formulation. The topcoat thickness shall be . 8 mils
minimum. The total film thickness shall be . 9 mils to 1 . 1 mils .
D . Finish shall meet or exceed the following:
I . Accelerated Weathering: No noticeable chalking, fading, loss of adhesion or
other coating deterioration after 2,000 hours (ASTM G-23) .
13122-8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Fixtures : Set level , plumb, and square with ceilings and walls . Install lamps in each fixture .
B . Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings : Use grid for support.
1 . Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2 . Support Clips : Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application .
3 . Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid : Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel , and support fixtures independently with at least two 3 /4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees .
4 . Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3 .
C . Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1 . Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2 . Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3 . Continuous Rows : Use tubing or stein for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4 . Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
D. Air-Handling Fixtures : Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16511
l
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 4
SECTION 16715
�l
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hems for wiring systems used as signal pathways t'urvoice and
high-speed data transmission:
1 . Mounting elements.
2. Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
3 . Fiber-optic cabling.
4. Workstation outlets .
5 . Backboards.
6. Identification products.
\ B . Related Sections include the following:
/) 1 . Division 13 Section " Security Access" for data transmission meeting RS-232 and RS-485
cabling associated with system panels and devices.
2 . Division 16 Sections "AudioNideo Cabling".
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backbone: A facility (e. g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between telecommunications rooms or
floor distribution terminals , the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms within or between
buildings.
B . BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Cross,Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. Horizontal Cabling: Cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and
the horizontal cross-connect. Also the cabling between and including the building automation
system outlet or the first mechanical terminations on the horizontal connection point and the
horizontal cross-connect.
16715 - I
2 . Humidity Resistance_ Less than 5 % of 48 blisters or no loss of adhesion
i
after 1 ,000 hours at 100% relative humidity, 100 degree F (ASTM D2247) .
3 . Adhesion: No coating was removed when tested according to ASTM D3359 .
4. Abrasion Resistance_ The coating shall have a coefficient of abrasion of
65 "/- 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-0968-81 , falling
sand abrasion test.
5 . Specular Gloss : The gloss rating shall be 24-35 units on a 60-degree gloss
meter when tested in accordance with ASTM method D-523 -80 .
6 . Color Retention: Maximum 4E units (Hunter) color change (STM D659).
7 . Chalk Resistance : Minimum rating of 9, (ASTM D659).
8 . Hardness : The coating shall have a minimum hardness of HB -H using Eagle
Turquoise pencils, (ASTM D3363 ).
9. Salt Spray_ The coating has been tested in a 5 % sodium chloride salt spray
for 1000 hours at 95 degrees F . , with less than 3/ 16 " creepage from the
scribe and less than 5 % no. 6 blisters . (ASTM BI 17) . `
E . The interior finish shall have one of the following :
1 . A gray polyester topcoat over an epoxy primer
2 . A . 15 mil epoxy primer and . 35 mil off-white backer
3 A wash coat of 70% Kynar resin of .03 to . 04 mil, dry film thickness over
primer.
4 . A polyester paint, not formulated for exterior weathering, of 1 mil minimum
total thickness over primer, or
5 . An acrylic wash coat, dry film thickness of . 3 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 GENERAL
A. Erection practices shall conform to Section 6, Common Industry Practices found in
the "Low Rise Building Systems Manual", MBMA 1986 . There shall be no field
modifications to primary structural members except as authorized.
3 . 02 ERECTION
-J A. The erection of the metal building and the installation of accessories shall be
13122-9
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
D. Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle : Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/ ] 6-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories : Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the
type and size of channel with which used .
1 - Materials : Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel .
F. Raceway and Cable Supports : Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-
type hangers.
G . Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53 , Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel , plain ends.
H . Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarnored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish .
L Expansion Anchors : Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
J . Toggle Bolts : All-steel springhead type.
K . Powder-Driven Threaded Studs : Heat-treated steel .
2 . 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A . Identification Device Colors : Use those prescribed by ANSI A13 . 1 , NFPA 70, and .these
Specifications.
B . Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables : Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
C . Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
D. Color-Coding Cable Ties : Type 6/6 nylon,- self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape
compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and with the following features :
1 • Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2 . Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
3 Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates : Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1 / 16-inch minimum thickness for signs up
l to 20 sq . in. and 1 /8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 16715
�l
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hems for wiring systems used as signal pathways t'urvoice and
high-speed data transmission:
1 . Mounting elements.
2. Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
3 . Fiber-optic cabling.
4. Workstation outlets .
5 . Backboards.
6. Identification products.
\ B . Related Sections include the following:
/) 1 . Division 13 Section " Security Access" for data transmission meeting RS-232 and RS-485
cabling associated with system panels and devices.
2 . Division 16 Sections "AudioNideo Cabling".
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backbone: A facility (e. g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between telecommunications rooms or
floor distribution terminals , the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms within or between
buildings.
B . BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Cross,Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. Horizontal Cabling: Cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and
the horizontal cross-connect. Also the cabling between and including the building automation
system outlet or the first mechanical terminations on the horizontal connection point and the
horizontal cross-connect.
16715 - I
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G . LAN : Local area network.
H. RCDD : Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. RMC : Rigid metallic conduit.
j . UTP : Unshielded twisted pair.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For features , ratings , and performance of each component specified.
B . Shop Drawings :
1 . Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of telecommunications equipment rooms,
labeling each individual component. Show equipment rack assemblies, method of field
assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections .
2 . System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules , in software and format
selected by Owner.
3 . - Cabling Administration Drawings.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics includ ng the following:
a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies. �.
b. Patch cords .
C. Patch panels.
d. Fiber-optic boxes .
e. Distribution racks.
f. Terminal racks.
1 .5 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Cabling installer must have on staff personnel certified by BICSI.
1 . Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings , Cabling Administration Drawings,
and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2 . Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Proj ect
site.
1 .6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with School Board' s
MIS team and equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with
local exchange carrier.
16715-2 _
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES ll
J
G . Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted ; comply with 29 CFR 1910 . 145 , Chapter XVII . Co ors,
legend, and size appropriate to each application .
1 . Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel -finish , punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners. cellulose-acetate butyrate with
2 . Exterior Units: Weather-resistant; nonfading, preprinted,
0 .0396-inch, galvanized-steel backing. 1 /4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
H . Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers .
2 . 5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY' S ELECTRICITY METERING
A . Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for meter socket .
2 . 6 CONCRETE BASES
Materials : As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
A . Concrete Forms and Reinforcement
Place Concrete . "
B . Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength -
PART 3 EXECUTION
trength .PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A . Headroom Maintenance : if mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom .
B . Materials and Components: Install level , plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated .
C . Equipment : Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components .
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations .
D . Right of Way : Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3 .2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoor Installations:
1 . Exposed: RNC .
2 . Concealed: RNC .
3 . Underground, Single Run: RNC .
4 . Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated .
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 4 of 4
performed in accordance with erection drawings by a qualified erector using proper
tools and equipment. )
B . Columns and Struts shall be accurately aligned and beams set to correct level or
slope using Surveyor' s transit and levels and referring to permanent bench marks.
Struts and columns shall be kept ph during erection for which all temporary
braces, guys, and temporary beams shall be installed and kept in place until work is
properly secured. Individual pieces shall be considered plumb or level when the
variation does not exceed 1 to 500 and 1 to 1000 for exterior columns .
C . The Contractor shall provide all necessary additional bracing, beams, temporary
struts, ties, guys, clip angles, etc., that may be required to erect the structural frame
and maintain it in alignment until the building is completed.
D . Welding and Bolting of all connection shall follow the setting of the steel as closely
as plumbing and alignment will permit.
E. Any variation from the work, as shown on the drawings, which may occur during
erection shall be reported to the Architect for adjustment and work not affected by
such variation shall be continued until the Architect has rendered a decision .
F . Utmost care shall be taken in erecting steel to avoid endangering the structure,
construction personnel, or other personnel of the Owner or Architect or personnel
having legitimate business at the site . Location of supports for derricks, hoists,
rigging or materials, shall be carefully studies and shall be reviewed by the
Architect if any questions arise .
G . Flame cutting of structural steel in the field by any Contractor will not be allowed
except with the specific written permission of the Architect.
* * *END OF SECTION * * *
13122-10
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G . LAN : Local area network.
H. RCDD : Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. RMC : Rigid metallic conduit.
j . UTP : Unshielded twisted pair.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For features , ratings , and performance of each component specified.
B . Shop Drawings :
1 . Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of telecommunications equipment rooms,
labeling each individual component. Show equipment rack assemblies, method of field
assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections .
2 . System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules , in software and format
selected by Owner.
3 . - Cabling Administration Drawings.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics includ ng the following:
a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies. �.
b. Patch cords .
C. Patch panels.
d. Fiber-optic boxes .
e. Distribution racks.
f. Terminal racks.
1 .5 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Cabling installer must have on staff personnel certified by BICSI.
1 . Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings , Cabling Administration Drawings,
and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2 . Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Proj ect
site.
1 .6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with School Board' s
MIS team and equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with
local exchange carrier.
16715-2 _
} I . Meetjointly with School Board' s MIS team and equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier
representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants.
3 . Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross-connect and patch panels
in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2 .2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B . Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs in
cables, positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate at
minimum 25 percent future increase in the number of workstations shown on Drawings. This
expansion requirement does not apply to horizontal cable from workstation outlet to first terminal
board.
2 . 3 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A. Backboards : 3/4'-inch, interior-grade, free-retardant-treated plywood.
B . Distribution Racks: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for
telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
1 . Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard 19 -inch panel mounting.
2. Finish: Baked-polyester powder coat.
C . Power Strips: For mounting in the rack, with 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R
receptacles, number as indicated, but in no case fewer than 6, and including the following:
I . LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
3 . Circuit breaker and thermal fusing. Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost.
16715 -3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15055 - COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hanger and Pipe Attachments: Factory fabricated with galvanized coatings; nonmetallic
coated for hangers in direct contact with copper tubing.
B . Building Attachments : Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval
for fire-protection systems.
C . Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials; UL listing and FM approval for fire-
protection systems .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping free of sags and bends .
B . Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections .
C . Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
concrete floor, and roof slabs.
D. Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations : Mechanical sleeve seals installed in steel or cast-iron pipes
for wall sleeves.
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations : Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material specified
in Division 7. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of
equipment.
F. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas,
compressed air, and vacuum piping.
G . Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings .to . connect -piping materials of dissimilar metals in
water and steam piping.
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page ] of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Indoor Installations :
I - Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC .
2 . Concealed in Walls or Ceilings : EMT.
3 . In Concrete Slab: EMT.
4 . Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RNC
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations : LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 , unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A . Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and
floors .
B . Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel .
C . Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or woven
Polypropylene or monofilament plastic Line with not less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensile strenh .
Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires . gt
E . Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN 53) and smaller, in
maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent Add
pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.
F. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration , noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. ---Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections .
G . Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface .
3 .4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A . Application : Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as
interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Exposed Feeders : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
C . Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
D. Concealed Feeders in Concrete, below Floors on Grade, in Crawlspaces: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single
J conductors in raceway.
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 5 of 5
} I . Meetjointly with School Board' s MIS team and equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier
representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants.
3 . Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross-connect and patch panels
in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2 .2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B . Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs in
cables, positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate at
minimum 25 percent future increase in the number of workstations shown on Drawings. This
expansion requirement does not apply to horizontal cable from workstation outlet to first terminal
board.
2 . 3 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A. Backboards : 3/4'-inch, interior-grade, free-retardant-treated plywood.
B . Distribution Racks: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for
telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
1 . Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard 19 -inch panel mounting.
2. Finish: Baked-polyester powder coat.
C . Power Strips: For mounting in the rack, with 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R
receptacles, number as indicated, but in no case fewer than 6, and including the following:
I . LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
3 . Circuit breaker and thermal fusing. Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost.
16715 -3
4. Direct plug-in cord connected with 15 -foot line cord.
5 . Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
6 . Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 33 kA per phase.
7 . Protection modes shall be line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground. UL 1449
clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V.
8 . One RJ11 / 12C telephone line protector, suitable for modem connection. Maximum
clamping voltage 220 peak on pins No. 3 and No. 4.
D, Wall-Mounting Rack: Aluminum, hinged wall bracket with provisions for power strip mounting.
E. Floor-Mounting Rack: Steel, freestanding, modular, with vertical and horizontal cable
management channels, top and bottom cable troughs , and grounding lug.
2 .4 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
A. Available Cable Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2 . Belden Inc. ; Electronics Division-
3 . KRONE Incorporated.
B . Terminal and Connector Component and Distribution Rack Manufacturers :
I . AMP ; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.
2 . Avaya Inc . 1
3 . Hom2cO. \
4 . KRONE Incorporated.
5 . Panduit Corp.
C . 100-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG, number of pairs as required, minimum 25 pairs.
2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIABIA-568 -B .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, type CMR complying with UL 1666.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG , 100 ohm, four pair.
2 . Comply with TIA/EIA-568-11 .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, types CMG and CMP.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
r
16715-4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
I below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in
G . Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete,
raceway .
H . Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway .
3 . 5 WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Make taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
3 .6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A . Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hct-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel
system components.
B . Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C . Strength least four f Su po Ib m Adequate
design carry preset nd future rt loads, times a safety factor of at
3 .7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A . Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 1\
B . Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent 1
minimum in the future.
C . Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps .
lled
D . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls my and fire-rated
holes are used . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies . Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods
unless other fastening methods are indicated :
I Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails.
2 . Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of
wall .
3 . Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around
sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall .
4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts . powder charge and
S . Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts or threaded studs driven by p
provided with lock washers.
6 . Structural Steel : Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock l
washers.
7 . Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws.
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 6 of 6
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
3 .2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A . Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel . Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
B Install powder-actuated
drive-pin ess than 4inches (100 mm)
sin concrete rtho k rete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concreten slab
C . Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is cured . Do not use in
lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches ( 100 mm) thick.
D . Support fire-protection system piping independent of other piping.
E. Load Distribution : Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
END OF SECTION 15055
15055 COMMON PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2
4. Direct plug-in cord connected with 15 -foot line cord.
5 . Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
6 . Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 33 kA per phase.
7 . Protection modes shall be line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground. UL 1449
clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V.
8 . One RJ11 / 12C telephone line protector, suitable for modem connection. Maximum
clamping voltage 220 peak on pins No. 3 and No. 4.
D, Wall-Mounting Rack: Aluminum, hinged wall bracket with provisions for power strip mounting.
E. Floor-Mounting Rack: Steel, freestanding, modular, with vertical and horizontal cable
management channels, top and bottom cable troughs , and grounding lug.
2 .4 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
A. Available Cable Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2 . Belden Inc. ; Electronics Division-
3 . KRONE Incorporated.
B . Terminal and Connector Component and Distribution Rack Manufacturers :
I . AMP ; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.
2 . Avaya Inc . 1
3 . Hom2cO. \
4 . KRONE Incorporated.
5 . Panduit Corp.
C . 100-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG, number of pairs as required, minimum 25 pairs.
2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIABIA-568 -B .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, type CMR complying with UL 1666.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG , 100 ohm, four pair.
2 . Comply with TIA/EIA-568-11 .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, types CMG and CMP.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
r
16715-4
F . Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B .2 , IDC type, using modules designed
1 for punch-down caps or tools.
1 . IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and j acks
where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
G . Cross-Connect Panel: Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables
and permit interconnection between cables.
1 . Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables plus 25 percent
spare.
H. Patch Panel: Comply with TIA/EIA-568 -13 .2, meeting or exceeding cable performance. Modular
panels housing multiple-numbered j ack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for pentianeut
termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1 . Number of Jacks per Field : One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus
spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
2 . 5 FIBER-OPTIC CABLING
A . Cable, Terminal, and Connector Product Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2. Berk-Tek; an Alcatel Company.
3 . Chromatic Technologies; a Draka USA Company.
4. Coming Cable Systems.
5 . Panduit Corp.
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: 62 .5/ 125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber.
C . Backbone Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on the drawings .
1 . Comply with TLVEIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2 . NFPA 70, Type OFN complying with UL 1666 .
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 .50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 .25 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
D. Horizontal Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on drawings .
1 . Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2. NFPA 70, Types OFN and OFNP as required.
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 . 50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 . 0 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4 . Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
16715 -5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
li SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Summary: Mechanical insulation includes pipe and duct insulation for indoor applications .
B . Submit Product Data for each type of mechanical insulation
C . Quality Assurance : UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum
smoke- developed rating of 50 according to ASTM E 84 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPE INSULATION
A. Preformed Glass-Fiber Pipe insulation : ASTM C 547, Class 1 , jacketed, with a k-value of
0.26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 10 16/cu. ft.
( 160 kg/cu . m) .
B . Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0 .30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
2 .2 DUCT AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Glass-Fiber Insulation : ASTM C 612, Class 113, semirigid, jacketed board with a k-value of
0 .26 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature and an average maximum density of 12 Ib/cu . fr.
( 192 kg/cu. m).
B . Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation : ASTM C 553 , Type II, Class F1 , jacketed blankets with a k-
value of 0.31 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Sheet Insulation : ASTM C 534, Type 1, closed-cell insulation
with a k-value of 0.30 at 75 deg F (23 deg C) mean temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F
( 15 deg C).
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 1 of I
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
l 8 . Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations : Stainless steel .
9. Light Steel : Sheet-metal screws.
10. Fasteners : Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load .
3 . 8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A . Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B . Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards . Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C . Self-Adhesive Identification Products : Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for
voltage and phase identification .
E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and
communication lines . Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall; use a
1 single line marker.
F . Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 191`0. 145,
Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of items to which they connect . Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation . Install
metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
G . Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations .
3 .9 ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements .
Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.
3 . 10 FIRESTOPPrNTG
A . Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.
Firestopping installation is specified in other sections of these specifications.
3 . 11 CONCRETE BASES
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 7 of 7
F . Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B .2 , IDC type, using modules designed
1 for punch-down caps or tools.
1 . IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and j acks
where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
G . Cross-Connect Panel: Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables
and permit interconnection between cables.
1 . Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables plus 25 percent
spare.
H. Patch Panel: Comply with TIA/EIA-568 -13 .2, meeting or exceeding cable performance. Modular
panels housing multiple-numbered j ack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for pentianeut
termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1 . Number of Jacks per Field : One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus
spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
2 . 5 FIBER-OPTIC CABLING
A . Cable, Terminal, and Connector Product Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2. Berk-Tek; an Alcatel Company.
3 . Chromatic Technologies; a Draka USA Company.
4. Coming Cable Systems.
5 . Panduit Corp.
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: 62 .5/ 125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber.
C . Backbone Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on the drawings .
1 . Comply with TLVEIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2 . NFPA 70, Type OFN complying with UL 1666 .
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 .50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 .25 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
D. Horizontal Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on drawings .
1 . Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2. NFPA 70, Types OFN and OFNP as required.
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 . 50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 . 0 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4 . Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
16715 -5
E. Cross-Connect and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable )
connectors.
1 . Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
F- Patch Cords : Factory-made, dual fiber cables in 36-inch lengths and/or directed by MIS team.
G . Cable Connecting Hardware:
I . Comply with TLA/EIA-568-B .3 .
2 . Quick-connect, simplex- and duplex-Type Sc couplers . Insertion loss not morethan 0 .7 dB .
3 . Type SFE connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages .
2. 6 WORKSTATION OUTLETS
A. Jacks : 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, modular, RJ-45 . Comply with
T A/EIA-568-B . 1 -
B . Workstation. outlets: . Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single ,or multi gang faceplate.
1 . Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
3 - Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying the circuit.
C . Flush dual fiber-optic connector assemblies mounted int-gangfaceplatewithflush dual RJ-45jack
assembly.
1 . Faceplate: Higb-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated- the circuit.
3 . Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying
2 .7 BACKBOARDS
A. A-C , void-free plywood, 84 inches high and 314-inch thick, fire rated. Paint both sides with (2) two
coats of white fire-retardant paint.
2. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Materials: Comply with NFPA 70 , TLVEIA-607 , and UL 467 .
2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . Brady Worldwide, Ine-
t
16715 -6 �. _
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer' s anchorage 1
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated .
3 . 12 DEMOLITION
A . Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain . If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality .
B . Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety .
to
C Abandoned
7 ncs below the surk: Cut rface indicated remove buried raceway and wiring, babandoned
in
rf ce of adjacentacent co struction . Cap r cewaysndpath surfac
place, 2hee to
match existing finish .
D . Remove, store, clean , reinstall , reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3 . 13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
-s walls , ats othei involved .surfaces required to
A Cut, channel,hase, and
d , fed ceilings, and
tirades
permt elctri alsPerform cutting
B . Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces .
END OF SECTION 16050
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 8 of 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
B . Insulate fittings, valves, and specialties.
C . Seal vapor-barrier penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections.
D . Coat glass-fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor-barrier coating.
E. Seal ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with adhesive .
F . Roof Penetrations : Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the top of
the roof flashing.
G . Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal .
H . Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
I . Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations : Terminate insulation at penetrations through
fire-rated walls and partitions . Seal around penetration with firestopping specified in
Division 7 .
J . Floor Penetrations : Terminate insulation at the underside of the . floor p assembly and at the
floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with firesto n s ecified in Division 7 .
K. Glass-Fiber Insulation Installation : Bond insulation to pipe with adhesive. Seal seams and \
joints with vapor-barrier compound .
L . Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation : Seal joints with adhesive.
M . Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following Piping systems:
1 . Domestic hot water.
2 . Recirculated domestic hot water.
3 . Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water piping.
4 . Exposed sanitary drains for handicapped accessible fixtures.
5 . Hydronic heating and cooling piping.
6 . Refrigerant suction piping.
N . Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Flexible connectors .
2 . Fire-protection piping systems .
3 . Sanitary drainage and vent piping.
4 . Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated .
5 . Below-grade piping.
6 . Chrome-plated-pipes and fittings, -except-for plumbing fixtures for the disabled.
7 . Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,
and flow regulators.
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 2 of 2
E. Cross-Connect and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable )
connectors.
1 . Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
F- Patch Cords : Factory-made, dual fiber cables in 36-inch lengths and/or directed by MIS team.
G . Cable Connecting Hardware:
I . Comply with TLA/EIA-568-B .3 .
2 . Quick-connect, simplex- and duplex-Type Sc couplers . Insertion loss not morethan 0 .7 dB .
3 . Type SFE connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages .
2. 6 WORKSTATION OUTLETS
A. Jacks : 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, modular, RJ-45 . Comply with
T A/EIA-568-B . 1 -
B . Workstation. outlets: . Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single ,or multi gang faceplate.
1 . Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
3 - Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying the circuit.
C . Flush dual fiber-optic connector assemblies mounted int-gangfaceplatewithflush dual RJ-45jack
assembly.
1 . Faceplate: Higb-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated- the circuit.
3 . Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying
2 .7 BACKBOARDS
A. A-C , void-free plywood, 84 inches high and 314-inch thick, fire rated. Paint both sides with (2) two
coats of white fire-retardant paint.
2. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Materials: Comply with NFPA 70 , TLVEIA-607 , and UL 467 .
2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . Brady Worldwide, Ine-
t
16715 -6 �. _
2. HellermannTyton.
3 . Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B . Comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
C_ Cable Labels : Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers , machine printed with
alphanumeric cable designations.
2. 10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Coaxial Cable: Each cable spool sweep tested at the factory before shipping at frequencies from
5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a
cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through specified frequency range and
graphing the results .
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: Each cable spool tested at factory before shipping at 850 and 1300 nm. Test
and inspect OTDR according to TIA/EIA TSB-67 .
C . UTP Cable Verification of Performance: Test every cable package or reel at factory to verify that
cable complies with TLA/EIA-568-B .2 requirements .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BICSI TCI, TWEIA-568-13. 1 , TIAlEIA-568 -8 . 2, TWEIA-568-13.3 , and
TLA/EIA-569-A.
3 .2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
1 . Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed
complying with EMI clearance requirements.
2 . Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using
products labeled for type of wall penetrated.
3 . Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of
individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures
is adequate for each pathway.
4 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16715 -7
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials
and thicknesses:
1 Domestic Hot Water and Recirculated Hot Water: 1 /2-inch ( 12 . 7-mm) flexible
elastomeric pipe insulation.
2 . Sanitary Drains and Storm Water Piping: 1 /2-inch ( 12 .7-mm) flexible elastomeric pipe
insulation .
B . Install duct insulation as follows:
1 . Install insulation continuously on ducts that penetrate walls and floors, except at fire-
rated assemblies terminate insulation at the assembly. Maintain insulation vapor
retarder on cold duct.
2 . Install removable or segmented insulation on access panel and doors.
3 . Install vapor barriers on insulated ducts and plenums with surface operating
temperatures below 60 deg F ( 15 deg C) . Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor
barrier on insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
4 Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation
requiring a vapor harrier.
5 . Taper glass-fiber insulation ends at a 45-degree angle and seal with adhesive. Cut ends
of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive.
6 . Board Insulation Installation : Secure insulation tight and smooth with speed washers
and anchor pins. Space anchor pins 18 inches (450 mm) apart each way . and 3 inches
(76 mm) from insulation joints. Apply vapor-barrier coating compound to insulation in
1 contact, open joints, breaks, punctures, and voids in vapor barrier.
7. Blanket Insulation Installation : Bond ducts having long sides or diameters smaller than
24 inches (610 mm) with bonding adhesive applied in 6-inch- ( 150-mm-) wide
transverse strips on 12-inch (300-mm) centers. Bond ducts having long sides or
diameters 24 inches (610 mm) and larger with anchor pins spaced 12 inches (300 mm)
apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of insulation . Overlap
joints 3 inches (76 mm). Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor-barrier
compound .
C . Duct System Applications : Insulate indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ducts.
D. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:
1 . Fibrous glass ducts.
2 . Metal ducts with duct liner.
3 . Factory- insulated flexible ducts.
4 . Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections .
5 . Flexible connectors .
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing laboratory labels and stamps.
8 . Nameplates and data plates .
E. Duct_ Insulation_ Thickness --and -Application Schedule: Insulate ducts with the following
materials and thicknesses :
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For ground rods .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
% B - Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2 .
C . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system:
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.
2 . Boggs, Inc.
3 . Chance/Hubbell .
4. Copperweld Corp.
5 . Dessert Corp.
6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
7. Framatome ConnectorsBurndy Electrical .
8 . Galvan Industries, Inc.
9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 1 of ]
2. HellermannTyton.
3 . Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B . Comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
C_ Cable Labels : Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers , machine printed with
alphanumeric cable designations.
2. 10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Coaxial Cable: Each cable spool sweep tested at the factory before shipping at frequencies from
5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a
cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through specified frequency range and
graphing the results .
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: Each cable spool tested at factory before shipping at 850 and 1300 nm. Test
and inspect OTDR according to TIA/EIA TSB-67 .
C . UTP Cable Verification of Performance: Test every cable package or reel at factory to verify that
cable complies with TLA/EIA-568-B .2 requirements .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BICSI TCI, TWEIA-568-13. 1 , TIAlEIA-568 -8 . 2, TWEIA-568-13.3 , and
TLA/EIA-569-A.
3 .2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
1 . Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed
complying with EMI clearance requirements.
2 . Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using
products labeled for type of wall penetrated.
3 . Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of
individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures
is adequate for each pathway.
4 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16715 -7
3 3 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A . Backbone Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between
equipment rooms and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
B . Backbone Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between equipment rooms
and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
C . Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between wiring
closets and workstation outlets .
D. Horizontal Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between wiring closets
and workstation outlets .
3 .4 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 .
B . Wiring Metbod: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces . Cable trays are specified
in Division 16 Section "Cable Trays ." Raceways and boxes are specified in Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes . "
C . Wiring Method: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where
unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, /
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. Cable trays
including plenum ceilings.
'Cable Trays . " Raceways and boxes are specified in
are specified in Division 16 Section
Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes ."
D. Cable Installation:
I . Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members
and follow surface contours where possible.
2 . Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect
and patch panels.
3 , Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's written recommended pulling tensions. Do
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
5 . Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches
from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames , and terminals.
16715-8
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
10 . Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc . (,
I ] . Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
12 . Ideal Industries, Inc _
13 . ILSCO .
14 , Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
15 . Korns, C . C. Co .; Division of Robroy Industries .
16 . Lightning Master Corp .
17 . Lyncole XIT Grounding.
18 . O-Z/Gedney CO . ; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
19 . Raco, Inc . ; Division of Hubbell .
20 . Robbins Lightning, Inc.
21 . Salisbury, W . H . & Co .
22 . Superior Grounding Systems, Inc .
23 . Thomas & Betts, Electrical .
2 .2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A . For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
B . Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation .
C . Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe . On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow . (^
D . Grounding Electrode Conductors : Stranded cable . i
E. Underground Conductors : Bare, tinned, stranded , unless otherwise indicated.
F . Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors : ASTM B 3 .
G . Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8 .
H . Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33 .
1 . Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
J . Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
K . Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution : No . 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
M . Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
N . Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467 ; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items . Exothermic-welded Type, in kit form, (!
selected per manufacturer's written instructions .
] 6060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 2 of 2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
1 . Concealed Applications: Fiberglass blanket, 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm) thick or Fiberglass {\ 1
board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick. J
2. Exposed Applications : Fiberglass board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 15080
15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Page 4 of 4
3 3 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A . Backbone Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between
equipment rooms and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
B . Backbone Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between equipment rooms
and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
C . Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between wiring
closets and workstation outlets .
D. Horizontal Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between wiring closets
and workstation outlets .
3 .4 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 .
B . Wiring Metbod: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces . Cable trays are specified
in Division 16 Section "Cable Trays ." Raceways and boxes are specified in Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes . "
C . Wiring Method: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where
unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, /
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. Cable trays
including plenum ceilings.
'Cable Trays . " Raceways and boxes are specified in
are specified in Division 16 Section
Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes ."
D. Cable Installation:
I . Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members
and follow surface contours where possible.
2 . Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect
and patch panels.
3 , Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's written recommended pulling tensions. Do
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
5 . Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches
from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames , and terminals.
16715-8
6. Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and
linked signal paths, end to end.
a. Do not untwist more than 1/2 inch of Category 6 cables at connector terminations.
7 . Outdoor Coaxial Cable:
a. Outdoor connections shall be installed in enclosures complying with NEMA 250,
Type 4X. Connectors shall be corrosion resistant with properly designed O-rings to
keep out moisture.
b. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.
E: Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures:
1 . Install plywood backboards on walls of equipment rooms and wiring closets from floor to
ceiling or as directed by MIS team.
2. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards and
floor-mounted racks.
3 . Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
4. Train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
5 . Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
F. Separation from EMI Sources : Comply with BICSI TDM and TLA/EIA-569-A recommendations
for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment. Comply with the following minimum separation
distances from possible sources of EMI:
I . Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open
cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 12 inches .
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 24 inches.
2. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to cables
in grounded metallic raceways is as follows :
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2- 1/2 inches .
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 6 inches.
C . Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches.
3 . Separation between power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic
conduits or enclosures in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
16715 -9
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. End Connections : Threads shall comply with ANSI B1 .20. 1 . Flanges shall comply with ANSI
1316. 1 for cast-iron valves and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall
comply with ANSI 816. 18 .
B . Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-bronze body and bonnet; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc,
copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland , "Teflon " impregnated packing, and malleable-
iron handwheel .
C. Ball Valves : Rated for 150-psig ( 1035 -kPa) saturated steam pressure, 400-psig (2760-kPa)
WOG pressure; 2-piece construction; with bronze body, standard (or regular) port, chrome-
" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem
plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon " or "TFE , and
vinyl-covered steel handle .
D. Plug Valves : Rated at 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern,
square head, and threaded ends.
E . Globe Valves: Class 125 ; body and screwed cast-bronze bonnet; with threaded or solder ends,
brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon "
impregnated packing, and malleable-iron handwheel .
F. Swing Check Valves : Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
and bronze disc; and with threaded or solder ends .
G. Valves for Copper Tube: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water and
low-pressure steam service.
H. Valves for Steel Pipe: Threaded ends .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Use gate and ball valves forshutoffduty;--globe -and ballforthrottling duty.
i B . Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support pport where necessary.
15110 VALVES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. \ 2 .3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A Ground Rods : Sectional type; copper-clad steel .
I . Size: ''/<" in diameter by 120 inches per section .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials .
B . In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors .
C . Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections.
D . Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated .
1 . Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches''above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1 2 - At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and
down to the indicated height above the floor.
E. Underground Grounding Conductors : Use copper conductor, No . 2/0 AWG minimum . Bury at
least 24 inches below grade .
F. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and
quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larer
nductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicasizes, or more
ted . g
I . Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in feeders and branch circuits .
2 . Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
3 . Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-
circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units .
4 . Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits : Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor
from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service
, unless
Otherwise indicated .
5 . Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits : For designated equipment supplied by a branch
circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic
raceway fitting listed for the purpose . Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and
'\1 install an insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 3 of 3
6. Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and
linked signal paths, end to end.
a. Do not untwist more than 1/2 inch of Category 6 cables at connector terminations.
7 . Outdoor Coaxial Cable:
a. Outdoor connections shall be installed in enclosures complying with NEMA 250,
Type 4X. Connectors shall be corrosion resistant with properly designed O-rings to
keep out moisture.
b. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.
E: Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures:
1 . Install plywood backboards on walls of equipment rooms and wiring closets from floor to
ceiling or as directed by MIS team.
2. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards and
floor-mounted racks.
3 . Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
4. Train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
5 . Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
F. Separation from EMI Sources : Comply with BICSI TDM and TLA/EIA-569-A recommendations
for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment. Comply with the following minimum separation
distances from possible sources of EMI:
I . Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open
cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 12 inches .
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 24 inches.
2. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to cables
in grounded metallic raceways is as follows :
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2- 1/2 inches .
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 6 inches.
C . Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches.
3 . Separation between power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic
conduits or enclosures in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
16715 -9
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 3 inches.
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 6 inches.
4. Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inches.
5 . Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches.
G. Conduit:
I , Comply with TWEIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull
points, and for pull-box sizing.
2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible.
3 . In telecommunications rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard (in
case of a single piece of plywood) or in the corner of room (where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room) . Use cable trays to route cables if
conduits cannot be located in these positrons. Secure conduits to backboard when entering
room from overhead. Extend conduits I to 3 inches in finished floor.
H. Backboards: Install plywood with 84-inch dimension from floor up toward ceiling. Butt adj acent
sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners .
3 . 5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section " Grounding and Bonding" and with TWEIA 607 .
B. Grounding Points: { �
I . Locate grounding terminals in each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabinet. \
2 . Telecommunications Grounding Busbars : Mount on wall of telecommunications entrance
facility, equipment room, and closet, with standoff insulators.
C. Bonding Conductors:
1 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to electrical entrance facility and connect
to grounding electrode.
2 . Where a panelboard for telecommunications islocated insame room or space as a grounding
bulbar, bond to equipment ground bus of electrical panelboard.
3 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to grounding busbars.
4. Extend from grounding busbars to ground terminals in equipment racks and cabinets.
5 . Extend from grounding busbars to building metal frame within room, or to metal frame
external to room but readily accessible.
D . Special Requirements :
1 . Bonding conductors shall be insulated copper, No. 6 AWG minimum.
2. Install only in nonmetallic conduit, unless specifically required for protection of conductor.
Metallic conduit, if used, shall be RMC. For RMC that exceeds 36 inches in length,
conductors shall be bonded at each end of conduit.
16715 -10 ��
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
r terminal of the applicable derived system or service,
equipment grounding conducto
unless otherwise indicated.
6 . Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic
raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables .
7 . Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and
heaters . Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
8 . Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated
c water heater,
rost
heat ngecable.un
Bond conductoro to cheater t uni s, piping, connected n& and f
equipment, and
components.
9 . Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System : Bond electrical power
system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest
point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as
system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
G . Metal Frame Grounding for Buildings : Drive a ground rod at the base of every corner column
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart . Connect rod to
column with an underground grounding conductor. Interconnect
ground
in hes iminimi ntinu om
ous
underground conductor, extending to existing building grounds,
building foundation . Use copper conductor not less than No . 2/0 AWG for underground
conductor, and bury 18 inches below grade, minimum .
feet
) or three
ds
ced
least one-
H odrlengthdfromnseachtother andt two rods locat deatyleastrtheesame distanceofromaothertgrounding
i
electrodes.
1 . Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
2 . Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors . Use exothermic welds,
except as otherwise indicated . Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
copper coating.
1 . Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated . Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
J . Banding Straps and Jumpers : In so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required ; then, use a
bolted clamp . Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
K. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main meta] water service entrances
to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by g clamp
p
connectors . Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end .
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
C. Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment. t l
D . Install 3 -valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling-type valves.
E . Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe .
F . Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G . Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level .
END OF SECTION 15110
15110
VALVES Page 2 of 2
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 3 inches.
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 6 inches.
4. Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inches.
5 . Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches.
G. Conduit:
I , Comply with TWEIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull
points, and for pull-box sizing.
2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible.
3 . In telecommunications rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard (in
case of a single piece of plywood) or in the corner of room (where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room) . Use cable trays to route cables if
conduits cannot be located in these positrons. Secure conduits to backboard when entering
room from overhead. Extend conduits I to 3 inches in finished floor.
H. Backboards: Install plywood with 84-inch dimension from floor up toward ceiling. Butt adj acent
sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners .
3 . 5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section " Grounding and Bonding" and with TWEIA 607 .
B. Grounding Points: { �
I . Locate grounding terminals in each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabinet. \
2 . Telecommunications Grounding Busbars : Mount on wall of telecommunications entrance
facility, equipment room, and closet, with standoff insulators.
C. Bonding Conductors:
1 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to electrical entrance facility and connect
to grounding electrode.
2 . Where a panelboard for telecommunications islocated insame room or space as a grounding
bulbar, bond to equipment ground bus of electrical panelboard.
3 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to grounding busbars.
4. Extend from grounding busbars to ground terminals in equipment racks and cabinets.
5 . Extend from grounding busbars to building metal frame within room, or to metal frame
external to room but readily accessible.
D . Special Requirements :
1 . Bonding conductors shall be insulated copper, No. 6 AWG minimum.
2. Install only in nonmetallic conduit, unless specifically required for protection of conductor.
Metallic conduit, if used, shall be RMC. For RMC that exceeds 36 inches in length,
conductors shall be bonded at each end of conduit.
16715 -10 ��
3 . Bonding conductors shall be installed without splices unless approved by Architect because
of special circumstances . Where splices are necessary, they shall be accessible and shall be
located in telecommunications spaces. Splices shall be by irreversible compression
connectors or by exothermic welding.
3 . 6 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable
requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification. "
1 . Administration class for this Project shall be Class 3 .
2. Color-code cross-connect fields.
B . Using cable and asset management software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration
Drawings for system identification, testing, and managernen1 . Usc unique, alphanumeric
designation for each cable, and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects
with same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural
arrangement. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement and nomenclature,
and a consistent color-coded identification of individual conductors.
D. Cable and Wire Identification:
1 . Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device
if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or
cabinet .
3 . Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs : Label each cable at intervals
not exceeding 15 feet.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel .
a. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,
and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a
building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b . Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames .
5 . Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks
and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for
jacks and plugs of each service.
6. At Workstations: Attach label to device.
E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet . List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid
16715 - 11
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube : ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
B . Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
C . Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 , Type S, Grade A. Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 , Classes 50 and 51 ; mechanical or push-on joint; with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
E. PVC Plastic, Water Pipe: ASTM D 1785 , Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends .
2 .2 FITTINGS
A . Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 .22.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings : ASME B16 . 18 .
C . Bronze Flanges : ASME B16 .24 , Classes 150 and 300.
D. Copper Unions : ASME 1316 . 18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball -and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded
ends. Threads complying with ASME B 1 .20. 1 .
E . Ductile- and Gray-Iron Gasketed Fittings : AWWA C110 standard pattern or ductile- iron
AWWA C153 compact pattern, 250-psig ( 1725 -kPa) minimum pressure rating, with
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining and AWWA C1 I rubber gaskets.
F. Ductile- and Gray-Iron Flanged Fittings : AWWAC110, 250-prig ( 1725kPa) minimum
pressure rating, with AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
G . Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733 , made of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40,
seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.
H. Malleable-Iron Unions : ASME BI 6 .39, Classes 150 and 300; hexagonal-stock; with ball-and-
socket joint; metal -to-metal bronze seating surfaces; and female threaded ends with threads
complying with ASME B 1 . 20 . 1 .
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
M . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system .
N . Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized .
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2 . Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3 . Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
Penetration of moisture to contact surfaces .
4 . Exothermic-Weided Connections : Comply with manufacturer's written instructions .
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
5 . Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors .
6 . Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations : If metallic raceways terminate at „metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor
to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, ,unless
Otherwise indicated.
7 . Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A .
8 . Compression-Type Connections : Use hydraulic compression tools to provide;`correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors . Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to
make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
9. Moisture Protection : If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
O. Overhead Line Grounding: Comply with IEEE C2 except where stricter requirements are
indicated . Use 2 or more parallel ground rods if a single ground rod electrode resistance to
ground exceeds 25 ohms .
1 . Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth .
2 . Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for
underground connections and connections to rods.
3 . Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other groundi
conductor. ng conductors.
4. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding
5 . Protect grounding conductors on surface of wood poles with molding extended from
grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 5 of 5
3 . Bonding conductors shall be installed without splices unless approved by Architect because
of special circumstances . Where splices are necessary, they shall be accessible and shall be
located in telecommunications spaces. Splices shall be by irreversible compression
connectors or by exothermic welding.
3 . 6 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable
requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification. "
1 . Administration class for this Project shall be Class 3 .
2. Color-code cross-connect fields.
B . Using cable and asset management software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration
Drawings for system identification, testing, and managernen1 . Usc unique, alphanumeric
designation for each cable, and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects
with same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural
arrangement. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement and nomenclature,
and a consistent color-coded identification of individual conductors.
D. Cable and Wire Identification:
1 . Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device
if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or
cabinet .
3 . Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs : Label each cable at intervals
not exceeding 15 feet.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel .
a. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,
and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a
building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b . Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames .
5 . Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks
and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for
jacks and plugs of each service.
6. At Workstations: Attach label to device.
E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet . List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid
16715 - 11
frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project.
F . Cabling Administration Drawings:
floor plans o
stration
gcovtioad how labefor telecommunications closets ,ts , backbone
labeling. Idn fYlabelinn
s, work areas and
pathways and cables, terminal hardware and
positions,
and pahways,tndabquipment grounding
workstation terminal positions, grounding
nvention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in
conductors . Follow co
software and format selected by Owner.
3 .7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
A. Perform the following
B . Category 6 UTP Cabling Tests:
I . Tests shall include all tests of Category 5e, conducted from 1 to 250 MHz.
2. Channel and permanent link tests shall be performed with a tester that complies with
EIA-568 -B .2, Level III. Include tests for longitud nal or
performance requirements in TIA/
transverse conversion loss .
3 . Performance shall comply with mi
nimum criteria in TIAIEIA-568 -B .2.
C . Fiber-Optic Cable Tests:
I Test co applicable stua
qu pment manufacturer forchannel
only test ds and adapters that are qualified by to e
or link test configuration.
ment, cabletermnation, groundingandbonding equipment an
2. Visually inspect cableplace
patch cords , and labeling of all components.
3 . Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
a. Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in
1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526- 14-A, Method B , One Reference Jumper-
b .
umper.r horizontal links shall be
s than 2.0
b
results shall be less than that calculated according tosequation mT WEIA-568-B . 1.
ll be printed
n a
D. Data for report
that is formattedshallsimi lar to Table 10be documented . .11ain BICSI TDMlor transferred from the
pthe
summary p
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
.
E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
F. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified
requirements.
16715 - 12 r
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
p . Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches : Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling
pad . Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with 1.
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes . Use tinned-
copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground
pad . Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation .
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1 . After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements .
2 . Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal . Measure
ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation , and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81 .
3 . Provide drawings locating each ground rod , ground rod assembly, and other grounding
electrodes. identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and
include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results .
Describe measures taken to improve test results . Nominal maximum values are as
follows: (,
. .J
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less : 10 ohms .
b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA : 5 ohms .
C. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d . Overhead Distribution Line Equipment: 25 ohms .
e . Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
f. Manhole Grounds : 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION 16060
C
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
I . Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings : ASME B16 .4 , Classes 125 and 250; standard (,
pattern; with threads complying with ASME B1 .20. 1 . l)
J . Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16 . 1 , Classes 125 and 300 .
K. PVC Plastic, Schedule 40, Socket-Type Pipe Fittings : ASTM D 2466 .
2 .3 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Ductile-Iron Pipe Push-On Joints: AWWA CI I I rubber gaskets and lubricant.
B . Ductile-Iron Pipe Mechanical Joints : AWWA C1 I ductile- or gray-iron glands, high-strength
steel bolts and nuts, and rubber gaskets .
C. Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanged Joints: AWWA CI 15 ductile- or gray-iron pipe flanges, rubber
gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts .
D . Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
E . Solder Filler Metal : ASTM B 32 , alloys to suit system requirements .
F . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 9 , alloys to suit system requirements .
G . Welding Filler Metals : Comply with AWS D10 . 12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded .
H . Solvent Cements : As recommended by manufacturer.
1 . Plastic Pipe Seals : ASTM F 477 , elastomeric gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications :
1 . Underground, Service Entrance Piping: [Soft copper tube, Type L, cast-copper-alloy,
solder-joint pressure fittings and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 , Sn94, or E solder] or
[Schedule 80 PVC plastic water pipe, Schedule g0 PVC fittings, and solvent-cemented
joints] .
2 pressure fittings;Fard copperounions; bronzr tube, eflanges;wrought-copper
andsolderjoints with AlloyrSn95 .
Sn94 or E solder.
32 VALVE APPLICATIONS
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 2o f 2
frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project.
F . Cabling Administration Drawings:
floor plans o
stration
gcovtioad how labefor telecommunications closets ,ts , backbone
labeling. Idn fYlabelinn
s, work areas and
pathways and cables, terminal hardware and
positions,
and pahways,tndabquipment grounding
workstation terminal positions, grounding
nvention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in
conductors . Follow co
software and format selected by Owner.
3 .7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
A. Perform the following
B . Category 6 UTP Cabling Tests:
I . Tests shall include all tests of Category 5e, conducted from 1 to 250 MHz.
2. Channel and permanent link tests shall be performed with a tester that complies with
EIA-568 -B .2, Level III. Include tests for longitud nal or
performance requirements in TIA/
transverse conversion loss .
3 . Performance shall comply with mi
nimum criteria in TIAIEIA-568 -B .2.
C . Fiber-Optic Cable Tests:
I Test co applicable stua
qu pment manufacturer forchannel
only test ds and adapters that are qualified by to e
or link test configuration.
ment, cabletermnation, groundingandbonding equipment an
2. Visually inspect cableplace
patch cords , and labeling of all components.
3 . Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
a. Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in
1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526- 14-A, Method B , One Reference Jumper-
b .
umper.r horizontal links shall be
s than 2.0
b
results shall be less than that calculated according tosequation mT WEIA-568-B . 1.
ll be printed
n a
D. Data for report
that is formattedshallsimi lar to Table 10be documented . .11ain BICSI TDMlor transferred from the
pthe
summary p
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
.
E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
F. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified
requirements.
16715 - 12 r
3 . 8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records
of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training. "
END OF SECTION
16715- 13
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures
or equipment connections and where indicated .
B. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each
plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to
drain water distribution piping system .
D . Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated .
E. Install ball valves in each hot-water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump .
3 .3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A . Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable Plumbing Code and as
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
B . Support vertical piping at each floor.
3 .4 INSPECTING AND CLEANING
A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having .
jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15140
15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports .
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 702
Article 10o, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 - 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
1 . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
Offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2-2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers :
L American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2 General Cable Corporation .
3 . Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 1 of 1
3 . 8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records
of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training. "
END OF SECTION
16715- 13
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Refer to Part i " Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable �.
construction, and ratings .
C . Conductor
conductor forNo.Material : Copper c
AWG and smaller, gstranded conductor, solid
stranded forrNo 8 AWG and larger.
D . Conductor insulation Types : Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7 .
2 .3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A . Available Manufacturers :
I . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2AMP Incorporated/Tyco International .
3 . Hubbell/Anderson .
4 . O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
5 . 3M Company; Electrical Products Division .
B . Description : Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated .
PART 3 - EXECUTION (_
3 . 1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS ` J
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway.
B . Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway .
C . Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single conductors
in raceway .
elow Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN -
D . Feeders Concealed in Concrete, b
THWN , single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in
raceway.
ilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single
F . Branch Circuits Concealed in Ce
conductors in raceway.
G . Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN ,
single conductors in raceway.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A . Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated .
t
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
B . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe : CISPI 301 .
C . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe : ASTM D 2665 , Schedule 40, plain ends.
2 .2 FITTINGS
A - Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.29.
B . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings : ASME B16.23 .
i
- 1 C Wrou ht-Co
g pper, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings: ASME B16. 43 .
D . Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16.32 .
E. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings : ASTM A 74, Service class.
F . Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301 .
G. Cast-Iron, Sovent Drainage Fittings : ASME B 16 .45 .
H . PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665 , made to ASTM D 3311 ; socket-type; drain,
waste, and vent pipe patterns.
I . Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : ASTM C 564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricant.
J . CISPI Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings : CISPI310, having
ASTM C 564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 series stainless-steel
clamp assembly. , corrugated shield-and-
K . Cast-Iron-Pipe Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End, Nonpressure System Pipe : Rubber or
elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band assembly, fabricated to match OD of pipes to be
joined.
L. Plastic Pipe Sleeves : ASTM C 564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F 477 elastomeric
seal.
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation . Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values .
C . Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division ] 6 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
F . Sea] around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to other sections of this
specification .
G . Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods . "
H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1 . Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3 . 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
\� A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS , Section 7. 3 . 1 . Certify compliance with test parameters.
B . Test Reports : Prepare a written report to record the following:
] . Test procedures used .
2 . Test results that comply with requirements .
3 . Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements .
END OF SECTION 16120
J
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
t
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A . Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron soil pipe fittings; cast-iron, heavy-duty
couplings for hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings ; and hubless joints.
B . PVC plastic DWV pipe; PVC socket-type drain, waste, and vent pipe pattern fittings; and
solvent-cemented joints.
C . Copper drainage tube, wrought-copper or cast-copper-alloy drainage fittings, and soldered
joints with Alloy E or Alloy Sn50 solder.
3 .2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building
sanitary sewer.
B . Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures
or drains-
3 -3
rains_33 INSPECTION
A . Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15150
15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 PIPES AND TUBES
A . Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn temper] .
B Soft Copper Tube: [ASTM B 280, Type ACR, annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B), annealed temper] or [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type e L
annealed temper] .
2 - 2 FITTINGS
A Copper Fittings : ASME B 16. 22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern .
l
23 JOINING MATERIALS
A . Brazing Filler Metals : AWS A5 . 8, Classification BAg- 1 (Silver) .
2 .4 VALVES
A . Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings: 500psig (3450kPa) working pressure and 275
deg F ( 135 deg C) working temperature, unless otherwise indicated.
B . Solenoid Valves: Comply with AW 760; 250 deg F ( 121 deg C) temperature rating, 400psig
(2760kPa) working pressure, and 24-V normally closed holding coil .
C. Pressure-Regulating Valves : Direct acting and comply with ARI 770 .
D Pressure-Relief Valves : ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
E. Thermal-Expansion Valves : Comply with ARI 750; with sensing bulb, distributor having side
-gas bypass line
connection for hot , and external equalizer line.
2. 5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Strainers : 430-psig (2960-kPa) working pressure .
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PARTi - GENERAL
] . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B . See other sections of this specification for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground
utility construction .
C . See other sections of this specification for firestopping materials and installation at
through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. penetrations
D. See Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for supports, anchors, and
identification products.
E. See Division 16 Section " Wiring Devices " for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings,
boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers j
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance .with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2 .2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A _ Available Manufacturers:
1 . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2 . Alflex Inc .
3 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
4 . Electri-Flex Co .
S . Grinnell Co ./Tyco International ; Allied Tube and Conduit Div .
6 . LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
7 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8 . O-Z Gedney ; Unit of General Signal .
9 . Wheatland Tube Co .
B . Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80 . 1 .
C . Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80 .5 . /f
D. IMC : ANSI C80 .6 . l i
E. EMT and Fittings : ANSI C80 .3 .
1 . Fittings : Set-screw Type.
F . LFMC : Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G . Fittings : NEMA FB 1 ; compatible with conduit and tubing materials .
2 . 3 ' NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A . Available Manufacturers:
I . American International .
2 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3 . Arnco Corp .
4 . Cantex Inc.
5 . Certainteed Corp. ; Pipe & Plastics Group .
6 . Condux International.
7 . ElecSYS, Inc.
8 . Electri-Flex Co.
9 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11 - RACO ; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 2 of
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Moisture/Liquid Indicators : 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure, 200 deg F (93 deg C)
polished, optical viewing window with color-coded
operating temperature, with replaceable, i .
moisture indicator .
C . Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 500-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure; with replaceable-
core kit including gaskets, and filter-dryer cartridge.
-kPa) operating pressure; minimum 7 inches (180 mm)
D. Flexible Connectors : 500-psig (3450
long.
E. Mufflers: 5o0-psig (3450-kPa) operating pressure .
F . Refrigerant: [ASHRAE 34 , R- 134a] or [ASHRAE 34, R-221 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 .
ments are specified in Division 15 Section " Common Piping
B . Basic piping installation require
Requirements ." l4
C Belowground , install copper tubing in conduit . Vent conduit outdoors.
D . Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
E . Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
F . Provide bypass around moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 inch NPS (DN50) .
G . Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion
valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators .
H . Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection , at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
1 . Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant by following ASHRAE 15
procedures . or for
s at
sor
t and
I ll avalves On suction
taps at and discharge
as bypass Of cOmPrto esson inlet gand outlet andonacheside of
ou]e
strainers.
essor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on systems with
K. Install check valves on compr
multiple-condensers -
Page 2 of 2
15193 REFRIGERANT PIPING
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve
and expansion valve.
M . Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated .
N. Install a full-sized, 3 -valve bypass around each dryer.
O. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
P- Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
Q. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves_
R. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.
S . Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
T. Install pressure-relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors .
1
END OF SECTION 15183
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
12 . Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
13 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
B . ENT: NEMA TC 13 .
C . RNC : NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC .
D. ENT and RNC Fittings : NEMA TC 3 ; match to conduit or tubing type and material .
E. LFNC: UL 1660.
2 .4 METAL WIREWAYS
A . Available 1:^,anu adorers:
1 Hoffman .
2 . Square D.
B . Material and Construction : Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R.
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
\ D . Select features, unless otherwise indicated , as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
E . Wireway Covers : As indicated .
F . Finish : Manufacturer's standard enamel finish .
2 . 5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Hoffman .
2 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B . Description : PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners .
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
_ - ) 2 . 6 SURFACE RACEWAYS
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Surface Metal Raceways : Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating.
I . Available Manufacturers :
a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The) .
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation .
C . Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The).
d . Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
B . Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturers standard color.
1 . Available Manufacturers :
a . Butler Manufacturing Co . ; Walker Division .
b . Enduro Composite Systems.
c . Hubbell , Inc. ; Wiring Device Division .
d . Lamson & Sessions, Carlon Electrical Products .
C. Panduit Corp .
f. Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The) .
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
C . Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways .
2 .7 BOXES , ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div . of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2 . Emerson/General Signal ; Appleton Electric Company .
3 . Erickson Electrical Equipment Co .
4 . Hoffman .
5 . Hubbell , Inc . ; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
6 . O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal .
7 . RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
8 . Robroy Industries, Inc. ; Enclosure Division .
9 . Scott Fetzer Co . ; Adalet-PLM Division .
10 . Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
12 . Walker Systems, Inc .; Wiremold Company (The) .
13 . Woodhead, Daniel Company: Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B . Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1 .
C . Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1 , Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D . Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes : NEMA OS 2 .
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 4 of 4
� �
�j_,
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A- Submit Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture.
B . Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act, " regarding water flow
rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 WATER CLOSET
A . Vitreous-China Water Closet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
B . Toilet Seat: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
22 LAVATORY
A . Vitreous-China Lavatory: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
C . Drain : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D. Fixture Support: Hanger plate
2 .2 SHOWER
A. Mixing-Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Supplies: Copper tubing with ball , gate, or globe valve if check stops are not included with
faucet.
C . Drain : 2-inch NPS (DN50), nickel-bronze-strainer, floor drain .
D. Trap: 2-inch NPS (DN50) drainage piping.
2 .3 SINK
A Stainless-Steel Sink : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 1 of ]
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\ E. Floor Boxes : Cast metal , fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G . Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA OS 1 .
H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA FB 1 , cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , with continuous hinge cover and flush latch .
1 . Metal Enclosures : Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel .
2 . Nonmetallic Enclosures : Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
J . Cabinets : NEMA 250, Type 1 , galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel . Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
2 . 8 FACTORY FINISHES
A . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-
coat finish ready for field painting.
B . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint
applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
hipping.PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A . Outdoors:
I I Exposed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC80.
2 . Concealed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC40 .
3 Underground, Single Run: RNC or PVC40.
4• Underground, Grouped: RNC or PVC40.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B . Indoors:
1 . Exposed : RNC or PVC40/80.
2. Concealed : RNC or PVC40.
3 . Cormection_to_Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers. and Hydraulic; Pneumatic,
\ Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations : Rigid steel conduit.
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 5 of 5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
5 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , except as follows :
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C . Minimum Raceway Size : 3 /4 - inch trade size.
D . Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location .
1 . Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated .
2 . PVC Externally Coated , Rigid Steel Conduits : Use only fittings approved for use with
that material . Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits .
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
s and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve .
raceways are installed for such circuit
F . Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
32 INSTALLATION
A . Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes .
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B . Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation .
C . Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods . "
D . Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways .
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above finished slab .
F . Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated .
G . Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated .
1 . Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated .
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1 /3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches of concrete cover .
1 . Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2 . Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3 . Run-conduit-larger-than l -inch trade size parallel-or-at-right angles to main-reinforcement. /
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
4 . Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, 1
or IMC before rising above floor.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 6 of 6
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Drain(s): See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
2 .4 MOP-SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Mop-Service Basin : See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
C . Mounting: Floor.
D . Rim Guard : Manufacturer's standard
E . Drain: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) with grid strainer.
F . P-Trap: 3 -inch NPS (DN80) drainage piping.
G . Mop Rack : Manufacturer' s standard
H . Supplies: 1 /2-inch NPS (DN15) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve .
ounting faucet, wall brace, and hose-book bracket .
I . Reinforcement: Provide for wall-m
2 . 5 SERVICE SINK
A . Plastic Sink: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Fixture Mounting: Floor stand
C . Faucet: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
D . Drain(s) : Manufacturer's standard grid drain with 1 - 1 /2-inch NPS (DN40) tubular-brass
tailpiece .
E. Fixture Support: Manufacturers standard steel stand or base unit.
2 .6 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATIONS
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Install fitting insulation kits on handicap-accessible fixtures.
B . Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.
C. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for handicapped
People to reach.
D- Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
E. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate
when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
F. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to
wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls .
G. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls .
H. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework .
1. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.
J- Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
K . Install individual
c]eanouts at fixture.supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with
I- _ Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
M. Install traps on fixture outlets . Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps . Omit traps on
indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if
location is not indicated .
O. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in counter with spout over sink.
F. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
Q . Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
R. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
-\ equipment. Install insulation on supplies and drains of handicap-accessible fixtures .
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
1 . Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible.
1 . Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports .
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways .
J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and makejoints tight .
1 . Use insulating bushings to protect conductors .
K . Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools .
L. Terminations :
1 Where raceways are terminated with lockouts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
2 . Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed .
M . Install pull wires in empty raceways . Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-1b tensile strength . Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
i N . Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two go-
degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements .
O. Stub-up Connections : Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future
equipment connections .
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections .
Q. Surface Raceways : Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals .
R . Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3 .3 PROTECTION
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 7 of 7
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
A . Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion .
I . Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2 . Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
4
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 8 of 8
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
S . Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and `l
UL 486B . J
END OF SECTION 15410
1.
15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15425 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A . Floor Drains: See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
B . Backflow Preventers: ASSE standard backflow preventers, 150-psig ( 1035-kPa) minimum
working pressure, bronze body with threaded ends, and an inlet strainer.
C. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1001 , with floating disc and atmospheric vent.
D. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers : ASSE 1011 , rough bronze, with nonremovable and
manual drain features and garden -hose threaded connection.
E. Water Filters : Cartridge type.
F. Hose Bibbs : Bronze body in rough-bronze finish, with removable composition disc, threaded
or soldered inlet, garden-hose threaded outlet, and loose-key handle.
G . Water Hammer Arrester: Bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install backflow preventers at each water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction .
B . Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas and where indicated . Set tops of drains flush
with finished floor. Set drainelevationdepressed below finished slab elevation as indicated
below :
1 5-Foot ( 1 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius : 1 /2-inch ( 13 -mm) depression .
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
I . Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault
suppression units , circuit interrupters, and integral surge
2 . Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches .
? . Device wall
Plates.
4. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated .
B . Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates .
\ C. Samples : One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified .
D . Field quality-control test reports .
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 7Q
intended use.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements
following: , provide products by one of the
1 . Wiring Devices :
16140
WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary .
b . Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc .
C . Hubbell Incorporated ; Wiring Device-Kellems.
d . Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
2 . Multioutlet Assemblies :
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems .
b. Wiremold Company (The) .
3 . Poke-Through , Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles :
a. Hubbell Incorporated ; WiringDevice-Kellems .
b . Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
C . Square D/Groupe Schneider NA .
d . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
e. Wiremold Company (The) .
2 .2 RECEPTACLES
A . Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles : Comply with NEMA WD 1 , NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498 .
B . GFCI Receptacles : Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral �^
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5 -20R duplex receptacle, complying with UL 498 and UL 943 .
Design units for installation in a 2-3 /4-inch - deep outlet box without an adapter.
2 .3 SWITCHES
A . Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C- 896F and UL 20 .
B . Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
C . Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and
removable tab corrector that pen-nit separate or common feed connection .
1 . Switch : 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
2 . Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 , Configuration 5 - 15R.
D . Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral , quiet on/off switches and
audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1 . Control : Continuously adjustable toggle switch with single-pole or three-way switching
to suit connections .
2 . Incandescent Lamp Dimmers : Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable
rotary_.knob, -toggle-switch, or-slider; single- pole with soft tap or -other quiet switch;
EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads .
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . 10-Foot (3 -m) Drain Area Radius: 3 - 1 /2-inch (90-mm) depression . 1
3 . 15-Foot (4 . 5-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 -inch (25-mm) depression. J
4 . 20-Foot (6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /4-inch (32-mm) d deere on .
n
5 . 25 -Foot (7 .6-m) Drain Area Radius: 1 - 1 /2-inch (38-mm) p
D _ Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain.
E. install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes .
END OF SECTION 15425
r
15425 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15480 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B. Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design
ofNew Low-Rise Residential Buildings. "
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A . See Plumbing Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Install temperature and pressure-relief valves and extend to closest floor drain .
B . Install vacuum-relief valves and expansion tank in cold-water- inlet piping.
C Install shutoff valves and unions at hot- and cold-water piping connections .
D. Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined -
E- Electrically ground units according to authorities having jurisdiction .
END OF SECTION 15480
15480 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Page ] of I
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
3 . Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches : Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2 .4 WALL PLATES
A . Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices .
1 - Plate- Securing Screws : Metal with head color to match plate finish .
2 . Material for Unfinished Spaces : Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic .
3 . Material for Wet Locations : Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations. "
2 . 5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies : Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B . Raceway Material : Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish .
C . Wire: No. 12 AWG .
\ 2 . 6 FINISHES
A Color:
1 . Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System : Ivory, unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70.
2 . TVSS Devices: Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B . Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging.
C . Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
1 E . Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
_ l
16140 WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
F . Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and l
furnishings .
3 .2 IDENTIFICATION
A . Comply with Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ."
1 . Receptacles : Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served . Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes .
3 . 3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding. "
B . Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports :
I . After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized , test for
proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements . /
2 . Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions .
B . Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above .
END OF SECTION 16140
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15736 - SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes packaged air-conditioning units with refrigerant compressors and
controls; intended for indoor installations.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data : For each unit indicated.
B . Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article loo, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1 .4 WARRANTY
A . Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace self-contained air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five
<5> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B - Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2 Lennox.
3 . Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
4. Bard.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Time switches .
2 . Photoelectric relays.
3 - Occupancy sensors .
4 . Muhipcle lighting relays.
5 . Multipole lighting contactors .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting control device indicated .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined iin`NFPA 70,
Article IOQ by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with 47 CFR 15 , Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices .
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Contactors and Relays:
-J a. Automatic Switch Co .
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp .
c. Cutler-Hammer Products ; Eaton Corporation .
d . Furnas Electric Co.
e. GE Lighting Controls.
f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc .
h. Square D Co . ; Power Management Organization .
i . Zenith Controls, Inc .
2 . Time Switches :
a. Diversified Electronics, Inc .
b. Grasslin Controls Corp.
c. Intermatic, Inc.
d , Leviton Manufacturing.
e. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc .
f. Tork, Inc.
g. Zenith Controls, Inc.
3 . Photoelectric Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation .
b . Area Lighting Research , Inc .
C. Fisher Pierce .
d . Grasslin Controls , Corp. /
C . Intermatic, Inc .
I. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc.
g. Rhodes, M H , Inc .
h . SSAC, Inc.
i . Tork, Inc.
2 .2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A . Line-Voltage Surge Protection : Include in all 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. Comply
with UL 1449 and with ANSI C62 .41 for Category A locations .
2 .3 TIME SWITCHES
A . Description : Solid-state programmable type with alphanumeric display complying with
UL 917 .
1 . Astronomic dial .
2 . Two contacts, rated 30 A at 277-V ac, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2 A at 240-V ac, unless otherwise indicated .
4 . Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays .
5 . Skip-day mode.
2 .4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 2
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 .2 PACKAGED UNITS
ng of cabinet,
ssembled
-wired unit; consisti
A Description : d,compressor, ev poratortainfaue evaporator acoil , air filters, and controls; and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil; with integral water-cooled condenser.
B . Disconnect Switch : Factory mounted on equipment.
C . Cabinet Frame and Panels : Structural-steel frame with galvanized-steel panels with baked-
enamel finish in color selected by Architect, and with access doors or panels.
1 . Insulation : Minimum 1 /2-inch- ( 13 -num-) thick, acoustic duct liner on cabinet interior
and control panel .
2 . Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating.
3 . Discharge Plenum: Cabinet extension with directional louvers .
Phenolic coating on unit interior and exterior
4 . Corrosion-Resistant Treatment: .
D . Evaporator Fan: Galvanized-steel, double-width , double-inlet, forward-curved centrifugal fan;
statically and dynamically balanced .
I . Drive: [Belt, with fan mounted on permanently lubricated bearings] or [Direct, with fan
and motor resiliently mounted] .
2 . Fan Sheaves: Cast-iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced , bored to fit shafts and
keyed.
3 . Motor Sheave: Variable and adjustable pitch selected so required rpm are obtained when
set at midposition.
4 . Motors: Multispeed, PSC type.
E . Compressor : Hermetically sealed, [reciprocating] or [scroll] type, 3600 rpm maximum, and
resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection .
F. Evaporator Coil : Direct-expansion coil with seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins .
G . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection .
H . Permanent Filters: 1 -inch- (25 -nun-) thick, cleanable panel filters .
1 . Disposable Filters: 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, glass-fiber, pleated panel filters.
I . Refrigeration System : Factory assembled and tested, and charged with refrigerant; consisting of
piping and accessories connecting compressor, evaporator coil, and condenser coil, and
including the following:
1 . Four-way reversing valve and suction line accumulator.
2 . Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3 . Refrigerant dryer. s
4 . High-pressure switch .
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
5 . Low-pressure switch .
6 . Thermostat for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature operation or
loss of air.
7. Low-ambient switch .
8 . Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.
K. Control Package: Factory wired, including contactor, high- and low-pressure cutouts, internal-
winding thermostat for compressor, control-circuit transformer, and noncycling reset relay.
I - Time-Delay Relay: Five-minute delay to prevent compressor cycling.
2 . Adjustable Thermostat: Remote to control the following:
a Supply fan .
b • Compressor.
C. Electric heater.
3 System Selector Switch : Off-heat-auto-cool .
4 . Fan Control Switch : Auto-on .
L. Ventilation Options :
1 Motorized Outside-Air Damper: Motorized, 2-position blade damper allowing induction
Of specified quantity of outside air; with spring-return, low-voltage damper motor. <
PART 3 - EXECUTION
l
i
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Anchor units to structure .
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A . Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
B Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B . Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks . Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 3 of
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Outdoor Sealed Units : Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A
Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield .
1 . Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn -off
levels.
2 Time Delay: Prevents false operation .
2 . 5 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
A . Description : Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508 and
NEMA ICS 2 .
1 • Listed Current Rating for Switching: C
tungsten filament, inductiveonsistent with type of Load served, including
, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total
harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage : Match control power source .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
1 A . Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and
wall-mounting devices . to center of unit for
3 . 2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
B . Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures .
3 .3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents .
B . Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components .
Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
J
- - 1 . Continuity tests of circuits.
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . Operational Tests : Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities - -\
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions . Record )
control settings, operations, and functional observations.
3 . Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
END OF SECTION 16145
t /
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 4 of 4
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
C . Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
ew components,
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with n
and retest.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
D . Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15736
15736 SELF-CONTAINED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ( 15 TONS AND SMALLER)Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I'll/Ssw'p 2M.LRa°t
SECTION 15738 , SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIOI•IING UNITS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A• This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat
PmnP
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units
units consisting of separate
and may be connected to ducts, are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting,
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A• Product Data; For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B• Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, a
intended use. nd Accessories: Listed and IabeIed as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
1 . 4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace split-system air
gantial Completion.units that fail in materials and work
manufacturer
sh
years from date of Subst
p within five
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers:
products Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B• Manufacturers : Subject to compliance wi
following: th requirements, provide products by one of the
I • Carrier Air Conditioning, Div. of Carrier Corp.
2• First Co.
3 . Friedrich Air Conditioning Company,
4. Lennox Industries Inc.
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 1 of
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
� SECTION ] 6231 -
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 , 1 STU IMARY
A, This Section includes packaged
features. diesel-engine generator sets with the following
accessory
1 . Battery charger.
2• Belly fuel tank or separate day tank.
3 . Muffler.
4. Outdoor, weatherproof,
5• Audio/Visual Signal, corrosion resistant, sound attenuated enclosure.
6. Remote stop switch with durable acrylic sign ,
7. Starting battery,
g• Engine coolant heater
9. Remote annunciator
1 . 2 SUBiVETTALS
� A. Product Data: For
the generator set and each accessory component indicated.
B• Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations
Of each field connection . , sections, details of installation, and location and size
1 • Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C Certified prototype test reports.
D. Field quality-control test reports.-_
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Manufacturer Qualifications: Specify in the bid a servicecerite r capable of emergency
maintenance and repairs at the Project with eight hours' maximum response time.
this Section through
$• Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxili
one source from a single manufacturer. ary components specified in
C• Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED
ENGINE GENERATOR Page 1 of ] 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc . IRC Maintenance
E. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.
F. Noise Emission: Not to exceed 87dB maximum noise level at 25 feet from generator due to
sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, eughre cooling air intake and
discharge, and other components of the installation.
CART 2 - PRODUCT
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Baldor Electric Company
2. Caterpillar, Inc .; Engine Div.
3 . Gene= Corp. .
4. Kohler Cc ; Generator Division .
5 . Cummins Power Generation, Inc
6. Winco, hie.
2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET
A. Provide a coordinated assembly of compatible components.
B . Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15 . 1 ;
C . Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a conspicuous nameplate of
component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model
and serial number of item, year of manufacture, and rating information prescribed by the
standards the equipment is built to.
D . Ratings:
I . Genset electrical power output shall be at 60 Hz.
2 . Minimum prime power rating shall be 55kW/55kVA at unity power factor.
3 . Minimum standby power rating shall be 60kW/60kVA at unity power factor.
4 . Voltage output shall be 120/240 volts, single phase, 3 wire.
2.3 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE
A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 4 percent of rated output voltage from no load to
full load. Shall maintain voltage output to within f1 .0% at any power factor between 0 .8 and
1 .0
B . Steady-State Voltage Modulation Frequency: Less than 1 Hz.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 2 of 11
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON' ENGINEERING SERVICES �ylp 2MARo9
5 . Trane Co . (The); Unitary Products Group.
6. York International Corp.
2.2 EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1 . Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B . Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
1 . Insulation : Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
2 . Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D . Electric Coil : Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminalbox for overcurrent
protection .
E. Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
F. Fan Motor: Multispeed.
G. Filters: l inch (25 min) thick; in fiberboard frames
23 AIR-COOLED , COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
th removable panels for access to
, weep
A Casing ,holes foreeelwater dra nage,! and mounting holes h baked enamel, rin base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed (reciprocating] or (scroll] type with crankcase heater and
mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive
overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Mounting Base: Concrete.
Page 2 of 4
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
i
/
(3 LRRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
/ IRC Maintenance
2.4 ACCESSORIES W/& 4Z 2NAZ09'
A• Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B• Refrigerant Line Kits : Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with Hazed fttings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1 INSTALLATION
A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturers standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
B . Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- ( 100-ntm ) thick,
reinforced concrete base; 4 inches ( 100 mm ) larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete. "
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
C. histall ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. , .,,:;
D. Install compressor-condenser components on neoprene isolators.
3 .2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fitti
allow access to unit. ngs. Install tub ng to
B . Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff duty valve and union or flange on the sup1
connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.
P Y
C. Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
D. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. including
B. Leak Test: Ager installation
leaks exist. , charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING
UNITS Page 3 0f 4
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
C Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20
increase or decrease, Voltage recovers fo remain Percent variation for 50
three seconds. within the percent step-load
steady-state operating b
D. g and within
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth; 0.5 percent of rated fre
q
E. Steady-State Frequency Stabili
�
load, there are no rando • When system i "On 0Y from no toad to
m s operating at any constant load within rated
huntingspeed de the steady variations outside -
or surging of speed. state operational band and no
F. Transient Frequency PerfonanCe. Less than 5 percent variation for a 50
increase or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within
within five seconds, a the steady-state percent
eP-lo d
G• Output Waveform; At no load harmonic
not exceed 5 percent total and 3 content measured line-to-line or line-
determined accordingto percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor,
NEMA MG I , shall not exceed 50.
H• Sustained Short-
thegenerator andts protective deviCirc;uit Current' er a ces shall sup phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals,
current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear theplyam�mm automa0 Pe
any generator system com Percent of ratedfgll-load
ponent, y, without damage to
�--1 I• Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type M, system requirements.
2.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS
Ad Environmental Conditions:
satisfactorily under the followinugme generator shall be e
damage or de g environmental c quipped to start and : operate
gradation Of capability: conditions without mechanical or electrical
1 , Ambient Tempera
2 Relative Htm e: Minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.
Humid 30 to 100 percent.
3 • Altitude: Sea level to 50 feet.
2. 5 ENGME
A. Description: 4-cycle unit with maximum
Piston
speed of 9 meters per second
B • Comply with NFPA 37.
C. Fuel: Diesel per ASTM D 975, 2-D, (S 15) or (S500).
D. Rated Engiue Speed: 1800rprn.
1. E• Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity Siphons
drainage to an easily removable container
With no disassembly and without use of
Pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances.
16231 OPTIONAL ST
ANDBy SyS ,M PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 3 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 37. System includes the following:
1 . Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
2 . Relief/Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess
fuel to source.
2 .6 GOVERNOR
A. Type: mechanical
2 .7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator-set
skid and integral eugine-driven coolant pump.
B . Radiator Core Tubes: Nonferrous-metal construction other than aluminum.
C . Coolant: 50% distilled water, 50% ethylene glycol.
2. 8 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A . Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37 .
B. See Plan Sheet F- 1 for additional information:
C. Fuel Oil Tank(s) : Factory-installed and piped, listed unit. Features include the following:
1 . Tank level indicator. -
2 . Capacity: See Plan Sheet F- 1 .
3 . Vandal-resistant fill cap.
4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Residential type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound
level in the 20- to 75-Hz frequency band at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) from exhaust discharge,
is 82 d,BA or less.
B . Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to muffler drain outlet
through a petcock.
C . Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless-steel
pipe.
D. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless-steel expansion joint with liners.
n
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 4 of I 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES P,;e�Q 150 2MAP.
C. Operational Test. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15738
15739 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15810 - DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary : Metal and nonmetal ducts and accessories in pressure classes 2 inch wg (500 Pa) or
less and a maximum velocity of 2400 fpm ( 12 m/s).
B . Submit Product Data for fire dampers and smoke dampers .
C. Submit Shop Drawings detailing duct layout and including locations and types of duct
accessories, duct sizes, transitions, radius and vaned elbows, special supports details, and
inlets and outlet types and locations .
D . Comply with NFPA 90A for systems serving spaces more than 25 , 000 cu. ft . (708 cu . m) in
volume or building Types 11, IV, and V construction over 3 stories in height.
E. Comply with NFPA 90B for systems serving spaces 1 - or 2-family dwellings or serving spaces
less than 25,000 cu . It. (708 cu . m) .
F. Comply with NFPA 96 for systems serving public or private cooking operations, except single-
family residential usage; and includes cooking equipment exhaust hoods, grease-removal
devices, exhaust ductwork, exhaust fans, dampers, fire-extinguishing equipment, and all other
auxiliary or ancillary components of systems or systems that are involved in the capture,
containment, and control of grease- laden cooking effluent.
G . Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.
11. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Qualifications : AABC or NEBB certified .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3 . 1 DUCTS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel : Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653 , G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275)
coating designation with mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to
view.
B . Fibrous Glass Duct Board : Comply with UL 181 , Class 1 , fibrous glass with fire-resistant,
reinforced foil -scrim-kraft barrier, and having the air-side surface treated to prevent erosion .
Thickness: 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm).
C. Duct Liner: ASTM C 1071 , Type II, with an airstream surface coated with a temperature-
resistant coating.
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc_
IRC' Maintenance
^, E Exhaust Piping External to Engine: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded, black steel, with welded
joints and fittings,
2. 10 COMBUSTION-ATR-INTAKE
A. Description: Standard duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable
"blocked filter" indicator.
dry filter element and
2. 11 STARTING SYSTEM
A• Description: 12 Volt DC electric, with negative ground and including the following items:
I • Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Environmental Conditions "
"Service Conditions" Article above.
2. Cranking Paragraph in
g Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from eng gine
flywheel without binding,
3 . Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.
4• Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range
"Enviromnental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service
specified cranking cycle at Conditions " Article above to provide
least twice without recharging, specified in
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by generator-set
battery capacity indicated. manufacturer for cable length and
accessories . Include interconnecting conductors and connection
6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with s
regulation and 35-A olid state .voltage
7. minimum continuous rating.
Battery Charger: Current-1 miting, automatic-equalizing and float-char in
complies with UL 1236 and includes the following features:
g g type: Unit
a
a• Operation : Equalizing-charging rate of. 10 A is initiated automatically after battery
has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a lower float-charging mode and
continues operating in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b• Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 5 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high te
Automatic mperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c• Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of
rate.
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Ammeter indicates charging
e• Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage, arranged to
close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring
panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do
output of battery charger. Either of latter conditions closes contacts
battery-charger malfunction indication at system that provide a control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 4X, wall-mounted cabinet.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 5 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering; Inc. JRC Maintenance
2. 12 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Functional Description: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on
position starts the generator set. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set
shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or
derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a
remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down the generator set.
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator
set. A remote annunciator panel shall provide all alarm indications provided at the main panel.
Mounting method isolates the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include those required by NFPA 1. 10 for a
Level 2 system.
D . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include the following:
1 . AC voltmeter.
2 . AC ammeter.
3 . AC frequency meter.
4 . DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5 . Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7 . Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, .phase-selectorswitch(es). '
9 . Generator voltage adjusting rheostat. .
10 . Start-stop switch..
IL Overspeed shutdown device.
12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
13 . Coolant low-level shutdown device.
14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.
15 . Fuel tank derangement alarm .
16 . Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
17 . Low battery alarm.
18 . Battery charger malfunction alarm.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices, and wiring
required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine,
generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's
standard.
F. Audible Alarms: Signal the occurrence Of any events listed below without differentiating
between event types. Locate audible device and silencing means on generator. Connect so that
after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing
switch is reset.
1 . Engine high-temperature shutdown.
2. Lube-oil low-pressure shutdown.
r� 3 . Overspeed shutdown .
4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 6 of 11
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
D . Thickness : 1 - 1 /2 inches (38 mm). t,
g . Adhesive: ASTM C 916, Type I .
F . Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel pin, length required penetrate liner plus a 1 /8- inch
(3-mm) projection maximum into the airstream .
G . Joint and Seam Tape: Comply with UL 181 A .
H . Joint and Seam Sealant: Comply with UL 181 A .
1 . Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication : Comply with SMACNA' s " HVAC Duct Construction
Standard " for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint
types and intervals .
mply with SMACNA' s "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction
J . Fabricate Fibrous Glass Ducts: Co
Standard. "
3 .2 ACCESSORIES
A . Volume-Control Dampers: Factory fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with
required hardware and accessories . Single-blade and multiple opposed -blade, standard leakage
rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications .
�omplete with required hardware and
B Fir esDampeTs: labeled Factory
-faccbdicated fire ng UL 555 , " Standard rd forFire Dampers ."
ampers, c
mlete with
C . Ceiling Fire
accessories . DUL listed and nlabeled; comply dwith the conrequired
struct on det ilsfor the tested
floor/roof-ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
D . Smoke Dampers: Factory-fabricated smoke and fire dampers, complete with required
hardware and accessories . UL labeled according to UL SSSS , " Standard for Leakage Rated
Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems ." Combination fire and smoke dampers shall also
be UL labeled for 1 - 1 /2-hour rating according to UL 555 , " Standard for Fire Dampers . "
E . Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181 , Class 1 .
F . Flexible Ducts : [Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing] or [Factory-
fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1 - 1 /2-inch- (38-mm-) thick,
glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner] .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEEMIG SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Duct System Pressure Class : Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct
pressure classification indicated .
B . Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.
C . Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures .
D. Dishwasher Exhaust Duct Installation : Comply with SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards . "
E. Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA 's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standard . "
F. Support and r- om]eet fibrous glass ducts according to SIVIACNA 's Tihrnns Glass hurt
Construction Standard . "
G . Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in
SMACNA standards .
H. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to
avoid erosion of duct liner.
I Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions .
J- Install fusible links in fire dampers.
3 .2 TESTING, ADJUSTING , AND BALANCING
A . Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to
indicated quantities.
END OF SECTION 15810
15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 3
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
!1 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm•
7. Lube-oil loco-pressure prealann.
7• Fuel tank low level.
8• Overcrank shutdown.
9. Coolant low-temperature alarm
10. Control switch not in auto position.
11 . Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
l2. Battery low-voltage alarm.
G. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Outdoor, wall-mounted with sight of and at least 25 feet from
the generator and fuel tanks, NEMA 4X and prominently labeled with a durably ac
using minimum =" white letters on a red background. Push button is protected from accidental
operation. 1y acrylic sign
2. 13 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, m
thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; co
With NEMA AB 1plying
and UL 489.
1 . Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protectio .
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. n
3 . Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when
Protective devices. generator set is shut do
� wn by other
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel .
B . Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case
with UL 489. , electronic-trip type; 10o percent rated complying
I • Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time dela
2. Trip Settings: Matched to generator thermal damage curve as closely as instantaneous.3 • Shunt TriY and instantaneous.
Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down b
Protective devices.
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoringY other
C. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case a panel.
tYP 100 percentrated.
1 . Rating: Matched to generator output rating,
2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by other
Protective devices .
D. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit that continuously monitors current level in
each phase a generator output, integrates generator heating effect over time, and predicts when
thermal damage of the alternator will occur. When signaled b
set protective devices, a shun rip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
Y the protector or other generator-
switch to
disconnect the generator frotn the load circuits. Protector performs the following
functions:
1 • Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 1 10 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 7 of I I
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
2. Under fault conditions, regulates the generator to 300 percent of rated full- load current
for up to 10 seconds .
3 . As heating effect on the generator of overcurrent approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
switch, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated
voltage to avoid overshoot.
2. 14 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
B . Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated integrally with
generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H.
D. Stator-Winding Leads : Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and beat during specifiedintervalsofoperation at 110 percent of
rated capacity.
F . Exciter uses no slip or collector rings, or brushes, . and-is arranged to .sustain generator output
under short-circuit conditions as specified:
G. Enclosure: Dripproo£
H. Voltage Regulator:'- Solid-state type, separate from, exciter; 'providing performance as specified.
1 . Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output- voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
2 . 15 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, rainproof stainless or galvanized steel housing, wind resistant up
to 120 mph. Multiple housing-access panels are lockable and provide adequate access to
components requiring maintenance, Panels are removable by one person without tools.
Instruments and controls are mounted within enclosure.
B . Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system
components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours
with ambient temperature at top of range specified in "Service Conditions" Article.
C. Louvers: Fixed-engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entryof rain and snow.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 8 of 11
� )
c�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15 83 8 - POWER VENTILATORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit Product Data.
B . Submit Shop Drawings, including roof-mounting details .
C . Bear the AMCA seal .
D . Comply with applicable NEMA standards .
E. ComPly with UL 705 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 VENTILATORS AND ACCESSORIES
—� A . Wall -Mounted Ventilators: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
B . Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Ceiling Units : Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
B . Ground power ventilators.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B .
END OF SECTION 15 83 8
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
Page ] of 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
2 . 16 FINISHES
A. Description: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and
compatible standard primer.
2. 17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Include prototype testing and Project-specific
equipment manufactured specifically for this Project). equipment testing (testing of
B. Prototype Testing: Performed on a separate engine generator set using same engine model
accessories. ,
constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent
C. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Factory test engine generator set and other system
components and accessories before shipment.
Include the following tests ; Perform tests at rated load and power factor.
1 . Full load run.
Maximum power.
3 - Voltage regulation.
4• Transient and steady-state governing.
5 . Single-step load pickup. ="
6. Safety shutdown.
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written instalalignment
instructions, and with NFPA 110. lation and
E . Set packaged engine generator on concrete base. Cast-in-place concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
I • Support generator-set mounting feet on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points new foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1 - 1 (2-inch
( 19- to 38-111m) gap between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2 • Adjust metal supports or wedges until generator is level.
C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance without removing
connections or accessories.
D. Install exhaust-system piping for diesel engines according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Exhaust shall be directed away from, and generally upward and in the opposition
direction from the nearby fuel dispensers and fuel tank vents.
E. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping 0 1ow
points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of disposition,
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 9 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorised service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to supervise testing: Report results in writing.
B . Tests: Include the following;
I . Tests recommended by manufacturer.
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 1. 10 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Single-step full-load pickup test.
3 . Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
Perform an integrity load test and a .capacity load test for the ' battery. Verify acceptance
of charge for each element of batteryafter. discharge. Verify measurements are within
manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
S . System Integrity Tests; Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine generator installation before and during system operation.
Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks .
6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer- with 'a scale exceeding 40-inch
wg ( 120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that
back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the
engine.
7. Noise Level Tests : Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from the generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling air intake and discharge, at 25 feet
north, east, south, and west from the generator, and compare measured levels with
required values.
C. Coordinate generator-set test with test for the transfer switch and perform them concurrently.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.
F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 10 of 11
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS , AND GRILLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Submit Product Data, including color charts for factory finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 OUTLETS AND INLETS
A Diffusers : See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
B . Wall and Ceiling Registers: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
C Wall and Ceiling Grilles: See HVAC Plans for manufacturer and details.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling- and
wall-mounted items.
B - Locate ceiling diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction 'Reflected
Ceiling Plans . " Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
END OF SECTION 15855
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Page 1 of 1
Port Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
3 .3 BATTERY EQUALIZA'T'ION
A• Description; Equalize charging of battery
Record individual cell voltages. cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3 .4 DEMONSTRATION
A• Engage afactory-authorized service representative to train O
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. wner's maintenance personnel to
I • Coordinate with training requirements for transfer switch .
END OF SECTION 1623I
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 11 of I 1
`, l
� ^�
_.�
(�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A . Summary: Electric/electronic controls sequences for HVAC systems and equipment.
B . Submit Shop Drawings detailing operating control sequences of each item of HVAC
equipment and system .
C. Submit Product Data for controllers, sensors, operators, control panels, thermostats,
humidistats, actuators, and control valves and dampers.
D. System Description : See HVAC Plans for control requirements .
E- Operation Sequence : See HVAC Plans for control requirements.
l PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A - Install control wiring concealed, except in mechanical rooms, and according to requirements
specified in Division 16 sections.
END OF SECTION 15900
15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V
and less, used for disconnecting and protection functions.
B . See Division 16 Section "Fuses " for fuses for fusible disconnect switches.
1 -2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of switch and circuit breaker indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers-
C . Field quality-control test reports .
D. Operation and maintenance data.
\� 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Eaton Corp .; Cutler-Hammer Products .
2. General Electric Co. ; Electrical Distribution & Control Division .
3 . Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance /
4 . Square D Co.
2 .2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A . Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with lockable handle, interlocked with
cover.
B . Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked with cover.
2 .3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A . Molded-Casa Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1 , with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1 . Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers : Inverse time-current element for low- level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2 . Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted; field-adjustable trip setting.
3 . Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers : Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1 , RK-5 .
4 . GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity .
B . Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories : Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and ( _J
number of poles.
1 . Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings , and material of conductors .
2 . Application Listing: Appropriate for application ; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3 . Ground-Fault Protection : Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4 . Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of
rated voltage.
2 .4 ENCLOSURES
A . Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:
1 . Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2 . Food Service Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel .
3 . Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2 of 2
t )
C _;
SECTION 15981
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FINAL
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1 .2 SCOPE
A. Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to verify the performance of the
complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described by Division 15 .
Performance verification shall be accomplished by established testing and balancing procedures
as described in this section.
1 . 3 RELATION TO OTHER WORK
A . Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other
sections of Division 15 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.
1 .4 TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY
A . All performance verification shall be performed by an independent test and ba]
(herein referred to as the "T & B Agency") ante agency
g y ) which is fully certified by and acurrent membe -of
the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
1 . 5 CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
A. Performance verification shall be performed as a service of the T & B
Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of the agreement. Agency directly to the
B . Performance verification is specified in this Division 15 only because it relates predominantly
to Division 15 work. However, the inclusion in this Division 15 of this section covering
Performance verification shall not preclude the contractual agreement of the T & B Agency from
contracting directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of such agr
1 . 6 AGENCY APPROVAL eement.
A. Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T & B Agency to the Architect/Engineer for
approval within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed.
B. Include AABC National Project Certification Performance Guaranty.
15981 - 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. l
A . Temporary Provisions : Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of moving parts.
B . Identify components, provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuits
have been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements .
B . Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers: Make internal and external
inspections and perform tests, including the following :
1 Inspect for freedom from Physical d .
r ) amage, proper unit sating, mechanical condition,
enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances, and tightness of
electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is observed on any unit, check
each electrical connection for each switch and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for
compliance with manufacturer's torquing instructions.
2 . Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase-to-phase, and please-to-ground, following
manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use
500-V minimum test voltage for units and circuits rated up to 250 V, 1000-V minimum
test voltage for units rated more than 250 V . Measured insulation resistance`.inust be 25
megohms, minimum , for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 megohms, minimum, for
switches rated more than 250 V.
1 3 . Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper operation .
l C Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches : Include the following:
1 . Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions.
2 . Check adequacy and integrity of fuseholders by removing and installing fuses`
3 . Check integrity of phase barriers.
4 . Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe adequacy of blade
pressure.
D . Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers: hrclude the following:
1 . Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating.
2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating components for proper operation .
E . Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and reinspect and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16410
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
1 . Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts .
2 - Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
1 . 2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation . Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B . Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures . Indicate dimensions, weights,
methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories .
1 . Include wiring diagrams .
,l C . Product Certificates : For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product
/ manufacturer.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
C. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by FMG.
D. NFPA 101 Compliance : Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
igns.PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
_ product selection :
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page I of 1
1 7 WORK INCLUDED
A. The T & B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services , tools, test
equipment and instruments (except as otherwise specified) to perform the following work and
all other work of this section:
1 . Review the automatic temperature control and air terminal unit specifications r and
their
respective and combined effects on the testing and balancing procedures
hydronic systems.
2. Where in the opinion of the T & B Agency conditions may exist in the system design or
construction that may have the potential of adversely affecting system performance, then the
T & B Agency shall identify the condition and submit in writing recommended correctives
for consideration by the Architect/Engineer.
3 . During construction, review those shop drawings which have relevance to performance
verification to confirm that the required piping, ductwork and equipment, and their
respective specialties and accessories such as gauges, valves , dampers, access doors , etc. ,
are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing d balancing
to be accomplished.
4 . Perform site inspections to verify compliance with documents, and observe pressure tests
on ductwork.
5 . perform a complete air and hydronic test and balance of all heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and exhaust air systems and all water and steam systems shown and described
on the Construction Documents and as further described herein.
6. Submit Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report.
fter
7 . Furnish specifications to Contractor for properly sized fixed sheaves on fan systems a
proper RPM has been established.
l . g EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Prior to balancing and testing the new systems, obtain test data on those existing systems which
es
provided
ary) those existing t s ting sysso that they operate at hm
e saconditions u
lance (if and as
nnder wh ch they
were operating prior to the new work.
B . The above test data shall be provided as part of the test and balance report. The test data shall
and temperatures entering and leaving any equipment items
include the water and air flow rates air conditioning system. However, only the
which is part of the existing heating, ventilating and
fluid affected by the new work need be tested (for example, an air handling unit which is
unaffected on its airside but which is affected on its waterside need only have flow ae water data
obtained). Also, if a piping system branch serves a group of units, then only
15981 -2 `
existing branch need be measured and not necessarily the flow at each air handling unit served
by the branch (unless measurement at each unit is the only way to obtain the branch total flow).
1 . 9 GUARANTY
A. The T & B Agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and
acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect/Engineer may
request a re-check or re-setting of any system component requiring testing and balancing, The
T & B Agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect/Engineer
in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition
to the A.A. B. C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall also be
provided.
PAR12 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. The tangible product of this section shall include the reports and documentation necessary to
verify the systems' performance.
2.2 REPORT
A. The T & B Agency shall in the course of his work record the information herein specified.
Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system. Recorded data shall
be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Construction
Documents. Four (4) copies of the final report signed, bound and indexed shall be submitted
to the Architect/Engineer for his approval or comments.
B . Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10%
from the design, the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations
for corrective action to the Architect/Engineer for his consideration.
C. In those cases where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent
and/or erroneous, the Architect/Engineer may request additional testing and balancing. The T
& B Agencyshall at no additional cost perform such retesting and rebalancing as directed by and
in the presence of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Where, in the opinion of the T & B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise
from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T & B Agency shall note same in the
report and submit recommendations for action to the Architect/Engineer.
E. The T & B Agency shall verify that each thermostat and the devices it is controlling, such as
control valves, motorized dampers, VAV boxes, etc. , operate in the exact sequence required.
F. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report:
15981 -3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to , products specified.
2 . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified .
2 .2 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A . Fixture Drawing E-7 :
1 . Available Products:
a. As specified on drawings
2 . Voltage: 120/240-V ac.
3 . Mounting: As specified on drawings
4 . Lamps: As specified on drawings.>
2 .3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A . Description : Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated :
1 . Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
2 . Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3 .0 times the line current .
B . Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise
indicated :
I . Comply with NEMA C82 . 11 .
2 . Ballast Type : Instant start, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently
started lamps .
4 . Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to NEMA C82 . 11 .
5 . Transient Voltage Protection : IEEE C62 .41 , Category A .
6 . Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail .
C . Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Type: Electronic.
2 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3 . Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
4 . Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
D . Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum .
2 . Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum . _
3 . Transient Protection : Comply with IEEE C62 .41 for Category Al locations.
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\l
2 .4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A . Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and
yield less than 0 .2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1 .
B . T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI
of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless
otherwise indicated .
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches. 1300
initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K. and average
rated life of 20, 000 hours, unless otherwise indicated .
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps : CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 , average rated life of
10
.000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum) .
3 . T4, Twin Tube : Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum).
5 . T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 900 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum) .
7. T43 Double-Twin Tube : Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum ) .
2 . 5 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
1 A . Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports .
B . Single-Stem Hangers: 1 /2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin -Stem Hangers : Two, 1 /2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D . Wires : ASTM A 641 /A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage wire size>.
E . Wires For Humid Spaces : ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/ 16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod .
G . Hook Hangers : Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page 3 of 3
1 . Motors:
Manufacturer
Model and serial number
Rated amperage and voltage
Rated horsepower
Rated RPM
Corrected full load amperage
Measured amperage and voltage
Calculated BHP
Measured RPM
Sheave size, type and manufacturer
2 . Fans:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, BI or Air Foil - number of blades
Rated CFM , measured CFM
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Measured pressures - inlet and Outlet Static Pressure
Pulley size, type and manufacturer
Belt size and quantity
Rated TSP
Operating TSP & operating ESP (at discharge side of _
Supply Fan or suction side of Exhaust/Return Fan)
3 . Pum s:
Manufacturer
Model or Serial number, impeller size
Rated RPM, measured RPM
Rated head, measured head
Rated pressures
Measured discharge pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured suction pressure (full flow and no flow)
Measured GPM
Operating bead
Operating RPM
4 AirSyst als (including inlets and outlets
Provide single. line diagrammatic plan locating each air inlet and outlet and its reference
number.
Grille or diffuser reference number and manufacturer.
Grille or diffuser location.
Design velocity.
Design CFM . r
15981 -4
Effective area factor and size-
Measured velocity.
Measured CFM
Terminal Unit CFM
G. Other Report Requirements: Where any systems have equipment or components which are not
covered by the above, then the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following data
as applicable to such equipment or systems to confirm actual operation:
1 . All inlet and outlet areas.
2 . All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions.
4 . All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at appropriate locations.
5 . All speeds.
6 . All voltage and ampere ranges .
7. Descriptions of each test method used.
2 -3 INSTRUMENTATION
A. All test and balance equipment and instruments to be furnished by the T & B Agency shall have
been calibrated within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments
to be used shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to commencing test and balancin
operations and shall include equipment and/or instrumentsg
, name, manufacturer, serial number
and certification of last calibration date. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability
shall be accompanied with manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Test and balance equipment
and instruments furnished by the Contractor to the T & B Agency shall be accompanied with
certification as required above. The T & B Agency shall be responsible for the protection from
damage due to accident, abuse or misuse, all equipment and instruments provided by the
Contractor, and shall return same in good working condition at the completion of the test and
balance work to the Contractor. The T & B Agency shall repair at his expense to original
condition and accuracy or replace with like equipment and instruments damaged in the work.
2.4 DIAGRAMS
A. Provide a schematic diagram (i.e., one-line) of duct system(s) tested. Indicate on the diagram
the relative location of all air distribution devices, VAV boxes, heating/cooling coils, points of
data measurements (i .e., Pitot traverse, temperature, static pressure) fans, airhandling units, and
similar equipment included in the system. Diagram shall identify each component tested. Said
identification shall utilize the conventions shown on the drawings (i. e. , AHU- 1 or SF-6) and
correlate with the data sheets provided in the Test and Balance Report.
J
15981 -5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Fixtures : Set level , plumb, and square with ceilings and walls . Install lamps in each fixture .
B . Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings : Use grid for support.
1 . Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2 . Support Clips : Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application .
3 . Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid : Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel , and support fixtures independently with at least two 3 /4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees .
4 . Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3 .
C . Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1 . Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2 . Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3 . Continuous Rows : Use tubing or stein for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4 . Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
D. Air-Handling Fixtures : Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16511
l
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 4
SECTION 16715
�l
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hems for wiring systems used as signal pathways t'urvoice and
high-speed data transmission:
1 . Mounting elements.
2. Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
3 . Fiber-optic cabling.
4. Workstation outlets .
5 . Backboards.
6. Identification products.
\ B . Related Sections include the following:
/) 1 . Division 13 Section " Security Access" for data transmission meeting RS-232 and RS-485
cabling associated with system panels and devices.
2 . Division 16 Sections "AudioNideo Cabling".
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backbone: A facility (e. g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between telecommunications rooms or
floor distribution terminals , the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms within or between
buildings.
B . BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Cross,Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. Horizontal Cabling: Cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and
the horizontal cross-connect. Also the cabling between and including the building automation
system outlet or the first mechanical terminations on the horizontal connection point and the
horizontal cross-connect.
16715 - I
2. 5 LOGSANDFORMS t l
A. Logs and forms shall clearly indicate following: /
1 . All inlet and outlet areas .
2. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes.
3 . Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions .
4 . Allfluidvelocities, flowrates, temperaturesandpressuresatsignificantlocations (e.g. , fluid
pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and
return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.).
5 . All fan speeds .
6 . All motor ampere ranges .
7 . Descriptions of each test method used.
B . Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. Sheaves: The Contractor shall provide applicable fans with V-belt drives and fixed pitch
sheaves . In order to provide the properly sized fixed pitces. h sheave, the Contractor shall initially
provide fans with V -belt drives, variable Agency, will replace these adjustable pitch sheaves with fixed
The Contractor, upon completion Of
system balancing by the T p B Ag Y, p enc The Contractor shall tag the
sheaves of the size and type specified by the T & B Agency.
g Y�
adjustable sheaves , transmit same to Owner, and receive written The
by Owner of acceptance
of these sheaves.
B . Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be undertaken with maximum
attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with
ceiling tile in place and enclosing partitions and doors erected.
C . Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal
operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect and Owner.
D. Where patented measuring stations are installed, each of these is to be read and recorded. In the
anometers, annular
hydronic systems, the permanent devices, such as flow tubes with mercury m
ring systems, ventu i tubes with portable meters, etc. must be used for final measurements after
they are completed, calibrated and in satisfactory condition.
i
15981 -6
3 - 2 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY
A. The Contractor, prior to commencement of the balancing by the T & B Agency, shall verify in
writing:
1 . That strainers have been removed and cleaned.
2. That all air filters have been installed and are in clean condition.
3 . That expansion tanks have been inspected and that the system is not air bound and is
completely filled with water.
4. That all air vents at coils and high points of the piping systems have been inspected and are
installed and operating freely.
5. That all automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been left or fixed in the
open position for full flow through all devices.
6. That all linkages between valves or dampers and their actuators are secure.
7. That all pumps and fans are operating at the specified RPM.
B . The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the systems as scheduled for balancing, are
operational and ete
at all
ing
uctwork have been
ressure tested and
accepted and all affemc elpg dpi m syystems have beendcleaned, flushed and refiled with prescribed
1 treated water and vented.
/ 3 . 3 PROTECTION OF WORK
A . The Contractor shall protect all mechanical devices during the testing and balancing period The
activities of the T & B Agency will include but not be limited to the adjustments of designated
balancing devices including; adjustment of balancing dampers, adjustment of inlet vane
dampers, adjustment of air extractors, air splitters, or manual dampers, the adjustment of
adjustable sheaves for fan speed, the adjustment of balancing valves, or similar devices. The
existence of the T & B Agency shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
complete operation of the mechanical systems in conformance with the contract documents.
3 .4 CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner rectify discrepancies between the actual
installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T & B Agency the discrepancy
will significantly affect system balance and performance.
3 . 5 COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE
A. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by providing all labor, equipment, tools and
material required to operate all of the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and
15981 -7
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G . LAN : Local area network.
H. RCDD : Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. RMC : Rigid metallic conduit.
j . UTP : Unshielded twisted pair.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For features , ratings , and performance of each component specified.
B . Shop Drawings :
1 . Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of telecommunications equipment rooms,
labeling each individual component. Show equipment rack assemblies, method of field
assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections .
2 . System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules , in software and format
selected by Owner.
3 . - Cabling Administration Drawings.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics includ ng the following:
a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies. �.
b. Patch cords .
C. Patch panels.
d. Fiber-optic boxes .
e. Distribution racks.
f. Terminal racks.
1 .5 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Cabling installer must have on staff personnel certified by BICSI.
1 . Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings , Cabling Administration Drawings,
and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2 . Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Proj ect
site.
1 .6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with School Board' s
MIS team and equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with
local exchange carrier.
16715-2 _
} I . Meetjointly with School Board' s MIS team and equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier
representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants.
3 . Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross-connect and patch panels
in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2 .2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B . Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs in
cables, positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate at
minimum 25 percent future increase in the number of workstations shown on Drawings. This
expansion requirement does not apply to horizontal cable from workstation outlet to first terminal
board.
2 . 3 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A. Backboards : 3/4'-inch, interior-grade, free-retardant-treated plywood.
B . Distribution Racks: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for
telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
1 . Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard 19 -inch panel mounting.
2. Finish: Baked-polyester powder coat.
C . Power Strips: For mounting in the rack, with 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R
receptacles, number as indicated, but in no case fewer than 6, and including the following:
I . LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
3 . Circuit breaker and thermal fusing. Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost.
16715 -3
balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic
or automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each
working day during the period of final testing and balancing. The Contractor shall assist the T
& B Agency by arranging to have all ceilings, partitions, windows, and doors installed prior to
the scheduled commencement of balancing within each specified area.
B . The Contractor shall provide to the approved T & B Agency a complete set ofp lens and
specifications and an approved copy of all heatingventilatingand air conditioning equipment
shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes , as
well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the T &
B Agency.
3 .6 AIR SYSTEMS
A. The testing and balancing shall include, but is not l mited to, the following requirements:
1 . Adjust fan speeds to deliver the required cfm and static pressure, and record rpm and fall
load amperes .
2 . Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts to verify design cfm. Seal duct access holes
with rubber or metal snap-in plugs.
3 . For each supply air system, verify the quantity of outside air and return air when the system
is operating in the maximum cooling and full heating modes. { _
4. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements, and
\._
also adjust so as to minimize drafts in all areas.
5 . Observe all equipment and exposed ductwork for noise, movement or vibration under
normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect/Engineer.
B . After all air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air
quantities and if temperature in any area . (where such area does not have the particular zone
temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees
plus or minus of the zone areas which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then
notify Architect/Engineer of such conditions and obtain approval to rebalance devices to obtain
air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone ill bo reb lance,
e as even as
possible regardless of calculated design air quantities . After obtaining app
rovaperform such necessary rebalancing.
END OF SECTION
15981 - 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Raceways .
2 . Building wire and connectors.
3 - Supporting devices for electrical components-
4. Electrical identification -
5 . Utility company electricity-metering components.
6. Concrete equipment bases.
7 . Electrical demolition .
8 . Cutting and patching for electrical construction .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A - Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components.
B . Shop Drawings : Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single-line
of electricity-metering component assemblies specific to this Project. diagram
1 -3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices
Article 100 , and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
, by a testing agency acceptable to authoriti
intended use . es having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published
standards.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
1 .4 COORDINATION
A Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and
cable with general construction work.
B . Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 of ]
4. Direct plug-in cord connected with 15 -foot line cord.
5 . Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
6 . Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 33 kA per phase.
7 . Protection modes shall be line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground. UL 1449
clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V.
8 . One RJ11 / 12C telephone line protector, suitable for modem connection. Maximum
clamping voltage 220 peak on pins No. 3 and No. 4.
D, Wall-Mounting Rack: Aluminum, hinged wall bracket with provisions for power strip mounting.
E. Floor-Mounting Rack: Steel, freestanding, modular, with vertical and horizontal cable
management channels, top and bottom cable troughs , and grounding lug.
2 .4 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
A. Available Cable Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2 . Belden Inc. ; Electronics Division-
3 . KRONE Incorporated.
B . Terminal and Connector Component and Distribution Rack Manufacturers :
I . AMP ; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.
2 . Avaya Inc . 1
3 . Hom2cO. \
4 . KRONE Incorporated.
5 . Panduit Corp.
C . 100-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG, number of pairs as required, minimum 25 pairs.
2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIABIA-568 -B .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, type CMR complying with UL 1666.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG , 100 ohm, four pair.
2 . Comply with TIA/EIA-568-11 .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, types CMG and CMP.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
r
16715-4
F . Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B .2 , IDC type, using modules designed
1 for punch-down caps or tools.
1 . IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and j acks
where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
G . Cross-Connect Panel: Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables
and permit interconnection between cables.
1 . Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables plus 25 percent
spare.
H. Patch Panel: Comply with TIA/EIA-568 -13 .2, meeting or exceeding cable performance. Modular
panels housing multiple-numbered j ack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for pentianeut
termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1 . Number of Jacks per Field : One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus
spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
2 . 5 FIBER-OPTIC CABLING
A . Cable, Terminal, and Connector Product Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2. Berk-Tek; an Alcatel Company.
3 . Chromatic Technologies; a Draka USA Company.
4. Coming Cable Systems.
5 . Panduit Corp.
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: 62 .5/ 125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber.
C . Backbone Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on the drawings .
1 . Comply with TLVEIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2 . NFPA 70, Type OFN complying with UL 1666 .
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 .50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 .25 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
D. Horizontal Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on drawings .
1 . Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2. NFPA 70, Types OFN and OFNP as required.
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 . 50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 . 0 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4 . Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
16715 -5
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES tt l
overhe
d utiffics and
I _ Coordinate
oordina e Inst Nationing and conne on for service entranceion of s and elgectr ciityround meteringa components. 1, /
rvices,
rs for electrical items
at aye concealed by
D . Cooled sturfaces . Access doors and panels afire sh
specified in other portions of this specification .
fin
ied to
E iWhere eltrical n tallation of identificatioadevices with completion tion devices are lof finished field-finished surfaces, coordinate
d surface
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 RACEWAYS
I C80 .3 , zinc-coated steel , with set-screw fittings .
A . EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANS
B . FMC : Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel .
C . IMC : Intermediate metal conduit; ANSI C80 .6, zinc-coated steel , with threaded fittings .
D . LFMC : Liquidtight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and
mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.
E RMC : Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel ; ANSI C80 . 1 .
C : Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings .
F . g
G . Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used .
2 .2 WIRES , CABLES , AND CONNECTIONS
A . Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper .
B . Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG : Stranded copper. ZHWN or
C . Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V , 75 deg C minimum, Type THW , THHN
USE depending on application . .
D . Wire Correctors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, materia], type, and class suitable
for service indicated.
2 .3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-funned steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.
B . Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
ameter
C at attmaximum of hannel :
inches c ., edges turned towrd web5
Strengths rating o suidt stra lr slotted holes
tural loading.
i
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
D. Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle : Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/ ] 6-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least
one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.
E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories : Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the
type and size of channel with which used .
1 - Materials : Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel .
F. Raceway and Cable Supports : Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-
type hangers.
G . Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53 , Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel , plain ends.
H . Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarnored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish .
L Expansion Anchors : Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
J . Toggle Bolts : All-steel springhead type.
K . Powder-Driven Threaded Studs : Heat-treated steel .
2 . 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A . Identification Device Colors : Use those prescribed by ANSI A13 . 1 , NFPA 70, and .these
Specifications.
B . Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables : Self-adhesive vinyl tape,
not less than I inch wide by 3 mils thick.
C . Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
D. Color-Coding Cable Ties : Type 6/6 nylon,- self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.
E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape
compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and with the following features :
1 • Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2 . Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
3 Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates : Engraving stock, melamine plastic
laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1 / 16-inch minimum thickness for signs up
l to 20 sq . in. and 1 /8-inch minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters
on white background .
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 3
E. Cross-Connect and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable )
connectors.
1 . Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
F- Patch Cords : Factory-made, dual fiber cables in 36-inch lengths and/or directed by MIS team.
G . Cable Connecting Hardware:
I . Comply with TLA/EIA-568-B .3 .
2 . Quick-connect, simplex- and duplex-Type Sc couplers . Insertion loss not morethan 0 .7 dB .
3 . Type SFE connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages .
2. 6 WORKSTATION OUTLETS
A. Jacks : 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, modular, RJ-45 . Comply with
T A/EIA-568-B . 1 -
B . Workstation. outlets: . Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single ,or multi gang faceplate.
1 . Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
3 - Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying the circuit.
C . Flush dual fiber-optic connector assemblies mounted int-gangfaceplatewithflush dual RJ-45jack
assembly.
1 . Faceplate: Higb-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated- the circuit.
3 . Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying
2 .7 BACKBOARDS
A. A-C , void-free plywood, 84 inches high and 314-inch thick, fire rated. Paint both sides with (2) two
coats of white fire-retardant paint.
2. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Materials: Comply with NFPA 70 , TLVEIA-607 , and UL 467 .
2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . Brady Worldwide, Ine-
t
16715 -6 �. _
2. HellermannTyton.
3 . Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B . Comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
C_ Cable Labels : Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers , machine printed with
alphanumeric cable designations.
2. 10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Coaxial Cable: Each cable spool sweep tested at the factory before shipping at frequencies from
5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a
cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through specified frequency range and
graphing the results .
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: Each cable spool tested at factory before shipping at 850 and 1300 nm. Test
and inspect OTDR according to TIA/EIA TSB-67 .
C . UTP Cable Verification of Performance: Test every cable package or reel at factory to verify that
cable complies with TLA/EIA-568-B .2 requirements .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BICSI TCI, TWEIA-568-13. 1 , TIAlEIA-568 -8 . 2, TWEIA-568-13.3 , and
TLA/EIA-569-A.
3 .2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
1 . Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed
complying with EMI clearance requirements.
2 . Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using
products labeled for type of wall penetrated.
3 . Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of
individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures
is adequate for each pathway.
4 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16715 -7
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES ll
J
G . Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted ; comply with 29 CFR 1910 . 145 , Chapter XVII . Co ors,
legend, and size appropriate to each application .
1 . Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel -finish , punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners. cellulose-acetate butyrate with
2 . Exterior Units: Weather-resistant; nonfading, preprinted,
0 .0396-inch, galvanized-steel backing. 1 /4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
H . Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-
steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers .
2 . 5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY' S ELECTRICITY METERING
A . Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for meter socket .
2 . 6 CONCRETE BASES
Materials : As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
A . Concrete Forms and Reinforcement
Place Concrete . "
B . Concrete: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength -
PART 3 EXECUTION
trength .PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A . Headroom Maintenance : if mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom .
B . Materials and Components: Install level , plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated .
C . Equipment : Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components .
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations .
D . Right of Way : Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3 .2 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoor Installations:
1 . Exposed: RNC .
2 . Concealed: RNC .
3 . Underground, Single Run: RNC .
4 . Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated .
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Indoor Installations :
I - Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC .
2 . Concealed in Walls or Ceilings : EMT.
3 . In Concrete Slab: EMT.
4 . Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RNC
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations : LFMC .
6 . Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 , unless otherwise indicated.
3 . 3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A . Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and
floors .
B . Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel .
C . Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or woven
Polypropylene or monofilament plastic Line with not less than 200-1b (90-kg) tensile strenh .
Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wires . gt
E . Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN 53) and smaller, in
maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent Add
pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.
F. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration , noise transmission, or movement with a
maximum of 72-inches flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. ---Install
separate ground conductor across flexible connections .
G . Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface .
3 .4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A . Application : Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as
interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B . Exposed Feeders : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
C . Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
D. Concealed Feeders in Concrete, below Floors on Grade, in Crawlspaces: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces : Insulated single conductors in raceway.
F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions : Insulated single
J conductors in raceway.
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 5 of 5
3 3 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A . Backbone Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between
equipment rooms and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
B . Backbone Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between equipment rooms
and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
C . Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between wiring
closets and workstation outlets .
D. Horizontal Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between wiring closets
and workstation outlets .
3 .4 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 .
B . Wiring Metbod: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces . Cable trays are specified
in Division 16 Section "Cable Trays ." Raceways and boxes are specified in Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes . "
C . Wiring Method: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where
unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, /
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. Cable trays
including plenum ceilings.
'Cable Trays . " Raceways and boxes are specified in
are specified in Division 16 Section
Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes ."
D. Cable Installation:
I . Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members
and follow surface contours where possible.
2 . Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect
and patch panels.
3 , Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's written recommended pulling tensions. Do
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
5 . Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches
from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames , and terminals.
16715-8
6. Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and
linked signal paths, end to end.
a. Do not untwist more than 1/2 inch of Category 6 cables at connector terminations.
7 . Outdoor Coaxial Cable:
a. Outdoor connections shall be installed in enclosures complying with NEMA 250,
Type 4X. Connectors shall be corrosion resistant with properly designed O-rings to
keep out moisture.
b. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.
E: Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures:
1 . Install plywood backboards on walls of equipment rooms and wiring closets from floor to
ceiling or as directed by MIS team.
2. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards and
floor-mounted racks.
3 . Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
4. Train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
5 . Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
F. Separation from EMI Sources : Comply with BICSI TDM and TLA/EIA-569-A recommendations
for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment. Comply with the following minimum separation
distances from possible sources of EMI:
I . Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open
cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 12 inches .
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 24 inches.
2. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to cables
in grounded metallic raceways is as follows :
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2- 1/2 inches .
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 6 inches.
C . Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches.
3 . Separation between power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic
conduits or enclosures in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
16715 -9
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
I below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in
G . Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete,
raceway .
H . Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway .
3 . 5 WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Make taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better
mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
3 .6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A . Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hct-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel
system components.
B . Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C . Strength least four f Su po Ib m Adequate
design carry preset nd future rt loads, times a safety factor of at
3 .7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A . Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers. 1\
B . Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent 1
minimum in the future.
C . Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps .
lled
D . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls my and fire-rated
holes are used . Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies . Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods
unless other fastening methods are indicated :
I Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails.
2 . Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of
wall .
3 . Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around
sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall .
4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts . powder charge and
S . Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts or threaded studs driven by p
provided with lock washers.
6 . Structural Steel : Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock l
washers.
7 . Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws.
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
l 8 . Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations : Stainless steel .
9. Light Steel : Sheet-metal screws.
10. Fasteners : Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-
test load .
3 . 8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES
A . Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and
maintenance of equipment.
B . Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification
with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and
standards . Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C . Self-Adhesive Identification Products : Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit
numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for
voltage and phase identification .
E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior
underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and
communication lines . Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. If width of multiple lines
installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches, overall; use a
1 single line marker.
F . Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 191`0. 145,
Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems
and of items to which they connect . Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation . Install
metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
G . Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background
with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load
shedding, and other emergency operations .
3 .9 ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements .
Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.
3 . 10 FIRESTOPPrNTG
A . Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and
wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies.
Firestopping installation is specified in other sections of these specifications.
3 . 11 CONCRETE BASES
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 7 of 7
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 3 inches.
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 6 inches.
4. Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inches.
5 . Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches.
G. Conduit:
I , Comply with TWEIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull
points, and for pull-box sizing.
2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible.
3 . In telecommunications rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard (in
case of a single piece of plywood) or in the corner of room (where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room) . Use cable trays to route cables if
conduits cannot be located in these positrons. Secure conduits to backboard when entering
room from overhead. Extend conduits I to 3 inches in finished floor.
H. Backboards: Install plywood with 84-inch dimension from floor up toward ceiling. Butt adj acent
sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners .
3 . 5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section " Grounding and Bonding" and with TWEIA 607 .
B. Grounding Points: { �
I . Locate grounding terminals in each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabinet. \
2 . Telecommunications Grounding Busbars : Mount on wall of telecommunications entrance
facility, equipment room, and closet, with standoff insulators.
C. Bonding Conductors:
1 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to electrical entrance facility and connect
to grounding electrode.
2 . Where a panelboard for telecommunications islocated insame room or space as a grounding
bulbar, bond to equipment ground bus of electrical panelboard.
3 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to grounding busbars.
4. Extend from grounding busbars to ground terminals in equipment racks and cabinets.
5 . Extend from grounding busbars to building metal frame within room, or to metal frame
external to room but readily accessible.
D . Special Requirements :
1 . Bonding conductors shall be insulated copper, No. 6 AWG minimum.
2. Install only in nonmetallic conduit, unless specifically required for protection of conductor.
Metallic conduit, if used, shall be RMC. For RMC that exceeds 36 inches in length,
conductors shall be bonded at each end of conduit.
16715 -10 ��
3 . Bonding conductors shall be installed without splices unless approved by Architect because
of special circumstances . Where splices are necessary, they shall be accessible and shall be
located in telecommunications spaces. Splices shall be by irreversible compression
connectors or by exothermic welding.
3 . 6 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable
requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification. "
1 . Administration class for this Project shall be Class 3 .
2. Color-code cross-connect fields.
B . Using cable and asset management software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration
Drawings for system identification, testing, and managernen1 . Usc unique, alphanumeric
designation for each cable, and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects
with same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural
arrangement. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement and nomenclature,
and a consistent color-coded identification of individual conductors.
D. Cable and Wire Identification:
1 . Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device
if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or
cabinet .
3 . Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs : Label each cable at intervals
not exceeding 15 feet.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel .
a. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,
and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a
building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b . Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames .
5 . Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks
and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for
jacks and plugs of each service.
6. At Workstations: Attach label to device.
E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet . List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid
16715 - 11
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer' s anchorage 1
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated .
3 . 12 DEMOLITION
A . Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain . If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality .
B . Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety .
to
C Abandoned
7 ncs below the surk: Cut rface indicated remove buried raceway and wiring, babandoned
in
rf ce of adjacentacent co struction . Cap r cewaysndpath surfac
place, 2hee to
match existing finish .
D . Remove, store, clean , reinstall , reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3 . 13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
-s walls , ats othei involved .surfaces required to
A Cut, channel,hase, and
d , fed ceilings, and
tirades
permt elctri alsPerform cutting
B . Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces .
END OF SECTION 16050
16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Page 8 of 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART ] - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified
in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For ground rods .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
% B - Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2 .
C . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system:
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.
2 . Boggs, Inc.
3 . Chance/Hubbell .
4. Copperweld Corp.
5 . Dessert Corp.
6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
7. Framatome ConnectorsBurndy Electrical .
8 . Galvan Industries, Inc.
9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 1 of ]
frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project.
F . Cabling Administration Drawings:
floor plans o
stration
gcovtioad how labefor telecommunications closets ,ts , backbone
labeling. Idn fYlabelinn
s, work areas and
pathways and cables, terminal hardware and
positions,
and pahways,tndabquipment grounding
workstation terminal positions, grounding
nvention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in
conductors . Follow co
software and format selected by Owner.
3 .7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
A. Perform the following
B . Category 6 UTP Cabling Tests:
I . Tests shall include all tests of Category 5e, conducted from 1 to 250 MHz.
2. Channel and permanent link tests shall be performed with a tester that complies with
EIA-568 -B .2, Level III. Include tests for longitud nal or
performance requirements in TIA/
transverse conversion loss .
3 . Performance shall comply with mi
nimum criteria in TIAIEIA-568 -B .2.
C . Fiber-Optic Cable Tests:
I Test co applicable stua
qu pment manufacturer forchannel
only test ds and adapters that are qualified by to e
or link test configuration.
ment, cabletermnation, groundingandbonding equipment an
2. Visually inspect cableplace
patch cords , and labeling of all components.
3 . Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
a. Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in
1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526- 14-A, Method B , One Reference Jumper-
b .
umper.r horizontal links shall be
s than 2.0
b
results shall be less than that calculated according tosequation mT WEIA-568-B . 1.
ll be printed
n a
D. Data for report
that is formattedshallsimi lar to Table 10be documented . .11ain BICSI TDMlor transferred from the
pthe
summary p
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
.
E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
F. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified
requirements.
16715 - 12 r
3 . 8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records
of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training. "
END OF SECTION
16715- 13
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
10 . Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc . (,
I ] . Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.
12 . Ideal Industries, Inc _
13 . ILSCO .
14 , Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
15 . Korns, C . C. Co .; Division of Robroy Industries .
16 . Lightning Master Corp .
17 . Lyncole XIT Grounding.
18 . O-Z/Gedney CO . ; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
19 . Raco, Inc . ; Division of Hubbell .
20 . Robbins Lightning, Inc.
21 . Salisbury, W . H . & Co .
22 . Superior Grounding Systems, Inc .
23 . Thomas & Betts, Electrical .
2 .2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A . For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
B . Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation .
C . Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe . On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow . (^
D . Grounding Electrode Conductors : Stranded cable . i
E. Underground Conductors : Bare, tinned, stranded , unless otherwise indicated.
F . Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors : ASTM B 3 .
G . Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8 .
H . Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33 .
1 . Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
J . Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
K . Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated
with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches wide and 1 / 16 inch thick.
L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution : No . 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
M . Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.
N . Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467 ; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and connected items . Exothermic-welded Type, in kit form, (!
selected per manufacturer's written instructions .
] 6060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. \ 2 .3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A Ground Rods : Sectional type; copper-clad steel .
I . Size: ''/<" in diameter by 120 inches per section .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A . Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials .
B . In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors .
C . Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections.
D . Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated .
1 . Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches''above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1 2 - At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and
down to the indicated height above the floor.
E. Underground Grounding Conductors : Use copper conductor, No . 2/0 AWG minimum . Bury at
least 24 inches below grade .
F. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and
quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larer
nductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicasizes, or more
ted . g
I . Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in feeders and branch circuits .
2 . Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
3 . Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-
circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units .
4 . Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits : Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor
from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment
grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service
, unless
Otherwise indicated .
5 . Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits : For designated equipment supplied by a branch
circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic
raceway fitting listed for the purpose . Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and
'\1 install an insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding
conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
r terminal of the applicable derived system or service,
equipment grounding conducto
unless otherwise indicated.
6 . Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic
raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables .
7 . Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to
duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and
heaters . Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.
8 . Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated
c water heater,
rost
heat ngecable.un
Bond conductoro to cheater t uni s, piping, connected n& and f
equipment, and
components.
9 . Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System : Bond electrical power
system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest
point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as
system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
G . Metal Frame Grounding for Buildings : Drive a ground rod at the base of every corner column
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart . Connect rod to
column with an underground grounding conductor. Interconnect
ground
in hes iminimi ntinu om
ous
underground conductor, extending to existing building grounds,
building foundation . Use copper conductor not less than No . 2/0 AWG for underground
conductor, and bury 18 inches below grade, minimum .
feet
) or three
ds
ced
least one-
H odrlengthdfromnseachtother andt two rods locat deatyleastrtheesame distanceofromaothertgrounding
i
electrodes.
1 . Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
2 . Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors . Use exothermic welds,
except as otherwise indicated . Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
copper coating.
1 . Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated . Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
J . Banding Straps and Jumpers : In so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required ; then, use a
bolted clamp . Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
K. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main meta] water service entrances
to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by g clamp
p
connectors . Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end .
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
L. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
M . Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system .
N . Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized .
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1 Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2 . Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3 . Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
Penetration of moisture to contact surfaces .
4 . Exothermic-Weided Connections : Comply with manufacturer's written instructions .
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
5 . Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors .
6 . Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations : If metallic raceways terminate at „metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit
with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor
to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at
entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, ,unless
Otherwise indicated.
7 . Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A .
8 . Compression-Type Connections : Use hydraulic compression tools to provide;`correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors . Use tools and dies recommended
by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to
make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
9. Moisture Protection : If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration
of insulation and cable.
O. Overhead Line Grounding: Comply with IEEE C2 except where stricter requirements are
indicated . Use 2 or more parallel ground rods if a single ground rod electrode resistance to
ground exceeds 25 ohms .
1 . Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth .
2 . Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for
underground connections and connections to rods.
3 . Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other groundi
conductor. ng conductors.
4. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding
5 . Protect grounding conductors on surface of wood poles with molding extended from
grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Page 5 of 5
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
p . Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches : Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling
pad . Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with 1.
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes . Use tinned-
copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground
pad . Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation .
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1 . After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements .
2 . Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal . Measure
ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation , and
without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground
resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81 .
3 . Provide drawings locating each ground rod , ground rod assembly, and other grounding
electrodes. identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and
observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and
include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results .
Describe measures taken to improve test results . Nominal maximum values are as
follows: (,
. .J
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less : 10 ohms .
b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA : 5 ohms .
C. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d . Overhead Distribution Line Equipment: 25 ohms .
e . Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
f. Manhole Grounds : 10 ohms.
END OF SECTION 16060
C
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports .
13 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 702
Article 10o, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 - 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
1 . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
Offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2-2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers :
L American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2 General Cable Corporation .
3 . Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
B . Refer to Part i " Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable �.
construction, and ratings .
C . Conductor
conductor forNo.Material : Copper c
AWG and smaller, gstranded conductor, solid
stranded forrNo 8 AWG and larger.
D . Conductor insulation Types : Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7 .
2 .3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A . Available Manufacturers :
I . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2AMP Incorporated/Tyco International .
3 . Hubbell/Anderson .
4 . O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
5 . 3M Company; Electrical Products Division .
B . Description : Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated .
PART 3 - EXECUTION (_
3 . 1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS ` J
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway.
B . Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in raceway .
C . Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single conductors
in raceway .
elow Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN -
D . Feeders Concealed in Concrete, b
THWN , single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN , single conductors in
raceway.
ilings, Walls, and Partitions : Type THHN-THWN , single
F . Branch Circuits Concealed in Ce
conductors in raceway.
G . Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN ,
single conductors in raceway.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A . Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated .
t
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
B . Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation . Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values .
C . Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division ] 6 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
F . Sea] around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to other sections of this
specification .
G . Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods . "
H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1 . Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3 . 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
\� A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS , Section 7. 3 . 1 . Certify compliance with test parameters.
B . Test Reports : Prepare a written report to record the following:
] . Test procedures used .
2 . Test results that comply with requirements .
3 . Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements .
END OF SECTION 16120
J
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PARTi - GENERAL
] . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B . See other sections of this specification for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground
utility construction .
C . See other sections of this specification for firestopping materials and installation at
through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. penetrations
D. See Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for supports, anchors, and
identification products.
E. See Division 16 Section " Wiring Devices " for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings,
boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1 . 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection :
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
I . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers j
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified .
2 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance .with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified .
2 .2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A _ Available Manufacturers:
1 . AFC Cable Systems, Inc .
2 . Alflex Inc .
3 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
4 . Electri-Flex Co .
S . Grinnell Co ./Tyco International ; Allied Tube and Conduit Div .
6 . LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
7 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8 . O-Z Gedney ; Unit of General Signal .
9 . Wheatland Tube Co .
B . Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80 . 1 .
C . Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80 .5 . /f
D. IMC : ANSI C80 .6 . l i
E. EMT and Fittings : ANSI C80 .3 .
1 . Fittings : Set-screw Type.
F . LFMC : Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G . Fittings : NEMA FB 1 ; compatible with conduit and tubing materials .
2 . 3 ' NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A . Available Manufacturers:
I . American International .
2 . Anamet Electrical , Inc. ; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3 . Arnco Corp .
4 . Cantex Inc.
5 . Certainteed Corp. ; Pipe & Plastics Group .
6 . Condux International.
7 . ElecSYS, Inc.
8 . Electri-Flex Co.
9 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10 . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11 - RACO ; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 2 of
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
12 . Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
13 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
B . ENT: NEMA TC 13 .
C . RNC : NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC .
D. ENT and RNC Fittings : NEMA TC 3 ; match to conduit or tubing type and material .
E. LFNC: UL 1660.
2 .4 METAL WIREWAYS
A . Available 1:^,anu adorers:
1 Hoffman .
2 . Square D.
B . Material and Construction : Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 3R.
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
\ D . Select features, unless otherwise indicated , as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
E . Wireway Covers : As indicated .
F . Finish : Manufacturer's standard enamel finish .
2 . 5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Hoffman .
2 . Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B . Description : PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners .
C . Fittings and Accessories : Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system .
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
_ - ) 2 . 6 SURFACE RACEWAYS
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Surface Metal Raceways : Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating.
I . Available Manufacturers :
a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The) .
b. Thomas & Betts Corporation .
C . Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The).
d . Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
B . Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturers standard color.
1 . Available Manufacturers :
a . Butler Manufacturing Co . ; Walker Division .
b . Enduro Composite Systems.
c . Hubbell , Inc. ; Wiring Device Division .
d . Lamson & Sessions, Carlon Electrical Products .
C. Panduit Corp .
f. Walker Systems, Inc. ; Wiremold Company (The) .
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division .
C . Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways .
2 .7 BOXES , ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A . Available Manufacturers :
1 . Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div . of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2 . Emerson/General Signal ; Appleton Electric Company .
3 . Erickson Electrical Equipment Co .
4 . Hoffman .
5 . Hubbell , Inc . ; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
6 . O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal .
7 . RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
8 . Robroy Industries, Inc. ; Enclosure Division .
9 . Scott Fetzer Co . ; Adalet-PLM Division .
10 . Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11 . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
12 . Walker Systems, Inc .; Wiremold Company (The) .
13 . Woodhead, Daniel Company: Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B . Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1 .
C . Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1 , Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D . Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes : NEMA OS 2 .
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\ E. Floor Boxes : Cast metal , fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G . Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA OS 1 .
H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes : NEMA FB 1 , cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , with continuous hinge cover and flush latch .
1 . Metal Enclosures : Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel .
2 . Nonmetallic Enclosures : Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
J . Cabinets : NEMA 250, Type 1 , galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel . Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
2 . 8 FACTORY FINISHES
A . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-
coat finish ready for field painting.
B . Finish : For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint
applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
hipping.PART3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A . Outdoors:
I I Exposed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC80.
2 . Concealed : Rigid steel or IMC or PVC40 .
3 Underground, Single Run: RNC or PVC40.
4• Underground, Grouped: RNC or PVC40.
5 . Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B . Indoors:
1 . Exposed : RNC or PVC40/80.
2. Concealed : RNC or PVC40.
3 . Cormection_to_Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers. and Hydraulic; Pneumatic,
\ Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations : Rigid steel conduit.
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 5 of 5
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
5 . Boxes and Enclosures : NEMA 250, Type 1 , except as follows :
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C . Minimum Raceway Size : 3 /4 - inch trade size.
D . Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location .
1 . Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated .
2 . PVC Externally Coated , Rigid Steel Conduits : Use only fittings approved for use with
that material . Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits .
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
s and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve .
raceways are installed for such circuit
F . Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
32 INSTALLATION
A . Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes .
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B . Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation .
C . Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods . "
D . Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways .
E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above finished slab .
F . Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated .
G . Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated .
1 . Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated .
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1 /3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches of concrete cover .
1 . Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2 . Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3 . Run-conduit-larger-than l -inch trade size parallel-or-at-right angles to main-reinforcement. /
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
4 . Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, 1
or IMC before rising above floor.
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 6 of 6
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
1 . Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible.
1 . Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports .
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways .
J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and makejoints tight .
1 . Use insulating bushings to protect conductors .
K . Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools .
L. Terminations :
1 Where raceways are terminated with lockouts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
2 . Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed .
M . Install pull wires in empty raceways . Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-1b tensile strength . Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
i N . Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two go-
degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements .
O. Stub-up Connections : Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future
equipment connections .
P. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and
semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections .
Q. Surface Raceways : Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals .
R . Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
S. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3 .3 PROTECTION
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
Page 7 of 7
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
A . Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion .
I . Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2 . Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
4
16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 8 of 8
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
I . Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault
suppression units , circuit interrupters, and integral surge
2 . Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches .
? . Device wall
Plates.
4. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of product indicated .
B . Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates .
\ C. Samples : One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified .
D . Field quality-control test reports .
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 7Q
intended use.
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements
following: , provide products by one of the
1 . Wiring Devices :
16140
WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
a. Bryant Electric, Inc./Hubbell Subsidiary .
b . Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc .
C . Hubbell Incorporated ; Wiring Device-Kellems.
d . Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
2 . Multioutlet Assemblies :
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems .
b. Wiremold Company (The) .
3 . Poke-Through , Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles :
a. Hubbell Incorporated ; WiringDevice-Kellems .
b . Pass & Seymour/Legrand ; Wiring Devices Div .
C . Square D/Groupe Schneider NA .
d . Thomas & Betts Corporation .
e. Wiremold Company (The) .
2 .2 RECEPTACLES
A . Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles : Comply with NEMA WD 1 , NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498 .
B . GFCI Receptacles : Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral �^
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5 -20R duplex receptacle, complying with UL 498 and UL 943 .
Design units for installation in a 2-3 /4-inch - deep outlet box without an adapter.
2 .3 SWITCHES
A . Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C- 896F and UL 20 .
B . Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type.
C . Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and
removable tab corrector that pen-nit separate or common feed connection .
1 . Switch : 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
2 . Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 , Configuration 5 - 15R.
D . Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral , quiet on/off switches and
audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
1 . Control : Continuously adjustable toggle switch with single-pole or three-way switching
to suit connections .
2 . Incandescent Lamp Dimmers : Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable
rotary_.knob, -toggle-switch, or-slider; single- pole with soft tap or -other quiet switch;
EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads .
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
3 . Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches : Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2 .4 WALL PLATES
A . Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices .
1 - Plate- Securing Screws : Metal with head color to match plate finish .
2 . Material for Unfinished Spaces : Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic .
3 . Material for Wet Locations : Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations. "
2 . 5 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies : Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B . Raceway Material : Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish .
C . Wire: No. 12 AWG .
\ 2 . 6 FINISHES
A Color:
1 . Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System : Ivory, unless otherwise indicated
or required by NFPA 70.
2 . TVSS Devices: Blue.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B . Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging.
C . Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
1 E . Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
_ l
16140 WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
F . Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and l
furnishings .
3 .2 IDENTIFICATION
A . Comply with Division 16 Section " Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ."
1 . Receptacles : Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served . Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes .
3 . 3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding. "
B . Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section " Conductors and Cables . "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports :
I . After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized , test for
proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements . /
2 . Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions .
B . Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above .
END OF SECTION 16140
16140
WIRING DEVICES Page 4 of 4
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Time switches .
2 . Photoelectric relays.
3 - Occupancy sensors .
4 . Muhipcle lighting relays.
5 . Multipole lighting contactors .
1 .2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting control device indicated .
B . Field quality-control test reports .
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined iin`NFPA 70,
Article IOQ by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with 47 CFR 15 , Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices .
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Contactors and Relays:
-J a. Automatic Switch Co .
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp .
c. Cutler-Hammer Products ; Eaton Corporation .
d . Furnas Electric Co.
e. GE Lighting Controls.
f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc.
g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc .
h. Square D Co . ; Power Management Organization .
i . Zenith Controls, Inc .
2 . Time Switches :
a. Diversified Electronics, Inc .
b. Grasslin Controls Corp.
c. Intermatic, Inc.
d , Leviton Manufacturing.
e. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc .
f. Tork, Inc.
g. Zenith Controls, Inc.
3 . Photoelectric Relays:
a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation .
b . Area Lighting Research , Inc .
C. Fisher Pierce .
d . Grasslin Controls , Corp. /
C . Intermatic, Inc .
I. Paragon Electric Co ., Inc.
g. Rhodes, M H , Inc .
h . SSAC, Inc.
i . Tork, Inc.
2 .2 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A . Line-Voltage Surge Protection : Include in all 120- and 277-V solid-state equipment. Comply
with UL 1449 and with ANSI C62 .41 for Category A locations .
2 .3 TIME SWITCHES
A . Description : Solid-state programmable type with alphanumeric display complying with
UL 917 .
1 . Astronomic dial .
2 . Two contacts, rated 30 A at 277-V ac, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Two pilot-duty contacts, rated 2 A at 240-V ac, unless otherwise indicated .
4 . Eight-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays .
5 . Skip-day mode.
2 .4 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A . Outdoor Sealed Units : Solid state, with single-pole, double-throw dry contacts rated to operate
connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A
Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield .
1 . Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on/turn -off
levels.
2 Time Delay: Prevents false operation .
2 . 5 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS
A . Description : Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508 and
NEMA ICS 2 .
1 • Listed Current Rating for Switching: C
tungsten filament, inductiveonsistent with type of Load served, including
, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total
harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage : Match control power source .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
1 A . Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and
wall-mounting devices . to center of unit for
3 . 2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A . Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. "
B . Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures .
3 .3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A . Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents .
B . Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components .
Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
J
- - 1 . Continuity tests of circuits.
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 3 of 3
IRC Maintenance
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
2 . Operational Tests : Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities - -\
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions . Record )
control settings, operations, and functional observations.
3 . Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
END OF SECTION 16145
t /
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Page 4 of 4
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
� SECTION ] 6231 -
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
PART ] - GENERAL
1 , 1 STU IMARY
A, This Section includes packaged
features. diesel-engine generator sets with the following
accessory
1 . Battery charger.
2• Belly fuel tank or separate day tank.
3 . Muffler.
4. Outdoor, weatherproof,
5• Audio/Visual Signal, corrosion resistant, sound attenuated enclosure.
6. Remote stop switch with durable acrylic sign ,
7. Starting battery,
g• Engine coolant heater
9. Remote annunciator
1 . 2 SUBiVETTALS
� A. Product Data: For
the generator set and each accessory component indicated.
B• Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations
Of each field connection . , sections, details of installation, and location and size
1 • Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C Certified prototype test reports.
D. Field quality-control test reports.-_
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A• Manufacturer Qualifications: Specify in the bid a servicecerite r capable of emergency
maintenance and repairs at the Project with eight hours' maximum response time.
this Section through
$• Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generator and auxili
one source from a single manufacturer. ary components specified in
C• Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED
ENGINE GENERATOR Page 1 of ] 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc . IRC Maintenance
E. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.
F. Noise Emission: Not to exceed 87dB maximum noise level at 25 feet from generator due to
sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, eughre cooling air intake and
discharge, and other components of the installation.
CART 2 - PRODUCT
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Baldor Electric Company
2. Caterpillar, Inc .; Engine Div.
3 . Gene= Corp. .
4. Kohler Cc ; Generator Division .
5 . Cummins Power Generation, Inc
6. Winco, hie.
2.2 ENGINE GENERATOR SET
A. Provide a coordinated assembly of compatible components.
B . Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15 . 1 ;
C . Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a conspicuous nameplate of
component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model
and serial number of item, year of manufacture, and rating information prescribed by the
standards the equipment is built to.
D . Ratings:
I . Genset electrical power output shall be at 60 Hz.
2 . Minimum prime power rating shall be 55kW/55kVA at unity power factor.
3 . Minimum standby power rating shall be 60kW/60kVA at unity power factor.
4 . Voltage output shall be 120/240 volts, single phase, 3 wire.
2.3 GENERATOR-SET PERFORMANCE
A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 4 percent of rated output voltage from no load to
full load. Shall maintain voltage output to within f1 .0% at any power factor between 0 .8 and
1 .0
B . Steady-State Voltage Modulation Frequency: Less than 1 Hz.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 2 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
C Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20
increase or decrease, Voltage recovers fo remain Percent variation for 50
three seconds. within the percent step-load
steady-state operating b
D. g and within
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth; 0.5 percent of rated fre
q
E. Steady-State Frequency Stabili
�
load, there are no rando • When system i "On 0Y from no toad to
m s operating at any constant load within rated
huntingspeed de the steady variations outside -
or surging of speed. state operational band and no
F. Transient Frequency PerfonanCe. Less than 5 percent variation for a 50
increase or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within
within five seconds, a the steady-state percent
eP-lo d
G• Output Waveform; At no load harmonic
not exceed 5 percent total and 3 content measured line-to-line or line-
determined accordingto percent for single harmonics. The telephone influence factor,
NEMA MG I , shall not exceed 50.
H• Sustained Short-
thegenerator andts protective deviCirc;uit Current' er a ces shall sup phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals,
current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear theplyam�mm automa0 Pe
any generator system com Percent of ratedfgll-load
ponent, y, without damage to
�--1 I• Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type M, system requirements.
2.4 SERVICE CONDITIONS
Ad Environmental Conditions:
satisfactorily under the followinugme generator shall be e
damage or de g environmental c quipped to start and : operate
gradation Of capability: conditions without mechanical or electrical
1 , Ambient Tempera
2 Relative Htm e: Minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.
Humid 30 to 100 percent.
3 • Altitude: Sea level to 50 feet.
2. 5 ENGME
A. Description: 4-cycle unit with maximum
Piston
speed of 9 meters per second
B • Comply with NFPA 37.
C. Fuel: Diesel per ASTM D 975, 2-D, (S 15) or (S500).
D. Rated Engiue Speed: 1800rprn.
1. E• Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity Siphons
drainage to an easily removable container
With no disassembly and without use of
Pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances.
16231 OPTIONAL ST
ANDBy SyS ,M PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 3 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 37. System includes the following:
1 . Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under
starting and load conditions.
2 . Relief/Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess
fuel to source.
2 .6 GOVERNOR
A. Type: mechanical
2 .7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Description: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator-set
skid and integral eugine-driven coolant pump.
B . Radiator Core Tubes: Nonferrous-metal construction other than aluminum.
C . Coolant: 50% distilled water, 50% ethylene glycol.
2. 8 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A . Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37 .
B. See Plan Sheet F- 1 for additional information:
C. Fuel Oil Tank(s) : Factory-installed and piped, listed unit. Features include the following:
1 . Tank level indicator. -
2 . Capacity: See Plan Sheet F- 1 .
3 . Vandal-resistant fill cap.
4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.9 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Residential type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound
level in the 20- to 75-Hz frequency band at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) from exhaust discharge,
is 82 d,BA or less.
B . Condensate Drain for Muffler: Schedule 40, black steel pipe connected to muffler drain outlet
through a petcock.
C . Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless-steel
pipe.
D. Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless-steel expansion joint with liners.
n
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 4 of I 1
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc_
IRC' Maintenance
^, E Exhaust Piping External to Engine: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded, black steel, with welded
joints and fittings,
2. 10 COMBUSTION-ATR-INTAKE
A. Description: Standard duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable
"blocked filter" indicator.
dry filter element and
2. 11 STARTING SYSTEM
A• Description: 12 Volt DC electric, with negative ground and including the following items:
I • Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Environmental Conditions "
"Service Conditions" Article above.
2. Cranking Paragraph in
g Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from eng gine
flywheel without binding,
3 . Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.
4• Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range
"Enviromnental Conditions" Paragraph in "Service
specified cranking cycle at Conditions " Article above to provide
least twice without recharging, specified in
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by generator-set
battery capacity indicated. manufacturer for cable length and
accessories . Include interconnecting conductors and connection
6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with s
regulation and 35-A olid state .voltage
7. minimum continuous rating.
Battery Charger: Current-1 miting, automatic-equalizing and float-char in
complies with UL 1236 and includes the following features:
g g type: Unit
a
a• Operation : Equalizing-charging rate of. 10 A is initiated automatically after battery
has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit then automatically switches to a lower float-charging mode and
continues operating in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b• Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 5 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high te
Automatic mperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c• Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of
rate.
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Ammeter indicates charging
e• Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage, arranged to
close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring
panel. Also include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do
output of battery charger. Either of latter conditions closes contacts
battery-charger malfunction indication at system that provide a control and monitoring panel.
f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 4X, wall-mounted cabinet.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 5 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering; Inc. JRC Maintenance
2. 12 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Functional Description: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on
position starts the generator set. The off position of the same switch initiates generator-set
shutdown. When the generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or
derangements automatically shut down the generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a
remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down the generator set.
B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages are grouped on a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator
set. A remote annunciator panel shall provide all alarm indications provided at the main panel.
Mounting method isolates the control panel from generator-set vibration.
C . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include those required by NFPA 1. 10 for a
Level 2 system.
D . Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: Include the following:
1 . AC voltmeter.
2 . AC ammeter.
3 . AC frequency meter.
4 . DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
5 . Engine-coolant temperature gage.
6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
7 . Running-time meter.
8. Ammeter-voltmeter, .phase-selectorswitch(es). '
9 . Generator voltage adjusting rheostat. .
10 . Start-stop switch..
IL Overspeed shutdown device.
12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
13 . Coolant low-level shutdown device.
14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.
15 . Fuel tank derangement alarm .
16 . Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
17 . Low battery alarm.
18 . Battery charger malfunction alarm.
E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices, and wiring
required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine,
generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's
standard.
F. Audible Alarms: Signal the occurrence Of any events listed below without differentiating
between event types. Locate audible device and silencing means on generator. Connect so that
after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing
switch is reset.
1 . Engine high-temperature shutdown.
2. Lube-oil low-pressure shutdown.
r� 3 . Overspeed shutdown .
4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 6 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
!1 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm•
7. Lube-oil loco-pressure prealann.
7• Fuel tank low level.
8• Overcrank shutdown.
9. Coolant low-temperature alarm
10. Control switch not in auto position.
11 . Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
l2. Battery low-voltage alarm.
G. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Outdoor, wall-mounted with sight of and at least 25 feet from
the generator and fuel tanks, NEMA 4X and prominently labeled with a durably ac
using minimum =" white letters on a red background. Push button is protected from accidental
operation. 1y acrylic sign
2. 13 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, m
thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; co
With NEMA AB 1plying
and UL 489.
1 . Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protectio .
2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. n
3 . Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when
Protective devices. generator set is shut do
� wn by other
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel .
B . Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case
with UL 489. , electronic-trip type; 10o percent rated complying
I • Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time dela
2. Trip Settings: Matched to generator thermal damage curve as closely as instantaneous.3 • Shunt TriY and instantaneous.
Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down b
Protective devices.
4• Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoringY other
C. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case a panel.
tYP 100 percentrated.
1 . Rating: Matched to generator output rating,
2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by other
Protective devices .
D. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit that continuously monitors current level in
each phase a generator output, integrates generator heating effect over time, and predicts when
thermal damage of the alternator will occur. When signaled b
set protective devices, a shun rip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
Y the protector or other generator-
switch to
disconnect the generator frotn the load circuits. Protector performs the following
functions:
1 • Initiates a generator overload alarm when the generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 1 10 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 7 of I I
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
2. Under fault conditions, regulates the generator to 300 percent of rated full- load current
for up to 10 seconds .
3 . As heating effect on the generator of overcurrent approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, the protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
switch, and shuts down the generator set.
4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated
voltage to avoid overshoot.
2. 14 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
B . Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated integrally with
generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H.
D. Stator-Winding Leads : Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed
up to 125 percent of rating, and beat during specifiedintervalsofoperation at 110 percent of
rated capacity.
F . Exciter uses no slip or collector rings, or brushes, . and-is arranged to .sustain generator output
under short-circuit conditions as specified:
G. Enclosure: Dripproo£
H. Voltage Regulator:'- Solid-state type, separate from, exciter; 'providing performance as specified.
1 . Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output- voltage operating band.
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
2 . 15 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A. Description: Vandal-resistant, rainproof stainless or galvanized steel housing, wind resistant up
to 120 mph. Multiple housing-access panels are lockable and provide adequate access to
components requiring maintenance, Panels are removable by one person without tools.
Instruments and controls are mounted within enclosure.
B . Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system
components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours
with ambient temperature at top of range specified in "Service Conditions" Article.
C. Louvers: Fixed-engine cooling air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entryof rain and snow.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 8 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
2 . 16 FINISHES
A. Description: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and
compatible standard primer.
2. 17 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Include prototype testing and Project-specific
equipment manufactured specifically for this Project). equipment testing (testing of
B. Prototype Testing: Performed on a separate engine generator set using same engine model
accessories. ,
constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent
C. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Factory test engine generator set and other system
components and accessories before shipment.
Include the following tests ; Perform tests at rated load and power factor.
1 . Full load run.
Maximum power.
3 - Voltage regulation.
4• Transient and steady-state governing.
5 . Single-step load pickup. ="
6. Safety shutdown.
PARTS - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written instalalignment
instructions, and with NFPA 110. lation and
E . Set packaged engine generator on concrete base. Cast-in-place concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
I • Support generator-set mounting feet on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal
wedges having small taper, at points new foundation bolts to provide 3/4- to 1 - 1 (2-inch
( 19- to 38-111m) gap between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2 • Adjust metal supports or wedges until generator is level.
C. Install packaged engine generator to provide access for periodic maintenance without removing
connections or accessories.
D. Install exhaust-system piping for diesel engines according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Exhaust shall be directed away from, and generally upward and in the opposition
direction from the nearby fuel dispensers and fuel tank vents.
E. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping 0 1ow
points of exhaust system and from muffler to condensate traps and to point of disposition,
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 9 of 11
Fort Pierce Engineering, Inc. IRC Maintenance
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorised service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to supervise testing: Report results in writing.
B . Tests: Include the following;
I . Tests recommended by manufacturer.
2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 1. 10 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Single-step full-load pickup test.
3 . Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery
terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and
specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of all connectors.
Perform an integrity load test and a .capacity load test for the ' battery. Verify acceptance
of charge for each element of batteryafter. discharge. Verify measurements are within
manufacturer's specifications.
4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-
charging conditions.
S . System Integrity Tests; Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine generator installation before and during system operation.
Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks .
6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer- with 'a scale exceeding 40-inch
wg ( 120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that
back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the
engine.
7. Noise Level Tests : Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from the generator-set
installation, including engine exhaust and cooling air intake and discharge, at 25 feet
north, east, south, and west from the generator, and compare measured levels with
required values.
C. Coordinate generator-set test with test for the transfer switch and perform them concurrently.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
E. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.
F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST
standards, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration
records available for examination on request.
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 10 of 11
Port Pierce Engineering, Inc.
IRC Maintenance
3 .3 BATTERY EQUALIZA'T'ION
A• Description; Equalize charging of battery
Record individual cell voltages. cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3 .4 DEMONSTRATION
A• Engage afactory-authorized service representative to train O
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. wner's maintenance personnel to
I • Coordinate with training requirements for transfer switch .
END OF SECTION 1623I
16231 OPTIONAL STANDBY SYSTEM, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR Page 11 of I 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V
and less, used for disconnecting and protection functions.
B . See Division 16 Section "Fuses " for fuses for fusible disconnect switches.
1 -2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data: For each type of switch and circuit breaker indicated .
B . Shop Drawings : Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers-
C . Field quality-control test reports .
D. Operation and maintenance data.
\� 1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Source Limitations : Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C . Comply with NFPA 70 .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A . Available Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following :
B . Manufacturers : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1 . Eaton Corp .; Cutler-Hammer Products .
2. General Electric Co. ; Electrical Distribution & Control Division .
3 . Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 1 of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance /
4 . Square D Co.
2 .2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A . Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch : NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with lockable handle, interlocked with
cover.
B . Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1 , Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked with cover.
2 .3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A . Molded-Casa Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1 , with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1 . Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers : Inverse time-current element for low- level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2 . Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted; field-adjustable trip setting.
3 . Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers : Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1 , RK-5 .
4 . GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity .
B . Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories : Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and ( _J
number of poles.
1 . Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings , and material of conductors .
2 . Application Listing: Appropriate for application ; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3 . Ground-Fault Protection : Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4 . Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of
rated voltage.
2 .4 ENCLOSURES
A . Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:
1 . Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2 . Food Service Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel .
3 . Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
. l
A . Temporary Provisions : Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of moving parts.
B . Identify components, provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods. "
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuits
have been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements .
B . Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers: Make internal and external
inspections and perform tests, including the following :
1 Inspect for freedom from Physical d .
r ) amage, proper unit sating, mechanical condition,
enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances, and tightness of
electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is observed on any unit, check
each electrical connection for each switch and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for
compliance with manufacturer's torquing instructions.
2 . Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase-to-phase, and please-to-ground, following
manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use
500-V minimum test voltage for units and circuits rated up to 250 V, 1000-V minimum
test voltage for units rated more than 250 V . Measured insulation resistance`.inust be 25
megohms, minimum , for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 megohms, minimum, for
switches rated more than 250 V.
1 3 . Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper operation .
l C Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches : Include the following:
1 . Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions.
2 . Check adequacy and integrity of fuseholders by removing and installing fuses`
3 . Check integrity of phase barriers.
4 . Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe adequacy of blade
pressure.
D . Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers: hrclude the following:
1 . Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating.
2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating components for proper operation .
E . Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and reinspect and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 16410
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 3 of 3
� _ )
�,�
ti�
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A . This Section includes the following:
1 . Interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts .
2 - Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
1 . 2 SUBMITTALS
A . Product Data : For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation . Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
B . Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom fixtures . Indicate dimensions, weights,
methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories .
1 . Include wiring diagrams .
,l C . Product Certificates : For each type of ballast for dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product
/ manufacturer.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
1 .3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories : Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B . Comply with NFPA 70.
C. FMG Compliance: Fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated
class and division of hazard by FMG.
D. NFPA 101 Compliance : Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
igns.PART2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
_ product selection :
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page I of 1
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES IRC Maintenance
1 . Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to , products specified.
2 . Products : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified .
2 .2 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A . Fixture Drawing E-7 :
1 . Available Products:
a. As specified on drawings
2 . Voltage: 120/240-V ac.
3 . Mounting: As specified on drawings
4 . Lamps: As specified on drawings.>
2 .3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A . Description : Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated :
1 . Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output.
2 . Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3 .0 times the line current .
B . Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features, unless otherwise
indicated :
I . Comply with NEMA C82 . 11 .
2 . Ballast Type : Instant start, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently
started lamps .
4 . Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 10 percent according to NEMA C82 . 11 .
5 . Transient Voltage Protection : IEEE C62 .41 , Category A .
6 . Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on
surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail .
C . Ballasts for compact lamps in recessed fixtures shall have the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Type: Electronic.
2 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.
3 . Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
4 . Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
D . Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless
otherwise indicated :
1 . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum .
2 . Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum . _
3 . Transient Protection : Comply with IEEE C62 .41 for Category Al locations.
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2 of 2
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
\l
2 .4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A . Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with Federal toxic characteristic leaching procedure test, and
yield less than 0 .2 mg of mercury per liter, when tested according to NEMA LL 1 .
B . T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI
of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless
otherwise indicated .
C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches. 1300
initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K. and average
rated life of 20, 000 hours, unless otherwise indicated .
D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps : CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 , average rated life of
10
.000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . T4, Twin Tube: Rated 5 W, 250 initial lumens (minimum).
2. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 7 W, 400 initial lumens (minimum) .
3 . T4, Twin Tube : Rated 9 W, 600 initial lumens (minimum).
4. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 825 initial lumens (minimum).
5 . T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W, 900 initial lumens (minimum).
6. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum) .
7. T43 Double-Twin Tube : Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens (minimum ) .
2 . 5 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
1 A . Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods " for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports .
B . Single-Stem Hangers: 1 /2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as fixture.
C. Twin -Stem Hangers : Two, 1 /2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D . Wires : ASTM A 641 /A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated, 12 gage wire size>.
E . Wires For Humid Spaces : ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage.
F. Rod Hangers: 3/ 16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod .
G . Hook Hangers : Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Page 3 of 3
GARRISON ENGINEERING SERVICES
IRC Maintenance
A. Fixtures : Set level , plumb, and square with ceilings and walls . Install lamps in each fixture .
B . Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings : Use grid for support.
1 . Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.
2 . Support Clips : Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application .
3 . Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid : Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel , and support fixtures independently with at least two 3 /4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees .
4 . Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3 .
C . Suspended Fixture Support: As follows:
1 . Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.
2 . Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3 . Continuous Rows : Use tubing or stein for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
4 . Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable.
D. Air-Handling Fixtures : Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.
E. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
END OF SECTION 16511
l
16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4 of 4
SECTION 16715
�l
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
PARTI - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hems for wiring systems used as signal pathways t'urvoice and
high-speed data transmission:
1 . Mounting elements.
2. Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
3 . Fiber-optic cabling.
4. Workstation outlets .
5 . Backboards.
6. Identification products.
\ B . Related Sections include the following:
/) 1 . Division 13 Section " Security Access" for data transmission meeting RS-232 and RS-485
cabling associated with system panels and devices.
2 . Division 16 Sections "AudioNideo Cabling".
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backbone: A facility (e. g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between telecommunications rooms or
floor distribution terminals , the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms within or between
buildings.
B . BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Cross,Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. Horizontal Cabling: Cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet/connector and
the horizontal cross-connect. Also the cabling between and including the building automation
system outlet or the first mechanical terminations on the horizontal connection point and the
horizontal cross-connect.
16715 - I
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G . LAN : Local area network.
H. RCDD : Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. RMC : Rigid metallic conduit.
j . UTP : Unshielded twisted pair.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For features , ratings , and performance of each component specified.
B . Shop Drawings :
1 . Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of telecommunications equipment rooms,
labeling each individual component. Show equipment rack assemblies, method of field
assembly, workspace requirements, and access for cable connections .
2 . System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules , in software and format
selected by Owner.
3 . - Cabling Administration Drawings.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics includ ng the following:
a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies. �.
b. Patch cords .
C. Patch panels.
d. Fiber-optic boxes .
e. Distribution racks.
f. Terminal racks.
1 .5 QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications : Cabling installer must have on staff personnel certified by BICSI.
1 . Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings , Cabling Administration Drawings,
and field testing program development by an RCDD.
2 . Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Level 2
Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Proj ect
site.
1 .6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with School Board' s
MIS team and equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with
local exchange carrier.
16715-2 _
} I . Meetjointly with School Board' s MIS team and equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier
representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants.
3 . Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross-connect and patch panels
in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space
requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2 .2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B . Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs in
cables, positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate at
minimum 25 percent future increase in the number of workstations shown on Drawings. This
expansion requirement does not apply to horizontal cable from workstation outlet to first terminal
board.
2 . 3 MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A. Backboards : 3/4'-inch, interior-grade, free-retardant-treated plywood.
B . Distribution Racks: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for
telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.
1 . Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard 19 -inch panel mounting.
2. Finish: Baked-polyester powder coat.
C . Power Strips: For mounting in the rack, with 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R
receptacles, number as indicated, but in no case fewer than 6, and including the following:
I . LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
3 . Circuit breaker and thermal fusing. Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost.
16715 -3
4. Direct plug-in cord connected with 15 -foot line cord.
5 . Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
6 . Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 33 kA per phase.
7 . Protection modes shall be line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground. UL 1449
clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V.
8 . One RJ11 / 12C telephone line protector, suitable for modem connection. Maximum
clamping voltage 220 peak on pins No. 3 and No. 4.
D, Wall-Mounting Rack: Aluminum, hinged wall bracket with provisions for power strip mounting.
E. Floor-Mounting Rack: Steel, freestanding, modular, with vertical and horizontal cable
management channels, top and bottom cable troughs , and grounding lug.
2 .4 UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
A. Available Cable Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2 . Belden Inc. ; Electronics Division-
3 . KRONE Incorporated.
B . Terminal and Connector Component and Distribution Rack Manufacturers :
I . AMP ; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.
2 . Avaya Inc . 1
3 . Hom2cO. \
4 . KRONE Incorporated.
5 . Panduit Corp.
C . 100-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG, number of pairs as required, minimum 25 pairs.
2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIABIA-568 -B .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, type CMR complying with UL 1666.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1 . No. 24 AWG , 100 ohm, four pair.
2 . Comply with TIA/EIA-568-11 .2, Category 6 .
3 . NFPA 70, types CMG and CMP.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
r
16715-4
F . Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B .2 , IDC type, using modules designed
1 for punch-down caps or tools.
1 . IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and j acks
where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
G . Cross-Connect Panel: Modular array of IDC terminal blocks arranged to terminate building cables
and permit interconnection between cables.
1 . Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables plus 25 percent
spare.
H. Patch Panel: Comply with TIA/EIA-568 -13 .2, meeting or exceeding cable performance. Modular
panels housing multiple-numbered j ack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for pentianeut
termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1 . Number of Jacks per Field : One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus
spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
2 . 5 FIBER-OPTIC CABLING
A . Cable, Terminal, and Connector Product Manufacturers:
1 . Avaya Inc.
2. Berk-Tek; an Alcatel Company.
3 . Chromatic Technologies; a Draka USA Company.
4. Coming Cable Systems.
5 . Panduit Corp.
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: 62 .5/ 125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber.
C . Backbone Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on the drawings .
1 . Comply with TLVEIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2 . NFPA 70, Type OFN complying with UL 1666 .
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 .50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 .25 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
D. Horizontal Fiber Cable: Number of fibers as required and/or indicated on drawings .
1 . Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA, tight buffer.
2. NFPA 70, Types OFN and OFNP as required.
3 . Maximum Attenuation: 3 . 50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1 . 0 dB/km at 1300 nm.
4 . Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
5 . Cable Jacket Color: Orange.
16715 -5
E. Cross-Connect and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable )
connectors.
1 . Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,
plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy specified expansion criteria.
F- Patch Cords : Factory-made, dual fiber cables in 36-inch lengths and/or directed by MIS team.
G . Cable Connecting Hardware:
I . Comply with TLA/EIA-568-B .3 .
2 . Quick-connect, simplex- and duplex-Type Sc couplers . Insertion loss not morethan 0 .7 dB .
3 . Type SFE connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages .
2. 6 WORKSTATION OUTLETS
A. Jacks : 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, modular, RJ-45 . Comply with
T A/EIA-568-B . 1 -
B . Workstation. outlets: . Dual jack-connector assemblies mounted in single ,or multi gang faceplate.
1 . Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
3 - Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying the circuit.
C . Flush dual fiber-optic connector assemblies mounted int-gangfaceplatewithflush dual RJ-45jack
assembly.
1 . Faceplate: Higb-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2 . Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated- the circuit.
3 . Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying
2 .7 BACKBOARDS
A. A-C , void-free plywood, 84 inches high and 314-inch thick, fire rated. Paint both sides with (2) two
coats of white fire-retardant paint.
2. 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Materials: Comply with NFPA 70 , TLVEIA-607 , and UL 467 .
2.9 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . Brady Worldwide, Ine-
t
16715 -6 �. _
2. HellermannTyton.
3 . Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B . Comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
C_ Cable Labels : Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers , machine printed with
alphanumeric cable designations.
2. 10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Coaxial Cable: Each cable spool sweep tested at the factory before shipping at frequencies from
5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a
cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through specified frequency range and
graphing the results .
B . Fiber-Optic Cable: Each cable spool tested at factory before shipping at 850 and 1300 nm. Test
and inspect OTDR according to TIA/EIA TSB-67 .
C . UTP Cable Verification of Performance: Test every cable package or reel at factory to verify that
cable complies with TLA/EIA-568-B .2 requirements .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BICSI TCI, TWEIA-568-13. 1 , TIAlEIA-568 -8 . 2, TWEIA-568-13.3 , and
TLA/EIA-569-A.
3 .2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
1 . Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed
complying with EMI clearance requirements.
2 . Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using
products labeled for type of wall penetrated.
3 . Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of
individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures
is adequate for each pathway.
4 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
16715 -7
3 3 APPLICATION OF MEDIA
A . Backbone Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between
equipment rooms and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
B . Backbone Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between equipment rooms
and wiring closets and for runs between wiring closets.
C . Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 fiber-optic cable for runs between wiring
closets and workstation outlets .
D. Horizontal Cable for Voice Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between wiring closets
and workstation outlets .
3 .4 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 .
B . Wiring Metbod: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces . Cable trays are specified
in Division 16 Section "Cable Trays ." Raceways and boxes are specified in Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes . "
C . Wiring Method: Install cables in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks ,
and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where
unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, /
Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. Cable trays
including plenum ceilings.
'Cable Trays . " Raceways and boxes are specified in
are specified in Division 16 Section
Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes ."
D. Cable Installation:
I . Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members
and follow surface contours where possible.
2 . Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect
and patch panels.
3 , Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's written recommended pulling tensions. Do
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
4. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
5 . Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches
from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames , and terminals.
16715-8
6. Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and
linked signal paths, end to end.
a. Do not untwist more than 1/2 inch of Category 6 cables at connector terminations.
7 . Outdoor Coaxial Cable:
a. Outdoor connections shall be installed in enclosures complying with NEMA 250,
Type 4X. Connectors shall be corrosion resistant with properly designed O-rings to
keep out moisture.
b. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.
E: Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures:
1 . Install plywood backboards on walls of equipment rooms and wiring closets from floor to
ceiling or as directed by MIS team.
2. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on backboards and
floor-mounted racks.
3 . Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
4. Train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
5 . Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
F. Separation from EMI Sources : Comply with BICSI TDM and TLA/EIA-569-A recommendations
for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources,
including electrical power lines and equipment. Comply with the following minimum separation
distances from possible sources of EMI:
I . Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open
cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 5 inches.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 12 inches .
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 24 inches.
2. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to cables
in grounded metallic raceways is as follows :
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2- 1/2 inches .
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 6 inches.
C . Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches.
3 . Separation between power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic
conduits or enclosures in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
16715 -9
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 3 inches.
C. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 6 inches.
4. Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inches.
5 . Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches.
G. Conduit:
I , Comply with TWEIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull
points, and for pull-box sizing.
2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible.
3 . In telecommunications rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard (in
case of a single piece of plywood) or in the corner of room (where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room) . Use cable trays to route cables if
conduits cannot be located in these positrons. Secure conduits to backboard when entering
room from overhead. Extend conduits I to 3 inches in finished floor.
H. Backboards: Install plywood with 84-inch dimension from floor up toward ceiling. Butt adj acent
sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners .
3 . 5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section " Grounding and Bonding" and with TWEIA 607 .
B. Grounding Points: { �
I . Locate grounding terminals in each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabinet. \
2 . Telecommunications Grounding Busbars : Mount on wall of telecommunications entrance
facility, equipment room, and closet, with standoff insulators.
C. Bonding Conductors:
1 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to electrical entrance facility and connect
to grounding electrode.
2 . Where a panelboard for telecommunications islocated insame room or space as a grounding
bulbar, bond to equipment ground bus of electrical panelboard.
3 . Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to grounding busbars.
4. Extend from grounding busbars to ground terminals in equipment racks and cabinets.
5 . Extend from grounding busbars to building metal frame within room, or to metal frame
external to room but readily accessible.
D . Special Requirements :
1 . Bonding conductors shall be insulated copper, No. 6 AWG minimum.
2. Install only in nonmetallic conduit, unless specifically required for protection of conductor.
Metallic conduit, if used, shall be RMC. For RMC that exceeds 36 inches in length,
conductors shall be bonded at each end of conduit.
16715 -10 ��
3 . Bonding conductors shall be installed without splices unless approved by Architect because
of special circumstances . Where splices are necessary, they shall be accessible and shall be
located in telecommunications spaces. Splices shall be by irreversible compression
connectors or by exothermic welding.
3 . 6 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with TIAJEIA-606-A and with applicable
requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification. "
1 . Administration class for this Project shall be Class 3 .
2. Color-code cross-connect fields.
B . Using cable and asset management software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration
Drawings for system identification, testing, and managernen1 . Usc unique, alphanumeric
designation for each cable, and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects
with same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural
arrangement. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement and nomenclature,
and a consistent color-coded identification of individual conductors.
D. Cable and Wire Identification:
1 . Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a
cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device
if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or
cabinet .
3 . Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs : Label each cable at intervals
not exceeding 15 feet.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel .
a. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,
and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a
building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b . Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames .
5 . Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks
and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for
jacks and plugs of each service.
6. At Workstations: Attach label to device.
E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet . List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid
16715 - 11
frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project.
F . Cabling Administration Drawings:
floor plans o
stration
gcovtioad how labefor telecommunications closets ,ts , backbone
labeling. Idn fYlabelinn
s, work areas and
pathways and cables, terminal hardware and
positions,
and pahways,tndabquipment grounding
workstation terminal positions, grounding
nvention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in
conductors . Follow co
software and format selected by Owner.
3 .7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
A. Perform the following
B . Category 6 UTP Cabling Tests:
I . Tests shall include all tests of Category 5e, conducted from 1 to 250 MHz.
2. Channel and permanent link tests shall be performed with a tester that complies with
EIA-568 -B .2, Level III. Include tests for longitud nal or
performance requirements in TIA/
transverse conversion loss .
3 . Performance shall comply with mi
nimum criteria in TIAIEIA-568 -B .2.
C . Fiber-Optic Cable Tests:
I Test co applicable stua
qu pment manufacturer forchannel
only test ds and adapters that are qualified by to e
or link test configuration.
ment, cabletermnation, groundingandbonding equipment an
2. Visually inspect cableplace
patch cords , and labeling of all components.
3 . Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
a. Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in
1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526- 14-A, Method B , One Reference Jumper-
b .
umper.r horizontal links shall be
s than 2.0
b
results shall be less than that calculated according tosequation mT WEIA-568-B . 1.
ll be printed
n a
D. Data for report
that is formattedshallsimi lar to Table 10be documented . .11ain BICSI TDMlor transferred from the
pthe
summary p
instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
.
E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
F. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified
requirements.
16715 - 12 r
3 . 8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records
of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training. "
END OF SECTION
16715- 13
I
`_�.
i